REESE    LIBRARY 

OF   THE 

UNIVERSITY   OF   CALIFORNIA. 

Received...          ___4^^?^ 
Accessions  No.^.?£Q}!*~*..       SJielf  No. 


V 


INSTRUCTION  IN  GERMAN, 


(Bo  Jo 

Respectfully  informs  his  friends  and  the  public,  that  during  the  coming  sea- 
son he  will  give  lessons  in  the  GERMAN  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE,  either 
at  his  own  rooms,  No-  7  University-Buildings,  near  I  Washington-  Square,  or 
at  the  houses  of  his  pupils. 

By  his  long  residence  in  this  country,  where  in  part  he  has  received  hi* 
education,  Mr.  ADLEH  has  had  an  opportunity  of  adding  to  a  knowledge  of 
his  native  language,  such  a  familiarity  with  the  English,  as  enables  him  to 
commend  his  services  with  so  much  the  more  confidence  to  all  such  as  wish 
to  acquire  a  speedy  and  thorough  knowledge  of  the  German,  more  especially 
to  those  who  desire  it  for  scientific  or  literary  purposes. 

Applications  may  be  made  either  by  letter,  or  personally,  at  No.  7  Univcr- 
iity-Buildinga,  from  9  to  10  A.M. 

&ef  erentes. 

HON.  THEODORE  FRELINGHUYSEN,  LL.D., 

Chancellor  of  the  University. 

The  following  Gentlemen  of  the  FACULTY  or  SCIENCE  AND  LETTERS  of 
ihe  University  :  — 

CYRUS  MASON,  D.D., 
Prof,  of  Political  Economy  and  the  Evidences  of  Revealed  Religion. 

TAYLER  LEWIS,  LL.D,, 
Prof,  of  the  Greek  Language  and  Liteiwture. 

E.  A.  JOHNSON,  A.M., 
Prof,  of  the  Latin  Language  and  Literature. 

C.  S.  HENRY,  D.D., 
Prof,  of  Intellectual  Philosophy,  History,  and  Belles-  Lethw. 

JOHN  W.  DRAPER,  M.D., 
Prof,  of  Chemistry  and  Natural  Hittmy. 


COLLEGE  OF  Nsw-JEnsar,  1 
Sept.  8,  1845.  J 

Having  personally  enjoyed  the  benefit  of  Mr.  ADLER'S  instruction,  we  ex- 
press with  confidence  our  high  sense  of  his  qualifications  as  a  teacher.  Hi* 
thorough  acquaintance  with  the  German  language  and  literature,  and  at  the 
same  time  with  the  English,  —  his  aptness  to  teach  what  he  knows,  and  hi* 
general  philological  attainments,  give  him  advantages  as  an  Instructor  that 
but  few  men  possess. 

ALBERT  B.  DOD,  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

EVERT  M.  TOPPING,  Adj.  Prof,  of  Ancient  Languages. 

$3-  Parents  who  wish  to  obtain  a  thorough  Classical  education  for  their 
sons,  and  who  prefer  private  tuition,  are  also  informed,  that  Mr.  ADLER  haa 
had  several  years  experience  as  an  instructor  in  this  line,  and  is  ready  to  re- 
ceive a  few  private  scholars  who  may  wish  to  prepare  for  college,  or  to  read 
some  one  of  the  Latin  or  Greek  authors  usually  embraced  in  a  course  of 
liberal  education. 


OF  THE 

UHIVERSIT 


OLLENDORFF'S 

]\T  E  ¥     METHOD 


OF    LEARNING    TO 


READ,  WRITE,  AND  SPEAK 


GERMAN    LANGUAGE 

TO  WHICH  IS  ADDED 
A 

SYSTEMATIC   OUTLINE 


DIFFERENT   PARTS    OF    SPEECH, 

THEIR  INFLECTION  AND  USE, 

" 


WITH  FULL  PAR^Dl&ALS  AND  A  COMPLETE  TABLE  OF  THE 


IF03 

G.    J.    ADLER,    A.B. 


N  E  W  -  Y  O  R  K  : 
D.    APPLETON   &  CO.,    200   BROADWAY. 

PHILADELPHIA: 
GEORGE   S.   APPLET*  CIIESNUT-STREET. 

1840. 


ENTERED  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1845,  by 

D.    APPLETON    &    CO., 
In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  for  the  Southern  District  of  New  York. 


NOTICE. 
A  Key  to  the  exercises  of  this  Grammar  is  published  in  a  separate  volume. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  AMERICAN  EDITION. 


Ix  presenting  to  the  American  Public  a  new  and  improved  edi- 
tion of  OllendorfTs  New  Method,  it  would  seem  to  be  only 
necessary  to  state  what  alterations  or  additions  have  been 
made.  To  say  anything  in  commendation  of  the  book  itself 
appears  almost  gratuitous  ;  for  the  extensive  circulation  which 
it  now  enjoys  in  England,  and  the  increasing  demand  for  it  in 
this  country,  its  costliness  notwithstanding,  constitute  the  strong- 
est evidence  in  its  favour.  The  fact  that  Ollendorff  has  been 
sought  after  with  avidity,  whilst  many  other  Grammars  of  high 
merit  have  met  with  but  a  slow  and  cold  reception,  justifies  the 
inference  that,  as  a  book  of  instruction,  it  presents  facilities 
which  in  similar  works  were  either  entirely  wanting  or  but 
imperfectly  afforded. 

Even  the  excellent  and  highly  scientific  Grammar,  written 
for  the  use  of  Englishmen  by  the  genial  Becker  himself,  who 
by  his  Orcjcmt'Sm,  his  Deiitfcfye  28ortlnftiimj,  and  subsequently 
by  his  Deiitfcfye  ©rammatif,  has  made  such  valuable  contribu- 
tions to  the  Philosophy  of  Language,  and  has  almost  revolu- 
tionized the  terminology  of  Grammar  in  his  own  country,  has, 
in  the  space  of  fifteen  years,  not  even  undergone  a  second  edi- 
tion, and  is  now  entirely  out  of  print.  Surely,  Becker  has  de- 
served a  better  fate  among  scholars  at  least ! 


iv 

The  success  of  Ollendorff  is  unquestionably  due  to  his 
method,  by  which  he  has  made  the  German,  heretofore  noto- 
riously difficult  to  foreigners,  accessible  to  the  capacity  of  all, 
young  or  old,  learned  or  unlearned.  Instead  of  pre-supposing 
a  familiarity  with  English  Grammar  in  the  pupil,  and  then 
presenting  a  synthetic  view  of  the  principles  of  the  language, 
as  is  commonly  done,  he  begins  apparently  without  any  system, 
with  the  simplest  phrases,  from  which  he  deduces  the  rules, 
until  gradually  and  almost  imperceptibly  he  makes  the  pupil 
master  of  the  etymology  and  syntax  of  every  part  of  speech. 
The  rules  are,  as  it  were,  concealed  amid  the  multitude  of 
exercises  which  are  added  to  each  lesson,  and  which  serve  to 
fortify  the  learner  in  the  principles  he  has  already  acquired. 
Another  characteristic  feature  of  the  book,  and  one  in  which 
its  practical  merit  chiefly  consists  is,  that  the  examples  on 
which  the  rules  are  based,  and  those  which  are  intended  to 
illustrate  the  rules,  are  not  derived  from  the  German  Classics ; 
they  are  neither  the  ideal  language  of  Poetry,  nor  the  rigorous 
language  of  Science,  but  of  life, — short  sentences,  such  as  one 
would  be  most  likely  to  use  in  conversing  in  a  circle  of  friends, 
or  in  writing  a  letter. 

Special  prominence  is  given  from  the  beginning  to  the  end 
of  the  book  to  the  idioms  of  the  language,  as  it  were  the  Ger- 
man side  of  the  German — a  most  important  element  in  the 
acquisition  of  any  language.  In  the  beginning  of  the  book 
the  exercises  are  of  necessity  very  brief  and  simple,  and  the 
Author,  according  to  his  own  confession  (page  351),  has  of- 
ten sacrificed  logical  accuracy  to  his  eagerness  for  thoroughly 
grounding  the  pupil  in  the  principles  of  inflection  and  construc- 
tion previously  laid  down.  As  the  pupil  advances  the  exer- 


PREFACE  TO  THE  AMERICAN  EDITION. 


Ix  presenting  to  the  American  Public  a  new  and  improved  edi- 
tion of  OllendorfT's  New  Method,  it  would  seem  to  be  only 
necessary  to  state  what  alterations  or  additions  have  been 
made.  To  say  anything  in  commendation  of  the  book  itself 
appears  almost  gratuitous  ;  for  the  extensive  circulation  which 
it  now  enjoys  in  England,  and  the  increasing  demand  for  it  in 
this  country,  its  costliness  notwithstanding,  constitute  the  strong. 
est  evidence  in  its  favour.  The  fact  that  Olleridorff  has  been 
sought  after  with  avidity,  whilst  many  other  Grammars  of  high 
merit  have  met  with  but  a  slow  and  cold  reception,  justifies  the 
inference  that,  as  a  book  of  instruction,  it  presents  facilities 
which  in  similar  works  were  either  entirely  wanting  or  but 
imperfectly  afforded. 

Even  the  excellent  and  highly  scientific  Grammar,  written 
for  the  use  of  Englishmen  by  the  genial  Becker  himself,  who 
by  his  Organism,  his  Seutfdje  SfBortlnltumcj,  and  subsequently 
by  his  Dciitfcfye  ©rammattf,  has  made  such  valuable  contribu- 
tions to  the  Philosophy  of  Language,  and  has  almost  revolu- 
tionized the  terminology  of  Grammar  in  his  own  country,  has, 
in  the  space  of  fifteen  years,  not  even  undergone  a  second  edi- 
tion, and  is  now  entirely  out  of  print.  Surely,  Becker  has  de- 
served a  better  fate  among  scholars  at  least ! 


IV 

The  success  of  OllendorfF  is  unquestionably  due  to  his 
method,  by  which  he  has  made  the  German,  heretofore  noto- 
riously difficult  to  foreigners,  accessible  to  the  capacity  of  all, 
young  or  old,  learned  or  unlearned.  Instead  of  pre-supposing 
a  familiarity  with  English  Grammar  in  the  pupil,  and  then 
presenting  a  synthetic  view  of  the  principles  of  the  language, 
as  is  commonly  done,  he  begins  apparently  without  any  system, 
with  the  simplest  phrases,  from  which  he  deduces  the  rules, 
until  gradually  and  almost  imperceptibly  he  makes  the  pupil 
master  of  the  etymology  and  syntax  of  every  part  of  speech. 
The  rules  are,  as  it  were,  concealed  amid  the  multitude  of 
exercises  which  are  added  to  each  lesson,  and  which  serve  to 
fortify  the  learner  in  the  principles  he  has  already  acquired. 
Another  characteristic  feature  of  the  book,  and  one  in  which 
its  practical  merit  chiefly  consists  is,  that  the  examples  on 
which  the  rules  are  based,  and  those  which  are  intended  to 
illustrate  the  rules,  are  not  derived  from  the  German  Classics  ; 
they  are  neither  the  ideal  language  of  Poetry,  nor  the  rigorous 
language  of  Science,  but  of  life, — short  sentences,  such  as  one 
would  be  most  likely  to  use  in  conversing  in  a  circle  of  friends, 
or  in  writing  a  letter. 

Special  prominence  is  given  from  the  beginning  to  the  end 
of  the  book  to  the  idioms  of  the  language,  as  it  were  the  Ger- 
man side  of  the  German — a  most  important  element  in  the 
acquisition  of  any  language.  In  the  beginning  of  the  book 
the  exercises  are  of  necessity  very  brief  and  simple,  and  the 
Author,  according  to  his  own  confession  (page  351),  has  of- 
ten  sacrificed  logical  accuracy  to  his  eagerness  for  thoroughly 
grounding  the  pupil  in  the  principles  of  inflection  and  construc- 
tion previously  laid  down.  As  the  pupil  advances  the  exer- 


CONTENTS 


SYSTEMATIC    OUTLINE, 


Pag* 

PARTS  OF  SPEECH,  $  1 377 

Cases,  $  2 377 

ARTICLES. 

Declension  of  the  articles,  §  3. 378 

The  article,  before  proper  names,  $  5 379 

"       before  abstract  substantives  and  names  of  materials,  $  6.  379 

"       before  common  nouns,  §  7. 330 

"       idiomatic  use  of,  $  8 330 

"       in  sentences,  $  9. 331 

"  "      contracted  with  prepositions,  §  10 331 

SUBSTANTIVES  OR  NOUNS. 

Classification  of  nouns,  $  11 332 

I.     Their  GENDER,  determined  by  their  signification,  $  13  and  §  14.  .  333 
determined   by  their  termination,  $  15-§  20.        .  383 

Gender  of  compound  substantives,  §  20 336 

"       of  foreign  substantives,  $  21 337 

II.     NUMBER.    Rules  for  the  formation  of  the  plural,  §  22,  §  23  and  §  24.  383 

Nouns  employed  in  the  plural  only,  $  27 390 

Nouns  with  two  forms  of  the  plural,  $  23 390 

III.  INFLECTION.     Declension  of  common  and  abstract  nouns,  §  30.  .  391 

Earlier  Declension,  $  31-$  33.         . 391 

Later  Declension,  %  3S-$  42 397 

Declension  of  foreign  substantives,  $  42 400 

Declension  of  proper  names  of  persons,  $  43-$  48.          ...  401 
"      "  "     of  places,  $43 404 

IV.  GOVERNMENT  of  substantives,  $  49-§  52 405 

ADJECTIVES. 

Classification  of  adjectives,  $  52-§  55 406 


I.    INFLECTION,  $  55.    First  declension,  $  56 408 

Second  declension,  $  57  and  §  58.  .        .        .  410 

Third  declension,  §  59 411 

Observations  on  the  three  declensions,  §  60  and  $  61.     .        .        .412 

II.     COMPARISON,  terminational  and  compound,  $  62-$  66.    .        .         .  414 

irregular  and  defective,  $  66  and  $  67.         .         .         .  415 

"  of  adverbs,  $  68 416 

III.    USE  AND  GOVERNMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES,  $  70 417 

Adjectives  with  the  infinitive,  §  72 ;  with  the  genitive,  $"73  ;  with 
the  dative,  $  74 ;  with  the  accusative,  §  74.  iii.          .        .        .418 

NUMERALS. 

Classification  of  numerals,  $  75 419 

List  of  CARDINALS  and  ORDINALS,  $  76. 420 

Observations  on  their  inflection  and  use,  $  77-$  80.  ...  421 
COMPOUND  NUMERALS:  Distributives,  Iteratives,  &c.,  Dimidiatives, 

&c.,  $80  and  $81 423 

INDEFINITE  NUMERALS,  $  82;  implying  number,  $  83;  quantity,  $  84  ; 

number  and  quantity  both,  $  85 424 

The  use  of  numerals,  $  86  ami  $  87. 426 

PRONOUNS. 

Classification  of  pronouns,  $  88 427 

I.     PERSONAL  PRONOUNS,  §  89  ;  including  reflexive,  §  90,  Obs.  3,  and 

reciprocal  pronouns,  §  90,  Obs.  4 427 

Indefinite  personal  pronouns,  §  92.  ......  429 

II.     POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS,  §93;  conjunctive,  §  94.  .        .        .  430 

Absolute  possessive  pronouns,  §  95 431 

III.  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS,  their  inflection  and  use,  §  97-§  99.  433 

IV.  DETERMINATIVE  PRONOUNS,  §  100-§  103 434 

V.    RELATIVE  PRONOUNS,  §  103-§  106 435 

VI.    INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS,  §  106-§  109 437 

VERBS. 

CLASSIFICATION  OF  VERBS — Transitive,   §  109 ;   Intransitive,  §  110; 

Reflexive,  §  113;  Impersonal,  §  114;  Auxiliary,  §  115.  .  .  .  439 
Personal  terminations,  §  117;  moods,  §  118;  tenses,  §  119.  .  .  442 

The  infinitives,  §  120 ;  participles,  their  formation  and  signification,  §  121.  442 
The  omission  of  the  prefix  13  e  in  the  perfect  participle,  §  122.  .  .  443 

AUXILIARY  VERBS  OF  TENSES,  their  use  in  the  formation  of  compound 

tenses,  §  123 443 

|lules  for  the  formation  of  compound  tenses,  §  124.  ....  444 


XI 


Conditionals,  §  126  ..........  .  444 

Conjugation  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  :  f>afrcn,  §  127  ;  fctit,  §  123  ;  ivcrben, 
§  129  ..............  445 

Intransitive  verbs  which  assume  the  auxiliary  Mtn,  §  131.     .         .         .  454 

Intransitive  verbs  winch  assume  the  auxiliary  fcill,  §  132.        .         .         .  454 

CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS,   §  134;  regular  and  irregular  mode  of  conju- 
gation, §  137.          .  .......  455 

Table  of  terminations,  §  140  ..........  457 

Formation  of  the  tenses  of  the  pas.-hv  voice,  §  142.          .         .  .  458 

CONJUGATION  OF  TRANSITIVE  VERBS,  §  143  ......  459 

"    REFLEXIVE  VERBS,  §  144  ......  463 

"     INTRANSITIVE  VERBS.  §  145  ......  464 

"    IMPERSONAL  VERBS,  §  146  ......  466 

COMPOUND  VERBS—  sej  (arable  and  inseparable,  §  148-§  155.  .        .  467 

Conjugation  of  compound  verbs,       ........  469 

SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB—  agreement,  §  156-§  159  ......  470 

Use  of  the  tenses  and  moods,  §  159-§  163  ......  471 

The  infinitive  w'dhout  \  u,  §  167  and  §  168  ......  472 

The  infinitive  with  $  u,  §  169-§  172  .......  473 

Use  of  the  participles,  §  172-§  178  .......  475 

ADVERBS. 

Definition  and  classification  of  adverbs,  §  178.          .....  477 

ADVERBS  OF  PLACE  AND  OF  TIME,  §179  .......  477 

"         "    MODALITY,  OF  QUANTITY,   OF  QUALITY   OR  MANNER, 

OF  INTENSITY,        ........  478 

Signification  of  the  adverbs  I)  i  n  and  f)  c  r,  §  180  ......  478 

The  pronominal  adverbs  b  d  and  to)  0,  and  their  compounds,     .        .        .  479 
Comparison  of  adverbs,  see  §  68. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

Definition,  §  181  ;  list  of  German  prepositions,        .....  480 

Prepositions  which  govern  the  genitive,  §  184.          .....  480 

"      the  dative,  §  185  .......  481 

"  "  "      the  accusative,  §  186  ......  481 

Prepositions  governing  both  the  dative  and  accusative,  §  187.          .         .  482 
Three  prepositions  which  govern  the  genitive  and  dative  both,  §  188.     .  482 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

Classification  of  conjunctions  —  copulative,  disjunctive,  adversative,  con- 
ditional, concessive,  &c.,  §  191  .........  483 


Xll 
INTERJECTIONS. 

Page 

A  list  of  German  interjections,  §  193 .        .  484 

Observations  on  their  use, 485 

CLASSIFICATION  OF  THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS, 486 

A  TABLE  OF  THE  SIXTEEN  VERBS  WHICH  ARE  IRREGULAR  ONLY  IN 

PART, 489 

TABLE  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS, 490-506 

The  government  of  verbs,        ........    506-510 


ERRATA. 

Page  9,  9th  line  from  the  bottom,  read  ,,e  t  W  a  8"  instead  of  „(*  t  tt)  a  8." 
On  page  72,  near  the  bottom,  read  "  Thirty-second  Lesson.—  3tuet  unb  bret* 
fjtgfle  Section  "  instead  of  "  Thirty-fourth  Lesson"  fyc. 

Page   139,  7th  and  8th  lines  from  the  top,  read    ,,aUe$"    instead   of 


Page  313,  8th  line  from  the  bottom,  read  ,,Sie  toerbCtt  ft  e"  instead  of  ,,<§te 
luevbeit  (5  i  c." 

Page  386,  14th  line  from  the  top,  read  ,,U  e  fc  e  r  fc  I  e  i  fc  f  c  I"  instead  of 
,,UeberfrIetfel." 

Page  387,  13th  line  from  the  top,  read  "  altar  "  instead  of  "  alter." 


OLLENDORFF'S 

GERMAN    GRAMMAR, 


FIRST  LESSON.— ffirste  faction. 
OF  READING. 

IN  German  every  letter  is  pronounced.  Hence  it  fol- 
lows, that  foreigners  are  able  to  read  the  language 
with  greater  facility:  reading  may  be  acquired  in  one 
lesson. 

PRINTED    LETTERS    OF    THE    GERMAN    ALPHABET. 

There  are  in  German,  as  in  English,  twenty-six  let- 
ters, of  which  we  give  : 

The  Figures,     The  Pronunciation,     The  Power. 


r 

*\ 

CAPITALS. 

SMALL  LETTERS. 

«/ 

a,                   ah, 

a, 

$8, 

&,                     bay, 

b, 

(5, 

c,                     tsay, 

c, 

T&9 

t»,                     day, 

d, 

fir, 

e,                     a, 

e, 

8>/ 

f,                    .ef, 

f, 

®/ 

8/                    gay, 

§•» 

5\ 

b,                    hah, 

h, 

i 

f,                     e, 

i, 

3,* 

\f               yot, 

f,                     kah, 

i, 

?/ 

t,                      el, 

1, 

m, 

TTt,                    em, 

in, 

9Z> 

It,                     en, 

n, 

£>, 

o,                     o, 

o, 

*  In  print,  the  Germans  have  but  one  capital  letter  for  the  vowel  *  and  the 
consonant  j. 

I 


CAPITALS. 


The  Figures.     The  Pronunciation,     The  Power. 

-A        k 


@, 
«,' 

58, 
SB, 


3, 


SMALL  LETTERS. 

r, 

fi 

*, 


*/ 

9/ 


pay, 

koo, 

err, 

ess, 

tay, 

oo, 

fow, 

vay, 

iks, 

ypsilon, 

tset, 


r, 

s, 

t, 

u, 

v, 

w, 

x, 

yi 

z. 


Most  of  the  German  letters  being  pronounced  as  in 
English,  we  shall  only  present  those  that  follow  a  dif- 
ferent pronunciation. 


TABLE  OF  THOSE  VOWELS  AND  DIPHTHONGS,  THE  PRONUNCIATION 
OF  WHICH  IS  NOT  THE  SAME  AS  IN 


Arr 

In 

Figures. 

Nnme.               pronounced 

the  Enjlith 

as  : 

words: 

a, 

ah-a, 

a, 

made, 

6, 

o-a, 

i. 

bird,* 

it, 

oo-a, 

t 

ie/I 

e-a, 

ie, 

field, 

ci, 

a-e, 

\ 

c*>, 

a—  ypsilon, 

\  I, 

I, 

at, 

ah-e, 

) 

au, 

Cit, 

ah-a-oo, 
a-oo, 

(oy, 

boy.ll 

German     Examples. 

SSatcr,  fathers. 
l'6u>c,  lion. 
PHucf^appiness. 
SBBicfe,  meadow. 

!2Beife,  manner. 
fcmt,     to  be. 
$aifcr,  emperor. 
(  SSdume,  trees. 
\  ?eute,  people. 


*  The  English  word  bird  does  not  qnite  answer  to  the  sound  of  this  rowel ; 
it  has  rather  the  sound  of  cu  in  the  French  words  :  feu,  coeur,  fltur,  jcune, 
pen. 

f  There  is  no  sound  corresponding  to  this  vowel  in  English,  and,  in  order  to 
learn  it  well,  the  pupils  must  hear  it  pronounced ;  it  answers  to  the  sound  of  u 
in  the  French  words :  but,  n#,  vertu. 

t  The  method  which  we  have  adopted,  of  placing  analagous  sounds  to- 
gether, will  facilitate  to  learners  the  study  of  the  pronunciation.  There  are 
even  some  provinces  in  Germany,  where  d  and  o  are  both  pronounced  a;  u 
and  ie,  c;  ct  or  ei%  Clt  and  alt,  /. 

jf  We  hare  only  been  able  to  indicate  the  sounds  of  the  two  diphthong?  5tt 


Figure*.  M,         Are  pronounced     In  the  Entltsh         German     Examples. 

as  : 


an,  ah-oo,          ou,          lions.  -.         £au$,  house. 

n/  oo,  oo,          boot,          gut,      good. 

Of  the  simple  and  compound  consonants  the  follow- 
ing differ  in  their  pronunciation  from  the  English  con- 
;iits: 

(5. 

(5,  before  a,  o,  it,  before  a  consonant,  or  at  the  end 
of  a  syllable,  has  the  sound  of  k.  Ex.  Sato,  Cato  ; 
Sonmb,  Conrad  ;  (5ar,  cure  ;  (Jrcfrir,  credit  ;  gpectafcl, 

l>ei'(nv    the    other    vmvrls,   the    letter    C    is    pro- 

like    /.v.      Ex.  @dfar,  Caesar;  C5tccro,  Cicero; 

Ch. 

&,  which  is  called  ts</t/-hfih,  is  pronounced  like  k: 
1.  when  ;it  the  beginning  of  a  word.  Ex.  (5her,  choir  ; 
CSluTiuf,  eimmicle  ;  Shrift,  clyistian  ;  2.  when  followed 
by  f  or  d.  Ex.  53itcfifc,  box  ;  2B<ui)d,  wax.  In  words 
derived  from  the  French,  it  preserves  the  French 
sound.  Ex.  Gbarfotan,  quack.  This  consonant,  when 
preceded  by  a,  c,  it,  is  pronounced  from  the  throat. 
Ex.  T\tdv  Vivuiet;  ?cch,  hole;  SSiid),  book;  gprac()C, 
laiiLru:ijre.  IMueed  any  where  else,  it  is  articulated 
with  a  less  guttural  sound.  Ex.  Siicfjer,  books  ;  S3  fed), 
iron  plate  ;  id),  I  ;  ©ejTd)t,  face. 


®,  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  has  a  hard  sound, 
as  in  the  English  word  go.  Ex.  ©abe,  gift  ;  ©ott,  God  ; 
gut,  good  ;  ©ift,  poison.  When  at  the  end  of  a  syl- 
lable, it  has  a  medium  sound  between  those  of  the  gut- 
tural d)  and  f.  Ex.  £ag,  day  ;  mcgltd),  possible  ;  Hug, 
prudent  ;  SfjTg,  vinegar  ;  ettng,  eternal.  In  words  bor- 
rowed from  the  French,  g  is  pronounced  as  in  French. 
Ex.  ?oge,  box  (in  a  theatre)  ;  ©cnic,  genius. 

and  Clt  approximatively  ;  their  pronunciation  is  not  quite  the  same,  and  in  or- 
der to  become  familiar  with  them,  the  pupils  must  hear  their  master  pro- 
nounce them. 


The  pronunciation  of  g  cannot  be  properly  acquired, 
unless  from  the  instructor's  own  lips  ;  he  must  there- 

fore make  his  pupils  pronounce  the  following  words  : 

©age,  tradition.  9Xf$ic$&n$tt,  idler. 

,  tallow.  Sowing,  pupil. 

mountain.  #ngft,  anguish. 

,  dwarf.  2anqc,  length. 

£a'U()ncn,  to  deny.  Sfflcngc,  quantity. 

©teg,  victory.    "  (Skfan^,  singing. 

$af)icjr\'tt,  capacity.  JUang,  sound. 

9)2eg(tcr;Eett,  possibility.  JKing,  ring. 

maid-servant.  Sungftau,  virgin. 

,  maid-servants.  Sunggcfctl,  bachelor. 


The  letter  I)  is  aspirated  at  the  beginning  of  a  sylla- 
ble. Ex.  £dttb,  hand  ;  £elb,  hero  ;  jpiit,  hat.  It  is 
mute  in  the  middle  and  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  and 
then  it  lengthens  the  vowel  that  precedes  or  follows  it. 
Ex.  aSafytt,  road  ;  £oJ)tt,  mockery  ;  2of)tt,  reward  ;  lefyren, 
to  teach  ;  Abater,  crown  (coin)  ;  $ut),  cow  ; 
tear  ;  tfyutt,  to  do. 


3  (yot)  has  the  sound  of  y  in  the  English  word  you. 
Ex.  3agb,  chase;  Sager,  hunter;  jeber,  each;  jegt,  at 
present. 

D. 

D  is  always  followed  by  u,  and  in  combination  with 
that  letter  pronounced  like  kv  in  English.     Ex. 
torment  ;  DiteKe,  source. 


@,  when  initial,  has  the  pronunciation  of  z  in  Eng- 
lish.    Ex.  (Same,  seed  ;  (Seele,  soul. 


@cf)  is  pronounced  like  sh  in  English.     Ex.  ©cfyaf, 
sheep  ;  @rf)ito,  shield. 


l  is  pronounced  like  ss  in  English.     Ex.  £<*$,  hatred  ; 


tt>et$,  white.     This  double  consonant  is  compounded  of 
f  and  $,  and  is  called  ess-tset. 


g  is  compounded  of  t  and  j,  and  has  the  sound  of 
these  two  consonants  combined.     Ex.  @d)a£,  treasure  ; 
(3,  finery. 


35  is  sounded  like  /.     Ex.  Setter,  father  ;  Sormwtb, 
tutor  ;  SBoff,  people. 

25. 

28  is  pronounced  like  an  English  v  and  not  like  w. 
Ex.  2Balt>,  forest  ;  2Ctefe,  meadow. 

3* 

3  has  the  pronunciation  of  ts.     Ex.  3<*fytt/  tooth  ;  $elt, 
tent. 


EXPLANATION    OF    SOME    SIGNS    USED    IN    THIS    BOOK. 

Expressions  which  vary  either  in  their  construction 
or  idiom  from  the  English  are  marked  thus  :  f. 
A  hand  (08F")  denotes  a  rule  of  syntax  or  construction. 


SECOND  LESSON—  Zwtite  Cation.* 


NOMINATIVE,  the. 

GENITIVE,  of  the. 

DATIVE,  to  the. 

ACCUSATIVE,  the. 


Masculine.        Neuter. 


NOM.  be*,  bag* 

GEN.  beg.  beg. 

DAT.  bent.  bem. 

Ace.  ben.  bag* 


*  To  INSTRUCTORS. — Each  lesson  should  be  dictated  to  the  pupils,  who 
should  pronounce  each  word  as  soon  as  dictated.  The  instructor  should  also 
exercise  his  pupils  by  putting  the  questions  to  them  in  various  ways.  Each 
lesson,  except  the  second,  includes  three  operations  :  the  teacher,  in  the  first 
place,  looks  over  the  exercises  of  the  most  attentive  of  his  pupils,  putting  to 
them  the  questions  contained  in  the  printed  exercises  ;  he  then  dictates 
to  them  the  next  lesson  ;  and  lastly  puts  fresh  questions  to  them  on  all  the 
preceding  lessons.  The  teacher  may  divide  one  lesson  into  two,  or  two  into 
three,  or  even  make  two  into  one,  according  to  the  degree  of  intelligence  of 
his  pupils. 


6 

Have  you  ?  £ci&en  @ic  ? 

Yes,  Sir,  I  have.  So,  nictn  £<**/  id)  fyafce. 

Have  you  the  hat  ?  £aOcn  @ie  ten  £ut  ? 

Yes,  Sir,  I  have  the  hat.  3a,  nictn  £eiT,  id)  fyabe  ben 

The  ribbon,  fcas  23cmfc  ; 

the  salt,  fccig  ©0(5  ; 

the  table,  ten  Stfd)  ; 

the  sugar,  ten  Surfer  ; 

the  paper,  ba$ 


The  Germans  begin  all  substantives  with  a 
capital  letter. 

Masculine.        Neuter. 


NOM.  my. 

GEN.  of  my. 

DAT.  to  my. 

Ace.  my. 


NOM.  mem*  mem* 

GEN.  metneS.  meme$. 

DAT.  tttetnem,  metnem. 

Ace.  meinem  ntetn. 


3fjr,  you,  is  declined  like  mem.     Example  : 


Masculine.        Neuter. 


NOM.      31»r. 
GEN. 
DAT. 
Ace. 


NOM.  your. 

GEN.  of  your. 

DAT.  to  your. 

Ace.  your. 

Have  you  my  hat  ?  4bciOcn  (Sic  uictncn  .„,...  . 

Yes,  Sir,  I  have  your  hat.  £>«/  nictn  £H'rr,  id)  f)obc  Sfyrot  $ut. 

Have  you  my  ribbon  ?  £obcn  @ic  incin  iBnnt) '? 

I  have  your  ribbon.  3d)  ()flOc  3b*  JsBanfc. 

EXERCISE  1. 

Have  you  the  salt? — Yes,  Sir,  I  have  the  salt. — Have  you  your 
salt? — I  have  my  salt. — Have  you  the  table? — I  have  the  table. — 
Have  you  my  table  ? — I  have  your  table. — Have  you  the  sugar? — 
I  have  the  sugar. — Have  you  your  sugar  ? — I  have  my  sugar. — 
Have  you  the  paper?— I  have  the  paper. — Have  you  my  paper  ? — 
I  have  your  paper.f 


*  Sfyt  with  a  small  letter  signifies  their,  and  has  the  same  declension  as 
3^V,  your. 

t  Pupils  desirous  of  making  rapid  progress,  may  compose  a  great  many 
phrases  in  addition  to  those  we  have  given  them  in  the  exercises  ;  but  they 
must  pronounce  them  aloud,  as  they  write  them.  They  should  also  make 
separate  lists  of  such  substantives,  adjectives,  pronouns  and  verbs,  as  they 
meet  with  in  the  course  of  the  lessons,  in  order  to  be  able  to  find  those  words 
more  easily,  when  they  have  occasion  to  refer  to  them  in  writing  their  lessons. 


THIRD  LESSON.— JDritte  Action. 


SBefcfjer,  which,  has  the  same  declension  as  t>er. 


Masc. 


Neut. 


Which. 


NOM. 
Ace. 


tt)e(d)er. 
roelcfyen. 


DECLENSION     OF     AN    ADJECTIVE    PRECEDED     BY     THE    DEFINITE 
ARTICLE,  OR  A  WORD  WHICH  HAS  THE    SAME  TERMINATION.* 


Masc. 


Neut. 


NOM.  the  good. 

GEN.  of  the  good. 

DAT.  to  the  good. 

Ace.  the  good. 


NOM.  fcer  gnte*  baS  gate. 

GEN.  be$  guten.  beS  guten. 

DAT.  bem  guten.  bcm  gutetu 

Ace.  ben  gnten*  bag  gnte. 


Observation.  Adjectives  vary  in  their  declension 
when  preceded  by :  mem,  my ;  3f)f,  your ;  or  by  one  of 
the  following  words :  em,  a  ;  fein,  no,  none  ;  bein,  thy ; 
fetn,  his ;  ifyr,  her  ;  tmfer,  our ;  Sner,  your.  Example : 


Masc. 


Neut. 


NOM. 

my  good. 

N. 

metn 

gnter* 

mem 

gnteS* 

GEN. 

of  my  good. 

G. 

meinetf 

gnten. 

metneS 

gnten* 

DAT. 

to  my  good. 

D. 

meinem 

gnten. 

meinem 

gnten. 

Ace. 

my  good. 

A. 

metnen 

gnten« 

metn 

gnte$. 

Good, 

qut  ; 

bad, 

fcMcd)t  ; 

beautiful  or  fine, 

fd)en  ; 

great,  big  or  large, 
Have  you  the  good  sugar? 
Yes,  Sir,  I  have  the  good  sugar. 

Have  you  the  fine  ribbon? 
I  have  the  fine  ribbon. 
Which  hat  have  you  ? 
I  have  my  ugly  hat. 
WThich  ribbon  have  you? 
I  have  your  fine  ribbon. 


(Sic  ^cn  gntcn  Sucfcr  ? 
niein  ^crrx  tc^  (jobc  t>cn  ^utcn 
Sucfcr. 

Sic  fcci*  fcbb'nc  fflonb  ? 
&c  tas  fd)6'nc  !^ 

ut  fjobcn  < 
Scl)  haOc  ntcincn 
2Be(cfK$  S^anb  bnOcn 


*  As  biefer,  this ;  jener,  that,  &c 


EXEHCISE    2. 

Have  you  the  fine  hat  1 — Yes,  Sir,  I  have  the  fine  hat. — Have 
you  my  bad  hat! — I  have  your  bad  hat. — Have  you  the  bad  salt  !— 
I  have  the  bad  salt. — Have  you  your  good  salt? — I  have  my  good 
salt. — Which  salt  have  you  ] — I  have  your  good  salt. — Which  su- 
gar have  you  1 — I  have  my  good  sugar. — Have  you  my  good  su- 
gar?— I  have  your  good  sugar. — Which  table  have  you  1 — I  have 
the  fine  table. — Have  you  my  fine  table? — I  have  your  fine  table. — 
Which  paper  have  you  1 — I  have  the  bad  paper. — Have  you  my 
ugly  paper  1 — I  have  your  ugly  paper. — Which  bad  hat  have  you  ? 
— 1  have  my  bad  hat. — Which  fine  ribbon  have  you? — I  have  your 
fine  ribbon. 


FOURTH  LESSON.—  J 


Cation. 


It. 


Masc. 

NOM.         er. 
Ace.          tbm 


Neut. 


Not. 

I  have  not. 
No,  Sir. 

Have  you  the  table  1 
No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not. 
Have  you  the  paper  1 
No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not. 


The  stone, 
the  cloth, 
the  wood, 
*  the  leather, 
the  lead, 
the  gold, 


3?td)t. 

3db  M>e  ntcM* 

SRcin,  mcin  £crr. 

&a(>cn  (Sic  ben  Stfcf)  ? 

97cm,  nu-tn  £crr,  tcl)  fja&e  tfjn  n  i  3)  t. 


r,   id)    fja&e 


fecin,    inc'm 
ntd)t. 

fccr  Stein  ; 
tnS  Sud)  ; 
bag  &el$  ; 
ba^  Scbcr  ; 
t>a^  S3(et  ; 
bag  ©otb. 


The  terminations  en  and  crn  are  used  to  form 
adjectives  and  denote  the  materials  of  anything. 


golden  or  of  gold, 
leaden  —  of  lead, 
stone    —  of  stone, 
pretty, 

Have  you  the  paper  hat  1 
I  have  it  not. 


cjcftxm  ; 
btctcrn  ; 
jlctncrn  ; 
F)U6|cr,  (artifl). 


©tc  ben  pctptercncn 
tfyn  nid^t. 


The  wooden  table, 
the  horse  of  stone, 
the  coat, 
the  horse, 
the  dog, 
the  shoe, 
the  thread, 
the  stocking, 
the  candlestick, 
the  golden  rihbon, 


9 

Km  f>e($crncn  Stfrf)  ; 

ta6  frcincrnc  $)fcrt>  ; 

ten  <Korf  (fro*  Elicit 

ta*  $?fcrb  ; 

tvu  Acninb  ; 

ten  Sdnif)  ; 

ton 

ten 

ten  2i'«cl)ter  ; 

tcis  cjclbenc 


EXERCISE    3. 

Have  you  the  wooden  table  1  —  No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not.  —  Which 
table  have  you]  —  I  have  the  stone  table.  —  Have  you  my  golden 
candlestick  ]  —  I  have  it  not.  —  Which  stocking  have  you  !  —  I  have 
the  thread  (fabcn)  stocking.  —  Have  you  my  thread  stocking  1  —  1 
have  not  your  thread  stocking,  —  Which  coat  have  you]  —  I  have 
my  cloth  (tucluMi)  coat.  —  Which  horse  have  you  ]  —  I  have  the  wood- 
en horse.  —  Have  you  my  leathern  shoe1?  —  I  have  it  not.  —  Have 
you  the  leaden  horse]  —  I  have  it  not.  —  Have  you  your  good 
wooden  horse  ]  —  I  have  it  not.  —  Which  wood  have  you  1  —  I  have 
your  good  wood.  —  Have  you  my  good  gold  ]  —  I  have  it  not.  — 
Which  oold  have  you]  —  I  have  the  good  gold.  —  WThich  stone  have 
you  ]  —  I  have  your  fine  stone.  —  Which  ribbon  have  you  ]  —  I  have 
your  golden  ribbon.  —  Have  you  my  fine  dog  1  —  I  have  it.  —  Huve 
you  my  ugly  horse  ]  —  I  have  it  not. 


FIFTH  LESSON.—  JFftnfte  Section. 


The  chest,  the  trunk, 
the  button, 
the  money, 

Anything,  something, 
Not  anything,  nothing, 

Have  you  anything] 

I  have  nothing. 
The  cheese, 
the  old  bread, 
the  pretty  dog, 
the  silver  (metal), 
the  silver  ribbon, 


ten  .ft  offer  ; 
ben  .ftnopf  ; 
bag 


(S  t  ix>  a  $  . 

97  t  cb  t  £  . 

£aOcn  (Sic 

3d)  fafcc  md)t$. 

ben  .ficife  ; 

ta$  a(rc  23ret>  ; 

ton  artigcn  (tjubfcfycn) 

fra$  <£t(bet  ; 

t>a$  filOcrnc 


*  As  in  French  :  avez-vous  faim  ? 
1* 


10 

r  C  3d)  bin  rjunqriq. 

I  am  hungry.  *  fS*  fobe  $unger. 

C  <Sint>  ©tc  butftiq  ? 
Are  you  thirsty  1  i  f  *ert«n  ®i«  SDutfl  1* 

S  Set)  bin  turfttq. 
la<nth,rsty.  H  3*  Dak-  ®urft. 


Are  you  sleepy  1  <£inb  (£ie  fd)(dfcrtQ  ? 

I  am  sleepy.  3d)  tun  fc&Mfma, 

Are  you  tired  1  <Sint>  @tc  nuibe  ? 

I  am  not  tired.  3d)  bin  ntcljt  miibe. 


Of  tfAe  (genitive). 


Masc. 
Neut. 

Nouns  of  the  masculine  and  neuter  gender 
take  3  or  e£  in  the  genitive  case  singular. 


The  tailor's,  or  of  the  tailor,  te6 

the  dog's,  or  of  the  dog,  bcs  &iintc£  ; 

the  baker's,  or  of  the  baker,  t>c$  iJ3aefer8  ; 
the  neighbour's,  or  of  the  neigh-  tc$  iflad)bcir$  ; 

bour, 

of  the  salt,  teg  ©cit$c$. 

rp,     ,   ,     .    ,  C  tcr  >oitnb  beg  SBtfcferS, 

The  bakers  dog.  1 


tailor's  coat  bcr  Kccf  bl?fi 


EXERCISE    4. 

Have  you  the  leathern  trunk  ?  —  I  have  not  the  leathern  trunk.  — 
Have  you  my  pretty  trunk  ]  —  I  have  not  your  pretty  trunk.  — 
Which  trunk  have  you  1  —  I  have  the  wooden  trunk.  —  Have  you 
my  old  button  1  —  I  have  it  not.  —  Which  money  have  you  1  —  I  have 
the  good  money.  —  Which  cheese  have  you  ?  —  I  have  the  old  cheese. 
—  Have  you  anything  !  —  I  have  something.  —  Have  you  my  large 
dog  1  —  I  have  it  not.  —  Have  you  your  good  gold  ]  —  I  have  it.  — 
Which  dog  have  you  ?  —  I  have  the  tailor's  dog.  —  Have  you  the 
neighbour's  large  dog  ?  —  I  have  it  not.  —  Have  you  the  dog's  golden 
ribbon  1  —  No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not.  —  Which  coat  have  you  ?  —  I  have 
the  tailor's  good  coat.  —  Have  you  the  neighbour's  good  bread?  — 
I  have  it  not.  —  Have  you  my  tailor's  golden  ribbon  ?  —  I  have  it.  — 
Have  you  my  pretty  dog's  ribbon  ?  —  I  have  it  not.  —  Have  you  the 
good  baker's  good  horse  1  —  I  have  it.  —  Have  you  the  good  tailors 

*  As  in  French:  avez-vous  soif? 

f  The  first  of  these  two  expressions  is  more  usual,  the  latter  is  preferred 
in  poetry. 


11 

horse  1 — I  have  it  not. — Are  you  hungry] — 1  am  hungry. — Are 
you  sleepy  1 — I  am  not  sleepy. — Which  candlestick  have  you  ? — I 
have  the  golden  candlestick  of  my  good  baker. 


SIXTH  LESSON.—  Sedjste  Cection. 

Anything  or  something  good.  (£ttt>fl$  @)utc$. 

Nothing  or  not  anything  bad.  9iid)t$  Gtyfafttt*. 

Have  you  anything  good  ?  £>n(,K'n  (gie  ctnxi$ 

I  have  nothing  bad.  3d)  (jn&c  md)t$ 

What  ?  2B  a  $  ? 

What  have  you  ?  2£n$  IjaOcn  <£ic? 

What  have  you  good  ?  2£ci8  ftatcn  ©ic  ©utcS? 

I  have  the  good  bread.  3d)  Ija&c  tag  o,utc  23  rob. 


.        ben. 
or  the  one. 


The  neighbour's,  or  that  of  the  ben  bc$ 

neighbour. 

The  tailor's,  or  that  of  the  tailor,  tag  te§ 

Or.  £)  t)  e  r. 


The  book,  fca* 

Have  you  my  book  or  that  of  the  .pabcn  (Sic  mcin  93uc^  ot)cr  ba$  bcS 

neighbour  ?  S^adjbar^  ? 

I  have  that  of  the  neighbour.        3d)  fyaOc  bag  bc5  0?ad)6arg. 
Have     you    your    hat    or    the  jpabcn  (Sic  Sljrcn  |>ut  cbcr  ben  beg 

baker's  ?  S3oc!ers  ? 

EXERCISE    5. 

Have  you  my  book  ?  —  I  have  it  not.  —  Which  book  have  you  1  — 
I  have  my  good  book.  —  Have  you  anything  ugly  ?  —  I  have  nothing 
ugly.  —  I  have  something  pretty.  —  Which  table  have  you  ?  —  I  have 
the  baker's.  —  Have  you  the  baker's  dog  or  the  neighbour's"?  —  I 
have  the  neighbour's.  —  What  have  you  7  —  1  have  nothing.  —  Have 
you  the  good  or  bad  sugar?  —  I  have  the  good.  —  Have  you  the 
neighbour's  £6od  or  bad  horse  1  —  I  have  the  good  (one*).  —  Have 
you  the  golden  or  the  silver  candlestick  ?  —  I  have  the  silver  can- 
dlestick. —  Have  you  my  neighbour's  paper  or  that  of  my  tailor  "?  — 
I  have  that  of  your  tailor.  —  Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty  ?  —  I  am 
hungry.  —  Are  you  sleepy  or  tired  ]  —  I  am  tired.  —  What  have  you 

*  Words  in  the  exercises  between  parentheses,  arc  not  to  be  translated. 


12 

pretty  1 — I  have  nothing  pretty. — Have  you  the  leather  shoe  1—1 
have  it  not. 


SEVENTH  LESSON.— Gitbtnte  Cation, 
Have  you  my  coat  or  the  tailor's  ?  £a6en  <£te  nictnen  3?ecf  ober  ben  beg 
I  have  yours.  3d)  fyafce  ben  Sfyncjen. 

Masculine.  Neuter. 


N.  ber  tneim'ge.  batf  ntetm'ge. 
A.  ben  metm'gen,  bag  meintge, 
N.  ber  Sbrige.  ba£ 
A.  ben  Sfyrigett*  bag 


Yours.  5N.ber3{mge.     bod 


Absolute  possessive  pronouns,  as  :  ber  nteinige,  mine  ; 
ber  Sfyrtge,  yours  ;  ber  fetnige,  his,  &c.,  are  declined  like 
adjectives  preceded  by  the  definite  article.  (See  Les- 
son in.) 

Obs.  When  the  conjunctive  possessive  pronouns  : 
metn,  my  ;  3fyr/  your  ;  fetn,  his,  &c.,  are  used  for  the 
absolute  possessive  pronouns  :  ber  metnige,  mine  ;  ber 
Sfyrige,  yours,  &c.,  they  terminate  in  the  masculine  in 
er  and  in  the  neuter  in  e$,  —  Ex.  : 

Is  this  your  hat  1  3ft  ba£  3(jr  £ut  ? 

No,  Sir,  it  is  not  mine,  but  yours.  97ctnx  mctn  J&crr,  eg  tft  ntd^t  meiner/ 

fcnbcrn  3^rcr. 

Is  this  my  book  1  3ft  bag  mctn  23ttcl)  ? 

No,  it  is  not  yours,  but  mine.       ^cin,  c$  tft  ntcfyt  3^eg,  fonbern 


(vir)  ; 

ber  «r«enfd)  (gen.  en,  homo)  ; 

the  stick,  ber  (Stoct  ; 

my  brother,  metn  SBrnber  ; 

the  shoemaker,  ber  (Sd)ufjmad)er  ; 

the  merchant,  ber  .Raufmann  ; 

the  friend,  ber  Jreunb. 

Have  you  the  merchant's  stick  .£>alu'n  Sic  ben  <Stoc!  beg  jlauf* 
or  yours  1  mannS  obcr  ben  3^i^en  ? 

Neither.  SB  e  b  e  r. 

Nor.  VI  c  d). 

1  have  neither  the   merchant's  3*  fa&e  roeber  ben  ©tccf  beg  Jtnuf? 
stick  nor  mine.  manng  noi^  ben  meintgcn* 


13 


Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty  1  {%£$?£$ 


I  am  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty.  J  f  *  jf 


EXERCISE    6. 

Have  you  your  cloth  or  mine  1  —  I  have  neither  yours  nor  mine. 

—  I  have  neither  my  bread  nor  the  tailor's.  —  Have  you  my  stick  or 
yours  1  —  1  have  mine.  —  Have  you  the   shoemaker's  shoe   or  the 
merchant's  1  —  I  have  neither  the  shoemaker's  nor  the  merchant's. 

—  Have  you  my  brother's  coat  "?  —  I  have  it  not.  —  Which  paper 
have  you  1  —  I  have   your  friend's.  —  Have   you   my  dog   or   my 
friend's  ]  —  I  have  your  friend's.  —  Have  you  my  thread  stocking  or 
my  brother's]  —  I  have  neither  yours  nor  your  brother's.  —  Have 
you  my  good  baker's  good  bread  or  that  of  my  friend  ?  —  I  have 
neither  your  good  baker's  nor  that  of  your  friend.  —  Which  bread 
have   you  1  —  I    have   mine.  —  Which   ribbon  have  you  1  —  I   have 
yours.  —  Have  you  the  good  or  the  bad  cheese  1  —  I  have  neither 
the  good  nor  the  bad.  —  Have  you  anything!  —  I  have  nothing.  — 
Have  you  my  pretty  or  my  ugly  dog  !  —  I  have  neither  your  pretty 
nor  your  ugly  dog.  —  Have  you  my  friend's  stick  ?  —  I  have  it  not. 

—  Are  you  sleepy  or  hungry  1  —  I  am  neither  sleepy  nor  hungry.  — 
Have  you  the  good  or  the  bad  salt  1  —  I  have  neither  the  good  nor 
the  bad.  —  Have  you  my  horse  or  the  man's  ?  —  I  have  neither  yours 
nor  the  man's.  —  What  have  you  1  —  1  have  nothing  fine.  —  Are  you 
tired  1  —  I  am  not  tired. 


EIGHTH  LESSON.— <2UI)te  Section. 

The  cork,  bet  spfropf  ($)fropfcn)  ; 

the  corkscrew,  bet  Spfropfticlxt 

the  umbrella,  bet  JKeflenfcrjitm  ; 

the  hoy,  bet  .Rnabe  (gen.  n). 

Obs.  Masculine  substantives  ending  in  e,  take  n 
in  the  genitive  case  singular,  and  keep  this  termina- 
tion in  all  the  cases  of  the  singular  and  plural. 

The  Frenchman,  bcr  Srartjofe  (gen.  n)  ; 

the  carpenter,       .  bcr  Sintmcrmann ; 

the  hammer,  bet  jammer  ; 

the  iron,  bag  (Stfen  ; 

iron  or  of  iron,  ctfctn  (adjective) ; 

the  nail,  bet  ^acjel ; 

the  pencil,  bet  23letjttft ; 


14 

the  thimble,  tet  ftinqetfyut  ; 

the  coffee,  tet  Coffee  ; 

the  honey,  tct  &cni§  ; 

the  biscuit,  tet  Snnebarf. 

Have  1  1  £afce  id)  ? 

You  have.  ©ie  fyabcn. 

What  have  I  ?  2Ba$  fyafce  id)  ? 
You  have  the  carpenter's  ham-    <Ste  ftaOcn  ten  .pammcr  te$ 
mer.  mating. 

Have  I  the  nail  ?  ^)flbc  id)  ten 

You  have  it.  ©tc  fjaton  ify 

Have  I  the  bread  I  .pafce  id)  ta6  S3tct  ? 

You  have  it.  (£ic  focitcn  e£. 

I  am  right.  t  3d)  (KI&C  ftccrjt. 

I  am  wrong.  t  3d)  M>c  Unrcd)t. 

Am  I  right?  t  $*bc  id) 


EXERCISE    7. 

I  have  neither  the  baker's  dog  nor  that  of  my  friend.  —  Are  you 
sleepy  1  —  I  am  not  sleepy.  —  I  am  hungry.  —  You  are  not  hungry.  — 
Have  I  the  cork  1  —  No,  Sir,  you  have  it  not.  —  Have  I  the  carpen- 
ter's wood  ?  —  You  have  it  not.  —  Have  1  the  Frenchman's  good  um- 
brella? —  You  have  it.  —  Have  I  the  carpenter's  iron  nail  or  yours  ? 
—  You  have  mine.  —  You  have  neither  the  carpenter's  nor  mine.  — 
Which  pencil  have  1  1  —  You  have  that  of  the  Frenchman.  —  Have 
I  your  thimble  or  that  of  the  tailor  ?  —  You  have  neither  mine  nor 
that  of  the  tailor.  —  Which  umbrella  have  1  1  —  You  have  my  good 
umbrella.  —  Have  I  the  Frenchman's  good  honey  ?  —  You  have  it 
not.  —  Which  biscuit  have  1  1  —  You  have  that  of  my  good  neigh- 
bour. —  Have  you  my  coffee  or  that  of  my  boy  1  —  I  have  that  of 
your  good  boy.  —  Have  you  your  cork  or  mine  ?  —  I  have  neither 
yours  nor  mine.  —  What  have  you  T  —  I  have  my  good  brother's  good 
pencil.  —  Am  I  right"?  —  You  are  right.  —  Am  Twrong?  —  You  are 
not  wrongf.  —  Am  I  right  or  wrong  1  —  You  are  neither  right  nor 
wrong.  —  You  are  hungry.  —  You  are  not  sleepy.  —  You  are  neither 
hungry  nor  thirsty.  —  You  have  neither  the  good  coffee  nor  the  good 
sugar.  —  What  have  I  ?  —  You  have  nothing. 


NINTH  LESSON.— Neunte  Section. 

Have  I  the   iron  or  the  golden  £abc  id)  t>cn  ctfcrncn  cfccr  ten  cjotfcc* 

nail  ]  ncn  9?agcl  ? 

You  have  neither   the  iron  nor  @ic  fyafrcn  nxfcct  ten  cifcrnen  nod) 

the  golden  nail.  ten  gcltcnen  Sftagcf. 


15 


The  sheep, 

the  ram, 

the  chicken  (the  hen), 

the  ship, 

the  bag  (the  sack), 

the  young  man, 

the  youth, 

Who  ? 

Who  has  ? 

Who  has  the  trunk? 
The  man  has  the  trunk. 
The  man  has  not  the  trunk. 
Who  has  it? 
The  young  man  has  it. 
The  young  man  has  it  not. 

He  has. 

He  has  the  knife. 
He  has  not  the  knife. 
He  has  it. 
Has  the  man  ? 
Has  the  painter? 
Has  the  frie~nd  ? 
Has    the   boy    the  carpenter's 

hammer  ? 
He  has  it. 
Has  the  youth  it? 
Is  he  thirsty  ? 
He  is  thirsty. 
Is  he  tired  ? 
He  is  not  tired. 


fcer  .panmiel  (to1 
fca$  Jbubn  ; 
ta$  ©c&tff; 


tor  jjunge  SHenfd)  (gen.  en)  ; 
fccr  Stinging. 


hat  fren  jl  offer? 
£)cr  9)tann  bat  ten  jl  offer. 
Dor  s)3tann  !)at  fecn  Coffer  n  t  d)  t. 
Sl'er  bat  tbn  ? 
2)er  junge  9)Jenfd)  bat  thru 
2)er  jungc  $Renfd)  fyat  tbn  n  t  d)  t. 

(Sr  (jat. 


(5r  bat  t»ag  SKcffft  n  i  d)  t  . 

<£r  fjat  c^. 

|>at  ter  9)2ann  ? 

|>at  bcr  grater  ? 

$at  ber  Jrcunt)  ? 

j^at  ter  JtnaOc  ^cn   jammer 

Suunu'rmanns  ? 
6r  bat  ibn. 

^>at  tbn  t>cr  Siingdng  ? 
Sft  cr  turfttg?  (.oat  er  SDurft?) 
(Sr  tft  burfltg.  ((Sr  feat  JDurft) 
Sit  cr  niflfcc  ? 
(Sr  tjl  n  i  cl)  t 


EXERCISES.    8. 

Is  lie  thirsty  or  hungry  ? — He  is  neither  thirsty  nor  hungry. — 
Has  the  friend  my  hat? — He  has  it. — He  has  it  not. — Who  has 
my  sheep  ? — Your  friend  has  it. — Who  has  rny  large  sack  ? — The 
baker  has  it. — Has  the  youth  my  book  ? — He  has  it  not. — WThat  has 
he  ? — He  has  nothing. — Has  he  the  hammer  or  the  nail  ? — He  has 
neither  the  hammer  nor  the  nail. — Has  he  my  umbrella  or  my 
stick  ? — He  has  neither  your  umbrella  nor  your  stick. — Has  he  my 
coffee  or  my  sugar  ? — He  has  neither  your  coffee  nor  your  sugar ; 
he  has  your  honey. — Has  he  my  brother's  biscuit  or  that  of  the 
Frenchman  ? — He  has  neither  your  brother's  nor  that  of  the  French- 
man ;  he  has  that  of  the  good  boy. — Which  ship  has  he  ? — He  has 
my  good  ship. — Has  he  the  old  sheep  or  the  ram  ? 

9. 

Has  the  young  man  my  knife  or  that  of  the  painter  ? — He  has 
neither  yours  nor  that  of  the  painter. — Who  has  my  brother's  fine 


16 

dog? — Your  friend  has  it. — What  has  my  friend1? — He  has  the 
baker's  good  bread. — He  has  the  good  neighbour's  good  chicken. — 
What  have  you  1 — I  have  nothing. — Have  you  my  bag  or  yours  1 — 
I  have  that  of  your  friend.— Have  I  your  good  knife  ] — You  have 
it. — You  have  it  not. — Has  the  youth  it  (.feat  c?)  1 — He  has  it  not. 
— What  has  he? — He  has  something  good. — He  has  nothing  bad. 
— Has  he  anything] — He  has  nothing. — Is  he  sleepy] — He  is  not 
sleepy — He  is  hungry. — Who  is  hungry  1 — The  young  man  is 
hungry. — Your  friend  is  hungry. — Your  brother's  boy  is  hungry. — 
My  shoemaker's  brother  is  hungry. — My  good  tailor's  boy  is 
thirsty. — Which  man  has  my  book  1 — The  big  (cjrcp)  man  has  it. — 
Which  man  has  my  horse  1 — Your  friend  has  it. — He  has  your 
good  cheese. — Has  he  it  ] — Yes,  Sir,  he  has  it. 


TENTH  LESSON.— 2eljnte  Section. 


The  peasant, 
the  ox, 
the  cook, 
the  bird, 


His. 


tec  2$cwcc  (gen.  n)  *, 
NT  £cbfc ; 
tcc.fi 
tcr  \ 

Masc. 

fem/ 
feittnt/ 


NOM. 
Ace. 


Neut. 

fetn. 
fern. 


Obs.  A.     The  conjunctive  possessive  pronoun  fcin  is 


declined  like  mem  and 


(See  Lessons  II.  and  III.) 


The  servant, 
the  broom, 

Has  the  servant  his  broom  1 
His  eye, 
his  foot, 
his  rice, 


He  has  his  own. 

His  or  Jiis  own  (absolute 
possessive  pronoun). 


tec  SBcttente ; 
tec  Skfcn. 

v&at  tec  jycttcntc  fcincn  JBcfcn  ] 
few  ?(uc)c ; 
fcincn  ^u{j ; 
fcincn  9?et$. 

Has  the   cook  his   chicken  or    £at  ^ct  -^Ccft  f^n  ^nljn  ctcr  tas  tc5 
that  of  the  peasant  ]  ^auern  ] 

'It  ()at  ta^  fctntgc. 

Masc.  Neut. 

i  N.  ber  feinige.    bae^  feinfge. 
j  A.  ben  jeinigen*   ba^  fentfge* 

)cit  tec  SBcjbtcntc  fcincn  Coffee  otcc 
ten  mctntgcn  ? 


Has   the  servant   his  trunk  or 

mine] 

He  has  his  own. 
Have  you  your  shoe  or  his  ] 

I  have  his. 


(Sc  fiat  ten  fcmtgetu 


fi'tntgcn  ? 
d)  f)abc  ten  fcintcjcn. 


obcr 


17 

Somebody  or  anybody,  some      I  ~ ( ^ 
one  or  any  one  (indefi-    <  ^ 

-nrmnnV  . 


nite  pronoun).  ^         §= 


Has  anybody  my  hat? 
Sc~bodyta.it. 

Who  has  my  stick  1  r  bat  mctncn  (gtccf  ? 

Nobody  has  it.  SHicmanfc  fjat  il)n. 

JVo  one,  nobody  or  no/  anybody.  97 1  c  m  a  n  t». 

Ofo.  B.     SJttemanb  is  declined  exactly  like 

Who  has  my  ribbon  ?  8£ct  fyat  mctn  33cwt>  ? 

Nobody  has  it.  9iiemcmt>  bat  ft. 

Nobody  has  his  broom.  97icnmnt>  f)at  fctncn  23cfen. 

EXERCISES.       10. 

Have  you  the  ox  of  the  peasant  or  that  of  the  cook? — I  have 
neither  that  of  the  peasant  nor  that  of  the  cook. — Has  the  peasant 
his  rice  ? — He  has  it. — Have  you  it  ? — I  have  it  not. — Has  his  boy 
the  servant's  broom  ? — He  has  it. — Who  has  the  boy's  pencil  ? — 
Nobody  has  it. — Has  your  brother  my  stick  or  that  of  the  painter? 
—He  has  neither  yours  nor  that  of  the  painter  ;  he  has  his  own.— 
Has  he  the  good  or  bad  money  1 — He  has  neither  the  good  nor  the 
bad. — Has  he  the  wooden  or  the  leaden  horse  ? — He  has  neither 
the  wooden  nor  the  leaden  horse. — What  has  he  good  1 — He  has 
my  good  honey. — Has  my  neighbour's  boy  my  book  ? — He  has  it 
not. — Which  book  has  he  ? — He  has  his  fine  book. — Has  he  my 
book  or  his  own  1 — He  has  his  own. — Who  has  my  gold  button  ? 
— Nobody  has  it. — Has  anybody  my  thread  stocking  1 — Nobody 
has  it. 

'  11. 

Which  ship  has  the  merchant? — He  has  his  own. — Which 
horse  has  my  friend? — He  has  mine. — Has  he  his  dog  ? — He  has 
it  not. — Who  has  his  dog  ? — Nobody  has  it. — Who  has  my  bro- 
ther's umbrella  ? — Somebody  has  it. — WThich  broom  has  the  ser- 
vant?— He  has  his  own. — Is  anybody  hungry? — Nobody  is  hun- 
gry.— Is  anybody  sleepy  ? — Nobody  is  sleepy. — Is  any  one  tired  ? — 
No  one  is  tired. — Who  is  right? — Nobody  is  right. — Have  I  his 
biscuit  ? — You  have  it  not. — Have  I  his  good  brother's  ox  ? — 
You  have  it  not. — Which  chicken  have  1  ? — You  have  his. — Is 
anybody  wrong? — Nobody  is  wrong. 


18 

ELEVENTH  LESSON.—  ®lfte  Section. 

The  sailor,  tcr  sfflatrofc,  tcr  S3ect$fncdf)t  ; 

the  chair,  tcr  ©tuf)l  ; 

the  looking-glass,  tcr  (Sptcgcf  ; 

the  candle,  ta$  £td)t  ; 

the  tree,  tcr  Staum  ; 

the  garden,  tcr  ©artcn  ; 

the  foreigner,  tcr  Jrcmtc  ; 

the  glove,  tcr  £antfd)ulj. 

This  ass,  ttcfcr  (5fe(  ; 

that  hay,  ticfce  (tic$)  £cu. 

The  grain,  bag  ,Rorn  ; 

the  corn,  ta$  ©ctrcttc. 

This  man,  ttcfcr  9)tann  ; 

that  man,  jcncr  Dflann  ; 

this  book,  ttcfc*  (ttc$a)  23ud)  ; 

that  book,  jcncS  X) 


N.  G.        D.        A. 

This  or  this  one.  Masc.      btefer  —  e^  —  em  —  en* 

That  or  that  one.          Neut.      jeneS  —  e$  —  em  —  e$. 

It  will  be  perceived  that  btefer  and  jeiier  are 
declined  exactly  like  the  definite  article.  (See  Lesson 
II.)  The  English  almost  always  use  that,  when  the 
Germans  use  b  i  e  f  e  3.  In  German  j  e  n  e  r  is  only  em- 
ployed when  it  relates  to  a  person  or  a  thing  spoken 
of  before,  or  to  make  an  immediate  comparison  be- 
tween two  things  or  persons.  Therefore,  whenever 
this  is  not  the  case,  the  English  that  must  be  translated 
by  btefer. 

Have  you  this  hat  or  that  one  ?    £o&cn  ©ic  ticfcn  obcr  }cncn  £ut  ? 
But.  2Ct>cr,  f  on  tern. 

06s.  Slber  is  used  after  affirmative  and  negative 
propositions  ;  fonbertt  is  only  used  after  negative  propo- 
sitions. 

I  have  not  this,  but  that  one.        3cb  f)flk  ntcbt  ttcfon,  fcntcrn  jcncn. 
Has  the  neighbour  this  book  or   £at  tcr  97ad)0ar  ttcfcS  ctcr  jcnc* 
that  one  1  22ud)  ? 


is  often  used  for  biefeS  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  neu- 
ter, particularly  when  it  is  not  followed  by  a  substantive,  and  when  it  re- 
presents a  whole  sentence,  as  will  be  seen  hereafter. 


19 

He  has  this,  but  not  that  one.  <£t  (jat  triefcS,  abet  mcf)t  j 

Have  you  this  looking-glass  or  £aOcn  <Sic  t)icfcn  efcct:  jencn 

that  one!  get? 

I  have  neither  this  nor  that  one.  3d)  fyaOe  n>ct>cr  friefcn  nod)  jcncn. 

That  ox,  ttcfvT  £d>fc ; 

the  letter,  fccv  SBricf ; 

the  note,  t>ct  3cttc(  (frciS  fillet)  ; 

the  horse-shoe,  tas  .pufctjVn. 

EXERCISE   1-J. 

Which  hay  has  the  foreigner  1 — He  has  that  of  the  peasant. — Has 
the  sailor  my  looking-glass  1 — He  has  it  not. — Have  you  this  can- 
dle or  that  one  ? — I  have  this  one. — Have  you  the  hay  of  my  gar- 
den or  that  of  yours  ? — I  have  neither  that  of  your  garden  nor  that 
of  mine,  but  that  of  the  foreigner. — Which  glove  have  you? — I 
have  his  glove. — Which  chair  has  the  foreigner  1 — He  has  his 
own. — Who  has  my  good  candle? — This  man  has  it. — Who  has 
that  looking-glass  ? — That  foreigner  has  it. — What  has  your  ser- 
vant (3br  sftcDicntcr)  ? — He  has  the  tree  of  this  garden. — Has  he 
that  man's  book  ] — He  has  not  the  book  of  that  man,  but  that  ot 
this  boy. — Which  ox  has  this  peasant  ? — He  has  that  of  your 
neighbour. — Have  I  your  letter  or  his  ? — You  have  neither  mine 
nor  his,  but  that  of  your  friend. — Have  you  this  horse's  hay  1 — I 
have  not  its  hay,  but  its  shoe. — Has  your  brother  my  note  or  his 
own  1 — He  has  that  of  the  sailor. — Has  this  foreigner  my  glove 
or  his  own  1 — He  has  neither  yours  nor  his  own,  but  that  of  his 
friend. — Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty! — I  am  neither  hungry  nor 
thirsty,  but  sleepy. — Is  he  sleepy  or  hungry  1 — He  is  neither  slee- 
py nor  hungry,  but  tired. — Am  1  right  or  wrong? — You  are  neither 
right  nor  wrong,  but  your  good  boy  is  wrong. — Have  I  the  good 
or  the  bad  knife  ? — You  have  neither  the  good  nor  the  bad,  but  the 
ug^ly  (one). — What  have  1 1 — You  have  nothing  good,  but  some- 
thing bad. — WTho  has  my  ass  ? — The  peasant  has  it. 


TWELFTH  LESSON.— 2»8lfte  faction. 

N.  O.         D.        A. 

That  or  which   (relative  (  Masc.  tt>efd)er — e3 — em — em 
pronoun).  (  Neut.    tttflofyeS — e£ — em — eg. 

Obs.  A.  It  will  be  perceived  that  the  relative  pro- 
noun tt>e(of)er  is  declined  like  the  definite  article,  which 
may  be  substituted  for  it ;  but  then  the  masculine  and 
neuter  of  the  genitive  case  is  beffen  instead  of 
3CeIdher  is  never  used  in  the  genitive  case. 


20 

Have  you  the  hat,   which  my  £akn  (Sic   ben  .put,  rocldjcn  man 

brother  has  1  JsBruK'r  f)at  ? 

I  have  not  the  hat,  which  your  3d)  bnbc  nidjt  ten  vput,  rockbcn  36^ 

brother  has.  SBrubcr  bat. 

Have  you  the  horse,  which   I  ^jo6cn  ©te  bag    ^ferb,  roctdjcS   id) 

have  ?  b^Oc  ? 

I  have  the  horse,  which  you  have.  3d)   b^c    bns  syfcrb,  nx(d)C$    (Sic 


Masc.  Neut. 

f  NOM.  berjemgc*    ba^jemge. 

That  or  the  one  (determi-    i  GEN.  beSjemgem  be^jenigen* 
native  pronoun).  ]  DAT.  bemjenigen,  bentjcntgen. 

[Ace.  benjenigen,  ba^jcnige. 

Obs.  B.  jD  c  r  j  e  n  t  g  e  is  always  used  with  a  rela- 
tive pronoun,  to  determine  the  person  or  thing  to  which 
that  pronoun  relates.  It  is  compounded  of  the  definite 
article  and  jemg,  and  declined  like  an  adjective,  pre- 
ceded by  this  article.  The  article  alone  may  also  be 
substituted  in  its  stead,  but  must  then  undergo  the 
modification  pointed  out  in  the  foregoing  observation, 
as  will  be  seen  hereafter. 

I  have  that,   or  the  one  which  P*^  *<<«<<>  ™l*cn  «' 
you  have<  C  3d)  bal'c  t)cn,  mcld)cn 

You  have  that  which  I  have 


r<Sic  b^Ocn  ba^cnigc,  n?c(cbc^  i 
.        <      bafcc. 

C  ^tc  OaOcn  ba^  wcldbc^  icb  ba^e« 


That  which  or  the  one  which.  <  Neuter 


Masculine. 


NOM.  berjentge,  «>e(cf)er. 
Ace.   benjenigen,  tt)eld)en. 


NOM.  batfjemge, 

Ace.   ba^jenige,  n>elcf)e£. 


Which  carriage  have  you  :  SOBcfdjcn  Sfitagcn  baK'n  (gtc  ? 

I  have  that  which  your  friend  3d)  bate  ben  (bcnicnujcn),  roctd)en 
has.  3fa  Srcunl)  ^at- 

The  carriage,  bcr  SKagcn  ; 

the  house,  bciS  ^>au^. 

rp,  (  Masc.  berfetbe  (ber  namltcfje). 


21 

Obs.  C.  Scrfelbe,  the  same,  is  compounded  of 
the  definite  article  and  fefb,  and  is  declined  like  tor  jo* 
tttge.  It  is  frequently  used  instead  of  the  personal  pro- 
noun of  the  third  person  to  avoid  repetition  and  to 
make  the  sentence  more  perspicuous. 

Have  you  the  same  stick,  which  Apaben  Ctc   tcnjVtben    (ten    ncw.lls 
I  have  ]  d)cn)  Stecf,  ten  id)  haK*  ? 

1  have  the  same.  3d)  hnbc  tcnfi'Uvn  (ten  nftwttdxn)* 

Has  that  man   the  same  cloth,  .pat  tu'fcv  9)Janu  ta?|\10c  (to*  nams 
which  you  have  ]  (td)c)    Suel),   iwldKS    (tai>)    Sic 

vn? 

He  has  not  the  same.  OT  iv.r  i;::M  tui>|Vtbc  (ta$  nani(td)v'). 

Has  he   (that  is,  has  the  same  .pot  tafilK'  nictncn  £antfd)iil)  ? 
man)  my  glove  ] 

He  has  it  not.  (5r  fyat  tfw  (tcnfdOcn)  nid)t. 

EXERCISE    13. 

Have  you  the  garden,  which  1  have;?  —  I  have  not  the  one  that 


you  have.  —  Which  lookiiiLi"-'.1;!.^-  have  you?  —  I  have  the  one 
which  your  brother  has.  —  Has  he  the  hook  that  your  friend  has  ]  — 
He  has  not  the  one  which  my  friend  has.  —  Which  candle  has  he  1 

—  He  has  that  of  his  neighbour.  —  He  has  the  one  that  I  have.  — 
Has  he  this  tree  or  that  one!  —  He  has  neither  this  nor  that,  but 
the  one  which  I  have.  —  Which  ass  has  the  man  1  —  He  has  the 
one  that  his  boy  has.  —  Has  the  stranger  your  chair  or  mine  1  —  He 
has  neither  yours  nor  mine;  but  he  has  his  friend's  good  chair.  — 
Have  you  the  glove  which  t  have,  or  the  one  that  my  tailor  has.  — 
1  have  neither  the  one  which  you  have,  nor  the  one  which  your 
tailor  lias,  but  my  own.  —  Has  your  shoemaker  my  fine  shoe,  or 
that  of  his  boy  ]  —  He  has  neither  yours  nor  that  of  his  boy,  but 
that  of  the  jrood  stranger.  —  Which  house  has  the  baker]  —  He  has 
neither  yours  nor  mine,  but  that  of  his  oood  brother.  —  Which  car- 
riage have  1  ]  —  Have  I  mine  or  that  of  the  peasant  1  —  You  have 
neither  yours  nor  that  of  the  peasant  ;  you  have  the  one  which  1 
have.  —  Have   you   my   fine   carriage  1  —  I   have   it   not  ;   but   the 
Frenchman  has  it.  —  Wrhat  has  the  Frenchman  ]  —  He  has  nothing. 

—  What  has  the  shoemaker]  —  He  has  something  fine.  —  What  has 
he  fine]  —  He  has  his  fine  shoe.  —  Is  the  shoemaker  right]  —  He  is 
not  wrong  ;  but  this  neighbour,  the  baker,  is  riorht.  —  Is  your  horse 
hungry  1  —  It  ((£$)  is  not  hungry,  but  thirsty.  —  Have  you  my  ass's 
hay  or  yours]  —  I  have  that  which  my  brother  has.  —  Has  your 
friend  the  same  horse  that  my  brother  has]  —  He  has  not  the  same 
horse,  but  the  same  coat.  —  Has  he  (£at  fccrfMe)  my  umbrella  ]  —  He 
has  it  not. 


22 
THIRTEENTH  LESSON.—  JBrei^ntc   flection. 

DECLENSION  OF  MASCULINE  AND  NEUTER  SUBSTANTIVES. 

I. 


RULES.  —  1.  Substantives  of  the  masculine  and  neu- 
ter gender  take  e3  or  3  in  the  genitive  case  singular  : 
those  ending  in  $,  f5,  J,  £,  take  c3  ;  all  others,  particu- 
larly those  ending  in  el,  en,  er,  cfyen  and  kin,  take  $. 

2.  Masculine  substantives  which  end  in  e  in 
the  nominative  singular,  take  n  in  the  other  cases  of 
the  singular  and  plural,a  and  do  not  soften  the  radical 
vowel. 

II.     PLURAL. 

RULES.  —  1.  All  substantives,  without  exception, 
take  n  in  the  dative  case  of  the  plural,  if  they  have 
not  one  in  the  nominative. 

2.  All  masculine  and  neuter  substantives  ending  in 
el,  en,  er,  as  also  diminutives  in  cfyen  and  leilt,  have  the 
same  termination  in  the  plural  as  in  the  singular. 

3.  In  all  cases  of  the  plural  masculine  substan- 
tives take  e,  and  neuter  substantives  er  ;  and  soften  the 
radical  vowels  a,  c,  u,  into  a,  6,  ii* 

4.  In  words  of  the  neuter  gender  ending  in  ef,  en, 
er,  the  radical  vowel  is  not  softened  in  the  plural,  ex- 
cept in  :  ba$  Softer,  the  convent  ;  plur.  tie 

The  hats,  Me  £utc  ; 

the  buttons,  tic  jtncpfc  ; 

the  tables,  Me  Stfdjc  ; 

the  houses,  tic  £a'ufcr  ;c 

the  ribbons,  Me 


"  Except  bcr  -Jtafe,  the  cheese  ;  gen.  be8  JlafeS  ;  plur. 

b  The  cleclen^ion  of  those  substantives  which  deviate  from  these  rules 
will  be  separately  noted  *. 

c  It  must  be  observed  that  in  the  diphthong  (lit,  a  is  softened.  In  the  diph- 
thong Ctl,  u  is  not  softened,  as  :  bcr  $rem:b,  the  friend  ;  plur.  bte  ffteutftt,  the 
friend*. 


[UNIVERSITY 


23 


The  threads, 
the  tailors, 
the  notes, 

tic  gatcn  ; 
tic  (Scbncitct  ; 
tic  Scttcl,  tic  23ittctte. 

The  hoys, 
the  Frenchmen, 
men  or  the  men, 

tic  vftnabcn  ; 
tic  £ran$efcn  ; 
tic  9)icnfd)cn. 

DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES    PRECEDED    BY    THE    DEFINITE 
ARTICLE    IN    THE    PLURAL. 


NOM.  the  good. 

GEN.  of  the  good. 

DAT.  to  the  good. 

Ace.  the  good. 

The  good  boys. 
The  ugly  dogs. 


For  all  genders. 

NOM.  bte  guten. 

GEN.  ter  guten. 

DAT.  ten  guten. 

Ace.  bte  guten. 


Bitten 


£untc.d 


Obs.  Adjectives  preceded  in  the  plural  by  a  posses- 
sive pronoun,  have  the  same  declension  as  with  the 
definite  article. 

For  all  genders. 

f  NOM.  metne  guten. 

TM-         j  /  i      i\       J  GEN.   metner  quten 
My  good  (plural).     <l  DAT>  m^^n  » ffMf 


I 


Have  you  my  good  books  ? 
I  have  your  good  books. 


tneuten  guten. 
.   meine  guten* 

ic  mcinc  cjutcn  SBiicfyct  ? 
c  3f)rc  cuitcn  JBficl)cr. 


A  TABLE 

OF  THE  DECLENSION  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 


Sat 

st.  Masculine. 

Subst.  Feminine. 

Su 

N. 

bst.  Neuter. 

G. 
D. 

£  or  e£» 
or  e» 

I 

>  invariable. 

G. 
D. 

£  or  e£. 
or  e. 

kA 

AJ 

A. 

The  word  $unb,  dog,  docs  not  soften  the  rowel  u  in  the  plural 


24 

Sul 

rN. 

st.  Masculine. 

e. 

N." 

Subst.  Feminine. 

G. 
D. 

e* 
en  or  n» 

G. 
D. 

>  en  or  n* 

A. 

e. 

A. 

Subst.  Neuter. 

N. 


G. 
D. 
A. 


er* 

em* 

er. 


EXERCISE.    14. 

Have  you  the  tables'? — Yes,  Sir,  I  have  the  tables. — Have  you 
my  tables  ? — No,  Sir,  I  have  not  your  tables. — Have  I  your  but- 
tons ? — You  have  my  buttons. — Havel  your  fine  houses'? — You 
have  my  fine  houses. — Has  the  tailor  the  buttons  1 — He  has  not 
the  buttons,  but  the  threads. — Has  your  tailor  my  good  buttons  7 — 
My  tailor  has  your  good  gold  buttons. — What  has  the  boy1? — He 
has  the  gold  threads. — Has  he  my  gold  or  my  silver  threads? — 
He  has  neither  your  gold  nor  your  silver  threads. — Has  the 
Frenchman  the  fine  houses  or  the  good  notes? — He  has  neither  the 
fine  houses  nor  the  good  notes. — What  has  he? — He  has  his  good 
friends. — Has  this  man  my  fine  umbrellas? — He  has  not  your  fine 
umbrellas,  but  your  good  coats. — Has  any  one  my  good  letters  ? — 
No  one  has  your  good  letters. — Has  the  tailor's  son  (tcr  Sohn)  my 
good  knives  or  my  good  thimbles?  —  He  has  neither  your  good 
knives  nor  your  good  thimbles,  but  the  ugly  coats  of  the  stran^'  r's 
big  (flvofO  boys. — Have  I  your  friend's  good  ribbons? — You  have 
not  my  friend's  good  ribbons,  but  my  neighbour's  fine  carriage. — 
Has  your  friend  the  shoemaker's  pretty  sticks,  or  my  good  tailor's 
pretty  dogs  ? — My  friend  has  my  good  shoemaker's  fine  books  ; 
but  he  has  neither  the  shoemaker's  pretty  sticks  nor  your  good 
tailor's  pretty  dogs. — Is  your  neighbour  right  or  wrong? — He  is 
neither  right  nor  wrong. — Is  he  thirsty  or  hungry  ? — He  is  neither 
thirsty  nor  hungry. 


FOURTEENTH  LESSON.— bierjeljntc    £ection. 


The  Englishman, 
the  German, 
the  Turk, 
the  small  books, 
the  large  horses, 

Have  the  English  the  fine  hats 
ot*  the  French  ? 


fccr  (Sn.qfcmbct  ; 

fccr  £)eutfdjc  ; 

bet  £iir!c  ; 

Me  Hctnen  Mcbct  ; 

Me 


tc  fcer 


Me  fd)b'nen 


25 

For  all  genders. 

f  NOM.  biejettigen  or  bie. 

rp,  I  GEN.  berjcmgen  —  berer, 

]  DAT.  bcnjcm'gen  —  bcueiu 

(^Acc.  bicjeuigeu  —  bie* 

Obs.  A.  When  the  definite  article  is  substituted 
for  berjenige,  its  genitive  plural  is  bercr,  and  its  dative 
plur.  bencn.  (See  also  Lesson  XII.  Obs.  B.) 

Have  you  the  books  which  the  £aOcn  (Sic  tic  23ud)cr,  roe(d)C  tic 
men  have  ?  9flcnnct  WH'II  ? 

I  have  not  those  which  the  men  3d)  faOc  nid)t  Mcjcmcjcn  (tic),  ivct- 
have;  but  I  have  those  which  d)C  fctc  Scanner  ifabcn  ;  nbcv  id) 
you  have.  ^abc  Me  (fctqcnujcn),  wctdjc  (Sic 


For  all  genders. 

fp,  I)  i  c  f  e  1  6  e  na   (bic  ndmlicfyem 

See  Lesson  XII.  Obs.  C.) 

Have  you  the  same  books,  which  £afccn  <Sic  t>tcfc((>cn  23iid)cr,  t>tc  tc^ 

I  iiave  ?  ^aOc  ? 

I  have  the  same.  3d)  fabe  btcfc(6cn* 

The  Italian,  the  Italians,  bet  Staltcncr,  tic  Softener  ; 

the  Spaniard,  the  Spaniards,        t>cc  (Spanicr,  tic 


For  all  genders. 

TNoM.  n>e(ci)c    or  bt'e* 
GEN. 


.  n>cfcf)e  —  bie* 


.  B.  When  the  definite  article  stands  for 
its  genitive  case  plural  is  not  berer,  but  beren,  (See 
Lesson  XII.  Obs.  A.)  The  genitives  beficn,  berett,  are 
preferable  to  the  genitives  tt>efd)e£,  tt>eld)er,  being  more 
easily  distinguished  from  the  nominative. 

For  all  genders. 

N.        G.        D.        A. 


These. 
Those. 


btefe,    btefer,   biefen,    biefe* 
jene,    jener,    jenen,    j[ene» 


»  $>tefet(jen  is  declined  like  btcjcntgert. 

b  Nouns  derived  from  foreign  languages  do  not  soften  the  radical  vowel  in 
the  plural. 

2 


26 

Obs.  C.  The  definite  article  may  be  used  instead 
of  these  pronouns.  Before  a  noun  it  follows  the  regu- 
lar declension  ;  but  when  alone,  it  undergoes  the  same 
changes  as  when  substituted  for  terjemge  (See  Obs.  A. 
above).  The  pronoun  fcer,  ba£,  is  distinguished  from 
the  article  bet,  ba£,  by  a  stress  in  the  pronunciation. 
As  an  article,  it  throws  the  principal  accent  on  the 
word  which  immediately  follows. 

Which  books  have  you  !  95Md)C  23ud)Ct  rjatjcn  (Sic  1 

Have  you  these  books  or  those  ?  $aOcn  ©ic  fctcfe  oK'c  jcnc  23iid>cr  ? 
I  have  neither  these  nor  those.  ^ 

I  have  neither  the  one  nor  the  S-  3d)  f)a(>c  n^bcr  fctcfe  nccfy  jcnc, 

other.c  ) 

I  have  neither  those  of  the  Span-  3d)  fynfec  tvcbcr  btc  tcr  <Spcmkr  nod? 

iards  nor  those  of  the  Turks.  tic  t>et  Siitfen. 

EXERCISES.    15. 

Have  you  these  horses  or  those  1 — I  have  not  these,  but  those. — 
Have  you  the  coats  of  the  French  or  those  of  the  English"? — I  have 
not  those  of  the  French,  but  those  of  the  English. — Have  you  the 
pretty  sheep  (ba?  <2d)af  takes  c,  and  is  not  softened  in  the  plural) 
of  the  Turks  or  those  of  the  Spaniards? — I  have  neither  those  of 
teh  Turks  nor  those  of  the  Spaniards,  but  those  of  my  brother. — 
Has  your  brother  the  fine  asses  of  the  Spaniards  or  those  of  the 
Italians  ] — lie  has  neither  those  of  the  Spaniards  nor  those  of  the 
Italians,  but  he  has  the  fine  asses  of  the  French. — Which  oxen  has 
yum  brother  ? — He  has  those  of  the  Germans. — Has  your  friend  my 
large  letters  or  those  of  the  Germans  1 — He  has  neither  the  one  nor 
the  other  (See  Note  c,  Lesson  XIV.).— Which  letters  has  he  ? — 
He  has  the  small  letters  which  you  have. — Have  I  these  houses  or 
those  ? — You  have  neither  these  nor  those. — Which  houses  have 
I  ] — You  have  those  of  the  English. — Has  any  one  the  tall  tailor's 
gold  buttons  1 — Nobody  has  the  tailor's  gold  buttons,  but  somebody 
has  those  of  your  friend., 

16. 

Have  I  the  notes  of  the  foreigners  or  those  of  my  boy] — You 
have  neither  those  of  the  foreigners  nor  those  of  your  boy,  but  those 
of  the  great  Turks. — Has  the  Turk  my  fine  horse  ] — He  has  it 
not. — Which  horse  has  he  1 — He  has  his  own. — Has  your  neigh- 
bour my  chicken  or  my  sheep  ] — My  neighbour  has  neither  your 
chicken  nor  your  sheep. — What  has  he  ] — He  has  nothing  good. — 
Have  you  nothing  fine  ? — I  have  nothing  fine. — Are  you  tired  1 — I 

c  The  English  phrases  the  former  and  the  latter,  the,  one  and  the  other,  are 
generally  expressed  in  German  by  btefer,  plur.  fctefe,  and  jener,  plur.  jenc,  but 
in  an  inverted  order,  ticfer  referring  to  the  latter  and  jetter  to  the  former. 


27 

am  not  tired. — Which  rice  has  your  friend  ] — He  lias  that  of  his 
merchant. — Whir-h  sugar  has  he  1 — He  has  that  which  I  have.-— 
Has  he  your  merchant's  good  coffee  or  that  of  mine1? — He  has  nei- 
ther that  of  yours  nor  that  of  mine  ;  he  has  his  own. — Which  ships 
(to?  Sccbtff  forms  its  plural  in  c)  has  the  Frenchman7? — He  has  the 
ships  of  the  English. — Which  houses  has  the  Spaniard  1 — He  has' 
the  same  which  you  have. — Has  he  my  good  knives'? — He  has  your 
good  knives. — Has  he  the  thread  stockings  which  I  have  1 — He  has 
not  the  same  that  you  have,  but  those  of  his  brother. 


tcr  Jtamm. 

£afcen  ©te  mctnc  ttetncn  Jlamme  ? 
3*>0c  fie. 

fi  c  (after  the  verb). 

Plural  for  all  genders. 

N.        G.        D.        A. 
metne-meuter-memett-meme* 
3f)re  -Sforer  -Sfymt  -SJjre. 
feine  -fdner  -fetnen  -feine, 
tfyre  -tfyrcr    -tfymt  -ifyre. 


FIFTEENTH  LESSON.— jrunfjeljnte  Cettion. 


The  glass, 
the  comb, 

Have  you  my  small  combs  1 
I  have  them. 

Them, 


My  (plural), 
Your,  — 
His,    — 

Their,  — 

Have  you  my  fine  glass  1 
Has  he  my  fine  glasses  1 
He  has  them. 
The  man  has  them. 
He  has  them  not. 
The  men  have  them. 
Have  the  men  them  ? 

Have  you  my  chairs  or  his "? 
I  have  neither  yours  nor  his. 

Which  chairs  have  you  1 
I  have  mine. 

Some  sugar, 
some  bread, 
some  salt, 


tc  nu'tn 

cr  mctnc  fdjb'ncn  ®(afcr  ? 
(Sr  f)at  ftc. 
2)cr  O^nnn  ^at  ftc. 
(£t  r)at  fie  nt  d)t. 
5)ic  Banner  fjabcn  fie. 
|>aOcn  ftc  tic  9)2a'nner;  1 


Sic  mctnc  ^tiif)(e  cbcc  tie 
fctntgcn  ?  (See  Lesson  VII.) 

3cb  fyabc  njcter  tic  S^tgcn  nod)  tie 
feint  cjcn. 

aOBi-lcfec  ©ttt^tc  ftabcn  ©ic  ? 

3d)  ^abc  tic  mcimgcn. 

Surfer  ; 
SBrcD  ; 
60!*. 


RULE. 
in  German. 


or  «?iy  before  a  noun  is  not  expressed 


28 

EXERCISE.    17. 

Have  you  my  good  combs  1 — I  have  them. — Have  you  the  good 
horses  of  the  English  ] — 1  have  them  not. — Which  brooms  have 
you] — I  have  those  of  the  foreigners. — Have  you  my  coats  or 
those  of  my  friends  ? — I  have  neither  yours  nor  those  of  your 
friends. — Have  you  mine  or  his"? — I  have^his — Has  the  Italian 
the  good  cheeses  which  you  have? — He  has  not  those  which  I 
have,  but  those  which  you  have. — Has  your  boy  my  good  pencils  ? 
He  has  them. — Has  he  the  carpenter's  nails  ? — He  has  them  not. 
— What  has  he  1 — He  has  his  iron  nails. — Has  anybody  the  thim- 
bles of  the  tailors  ? — Nobody  has  them. — Who  has  the  ships  of 
the  Spaniards! — The  English  have  them. — Have  the  English 
these  ships  or  those  1 — The  English  have  their  ships. — Have  your 
brothers  my  knives  or  theirs? — My  brothers  have  neither  your 
knives  nor  theirs. — Have  I  your  chickens  or  those  of  your  cooks  1 
— You  have  neither  mine  nor  those  of  my  cooks. — Which  chick- 
ens have  I? — You  have  those  of  the  good  peasant. — Who  has 
my  oxen  1 — Your  servants  have  them. — Have  the  Germans  them  1 
— The  Germans  have  them  not,  but  the  Turks  have  them. — Who 
has  my  wooden  table  1 — Your  boys  have  it. — Who  has  my  good 
bread  ! — Your  friends  have  it. 


SIXTEENTH  LESSON.—  0ecl)}el)nte  flection. 

DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES  WITHOUT  AN  ARTICLE. 

RULE.  An  adjective,  not  preceded  by  an  article, 
takes  the  same  termination  as  the  definite  article,  ex- 
cept in  the  genitive  singular,  masculine  and  neuter, 
which  then  ends  in  en  instead  of  e£. 

Masculine.  Neuter. 

{N.  guter  2Beuu      gutetf  Sa(j. 
G.  quten  SBeined.  quten  Sal* 
t 
D.  gntentSffietne,  gntem  ©afje. 
A.  guten  28ein* 


Plural  for  all  genders. 

Good  or  some  good,  &c.    (  N.        G.         D.         A. 
(plural.)  \  gute,    guter,  guten,     gute, 


Some  good  cheese,  gutcr 

some  good  bread,  gutc$  23rer. 


29 


Singular. 

Some  of  it,  any  of  it,  of  it.  \  %'  "??Je"'  **£  "'  Jeffe|Jm- 

I  N.  reclcfyetf,  beffcn,  be^felben. 


Same  of  them,  any  of  them, 

OjT  tfl-STTlu 


Plural  for  all  genders. 

^ 


The  pronoun  so;we  or  «wy,  when  taken  in  a 
partitive  sense,  is  expressed  by  tt>efcf).  Of  him,  of  it,  of 
them*  &i\,  when  governed  by  a  substantive,  an  adjec- 
tive, or  a  verb  requiring  in  German  the  genitive,  are 
expressed  by  the  genitive  of  the  personal  pronouns,  if 
rein  ting  to  a  person,  and  if  to  a  thing,  by  the  genitives 
teflon,  betffelbcn,  bercn,  berfdbcn,  which  may  sometimes 
be  omitted. 


Have  you  any  wine  1 

I  have  some. 

Have  you  any  water  1 

I  have  some. 

Have  you  any  good  wine  ? 

I  have  some. 

Have  I  any  good  cloth  ? 

You  have  some. 

Have  you  any  shoes  ? 

I  have  some. 

1  lave  you  good  or  bad  horses  1 

I  have  some  good  ones. 

Have  you  good  or  bad  wine  1 

I  have  some  good. 

Have  you  good  or  bad  water  1 

I  have  some  good. 


EXERCISE.  18. 

Have  you  any  sugar  ?  —  I  have  some.  —  Have  you  any  good  cof- 
fee 1  —  I  have  some.  —  Have  you  any  salt  1  —  I  have  some.  —  Have  I 
any  good  salt  1  —  You  have  some.  —  Have  I  any  shoes  1  —  You  have 
some.  —  Have  I  any  pretty  dogs'?  —  You  have  some.  —  Has  the  man 
any  good  honey  1  —  He  has  some.  —  What  has  the  man  1  —  He  has 
some  good  bread.  —  What  has  the  shoemaker]  —  He  has  some 
pretty  shoes.  —  Has  the  sailor  any  biscuits  (3nricfoacf  does  not  soften 
in  the  plural)  1  —  He  has  some.  —  Has  your  friend  any  good  pencils  1 
—  He  has  some.  —  Have  you  good  or  bad  coffee  1  —  I  have  somo 
good.  —  Have  you  good  or  bad  wood  1  —  I  have  some  good.  —  Have 


jaafccn  Sic  SOScin  ? 

3d)  babe  n>c(d)cn. 

4babcn  Sic  SHSofiet  ? 

3d)  b^bc  nxld)C$. 

£cibcn  Sic  gutcn  SBctn  ? 

3d)  fjobc  roc(d)cn. 

^>aOe  id)  gutc$  Sud)  ? 

Sic  Ija&cn  tDe(d)f^. 

Jbabcn  (Sic  @d)u()e  ? 

3d)  ^abc  n?c(d)f. 

£afan  Sic  cjutc  ctcr  fd)(cd)tc  ^fcrbc? 

3d)  b^Oc  flute. 

$cibeu    Sic    Quten    otcr    fc^tcc^tcn 

SKcin? 

3d)  fafce  QUtcn. 
£a(>cn  Sic  cuUcS  otcr  fd)(cc^tc^ 

far? 
3d)  taO 


30 

I  good  or  bad  oxen  1 — You  have  some  bad  (ones). — Has  your 
brother  good  or  bad  cheese  1 — He  has  neither  good  nor  bad. — What 
has  he  good  1 — He  has  some  good  friends. — Who  has  some  cloth  ? 
—My  neighbour  has  some. — Who  has  some  money  ? — The  French 
have  some. — Who  has  some  gold  ? — The  English  have  some. — 
Who  has  some  good  horses  1 — The  Germans  have  some. — Who 
has  some  good  hay  1 — This  ass  has  some. — Who  has  some  good 
bread  1 — That  Spaniard  has  some. — Who  has  some  good  books  1 — 
These  Frenchmen  have  some. — Who  has  some  good  ships? — 
Those  Englishmen  have  some  1 — Has  anybody  wine  1 — Nobody 
has  any. — Has  the  Italian  fine  or  ugly  horses  ? — He  has  some  ugly 
(ones). — Have  you  wooden  or  stone  tables'? — I  have  neither  wood- 
en nor  stone  (ones). — Has  your  boy  the  fine  books  of  mine  7 — He 
has  not  those  of  your  boy,  but  his  own. — Has  he  any  good  thread 
stockings  1 — He  has  some. — What  has  the  Turk  1 — He  has  nothing. 


SEVENTEENTH  LESSON.—  0i*b*n?e!)nte  £  alien. 

Singular. 

C        N.       G.       D.       A. 

No,  none,  not  a,  or  not     <  M.  fern,  feine$,  fement,  feinen* 
any.  (  N.  fein,  feinetf,  fetnem,  few. 

Obs.  A.  The  word  fein  has  this  declension  when, 
like  no  in  English,  it  is  followed  by  a  substantive  ; 
but  when  the  substantive  is  understood  as  with  none 
in  English,  it  forms  its  nominative  masculine  in  er,  and 
its  nominative  and  accusative  neuter  in  e£  or  3. 

Have  you  any  wine  ?  £abcn  ©tc  £8ctn  ? 

I  have  none.  3d)  M>c  ton  en. 

Have  you  no  bread  ?  £akn  (Sic  f  cm  SBrct)  ? 

I  have  not  any.  3d)  fyafce  fcincS  (fctn$). 

Obs.  B.  It  will  be  observed  that  any  is  expressed 
by  fein,  when  accompanied  by  a  negation. 

Plural  for  all  genders. 

No,  none,  or  not  any  (plu-     (   N.         G.         D.         A. 
ral).  (  feme,  feiner,  feinett,  feme. 


Have  you  no  shoes  ?  ^afccn  ©ic  feme  (Scfyufye 

I  have  none.  3d)  fyabc  fctne* 

Have  you  any  ?  £abcn  <Stc  nx(d)C  ? 

1  have  not  any.  3d)  f)abc  fcinc. 

Has  the  man  any  1  £nt  t>ct  9)tonn  nx(d)C  ? 


31 

He  has  none.  ©r  fjat  fctnc. 

Has  he  any  good  books  ?  &at  cr  gutc  S3iid)Ct  ? 

He  has  some.  <£t  Ijat  n?cld)c. 

The  American,  tot  tfmcrifcmcr  ; 

the  Irishman,  fcci  Sinter  ; 

the  Scotchman,  tor  (cdjottlantcr  (3d)0ttc)  ; 

the  Dutchman,  tcr  £oUcmtcr  ; 

the  Russian,  tcr 


RULE,     Compound  words  in  mantt  form  their  plural 
by  changing  this  termination  into  [eutc.     Ex. 

The  merchants,  tic  jtauflcutc  ; 

the  carpenters,  tic  3inimcrU'Utc. 

EXERCISE.    19. 

the  American  good  money  1  —  He  has  some.  —  Have  the 
Dutch  good  cheese  1  —  Yes,  Sir,  the  Dutch  have  some.  —  Has  the 
Russian  no  cheese  1  —  He  has  none.  —  Have  you  good  stockings  ?  — 
I  have  some.  —  Have  you  good  or  bad  honey  1  —  I  have  some  good. 
—  Have  you  some  good  coffee  1  —  1  have  none.  —  Have  you  some  bad 
coffee  ?  —  I  have  some.  —  Has  the  Irishman  good  wine  ?T—  He  has 
none.  —  Has  he  good  water  ?  —  He  has  some.  —  Has  the  Scotchman 
some  good  salt]  —  He  has  none.  —  What  has  the  Dutchman  ?  —  He 
has  good  ships.  —  Have  I  some  bread  ?  —  You  have  none.  —  Have  I 
some  good  friends  ?  —  You  have  none.  —  Who  has  good  friends  1  — 
The  Frenchman  has  some.  —  Has  your  servant  (3>f)r  Scttcntcr)  any 
<»r  brooms?  —  He  has  some  good  brooms,  but  no  coats.  —  Has 
any  one  hay  ?  —  Some  one  has  some.  —  Who  has  some  1  —  My  ser- 
vant has  some.  —  Has  this  man  any  bread  ?  —  He  has  none.  —  Who 
has  good  shoes  ?  —  My  good  shoemaker  has  some.  —  Have  you  the 
good  hats  of  the  Russians,  or  those  of  the  Dutch  1  —  I  have  neither 
those  of  the  Russians  nor  those  of  the  Dutch,  I  have  those  of  the 
Irish.  —  Which  sacks  has  your  friend?  —  He  has  the  good  sacks  of 
the  merchants  —  Has  your  boy  the  good  hammers  of  the  carpen- 
ters ?  —  No,  Sir,  he  has  them  not.  —  Has  this  little  boy  some  sugar  ? 
—He  has  none  —  Has  the  brother  of  your  friend  good  combs  ?  — 
The  brother  of  my  friend  has  none,  but  I  have  some.  —  Who  has 
good  wooden  chairs  ?  —  Nobody  has  any. 


EIGHTEENTH  LESSON.—  aui^ljnte  Cection. 


The  hatter,  tct  £utmad)ei:  ; 

the  joiner,  tet  £ifd)(Ct  (Gtyttfett). 


32 

Masculine.  Neuter. 

f  NOM.    em*  eitu 

A  ]  GEN. 

A  or  an  (one).  j  DAT 

[Ace.     einem        eiru 

Obs.  A.  When  a  substantive  is  understood,  eitt  like 
f  em,  takes  e  r  in  the  nominative  masculine,  and  e  3  or  £ 
in  the  nominative  and  accusative  neuter.  (See  pre- 
ceding Lesson.) 


Have  you  a  looking-glass  ?  £nkn  @te  ctncn 

I  have  one.  3d)  fjabc  cincn. 

Have  you  a  book  ?  £cibcn  (Sic  cm  23ud)  ? 

1  have  one.  3d)  ^abe  ctn^  (etneS). 

I  have  none.  3c^  !?a&e 


jS.     Neither  the  indefinite  article  nor  feftt  is 
ever  accompanied  by 


And.  U  n  fc. 

DECLENSION    OF    AN    ADJECTIVE   PRECEDED   BY   THE    INDEFINITE 
ARTICLE     OR     A     POSSESSIVE     PRONOUN     IN     THE     SINGULAR. 

(See  Obs.  in  Lessons  III.  and  XIII.) 

Masculine.  Neuter. 

{N.  em     gitter,  em     gute& 
G.  eme$  gtttem  eme$  gutem 
D.  emem  guten.  emem  guten* 
A.  emeu  gutetu  ein 


Have  you  a  good  round  hat  ?  £a&cn  (Ste  cincn  gutcn  runtcn  £ut? 

I  have  one.  3cb  fa&c  ctncn. 

Has  he  a  beautiful  house  1  £at  cr  cm  fdjcne^ 

He  has  one.  ®t  ftat  ctn^  (ctncs). 

He  has  none.  (Sr  f)at  fctn^  (fctncO- 

I  have  two  of  them.  3d)    b«t>c   bcrcn  gweu    (See   Obs. 

Lesson  XVI.) 

He  has  three.  ©r  fyat  bcrcn  t>rct. 

You  have  four.  (Sic  fyabcn  bcrcn  mcr. 

Have  you  five  good  horses  ?  £aben  (Sic  funf  c;utc  3)fcrt>C  ? 

I  have  six.  3d)  ^abc  bcrcn  fccl)^. 
I  have  six  good  and  seven  bad  3d)     fabt    fcc^^    fiutc    vmfc    fiebcn 
ones.  fcr)(cd)tc. 


33 

RECAPITULATION  OF    THE   RULES  RELATIVE  TO  THE  DECLENSION 
OF  ADJECTIVES. 

We  have  shown  in  the  foregoing  lessons  that  in 
Herman  as  in  English,  the  adjective  always  precedes 
the  substantive.  When  two  or  more  adjectives  are 
before  the  same  noun,  they  all  follow  the  same  declen- 
sion. Adjectives  are  not  declined  when  they  are  jiot 
accompanied  by  a  substantive  expressed  or  understood, 
i.  e.,  when  they  form  the  predicate  of  a  proposition. 
J\br  £ut  ift  fcfycn,  your  hat  is  beautiful ;  mciit  93anb 
t|l  fd)CH,  my  ribbon  is  beautiful;  tyvc  £itte  jwt>  fd)6n, 
your  hats  are  beautiful. 

When  followed  by  a  substantive  expressed  or  under- 
stood, the  adjective  is  declined,  and  assumes  three  dif- 
ferent forms,  viz: 

1st,  Before  a  substantive  without  an  article  pre- 
ceding, it  takes  the  same  termination  as  the  definite 
article,  except  in  the  genitive  case  singular  masculine 
and  neuter,  in  which  it  adds  e  tt  instead  of  e  3. 

2d,  When  it  follows  the  definite  article,  or  a  word 
of  the  same  termination,  it  adds  en  in  all  cases,  except 
in  the  nominative  singular  of  all  genders,  and  the  ac- 
cusative singular  feminine  and  neuter,  in  which  it 
adds  e* 

3d,  When  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article,  or  a 
possessive  or  personal  pronoun,  it  adds  c  t  in  the  nomi- 
nalive  masculine,  e  in  the  nominative  and  accusative 
feminine,  eg  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  neuter, 
and  e  it  in  the  other  cases. 

All  participles  partake  of  the  nature  of  adjectives, 
and  are  subject  to  the  same  laws. 

2* 


34 

A  TABLE 

OF  THE  DECLENSION  OF  GERMAN  ADJECTIVES. 


I.    The  adjective 
without  an  article  before 

|     II.    The  adjective 
preceded  by  the  defi- 

III.     The    adjective 
preceded    by  the  indefi- 

a substantive. 

nite  article. 

nite  artic 

e. 

Jlfasc. 

Fern. 

JYeut. 

Jfasc. 

Fcni. 

JVeut. 

Jtfasc. 

Fern. 

Jfeut. 

NOM.  er 

e 

e3 

e 

e 

e 

er 

e 

e£ 

bS 

J 

GEN.  en 

er 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

D  - 

jiE 

DAT.  em 

er 

em 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

OQ 

LAcc.  en 

e 

e£ 

en 

e 

e 

en 

e 

e$ 

fNoM.  e 

en 

J 

GEN.  er 

For  all 

en 

For  all 

to  * 

DAT.  en 

genders. 

en 

genders. 

PH 

Ace.  e 

en 

Obs.  A.  The  adjective  is  declined  in  the  same 
manner  when  taken  substantively. 

B.  Adjectives  preceded  by  the  words :    atle,  all ; 
etnige,  etlirfje,  some,  sundry ;  genttjfe,  certain  ;  feme,  none  ; 
mandje,  several ;  mefyrere,  many,  several ;  folcfye,  such ; 
fcerfcfyiebene,  various ;  Diefe,  many ;  n>efd)er  which ;  tt>entge, 
few,  lose  the  letter  n  in  the  nominative  and  accusa- 
tive plural ;  but  they  keep  that  termination  when  pre- 
ceded by  a  possessive  or  personal   pronoun   in   the 
plural. a 

C.  Adjectives  ending  in  e  (,  e  n,  e  r,  for  the  sake  of 
euphony  often  reject  the  letter  e  which  precedes  those 
three  consonants.     Ex.  instead  of  efcefer,  golbener,  tfyenc* 
rer,  we  say :  ebfer,  golfcner,  tfyenrer* 

EXERCISE.       20. 

Have  you  a  good  servant  1 — I  have  one. — Has  your  hatmaker  a 
beautiful  house  1 — He  has  two  of  them. — Have  I  a  pretty  gold  rib- 
bon 1 — You  have  one. — What  has  the  joiner'? — He  has  beautiful 

a  Most  modern  authors  frequently  reject  this  distinction,  and  form  all  the 
cases  of  the  plural  in  ett. 


35 

tables. — Has  he  a  beautiful  round  (runt))  table  1 — He  has  one. — 
Has  the  baker  a  large  looking-glass  ? — He  has  one. — Has  the 
Scotchman  the  friends  that  I  have  1 — He  has  not  the  same  that  you 
have,  but  he  has  good  friends. — Has  he  your  good  books  1 — He  has 
them. — Have  I  their  good  hammers  1 — You  have  them  not,  but  you 
have  your  good  iron  nails. — Has  that  hatter  my  good  hat  ] — He  has 
m»t  yours,  but  his  own. — Have  I  my  good  shoes  "? — You  have  not 
yours;  you  have  his. — Who  has  mine? — Somebody  has  them. — 
any  body  two  letters  ] — Tlvc  brother  of  my  neighbour  has 
three. — Has  your  cook  two  sheep  (plur.  S?d)flfc)  7 — He  has  four. — 
-  he  six  good  chickens  1 — He  has  three  good  and  seven  bad. — 
Has  the  merchant  good  wine  1 — He  has  some. — Has  the  tailor  good 
coats  ] — He  has  none. — Has  the  baker  good  bread  1 — He  has  some. 
— What  has  the  carpenter  ? — He  has  good  nails. — What  has  your 
merchant  ! — He  has  good  pencils,  good  coffee,  good  honey,  and 
good  biscuits  (plur.  Snne&ncfc). — Who  has  good  iron] — My  good 
friend  has  some. — Am  I  right  or  wrong  ? — You  are  wrong. — Is  any 
body  sleepy  1 — The  shoemaker  is  sleepy  and  thirsty. — Is  he  tired  ? 
— He  is  not  tired. — Has  your  servant  the  glasses  of  our  (iwfcrer, 
see  the  next  Lesson)  friends  ? — He  has  not  those  of  your  friends, 
but  those  of  his  great  merchants. — Has  he  my  wooden  chair  ? — He 
has  not  yours,  but  that  of  his  boy. — Are  you  thirsty  1 — I  am  not 
thirsty,  but  very  hungry  (gtopcn  £ungcr). 




NINETEENTH  LESSON.— tf*un}el)nte  Section. 

How  much*     How  many  ?  2BtCt)ic(]a 

How  many  hats  1  95Mcwc(  £itfc  1 

How  many  knives  ]  SBtctricl  $)icf]cr  T 

How  much  bread  ?  SQ&tc&tct  23ret>  ? 

Only,  but.  01  u  r. 

How  many  tables  have  you  !  SQ&tcwcl  3>tfrf)C  fja&en  <£ie  ? 

I  have  only  two.  3d)  baOc  tcrcn  nut  *roct.     (See 

Obs.  Lesson  XVI.) 

How  many  knives  have  you  1  3&tcmc(  SBJcflet  f)aOcn  (Sic  ? 

I  have  but  one  good  one.  3d)  ftaOc  mir  cm  cuitc?. 

Eight,  acfet ; 

nine,  ncun ; 

ten,  $c()n. 

*  Cardinal    numbers    are   used  to   answer  the    question    hneuiel;  how 
many? 


36 


What  (designating  the  na- 
ture or  kind  of  a  thing)  ? 


What  table  have  you  1 
1  have  a  wooden  table.1" 
What  tables  has  he  ? 
He  has  stone  tables. 
What  book  has  your  friend  1 
He  has  a  pretty  book. 
What  paper  have  you  I 
I  have  some  fine  paper. 
What  sugar  has  he  ? 
He  has  some  good  sugar. 


Masc.  Neut. 

N.  n>ag  fiir  em.    n>a3  fair  em. 
A,  n>a3  fiir  etnen*  tt>a3  fiir  eitn 

Plural  for  all  genders. 

fiir. 


gteunfc  7 


Our. 


Our  (plural). 


i  fiic  ctnen  Stfcf) 
3d)  feafcc  ctnen  f)6'($ernen 
5Sas  fur  StfofK  feat  cr  ? 
(Sc  feat  fK'inccne  Stfcbe. 

i  fiir  cm  .^8iid)  f)ot  2 

hat  cm  bfit'fcbc^  Slid 

i  fftc c  papier  baOcn 
3d)  babe  fd)6'nc6  papier. 
SOSa^  fiic  Sucfec  feat  ec  1 
(£c  feat  Quten  Sudfer. 

Masc.  Neut. 

(  NOM.  itnfer*  imfen 

J  GEN.  nnfere&  imfere^* 

]  DAT.  uujerem*  imferem* 

[  Ace.  unferen*  imfer* 

Plural  for  all  genders. 

(     N.         G.  D.        A. 

<tinfcrc,  wnfcrer,  itnfcrett,   »m# 


Ours  (singular  and  plural).  2)cr  (tas)  unfcricjc  ;  Me  unfcttgcn. 

Obs.  When  a  consonant,  f,  m,n  or  r,  stands  between 
two  e's,  one  of  them  is  omitted  to  avoid  too  soft  a  pronun- 
ciation (see  Lesson  XXL,  Obs.  C.),  except  when  this 
letter  is  necessary  to  the  termination  of  the  word  or 
the  indication  of  the  case.  Thus  we  frequently  say, 
unfertf,  imferm,  imfre,  Grureg/1  Surcm,  Sure,  &c.,  instead  of 
imfcrc^,  unfercm,  imfere,  SuereS,  Sucrem,  @uere,  &c. 

EXERCISES.      21. 

How  many  friends  have  you  ?  —  I  have  two  good  friends.  —  Have 
you  eight  good  trunks  ?  —  I  have  nine.  —  Has  your  friend  ten  good 

b  The  pupils  will  take  care  not  to  answer  here  with  the  definite  article. 

c  The  indefinite  article  is  never  placed  before  collective  words,  such  as  : 
Javier,  paper  ;  ^Iktit,  wine  ;  3u^er'  sugar,  &c. 

d  Ohier,  your,  is  in  fact  the  second  person  of  the  possessive  pronoun.  31jr  is 
the  third  person,  used  generally  out  of  politeness,  and  for  that  reason  written 
with  a  capital  letter.  (See  Lessons  II.  and  XV.) 


37 

brooms  ? — He  has  only  three. — Has  he  two  good  ships  ? — He  has 
only  one. — How  many  hammers  has  the  carpenter  1 — He  has  only 
four. — How  many  shoes  has  the  shoemaker  1 — He  has  ten. — Has 
the  young  man  ten  good  books  1 — He  has  only  five. — Has  the 
painter  seven  good  umbrellas  ? — He  has  not  seven,  but  one. — How 
many  corks  (^rcpfcn  does  not  soften  in  the  plur.)  have  I  ? — You 
have  only  three. — Has  your  neighbour  our  good  bread  ? — He  has 
not  ours,  but  that  of  his  brother. — Has  our  horse  any  hay  ? — It  ((£•*) 
has  some. — Has  the  friend  of  our  tailor  good  buttons  ? — He  has 
some. — Has  he  gold  buttons  ? — He  has  no  gold  (buttons),  but  sil- 
ver (ones). — How  many  oxen  has  our  brother  ? — He  has  no  oxen. 
• — How  many  coats  has  the  young  man  of  our  neighbours  (plur. 
9?acblHirn)  ? — The  young  man  of  our  neighbours  has  only  one  good 
coat,  but  that  of  your  friends  has  three  of  them. — Has  he  our  good 
' — He  has  them. — Have  I  his  1 — You  have  not  his,  but  ours. 
— How  many  good  rams  have  1 1 — You  have  nine. 

22. 

Who  has  our  silver  candlesticks  ? — Our  merchant's  boy  has 
tin  in. — Has  he  our  large  birds'? — He  has  not  ours,  but  those  of  the 
great  Irishman. — Has  the  Italian  great  eyes  (t>a$  2(ugc  takes  n  in 
th<>  plur.  and  is  not  softened)  ? — He  has  great  eyes  and  great  feet. 
— Who  has  great  thread  stockings'? — The  Spaniard  has  some.— 
Has  he  any  cheese  1 — He  has  none. — Has  he  corn ? — He  has  some. 
— What  kind  of  corn  has  he  1 — He  has  good  corn. — What  kind  of 
rice  has  our  cook  ? — He  has  good  rice. — WThat  kind  of  pencils  has 
our  merchant  ? — He  has  good  pencils. — Has  our  baker  good  bread  1 
— He  has  good  bread  and  good  wine. 

23. 

Who  is  thirsty  ? — Nobody  is  thirsty ;  but  the  friend  of  our 
neighbour  is  sleepy. — Who  has  our  iron  knives  ? — The  Scotch- 
man has  them. — Has  he  them  ? — He  has  them. — WThat  kind  of 
friends  have  you  ? — I  have  good  friends. — Is  the  friend  of  our 
Englishmen  right  1 — He  is  neither  right  nor  wrong. — Has  he  good 
little  birds,  and  good  little  sheep  (plur.  Sobnfc)  ?— He  has  neither 
birds  nor  sheep. — What  has  the  Italian? — He  has  nothing. — Has 
our  tailor's  boy  anything  beautiful  ? — He  has  nothing  beautiful,  but 
something  ugly. — What  has  he  ugly? — He  has  an  ugly  dog. — 
Has  he  an  ugly  horse  ? — He  has  no  horse. — What  has  our  young 
friend  ? — He  has  nothing. — Has  he  a  good  book  ? — He  has  one. — 
Has  he  good  salt  ? — He  has  none. 


TWENTIETH  LESSON.— guwnfofite  Cection. 

Much,  many,  a  good  deal  of.         83  t  c  t . 

Much  wine.  83 id  SQBetn. 

Much  money.  83 id  ©dt>. 


38 

Obs.  A.  When  tttel  is  preceded  by  an  article,  pro- 
noun, or  preposition,  or  when  it  stands  alone  and  is 
used  substantively,  it  is  declined  like  an  adjective  ; 
otherwise  it  is  indeclinable. 

Have  you  much  good  wine  ]         £a(>cn  <Stc  flirt  gutcn  SBcin  ? 

I  have  a  good  deal.  3d)    fyflfcc   fceffcn    rric(.     (See    Ota. 

Lesson  XVI. 

Have  you  much  money  ?  £obcn  ©tc  met  ®elfc  ? 

1  have  a  good  deal.  3d)  (jabc  t>c|]en  wcL 

Too  mwcA.  3  u    otcl. 

You  have  too  much  wine.  (Sic  IjciOcn  $u  wet  SDSctn. 

We.  80S  i  r. 

We  have.  S5Mt  bafccn. 

We  have  not.  SStr  ^aOcn  mcfet. 

We  have  little  or  not  much  money.  S05tr  FjuOcn  nid)t  t»tct  (5>c(t>. 

Enough.  <&  c  n  u  g. 

Enough  money.  (SJclt)  c;cnucj. 

Knives  enough.  S^effci;  gcnug. 

Obs.  B.     ©eiuig  is  never  put  before  the  substantive, 

Little. 


C.  Our  remark  on  fciel  applies  equally  to  tt>emg. 
But  these  two  words  are  declined,  when  they  relate  to 
several  distinct  things,  or  anything  that  may  be  coun- 
ted, as  will  be  seen  hereafter. 

But  little,  only  a  little  (not  much).  9£  u  r   w  c  n  i  9  (ntd)t  met). 

Have  you  enough  wine  1  $obcn  <Ste  SScin  cjcnucj  ? 

I  have  only  a  little,  but  enough.   3d)  fa&e  fccfjen  nur  n?cnig,  at^cr  QC^ 

nug.    (See  Ota.  Lesson  XVI.) 

A  little.  Sin  it>  c  n  i  g. 

A  little  wine.  ©in  rucmg  ££ctn. 

A  little  salt.  ©in  rocntg  ©0(3. 

Courage.  t)  c  r  9)j  u  t  &. 

You  have  but  little  courage.         (Sic  fja&en  ntd^t  tJtct  SDlutlj. 
We  have  few  friends.  SOStr  fjoOcn  wcntg 


O/*  them  (relative  to  persons).  3  ft  t  c  r  (gen.  of  the  personal  pro- 

noun fie,  they;  see  Ota.   Les- 
son XVI.) 


39 

Have  you  many  friends  ]  .oalvn  (Sic  Diet  Jreuufc*? 

We  have  but  few.  &Mr  baben  tbrcr  nuu  nxnicje  (See 

Obs.  C.  above). 

You  have  but  little  money.  2;.  habcn  nicbt  met  ®c(b. 

Has  the  foreigner  much  money  ]  £at  tvr  Jremfce  Diet  ®ctt>  ? 
He  has  but  little.  C£T  hat  fceffen  nut  rventcj. 

EXERCISES.     21. 

Have  you  much  coffee] — I  have  only  a  little. — Has  your  friend 
much  watt-r  ? — He  has  a  great  deal. — Has  the  foreigner  much 
corn  1 — He  has  not  much. — What  has  the  American  1 — He  has 
much  su-jr-ar. — What  has  the  Russian? — He  has  much  salt. — Have 
ire  much  rice"? — We  have  but  little. — What  have  we] — We  have 
much  wine,  much  water  and  many  friends. — Have  we  much  gold] 
— \\'u  iiave  only  a  little,  but  enough. — Have  you  many  boys] — 
\\ 'f  have  only  a  few. — Has  our  neighbour  much  hay  ] — He  has 
<  Mouoli. — Has  the  Dutchman  much  cheese] — He  has  a  great  deal. 
— Has  this  man  courage] — He  has  none. — Has  that  foreigner 
money  ] — 1  lr  lias  not  a  great  deal,  but  enough. — Has  the  painter's 
boy  candles  (plur.  2id)tc)  ] — He  has  some. 

25. 

Have  we  good  letters] — WTe  have  some. — We  have  none. — 
l  the  joiner  good  bread] — He  has  some. — He  has  none. — Has 
he  good  honey  ] — He  has  none. — Has  the  Englishman  a  good 
h  Mi-.su  ] — He  has  one. — What  have  we  ] — We  have  good  horses. — 
Who  has  a  beautiful  house  ] — The  German  has  one. — Has  the  Ita- 
lian many  pretty  looking-glasses] — He  has  a  great  many;  but  he 
has  only  a  little  corn. — Has  my  good  neighbour  the  same  horse 
which  you  have] — He  has  not  the  same  horse,  but  the  same  car- 
riage.—  Has  the  Turk  the  same  ships  that  we  have  ] — He  has  not 
the  same,  he  has  those  of  the  Russians. 

26. 

How  many  servants  have  we  ] — We  have  only  one,  but  our  bro- 
thers have  three  of  them. — What  knives  have  you  ] — We  have 
iron  knives. — What  bag  has  the  peasant  ] — He  has  a  thread  bag. 
— Has  the  young  man  our  long  (grojj)  letters] — He  has  them  not. 
— Who  has  our  pretty  notes  ] — The  father  (t>cc  Stater)  of  the  sailor 
has  them. — Has  the  carpenter  his  nails  ] — The  carpenter  has  his 
iron  nails,  and  the  hatmaker  his  paper  hats. — Has  the  painter  beau- 
tiful gardens  ] — He  has  some,  but  his  brother  has  none. — Have  you 
many  glasses  ] — Wre  have  only  a  few. — Have  you  enough  wine  ] 
— We  have  enough  of  it. — Has  anybody  my  brooms  ] — Nobody 
has  them. — Has  the  friend  of  your  hatmaker  our  combs  or  yours  ] 
— He  has  neither  yours  nor  ours;  he  has  his. — Has  your  boy  my 
note  or  yours  ] — He  has  that  of  his  brother. — Have  you  my  stick  ] 
— I  have  not  yours,  but  that  of  the  merchant. — Have  you  my 
gloves  (plur.  Jpant>fd)ub0  • — I  nave  not  yours?  but  those  of  my 
good  neighbour. 


40 


TWENTY-FIRST  LESSON.— ©in  unb   }ttmn?igst* 
Cation. 


The  pepper, 
the  meat, 
the  vinegar, 
the  beer, 


A  few  books. 


The  other. 


The  others. 


Another, 
another  horse, 
other  horses, 

Have  you  another  horse  ? 
I  have  another. 

No  other. 


bcr  spfcffcr  ; 
bas  g  let  fd)  ; 


A  few. 

Have  you  a  few  books  1 

I  have  a  few. 

He  has  a  few. 

I  have  only  a  few  knives. 

You  have  only  a  few. 

The  florin, 

the  kreutzer  (a  coin), 
Other. 


bas 

fN.  etntge  (etlicfye)  SBitdjer* 

1  G.  euriger  (etltcfyer)  SSnrfjer. 

i  D.  etntgen  (ctltdjcn)  SMirfjcnu 

[A.  etntge  (etlidje)  S3itd)er» 

6  i  n  i  cj  c,  e  t  ( t  d)  c. 

t  (Sic  ctntijc  93ttd)cr  ? 
ibc  cini^c. 
t  ctttd)C. 

v.ibc  nur  eintgc  SCWcflcr. 
(&tc  (jabcn  nur  ctntgc. 

bcc  diutbcn  (is  not  softened  in  the 
plur.) ; 


tfnbct  (is  declined  like  an  ad- 
jective). 

Singular. 
Masc.  Neut. 

N.  bet  anbere.  ba^  anbere. 

G.  be^  anbern.  be3  anbenu 

D.  bem  anbcnu  bent  anbem, 

[  A.  ben  anbern*  ba^  anbere. 

Plural  for  all  genders. 

N.  bte  anbenu    D.  ben  anbenu 

G.  ber  anbenu   A.  bte  anbern, 

(See  Obs.  Lesson  XIX.) 

ctn  ?Cnbcrcr  ; 

ctu 

anber 


<Stc  ctn  cmbcvcS 
Sd)  I)a0c  cin  anbcrce. 

Masc.  Ictncn  anbern* 
Neut.   fetit  anbere^* 


41 


nnbete  (See  Lesson    XVIII. 
Obs,  B. 

3d)  f)aOe  fein  nnfretcS  $fetfr. 
3d)  f)flOc  fetn  anfrete*. 
£a6en  ©ic  nnfretc  $)fert>e  1 
3d)  fyabe  anfrete. 
3d)  babe  tone  anfrere. 

fra$  .oeinfr  (plur.  en)  ; 
frag  Sn'tn  (plur.  e)  ; 
fret  Jlcpf ; 

frer  2{tm  (is  not  softened  in  the 
plur.); 


No  others. 

I  have  no  other  horse. 
I  have  no  other. 
Have  you  other  horses  ] 
I  have  some  others. 
I  have  no  others. 

The  shirt, 
the  leg, 
the  head, 
the  arm, 

the  heart, 

the  month,  tct  fiXOBOl  (is  not  softened  in  the 

plur.)  ; 

the  work,  fra*  2£erf  (plur.  e)  ; 

the  volume,  fret  i^anfr  ; 

the  crown  (money),        fret  SMct  (is  not  softened  in  the 

plur.). 

What  day  of  the  month  ?       fr  C  t  (t)a£)  rot  c  &  t  c  I  ft  e  ? 

Obs.  Ordinal  numbets  are  used  in  replying  to  the 
question  ber  or  bag  ttriemel fte  ?  what  day  of  the  month  ? 
These  numbers  are  declined  like  adjectives.  They  are 
formed  of  the  cardinal  numbers  by  adding  t  as  far  as 
twenty,  and  fl  from  twenty  to  the  last,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  erfi,  iirst,  and  britt,  third,  which  are  irregular. 
Ex. 


The  first,  tcr 

the  second,  t)Ct 

the  third,  fcct 

the  fourth,  fcct 

the  fifth,  fret 

the  sixth,  fret 

the  seventh,  fret 

the  eighth,  fret 

the  ninth,  fret 

the  tenth,  fret 

the  eleventh,  fret 

the  twentieth,  fret 

the  twenty-first,  &c.  fret 


or  fra$  ctfte ; 


frtitte  ; 
tnevte  ; 
fiinfte  ; 


fieOente  ; 
ad)te  ; 
neuntc  ; 
gcljntc  ; 

dfte  ; 


cm  unt)  jvvansicjjie, 


8  Ta§  -6cr^  the  heart,  takes  c n  9  in  the  genitive  and  en  in  the  dative  case 
singular  ;  in  the  plural  it  takes  e  n  in  all  the  cases. 

b  Henceforth  the  k-amers  should  write  the  date  before  their  task.  Ex.  Son- 
ben,  ten  erftcn  s!)?at,  em  taufeub  cic^t  fjunfert  unb  arf)t  utib  bvet^tg,  London,  1st 
May,  1838. 


42 

Have  you  the  first   or    second  £aOcn  ©ic  ba$  erftc  ober  bag 

book?  23ud>? 

1  have  the  third.  3d)  ()abc  bag  btittc. 

Which  volume  have  you  ?  S^c(d)cn  S3anb  faben  (Sic  ? 

I  have  the  fifth.  Set)  fya&c  ben  fttnften. 

EXERCISES.       27. 

Have  you  a  few  knives  1 — I  have  a  few. — Have  you  many 
rams  ? — I  have  only  a  few. — Has  the  friend  of  the  great  painter 
many  looking-glasses  ? — He  has  only  a  few. — Have  you  a  few 
florins  ? — 1  have  a  few. — How  many  florins  have  you  ? — I  have 
ten. — How  many  kreutzers  has  your  servant  ? — He  has  not  many, 
he  has  only  two. — Have  the  men  the  beautiful  glasses  of  the  Ita- 
lians 1 — The  men  have  them  not,  but  we  have  them. — What  have 
we  ? — We  have  much  money. — Have  you  the  carriage  of  the 
Dutchman  or  that  of  the  German? — 1  have  neither  the  one  nor  the 
other. — Has  the  peasant's  boy  the  fine  or  the  ugly  letter  1 — He  has 
neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — Has  he  the  gloves  of  the  merchant 
or  those  of  his  brother? — He  has  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — 
Which  gloves  has  he  ? — He  has  his  own. — Have  we  the  horses  of 
the  English  or  those  of  the  Germans? — We  have  neither  the  one 
nor  the  other. — Have  we  the  umbrellas  of  the  Spaniards  ? — We 
have  them  not ;  the  Americans  have  them. — Have  you  much  pep- 
per ? — I  have  only  a  little,  but  enough. — Have  you  much  vinegar  ? 
— I  have  only  a  little. — Have  the  Russians  much  meat? — The 
Russians  have  a  great  deal,  but  the  Turks  have  only  a  little. — 
Have  you  no  other  pepper  ? — I  have  no  other. — Have  I  no  other 
beer  ? — You  have  no  other. — Have  we  no  other  good  friends  ? — 
We  have  no  others. — Has  the  sailor  many  shirts  ? — He  has  not 
many  ;  he  has  only  two. — Have  you  a  wooden  leg  ? — I  have  not  a 
(few)  wooden  leg,  but  a  good  heart. — Has  this  man  a  good  head  ? 
— He  has  a  good  head  and  a  good  heart. — How  many  arms  has  that 
boy? — He  has  only  one;  the  other  is  of  wood  (ocn  £olj). — What 
kind  of  head  has  your  boy  ? — He  has  a  good  head. 

28. 

Which  volume  have  you  ? — I  have  the  first. — Have  you  the  se- 
cond volume  of  my  work? — I  have  it. — Have  you  the  third  or  the 
fourth  book  ? — I  have  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — Have  we  the 
fifth  or  sixth  volume  ? — We  have  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — 
Which  volumes  have  we? — We  have  the  seventh. — What  day 
(£)en  nriciricfjtcn)  of  the  month  is  it  (fjafrcn  rotr)  ? — It  is  (SBtt  bafcen) 
the  eighth. — Is  it  not  (£aben  nut  ntcht)  the  eleventh  ? — No,  Sir,  it  is 
the  tenth. — Have  the  Spaniards  many  crowns  ? — The  Spaniards 
have  only  a  few  ;  but  the  English  have  a  great  many. — Who  has 
our  crowns  ? — The  French  have  them. — Has  the  youth  much  head  ? 
— He  has  not  much  head,  but  much  courage. — How  many  arms 
has  the  man  ? — He  has  two. 


43 

29. 

Have  you  the  crowns  of  the  French  or  those  of  the  English  1 — 
I  have  neither  those  of  the  French  nor  those  of  the  English,  but 
those  of  the  Americans. — Has  the  lierman  a  few  kreutzers  1 — He 
has  a  few. — Has  he  a  few  florins  ? — He  has  six  of  them. — Have  you 
another  stick] — I  have  another. — "What  other  stick  have  you"? — 
another  iron  stick. — Have  you  a  few  gold  candlesticks! — 
\V.  have  a  to\v. —  Have  these  mm  vim-jr,ir  ! — These  men  have 
none,  but  their  i'ru-nds  have  some. — Have  our  boys  candles  1 — 
Our  boys  have  none,  but  the  friends  of  our  boys  have  some. — Have 
you  some  other  bags  1 — I  have  no  others. — Have  you  any  other 
cheeses  ! — I  have  some  others. — Have  you  other  meat  1 — I  have 
no  other.  (See  note  f,  Lesson  II. )c 


TUEXTY-SECOND  LESSON.  —  Zmi  nnb  }*mn}igste 
Section. 

The  tome  (volume),          K't  Sfyctt. 

Have  you  the  first  or  third  tome  .paOcn  <Sic  fccn  crftcn  ct>cc  trittcn 
of  my  work  ?  Sfjctl  mctnc6  2Bcrf$  1 

Both.  23  e  i  t>  c  (is  declined  like  an  ad- 

jective). 

I  have  both.  3d)  fyoOc  Oette. 

Obs.  The  singular  of  6  e  i  b  e  is  used  only  in  the  no- 
miimtive  and  accusative  neuter.  The  olural  beifce  is 
employed  \\hrn  two  substantives  excess  the  same 
thin::,  and  the  singular  neuter  betbe$,  when  they  ex- 
pivss  two  different  things:  as, 

Have  you  my  book  or  my  stick  1  £aOcn  (Sic  mem  2}ud)  ot>ct  metncn 

etccf? 

I  have  both.  3d)  tyaOc  bctfccS. 


yet,  some  or  any  more.  02  0  d). 

Some  more  wine.  97ccr)  SSctn. 

Some  more  money.  Stfod)  ®db. 

Some  more  buttons.  97erf)  Jlntfpfc. 

Have  you  any  more  wine  ?  £akn  (Sic  nod)  S03cin  ? 


W«-  h:m-  liiih'-ri.)  iMi'-nti<mally.niul  in  perfect  harmony  with  this  system, 
rtined  i'n»m  speaking  of  femini 
after.     (See  Leseon  LXXVI1I.) 


.  , 

tofirtined  i'n»m  speaking  of  feminine  nouns.     They  will  be  touched  upon  here- 
XX 


44 


I  have  some  more. 
Has  he  any  more  bread  7 
He  has  some  more. 
Have  I  any  more  books? 
You  have  some  more. 

Not  any  more,  no  more* 

I  have  no  more  wine. 

Have  you  any  more  vinegar  7 

I  have  no  more. 

Has  he  any  more  bread  7 

He  has  no  more. 

I  have  no  more  dogs. 

I  have  no  more. 

Not  much  more. 

Have  you  much  more  wine  7 
I  have  not  much  more. 
Have  you  many  more  books  7 
I  have  not  many  more. 

One  more  book. 

One  more  good  book. 

A  few  books  more. 
Have  we  a  few  hats  more  7 
We  have  a  few  more. 
Has  he  a  few  good  knives  more  1 

He  has  a  few  more. 


3d)  f)abc  nod)  roctd)cn. 
£at  cr  nod)  SBrot)  ? 
C£r  f)at  nod)  ruc(cf)e£. 
£abe  id)  nod)  &ttd)cr  ? 
8ic  tyabcn  nod)  nn'td)e. 

jt  c  t  n  —  m  c  ^  r . 

3d)  fyabc  fcincn  £Sein  mefjr. 

£abcn  (Sic  nod)  C£fjig  ? 

3d)  t)nbc  fcincu  mcfyr. 

£at  cr  nod)  iBrot)  7 

(£r  (jat  fcinS  mefyr. 

3d)  Ijabc  fcine  ^>unt>c  mcfjr. 

3d)  ()abe  Ccinc  mc(;r. 

97  t  cr;  t  » t  c  t  m  c  f)  r . 

Sic  nod)  met  2£ctn  7 


3d)  fjabc  tcjjcn  nid)t  r?tct  mc(jr. 
^abcn  ©ic  nod)  met  JBudjcr  ? 
3d)  ^abc  fccrcn  ntd)t  »tel  meljr. 

97od)  cin  S5ud). 

9?ocr)  cin  chutes  JSudft. 

97od)  ctnige  93ud)cr. 

^)dbcn  ruir  nod)  ^cinige  .J>utc  ? 

SSir  fjabcn  nod)Vinicjc. 

»g)at  cr  nod)  ciniqc  gutc^cfTcr?  7  (See 

Lesson  XVIII.  Obs.  B.) 
(5r   ()at    nod)    etntge.     (See    OZ»5. 

Lesson  XVI.)   " 


EXERCISES.       30. 

Which  volume  of  his  work  have  you  ? —  I  have  the  second. — 
How  many  tomes  has  this  work  1 — It  has  three. — Have  you  my 
work,  or  that  of  my  brother  7 — 1  have  both  (bcitc). — Has  the  for- 
eigner my  comb  or  my  knife  7 — He  has  both  (K'ifcC6). — Have  you 
our  bread  or  our  cheese  7 — I  have  both. — Have  you  my  glass  or 
that  of  my  friend  7 — I  have  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — Have 
we  anymore  hay  7 — We  have  some  more. — Has  our  merchant  any 
more  pepper  7 — He  has  some  more. — Has  he  any  more  candles  7 — 
He  has  some  more. — Have  you  any  more  coffee  7 — We  have  no 
more  coffee ;  but  we  have  some  more  vinegar. — Has  the  German 
any  more  water  7 — He  has  no  more  water ;  but  he  has  some  more 
meat. — Have  we  any  more  gold  ribbons  7 — We  have  no  more  gold 
(Lesson  XVIII.  Obs.  D.)  ribbons  ;  but  we  have  some  more  silver 
(ribbons). — Has  our  friend  any  more  sugar? — He  has  no  more. — 
Have  I  any  more  beer  ? — You  have  no  more. — Has  your  young 
man  any  more  friends  7 — He  has  no  more. 


45 


31. 

Has  your  brother  one  more  horse  1 — lie  1ms  one  more. — Have 
you  one  more  ] — I  have  one  more. — I  las  the  peasant  one  more  ox  '? 
— He  has  one  more. — Have  you  a  few  more  "-.miens  1 — We  have 
a  few  more. — What  have  you  more] — We  have  a  few  (rood  ships 
(plur.  (Scfytffc)  and  a  few  good  sailors  more. — Has  our  brother  a  few 
more  friends  ] — He  has  a  few  more. — Have  I  a  little  more  money  1 
— You  have  a  little  more. — Have  you  any  more  courage  ] — I  have 
no  more. —  Have  you  much  more  money] — I  have  much  more,  hut 
my  brother  has  no  more. — Has  he  enough  salt  ? — He  has  not 
enough. — Have  we  buttons  enough  ] — We  have  not  enough. — Has 
the  good  son  of  your  good  tailor  buttons  enough] — He  has  not 
enough. 


TWENTY-THIRD  LESSON.— Dm  nub 

Section. 


Seveni/. 


The  father, 
the  son, 
the  child, 
the  captain, 
the  tea, 
the  cake, 


33erfd)tebcnc  (is  tlrHinrd  like 
an  adjective,  and  hardly  ever 
used  in  the  singular.)  (See 
Lesson  XVIIL,  Obs.  B.) 


For  all  genders. 


N.  fcerfcfy'cbene.    D.  fcerfcfnebcncn. 
G.  fcerfctyefccttcr.  A. 


tor 
NT  < 
Nrt.fi 

NT  .ocwptmann  (plur.  £aupt(cutc)  ; 
NT  2f)cc ; 

fcet  .fiudxn  (is  not  softened  in  the 
plur.). 

2$crfcl)icbcnc  Winter. 


Several  children. 

As  much)   as  many. 

As  much — as,  as  many — as 

As  much  bread  as  wine. 
As  many  men  as  children. 

Have  you  as  much  gold  as  sil-  £afccn  Sic  fo  wet  ©olt> 
ver] 

Of. 


<S  o  p  t  c  I  —  n>  t  c. 

^o  met  JBrot  rate  SSctn. 
So  OK(  Banner  rate  Winter. 


©t(0ct  ? 


25  o  n  (preposition  governing  the 
dative). 


46 

I   have  as  much  of  this  as   of  %d)  f)a(<e  fc  incl  ren  fctcfcm  rule  ttcn 

that.  jcncm. 

Have  you  as  many  hats  as  coats  1  .frozen  (£tc  fc  met  .<Mitc  to?te  JHccfe  ? 
1  have  as  many  of  these  as  of  3d)  fyoOe  fc  tricl  rcn  fctcfcn  itnc  r»crT 

those.  jenen. 

As  many  of  the  one  as  of  the  (So  incl  t?cn  ten  ctncn  rcic  t>cn  ton 

other.  (intern. 

Obs.  A.     When  e  t  tt  is  used  as  an  indefinite  numer- 
al adjective,  it  is  declined  like  other  adjectives. 

Quite  (or  just)  as  much.       (S  0  c  n  f  o  o  t  c  (. 

I  have  quite  as  much  of  this  as  3d)  bate  cOen  fc  inct  sen  fctcfem  wic 
of  that.  pen  jcncnu 

The  enemy,  tec  J 

the  finger,  tvr  fi 

the  hoot,  tec 

Afore.  9E  c  ^  r  (comparative  adverb). 

More  bread.  9)?cl)r 

More  men,  932e()c 

77mn.  ?(  I  ^. 


7?.     91  1  d  answers  to  than  in  English,  as  tt)  t  e 
answers  to  <7>. 


More  broail  t!nn  win<-. 
More  in.'n  than  children.  9)^%I^r  SNcmiuT  civ  .vuntvr. 

More  of  this  i!r.m  of  that.  9}febr  t>cn  ttefv'tn  0(6  r»cn  joncm. 

More  of  the  one  than  Of  the  other.  9)icbr  vcn  torn  einon  als  .rcn  tcin 


More  of  those  than  of  those.  9)M)r  pen  Mofcn  ol{t  ?on 
I  have  more  of  your  sugar  than  3<-t  babe  nu'br  rcn  3l)vcm  Surfer 
of  mine.  vcn  tern  inctni^cn. 

Less.  8S  c  n  1  9  c  r  (comparative  of  wcnicj). 

Less  water  than  wine.  2Bcntc\cc  Staffer  a(»  85?ctn. 

Less  than  I.  SScntcjcr  al^  icf). 

—  than  he.  —      d$  cr. 

—  than  you.  —      d$  8ic. 

T//f  y.  (5  1  c*. 

TVwn  //icy.  Xl«  fie. 

As  much  as  you.  (^e  wel  wtc  Sic. 

As  much  as  he.  ^o  t»icl  ivtc  cr. 

As  much  as  they.  (So  wet  rote  fie. 

«  When  collective  or  plural  nouns,  as  :  SB  e  t  it,  wine  ;  03  r  0  b,  bread,  &c., 
are  to  he  rrpivsontoi]  by  the  pronouns,  fc  t  cfc  r  and  jcrtcr  must  be  used, 
and  not  cin  and  a  n  t*  e  r. 


47 

EXERCISES.    32. 

Have  you  a  coat  1 — 1  have  several. — Has  he  a  looking-glass  ? — 
He  has  several. — What  kind  of  looking-glasses  has  he  ? — He  has 
beautiful  looking- glasses. — \Vho  lias  my  good  cakes'? — Several 
men  have  them. — lias  your  brother  a  child  ? — He  has  (tfyrcr,  Les- 
son XVI.)  several. — Have  you  as  much  coftee  as  honey] — I  have 
as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Has  he  as  much  tea  as  beer  ? 
— He  has  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Has  this  man  as 
many  friends  as  enemies  ? — He  has  as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the 
other. — Has  the  son  of  your  friend  as  many  coats  as  shirts  ? — He 
has  as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Have  we  as  many  boots 
as  shoes  ? — We  have  as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. 

33. 

Has  your  father  as  much  gold  as  silver  ? — He  has  more  of  the 
latter  than  of  ihe  former. — Has  lie  as  much  tea  as  coffee  1 — He 
has  more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Has  the  captain  as  ma- 
jors as  ships  ? — He  has  more  of  the  one  than  of  the  other. — 
Have  you  as  many  rams  as  I  ? — I  have  just  as  many. — Has  the 
foreigner  as  much  courage  as  we  ? — He  has  quite  as  much. — Have 
we  as  much  good  as  bad  paper? — We  have  as  much  of  the  one  as 
of  the  other. — Have  we  as  much  cheese  as  bread  ? — We  have  more 
of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Has  your  son  as  many  cakes  as 
books  ? — He  has  more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former ;  more  of 
the  one  than  of  the  other. 

34. 

How  many  children  have  you  ? — I  have  only  one,  but  my  bro- 
ther has  more  than  I ;  he  has  five. — Has  your  son  as  much  head  as 
mine  ? — He  has  less  head  than  yours,  but  he  has  more  courage. — 
My  children  have  more  courage  than  yours. — Have  I  as  much 
money  as  you  ? — You  have  less  than  I. — Have  you  as  many  books 
as  1 ? — I  have  less  than  you. — Have  I  as  many  enemies  as  your 
father] — You  have  fewer  than  he. — Have  the  Americans  more 
children  than  we  ? — They  have  fewer  than  we. — Have  we  as  many 
ships  as  the  English  ? — We  have  less  than  they. — Have  we  fewer 
knives  than  the  children  of  our  friends  1— We  have  fewer  than 
they. 

35. 

Who  has  fewer  friends  than  we  1 — Nobody  has  fewer. — Have 
you  as  much  of  my  tea  as  of  yours"? — I  have  as  much  of  yours  as 
of  mine. — Have  I  as  many  of  your  books  as  of  mine1? — You  have 
fewer  of  mine  than  of  yours. — Has  the  Spaniard  as  much  of  your 
money  as  of  his  own  ? — He  has  less  of  his  own  than  of  ours. — 
Has  your  baker  less  bread  than  money? — He  has  less  of  the  latter 
than  of  the  former. — Has  our  merchant  fewer  dogs  than  horses  ? — 


48 

He  has  fewer  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former ;  he  has  fewer  of  the 
one  than  of  the  other. — He  has  fewer  horses  than  we,  and  we 
have  less  hread  than  he. — Have  our  neighbours  as  many  carriages 
as  we  ] — We  have  fewer  than  they. — We  have  less  corn  and  less 
meat  than  they. — We  have  but  little  corn,  but  meat  enough. 


TWENTY-FOURTH  LESSON.  —  t)i*r  unit 
Certion. 

OF    THE    INFINITIVE. 

All  German  verbs  form  their  infinitive  in  en.  This 
termination  in  verbs,  the  root  of  which  ends  in  e  i  or  e  r,a 
is  contracted  by  throwing  out  the  letter  e,  as  fytnbew, 
to  prevent  ;  fammeht,  to  collect,  &c.  The  verbs  marked 
with  an  asterisk  (*")  are  irregular. 

A  wish,  a  ndnd,  a  desire,       2  u  ft  ; 
time,     3  c  i  t  ;b 
to,         3  u  . 

Obs.  The  preposition  }  it/  20,  always  stands  before 
the  infinitive.  In  compound  verbs  it  is  placed  between 
the  separable  particle  and  the  infinitive,  as  will  be 
exemplified  in  future  lessons. 

To  work.  2CrOcitcn. 

To  speak.  ©  p  r  e  dj  c  n*,  r  e  b  c  n.c 

Have  you  a  mind  to  work  1  £afren  ©tc  Shift  gu  arOcttcn  ? 

I  have  a  mind  to  work.  Scl)  f)aOc  Suft  $u  arbdten. 

He  has  not  the  courage  to  speak.  <5r  fyat  ben  Sftutf)  ntct)t,  $u  fprcd)cn. 

To  cwjJ.  ©  d)  n  e  t  b  c  n*. 


To  cut  them,      fie  fcfynctbcn*. 

»  By  the  root  we  understand  that  part  of  a  verb  which  precedes  the  termi- 
nation c  n  of  the  infinitive  ;  e.  g.  in  the  verb  lobett,  to  praise,  I  0  b  is  the  root. 

b  The  two  substantives  £llft  and  Beit  are  feminine.  If  they  are  required 
in  a  negative  sense,  feme  £uft,  and  tucfyt  $tit  must  be  used.  Ex.  3d)  l)abe 
letue  Sufi  $u  fprerfjen,  I  have  no  mind  to  speak:  ev  I;at  nicf)t  %tit  gu  avbeiten, 
he  has  no  time  to  work. 

c  (S)?ved)en  is  derived  from  bie  (SV^itc^e,  the  language,  and  signifies  to  pro- 
duce or  emit  sounds  in  a  physical  manner  ;  vebett  means  to  express  ideas  by 
words,  from  bie  SRebe,  the  discourse. 


To  cut  some. 


Has  he  time  to  cut  trees  ? 
He  has  time  to  cut  some. 

To  buy. 
To  buy  some  more. 


fMasc.    roefdjen/  bejfen, 

bafcon 
Neut.    tt>elcf)e3,  beffett, 


To  buy  one. 

To  buy  two. 
To  buy  one  more. 

To  buy  two  more. 


•s  cciDon  j     # 

Plural  for  all  genders. 

tt>elrf)e,    beren,   batten    frfjnet* 
ben. 

&at  ec  Sett-  SBa'ume  ^ii  fcbncttcn  ? 
(£t  f;at  3eit  welcbc  511  fdjnetfcen. 

faufen. 
S7cd)  faufen. 
M«5c.    etnen 


>   fanfen. 


faufen. 


3roei  fail  fen. 
Masc.  ttocf)  etnen 
norf)  etn3 

'i  faufen. 

The  infinitive  is  always  placed  at  the  end  of 
the  phrase  whether  preceded  by  jn  or  not. 

Have  you  a  mind   to  buy  one  £abcn  ©ic  Cuft  nccr;  cin  ^fetfc  311 

more  horse  ?  fan  fen  ? 

I  have  a  mind  to  buy  one  more,    Scb  fjafce  £uft  ncct)  ein^  gu  fanfen. 
Have  you  a  mind  to  buy  some  £abcn  (£ie  Suft  S5iicf)er  jit  faufen  ? 

books  ? 
I  have  a  mind  to  buy  some,  but  Scf)   I)aOe   Cuft    wetcbe  gu   faufen/ 

I  have  no  time.  abet  icb  babe  nid)t  3eit. 

Has  he  time  to  work  ?  £at cc  3ctt  ^u  arbeiten? 

He  has  time,  but  no  mind   to  (5r  bat  3eitx  abet:  fctnc  Cuft  $U  ars 

work.  beiten. 

EXERCISES.    36. 

Have  you  still  a  mind  to  buy  the  house  of  my  friend  1 — I  have 
still  a  mind  to  buy  it,  but  I  have  no  more  money — Have  you  time 
to  work  1 — I  have  time,  but  no  mind  to  work. — Has  he  time  to  cut 
some  sticks  ? — He  has  time  to  cut  some. — Have  you  a  mind  to  cut 
some  bread  ] — 1  have  a  mind  to  cut  some,  but  I  have  no  knife. — 
Have  you  time  to  cut  some  cheese  ? — I  have  time  to  cut  some.— 
Has  he  a  desire  to  cut  the  tree  ] — He  has  a  desire  to  cut  it,  but  he 
has  no  time. — Has  he  time  to  cut  the  cloth  1 — He  has  time  to  cut  it. 
— Have  1  time  to  cut  the  trees  ] — You  have  time  to  cut  them. — 
Has  the  painter  a  mind  to  buy  a  horse  1— He  has  a  mind  to  buy 
two. — Has"  your  captain  of  the  navy  (Scbtff^papitan)  time  to  speak 
•—Jrle  has  time,  but  no  desire  to  spea 
3 


50 

37. 

Have  you  a  mind  to  bay  a  carriage  ] — I  have  a  mind  to  buy  one. 
— Have  I  a  mind  to  buy  a  house  ] — You  have  a  mind  to  buy  one. 
— Has  your  brother  a  mind  to  buy  a  great  ox  ] — He  has  a  mind  to 
buy  a  little  one. — We  have  a  mind  to  buy  little  oxen. — How  many 
horses  have  you  a  mind  to  buy  1 — I  have  a  mind  to  buy  four. — Has 
any  one  a  rnind  to  buy  a  broom  ?— This  man  has  a  mind  to  buy 
one. — What  has  that  man  a  mind  to  buy  ? — He  has  a  mind  to 
buy  a  beautiful  carriage,  three  beautiful  horses,  good  tea,  and  good 
meat. 

38. 

Have  yon  a  desire  to  speak  1 — I  have  a  desire,  but  no  time  to 
speak. — Have  you  the  courage  to  cut  your  arm  1 — I  have  not  the 
courage  to  cut  it. — Am  I  right  in  speaking  ($u  fprccfjcn)  ? — You  are 
not  wrong  in  speaking,  but  you  are  wrong  in  cutting  ($u  fcfynctK'n) 
my  trees. — Has  the  son  of  your  friend  a  desire  to  buy  one  more 
bird  ? — He  has  a  desire  to  buy  one  more  ? — Have  you  a  mind  to 
buy  one  more  beautiful  coat  1 — I  have  a  mind  to  buy  one  more. — 
Have  we  a  mind  to  buy  a  few  more  horses  1 — We  have  a  mind  to 
buy  a  few  more,  but  we  have  no  more  money.  (See  Lesson  XXII.) 

39. 

What  have  you  a  mind  to  buy  ? — :We  have  a  mind  to  buy  some- 
thing good,  and  our  neighbours  have  a  mind  to  buy  something  beau- 
tiful.— Have  their  children  a  desire  to  buy  any  birds  1 — Their 
children  have  no  desire  to  buy  any. — Have  you  the  courage  to  buy 
the  trunk  of  the  captain  1 — I  have  a  desire  to  buy  it,  but  I  have  no 
more  money. — Who  has  a  mind  to  buy  my  beautiful  dog  ? — Nobo- 
dy has  a  mind  to  buy  it. — Have  you  a  mind  to  buy  my  beautiful 
birds,  or  those  of  the  Frenchman] — I  have  a  mind  to  buy  those  of 
the  Frenchman. — Which  book  has  he  a  mind  to  buy  1 — He  has  a 
mind  to  buy  that  which  you  have,  that  which  your  son  has,  and 
that  which  mine  has — Have  you  two  horses  1 — I  have  only  one, 
but  I  have  a  wish  to  buy  one  more. 


TWENTY-FIFTH    LESSON.  —  JFtinf    tmb 

Section. 


OF    COMPOUND    VERBS. 


There  are  in  German  two  kinds  of  compound  verbs : 
one  kind  consists  of  a  simple  verb  and  a  particle 
which  is  inseparable  from  it ;  the  other  of  a  simple 
verb  and  a  particle  which  can  be  separated,  either  to 


51 

give  place  to  the  syllable  g  c  of  the  participle  past,  or 
to  $  U,  or  to  be  itself  placed  after  the  verb  or  even  at 
the  end  of  the  phrase.  We  shall  distinguish  the  separ- 
able verbs  by  placing  j  u  between  the  verb  and  the 
particle.1  Examples : 


To  break. 

To  keep  (to  take  care).  ?(uflvii>abtcn 

To  pick  up.  2(ufbcOcn*  f 

To  mend.  ?(usbetTcrn  (au$$ubcf[crn). 

To  make  a  fire.  5l'ucr  flnmad)cn  (an$umad)cn). 

Has  the  tailor  time  to  mend  my  £at  fccr  ScfwetK't  3cit  mctncn  9?ect 

He  has  time  to  mend  it.  (5r  fyat  3cit  ti;n  au$$uOc(jcrn.b 

To  wash.  2£afd)cn  *. 

To  burn,  <  iHerbrcnncn   (to  destroy  by  burn- 

(      in£)- 

To  seek,  to  look  for.       Suchon  (governs  the  accusative). 
To  warm.  Qiv'irmcn. 

To  make.  SHfld)cn  (physically). 

To  do.  Sfjun  *  (morallyd). 

Has  the  shoemaker  time  to  make  ^att^cr  Sd)iif)niad)CV  Sett  mctnc  ©tic* 

my  boots  1  fcl  $u  mad)cn  ? 

He  has  time  to  make  them.  (Sc  fyat  Sett  ftc  511  madjcn. 

To  be  willing  j  to  wish.       2B  c  t  ( e  n  *. 

Will  you  ?  ) 

Are  you  willing  ?  >  SKottcn  Sic  ? 

Do  you  wish  ]  J 
I  will,  I  am  willing;,  I  wish.         3d)  rwtt. 

Will  he  ?  is  he  willing?  does  >  „*.„      0 

he  wish.]  {«••«« 

•  These  verbs  may  likewise  be  distinguished  by  the  principal  accent,  which 
is  placed  on  the  root  of  the  verb  when  the  particle  is  inseparable,  and  when 
separable  on  tli»*  particle  itself. 

b  These  examples  show  how  the  separable  particle  gives  way  in  the  infini- 
tive to  \  u . 

c  The  verb  brcnncit  (as  well  as  its  compounds,  oerfcrennen,  &c.)  is  regu- 
lar when  used  in  an  active  or  transitive,  but  irregular  when  in  a  neuter  or  in- 
transitive sense.  We  denote  such  verbs  by  the  following  abbreviations  :  v. 
ac.  and  neut.  irreg. 

d  The  verb  in  a  d)  c  n  always  relates  to  a  determinate  action,  and  is  em- 
ployed nearly  as  the  English  verb  to  make,  in  the  sense  of  producing  anything ; 
the  verb  t  b  u  n  *  on  the  contrary  always,  like  the  English  verb  to  do,  relates  to 
an  indeterminate  action,  as  :  (vin  Jllctb  mad;cn,  to  make  a  coat;  'Aencr  ma* 
cfceu,  to  make  a  fire;  eincn  QJefaUen  ttyun,  to  do  a  favour;  feme  fK 
ttjun,  to  do  one's  duty. 


52 


He  will,  he  is  willing,  he  wish-  )  ~  •  ^ 

es.  J 

We  will,  we  are  willing,  we  5  ^  u 

wish.  3 


They  will,  they  are  willing,    7@ 
they  wish.  _$ 

Ofo.  A.  The  particle  j  U  does  not  precede  the  in- 
finitive added  to  the  verb  tt>  o  1  1  e  it,  to  be  willing.  Ex. 

Do  you  wish  to  make  my  fire  ?    SSeflcn    ©te    mcin    $cucr    cmmcu 

djcn  ? 

I  am  willing  to  make  it.  3cb  will  c$  annwd)cn. 

I  do  not  wish  to  make  it.  £\cb  will  eg  ntcbt  anmacbcn. 

Does  he  wish  to  buy  your  horse  ?  2£itl  cr  Sfa  'Pf^t)  faufcn  ? 
He  wishes  to  buy  it.  (£t  will  Co  few  fen. 

A  TABLE  OF  COMPOUND  VERBS/ 

I.     INSEPARABLE  VERBS  .g 

These  verbs  are  formed  by  prefixing  one  of  the  fol- 
lowing unaccented  particles  to  simple  verbs  :  b  e,  e  m  p, 
ent,  er,  gc,  fyinter,  »er,  rotbcr, 


jPc  —  bcbcnfcn  *,  to  reflect.  ^tntcr  —  fymtergcbcn  *f  to  deceive. 

(Sinp  —  cmpfcf)(vn  *f  to  recommend.  8Scr  —  Dcrfptccbtn  *,  to  promise. 

@nt  —  cntflicbcn  */  to  run  away.  SBibcr  —  wit>cr(cc\cn  *,  to  refute. 

g-t:  —  crfyaltcn  */  to  receive.  3^  —  jC(^rcd)cn  */  to  break. 
©c  —  cjcllcljcn*/  to  confess. 

II.     SEPARABLE  VERBS. 

2((>  —  afefcbrct&cn  *,  to  copy.  23ei  —  kiftefjcti  */  to  assist. 

2(n  —  anfangcn  */  to  begin.  3)ar  —  barftcllen/  to  exhibit. 

2Cuf  —  oufbctcn  */  to  pick  up.  2)aruntcr  —  batuntctmifdxn,  to  in- 
2(us  —  auftjcbcn  */  to  go  out.  termingle. 

'  3  ?  y/  you,  is  the  real  second  person  plural  ;  but  the  Germans  generally 
use  ©  t  C  ,  which  is  the  third. 

f  Our  intention  in  giving  tables  of  the  most  complicated  grammatical  parts, 
is  not  that  the  learners  should  make  an  immediate  application  of  them  ;  we 
only  wish  to  give  them  a  clear  and  general  idea  of  those  parts,  in  order  to  en- 
able them  to  find  them  out  more  easily,  as  they  will  be  in  want  of  them  in  ad- 
vancing by  degrees.  They  must  in  their  exercises  employ  only  the  words  and 
expressions  made  use  of  in  the  lessons. 

«  We  call  verbs  inseparable  when  they  cannot,  and  separable  when  they 
can  be  separated. 


53 

ADflfen  —  bafconfemmcn*,  to  escape.  9?ncb  —  nacfyucicbcn,  to  imitate. 

£>urd)  —  twrcfyrcijcn,      to       travel  Ucbcr  —  uberfltcjjcn  *,  to  overflow. 

through.  Um  —  uninK'vjvn  *,  to  overturn. 

(Sin  —  cinfcbtofen  *,  to  fall  asleep.  Untor  —  untcr  jinfcn  */  to  go  to  the 
•Jort  —  fcrtfaljren  *,  to  continue.  bottom. 

£ctm  —  bctnujcben  *,  to  go  home.  £>ell  —  Dottgteffett  *,  to  fill  up. 

£erau$  —  [jcfauvfomnu'n  *,  to  come  sHor  —  scrflcben  *,  to  pretend. 

out.  &>orau$  —  perau£fagcn,  to  foretell. 

gaunter  —  fjcruntcrOrincjcn  *,      to  SSerba  —  vevbacjebcn*,  to  pass  by. 

bringdown.  Berber  —  DCrfxrff  fan  *,  to  foresee. 

£vT}ii  —  bcrjimabcn,  to  draw  near.  SSorubcr  —  perubcrfcifyrcn*,  to  pass 
£>tn  —  ()imvbcn  */  to  go  thither.  by  in  a  coach. 

jptnauf  —  t)tnauf|leu}v'n*,  to  ascend.  SBeg  —  nwgcjebcn  */  to  go  away. 

£imuis  —  ijtnausnxrfcu  */  to  throw  SBtcfccr  —  Sic&crfemmcn  */  to  come 

out.  again. 

£iiu'tn  —  fjtnetngcbcn  *,  to  go  in.  3u  —  $urct>cn,  to  persuade. 

Snnc  —  mncfjaltcn  */   to  stop.  Surucf  —  ^uriidffcljrcn,  to  return. 

932  it  —  mtttf)ci(cn,  to  communicate.  3u|ammcn  —  jufaninicnfc^cn,  to  put 
Stictcr  —  nictcrU'ijon,  to  lay  down.         together. 


B.  Some  compound  verbs  are  either  insepar- 
able or  separable,  according  to  their  signification.  We 
shall  speak  of  them  hereafter. 

EXERCISES.  40. 

Have  you  a  desire  to  keep  my  letter  1  —  I  have  a  desire  to  keep 
it.  —  Am  I  right  in  keeping  (auftubavafyrcn)  your  money  1  —  YOU  are 
right  in  keeping  it.  —  Has  the  tailor  a  desire  to  make  my  coat  1  — 
He  has  a  desire  to  make  it,  but  he  has  no  time.  —  Has  your  tailor 
time  to  mend  my  coats  ?  —  He  has  time  to  mend  them.  —  Have  you 
the  courage  to  burn  my  hat1?  —  I  have  not  the  courage  to  burn  it;  I 
have  a  mind  to  keep  it.  —  Has  the  shoemaker's  boy  a  mind  to  mend 
my  boots  1  —  He  has  no  time  to  mend  them.  —  What  has  our 
friend's  tailor  to  mend  ?  —  He  has  to  mend  our  old  coats.  —  Who  has 
to  mend  our  boots  1  —  Our  shoemaker  has  to  mend  them.  —  What 
has  our  hatmaker  to  do  1  —  He  has  to  mend  your  great  hats.  —  Has 
your  brother's  joiner  anything  to  do  ]  —  He  has  to  mend  our  great 
tables  and  our  little  chairs. 

41. 

Do  you  wish  to  keep  my  twenty-seven  crowns  1  —  I  wish  to  keep 
them.  Will  you  pick  up  that  crown  or  that  florin  ?  —  I  will  pick  up 
both.  —  Do  you  wish  to  cut  his  finger  1  —  I  do  not  wish  to  cut  it.  — 
Does  the  painter  wish  to  burn  vinegar  1  —  He  wishes  to  burn 
some.  —  Is  the  peasant  willing  to  burn  his  bread  1  —  He  is  not  wil- 
ling to  bum  his  own,  but  that  of  his  neighbour.  —  Have  you  any- 
thing to  do  ]  —  I  have  nothing  to  do.  —  Have  we  anything  to  do  1  — 
We  have  to  warm  our  coffee.  —  Do  you  wish  to  speak  1  —  I  wish  to 
Bpeak.—  Is  your  son  willing  to  work  ?—  -He  is  not  willing  to  work. 


54 

42. 

Do  you  wish  to  buy  anything? — I  wish  to  buy  something. — 
What  do  you  wish  to  buy  ] — I  wish  to  buy  some  good  books. — 
What  has  he  to  buy  1 — He  has  to  buy  a  good  horse. — Will  you  buy 
this  or  that  table  1 — I  will  buy  (put  the  infinitive  always  to  the  end 
of  the  phrase)  neither  this  nor  that. — Which  house  does  your  friend 
wish  to  buy  ? — He  wishes  to  buy  your  brother's  great  house. — Is 
your  servant  willing  to  make  my  fire  ? — He  is  willing  to  make  it. — 
Will  your  father  buy  these  rams  or  these  oxen  ] — He  will  buy 
neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — Does  he  wish  to  buy  my  umbrella 
or  my  cane  ] — He  wishes  to  buy  both. 

43. 

Bo  you  wish  to  make  a  fire  1 — We  do  not  wish  to  make  any. — 
What  do  you  wish  to  make  ] — I  wish  to  make  vinegar. — Will  you 
seek  my  knife? — I  will  seek  it. — Have  you  to  look  for  anything  1 — 
1  have  nothing  to  look  for. — Has  he  time  to  seek  my  son  ? — He  has 
time,  but  he  will  not  seek  him. — What  has  he  to  do  1 — He  has  to 
make  a  fire,  to  wash  my  thread  stockings,  to  buy  good  coffee,  good 
sugar,  good  water,  and  good  meat. — Will  he  buy  your  good  trunk  ? 
— He  will  buy  it. — Will  you  buy  my  great  or  my  little  house  1 — 
I  will  buy  neither  your  great  nor  your  little  house ;  I  wish  to  buy 
that  of  our  friend. — Will  you  buy  my  beautiful  horses  ? — I  will  not 
buy  them. 

44. 

How  many  rams  will  you  buy  1 — I  will  buy  twenty-two. — Does 
the  foreigner  wish  to  buy  much  corn  ? — He  wishes  to  buy  but 
little. — Do  you  wish  to  buy  a  great  many  gloves  ] — We  wish  to 
buy  only  a  few  ;  but  our  children  wish  to  buy  a  great  many. — Will 
they  seek  the  same  boots  that  we  have  1 — They  will  not  seek  those 
which  you  have,  but  those  which  my  father  has. — Will  you  look 
for  my  coats  or  for  those  of  the  good  Frenchman  1 — I  will  look  for 
neither  yours  nor  those  of  the  good  Frenchman ;  I  will  look  for 
mine,  and  for  those  of  my  good  son. 


TWENTY-SIXTH  LESSON.  —  Qttfc  ftnb  ;tDan?ig0te 
Cation. 

To  tear.  Settctpen*. 

Togo.  ©  c  6  c n *. 

At.  SB  c  i ,    >   prepositions  governing 

To.  3  u ,        5         the  dative  case. 

To  be.  ©cm  *. 

RULE.     The  preposition  b  c  i  signifies  with  or  at  the 
house  oj,  the  preposition  }  U,  to  or  to  the  house  of. 


55 

To  be  with  the  man  or  at  the  23ct  tern  SDftmnc  fcin*. 

man's  house. 
To  go    to  the  man  or  to  the  3u  fccm  9)?annc  gcfjcn*. 

man's  house. 
To  be  with  his  (one's)  friend  or  23d  fcincm  Jtcunfcc  fcin*. 

at  his  (one's)  friend's  house. 
To  go  to  my  father  or  to  my  3u  mctncm  93atcr  gcfycn*. 

father's  house. 

To  be  at  home.  3u  £aufc  fcin*. 

To  go  home.  9?ad)  £aufc  gcfjcn. 

To  be  with  me  or  at  my  house.    S3ct  nut  fcin*. 

To  go  to  me  or  to  my  house.        3u  nut  gcfycn*. 

To  be  with  him  or  at  his  house.   23d  tfym  fcin*. 

To  go  to  him  or  to  his  house.        3u  tjjm  gcljcn*. 

To  be  with  us  or  at  our  house.      23d  un$  fcin*. 

To  go  to  us  or  to  our  house.          3u  un$  gcfjcn*. 

To  be  with  you  or  at  your  house,    i  23d  S^ncn  fcin*,  6ct  (Sud)  fcin*. 

To  go  to  you  or  to  your  house.      (  3u  3fjnen  gcljcn*,  $u  ®ucr;  gcljcn* 

To  be  with  them  or  at  their  house.  23ct  tfjncn  fctn*. 

To  go  to  them  or  to  their  house.  3u  tfyncn  gc^cn*.       ^ 

To  be  with  some  one  or  at  some  J&ct  Sfcmanbem  fctn*. 

one's  house. 
To  go  to  some  one  or  to  some  3U  Scmanbcm  gc^cn*. 

one's  house. 
To  be  with  no  one  or  at  no  one's  SBct  SHcmant'Cm  fctn*. 

house. 
To  go  to  no  one  or  to  no  one's  3u  9?iemant>cm  gcfjcn*. 

house. 

At  whose  house  ?     With  whom  ?  S3  c  t  tt>  c  m  ? 
To  whose  house  ?     To  whom  ?      3  u   tt?  c  m  ? 

To  whom  (to  whose  house)  do  3u  rocm  wollcn  ©ie  gcljcn  ? 

you  wish  to  go  1 
I  wish  to  go  to  no  one  (to  no  3d)  rottt  $u  97tcmanbcm  gcljcn.* 

one's  house). 
At  whose  house  (with  whom)  is  23ct  went  iff  3>Ijt  S3rut>ct  ? 

your  brother  ? 

He  is  at  ours  (with  us).  (5c  if!  6ci  un^. 

Is  he  at  home  ?  3ft  cc  gu  J^aufc  ? 

He  is  not  at  home.  @t  tft  nic^t  gu  |>oufc. 

To  drink.  Srtnfcn*. 

To  carry  (to  take).         Sragcn*. 
To  bring  (to  carry).        S3ringcn*. 

8  In  German,  as  in  English,  no  more  than  one  negative  is  ever  expressed, 
as  has  already  been  seen  in  many  instances. 


56 

EXERCISES.    45. 

Do  you  wish  to  tear  my  coat  1 — I  do  not  wish  to  tear  it. — Does 
your  brother  wish  to  tear  my  beautiful  hook  ? — He  does  not  wish 
to  tear  it. — What  does  he  wish  to  tear  1 — He  wishes  to  tear  your 
heart. — With  whom  is  our  father? — He  is  with  his  friend. — To 
whom  do  you  wish  to  go  1 — I  wish  to  go  to  you. — Will  you  go  to 
my  house  1 — I  will  not  go  to  your's,  but  to  my  tailor's. — Does  your 
father  wish  to  go  to  his  friend  ? — He  wishes  to  go  to  him. — At 
whose  house  is  your  son  ? — He  is  at  our  house. — Do  your  children 
wish  to  go  to  our  friends  1 — They  wish  to  go  to  them. — Is  the 
foreigner  at  our  brother's  1 — He  is  there  (bet  ifym). — At  whose 
house  is  the  Englishman  ? — He  is  at  yours. — Is  the  American  at 
our  house? — No,  Sir,  he  is  not  at  our  house;  he  is  at  his  friend's. 
— Is  the  Italian  at  his  friend's  ? — He  is  at  their  house. 

46. 

Do  you  wish  to  go  home  ? — I  do  not  wish  to  go  home  ;  I  wish 
to  go  to  the  son  of  my  neighbour. — Is  your  father  at  home  ? — No, 
Sir,  he  is  not  at  home. — With  whom  is  he  ? — He  is  with  the  good 
children  of  our  old  neighbour. — Will  you  go  to  any  one's  house  ? 
— I  will  go  to  no  one's  house. — At  whose  house  is  your  son  ? — 
He  is  at  no  one's  house;  he  is  at  home. — What  will  he  do  at 
home? — He  will  drink  good  wine. — Will  you  carry  my  letters 
home? — 1  will  carry  them  to  my  father's.^ — Who  will  carry  my 
notes  ? — The  young  man  will  carry  them. — Will  he  carry  them  to 
my  house? — No,  he  will  carry  them  to  his  brother's. — Is  his 
father  at  home  ? — He  is  not  at  home ;  he  is  at  the  foreigner's. 

47. 

What  have  you  to  drink  ? — I  have  nothing  to  drink. — Has  your 
son  anything  to  drink? — He  has  good  wine  and  good  water  to 
drink. — Will  your  servant  carry  my  books  to  my  brother's? — He 
will  carry  them  to  their  house. — What  will  you  carry  to  my 
house  ? — I  will  carry  to  your  house  two  chickens,  three  birds,  good 
bread,  and  good  wine  (always  put  the  infinitive  to  the  end,  and  do 
not  separate  it  from  "  to  your  house"). — Will  you  carry  these 
chairs  to  my  house  ? — I  will  not  carry  these,  but  those. — What 
will  the  German  do  at  home? — He  will  work  and  drink  good  wine. 

48. 

What  have  you  at  home  ? — I  have  nothing  at  home. — Have  you 
anything  good  to  drink  at  home  ? — I  have  nothing  good  to  drink ; 
I  have  only  bad  water. — Has  the  captain  as  much  coffee  as  sugar 
at  home? — He  has  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other  at  home. — 
Will  you  carry  as  many  crowns  as  buttons  to  my  brother's  ? — I 
will  carry  to  his  house  as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Will 
you  carry  great  glasses  to  my  house  ? — I  will  carry  some  to  your 
house. — Has  the  merchant  a  desire  to  buy  as  many  oxen  as  rams? 
— He  wishes  to  buy  as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. 


57 

49. 

Has  the  shoemaker  as  many  shoes  as  boots  to  mend] — He  has 
as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the  other  to  mend. — Has  he  as  much 
wine  as  water  to  drink  ] — He  has  as  much  to  drink  of  the  one  as 
of  the  other. — Has  the  Turk  a  desire  to  break  some  glasses  1 — He 
has  a  desire  to  break  some. — Has  he  a  mind  to  drink  some  wine  1 
— He  has  no  mind  to  drink  any. — Will  you  buy  anything  of  (bet) 
roe? — I  will  buy  nothing  of  you. — Of  whom  (-Bet  ivem)  will  you 
buy  your  corn  ] — I  will  buy  it  of  the  great  merchant. — Of  whom 
will  the  English  buy  their  oxen] — They  will  buy  them  of  the 
Dutch. — Will  the  Spaniards  buy  anything] — They  will  buy 
nothing. 


TWENTY-SEVENTH  LESSON.—  Qieben  tmfc 

Section. 


w/       ?  C  SOB  o  ?     (an  adverb  of  place  with- 

£      out  motion.) 

WL*L     9      JL       /»       CSBobin?    (an   adverb  of  place 
Whither  ?  where  to  ? 


RULES. 

1.  The  question  tt)0?  indicates  rest  in  a,  place,  or 
with  any  person  or  object  whatsoever  ;  the  preposition 
which  answers  this  question  always  governs  the  da- 
tive. 

2.  The  question  tt>  0  1)  t  it  ?  denotes  motion  or  direc- 
tion towards  some  place  or  object  ;  when  answered 
by  one  of  the  prepositions  a  it,  to  ;  a  it  f,  upon  ;  t)  t  it  t  e  r, 
behind  ;    it  e  6  e  it,  by  the  side  ;  it  b  e  r,  above  ;  it  it  t  e  r, 
under;   jrotfdjeit,  between;   ttor,  before;   tit,  in  or 
into,  it  always  requires  the  accusative.* 

There.  £)  a  (rest,  repose). 

Thither.  $  t  n  or  t>  a  r;  t  n  (motion  or  direc- 

tion). 

To  carry  thither.  £tn  or  fcaljin  tracjcn*. 

m  (  Masc.   tbn   \    Init  or    babf 

To  carry  it  thither,     j  ^^    £     j        ^^ 

•  The  same  prepositions  govern  the  dative  when  they  answer  the  question 
too  ? 

3* 


ftt 


58 


To  carry  some  thither.       $  ^  «*$*«  !  ^  °r 

I  Neut.  tt>dcf)e£  $      tragen*. 

To  carry  them  thither,        jTe  fyitt  or  bafytn  tragen** 

Obs.  A.  The  adverb  b  a,  there,  is  always  joined  to 
a  verb  of  rest,  and  the  abverb  ty  t  n  or  b  a  1)  i  it,  thither, 
to  a  verb  of  motion.  £  t  n  is  used  to  express  motion 
from,  and  ft  e  r  motion  towards  the  person  that  speaks. 
Ex.  @r  ifi  ba,  he  is  there  ;  id)  tt>itt  aiuf)  f)irt  (bat)in)  gefyert, 
I  will  also  go  thither  ;  tt>otten  @ie  fyerfommen  ?  will  you 
come  hither? 

rp   c  C  (Scnbcru* 

lo  send.  -<  ~  «  •  .     . 

(.  (Sd)tofen.b 

To  come.  ^cmmcn*. 

To  lead.  giifyrcn. 

I  will  send  him  (it)  to  you.  §d)  will  tfyn  (ce)  511  3^ncn  fcl)ic!cn. 


When  ? 

To-morrow.  Stfercjcn. 

To-day. 


Some  where,  any  where.  Stgcnbroo  (rest). 

Some  whither,  any  whither.  3rgcnt>roof)tn  (direction). 

No  where,  not  any  where.  9?  t  r  Q  c  n  b  or  n  i  r  $  c  n  t)  $. 

Do  you  wish  to  go  any  whither!  Section  (Sic  tr$cnbn?ef)tn 

I  do  not  wish  to  go  any  whither.  3d)  roill  ntrgcnfc$ 


The  physician,  bo 

To  write.  ©cfjrcibcn*. 

Have  you  to  write  as  many  let-  £akn  (Sic  fo  t»tc(  fflricfc  311  fc^rctOcn, 
ters  as  rny  father?  rutc  mctn  iSatcrl 

Obs.  B.  Where  the  verb  stands  at  the  end  of  a 
phrase,  the  word  tt>  t  e  ,  as,  or  a  1  3  ,  ^«TI,  is  placed  with 
its  npminative  after  the  verb. 

I  have  to  write  more   (i.  e.   let-  3d)  Ijafce  fccrcn  mcfyr  gu  fdjrctOcn,  aU 
ters)  than  he.  er. 

EXERCISES.  50. 

Where  is  your  brother?  —  He  is  at  home.  —  Whither  do  you  wish 
to  go?  —  I  wish  to  go  home.  —  Whither  does  your  father  wish  to 

b  ©  tf)  t  df  e  tt  is  used  when  a  person  is  sent  without  any  object,  or  with  one 
of  little  importance,  fen  ben,  on  the  contrary,  always  denotes  a  mission  of 
importance,  whence  fret  ©efanbte,  the  ambassador. 


59 

go  ] — He  wishes  to  go  to  your  house. — Whither  will  you  carry 
this  letter  1 — I  will  carry  it  to  my  neighbour's. — Is  your  son  at 
home  ] — He  is  there. — \Vhither  will  the  shoemaker  carry  my  boots  I 
— He  will  carry  them  to  your  house. — Will  he  carry  them  home? 
— He  will  carry  them  thither. — Will  you  send  good  sugar  home  ] 
— I  will  send  some  thither. — Will  the  baker  send  good  bread  home  ] 
— He  will  send  some  thither. — Will  you  come  to  me"? — I  will  come 
to  you. — Whither  do  you  wish  to  go? — I  wish  to  go  to  the  good 
Frenchmen. — Will  the  good  Italians  go  to  our  house  1 — They  will 
go  no  whither. — Will  you  take  (fufjrcn)  your  son  to  my  house  1 — I 
will  not  take  him  to  your  house,  but  to  the  captain's. — When  will 
you  take  him  to  the  captain's  1 — I  will  take  him  there  (511  ifjm)  to- 
morrow. 

51. 

Will  you  go  any  whither  (any  where)  1 — I  will  £0  no  whither 
(no  where)- — Will  your  good  son  go  to  any  one  7 — He  will  go  to 
no  one. — When  will  you  take  (fftfjrcn)  your  young  man  to  the  pain- 
ter ] — I  will  take  him  there  ($u  tfjm)  to-day. — Where  will  he  carry 
these  birds  to] — He  will  carry  them  no  whither. — Will  you  take 
tho  physician  to  this  man] — I  will  take  him  there  (gu  ifjm). — When 
will  you  take  him  there] — I  will  take  him  there  to-day. — Will  the 
•ians  come  to  your  good  brother] — They  will  not  come  to  him. 
—  Will  you  send  me  a  servant] — I  will  send  you  none. — Will  you 
send  a  child  to  the  physician? — I  will  send  one  to  him. — With  whom 
is  the  physician] — He  is  with  nobody. — Do  you  wish  to  go  any 
whither] — I  wish  to  go  to  the  good  Americans. — Has  he  time  to  come 
to  my  house] — He  has  no  time  to  come  there. — Will  the  captain 
write  one  more  letter  ] — He  will  write  one  more. — Will  you  write 
a  note] — I  will  write  one. — Has  your  friend  a  mind  to  write  as 
many  letters  as  I  ] — He  has  a  mind  to  write  quite  as  many. 

52. 

Have  you  many  letters  to  write  ] — I  have  only  a  few  to  write. — 
How  many  letters  has  our  old  neighbour  to  write  ] — He  has  as 
many  to  write  as  you. — Who  has  long  letters  to  write] — The  youth 
has  some  to  write. — How  many  more  letters  has  he  to  write  ] — He 
has  six  more  to  write. — How  many  has  he  to  send  ] — He  has  twen- 
ty to  send  ] — Has  he  as  many  letters  to  send  as  his  father  ] — He 
has  fewer  to  send. — Has  the  hatmaker  some  more  hats  to  send  ] — 
He  has  no  more  to  send. — Has  your  son  the  courage  to  write  a 
long  letter  ] — He  has  the  courage  to  write  one. — Will  he  write  as 
many  letters  as  mine  ] — He  will  write  quite  as  many. — Will  you 
buy  as  many  carriages  as  horses  ] — I  will  buy  more  of  the  latter 
than  of  the  former. 


60 

TWENTY-EIGHTH   LESSON.—  £cl)t  nrib  }ttmn?ig*t<? 
Certion. 

In  order  to  (conjunction).      M  m  —  311, 
To  see.  <S  c  F)  c  n  »  . 

O&s.  -A.  The  conjunctive  expression  in  order  to  pre- 
ceding the  infinitive  is  translated  into  German  by  it  lit 
3  II.  When  the  sentence  is  short,  u  nt,  in  order,  may  be 
left  out. 

I  will  go  to  my  brother  in  order  3d)  roid  gu  mcincm  Srufcct  Qcfycn/ 
to  see  him.  urn  tfjn  $u  fcfjen. 

I  have  no  money  (in  order)  to  3d)  Ijabc  few  ©eft/  (um)  23ret>  ju 
buy  bread.  faufrn. 

Has  your  brother  a  knife  (in  or-  £at  3fa  SBrufoct  cm  SRcfler,  (um) 
der)  to  cut  his  bread  ?  fcin  S?rcb  gu  fdjncitcn  ? 

He  has  one  to  cut  it.  (?E  f)at  ctn^/  um  cs  ^u  fcl)nctt)cn. 

To  sweep.  2(u£!cf)tcn  (nu^ufc^rcn). 

To  kill.  SoDtcn  7 

To  slaughter.  (S  d)  (  a  d)  t  c  n      5  " 

Tosaltl  ©atjcn. 

To  og  a0/e.  ^  6  n  n  c  n  *. 


I   can    (am    able)  —  he    can  (is  3ci)  fann  —  cc  Fann. 

able). 
We    can    (are  able)—  they  can  SStr  fonncn  —  pc  f  onncn. 

(are  able). 
You  can  (are  able).  3^  fonnct  (8ic  fonncn). 

Obs.  B.  The  particle  j  u  does  not  precede  the  infini- 
tive added  to  the  verb  fonncn,  to  be  able.  (See  Les- 
son XL.)  Ex. 

Can  you  write  a  letter  ?  jtcnncn  ©tc  ctncn  SBrtcf  fdjrctbcn  *? 

I  can  write  one.  3d)  fann  ctncn  fd)rctfccn. 

He  is  able  to  work.  6't  fann  arbcitcn. 


Singular. 

DAT.     Ace. 


To  me.        me. 
To  him.       him. 


1st  person,     mir.     micfj. 
3d  person,     ifynt*     ifyn, 


»  5!obtcn  means  to  deprive  any  one  of  life  ;  fd)tadjtett,  to  slaughter,  is  used 
in  speaking  of  animals,  the  flesh  of  which  is  eaten.  Ex.  <£euten  ^einb  tobtett 
to  kill  his  enemy  j  Deafen  uut>  <3(f)afe  f<$la$ten,  to  slaughter  oxen  and  sheep. 


61 


To  us.  us. 

To  you.  you. 

To  them.          them. 

To  kill  me. 
To  see  u H-. 
To  speak  to  me. 

To  speak  to  him. 

To  send  to  him. 

To  send  to  his  house. 

To  send  him  to  me. 

To  send  him  to  me  to-morrow. 


1st  person. 


Plural. 

DAT.       Ace. 


3d  person,     ibuen.     fie. 


tittten. 
)  ft-bcn*. 
S)Jtd)    (nut   nut    or  $u  mtr)  fprcs 

d)cn*. 
3bn    (mit   tfjm  or  311  ifym)  fprcs 

d)cn*. 

3bm  fd)icfcn. 
3u  tf)in  fcbicfcn. 
Sbn  mir  ($u  mir)  fcf)icfcn. 
Sfyn  nur  merqcn  fcbtctcn  (tfyn  mors 

gen  ju  mtr  fd)ic!cn). 

In  German  the  dative  precedes  the  accusative  ; 
but  when  the  accusative  is  a  personal  pronoun  it  pre- 
<  the  dative. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


It  to  me    —  them  to  me. 
It  to  him  —  them  to  him. 
It  to  us     —  them  to  us. 

It  to  you  —  them  to  you. 
It  to  them  —  them  to  them. 


Masc. 

thm 
thm 


ifjm 


Neut% 

eg  mtr    —  fie  mtr* 
eg  tfynt    —  fie  tf)m. 
eg  iin^    —  fie  ung* 
eg  @ucf)  —  fie  @urf), 
eg  (3hnen)fie(3(nten). 
eg  iljnen  —  fie  tfynett. 


When  will  you  send  me  the  hat  ?  Sfcann  wcttcn   (Sic  mtr  ben  |)Ut 

[d)tc!cn  ? 
I  will  send  it  to  you  to-morrow.    36    nutt    i^n    3bncn    morgcn 

fdjicfcn. 


Masc. 


Neut. 


Plural. 


Some  to  me. 
Some  to  him. 
Some  to  us. 

Some  to  you. 
Some  to  them. 


t  mtr 
t  nttg 


mir 
tl)tn 


t   ifynen 


roetefyen.  n>e(rf)eg. 


tt>efrf)e. 
Moeldw. 


b  See  note  %  Lesson  XXXJ. 


62 


®  e  6  c  n  *. 
2  c  1 1)  c  n  *. 


To  give. 
To  lend. 

To  give  me. 

To  lend  me.  932it  fct()cn*. 

Are    you  willing   to    lend    me  SBotlcn  <£te  mit  (Skit  (ctfjen  ? 

some  money  1 
I  am  willing  to  lend  you  some.    3kfy  ttntt  Sftncn  ivclcfycS  Icifjen. 

A  TABLE 

OF  THE  DECLENSION  OF  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

FIRST  PERSON.  SECOND  PERSON. 


. 

'NOM. 

id), 

I. 

bn, 

thou. 

SINGULAI 

GEN. 
DAT. 
i  Ace. 

meiner  (mein0)/  of  me. 
ntir,                  to  me. 
nticf),                     me. 

beiner  (bein),  of 
bit,              to 
bid), 

thee. 
thee. 
thee. 

"NOM. 

ttnr, 

we. 

i^r, 

you. 

i. 

GEN. 

nnfer, 

of  us. 

ener 

,               of  you. 

1 

DAT. 

un^, 

to  us. 

encf),             to 

you. 

.Ace. 

nn^, 

us. 

end), 

you. 

THIRD 

PERSON. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Neuter. 

~^ 

^ 

rNoM.'er, 

he. 

ffe,         she. 

rf, 

it. 

SINGULAI 

GEN.  feiner  (fein),  of  him. 
DAT.  ifym,             to  him. 
.Ace.  ifyn,                 him. 

if)rer,ofher. 
i^r,    to  her. 
(Te,         her. 

feiner  (fein), 
i^m, 

of  it. 
to  it. 
it. 

'NOM. 

For  all  genders. 
ffe. 

they. 

fijj 
t 

GEN. 
DAT. 

if^rer, 

of  them, 
to  them. 

.Ace. 

jte, 

them. 

e  3Jieut,  bciit,  fein,  as  genitives  singular,  for  mctncr,  betner,  femer,  are  used 
only  in  familiar  discourse  and  in  poetry.  Ex.  53ergtj}  mein  ni^t,  forget  ma 
not. 


63 

EXERCISES.    53. 

Has  the  carpenter  money  to  buy  a  hammer  1 — He  has  some  to 
buy  one. — Has  the  captain  money  to  buy  a  ship  ? — He  has  some 
to  buy  one. — Has  the  peasant  money  to  buy  sheep  (t>a$  (Sefyaf  adds 
c  and  is  not  softened  in  the  plural)  ? — He  has  none  to  buy  any. — 
Have  you  time  to  see  my  father  ? — I  have  no  time  to  see  him. — 
Does  your  father  wish  to  see  me? — He  does  not  wish  to  see  you. 
— Has  the  servant  a  broom  to  sweep  the  house  1 — He  has  one  to 
s\\< •» p  it. — Is  he  willing  to  sweep  it] — He  is  willing  to  sweep  it. 
— Have  I  salt  enough  to  salt  my  meat  1 — You  have,  not  enough  of 
it  to  salt  it. — Will  your  friend  come  to  my  house  in  order  to  see 
me  ? — He  wrill  neither  come  to  your  house  nor  see  you. — Has  our 
neighbour  a  desire  to  kill  his  horse  ? — He  has  no  desire  to  kill  it. — 
Will  you  kill  your  friends  ? — I  will  kill  only  my  enemies. 

54. 

Can  you  cut  me  some  bread  ? — I  can  cut  you  some. — Have  you 
a  knife  to  cut  me  some  ? — I  have  one. — Can  you  wash  your 
gloves  ? — I  can  wash  them,  but  I  have  no  wish  to  do  it. — Can  the 
tailor  make  me  a  coat  ? — He  can  make  you  one. — Will  you  speak 
to  the  physician  ? — I  will  speak  to  him. — Does  your  son  wish  to 


see  me  in  order  to  speak  to  me  ? — He  wishes  to  see  you,  in  order 
to  give  you  a  crown. — Does  he  wish  to  kill  me? — He  does  not 
wish  to  kill  you  ;  he  only  wishes  to  see  you. — Does  the  son  of  our 


old  friend  wish  to  kill  an  ox  1 — He  wishes  to  kill  two. — How 
much  money  can  you  send  me  ? — I  can  send  you  thirty  crowns. — 
Will  you  send  me  my  letter? — I  will  send  it  to  you. — Will  you 
send  the  shoemaker  anything  ? — I  will  send  him  my  boots  1 — Will 
you  send  him  your  coats? — -No,  I  will  send  them  to  my  tailor. — 
Can  the  tailor  send  me  my  coat? — He  cannot  send  it  you. — Are 
your  children  able  to  write  letters  ? — They  are  able  to  write  some. 


Have  you  a  glass  to  drink  your  wine? — I  have  one,  but  I  have 
no  wine  ;  I  have  only  water. — Will  you  give  me  money  to  buy 
some  ? — I  will  give  you  some,  but  I  have  only  a  little. — Will  you 
give  me  that  which  you  have  ? — I  will  give  it  you. — Can  you 
drink  as  much  wine  as  water  ? — I  can  drink  as  much  of  the  one  as 
of  the  other. — Has  our  poor  neighbour  any  wood  to  make  a  fire  ?— 
He  has  some  to  make  one,  but  he  has  no  money  to  buy  bread  and 
meat. — Are  you  willing  to  lend  him  some  ? — I  am  willing  to  lend 
him  some. — Do  you  wish  to  speak  to  the  German  ? — I  wish  to 
speak  to  him. — Where  is  he  ? — He  is  with  the  son  of  the  captain. 
— Does  the  German  wish  to  speak  to  me  ? — He  wishes  to  speak  to 
you. — Does  he  wish  to  speak  to  my  brother  or  to  yours  ? — He 
wishes  to  speak  to  both — Can  the  children  of  our  tailor  work  ? — 
They  can  work,  but  they  will  not. 


64 

56. 

Do  you  wish  to  speak  to  the  children  of  your  shoemaker  1 — I 
wish  to  speak  to  them. — What  will  you  give  them  1 — 1  will  give 
them  great  cakes. — Will  you  lend  them  anything  7 — I  have  nothing 
to  lend  them. — Has  the  cook  some  more  salt  to  salt  the  meat  ] — 
He  has  a  little  more. — Has  he  some  more  rice  1 — He  has  a  great 
deal  more. — Will  he  give  me  some  ] — He  will  give  you  some. — 
Will  he  give  some  to  my  poor  children? — He  will  give  them 
some. — Will  he  kill  this  or  that  hen  ] — He  will  kill  neither  this 
nor  that. — Which  ram  will  he  kill "? — He  will  kill  that  of  the  good 
peasant. — Will  he  kill  this  or  that  ox  ] — He  will  kill  both. — Who 
will  send  us  biscuits  1 — The  baker  will  send  you  some. — Have 
you  anything  good  to  give  me  ] — I  have  nothing  good  to  give  you. 


TWENTY-NINTH  LESSON.— tfetm  nub 
Cation. 

To  whom  ?  803  e  m  ?    (A  question  followed  by 

the  dative.) 

Whom  ?  For  persons :    SB  c  n  ?  ^  (Questions 

>  followed  by 
What  ?  For  things  :    SOS  a  $  ?  j  the  accus.). 

DECLENSION    OF    THE    INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUN    3S  C  t  ?    WHO? 

Masc.  and  Fern.    Neut. 

N.  tt>er? 
G. 


D.n)em?lin^!!!!'rano? 


A. 


njorauf  ? 


NOM.  Who  ?  what  ? 

GEN.  whose? 

DAT.  to  whom  ?  to  what  ? 
Ace.        whom  ?       what  ? 

5GB  e  r,  10^0,  has  no  plural,  and  relates  only  to  per- 
sons, without  distinction  of  sex,  as  who  in  English.  It 
may  be  used  instead  of  fcerjenige,  tt>clrf)er,  he  who. 

2B  a  $,  which,  has  no  plural,  and  always  relates  to  a 
thing.  It  often  stands  for  baSjenige,  tt>etd)e$  or  batf,  tt>ek 
d)e£,  that  which. 

To  answer.  U  n  t  n?  o  r  t  c  n.a 

To  answer  the  man.  £)cm  9Jfannc  antroortcn. 

»  The  verb  anttoorrctt  is  inseparable,  although  the  accent  rests  upon  the 
particle  ant;  it  governs  the  accusative  with  the  preposition  auf,  to.     * 
n,  to  answer,  governs  the  accusative  without  a  preposition. 


65 

To  answer  the  men.  3)en  SRa'nncrn  antworten. 

To  answer  a  letter.  7(iif  cinen  i>*ncf  antivcrtat  or  etncn 

iBricf  beantiverten. 
To  it.  2)  a  r  a  it  f. 

To  answer  it.  £arauf  antivcrtcn  or  tf;n  (c$)  fccant* 

tvcrtcn. 

Obs.  A.  The  demonstrative  local  adverbs,  ba,  there ; 
fytcr,  here ;  tt)0,  where  ;  are  usually  employed  instead 
of  demonstrative  pronouns,  and  connected  with  the 
preposition  which  the  verb  requires.  If  the  preposi- 
tion begins  with  a  vowel,  the  letter  r  is  added  to  the 
words  ba  and  tt>o  for  the  sake  of  euphony. 

In.  3n  (governs  the  dat.  and  ace.). 

In  the.  3"  b»-'iN  (tm,  rest'1). 

Into  the.  3  n  ben  (motion). 

In  the.  £>n  ben  (rest). 

Into  the.  3  n  b  t  C  (motion). 

To  go  into  the  garden.  3"  ben  ©artcn  qcfjcn*. 

To  be  in  the  garden.  3n  K'm  (tin)  Qortal  fctn*. 

To  go  into  the  gardens.  SH  tie  ©artcn  gcfjcn*. 

To  be  in  the  gardens.  3n  ben  ©arten  fein*. 


B.  The  rapidity  of  pronunciation  has  led  to  a 
contraction  of  the  last  letter  of  the  definite  article  with 
certain  prepositions  which  precede  it ;  thus  betm  is  of- 
ten said  instead  of  bei  bent,  im  instead  of  m  bent,  tn3  in 
the  accusative  neuter  instead  of  in  ba$. 

According  to  this  contraction  we  may  say  or  write  : 

?fm,  near  the,  for  an  Km  ftto,  for  the,  for  fur  t>a& 

?(n£,  to  the,  against  3m,  in  the,  —  in  fcenu 

the,  —  on  fcci£.  3n£/  into  the,          —  tn  t>n£. 

?fiiu-,  upon  the,         —  auf  Da*.  SScn^from  the,        —  t>cn  torn, 

i^ctm,  at  the,  —  Ivt  tern.  Sinn,  to  the,  —  ju  tern. 

Duress,  through  the,  —  tmrcf; 'on$.  3ur,  to  the,  —  311  t>cr. 

The  theatre,  tag  Sbcatcr ; 

the  forest,  the  wood,       tct  SO^ntb  (plur.  Me  S&flbft)  ; 
the  warehouse,  ta?  SBanrcntagct  (is  not  softened  in 

the  plur.)  ; 

b  The  preposition  t  n  is  used  when  the  place  in  which  a  person  is,  or  to- 
wards which  the  motion  is  directed,  is  closed,  or  conceived  to  be  so.  It  is 
followed  by  the  dative  to  the  question  » «? ,  and  the  accusative  to  the  question 
tt)  o  f)  i  n . 


66 

the  storehouse,  ba$  23etrat!)$!)au$  ;c 

the  magazine,  t>a$  $0Zaga$in  (plur.  c)  ; 

the  provision,  store,  t»cr  23orratfj  ; 

the  room,  the  chamber,  ba$  Simmer  ; 

the  butcher,  tcr  jlctfcfyct  (bet  Sttc^er-). 

To  go  into.  ^tnctngcfjcn*. 

To  be  in  the.  £)  a  t  t.n  f  C  t  U  *. 

Do  you  wish  to  go  to  the  thea-  £Sottcn  <£ic  inS  Sweater  cjcfycn  ? 

tre] 

I  wish  to  go  thither.  3$  roifl  f)incin  gcfjcn. 

Is  your  brother  in  the  theatre  ]  3ft  3fa  SBtufccc  im 

He  is  there.  ©C  tft  battn. 


C.  The  above  examples  show  how  t  a  r  t  it 
expresses  rest  in,  and  f)  t  n  e  i  n  motion  towards,  the 
interior  of  a  closed  place. 

EXERCISES.    57. 

Will  you  answer  your  friend1?  —  I  will  answer  him.  —  But  whom 
will  you  answer?  —  I  will  answer  my  good  father.  —  Will  you  not 
answer  your  good  friends'?  —  I  will  answer  them.  —  Who  will 
answer  me]  —  The  Russian  wishes  to  answer  you,  but  he  cannot.  — 
Will  the  Russian  write  me  a  letter  ]  —  He  will  write  you  one.  —  Can 
the  Spaniards  answer  us  ]  —  They  cannot  answer  us,  but  we  can 
answer  them.—  What  has  the  Englishman  to  do]  —  He  has  to 
answer  a  letter.  —  Which  letter  has  he  to  answer  ]  —  He  has  to 
answer  that  of  the  good  Frenchman  ]  —  Have  I  to  answer  a  letter  ] 
—  You  have  not  to  answer  a  letter,  but  a  note.  —  Which  note  have  I 
to  answer  ]  —  You  have  to  answer  that  of  the  great  captain. 

58. 

Have  we  to  answer  the  letters  of  the  great  merchants  ]  —  We 
have  to  answer  them.  —  Will  you  answer  the  note  of  your  tailor]  — 
I  will  answer  it.  —  Will  any  one  answer  my  great  letter  ]  —  No  one 
will  answer  it.  —  Will  your  father  answer  this  or  that  note  ]  —  He 
will  answer  neither  this  nor  that.  —  Which  notes  will  he  answer]  — 
He  will  answer  only  those  of  his  good  friends.  —  Will  he  answer 
me  my  letter  ]  —  He  will  answer  it  you.  —  Will  your  father  go  any- 
whither  ]  —  He  will  go  nowhither.  —  Where  is  your  brother  ]  —  He  is 
in  the  garden  of  our  friend.  —  Where  is  the  Englishman  ]  —  He  is  in 
his  little  garden.  —  Where  dp  we  wish  to  go  to]  —  We  wish  to  go 
into  the  garden  of  the  French.  —  Where  is  your  son  ]  —  He  is  in  his 
room.  —  Will  he  go  to  the  magazine  1  —  He  will  go  thither.  —  Will 
you  go  to  the  great  theatre  ]  —  I  will  not  go  thither,  but  my  son  has 
a  mind  to  go  thither.  —  Where  is  the  Irishman  ]  —  He  is  in  the  the- 
atre. —  Is  the  American  in  the  forest]  —  He  is  there. 

c  In  compound  words  the  last  only  is  softened.  Ex.  bag  23orr<ltf)$fjau$, 
the  storehouse  ;  plur.  He  i£orrarf)gf)aufet. 


67 

59. 

Will  you  come  to  me  in  order  to  go  to  the  forest  ] — I  have  no 
wish  to  go  to  the  forest. — To  which  theatre  do  you  wish  to  go  ] — 
I  wish  to  go  to  the  great  theatre. — Will  you  go  into  my  garden,  or 
into  that  of  the  Dutchman] — I  will  go  neither  into  yours  nor  into 
that  of  the  Dutchman ;  I  will  go  into  the  gardens  of  the  French. — 
Will  you  go  into  those  of  the  Germans  1 — I  will  not  go  thither  (btnz 
cin). — Have  the  Americans  great  warehouses  1 — They  have  some. — 
Have  the  English  great  stores  ] — They  have  some. — Have  the  Ger- 
mans as  many  warehouses  as  stores  1 — They  have  as  many  of  the 
latter  as  of  the  former. — Will  you  see  our  great  stores  ] — I  will  go 
into  your  warehouses  in  order  to  see  them. — Have  you  much  hay 
in  your  storehouses  ] — We  have  a  great  deal,  but  we  have  not 
enough  corn. — Do  you  wish  to  buy  some] — We  wish  to  buy  some. 
— Have  we  as  much  corn  as  wine  in  our  storehouses  ] — We  have 
as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Have  the  English  as  much 
cloth  as  paper  in  their  warehouses  ] — They  have  more  of  the  one 
than  of  the  other  in  them  (barin). — Has  your  father  time  to  write 
me  a  letter] — He  wishes  to  write  you  one,  but  he  has  no  time  to- 
day.— When  will  he  answer  that  of  my  brother  ] — He  will  answer 
it  to-morrow. — Will  you  come  to  my  house  in  order  to  see  my 
great  warehouses  ] — 1  cannot  come  to  your  house  to-day ;  I  have 
letters  to  write. 


THIRTIETH  LESSON.—  SDrnssigste  Cation. 

Upon.  TTu  f  (governs  the  dat.  and  ace.). 

rr    „  .1  C  7C  n  f  b  e  m  (repose3). 

Upon  the.  en,  ba*  (action). 


The  market,  bet 

the  ball,  bet 

the  country,  ba$  2ant>  ; 

the  place  (the  square),  bet  >p(a6  ; 
the  field,  ba$  gelt)". 

To  be  at  the  market.  ?Cuf  bcm  $ttatftcb  fdn*. 

To  go  to  the  market.  2Cuf  ben  Sttarft  fttfcn*. 

To  be  at  the  ball.  ?fuf  tern  JBolU  fdn*. 

To  go  to  the  ball.  2Cttf  ben  Sail  gehon*. 

To  be  in  the  country.  ?(uf  bem  £anbe  fdn*. 

To  go  into  the  country.  2(uf  ba$  2anb  Qcfyen*. 

»  The  preposition  rtuf,  upon,  is  used  when  the  place  is  not  closed,  but  open. 

b  The  genitive  singular  of  masculine  a:  il  neuter  nouns  sometimes  termi- 
luit'-s  in  6,  and  sometimes  in  t§  (except  th  ><  >  in  el,  en,  er,  d)  e  n  and  let  it 
which  always  take  0).  These  forms  ar-  cnially  good;  but  the  former  is 
more  frequently  used  in  conversation,  and  tii1  latter  in  composition.  The 
same  distinction  ought  to  be  observed  with  r  <>ard  to  the  dative  singular  of 
masculine  and  neuter  nouns,  which  takes  e  whai  the  genitive  takes  e3. 


68 

To  be  at  the  place  (in  the  square).  2fuf  fccm  $plfl|c  fcin*, 

To  go  to  the  place.  2(uf  ben  $)(ci6  gcbcn*. 

To  be  in  the  field.  2tuf  bem  Sft&*  KIN*. 

To  go  into  the  field.  2£uf  jDa$  Jclb  a,el;cn*. 

JU.  2C  n  (dat.  and  ace.). 

At  the*  2(  n  bem  (repose11). 

To  Me.  2(  n  t>  c  n  ,  bag  (action). 

The  window,  tag  Jenfter. 

To  go  to  the  window.  2(n  bag  gvnftct  a,cr)cn*. 

To  stand,  (gtcbcn*. 

To  stand  at  the  window.  2Cn  bem  Jenftet  ftcfjcn*. 

To  write  to  somebody. 


Are  you  willing  to  write  to  me  '.{  gjg  f  « 

I  am  willing*  writetoyou.          Jg  jg  Sj 

I  wish  to  write  to  the  man.  3d)  n>iU  an  ben  9)iann  fc^rctt>cn. 

To  w;A0m  ?  2(  n  n?  c  n  ? 

To  whom  do  you  wish  to  write  1  2(n  wen  ivcUen  <Stc 

To  me,  to  him.        2Cn  mid),  an  t  f)  n  . 

To  the  man.  2(n  ben  «Dlann. 

I  will  write  to  him.  3d)  will  i^m  fdjteifccn. 


To  wAom  ?  fXB  c  m  ? 

To  me,  to  him.  SO*  i  r  ,  i  5  nu 

To  whom  do  you  wish  to  write  1  SBcm  wcllcn  <Sic 

To  the  man.  £)em 


The  nobleman,  bet  (SMmnnn  *,d 

the  boatman,  bcr  @d)tffmann  ; 

the  bailifF,  ber  2(uitmann  ; 

people,  Ccutc  (p(ur.). 

EXERCISES.    60. 

Whither  do  you  wish  to  go  ?  —  I  wish  to  go  to  the  market.  — 
Where  is  your  cook  1  —  He  is  at  the  market.  —  Where  is  my  brother. 
—  He  is  at  the  ball.  —  Will  you  come  to  me  in  order  to  go  to  the 
ball  1  —  I  will  come  to  you  in  order  to  go  thither.  —  Is  your  father  in 
the  country  ?  —  He  is  there.  —  Do  you  wish  to  go  to  the  country  1  — 
I  do  not  wish  to  go  there.  —  Whither  does  your  son  wish  to  go  ]  — 
He  wishes  to  go  to  the  great  place.  —  Is  your  friend  at  the  great 
place1?  —  He  is  there.  —  Does  the  Englishman  wish  to  go  into  the 
country  in  order  to  see  the  fields  ?  —  He  does  not  wish  to  go  into 


c  2ltt,  at,  by,  near,  points  out  proximity  to  a  person  or  a  pla 
d  For  substantives  terminating  in  mamt,  see  Lesson  XVII. 


>lace. 


69 

the  country  in  order  to  see  the  fields,  but  to  see  the  forests,  the 
birds,  the  water,  and  to  drink  tea. — Where  is  the  son  of  the 
peasant] — He  is  in  the  field  to  cut  some  corn  (cutting  corn). — 
Does  the  son  of  the  nobleman  wish  to  go  anywhither  1 — He  does  not 
wish  to  go  anywhither ;  he  is  tired. — Whither  does  the  son  of  the 
bailiff  wish  to  carry  corn  1 — >He  wishes  to  carry  some  to  the  store- 
house of  your  brother. — Does  he  wish  to  carry  thither  the  wine 
and  the  meat  1 — He  wishes  to  carry  both  thither. 

61. 

Is  the  friend  of  the  Spaniard  able  to  carry  provisions  1 — He  is 
able  te  carry  some. — Whither  does  he  wish  to  carry  provisions  ] — 
He  wishes  to  carry  some  to  our  storehouses. — Do  you  wish  to  buy 
provisions  in  order  to  carry  them  to  our  storehouses  1 — I  wish  to 
buy  some  in  order  to  take  them  into  the  country.— Do  you  wish  to 
go  to  the  window  in  order  to  see  the  youth  1 — I  have  no  time  to  go 
to  the  window. — Have  you  anything  to  do  1 — I  have  a  letter  to 
write. — To  whom  have  you  a  letter  to  write  ] — I  have  to  write  one  to 
my  friend. — Do  you  wish  to  write  to  the  bailiff? — I  wish  to  write 
to  him. — What  do  you  wish  to  write  to  him  ? — I  wish  to  answer 
him  his  letter. — Are  you  able  to  write  as  many  letters  as  1 1 — I  am 
able  to  write  more  of  them  than  you. — Can  you  write  to  the  (cm 
fcic)  noblemen  1 — lean  write  to  them. — Have  you  paper  to  write  1 — I 
have  some. — Is  the  bailiff  able  to  write  to  anybody  ] — He  is  not 
able  to  write  to  anybody. 

62. 

Have  you  time  to  stand  at  the  window] — I  have  no  time  to 
stand  at  the  window. — Is  your  brother  at  home  1 — He  is  not  at 
home. — W'here  is  he  ? — He  is  in  the  country. — Has  he  anything  to 
do  in  the  country] — He  has  nothing  to  do  there. — Whither  do  you 
wish  to  go  ] — I  wish  to  go  to  the  theatre. — Is  the  Turk  in  the 
theatre  1 — He  is  there. — Who  is  in  the  garden  1 — The  children  of 
the  English  and  those  of  the  Germans  are  there. — Where  does  your 
father  wish  to  speak  to  me  1 — He  wishes  to  speak  to  you  in  his 
room. — To  whom  does  your  brother  wish  to  speak  ] — He  wishes  to 
speak  to  the  Irishman. — Does  he  not  wish  to  speak  to  the  Scotch- 
man ] — He  wishes  to  speak  to  him. — Where  will  he  speak  to  him  ? 
— He  will  speak  to  him  at  (in)  the  theatre. — Does  the  Italian  wish 
to  speak  to  anybody  1 — He  wishes  to  speak  to  the  physician. — 
Where  will  he  speak  to  him  ] — He  will  speak  to  him  at  the  ball. 

63. 

Can  you  send  me  some  money  1 — I  can  send  you  some. — How 
much  money  can  you  send  me  1 — I  can  send  you  thirty-two 
crowns. — When  will  you  send  me  that  money  ] — I  will  send  it  to 
you  to-day. — Will  you  send  it  tome  into  the  country  ] — I  will  send 
it  to  you  thither. — Will  you  send  your  servant  to  the  market  ] — I  will 
send  him  thither. — Have  you  anything  to  buy  at  the  market  1 — 
1  have  to  buy  good  cloth,  good  boots,  and  good  shoes. — What  does 


70 

the  butcher  wish  to  do  in  the  country  1 — He  wishes  to  buy  there 
oxen  and  rams  in  order  to  kill  them. — Do  you  wish  to  buy  a  chick- 
en in  order  to  kill  it 7 — I  wish  to  buy  one;  but  I  have  not  the 
courage  to  kill  it. — Does  the  boatman  wish  to  kill  any  one  1 — He 
does  not  wish  to  kill  any  one. — Have  you  a  desire  to  burn  my  let- 
ters ] — 1  have  not  the  courage  to  do  it. — Will  the  servant  seek  my 
knife  or  my  paper  1 — He  will  seek  both. — Which  knife  do  you 
wish  (to  have)  1 — I  wish  (to  have)  my  large  knife. — What  oxen 
does  the  butcher  wish  to  kill  1 — He  wishes  to  kill  large  oxen. — 
What  provisions  does  the  merchant  wish  to  buy  ? — He  wishes  to 
buy  good  provisions. — Wliere  does  he  wish  to  buy  them1? — He 
wishes  to  buy  them  at  the  market. — To  whom  does  he  wish  to  send 
them  1 — He  wishes  to  send  them  to  our  enemies. — Will  you  send 
me  one  more  book  1 — I  will  send  you  several  more. — Are  you  able 
to  drink  as  much  as  your  neighbour  ? — I  am  able  to  drink  as  much 
as  he  ;  but  our  friend,  the  Russian,  is  able  to  drink  more  than  both 
of  us  (rwr  K'tbc). — Is  the  Russian  able  to  drink  as  much  of  this 
wine  as  of  that  ? — He  is  able  to  drink  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the 
other. — Have  you  anything  good  to  drink  ] — I  have  nothing  to 
drink. 


THIRTY-FIRST  LESSON.— ®in  twi 

Cation. 

The  corner,  bcr  2Btnfc( ; 

the  fountain  (well),        bcr  23runncn  (is  not  softened   in 

the  plur.)  ; 
the  hole,  ba$  Cod). 

To  leave,  to  let.  Caffcn*. 

To  go  for )  to  fetch.        $  o  I  c  n. 

To  send  for.  £  0  I  c  n  laffeu*. 

I  leave     — he  leaves.  3cf)  fofic        —  et  (apt. 

We  leave— they  leave.  2Bir,  (affcn     —  fie  taffcn. 

You  leave.  3(jr  tofftf  (Sic  foffcn). 

Obs.  A.     The  particle  j  it ,  does  not  precede  the  infi- 
nitive joined  to  the  verb  taflen.     See  Lesson  XL.  Ex. 

We  send  for  bread.  §5>tt  laffcn  2?rct>  fyefcn. 

We  wish  to  send  for  wine.  £Btr  roolU'ti  2Bctn  fyotcn  (affcn. 

To  go  for  it,  to  fetch  it.  Sbn  Or  c$  f)o(cn. 

To  go  for  some,  to  fetch  some.  SBctcfycn,  roefefycS  F;eU*n. 

Thou.  £>  ua. 

a  In  addressing  one  another,  the  Germans  use  the  second  person  singular 
and  third  person  plural.  The  second  person  singular  £>U,  thou,  is  used  :  1. 
in  addressing  the  Supreme  Being ;  2.  in  sublime  or  serious  style  and  in  poetry ; 


71 


Thou  hast — thou  art.  £Hi  Ijaft  —  £)u  fcift. 

Art  thou  fatigued  1  SSift  £>u  unite  ? 

I  am  not  fatigued.  3d)  bin  nicl)t  mute. 

Thou  wilt  (wishest), — thou  art  S)u  nritlft  —  3)u  fcmnjt.      , 

able  (canst). 

Art  thou  willing  to  make  my  fire]  SSiflft  £)u  mcin  Jcucr  cmmarfjcn  ? 
I  am  willing  to  make  it,  but  I  3d)  will  c$  cmmadjcn,  abcr  id)  fcmn 

cannot.  nid)t. 

Thou  leavest.  £>ii  lafjcfl. 


Thy. 

To  be  obliged  (must). 

I  must        — he  must. 
We  must    — they  must. 
Thou  must  — you  must. 


Sing.  3)  e  i  n.    Plur.  ®  e  t  n  eb. 
SEuffcn*. 

3d)  mujj      —  cr  mujj. 

nmffcn  —  fie  nwjjcn. 
)u  mu(Jt     —  3fyr  mullet  or  mupt 
(<£tc  mfificn). 


Obs.  B.  The  infinitive  joined  to  the  verb  ntflflen  is 
not  preceded  by  the  particle  jit.  (See  Lesson  XL.) 
Ex. 


muflcn  cit&etten. 

(Sic  Sfjrem  23rutcr  ctncn 
SBrtcf  fd)rcibcn  1 

cr  cwf  ten  90?atft  gcrjen  ? 
nwjj  tafnn  §cbcn. 

^flft  S)u  ^u  tfjun  ? 
3d)  ^aOc  ntcbt5  311  tfyun. 
l)aft  ^)u  gu  trtnfen  ? 
abc  mcf)t$  ^u  trtnfen. 
b«t  tcr  9^ann  ^u  tf)un  ? 
mup  in  ten  SOSalt 


We  must  work. 

Must  you  write  a  letter  to  your 

brother  1 

Is  he  obliged  to  go  to  the  market  ? 
He  is  obliged  to  go  thither. 
What  hast  thou  to  do  1 
I  have  nothing  to  do. 
What  hast  thou  to  drink? 
I  have  nothing  to  drink. 
What  has  the  man  to  do  ? 
He   is  obliged   to  go   into  the 

wood. 

This  evening  (to-night). 
In  the  evening. 
This  morning. 
In  the  morning. 


3.  it  is  a  mark  of  intimacy  among  friends,  and  is  employed  by  parents  and 
children,  brothers  and  sisters,  husbands  and  wives,  towards  one  another  :  in 
general  it  implies  familiarity  founded  on  affection  and  fondness.  In  polite 
conversation,  persons  always  address  each  other  in  the  third  person  plural. 
The  third  person  singular  and  second  person  plural  also,  especially  the  former, 
are  frequently  used  towards  inferiors,  as  servants,  &c.  In  writing,  the  pro- 
nouns of  address  :  5)11,  <5te  and  3br,  have  a  capital  initial  letter. 
b  3>ein  and  Tetne,  thy,  are  declined  exactly  as  mctu  and  meine,  my. 


(  5)tefen  2(6cnt  (accusative). 

f  ^)cute  2(bent. 
\  f  3)eg  2(6cnt^  (genitive). 

t  2(m  7(bent. 

iD'tefen  ^crcjcn  (accusative). 

t  «&eute  9Rer$en. 

1  ^^»  97Jorgem>  (genitive). 

j  2(ni 


72 

EXERCISES.    64. 

Will  you  go  for  some  sugar  1 — I  will  go  for  some. — Son  (90?ctn 
<Sot)n),  wilt  thou  go  for  some  water"? — Yes,  father  (nictn  SSfltcr),  I 
will  go  for  some. — Whither  wilt  thou  go  1 — I  will  go  to  the  well 
in  order  to  fetch  some  water. — Where  is  thy  brother  ! — He  is  at 
the  well. — Will  you  send  for  my  son! — I  will  send  for  him. — 
Will  the  captain  send  for  my  child! — He  will  send  for  him  (c$). — 
Where  is  he  1 — He  is  in  a  corner  of  the  ship. — Can  you  make  a 
hole  in  the  (with  accusative)  table  1 — I  can  make  one. — Art  thou 
able  to  write  a  letter  to  me! — I  am  able  to  write  one  to  you. — 
Must  I  go  any  whither! — Thou  must  go  into  the  garden. — Must  I 
send  for  anything  ! — Thou  must  send  for  good  wine,  good  cheese, 
and  good  bread. — What  must  I  do ! — You  must  write  a  long  letter. 
— To  whom  must  I  write  a  long  letter  ! — You  must  write  one  to 
your  friend. 

65. 

What  must  we  do  ! — You  must  go  into  the  forest  in  order  to 
cut  some  wood. — What  has  the  Englishman  to  do! — He  has 
nothing  to  do. — Has  the  Spaniard  anything  to  do  ! — He  has  to 
work. — Where  can  he  work  ! — He  can  work  in  his  room  and  in 
mine. — When  will  you  give  me  some  money  ! — I  will  give  you 
some  this  evening. — Must  I  come  to  your  house  ! — You  must  come 
to  my  house. — When  must  I  come  to  your  house  ! — This  morning. 
— Must  I  come  to  your  house  in  the  morning  or  in  the  evening! — 
You  must  come  in  the  morning  and  in  the  evening. — Whither 
must  I  go  ! — You  must  go  to  the  great  square  in  order  to  speak  to 
the  merchants. — Where  must  the  peasant  go  to  ! — He  must  go  into 
the  field  in  order  to  cut  some  hay. — Must  I  keep  anything  (for) 
you  (3>bncn)  ! — You  must  keep  (for)  me  (nur)  my  good  gold  and 
my  good  works. — Must  the  children  of  our  friends  do  anything! — 
They  must  work  in  the  morning  and  in  the  evening. — What  must 
the  tailor  mend  (for)  you  ! — He  must  mend  my  old  coat  (for)  me. 
— Which  chicken  must  the  cook  kill ! — He  must  kill  this  and 
that. — Must  I  send  you  these  or  those  books  ! — You  must  send 
me  (both)  these  and  those. 


g 

THIRTY-FOUflTH  LESSON.— Jbiet  nnb 

Csction. 

As  far  as.  SB  t  $  (an  adverb  of  place). 

How  far!  23t£  roef)tn  ?  (See  Lesson  XXVII, 

.Rufe  2.) 

As  far  as  the  corner.  .    S8te»  in  ten  ££mr\'f. 

As  far  as  the  end  of  the  road.       93 i$  an  ta$  ^ntc  tc$ 


73 


The  end, 

the  end  (the  extremity), 

the  road,  the  way, 

To  the  bottom  of  the  cask. 
To  the  bottom  of  the  well. 
To  the  bottom  of  the  wells. 

The  bottom, 
the  garret, 
the  ground, 
the  cask, 
the  purse, 


ta£  (Snfoc  (has  no  plural)  ; 
tab  @nte  (plur.  tie  (Snten) ; 
tec  9Skt> 

23t$  auf  ten  SBctcn  te$  gaffe*. 
93i*auf  ten  G>cunt  te$  SBcunnenS. 
&H*  auf  ten  ©runt  tec  23cunnen. 

tec  ®eten ; 
tec  £toten ; 
tec  ©cunt ; 


tec  JBcutct. 

I  go,  am  going— he  goes,    is  3d)  gefye  —  cc  gef)et  or  gefyt. 

going. 

We  go,  are  going — they  go,  are  SO&tc  gcr)en  —  fie  Qefjeru 

going. 

Thou  goest,  art  going— you  go,  £>u  gcfjeft  or  gcfyft —  3f)C  gcrjct  or 

are  going.  ger;t  (S>ie  cjefjcn). 

A//,  every.  2C  I (. 

31H,  is  declined  like  the  definite  article.  It  is  never 
preceded  or  followed  by  an  article,  but  may  be  so  by 
a  pronoun. 

t  TCtlc  Sage, 
f  2(Ue  Gorgon, 
t  Me  Went. 

Unu 

Um  rwetriel  Ufyc  ? 
Um  nx'lcrje  Sett  ? 
Um  etnS  or  um  cm  U^c.* 


Every  day. 
Every  morning. 
Every  evening. 

At. 

At  what  o'clock  ? 
At  what  time  ] 
At  one  o'clock. 

Half. 

At  half  past  three. 
At  a  quarter  past  one. 
At  a  quarter  past  eleven. 
At  a  quarter  to  one. 
At  twelve  o'clock. 
At  twelve  o'clock  at  night  (mid-  Um 
night). 

The  quarter,  ta$ 


t  Um  r)a(6  mec. 
f  Um  ein  SSiectct  auf  groet. 
t  Um  ctn  SSiectet  auf  gmolf. 
{  Um  tcet  $tectel  auf 
Um  ^roolf  or  urn 


93tcctc(. 


. 
2C  u  $  9  c  ^  e  n  *  (au^ugcfjen). 


At  present,  now. 

To  go  out. 

To  remain,  to  stay. 

*  Ufyr  signifies  clock,  watch,  and  not  hour,  which  is  translated  by  <Sttlttbe. 
When  we  say:  SBieoiel  U!?r  ift  e«?  it  means:  SBteoiel  tfl  eg  auf  ber  U^r? 
How  much  is  it  upon  the  clock  ?  For  this  reason  we  may  leave  out  the  word 
#()r,  when  we  say :  um  ein$,  um  jwolf,  as  above. 


74 


When  do  you  wish  to  go  out? 

I  wish  to  go  out  now. 

To  remain  (to  stay)  at  home. 


SO&cmn  n>etten  (Sic 
3d)  nritt  ie£t 

WciOcn*. 


Here. 

£  ter. 

To  remain  here. 

£ier  fctci&en*. 

There. 

5)  a. 

To  remain  there. 

JDa  &leikn*. 

Are  you  going  to  your  brother  ? 
I  am  going  to  him. 
We  are  —  they  are. 
You  are. 
We  have  —  they  have. 
You  have. 

(Skljcn  ©ie  gu  Sfaem  S3rubctr  ? 
3d)  gcfje  su  tfjm. 
SOStr  finb  —  fie  finb. 
$f)t  feib  (@ie  finb). 
28ir  fjaben  —  fie  fyafccn. 
3f)r  fyaDet  or  ()a()t  ((^te  6fl^'n). 

Are  your  brothers  at  home  ! 
They  are  at  home. 
They  are  not  at  home. 
Are  the  men  thirsty  1 

Have  your  friends  my  books'? 
They  have  them  not. 
Have  they  time  to  write  ? 

To  thee. 
Thcc. 


S3riibct  gu 
©tc  finb  gu  ^>aufc. 
Ctc  finb  md)t  gu  ^>aufe. 
©tnb  btc  Banner  bur(!ig? 


ntctnc 

Ijabcn  fie  nid)t. 
fie  3cit  su  fd)tci6cn  ? 


3)  it  (dative). 

3)  t  c^  (accusative). 


Obs.     Do  and  a#z,  when  used  as  auxiliaries,  are  never 
expressed  in  German.     Ex. 


Do  you  wish  to  take  me  to  my  SEctlcn  ©ie  mid)  311  metncm 

father  1  fiifju'n  ? 

I  wish  to  take  thee  to  him.  3d)  will  >pid)  gu  i^m  filf)rcn. 

Are  you  willing  to  give  me  a  SBctlcn  ^ic  mir  ein  5Kc(fer 

knife  ? 

I  am  willing  to  give  thee  one.      3d)  witt  2)ir  cinS  geben. 
Am  I  going  to  him  ?  ©cfee  id)  gu  tftm  ? 

Thou  art  not  going  to  him,  but  £)u  .qcfjcft  ntdbt  311  ifym,  fonbcrn  5U 

to  me.  mir. 

EXERCISES.  66. 

How  far  do  you  wish  to  go  1  —  I  wish  to  go  as  far  as  the  end  of 
the  forest.  —  How  for  does  your  brother  wish  to  go  ?  —  He  wishes 
to  go  as  far  as  the  end  of  that  road.  —  How  far  does  the  wine  go  ? 

—  It  goes  to  the  bottom  of  the  cask.  —  How  far  does  the  water  go  ? 

—  It  goes  to  the  bottom  of  the  well.  —  Whither  art  thou  going  1  — 
I  am  going  to  the  market.  —  Whither  are  we  going]  —  We  are  going 
into  the  country.  —  Are  you    going  as  far  as  the  square  ?  —  I  am 


75 

going  as  far  as  the  fountain. — When  does  your  cook  go  to  the 
market  1 — He  goes  there  every  morning. — Can  you  speak  to  the 
nobleman] — I  can  speak  to  him  every  day. — Can  I  see  your 
father  ] — You  can  see  him  ervery  evening. — At  what  o'clock  can  I 
see  him  ] — You  can  see  him  every  evening  at  eight  o'clock. — Will 
you  come  to  me  to-day  1 — I  cannot  come  to  you  to-day,  but  to-mor- 
row.— At  what  o'clock  will  you  come  to-morrow  ] — I  will  come  at 
half  past  eight. — Can  you  not  come  at  a  quarter  past  eight  1 — I 
cannot. — At  what  o'clock  does  your  son  go  to  the  captain  1 — He 
goes  to  him  at  a  quarter  before  one. — At  what  o'clock  is  your 
friend  at  home  .* — At  midnight. 

67. 

Have  you  a  mind  to  go  out  ] — I  have  no  mind  to  go  out.—When 
will  you  go  out  ] — I  will  go  out  at  half  past  three. — Does  your 
father  wish  to  go  out  ] — He  does  not  wish  to  go  out ;  he  wishes  to 
remain  at  home. — Are  you  willing  to  remain  here,  my  dear  (licb) 
friend  ] — I  cannot  remain  here,  I  must  go  to  the  warehouse. — Must 
you  go  to  your  brother  1 — I  must  go  to  him — At  what  o'clock  must 
you  write  your  letters  ] — I  must  write  them  at  midnight. — Do  you 
go  to  your  neighbour  in  the  evening  or  in  the  morning] — I  go  to 
him  (both)  in  the  evening  and  in  the  morning. — Where  are  you 
going  to  now  ] — I  am  going  to  the  play — Where  are  you  going  to 
to-night  1 — I  am  going  nowhither;  I  must  remain  at  home  in  order 
to  write  letters. — Are  your  brothers  at  home  ] — They  are  not  there. 
—Where  are  they  1— They  are  in  the  country. — Where  are  your 
friends  going  to  1 — They  are  going  home. — Has  your  tailor  as 
many  children  as  your  shoemaker  1 — He  has  quite  as  many  of  them 
(thrcr). — Have  the  sons  of  your  shoemaker  as  many  boots  as  their 
father  ] — They  have  (tcrcn)  more  than  he. — Have  the  children  of 
our  hatter  as  much  bread  as  wine  1 — They  have  more  of  the  one 
than  of  the  other. — Has  our  carpenter  one  more  son  ] — He  has 
several  more. — Are  the  Italians  thirsty  ] — They  are  thirsty  and 
hungry. — Have  they  anything  to  do  ] — They  have  nothing  to  do. — 
Are  the  children  of  the  Irish  hungry  or  thirsty  ] — They  are  neither 
hungry  nor  thirsty,  but  fatigued. 

68. 

Have  you  time  to  go  out  ] — I  have  no  time  to  go  out, — WThat 
have  you  to  do  at  home  ] — I  must  write  letters  to  my  friends. — 
Must  you  sweep  your  room  ] — I  must  sweep  it. — Are  you  obliged 
to  lend  your  brothers  money  ] — I  am  obliged  to  lend  them  some. — 
Must  you  go  into  the  garden? — I  must  go  thither. — At  what  o'clock 
must  you  go  thither  1 — I  must  go  thither  at  a  quarter  past  twelve. 
— Are  you  obliged  to  go  to  my  father  at  eleven  o'clock  at  night 
(Tfbcnfcs)  ] — I  arn  obliged  to  go  to  him  at  midnight. — Where  are 
the  brothers  of  our  bailiff? — They  are  in  the  great  forest  in  order 
to  cut  great  trees. — Have  they  money  to  buy  bread  and  wine] — 
They  have  some. — Are  our  children  wrong  in  going  ($u  Cjcfycn)  to 


76 

the  English  ] — They  are  not  wrong  in  going  ($u  $cfjcn)  to  them.— 
Must  the  children  of  the  French  go  to  the  children  of  the  English 
• — They  must  go  to  them. — Is  the  Russian  right  in  remaining  ($1 
bletfrcn)  with  the  Turk  ? — He  is  not  wrong  in  remaining  with  him 
— Will  you  send  for  some  wine  and  glasses  ? — I  will  neither  sen< 
for  wine  nor  for  glasses ;  I  am  not  thirsty. — Is  thy  father  thirsty 
—He  is  not  thirsty. — Are  you  willing  to  give  me  some  money  ii 
order  to  go  for  some  bread  1 — I  am  willing  to  give  you  some  ii 
order  to  go  for  some  bread  and  beer. 


THIRTY-THIRD  LESSON.—  JUui  tmfc 


To  sell.  aScrfaufen. 

To  tell,  to  say.  <S  a  a,  c  n. 

To  tell  a  man.  (Sinem  SOfrmnc  facjen. 

The  word,  tag  SOScrt  ; 

the  favour,  tcr  ®efatten  ; 

the  pleasure,  tag  ^Scrgniigcn. 

To  give  pleasure.  SScr^niigcn  macfycn. 

To  do  a  favour.  Garten  (befallen  tfyun*. 

Will  you  tell  the  servant  to  SBoften  Cie  tern  23ettcnten  fagcn, 
make  the  fire  1  tag  gcuer  an$umad)cn  ? 

J  will  tell  him  to  make  it.  Set)  will  i(jm  faQen,  eg  an$umncf)cn. 

Will  you  tell  the  servant  to  buy  SBotlcn  ©te  tern  S3ct>tcntcu  fagcn, 
a  broom  1  ctncn  SBcfcn  %u  fan  fen  ? 

I  will  tell  him  to  buy  one.  3d)  will  ifom  facjcn,  einen  ^u  faufcn. 

It  is.  ©  g  i  ft. 

Late.  ©pat. 

What  oVlork  is  it  I  $*  m*  ^  ift  C^  ? 

\  t  kernel  Ul)r  t(l  eg  ? 

It  is  three  o'clock.  (£g  ift  tret  ilf)r. 

It  is  twelve  o'clock.  <£g  tft  sn)8tf  Owolf  Uf)r). 

It  is  a  quarter  past  twelve.  f  @6  ift  etn  Xi5tertel  auf  cing. 

It  wants  a  quarter  to  six.  f  ©g  ift  tret  SStertel  auf  fecl)g. 

It  is  half  past  one.  j  ©$  ^ft  f)at6  5tt)et. 

To  5e  acquainted  ivith  {to  know),  jt  e  n  n  C  n  (governs  the  accus.). 

To  be  acquainted  with  (to  know)  (Sinen  SOJenfcfyen  fennen** 

a  man. 
Doyoiiknow  (are  you  acquainted  Bennett  (Sic  tiefen 

with)  this  man  1 
I  know  him  (am  acquainted  with  3c!)  fenne  tf)n. 

him). 


77 


To.  want. 

To  be  in  want  of. 

I  want  it. 

I  am  in  want  of  it. 

Do  you  want  this  hat"? 

Are  you  in  want  of  this  haf? 

I  want  it. 

I  am  in  want  of  it. 

Do  you  want  this  money  ? 


C9?otbto,   babcn*  (governs  the 
£      accusative). 

|  S3  e  n  o  1 1)  t  a,  t  fcin*  (governs  the 
\      genitive). 

3d)  babe  cs  nb'tbicj. 
3d)  Inn  beffen  bcnctbtat.    (See  Les- 
son XVI.) 

£abcn  ©te  fctcfcn  £ut  nctbta,? 
©int>  ©te  btefeS  £ute$  benotbia,t  ? 
Set)  ba&e  tbn  notbtg. 
3d)  bin  fccffcn  bcnotbtgt. 
£abcn  @te  btcfe*  ©clb  notbta,? 


Are  you  in  want  of  this  money  ?  ©tnb  (Sic  btefcS  ®clbe$ 


babe  e*  n(Jtbtg. 
3d)  bin  tcffcn  benb'tbtjt. 
3d)  bak  c^  nid)t  nctbtg. 
3d)  bin  b«ffe»  nic^t  bcnotf)tc;t, 

3d)  babe  nicbt^  notbig. 
©ie  ®c(b 


I  want  it. 

I  am  in  want  of  it. 

I  do  not  want  it. 

I  am  not  in  want  of  it. 

I  do  not  want  anything. 

I  am  not  in  want  of  anything. 

Do  you  want  money  1 

Are  you  in  want  of  money  ] 

I  want  some. 

I  am  in  want  of  some. 

I  do  not  want  any. 

I  am  not  in  want  of  any. 

Obs.  A.  33enotfyigt  few*,  must  never  be  used  when 
the  noun  is  not  preceded  by  a  determinative  word  like 
the  definite  article,  or  a  possessive  or  demonstrative 
pronoun. 

What  ?  805  a  $  ? 

wSt  a?eyy°o™want  of  1  }  «**  *<*«  ©«  nWd  ? 

Obs.  B.  All  the  cases  of  the  personal  pronouns 
have  been  more  or  less  employed  thus  far,  except  the 
genitive,  which  is  as  follows  : 

Of  me — of  thee — of  him.  SRctnet  —  £)ctnct  —  fctncr. 

Of  us— of  you — of  them.  Unfcr  —  (Suet  (3b^r)  —  ^rct  (f°r 

all  genders). 

Is  he  in  want  of  me  ?  3ft  er  mctncr  benefit  ? 

He  is  in  want  of  you.  (£r  tft  3brcr  bcnotbigt.  (See  Les- 

son XVI.) 

Are  you  in  want  of  these  books  ?  ©tnb  <Stc  btcfct  S5ficher  bcnotbtgt  ? 

I  am  in  want  of  them.  3cb  bin  bcrfclbcn  bcnctbt^t. 

Is  he  in  want  of  my  brothers  1     3ft  cr  meincr  SBtiiK'r  bcnotbtQt  ? 

He  is  in  want  of  them.  (£t  tft  thrcr  benotbtat.  (See  Les- 

son XVI.) 


78 

EXERCISES.    69. 

Will  you  do  me  a  favour  7 — Yes,  Sir,  what  one  (ivaS  fur  ctncn)  7 
— Will  you  tell  your  brother  to  sell  me  his  horse] — I  will  tell  him 
to  sell  it  you. — Will  you  tell  my  servants  to  sweep  my  large 
rooms  7 — 1  will  tell  them  to  sweep  them. — Will  you  tell  your  son 
to  come  to  my  father  1 — I  will  tell  him  to  come  to  him. — Have  you 
anything  to  tell  me  1 — I  have  nothing  to  tell  you  (put  the  dative 
before  the  accus.). — Have  you  anything  to  say  to  my  father  1 — I 
have  a  word  to  say  to  him. — Do  your  brothers  wish  to  sell  their 
carriage  1 — They  do  not  wish  to  sell  it. — John  (^ofyann)  !  art  thou 
there  (Da)  1 — Yes,  Sir,  I  am  here  (t>n). — Wilt  thou  go  to  my  hatter 
to  tell  him  to  mend  my  hat  1 — I  will  go  to  him. — Wilt  thou  go  to 
the  tailor  to  tell  him  to  mend  my  coats  1 — I  will  go  to  him. — Art 
thou  willing  to  go  to  the  market  1 — I  am  willing  to  go  thither. — 
What  has  the  merchant  to  sell  1 — He  has  beautiful  leather  gloves, 
combs,  and  good  cloth  to  sell. — Has  he  any  shirts  to  sell  1 — He 
has  some  to  sell. — Does  he  wish  to  sell  me  his  horses  1 — He 
wishes  to  sell  them  to  you. 

70. 

Is  it  late  7 — It  is  not  late. — What  o'clock  is  it  7 — It  is  a  quarter 
past  twelve. — At  what  o'clock  does  your  father  wish  to  go  out  7 — 
He  wishes  to  go  out  at  a  quarter  to  nine. — Will  he  sell  this  or  that 
horse  7 — He  will  sell  neither  this  nor  that. — Does  he  wish  to  buy 
this  or  that  coat  7 — He  wishes  to  buy  both. — Has  he  one  horse 
more  to  sell  7 — He  has  one  more,  but  he  does  not  wish  to  sell  it. — 
Has  he  one  carriage  more  to  sell  7 — He  has  not  one  more  carriage 
to  sell ;  but  he  has  a  few  more  oxen  to  sell. — When  will  he  sell 
them  7 — He  will  sell  them  to-day. — Will  he  sell  them  in  the 
morning  or  in  the  evening  7 — He  will  sell  them  this  evening. — At 
what  o'clock  7 — At  half  past  five. — Can  you  go  to  the  baker  7 — I 
cannot  go  to  him ;  it  is  late. — How  late  is  it  7 — It  is  midnight. 
— Do  you  wish  to  see  that  man  7 — I  wrish  to  see  him,  in  order  to 
know  him. — Does  your  father  wish  to  see  my  brothers  7 — He 
wishes  to  see  them,  in  order  to  know  them. — Does  he  wish  to  see 
my  horse  7 — He  wishes  to  see  it. — At  what  o'clock  does  he  wish 
to  see  it  7 — He  wishes  to  see  it  at  six  o'clock. — Where  does  he 
wish  to  see  it  7 — He  wishes  to  see  it  in  (cwf)  the  great  square. — 
Has  the  German  much  corn  to  sell  7 — He  has  but  little  to  Sell. — 
What  knives  has  the  merchant  to  sell  7 — He  has  good  knives  to 
sell. — How  many  more  knives  has  he  7 — He  has  six  more. — Has 
the  Irishman  much  more  wine  7 — He  has  not  much  more. — Hast 
thou  wine  enough  to  drink  7 — I  have  not  much,  but  enough. — Art 
thou  able  to  drink  much  wine  7 — I  am  able  to  drink  much. — Canst 
thou  drink  some  every  day  7 — I  can  drink  some  every  morning  and 
every  evening. — Can  thy  brother  drink  as  much  as  thou  7 — He  can 
drink  more  than  I. 


79 

71. 

What  are  you  in  want  of]  —  I  am  in  want  of  a  good  hat.  —  Are 
you  in  want  of  this  knife  ]  —  I  am  in  want  of  it.  —  Do  you  want 
money]  —  I  want  some.  —  Does  your  brother  want  pepper]  —  He 
does  not  want  any.  —  Does  he  want  some  boots  ]  —  He  does  not 
want  any.  —  What  does  my  brother  want  ]  —  He  wants  nothing.  — 
Who  wants  some  sugar]  —  Nobody  wants  any.  —  Does  anybody 
want  money  ]  —  Nobody  wants  any.  —  Does  your  father  want  any- 
thing] —  He  wants  nothing.  —  What  do  I  want]  —  You  want  no- 
thing. —  Art  thou  in  want  of  my  book  ]  —  I  am  in  want  of  it.  —  Is 
thy  father  in  want  of  it  ]  —  He  is  not  in  want  of  it.  —  Does  your 
friend  want  this  stick]  —  He  wants  it.  —  Does  he  want  these  or 
those  corks  ]  —  He  wants  neither  these  nor  those.  —  Are  you  in  want 
of  me]  —  I  am  in  want  of  thee.  —  When  do  you  want  me]  —  At 
present.  —  What  have  you  to  say  to  me  ]  —  I  have  a  word  to  say  to 
thee.  —  Is  your  son  in  want  of  us  ]  —  He  is  in  want  of  you  and 
your  brothers.  —  Are  you  in  want  of  my  servants  ]  —  I  am  in  want 
of  them.  —  Does  any  one  want  my  brother  ]  —  No  one  wants  him. 


THIRTY-FOURTH  LESSON.—   kr  unb  irmsigste 


THE     PRESENT. 

There  is  no  distinction  in  German  between  :  I  love, 
do  love  and  am  loving.  All  these  present  tenses  are 
expressed  by  :  id)  [iebe,  I  love. 

In  the  regular  verbs  the  third  person  singular  and 
second  person  plural  of  the  present  tense  indicative 
mode  are  alike,  and  terminate  (even  in  most  of  the  ir- 
regular verbs)  in  e  t  or  t*  The  first  and  third  persons 
plural  in  all  German  verbs  are  like  the  infinitive. 


5 


To  love.  2  i  e  t)  e  n. 

love,  C  loves,          J 

do  love,        he  ^  does  love,  >3dj  liebc,    ct  licfcet  or  ftc&t. 

am  loving.  (  is  loving,    y 


art  loving.  (  are  loving.  ) 

i  love,  f  love,  1 

We      •?  do  love,  they-?  do  love,      >2Bit  Ittftcn,   ftc  Ucfccn. 
f  are  loving.  (  are  loving,  y 


80 


Obs.  A.  The  letter  e  is  often  rejected  in  the  second 
and  third  persons  singular  and  in  the  second  person 
plural  of  the  present  tense ;  but  never  in  verbs  the 
root  of  which  ends  in  b,  t,  t  f),  ft,  or  in  two  or  more 
consonants,  after  which  t  or  ft  could  not  be  distinctly 
pronounced,  as  in  :  fettbett*,  to  send ;  bit  fenbefl,  er  fenbet, 
3fyr  fenbet ;  orbnen,  to  set  in  order  ;  bit  orbitefl,  er  orbnet, 
3fyr  crbltet,  &c.  On  the  other  hand  this  contraction 
always  takes  place  in  verbs  that  end  in  e  I  n  or  e  r  it, 
as :  fcfymeicfyeftt,  to  flatter ;  bit  fdpneicfyetft,  er  fcfjmeidjeft, 
fcfjmetcfyelr ;  cinbertt,  to  alter ;  bit  anbertf,  er  dnbert,  3 
bert*  (See  Lesson  XXIV.  the  Infinitive.) 


93  r  o  u  d)  e  n  (governs  the  accusa- 
tive). 


To  want. 

Do  you  want  your  money  ? 

I  want  it.  3d)  braucfye  e$. 

To  set  in  order.  £)  r  t>  n  e  tt. 

To  0;?ew.  £)  e  f  f  n  e  n  (aufmndKtt, 

Do  you  open  the  window  1  9ftad)cn  ©ic  fca$  Jenfter  auf  ? 

I  open  it.  3d)  macfye  cs  cwf. 

Ofo.  jB.  German  verbs  are  generally  not  irregular 
in  the  present  tense,  but  rather  in  the  imperfect  and 
past  participle.  Some,  however,  are  irregular  in  the 
second  and  third  persons  singular ;  and  as  pupils 
should  be  acquainted  with  all  the  irregularities,  we 
shall  always  mark  these  two  persons  whenever  they 
present  any.  Of  those  which  we  have  seen  already, 
the  following  are  irregular  in  the  second  and  third 
persons  singular. 

To  give : 

thou  givest    — he  gives. 
To  see : 

thoa  seest      — he  sees. 
To  speak  : 

thou  speakest — he  speaks. 
To  take,  to  carry  : 

thou  carriest  — he  carries. 
To  wash  : 

thou  washes!  — he  wTashes. 
To  break : 

thou  breakest — he  breaks. 


(Sic&en*  : 


£)u 

Stcicjen*  : 
£>u 
SB&afcftcn*  : 


cjt&fl      —  er  cjtfct. 
ficf)ft     —  cr  fiefjt. 

—  er  fprtcfyt 

•—  er 
wafcfyeft  —  er 

t  —  et 


81 

Personal  pronouns  not  standing  in  the  nomina- 
tive, take  their  place  after  the  verb. 

Do  you  love  him  ?  fitc&cn  (Sic  i  fj  n  ] 

I  do  love  him.  Set)  Itcbc  i  1)  n. 

I  do  not  love  him.  Scl)  lii'&c  i  1)  n  n  t  cf)  t. 

Does    the    servant  sweep    the  Jteftrt    bet   SBcfctentc    t>a$    Simmer 
room  1  ci  u  $  ] 


C.  In  simple  tenses,  as  the  present  or  imper- 
fect, the  separable  particle  is  always  placed  at  the 
end  of  the  sentence  ;  unless  this  begins  with  a  con- 
junction, a  relative  pronoun,  or  a  relative  adverb,  in 
which  case  the  particle  is  not  separated  from  the  verb, 
which  then  takes  its  place  at  the  end. 

He  sweeps  it.  (?t  fcf)rt  e£  cui$. 

Does  your  father  go  out  to-day  1  ©cfyt  3()t  SSnter  fccutc  cms  1 

He  does  not  go  out  to-day.  (£t  gefyt  fycutc  ntcl)t  cw$. 

EXERCISES.  72. 

Do  you  love  your  brother  1  —  I  love  him.  —  Does  your  father  love 
hirn  ]  —  He  does  not  love  him.  —  Dost  thou  love  me,  my  good  child  ? 

—  I  love  thee.  —  Dost  thou  love  this  ugly  man  ]  —  I  do  not  love  him. 

—  Does  your  father  want  his  servant]  —  He  does  want  him.  —  Dost 
thou  want  anything  1  —  I  want  nothing.  —  Does  the  servant  open  the 
window  1  —  He  does  open  it.  —  Dost  thou  open  it]  —  1  do  not  open 
it.  —  Dost  thou  set  my  books  in  order]  —  I  do  set  them  in  order.  — 
Does   the  servant  set  our  boots  or  our  shoes  in  order  ?  —  He  sets 
(both)  the  one  and  the  other  in  order.  —  Do  our  children  love  us  ]  — 
They  do  love  us.  —  Do  we  love  our  enemies  ]  —  We  do  not  love 
them.  —  Do  you  want  your  money  ]  —  I  do  want  it.  —  Do  we  want 
our  carriage  ]  —  We  do  want  it.  —  Are  our  friends  in  want  of  their 
clothes  (.ftU'ifccr)  ?  —  They  are  in  want  of  them.  —  What  do  you  give 
me  ]  —  I  do  not  give  thee  anything.  —  Do  you  give  my  brother  the 
book  ]  —  I  do  give  it  him.  —  Do  you  give  him  a  hat  ]  —  I  do  give  him 
one. 

73. 

Dost  thou  see  anything  1  —  I  see  nothing.  —  Do  you  see  my  large 
garden  ]  —  I  do  see  it.  —  Does  your  father  see  our  ship  ]  —  He  does 
not  see  it,  but  we  see  it.  —  How  many  ships  do  you  see  ]  —  We  see 
a  good  many  ;  we  see  more  than  thirty  of  them.  —  Do  you  give  me 
books]  —  I  do  give  thee  some.  —  Does  our  father  give  you  money  1 
-—He  does  not  give  us  any.  —  Does  he  give  you  hats  ]  —  He  does 
not  give  us  any.  —  Do  you  see  many  sailors  ]  —  We  see  more 
soldiers  (fcct  (Selfcnt,  plur.  en)  than  sailors.  —  Do  the  soldiers  see 
many  storehouses  ]  —  They  see  more  gardens  than  storehouses.  — 
4* 


82 

Do  the  English  give  you  good  cakes  ] — They  do  give  us  some. — 
Do  you  give  me  as  much  wine  as  beer  ] — I  give  thee  as  much  of 
the  one  as  of  the  other. — Can  you  give  me  some  more  cakes  1 — I 
can  give  thee  no  more  ;  I  have  not  many  more. — Do  you  give  me 
the  horse  which  you  have  ] — I  do  not  give  you  that  which  I  have. — 
Which  horse  do  you  give  me  ] — I  give  you  that  of  my  brother. 

74. 

Do  you  speak  to  the  neighbour  ] — I  do  speak  to  him. — Does  he 
speak  to  you  1 — He  does  not  speak  to  me. — Do  your  brothers  speak 
to  you  1 — They  do  speak  to  us. — When  dost  thou  speak  to  thy 
father  1 — I  speak  to  him  every  morning  and  every  evening. — What 
dost  thou  carry  1 — I  carry  a  book. — Where  dost  thou  carry  it  to  1 — I 
carry  it  home. — Do  you  wash  your  stockings  ] — I  do  not  wash 
them. — Does  your  brother  wash  as  many  shirts  as  stockings  1 — He 
washes  more  of  the  one  than  of  the  other. — Hast  thou  many  more 
stockings  to  wash  ] — I  have  not  many  more  to  wash. — How  many 
more  shirts  have  your  friends  to  wash  1 — They  have  two  more  to 
wash. — What  does  your  servant  carry  ] — He  carries  a  great  table. 
— What  do  these  men  carry  1 — They  carry  our  wooden  chairs. — 
Where  do  they  carry  them  to  ] — They  carry  them  into  the  large 
room  of  our  brothers. — Do  your  brothers  wash  their  stockings  or 
ours  ] — They  neither  wash  yours  nor  theirs  ;  they  wash  those  of 
their  children. 

75. 

Dost  thou  not  break  my  glass  1 — No,  Sir,  I  do  not  break  it. — Do 
the  sons  of  our  neighbours  break  our  glasses  ] — They  do  break  them. 
— Who  tears  your  books  1 — The  young  man  tears  them. — Do  you 
not  tear  them  ] — I  do  not  tear  them. — Do  the  soldiers  cut  trees  ] — 
They  do  cut  some. — Do  you  buy  as  many  hats  as  gloves  1 — I  buy 
more  of  the  one  than  of  the  other. — Does  your  brother  buy  any 
bread  ] — He  is  obliged  to  buy  some  ;  he  is  hungry. — Do  our 
brothers  buy  any  wine  1 — They  are  obliged  to  buy  some  ;  they  are 
thirsty. — Do  you  break  anything. — We  do  not  break  anything. — 
Who  breaks  our  chairs  ] — Nobody  breaks  them. — Dost  thou  buy 
anything! — I  do  not  buy  anything. — Who  keeps  (takes  care  of) 
our  money  1 — My  father  keeps  it. — Do  your  brothers  take  care  of 
my  books  1 — They  do  take  care  of  them. — Dost  thou  take  care  of 
anything] — I  do  not  take  care  of  anything. 

76. 

Does  the  tailor  mend  our  coats  ] — He  does  mend  them. — What 
dost  thou  write] — I  write  a  letter. — To  whom  dost  thou  write  a 
letter  ] — To  my  father. — When  does  thy  brother  write  his  letters  ? 
— He  writes  them  in  the  morning  and  in  the  evening. — What  dost 
thou  now. — I  do  nothing. — At  what  o'clock  do  you  go  to  the  the- 
atre ] — At  a  quarter  past  seven. — What  o'clock  is  it  now  ] — It 


83 

wants  a  quarter  to  six. — At  -what  o'clock  does  your  cook  go  to  the 
market? — He  goes  there  at  five  o'clock  (put  tafyin  to  the  end). — 
Does  he  go  thither  in  the  evening  1 — No,  he  goes  thither  in  the 
morning. — Do  you  go  any  whither  ] — I  go  no  whither;  hut  my 
brothers  go  into  the  garden. — Dost  thou  drink  anything  1 — I  drink 
nothing  ;  but  the  Italian  drinks  good  wine  and  good  beer. — Do  you 
send  me  one  more  book  1 — I  do  not  send  you  one  more. — Are  you 
answering  his  letter  ? — I  am  answering  it. — Does  he  answer  thine  1 
— He  does  answer  it. — What  do  you  say  1 — I  say  nothing. — Must 
I  give  him  money  to  remain  here  1 — You  must  give  him  some  to 
go  out. — Is  this  man  selling  anything  1 — He  is  selling  good  cakes. 
— What  do  you  sell] — I  sell  nothing;  but  my  friends  sell  nails, 
knives,  and  horse-shoes. — What  does  the  man  say  1 — He  says  no- 
thing.— What  art  thou  looking  for  1 — I  am  not  looking  for  any- 
thing. 

***  We  should  fill  volumes,  were  we  to  give  all  the  exercises  that  are  applica- 
ble to  our  lessons,  and  which  the  pupils  may  very  easily  compose  by  them- 
selves. We  shall  therefore  merely  repeat  what  we  have  already  mentioned 
at  the  commencement :  pupils  who  wish  to  improve  rapidly  ought  to  compose 
a  great  many  sentences  in  addition  to  those  given ;  but  they  must  pronounce 
them  aloud.  This  is  the  only  way  by  which  they  will  acquire  the  habit  of 
speaking  fluently. 


THIRTY-FIFTH   LESSON.  —  Jfmf  ttnfr 
Certion. 


The  pain, 
the  tooth, 
the  ear, 

the  neck, 
the  ache, 
the  evil, 


tct 

ter  3afjn ; 

tag  £)f)r   (is  not  softened 

takes  en  in  the  plur.) ; 
tec  £a(* ; 

tag  £Belj  (plur.  en  *) ; 
tag  UcOct. 


and 


Sore  (ill,  wicked).     SB  6  f  C . 
Bad.  ©d)ltmm. 

Evil,  ill.  Ucbet. 


Have  you  a  sore  finger  1 

I  have  a  sore  finger. 

Has  your  brother  a  sore  foot  1 

He  has  a  sore  eye. 

We  have  sore  eyes. 


©ic  ctnen  fcb'fen  Jtncjcr  ? 

f)afce  etnen  fcofen  $tnqer. 

Sbt  S3rutet  einen 
f)at  cm  Oofeg  2Cua,e. 
c  fyafccn  fcofe  #ua,cn. 


«  $a«  2Bef),  the  ache,  is  employed  in  the  plural  only  to  denote  the  pangs  of 
childbirth. 


84 

The  head-ache,  bag 

the  tooth-ache,  bag 

the  ear-ache,  ba$ 

a  sore  throat, 

a  pain  in  one's  back,  3?ucfenfd)mer3. 

He  has  the  head-ache. 

I  have  the  tooth-ache*  3d) 

The  elbow,  tier  (StlOegcn  ; 

the  back,  bet  SKucfcn  ; 

the  knee,  bag  jtnte.d 

To  bring.  IB  r  i  n  g  c  n  *. 

To  find.  gin  ten*. 

That  which  (what).  255  a  $  (fcasicnigc  rccfcfyctf,  t>a$ 


O&s.  -4.    90Ba£  is  often  used  instead  of  ba$jenige,  tt>el* 
or  ba3,  melcf^e^/  that  which.     (See  Lesson  XXIX.) 

Do  you  find  what  you  are  look-  gintxm  <Sicx  w  a  $  (Sic  fucfycn  T 

ing  for  ? 

I  find  what  I  am  looking  for*        Scb  fwfcc,  n?as  left  fucl)C. 
He  does  not  find  what  he  is  look-  (St  fmfcet  ntcfyt,  n?a^  cr  fuc^f. 

ing  for. 

We  find  what  we  are  looking  for*  2Btt  ftnbcn,  n>a$  rmr  fud)cn. 
1  have  what  I  want.  3cf)  ^abc,  tva$  tcl)  brand)?. 

I  mend  what  you  mend.  3d)  bcffcre  oii^,  wa^   ©U  auskf; 

fern. 

Obs.  B.  As  the  second  member  of  this  phrase  be- 
gins with  a  relative  pronoun,  the  particle  au£  is  not 
separated  from  its  verb  which  is  removed  to  the  end. 
(See  Obs.  C.  Lesson  XXXIV.  and  rule  of  Syntax,  Les- 
son XLVII.) 
To  read  (thou  reddest,  he  reads),  gcfen*  (t>u  licfcfl,  cr  liefct  or 


To  study.  €5  1  U  t>  t  C  C  tt  . 

To  learn.  8  c  r  n  c  n  . 

C.  The  particle  j  ll  does  not  precede  the  infini- 
tive joined  to  the  verb  krneit,  to  learn.  (See  Lesson 
XL,  Ex. 

b  Compound  words  are  of  the  gender  of  the  last  component  which  expresses 
the  fundamental  or  general  idea, 

c  &  corner  5,  pain,  is  here  in  the  plural.  In  compound  words,  2Se^  is  em- 
ployed in  the  singular,  and  <Sd)mer$  in  the  plural,  thus  :  3$  f)ttfo  Jlopfttjcty, 
and  :  3^J  We  .^o^ff^merjen,  I  have  the  head-ache. 

A  QdS  ^nie,  the  knee,  does  not  take  an  additional  C  in  the  plural  and  is  ne- 
vertheless pronounced  as  if  it  did. 


85 

I  learn  to  read.  f  Sdj  tone  fcfen. 

He  learns  to  write.  f  @*  tont  fcfyreibcn. 


French,  fran^jifd)  (an  adjective6)  ; 

English,  cng(tfd)  ; 

German,  tcutfd). 

Do  you  learn  German  ?  Scrncn  ©tc  tcutfcf)  ? 

I  do  learn  it.  3d)  tone  c$. 

I  do  not  learn  it.  3d)  tone  c$  ntd)t. 

EXERCISES.     77. 

Where  is  your  father  1  —  He  is  at  home.  —  Does  he  not  go  outl—  • 
He  is  not  able  to  go  out  ;  he  has  the  head-ache.  —  Hast  thou  the 
head-ache?  —  I  have  not  the  head-ache,  but  the  ear-ache.  —  What 
day  of  the  month  is  it  (Den  ttnernditt'u  fjaben  ttur,  Lesson  XXI)  to- 
day ?—  It  is  the  twelfth  to-day.  —  What  day  of  the  month  is  (Set 
roictndfie  ift)  to-morrow  1  —  To-morrow  is  the  thirteenth.  —  What 
teeth  have  you?  —  I  have  good  teeth.  —  What  teeth  has  your  bro- 
ther? —  He  has  bad  teeth.  —  Has  the  Englishman  the  tooth-ache  ?— 
He  has  not  the  tooth-ache  ;  he  has  a  sore  eye.  —  Has  the  Italian  a 
sore  eye  1*  —  He  has  not  a  sore  eye,  but  a  sore  foot.  —  Have  I  a  sore 
finger?  —  You  have  no  sore  finger,  but  a  sore  knee.  —  Will  you  cut 
me  some  bread  ?  —  I  cannot  cut  you  any  ;  1  have  sore  fingers.  — 
W^ill  anybody  cut  me  some  cheese  ?  —  Nobody  will  cut  you  any.  — 
Are  you  looking  for  any  one  ?  —  I  am  not  looking  for  any  one.— 
Has  any  one  the  ear-ache  ?  —  No  one  has  the  ear-ache.  —  Wliat  is 
the  painter  looking  for?  —  He  is  not  looking  for  anything.  —  Whom 
are  you  looking  for  ?  —  I  am  looking  for  your  son.  —  WTho  is  look- 
ing for  me  ?  —  No  one  is  looking  for  you.  —  Dost  thou  find  what  thou 
art  looking  for  ?  —  I  do  find  what  I  am  looking  for  ;  but  the  captain 
does  not  find  what  he  is  looking  for. 

78. 

Who  has  a  sore  throat  ?  —  We  have  sore  throats.  —  Has  any  one 
sore  eyes  ?  —  The  Germans  have  sore  eyes.  —  Does  the  tailor  make 
my  coat  ?  —  He  does  not  make  it  ;  he  has  a  pain  in  his  back.  —  Does 
the  shoemaker  make  my  shoes  ?  —  He  is  unable  (fcmn  nid)t)  to  make 
them  ;  he  has  sore  elbows.  —  Does  the  merchant  bring  us  beautiful 
purses  (t>ct  sj$c»tct)  ?  —  He  cannot  go  out  ;  he  has  sore  feet.  —  Does 
the  Spaniard  find  the  umbrella  which  he  is  looking  for?  —  He  does 
find  it.  —  Do  the  butchers  find  the  sheep  which  they  are  looking  for  ? 

—  They  do  find  them.  —  Does  the  tailor  find  his  thimble  ?  —  He  does 
not  find  it.  —  Dost  thou  find  the  paper  which  thou  art  looking  for?  — 
I  do  not  find  it.  —  Do  we  find  what  we  are  looking  for  ?  —  We  do 
not  find  what  we  are  looking  for.  —  W^hat  is  the  nobleman  doing? 

—  He  does  what  you  are  doing.  —  WThat  is  he  doing'  in  his  room  ?— 
He  is  reading. 

«  Derived  from  ter  $ranjofe,  the  Frenchman. 


86 

79. 

Art  thou  reading? — I  am  not  reading. — Do  the  sons  of  the  noble- 
men study] — They  do  study. — What  are  they  studying] — They 
are  studying  German. — Art  thou  studying  English  ] — I  have  no 
time  to  study  it. — Are  the  Dutch  looking  for  this  or  that  ship  ] — 
They  are  looking  for  both. — Is  the  servant  looking  for  this  or  that 
broom  1 — He  is  neither  looking  for  this  nor  that. — Who  is  learning 
German  1 — The  sons  of  the  captains  and  those  of  the  noblemen  are 
learning  it. — When  does  your  friend  study  French] — He  studies 
it  in  the  morning. — At  what  o'clock  does  he  study  it  ] — He  studies 
it  at  ten  o'clock. — Does  he  study  it  every  day  ] — He  studies  it 
every  morning  and  every  evening. — What  are  the  children  of  the 
carpenter  doing] — They  are  reading. — Are  they  reading  German] 
— They  are  reading  French  ;  but  we  are  reading  English. — What 
books  does  your  son  read  ] — He  reads  good  books. — Does  he  read 
German  books  ] — He  reads  French  books. — What  book  do  you 
read  ] — I  read  a  German  book. — Do  you  read  as  much  as  my  chil- 
dren ] — I  read  more  than  they. — Does  your  father  read  the  book 
which  I  read  ] — He  does  not  read  that  which  you  read,  but  that 
which  I  read. — Does  he  read  as  much  as  I  ] — He  reads  less  than 
you,  but  he  learns  more  than  you. — Do  you  lend  me  a  book  ] — I  do 
lend  you  one. — Do  your  friends  lend  you  any  books  ] — They  do  lend 
me  some. 


X 


THIRTY-SIXTH   LESSON.— 0ecl)S  unb 

Ceriion. 

Spanish,  fpantfd)  (an  adjective  •)• 

The  termination  ifcf)  serves  to  form  adjectives  of  the 
names  of  nations.     Thus : 

Italian,  itaticmfdj ; 

Polish,  potntfd) ; 

Russian,  r ufftfcl) ; 

Latin,  (atctntfd) ; 

Greek, 

Arabian,  Arabic, 

Syrian,  Syriac,  fynfcrj. 

The  Pole,  bcr  $otc ; 

the  Roman,  tec  JKomcc ; 

the  Greek,  tct 

the  Arab,  the  Arabian,  ter 

the  Syrian,  fcct  ( 

»  Derived  from  <Spaniett,  Spain. 


87 


Are  you  a  Frenchman  ? 
No,  Sir,  I  am  a  German. 

Is  he  a  tailor? 

No,  he  is  a  shoemaker. 

He  is  a  fool. 

To  wish')  to  desire. 

The  fool, 

the  mouth, 

the  memory, 

Have  JTOU  a  good  memory  1 
He  has  a  little  mouth. 
Your  brother  has  blue  eyes. 
Do  you  wish  me  a  good  morn- 
ing! 
I  wish  you  a  good  evening. 

Blue, 
black, 

Instead  of. 

To  play. 

To  listen,  to  hear. 

Instead  of  listening. 
Do  you  play  instead  of  studying  1 
I  study  instead  of  playing. 
That  man  speaks  instead  of  list- 
ening. 


To  listen  to. 


/  id)  bin  cin  £eut* 


(Stnb  <Stc  cin 
9Mn,  mctn 

fcber. 

3ft  cr  cin  (gcbncibcr  ? 
Sictn,  cr  ift  cin  < 
(5r  ijl  cin  2?arr. 

SOSunfd)  en. 

fccr  9?arr  (gen.  en)  ; 
bcr  STCunb  (has  no  plur.)  ; 
©ct>ad)tm£  (plur.  c). 

(Sic  cin  gutc*  (Sktacfytnip  1 
(;at  ctncn  ftctncn  9}?unt). 
Sbt  SBrutcr  bat  Mauc  2(uc\cn. 

c    mit    cincn    gutcn 


cincn  gutcn 


2Cnftatt  ^u. 
@  p  t  c  (  c  n. 
^>  o  r  c  n. 

f  TCnftatt  su  f)6rcn. 
j  <Spic(cn  8tc,  anftatt  gu  flubtrcn  ? 
t  3d)  flutirc,  anftatt  ^u  fpictcn. 
t  liefer  5)2ann  fpricljt,  anftatt 


3d)  roiinfdjc 
Xtaft. 

Wau  ; 


2(  n  !)  o  r  c  n    (an^ufjorcn,  governs 

the  accusative). 
3  u  ft  S  t  c  n    (^ubotcn,  governs 

the  dative). 

3d)  Wire  tfen  an. 
3d)  bore  \tymyL 
2(uf  3cmanbcn  ct>cr  ctroag  fjoren. 

£>  a  ^  n;  a  & 


I  listen  to  him. 

To  listen  to  some  one  or  some- 
thing. 

That  which. 

|"£6rcn 

Do  you  listen  to  what  the  man  I      SNann  facjt? 
tells  you  1  ]  $crcn  ©ie  auf  t>a$,  wag  tcr 

I     Sbncnfagt? 
I  do  listen  to  it.  3*  ()orc  fcarauf.b 

»>  2lttf)orett  takes  the  person  in  the  accusative,  and  ju^oren  in  the  dative. 
They  never  relate  to  a  thing ;  but  f)6tett  auf  stands  either  with  the  person  or 


88 

He  listens  to  what  I  tell  him.         CSr  fyb'tt  cwf  ta$,  rca$  id)  ifjm  fagc. 

To  correct.  95  c  1 1>  c  ff  c  r  n,  c  o  r  r  t  g  i  re  n. 

To  ta£e  off  (as  the  hat).  2C  b  n  c  I)  m  en*  (ab$unef)mcn). 

To  ta£e  ojf  (as  clothes).  U  u  £  3 1  c  ()  c  n  * 

To  ta£e  away.  SOB  c  3  n  c  f)  m  c  n*. 

To  take.  91  c  Omen*. 

Thou  takest, — he  takes.  £)u  ntmmft,  —  cr  nimmt. 

Thou  takest  off  thy  hat.  £)u  mmmft  £>ctnen  Jjbut  cifc. 

Do  you  take  off  your  boots  ?  Ste&cn  ©ic  Sbre  (Sticfcln  cm*  1 

We  take  off  our  coats.  £Ctt  $tef)cn  unfcre  SKocfe  <ui$. 

Who  takes  away  the  chairs  ]  ££ct  ntnmit  t>tc  ©tiil)(e  ttK'$  ] 

The  servant  takes  them  away.  £>cc  SBetit'nte  nimmt  fie  weg. 

EXERCISES.  80. 

Do  you  speak  Spanish  ] — No,  Sir,  I  speak  Italian. — Who  speaks 
Polish  1 — My  brother  speaks  Polish. — Do  our  neighbours  speak 
Russian  1 — They  do  not  speak  Russian,  but  Arabic. — Do  you  speak 
Arabic? — No,  I  speak  Greek  and  Latin. — What  knife  have  you  ] 
— I  have  an  English  knife. — What  money  have  you  there  ] — Is  it 
Italian  or  Spanish  money  ? — It  is  Russian  money. — Have  you  an 
Italian  hat  ] — No,  I  have  a  Spanish  hat. — Are  you  a  German  1 — 
No,  I  am  an  Englishman. — Art  thou  a  Greek  ] — No,  I  am  a  Span- 
iard 1 — Are  these  men  Poles'? — No," they  are  Russians. — Do  the 
Russians  speak  Polish  ? — They  do  not  speak  Polish,  but  Latin, 
Greek,  and  Arabic. — Is  your  brother  a  merchant  ] — No,  he  is  a 
joiner. — Are  these  men  merchants  1 — No,  they  are  carpenters. — 
Are  we  boatmen  ? — No,  we  are  shoemakers. — Art  thou  a  fool  ? — I 
am  not  a  fool. — What  is  that  man  ? — He  is  a  tailor. — Do  you  wish 
me  anything] — I  wish  you  a  good  morning. — What  does  the  young 
man  wish  me  ] — He  wishes  you  a  good  evening. — Whither  must  I 
go  ] — Thou  must  go  to  our  friends  to  wish  them  a  good  day  (Sag). 
— Do  your  children  come  to  me  in  order  to  wish  me  a  good  evening  ? 
— They  come  to  you  in  order  to  wish  you  a  good  morning. 

81. 

Has  the  nobleman  blue  eyes  ] — He  has  black  eyes  and  a  little 
mouth. — Hast  thou  a  good  memory  ] — I  have  a  bad  memory,  but 
much  courage  to  learn  German. — What  dost  thou  (do)  instead  of 
playing  ] — I  study  instead  of  playing.^ — Dost  thou  learn  instead  of 
writing  ] — I  write  instead  of  learning. — What  does  the  son  of  our 
bailiff  (do)  ] — He  goes  into  the  garden  instead  of  going  into  the 
field. — Do  the  children  of  our  neighbours  read  ] — They  write  in- 
stead of  reading. — What  does  our  cook  (do)] — He  makes  a  fire 

the  thing,  and  always  requires  the  accusative.  Ex.  3cf)  f)5re  tljn  an,  or  tcfy  f)D= 
re  thm  511,  1  listen  to  him;  but  i$  fjove  auf  bag,  t»a3  eie  mir  fatjcn,  I  listen  to 
what  you  are  telling  me. 


89 

instead  of  going  to  the  market. — Does  your  father  sell  his  ox  ?— 
He  sells  his  horse  instead  of  selling  his  ox. — Do  the  physicians 
•  out] — They  remain  in  their  rooms  instead  of  going  out. — At 
what  o'clock  does  our  physician  come  to  you  ] — He  comes  every 
morning  at  a  quarter  to  nine. — Does  the  son  of  the  painter  study 
English  1 — He  studies  Greek  instead  of  studying  English. — Does 
the  butcher  kill  oxen  1 — He  kills  sheep  instead  of  killing  oxen. — 
Do  you  listen  to  me  ? — I  do  listen  to  you. — Does  your  brother  listen 
to  me  ] — He  speaks  instead  of  listening  to  you. — Do  you  listen  to 
what  I  am  telling  you  ? — I  do  listen  to  what  you  are  telling  me. 

82. 

Does  the  man  listen  to  what  you  are  telling  him  ? — He  does  listen 
to  it. — Do  the  children  of  the  physician  listen  to  what  we  tell  them  ? 
— They  do  not  listen  to  it. — Dost  thou  listen  to  what  thy  brother  tells 
thee  ? — I  do  listen  to  it. — Do  you  go  to  the  theatre  1 — I  am  £oing  to 
the  storehouse  instead  of  going  to  the  theatre. — Are  you  willing  to 
listen  to  me  ] — I  am  willing  to  listen  to  you,  but  I  cannot ;  1  have 
the  ear-ache. — Does  thy  father  correct  my  notes  or  thine  ? — He 
corrects  neither  yours  nor  mine. — Which  notes  does  he  correct  1 — 
He  corrects  those  which  he  writes. — Does  he  listen  to  what  you 
tell  him  ? — He  does  listen  to  it. — Do  you  take  off  your  hat  in  order 
to  speak  to  my  father  1 — I  do  take  it  off  in  order  to  speak  to  him. — 
Does  thy  brother  listen  to  what  our  father  tells  him  ] — He  does 
listen  to  it. — Does  our  servant  go  for  some  beer  1 — He  goes  for 
some  vinegar  instead  of  going  for  some  beer. — Do  you  correct  my 
letter  ? — I  do  not  correct  it ;  I  have  sore  eyes. — Does  the  servant 
take  off  his  coat  in  order  to  make  a  fire  7 — He  does  take  it  off. — 
Do  you  take  off  your  gloves  in  order  to  give  me  money  ? — I  do 
take  them  off  in  order  to  give  you  some. — Does  he  take  off  his 
shoes  in  order  to  go  to  your  house  ] — He  does  not  take  them  off. — 
Who  takes  away  the  tables  and  chairs  ? — The  servants  take  them 
away. — Will  you  take  away  this  glass  ? — I  have  no  mind  to  take  it 
away. — Is  he  wrong  to  take  off  his  boots  1 — He  is  right  to  take 
them  off. — Dost  thou  take  away  anything  1 — I  do  not  take  away 
anything. — Does  anybody  take  off  his  hat  ? — Nobody  takes  it  off. 


THIRTY-SEVENTH  LESSON.—  Siebim  mtir 
Certion. 


Wet  (moist").  S£  a  6  (an  adjective). 

To  wet  (to  moisten).      97  a  jj  m  a  d)  e  n  (ncfeen). 
To  show.  3  c  i  $  c  n,  ro  c  i  f  e  n  *  (govern  the 

dative'1). 

•  Bei^ctt  expresses  the  mere  act  of  showing-  ;  tvetfctt  implies  showing  with 
instruction,  and  is  derived  from  the  word  :  t»ie  3Betfc,  the  manner. 


00 


To  let  see  (expose  to  sight).  (Scfycn  laffen  (governs  the  ac- 

cusative). 

Do  you  let  me  see  your  gold  Caffcn  (Sic  mid)  3fjrc  cjolbcnen  SBa'ru 

ribbons  ?  bet  fefyen  ? 

I  do  let  you  see  them.  3d)  taffe  (Sic  btefel&en  fefyen. 

Brandy,  -sBtanntroctn  (masc.)  ; 

tobacco,  &aba!  (masc.)  ; 

tobacco  (for  smoking),   £Raud)tcibaf  ; 

snuff,  (gdwupftaba?  ; 

cider,        •  (Stbct  (masc.)  ; 

meal  (flour),  Sflef)(  (neut.)  ; 

apples,  tfcpfel  (tpfel)  (plur.  of  bet  tfpfel). 

The  gardener,  bet  ©cittnct  ; 

the  cousin,  bet  letter  ; 

the  brother-in-law,  bet  (Scfyrcaget  ; 

the  handkerchief,  bci$  £ud)  ; 

the  pocket  handkerchief,  bag  <g>d)nupfhtd)  ; 

the  valet,  servant,  bet  £)icnct,  bet  jtncd)t.b 

Do  you  go  for  your  brother-in-  £olen  ®te  S^ten  (Sdjroaget  ? 

law? 
I  do  go  for  him.  3d)  Ijete  tfjn. 

To  intend  (to  think).      ©  C  b  C  n  f  c  n. 

Do  you  intend  to  go  to  the  ball  ©cfccnfrm  ©te  Fjcute  7C6cnb  ouf  ben 

this  evening  ?  SBatt  ^u  Qcfjen  ? 

I  do  intend  to  go  thither.  3d)  acbcnfe  ttn^u^ebcn.     (See  Ols. 

A.  Lesson  XXVII.) 

To  know.  2B  t  f  f  e  n  * 

I  know  —  he  knows.  3d)  roetp     —  ct 

We  know        —  they  know.  SOBtt  nnflcn  —  fie  wiffen. 

Thou  knowest  —  you  know.  £)u  rcctpt    —  3^  wiff^t  (@ie  ttrif* 

fen). 

Do  you  know  German  1  jtonnen  @ic  bcutfd)  ? 

I  do  know  it.  3c^  fann  c^. 

Do    you    know    how    to    read  "^ 

French  ?  >^onncn  <Sie  ftan^oftfcr)  (efen  1 

Can  you  read  French1?  3 

b  £>  tetter  generally  means  servant  ;  hence  :  ber  Jtammerbtener,  the  valet  de 
chambre  ;  ber  ^trc^enbtener,  the  church-minister,  clergyman  ;  Jtnecfyt  points 
out  the  lowest  degree  of  servitude,  hence  :  ber  .jpaugFnec&t,  the  menial  ser- 
vant ;  ber  <5taUfnec|t,  the  groom,  the  stableman  ;  ber  $ett!ned)t,  the  jockey. 

c  SQBiffen  implies  to  have  the  knowledge  of  a  thing,  not  to  be  ignorant  of  it  ; 
Bnnen  signifies  to  be  able,  to  have  the  knowledge  of  an  art  or  a  science.  Ex. 
3>cf)  tt?et$,  was  <Ste  fa#en  tcollen,  I  know,  what  you  wish  to  say.  (£r  faint 
einett  beutfcben  33rtef  fc^mben,  he  knows  how  to  write  a  German  letter.  The 
learner  must  take  care  not  to  confound  tinffett*,  to  know,  with  f&tttten*,  to  be 
able,  and  the  latter  not  with  fettttett*,  to  be  acquainted.  (See  Lessons  XXVIII. 
and  XXXIII.) 


91 

Can  you  make  a  hat?  "^ 

Do  you  know  how  to  make  a  £  jtonncn  €>te  ctncn  £ut  mcicfyen  ? 

hat1?  J 

Can  you  come  to  me  to-day  1       jlonncn  ©tc  fyeute  $u  nut  fommcn  ? 

To  swn'm.  ©  d)  n)  t  mm  c  n  *. 

«  fd>«nmmen  ? 


Whither  ?  where  to?      90S  0  f)  i  n  ? 
Whither  are  you  going  ?  ?H$o  Qcfycn  ®tc  f)tn  ?d 

EXERCISES.     83. 

Do  you  wish  to  drink  brandy  1  —  No,  I  wish  to  drink  wine.  —  Do 
you  sell  brandy  ]  —  I  do  not  sell  any  ;  but  my  neighbour,  the  mer- 
chant, sells  some.  —  Will  you  fetch--  me  some  tobacco  ]  —  I  will 
fetch  you  some  ;  what  tobacco  do  you  wish  to  have  ]  —  I  wish  to 
have  some  snuff;  but  my  friend,  the  German,  wishes  to  have  some 
tobacco  (for  smoking).  —  Does  the  merchant  show  you  cloth]  —  He 
does  not  show  me  any.  —  Does  your  valet  go  for  some  cider  1  —  He 
does  go  for  some.  —  Do  you  want  anything  else  (nod)  cmxi£)  1  —  I 
want  some  flour  ;  will  you  send  for  some  (for)  me  ]  —  I  will  send 
for  some  (for)  you.  —  Does  your  friend  buy  apples  1  —  He  does  buy 
some.  —  Does  he  buy  handkerchiefs  1  —  He  buys  tobacco  instead  of 
buying  handkerchiefs.  —  Do  you  show  me  anything  ]  —  I  show  you 
gold  and  silver  clothes.  —  Whither  does  your  cousin  go  1  —  He  goes 
to  the  ball.  —  Do  you  go  to  the  ball  ]  —  I  go  to  the  theatre  instead 
of  going  to  the  ball.  —  Does  the  gardener  go  into  the  garden1?  —  He 
goes  to  the  market  instead  of  going  into  the  garden.  —  Do  you  send 
your  servant  to  the  shoemaker  ]  —  I  send  him  to  the  tailor  instead 
of  sending  him  to  the  shoemaker. 

84. 

Dost  thou  go  to  fetch  thy  father  ]  —  I  do  go  to  fetch  him.  —  May 
(.5tann)  I  go  to  fetch  my  cousin  1  —  You  may  go  to  fetch  him.  — 
Does  your  valet  find  the  man  whom  he  is  looking  for  1  —  He  does 
find  him.  —  Do  your  sons  find  the  friends  whom  they  are  looking 
for]  —  They  do  not  find  them.  —  When  do  you  intend  going  to  the 
ball]  —  1  intend  going  thither  this  evening.  —  Do  your  cousins  intend 
to  go  into  the  country  ]  —  They  intend  to  go  thither.  —  When  do 
they  intend  to  go  thither  1  —  They  intend  to  go  thither  to-morrow.  — 
At  what  o'clock  ]  —  At  half-past  nine.  —  What  does  the  merchant 
wish  to  sell  you  ]  —  He  wishes  to  sell  me  pocket-handkerchiefs.  — 
Do  you  intend  to  buy  some  ]  —  1  will  not  buy  any.  —  Dost  thou  know 

-1  2Bot)ttt,  as  above,  may  be  divided  into  two  parts,  the  first  of  which  is 
placed  in  the  beginning  and  the  second  at  the  end  of  the  sentence.  If  the 
sentence  ends  with  a  past  participle  01  an  infinitive,  f)  t  tt  is  placed  before  it, 


92 

anything  1 — I  do  not  know  anything. — What  does  thy  cousin  know  ? 
— He  knows  how  to  read  and  to  write. — Does  he  know  German  ]— 
He  does  not  know  it. — Do  you  know  Spanish  ] — 1  do  know  it. — 
Do  your  brothers  know  Greek  1 — They  do  not  know  it ;  but  they 
intend  to  learn  it. — Do  I  know  English  ]— You  do  not  know  it; 
but  you  intend  to  study  it. — Do  my  children  know  how  to  read 
Italian"? — They  know  how  to  read,  but  not  how  to  speak  it. 

85. 

Do  you  intend  to  study  Arabic  ? — I  intend  to  study  Arabic  and 
Syriac. — Does  the  Englishman  know  Polish  ? — He  does  not  know 
it,  but  he  intends  learning  it. — Do  you  know  how  to  swim  ? — I  do 
not  know  how  to  swim,  but  how  to  play. — Does  your  cousin  know 
how  to  make  coats] — He  does  not  know  how  to  make  any;  he  is 
no  tailor. — Is  he  a  merchant] — He  is  not  one. — What  is  he  1 — He 
is  a  physician. — Whither  are  you  going  ? — I  am  going  into  my 
garden,  in  order  to  speak  to  trie  gardener. — What  do  you  wish  to 
tell  him  ? — 1  wish  to  tell  him  to  open  the  window  of  his  room. — 
Does  your  gardener  listen  to  you  1 — He  does  listen  to  me. — Do 
you  wish  to  drink  some  cider  ] — No,  I  have  a  mind  to  drink  some 
beer  ;  have  you  any  ? — I  have  none  ;  but  I  will  send  for  some. — 
When  will  you  send  for  some  ? — Now. — Do  you  send  for  apples  ? 
—I  do  send  for  some. — Have  you  a  good  deal  of  water  ? — I  have 
enough  to  wash  my  feet. — Has  your  brother  water  enough  ? — He 
lias  only  a  little,  but  enough  to  moisten  his  pocket-handkerchief. — 
Do  you  know  how  to  make  tea  ? — I  know  how  to  make  some. — Does 
your  cousin  listen  to  what  you  tell  him  ? — He  does  listen  to  it.— 
Does  he  know  how  to  swim  ] — He  does  not  know  how  to  swim. — 
Where  is  he  going  to] — He  is  going  no  whither;  he  remains  at 
home. 


THIRTY-EIGHTH  LESSON.—  <3UI)t  tttti  brd$$i0$te 
Cection. 

The  intention.  3)  e  t  £>  0  t  f  a  |. 

Intended.  ®  c  f  o  n  n  c  ru 

To  intend  or  to  have  the  intention.  (SJcfonnen  fctn*. 

I  intend  to  go  thither.  3$)  f>tn  Qcfenncn  fytngugerjen. 

We  have  the  intention  to  do  it.    aBBir  finb  cjcfcnncn  c$  $u  tfyun. 

'  (S  r  !)  a  (  t  c  n  *    (to    receive    any- 
thing sent). 

S3  e  f  o  m  m  e  n  *   (to  receive  as  a 
To  receive. 


(S  m  p  f  a  n  9  c  n  *  (to  welcome,  to 
entertain). 


93 


C£>u  crtjaltff.        (L  .,., 

1  £>u  fmpfSngft/  (Sr  cmpfangf. 

(St  kfemmt  ®clb. 

(£t  crfyalt  fccn  SBerjug. 

(£r  cmpfancjt  fcinc  Jteunbe. 

(Stfyatten  ©ic  beutc  ctncn  SSt'uf  1 

3d)  crfyaltc  nietgcn  ctncn. 

i.  gftljtetO  b 
Ceiten  5  ' 
3d)  ffifjte  bag  spfctb  in  ben  ©tolt. 

bet  93et$ua, ; 
bet  (Stall ; 
bltnb  ; 
ftan! ; 
otnu 

2Cu£lofd)cn  (v.  act.  and  n.  ir. 


li  n  5  (I  n  b  c  n  (an$u$unbcn). 
2(  n  ft  c  cf  c  n  (anguftaftn). 


er 


Thou  receivest — He  receives. 

He  receives  money. 

He  obtains  the  preference. 

He  receives  his  friends. 

Do  you  receive  a  letter  to-day  1 

I  receive  one  to-morrow. 

To  guide  (conduct,  take) 
To  lead. 

I  lead  the  horse  into  the  stable. 

The  preference, 
the  stable, 
blind, 
sick  (ill), 
poor, 

To  extinguish. 

To  light. 

To  set  on  fire. 

Does  he  extinguish  the  candle  1 

He  lights  it.  ©t  jiinbct  c£  an. 

To  depart,  to  set  out.     U  6 1  c  i  f  c  n  (afyutctfcn). 

When  do  you  intend  to  depart  1    2£ann  gcbcnfen  @tc  afyutcifcn  ? 
I  intend  to  depart  to-morrow.        3d)  $cbcn!e  metcjen  afyuretfcn. 

EXERCISES.  86. 

Do  your  brothers  intend  to  go  into  the  country  ? — They  do  in- 
tend to  go  thither. — Do  you  intend  to  go  to  my  cousin  1 — I  do  in- 
tend to  go  to  him. — Dost  thou  intend  to  do  anything1? — I  intend  to 
do  nothing. — Do  you  intend  to  go  to  the  theatre  this  evening] — I 
do  intend  to  go  thither,  but  not  this  evening. — Dost  thou  receive 
anything] — I  receive  money. — From  (iCon)  whom  dost  thou  receive 
some  ] — I  receive  some  from  my  father,  my  brother,  and  my  cousin. 
— Does  your  son  receive  books  ? — He  does  receive  some. — From 
whom  does  he  receive  some  ] — He  receives  some  from  me,  from  his 
friends,  and  neighbours. — Does  the  poor  man  (bet  TCrme,  See 
page  34,  Obs.  A.)  receive  money  ] — He  does  receive  some. — From 
whom  does  he  receive  some  ] — He  receives  some  from  the  rich. — 
Dost  thou  receive  wine] — I  do  not  receive  any. — Do  I  receive 
money  '\ — You  do  not  receive  any. — Does  your  servant  receive 

a  The  persons  not  mentioned  follow  the  regular  conjugation.  (See  Pre- 
sent Tense,  Lesson  XXXIV.) 

b  Bubrett  expresses  the  act  of  conducting  only ;  leitctt  means  to  conduct 
with  safety.  Ex.  (£inen  Jtrtttfen  fiityren,  to  conduct  a  sick  person  j  etn  Jlinb, 
einen  33litiben  leiten,  to  guide  a  child,  a  blind  man. 


94 

clothes  (,ft(e!bcr)  ? — He  does  not  receive  any. — Do  you  receive  the 
books  which  our  friends  receive1? — We  do  not  receive  the  same 
which  your  friends  receive;  but  we  receive  others. — Does  your 
friend  receive  the  letters  which  you  write  to  him  ? — -He  does  re- 
ceive them. — Do  you  receive  the  apples  which  I  send  you? — I  do 
not  receive  them. — Does  the  American  receive  as  much  brandy  as 
cider  1 — He  receives  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Do  the 
Scotch  receive  as  many  books  as  letters  1 — They  receive  as  many 
of  the  one  as  of  the  other. 

87. 

Does  the  Englishman  obtain  the  preference  1 — He  does  obtain  it. 
— Does  your  cousin  receive  as  much  money  as  I  ? — He  receives 
more  than  you. — Does  the  Frenchman  receive  his  letters  1 — He 
does  receive  them. — When  does  he  receive  them  1 — He  receives 
them  in  the  evening. — When  dost  thou  receive  thy  letters  1 — I  re- 
ceive them  in  the  morning. — At  what  o'clock  1 — At  a  quarter  to 
ten. — Dost  thou  receive  as  many  letters  as  1 1 — I  receive  more  of 
them  than  thou. — Dost  thou  receive  any  to-day  ? — I  receive  some 
to-day  and  to-morrow. — Does  your  father  receive  as  many  friends 
as  ours  (as  our  father)  ? — He  receives  fewer  of  them  than  yours 
(than  your  father). — Does  the  Spaniard  receive  as  many  enemies 
as  friends  1 — He  receives  as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Do 
you  receive  one  more  crown  ] — I  do  receive  one  more. — Does  your 
son  receive  one  more  book  ? — He  does  receive  one  more. — What 
does  the  physician  receive  ? — He  receives  good  tobacco,  good  snuff, 
and  good  pocket-handkerchiefs. — Does  he  receive  brandy  ? — He 
does  receive  some. 

88. 

Does  your  servant  receive  shirts  1 — He  does  receive  some. — Does 
he  receive  as  many  of  them  as  my  valet  (does)  1 — He  receives  quite 
as  many  of  them. — Do  you  receive  anything  to-day  1 — I  receive 
something  every  day. — Dost  thou  conduct  anybody  1 — I  conduct 
nobody. — Whom  do  you  guide  1 — I  guide  my  son. — Where  are  you 
conducting  him  to  ? — I  conduct  him  to  my  friends  to  wish  them  a 
good  morning. — What  is  your  son  1 — He  is  a  physician. — Does 
your  servant  guide  any  one  ? — He  guides  my  child. — Whom  ("Iftcn) 
must  I  guide] — Thou  must  guide  the  blind.  (Page  34,  Obs. 
A.} — Must  he  conduct  the  sick  person  1 — He  must  conduct  him. — 
Whither  must  he  conduct  him  1 — He  must  couduct  him  home. — 
Whither  is  he  leading  your  horse  ? — He  is  leading  it  into  the 
stable. — Dost  thou  guide  the  child  or  the  blind  man? — I  guide  both. 
— When  does  the  foreigner  intend  to  depart] — He  intends  to  depart 
this  morning. — At  what  o'clock1? — At  half  past  one. — Does  he  not 
wish  to  remain  here  ? — He  does  not  ((5r  rcill  nicfct). — Do  you  intend 
to  £0  to  the  theatre  this  evening  ] — I  intend  to  go  there  to-morrow. 
— Do  you  depart  to-day  ? — I  depart  now. — When  do  you  intend  to 


95 

write  to  your  friends  "? — I  intend  to  write  to  them  to-day. — Do  your 
friends  answer  your  letters  ] — They  do  answer  them. — Do  you  ex- 
tinguish the  fire  1 — I  do  not  extinguish  it. — Does  your  servant  light 
the  candle  ] — He  does  light  it. — Does  this  man  intend  to  set  your 
warehouse  on  fire  1 — He  does  intend  to  set  it  on  fire  (cmjuftccf en). 


THIRTY-NINTH    LESSON.— 


mtfr 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

The  comparative  is  formed  by  adding  e  r  and  the 
superlative  by  adding  fla  to  the  ^simple  adjective. 
Examples : 

POSIT.         COMP.       SUPERL. 

Handsome — handsomer —     @cf)6n  —  fcfyoner  —  1 

handsomest. 

Small — smaller — smallest. 
Wild — wilder — wildest. 


—  ffetner  —  ffeinjh 
SOBtfb    —  nnlber  —  nrilbefl. 


Obs.  A.*  Comparative   and   superlative    adjectives 
are  declined  like  the  positive.     Examples : 


COMPARATIVE. 


Masculine. 


Neuter. 


The  handsomer 
table,  the  hand-<^ 
somer  book,  &c. 


"N.  ber  fdjonere      ba$  fcfyonere  SSitcfy. 

Stp, 
G.  beS  fcfyoneren    be$  fcfyoneren  SSucfyeS* 


D.  bem  fcfyotterett  bent  fdjottereit 

Stifle, 
A.  ben  fcfyoneren   ba^  fdE)6nereh  S3itcf|. 


»  In  the  superlative,  fl  is  sometimes  preceded  by  c  when  the  pronunciation 
requires  it,  as :  flip,  sweet,  fujjeft ;  fc^tecfjf,  bad,  fdpled)tefl.  In  the  word  flrojii, 
great,  the  superlative  grofjeft,  is  contracted  into  gropt,  as :  ber  grofjte  3Jiann, 
the  greatest  man. 

b  The  letter  c,  which  precedes  or  follows  the  consonant  r  in  the  compara- 
tive, is  often  omitted  for  the  sake  of  euphony;  thus  instead  of:  ber,  bag  fci)o= 
nere,  beg  fcboneren,  bem  fcfcotteren,  we  say :  ber,  ba$  fd)5nre,  be$  fd)onern,  bem 
fd[)i>nern,  &c.  (See  Oba.  Lesson  XIX.) 


96 


The      smallest 
hat,  the  smal-  •< 
lest  book,  &c. 


SUPERLATIVE. 

Masculine.  Neuter. 

N.  bet  ffemfle       ba3  ftemtfe  S3ncf), 
3  ffemflen 


G.  be£  ffemfien 


D.  bem  flemften   bent  Hempen  33ncfje, 


A.  ben  fteinften    ba$  Hetntfe  23u<fj, 


5.  The  radical  vowels  a,  0,  U,  are  softened 
in  the  comparative  and  superlative  into  a,  6,  it*c 
Examples : 

POSIT.       COMP.       SUPERL. 


Old,  &c. 
pious,  &c. 
young,  &c. 


aft         after         altefh 
fromm    frommer   fronting 
jnng       jitnger      jitngfh 


Obs.  C.  The  following  adjectives,  which  are  also 
used  as  adverbs,  are  irregular  in  the  formation  of  their 
comparatives  and  superlatives. 

POSITIVE.  COMP. 

Sato,  efier, 
ber  or  ba^  fcalbtge,  eJ)ere, 

(  ©ern,  Iteber, 

|  ber  or  ba$  fiebe,  Kcberc, 

r     i          (  ©nt,  befier, 

{  ber  or  ba$  gate,  befiere, 
TT-. 


« 


SUPERLATIVE. 
efjefi  (am  ef)eflen(1); 
ef^e  jle. 

Ite6|l  (am  (ie6flen)  ; 
Kebpe. 

bep  (am  6e(len)  ; 
betfe. 


ber  or  ba^ 


lere 


c  On  the  adjectives  which  do  not  soften  the  radical  vowels  a,  0,  U  in  the 
comparative  and  superlative,  see  Obs.  D.  hereafter. 

J  When  an  adjective  is  used  in  the  superlative  degree  adverbially,  it  is 
combined  with  a  contraction  of  the  definite  article,  and  one  of  the  preposi- 
tions, an,  auf,  ju,  in,  as:  am  ftentflften,  the  least;  aufs  t)6rf)fte,  at  the  most;  junt 
ieften,  for  the  best ;  tm  ininbcfteh,  at  least.  Hence  the  adverbs :  frfjonflen^ 
in  the  handsomest  manner;  btfhnS,  in  the  best  manner;  ^5cf)ften^  at  the 
most;  nad[)ften§,  next  time ;  toent^flene,  at  least,  &c. 

e  In  the  positive  and  comparative  degrees  the  form  fjof),  not  fwcl),  is  used  as 
an  adjective  before  a  noun ;  but  as  a  predicate  after  the  noun,  the  positive  is 
bocf).  Ex.  5)cr  hobe  33aum,  the  high  tree ;  ter  §o^ere  33aum,  the  higher  tree; 
but  bicfer  53aum  ift  fjoci),  this  tree  is  high. 


97 


Near, 
Much, 


POSITIVE. 

\  3tof»e, 

I  ber  or  ba$  ttafye, 

\  33M, 

I  ber  or  ba$  tnefe, 


This  book  is  small,  that  is  smal- 
ler, and  this  is  the  smallest  of 
all. 

This  hat  is  large,  but  that  is 
larger. 

Is  your  book  as  large  as  mine? 

It  is  not  so  large  as  yours. 
It  is  larger  than  yours. 

Not  so  large. 

Are  our  neighbour's  children  as 

good f  as  ours  ? 
They  are  better  than  ours. 

Whose  ? 
It  is. 

Whose  hat  is  this  ? 
It  is  the  hat  of  my  brother. 
It  is  my  brother's. 
It  is  my  brother's  hat. 
Whose  hat  is  the  finest? 
That  of  my  father  is  the  finest. 
Whose  ribbon  is  the  handsomer, 
yours  or  mine  ? 

Good,  gentle,  pretty, 

light,  easy, 

heavy,  difficult, 

great,  grand  (big,  large), 

long, 

short, 

round, 

rich, 


COMP.  SUPERLATIVE. 

naber,  nadjft  (amnddjflen); 

nafyere,  nacfyfte. 

ntefyr,  metft  (am  meiften) ; 

ntefyre,  meifte, 

®tcfc$  S3ud)  tft  f(ctn,  jcncg  ift  ftcts 
ncr,  tint)  ttcfcS  bice  tft  am  fletns 
flcn  (ta$  f(ctnftc)  t>en  alien. 

SDicfct  .put  tft  grop,  allctn  jcncc  t(l 
grower. 

Sft  3ft t  23 ud)  fo  grcp  wic  t>a$  met? 
nic^c? 

65  tft  nid)t  fo 

6s  tft 


:  fo  gr op. 

tic  Winter  unfcrcS  _.... 

fo  arttg  n>tc  tic  unfrtgcn  ? 
Sic  fint  artigcr  al$  tic  unfrtgcn. 

SB  c  f  f  c  n  ?  6  (See  Lesson  XXIX.) 
<£«  ift. 

SQBcffen  £ut  tft  tag  ! 
(5$  ift  tcr  £ut  mcinc$  25rutcr& 
@£  ift  mcinc$  JBrutcrS. 
Qi  ift  mctnc^  23rutcr$  ^ut. 
2Bc(fcn  ^)Ut  tft  tcr  fd)onftc  ? 
JDcr  mcincg  Waters  ift  tcr  fcftb'njtc. 
SQScffcn  JBnnt  ift  fdjoncr,  tas  3ftns 
gc  otcr  ta6  tncinigc  ? 

orttg ; 
lcid)t ; 
fdbrucr ; 
grop; 
lang ; 
f urj ; 
runt ; 
rctci). 

5.  D.     The  adjectives  which  do  not  soften  the  ra- 
dical vowels  in  the  comparative  and  superlative,  are : 
1st,  Those  of  which  the  last  syllable  does  not  belong 

f  In  this  phrase  the  word  a  1 1 1  $  does  not  quite  correspond  to  the  English 
word  good;  but  it  does  in  many  others,  as  for  instance  :  be  good !  fei  arttg ! 
a  good  child,  em  arttgeS  ifttnb. 

g  The  word  which  answers  the  question  toeffen  ?  is  always  put  in  the  geni- 
tive case. 


98 


to  the  primitive11  word,  as:  banfbar,  grateful; 
culpable  ;  bogfyaft,  malicious.    Ex.  arttg,  pretty ;  artiger, 
prettier ;  arttgfl,  prettiest. 

2d,  Participles,  as :  kbenb,  refreshing ;  gelobt, praised; 
tobenb,  furious ;  fucfyenb,  seeking,  &c. 

3d,  Those   which   contain    a  diphthong,  as:  gencw, 
exact ;  few!,  lazy ;  bfait,  blue  ;  grait,  grey,  &c. 

4th,  Those  terminating  in  e  r,  as  tapfer,  valiant,  &c. 

5th,  The  following : 

flat,  clear ; 
f napp,  tight ; 
fafym,  lame ; 
(os,  loose ; 
matt,  wearied ; 
morfcf),  brittle ; 
nncft,  naked ; 
platt,  flat ; 
plump,  clumsy ; 
ref),  raw; 
runt/  round  ; 


£,  pale ; 

bunt,  variegated 
fat)(,  fallow ; 
falfci),  false ; 
fref),  joyful ; 
gcrafcc,  straight; 
ijcfiwt),  healthy ; 
fltott/  smooth ; 
I)cl)l,  hollow ; 
f)dt>,  kind  ; 
faW/  bald  ; 
fare),  stingy ; 

E. 


fan  ft,  gentle ; 
fatt,  satisfied ; 
fdbtoff,  slack  ; 
jcfyanf,  slender ; 
parr,  numb ; 
(M$,  proud  ; 
draff/  stiff; 
fhimm/  dumb  ; 
tell,  mad  ; 
»oll,  full ; 
jafyrn,  tame. 


In  German  the  superlative  is  almost  al- 
ways relative,  and  to  express  the  absolute  superlative, 
we  use,  as  in  English,  one  of  the  adverbs:  fet)r,very; 
rerfjt,  very ;  fyocfyft,  extremely ;  imgemeitt,  uncommonly, 
&c.  Ex.  ©u  fefyr  armer  SSJJanit,  a  very  poor  man ;  em 
fefyr  fcfyoneg  $mb,  a  very  fine  child. 

Obs.  F.  Than,  after  a  comparative,  is  translated  by 
a  I  g  (See  Obs.  B.  Lesson  XXIIL).  To  increase  the 
force  of  the  comparative,  we  use  the  adverbs  nod),  still, 
and  toeit,  far.  Ex.  9fa>d)  grower,  still  greater ;  icf)  bin  tt>ett 
gfitdfttcfyer  afg  er,  I  am  far  happier  than  he. 

Obs.  G.  The  following  adjectives  have  no  compara- 
tive: 

POSITIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 

The  exterior,      ber  or  bag  aufjiere,    ber  or  bag  aitffcrtfe ; 
the  interior,        ber  —  bag  innere,     ber  —  bag  innerfle ; 
the  posterior,      ber  —  bag  fyintere,    ber  —  bag  fyinterfte ; 
the  middle  one, 
the  superior, 


ber  —  bag  nritrfere,  ber  —  bag  mittef fte ; 
ber  —  bag  obcre,      ber  —  bag  oberfle ; 


h  By  primitive  we  mean  a  word  to  which  a  syllable  may  be  added  in  order 
to  form  another  word,  as  bflttfbcir,  which  is  formed  of  the  word  *£anf,  thanks, 
and  the  syllable  bar. 


99 

POSITIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 

the  inferior,        ber  or  ba3  itntere,     bet  or  bag  imtertfe ; 
the  anterior,       ber  —  ba$  fcorbere,  bcr  —  ba£  ttorberfle, 

EXERCISES.    89. 

Is  your  brother  taller  (grc£)  than  mine  1 — He  is  not  so  tall,  but 
better  than  yours. — Is  thy  hat  as  bad  as  that  of  thy  father  1 — It  is 
better,  but  not  so  black  as  his. — Are  the  shirts  of  the  Italians  as 
white  (roeip)  as  those  of  the  Irish  1 — They  are  whiter,  but  not  so 
good. — Are  the  sticks  of  our  friends  longer  than  ours  1 — They  are 
not  longer,  but  heavier. — Who  have  (2Bcr  f)0t)  the  most  beautiful 
gloves  ? — The  French  have  them. — Whose  horses  are  the  finest  ? 
— Mine  are  fine,  yours  are  finer  than  mine  ;  but  those  of  our  friends 
are  the  finest  of  all. — Is  your  horse  good  1 — It  is  good,  but  yours 
is  better,  and  that  of  the  Englishman  is  the  best  of  all  the  horses 
which  we  know. — Have  you  pretty  shoes'? — I  have  very  pretty 
(ones) ;  but  my  brother  has  prettier  (ones)  than  I. — From  (iCcn) 
whom  does  he  receive  them  1 — He  receives  them  from  his  best 
friend. — Is  your  wine  as  good  as  mine  1 — It  is  better. — Does  your 
merchant  sell  good  handkerchiefs  1 — He  sells  the  best  handkerchiefs 
that  I  know. 

90. 

Have  we  more  books  than  the  French  ? — We  have  .more  of  them 
than  they ;  but  the  Germans  have  more  of  them  than  we,  and  the 
English  have  the  most  of  them. — Hast  thou  a  finer  garden  than 
that  of  our  Physician  ] — I  have  a  finer  (one). — Has  the  American 
a  finer  house  than  thou  1 — He  has  a  finer  (one). — Have  we  as  fine 
children  as  our  neighbours  ] — We  have  finer  (ones). — Is  your  coat 
as  long  as  mine  1 — It  is  shorter,  but  prettier  than  yours. — Do  you 
soon  (l>cilt>)  go  out1? — [  do  not  go  out  to-day. — When  does  your 
father  go  out  ] — He  goes  out  at  a  quarter  past  twelve. — Is  this  man 
older  than  that  (man)  ] — He  is  older,  but  that  (man)  is  healthier 
(gi'funfccr). — WThich  of  these  two  children  is  the  better1? — The  one 
who  studies  is  better  than  the  one  who  plays. — Does  your  servant 
sweep  as  well  as  mine  1 — He  sweeps  better  than  yours. — Does  the 
German  read  as  many  bad  books  as  good  (ones)  ] — He  reads  more 
good  than  bad  (ones). — Do  the  merchants  sell  more  sugar  than 
coffee] — They  sell  more  of  the  one  than  of  the  other. — Does  your 
shoemaker  make  as  many  boots  as  shoes  1 — He  makes  more  of  the 
one  than  of  the  other. 

91. 

Can  you  swim  as  well  as  the  son  of  the  nobleman  ? — I  can 
swim  better  than  he  ;  but  he  can  speak  German  better  than  I. — 
Does  he  read  as  well  as  you  ? — He  reads  better  than  I. — Have  you 
the  head-ache  ?— No,  I  have  the  ear-ache.— Does  your  cousin 
listen  to  what  you  tell  him  1 — He  does  not  listen  to  it. — Does  the 


100 

son  of  your  bailiff  go  into  the  forest?— No,  he  remains  at  home; 
he  lias  sore  feet. — Do  you  learn  as  well  as  our  gardener's  son  ?— 
I  learn  better  than  he,  but  he  works  better  than  I. — Whose  car- 
riage is  the  finest  ? — Yours  is  very  fine,  but  that  of  the  captain  is 
still  finer,  and  ours  is  the  finest  of  all. — Has  any  one  as  fine  apples 
as  we  ? — No  one  has  such  fine  (ones).  (See  end  of  Lesson 
XXXIV.) 


FORTIETH  LESSON.—  bierjlgpt*  Action. 

To  begin.  2Cnfano,en*  (anjufancjen). 

Thou  beginnest  —  he  begins.  £)u  fana,ft  an  —  cr  fangt  an. 

I  begin  to  speak.  3d)  fange  an  gu  fprccfjcn. 

Does   your   servant   sweep   the  3U'()tt  3(jr   SBcbicntet    t>a£  Simmer 
room,  which  I  sweep  ?  au$,  n>c(d)e$  id)  au^fcfjrc  ? 

To  finish,  to  end.  (£  n  t>  t  g  C  n. 

Not  yet.  9?od)  ntd)t. 

Already.  <Sd)On. 

Before.  (Sfyc  (Oc»or). 

Do  you  speak  before  you  listen  ?  ©prcdjcn  Sic,  etje  ©ic  horcn  ? 
Does  he  go  to  the  market  before  ®cf)t  cr  auf  ten   9)iar6t,  ef)e  er 

he  writes  ?  fdjrctOt  ? 

Do  you  take  off  your  stockings  Steven  @tc  Sftte  ©trfimpfc  au^,  cftc 

before  you  take  off  your  shoes  ]       ©ie  3f)rc  ©d)ub<  au^tcf)cn  ? 
I  take  off  my  shoes  before  I  take  3d)  gU'fjc  mctnc  @d)ul)C  a«^  c^c 
off  my  stockings.  mctne  ©trfimpfe 


Obs.  A.  These  examples  show  that  when  a  con- 
junctive word,  as  a  conjunction,  a  relative  pronoun  or 
relative  adverb  begins  the  sentence,  the  separable  par- 
ticle is  not  detached  from  the  verb,  which  is  placed  at 
the  end.  (See  Lesson  XXXIV.  Obs.  C.9  and  Rule  of 
Syntax,  Lesson  XLVIL) 

Often.  £>  ft  (eftmatS,  8fter$),  its  compara- 

tive is  oftcr/  and  its  superlative 
am  oftcftcn. 

As  often  as  you.  (So  eft  rate  (Sic. 

Oftener  than  you.  £)cftcr  (£)ftcr)  o($  <£u. 

Not  so  often  as  you.  9?td)t  fo  oft  ait  <Stc. 

To  breakfast.  g  r  u  f)  ft  ft  df  c  n. 

J5'/r/y.  g  r  a  f). 

Do  you  breakfast  before  you  go  $ruf)fKtcfcn  (Ste,  c^c   ^ic    in  tm 
into  the  wood  ?  £Balt>  Qcf)cn  ? 


101 

Does  he  breakfast  before  he  be-  Jrufyftuoft  et,  c!je  ct  anftfngt  $u  at* 

gins  to  work  ]  Oaten  ? 

Do  you  breakfast  as  early  as  1  1  $rul)ftuc!en  (Sic  fo  ftiif)  nric  id)  ? 

I  breakfast  earlier  than  you.  3d)  frttfyftiirfe  ftiifyct  0(5 


©  p  &  t. 

Too.  3  u. 

Too  late.  3u  fpat. 

Too  early.  3u  frfifj. 

Too  great.  3u  Qrcp. 

Too  little.  3u  ftctn. 

Too  much.  3u  t»tcf. 

Do  you  speak  too  much  ?  (£prcd)cn  <Ste  gu  met  ? 

I  do  not  speak  enough.  3d)  fprcdjc  nid)t 


J5.  We  have  seen  (Lesson  XXIV.)  that  the  in- 
finitive in  German  is  always  preceded  by  the  particle 
git*  This  particle,  however,  is  omitted  before  the  infi- 
nitive, 

1st,  When  it  is  joined  to  one  of  the  following  verbs  : 

Surfeit*,  to  be  permitted  ;  fyeigen*,  to  bid  ;  fydfen*,  to 
help  ;  fyorett*,  to  hear  ;  foittten*,  to  be  able  (can)  ;  Idf* 
fen*,  to  let  ;  lefyrett,  to  teach  ;  (ernett,  to  learn  ;  mogen*, 
to  be  allowed  (may)  ;  tnujfen*,  to  be  obliged  (must)  ; 
fe()en*,  to  see  ;  fotten*,  to  be  obliged  (shall,  ought)  ;  tt>o(* 
len*,  to  be  willing,  to  wish  (will). 

$afyren*,  to  ride,  to  go  (in  a  carriage)  ;  ftnten*/  to 
find  ;  fiifyteit,  to  feel  ;  ttennen*,  to  call,  to  name  ;  reiten*, 
to  ride,  to  go  on  horseback. 

2d,  When  the  infinitive  is  used  in  an  absolute  sense. 
Ex.  gfei£ig  fern  cjejt'emt  bem  Sftcmne/  it  behoves  a  man  to 
be  assiduous.  When  two  infinitives  are  thus  em- 
ployed, the  verb  which  follows  them  is  put  in  the  third 
person  singular.  Ex.  Seine  $ef)(er  befennen  nnb  berenett 
ijl  fofyon  fyalbe  Sejfernng,  to  acknowledge  one's  faults  and 
to  repent  of  them  is  already  half  an  amendment.  In 
constructing  the  phrase  with  e£  t(l,  it  is,  the  verbs  fern*, 
to  be;  befennen*,  to  acknowledge;  berenen,  to  repent, 
are  removed  to  the  end  and  preceded  by  }  it,  Ex.  @£ 
gejtemt  bem  9Kanne,  fleigtg  jn  fetn.  ®$  tjl  fcf)on  f;a(be 
rnng,  feine  geljkr  jit  befennen  nnb  jn  berenen* 


102 

EXERCISES.    92. 

Do  you  begin  to  speak  ? — I  begin  to  speak. — Does  your  brother 
begin  to  learn  Italian? — He  begins  to  learn  it. — Can  you  already 
speak  German? — Not  yet,  but  I  am  beginning. — Do  our  friends 
begin  to  speak? — They  do  not  yet  begin  to  speak,  but  to  read. — 
Does  our  father  already  begin  his  letter  ? — He  does  not  yet  begin 
it. — Does  the  merchant  begin  to  sell  ? — He  does  begin. — Can  you 
swim  already? — Not  yet,  but  I  begin  to  learn. — Does  your  son 
speak  before  he  listens  ? — He  listens  before  he  speaks. — Does  your 
brother  listen  to  you  (Lesson  XXXVI.)  before  he  speaks? — He 
speaks  before  he  listens  to  me. — Do  your  children  read  before  they 
write  ? — They  write  before  they  read. — Does  your  servant  sweep 
the  warehouse  before  he  sweeps  the  room  ? — He  sweeps  the  room 
before  he  sweeps  the  warehouse. — Dost  thou  drink  before  thou 

foest  out? — I  go  out  before  I  drink. — Does  your  cousin  wash  his 
ands  (feme  £anfce)  before  he  washes  his  feet  ? — He  washes  his 
feet  before  he  washes  his  hands. — Do  you  extinguish  the  fire  be- 
fore you  extinguish  the  candle  ? — I  extinguish  neither  the  fire  nor 
the  candle  (oul,  to  the  end). — Do  you  intend  to  go  out  before  you 
write  your  letters  ? — I  intend  writing  my  letters  before  I  go  out. — 
Does  your  son  take  off  his  boots  before  he  takes  off  his  coat  ? — 
My  son  takes  off  neither  his  boots  nor  his  coat  (au£,  to  the  end). 

93. 

Do  you  intend  to  depart  soon  (baft)  ? — I  intend  to  depart  to- 
morrow.— Do  you  speak  as  often  as  1 1 — I  do  not  speak  as  often, 
but  my  brother  speaks  oftener  than  you. — Do  I  go  out  as  often  as 
your  father  ? — You  do  not  go  out  as  often  as  he ;  but  he  drinks 
oftener  than  you. — Do  you  begin  to  know  this  man  1 — I  begin  to 
know  him. — Do  you  breakfast  early  1 — We  breakfast  at  a  quarter 
past  nine. — Does  your  cousin  breakfast  earlier  than  you? — He 
breakfasts  later  than  I. — At  what  o'clock  does  he  breakfast  ? — He 
breakfasts  at  eight  o'clock,  and  I  at  half-past  six. — Do  you  not 
breakfast  too  early  ? — I  breakfast  too  late. — Does  your  father  break- 
fast as  early  as  you  ? — He  breakfasts  later  than  I. — Does  he  finish 
his  letters  before  he  breakfasts  ? — He  breakfasts  before  he  finishes 
them. — Is  your  hat  too  large  ? — It  is  neither  too  large  nor  too 
small. — Does  our  gardener  breakfast  before  he  goes  into  the  garden  1 
— He  goes  into  the  garden  before  he  breakfasts. — Do  you  read 
French  as  often  as  German? — I  read  French  oftener  than  German. 
— Does  the  physician  speak  too  much  ? — He  does  not  speak  enough. 
— Do  the  Germans  drink  too  much  wine? — They  do  not  drink 
enough  of  it. — Do  they  drink  more  beer  than  cider  J — They  drink 
more  of  the  one  than  of  the  other. — Have  you  much  money  ] — 
We  have  not  enough  of  it. — Have  your  cousins  much  corn  ? — 
They  have  only  a  little,  but  enough. — Have  you  much  more  brandy  ? 
—We  have  not  much  more  of  it. — Have  you  as  many  tables  as 


103 

chairs  1 — I  have  as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Does  your 
friend  receive  as  many  letters  as  notes  ? — He  receives  more  of  the 
latter  than  of  the  former. — Do  you  finish  before  you  begin  ? — I 
must  begin  before  I  finish.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


FORTY-FIRST  LESSON.— Qcin  uni  met$$*te  Italian. 

THE  PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

The  past  participle  of  regular  verbsa  is  formed  from 
the  second  person  plural  of  the  present  indicative,  by 
prefixing  to  it  g  e,  Ex.  3fyr  fiebet  or  Kebt,  you  love  ;  ge* 
Itebct  or  geliebr,  loved.  The  past  participle  of  irregular 
verbs  will  always  be  given  with  the  verb. 

All  that  has  been  said  (Obs.  A.  Lesson  XXXIV.)  on 
the  rejection  of  the  letter  e,  is  equally  applicable  to 
the  past  participle,  this  being  formed  from  the  second 
person  plural. 

Obs.  A.  Some  verbs  do  not  add  the  syllable  g  e  in 
the  past  participle.  (See  those  verbs,  Lesson  XLV.) 

To  be — been.  <S  C  t  n  *  —  gcwcfcn. 

Have  you  been  to  the  market  1  ©inb  <Sic  cwf   tern  9flacf te  rjcrocs 

fen? 

I  have  been  there.  3cf>  bin  ba  gcrocfcn. 

I  have  not  been  there.  3cf)  tin  nicl)t  ba  gcrocfcn. 

Have  1  been  there  1  S3in  id)  ba  gcrocfcn  ? 

You  have  been  there.  (Sic  fint)  ba  gctvcfcn. 

Has  he  been  there  ?  3ft  ct  ta  gcnxfcn  ? 

Ever.  3  C ,  i  c  m  a  I  $ . 

Never.  $1  i  c ,  n  i  c  m  a  I  $ . 

Have  you  been  at  the  ball  ?  (Stnt)  <Sic  auf  bcm  SBalt  gcwcfcn  ? 

H?.ve  you  ever  been  at  the  ball  ?  (Sint)  @tc  jc  auf  t>cm  33ai(  gcwcfcn  ? 

I  have  never  been  there.  3d)  bin  nic  t>a  gcrocfcn. 

Thou  hast  never  been  there.  3)u  In  ft  me  t)a  gcrocfcn. 

You  have  never  been  there.  (Sic  ftnb  (3()t:  fcit)  ntcmatS  ba  £C» 

tt>cfcn. 

He  has  never  been  there.  (£t  ift  ntc  ba  gcttJcfcn. 

Have  you  already  been  at  the  (Stnb  @ic  fcljcn  im  <Sc^aufpict  cjcwc- 
play  ?  fen  ? 

*  The  pupils,  in  repeating  the  irregular  verbs  already  given,  must  not  fail 
to  mark  in  their  lists  the  past  participle  of  those  verbs. 


104 

I  have  already  been  there.  3d)  bin  fdjon  ba  geroefeff. 

You  have  already  been  there*        (Sic  finb  fd)en  ba  gewcfetu 
The  play,  tag  <Sd)aufptc(  (plur.  e). 

I  have  not  yet  been  there.  3d)  bin  ned)  nicbt  ba  gcrocfen* 

Thou  hast  not  yet  been  there.  2)u  btft  ncd)  nid)tba  gerocfcn* 
You  have  not  yet  been  there.  @tc  finb  nod)  nid)t  ba  gcnxfcn. 
He  has  not  yet  been  there.  (5r  tft  tied)  md)t  ba  gcrocfen. 

We  have  not  yet  been  there.        SBtt  ftnb  ncd)  ntd)t  ba  gewefen. 
Have  you   already  been  at  my  ©tnb  <£tc  fd)0n  bet  nu'tnem  SSatct  ge? 

father's  (with  my  father)  1  roefcn  ? 

I  have  not  yet  been  there  (with  3d)  bin  nod)  ntd)t   fcci  tfjm 

him).  fen. 

Where  have  you  been  this  morn-  2Bo  ftnb  €>te  btcfcn  SERorgcn 

ing  1  fen  ? 

I  have  been  in  the  garden.  3d)  bin  tm  (in  bem)  ©artcn 

fi-n. 

Where  has  thy  brother  been  ?  SBo  tft  £>etn  ffirubcr  gcnxfcn  ? 
He  has  been  in  the  storehouse.  (Sr  ift  tm  33orratOs!;aufc  gcrocfcn. 

EXERCISES.     94. 

Where  have  you  been  ? — I  have  been  at  the  market. — Have  yon 
been  at  the  ball  ] — 1  have  been  there. — Have  I  been  at  the  play  7^ 
You  have  been  there. — Hast  thou  been  there  ? — I  have  not  been 
there. — Has  your  cousin  ever  been  at  the  theatre  1 — He  has  never 
been  there. — Hast  thou  already  been  in  the  great  square  ? — I  have 
never  been  there. — Do  you  intend  to  go  thither  ? — I  intend  to  go 
thither. — When  will  you  go  thither? — I  will  go  thither  to-morrow. 
— At  what  o'clock  ? — At  twelve  o'clock. — Has  your  son  already 
been  in  my  large  garden  ? — He  has  not  yet  been  there. — Does  he 
intend  to  see  it  ? — He  does  intend  to  see  it. — When  will  he  go 
thither  (frinctn)  ? — He  will  go  thither  to-day.— Does  he  intend  to  go 
to  the  ball  this  evening  ? — He  does  intend  to  go  thither. — Have  you 
already  been  at  the  ball  1 — I  have  not  yet  been  there. — When  do 
you  intend  to  go  thither  (bafytn)  1 — I  intend  to  go  thither  to-morrow, 
— Have  you  already  been  in  the  Englishman's  room  ? — I  have  not 
yet  been  in  it  (bartn). — Have  you  been  in  my  rooms? — I  have 
been  there. — When  have  you  been  there  ? — I  have  been  there  this 
morning. — Have  I  been  in  your  room  or  in  that  (in  bcm)  of  your 
friend  ? — You  have  neither  been  in  mine  nor  in  that  of  my  friend, 
but  in  that  of  the  Italian. 

95. 

Has  the  Dutchman  been  in  our  storehouses  or  in  those  (in  bcncn) 
of  the  English  ? — He  has  neither  been  in  ours  nor  in  those  of  the 
English,  but  in  those  of  the  Italians. — Hast  thou  already  been  at 
the  market  ? — I  have  not  yet  been  there,  but  I  intend  to  go  thither. 
— Has  the  son  of  our  bailiff  been  there  ? — He  has  been  there.— 
When  has  he  been  there  ? — He  has  been  there  to-day. — Does  the 


105 

son  of  our  neighbour  intend  to  go  to  the  market  1 — He  does  intend 
to  go  thither. — What  does  he  wish  to  buy  there  1 — He  wishes  to 
buy  some  chickens,  oxen,  cheese,  beer,  and  cider  there. — Have  you 
already  been  at  my  cousin's  house  1 — I  have  already  been  there. — 
Has  your  friend  already  been  there  1 — He  has  not  yet  been  there. — 
Have  we  already  been  at  our  friends  1 — We  have  not  yet  been 
there  (foci  tfyncn). — Have  our  friends  ever  been  at  our  house  1 — 
They  have  never  been  there. — Have  you  ever  been  at  the  theatre  ? 
I  have  never  been  there. — Have  you  a  mind  to  write  a  letter  1 — 
I  have  a  mind  to  write  one. — To  whom  do  you  wish  to  write  I— 
I  wish  to  write  to  my  son. — Has  your  father  already  been  in  the 
country  1 — He  has  not  yet  been  there,  but  he  intends  to  go  thither.— 
Does  he  intend  to  go  thither  to-day  1 — He  intends  to  go  thither  to- 
morrow.— At  what  o'clock  wrill  he  depart1? — He  will  depart  at 
half  past  six. — Does  he  intend  to  depart  before  he  breakfasts  ? — 
He  intends  to  breakfast  before  he  departs. — Have  you  been  any- 
where ] — I  have  been  nowhere.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


FORTY-SECOND   LESSON.  —  gtxm  uttir 
Ceciion. 

To  have — had.  £  a  fc  e  n  *  —  9  c  &  a  6 1 . 

DC/3  The  participle  past,  as  well  as  the  infinitive 

(Lesson  XXIV),  when  it  forms  with  the  auxiliary  a 
compound  tense,  is  in  German  placed  at  the  end  of  the 
phrase. 

Have  you  had  my  coat  ?  £afcen  &w  nicinen  9?oc!  gcljafct  ? 

I  have  not  had  it.  3d)  fyabe  ttw  nicfyt  Qcfyabt. 

Have  I  had  it  ?  £abc  tcb  ifytt  gefjabt  ? 

You  have  had  it.  Sic  fynben  tl)h  gcbcibt. 

You  have  not  had  it.  (gte  fyabcn  tf)n  md)t  acljafct. 

Thou  hast  not  had  it.  S)u  fyaft  tf>n  md)t  gctjabt. 

Has  he  had  it  ?  &at  cr  tfw  ^cfjaM  ? 

He  has  had  it.  (5t  fyat  ifyn  gefya&t. 

Hast  thou  had  my  book  1  ^oft  £»u  twin  23ud) 

I  have  had  it.  3cf)  fabc  C$  gcfycibt. 

I  have  not  had  it.  3d)  fyabe  C8  md)t  cjcftafct. 

Have  you  had  the  books  1  £akn  <Stc  Me  23iicf)Ct  ( 

I  have  had  them.  3$)  fafo  fie 

Has  he  had  them  ?  &at  cr  ftc  g 

He  has  had  them.  (£r  l)at  fie  g 

-Have  you  had  bread  ?  JDabcn  (Sic  23ret>  Cjelja&t  ? 

I  have  had  some.  Scb  fyaOc  n?ctd)C^  gcbcibt 

Hast  thou  had  paper  ?  |>aft  J)u  Rapier 
6* 


106 

I  have  had  none.  Scf)  fynfce  fctnS  geljcibt. 

Have  I  had  any  ?  ^>abe  id)  n>c(d)C*  .qcfyabt 

Has  he  had  some  wine  ?  $at  cr  SSctn  gcfyabt  ? 

He  has  had  some.  <£t  f)at  rc>eld)en  gcfjabt 

He  has  had  none.  @r  fyat  fcinen  gef)abt. 

What  has  he  had  ?  £Ba$  f)at  cr  geljabt  ? 

He  has  had  nothing.  (£r  (jot  nid)t$  gefyabt. 
He  has  never  been  either  right  f  (£t  fyat  rue  n?ct)Ct:  SKcdjt  no<^  Uns 
or  wrong.  rcd)t 


To  ^a^e  ^Zace.  ®  t  a  1  1  ft  n  b  c  n  *. 

Does  the  ball   take   place  this  Jtnbct    tct     S3all     ttcfcn     2(0cnt) 

evening  ]  ©tatt  ? 

It  does  take  place.  <£t  pnbct  ©tott. 

It  takes  place  this  evening.          (Sr  pntct  fcicfcn  2C6cnb  @tatt. 

^ownJ.  ©cfunbcn. 

When  did  the  ball  take  place  !      SDSann  ^at  tec    S3att  (Statt  gcfuns 

ben? 

Yesterday.  ©cftcrn. 

The  day  before  yesterday.  8Scrqc|icrn. 

It  took  place  yesterday.  <£r  f)at  gcftcrn  Statt  gcfunbcn. 

Obs.  A.  Expressions  such  as  Statt  finben*,  ought 
to  be  considered  as  separable  verbs,  of  which  the  par- 
ticle is  placed  at  the  end  in  simple  tenses  and  before 
the  syllable  g  c  of  the  past  participle.  Here  the  sub- 
stantive ©tdtt,  place,  stands  as  a  separable  particle. 

Time.  8flal.a 

The  first  time.  £)a$  crftc  M. 

The  last  time.  £)ac>  lc£te  9^a(. 

Last.  Cc|t. 
How  many  times  (how  often)  ?     SBic  mctmat  ? 

Once,  cinmal  ; 

twice,  gTOcimol  ; 

thrice,  brctmal  ; 

several  times,  »crfcfttct>cnc  9}Ja(. 

Formerly.  ©  f)  c  b  c  m  (etcmat^  cfjcbcffen,  r»cr* 

mnts). 
Sometimes.  5)1  a  n  d)  m  a  (  . 

Do  you  go  sometimes  to  the  mar-  ©ebon    <Ste    mcmcfymat     auf    ben 

ket  ?  9Xar!t  ? 

I  do  go  sometimes  thither.  3cf)  QC^e  man^mat  tafjtn. 

a  When  the  word  3ftat  is  preceded  by  an  adjective  or  an  ordinal  number,  it 
is  written  with  a  capital  initial  letter  ;  when  annexed  to  a  cardinal  number,  it 
begins  with  a  small  letter. 


107 

Gone.  ©  e  g  a  n  g  c  tu 

Gone  thither.  £tnge$ancjcn. 

Have  you   gone  thither  some-  (Sint)  ©tc  mand)ma( 
times  ? 


1?.  Here  it  may  be  seen  how  the  syllable  g  e 
in  the  past  participle  is  placed  between  the  separable 
particle  and  the  verb.  (See  Lesson  XXV.) 


I  have  gone  thither  sometimes.     £sd)  Inn  mcmd&mal 

Oftener  than  you.  JDcftcr  a(S  ©tc. 

Have  the  men  had  my  trunk  ]      £akn  tic  Banner  mctncn 


They  have  not  had  it.  (gfc  fyafrcn  if)n  md)t  (jcfjafct. 

Who  has  had  it1?  SScr  fyat  tfyn  cjcfyabt"? 

Have  I  been  wrong  in  buying  £ciOc  id)  Unrcdjt  Qcfyafct,  23ud)cr  ju 

books'?  fyufcn1? 

You  have   not  been  wrong   in  Sic  fycibcn  mcfyt  ilnrcd)t  Qcrjafct,  n?e(s 

buying  some.  d)C  $u  faufcn. 

EXERCISES.  96. 

Have  you  had  my  glove  1  —  I  have  had  it.  —  Have  you  had  my 
pocket-handkerchief?  —  I  have  not  had  it.  —  Hast  thou  had  my 
umbrella1?  —  I  have  not  had  it.  —  Hast  thou  had  my  pretty  knife  ?  — 
I  have  had  it.  —  When  hadst  (f)(ift  —  .qcfyaOt)  thou  it?  —  I  had  it  yes- 
terday. —  Have  I  had  thy  gloves  ]  —  You  have  had  them.  —  Has  your 
brother  had  my  wooden  hammer  1  —  He  has  had  it.  —  Has  he  had 
my  golden  ribbon  ]  —  He  has  not  had  it.  —  Have  the  English  had 
my  beautiful  ship  1  —  They  have  had  it.  —  Who  has  had  my  thread 
stockings  ?  —  Your  servants  have  had  them.  —  Have  we  had  the  iron 
trunk  of  our  good  neighbour  ?  —  We  have  had  it.  —  Have  we  had 
his  fine  carriage  ?  —  We  have  not  had  it.  —  Have  we  had  the  stone 
tables  of  the  foreigners  1  —  We  have  not  had  them.  —  Have  we  had 
the  wooden  leg  of  the  Irishman]  —  We  have  not  had  it.  —  Has  the 
American  had  my  good  work  1  —  He  has  had  it.  —  Has  he  had  my 
silver  knife  1  —  He  has  not  had  it.  —  Has  the  young  man  had  the 
first  volume  of  my  work?  —  He  has  not  had  the  first,  but  the 
second.  —  Has  he  had  it"?  —  Yes,  Sir,  he  has  had  it.  —  When  has  he 
had  it  ?  —  He  has  had  it  this  morning.  —  Have  you  had  sugar  1  — 
I  have  had  some.  —  Have  I  had  good  paper  1  —  You  have  had  some. 
—  Has  the  sailor  had  brandy  1  —  He  has  had  some.  —  Have  you  had 
any  ?  —  I  have  had  none. 

97. 

Has  the  German  had  good  beer  ]  —  He  has  had  some.  —  Hast 
thou  had  large  cakes  (.ftucfycn  is  not  softened  in  the  plur.)  ?  —  I  have 
had  some.  —  Has  thy  brother  had  any  1  —  He  has  had  none.  —  Has 
the  son  of  our  gardener  had  flour  1  —  He  has  had  some.  —  Have  the 


108 

Poles  had  good  tobacco  ?^-They  have  had  some.^What  tobacco 
have  they  had  !— They  have  had  tohacco  for  smoking-  and  snuff 
(9?cwd)r  unb  ©dwupftabaf). — Have  the  English  had  as  much  sugar 
as  tea  1 — They  have  had  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — 
Has  the  physician  been  right  ! — He  has  been  wrong. — Has  the 
Dutchman  been  right  or  wrong  !— He  never  has  been  either  right 
or  wrong. — Have  I  been  wrong  in  buying  honey  ?— You  have  been 
Wrong  in  buying  some.—- What  has  your  cousin  had  1 — He  has 
had  your  boots  and  shoes.  —  Has  he  had  my  good  biscuits 
(Snnebnct  is  not  softened  in  the  plur.)  1- — He  has  not  had  them.— 
What  has  the  Spaniard  had  ? — He  has  had  nothing. — -Who  has 
had  courage  ? — The  English  have  had  some. — Have  the  English 
had  many  friends  ? — They  have  had  many  of  them. — Have  we 
had  many  enemies  ! — We  have  not  had  many  of  them. — Have  we 
had  more  friends  than  enemies  !—  We  have  had  more  of  the  latter 
than  of  the  former. — Has  your  son  had  more  wine  than  meat!; — 
He  has  had  more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former.— Has  the  Turk 
had  more  pepper  than  corn  l-^He  has  had  more  of  the  one  than  of 
the  other. — Has  the  painter  had  anything! — He  has  had  nothing. 

98. 

Have  I  been  right  in  writing  to  my  brother  1 — You  have  not 
been  wrong  in  writing  to  him. — Have  you  had  the  head-ache  !— 
I  have  had  the  tooth-ache.— Have  you  had  anything  good  ! — I  have 
had  nothing  bad  ! — Did  the  ball  take  place  yesterday  1 — It  did  not 
take  place.— Does  it  take  place  to-day  ? — It  does  take  place  to- 
day.— When  does  the  ball  take  place  ? — It  takes  place  this  evening, 
- — Did  it  take  place  the  day  before  yesterday  ! — It  did  take  place. 
- — At  what  o'clock  did  it  take  place  ! — It  took  place  at  eleven 
o'clock. — Have  you  gone  to  my  brother's  ! — I  have  gone  thither. — 
How  often  hast  thou  gone  to  my  cousin's  house  ? — I  have  gone 
thither  twice. — Do  you  go  sometimes  to  the  theatre  ! — I  go  some- 
times thither. — How  many  times  have  you  been  at  the  theatre  ! — 
I  have  been  there  only  once. — Have  you  sometimes  been  at  the 
ball ! — I  have  often  been  there. — Has  your  brother  ever  gone  to  the 
ball ! — He  has  never  gone  thither.— Has  your  father  sometimes 
gone  to  the  ball  ! — He  Went  (ift — gccjangcn)  thither  formerly.— Has 
he  gone  thither  as  often  as  you !-— He  has  gone  thither  oftener  than 
I. — Dost  thou  go  sometimes  into  the  garden  I — I  do  go  thither 
sometimes. — Hast  thou  never  been  there  1 — I  have  often  been 
there. — Does  your  old  cook  often  go  to  the  marketl — He  does  ga 
thither  often. — Does  he  go  thither  as  often  as  my  bailiff  ? — He 
goes  thither  oftener  than  he. 

99. 

Have  you  formerly  gone  to  the  ball  !— I  have  gone  thither  some- 
times.— When  hast  thou  been  at  the  ball  ! — I  was  there  the  day 
before  yesterday.— Didst  thou  find  anybody  there  ? — I  found  (foa&e 
Qcfunfcen)  nobody  there. — Hast  thou  gone  to  the  ball  oftener  than 


109 

thy  brothers  \ — I  have  gone  thither  oftener  than  they. — Has  your 
cousin  often  been  at  the  play  ] — He  has  been  there  several  times, 
—Have  you  sometimes  been  hungry  ] — I  have  often  been  hungry. 
— Has  your  valet  often  been  thirsty] — He  has  never  been  either 
hungry  or  thirsty. — Have  you  gone  to  the  play  early  1 — I  have 
gone  thither  late. — Have  I  gone  to  the  ball  as  early  as  you  ]— You 
have  gone  thither  earlier  than  I. — Has  your  brother  gone  thither 
too  latel — He  has  gone  thither  too  early. — Have  your  brothers  had 
anything  1 — They  have  had  nothing. — Who  has  had  my  purse  and 
my  money  1—  Your  servant  has  had  both. — Has  he  had  my  stick 
and  my  hat  ? — -He  has  had  both. — Hast  thou  had  my  horse  or  that 
of  my  brother] — I  have  had  neither  yours  nor  that  of  your  brother. 
- — Have  I  had  your  note  or  that  of  the  physician  1 — You  have  had 
both  (beifcc). — What  has  the  physician  had  1 — He  has  had  nothing. 
— Has  anybody  had  my  golden  candlestick  1 — Nobody  has  had  it. 
(See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


FORTY.THIRD  LESSON.—  SDrei  tmir  trier^igste 


To  do  —  done.  $  f)  u  n  *  — 


"What  have  you  done  ?  5Bn$  fjabctt  ©ic  gctfycm  ? 

I  have  done  nothing.  3d)  fafce  md)t6  cjetfycin. 

Has   the   shoemaker  made  my  £at  tet  @d)ul)mad)cr  mcinc  ©ttcfel 

boots  1  gcmacbt  ? 

He  has  made  them.  (Srr  f)cit  fie  gcmacfyt. 

He  has  not  made  them.  (£r  fyat  fie  nid)t  gcmacfyt. 


Have  you  taken  your  boots  off  1  £akn  ©tc  Sfce 

I  have  taken  them  off.  3d)  Ijafce  fie  auftjcgegcn 

This,  that.  2)iefc$,  b  a  5. 

Has  he  told  you  that  1  £at  cr  Sfyncn  fcaS 

It.  6-  1. 

He  has  told  it  to  me*  (gr  fjat  c$  nut 


Ofo.  The  neuter  pronoun  e£,  it,  which  is  some- 
times rendered  into  English  by  so,  and  more  elegantly 
omitted,  may  in  German  relate  to  substantives  of  any 
gender  or  number,  to  adjectives,  and  even  to  whole 
phrases. 


110 

Have  you  told  it  to  me  ?  £abcn  &w  *$  n^r  9cfa^  ? 

1  have  told  it  to  you.  3cf)  (jafo*  f$  S&ncn  gcfagt. 

Who  has  told  it  to  him  ?  2Bet  fat  c$  tbm  gcfngt  ? 

Are  you  the  brother  of  my  friend  1  ©tnt  (£ie  t>cr  iBruict:  rncine*  gteun* 

be*.? 

I  am.  f  3d)  bin  c  $. 

Are  you  ill  ?  feint  (Sic  frcmf  ? 

I  am  not.  f  3d)  Inn  c  $  md)t. 

Are  our  neighbours  as  poor  as  f  <Stnt>  unfctc  9?cid)&arn  jo  arm,  roie 

they  say  ?  ft  c  c  $  fcigcn  ? 

They  are  so.  t  ®*c  Pn&  c& 

T0  speak  —  spoken.         ©ptecfycn*  —  cjefprecfyen. 

I  have  spoken  with,  the  man.        Scf)  f)cibc  nut  fccm  9^annc  gcfprcd)cn. 
I  have  spoken  to  the  man.  3d)  Ija&e  t>cn  SOiann  gcfprcdjcn.* 

9JI  1  1  (a  preposition  which  gov- 
erns the  dative). 


With    which    man    have    you  SOttt  wc(d)cm  SO^annc  ^abcn  ©tc  cjc$ 

spoken  ]  fprccl)cn  ? 

To  which  man  have  you  spoken  1  SEctdjcn  9}fann  f)cibcn  <Stc  gcfprcd^cn  ? 

CM*  (past  participle).     ©cfd)ntttcn. 
Picked  up.  X  u  f  9  c  f)  o  b  c  n. 

Washed.  ©  C  tu  a  f  cf)  c  n. 

Which  books  have  you  picked  2Bc(d)C  Sitcfycr  ^abcn  ^U  aufcjcljo* 

up  ?  ben  ? 

I  have  picked  up  yours.  Set)   fafcc  tie   S^tgcn   oufgcbcbcn. 

(See  O&s.  jB.  preceding  Lesson.) 

Burnt.  95  c  r  b  r  e  n  n  t.b 

Which  books  have  you  burnt!      SBctcfte  SBiicbcr  fjatcn  S"tc  »cr6rcnnt  ? 
I  have  burnt  no  books.  3d)  ()a^c  fcinc  93iid)cr  scrbrcnnt. 

Torn.  3  cr  tiff  en. 

Which  shirts  have  you  torn  1       fHMcbe  £cmtcn  Wen  (Sic  gcrriffcn  ? 
I  have  torn  my  own.  3d)  ()abe  tic  nwtnigcn  gcttiffcn. 

EXERCISES.    100. 

Have  you  anything  to  do?  —  I  have  nothing  to  do.  —  What  has 
your  brother  to  do  1  —  He  has  to  write  letters.  —  What  hast  thou 
done  1  —  I  have  done  nothing.  —  Have  I  done  anything  ?  —  You  have 

a  Semanbett  fprcd>ett  means  to  speak  to  somebody  in  an  absolute  sense,  with- 
out mentioning  the  subject  spoken  of.  whilst  mtt  3eman>cm  fyrecfyen,  means  to 
speak  with  or  to  somebody  about  a  particular  thing,  as  :  mit  Semanbem  liber 
etttxiS  (yon  etner  <Sacfoe)  fpred^Ctt,  to  speak  with  somebody  about  something. 

b  The  participle  past  of  the  verb  yerbrennen  would  be  serbrannt,  if  it  were 
employed  either  in  a  neuter  or  intransitive  sense.  Ex.  Are  my  books  burnt  ? 
ftnb  metne  Q3ucfter  yerbrannt?  They  are  burnt,  fie  ftnb  serbvannt.  (See  Note 
c,  Lesson  XXV.) 


Ill 

torn  my  clothes  (.Jl(ctber). — What  have  your  children  done  ? — They 
have  torn  their  beautiful  books. — What  have  we  done  1 — You  have 
done  nothing ;  but  your  brothers  have  burnt  my  fine  chairs. — Has 
the  tailor  already  made  your  coat  ? — He  has  not  yet  made  it. — 
Has  your  shoemaker  already  made  your  boots'? — He  has  already 
made  them. — Have  you  sometimes  made  a  hat? — I  have  never 
made  one. — Hast  thou  already  made  thy  purse  ? — I  have  not  yet 
made  it. — Have  our  neighbours  ever  made  books] — They  made 
(f)al»en  —  qomadbt)  some  formerly. — How  many  coats  has  your  tailor 
made  ? — He  has  made  thirty  or  forty  of  them. — Has  he  made  good 
or  bad  coats'? — He  has  made  (both)  good  and  bad  (ones). — Has 
our  father  taken  his  hat  off"? — He  has  taken  it  off. — Have  your 
brothers  taken  their  coats  off? — They  have  taken  them  off.— lias 
the  physician  taken  his  stockings  or  his  shoes  off? — He  has  taken 
off  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — What  has  he  taken  away1? — 
He  has  taken  away  nothing,  but  he  has  taken  off  his  large  hat. — 
Who  has  told  you  that  1 — My  servant  has  told  it  to  me. — What  has 
your  cousin  told  you  ? — He  has  told  me  nothing. — Who  has  told 
it  to  your  neighbour  ? — The  English  have  told  it  to  him. — Are  you 
the  brother  of  that  (ttcfcS)  youth  ? — I  am  (3>cl)  bin  Cf). — Ts  that  boy 
your  son  ? — He  is. — How  many  children  have  you  ? — I  have  but 
two. — Has  the  bailiff  gone  to  the  market  ? — He  has  not  gone 
thither. — Is  he  ill  ? — He  is. — Am  I  ill  ? — You  are  not. — Are  you 
as  tall  (grojj)  as  1 1 — I  am. — Are  your  friends  as  rich  as  they  say  ? 
— They  are. — Art  thou  as  fatigued  as  thy  brother? — I  am  more  so 
(e$  nictjr)  than  he. 

101. 

Have  you  spoken  to  my  father? — I  have  spoken  to  him. — When 
did  (fjaOcn  cjcfprocfyen)  you  speak  to  him? — I  spoke  to  him  the  day 
before  yesterday. — Have  you  sometimes  spoken  with  the  Turk  ? — 
I  have  never  spoken  with  him. — How  many  times  have  you 
spoken  to  the  captain? — I  have  spoken  to  him  six  times. — Has 
the  nobleman  ever  spoken  with  you  ? — He  has  never  spoken  with 
me. — Have  you  often  spoken  with  his  son  ? — I  have  often  spoken 
with  him. — Have  you  spoken  with  him  oftener  than  we  ? — I  have 
not  spoken  with  him  so  often  as  you  (have). — To  which  son  of  the 
nobleman  have  you  spoken  ? — I  have  spoken  to  the  youngest. — To 
which  men  has  your  brother  spoken? — He  has  spoken  to  these. — 
What  has  your  gardener's  son  cut  ? — He  has  cut  trees. — Has  he 
cut  corn  ? — He  has  cut  some. — Has  he  cut  as  much  hay  as  corn  1 
— He  has  cut  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Have  you 
picked  up  my  knife  ? — I  have  picked  it  up. — Has  your  boy  picked 
up  the  tailor's  thimble? — He  has  not  picked  it  up. — Have  you 
picked  up  a  crown  ? — I  have  picked  up  two  of  them. — What  have 
you  picked  up? — We  have  picked  up  nothing. — Have  you  burnt 
anything?— We  have  burnt  nothing. — What  have  the  sailors 
burnt?— They  have  burnt  their  cloth  coats.— Hast  thou  burnt  my 
fine  ribbons  ? — I  have  not  burnt  them. — Which  books  has  the 


112 


Greek  burnt! — He  has  burnt  his  own. — Which  ships 
have  the  Spaniards  burnt? — They  have  burnt  no  ships. — Have  you 
burnt  paperl — I  have  not  burnt  any. — Has  the  Physician  burnt 
notes  1 — He  has  burnt  none. — Have  you  had  the  courage  to  burn 
my  hat  1 — I  have  had  the  courage  to  burn  it. — When  did  you  bum 
it  1 — I  burnt  it  yesterday. — Where  have  you  burnt  it  1 — I  have 
burnt  it  in  my  room. — Who  has  torn  your  shirt  ? — The  ugly  boy  of 
our  neighbour  has  torn  it. — Has  anybody  torn  your  books  1 — No- 
body has  torn  them. 


FORTY-FOURTH 


To  drink — drunk. 
To  carry — carried. 
To  bring — brought. 
To  send  — sent. 
To  write — written. 
Te  see    — seen. 
To  give  — given. 
To  lend  — lent. 


LESSON.— 
Ceciion. 


)i*r  tm&  uutjigste 


INFINITIVE.       PAST  PART. 
£rtnfen*  — getrtmfem 
£ragen*    — getragem 
93ringen*  — gebracfyt, 
©enben*   — gefanbt. 
©cfyreiben* — gefcfyriebetu 
(Sefyen*     — gefehem 
©eben*     — gegeben* 
?eifyen*     — getiefyem 


NEUTER  VERBS. 

Neuter  verbs  are  conjugated  like  the  active.  The 
latter,  however,  always  form  their  past  tenses  with 
the  auxiliary  fyafcen*,  to  have  ;  on  the  contrary,  some 
neuter  verbs  take  fetn*,  to  be,  and  others  fyaben*,  for 
their  auxiliary ;  others  again  take  sometimes  fyabett*, 
and  sometimes  fern**  Those  of  which  the  auxiliary 
is  not  marked  have  the  same  as  in  English. 

To  come — come  (Past  part.).    &  o  m  m  c  n  *  —  g  e  E  o  m  m  c  n. 
To  go    — gone.  ©  e  f)  c  n 

Is  the  man  come  to  your  father?  3ft  fcet 

fommcn  ? 

He  is  come  to  him.  (5t  ift  $u  tfjm  gcfcmmcn. 

Is    thy   brother    gone   into   the  3ft   £)Ctn    JBrufcer  auf  tag  (auf$) 

field  1  gclb  ge^cncjen  ? 

He  is  gone  thither.  (£T  iff  t>al)tn  gCijcuiQcn. 

Have  you  seen  the  man  1  £afcen  <Stc  t>cn  »3}tann  cjcfcfjen  ? 

I  have  seen  him.  3cr>  babe  tf)it 

Have  you  seen  my  book  ?  $aOen  @ic  mcin 


113 

I  have  seen  it.  3d)  fafce  c$  gefcfjcn. 

I  have  not  seen  it.  3d)  (ja&e  c$  md)t  geferjen. 

When?—  Where?  2B  onn?  —  955  c  ?a 

When  did  you  see  my  cousin  ?    SBann  fjafcen  ©tc  mctncn  SScttcr  aes 


I  saw  him  the  day  before  yester-  3d)  fyaOe  tf)n  ttorgcftcrn  gcfefjen. 

day. 

Where  have  you  seen  him  *          95*0  Men  (Sic  tfjn  gcfcrjcn  ? 
I  have  seen  him  at  the  theatre.     3d)  baOc  if)n  im  Sweater  gcfcfjcn. 
Where  hast  thou  seen  my  book  ?  S5?o  f)dfl  £>u  mctn  93ud)  gcfcfycn  ? 
I  have  seen  it  in  your  room.         3d)  fyabc  e$  in  Sfyrcm  dinmict  cjcfc* 

r;cn. 

Do  you  learn  to  read  I  Serncn  ©tc  tcfcn  ? 

I  do  learn  (it).  3d)  Icrnc  c^. 

I  learn  to  write.  3d)  (erne  fcbret&en. 

Have  you  learnt  to  write  ?  jbaben  ©te  fd)tetbcn  Qe(ernt  ? 

I  have  (learnt  it).  3d)  (jttbc  es  gclernt. 

To  know  (to  be  acquainted  with)  Jtennen*  —  cjcfannt. 
—  known. 

Have  you  known  those  men  1       £akn  @ie  jenc  Scanner 
I  have  not  known  them.  3d)  (jabc  fie  md)t  gefannt* 

Obs.  Instead  of  the  past  participle,  the  following 
verbs  retain  the  form  of  the  infinitive  when  preceded 
by  another  infinitive  :b  biirfen*,  to  be  permitted  ;  fyeifjen*/ 
to  bid  ;  fyelfen*,  to  help  ;  fyorett,  to  hear  ;  fontten*,  to  be 
able  (can)  ;  fofien*,  to  let  ;  Iel)ten,  to  teach  ;  (ernen,  to 
learn  ;  ntogen*,  to  be  allowed  (may)  ;  muflfen*,  to  be 
obliged  (must)  ;  fefyen*,  to  see  ;  fotlen,  to  be  obliged 
(shall,  ought)  ;  Gotten,  to  be  willing,  to  wish  (will).0 

To  let  (to  get,  to  have,  to  order).  2  a  f  f  c  n  *.     (See  Lesson  XXXI. 

where  this  verb  is  conjugated 
in  the  present  tense.) 

To  get  or  to  have  mended  —  got  TCusbeffcrn  (often*. 
or  had  mended. 

a  Learners  ought  now  to  use  in  their  exercises  the  adverbs  of  time,  place, 
and  number,  mentioned  in  Lessons  XXVII.  XXXI.  XXXII.  and  XLII. 

b  It  will  be  useful  to  remember  that  the  particle  J  ll  does  not  precede  the 
infinitive  joined  to  one  of  these  verbs.     (See  Obs.  B.  Lesson  XL.) 

c  Modern  authors  do  not  always  observe  this  distinction,  but  give  the  pre- 
ference to  the  regular  form.  Thus  it  is  already  generally  said  :  2>cfe  babe  tfytt 
lennen  geternt  (not  lernett),  I  have  become  acquainted  with  him;  3d)  bftbe  tf)nt 
arbeitcn  gcbolfeit  (not  fcelfett),  I  have  helped  him  to  work;  ec  f)at  mid) 
ftredjen  gele^rt  (not  lenteit),  he  has  taught  me  to  speak  correctly. 


114 

To  get  or  to  have  washed — got  SBafdjen  (often*. 

or  had  washed. 

To  have  made — had  made.  9fl?ad)cn  taffcn*. 

Are  you  getting  a  coat  made  (do  £affcn  ©ic  ctncn  iKec! 

you  order  a  coat)  1 
I   am  getting   one  made  (I   do  2$)  (affc  ctncn  macfycn. 

order  one). 

I  have  had  one  made.  3$  f)a(>c  ctncn  macf)cn  (affcn. 

Has  your  brother  had  his  shirt  £at  Sfc  23tut>ct  fctn  £cml> 

washed  ?  (affcn  ? 

He  has  had  it  washed.  (Sr  fyat  c*>  roafcfycn  (affcn. 

The  cravat,  tag  £a(stud)  ; 

the  neck,  tcr  £a(*. 

Hastthou  sometimes  had  cravats  ^>aft  £)u  mancftmat  $aUl\i$)tt  au$* 

mended  1  frcffcrn  (affcn  ? 

I  have  had  some  mended  some-  3>cf)  fyabc  mandjma(  roctcfyc  auSfccffcnt 

times.  (affcn. 

* 

EXERCISES.    102. 

Have  you  drunk  wine  1 — I  have  drunk  some. — Have  you  drunk 
much  of  it] — I  have  drunk  but  little  of  it. — Hast  thou  drunk 
some  beer  ? — I  have  drunk  some  ? — Has  thy  brother  drunk  much 
good  cider? — He  has  not  drunk  much  of  it,  but  enough. — When 
did  you  drink  any  wine  ? — I  drank  some  yesterday  and  to-day  (3d) 
FjaOc  gcjicrn  unt  beute  ivc(cbcn). — Has  the  servant  carried  the  letter  ? 
— He  has  carried  it. — Where  has  he  carried  it  to  ? — He  has 
carried  it  to  your  friend. — Have  you  brought  us  some  apples  1 — We 
have  brought  you  some. — How  many  apples  have  you  brought  us  1 
— We  have  brought  you  twenty-five  of  them. — When  did  you 
bring  them  ? — I  brought  (babe — c}cbrad)t)  them  this  morning. — At 
what  o'clock? — At  a  quarter  to  eight. — Have  you  sent  your  little 
boy  to  the  market? — I  have  sent  him  thither  (t>af)tn). — When  did 
you  send  him  thither? — This  evening. — Have  you  written  to  your 
father  ? — I  have  written  to  him. — Has  he  answered  you  ? — He  has 
not  yet  answered  me. — Have  you  ever  written  to  the  physician  ? — 
I  have  never  written  to  him. — Has  he  sometimes  written  to  you  ? 
— He  has  often  written  to  me. — What  has  he  written  to  you  ? — He 
has  written  to  me  something. — Have  your  friends  ever  written  to 
you  ? — They  have  often  written  to  me. — How  many  times  (Lesson 
XLII.)  have  they  written  to  you  1 — They  have  written  to  me  more 
than  thirty  times. — Have  you  ever  seen  my  son  ? — I  have  never 
seen  him. — Has  he  ever  seen  you  1 — He  has  often  seen  me. — Hast 
thou  ever  seen  any  Greeks  ? — I  have  often  seen  some. — Have  you 
already  seen  a  Syrian  1 — I  have  already  seen  one. — Where  have 
you  seen  one  ? — At  the  theatre. — Have  you  given  the  book  to  my 
brother  ?  (Rule  of  Syntax,  Lesson  XXVIII.) — I  have  given  it  to 
him. — Have  you  given  money  to  the  merchant"? — I  have  given 
some  to  him. — How  much  have  you  given  to  him  1 — I  have  given 
to  him  fifteen  crowns. — Have  you  given  gold  ribbons  to  our  good 


115 

neighbours'  children"?  —  I  have  given  some  to  them.  —  Will  you 
give  some  bread  to  the  poor  (man)  (Page  34,  Obs.  A.)  1  —  I  have 
already  given  some  to  him.  —  Wilt  thou  give  me  some  wine  ]  —  I 
have  already  given  you  some.  —  When  didst  thou  give  me  some  ]  — 
I  gave  you  some  formerly.  —  Wilt  thou  give  me  some  now  ]  —  I 
cannot  give  you  any  (3ct)  fann  Sl^cn  Cctncn). 


103. 

Has  the  American  lent  you  money  1  —  He  has  lent  me  some.  — 
Has  he  oftenlent  you  some  1  —  He  has  lent  me  some  sometimes.  — 
When  did  he  lend  you  any  ?  —  He  lent  me  some  formerly.  —  Has 
the  Italian  ever  lent  you  money  ]  —  He  has  never  lent  me  any.  — 
Is  he  poor  ]  —  He  is  not  poor  ;  he  is  richer  than  you.  —  Will  you 
lend  me  a  crown  ]  —  I  will  lend  you  two  of  them.  —  Has  your  hoy 
come  to  mine  ]  —  He  has  come  to  him.  —  When  ]  —  This  morning.  — 
At  what  time  ]  —  Early.  —  Has  he  come  earlier  than  I  ]  —  At  what 
o'clock  did  you  come  ]  —  I  came  at  half  past  five.  —  He  has  come 
earlier  than  you.  —  Where  did  your  brother  go  to  ?  —  He  went  to  the 
ball.  —  When  did  he  go  thither]  —  He  went  thither  the  day  before 
yesterday.  —  Has  the  ball  taken  place  ]  —  It  has  taken  place.  —  Has 
it  taken  place  late?  —  It  has  taken  place  early.  —  At  what  o'clock? 

—  At  midnitrht.  —  Does  your  brother  learn  to  write  ]  —  He  does  learn 
it.  —  Does  he  already  know  how  (Lesson  XXXVII.)  to  read  ]  —  He 
does  not  know  how  yet.  —  Have  you  ever  learnt  German  ]  —  I  learnt 
it  formerly,  but  I  do  not  know  it.  —  Has  your  father  ever  learnt 
French]  —  He  has  never  learnt  it.  —  Does  he  learn  it  at  present]  — 
He  does  learn  it.  —  Do  you  know  the  Englishman  whom  I  know? 
I  do  not  know  the  one  whom  (Lessons  XII.  and  XIV.)  you  know  ; 
but  I  know  another  (Lesson  XXI).  —  Does  your  friend  know  the 
same  nobleman  whom  I  know]  —  He  does  not  know  the  same  ;  but 
he  knows  others.  —  Have  you  known  the  same  men  whom  I  have 
known  (nxtcbc  id)  gcfcmnt  hobc).  —  I  have  not  known  the  same  ;  but 
I  have  known  others.  —  Have  you  ever  had  your  coat  mended]  — 
I  have   sometimes  had  it  mended  ]  —  Hast  thou  already  had   thy 
boots  mended  ]  —  I  have  not  yet  had  them   mended.  —  Has   your 
cousin  sometimes  had   his  stockings  mended  ]  —  He  has  several 
times  had  them  mended.  —  Hast  thou  had  thy  hat  or  thy  shoe  mend- 
ed ?  —  I  have  neither  had  the  one  nor  the  other  mended.  —  Have  you 
had  my  cravats   or  my  shirts   washed  ]  —  I  have  neither  had  the 
one  nor  the  other  washed.  —  W7hat  stockings  have  you  had  washed  ? 

—  I  have  had  the  thread  stockings  washed.  —  Has  your  father  had 
a  table  made?  —  He  has  had  one  made.  —  Have  you  had  anything 
made  ?  —  I  have  had  nothing  made.    (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


116 

FORTY-FIFTH  LESSON.  —  JFiinf   unir  merjipte 
Action. 

To  receive  —  received.        S3e!ommen*     (erfyatten*, 
e  m  p  f  a  n  9  c  n  *). 

Ofo.  A  We  have  observed  (Lesson  XLI.)  that  some 
verbs  do  not  take  the  syllable  g  e  in  the  past  participle  ; 
they  are, 

1st,  Those  which  begin  with  one  of  the  inseparable 
unaccented  particles  :  be,  emp,  ent,  er,  ge,  fcer,  ttnber,  jer 
(See  Lesson  XXV.)?  or  with  one  of  the  following  par- 
ticles, when  inseparable  :  bltrcf),  through  ;  fyirtter,  behind  ; 
fiber,  over  ;  unt,  around  ;  itttter,  under  ;  Dolt,  full  ;  tttteber, 
again.  a 

2nd,  Those  derived  from  foreign  languages  and  ter- 
minating in  tren,  or  tereru  Ex.  flubiren/»  to  study  ;  past 
part,  flubirt,  studied. 

Rule.  All  verbs,  in  general,  which  have  not  the  prin- 
cipal accent  upon  the  first  syllable,  reject  the  syllable 
g  e  in  the  past  participle. 


How  much  money  have  you  re-  SBtCDtcl  dklb  fya&cn  fie  bcfommcn  1 

ceived  "? 

I  have  received  three  crowns.       3d)  fya&c  tret  Sfjafct  ftcEommctu 
Have  you  received  letters  ]  £abcn  ®^  ffirtcfc  erf)a(ten  ? 

I  have  received  some.  3d)  fjabc  wclc^c  ctfyalten. 

To  promise—  promised.         SSerfprcc^e  n*  —  1>  erfproc^cn. 

Obs.  B.  Derivative  and  compound  verbs  are  con- 
jugated like  their  primitives  :  thus  the  verb  fcerfprerfjeri* 
is  conjugated  like  fprecfyen*,  to  speak,  which  is  its  pri- 
mitive. (Lessons  XXIV.  and  XXXIV.) 

Do  you  promise  me  to  come  ?       83crfptecf)cn  <£te  mtr  $u  fommen  ? 
I  promise  you.  3cf)  t)erfpred)C  c^  3bncn. 

The  grosh  (a  coin),  fcct  ®refcl)cn  (is  not  softened  in  the 

plur.)  ; 

the  denier,  tec  pfennig. 

A  crown    contains   twenty-four  (Sin   Shelter   ^at   t>icr  unt)  swanjtg 
groshes.  ©rcfc^cn. 

a  Verbs  compounded  with  these  particles  are  inseparable,  when  the  par- 
ticles may  be  considered  as  adverbs,  and  separable,  when  they  have  the 
meaning  of  prepositions. 


117 

A  grosh  contains  twelve  deniers.  <£in  ©rofcfien  fiat  jrogff  S. 

A  florin  contains  sixteen  groshes  (Sin  ®ult»cn  fiat  fecfi$cf)n  ©tefefien 
or  sixty  kreuzers,  or  forty-eight  ebcr  fcd)$tg  £reu$et,  ebct  ad)t  un& 
good  kreuzers.  mcrjia,  gutc  ,Rrcu$iT. 

A  denier  contains  two  oboles.       <5tn  pfennig  fiat  $wci  Better. 
The  obole,  bet  £ellcr. 

There  is.  <£$i(h 

TAere  are.  <£$  ftnb. 

How  many  groshes  are  there  in  g&tewcl  (SJrofcfien  ftnb  in  cincm  Sfia* 

a  crown  ?  (cr  ? 

Twenty-four.  SStcr  unb  $tvan$tg. 

To  wear  out  —  worn  out.  TCbttagen  *  —  abcjettagen 

(abnu$cn  —  afcgcnufct). 

To  spell  —  spelled.          23ud)ftaOite  n  —  0  u  d)  |t  a  b  t  r  t. 
SB  t  c  ? 


Well.  (Star,  wofit  (adverbs  b). 

Bad,  badly.  (Scfyccfit,  uOct,  fcfitimm  (adverbs  c). 

How  has  he  washed  the  shirt  ?     SOSic  fiat  cc  bag  £cmb  gewafcficn  ? 
He  has  washed  it  well.  (£t  fiat  c€  gut  gcroafcficn. 

How  have  you  written  the  letter  ?  SStc  fiabcn  ©te  ten  JBrief  gcfcfirie 

ben  ? 


©  o  . 

So  so.  ©  o  f  o. 


To  call—  called.  $  u  f  e  n  *  —  9  e  t  u  f  c  n  . 


Have  you  called  the  man  ?  ^jaOcn  ©tc  ben  9Eann  gcrufcn  ? 

I  have  called  him.  3cfi  fiabe  tfin  (jerufen. 

To  rfry.  S  r  o  cf  n  e  n  . 

To  put  (to  place,  to  lay).  &  e  9  c  n  . 

Do  you  put  your  coat  to  dry  ?      Scgcn  ©tc  Sfircn  9?ccf  $u  trorfncn  ? 
J  do  put  it  to  dry.  Scfi  Icge  tfin  gu  trccfncn. 

Where   have   you  placed  (put)  2Bo  fiaOcn    ©ie   bag    93ud)   fitngc- 
the  book1?  U'Qt?      (See    Note    d,    Lesson 

XXXVII. 

b  ®ut  relates  to  the  manner  in  which  a  thing  is  done.  Ex.  (§r  rebet  gut  he 
speaks  well.  28oI)I  denotes  a  certain  degree  of  well  being.  Ex.  3dj  bin 
tt>of)t,  I  am  well  ;  id)  Itcif  e§  tooljl,  I  know  it  well. 

c  (ScJ)lec^t  is  the  opposite  to  gut,  and  libel  the  opposite  to  UJoftf.  Ex.  (£r 
fdjmbt  fcbledjt,  he  writes  badly.  (£ttt>a8  libel  ne^men,  to  be  offended  at  any- 
thing. (£d)ltmm  is  employed  nearly  in  the  same  sense  as  iibel,  thus  we  say  : 
fd)limnt  gemtg,  bad  enough  ;  befto  [glimmer,  so  much  the  worse. 


118 

I  have  placed  it  upon  the  table.  3$  fyafce  cS  auf  ten  Sifcfj  $c(ea,t. 

To  lie — lain.  £  i  c  a,  c  n  * — §  eleven. 

Where  lies  the  book  ?  2$e  (tccjt  ba$  93ucb  1 

It  lies  upon  the  table.  C£»  ttcgt  auf  bem  Stfcbe. 

It  has  lain  upon  the  table.  (£'6  f>at  auf  bcm  Stjtfje  $c(ca,cn. 

TAere.  2)  a  r  a  u  f . 

Does  the  book  lie  on  the  chair  ?  Ctcgt  bag  -Sue!)  auf  bem  @tu!j(c  ? 
It  does  lie  there  (on  it).  (5*  (te^qt  b  a  r  a  u  f. 

It  has  lain  there.  (£$  (jat  barauf  gclcgen. 

EXERCISES.    104. 

Hast  thou  promised  anything? — I  have  promised  nothing. — Do 
you  give  me  what  you  have  promised  me  ? — I  do  give  it  to  you. — 
Have  you  received  much  money  ? — I  have  received  but  little. — How 
much  have  you  received  of  it  '\ — I  have  received  but  one  crown. — 
When  have  you  received  your  letter  1 — I  have  received  it  to-day. — 
Hast  thou  received  anything] — I  have  received  nothing. — What 
have  we  received  ? — We  have  received  long  (.qrop)  letters. — Do  you 
promise  me  to  come  to  the  ball  ? — I  do  promise  you  to  come  to  it. — 
Does  your  ball  take  place  to-night? — It  does  take  place. — How 
much  money  have  you  given  to  my  son  ? — I  have  given  him  fifteen 
crowns. — Have  you  not  promised  him  more  ] — I  have  given  him  what 
I  have  promised  him. — Have  our  enemies  received  their  money  ? — 
They  have  not  received  it. — Have  you  German  money  ? — I  have 
some. — What  kind  of  money  have  you  ? — I  have  crowns,  florins, 
kreuzers,  groshes,  and  deniers. — How  many  groshes  are  there  in 
a  florin1? — A  florin  contains  (f)at)  sixteen  groshes,  or  sixty  kreuzers, 
or  forty-eight  good  kreuzers. — Have  you  any  oboles  *? — I  have  a 
few  of  them. — How  many  oboles  are  there  in  a  denier  ? — A  denier 
contains  two  oboles. — Will  you  lend  your  coat  to  me  1 — I  will  lend 
it  to  you;  but  it  is  worn  out. — Are  your  shoes  worn  out1? — They 
are  not  worn  out.— Will  you  lend  them  to  my  brother  ? — I  will 
lend  them  to  him. — To  whom  have  you  lent  your  hat] — I  have  not 
lent  it ;  I  have  given  it  to  somebody. — To  whom  have  you  given 
it  ? — I  have  given  it  to  a  pauper  (fccr  TCrmc). 

105. 

Does  your  little  brother  already  know  how  to  spell1? — He  does 
know. — Does  he  spell  well  1 — He  does  spell  well. — How  has  your 
little  boy  spelt1? — He  has  spelt  so  so. — How  have  your  children 
written  their  letters  1 — They  have  written  them  badly. — Do  you 
know  (Lesson  XXXVII.)  Spanish  1 — I  do  know  it. — Does  your 
cousin  speak  Italian  1 — He  speaks  it  well. — How  do  your  friends 
speak1? — They  do  not  speak  badly  (mcfet  u6c(). — Do  they  listen  to 
what  you  tell  them  "? — They  do  listen  to  it. — How  hast  thou  learnt 
English  1 — I  have  learnt  it  in  this  manner. — Have  you  called  me  1 — 
1  have  not  called  you,  but  your  brother. — Is  he  come  ? — Not  yet, 


119 

(Lesson  XL.) — Where  have  you  wet  (na£  macftcn)  your  clothes  ? 
— I  have  wet  them  in  the  country. — Will  you  put  them  to  dry 
(ju  trerfncn  tccjcn)  ? — I  will  put  them  to  dry. — Where  have  you  put 
my  hat  1 — I  have  put  it  upon  the  table. — Hast  thou  seen  my  book  1 
— I  have  seen  it. — WThere  is  it  ] — It  lies  upon  your  brother's  trunk. 
— Does  my  handkerchief  lie  upon  the  chair1? — It  does  lie  upon  it. — 
When  have  you  been  in  the  country  1 — I  have  been  there  the  day 
before  yesterday. — Have  you  found  your  father  there  1 — I  have  found 
him  there. — What  has  he  said  ] — He  has  said  nothing. — What  have 
you  been  doing  in  the  country  ? — I  have  been  doing  nothing  there 


FORTY-SIXTH  LESSON.  —  0*d)0  mt&  trierjigste 
Action. 

Does  your  father  wish  to  give  SBtfl  3fyr  SSatcr  mit  ctn?a$  $u  tfyun 

me  anything  to  do  ?  gcfocn  ? 

He  does  wish  to  give  thee  some-  Gt  nrill  ®it  ctroaS  $u  tfyim  Qcfcen. 

thing  to  do. 

Obs.     £>  a  j  it  ,  to  it,  relates  sometimes  to  an  infini- 
tive, as: 

Have  you  a  mind  to  work  ?  £nftcn  (Ste  Cuff  gu  arfccttcn  ? 

I  have  no  mind  to  it.  3cf)  fyaOc  fatne  2uft  tqu. 

Is     thy    brother    gone    to  the  3ft  i)ctn  &3riit>ei:  ouf*  Ccwb 

country  1  c\cn  ? 

He  is  gone  thither.  (Stftft  t)ol)in  gcgnngcn. 
Hast  thou  a  mind  to  go  thither?  ^>aft  5)u  Suft  fcafytn  ^u  C|cf}cn  ? 

I  have  a  mind  to  it.  3d)  r;abe  Cufl  ba^iu 


How  old  are  you  1  SSte  a(t  finb  ( 

I  am  twelve  years  old.  3d)  bin  ^o(f  3af)ra  a(t. 

How  old  is  your  brother  1  SOBic  ci(t  i|l  3fjr  23rut)cc  ? 

He  is  thirteen  years  old.  (5t  iffc  trct^c^n  3nfjr  a(t» 

Almost  (nearly).  JBctnafje  or  faft. 

About.  U  n  9  c  f  a  f)  r. 

Hardly.  ^  a  u  ni  . 

He  is  almost  fourteen  years  old.  (Sr  ift  faft  mcr$cFm  Saljr  atf. 

I  am  about  fifteen  years  old.  3cr)  bin    uncjcftff;t 


. 

He  is  almost  sixteen  years  old.     <5r  ift  t'Ctnabe  fccfeef)n  3ar)r  atf. 
Your  are  hardly  seventeen  years  ©ic  fint)  faum  (ictcn^cljn  3«^r  olt 
old. 

»  Here  custom  requires  the  singular  number. 


120 

Not  quite.  0Z  t  d)  t  $  a  n  3. 

I  am  not  quite  eighteen  years  3d)  6tn   md)t   $an$  ad)t$ef)n 

old.  oft. 

Art  thoa  older  than  thy  brother  1  SBtft  £>it  filter  al$  £)ein  JBruber  ? 

I  am  younger  than  he.  3d)  bin  (linger  fll$  er. 


To  understand — understood.     SSerftefjen*  —  t 

Do  you  understand  me  1  SSerftefjen  &e  mid)  1 

I  do  understand  you.  3d)  ttcrfiefyc  <Ste. 

Have  you  understood  the  man?  £>a6en  ©te  ben  90?ann 
I  have  understood  him.  3d)  fycifce  ifyn  Dcrftanben. 

1  hear  you,  but  I  do  not  under-  3d)  fybre  ©ie,  flfcer  id)  flerftcfje  ©ie 
stand  you.  nid)t. 

The  noise,  ber  Carnt ; 

-  The  noise  (roaring)  of  the  wind,  ba£  ©oufcn  bc^  SDSinbe^ ; 

The  wind,  ber  SStnb. 

Do  you  hear  the  roaring  of  the  £oren  @tc  bae  ©aufen   be$  2Bin< 

wind  ?  be^  ? 

I  do  hear  it.  3d)  f)6'rc  c$. 

To  bark.  S5cllcn. 

The  barking,  bag  23cltcn. 

Have  you  heard  the  barking  of  £afcen  <Ste  ba^  SScllen  ber  $unbe  ty* 

the  dogs  ?  Ijort  ? 

I  have  heard  it.  3d)  fyaOc  < 


To  lose  —  lost.  9S  e  r  (  t  c  r  c  n  *  —  1>  c  r  (  o  r  c  n. 

To  beat—  beaten.  <£  d)  I  a  g  c  n  *  —  C}  e  f  d)  I  a  g  c  n. 

Thou  beatest,—he  beats.  £>u  fdjta'gft,  —  er  fcfttd'gt. 

To  read     —read  (past  part.)  .  C  e  f  C  n  *  —  9  c  (  c  f  c  n. 

To  remain  —  remained.  23  (  c  1  6  c  n*  —  3  e  b  I  i  e  0  C  n  (takes 

fcin  for  its  auxiliary). 

To  take—  taken.  9Z  e  f)  m  c  n  *  —  g  e  n  o  m  m  c  tu 

To  know  —  known.  SOS  t  f  f  e  n  *  —  Q  c  n)  u  p  t. 

Have  you  lost  anything  ?  £akn  (Sie  ctroag  Dcrforen  ? 

1  have  lost  nothing.  3d)  (jabc  ntd)t^  certorcn. 

To  Zo^e  (at  play)—  Zos*.  SSerfptctcn*  —  Derfpielt. 

How  much  has  your  brother  lost?  SOStcmcl  ^at  3f)r  SBruber  »erfpictt? 

He  has  lost  about  a  crown.  (5r  ^at  uncjefafyr  ctncn  Skater  »er^ 

fptett. 

Who  has  beaten  the  dog  1  £Ber  fyat  ben  ^unb  .qefcbta^en  ? 

No  one  has  beaten  it.  9?  it*  numb  hat  tf)n  gefd)(agett, 

How  many  books  has  j^our  cousin  SOStcind  93uc^cr  ^ot  3^  letter  fd&on 
already  read  1  Qetefen  ? 


121 

He  has  already  read  five  of  them,  (5r  fjat  turcn  fcfcen  fiinf  $cfcfcn,  unb 

and  at  present  he  is  reading  jc£t  ticfl  cr  fcas  fcd)ftc. 

the  sixth. 
Has    the    man  taken   anything-  f  £at  tcr  9]?ann   Sfywn  ctroaS  cjcs 

from  you  ?  ncinmcn  ? 

He  has  taken  nothing  from  me.  f  (£T  (jat  nut  ntcbtS  gcnommcn. 
Do  you  know  as  much  as  this  aBtfjVn     <2ic     fo     wet    rcic    fctcfct: 

man  ?  sjjiann  ? 

I  do  not  know  as  much  as  he.        Sol)  nxift  nicl)t  fc  wcl  tvie  cr. 
Have  you  known  that?  &a&cn  Sic  tag  gcnnijjt  ? 

I  have  not  known  it.  3d)  babe  c$  md)t  genwpt. 

Where    have    our    friends    re-  2Bo  ftnt)  unjctc  Jwun&e  QcbUcbcn  ? 

mailed  ? 
They  have  remained  at  home.       (Sic  ftnb  $u  £aufc  gcOttcbcn. 

EXERCISES.     106, 

Have  you  time  to  write  a  letter] — I  have  time  to  write  one. — 
Will  you  lend  a  hook  to  my  brother  1 — I  have  lent  one  to  him 
already. — Will  you  lend  him  one  more  ? — I  will  lend  him  two 
more. — Have  you  given  anything  to  the  poor  1 — I  have  given  them 
money. — How  much  money  has  my  cousin  given  you  1 — He  has 
given  me  only  a  little  ;  he  has  given  me  only  two  crowns. — How 
old  is  your  brother1? — He  is  twenty  years  old. — Are  you  as  old  as 
he? — I  am  not  so  old. — How  old  are  you? — I  am  hardly  eighteen 
years  old. — How  old  art  thou  ? — I  am  about  twelve  years  old. — Am 
I  younger  than  you  ? — I  do  not  know. — How  old  is  our  neighbour  ? 
— He  is  not  quite  thirty  years  old. — Are  our  friends  as  young  as 
we  ? — They  are  older  than  we. — How  old  are  they  ? — The  one  is 
nineteen  and  the  other  twenty  years  old. — Is  your  father-as  old  as 
mine  ? — He  is  older  than  yours  ? — Have  you  read  my  book  ? — I  have 
not  quite  read  it  yet. — Has  your  friend  finished  his  book  ? — He  has 
almost  finished  it. — Do  you  understand  me  ? — I  do  understand  you. 
— Does  the  Englishman  understand  us  ? — He  does  understand  us. 
— Do  you  understand  what  we  are  telling  you  ?— We  do  understand 
it. — Dost  thou  understand  German? — I  do  not  understand  it  yet, 
but  I  am  learning  it. — Do  we  understand  the  English  ? — We  do 
not  understand  them. — Do  the  Germans  understand  us  ? — They  do 
understand  us. — Do  we  understand  them  ? — We  hardly  understand 
them. — Do  you  hear  any  noise  ? — I  hear  nothing. — Have  you  heard 
the  roaring  of  the  wind  ? — I  have  heard  it. — What  do  you  hear? — 
I  hear  the  barking  of  the  dogs. — Whose  dog  is  this  ?— It  is  the  dog 
of  the  Scotchman. 

107. 

Have  you  lost  your  stick  ? — I  have  not  lost  it. — Has  your  ser- 
vant lost  my  note  ? — He  has  lost  it. — Have  you  gone  to  the  ball  ? 
•—No,  I  have  not  gone  to  it. — Where  have  you  remained  ? — I  have 
remained  at  home. — Has  your  father  lost  (at  play)  as  much  money 
as  I  ? — He'nas  lost  more  of  it  than  you  ? — How  much  have  I  lost  ? 
6 


122 

— You  have  hardly  lost  a  crown. — Where  has  thy  brother  re- 
mained 1 — He  has  remained  at  home. — Have  your  friends  re- 
mained in  the  country! — They  have  remained  there. — Do  you 
know  as  much  as  the  English  physician? — I  do  not  know  as  much 
as  he. — Does  the  French  physician  know  as  much  as  you  ? — He 
knows  more  than  I. — Does  any  one  know  more  than  the  French 
physicians? — No  one  knows  more  than  they. — Have  your  brothers 
read  my  books  ? — They  have  not  quite  read  them. — How  many  of 
them  have  they  read  ? — They  have  hardly  read  two  of  them. — Has 
the  son  of  my  gardener  taken  anything  from  you  ? — He  has  taken 
my  books  from  me. — What  hast  thou  taken  from  him  ? — I  have 
taken  nothing  from  him. — Has  he  taken  money  from  yea1? — He 
has  taken  some  from  me. — How  much  money  has  he  taken  from 
yon  ] — He  tas  taken  from  me  almost  two  crowns.  (See  end  of 
Lesson  XXXIV.) 


FORTY.SEVENTH  LESSON.—  SUbett  nnb 
faction. 

To  lite  —  bitten*  SBcipcn  —  gcfciffen. 

Why  ?  SB  a  t  u  m  ? 

Because.  •     2B  c  1  1. 

DC/3  The  verb  of  the  subject  or  nominative,  (in 
compound  tenses,  the  auxiliary)  is  placed  at  the  end 
of  the  phrase,  when  this  begins  with  a  conjunction  or 
a  conjunctive  word,  such  as  a  relative  pronoun  or  a 
relative  adverb.  The  conjunctions  which  do  not  re- 
quire the  verb  to  be  placed  at  the  end,  will  be  given 
hereafter. 


Why  do  you  heat  the  dog  ?          SBarum  fd)fagcn  ©te  ben 

I  beat  it,  because  it  has  bitten  3d)  fd)la$c  tf)n,  roctt  ct  mid)  gc&tflcn 

me.  fjat. 

Do  you  see  the  man  who  is  in  (£d)en  ©te  ben  sjjfonn/  wcldjct  (bet) 

the  garden  1  tin  ©atten  ift  ? 

I  do  see  him.  3d)  fefye  t  fin- 

Do  you  know  the  man  who  has  ^cnncn  @tc  ben  9)?cmn,  bcr  (nocld)Ct) 

lent  me  the  book  ?  nut  baS  S3ud)  gclicfjcn  fynt  ? 

I  do  not  know  him.  3d)  Cennc  tfnt  ntc^t. 

Do  you  read  the  book,  which  I  Ccfcn  ©te  ba^  93nd)/  tvctd)C5  tc^  3b- 

have  lent  you  ]  ncn  cjcltc^n  fy&t  1 

I  do  read  it.  3d)  lefe  eg. 


.     When  the  verb,  which  a  conjunctive  word 
causes  to  be  placed  at  the  end  of  the  phrase,  is  com- 


123 

pounded  with  a  separable  particle,  this  is  not  detached 
from  it.     Ex. 

I  breakfast  before  I  go  out.  3d)  friiljftudfc,  cf)C  id)  auSgcfjc. 

•  Does  the   tailor   show   you  the  Sctcjt  Sbncn  K'r  (gcbncttcr  ten  9?Ccf, 
coat,  which  he  is  mending?          nx'(d)cn  cr  au£0c(fcrt? 

To  wait.  80S  a  r  t  c  n. 

To  expect.  (£  r  n?  a  r  t  c  ru*  , 

To   wait  for  some    one  or  for  ?(uf  (Stncn  et>ct  ctroaS  roartcn. 

something". 
To  expect  some  one  or  some-  (Sincn  efcct  ettvaS  crrcartcn. 

thing. 

Do  you  wait  for  my  brother?        Smarten  <£tc  auf  mdnc-n  SBrufccr? 
I  do  wait  for  him.  3d)  rvartc  auf  thru 

Do  you  expect  friends  ?  (Srirartcn  (Sic  Jreunbc  ? 

I  do  expect  some.  3d)  crrcartc  cintgc. 

To  owe.  ©  d)  u  1  1>  i  9  f  c  i  n  *.b 

How  much  do  you  owe  me  1         SOStcwet  finb  <Stc  nur  fcf)ii(fciy)? 

I  owe  you  fifty  crowns.  3d)  ton  Sftncn  fitnfitg  Sljatci:  fd)u(? 


How  much  does  the  man  owe  Sffiicmcltft  Sfjncn^cr 

you? 

He  owes  me  ten  shillings.  ©r  tft  mtr  ge!)n 

Does  he  owe  as  much  as  you  ?  3ft  cr  fo  wel  fdjutMg  ivtc 

He  owes  more  than  I.  (£v  tft  mc()r  fd)utt)t^  ol5  id). 

The  shilling,  tec  €>d)tttijrtg  ; 

the  pound,  ta§ 

the  livre  (a  coin),  t>cr 

To  return  —  (to  come  back)  —  re-  Surucffonimcn*  — 
turned.  I  0  m  men. 

At  what  o'clock  do  you  return  Urn  nncinct  Mr   !cmmcn  ©ie   t»cn 

from  the  market?  fccm  93Zarftc  ^urtic!  ? 

I  return  from  it  at  twelve  o'clock.  3d)  fcmmc  urn  srco'lf  tlfyr  ocn  ta  su^ 

riic!. 

From  there,  thence  (from  it).       2>  C  n  t)  a. 

Does   the   servant  return  early  jtommt  tcr  JScttcntc  fru5  t?cn  ba  $1* 

thence?  rue!? 

He  returns  thence  at  ten  o'clock  Cr  fcmmt   win  jefjn  it^r   93?crcjcn» 

in  the  morning.  »cn  to  $urtirf. 

At  nine  o'clock  in  the  morning,    f  Urn  ncun  Uf)t  9^crC|cn^. 
At  eleven  o'clock  at  night.  f  Urn  ctf  lU)r  2((>cnt)^. 

a  53itrtctt  auf,  with  the  accusative  case,  is  used,  when  the  person  or  thing 
spoken  of  is  present,  and  entfarfeil,  when  it  is  not. 

b  ecbulbtfl  fetn*,  to  owe,  is  to  be  considered  as  a  compound  verb,  of  which 
the  separable  particle  is  placed  at  the  end,  fdjubig,  due,  owing,  indebted,  hav- 
ing here  the  force  of  the  separable  particle. 


124 


How  long  ? 
During,  for. 


How    long 
there  ? 

A  minute. 
An  hour. 
A  day. 
A  year. 

A  month. 

The  summer, 
The  winter, 


SStc  „_  . 

£B  a  f)  r  c  n  t)  (a  preposition  which 
governs  the  genitive  case). 

has    he    remained  SBtc  lancje  ift  ct  fca  gebUeben  ? 


During  the  summer.    < 

How  long  have  you  spoken  with 
the  man  ] 

I  have  spoken  with  him  for  three 
hours. 

How  long  has  your  brother  re- 
mained in  the  country  T 

He  has  rernained  there  a  month. 

Have  you  remained  long  with 
my  father  1 

1  have  remained  with  him  for  an 
hour. 

Long. 


(Sine 

(Sine  < 

(Stncn  Sao,. 

©in  Sfafyr  (a  neuter  substantive, 

taking  c  in  the  plur.   without 

beiug  softened). 
(Stncn  9)ionat. 

tcr  ©omnicr. 

tec  SBintcr. 

3Baf)rcnt>  t>c^  (Scmmcr^. 

^)cn  ©cmmcr  iibcr. 

3)en  Scunner  l)in^urc!). 

9Stc  lange  f)abcn  (Sic  mit  tcm  9)?an* 

nc  gcfprcd)cn  ? 
Scl)  fyabc  t>rci  Stunbcn  mit  i()m  §t* 

fprcd)cn. 
SEic  tancjc  ift  3fc  95rubcr  auf  tcm 


(Sr  ift  ctncn 

(gic  lanc^c  tct  mctncm 


bin  cine 
bticbcn. 


tancj  bet  ifjm  gc* 


EXERCISES.    108. 


Why  do  you  love  that  man  1  —  I  love  him,  because  he  is  good.  — 
Why  does  your  neighbour  beat  his  dog  "?—  Because  it  has  bitten 
his  little  boy.  —  Why  does  our  father  love  me  1  —  He  loves  you,  be- 
cause you  are  good.  —  Do  your  friends  love  us1?  —  They  love  us,  be- 
cause we  are  good.  —  Why  do  you  bring  me  wine?  —  I  bring  you 
some,  because  you  are  thirsty.  —  Why  does  the  hatter  drink  1  —  He 
drinks,  because  he  is  thirsty.  —  Do  you  see  the  sailor  who  is  in 
(auf)  the  ship  1  —  I  do  not  see  the  one  who  is  in  (auf)  the  ship,  but 

c  The  accusative  case  answers  to  the  question  line  lange  ?  how  long?  and 
other  similar  questions,  relative  to  measure,  weight,  quantity,  &c..  as  rote 
Icing?  how  long?  tine  fdjtuet?  how  heavy?  WtWteiV  how  much?  mie  then* 
et?  at  what  price?  We  nmt?  how  far?  we  gvojj?  of  what  size?  We  alt? 
how  old  ? 

d  Sfttnitte,  minute,  (Shmbe,  hour,  are  two  nouns  of  the  feminine  gender; 
they  add  tt  in  al)  the  cases  of  the  plural,  without  softening  the  radical  vow- 
els. We  can  also  say:  eitte  <5tlltti?e  lang  during  an  hour;  ehl  otft/v  Uiiij, 
during  a  year. 


125 

the  one  who  is  in  (auf)  the  square. — Do  you  read  the  books  which  my 
father  has  given  you  1 — I  do  read  them. — Do  you  know  the  Italians 
whom  we  know  1 — We  do  not  know  those  whom  you  know,  but 
we  know  others  (anfciTe). — Do  you  buy  the  horse  which  we  have 
seenl — I  do  not  buy  that  which  we  have  seen,  but  another  (cm 
entered). — Do  you  seek  what  you  have  lost] — I  do  seek  it. — Do  you 
find  the  man  whom  you  have  looked  for? — I  do  not  find  him. — 
Does  the  butcher  kill  the  ox  which  he  has  bought  in  (auf  with  the 
dat.)  the  market  ? — He  does  kill  it. — Do  our  cooks  kill  the  chickens 
which  they  have  bought  1 — They  do  kill  them. — Does  the  hatter 
mend  the  hat  which  I  have  sent  him  1 — He  does  mend  it. — Does 
the  shoemaker  mend  the  boots  which  you  have  sent  him  1 — He  does 
not  mend  them,  because  they  are  worn  out. — Does  your  coat  lie 
upon  the  chair  1 — It  does  lie  upon  it. — Does  it  lie  upon  the  chair 
upon  which  1  placed  it? — No,  it  lies  upon  another. — Where  is  my 
hat  ? — It  is  in  the  room  in  which  (ivcrin  or  in  tvold)cm)  you  have  been. 
— Do  you  wait  for  any  one  1 — I  wait  for  no  one. — Do  you  wait  for 
the  man  whom  I  have  seen  this  morning'? — I  do  wait  for  him. — 
Art  thou  waiting  for  thy  book  1 — I  am  waiting  for  it. — Do  you 
expect  your  father  this  evening1? — I  do  expect  him. — At  what 
o'clock  has  he  gone  to  the  theatre  1 — He  has  gone  thither  at  seven 
o'clock. — At  what  o'clock  does  he  return  from  there  1 — He  returns 
from  there  at  eleven  o'clock. — Has  your  bailiff  returned  from  the 
market  ? — He  has  not  yet  returned  from  it. — At  what  o'clock  has 
your  brother  returned  from  the  country? — He  has  returned  from 
thence  at  ten  o'clock  in  the  evening. 

109. 

At  what  o'clock  hast  thou  come  back  from  thy  friend  1 — I  have 
come  back  from  him  at  eleven  o'clock  in  the  morning. — Hast  thou 
remained  long  wdth  him  ? — I  have  remained  with  him  about  an 
hour. — How  long  do  you  intend  to  remain  at  the  ball  ? — I  intend 
to  remain  there  a  few  minutes. — How  long  has  the  Englishman 
remained  with  you  ? — He  has  remained  with  me  for  two  hours. — 
Do  you  intend  to  remain  long  in  the  country  1 — I  intend  to  remain 
there  during  the  summer. — How  long  have  your  brothers  remained 
in  town  (in  t>ct  3tat>t)  1 — They  have  remained  there  during  the 
winter. — How  much  do  I  owe  you  1 — You  do  not  owe  me  much. — 
How  much  do  you  owe  your  tailor  ] — I  only  owe  him  fifty  crowns. 
— How  much  dost  thou  owe  thy  shoemaker  ] — I  owe  him  already 
seventy  crowns. — Do  I  owe  you  anything  ? — You  owe  me  nothing. 
— How  much  does  the  Frenchman  owe  you  1 — He  owes  me  more 
than  you. — Do  the  English  owe  you  as  much  as  the  Spaniards  "? — 
Not  quite  so  much. — Do  I  owe  you  as  much  as  my  brother  ? — You 
owe  me  more  than  he. — Do  our  friends  owe  you  as  much  as  we  1 — 
You  owe  me  less  than  they. — Why  do  you  give  money  to  the  mer- 
chant ] — I  give  him  some,  because  he  has  sold  me  handkerchiefs. 
— Why  do  you  not  drink  ? — I  do  not  drink,  because  I  am  not 
thirsty. — Why  do  you  pick  up  this  ribbon  1 — I  pick  it  up,  because 


126 

I  want  it. — Why  do  you  lend  money  to  this  man] — I  lend  him 
some,  hecause  he  wants  some. — Why  does  your  brother  study  1 — 
He  studies,  because  he  wished  to  learn  German  ((ernen  n)i(l). — Art 
thou  thirsty  ] — I  am  not  thirsty,  because  I  have  drunk. — Has  your 
cousin  drunk  already? — Not  yet,  he  is  not  yet  thirsty. — Does  the 
servant  show  you  the  room  which  he  sweeps  ] — He  does  not  show 
me  that  which  he  sweeps  now,  but  that  which  he  has  swept  yester- 
day.— Do  you  breakfast  before  you  go  out  ] — I  go  out  before  I 
breakfast. — What  does  your  shoemaker  do  before  he  sweeps  his 
room  ]-»He  mends  my  boots  and  my  shoes  before  he  sweeps  it.  (See 
end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


FORTY-EIGHTH  LESSON.—  <3Ul}t  itnir  merest* 
lection. 


To  live,  to  dwell,  to  reside,  to  SOS 
abide,  to  lodge. 

Where  do  you  live  ?  £Bo  reefyncn  (Sic? 

I  live  in  William-street,  number  3cf)   rcefyne   in   bet4 

twenty-five.  Summer  fitnf  unfr1 

Where  has  your  brother  lived1?  SBo  fjat  tf)t  SBrutcr  g 

He  has  lived  in  Frederic-street,  (§t  rmt  in  t>ct  grtebn^sftrape, 

number  one  hundred  and  fifty.  met  fyunfccrt  unt)  fiinfttg 

Dost  thou  live  at  thy  cousin's  2Bel)nft  £)u  bet  £>ctnew  letter 

house  1 

I  do  not  live  at  his,  but  at  my  3$  rcoljnc  md)t  fcet  iljm/  fonbcrn  bci 

father's  house.  mctncm  SScitcr. 

Does  your  friend  still  live  where  2Bcl)iU  3l)r  grcunt)  nod)  (ba)r  it>o 

I  have  lived  1  id)  c^civc^nt  fjabc  ? 

He  lives  no  longer  where  you  6r  wofjnt  ntcl)t  mcljr  (ba)x  tt?o  ©ie 

have  lived  ;  he  lives  at  present  gcrooljnt  f)at>cn  ;  cr  rvcljnt  jcgt  auf 

in  the  great  square.  bcm  grcpcn 


The  street.  jDtc  (Strapc  (a  noun  of  the  femi- 

nine gender). 
The  number.  JDtc  Summer  (a  noun  of  the  femi- 

nine gender). 

To  brush.  25  it  r  ft  en. 

Have  you  brushed  my  coat  ]        £nOcn  (£te  mctncn  9?ccf  gc6itrftct  1 
I  have  brushed  it.  3d)  ftabc  tf;n  gcburftct. 

long?  2Btc  tan^c? 

S3  i  & 


*  In  German,  the  conjunction  unb,  is  used  to  add  a  number  less  than  a 
hundred. 


127 


Till  noon. 
Till  twelve  o'clock. 

Till  to-morrow.  S3i$  mermen. 
Till  the  day  after  to-morrow.         25t£  uOetmero/n. 
Till  Sunday.                             -      <8i$  (genntag. 

Till  Monday.  SBiS  sflttntao,. 

Till  this  evening.  J8U  fccutc  2(6ent>. 

Till  evening.  S3i*  auf  ten 

Until  morning.  3St£  an  ben 

Until  the  next  day.  23t$  gum  anbecn 

Until  this  day.  S3i3  auf  fctcfen 

Until  this  moment.  SBtS  auf  fcicfcn 

Till  now—  hitherto.  SBiS  ie£t  —  &i$f)Cr. 


To  this  place,  hither,  thus  far,  as  23U  fjtcrfyct  (an  adverb  of  place)* 

far  as  here. 
To  that  place,  thither,  so  far,  as  23i$  bafyitt  (an  adverb  of  place). 

far  as  there. 

Obs.  The  days  of  the  week  are  all  of  the  mascu- 
line gender,  except  tt'e  9Rttttt)ed)e,  Wednesday,  which 
some  authors  use  as  feminine. 


Tuesday, 

Wednesday, 

Thursday,  3)onncrftag  ; 

Friday, 

Saturday, 


Then.  2)  a  n  n  —  (a  I  €  t>  a  n  n). 

Till  I  return  (till  my  return).  95t$  ic()  gurucffcmmc. 

Till  my  brother  returns  (till  my  S3t$  mctn  23tut>ct  surudffcmmt. 

brother's  return). 

Till  four  o'clock  in  the  morning.  2St3  trier  ll^c  g^orgen^. 

Till  midnight  (till  twelve  o'clock  23U    Sp^tttetna^t    (a  noun  of   the 

at  night).  feminine  gender). 

How  long  did  you  remain  with  2Bie  (angc  jm£>    ©tc    fcci  mcincm 

my  father  ?  2Sater  gcKicOcn  ? 

I  remained  with  him  till  eleven  Sd)  tun  bt£  c(f  Uf)t:  2tbcnt^  Oct  ir)iu 

o'clock  at  night.  gcbltcbcn. 

One-)  the  people,  they  or  any  one.  $31  an  (indefinite  pronoun  always 

singular). 

Have  they  brought  my  shoes  ?  £cit  man  mctnc  (Sc^ufic  ^ct)racf)t  ? 

They  have  not  brought  them  yet.  9)?an  fyat  fie  nccl)  ntcht 

What  have  they  said  1  SBaS  r)ot  man  Qef 

They  have  said  nothing.  9J?an  bat  ntd)t^  g 

What  have  they  done  ?  9Sab  bat  man  ^c 

They  have  done  nothing.  932an  (jat  ntd)t^ 


128 

To  be  willing  (to  wish),  —  been  85$  0  H  f  n  *,  —  $  C  R>  0  H  t 
willing  (wished). 

Has  he  been  willing  to  go  for  £at  cr  ben  2Cr$t  fjckn  roetlctt  ?  (not 

the  physician  ?  gciveUt.  See  Obs.  Less.  XLIV.) 

He  has  not  been  willing  to  go  <5r  fyat  i()n  ntcfyt  fyelcn  rcellcn. 

for  him. 

Has  he  wished  to  go  out  this  £at    cr    bicfcn    Sflergcn    attorn 

morning  ?  roellcn  ? 

He  has  not  wished  to  go  out,  Gr  fyat  ntcl)t  au$£cljcn  roellcn. 

Have  they  been  willing  to  do  it  I  jjbat  man  eg  tf)im  wcUen  ? 

They  have  not  been  willing  to  93fan  Ijat  c$  md)t  tfjun  n?cltcn» 

do  it. 

They  have  not  been  willing  to  9)?cm  fyat  mcfytS  tr)un  rooftctt. 

do  any  thing. 

To    be    able    (cari),—leen  able  &  on  UC  n*—  -Cj  c  I  onn  t 
(cow/J). 

Have  they  been  able  to  find  the  $at  wan  tic  93iicber  flnbcn  fonncn  ? 

books  ?  (not  gcfcnnt.  See  Less.  XLIV.) 

They  have  not  been  able  to  find  SBtan  (jot  fie  nufyt  jtnt»cn  fonnen. 

them. 

Has  the  tailor  been  willing  to  $at  fccr  ^cfcncibcr  nictncn  S'Jcc!  au^ 

mend  my  coat  ]  beffern  tucllcn  ? 

He  has  not  been  willing  to  mend  (Sr  ()at  t^n  nic^t  au^ffcrn 

it. 

Something  (or  anything)  new.  (£ttt>a$ 

What  do  they  sayt  new  1  2Sa5  fagt  man 

They  say  nothing  '  new.  9)ian  fagt 


My  new  coat.  g^ctn  neuc^  .Sfcit). 

My  new  friend.  SJictn  ncucr  Srcl|nt» 

His  new  clothes.  ©cine  ncucn  ^leit>et. 

EXERCISES.      110. 

Where  do  you  live!  —  I  live  in  the  large  (in  bet  cjropcn)  street.  — 
Where  does  your  father  live  1  —  He  lives  at  his  friend's  house.  — 
Where  do  your  brothers  live  1  —  They  live  in  the  large  street,  number 
a  hundred  and  twenty.  —  Dost  thou  live  at  thy  cousin's  T  —  1  do  live  at 
his  house.  —  Do  you  still  live  where  you  did  live  (gercefynt  fjabcn)  1  — 
1  live  there  still.  —  Does  your  friend  still  live  where  he  did  live?  — 
He  no  longer  lives  where  he  did  live.  —  Where  does  he  live  at  present  ? 
—  He  lives  in  William-street,  number  a  hundred  and  fifteen  — 
Where  is  your  brother  1  —  He  is  in  the  garden.  —  Where  is  your 
cousin  £one  to  ?  —  He  is  gone  into  the  garden.  —  Did  you  go  to  the 
play  yesterday]  —  I  did  go  thither.  —  Have  you  seen  my  friend  1  — 
I  have  seen  him.  —  When  did  you  see  him  ]  —  I  saw  (fyafrc  —  gcfcfjcn) 
him  this  morning.  —  Where  has  he  gone  to  1  —  I  do  not  know 


129 

Lesson  XLIII.). — Has  the  servant  brushed  my  clothes  1 — He  has 

brushed  them. — Has  he  swept  my  room  ? — He  has  swept  it How 

long1  did  he  remain  here  ? — Till  noon. — How  long-  have  you  been 
writing? — I  have  been  writing  until  midnight. — How  long  did  I 
work] — You  worked  until  four  o'clock  in  the  morning. — How  long 
did  my  brother  remain  with  you  1 — He  remained  with  me  until 
evening. — How  long  hastthou  been  working  1 — I  have  been  working 
till  now. — Hast  thou  still  long  to  write  ? — I  have  to  write  till  the 
day  after  to-morrow. — Has  the  physician  still  long  to  work  ? — He 
has  to  work  till  to-morrow. — Must  I  remain  long  here? — You  must 
remain  here  till  Sunday. — Must  my  brother  remain  long  with  you  ? 
• — He  must  remain  with  us  till  Monday. — How  long  must  I  work?— 
You  must  work  till  the  day  after  to-morrow. — Have  you  still  long 
to  speak  1 — I  have  still  an  hour  to  speak. — Did  you  speak  long  1 — 
I  spoke  (fyabc — cjcfiTCcbcn)  till  the  next  day. — Have  you  remained 
long  in  my  room  ? — I  have  remained  in  it  till  this  moment. — Have 
you  still  long  to  live  in  this  house? — I  have  still  long  to  live  in  it 
(bavin). — How  long  have  you  still  to  live  in  it? — Till  Sunday. 

111. 

Does  your  friend  still  live  with  you  1 — He  lives  with  me  no  longer. 
— How  long  has  he  lived  with  you  ? — He  has  lived  with  me  only  a 
year. — How  long  did  you  remain  at  the  ball  ? — I  remained  there  till 
midnight. — How  long  have  you  remained  in  the  carriage  ? — I  have 
remained  an  hour  in  it. — Have  you  remained  in  the  garden  till  now  ? 
— I  have  remained  there  (fcarin)  till  now. — Has  the  captain  come 
as  far  as  here? — He  has  come  as  far  as  here. — How  far  has  the 
merchant  come  ? — He  has  come  as  far  as  the  end  of  the  small  road. 
— Has  the  Turk  come  as  far  as  the  end  of  the  forest  ? — He  has  come 
as  far  as  there. — What  do  you  do  in  the  morning? — I  read.— And 
what  do  you  do  then  ? — I  breakfast  and  work. — Do  you  breakfast 
before  you  read  ? — No,  Sir,  I  read  before  I  breakfast. — Dost  thou 
play  instead  of  working  (Lesson  XXXVI. )? — I  work  instead  of 
playing. — Does  thy  brother  go  to  the  play  instead  of  going  into  the 
garden? — He  does  not  go  to  the  play. — What  do  you  do  in  the 
evening  ? — I  work. — What  hast  thou  done  this  evening  ? — I  have 
brushed  your  clothes  and  have  gone  to  the  theatre. — Didst  thou 
remain  long  at  the  theatre  ? — I  remained  there  but  a  few  minutes. — 
Are  you  willing  to  wait  here  ? — How  long  must  I  wait  ? — You  must 
wait  till  my  father  returns. — Has  anybody  come  ? — Somebody  has 
come. — What  have  they  (man)  wanted  (gcroollt)  ? — They  (9)?an)  have 
wanted  to  speak  to  you. —  Have  they  not  been  willing  to  wait? — 
They  have  not  been  willing  to  wait. — What  do  you  say  to  that 
man  ? — I  tell  him  to  wait. — Have  you  waited  for  me  long? — I  have 
waited  for  you  an  hour. — Have  you  been  able  to  read  my  letter?  — 
I  have  been  able  to  read  it. — Have  you  understood  it  ? — I  have 
understood  it. — Have  you  shown  it  to  any  one? — I  have  shown  it 
to  no  one. — Have  they  brought  my  clothes  V — They  have  not  brought 
them  yet. — Have  they  swept  my  room  and  brushed  my  clothes  ? — 
6* 


130 

They  have  done  both  (Octbcs). — What  have  they  said  1 — They  have 
said  nothing. — What  have  they  done  1 — They  have  done  nothing. — 
Has  your  little  brother  been  spelling  1 — He  has  not  been  willing 
to  spell. — Has  the  merchant's  boy  been  willing  to  work  ] — He  has 
not  been  willing. — What  has  he  been  willing  to  do  1 — He  has  not 
been  willing  to  do  anything. 

112. 

t 

Has  the  shoemaker  been  able  to  mend  my  boots  1 — He  has  not 
been  able  to  mend  them. — Why  has  he  not  been  able  to  mend  them "? 
— Because  he  has  had  no  time.— Have  they  (man)  been  able  to  find 
my  gold  huttons  ? — They  have  not  been  able  to  find  them. — Why 
has  the  tailor  not  mended  my  coat  1 — Because  he  has  no  good 
thread. — Why  have  you  beaten  the  dog  1 — Because  it  has  bitten  me. 
— Why  do  you  not  drink  ? — Because  1  am  not  thirsty. — What  have 
they  wished  to  say  ] — They  have  not  wished  to  say  anything. — 
What  do  they  (man)  say  new  in  the  market? — They  say  nothing 
new  there. — Have  they  (man)  wished  to  kill  a  man  ] — They  have 
not  wished  to  kill  any  one. — Have  they  said  any  thing  new  ? — 
They  have  said  nothing  new.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


FORTY.NINTH  LESSON.—  Jfrmt  «n&  merest* 
faction. 

To  steal  —  stolen.  <S  t  c  I)  t  c  n  *  —  $  c  ft  c  r)  (  c  n. 

Thou  stealest,  he  steals.  3>u  fticl)lfr,  —  cr  ftteljlt. 

To  steal  something  from  some  f  3cnwnt)cm  ctivaS  ftcl;(cn*. 

one. 
Have  they  stolen  your  hat  from  f  «frat  man  Sfynen  Sfyrcn  £ut  gcs 

you  "?    '  frozen  ? 

They  have  stolen  it  from  me.       f  9)Jan  fyat  tfyn  nur  qcflehtcn. 
Has  the  man   stolen   the   book  f  &<it   &'w   K'r    9)i'cmn   fcaS    33ucr) 

from  thee  ?  gcfteljli'n  ? 

He  has  stolen  it  from  me.  f  (Ir  foot  c$  nrir  gcfleljfcn, 

What  have  they  stolen  from  you1?  f  SQBaS  ^at  man  3ftncn  gcft 


AIL  2C  (  (  is  declined  in  the  following 

manner. 

(  N.     G.    D.     A. 

All.  <  Masc.    affer  —  e3  —  em  —  en* 

(  Neut.     atte^  —  e£  —  em  —  e^» 

!  Plural  for  all  genders. 

N.     G.    D.   A. 
Sltte  —  ev  —  en  —  e* 


131 

All  the  good  wine.  2Utct  a,utc  SBcin. 

All  the  good  water.  ?{(lc£  flute  £Bciffer. 

All  the  good  children.  2Hle  cjutc  Winter.     (See  page  34, 

Obs.  B.) 

Obs.  A.  When  two  determinative  words,  which  do 
not  take  the  definite  article,  as  :  aff,  all  (See  Lesson 
XXXII.)  ;  btefer,  this;  jener,  that,  &c.,  are  placed 
one  after  the  other,  they  have  each  the  characteristic 
ending  of  this  article.  Ex. 

All  this  wine.  2f(tcr  btcfcr  (not  ticfe)  SGScin. 

All  this  money.  ?(tle$  jDicfcS  (not  fcicfe)  ©clfo. 

All  these  children.  Me  tncfc  jltnbct. 

All  these  good  children.  2(lle  fcicfe  flutcn  Winter. 

Obs.  B.  In  familiar  style,  when  atf,  all,  is  followed 
by  a  pronoun,  it  often  rejects  its  termination.  Ex. 

All  his  money.  OT  join  ®clt>. 

The  word,  tag  2&ert  ; 

the  speech,  ta$  2£ett  (plur.  SBorte).* 

How  is  this  word  written?  SBtc  fcfymOt  man  fciefeS  SOBort  ? 

It  is  written  thus.  93Jan  fdjrctfet  c^  fc. 

To  </ye  or  to  colour.  garden. 

To  dye  black,  white.  Scfyroarj,  wct^  fcirOcn. 

To  dye  green,  blue.  ©rim,  b(au  far6cn. 

To  dye  red,  yellow.  $Kct^,  gc(t)  fdrbcn. 

To  dye  grey,  brown.  (SJrau/  braun  farOcn. 

My  blue  coat.  93?etn    Maucc    9^ccf    (mctn    WaucS 

Jtfeifc). 

This  white  hat.  S)tcfcr  tr>ctpc  J5ut. 

Do  you  dye  your  coat  blue  ?  farOcn  @ic  Sftrcn  $Kccf  Mail  ? 

I  dye  it  green.  Scf)  fa'r&c  i^n  gritn. 
What  colour  will  you  dye  your  SDSie  molten  @ic  3^  Sud^  fd'rbcn  ? 

cloth  ? 

1  will  dye  it  blue.  %<§  roill  c£  Wau  fatten. 

The  dyer,  tcr  garbcr. 


To  ^-e/  c?ye<f  —  got  dyed.         Sat&en  taffen*. 

What  colour  have  you  got  your  2Btc  fjakn  ®ic   S6tcn  $ut  farktt 

hat  dyed  ]  (aficn  ? 

I  have  got  it  dyed  white.  3d)  t«^c  tf)tt  wcig  fd'tbcn  taffen. 

n  When  2Bovt,  means  merely  a  word,  its  plural  is  Shorter  ;  but  when  it 
conveys  the  meaning  of  a  whole  phrase,  its  plural  is  SBotte.  Ex.  £ecrc 
2Borte,  useless  words  ;  @lau$eit  <Ste  nteincn  Shorten,  take  my  word  for  it  ;  bad 
,  the  substantive  ;  plur.  btc  ^aupttvortev,  the  substantives. 


132 


As  far  as  my  brother's. 
As  far  as  London. 
As  far  as  Paris. 
As  far  as  England* 
As  far  as  France. 
As  far  as  Italy. 

Germany, 

Spain, 

Holland, 


t3  311  nietttcm  <8rut>cr. 
t$  2ent>en. 


2MS  ncd) 
Wi$  nod)  $ 
23i6  nad)  Stoltcn. 

£)cutfd)tant>  ; 
(Spamen  ; 
Reliant)* 


Rule.  The  names  of  countries,  towns,  and  villages, 
belong  to  the  neuter  gender,  and  stand  without  the 
article.  They  are  indeclinable,  except  in  the  genitive, 
which  receives  $  when  the  pronunciation  admits  it.  If 
the  ending  of  the  name  does  not  admit  the  letter  3,  as 
in  sparig,  Paris,  the  preposition  Don/  of,  is  used.  Ex. 
bte  ©ttttwfyner  Don  ^3ari^,  the  inhabitants  of  Paris. 
Some  proper  names  of  countries  are  of  the  feminine 
gender.  These,  like  all  other  feminine  nouns,  are  in- 
variable in  the  singular,  and  form  their  case  by  means 
of  the  definite  article,  viz.  1,  Names  of  countries 
which  terminate  in  ei.  Ex.  tie  £urfei,  Turkey ;  and  2, 
the  following  :  bte  Stvimm,  Crimea ;  bte  ?aujTg,  Lusatia  ; 
bt'e  9DJarf,  March ;  tie  SMbcut,  Moldavia ;  bt'e  $faf j, 
Palatinate  ;  bfe  Srf)tt>et$,  Switzerland.  Ex.  bte  ©rf)tt>etj, 
Switzerland ;  ber  @d)tt)eij,  of  Switzerland  ;  ber  @cf)tt>etj, 
to  Switzerland  ;  bie  ©ofytt)ei$,  Switzerland. 


To  travel. 


Do  you  travel  to  Paris  ? 
Do  you  go  to  Paris  ] 
I  do  travel  (or  go)  thither. 
Is  he  gone  to  England  1 
He  is  gone  thither. 
How  far  has  he  travelled  7 
He    has     travelled    as    far 
America. 


9?  c  t  f  c  ti  (is  used  with  the  auxi- 
liary fctn). 


9?ctfcn  ( 

©ct)cn  'Bit  nacl 
S'cb  rctfc  (id)  gc()c) 
Sft  cr  nad)  ©ngtanb 
G:r  i)l  t>abtn  gcrctpt. 
•iBt^  n>obtn  tft  cr  gcrcipt  1 
as  (£r  tft  Oi^  nact)  2(incri!a  cjcreipt. 


EXERCISES.       113. 

Have  they  (man)  stolen  anything  from  you  1 — They  have  stolen 
all  the  good  wine  from  me. — Have  they  stolen  anything  from  your 
father  T — They  have  stolen  all  his  good  books  from  him.  — Dost 
thou  steal  anything  1 — I  steal  nothing. — Hast  thou  ever  stolen 


133 

anything] — I  have  never  stolen  anything  (me  ctroaS). — Have  they 
stolen  your  apples  from  you  1 — They  have  stolen  them  from  me. — 
\Vhat  have  they  stolen  from  me  ] — They  have  stolen  from  you  all 
the  good  books. — When  did  they  steal  the  carriage  from  you]— 
They  stole  (^ion  fycit- — gcftefytcn)  it  from  me  the  day  before  yesterday. 
— Have  they  ever  stolen  anything  from  us  1 — They  have  never 
stolen  anything  from  us. — Has  the  carpenter  drunk  all  the  wine  ] — 
He  has  drunk  it. — Has  your  little  boy  torn  all  his  books  ] — He  has 
torn  them  all. — Why  has  he  torn  them  ] — Because  he  does  not 
wish  to  study. — How  much  have  you  lost  (at  play)  ] — I  have  lost 
all  my  money. — Do  you  knoAV  where  my  father  is  1 — I  do  not  know. 
— Have  you  not  seen  my  book  1 — I  have  not  seen  it. — Do  you 
know  how  this  word  is  written] — It  is  written  thus. — Do  you  dye 
anything] — I  dye  my  hat. — What  colour  do  you  dye  it  ] — I  dye  it 
black. — What  colour  do  you  dye  your  clothes] — We  dye  them 
yellow. 

114. 

Do  you  get  your  trunk  dyed  ] — I  get  it  dyed. — What  colour  do 
you  get  it  dyed  ] — I  get  it  dyed  green. — What  colour  dost  thou  get 
thy  thread  stockings  dyed  ] — I  get  them  dyed  white. — Does  your 
cousin  get  his  handkerchief  dyed  ] — He  does  get  it  dyed. — Does 
he  get  it  dyed  red  ] — He  gets  it  dyed  grey. — What  colour  have 
your  friends  got  their  coats  dyed  ] — They  have  got  them  dyed  green. 
— WThat  colour  have  the  Italians  had  their  carriages  dyed  ] — They 
have  had  them  dyed  blue. — What  hat  has  the  nobleman  ] — He  has 
two  hats,  a  white  one  and  a  black  one. — Have  I  a  hat  ] — You  have 
several. — Has  your  dyer  already  dyed  your  cravat  ] — He  has  dyed 
it. — What  colour  has  he  dyed  it] — He  has  dyed  it  yellow. — Do  you 
travel  sometimes  ] — I  travel  often. — Where  do  you  intend  to  go  to 
(f)tn$urctfcn)  this  summer] — I  intend  to  go  to  Germany. — Do  you 
not  go  to  Italy  ? — I  do  go  thither. — Hast  thou  sometimes  travelled  ? 
—I  have  never  travelled. — Have  your  friends  the  intention  to  go  to 
Holland  ] — They  have  the  intention  to  go  thither. — When  do  they 
intend  to  depart  ] — They  intend  to  depart  the  day  after  to  morrow. 
—Has  your  brother  already  gone  to  Spain  ] — He  has  not  yet  gone 
thither. — Have  you  travelled  in  Spain  ] — I  have  travelled  there. — 
When  do  you  depart? — I  depart  to-morrow. — At  what  o'clock  ? — 
At  five  o'clock  in  the  morning. — Have  you  worn  out  all  your  boots  ] 
— I  have  worn  them  all  out. — What  have  the  Turks  done  ? — They 
have  burnt  all  our  good  ships. — Have  you  finished  all  your  letters  ? 
— I  have  finished  them  all. — How  far  have  you  travelled  ] — I  have 
travelled  as  far  as  Germany. — Has  he  travelled  as  far  as  Italy  ] — 
He  has  travelled  as  far  as  America, — How  far  have  the  Spaniards 
gone  ] — They  have  gone  as  far  as  London. — How  far  has  this  poor 
man  come  ] — He  has  come  as  far  as  here. — Has  he  come  as  far  as 
your  house  1 — He  has  come  as  far  as  my  father's.  (See  end  of 
Lesson  XXXIV.) 


134 


FIFTIETH  LESSON.— jTunf^igsle  Cettiott. 


(motion). 


Above. 
Below. 

£)ben  (rest). 
Uttten  (rest). 

$  [nttauf 
)  fyerauf 
5  t)muttte 
1  l)eruttte 

This  side. 
That  side. 

2>enfeit£  (rest). 

Hithei 
I)icr 

t)0tt 

Thithe 

(motion). 


Obs.  A.  The  particles  f)et  and  Ijitt,  having  no  corres- 
ponding words  in  English,  must  be  carefully  distin- 
guished from  each  other.  5per  expresses  motion  to- 
wards the  person  who  speaks,  as  :  fyerauf,  up ;  fyerimter 
or  fyerab,  down ;  fyerau^,  out ;  fyeriiber,  hither,  to  this 
side,  jput  expresses  motion  from  the  person  who 
speaks  towards  another  place,  as  :  fytttcwf,  up  ;  fytttlMter 
or  I)tna6,  down ;  t)tncw3,  out ;  fymiiber,  thither,  to  the 
opposite  side.  If,  for  instance,  I  wish  to  tell  any  one 
who  is  on  a  mountain  to  come  down,  I  must  say :  t cm* 
men  Sie  fyerunter,  come  down  (to  where  I  am).  He 
might  answer  me,  fomnten  ©te  fyeraitf,  come  up.  I  might 
say  to  him,  id)  fomme  nicfyt  fytncwf,  I  am  not  coming  up  ; 
and  he  might  answer  me,  imb  id)  nicfyt  Ijinimter,  and  I 
am  not  coming  down. 

According  to  this  we  must  say :  fontmen  (St'e  Cerent, 
come  in ;  gefyen  @te  ^mau^,  go  out ;  fafyren  @e  fyiniiber, 
drive  to  the  opposite  side  ;  fprittgen  @te  t)tnetn,  jump  in 
(i.  e.  in  ben  §Iu$,  into  the  river)  ;  but  should  the  per- 
son speaking  be  already  in  the  water,  he  would  say  ; 
fprtngen  @ie  fyeretm 


The  mountain, 
the  river, 
the  present, 


tcr 
tcr 


®cfct)cn!  (plur.  ea). 


Obs.  B.     The  adverbs  bte^feit^,  jenfett^,  ought  to  be 
carefully  distinguished  from  the  prepositions,  bte^feit, 


a  Neuter  words,  formed  of  a  verb  and  the  prefix  gc,  add  e  to  all  the  cases 
plural,  and  do  not  soften  the  radical  vowel. 


135 

jenfett*  The  latter  are  always  followed  by  the  genitive, 
whilst  the  others  never  govern  a  case,  Ex.  fcie^fett  fce$ 
§fufife$,  on  this  side  of  the  river ;  jenfeit  teg  33erge3,  on 
the  other  side  of  the  mountain. 

To  go  up  the  mountain.  £)cn  23crg  Ijtnauf  gcfyen 

Where  is  your  brother  gone  to!  £Bo  ift  3fa  SSrufccr  bin 
He  is  gone  up  the  mountain.         (5r  ift  ten  23crg  Ijincwf 

To  give  back  again  (to  restore).   SBteberge(( 

Thou  givest  back  again.  £)u  gitft  roiebcr, 

He  gives  back  again.  (5r  gibt  tvtebcr. 

Given  back  again.  S&tcbcrgcgcfrcn* 

Does  he  restore  you  your  book  ?  ©it>t  cr  30ncn 

He  does  restore  it  to  me.  (£r  gibt  c^  mir  wtcbcr. 

Has   he  given  you  your  stick  £at  cr  Sfyncn  Sftnn  ~ 

back  again  ?  qcbcn  ? 

He  has  given  it  me  back  again.  (Sr  f)ot  ifyn  mir 


To  begin,  to  commence.         TCnfancjen*,  fcccjtnncn*. 


Begun,  commenced.  ^ngcfangcn,  t>cgcnncn. 

Have  you    already  commenced  £aben  ©W  S^cn  ffirtcf  fcl)Cn  QtigC- 

your  letter]  fangcn  ? 

Not  yet.  97od)  ntd)t. 

I  have  not  yet  commenced  it.        ScI)    &a6e   i^n   nccl)  ntd)t 

gen. 
Have  you  received  a  present  1      £a6cn   ©te    cin    ©cfcljcnf 

men  ? 

I  have  received  several.  3d)  feaOe  »crfd)tebcne  6cfommcn. 

From  whom  have  you  received  $on  rocm  t?aOcn  @tc  ®cfd)cn 

presents  "?  men  ? 

Whence  ?     Where  from  ?      2B  0  f)  e  r  ? 

Ow^  o/.  2C  u  g  (governs  the  dative). 

Where  do  you  come  from  ?  SODo  Fommcn  ©ic  r;cr  ? 


C.  The  adverb  tt>of)cr  may  be  separated  into  two 
parts  (as  tt>oJ)Ut,  Lesson  XXXYIL),  the  first  of  which  is 
put  at  the  beginning,  and  the  second  at  the  end  of  the 
phrase.  If  the  phrase  ends  with  a  participle  past,  or  an 
infinitive,  her  is  placed  before  it  ;  but  it  precedes  the 
particle  jit  of  the  infinitive. 

I  come  from  (out  of)  the  garden.  3d)  fcmmc  cw$  bcm  ©artcn. 

Where  has  he  come  from  1  2Bc|)cr  ift  cr  gcfommen  ? 

He  has  come  from  the  theatre.      <£t  ift  au$  bf  m  Sweater  (jefommctt. 


136 

To  be  worth.  SOS  e  r  1  1)  f  c  i  n  *. 


How  much  may  that  horse   be  SOBictnct    fann    ticfcS    ^pfcrb    nx'ttf) 

worth  ?  fcin  1 

It   may    be    worth    a    hundred  (5s  tcmn  fyuntcrt  Stjotcr  rocrtl)  fcin. 

crowns. 

This  is  worth  more  than  that.    3Mcfcs  ift  nierjt  wcttfj  cif»  jcnc*. 
The  one  is  not  worth  so  much  as  jDaS  cine  ift  ntcl)t  fo  tticl  nxttf)  al$ 

the  other.  fcaS  cmfccvc. 

How  much  is  that  worth  ?  iSMctricl  ift  t>n$  rocrtf)  ? 

That  is  not  worth  much.  £)«$  ift  nicbt  met  nxttf). 

That  is  not  worth  anything.          2)a£  if!  nid)t$  rocrtlj. 

To  fo  footer.  93  c  f  f  c  t     fcin*     (mcfyr    rccrtfj 

fcin  »). 

Ami  not  as  good  as  my  brother?  23in  id)  nicfyt  fo  gut  rcic  nicin  23cus 


You  are  better  than  h, 

I  am  not  as  good  as  you.  Set)  bin  nid)t  fo  gut 

EXERCISES.       115. 

Do  you  call  me  ?  —  I  do  call  you.  —  Where  are  you  ?  —  I  am  on  (cwf 
with  the  dative)  the  mountain  ;  are  you  coming  up  ?  —  I  am  not 
coming  up.  —  Where  are  you?  —  I  am  at  the  foot  (am  5ll£0  °f  tne 
mountain  ;  will  you  come  down  ?  —  I  cannot  come  down.  —  Why 
can  you  not  come  down  ]  —  Because  I  have  sore  feet.  —  WThere  does 
your  cousin  live  ]  —  He  lives  on  this  side  of  the  river.  —  Where  is 
the  mountain  1—  It  is  on  that  side  of  the  river.  —  Where  stands  the 
house  of  our  friend  ?  —  It  stands  on  that  side  of  the  mountain.  —  Is 
the  garden  of  your  friend  on  this  or  that  side  of  the  wood  1  —  It  is  on 
that  side  (jcnfctt?).  —  Is  our  storehouse  not  on  that  side  of  the  road  1 

—  It  is  on  this  side  (tic£ft*!t6).  —  Where  have  you  been  this  morning  ? 

—  I  have  been  on  (Lesson  XXX.)  the  great  mountain.  —  How  many 
times   have  you  gone  up  the  mountain  ]  —  1  have  gone  up  (binauf 
Qccjancjcn)  three  times.  —  Is  our  father  below  or  above  1  —  He  is  above. 

—  Have  the  neighbour's  boys  given  you  your  books  back  again  1 

—  They  have  given  them  to  me  back  again.  —  When  did  they  give 
them  back  again  to  you  ]  —  They  gave  (Ijciben  —  nMi'tonjcgeben)  them 
back  again  to  me  yesterday.  —  To  whom  have  you  given  your  stick  1 

—  I  have  given  it  to  the  nobleman.  —  To  whom  have  the  noblemen 
given  their  gloves  1  —  They  have  given  them  to  Englishmen.  —  To 
which  Englishmen   have  they  given  them  ]  —  To   those   (Lesson 
XIV.)  whom  you  have  seen  this  morning  at  my  house.  —  To  which 
people  do  you  give  money  ]  —  I  give  some  to  those  to  whom  (Lesson 
XIV)  you  give  some.  —  Do  you  give  any  one  money  ]  —  I  give  some 
to  those  who  want  any.  —  To  which  children  does  your  father  give 
cakes  1  —  He  gives  some  to  those  who  are  good, 


137 

116. 

Have  you  received  presents  ? — I  have  received  some. — What 
presents  have  you  received  1 — I  have  received  fine  presents. — Has 
your  little  brother  received  a  present  1 — He  has  received  several. — 
From  whom  has  he  received  any  ? — He  has  received  some  from  my 
father  and  from  yours. — Do  you  come  out  of  the  garden  ? — I  do  not 
come  out  of  the  garden,  but  out  of  the  house.-— Where  are  you  going 
to  ? — I  am  going  into  the  garden. — Whence  comes  the  Irishman  ? 
— He  comes  from  the  garden. — Does  he  come  from  the  same  garden 
from  which  (au$  rudofycm)  you  come] — He  does  not  come  from  the 
same. — From  which  garden  does  he  come  ? — He  comes  from  that 
of  our  old  friend. — Whence  comes  your  boy  ? — He  comes  from  the 
play. — How  much  is  that  carriage  worth? — It  is  worth  five  hundred 
crowns. — Is  this  book  worth  as  much  as  that  1 — It  is  worth  more. 
— How  much  is  my  horse  worth  ? — It  is  worth  as  much  as  that  of 
your  friend. — Are  your  horses  worth  as  much  as  those  of  the  French  ? 
— They  are  not  worth  so  much. — How  much  is  that  knife  worth  ? 
— It  is  worth  nothing. — Is  your  servant  as  good  as  mine  1 — He  is 
better  than  yours. — Are  you  as  good  as  your  brother? — He  is  better 
than  I. — Art  thou  as  good  as  thy  cousin  ] — I  am  as  good  as  he. — 
Are  we  as  good  as  our  neighbours  ? — We  are  better  than  they. — 
Is  your  umbrella  as  good  as  mine  ? — It  is  not  wrorth  so  much. — 
Why  is  it  not  worth  so  much  as  mine? — Because  it  is  not  so  fine 
as  yours. — Do  you  wish  to  sell  your  horse  ] — I  do  wish  to  sell  it. — 
How  much  is  it  worth  ] — It  is  worth  two  hundred  florins.—- Do  you 
wish  to  buy  it  1 — I  have  bought  one  already. — Does  your  father 
intend  to  buy  a  horse  1 — He  does  intend  to  buy  one,  but  not  yours. 
(See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


FIFTY-FIRST  LESSON.— ©in  ttnfc  fiUtfftjste  Section. 

That  (conjunction).        2)  a  0  (See  Rule  of  Syntax,  Les- 
son XL  VII.). 

What  do  you  say  1  £8a$  fciojcn  Sic  1 

I  say  that  you  have  my  book.       3d)  fagc,  fcoQ  Sic  nicin  23ud)  fycifren. 

I  tell  you  that  I  have  it  not.          3d)    fagc   3fyncn,  &ojj   id)   c$  ntd>t 

babe. 

Have  you  not  had  it  ?  £obcn  Sic  c£  ntdjt  gcljafct  ? 

I  have  had  it,  but  I  have  it  no  3d)  bobc  Cs  gcfjobt/  abet  id)  fyctfcc  tf 
longer.  md)t  mcfjr. 

No  more.  9H  d)  t  m  c  f)  r. 

Where  have  you  placed  it  T  ££o  fjo&cn  Sic  cr>  fjtn.qctt'gt  ? 

I  have  placed  it  on  the  table.  3d)  Ijobc  c$  ouf  t>cn  Stfd)  n/le<jt. 

Is  it  (does  it  lie)  on  the  table  ?  Siegt  c*  ouf  t>cm 

It  is  (lies)  on  it.  (5$  (tco,t  fcorouf. 


138 

Some,  a  little.  (5 1  tt>  a  6  (e  i  n  n?  e  n  i  a,). 

Can  you  give  me  some  water  ?     .ftcnncn  Sic  nut  etn?a£  SOSaffet 

kn  ? 
I  can  give  you  some.  3d)  frinn  3fynen  tt>ctd)e£  cjcfcen. 


jlfu  j*.  931  u  \  f  e  n,  past  part.  Cj  e  m  u  p  t . 

Necessary  (adjective).  9?  o  1 1)  i  Q. 

To  #e  necessary.  5)2  6 1  f)  1 0,  fein*. 


£  S0?up  man  auf  ben  9War!t  cjcfyen  ? 

Is  it  necessary  to  go  to  the  <  3ft  c$  notfyto,  auf  ben  SDlarft  su  ges 
market?  f      ^en? 

It  I.  necessary  to  gothithe,  {^3^^^". 

What  must  one  do  in  order  to  £Ba$  mup  man  t^un/  urn  beutfc^  5U 

learn  German  ?  (crnen  ? 

One  must  study  much.  9}lan  mup  met  ftubtrcn. 

What  must  he  do  ?  SBa^  mup  cr  tfjun  ? 

He  must  go  for  a  book.  (Sr  mup  ctn  SSud)  1 

What  must  I  do  1  805a$  mup  ic^  fyttft! 


etia 

To  oe  sitting,  been  sitting.  ©  i  ^  e  n  *     (takes    r)afocn   for   its 

auxiliary),  gcfcff  en. 

You  must  sit  still.  Sic  miiffcn  jlitt  ft^cn. 

Have  you  been  obliged  to  work  |>a6en  @te  met  arbcttcn  muffen  ( Obs. 

much  to  learn  German?  Lesson  XLIV.),  um  beutfd)  jtt 

terncn  ? 
I   have  been    obliged  to  work  3d)  fyafcc  tttel  artciten  muffen. 

much. 

The  competency,  the  subsistence,  £>a$  2Cu$!ommen. 

the  livelihood. 
To  have  wherewithal  to  live.          (Sein  TCllSfommen   ^aben*. 

Has  he  wherewithal  to  live  ?  ^at  cr  fein  TdiSfommen  ? 

He  has.  (5r  F)at  c^. 

What  must  I  buy  T  £Ba$  mujl  id)  taufen  ? 

Some  beef.  £KtnbfU'tfd). 

The  ox  (neat).  S)a^  9?tnb. 

Y'ou  must  buy  some  beef.  Sic  miiffcn  SRtnbfletfd)  faufen. 

What  do  you  wish  ?  SBaS  rooften 


What  do  you  want  t  f  «-  LT*^ .f^  ? 


I  want  S0me  money. 

Do  you  want  some  money  ?          23raucl)en  ©tc 
Do  you   wish    to    have  some  SBettcn  <Stc  ©clb 
money  ? 


139 


I  do  want  some. 

Do  you  want  much  1 

I  do  want  much. 

How  much  must  you  have  1 

How  much  do  you  want] 

I  only  want  a  grosh. 

Js  that  all  you  want  ? 

That  is  all  I  want. 

More* 

Do  you  not  want  more  1 
I  do  not  want  more. 
What  does  he  want  ] 
He  wants  a  coat. 
Have  you  what  you  want] 
I  have  what  I  want. 
He  has  what  he  wants. 
They  have  what  they  want. 


Set)  brcutdjc  wcfdfee*. 
*Braucf)cn  (Sic  fccffen  met  ? 
Set)  braud)c  fccffcn  wet. 
SGBiemcl  muff  en  (Sic  Ijabcn  ] 
SStcmcl  bvaud)cn  <Sie  ] 
Set)  brauebc  nur  cincn  ©rofd&en. 
3ft  fcflS  2(tlc>o,  ix>a$  @tc  brcuict)cn  1 
£)a$  tft  TCUcS,  n?a$  id)  braucfyc. 


<Braucf)cn  (Sic  mcf)t  mcfjr  1 
Set)  braucbc  nict)t  mcfjr. 
SOSaS  brauct)t  cr  ? 
(5t  braud)t  cm  £(ett>. 
4babcn  (Sic,  wag  (Sic  braucfycn  ? 
Set)  fyabc,  tvag  id)  braudjc. 
(£r  t)at,  tva^!  cr  braucl)t. 
(Sic  ^abcn,  wa^  ftc  brauc^cn. 


To  be  obliged  (shall,  ought).  (Soltctt,  past.  part. 


What  am  I  to  do  ? 
You  must  work. 
Am  I  to  go  thither] 
You  may  go  thither. 


SBo*  felt  tct)  tfjun  ? 
Sic  feflcn  arbcitcn. 
(Sell  id)  f)ing 
<Sic  fonncn 


EXERCISES.    117. 


Were  ((Stnfc — jcwcfcn)  you  yesterday  at  the  physician's  ] — I  was 
at  his  house  (bet  tfjm). — What  does  he  say  ] — He  says  that  he  can- 
not come. — Why  does  he  not  send  his  son] — His  son  does  not  go 
out  (gcfyt  ntd)t  cuiS,  Lesson  XXXIV.  Obs.  C.)« — Why  does  he  not 
go  out  (gcfyt  cr  niet)t  au?)  ] — Because  he  is  ill. — Hast  thou  had  my 
purse  ] — I  tell  you  that  I  have  not  had  it. — Hast  thou  seen  it  ] — I 
have  seen  it. — Where  is  it  ] — It  lies  upon  the  chair. — Have  you 
had  my  knife] — I  tell  you  that  I  have  had  it. — Where  have  you 
placed  it  ] — I  have  placed  it  upon  the  table. — Will  you  look  for  it  ] — 
I  have  already  looked  for  it. — Have  you  found  it  ] — I  have  not  found 
it. — Have  you  sought  (for)  my  gloves  ] — I  have  sought  (for)  them, 
but  I  have  not  found  them. — Has  your  servant  my  hat  ] — He  has 
had  it,  but  he  has  it  no  longer. — Has  he  brushed  it  ] — He  has 
brushed  it. — Are  my  books  upon  your  table  ] — They  are  (lie)  upon 
it. — Have  you  any  wine  ] — I  have  but  little,  but  I  will  give  you 
what  I  have. — WTill  you  give  me  some  water  ] — I  will  give  you 
some. — Have  you  much  wine  ] — I  have  much. — Will  you  give  me 
some  ] — I  will  give  you  some. — How  much  do  I  owe  you  ] — You 
owe  me  nothing. — You  are  too  kind  (g(itic\). — Must  I  go  for  some 
wine  ] — You  must  go  for  some. — Shall  I  go  to  the  ball  ] — You 
must  go  thither. — When  must  I  go  thither] — You  must  go  thither 
this  evening. — Must  I  go  for  the  carpenter  ] — You  must  go  for  him. 


140 

— Is  it  necessary  to  go  to  the  market  1 — It  is  necessary  to  go 
thither. — What  must  one  do  in  order  to  learn  Russian  ? — One  must 
study  much. — Must  one  study  much  to  learn  German  1 — One  must 
study  much. — What  shall  I  do] — You  must  buy  a  good  book. — 
What  is  he  to  do'? — He  must  sit  still. — \Vhatarewe  to  do  1 — You 
must  work. — Must  you  work  much,  in  order  to  learn  the  Arabic? — 
I  must  work  much  to  learn  it. — Does  your  brother  not  work  ] — He 
does  not  want  to  work. — Has  he  wherewithal  to  live  ? — He  has. — 
Why  must  I  go  to  the  market  1 — You  must  go  thither  to  buy  some 
beef. — Why  must  I  work  ? — You  must  work,  in  order  to  get  (jjabcu) 
a  competency. 

118. 

What  do  you  want,  Sir  ? — I  want  some  cloth. — How  much  is 
that  hat  worth  ] — It  is  worth  three  crowns. — Do  you  want  any 
stockings  ? — I  want  some. — How  much  are  those  stockings  worth  1 
— They  are  worth  twelve  kreuzers. — Is  that  all  you  want  1 — That 
is  all. — Do  you  not  want  shoes  ? — I  do  not  want  any. — Dost  thou 
want  much  money  "? — I  want  much. — How  much  must  thou  have  ? 
—I  must  have  six  crowns. — How  much  does  your  brother  want  1 
— He  wants  but  six  groshes. — Does  he  not  want  more  ? — He  does 
not  want  more. — Does  your  cousin  want  more  1 — He  does  not  want 
so  much  as  I. — What  do  you  want  1 — I  want  money  and  boots. — 
Have  you  now  what  you  want? — I  have  what  I  want. — Has 
your  brother  what  he  wants  1 — He  has  what  he  wants. 


FIFTY-SECOND  LESSON.—  Zwti  tmtr  fftn%ste 
Ceciion. 

To  pay  —  paid.  S3  e  $  a  f)  (  c  n  —  bc^obtt.      (See 

Obs.  A.  Lesson  XLV.) 

To  pay  a  man  for  a  horse.  (Sincm  SRanne  cm  spfcrfc  &c$ar)(etu 

To  pay  the  tailor  for  the  coat.       5)cm  ©cfyncifccr  ben  $?ect  bcjafylcn. 
Do  you  pay  the  shoemaker  for  23qaf)len  <£tc  t>em  ©cfyu&macljci;  tie 

the  shoes  1  ©d)ul)e  ? 

I  pay  him  for  them.  $cf)  bqafyle  fie  tfym. 

Does  he  pay  you  for  the  knives?  23qaf)tt  cr  Sbncn  fur  t>tc  SDttffet  ? 
He  pays  me  for  them.  <£t  fecjaljlt  fie  nur. 


Obs.  A.  These  examples  show  that  the  verb 
Ictt  governs  the  dative  of  the  person,  and  the  accusa- 
tive of  the  thing.  It  may  also  be  used  with  the  pre- 
position fur,  for,  as  in  English.  Ex.  I  pay  him  for 
the  boots,  id)  bqafyle  ihm  fur  fct'e  ©tiefcL  But  taken 
figuratively,  in  the  signification  of  bejlrafeu,  to  punish, 


141 


it  is  sometimes  construed  with  the  accusative  of  the 
person,  as  in  the  following  expressions :  wart'/  id}  ttntt 
St'rf)  bejahlen,  wait,  I  shall  pay  (punish)  you  for  it ;  ben 
fyabe  id)  (d)6n  frejafylt, 1  have  paid  (punished)  this  man 
•well. 

Have  you  paid  the  shoemaker  £abcn  Sic  bcm  Sd)ufymad)ct    tie 

for  the  boots  ?  Sttefel  bcgatyt  ? 

I  have  paid  him  for  them.  3d)  fyabc  fie  tfym  bcgal)(f. 

I  pay  what  I  owe.  3d)  bc$ah(c,  tt>a*  id)  fcbuttig  bin. 

Have  you  paid  for  your  book?  £aben  ^ie  3^r  SBud)  be^aljlt? 

I  have  paid  for  it.  3d)  babe  e$  bcgaftft. 

I  have  not  yet  paid  for  it.  3d)  ^abc  c»  ncd)  nic^t  bc^a!){t. 


To  beg  of — begged  of. 

To  pray — prayed. 

To  request — requested. 

To  ask  any  one  for  money. 
To  beg  money  of  some  one. 
To  request  money  of  any  one. 
What  do  you  ask  me  for  1 
I  ask  you  for  nothing. 
I  beg  some  money  of  you. 


2tnfprcd)cn*  —  angcfprecfyen. 


um  ©c(b  anfprcd)cn*. 
3cnmntcni  um  ©clfe  bitten*. 
n5  perlangcn  (Sic  t»cn  nur  ? 


3ct)  fpvcdjc  ©tc  um 


an. 


He  has  begged  some  money  of  (£t  fycit  mid)  um  @5elt>  nngcfprcc^cn. 


Por.  U  m  (a  preposition  governing  the 

accusative). 

Do  you  beg  some  money  of  him  1  ^prccfccn  Sic  ifyn  um  ©ctt>  on  ? 
I  beg  some  of  him.  3d)  crbtttc  mtc  iuc(d)C§  t»cn  tf)m. 

To  solicit  any  one  to  do  a  thing,  ©twos  Don  3cmcmt>cm  crbittcn*. 


For  it. 

To  ask  him  for  it. 
To  ask  him  for  them. 

I  ask  you  for  it." 

Do  you  ask  me  for  anything  ] 
I  ask  you  for  the  hat. 
Do  you  ask  me  for  the  hat  1 
I  ask  you  for  it. 

To  speak  of  some  one. 

Does  one  speak  of  that  man  ] 
One  speaks  of  him. 


2)  Q  r  u  m. 

C  3f)n  tarum  cinfprcdjcn*. 
£  (£•$  t>cn  tfym  t>er(nngcn. 
C  3bn  barum  anfprcd)cn*. 
i  ©tc  t>cn  tljin  t>cr(anijcn. 
C  3cb  fprcdjc  ©tc  fcarum  an. 
C  3d)  ttcrlangc  eg  t>cn  Sftncn. 

95cr(angen  Sic  ctrcaS  Don  nut  ? 

3cb  btttc  Sie  um  ben  ^ut. 

S3ittcn  Sic  nu'ct)  um  ben  £ut  ? 

3d)  bitte  Sie  barum. 


3cmanbcm  fprcd)cn*. 

Sprtcbt  man  son  btcfem  9)?annc  1 
fprid)t  ocn  il?m. 


142 

One  does  not  speak  of  him.  93?cm  fpttd)t  nid)t  ucn  ifjm. 

Do  they  speak  of  my  book  ]  <Sprid)t  man  t>on  mctncm  23ud)C  1 

They  speak  much  of  it.  9)Jcm  |prtd)t  wcl  baron. 

What  do  you  say  to  it?  SSaS  fagcn  ©tc  ba$u  (f)U'r$u)  ? 

I  say  he  is  right.  3d)  fa9e/  kflP  « 

Content,  satisfied.  3  u  f  r  t  c  b  C  n. 

97  e  u. 


To  be  content  with  any  one.         Sfflit  3'emanbcm  gufrtcbcn  fctn*. 
Are  you  content  with  this  man  ?  ©inb  <Sic  nut  btcfcm  SJtenne  jufrtc* 

ben? 
I  am  content  with  him.  3d)  tin  nut  ifjm  gufrtcbcn. 

Obs.  B.  Of  f|  i  e  r,  /^ere,  and  b  a,  tfAere,  compound 
adverbs  are  formed  by  means  of  certain  prepositions 
governing  the  dative  or  accusative.  In  these  adverbs 
fyter  and  ba  stand  instead  of  the  three  genders  singular 
and  plural,  dative  and  accusative  of  the  demonstra- 
tive pronoun  :  biefer,  bt'efe,  biefe3  (bcr,  bfe,  ba^),  which  is 
never  used  with  a  preposition. 


Are  you  content  with  your  new  (Stnb  ©tc  nut  SOrcm  ncucn 

coat1?  gufttcbcn? 

I  am  contented  with  it.  3d)  tun  beimtt  ^ufrtcbcn. 

I  am  discontented  writh  it.  3d)  tun  un$ufrtct>cn  bflintt. 

Discontented. 


Of  what  do  they  speak  ?  SDBoocn  fpvtd)t  man  ? 

They  speak  of  peace,  of  war,  of  9Dfcm  fptid)t  ocn  bcm  J^rtcbcn,  »c 
your  book.  bcm  ^ricge,  i?cn  Sb^cm  S8ud)C. 

Do  they  speak  of  peace  1  ©pridjt  man  pen  bcm  Jrtcben  ? 

They  do  speak  of  it.  9)tan  fprtd)t  baron. 


Obs.  C.  The  adverb  tt)  cr  where,  like  ^fer  and  ba 
(See  Obs.  above),  forms  compound  adverbs  with  certain 
prepositions  governing  the  dative  or  accusative.  In 
these  tt)0  takes  the  place  of  the  dative  and  accusative 
of  the  pronoun  interrogative  VDelcfyer,  rt>elrf)e,  toelcfyeg,  or 


With  what  are  you  content  1         SSSomit  finb  (Sic  gnfrtcbcn  ? 
I  am  content  with  my  book.         3d)  bin  nut  mcincm  JBudjc 

ben* 

With  whom  are  you  satisfied  ?      93?it  wcm  finb  ©tc  ^ufrtcben  ? 
I  am  satisfied  with  my  master.     3d)  bin  wit  mctncm  Cdjrct  jufrtcs 

ben* 

To  study  —  studied.  (Stnbircn  —  ftnbtrt.      (See 

Obs.  A.  Lesson  XLV.) 


\  «  ."«  5  i*  JV/,".  - Y.Vr'/J  I,  I 
To  question, — interrogate.     §  r  a  3  c  n  (governs  the  ace.). 

The  uncle,  tcr  £%im  (is  not  softened  in  the 

plural)  ; 

the  gentleman,  the  lord,  tct  £ert ; 

the  master,  the  tutor,  the  pre-  )  v  _  ft,,    , 

ceptor,  the  professor,  ^cr  Scorer ; 

the  scholar,  tct  <Sd)it(ct  ; 

the  pupil,  tetSoQling; 

the  fee,  wages,  salary,  tcr  2ei)n  (has  no  plur.)  ; 

the  lesson,  tic    Section    (a     feminine     noun, 

taking  en  in  the  plur.)  ; 
the  exercise,  tic    2(iifcja&e    (a    feminine    noun, 

taking  n  in  the  plur.)  ; 

To  receive  a  present  from  some  2> en  Scmcmtcm  ein  ©efcfycnf  fccfenu 
one.  men*. 

EXERCISES.  119.  * 

Have  we  what  we  want  ? — We  have  not  what  we  want. — What 
do  we  want  1 — We  want  a  fine  house,  a  large  garden,  a  beautiful 
carriage,  pretty  horses,  several  servants,  and  much  money. — Is 
that  all  we  want? — That  is  all  we  want. — What  must  I  do  ] — You 
must  write  a  letter. — To  whom  (Lesson  XXX.)  must  I  write  1 — 
You  must  write  to  your  friend. — Shall  I  go  to  the  market  1 — You 
may  go  there. — Will  you  tell  your  father  that  I  am  waiting  for  him 
here  ? — I  will  tell  him  so  (Obs.  Lesson  XLIII.). — What  will  you 
tell  your  father  1 — I  will  tell  him  that  you  are  waiting  for  him  here. 
— What  wilt  thou  say  to  my  servant  1 — I  will  say  to  him  that  you 
have  finished  your  letter. — Have  you  paid  (for)  your  table  1 — I  have 
paid  (for)  it. — Has  your  uncle  paid  for  the  book  ? — He  has  paid 
for  it. — Have  I  paid  the  tailor  for  the  clothes  ] — You  have  paid 
him  for  them. — Hast  thou  paid  the  merchant  for  the  horse1? — I  have 
not  yet  paid  him  for  it. — Have  we  paid  for  our  gloves  ] — We  have 
paid  for  them. — Has  your  cousin  already  paid  for  his  boots  ] — He 
has  not  yet  paid  for  them. — Does  my  brother  pay  you  what  he 
owes  you  1 — He  does  pay  it  me. — Do  you  pay  what  you  owe  ] — I 
do  pay  what  I  owe. — Have  you  paid  (with  the  dative)  the  baker  1 
— I  have  paid  him. — Has  your  uncle  paid  the  butcher  for  the  meat  ? 
—He  has  paid  him  for  it. — Have  you  paid  your  servant  his  wages  ? 
— I  have  paid  them  1o  him. — Has  your  master  paid  you  your  wages  1 
— He  has  paid  them  to  me. — When  did  he  pay  them  to  you  1 — He 
paid  (f)cit — 6^a()(t)  them  to  me  the  day  before  yesterday. — What  do 
you  ask  this  man  for  ] — I  ask  him  for  my  book. — What  does  this 
boy  beg  of  me  ? — He  begs  of  you  some  money. — Do  you  ask  me 
for  anything  ] — I  ask  you  for  a  crown — Do  you  ask  me  for  the 
bread] — I  ask  you  for  it. — Do  the  poor  beg  money  of  you  ? — They 
beg  some  of  me. — Which  man  do  you  ask  for  money  ] — I  ask  him 
for  some  whom  you  ask  for  some. — Which  merchants  do  you  ask 


144 

for  gloves  ? — I  ask  those  who  live  in  William-Street  (Lesson 
XLVIII.)  for  some. — Which  joiner  do  you  ask  for  chairs  "? — I  ask 
that  one,  whom  you  know,  for  some. — What  do  you  ask  the  baker 
for  1 — I  ask  him  for  some  bread. — Do  you  ask  the  butchers  for  some 
meat  ] — I  do  ask  them  for  some. — Dost  thou  ask  me  for  the  stick  ? 
— I  do  ask  thee  for  it. — Does  he  ask  thee  for  the  book"? — He  does 
ask  me  for  it. — What  have  you  asked  the  Englishman  for  ? — I  have 
asked  him  for  my  leather  trunk. — Has  he  given  it  to  you  1 — He  has 
given  it  to  me. 

120. 

Whom  have  you  asked  for  some  sugar  ? — I  have  asked  the  mer- 
chant for  some. — Of  whom  have  the  poor  begged  some  money  "? — 
They  have  begged  some  of  the  noblemen. — Of  which  noblemen 
have  they  begged  some  1 — They  have  begged  some  of  those  whom 
you  know. — Whom  do  you  pay  for  the  meat  ] — 1  pay  the  butchers 
for  it. — Whom  does  your  brother  pay  for  his  boots  ] — He  pays  the 
shoemakers  for  them. — Whom  have  we  paid  for  the  bread  ] — We 
have  paid  our  bakers  for  it. — Of  whom  have  they  (man)  spoken  1 — 
They  have  spoken  of  your  friend. — Have  they  not  spoken  of  the 
physicians  ! — They  have  not  spoken  of  them. — Do  they  not  speak 
of  the  man  of  whom  (t»cn  nx(d)cm)  we  have  spoken"? — They  do  speak 
of  him. — Have  they  spoken  of  the  noblemen  ] — They  have  spoken 
of  them. — Have  they  spoken  of  those  of  whom  we  speak  1 — They 
have  not  spoken  of  those  of  whom  we  speak,  but  they  have  spoken 
of  others. — Have  they  spoken  of  our  children  or  of  those  of  our 
neighbours  1 — They  have  neither  spoken  of  ours  nor  of  those  of 
our  neighbours. — Which  children  have  been  spoken  of  ? — Those 
of  our  preceptor  have  been  spoken  of. — Do  they  speak  of  my  book  ? 
— They  do  speak  of  it. — Of  what  do  you  speak  ] — We  speak  of 
war. — Do  you  not  speak  of  peace  1 — We  do  not  speak  of  it. — Are 
you  content  with  your  pupils  ] — I  am  content  with  them. — How 
does  my  brother  study  ] — He  studies  well. — How  many  lessons 
have  you  studied  ? — I  have  already  studied  fifty-four. — Is  your 
master  satisfied  with  his  scholar1? — He  his  satisfied  with  him.-r- 
Has  your  master  received  a  present  ] — He  has  received  several.-— 
From  whom  has  he  received  presents  ? — He  has  received  some  from 
his  pupils. — Has  he  received  any  from  your  father  1 — He  has  re- 
ceived some  (both)  from  mine  and  from  that  of  my  friend. — Is  he 
satisfied  with  the  presents  which  he  has  received  ? — He  is  satisfied 
with  them. — How  many  exercises  hast  thou  already  done  ? — I  have 
already  done  twenty-one. — Is  thy  master  satisfied  with  thee  ? — He 
says  that  he  is  satisfied  with  me. — And  what  dost  thou  say  ? — I  say 
that  I  am  satisfied  with  him. — How  old  art  thou  ? — I  am  not  quite 
ten  years  old. — Dost  thou  already  learn  German  ? — I  do  already 
learn  it. — Does  thy  brother  know  German  1 — He  does  not  know  it. 
— Why  does  he  not  know  it] — Because  he  has  not  learnt  it. — Why 
has  he  not  learnt  it  1 — Because  he  has  not  had  time. — Is  your  father 
at  borne  ] — No,  he  has  departed,  but  my  brother  is  at  home. — Where 


145 

is  your  father  go<ne  to  * — He  is  gone  to  England, — Have  you  some- 
times gone  thither  ? — I  have  never  gone  thither. — Do  you  intend 
going  to  Germany  this  summer1? — I  do  intend  going  thither. — Have 
you  the  intention  of  staying  there  long  ? — I  have  the  intention  of 
staying  there  during  the  summer. — How  long  does  your  brother 
remain  at  home  1 — Till  twelve  o'clock. — Have  you  had  your  gloves 
dyed. — I  have  had  them  dyed. — What  have  you  had  them  dyed! — 
I  have  had  them  dyed  brown. — Will  you  tell  your  father  that  I 
have  been  here  ? — I  will  tell  him  so. — Will  you  not  wait  until  he 
comes  back  again  1 — I  cannot  wait.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


FIFTY-THIRD  LESSON.  -  ?Brd  fitti 
Cettion. 

To  eat — eaten-  <£  f  f  c  n  *  - 

Thou  eatest— he  eats,  £>u  tffef!  —  cr  tffct  or  t£t. 

C  3u  9J2itta^  cficn  — 
T0  <fo'/ie  (e«£  dinner} — dmed.  <      fen, 

(  ©pcifen  — •  gcfpcifct  or  gcfpcif't. 

C  Uiu  wicftcl  Itbr  fpcifen  (Sic  ? 
At  what  o'clock  do  you  dine  ?   <  Uin  tvclc^c  3^'tt  cffen  (Sic  $u 

(     tog? 
I  dine  at  five  o'clock,  %&)  fpc*fc  «m  funf  (urn  funf  U^r). 


I  have  dined.  Stf)  W^C  [ 

I  have  dined  earlier  than  you.       %fy  fyabc  ftufyc 


Have  you  already  breakfasted  !     &aOcn  (Stc  fd)Cn  Qcfcufyjtticft  ? 
The  dinner.  £)c 

The  breakfast.  £)< 


To  eat  supper  (to  sup).  3«    TC&cnt)    cffcn*,   2C6cnts 

'   cffcn*. 


The  supper.  £)a$  2f6cnbeffcn/  ba^  2(&cnb&wfc. 

I  wish  to  eat  supper.  3d)  njtfl  2(&cn^(>t^  cffcn. 

I  have  supped  late.  5  |*  M«  f^  »«  : Ucnt.  «fleff«j. 


After.  9Z  a  cl)    (a   preposition   governing1 

the  dative). 

After  you.  9?ad)  Sf)ncn. 

After  me.  97 ad)  mir. 

After  him.  97ac^  iljm. 

After  my  brother.  0tocfo  nictncm  93tutcr. 

I  Jiave  breakfasted  after  him.  $fy  fyabt  nnc^  if^m  j 
7 


146 


To  hold—held. 

Thou  boldest — he  holds. 
Will  you  hold  my  stick  ? 

To  try—tried. 
To  taste — tasted. 

Will  you  try  to  do  that  ? 

I  have  tried  to  do  it. 

You  must  try  to  do  it  better. 

Have  you  tasted  that  wine  1 
I  have  tasted  it. 

Are  you  looking  for  any  one  T 
Whom  are  you  looking  for  1 
I  am  looking   for   a  brother 
mine. 


An  uncle  of  mine. 
A  neighbour  of  yours, 
A  relation  of  mine. 


£>u  baltft  —  ct  beat 

SBotten  ©ic  mcincn  ©torf  flatten  ? 


n  —  p  r  e  (u  1  1. 
(.  &  cr  f  u  d)  c  n  —  »  c  r  f  u  d)  t. 
C&*ft*n—  gefafiet. 
C  9$  c  t  f  u  djc  n  —  »  c  r  f  u  d)  t 


SSottcn  ©ic  &cr(iid>cn,  ba$  ju  t!)im  T 

3d)  bafo  scrfudbt,  c*  511  tfjun. 

©ic  muffcn  Dcrfucfycn,  c$  6cf[cc  $u  mcu 

d)cn. 

^n6cn  ©ic  ttcfcn  SOScin  Qcfeftct  (ocr^ 
^  fn*t)? 
S*  Me  ifjn  gcfcjlet  (t?crfud)t). 


©udjen  (Sic 
SBcn  fud)cn  ©ic  ? 
of  f  3c^  fuc^c  ctncn  mctncc  SSriibcr. 

Ace.  Sing-.     GEN.  PZwr. 

t  Stncn  iticiner 

t  Smen 

t  (Stnen  ntcincr  3Scrtt>anbten* 


Obs.  Adjectives  taken  substantively  are  declined  like 
other  adjectives.  Ex.  bcr  SSemanbte,  the  relation  ;  gen. 
be3  aSern>anbten,  of  the  relation,  &c. ;  ber  S3cbtcnte,  the 
servant ;  gen.  be3  SSebtenten,  of  the  servant,  &c. ;  em  SSer^ 
tt>anbter,  a  relation ;  em  SSebienter,  a  servant,  &c. 


The  parents  (father  and  mother). 
He  tries  to  see  an  uncle  of  his. 

A  cousin  of  his. 
A  friend  of  ours. 
A  neighbour  of  theirs. 
He  tries  to  see  you. 
Does  he  try  to  see  me  ? 

To  inquire  after  some  one. 

After  whom  do  you  inquire  ? 
I  inquire  after  a  friend  of  mine. 

The  acquaintance. 
Whom  do  you  look  for? 


£>ic  ?Ccttcrn  (©(tern). 

@r  fucrjt  ctncn  fctncr  Dfjctmc  $u  fc- 

ben* 

t  (Stncn  fctncr  SScttern. 
t  @tncn  unfcrcr  ^cunbc. 
j  ^-tncn  ifjrcr  9?ad)born. 
@r  fud)t  ©ic  ju  fcfycn. 
©ud)t  cr  nuc^  311  fc&cn  ? 


Scmonbcm  fragcn. 

tvcm  fragen  ©ic  ? 
Sid)  ftcuje  nacr;  cincm  mctncr  grcun* 

be. 

jpcr  <Bc!anntc. 
2Bcn  fudjcn  ©ic  ? 


147 

I  am  looking  for  an  acquaintance  Sot)  fuci)C  cincn  nu'tner  S3cfanntcn. 

of  mine. 
I  ask  him  for  a  piece  of  bread.      Set)  futtc  i(;n  um  cin  Ctiic!  23rct>»' 

Rule  1.  The  preposition  of,  which  in  English  stands 
between  two  substantives,  when  the  second  determines 
the  substance  of  the  first,  is  never  expressed  in  Ger- 
man. Ex. 

A  piece  of  bread.  f  ©in  ©tficf  SBrofc. 

A  glass  of  water.  f  Gin  ©tog  SBafjcr. 

A  sheet  of  paper.  i  (Sin  Imogen  Copter. 

Three  sheets  of  paper.  f  S)tvt  2$ecjcn  papier. 

The  piece,  ta$ 

the  sheet,  tcr 

the  small  piece  (little  bit),  fcas  ( 

the  little  book,    '  ta$  S3ttcl)tcin. 

Rule  2.  All  diminutives  terminating  in  cfyett  and  f  eut 
are  neuter,  and  those  terminating  in  ling  are  mascu- 
line. To  form  diminutives  from  German  substantives, 
the  syllable  rf)  e  tt  or  I  e  i  It  is  added,  and  the  radical 
vowels,  a,  o,  it,  are  softened  into  a,  6,  it*  Ex. 


The  small  house,  t>a$ 

the  small  picture,  t>a$  3H(t>clKn  ; 

the  little  heart,  tc$  Jbcqcben  ; 

the  little  child,  fccul  .fiinfclctn  ; 

the  little  boy,  ta$  ^tnaOlctn,  jtnafccljen  ; 

the  suckling  (baby),  tct  (Sciuqting; 

the  favourite,  darling1,  t>cr  SicWtng; 

the  apprentice,  tcr  2cl)rling. 

EXERCISES.  121. 

Have  you  already  dined  1  —  Not  yet.  —  At  what  o'clock  do  you  dine  1 
—  I  dine  at  six  o'clock.  —  At  whose  house  (£Bct  im'tn,  Lesson  XXVI.) 
do  you  dine  ]  —  I  dine  at  the  house  of  a  friend  of  mine.  —  With  whom 
(bet  tvcm)  did  you  dine  yesterday  1  —  I  dined  (()oOe  —  cjefpctf't  with  a  re- 
lation of  mine.  —  What  have  you  eaten  ?  —  WTe  have  eaten  good  bread, 
beef,  apples,  and  cakes.  —  What  have  you  drunk?  —  We  have  drunk 
good  wine,  good  beer,  and  good  cider.  —  Where  does  your  uncle  dine 
to-day  ?  —  He  dines  with  (bet)  us.  —  At  what  o'clock  does  your  father 
eat  supper  1  —  He  eats  supper  at  nine  o'clock.  —  Do  you  eat  supper  ear- 
ier  than  he?  —  T  eat  supper  later  than  he.  —  At  what  o'clock  do  you 
breakfast]  —  I  breakfast  at  ten  o'clock.  —  At  what  o'clock  did  you 
eat  supper  yesterday  ?  —  We  ate  (fjaOcn  —  gocjcfjcn)  supper  late.  — 
What  did  you  eat  ?  —  We  ate  only  a  little  meat  and  a  small  piece  of 
bread.  —  When  did  your  brother  sup  ?  —  He  supped  after  my  father. 


148 

—Where  are  you  going  to? — I  am  going  to  a  relation  of  mine,  in 
order  to  breakfast  with  him. — Do  you  dine  early  ?- — We  dine  late* 
— Art  thou  willing  to  hold  my  gloves  ? — I  am  willing  to  hold  them. 
—Is  he  willing  to  hold  my  cane  1 — He  is  willing  to  hold  it. — Who 
has  held  your  hat  ] — My  servant  has  held  it. — Will  you  try  to 
speak. — I  will  try. — Has  your  little  brother  ever  tried  to  do  exercises  ? 
— He  has  tried. — Have  you  ever  tried  to  make  a  hat? — I  have  never 
tried  to  make  one. — Have  we  tasted  that  beer? — We  have  not 
tasted  it  yet. — Which  wine  do  you  wish  to  taste  1 — I  wish  to  taste 
that  which  you  have  tasted. — Have  the  Poles  tasted  that  brandy  ] 
— They  have  tasted  it. — Have  they  drunk  much  of  it  (toioon)  1 — 
They  have  not  drunk  much  of  it. — Will  you  taste  this  tobacco  1 — 
I  have  tasted  it  already. — How  do  you  find  it  1 — I  find  it  good. — 
Why  do  you  not  taste  that  cider  ] — Because  I  am  not  thirsty. — 
Why  does  your  friend  not  taste  this  meat  1 — Because  he  is  not 
hungry. 

122. 

Whom  are  you  looking  for  ? — I  am  looking  for  the  man  who  has 
sold  a  horse  to  me.— Is  your  relation  looking  for  any  one  ? — He  is 
looking  for  an  acquaintance  of  his. — Are  we  looking  for  any  one  "\ 
— We  are  looking  for  a  neighbour  of  ours. — Whom  dost  thou  look 
for  ? — I  look  for  a  friend  of  ours. — Are  you  looking  for  a  servant  of 
mine  1 — No,  I  am  looking  for  one  of  mine. — Have  you  tried  to 
speak  to  your  uncle  ? — I  have  tried  to  speak  to  him. — Have  you 
tried  to  see  my  father  ? — I  have  tried  to  see  him. — Have  you  been 
able  (Less.  XLVII1.)  to  see  him  ] — I  have  not  been  able  to  see  him. 
— After  whom  do  you  inquire  ] — I  inquire  after  your  father. — After 
whom  dost  thou  inquire  1 — I  inquire  after  the  tailor. — Does  this 
man  inquire  after  any  one  ? — He  inquires  after  you. — Do  they  in- 
quire after  you  1 — They  do  inquire  after  me  1 — Do  they  inquire 
after  me  ? — They  do  not  inquire  after  you,  but  after  a  friend  of 
yours. — Do  you  inquire  after  the  physician? — I  do  inquire  after 
him. — What  do  you  ask  me  for  1 — I  ask  you  for  some  meat. — 
What  does  your  little  brother  ask  me  for  ] — He  asks  you  for  some 
wine  and  some  water. — Do  you  ask  me  for  a  sheet  of  paper  ? — I 
do  ask  you  for  one. — How  many  sheets  of  paper  does  your  friend 
ask  for] — He  asks  for  two. — Dost  thou  ask  me  for  the  little  book  ? 
— I  do  ask  you  for  it. — What  has  your  cousin  asked  for  7 — He  has 
asked  for  a  few  apples  and  a  small  piece  of  bread. — Has  he  not 
breakfasted  yet  1 — He  has  breakfasted,  but  he  is  still  hungry. — 
What  does  your  uncle  ask  for  1 — He  asks  for  a  glass  of  wine. — 
What  does  the  Pole  ask  for  ] — He  asks  for  a  small  glass  of  brandy. 
— Has  he  not  already  drunk  1 — He  has  already  drunk,  but  he  is 
still  thirsty. 


149 


FIFTY-FOURTH   LESSON.-bkr  uttb 
Ciction. 


I  see  the  man  who  has  my  mo-  3cb  fcljc  ten  Sftcmn,  rccldjct  twin 

ney.  (Skit  fycit. 

I  see  the  child  who  plays.  3d)  fcl)C  tciS  Jltnt,  nx(d)C$  fpictt. 

I  perceive  him  who  is  coming.     3d)  fccmerfc  ten,  nxld)cr  femwt. 
I  see  him  who  owes  me  money.    3$  fcbe  ten,  rvctd)cr  mir  ($>elt>  fd)u(= 

tig  ifh 

Do  you  perceive  the  soldiers   I*"***  ®J5  We.«^atc«'  ™(*c 
who  are  going  into  the  store-      g^Jf^JJS  ^ 

[     in  ta£  9}?aga^in  (bincin)  get)cn  ? 
I  do  perceive  those  who  are  go-  C  3d)  bcmcrfc  tic,  tt>e(d)C  ta^in  gcfjcn. 


c  Iji 


Ccmerfc  tie,  i 

2(ud). 

S3  c  m  e  r  f  e  n  —  t 

i  (Sic  3cmanten  bcmcrf t  ? 
Dcmcrft. 


ing  into  it. 

J./50. 

To  perceive — perceived. 

Have  you  perceived  any  one"? 

I  have  perceived  no  one.  3$  1 

The  soldier,  tcr  ( 

To  go  to  the  store-house.  {  SSSJI**  (»'«««)  **"• 

O&5.  JL.  Direction  towards  a  place  or  towards  a 
country  is  expressed  by  the  preposition  nad)  with  the 
dative. 


Willingly. 

To  like. 

To  like  to  see. 

To  like  to  study. 

To  like  wine. 
He  likes  a  large  hat. 
Do  you  like  to  see  my  brother  1 
I  do  like  to  see  him. 
I  like  to  do  it. 
Do  you  like  water  ? 
No,  I  like  wine. 

Fowl, 
the  fish, 
fish, 

the  pike, 
pike, 


©crn. 

t  ©ern  fjafcen*. 

f  ®ctn  fcfyen*. 

t  ®crn  ftufcitm 

j  ®ern  £Bctn  trtnfcn*. 

t  (£T  fat  gcrn  cincn  grcfcn  ,£wt. 

t  <Sc()cn  fete  mctncn  JBrutcr  gcrn  1 

t  3d)  fcbe  ibn  gcrn. 

{  3d)  tf)uc  c^  gcrn. 

t  Srtnfcn  @ic  gcrn  2Baffcr? 

t  S7cin/  id)  trtnfc  gcrn  2Bcin. 


(plur.)  ; 


(plur.). 


bee 


tcr 


*  Substantives  derived  from  foreign  languages  and  terminating  in :  flttr, 
ard),  at,  et,  ent,  tft,  it,  oft,  add  en  to  the  genitive  singular  and  to  all  the  other 
cases  singular  and  plural. 


150 

To  like  something.  f  (Sin  Jrcunb  i?on  etroaS  fctn*. 

I  like  fish.  f  3d)  bin  cm  $rcunb  sen  8ifd)cn' 

He  likes  fowl,  f  (£r  tjjt  gcrn  £nl)n. 

I  do  not  like  fish.  f  3d)  bin  6etn  Jrcunt)  fcon  gtfdjcn. 

By  heart.  U  it  £  tt?  c  n  b  1  3. 

To  /earn  £y  Ae«r£.  2Cu£n?cnt>ig  lernen. 

Do  your  scholars  like  to  learn  Sernen  Sfjrc  (£d)u(ct  gcrn 

by  heart?  big? 

They  do  not   like   learning  by  (£tc  icrncn  md)t  gcrn  cwSrcc 

heart. 

Have  you  learnt  your  exercises  $abcn  <Ste  Sbrc  TCufeafcen 

by  heart  1  t>ig  gotcrnt  ? 

We  have  learnt%them.  SBtr  Ijabcn  @ic  gdcrnt. 

Once  a  day.  (Stnmol  bc^  Soc^ 

Thrice  or  three  times  a  month.  SDrctnuil  t»c» 


Obs.  B.  The  genitive  is  used  in  reply  to  the  ques- 
tions: tt>amt?  when?  nne  oft?  how  often?  in  speak- 
ing of  something  that  takes  place  habitually  and  at  a 
determinate  period. 

Six  times  a  year.  ©cdjSmat  bc$  3or)rc$. 

How  many  times  a  day  does  he  9Stc   mctaial   (wtc   eft)   ipt   CC   t>e^ 

eat  ?  £09$  ? 

He  eats  three  times  a  day.  (Sc  tpt  fcvctmat  bc^  Sciq^. 

Do  you  eat  as  often  as  he!  (Sffcn  ©tc  fo  eft  n>tc  cr  ? 

When  do  you  go  out?  85$cmn  gcfjcn  ^tc  au^  ? 
We  go  out  early  in  the  morning.  SOSir  gctycn  t)c^  9^cr(jcn^  friif)  au^. 


T/*.  S05  c  n  n    (See    Rule   of    Syntax, 

Lesson  XLVIL). 
I  intend  paying  you  if  I  receive  3d)  bin  gcfonncn/  ©tc  ^u  fcejartfcn/ 

my  money.  wcnn  id)  nictn  ©clt)  bcfcminc. 

Do  you  intend  to  buy  wood  ?        ©ebcnEen  ©ic  ^0(5  ^u  fciufcn  ? 
I  do  intend  to  buy  some,  if  they  3cft  gcbcnfc  roclefocS  511  faufcnx  wcnn 
pay  me  what  they  owe  me.  man  nut  bejafylt,  wa<)  man  nut 

fcfyulbta,  iff. 

How  is  the  weather? 
What  kind  of  weather  is  it  ? 

It  is  fine  weather  at  present.          (5$  if!  jcgt  fd)6'nc^  SOBcttcr. 
How  was  the  weather  y  ester-  "j 

»"«  ffit  ^'^  lwt 


7  <v^  P  t»-  m>^f^  ;o-  «*  t 
5  ^^  fu'  ^CttCr  ^  **  ' 


kind  of  weather  was  it 
yesterday  ? 


C.  SBar,  was,  is  the  imperfect  of  the  auxilia- 
ry verb  fein*,  to  be;  we  shall  speak  of  it  hereafter, 
(See  Lesson  LVII.) 


1.51 


Was  it  fine  weather  yesterday  \ 
It  was  bad  weather  yesterday. 
It  was  fine  weather  this  morning, 

Is  it  warm! 
It  is  warm. 

Very. 

It  is  very  warm. 
It  is  cold. 
It  is  very  cold. 
It  is  neither  cold  nor  warm. 

Dark,  obscure, 
dusky,  gloomy, 
clear,  light, 

It  is  gloomy  in  your  shop. 

Is  it  gloomy  in  his  room  1 

It  is  gloomy  there. 

The  shop, 

moist,  humid,  damp, 

dry, 

Is  the  weather  damp  ? 
The  weather  is  not  damp. 
It  is  dry  weather. 
The  weather  is  too  dry. 
It  is  moonlight  (moonshine). 
We  have  too  much  sun. 
We  have  no  rain. 

The  moonlight,  moonshine, 

the  rain, 

the  sun, 

Of  what  do  you  speak  ? 
W^e  speak  of  the  weather. 

The  weather, 


SOSar  c$  ^cfkrn  fcrjoru'S  letter  ? 
(5$  war  Cjcftern  fcf)led)te$  2Bettcr. 
.  (£5  war  tivfcn  Bergen  fcfyoncS  2Bet- 

tor. 

Sft  c*  warm  \ 
<£s  ift  warm. 
©cfjr.   s 

(S3  ift  fcl)t  warm. 
Gt>  ift  !a(t. 
<g*  ift  fcfjr  fa(r. 
(§6  tft  w^fccr  fait  nocf)  warm. 

finite  ; 
tunfe!  ; 
fctt, 

@S  ij!  tunM  in  Sfjrem  Safcen. 
SB  c$  tmnfct  in  fcincm  Simmer  ? 
<£$  tft  tunfcl  fcartn.     (See  Obs.  A. 
and  C.  Lesson  XXIX.) 

fccr 


tnxfcn. 

Sft  c^  fcud^tcg  letter  T 
£)a^  SScttcr  ift  mdjt  feurf)t. 
^  ift  trccfcnc^  SScttcr. 
®a^  2Bcttcr  ift  gu  twtfcw. 
6^  ift  OXonbfdKfit. 
2Bir  ^t>cn  gu  t»tc( 
SDBtr  IjaOen  Ccincn 


tcr 

tie  (Senne  (a  feminine  noun). 

SOSct>cn  fpmfycn  @te  ? 

S53ir  fprcc^cn  t?om  (r>cn  km)  SEcttcr. 

tag  SQBetter. 


EXERCISES.    123. 

Do  you  perceive  the  man  who  is  coming  ? — I  do  not  perceive 
him. — Do  you  perceive  the  soldier's  child  ? — I  perceive  it. — What 
do  you  perceive  1 — I  perceive  a  great  mountain  and  a  small  house. 
— Do  you  not  perceive  the  wood  ] — I  perceive  it  also. — Dost  thou 
perceive  the  soldiers  who  are  going  to  the  market  1 — I  do  perceive 
them. — Do  you  perceive  the  men  who  are  going  into  the  garden  1 — 
I  do  not  perceive  those  who  are  going  into  the  garden,  but  those 
who  are  going  to  the  market.— Do  you  see  the  man  to  whom  I 
have  lent  money  ? — I  do  not  see  the  one  to  whom  you  have  lent, 
but  the  one  who  has  lent  you  some. — Dost  thou  see  the  children 
who  are  studying  ] — I  do  not  see  those  who  are  studying,  but  those 


152 


>  you  like  a  large  hat  1 — I  do  not  like  a  large  hat, 
large  umbrella. — What  do  you  li'ke  to  do  ? — I  like  to  write. — Do 
you  like  to  see  those  little  boys  ] — I  do  like  to  see  them. — Do  you 
like  beer  ? — I  like  it. — Does  your  brother  like  cider  ] — He  does  not 
like  it.— What  do  the  soldiers  like  I — They  like  wine  and  water. — 
Dost  thou  like  wine  or  water  ? — I  like  both  (Oetfci'S). — Do  these 
children  like  to  study  1 — They  like  to  study  and  to  play. — Do  you 
like  to  read  and  to  write  1 — I  like  feo  read  and  to  write. — How  many 
times  do  you  eat  a  day  ? — Four  times.. — How  often  do  your  children 
drink  a  day  T — They  drink  several  times  a  day, — Do  you  drink  as 
often  as  they  I — I  drink  ofteaer. — Do  you  often  go  to  the  theatre  ? 
— I  go  thither  sometimes. — How  often  do  you  go  thither  (in)  a 
month  ? — I  go  thither  but  once  a  month. — How  many  times  a  year 
does  your  cousin  go  to  the  ball  I — He  goes  thither  twiee  a  year. — 
Do  you  go  thither  as  often  as  he  1 — I  never  go  thither* — Does  your 
cook  often  go  to  the  market  I — He  goes  thither  every  morning. 

124. 

Do  you  often  go  to  my  uncle's  1 — I  go  to  him  six  times  a  year. — 
Do  you  like  fowl  ] — I  do  like  fowl,  but  I  do  not  like  fish. — What 
do  you  like  ? — I  like  a  piece  of  bread  and  a  glass  of  wine. — What 
fish  does  your  brother  like  1 — He  likes  pike. — Do  you  learn  by 
heart  1 — I  do  not  like  learning  by  heart. — Do  your  pupils  like  to 
learn  by  heart  I — They  like  to  study,  but  they  do  not  like  learning 
by  heart. — How  many  exercises  do  they  do  a  day  1 — They  only 
do  two,  but  they  do  them  well.— -Do  you  like  coffee  or  tea  1— — I  like 
both. — Do  you  read  the  letter  which  1  have  written  to  you  (Rule  of 
Syntax,  Lesson  XLYII.)  T — I  do  read  it. — Do  you  understand  it  ]-~ 
I  do  understand  it. — Do  you  understand  the  man  who  speaks  to  you  ? 
— I  do  not  understand  him  ? — Why  do  you  not  understand  him  1 — 1 
do  not  understand  him  because  he  speaks  too  badly. — Does  this  man 
know  German  1 — He  does  know  it,  but  I  do  not  know  it* — Why  do* 
you  not  learn  it  I — 1  have  no  time  to  learn  it. — Have  you  received 
a  letter  1 — I  have  received  one. — Will  you  answer  it. — I  am  going 
to  (3d)  nriK)  answer  it. — Whea  did  you  receive  it  ? — I  received  it  at 
ten  o'clock  In  the  morning. — Are  you  satisfied  with  it  1 — I  am  not 
dissatisfied  with  it. — What  does  your  friend  write  to  yo«  1 — He 
writes  tome  that  he  is  ill  (Rule  of  Syntax,  Lesson  XL  VII.). — Does- 
he  ask  you  for  anything  I — He  asks  me  for  money .• — Why  does  he 
ask  you  for  money .? — Because  he  wants  some. — What  do  you  ask 
me  for  ? — I  ask  you  for  the  money  which  you  owe  me. — Will  you 
wait  a  little  ? — I  cannot  wait. — Why  can  you  not  wait  1 — I  cannot 
wait  because  I  intend  to  depart  to-day. — At  what  o'clock  do  you  in- 
tend to  set  out  ? — I  intend  setting  out  at  five  o'clock  in  the  evening. 
— Do  you  go  to  Germany  ? — I  do  go  thither. — Are  you  not  going  to* 
Holland  T- — I  am  not  going  thither. — How  far  has  your  brother  gone  I 
— He  has  gone  as  far  as.  London* " 


153 


125. 

Do  you  intend  going  to  the  theatre  this  evening  1 — I  do  intend 
going  thither,  if  you  go. — Has  your  father  the  intention  to  buy 
that  horse  ] — He  has  the  intention  to  buy  it,  if  he  receives  his  money. 
— Has  your  cousin  the  intention  to  go  to  England. — He  has  the 
intention  to  go  thither,  if  they  pay  him  what  they  owe  him. — Do 
you  intend  going  to  the  ball  1 — I  do  intend  going  thither,  if  my  friend 
goes  ? — Does  your  brother  intend  to  study  German  1 — He  does  in- 
tend to  study  it,  if  he  finds  a  good  master. — How  is  the  weather  to- 
day]— It  is  very  fine  weather. — Was  it  fine  wreather  yesterday  ? — 
It  was  bad  weather  yesterday. — How  was  the  weather  this  morning? 
— It  was  bad  weather,  but  now  it  is  (tjl  c$)  fine  weather. — Is  it  warm  ] 
— It  is  very  warm. — Is  it  not  cold  ] — It  is  not  cold. — Is  it  warm  or 
cold  1 — It  is  neither  warm  nor  cold. — Did  you  go  to  the  country 
(Lesson  XXX.)  the  day  before  yesterday  1 — I  did  not  go  thither. 
— Why  did  you  not  go  thither  ? — I  did  not  go  thither,  because  it 
was  bad  weather. — Do  you  intend  going  into  the  country  to-morrow? 
— I  do  intend  going  thither,  if  the  weather  is  fine. 

126. 

Is  it  light  in  your  room  1 — It  is  not  light  in  it. — Do  you  wish  to 
work  in  mine  1 — I.  do  wish  to  work  in  it. — Is  it  light  there  1 — It  is 
very  light  there. — Can  you  work  in  your  small  room  (Rule  2,  Lesson 
LIII.)1 — I  cannot  work  there. — Why  can  you  not  work  there  1 — 
I  cannot  work  there,  because  it  is  too  dark. — Where  is  it  too  dark  ? 
— In  my  small  room. — Is  it  light  in  that  hole  1 — It  is  dark  there. — Is 
it  dry  in  the  street  (Lesson  XL VIII.)  ] — It  is  damp  there. — Is  the 
weather  damp  1 — The  weather  is  not  damp. — Is  the  weather  dry  1 — 
It  is  too  dry. — Is  it  moonlight  1 — It  is  not  (fcin)  moonlight,  it  is 
very  damp. — Why  is  the  weather  dry  ? — Because  we  have  too  much 
sun  and  no  rain. — When  do  you  go  into  the  country  1 — I  intend  go- 
ing thither  to-morrow,  if  the  weather  is  fine,  and  if  we  have  no 
rain. — Of  what  does  your  uncle  speak  1 — He  speaks  of  the  fine 
weather. — Do  you  speak  of  the  rain  1 — WTe  do  speak  of  it. — Of 
what  do  those  men  speak  1 — They  speak  of  fair  and  bad  weather. 
— Do  they  not  speak  of  the  wind  1 — They  do  also  speak  of  it  (aud) 
tcwen). — Dost  thou  speak  of  my  uncle  1 — I  do  not  speak  of  him. — 
Of  whom  dost  thou  speak  1 — I  speak  of  thee  and  thy  parents. — Do 
you  inquire  after  any  one  ? — I  inquire  after  your  uncle  (Lesson 
LIII.)  ;  is  he  at  home  ] — No,  he  is  at  his  best  friend's.  (See  Lesson 
XXXIX  and  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


154 

FIFTY-FIFTH  LESSON.— Jiinf  tmb  ffin%5fe 
Cation. 

OF    PASSIVE    VERBS. 

In  English,  the  past  participle  is  joined  to  the  verb 
to  be,  either  to  form  the  passive  voice,  or  as  an  ad- 
jective to  qualify  the  subject.  In  the  first  instance  it 
must  be  translated  by  tt>erbeit*,  and  in  the  second  by  feilt** 

In  German  we  distinguish,  as  in  Latin :  ba$  Qd\l$  if! 
gebaut,  domus  cedificata  est,  from  ba3  S^aii^  ft>irb  gebaiit, 
^domus  cedificatur ;  bie  SSriefe  fntb  gefdjrieben,  litterce  scrip- 
tee  sunt,  from  bie  SSriefe  werbett  gefrf)rieben,  litterce  scri- 
buntur. 

To  ascertain  whether  a  past  participle  stands  as  an 
adjective  or  not,  one  has  only  to  change  the  construc- 
tion into  the  active  voice ;  if  in  that  voice  the  tense 
is  the  same  as  in  the  passive,  the  participle  is  a  pas- 
sive participle,  and  the  auxiliary  to  be  must  be  trans- 
lated by  werbett*;  but  if  the  tense  is  not  the  same,  it 
then  stands  as  a  mere  adjective,  and  the  auxiliary  to 
be  must  be  translated  by  fein**  Ex.  3d)  tt>erbe  geltebf, 
I  am  loved,  is  in  the  same  tense,  when  I  say :  er  liebt 
mid),  he  loves  me  ;  but  ber  (Spiegel  tfl  jerbrodjen,  the 
looking-glass  is  broken,  is  not  in  the  same  tense, 
when  I  say :  er  fyat  ben  (Spiegel  jerbrodjen,  he  has  bro- 
ken the  looking-glass.  Here  jerbrccfyett  is  nothing  but 
an  adjective,  which  qualifies  the  subject  (Spiegel,  look- 
ing-glass. 

I  am  loved.  3d)  rucrbc  gcltcfct. 

Thou  art  guided.  HDu  nrirft  gcfcttct. 

He  is  praised.  (Sr  nnrfc  gefebt. 

We  are  heard.  83Mt  rocrben  < 

They  are  blamed.  Sic  rucrbcn  ; 

You  are  punished.  1 1^  ^r^    ^^ 

To  praise,  to  blame.  goften/  tat)ctn. 

By  me  — by  us.  SScn  nut  —  t>cn  un$. 

By  thee — by  you.  SScn  3)tr  —  t)cn  (Sudj  (S^ncn). 

By  him — by  them.  SSon  t()m  —  sen  tfmcn. 

I  am  loved  by  him.  3d)  ivcrbc  »on  ifem  gc(ic6t. 

Who  is  punished  ?  SScr  ivtrb  cjcftrnft  1 


155 

The  naughty  boy  is  punished.       3)et  unarttgc  Jtnafte  tmtb  Qcffraft. 
By  whom  is  he  punished  ?  83  en  it>cm  rcitb  ct  cpftraft  ? 

He  is  punished  by  his  father.        (£t  nntb  i?on  fctncm  SSatet  gcfttaft. 
"Which  man  is  praised,  and  which  SBctcbct  9)2ann  roitb  gelobt,  unb  rccfe 

is  blamed  ?  <ftet  rclrb  gctabelt  ? 

The  skilful  man  is  praised,  and  £)ct  §efd)tc!te  9)tantt  reitb  £e(oftt  Uttb 

the  awkward  blamed.  bet  ungcfd)tc!te  ^etabclt. 

Which  boys  are  rewarded,  and  SBckfye  Jlnabcn  rcetbcn  bcloljnt,  unb 

which  are  punished  ]  nxfcfye  nxtben  fcefttaft  ? 

Those  that  are  assiduous  are  re-  SDUicmgen,  rvckfte  flctptg  ftnb,  t 

warded,  and  those  that  are  idle       ben  Mofynt,  unb  btc/  rocld)C 

punished.  finb,  beftraft. 

We  are  loved  by  the  captain's  2Btr  n?erben  i?cn  ben  (Sofjnen 

sons,  you  are  despised  by  them.       ^Quptmonng  gcltebt;  Sty* 

ten  tfjncn  ijcroc&tct 
You  are  praised  by  our  brothers,  ©ic  wcrbcn  t?cn  unfcrn  93rdbcrn  ^ 

and  we  are  despised  by  them.      lobt,    unb  nrit  «>erbcn  »on  t^ncn 

t?erad)tct. 

Good  —  naughty.  2frtta  —  unortifl.     (See  Note  f,  Les- 

son XXXIX.) 

Skilful,  diligent  —  awkward.          Gkfcfyidft  —  ungefitcTt. 
Assiduous  —  idle.  Sfctfttg  —  tra'^e  (faul). 

Ignorant.  UntOtffcnb. 

The.  idler,  the  lazy  fellow,  bet 


To  reward  —  rewarded.  S3c(o^ncn  —  tctofint    (See  Obs.  A. 

Lesson  XLV). 

To  esteem.  2Cd)tcn,  fcfyffgcn. 

To  despise.  83ctad)ten. 

To  hate.  ^affcn. 

Is  your  book  torn  ?  3ft  3f)t  $BucIj  ^ctttffen  ? 

It  is  not  torn.  <g$  tft  ntcl)t  gcrrifien. 

Are  your  children  good  ?  <Stnb  Sfjrc  ^tnbct  attt^l 

They  are  very  good.  (Ste  ftnb  fcftc 

Is  the  enemy  beaten  I  Sft  bet  getnb 

He  is  beaten.  (5t  tft  Cjefcfy 

The  enemies  are  beaten.  *Dw  getnbe  finb 

These  children  are  loved,  because  2)icfe  ^tnbct  tvetben  gcticbt,  wctt  fie 
they  are  studious  and  good.          fleiOia  unb  nrtiq  finb.   (See  Note 

f,  Lesson  XXXIX.) 

EXERCISES.      127. 

Are  you  loved  by  your  uncle  1  —  I  am  loved  by  him.  —  Is  your 
brother  loved  by  him  1  —  He  is  loved  by  him.  —  By  whom  am  I 
loved  1  —  Thou  art  loved  by  thy  parents.  —  Are  we  loved  1  —  You  are 
loved.  —  By  whom  are  we  loved  1  —  You  are  loved  by  your  friends. 
—  Are  those  gentlemen  loved  1  —  They  are  loved.  —  By  whom  are 
they  loved  1  —  They  are  loved  by  us  and  by  their  good  friends.  — 
By  whom  is  the  blind  man  led  "?  —  He  is  led  by  me.  —  Where  do 


156 

you  lead  him  to  ?— I  lead  him  home, — -By  whom  are  we  blamed  T— * 
We  are  blamed  by  our  enemies. — Why  are  we  blamed  by  them  1 — * 
Because  they  do  not  love  us. — Are  yoa  punished  by  your  tutor  ?— - 
We  are  not  punished  by  him,  because  we  are  good  and  studious. — * 
Are  we  heard?— We  are  (t^,  Lesson  XLIII.). — By  whom  are  we 
heard  1 — We  are  heard  by  our  neighbours. — Is  the  master  heard  by 
his  pupils  ? — He  is  heard  by  them. — Which  children  are  praised  I 
— Those  that  are  good. — Which  are  punished? — Those  that  are 
idle  and  naughty. — 'Are  you  praised  or  blamed!  f— -We  a?e  neither 
praised  nor  blamed. — Is  our  friend  loved  by  his  masters  ?— He  is- 
loved  and  praised  by  them,  because  he  is  studious  and  good ;  bat 
his  brother  is  despised  by  his,  because  he  is  naughty  and  idle. — Is 
he  sometimes  punished? — He  is  (nnrfc  e$)  every  morning  and  every 
evening.— Are  you  sometimes  punished  ? — -I  am  (cf)  never  ;  I  am? 
loved  and  rewarded  by  my  good  masters. — Are  these  children 
never  punished  ? — They  are  (ce)  never,  because  they  are  studious 
and  good  ;  but  those  are  so  (cs)  very  often,  because  they  are  idle 
and  naughty. 

128. 

Who  is  praised  and  rewarded? — Skilful  people1  (Ceutc)  are 
praised,  esteemed,  and  rewarded,  but  the  ignorant  are  blamed  and 
despised. — Who  is  loved  and  who  is  hated  ? — He  who  is  studious- 
and  good  is  loved,  and  he  who  is  idle  and  naughty  is  hated. — • 
Must  one  be  good  in  order  to  be  loved  ? — One  must  be  so. — What 
must  one  do  in  order  to  be  loved  ? — -One  must  be  good  and  assidu- 
ous.— What  must  one  do  in  order  to  be  rewarded  ?— One  must  be 
skilful  and  study  much, — Why  are  those  children  loved  ? — They 
are  loved,  because  they  are  good. — Are  they  better  than  we  ? — They 
are  not  better,  but  more  studious  than  you. — Is  your  brother  as 
assiduous  as  mine  ? — He  is  as  assiduous  as  he  ;  but  your  brother 
is  better  than  mine. — Do  you  know  anything  new  ? — 1  do  not 
know  anything  new. — What  does  your  cousin  say  new  ? — He  says 
nothing  new. — Do  they  not  speak  of  war  ? — They  do  not  speak  of 
it.-— Of  what  (Obs.  C.  Lesson  LII.)  do  they  speak  T— -They  speak 
of  peace. — What  do  they  say  ?—  They  say  that  the  enemy  is  beaten. 
— Are  you  understood  by  your  pupils  ? — I  am  understood  by  them. 
— Dost  thou  often  receive  presents  ? — I  do  receive  some  if  I  am 
good. — Are  you  often  rewarded  ? — We  are  rewarded  if  we  study 
well,  and  if  we  are  diligent. — Has  your  master  the  intention  of 
rewarding  you? — He  has  the  intention  of  doing  so  if  we  study 
well. — What  does  he  intend  to  give  you  if  you  study  well  ? — He 
intends  giving  us  a  book. — Has  he  already  given  you  a  book  ?— 
He  has  already  given  us  one. 

129. 

Have  you  dined  already? — I  have  dined  already,  but  I  am  still 
hungry. — Has  your  little  brother  drunk  already  ? — He  has  drunk 
already,  but  he  is  still  thirsty. — What  must  we  do  in  order  to  be 


151 

skilful  1 — You  must  work  much.— Must  we  sit  still  in  order  to 
study  1 — You  must  listen  to  what  the  master  tells  you. — Do  you 
intend  to  eat  supper  to-day  1 — I  do  intend  to  dine  before  I  eat 
supper. — At  what  o'clock  do  you  dine  ] — I  dine  at  four  and  eat 
supper  at  nine  o'clock. — Have  you  seen  my  cousin  1 — I  have  seen 
him. — What  has  he  said  1 — He  has  said  that  he  does  not  wish  to 
see  you  (fcfycn  tt)i(l). — Why  does  he  not  wish  to  see  me  1 — He  does 
not  wish  to  see  you,  because  he  does  not  like  you. — Why  does  he 
not  like  me  ? — Because  you  are  naughty. — Will  you  give  me  a 
sheet  of  paper  1 — Why  (iibOju)  do  you  want  paper  ] — I  want  some  to 
write  a  letter.— To  whom  (Lesson  XXX.)  do  you  wish  to  write  I 
• — I  wish  to  write  to  the  man  by  whom  (t>cn  roelcfyem)  lam  loved. — 
After  whom  do  you  inquire  1 — I  inquire  after  no  one.  (See  end  of 
Lesson  XXXIV.) 


FIFTY-SIXTH   LESSON.  —  0*d)S   twi 


OP    IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 


These  verbs  having  no  determinate  subject,  are  only 
conjugated  in  the  third  person  singular,  by  means  of  the 
indefinite  pronoun  e3,  it.  Ex. 


To  rain — it  rams. 
To  snow — it  snows. 

Does  it  thunder  1 
It  does  thunder. 
Is  it  foggy  1 
Does  the  sun  shine  1 

The  sun  shines. 
It  thunders  loud. 

F°g£y» 

the  fog, 
hard,  violent, 

To  shine — shone. 
To  thunder. 

The  sun  does  not  shine. 

The  sun  is  in  my  eyes. 
The  face, 
the  thunder, 
the  snow, 
the  sunshine, 
the  parasol, 


JKcgnen  —  e  6  rccjnet. 
—  c  $  fcfynctt, 


cs? 
($*  fconncrt. 
3ft  eg  nebdtg  ? 
3ft  ^  <Senncnfd)em  ? 
(£$  tft  (£ennenfd)ctn. 
2Btr  f)«0cn  <gonncnfd)ein. 
(£$  bcnncct  fycftuj. 
ncfu'Itg  ; 
t>ct 


©  d)  e  t  n  c  n  *  —  9  c  f  d)  i  c  n  e  n* 
3D  o  n  n  c  r  n. 


£)ic  ©onne  fcfjcint  ntd)t. 
f  £>k  (Scnnc  fd)dnt  nuc  in$ 
l>ag  ©efidbt  ; 
bcr  Conner  ; 
t>cr 


158 

Does  it  lighten  1  ffiftgt  c$  1 

It  does  lighten.  (£$  bttfet. 

To  hail.  4^90(11,  fd)lopen. 

The  hail,  fccr  £ngc(. 

Tt  haik  5  ®*  *W(t* 

}  <£g  falept. 

It  rains  very  hard.  (§£  rcgnct  fcf)t  ftatf. 

It  lightens  much.  (£$  frlt£t  fefyr. 

Does  it  snow  1  ©d)nctt  eg  ? 

It  does  snow  much.  (£$  fdjnctt  fdjr* 

It  hails  much.  (5$  (jcigclt  fcfyr. 


.  .A.  There  are  some  impersonal  verbs,  which  re- 
late to  a  person  :  they  govern  the  dative  or  accusative, 
and  instead  of:  id)  bin  fywtgrig,  (Lesson  V.)  one  may 
say  :  e$  fyungert  mid),  I  am  hungry  :  for  the  verb  fywtgern/ 
to  be  hungry,  governs  the  accusative. 

To  be  thirsty.  £)  u  t  ft  C  n. 

To  be  sleepy.  ©  d)  I  a  f  c  r  n. 

Art  thou  sleepy  ?  ©dtfa'fcrt  c^t  5)td)  ? 

I  am  not  sleepy,  but  hungry.         (£$  fd)tafcrt  mtcl)  ntd)t;  abet  c£  l)uns 

gcrt  mtd). 

Is  your  brother  thirsty  ?  JDurftct  c^  3btcn  JBrubcr  ? 

He  is  thirsty.  &  burftct  if)m 

He  is  not  thirsty,  but  sleepy.       (£S  burftct  tftn  ntdjt  ;  abet  c^>  fd)(cifcrt 


B.  The  case  of  the  verb  may  be  placed  before 
the  impersonal  verb,  but  then  the  indefinite  pronoun  e$ 
must  be  suppressed.  For  instance,  instead  of  :  e$  fyuttgert 
mid),  one  may  say  :  nttd)  fywtgert,  I  am  hungry  ;  but  if 
the  sentence  is  interrogative,  the  indefinite  pronoun  e$ 
must  not  be  omitted. 

Are  you  sleepy  1  ©d)td'fcrt  c$  ©tc  ? 

We  a,  sleepy.  {ZflS^ 

Are  those  men  hungry  ?  ^»uncjcrt  c^  btcfc  SWfinncr  ? 

They  are  hungry.  [ftttgf1 

Who  is  thirsty  1  SBcn  burftct  c^  ? 

C  @€  burftct  mid)  fcr}r. 

I  am  very  thirsty.  1  smicf,  tur(}ct  fcf)t. 

a  c^utt^crtt,  in  the  signification  of  to  fast,  is  neuter,  and  follows  the  conju- 
gation of  neuter  verbs. 


159 

x 

Has  your  cousin  been  thirsty  "?     £cit  eg  S&ren  23ettcr  gcfcurftct? 
He  has  been  thirsty. 


Where  has  he  gone  to  *  £Sef)tn  tft  cr  Qcrctf't  ? 

He  has  gone  to  Vienna.  C?r  tft  nad)  SQ&Kn""gcrci|'t. 

Is  it  good  travelling  1  3ft  c$  gut  rctfcn  ? 

It  is  bad  travelling.  (££  tft  fd)tcd)t  rctfcn. 

In  the  winter.  %n\  SBintcr. 

In  the  summer.  £stn  ©cnmicr. 

Is  it  good  travelling  in  the  win-  3ft  C$  gut  rctfcn  tm 

ter1? 
It  is  bad  travelling  in  the  winter.  <£$  tft  jcf)(cd)t  rctfcn  tm  SBinter. 

The  spring,  tec  griifjltng  ; 

the  autumn,  tcr  £crt>ft. 

To  ride  in  a  carriage.  Jal)rcn*     (in    this     signification 

takes  fcin*  for  its  auxiliary11). 
Ridden  in  a  carriage.  ©cfaf)ren. 

To  ride  on  horseback.  SKcttcn*  (takes  fcin*  for  its  auxi- 

liary). 

Ridden  on  horseback.  ©crtttcn. 

To  go  on  foot.  3u  Jfuflc  gcficn*. 

Do  you  like  to  go  on  horseback  ?  f  SKcttcn  ©ic  gcrn  ? 
I  like  to  ride  in  a  carriage.  f  3cb  fcifjrc  Qorn. 

Where  is  the  bailiflf  gone  to  (on  2Bo  tft  fcct  TCmtmann  ^tngcrittcn  ? 

horseback)  ? 
He  is  gone  (on  horseback)  to  the  (Sr  tft  in  ten  SBalb  gcrtttcn. 

forest. 
When  does  your  cousin  go  to  SBann  acf)t  il)r  SScttcr  nadj  23crlin  ? 

Berlin  ? 

He  goes  thither  this  winter.         (£t  gcfjt  bicfcn  SStntcr  ba^tn. 
I  intend  going  this   spring  to  3d)   tun  gcfenncn,  fctcfcn  grii!}(incj 

Dresden.  nacb  Srcsbcn  gu  rctfcn. 

Where  is  your  uncle  1  £Se  tft  Sfa  Df)cim  ? 

He  is  in  Berlin.  (£t  tft  in  SBcrttn. 

He  is  at  Berlin.  (5r  ift  su  SScrlin. 


The  preposition  jtt  or  in  is  used  to  express 
rest  in  a  place  or  country,  and  the  preposition  rtcicfy 
motion  or  direction  towards  a  place  or  country.  3^iac^ 
is  particularly  used  before  names  of  towns  or  coun- 
tries (Lesson  LIV.)  ;  but  the  preposition  jtt  must  be 
made  use  of  to  express  motion  towards  a  person. 
(Lesson  XXVI.) 

p  When  the  verb  fafjven*  signifies  to  move  anything  by  a  carriage   it  is  ac- 
tive and  takes  fyafcett*  for  its  auxiliary. 


160 


The  two  prepositions  ju  and  tit  answer  the  question 
tt)0  ?  and  ttacf)  the  question  toofyin  ?  as  is  seen  by  the 
above  examples. 

Is  it  good  living  in  Paris  1         7  o-i.   *  A  *  r,<  M  ;,» 
Is  the  living  good  in  Paris  ?       j  ^  <*  3Ut  Ickn  w 


sfl 


The  living  is  dear  there.  (££  tft  tl)cuet  U'Oen  t>a. 

Is  it  windy  ?     Does   the  wind  Sft  c$  rotnfctc}  ? 

blow] 

It  is  windy  ?    The  wind  blows.  (5$  ift  roinbtcj,  t>ct  2Btnt>  cjefyt. 


Is  it  stormv  t  5  3ft  <6  P«rmtf*  1 

Sfi  59  fUtmifclM  Better  T 


It  is  not  stormv  \  ®*  ijl  nid)t 

}  ^)a^  SBcttet  tft  nicl)t  (Ifirmtf*. 

Strong,  stormy,  dear,  windy.        (Star6  ;  fturmtfc^  ;  tftcucr  ', 


EXERCISES.    130. 

Do  you  like  to  ride  in  a  carriage  1—  I  like  to  ride  on  horseback.  — 
Has  your  cousin  ever  gone  on  horseback  1  —  He  has  never  gone  on 
horseback.  —  Did  you  go  on  horseback  the  day  before  yesterday  1  — 
I  went  on  horseback  to-day.  —  Where  did  you  go  to  (on  horseback)  ? 

—  I  went  into  the  country.  —  Does  your  brother  ride  on  horseback  as 
often  as  you  1  —  He  rides  on  horseback  oftener  than  I.  —  Hast  thou 
sometimes  ridden  on  horseback?  —  I  have  never  ridden  on  horse- 
back. —  Wilt  thou  go  (in  a  carriage)  to-day  into  the  country  1  —  I  will 
go   thither  (in  a  carriage).  —  Do  you  like  travelling  1  —  I  do  like 
travelling.  —  Do  you  like  travelling  in  the  winter]  —  I  do  not  like 
travelling  in  the  winter,  I  like  travelling  in  the  spring  and  in  autumn. 

—  Is  it  good  travelling  in  the  spring  1  —  It  is  good  travelling  in  the 
spring  and  in  the  autumn,  but  it  is  bad  travelling  in  the  summer 
and  in  the  winter.  —  Have  you  sometimes  travelled  in  the  winter  1 

—  I  have  often  travelled  in  the  winter  and  in  the  summer.  —  Does 
your  brother  travel  often  1  —  He  travels  no  longer,  he  formerly  travel- 
led much.  —  When  do  you  like  to  ride  on  horseback  1  —  I  like  riding 
on  horseback  in  the  morning  after  breakfast.  —  Is  it  good   travelling 
in  this  country  ?  —  It  is  good  travelling  here  (t>a).  —  Have  you  ever 
gone  to  Vienna  1  —  I   have   never  gone   thither.  —  Where    is  your 
brother  gone  to  ?  —  He  is  gone  to  London.  —  Does  he  sometimes  go 
to  Berlin  1  —  He  went  thither  formerly.  —  What  does  he  say  of  (port) 
that  country  1  —  He  says  that  it  is  good  travelling  in  Germany  1  — 
Have  you  been  at  Dresden?  —  I  have  been'  there.  —  Have  you  stayed 
there  long  ?  —  I  have  stayed  there  two  years.  —  What  do  you  say  of 


161 

the  (t>on  t»cn)  people  of  that  country  1 — I  say  that  they  are  good  people 
(i'S  flute  Ccutc  fint>). — Is  your  brother  at  Dresden  ? — No,  Sir,  he  is 
at  Vienna  ? — Is  the  living  good  at  Vienna  1 — The  living  is  good 
there. 

131. 

Have  you  been  in  London  ? — I  have  been  there. — Is  the  living 
good  there  ? — The  living  is  good  there,  but  dear. — Is  it  dear  living 
in  Paris  1 — It  is  good  living  there  and  not  dear. — At  whose  house 
have  you  been  this  morning  ? — I  have  been  at  my  uncle's. — Where 
are  you  going  to  now  ? — I  am  going  to  my  brother's. — Is  your  brother 
at  home  ? — I  do  not  know. — Have  you  already  been  at  the  English 
captain's  1 — I  have  not  been  there  yet. — When  do  you  intend  going 
thither  ? — I  intend  going  thither  this  evening. — How  often  has  your 
brother  been  in  London  1 — He  has  been  there  thrice. — Do  you  like 
travelling  in  France  ? — I  like  travelling  there,  because  one  finds 
good  people  there. — Does  your  friend  like  travelling  in  Holland  ? 
— He  does  not  like  travelling  there,  because  the  living  is  bad  there. 
—Do  you  like  travelling  in  Italy  1 — I  do  like  travelling  there,  be- 
cause the  living  is  good  there,  and  one  finds  good  people  there  ;  but 
the  roads  are  not  very  good  there. — Do  the  English  like  to  travel  in 
Spain? — They  like  to  travel  there  ;  but  they  find  the  roads  there  too 
bad. — How  is  the  weather ! — The  weather  is  very  bad. — Is  it  windy  ? 
— It  is  very  windy. — Was  it  stormy  yesterday  ? — It  was  stormy. — 
Did  you  go  into  the  country  1 — I  did  not  go  thither,  because  it  was 
stormy. — Do  you  go  to  the  market  this  morning  ? — I  do  go  thither, 
if  it  is  not  stormy. — Do  you  intend  going  to  Germany  this  year  ? — 
I  do  intend  going  thither,  if  the  weather  is  not  too  bad. — Do  you  in- 
tend breakfasting  with  me  this  morning  1 — I  intend  breakfasting 
with  you,  if  I  am  hungry. 

132. 

Does  your  uncle  intend  dining  with  us  to-day? — He  does  intend 
dining  with  you,  if  he  is  hungry. — Does  the  Pole  intend  drinking 
some  of  (r>cn)  this  wine  ? — He  does  intend  drinking  some  of  it  (t>cu 
t»on),  if  he  is  thirsty. — Do  you  like  to  go  on  foot  ? — 1  do  not  like  to 
go  on  foot,  but  I  like  going  in  a  carriage  when  (roenn)  I  am  travel- 
ling.— Will  you  go  on  foot  1 — I  cannot  go  on  foot,  because  I  am  too 
tired. — Do  you  go  to  Italy  on  foot  ? — I  do  not  go  on  foot,  because 
the  roads  are  there  too  bad. — Are  the  roads  there  as  bad  in  the  summer 
as  in  the  winter  1 — They  are  not  so  good  in  the  winter  as  in  the 
summer. 

133. 

Are  you  going  out  to-day  ? — I  am  not  going  out  when  it  is  raining. 
— Did  it  rain  yesterday  1 — It  did  not  rain. — Has  it  snowed  ? — It  has 
snowed. — Why  do  you  not  go  to  the  market  ? — I  do  not  go  thither, 
because  it  snows. — Do  you  wish  to  have  an  umbrella  ? — If  you  have 
one. — WTill  you  lend  me  an  umbrella? — I  will  lend  you  one. — What 
sort  of  weather  is  it  ? — It  thunders  and  lightens — Does  the  sun 
shine  ? — The  sun  does  not  shine,  it  is  foggy. — Do  you  hear  the 


162 

thunder  ? — I  do  hear  it. — How  long  have  you  heard  the  thunder. — 
I  have  heard  it  till  four  o'clock  in  the  morning. — Is  it  fine  weather  1 
— The  wind  blows  hard  and  it  thunders  much. — Does  it  rain  1 — It 
does  rain  very  fast  (ftarf). — Do  you  not  go  into  the  country  1 — How 
can  I  go  into  the  country,  do  you  not  see  how  (rate)  it  lightens  1 — 
Does  it  snow  1 — It  does  not  snow,  but  it  hails. — Does  it  hail  ? — 
It  does  not  hail,  but  thunders  very  much. — Have  you  a  parasol  1 — 
I  have  one. — Will  you  lend  it  me  ? — I  will  lend  it  you. — Have  we 
sunshine  ? — We  have  much  sunshine,  the  sun  is  in  my  eyes. — Is  it 
fine  weather  ? — It  is  very  bad  weather,  it  is  dark  ;  we  have  no  sun- 
shine. 

134. 

Are  you  thirsty  ? — I  am  not  thirsty,  but  very  hungry. — Is  your 
servant  sleepy? — He  is  sleepy. — Is  he  hungry  ? — He  is  hungry. — 
Why  does  he  not  eat  ? — Because  he  has  nothing  to  eat. — Are  your 
children  hungry  1 — They  are  very  hungry,  but  they  have  nothing 
to  eat. — Have  they  anything  to  drink? — They  have  nothing  to 
drink. — Why  do  you  not  eat? — I  do  not  eat  when  (rocnn)  I  am  not 
hungry. — Why  does  the  Russian  not  drink1? — He  does  not  drink 
when  he  is  not  thirsty. — Did  your  brother  eat  anything  yesterday 
evening  1 — He  ate  a  piece  of  beef,  a  small  piece  of  fowl,  and  a 
piece  of  bread. — Did  he  not  drink  ? — He  also  drank. — What  did 
he  drink  1 — He  drank  a  large  glass  of  water,  and  a  small  glass  of 
wine. — How  long  did  you  stay  at  his  house  (fcci  ifjm)  ? — I  stayed 
there  till  midnight. — Have  you  asked  him  for  anything  ? — I  have 
asked  him  for  nothing. — Has  he  given  you  anything  1 — He  has 
given  me  nothing. — Of  whom  have  you  spoken  1 — We  have  spoken 
of  you. — Have  you  praised  me  ? — We  have  not  praised  you;  we 
have  blamed  you. — Why  have  you  blamed  me  1 — Because  you  do 
not  study  well. — Of  what  has  your  brother  spoken? — He  has 
spoken  of  his  books,  his  houses,  and  his  gardens. — Who  is  hungry  1 
• — My  friend's  little  boy  is  hungry. — Who  has  drunk  my  wine  ? — 
No  one  has  drunk  it. — Hast  thou  already  been  in  my  room? — I 
have  already  been  there. — How  dost  thou  find  my  room  ? — I  find  it 
beautiful. — Are  you  able  to  work  there  ? — I  am  not  able  to  work 
there,  because  it  is  too  dark.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 

s/  


FIFTY-SEVENTH  LESSON.—  giebett  nn&  ffttt$ij0te 


OF  THE  IMPERFECT  AND  PERFECT  TENSES. 

In  English  there  are  three  imperfect  tenses,  viz  :  I 
praised,  did  praise,  and  was  praising.  These  three 
are  expressed  in  German  by  one  imperfect  irf)  lobte.  It 
is  used  to  express  a  past  action  or  event  in  reference 


163 

to  another,  which  was  either  simultaneous  with  or  an- 
tecedent to  it.  It  is  the  historical  tense  of  the  Germans, 
and  is  always  employed  in  narration,  particularly 
when  the  narrator  was  an  eye-witness  of  the  action  or 
event.  The  perfect  tense,  on  the  contrary,  expresses 
an  action  or  event,  as  perfectly  past  and  ended,  with- 
out any  reference  to  another  event,  and  when  the 
narrator  was  not  an  eye-witness.  In  this  latter  in- 
stance the  imperfect  also  may  be  used,  if  the  narrator 
accompanies  his  narrative  with  any  phrase  denoting 
that  he  does  not  speak  in  his  own  name,  as  meat  fagt  or 
fagt  man,  they  say,  it  is  said,  &c. 

The  perfect  tense  is  compounded  of  the  present  of 
the  auxiliary,  and  the  past  participle,  as  in  English. 
(See  Lessons  XLL,  XLII.  &c.) 

I  was — he  was.  3d)  n?at  —  ct  roar. 

We  were — they  were.  S£tt  nxitcn  —  fie  rcatctt. 

Thou  wast — you  were.  2)u  ivarft — 3fa  roatct  (6'te  tvaren). 

Were  you  content  ?  S&arcn  <Stc  gufrtcben  ? 

I  was  very  content.  3d)  roar  fcfa  gufrtebcn. 

Was  the  wine  good  ?  £Bcit  fcer  2Bcin  QUt  1 

It  was  very  good.  (£r  root  fcfa  gut. 

Were  you  there  yesterday  ?  <£wt>  (Sic  gcjfcrn  bo  0/roefcn  ? 

I  was  there  to-day.  3d)  bin  f)cute  bo  gcrucfcn. 
WThere  was  he  the  day  before  ££o  tft  cr  DOV^cftcrn  gcwefcn  ? 

yesterday  1 

Were  you  already  in  Paris  ?  (g'tnb  <Ste  fcfton  in  ^)ari^  gewcfcn  1 

I  was  there  twice  already  ?  3d)  bin  fd)cn  groctmol  ba  gcrocfcn* 

Obedient — disobedient.  ©cfjorfam  — uncjcfjcrfam. 

Negligent.  '  9£ad)fo'ffig. 

Obs.  A.  The  imperfect  of  regular  verbs  is  formed 
from  the  infinitive  by  changing  en  into  t,  and  adding 
the  proper  termination  to  each  person,  viz.  e,  to  the 
first  and  third  persons  singular,  en,  to  the  first  and  third 
persons  plural,  e(l,  to  the  second  person  singular,  and 
ct,  to  the  second  person  plural.  Ex. 

( loved>  (  loved'  )  CVA  ficttc— er 

I      |  did  love,          He]  did  love, 

(  was  loving.  (  was  loving. 

( loved'  \  loved' 

We    ]  did  love,      They]  did  love, 

(  were-  loving.          (  were  loving. 


164 

(  lovedst,  C  loved,  )  £u    [tebteft— 

Thou  <  didst  love,     You  <  did  love,         >  3br  tiebtet(£ie 
(  wast  loving.          (  were  loving.  )  liebten)  » 

Obs.  B.  The  consonant  t  of  the  imperfect  is  pre- 
ceded by  e,  if  the  pronunciation  requires  it,  which  is 
the  case  in  all  verbs,  the  root  of  which  ends  in  b,  t,  tl), 
or  (I,  or  in  several  consonants  united.  (See  Obs.  A. 
Lesson  XXXIV.  and  Lesson  XLI.)  Ex. 


[was  working,      [was  working.  J 


We  k.  They 

[were  working.    [were  working.  j 

(workedst,  f  worked,  1  Sit  arbetteteft—  - 

didst  work,  Youi  did  work,  r  3t)i*    arbeitetet 

wast  working,    [were  working,  j  (Siearbciteten)* 

Obs.  C.  In  all  German  verbs,  whether  regular  or 
irregular,  the  third  person  singular  of  the  imperfect 
tense  is  the  same  as  the  first  person  ;  and  the  third 
person  plural  is  the  same  as  the  first  in  all  the  tenses. 

I  had  —  he  had.  3cf)  Ijflttc  —  ct  F)atte. 

We  had  —  they  had.  Sffitt  fatten  —  fie  fatten. 

Thou  hadst  —  you  had.  £)u  fyatteft  —  Sfa  (jattctCSic  fatten). 

Had  you  money  ?  fatten  Sic  ®ctt)  ? 

I  had  some.  3cf)  fattc  melc^e^. 

Had  your  brother  books  1  £attc  Sfjt  iBrubcr  23iid)cr  ? 

He  had  some.  (5r  fattc  roclcl)?. 

What  had  we  1  SBaS  fatten  n?ir  ? 

What  sort  of  weather  was  it  yes-  ££a$  fiir  ^Better  war  e$  ^cftcrn  ? 

terday  ? 

It  was  fine  weather.  (5$  war  fdfoo'neS  ^Better. 

Had  you  a  wish  to  buy  a  horse  ?  gotten  ©tc  Suft  etn   5)fcrb  su  fou? 

'  fen  ? 
I  had  a  wish  to  buy  one,  but  I  3d)  fatte  Cuft  cin^  $u  faufen,  atec 

had  no  money.  tcf)  fattc  fetn  ®ctt>. 

Did  your  cousin  intend   to  learn  SBcit  Sfa  SScttet  gcfonncn  fccutfd)  5U 

German  ]  (ernen  ? 

He  did  intend  to  learn  it,  but  he  (§r  roar  gefonnen  c^  ^u  ternen/  afcec 

had  no  master.  cr  fatte  fcincn  Scorer. 


165 

EXERCISES.    135. 

Were  you  at  home  this  morning  1 — I  was  not  at  home. — Where 
were  you  7 — I  was  at  the  market. — Where  were  you  yesterday  1 — • 
I  was  at  the  theatre. — Wast  thou  as  assiduous  as  thy  brother  7 — 
I  was  as  assiduous  as  he,  but  he  was  more  clever  than  I. — Where 
have  you  been  7 — 1  have  been  at  the  English  physician's. — WTas 
he  at  home  ? — He  was  not  at  home.- — Where  was  he  7 — He  was  at 
the  ball. — Have  you  been  at  the  Spanish  cook's  1 — I  have  been  at 
his  house. — Has  he  already  bought  his  meat  1 — He  has  already 
bought  it. — Have  you  given  the  book  to  my  brother  1 — I  have  given 
it  to  him. — Hast  thou  given  my  books  to  my  pupils? — I  have 
given  them  to  them. — Were  they  satisfied  with  them  (fcamtt)  1 — 
They  were  very  well  (fcfjr)  satisfied  with  them. — Had  your  cousin  a 
wish  to  learn  German  7 — He  had  a  wish  to  learn  it. — Has  he 
learnt  it? — He  has  not  learnt  it. — Why  has  he  not  learnt  it? — 
Because  he  had  not  courage  enough. — Have  you  been  at  my 
father's  1 — I  have  been  there  (bei  tfym). — Have  you  spoken  to  him  7 
— I  have  spoken  to  him. — Has  the  shoemaker  already  brought  you 
the  boots  7 — He  has  already  brought  them  to  me. — Have  you  paid 
him  (for)  them  1 — I  have  not  paid  him  (for)  them  yet. — Have  you 
ever  been  in  London  I — I  have  been  there  several  times. — What 
did  you  do  there  7 — I  learnt  English  there. — Do  you  intend  going 
thither  once  more  1 — I  intend  going  thither  twice  more. — Is  the 
living  good  there  1 — The  living  is  good  there,  but  dear. — Was  your 
master  satisfied  with  his  pupil  7 — He  was  satisfied  with  him. — 
Was  your  brother  satisfied  with  my  children  7 — He  was  very  well 
(|\'f)r)  satisfied  with  them. — Was  the  tutor  satisfied  with  this  little 
boy  7 — He  was  not  satisfied  with  him. — Why  was  he  not  satisfied 
with  him  1 — Because  that  little  boy  was  very  negligent. 

136. 

Were  the  children  of  the  poor  as  clever  as  those  of  the  rich  ? — 
They  were  more  clever,  because  they  worked  harder  (mefjr). — Did 
you  love  your  tutor  1 — I  did  love  him,  because  he  loved  me. — Did 
he  give  you  anything  1 — He  gave  me  a  good  book,  because  he  was 
satisfied  with  me. — Whom  do  you  love  1 — I  love  my  parents  and 
my  preceptors. — Do  your  tutors  love  you  1 — They  do  love  me, 
because  I  am  assiduous  and  obedient. — Did  this  man  love  his 
parents! — He  did  love  them. — Did  his  parents  love  him  1 — They 
did  love  him,  because  he  was  never  disobedient. — How  long 
did  you  work  yesterday  evening  7 — I  worked  till  ten  o'clock. 
— Did  your  cousin  also  work  1  —  He  did  also  work.  —  When 
didst  thou  see  my  uncle]  —  I  saw  him  this  morning.  —  Had 
he  much  money  1 — He  had  "much. — Had  your  parents  many 
friends  7 — They  had  many. — Have  they  still  some  ? — They  have 
still  several. — Had  you  any  friends  7 — 1  had  some,  because  I  had 
money. — Have  you  still  some  ? — I  have  no  longer  any,  because  I 
have  no  more  money. — Where  was  your  brother  ? — He  was  in  the 
garden  7 — Where  were  his  servants  7 — They  were  in  the  house. — 


106 

Where  were  we  1 — We  were  in  a  good  country  and  with  (fret) 
good  people. — Where  were  our  friends  1 — They  were  on  (hoard) 
the  ships  of  the  English. — Where  were  the  Russians ? — They 
were  in  their  carriages. — Were  the  peasants  in  the  fields  1 — They 
were  there. — Were  the  bailiffs  in  the  woods  1 — They  were  there. — 
Who  was  in  the  storehouses  ? — The  merchants  were  there. 

137. 

What  sort  of  weather  was  it  1 — It  was  very  bad  weather. — Was 
it  wind y  1 — It  was  windy  and  very  cold. — Was  it  foggy  1 — It  was 
foggy. — Was  it  fine  weather  1 — It  was  fine  weather,  hut  too  warm. 
— What  sort  of  weather  was  it  the  day  before  yesterday  ] — It  was 
very  dark  and  very  cold. — Is  it  fine  weather  now] — It  is  neither 
fine  nor  bad  weather. — Is  it  too  warm  1 — It  is  neither  too  warm 
nor  too  cold. — Was  it  stormy  yesterday1? — It  was  very  stormy. — 
Was  it  dry  weather] — The  weather  was  too  dry  ;  but  to-day  it  is 
too  damp. — Did  you  go  to  the  ball  yesterday  evening] — I  did  not 
go,  because  the  weather  was  bad. — Had  you  the  intention  to  tear 
my  books'! — I  had  n.ot  the  intention  to  tear,  but  to  burn  them. 
(See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


FIFTY-EIGHTH   LESSON.—  &d)t  untr 
Cation. 

f  spoke,  fspoke, 

I       did     speak,    He    did     speak, 

I  was  speaking.      I  was   speaking. 

fspoke,  f  spoke,  1  5Qtr  fpracfyett 

We  \  did  speak,  They  1  did  speak,  —  jle  fpracfyem 

I  were  speaking.    I  were  speaking.  J  o&s.c.Less.LVii. 

f  spokest,  fspoke,  1  £it  fpracfyft— 

Thou  -(  didst  speak,  You-^  did  speak,  l^br 

I  wast  speaking,    [were  speaking.  J  (©te 


Obs.  In  irregular  verbs  the  imperfect  of  the  indica- 
tive is  formed  by  changing  the  vowels  :  a,  et,  i,  0,  it, 
and  adding  the  termination  belonging  to  each  person. 
Hence  in  the  irregular  verbs  we  shall  mark  only  the 
change  of  that  vowel,  together  with  the  termination  of 
the  first  person,  in  order  to  enable  learners  to  know 

a  Learners  ought  now  to  add  to  their  list  of  verbs  the  imperfect  of  all  ir- 
regular verbs  which  they  have  been  using  hitherto,  or  will  have  to  use  here- 
after. 


167 

the  imperfect  tense.  Examples :  the  verb  fprecfjett 
above  changes  in  the  imperfect  the  radical  vowel  e  into 
a ;  Metbeit,  to  remain,  changes  it  into  ie,  thus  :  id)  Wieb, 
I  remained ;  gefyett,  to  go,  into  t,  thus :  id)  ging,  I  went ; 
gtefyen,  to  draw,  into  o,  thus :  id)  jog,  I  drew ;  fd)(agen/ 
to  beat,  into  it,  thus :  id)  fd)Iitg,  I  smote. 

Compound  verbs  follow  in  general  the  conjugation  of 
simple  verbs. 

At  first  (in  the  beginning).  (Srjt,  $uerft  (cmfcm$$). 

Afterwards.  £ernad)  or  nadjfycr. 

Hereupon,  upon  this.  £tctauf* 

DCP  Whenever  a  sentence  begins  with  any  other 
word  than  the  subject,  its  order  is  inverted,  and  the 
subject  stands  after  the  verb  in  simple,  and  after  the 
auxiliary  in  compound  tenses. b 

At  first  he  "said  yes,  afterwards  (Svft  fagtc  ct  {a,  fycrnad)  ttdn. 

no. 
At  first  he  worked,  and  after-  (Srft  atkitetc,  unt>  rjernacr;  fpicftc  c  r. 

wards  he  played. 

I  do  not  go  out  to-day.  ^cutc  (jcfte  tct)  md)t  cwS. 

Now  you  must  work.  £te(?t  mujjcn  @  t  c  cirbcttcn. 

My  father  set  out  yesterday.         ©cftcrn  ift    me  t  n    %$  a  t  c  r    atyt* 

tctf't. 
Here  lies  your  book  and  there  $tct  ^^f-  3^  JBucr)  tinb  fca  S^ 

your  paper.  Copter. 

He  came  afterwards.  ©r  ift  rjctnacl)  (nad^^cr)  gcfcmmcn. 

Upon  this  he  said.  £tcrcuif  fagtc  c  r. 

A$  soon  as.  ©  0 1>  a  ( Dx  f  o  0  a  1 1>  a  ( ^. 

I  drink  as  soon  as  I  have  eaten.    £$c!)  trtnfc,  fcOalt)  tcr)  Qcgeffcn  r;ci6c» 
As  soon  as  I  have  taken  off  my  (Cobalt)   id)   mcinc  £5d)uf)e   au^qqc^ 
shoes  I  take  off  my  stockings.      gen  IjaOc/gic^c  tcl)  mcinc  (Strtiinpfc 

au^.c 
What  do  you  do  after  supper?      2BaS  tfyun  <Ste  nacr)  tern  ?(0cnt)cf? 

fen? 

To  sleep — slept.  <Scf)lafcn  —  cjcfc^tofcn.     Im- 

perfect fcfytief. 

I  sleep,  thou  sleepest,  he  sleeps.  3d)  [c^taf^  t>u  fcf)(afft,  cr  fc^taft. 

b  From  this  rule  must  be  excepted  the  conjunctions  which  serve  to  unite 
sentences  (See  Lesson  XLVIL) ;  they  leave  the  subject  in  its  place  and  throw 
the  verb  to  the  end  of  the  sentence.  " 

c  See  06*.  C.  Lesson  XXXI V. 


168 


Does  your  father  still  sleep  1 
He  does  still  sleep. 

To  live. 

Is  your  relation  still  alive  1 
He  is  no  longer  alive  (he  is  dead). 

Without. 

Without  money. 
Without  speaking. 
Without  saying  anything. 

To  go  away — gone  away. 

He  went  away  without  saying 
anything. 

At  last. 

To  arrive — arrived. 

Has  he  arrived  at  last  ? 
He  has  not  arrived  yet. 
Does  he  come  at  last? 
He  does  come. 

To  give  away — given  away. 
To  cut  off— cut  off  (past  part.). 

Has  he  given  away  anything  ? 
He  has  given  away  his  coat. 

To  cut  one's  throat. 
They  have  cut  his  throat. 

To  crop  a  dog's  ears. 

What  have  they  done  to  him  ? 
They  have  cut  off  his  ears. 

Aloud. 


<£T  fd)(aft  nod). 
£  c  6  c  n. 

f  2cfct  3fa  93cm>anbtet  nod)  ? 
t  (Sc  lebt  md)t  mefyr. 

£)  I)  n  c  (is  followed  by  $u  before 
the  infinitive). 

Sfoie  ®c(b. 

t  £)f)nc  gu  fprcdjen. 

f  £)f)ne  etwag  $u  facjcn. 

2B  e  a,  $  c  f)  e  n  *—  -w  c  a,  3  e  9  a  n  9  c  n. 

Imperf.  9  t  n  9. 
©r  ging  wc^,  c^nc  ctwa^  su  fagcn. 

(5  n  b  (  t  d>  . 

7C  n  !  c  m  in  c  n  *  —  a  n  g  e  !  o  m  m  c  n. 
Imperf.  6  a  m. 

Sit  cc  cnfcttdj  angcfommcn  1 
@c  ijt  nod)  nid)t  anqcEommcn. 
^cmmtcc 
@t  fommt. 


8S  e  cj  9  c  6  c  n*  — 
Imperf.  g  a  0. 


t  c  n.     Imperf.  f  d)  n  1  1  1 
^at  cr  ctmag 
(Sr  (;at 


btc  Dfjrcn  afcfdfyneU 


ben  |>a{$  aOfd)nctt>cn  *. 
if)tn    ben 
fcbnttten. 
(Stncm 
ben  *. 

ftc  t^ 

bafrcn   ibm  bic  D^cen 
fd)nittcn. 

Cant. 


Does  your  master  speak  aloud  !    @prtd)t  %fo  Odjrct  (aut  ? 


He  does  speak  aloud. 


(Sc  fprtd)t  (aut. 


la  order   to  learn  German,  one  Urn  bcutfd)  ju  letncn,  mufj  man  (aut 
must  speak  aloud.  [prcd)cn. 

EXERCISES.    138. 

Hadst  thou  the  intention  to  learn  English  1  —  I  had  the  intention 
to  learn  it,  but  I  had  not  a  good  master.  —  Did  your  brother  intend 


169 

>*. 

to  buy  a  carriage  ? — He  did  intend  to  buy  one,  but  he  had  no  more 
money. — Why  did  you  work  ] — I  worked  in  order  to  learn  Ger- 
man.— Why  did  you  love  that  man  ] — I  loved  him  because  he  loved 
me. — Have  you  already  seen  the  son  of  the  capt.iin  ? — I  have  already 
seen  him. — Did  he  speak  French  ] — He  spoke  English. — Where 
were  you  then  (Lesson  XL VIII. )? — I  was  in  Germany. — Did  you 
speak  German  or  English  1 — I  spoke  neither  German  nor  English, 
but  French. — Did  the  Germans  speak  French  ? — At  first  they  spoke 
German,  afterwards  French. — Did  they  speak  as  well  as  you  1 — 
They  spoke  just  as  well  as  you  and  L — What  do  you  do  in  the 
evening. — I  work  as  soon  as  I  have  supped. — And  what  do  you  do 
afterwards  1 — Afterwards  I  sleep. — When  do  you  drink  ] — I  drink 
as  soon  as  I  have  eaten. — When  do  you  sleep  ] — I  sleep  as  soon  as 
I  have  supped. — Dost  thou  speak  German  1 — I  spoke  it  formerly. 
— Dost  thou  take  off  thy  hat  before  thou  takest  off  thy  coat  1 — I  take 
off  my  hat  as  soon  as  I  have  taken  off  my  clothes. — What  do  you 
do  after  breakfast  1 — As  soon  as  I  have  breakfasted  I  go  out. — Art 
ihou  sleeping  ] — You  see  that  I  am  not  sleeping. — Does  thy  brother 
still  sleep  ] — He  does  still  sleep. — Have  you  tried  to  speak  to  my 
uncle  ? — I  have  not  tried  to  speak  to  him. — Has  he  spoken  to  you  ? 
— As  soon  as  lie  sees  me,  he  speaks  to  me. — Are  your  parents  still 
alive  ] — They  are  still  alive. — Is  your  friend^s  brother  still  alive  ? 
— He  is  no  longer  alive. 

139. 

Have  you  spoken  to  the  merchant? — I  have  spoken  to  him. — 
Where  have  you  spoken  to  him  ? — I  have  spoken  to  him  at  my 
house  (fret  nur). — What  has  hes  aid  ] — He  went  away  without  say- 
ing anything. — Can  you  work  without  speaking  ] — I  can  work,  but 
not  study  German,  without  speaking. — Do  you  speak  aloud  when 
(iwnn)  you  are  studying  German  1— I  do  speak  aloud. — Can  you 
understand  me  1 — I  can  understand  you  when  (roenn)  you  speak 
aloud. — Wilt  thou  go  for  some  wine  1 — 1  cannot  go  for  wine  withont 
money. — Have  you  bought  any  horses  ] — I  do  not  buy  without 
money. — Has  your  father  arrived  at  last] — He  has  arrived. — When 
did  he  arrive  1 — This  morning  at  four  o'clock. — Has  your  cousin 
set  out  at  last  ] — He  has  not  set  out  yet. — Have  you  at  last  found 
a  good  master  1 — I  have  at  last  found  one. — Are  you  at  last  learning 
English  1 — I  am  at  last  learning  it. — Why  did  you  not  learn  it  al- 
ready 1 — Because  I  had  not  a  good  master. — Are  you  waiting  for 
any  one] — I  am  waiting  for  my  physician  1 — Is  he  coming  at  last  ? 
— You  see  that  he  is  not  yet  coming. — Have  you  the  head-ache "? — 
No,  I  have  sore  eyes. — Then  you  must  wait  for  the  physician. — 
Have  you  given  away  anything  1 — I  have  not  given  away  anything. 
— What  has  your  uncle  given  away  ? — He  has  given  away  his  old 
clothes. — Hast  thou  given  away  anything? — I  had  not  anything  to 
give  away.— What  has  thy  brother  given  away  ? — He  has  given 
away  his  old  boots  and  his  old  shoes.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


170 

FIFTY-NINTH  LESSON.—  3\r<mn  tmb  ffin^igate 
Ceciion. 

J5een.  SOS  c  r  t>  e  n. 

O&s.  A.  The  learner  must  remember  that  tt)erben  % 
not  fetn*,  is  the  verb  which  serves  to  form  the  passive 
voice  (Lesson  LV.}.  The  past  participle  of  the  former 
is  ttwrbert,  and  that  of  the  latter  getoefen,  (Lesson  XLL) 

Have  you  been  praised  "?  (Stnb  ©te  gcfefrt  rcerbcn  ? 

I  have  been  praised.  3d)  bin  gdo&t  roorbcn. 

Hast  thou  been  blamed  ?  93ift  £>u  gctafcdt  roorbcn  ? 

I  have  not  been  blamed.  3d)  Otn  md)t  gctaMt  roorbcn. 

Have  we  been  loved  1  <Stnt>  ttnr  gclicbt  worsen  ? 

By  whom  has  he  been  punished  1  £>en  worn  ijt  cr  gcftraft  wcrbcn  ? 

He  has    been  punished   by  his  <§r  ift  »cn  fcincm  93otcr  geftraft  wcr? 

father.  ten. 

When  has  he  been  punished  ?      SQDann  tft  ct  gcftraft  racrbcn  ? 
He  has  been  punished  to-day.      (Sr  ijt  fjcutc  gcflraft  roctfcen. 

I  was        —  he  was      "j  Scft  wutbc    —  cr  nnirfrc     " 

We  were  —  they  were  Upraised.  2Bir  ruurbcn  —  fie  nmrtcn 
Thou  wast  —  you  were  J  jDu   ivurbcft  — 

(@tc  nwrfcen) 

Were  you  loved  ?  SKurbcn  ©tc 

I  was  loved.  £sd)  wurtc 

Was  he  hated  1  SBurbe  cr 

He  was  neither  loved  nor  hated.  (§r  rcwrbe  n?ct)cr  gcftctt  ncc^ 

To  become.  SOS  c  r  b  c  n  *. 

The  past  participle  of  this  verb  is  : 

Become.  ©  e  n?  c  r  b  c  n.a 

And  its  imperfect  : 
I  became  —  he  became.  3d)  tt>arb  or  nmrfce  —  er  roarb  or 

nmrbc. 
Thou  becamest.  ©u  marbft  or  wurbcft. 


5.  In  all  the  other  tenses  and  persons,  toerben*, 
to  become,  is  conjugated  as  the  verb  which  serves  to 
form  the  passive  voice.  (See  Lesson  LV.  and  above.) 


*  Not  ttiorbcn,  which  is  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  that  serves  to  form 
the  passive  voice,  as  may  be  seen  above, 


171 

Have  you  become  a  merchant]     (ginb  £U'  .ftaufmann  gcivertcn  ? 
1  have  become  a  lawyer.  3d)  bin  Httntfat  gcruerben. 

He  has  taken  the  degrees  of  a  f  (£r  tft  Doctor  geroorbcn. 
doctor. 

The  king,  bcr  .fto'ntg  ; 

the  successor,  bcr  97ad)fefgcr  ;b 

the  lawyer  (barrister  at  law),  bcr  tfbwtat  (See  Note  «,  Lesson 

L1V.)  ; 
the  office,  the  employment,       ba$  2(mt. 

Learned.  ©ctcfyrt. 

To  fall  sick.  >  , 

To  be  taken  ill.  $  t  Stan!  rocrbcn  *. 

To  recover,  to  grow  well.  >  , 

To  recover  one's  health.  1 1  »*M*  »«bcn  *. 
He  was  taken  ill.  j  @r  roarb  franf. 

He  has  recovered  his  health.         f  (£T  tft  o/funb  gcrocrbcn. 

What  has  become  of  him  !        5"  ®a«  W  au«  tf)m  gctvcrbcn  ? 

(.  9Sc  tft  cr  fnngcfommcn  ? 
He  has  turned  soldier.  (Sr  ift  Gftflbot  gCttMrtoflt 

He  has  enlisted.  (Sr  bat  j'tcl)  anivcrbcn  laflicn. 

To  enlist,  to  enroll.  5"  ®f^'flt  Wtfr^ «*;  -    , 

C  6>ttft  annxrbcn  taffcn*. 

Children  become  men.  2(u$  ^tnbcrn  wcrtcn  Scute. 

To  tear — torn. 

To  snatch — snatched. 

I  tore  — we  tore.  3d)  rt§    — rc>tt  riffcn. 

Thou  torest  — you  tore.  2)u  rtffcft — 3fa  tiffct  (8te  rtffcn). 

He  snatched  it  out  of  my  hands.  <5r  rt9  c^  mir  cwg  ben  ^a'nbcn. 
What  did  he  snatch  out  of  your  28a$  rip  cr  Sfyncn  au^  ben  £anbcn  1 
hands  ? 

When.  2(U  (b  a,  wcnn).     (See  Lesson 

XL  VII.) 

I  was    there,    when  you  were  3d)  war  ba7  al$  ^te  ba  warcn. 
there. 

Next  year.  9?acf)ftc$  3abr. 

Last  month.  QSortgcn  ((efetcn)  5Kcnat. 

Last  Monday.  gc£ten  9}icntacj. 

Next,  tiachft ; 

last,  pcrtg,  (c^t. 

When  was  he  in  Berlin  ?  20$ann  roar  cr  tn  SBcrttn  ? 

He  was  there  last  winter.  ($r  n?ar  ocrtqcn  2Btntcr  ba. 
When  will  you  go  to  Berlin  1      SSann  roellen  ©ic  nac^  Scrltn  rctfcn  ? 

b  Masculine  substantives  derived  from  a  regular  v^rb  do  not  soften  jhe  radi- 
cal vowel  in  the  plural,  as  :  sji a c^ folder,  which  is  derived  from  nacfyfolgeit,  to 
follow,  to  succeed  ;  plur.  He  -ftacfefolger,  the  successors. 

c  The  verb  ret^eu,  to  tear,  to  pull,  to  wrest,  must  not  be  mistaken  for  $er* 
tcipeu,  which  means :  to  tear  to  pieces,  to  rend,  to  burst  asunder. 


^  >$Kei|5cn*  —  cjeriffen.0 


172 

I  will  go  thither  next  summer.    3d)   nnft    nad)fhm   ©emitter  tafyitt 

retfetu 

So  that.  (So  t  a  £'  (See  Lesson  XLVIL). 

I  have  lost  my  money,  so  that  I  3cf)  fyafte  mctn  d5e(t  ccdorcn,  fo  tap 

cannot  pay  you.  id)  <£ic  nid)t  bejafolen  fann. 

J  am  ill,  so  that  I  cannot  go  out.  3d)  bin  franf,  fo  tap  id)  nid)t  auga/s 

(fen  fann. 

The  imperfect  of  Kmten  is  idt)  fomtte,  I  could. 

The  way  to  Berlin.  £)et  £Sco,  nad)  23erltn. 

The  way  from  Berlin  to  Dresden.  2)cr  SBeo,  con  Berlin  nad)  £>re$tcn. 
Which  way  has  he  taken  ?  SBclrfjcn  SBcg  fyat  cr  genemmen? 

He  has  taken  the  way  to  Leipzic.  @r  ()at  ten  SBea,  nad)  Cctp^ia,  genems 

men. 

Which  way  will  you  take  1          OGBctdbcn  £Beg  tvotlen  ©ie  neljmcn  ? 
I  will  take  this  way.  3d)  will  ttcfcn  £Beg  nefymcn. 

And  I  that  one.  Unt  id)  icneiu 

EXERCISES.  140. 

Why  has  that  child  been  praised  ? — It  has  been  praised,  because 
it  has  studied  well. — Hast  thou  ever  been  praised  1 — I  have  often 
been  praised. — Why  has  that  other  child  been  punished  1 — It  has 
been  punished,  because  it  has  been  naughty  and  idle. — Has  this 
child  been  rewarded  ? — It  has  been  rewarded,  because  it  has  worked 
well. — When  was  that  man  punished  ? — He  was  punished  last 
month. —  Why  have  we  been  esteemed? — Because  we  have  been 
studious  and  obedient. — Why  have  these  people  been  hated  1 — Be- 
cause they  have  been  disobedient. — Were  you  loved  when  you  were 
at  Dresden] — I  was  not  hated. — Was  your  brother  esteemed  when 
he  was  in  London  ? — He  was  loved  and  esteemed. — When  were  you 
in  Spain  ? — I  was  there  when  you  were  there. — Who  was  loved  and 
who  was  hated  ? — Those  that  were  good,  assiduous,  and  obedient, 
were  loved,  and  those  who  were  naughty,  idle,  and  disobedient, 
were  punished,  hated  and  despised. — What  must  one  do,  in  order 
not  to  be  despised  1— One  must  be  studious  and  good. — Were  you 
in  Berlin  when  the  king  was  there? — I  was  there  when  he  was 
there. — Was  your  uncle  in  London  when  I  was  there  ] — He  was 
there  when  you  were  there. — Where  were  you  when  1  was  at  Dres- 
den ? — I  was  in  Paris. — Where  was  your  father  when  you  were  in 
Vienna  ? — He  was  in  England. — At  what  time  did  you  breakfast 
when  you  were  in  Germany  1 — I  breakfasted  when  my  father  break- 
fasted.— Did  you  work  when  he  was  working? — I  studied  when  he 
was  working. — Did  your  brother  work  when  you  were  working  ? — 
He  played  when  I  was  working. 

141. 

What  has  become  of  your  friend  1 — He  has  become  a  lawyer. — 
What  has  become  of  your  cousin  ? — He  has  enlisted. — Was  your 


173 

uncle  taken  ill  ? — He  was  taken  ill,  and  I  became  his  successor  in 
his  office. — Why  did  this  man  not  work  ] — He  could  not  work,  be- 
cause he  was  taken  ill. — Has  he  recovered  1 — He  has  recovered. — 
What  has  become  of  him  1 — He  has  turned  a  merchant. — What 
has  become  of  his  children  1 — His  children  have  become  men. — 
What  has  become  of  your  son  1 — He  has  become  a  great  man. — 
Has  he  become  learned  ] — He  has  become  learned  (cf>). — What 
has  become  of  my  book  ? — I  do  not  know  what  has  become  of  it. — 
Have  you  torn  it  ? — I  have  not  torn  it. — What  has  become  of  our 
neighbour1? — I  do  not  know  what  has  become  of  him. — Did  they 
wrest  the  book  out  of  your  hands  1 — They  did  wrest  it  out  of  my 
hands. — Did  you  wrest  the  book  out  of  his  hands  ? — I  did  wrest  it 
out  of  his  hands. — When  did  your  father  set  out  1 — He  set  out  last 
Tuesday. — Which  way  has  he  taken  1 — He  has  taken  the  way  to 
Berlin. — When  were  you  in  Dresden  ] — I  wras  there  last  year. — 
Did  you  stay  there  long  1 — I  stayed  there  nearly  a  month. — Has 
my  brother  paid  you  1 — He  has  lost  all  (Obs.  B.,  Lesson  XLIX.) 
his  money,  so  that  he  cannot  pay  me.  (See  end  of  Lesson 
XXXIV.) 


SIXTIETH  LESSON.— Qet^Qte  Action. 

Of  whom,  of  which.  93  0  n  b  C  lit,  W  0  t>  0  n. 

Obs.  A.  Of  which,  when  relating  to  a  thing,  may 
be  translated  by  the  preposition  which  the  verb  re- 
quires, added  to  the  adverb  ttXh 

I  see  the  man  of  whom  you  3d)  fcfyc  ben  90?ann,  t>  o  n  bcm  (sen 
speak.  nxlcrjcm)  Sic  fpred)cn. 

I  have  bough  t  the  horse  of  which  gcf)  f)abe  t»a$  g)fcrfc  getauft,  »en 
you  spoke  to  me.  b  c  m  Sic  mit  nut  cjcfprecfycn  fyaben. 

Has  your  father  the  book  of  £at  3f)t  £>ater  ba$  SBud)/  n>  0  D  0  n 
which  I  am  speaking  ?  tcl)  fptcd)C  1 

Whose.  5)  c  f  f  c  n.    Plur.  b  c  r  c  n. 

The  man  whose.  £)et  93?ann,  fccffcn. 

The  child  whose.  £)a$  ^tnt)x  fccffi'n. 

The  men  whose.  £)tc  SRa'nncr/  bereft* 

I  see  the  man  whose  brother  has  Set)  fcbc  ten  SRann,  foeflcn  23rut>ct 

killed  my  dog.  nvctncn  £unt>  gcto'btct  hat. 

Do  you  see  the  child  whose  fa-  (Scbcn  Sic  ta$  jUnt>,  fccffcn  SSatcc 

ther  set  out  yesterday  ?  cjcfK'tn  abgcrcipt  ift  ? 

I  do  see  it.  ^scb  fcf)C  c^. 

I  see  the  man  whose  dog  you  Set)  fcbe  ben  Sfflann,  tcficn  ^)Unt)  (Sic 

have  killed.  qctot)tct  babcn. 

Do  you  see  the  people  whose  Sc'rjcn  Sic  t>tc  Ocutc,  tcrcn  $fcrb  id) 

horse  I  have  bought  ]  cjcfcwft 


174 

I  do  see  them.  3d)  fcfjc  fie. 

I  have  seen  the  merchant  whose  3d)    f)flbc    ten   jtaufmann    cjefcfjcn, 
shop  you  have  taken.  tcffcn  gaten  Sic  gcnommcn  fyaben. 

DC?9  Incidental  or  explicative  propositions  are 
placed  either  immediately  after  the  word  which  they 
determine,  or  at  the  end  of  the  principal  proposition. 

13d)  fyabc  nut  tern  SOtannc,  fccffcn 
£nu$  abgebtcmnt  tft,  gejpved)en. 
3d)  fyabc  nut  bcm  9J?annc  gcfpredjcn, 
tcffen  £>au$  abgcbrannt  ift. 
r2Cbbrenncn,  (verb  act.  and  neut. 

To  burn  —  burnt.  <      irreg.)    abgcbrannt.     Imperf. 

C     b  r  a  n  n  t  c. 


£akn  (Sic  t>a$  S3ud),  ivcfcbc^  icr) 


3f)ncn  gcltc^cn  babe,  gctcfcn  ? 
$abcn  @ic  t)ag  S3ud)  gcfcfcn 
icf)  Sbncn  gcjicfjcn  i)abc  ? 
I  have  what  I  want.  3d)  fyabc,  tt>ag  id)  braucbc. 

That,  the  one  of  which.          SD  a  $/  t)  c  f  f  c  n. 

Have  you  the  paper  of  which  £abcn  <Sie  t>a$  papier,  tcffcn  Sie 

you  have  need  ]  benotfjigt  finb  ? 

I  have  that  of  which  I  have  need.  3d)  fyaOc  fca*/  fccffcn  id)  bcnb'tfjigt  bin. 

DATIVE.  GEN. 

That,  the  one  of  which,  (  M.  ter,  fcon  n)drf)em-ber,  beffen, 
of  whom.  \  N.  t)a0,t)0tt  n)e[rf)em-ba^,beffett> 

I  see  the  man  of  whom  I  speak.  3d)  fcbc  ben  Sftcmn,  son  nxtdjcm  id& 

fprcd)C. 

I   see  the   one  of  whom   I  am  3d)  fcftc  t>cn  (bcnjcntgcn),   »cn  rocU 
speaking  to  you.  d)em  icl)  nut  3fynen  |"prcd)C.    (See 

Lesson  XII.) 

Which  book  have  you  1  2Bc(d)es  SBud)  ftaben  (Sic  ? 

I  have  that  (the  one)  of  which  I  3d)  fyflfcc  tag  (fcaSjcntcjO,  tcffcn  ic^ 
have  need.  bcnotfyigt  bin. 

DATIVE.  GEN. 


Those,  the  ones  of  which.       g  JJJ  bie,  berem 


Which  men  do  you  see  "?  2Bckf)C  Banner  fcfjcn  (Sic  ? 

I  see  those  of  whom  you  have  3d)  fcfyc  tic   (fcicjcnicjcn),  t»cn  welt 
spoken  to  me.  cl)cn   (son  tcncn)   (Sic   ntit  nut 

Qcfurodxn  l)abcn.     (See  Lesson 

XIV.) 


175 

Which  nails  has  the  man?  908cld)e  Sftacjcl  fyat  jDer 

He  has  those   of  which  he  has  (£t  Ijot  t»tc  (DiqcutQcn),  tcccn  cr  bt* 
need.  notfytcjt  t)l 

DAT.  Plur. 
To  whom.  &  c  n  c  n . 

I  seethe  children  to  whom  you  3d)  fefjc  tic  £tnbcr,    be  tun  Sic 
gave  apples.  2Ccpfcl  cjcgcOcn  fjabcru 

Of  those.  2$en  bcncn  (dative). 

Of  which  people  do  you  speak  1   SScn  nxtcfycn  Scutcn  rcfccn  <Stc  ? 
I  speak  o/  Mose  whose  children  3kf)  tet>c  r»en  t>  en  c  n  (tcnjcnigcn), 
have  been  assiduous.  t>mn  Jlinfccr  pctpig  gct&cfcn  finfc. 


DECLENSION     OF     THE     ARTICLE 

when  it  is  used  instead  of  either 

The  demonstrative  pronouns  btefer,  jetter,  the  determi- 
native pronoun  berjemge,or  the  relative  pronoun  tt>ekf)er* 
(See  Obs.  Lessons  XII.  and  XIV.) 

Masculine.  Feminine.  Neuter.  Plural  for  all  genders. 

NOM.  ber  tie  ba£  bie 

(TEN.  beflfen  (beg)   berett  beffen  (beg)  berer  (beren) 

DAT,  bent  ber  bent  benett 

Ace.  ben  bic  bag  bie* 


B.  In  the  genitive  singular  masculine  and 
neuter,  beg  is  often  used  instead  of  beften,  chiefly  in  poe- 
try and  compound  words. 

Obs.  C.  When  the  definite  article  is  used  instead 
of  ttttfcfyer,  its  genitive  plural  is  not  berer,  but  beren. 
(See  Obs.  Lesson  XIV.) 

EXERCISES.       142. 

Did  your  cousin  learn  German  1  —  He  was  taken  ill,  so  that  he 
could  not  learn  it.  —  Has  your  brother  learnt  it  1  —  He  had  not  a 
good  master,  so  that  he  could  not  learn  it.  —  Do  you  go  to  the  ball 
this  evening  1  —  I  have  sore  feet,  so  that  I  cannot  go  to  it.  —  Did  you 
understand  that  Englishman1?  —  I  do  not  know  English,  so  that  I 
could  not  understand  him.  —  Have  you  bought  that  horse  1  —  I  had 
no  money,  so  that  I  could  not  buy  it.  —  Do  you  go  into  the  country 
on  foot  ]  —  I  have  no  carriage,  so  that  I  must  go  thither  on  foot.  — 
Have  you  seen  the  man  from  whom  I  received  a  present  ]  —  I  have 
not  seen  him.  —  Have  you  seen  the  fine  horse  of  which  I  spoke  to 
you  1  —  I  have  seen  it.  —  Has  your  uncle  seen  the  books  of  which 


176 

you  spoke  to  him] — He  has  seen  them. — Hast  thon  seen  the  man 
whose  children  have  been  punished? — I  have  not  seen  him. — To 
whom  were  you  speaking  when  you  were  in  the  theatre  ] — I  was 
speaking  to  the  man  whose  brother  has  killed  my  fine  dog. — Have 
you  seen  the  little  boy  whose  father  has  become  a  lawyer  ] — I  have 
seen  him. — Whom  have  you  seen  at  the  ball  1 — I  have  seen  the 
people  there  whose  horses  and  those  whose  carriage  you  bought. — 
Whom  do  you  see  now  1 — I  see  the  man  whose  servant  has  broken 
my  looking-glass. — Have  you  heard  the  man  whose  friend  has  lent 
me  money  I — I  have  not  heard  him. — Whom  have  you  heard  ? — I 
have  heard  the  French  captain  whose  son  is-  my  friend. — Hast  thou 
brushed  the  coat  of  which  I  spoke  to  you] — I  have  not  yet  brushed 
it. — Have  you  received  the  money  which  you  were  wanting] — I 
have  received  it. — Have  I  the  paper  of  which  I  have  need  ] — You 
have  it. — Has  your  brother  the  books  which  he  was  wanting  1 — He 
has  them. — Have  you  spoken  to  the  merchants  whose  shop  we 
have  taken  ] — We  have  spoken  to  them. — Have  you  spoken  to  the 
physician  whose  son  has  studied  German  ] — I  have  spoken  to  him. 
— Hast  thou  seen  the  poor  people  whose  houses  have  been  burnt  ?— 
I  have  seen  them. — Have  you  read  the  books  which  we  lent  to 
you  ] — We  have  read  them. — What  do  you  say  of  them  1 — We  say 
that  they  are  very  fine. — Have  your  children  what  they  want  ] — 
They  have  what  they  want* 

143. 

Of  which  man  do  you  speak  ] — I  speak  of  the  one  whose  brother 
has  turned  soldier. — Of  which  children  did  you  speak? — I  spoke 
of  those  whose  parents  are  learned. — Which  book  have  you  read  ? 
— I  have  read  that  of  which  I  spoke  to  you  yesterday. — Which 
paper  has  your  cousin  ? — He  has  that  of  which  he  has  need. — 
Which  fishes  has  he  eaten  1 — He  has  eaten  those  which  you  do  not 
like. — Of  which  books  are  you  in  want  ? — I  am  in  want  of  those 
of  which  you  have  spoken  to  me. — Are  you  not  in  want  of  those 
which  I  am  reading  T — I  am  not  in  want  of  them. — Is  any  one  in 
want  of  the  coats  of  which  my  tailor  has  spoken  to  me? — No  one 
is  in  want  of  them. — Do  you  see  the  children  to  whom  I  have 
given  cakes  1 — I  do  not  see  those  to  whom  you  have  given  cakes, 
but  those  whom  you  have  punished. — To  whom  have  you  given 
money '! — I  have  given  some  to  those  who  gave  me  some. — To 
which  children  must  one  give  books  ]— One  must  give  some  to 
those  who  learn  well  and  who  are  good  and  obedient.-^To  whom 
do  you  give  to  eat  and  to  drink? — To  those  who  are  hungry  and 
thirsty — Do  you  give  anything  to  the  children  who  are  idle  1 — I 
give  them  nothing. — What  sort  of  weather  was  it  when  you  went 
(gtltgen)  out  ] — It  was  raining  and  very  windy. — Do  you  give  cakes 
to  your  pupils  1 — They  have  not  studied  well,  so  that  I  give  them 
nothing.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


177 
SIXTY-FIRST  LESSON.— ®in  un&  sedj}igste  Action. 

To  forget— forgotten.      9S  e  t  g  ef  f  en  *  —  ocr  gcffcn. 
Forgot.  Imperf.  23  e  v  0,  a  fj . 

Thou  forgettest — he  forgets.         £)n  wrgiffcft  —  cr  t»crcu'£t. 

I  have  forgotten  to  do  it.  £sd)  (jabc  wra,cffen,  c$  JU  thun. 

Has  he  forgotten  to  bring  you  the  £at  cr  wrcjcftcn,  Sfyncn  bag  S3 u eft  JU 

book?  bringcn"? 

He  has  forgotten  to  bring  it  me.  (£r    fyat   fcrgeffen,   eg  nitr  $u  trins 

gen. 

!(£ic  fyakn  »cnjcflcn,  an  mid)  $u  fdjrcU 
6cn. 
(Sic  ^aku  tKtgejfen/  nut  ^u  fc^rei* 
ten. 

To  belong.  ©  C  I)  6  t  C  n  . 

Does  this  horse  belong  to  your  ®cf)6'rt  btcfcg    9>fcrb 

brother  1  tcr  ? 

It  does  belong  to  him.  (5$  $c()6'rt  tfim. 

To  whom  does  this  table  belong  1  955cm  $cf)0tt  t)tcfcr  S'tfcf)  ? 
It  belongs  to  us.  <£r  gCQOtt  un^. 

To  whom  do  these  gloves  belong]  SQBcm  gcfyb'rcn  btcft*  .^ 
They  belong  to  the  captains.        ©te  gcfyb'tcn  t)cn  ^ouptlcutcn. 

WAo5e.  SB  e  f  f  c  n  (See  Lesson  XXIX.  and 

XXXIX). 

Whose  hat  is  this  1  S&cffcn  4)«t  ift  bag  ? 

It  is  mine.  <S$  ift  mctncr. 

Obs.  A.  The  possessive  conjunctive  pronouns,  when 
used  instead  of  the  possessive  absolute  pronouns,  in 
the  nominative  masculine  take  the  termination  e  r,  and 
e^  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  neuter.  (See 
Obs.  Lesson  VII.) 

Whose  book  is  this  ?  SBcjjen  93udj  ift  bag  ? 

It  is  his.  @S  ift  fetne*. 

Whose  carriage  is  that  ?  SScffen  2Bcitqcn  ift  bag  ? 

It  is  ours.  (£g  ift  unfcrcr. 

Whose  shoes  are  these  ?  SBcficn  ©dju&c  jinb  bag  ? 

They  are  ours.  ©g  ftnb  unfcrc. 

O^5.  B.  These  examples  show  that  the  indefinite 
pronoun  e3  may  be  used  of  any  gender  or  number. 
(See  also  the  Obs.  of  Lesson  XLIII.) 

To  fit  (suit).  JUeibcn,  poffen/  fteljen*. 

Do  these  shoes  fit  these  men  1      ?)affcn   bicfc  (Scfyufyc  bicfen 

ncrn  ? 

8* 


178 


They  fit  them. 

That  fits  you  very  well. 


©te  paffcn  ibnen. 

£>ag  ftebt  Sbnen  feljt  gut. 


To  suit  (please}— suited.      2C  n  ft  e  b  e  n  *  —  angcfUnben. 

Imperf.  ft  a  n  b. 

Does  this  cloth  suit  (please)  your  <£tebt  Sbfi'nt   SSrubcr  biefeg  Sucfy 

brother  ?  an  ? 

It  suits  (pleases)  him.  (5*  ftebt  ibm  an. 

Do  these  boots  suit  (please)  your  ©teben  3b^n  Srubern  btefe  <Sttefc( 

brothers  ?  an  ? 

They  suit  (please)  them.  @ie  jU'ben  ibnen  an. 

Does  it  suit  you  to  do  this  ?          (gtebt  eg  Sbnen  an,  biefeg  $u  tbun  ? 
It  does  suit  me  to  do  it.  (£'g  ftebt  mir  an,  eg  $u  tfjun. 


To  become. 


©  c  3  1  c  me  n. 


Does  it  become  you  to  do  this  ?  (Se^temt  eg  Sbnen,  biefeg  $u  tbun  ? 

It  does  become  me  to  do  it.  (£g  gegtcmt  mtr,  eg  ^u  tbun. 

It  does  not  become  me  to  do  it.  (5g  cjcjtemt  mir  nid)t,  eg  ^u  tbun. 

It  does  not  become  him  to  go  on  (£g  a,c$temt  ibm  ntcbt,  311  Jupe  ^u  ty* 
foot.  b^'U. 

To  please.  93  c  1 1  e  b  e  n. 

Does  it  please  your  brother  to  93c(tcOt  eg  3brem  23ruber  mttyifoms 
go  with  us?    '  men  (with  us  is  understood)? 

Does  it  suit  your  brother  to  go  (Stebt  eg  Sb^'iu  23rubec  an 
with  us  ?  Eommen  ? 

It  does  not  please  him.  (£g  bcltebt  ibm  md)t. 

It  does  not  suit  him.  <£g  ftebt  ibm  ntcbt  an. 

What  is  your  pleasure  ?    What  \  2Bag  Oclicbt    " 
do  you  want  ?  \  SBag  bettebt  ? 

To  please-,  to  like. 


Thou  pleasest — he  pleases. 

Does  this  book  please  you  1 

Do  you  like  this  book  ? 

It  pleases  me  much. 

I  like  it  very  much. 

How  are  you  pleased  here? 

I  am  very  well  pleased  here. 

Paid  in  cash,  ready. 
Ready  money. 
To  pay  down. 
To  buy  for  cash. 
To  sell  for  cash. 

On  credit. 
To  sell  on  credit. 


©efaHen*. 
Imperf. 

2)u  cjefallft  —  er  gcfa'ttt. 

1  ©efallt  Sbnen  tiefeg  23ud)  ? 

i 

-  (£$  cjcfa'ttt  mit  fefjr. 

28te  gcfd'ttt  eg  Sbnen  bier? 
©g  gcfallt  mir  recfyt  wobt  b^ 

SBaar. 

S3aarcg  ®e(b. 

S5aar  bqabten. 

Urn  baares  ®efo  faufen. 

Mm  baarcg  ©ell)  »crfaufen. 

JCuf  Stebtt,  auf  23crg. 
2(uf  (5ret»it 


179 

The  credit,  ber  (Sivbit,  bet  23cro,. 

Will  you  buy  for  cash  ?  £Boften  <£tc  urn  fcaareS  ©ctl)  faufen  ? 

Does  it  suit  you  to  sell  me  on  ®tcf)t  c$  Sbncn  an,  mic  auf  (Srebit 

credit  ?  $u  tjctfaufen  ? 

To  succeed  —  succeeded.         ©cltngcn*  —  gelungen. 

Imperf.   cj  c  I  a  n  a,. 

O&s.  C.  This  impersonal  verb  takes  feitt  for  its  auxi- 
liary, and  governs  the  dative.  (See  Obs.  A.  Lesson 
LVI.) 


Do  you  succeed  in  learning  the  f  ®cltno,t  cs  Sfyncn  bcutfclj  $u  tit* 

German?  ncn? 

I  do  succeed  in  it.  f  (£*  gcttngt  mir. 

I  do  succeed  in  learning  it.  f  @$  QdinQt  nur,  eg  ^u  (crncn. 
•  Do  these  men  succeed  in  selling  f  ©clingt    c^    fciefcn    Ccutcn/  tfjrc 

their  horses  ?  ^)fcrt)C  gu  t>crfaufcn  ? 

They  do  succeed  therein.  f  G£$  Qcltngt  tl)ncn. 

There  is.  <5  «   i  ft. 

TAere  are.  <£$   fint). 

Is  there  any  wine  ?  Sf!  SOBctn  to? 

There  is  some.  (£$  ijlt  wc(d)cr  t)a, 

Are  there  any  apples  I  ©info  2Cepfcl  ta  ? 

There  are  some.  &  ftnb  W)ctd)C  ba. 

There  are  none.  (5^  jint)  fetne  t>a, 

Are  there  any  men  ?  (Sint)  ?cutc  t>a  ? 

There  are  some.  C£*  ftnb  cintc^  ba. 


Z).  The  impersonal  verb  there  is,  there  are,  is 
translated  by  ed  ifi,  e^  ftnb,  when  it  expresses  exist- 
ence in  a  certain  place,  and  by  e£  gtbt,  when  it  expres- 
ses existence  in  general.  Ex. 


There  are  men  who  will  not  stu-  &  gt&t  gftenfcfyen,  wcldje  nidjt 

dy.  ten  rooltcn. 

Is  there  any  one  1  %ft  Semanb  ba  ? 

There  is  no  one.  <£$  iff  9^icmanb  ba. 

Has  a  man  been  there  1  3ft  ctn  5)iann  ba  a,enxfcn  t 

There  has  been  one  there.  (£$  ift  ctncc  ba  gctvcfcn. 

Were  many  people  there  ?  £Baren  uictc  Scute  ba  ? 

There  were  a  great  many  there.  ©5  rcatcn  fcfyt  tncle  ba. 


To  clean.  Stetnigctt/rein 

Clean.  9?ctn. 

The  inkstand,          ba$  Stntcnfa^. 
Will  you  clean  my  inkstand  ?      SBeflcn  @ie  wctn  ^intcnfap  rctnts 

a,cn  ? 
I  will  clean  it.  3d)  n?itt  c^  rctntgcn. 


180 

To  keep—  kept.  33  c  fj  a  1  1  c  n*. 

JTe/?/.  Imperf.  S5  e  f)  i  c  1  1. 

Will  you  keep  the  horse  1  Gotten  ©tc  t>ci$  $fctt>  ktyattcn  ? 

I  will  keep  it.  3d)  rotll  c*  kfjalten. 

You  must  not  keep  my  money.     <gte  nuiffcn  mcin  ©clb  md>t 

ten. 


Directly,  immediately. 

This  instant.  JDtcfcn  2CuQCnbltct 

Instantly. 


I  will  do  it.  3d)  nritt  c$  tfjuti. 

I  will  do  it  immediately*  3d)  n>iU  c*  fog(t'td)  tfyun. 

I  am  going  to  work.  3d)  will  atbeitcn. 


Some  conjunctions  do  not  throw  the  verb  to  the 
end  of  the  phrase  (See  Lesson  XL  VII.),  but  leave  it  in 
its  place  immediately  after  the  subject.  They  are 
the  following  : 

llnb,  and  ;  entrocbct  —  eK't,  either  —  or  ; 

oOcc  or  atletn,  but  ;  roefcer      —  tied),  neither  —  nor  ; 

fenfccrn,  but  (on  the  contrary)  ;      fcn?ol)l      —  G(£,         ? 

—  as 


fccnn,  for ;  fetvofyt      —  o(s  aud),  < 

cfcet,  or ;  tud)t  nur  —  fonfoern  cwd),  not  only 

— but  also. 

I  cannot  pay  you,  for  I  have  no  3d)  frinn  jSic  ntd)t  &c$aF}fen,  t>erm  td> 
money   (because   I   have    no      ftofec  !cin  ©cl&  (n>ci(  id)  fcin  < 
money).  fyabc). 

He  cannot  come  to  your  house,  (£r  fann  nid)t  gtt  35ncn 
for  he  has  no  time.  tcnn  cr  fyat  nid)t  Beit. 

EXERCISES.  144. 

Have  you  brought  me  the  book  which  you  promised  me  ] — I 
have  forgotten  it. — Has  your  uncle  brought  you  the  handkerchiefs 
which  he  promised  you  ] — He  has  forgotten  to  bring  me  them. — 
Have  you  already  written  to  your  friend  ] — I  have  not  yet  had  time 
to  write  to  him. — Have  you  forgotten  to  write  to  your  parent  ] — 
I  have  not  forgotten  to  write  to  him. — To  whom  does  this  house 
belong] — It  belongs  to  the  English  captain  whose  son  has  written 
a  letter  to  us. — Does  this  money  belong  to  thee  ] — It  does  belong 
to  me. — From  whom  hast  thou  received  it  ? — I  have  received  it 
from  the  men  whose  children  you  have  seen. — To  whom  do  those 
woods  belong] — They  belong  to  the  king. — Whose  horses  are 
those] — They  are  ours. — Have  you  told  your  brother  that  I  am 
waiting  for  him  here] — I  have  forgotten  to  tell  him  so. — Is  it 
your  father  or  mine  who  is  gone  into  the  country  ] — It  is  mine, — 
Is  it  your  baker  or  that  of  our  friend  who  has  sold  you  bread  on 


181 

credit  1— It  is  ours. — Is  that  your  son  ?— He  is  ((£•$  tft)  not  mine,  he 
is  my  friend's.— Where  is  yours  1 — He  is  at  Dresden. — Does  this 
cloth  suit  you  1 — It  does  not  suit  me,  have  you  no  other  ]-— I  have 
some  other;  but  it  is  dearer  than  this. — Will  you  show  it  to  me  1 — 
I  will  show  it  to  you. — Do  these  boots  suit  your  uncle  1 — They  do 
not  suit  him,  because  .they  are  too  dear. — Are  these  the  boots  of 
which  you  have  spoken  to  us  ?— They  are  the  same. — Whose 
shoes  are  these  1 — They  belong  to  the  gentleman  whom  you  have 
seen  this  morning  in  my  shop.— Does  it  suit  you  to  go  with  us  ] — 
It  does  not  suit  me. — Does  it  become  you  to  go  to  the  market  1 — It 
does  not  become  me  to  go  thither. — Did  you  go  on  foot  into  the 
country  1 — It  does  not  become  me  to  go  on  foot,  so  that  I  went 
thither  in  a  carriage. 

145. 

What  is  your  pleasure,  Sir  ? — I  am  inquiring  after  your  father. 
— Is  he  at  home  1 — No,  Sir,  he  is  gone  out. — What  is  your 
pleasure  1 — I  tell  you  that  he  is  gone  out. — Will  you  wait  till  he 
comes  back  again  1 — I  have  no  time  to  wait. — Does  this  merchant 
sell  on  credit  1 — He  does  not  sell  on  credit. — Does  it  suit  you  to 
buy  for  cash  1 — It  does  not  suit  me. — Where  have  you  bought 
these  pretty  knives'? — I  have  bought  them  at  the  merchant's  whose 
shop  you  saw  yesterday. — Has  he  sold  them  to  you  on  credit  ? — 
He  has  sold  them  to  me  for  cash. — Do  you  often  buy  for  cash  1 — 
Not  so  often  as  you. — Have  you  forgotten  anything  here  1 — I  have 
forgotten  nothing. — Does  it  suit  you  to  learn  this  by  heart  1 — I 
have  not  a  good  memory,  so  that  it  does  not  suit  me  to  learn  by 
heart. 

146. 

Has  this  man  tried  to  speak  to  the  king? — He  has  tried  to  speak 
to  him,  but  he  has  not  succeeded  in  it. — Have  you  succeeded  in 
writing  a  letter  1 — I  have  succeeded  in  it. — Have  those  merchants 
succeeded  in  selling  their  horses  1 — They  have  not  succeeded 
therein. — Have  you  tried  to  clean  my  inkstand  ] — I  have  tried,  but 
have  not  succeeded  in  it. — Do  your  children  succeed  in  learning 
the  English  1 — They  do  succeed  in  it. — Is  there  any  wine  in  this 
cask  ? — There  is  some  in  it  (fcartn). — Is  there  any  brandy  in  this 
glass  1 — There  is  none  in  it. — Is  wine  or  water  in  it  ] — There  is 
neither  wine  nor  water  in  it. — What  is  there  in  it  1 — There  is 
vinegar  in  it. — Are  there  any  men  in  your  room  ] — There  are  some 
there — Is  there  any  one  in  the  store-house? — There  is  no  one 
there. — Were  there  many  people  in  the  theatre  1 — There  were  many 
there. — Are  there  many  children  that  will  not  play? — There  are 
many  that  will  not  study,  but  few  that  will  not  play. — Hast  thou 
cleaned  my  trunk  ] — I  have  tried  to  do  it,  but  I  have  not  succeeded. 
— Do  you  intend  buying  an  umbrella  ? — I  intend  buying  one,  if 
the  merchant  sells  it  me  on  credit. — Do  you  intend  keeping  mine  ? 
— I  intend  giving  it  back  again  to  you,  if  I  buy  one. — Have  you  re- 


182 


turned  the  books  to  my  brother  ?  —  I  have  not  returned  them  yet  to 
him.  —  How  long  do  you  intend  keeping  them  1  —  I  intend  keeping 
them  till  I  have  read  them.  —  How  long  do  you  intend  keeping  my 
horse?  —  I  intend  keeping  it  till  my  father  returns.  —  Have  you 
cleaned  my  knife  ]  —  I  have  not  had  time  yet,  but  I  will  do  it  this 
instant.  —  Have  you  made  a  fire  ?  —  Not  yet,  but  I  will  make  one 
(tDdcrjC*)  immediately.-  —  Why  have  you  not  worked  ]  —  I  have  not 
yet  been  able.  —  What  had  you  to  do  1  —  I  had  to  clean  your  table, 
and  to  mend  your  thread  stockings.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SIXTY-SECOND  LESSON.— %mi  ttnir 


To  run — part,  past  run. 


Thou  runnest — he  runs. 
To  run  away. 
Behind  (a  preposition). 

To  be  sitting  behind  the  oven. 


Caufen*  —  9  el  a  uf  en  (takes 
fctn  for  its  auxiliary).  Imperf. 
lief. 

£>u  Wufll  —  et  Wufl. 

SQBcgtaufcn** 

.ptntet   (governs  the   dative   and 

accusative). 
$tntct  bem  £)fen  ft|en*.    Imperf. 


He  ran  behind  the  oven.  (gt  lief  Ijtntet  ben  jDfen 

Where  is  he  running  to  ?  2Bcf)tn  (a'uft  et  1 

He  is  running  behind  the  house.  (5t  Iciuft  fjmtet  bag 
Where  has  he  run  to  1  2Bo  ift  et 

The  oven,  the  stove,      bet  £)fen  ; 


the  blow,  the  knock, 

the  kick, 

the  stab, 
Have    you    given   that  man 

blow] 

I  have  given  him  one. 
A  blow  with  a  stick, 
beatings  with  a  stick, 
the  stab  of  a  knife, 
the  kick  (with  the  foot), 
a  blow  (with  the  fist), 
blows  (with  the  fist), 
the  sword, 
the  stab  of  a  sword, 
the  sabre, 

To  push — pushed. 


tcr  ©dblag,  bet 
t>ct  <£tpp,'t>ct  Sritt; 
bet  (Sttd). 

©tc   biefcm    Qftanne  etnen 

gegcbcn  ? 

Scl)  fabe  tfjm  ctnen  gcgcben. 
etn  ^d)(ag  nut  betn  ©tocfe  ; 


bet 

bet  Sritt  (nut  bcm 

etn  (£cl)(ag  (nut  bet  gaujt)  ; 


bet  3)egen  ; 
bet  Dcgenfti 
bet 


©topen*  — 
fliep. 


Imperf. 


183 

Thou  pushest  —  he  pushes.  £Ht  ftojkjt  —  cr  fto«t. 

To  beat.  $>rttgcfo  (f<Wagen*). 

Why  do  you  push  him  1  SBorum  ftepcn  ©tc  U)n 

I  push  him,    because    fie  has  3d)  ftope  tfyn,  rcetl  et  mid) 

pushed  me.  fyot. 

Has   this   soldier  given  you  a  £cit    3fyncn    ttejct    (Selbat    ctnen 

blow  ]  <Sd)laa,  gcgcbcn  ? 

He  has  given  me  a  blow  with  (5t  fyat  mit  ctncn  ^d)(acj  nut  tct 

the  fist.  gauft  gcgebcn* 

I  gave  him  a  kick.  3d)  gab  ifym  ctncn  Sritt. 

The  shot  or  the  report  of  a  gun,  tct 
the  shot  of  a  pistol,  fccr 

the  powder,  tag 

the  officer,  tcr  DfllrtCt  ; 

the  shot,  tec  ©d)UJ*. 

To  shoot—  part,  past  jAo^.     ©d)icgcn*  — 
Imperf.  5^0^,  fd)0p. 

(5incn    JUntcnfdjup   t^un*.     Imp. 
6-tncaj(tnte  IcSfdjicfcn*  or 


r  Gtncn  g)tftctcnfc!)up  tfjun*. 
To  fire  a  pistol.  <  ©tnc  g)t(lc(e  loelaffcn*  or 

C     Pen*. 

To  fire  at  some  one.  2Tuf  Swianbcn  fcfttcpcn*. 

I  have  fired  at  a  bird.  3d)  fyafoe  auf  ctncn  SScgct  gcfd)Cffcn. 

9?ad)    Scmantcm   nut    tcr    gltnte 


@tantcnfd)up  nad)  Scmantcm 

tl)un*. 
1  have  fired  (shot)  at  that  bird.     3d)  babe  nad)  ttcfcm  23oa,el  nrit  tcr 


I  have  fired  twice 

I  twice.  srf)  6fl6c  gn?d  giintcnfd)ilffc 

I  have  fired  three  times.  Set)  babe  trci  Jltntcnfd)iitTc  gctljan. 

I  have  fired  several  times.  3cf)  babe  ctntgc  5(tntcnfd)u|Tc  gctfean. 

How  many  times  have  you  fired  1  SBte  t?tc(mat  t)abcn  ©te  gcfc^cffcn  ? 
How  many  times  have  you  fired  SBtc  mclmcil  f)«bcn  ©tc  nac^  ttcfcm 

at  that  bird  1  9Seo,e(  gcfd)Cffcn  ? 

I  have  fired  at  it  several  times.     3$  babe't>erfd)tct>cnc  9^a(  nad)  i^m 

gefdjeffcn. 

I  have  heard  a  shot.  3ct)  ^be  ctncn  g(tntcn[d)up  $ef)6rt« 

He  has  heard  the  report  of  a  <£r  ,i)at  ctnen  ^tftotcnfc^np  cjcl)ort. 

pistol. 
We  have  heard  a  clap  of  thun-  SBtt  b^cn  ctncn 

der.  fjort 

The  clap  of  thunder,          fcet:  3)cnnerfd)fag. 


184 

EXERCISES.       147. 

Do  you  intend  buying  a  carriage? — I  cannot  buy  one,  for  I 
have  not  yet  received  my  money. — Musfl  goto  the  theatre  1 — You 
must  not  go  thither,  for  it  is  very  bad  weather. — Why  do  you  not 
go  to  my  brother  ? — It  does  not  suit  me  .to  go  to  him  ;  for  I  cannot 
yet  pay  him  what  I  owe  him. — Why  does  this  officer  give  this 
man  a  stab  with  his  sword  1 — He  gives  him  a  stab  with  his  sword, 
because  the  man  (fotcfcr)  has  given  him  a  blow  with  the  fist. — 
Which  of  these  two  pupils  begins  to  speak ? — The  one  who  is 
studious  begins  to  speak. — What  does  the  other  do  who  is  not  so] 
— He  also  begins  to  speak,  but  he  is  neither  able  to  write  nor  to 
read. — Does  he  not  listen  to  what  you  tell  him  1 — He  does  not 
listen  to  it,  if  (See  Rule  of  Syntax,  Lesson  XLVII.)  I  do  not  give 
him  a  beating  ((Stec!piu$cl). — What  does  he  do  when  (rocnn)  you 
speak  to  him  1 — He  sits  behind  the  oven,  without  saying  a  word. 
— Where  does  that  dog  run  to? — It  runs  behind  the  house. — 
What  did  it  do  when  you  gave  it  a  beating  1 — It  barked  and  ran 
behind  the  oven. — Why  does  your  uncle  kick  that  poor  dog  ? — 
Because  it  (fcicfct)  has  bitten  his  little  boy. — Why  has  your  servant 
run  away  ? — I  gave  him  a  beating,  so  that  he  has  run  away. — 
Why  do  those  children  not  work? — Their  master  has  given  them 
blows  with  the  fist,  so  that  they  will  not  work  (eirbctten  rvc(tcn). — 
Why  has  he  given  them  blows  with  the  fist? — Because  they  have 
been  disobedient. — Have  you  fired  a  gun  ? — I  have  fired  three 
times. — At  whom  did  you  fire  ? — I  fired  at  a  bird  which  sat  on  a 
tree. — Have  you  fired  a  gun  at  that  man  ? — I  have  fired  a  pistol  at 
him. — Why  have  you  fired  a  pistol  at  him  ? — Because  he  gave  me 
a  stab  with  his  sword.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SIXTY.THIRD  LESSON.— JDm  unfc 
Csction. 

To  cast — past  part.  cast.      ££  c  t  f  c  n  *  —  gcroorfett.     Im- 

perf.  ro  a  t  f. 

Thou  castest — he  casts.  £)u  roirfft  —  cc  nnrft. 

To  cast  an  eye  upon  some   one  (gincn  SMtcf  (t>tc  TCugcn)  nuf  Scmcm* 

or  something.  ten  efccr  euvaS  rocrfvn*. 

Have  you  cast  an  eye  upon  that  $ciben   <Sic   cincn    23lttf  cwf  fctcfeS 

book  ?  JBucf)  gcworfon  ? 

I  have  cast  an  eye  upon  it.  3cf)    babe    cincn    SMicf  bcircwf  Qv^ 

roerfcn.     (See  Obs.  A.   Lesson 
XXIX.) 

To  throw — thrown.        SBctfen*  — 
Threw.  28  a  r  f. 


185 


Have  you  thrown  a  stone  into  £aben  @te  ctncn  (Stem  in  ten  Jtufi 

the  river!  gcnjcrfcn  ? 

I  have  thrown  one  into  it.  3d)    fyabe   ctncn    fytnctn    gcworfcn. 

(Obs.  A.  Lesson  L.) 


Now. 

Where  does  the  stone  lie  now  1    5£o  ftegt  nun  ter  Stein  ? 

It  lies  in  the  river.  <5r  liegt  in  tcm  (tm)  Jlufle. 

To  draw,  to  pull.  3 1  c  f)  e  n  *.  Imperf.  3  c  g. 

To  drag.  S  d)  1  e  p  p  e  n. 

The  evil,  the  pain,  tag  Soft. 

To  hurt.  £[>ef)  tfnw*. 


m   i  !  Scmantcm  cm  8eit  tbim*. 

To  hurt  some  one.  ^  Scn^tvm  »'*  tbun*. 

[  3emflnfccm  JBofcS  sufugcn. 
The  injury,  the  damage,  frcr  (Scfyafccn. 

To  cause  (to  do).  3  u  f  u  g  e  n  /  » c  r  u  r  f  a  d)  e  n . 

To  prejudice  some  one.  3cmant>fni  ©d)at>en  guffigcn. 

It  is  a  pity.  f  C£'5  tjl  <Scl)flti*. 

Have  you  hurt  that  man  1  ^>abcn  <Ste  ticfcm  ?0?anne  etn?a^  ^u 

CetDe  gctban  ? 
I  have  not  hurt  him.  3cb  babe  ifjm    ntd)t§   gu    Ccitc  ge^ 

tfyan. 
Why  have  you  hurt  that  man !     8Q?nnun  f)a(>en  (£te  ttefcm   SKannc 

cm  Setb  getl?an  ! 

I  have  not  hurt  him.  3d)  ()al>e  thin  nid)t<5  ffidfc^  gct^an. 

Does  this  hurt  you?  S&ut  tag  36IU*n  ivcf)  ? 

It  does  hurt  me.  @g  tr)ut  mir  ivcl). 

Have  I  hurt  you  ?  j^aOc  id)  3bncn  ivcb 

You  have  not  hurt  me.  @ic  F;abcn  mir  ntd)t  i 

Harm.  S3  o  f  c  ^. 

Have  I  ever  done  you  any  harm!  £aOc  id)  3f)"?n  je  236'fcS  i 

On  the  contrary.         3m  Q&gentfjetf. 
No,  on  the  contrary,  you   have  Sictn/  tm  ©cgcntftcit/  Sic  ^o6cn  mir 

done  me  good.  ®utc§  gctfjan  (crrviefcn). 

I  have  never  done  harm  to  any  3d)  Ijnbe  nie  3emant>em   ctroag  311 

one.  8cii  gctban. 

To  do  good  to  anybody.  3emnnt>cm    ®utc$    t^un*     (crweis 

fen*). 
To  show — shown.  (Srn?etfv'n*  —  ertxncfen.    Imperf.  cr* 


To  be  good  for  the  health,  to  be  3utrffgltdj 
wholesome.  ©efunD 

That  does  mp  o-ood  5"  ^tc*  tf)ut  "lic  wc^ 

le  good.  £  £.cg  . p  mic  Jutc&a(. 


186 

What  does  the  servant  do  with  £8a$  matf)t  t>cc  23et>tente  nut  feincm 

his  broom  ?  SBcfcn  ? 

He  sweeps  the  room  with  it.         <£t  fcfjtt  t>a$  Simmer  bamtt  au£. 
What  does  he  wish  to  make  out  SQBaS  roitt  cr  au$  fctcjcm  ^>o(jc  mas 

of  this  wood  ?  d)cn  ? 

He  does  not  wish  to  make  any-  <5r  nritt  ntdjtS  fcaranS  macfjcn. 

thing  of  it. 

To  pass  hy  the  side  of  some  one.  2Cn  Semanbem  90t6ctger)en  *. 

I  pass  by  the  side  of  him.  3d)  Qefye  an  ifjm  ocrbet. 

Have  you  passed  by  the  side  of  <Sint>  <£ie  an  metnem  S3vnt>cr  t>or? 

my  brother?  bci()cgangcn? 

I  have  passed  by  the  side  of  him.  3d)  bin  an  ir)m  DOtfocta^angen. 


To  throw  away. 
He  has  thrown  away  his  money.  C£r  feat  fcin  (3>clt>  roea^eroorfen. 

Before.  S3  0  r  (dative  and  accusative). 

To  pass  before  a  place.  £$or  cittern  £)rte  t>ot&ctgcr)en  *• 

To  pass  by  a  place.  tfn  ctncm  £>tte  wcMyfyin  *. 

He  has  passed  before  my  house.  <£t  tft  t)0t  metncm  »&aufe 

gangcn. 
I  have  passed  by  the  theatre.        3d)  bin  am   Sfycatet 

9cn- 
He  has  passed  before  me.  (5t  ift  »or  mtr 

EXERCISES.    148. 

How  many  times  have  you  shot  at  that  bird  ?—  I  have  shot  at  it 
twice.  —  Have  you  killed  it  1  —  I  have  killed  it  at  the  second  shot.— 
Have  you  killed  that  bird  at  the  first  shot  ]  —  I  have  killed  it  at  the 
fourth.  —  Do  you  shoot  at  the  birds  which  you  (see)  upon  the  houses, 
or  at  those  which  you  see  in  the  gardens  1  —  I  shoot  neither  at 
those  which  I  (see)  upon  the  houses  nor  at  those  which  I  see  in  the 
gardens,  but  at  those  which  I  perceive  upon  the  trees.  —  How  many 
times  have  the  enemies  fired  at  us  1  —  They  have  fired  at  us  several 
times.  —  Have  they  killed  any  one  1  —  They  have  killed  no  one.  — 
Have  you  a  wish  to  shoot  at  that  bird  1  —  I  have  a  desire  to  shoot  at 
it.  —  Why  do  you  not  shoot  at  those  birds  ]  —  I  cannot,  for  I  have 
no  powder.  —  When  did  the  officer  fire  ?  —  He  fired  when  his 
soldiers  fired.  —  How  many  birds  have  you  shot  at?  —  I  have  shot 
at  all  that  I  have  perceived,  but  I  have  killed  none,  for  my  powder 
was  not  good. 

149. 

Have  you  cast  an  eye  upon  that  man  1  —  I  have  cast  an  eye  upon 
him.  —  Has  your  uncle  seen  you  ]  —  I  have  passed  by  the  side  of 
him,  and  he  has  not  seen  me,  for  he  has  sore  eyes.  —  Has  that  man 
hurt  you  1  —  No,  Sir,  he  has  not  hurt  me.  —  What  must  one  do  in 
order  to  be  loved  1  —  One  must  do  good  to  those  that  have  done  us 


187 

harm.  —  Have  we  ever  done  you  harm  1  —  No,  you  have  on  the 
contrary  done  us  good.  —  Do  you  do  harm  to  any  one?  —  I  do  no 
one  any  harm  ?  —  Why  have  you  hurt  these  children]  —  I  have  not 
hurt  them.  —  Have  I  hurt  you  ]  —  You  have  not  hurt  me,  but  your 
children  (have).  —  What  have  they  done  to  you!  —  They  dragged 
me  into  your  garden  in  order  to  beat  me.  —  Have  they  beaten  you  ? 
—  They  have  not  beaten  me,  for  I  ran  away.  —  Is  it  your  brother 
who  has  hurt  my  son  1  —  No,  Sir,  it  is  not  my  brother,  for  he  has 
never  hurt  any  one.  —  Have  you  drunk  of  (son)  that  wine  ?  —  I 
have  drunk  of  it,  and  it  has  done  me  good.  —  What  have  you  done 
with  my  book  ?  —  I  have  placed  it  on  the  table.  —  Where  does  it  lie 
now  ]  —  It  lies  upon  he  table.  —  Where  are  my  gloves  ?  —  They  are 
lying  upon  the  chair.  —  Where  is  my  stick]  —  They  (<D)?an)  have 
thrown  it  into  the  river.  —  'Who  has  thrown  it  into  it  1  (See  end 
of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 

- 


SIXTY-FOURTH  LESSON.  —  iier  ttntr 
Cation. 

To  spend  time  in  something.        £>u  3ctt  nut  ctit>a$  jubrin^cn  *  or 

fytnOtincjcn*. 

Imperf.  brought.  23rad)te. 

What  do  you  spend  your  time  in  1  £Bomtt  Ovmcjcn  @tc  btc  3ctt  $u  ? 

Rule.  A  demonstrative,  relative,  or  interrogative  pro- 
noun is  never  used  with  a  preposition,  when  it  relates 
to  an  indeterminate  thing.  Instead  of  the  pronoun,  one 
of  the  adverbs  ba,  too  is  joined  to  the  preposition  ;  thus  : 
baran,  for  an  ba3  ;  woran,  for  an  tt>a$  ;  rooranf,  for  auf 
tt>a3  ;  ttomtt,  for  tntt  tt>a3,  &c.  (See  Obs.  B.  and  C., 
Lesson  LII.) 

I  spend  my  time  in  studying.        3kb  fringe  btc  Sett  nut  ©tubtrcn 
What  has  he  spent  his  time  in  ?  SEomtt  (Jat  ct  btc  3cit 


To  miss,  to  fail.  S3  c  t  f  c  f)  I  c  nx  t)  e  r  a  fc  f  a  u  m  c  n. 


bringcn  ucrabfa'umt  (ocrfcMt). 
3)ct  Jlaufmann  t)«t  lu'rabfaumt  (t»crs 

fc()(t),  ba^  ®e(b  gu  bttn^cn. 

You  have  missed  your  turn.          (Sic  bcibcn  Sbw  3?eibe  t»crfi$f)tt. 
You  have  failed  to  come  to  me  ©ic  bobcn  ocrfcfjtt/  bicfcn  Bergen  jU 
this  morning.  nitr  ^u  fciumcn. 

The  turn,  bic  9lctl)C. 

To  hear.  fy  o  t  C  n. 

To  hear  of  some  one.  £>on  3*numfcem 


188 

* 

Have  you  heard  of  my  friend  1    .^afk'n  €>tc  tten  mctncm  Jrcunfcc  gc? 

Wrt? 

I  have  heard  of  him.  Set)  fea&e  tton  thm  gcfyort. 

Of  whom  have  you  heard  1  93  en  nxm  IjaOcn  ©it*  gefyb'rt  ? 

Have  you  heard  nothing-  new  1     .fra&cn  ©if  nicfyts  9?eue$  gcljert  ? 
I  hear  that  your  father  has  ar-  2>rf)  fyore,  txijj  36?  SSatcr  cmgi'fems 
rived.  men  ift» 

To  assure.  33  C  t  ft  cl)  c  rn   (governs  the  dat.). 

Ofo.  The  verb  tterjTcfyent  requires  the  dative  of  the 
person,  when  followed  by  the  conjunction  ba$,  expressed 
or  understood  ;  otherwise  it  takes  the  accusative  of  the 
person,  and  the  genitive  of  the  thing,  or  the  dative  of 
the  person  and  the  accusative  of  the  thing. 

Set)  wrjidjcre  <Sie  mctncS  SSctfton* 
3cJl'evftcr;ere  S^ncn  mctncn  SBcU 


f  ©  c  f  cf)  c  ft  c  n  *  —  .q  c  f  eft  c  f)  c  n 
rr,    ,  ,  7  Imperf.  a  cfcr;a  f). 

To  happen-happened.        ]  ^  i  b^  c  f  aj(,  A-  n*  -  1»  i  b  c  t  f  a  6= 

[     r  c  n.     Imperf  .  wtt)crfiir;r. 

To  happen,  to  meet  with.       23  c  cj  c  <j  n  c  n  (has    fctn*   for    its 

auxiliary). 

The  fortune,  happiness,     fraS  d5(uc!  ; 

the  misfortune,  fca$  llngtfirf. 

A  great  misfortune  lias  happened.  ©^  iff  ctri  groped  UngUtc!  qcfcr)Cf)Ctt. 
He  has  met  with  a  great  misfor-  (£*  t(t  tbm  ctn  gro^c^  Ungtucf  tcgcgs 

tune.  net  (tvtfcerfafyren). 

I  have  met  with  your  brother.       Set)  bin  S^cm  58rut)cr  tcgcgnct. 

Are  there  many  horses  in  this  vil-  ©tOt  c$  Diet  5)fcrbc  in  ttcfcm  >Dorfe  ? 
lage? 

TAer^.  5)afct6(l  or  ba. 

There  is  not  a  single  good  horse  (£$  gtbt  fctn  ctn^tgcS  gutc^  $fcrb  bas 

there.  fflbft. 

The  village,  fcnS  2)orf  ; 

single,  cingtg. 

Are  there  many  learned  men  in  ©iOt  c^  met  ©ctc^vtc  tn  gran!rctc%  ? 

France  ? 

There  are  a  good  many  there.        (5$  gi&t  fcf)t  t»ictc  bn. 
There  are  no  apples  this  year.      &  gtfct  fcinc  2Ccpfct 

To  Je  of  use,  to  be  good.        £  a  u  g  c  n. 
To  be  good  for  something.  3u  ettvaS  taugcn. 


189 

Of  what  use  is  that  ?  2Be$u  tciUQt  bag  ?    (Ofo.  C.,  Les- 

son   LIL,    and     Rule,     page 
187.) 

It  is  good  for  nothing.  (5$  tauQt  511  md)t$. 

The  good  for  nothing  fellow,         fcct  gaugenid)t$  ; 

the  fault,  the  defect,        tct  gef)Ur. 

Is  the    stuff  which    you  have  3ft  tor  Seng/  ben  @ie  gcfauft 
bought  good  1  gut  1 


EXERCISES.    150. 

I  do  not  see  my  gloves  ;  where  are  they  1  —  They  are  lying  in 
the  river.  —  Who  has  thrown  them  into  it  ?  —  Your  servant,  because 
they  were  no  longer  good  for  anything.  —  What  have  you  done  with 
your  money  ?  —  I  have  bought  a  house  with  it  (franut).  —  What  has 
the,  joiner  done  with  that  wood  1  —  He  has  made  a  table  and  two 
chairs  of  it.  —  What  has  the  tailor  done  writh  the  cloth  which  you 
gave  him  ?  —  He  has  made  clothes  of  it  for  (fur  with  the  accus.) 
your  children  and  mine.  —  What  has  the  baker  done  with  the  flour 
which  you  sold  him  1  —  He  has  made  bread  of  it  for  you  and  me.  — 
Have  the  horses  been  found  1  —  They  have  been  found.  —  Where 
have  they  been  found  1  —  They  have  been  found  behind  the  wood, 
on  this  side  (Lesson  L.)  of  the  river.  —  Have  you  been  seen  by 
anybody  ?  —  I  have  been  seen  by  nobody.  —  Have  you  passed  by 
anybody  1  —  I  passed  by  the  side  of  you,  and  you  did  not  see  me.  — 
Has  any  one  passed  by  the  side  of  you  1  —  No  one  has  passed  by 
the  side  of  me. 

151. 

Do  you  expect  (Lesson  XLVII.)  any  one  ?  —  I  do  expect  my 
cousin,  the  officer.  —  Have  you  not  seen  him  1  —  I  have  seen  him 
this  morning  ;  he  has  passed  before  my  house.  —  What  does  this 
young  man  wait  for  (Obs.  C.,  Lesson  LIL  and  page  187)  ?  — 
He  waits  for  money.  —  Art  thou  waiting  for  anything?  —  I  am 
waiting  for  my  book.  —  Is  this  young  man  waiting  for  his  money  ] 

—  He  is  waiting  for  it.  —  Has   the  king  passed   (in  the  carriage) 
here  (fnct  roorOct)  ?  —  He  has  not  passed  here,  but  before  the  the- 
atre. —  Has  he  not  passed    before  the    new   fountain  ?  —  He    has 
passed  there  ;  but  I  have  not  seen  him.  —  What  do  you  spend  your 
time  in  ?  —  I  spend  my  time  in  studying.  —  What  does  your  brother 
spend  his  time  in  ?  —  He  spends  his  time  in  reading  and  playing.— 
Does  this  man  spend  his  time  in  working  ?  —  He  is  a  good  for 
nothing  fellow  ;  he  spends  his  time  in  drinking  and  playing.— 
What  did  you  spend  your  time  in,  when  you  were  at  Berlin?  — 
When  I  was  at  Berlin,  I  spent  my  time  in  studying,  and  riding  on 
horseback.  —  What  do  your  children  spend  their  time  in  1  —  They 
spend  their  time  in  learning.  —  Can  you  pay  me  what  you  owe  me  ? 

—  I  cannot  pay  it  to  you,  for  our  bailiff  has  failed  to  bring  me  my 


190 

money. — Why  have  you  breakfasted  without  me? — You  failed  to 
come  at  nine  o'clock,  so  that  we  have  breakfasted  without  you. — 
Has  the  merchant  brought  you  the  stuff  which  you  bought  at  his 
house  (-bci  ifym)  ] — He  has  failed  to  bring  it  to  me. — Has  he  sold 
it  to  you  on  credit  ] — He  has  sold  it  to  me,  on  the  contrary,  for 
cash. — Do  you  know  those  men] — I  do  not  know  them;  but  I 
think  that  they  (c$)  are  good  for  nothing  fellows,  for  they  spend 
their  time  in  playing. — Why  did  you  fail  to  come  to  my  father 
this  morning  1 — The  tailor  did  not  bring  me  the  coat  which  he 
promised  me,  so  that  I  could  not  go  to  him. 

152. 

Have  you  heard  of  any  one  1 — I  have  not  heard  of  any  one, 
for  1  have  not  gone  out  this  morning. — Have  you  not  heard  of  the 
officer  who  has  killed  a  soldier  ] — I  have  not  heard  of  him. — Have 
you  heard  of  my  brothers  ] — I  have  not  heard  of  them. — Of  whom 
has  your  cousin  heard  ] — He  has  heard  of  a  man  to  whom  a 
misfortune  has  happened. — Why  have  your  scholars  not  done 
(gcmcid)t)  the  exercises] — I  assure  you  that  they  have  done  them. 
— What  have  you  done  with  my  book  ? — I  assure  you  that  I  have 
not  seen  it. — Have  you  had  my  knives  ] — I  assure  you  that  I  have 
not  had  them. — Has  your  uncle  arrived  already  ] — He  has  not 
arrived  yet. — Will  you  wait  till  he  returns  ] — I  cannot  wait,  for  I 
have  long  letters  to  write. — What  have  you  heard  new  ] — I  have 
heard  nothing1  new. — Has  the  king  assured  you  of  his  assistance1? 
— He  has  assured  me  of  it  (fceffen,  Obs.  Lesson  XVI.). —  What  has 
happened  to  you  ] — A  great  misfortune  has  happened  to  me. — 
What] — I  have  met  with  my  greatest  enemy,  who  has  given  me 
a  blow  with  his  stick.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SIXTY-FIFTH  LESSON.—  JTunf  tmfc  0ecl)?ig$te 


How  long  is  it  since  ?  SOStc  fonqe  tft  e£  fd)0tt,  tap  ? 

It  is  long  since.  (£$  tft  fdjon  langc,  bap. 

Is  it  long  since  you  breakfasted  1  3ft  t*  fd)0n  (ano,c,  bap  <Ste  $efrul)ftucft 

fjaOen  ? 
It  is  not  long  (it  is  a  short  time)  (5$  tft  tied)  mcf}t  (angc,  bap  id)  Qcfuifys 

since  I  breakfasted.  jKuft  fyaOe. 

It  is  a  great  while  since  I  break-  (5$  tft  fcfcon  fefyr  lancjc,  bap  id)  gc- 

fasted.  frubfturft  babe. 

I  breakfasted  an  hour  ago.  3d)  (ja&c  DOE  cinet  (Stunbc  acfrity? 

ftiicft. 

Obs.  A.     In  speaking  of  time,   the  word   ©tiwbe, 


191 

hour,a  must  be  employed,  and  not  the  word  Uljr,  which 
signifies  watch. 

Two  hours  ago.  85  cc  gnxi  (Stunben. 

Is  it  long  since  you  saw  him  ?     3ft  e$  fcben  (ange,  bap  <Ste  ibn  gcfes 

ben  baOen? 
How  long  is  it  since  you  saw  2Bte  tano,e  tft  c£,  tap  <Ste  ijjn  cjefeben 

him  1  baften  1 

I  saw  him  a  year  ago.  3d)  babe  iljn  r>or  etnem  Sab**  gi'fc- 

ben. 

Two  years  ago.  93er  $roci  3abren. 

An  hour  and  a  half  ago.         93or  anbertbatO  (Stunbctt. 
Two  hours  and  a  half  ago.   83er  brtttbato  ©tunben. 

Is   it   long    since    you   are   in  3)1  c$  fd>cn  fano,c,  bap  (Sic  in  grant's 

France  ]  rotcl)  finb  ? 

Have  you  been  long  in  France  1  f  ©tnfc  ©te  fdjcn  (ano,e  in 

rctcb  ? 
He  has  been  in  Paris  these  three  C  f  ©r  tft  fett  brci  Sabtcn  in 

years.  ^  j  @r  iff  (ebon  brct  Sabre  in 

How  long  is   it  since  he  was  gffitc  (ange  tft  c^  bap  cr  bier  war  ? 

here"? 
He  was  here  a  fortnight  ago.        <5r  war  t)0r  mcqcbn  Sagcn  b'^'t. 

It  is  but  a  year  since.  <£g  ift  crft  ctn  3ab^/  bap. 

Obs.  B.     But  is   translated  by  twr  (Lesson  XIX.) 
when  it  relates  to  a  quantity,  and  by  erfl  when  to  time. 

It  is  more  than  a  year  since.        (£$  ift  (anger  al$  ein  3abr/  bap. 
It  is  hardly  six  months  since.       (£$  finb  faum  fcd)S  O^cnatc,  bap. 
It  is  nearly  two  years  since.        ©g  finb  ungcfabr  $oti  Sabre,  bap. 
It  is  almost  a  year  since.  (5$  ift  Mb  cin  3ab^/  bap. 

I  have  been  living  here  these  two  f  3d)  wobnc  fett  ^tvei  3ab^en  bier. 

years. 
How  long  have  you  had  that  f  SKte  (ange  Ijafcen  @ie  ba$ 

horse  ] 
I  have  already  had  it  these  five  f  3d)  ^c&t  t$  fd^cn  ffinf  3 

years. 
It  is  already  more   than   three  (£$  finb  fd)Cn  mcbr  ofe  brct 

months  since.  bap. 

I  have  not  seen  him  for  a  year.     3d)  bate  tbn  in  etnem  3 

gcfcben. 


n,  almost.  25  a  (  b. 

A  few  hours  ago.  23or  etmgcn  ©tunben. 

Half  an  hour  ago.  9Sor  ctncr  balbcn  ©tunbe. 

A  quarter  of  an  hour  ago.     &$or  eincr  23ierte(ftunbe. 

»  5)ie  ©tunbc,  the  hour,  is  a  feminine  noun,  and  has  n  in  the  plural. 


192 

I  have  seen  him  more  than  twen-  3cfj  f)ak  tfjn  nicljr  a($  $tt>atHtcjmal 

ty  times.  gefcfycn. 

More  than  a  hundred  times.          Sftefyt  al$  fyunt>ettma(. 

Since.  ©  c  i  t    (a   preposition  governing 

the  dative). 
How  long  ?  t@cttroann? 

How  long  has  he  been  here  ?        f  ^ctt  roann  tfl  cr  fytct  ? 
These  three  days.  f  (gctt  tret  S 

This  month.  f  ©ctt  ctncm 


To  c0s£.  $  o  f!  c  n  (is  an  impersonal  verb 

governing    the    dative   of   the 
person)* 

How  much  does  this  book  cost  SBiwcl  fcftct  Sfyncn  fctcfcS 


you? 


It  costs  me  three  crowns  and  .£«  gg 

nan*  j      rvt  / 


!5)tefcr  Sifd)  fcpct  t^ 
ben. 
5)tcfcc  SifcJ)  fefkt  ifjm  ficfccn 
ctncn  Oalbcn  ©utbcn. 


jB.  The  adjective  ^at6,  half,  is  declined  when 
before  a  substantive  ;  but  it  is  not  declined  in  fraction- 
al numbers,  as  anbertfyalb,  one  and  a  half,  compounded 
of  ber  cmbere  (jtoette),  the  second,  and  fyalb,  half;  britt* 
halb,  two  and  a  half,  compounded  of  ber  britte,  the 
third,  and  fyalb,  half. 

To  purchase  (to  buy).  <5  i  n  I  a  u  f  c  n. 

"What  have  you  purchased   to-  SSag  ftafifn  ©1C  f)cutc  ctn^cfauft  ? 

day? 
I  have  purchased  three  pair  of  3cl)    fiflt>c    brci    ^?aar  ^cf)ube   un^ 

shoes,  and  two  pair  of  boots.        groci  ^)aar  (Sttcfct  ctngefanft. 
Have  you  purchased   anything  £abcn  ©tc  I;cutc  ctwag  ctmjcfcwft  1 

to-day  1 


C.  The  names  of  \veights,  measures,  and 
quantities,  as  well  as  the  word  SWamt,  man,  meaning  a 
soldier,  are  not  used  in  the  plural,  when  preceded  by 
a  noun  of  number. 


My   father   has   bought  twenty  gflc'tn  Skater  f)at  3tt>an$tg 

pounds  of  sugar.  Sucfcr  cjefruiff. 

Three  quires  of  paper.  >Dm  9ft  It  (6   Rapier. 

A  regiment  of  a  thousand  men.  (Sin  Regiment  t*cn  taufcn^  9JJ  fl  n  n. 


193 

The  pound  (weight),  fc<i$  <pfunt> ; 

the  dozen,  fca6  JDu&cnfo 

the  pair,  fca*  §)aar  ; 

the  quire  of  paper,  fcnS  35  ud)  p 

the  foot  (measure),  frcr  $u$,  fcct  <Sd)Uf) ; 

the  inch,  tev  Sell ; 

the  regiment,  t>a$  $Hc$imcnt ; 

the  ring,  bet 

the  picture,  fcas  ( 

EXERCISES.    153. 

Have  you  ever  been  in  this  village  ? — I  have  been  there  several 
times. — Are  there  good  horses  in  it  ? — There  is  not  a  single  one  in 
it. — Have  you  ever  been  in  that  country  1 — I  have  been  there  once. 
— Are  there  many  learned  men  there  ? — There  are  many  there,  but 
they  spend  their  time  in  reading. — Are  there  many  studious  chil- 
dren in  that  village  ? — There  are  some,  but  there  are  also  others 
who  will  not  study. — Are  the  peasants  of  this  village  able  to  read 
and  write  ] — Some  are  able  to  read,  others  to  write  and  not  to  read, 
and  many  both  to  read  and  to  write;  there  are  a  few  who  are 
neither  able  to  read  nor  to  write. — Have  you  done  the  exercises  1 — 
We  have  done  them. — Are  there  any  faults  in  them  ? — There  are 
no  faults  in  them,  for  we  have  been  very  assiduous. — Has  your 
friend  many  children? — He  has  only  one,  but  who  is  a  good  for 
nothing  fellow,  for  he  will  not  study. — In  what  does  he  spend  his 
time  1 — He  spends  his  time  in  playing  and  running. — Why  does 
his  father  not  punish  him? — He  has  not  the  courage  to  punish 
him. — What  have  you  done  with  the  stuff  which  you  bought? — 
I  have  thrown  it  away,  for  it  was  good  for  nothing. — Have  you 
thrown  away  your  apples  ] — I  tasted  (them),  and  found  them  very 
good,  so  that  I  have  eaten  them. 

154. 

Have  you  been  long  in  Paris  ? — These  four  years. — Has  your 
brother  been  long  in  London1? — He  has  been  there  these  ten  years. 
— -Is  it  long  since  you  dined  ? — It  is  long  since  I  dined,  but  not 
long  since  I  supped. — How  long  is  it  since  you  supped  ? — It  is 
two  hours  and  a  half. — Is  it  long  since  you  received  a  letter  from 
your  father  ] — It  is  not  long  since  I  received  one. — How  long  is  it 
since  you  received  a  letter  from  your  friend  who  is  in  Germany] — 
It  is  three  months  since  I  received  one. — Is  it  long  since  you  spoke 
to  the  man  whose  son  has  lent  you  money  1 — It  is  not  long  since  I 
spoke  to  him. — Is  it  long  since  you  saw  your  parents  1 — It  is  a 
great  while  since  I  saw  them, — Has  the  son  of  my  friend  been 
living  long  in  your  house  ? — He  has  been  living  there  a  fortnight 
(r»icr$d)n  SiU]0- — How  long  have  you  had  these  books  1 — I  have 
Jiad  them  these  three  months.— How  long  is  it  since  your  cousin 
set  cut? — It  is  more  than  a  month  since  he  set  out. — What  is  be- 
9 


194 

come  of  the  man  who  spoke  English  so  well  ? — I  do  not  know 
what  is  become  of  him,  for  it  is  a  great  while  since  I  saw  him. — - 
Is  it  long  since  you  heard  of  the  officer  who  gave  your  friend  a 
stab  with  his  sword? — It  is  more  than  a  year  since  I  heard  of  him. 
— How  long  have  you  been  learning  German  ? — I  have  been  learn- 
ing it  only  these  three  months. — Are  you  already  able  to  speak  it? 
— You  see  that  I  arn  beginning  to  speak  it. — Have  the  children  of 
the  French  noblemen  been  learning  it  long  ? — They  have  been 
learning  it  these  five  years,  and  they  do  not  yet  begin  to  speak. — 
Why  can  they  not  speak  it  1 — They  cannot  speak  it,  because  they 
are  learning  it  badly. — Why  do  they  not  learn  it  well? — Tney 
have  not  a  good  master,  so  that  they  do  not  learn  it  well. 

155. 

Is  it  long  since  you  saw  the  young  man  who  learnt  German  with 
(bet)  the  same  master  with  whom  we  learnt  it  ? — I  have  not  seen 
him  for  nearly  a  year. — How  long  is  it  since  that  child  ate? — It 
ate  a  few  minutes  (Lesson  XL VII.  Note  d)  ago. — How  long  is  it 
since  those  children  drank  1 — They  drank  a  quarter  of  an  hour  ago. 
— How  long  has  your  friend  been  in  Spain  1 — He  has  been  there 
this  month. — How  often  have  you  seen  the  king  1 — I  saw  him  more 
than  ten  times  when  I  was  in  Paris. — When  did  you  meet  my 
brother  1 — I  met  him  a  fortnight  ago. — Where  did  you  meet  him  1 — 
In  (2(uf)  the  great  square  ($)la£)  before  the  theatre. — Did  he  do  you 
any  harm  ? — He  did  me  no  harm,  for  he  is  a  very  good  boy. — Has 
your  son  long  been  able  to  read  ? — These  two  days  only. — With 
(SBct)  whom  has  he  learnt  it? — He  has  learnt  it  with  (bci)  the  Ger- 
man tutor. — How  long  have  you  been  spending  your  time  in  study- 
ing ? — Nearly  these  twenty  years. — Have  you  purchased  anything 
to-day  ? — I  have  purchased  something. — What  have  you  bought  ? 
— I  have  bought  three  casks  of  wine  and  thirty  pounds  of  sugar. — 
Have  you  not  bought  any  stockings  ? — I  have  bought  nine  pair  of 
them. — Have  you  also  bought  handkerchiefs  ? — I  have  bought  two 
dozen  of  them. — Why  have  you  not  bought  gold  rings  ? — I  could 
not  buy  anything  more,  for  I  had  no  more  money. — Are  there  many 
soldiers  in  your  country  ? — There  is  a  regiment  of  three  thousand 
men  there. — How  long  have  I  kept  your  cousin's  money  ? — You 
have  kept  it  almost  a  year.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SIXTY-SIXTH  LESSON.— gedjs  tmb 
Cation. 

Just  now.  (So  often. 

I  have  just  seen  your  brother.       3cb  fabc  fo  c&cn  Sfacn  93ruter 

fycn. 


195 

He  has  just  written.  <5r  fycit  fo  cK'n  0>'fcf)riekn. 

The  men  have  just  arrived.  5)ie  Scute  fint>  fo  cfccn  ongcfommctu 

To  spend  money.  1(  \\  6  9  c  ft  c  n  *. 

How  much  have  you  spent  to-  £Biewd  fyofcen  <Sic  fycutc  au£a,ca,el>cn  ? 
day? 

To  spend  (to  eat,  to  consume).  SSer^efyrcn. 

What  am  I  to  pay  1  t  %&**  We  id)  t>er$ef)rt  ? 

How  much  has  he  spent  at  the  }  SBtcstcl   fyat   cr  feet  fcem   SSittljc 

inn  1  t>crjcf)rt  ? 

He  has  fifty  crowns  a  month  to  f  (£r  ()at  ten  SGRenat  funftig 

live  upon.  $u 


To  squander,  to  dissipate,     95  C  r  f  c^  W  C  n  t)  C  n. 
£0  lavish. 

He    has    squandered    all    his  (5t  r)at  fctn  gan^c^  SScrmogcn 

wealth.  fdbrccnbet. 

The  landlord,  the  innkeeper,         fcct  SBirtr)  ; 
the  wealth,  the  fortune,  tag  SSermocjcn  ; 

entire,  whole.  gartj. 

rf  3Bof)cr  fint)  ©tc?    SKo  ftnb 
What  countryman  are  you  ]      <      t)cr  ? 

C  935ag  fur  cin  Sanb^mann8  fint) 

From  Venice.          85on  (au^)  SScncbtg.     • 
From  London.        9Son  (au$)  Sonbon. 
I  am  from  Dresden.        3d)  bin  aus  £)rc5t)en. 

Obs.  A.  The  syllable  er  is  the  characteristic  termi- 
nation of  the  masculine  gender,b  and  signifies  the  per- 
son that  performs  or  is  accustomed  to  perform  the  thing 
expressed  by  the  verb.  This  syllable  joined  to  the 
name  of  a  town  or  country,  forms  a  substantive  de- 
noting the  man  born  in  such  a  town  or  country.  Ex. 

He  is  a  saddler,  cr  tft  cin  <£cittfcr  ; 

a  baker,  cin  S3d'c!cr  ;c 

a  locksmith,  cin  @d)f  offer  ; 

the  lock, 

the  saddle,  fccr  ( 

the  key,  tcr  ©d)tuffcl. 

*  The  plural  of  ber  ^anblmann,  the  countryman,  one  of  the  same  country, 
is  Sanbgleute.  Its  feminine  is  £anb3ntaittiin,  country-woman,  a'  woman  of  the 
same  country.  This  word  must  not  be  mistaken  for  ber  ^anbmann,  the  coun- 
tryman, farmer,  rustic,  the  plural  of  which  is  £anbleute. 

b  For  this  reason  most  substantives  of  this  termination  are  of  the  mascu- 
line gender. 

c  Derived  from  fccicfen,  to  bake. 


196 


f  <5r  iff  ein  SScrfmer. 
<Stnb  (Sic  ein  (Snglcmbcr  1 

femmcn  ©te  ? 
femmcn  @ic  foer  ? 
femme  f 


He  is  from  Berlin. 

Are  you  an  Englishman] 

Whence  do  you  come  ? 
I  come  from  Paris. 

C  £>  t  e  n  c  n  (governs  the  dative). 
To  serve,  to  wait  upon.          <  &$  c  b  t  c  n  c  n  (governs  the   accu- 

(      sative). 
To  serve  some  one,  or  to  wait  3  C  m  o  n  b  C  m  b  t  C  n  e  n. 

upon  some  one. 
To  be  in  one's  service.  S3  C  t  3  C  m  a  n  b  C  m  b  i  e  n  C  n. 

Has  he  been  in  your  service  ?       £at  er  bci  3ftncn  gebtcnt  ? 

Does  he  serve  you  well  1  JBebtent  cr  <Sie  gut  ? 

He  serves  me  very  well.  (£r  fccbtent  mid)  feljr  gut. 

This  is  to  no  purpose  (of  no  use),  f  3)fl6  blent  $u  ntd)t*. 

Do  you  choose  any  of  it?  f  ^tann  id)  3^ncn  bamit  bienen  ? 

I  do  not  like  it.  )  .  ^     .L  .„     .      .  fL     v. 

>  f  S)amtt  ift  nur  ntd)t  gebtcnt. 


It  will  not  do  for  me. 

To  spoil. 

Thou  spoilest — he  spoils. 

You  have  spoiled  my  book. 
My  book  is  spoiled, 

Has  he  spoiled  my  hat  ? 

To  damage. 

That  hat  fits  you  well. 
How  does  this  hat  fit  me  1 
It  does  not  fit  you. 

Most  lovely,  charming. 

Admirably. 

To  dress,  to  fit,  to  sit  well. 


fSScr  bet  t>cn*    (verb.  act.   and 
\      neut.  irreg.). 

j  3  u  <S  d)  a  n  b  c  n  m  a  d)  c  n  (a  vul- 
L     gar  expression). 

£)u  tterbirOftx  cr  tu'rbtrM.     (Imp. 


f)atcn  mcin  SBud) 

58ud)  tft  ocrbcrOcn 
ben  gemad)t). 
t  cr  meinen  ^>u 

gcmad)t)  ? 


S5efd)abtgcn. 

SDtefcr  «&ut  ftc^t  3bncn  put. 
SOBtc  ftc^t  nur  btcfcr  ^ut  ? 
(5r  ftc^t  35«cn  ntd)t  gut. 


($u 


SBunberfdjcn. 
£  I  e  t  b  e  n. 


Obs.  B.  The  verb  ffetben,  when  it  signifies  to  jit,  to 
sit  well,  is  neuter ;  but  when  it  means  to  dress,  to  clothe, 
it  is  active,  and  governs  the  accusative  in  both  signi- 
fications. 

d  SlUer  is  the  genitive  plural  of  the  word  all,  all.     It  is  sometimes  thus 
joined  to  the  superlative  to  give  it  more  strength. 


107 

That  hat  fits  you  admirably  well.  -Dtefcr  4Mit  Rctbet  Sic  \ 

That  coat  fits  him.  2)tefer  JKccf  Hettet  U;n  gut. 

My  father  clothes  me.  9}?ctn  Stater  fteibet  mid). 

God  clothes  the  poor.  ©ctt  fteibet  btc  TCrmen. 

The  man  with  the  blue  coat.  2)er  93iann  nut  bem  Wauen  .fttcibe. 

How  was  the  child  dressed?  flGte  roar  bas  ^inb  gcfletbet? 

It  was  dressed  in  green.  f  (Sg  roar  griin  gefleibct. 


How  high  ]  of  what  height  ]        2Bte  fjocf)  ? 
H6w  deep  ]  of  what  depth  ]         SBic  ticf  ? 
Of  what  height  is  his  house  ?        £Bte  Ijed)  ift  fi'tn 
It  is  nearly  thirty  feet  high.          &  ift  ungefahr   breigig  guff 

(Lesson  LXV.  Obs.  C.) 

Trwe.  SK  a  fj  r. 

Is  it  true  that  his  house  has  been  3ft  c$  nxifjr,  tap  fcin  »&oug   at>gcs 

burnt  1  Orannt  i)t  ? 

It  is  true.  (£•$  ift  roaljr. 

Is   it  not]  (meaning,   Is  it  not  f  9^td)t  wafjr  ? 
true  1) 

The  philosopher,  tcr  aKcftwctfc,  bcc  >pl)ttofeplj   (gen. 

en). 

EXERCISES.       156. 

Who  is  the  man  who  has  just  spoken  to  you  ? — He  is  a  learned 
man. — What  has  the  shoemaker  just  brought] — He  has  brought  the 
boots  and  shoes  which  he  has  made  us. — Who  are  the  men  that 
have  just  arrived  ] — They  are  philosophers. — Of  what  country  are 
they] — They  are  from  London. — WTho  is  the  man  who  has  just 
started  ? — He  is  an  Englishman,  who  has  squandered  away  (»cr« 
fd)n>cnbct)  all  his  fortune  in  France. — What  countryman  are  you  ] — 
I  am  a  Spaniard,  and  my  friend  is  an  Italian. — Wilt  thou  go  for 
the  locksmith  1 — Why  must  I  go  for  the  locksmith  ] — He  (*Dcvfct()c) 
must  make  me  a  key,  for  I  have  lost  the  one  belonging  to  my  room 
(ben  mcincS  Simmers). — Where  did  your  uncle  dine  yesterday  ? — 
He  dined  at  the  innkeeper's. — How  much  did  he  spend  1 — He  spent 
three  florins. — How  much  has  he  a  month  to  live  upon  ? — He  has 
two  hundred  florins  a  month  to  live  upon.— Must  I  go  for  the  sad- 
dler]— You  must  go  for  him,  for  he  must  mend  the  saddle. — Have 
you  seen  any  one  at  the  market  ] — I  have  seen  a  good  many  people 
there. — How  were  they  dressed  ] — Some  were  dressed  in  blue, 
some  in  green,  some  in  yellow,  and  several  in  red. 

157. 

Who  are  those  men  ] — The  one  who  is  dressed  in  grey  is  my 
neighbour,  and  the  one  with  the  black  coat  the  physician,  whose 
eon  has  given  my  neighbour  a  blow  with  a  stick. — Who  is  the  manf 


198 

with  the  green  coat?  —  He  is  one  of  my  relations.  —  Are  you  from 
Berlin?  —  No,  I  am  from  Dresden.  —  How  much  money  have  your 
children  spent  to-day  ]  —  They  have  spent  J^ut  little  ;  they  have 
spent  but  one  florin.  —  Does  that  man  serve  you  well  1  —  He  does 
serve  me  well  ;  but  he  spends  too  much.  —  Are  you  willing  to  take 
this  servant1?  —  I  am  willing  to  take  him  if  he  will  serve  me.  —  Can 
I  take  this  servant  1  —  You  can  take  him,  for  he  has  served  me  very 
well.  —  How  long  is  it  since  he  (first)  served  you1?  —  It  is  but  two 
months  since.  —  Has  he  served  you  long  ]  —  He  has  served  me  (for) 
six  years.  —  How  much  did  you  give  him  a  year  (t>e$  Sabre*)  ?  —  I 
gave  him  five  hundred  francs  without  clothing  him.  —  Did  he  board 
(7(9)  with  (bet)  you]  —  He  did  board  with  me.  —  What  did  you  give 
him  to  eat?  —  I  gave  him  whatever  (son  allem,  nxi£)  1  ate.  —  Were 
you  pleased  with  him  1  —  I  was  much  (fchr)  pleased  with  him.  (See 
end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 

- 

SIXTY-SEVENTH  LESSON.—  Quben    ttttfc    s 
Section. 

To  trust  with.  tfnoerttctuen. 

To  entrust,  to  confide,  to  commit  SScrtraucn. 
in  confidence. 

1  trust  you  with  my  money.          3cf)  ttertraue  3bnen  niein  ®clb  an. 
He  has  trusted  me  with  his  mo-  (£*r  fyat  mir  fetn  ©clt>  cmscrtrcwt. 

ney. 
I  entrust  you  with  a  secret.          3cb    ttcttrcwe    Sfyncn    etn 

ntp. 
To  unbosom  one's  self  to  one.      f  (Std)  Scntonbem  ucrtroucn. 


The  secret,  ba£  ©efycimmp  (plur.  ea). 

To  keep  anything  secret.  (£tn?a£  gebcim  fyaltcn. 

Imperf.  fytctt. 

I  have  kept  it  secret.  3d)  fjabe  eg  gefyei 

Secret  (adjective).          ©e&eim. 

To  pity.  23  c  f  (  a  9  c  n. 

With  all  my  heart.  f  93  en  gcm$cm  jbcrgcn. 

Do  you  pity  that  man]  SBcHogcn  (Sic  fcicfcn  9)i 

I  do  pity  him  with  all  my  heart.     3ct)   bcHcige  ifjn   »on   gangcm  $MZ 

5cn. 

To  offer  —  offered.          2£n(>teten*  —  angebotcn. 
Imperf.  b  o  t. 

I  offer  it  you.  3d)  btctc  c^  3^ncn  an. 

R  Neuter  nouns  terminating  in  jj,  add  e  to  all  cases  of  the  plural  without 
*  softening  the  radical  vowel. 


169 

From.  Slit    (a   preposition    governing 

the  accusative). 


c  C  (gorge  fiic  ctrcaS  ttaacn 

To  take  care  of  something.  nc(mJcn 


;  ncfymen*. 


Neut. 


To  take  care  of  it.  ifr      '*  fcforgen. 


To  take  care  of  the  hat.  £>cn  £ut  in  2Ccf)t  ncfjmcn*. 

Imperf.  ncibm. 

Do  you  take  care  of  your  clothes?  9?cfjmcn  <£te  Sbte  £(dt>ct  in  2(d)t? 
I  do  take  care  of  them.  t  3d)  tiefyme  fie  in  2Cd)t. 


A  There  are  in  German  many  substantives, 
adverbs  and  other  words  and  expressions  which  form 
one  signification  with  the  verb,  as  :  mt3tt>enbtg  lemen,  to 
learn  by  heart  ;b  gem  effen*,  to  like  to  eat  (Lesson 
LIV.)  ;  fcf)iilbig  fein*,  to  owe  (Lesson  XL  VII.),  &c.  These 
are  placed  exactly  like  the  separable  particles  (Lesson 
XXV.),  but  are  never  joined  to  the  verb. 

C  SBotten  <Ste   fur    mcin  9>fcrb   fcv* 
Will  you  take  care  of  my  horse  ?  <      gen  ? 

(  SBcttcn  <Sic  mcin  ?>fcrb  fccforgcn  ?c 

Iwillta^caroofit. 


To  take  care.  ©orgcn, 

The  merchant  of  Hamburg.          2)ct  ^amburget  &aufmann. 


B.  The  genitive  of  names  of  towns  is  gener- 
ally expressed  in  German  by  an  adjective.  This  is 
formed  by  adding  the  syllable  et  to  the  name,  and  is 
indeclinable.  Ex. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

f  NOM.  ter  Seipjiger  ©tubent    —  bfe^     ?eip* 
The  student  1  GEN,  beg  8etp$tger  ©tubenten  —  ber  I    jtger 
of  Leipzic.  ]  DAT.  bent  ?etp$tger  ©tubenten—  ben  [    ©tit^ 
i^Acc.  ben  ?etpjiger  ©tubenten  —  bt'ej  betttem 

*  This  and  the  above   examples  show  that  such  a  construction  is  not  alto- 
gether unusual  in  English. 
c  The  first  of  these  two  expressions  is  the  best. 

| 


200 

The  citizen  (burgess)  of  London,  tcr  Conbencr 

the  citizen  of  Paris,  tor  ^attfet  S3urgcr  ; 

the  beer  of  Strasburg,  t>a£  fetrapOurger 


EXERCISES.  158. 

Are  there  many  philosophers  in  your  country1?  —  There  are  as 
many  there  as  in  yours.  —  How  does  this  hat  fit  me  1  —  It  fits  you 
very  well.  —  How  does  this  hat  fit  your  brother  1  —  It  fits  him  ad- 
mirably. —  Is  your  brother  as  tall  (fltcjj)  as  you  ?  —  He  is  taller  than 
I,  but  I  am  older  than  he.  —  How  high  is  this  man  ?  —  He  is  five 
feet,  four  inches  high.  —  How  high  is  the  house  of  our  landlord?—^ 
It  is  sixty  feet  high.  —  Is  your  well  deep  ]  —  Yes,  Sir,  for  it  is  fifty 
feet  deep.  —  How  long  have  those  men  been  in  your  father's  service  ? 

—  They  have  been  in  his  service  already  more  than  three  years.  — 
Has  your  cousin  been  long  at  Paris?  —  He  has  been  there  nearly 
six  years.  —  Who  has  spoiled  my  knife  ?  —  Nobody  has  spoiled  it, 
for  it  was  spoiled  when  we  were  in  want  of  it.  —  Is  it  true  that  your 
uncle  has  arrived  1  —  I  assure  you  that  he  has  arrived.  —  Is  it  true 
that  the  king  has  assured  you  of  his  assistance?  —  I  assure  you  that 
it  is  true.  —  Is  it  true  that  the  six  thousand  men  whom  we  were  ex- 
pecting have  arrived  ?  —  I  have  heard  so.  —  Will  you  dine  with  us  ? 

—  I  cannot  dine  with  you,  for  I  have  just  eaten.  —  Will  your  brother 
drink  a  glass  (of)  wine  j  —  He  cannot  drink,  for,  I  assure  you,  he 
has  just  drunk.  —  Do  you  throw  away  your  hat  1  —  I  do  not  throw  it 
away,  for  it  fits  me  admirably.  —  Does  your  friend  sell  his  coat  ]  — 
He  does  not  sell  it,  for  it  fits  him  most  beautifully  .  —  There  are  many 
learned  men  in  Berlin,  are  there  not  (ntcfyt  roafyr)  1  asked  Cuvier  a 
man  from  Berlin  (fccr  33crttncr).     Not  so  many  as  when  you  were 
there,  answered  the  man  from  Berlin. 

159. 

Why  do  you  pity  that  man?  —  I  pity  him,  because  he  has  trusted 
a  merchant  of  Hamburg  with  his  money,  and  the  man  (fctcfcr)  will 
not  return  it  to  him.  —  Do  you  trust  this  citizen  with  anything1?  —  I 
do  not  trust  him  with  anything.  —  Has  he  already  kept  anything 
from  you  ]  (SOncn  ctnxiS  befyaltcn).  —  I  have  never  trusted  him  with 
anything,  so  that  he  has  never  kept  anything  from  me.  —  Will  you 
trust  my  father  with  your  money  ?  —  I  will  trust  him  with  it.  —  What 
secret  has  my  son  entrusted  you  with  1  —  I  cannot  entrust  you  with 
that  with  which  he  has  entrusted  me,  for  he  has  desired  (bitten*) 
me  to  keep  it  secret.  —  Whom  do  you  entrust  with  your  secrets  ?  — 
I  entrust  nobody  with  them,  so  that  nobody  knows  them.  —  Has 
your  brother  been  rewarded  "?  —  He  has  on  the  contrary  been  pun- 
ished ;  but  I  beg  you  to  keep  it  secret,  for  no  one  knows  it.  —  What 
has  happened  to  him  ?  —  I  will  tell  you  what  has  happened  to  him, 
if  you  promise  me  to  keep  it  secret.  —  Do  you  promise  me  to  keep 
it  secret  ?  —  I  promise  you,  for  I  pity  him  with  all  my  heart.  (See 
end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


201 

SIXTY-EIGHTH  LESSON.—  ftdjt  tmb 
Cation. 


Each  man.  Sefcet  937cnfd). 

Each  child.  ScK'S  £tnl>. 

Every  one.  £set>ermcmn. 

The  whole  world.  £)ic  gan$e  SEBctt. 

5.  A.     Sefcermatttt  adds  3  in  the  genitive,  and  re- 
mains invariable  in  the  other  cases,  thus  : 


fNoM.  3eberntcmiu 

^  I  GEN.  S 

Every  one,  every  body.    J  DAT 

l^ 


Every  thing  (meaning  all).     ?C  (  (  e  £. 

Obs.  B.     3ltte£,  all,  taken  substantively,  is  put  in  the 
neuter  gender  singular.     Ex. 

He  knows  every  thing.  (£r  form  ntt 

I  have  seen  all.  3>cf)  tflOc  atl 

He  is  fit  for  any  thing.  f  (^c  ift  311  allem 


5.   C.  ©CWj,  whole,  entire,  is  used  with  the  article, 
but  alt,  all,  is  never  used  with  it. 

The  whole  town.  £)tc  $an$e  <S>tabt. 

The  whole  society.  £)te  gan^c  ©cfctlfcfeaft. 


The  walk  (meaning  the  place  to 

walk  in), 

the  concert,  Gcncert ; 

the  walk  (meaning  the  walking),  fret  ' 

There  were  many  people  in  the  (5$  roaten  met  Scute  cwf  t>cm 

walk  (at  the  concert).  gtergcmgc  (tm  (Concert). 

I  have  cut  his  finger.  f  3d)  fycibc  tfyn  in  ten  ^ingct:  go; 

fcfynttten. 

He  has  cut  my  leg.  f  (Sr  fyat  mid^  in  t»a^  SBetn  gcfcfyntt- 

ten. 

He  has  cut  off  his  finger.  (5r  ()at  tr)m  ben  Jtnger  abcjefcf)nitten. 

He  has  cut  it  off.  (£r  fjat  if)n  i^m  a(>cjcfd)nttten. 

Entirely.  (Sangt'td). 

To  bring  along  with  one.       93i  1 1 6  r  t  n  9  c  n  *. 

Have  you  come  quite  alone  !        ©irifc  ©tc  gang  allein  gcfcmmcn  ? 
9* 


202 

Obs.  D.  Slttettt,  as  a  conjunction,  has  the  same  signifi- 
cation as  aber,  but  ;  as  an  adverb  it  signifies  alone. 

No,  I  have  brought  all  my  men  9?ein,  id)  fjafte  atle  metnc  Scute  mite 

along  with  ine.  o,ct>racf)t. 
He  has  brought  all  his  men  along  (5r  fyat  alle  feine  Scute  mita,c&tad)t. 

with  him. 

Have  you  brought  your  brother  £afccn   ®te    Sfyrcn   23tut>et  mttcjes 

along  with  you  1  fctad)t? 

I  have  brought  him  along  with  3d)  fyabe  ifyn  mitcjcfcradjt. 

me. 

Have  you  told  the  groom  to  bring  £abcn  ®ie  bent  @tattfned)t  cjefa^t,  nur 

me  the  horse  1  t>a$  ^fcrb  ^u  bcincjcn  ? 

The  groom,  tct  @tallfnccl)t 


tn    bcr    0la^c    (go- 
verns the  genitive). 
Near.  <  23  c  i  (governs  the  dative). 

I  92  c  6  c  n  (governs  the  dative  and 
[      accus.). 

Near  me.  5?ct»cn  nut. 

f  JBci  t>cm 
Near  the  fire.  1  Km  $eucr. 

[  9Sor  bcm  Jcucr. 

Near  the  castle.  Unruett  t»c^  (Sd^lcffc 

Where  do  you  live  1  ££o  n?o()ncn  <Sic  ? 

I  live  near  the  castle.  3ct)  roofjne  unrvcit 

What  are  you  doing  near  the  fire  ?  2Ba$  tF)im  (Ste  bci  t)cm  :gcucr  ? 

To  fall.  g  all  en  (takes  fern  for  its  auxi- 

liary). 

Thou  fallest—  he  falls.  £)u  fallft  —  er  faHt. 

Fallen.  ©efoUen. 

Fell  (Imperf.).  gieC. 

To  </ro/?  (meaning  to  let  fall),  fallen  laffcn*. 


Has  he  dropt  anything  ]  ^>at  ct  ctwa^  fallen  laffen  ? 

He  has  not  dropt  anything.  (£r  ^cit  ntc^t^  fallen  lafien. 


To  hinder,  to  prevent.  SSe 

You  hinder  me  from  sleeping.      (Sic  ttctfyinfcern  micl)  $u  fcf)tafen. 

EXERCISES.      160. 

Whom  do  you  pity  1  —  I  pity  your  friend.  —  Why  do  you  pity 
him  ?  —  I  pity  him  because  he  is  ill.  —  Do  the  merchants  of  Berlin 

•  $>a$  <Sd)lof?,  the  castle,  is  declined  exactly  like  ba$  <£d)lo£,  the  lock. 


203 

pity  anybody  ] — They  pity  nobody. — Do  you  offer  me  anything  ? — 
I  offer  you  a  gold  ring. — What  has  my  father  offered  you  1 — He 
has  offered  me  a  fine  book. — To  whom  do  you  offer  those  fine 
horses  ] — I  offer  them  to  the  French  officer. — Do  you  offer  that  fine 
carriage  to  my  uncle  1 — I  do  offer  it  to  him. — Dost  thou  offer  thy 
pretty  little  dog  to  these  good  children  ? — I  do  offer  it  to  them,  for 
I  love  them  with  all  my  heart. — What  have  the  citizens  of  Stras- 
burg  offered  you  1 — They  have  offered  me  good  beer  and  salt-meat 
(gefcifjcncS  JfU'tfd)). — To  whom  do  you  offer  money  ! — I  offer  some  to 
those  Parisian  citizens,  who  have  assured  me  of  their  assistance. — 
WTill  you  take  care  of  my  clothes  ] — I  will  take  care  of  them. — Wilt 
thou  take  care  of  my  hat  1 — I  will  take  care  of  it. — Are  you  taking 
care  of  the  book  which  I  lent  you  1 — I  am  taking  care  of  it. — Will 
this  man  take  care  of  my  horse  ? — He  will  take  care  of  it. — Who 
will  take  care  of  my  servant  ? — The  landlord  will  take  care  of  him. 
— Does  your  servant  take  care  of  your  horses  ? — He  does  take  care 
of  them. — Is  he  taking  care  of  your  clothes  ? — He  is  taking  care  of 
them,  for  he  brushes  them  every  morning. — Have  you  ever  drunk 
Strasburg  beer  ? — I  have  never  drunk  any. — Is  it  long  since  you  ate 
Leipzic  bread  ] — It  is  almost  three  years  since  I  ate  any. 

161. 

Have  you  hurt  my  brother-in-law  ? — I  have  not  hurt  him ;  but  he 
has  cut  my  finger. — What  has  he  cut  your  finger  with  1 — With  the 
knife  which  you  had  lent  him. — Why  have  you  given  that  boy  a 
blow  with  your  fist  ? — Because  he  hindered  me  from  sleeping. — 
Has  anybody  hindered  you  from  writing  ] — Nobody  has  hindered 
me  from  writing;  but  I  have  hindered  somebody  from  hurting  your 
cousin. — Has  your  father  arrived  ] — Every  body  says  that  he  has 
arrived ;  but  I  have  not  seen  him  yet. — Has  the  physician  hurt 
your  son  ? — He  has  hurt  him,  for  he  has  cut  his  finger.— Have  they 
cut  off  this  man's  leg  1 — They  have  cut  it  off  entirely. — Are  you 
pleased  with  your  servant  ? — I  am  much  (fefjt)  pleased  with  him, 
for  he  is  fit  for  anything. — What  does  he  know? — He  knows  every 
thing. — Can  he  ride  on  horse-back  1 — He  can. — Has  your  brother 
returned  at  last  from  Germany  ? — He  has  returned  thence,  and  has 
brought  you  a  fine  horse. — Has  he  told  his  groom  to  bring  it  to  me  ? 
— He  has  told  him  to  bring  it  to  you. — WThatdo  you  think  (fagcn)  of 
(tti)  that  horse  7 — I  think  (fage)  that  it  is  a  fine  and  good  one,  and 
(I)  beg  you  to  lead  it  into  the  stable. — In  what  did  you  spend  your 
time  yesterday  ? — I  went  to  the  public  walk  (t>er  ©pcijtcrplog),  and 
afterwards  to  the  concert. — Were  there  many  people  in  the  public 
walk  ? — There  were  many  people  there. 

16*2. 

What  did  you  see  at  the  concert  ? — I  saw  many  people. — What 
did  you  do  after  the  concert? — I  went  to  the  inn  (t>a$  SOBtrtfySfyau*) 
in  order  to  dine. — Have  you  dined  well  1 — I  have  dined  very  well, 


204 

but  I  have  spent  too  much. — How  much  have  you  spent  1 — I  have 
spent  nearly  two  florins  and  a  half. — Is  the  fare  (©pctfet  nwn)  good 
at  your  inn  ? — It  is  very  good ;  but  every  thing  is  so  dear,  that  one 
must  be  rich  to  dine  there. — Have  you  dropt  anything  ] — I  have 
dropt  nothing ;  but  my  cousin  dropt  some  money. — Who  picked  it 
up  ] — Some  men  who  were  passing  by  picked  it  up. — Have  they 
returned  it  to  him  ? — They  have  returned  it  to  him,  for  they  were 
good  people. — Where  were  you  going  to  when  I  met  you  this  morn- 
ing 1 — I  was  going  to  my  uncle. — Where  does  he  live  ? — He  lives 
near  the  castle. — What  news  has  (fagt)  your  uncle  ? — He  has  no 
news. — What  has  happened  to  him? — A  little  misfortune  has  hap- 
pened to  him. — Will  you  tell  me  what  has  happened  to  him  ] — I 
will  tell  it  you  ;  but  I  beg  you  to  keep  it  secret. — I  promise  you  to 
tell  it  to  nobody. — Will  you  tell  me  now  what  has  happened  to 
him  1 — He  fell  as  (al$)  he  was  going  to  the  theatre. — Is  he  ill  ? — 
He  is  very  ill. — I  pity  him  from  my  heart,  if  he  is  ill. — Have  you 
succeeded  in  finding  a  hat  that  fits  you  well  1 — I  have  succeeded  in 
finding  one. — How  does  it  fit  you  1 — It  fits  me  admirably.  (See 
end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SIXTY-NINTH  LESSON.—  Jfom  mti> 
Cotton. 

Far.  SBett. 

How  far  ?  2Btc  nx'tt  ? 

How  far  is  it  from  here  to  Ber-  2Bte  nxnt  tft  c$  con  (jtct  nacfy  23cr« 

lin  ?  (in  ? 

Is  it  far  from  here  to  Berlin  1        3ft  cS  roctt  fcen  fytet  nad)  SScrttn  ? 
It  is  far.  @S  tft  tt>dt. 

It  is  not  far.  <£$  tft  ntd)t  roctt. 

How  many  miles  is  it  1  2Bic»icl  SMctlen  ftnb  c$  ? 

It  is  twenty  miles.  (£$  fint)  aroansicj  9Wct(cn. 

The  mile,  t)tc  ?Q7eUc  (a  feminine  noun*). 

It  is  almost  a  hundred  and  thirty  (£$  ftnb  bcinofje  bwnbcrt  unb  brctfi^ 

miles  from  here  to  Berlin.  SKcttcn  Don  f)tcr  nad)  SBcrlin. 

It  is  nearly  a  hundred  miles  from  (5$  finb  ungcfal)r  Jjunbctt  9)jcitcn  t>cn 

Berlin  to  Vienna.  SBerfm  nadi)  SBtcn. 

To  like  better.  %  t  c  t>  c  r  m  o  9  c  n.b 

Part,  past  gemod)t. 
Imperf.  in  o  eft  t  c. 

I  like  better,  thou  likest  better,  3$  ma0  (icber,  bu  magfl  Ucbcv,  ec 
he  likes  better.  macj  UcOcr. 

»  A  Gennan  mile  is  equal  to  four  English  miles  and  a  half. 

b  2ic&er  is  the  comparative  to  gertt.    (See  Lessons  XXXIX.  and  LIV.) 


205 

Than  Hit,  fl($  bag. 

13d)  mag  Itefret  f)tcr  Wct&i'n  ate  au$* 
qcbcn. 
3d)  blade  licbct  r)tcr,  at5  bap  id)  auSs 
gc&r. 

SDJityen  <£te  Itc0c<:  fdjretben  ate  fpre* 
dbcn? 


@d)rctOen  <Sic  lic&er,  ate  bop  <Sie  fprc« 
d)cn? 

13d)  mag  Uebet  fprcdjcn  ate  fcfytcU 
ben.   - 
3d)  fpredje  licber,  ate  bap  id)  fcftrcis 
be. 
He  likes  to  play  better  than  to  (5t    mag    Ucbcr    fpiclcn   at^   (lubu 

study.  rcn. 

He  likes  to  do  both.  Grr  tbut  fcctbc^  gcrn. 

I  like  beef  better  than  mutton,      f  3<fy   cffe    ItcOcc  ^tnb?  ote  ^olO^ 

flcifd).c 

He  likes  beer  better  than  wine,    f  ©^  trtnft  (te&ct  S3tcr  at^  SBctn. 
Do   you   like  bread  better  than  j  S'JTcn  @tc  UcOcr    93rob    ate  ^d'= 

cheese  ?  fe  ? 

I   like  neither  the  one  nor  the  3d)  cffc  fcinS  oon  bciben  gern. 

other. 
I  like  tea  as  much  as  coffee.         3d)  trtnfc  e&cn  fo  $wn  Sf)ee  wie 

The  calf, 


A:,  fast.  ©efdjrotnb, 

slowly.  %  a  n  9  fa  wu 

He  eats  quicker  than  I.  (5r  ipt  gcfd)tt)tnbcr  ate  id). 

Do  you  learn  as  fast  as  I  ?  Scrncn  @te  fo  fcfynett  tt>te  tdft  ? 

I  learn  faster  than  you.  3$  tcrnc  fdjncllet  ate  @tc, 
I  do  not  understand  you,  because  3d)  »etftef)C  <Sie  ntc^tx  well  <StC  jU 
you  speak  too  fast.  fcfynctt  fprcc^cn. 


Does  he  sell  cheap  ?  SScrfauft  cr 

He  does  not  sell  dear.  (£r  Dcrfouft  ntd)t  tf)cucr. 

He  has  sold  to  me  very  dear.        Cn:  (jot  mir  fcf)r  tt)cuer  wrfauft. 

So.  ©  o. 

So  much.  ©o  t)t  et. 

c  When  two  or  more  compounds  terminate  in  the  same  component  word, 
this  is  joined  only  to  the  last,  and  a  German  hyphen  (=)  is  placed  after  the 
others.  Ex.  ber  C?m=  unb  3lu§^an^,  the  entrance  and  exit  ;  er  ift  ein  fjutcr 
<&yvdd)z  unb  (Sc^retblebrcr,  he  is  a  good  master  of  languages  and  of  writing  ; 
9ttnbs  unb  <5d)6pfenfletfd),  beef  and  mutton  ;  auf=  unb  jumadjen,  to  open  and 
to  shut  :  instead  of  ber  (S'tngang  unb  5tu§aan^,  ber  @prad;Ic^rcr  unb 
le^rer,  ^tnbfleif4)  unb  Sdjopfenfletfd),  aujtnac^cn  unb  jumac^eu. 


206 

This  man  sells  every  thing  so  SMcfct  9)?aun  tjerfauft  cites  fc  tfxUtft, 
very  dear  that  one  cannot  buy  tap  man  ntcfytS  Oct  tfym  taufcn 
any  thing  of  him.  fonn. 

DCr*  In  a  sentence  in  which  the  verb  ought  to  stand 
at  the  end  (Lesson  XL VII.),  when  the  auxiliary  feirt* 
or  roerben*,  or  one  of  the  verbs  bitrfen*,  fomten*,  laffen*, 
ntogen*,  mufien*/  fotten*,  Pollen*,  is  added  to  an  infini- 
tive, it  must  be  placed  immediately  after  that  infini- 
tive, as  is  seen  in  the  above  example. 
» 

I  do  not  know  what  you  wish  to  3$  roctfi  nid)t,  rc>a$  Sic  facjcn  web 

say.  Icn« 

You  speak  so  fast  that  I  cannot  Sic  fprcdxn   fo  fdfenctt,  tag  id)  Sic 

understand  you.  md)t  t>etjM)cn  farm. 

I  assure  you  that  he  wishes  to  3d)  t>crftd)cre  (Sic/  tap  ct   Sic  fptcs 

speak  to  you.  d)cn  will. 

To  drink.  Srin  !cn*. 

Drank.  £  r  a  n  !  (Imperf.). 

Do  you  drink  tea  or  coffee  1          £rinfcn  Sic  Sfjcc  ctcr  . 
I  drink  neither  the  one  nor  the  3d)  tttnfc  fetn$  tten  Octtcn. 

other. 
What  do  you  drink  in  the  morn-  2Ba$  trinfcn  Sic  tc$ 


ing? 


EXERCISES.    163. 


How  far  is  it  from  Paris  to  London  1 — It  is  nearly  (Octnabc)  a 
hundred  miles  from  Paris  to  London. — Is  it  far  from  here  to  Ham- 
burg1?— It  is  far. — Is  it  far  from  here  to  Vienna? — It  is  almost  a 
hundred  and  forty  miles  from  here  to  Vienna. — Is  it  further  from 
Berlin  to  Dresden  than  from  Leipzic  to  Berlin  ] — It  is  further  from 
Berlin  to  Dresden  than  from  Leipzic  to  Berlin. — How  far  is  it  from 
Paris  to  Berlin  1 — It  is  almost  a  hundred  and  thirty  miles  from  here 
to  Berlin. — Do  you  intend  to  g-o  to  Berlin  soon  ? — I  do  intend  to  go 
thither  soon. — Why  do  you  wish  to  go  this  time  ? — In  order  to  buy 
good  books  and  a  good  horse  there  ;  and  to  see  my  good  friends.— 
Is  it  long  since  you  were  there  1 — It  is  nearly  two  years  since  I  was 
there. — Do  you  not  go  to  Vienna  this  year] — I  do  not  go  thither, 
for  it  is  too  far  from  here  to  Vienna. — Is  it  long  since  you  saw 
your  Hamburg  friend  1 — I  saw  him  but  a  fortnight  ago. — Do  your 
scholars  like  to  learn  by  heart  1 — They  do  not  like  to  learn  by 
heart ;  they  like  reading  and  writing  better  than  learning  by  heart. — • 
Do  you  like  beer  better  than  cider1? — I  like  cider  better  than  beer. 
— Does  your  brother  like  to  play] — He  likes  to  study  better  thap 
to  play. — Do  you  like  meat  better  than  bread  ? — I  like  the  latter 
better  than  the  former. — Do  you  like  to  drink  better  than  to  eat  ? 
— I  like  to  eat  better  than  to  drink  ;  but  my  uncle  likes  to  drink 


207 

better  than  to  eat. — Does  your  brother-in-law  like  meat  better  tban 
fish  ? — He  likes  fish  better  than  meat. — Do  you  like  to  write  better 
than  to  speak] — I  like  to  do  both. — Do  you  like  fowl  better  than 
fish  1 — Do  you  like  good  honey  better  than  sugar  1 — I  like  neither. 

164. 

Does  your  father  like  coffee  better  than  tea  ? — He  likes  neither. 
— What  do  you  drink  in  the  morning  1 — I  drink  a  glass  of  water 
with  a  little  sugar;  my  father  drinks  good  coffee,  my  younger  bro- 
ther good  tea,  and  my  brother-in-law  a  glass  of  good  wine. — Can 
you  understand  me  1 — No,  Sir,  for  you  speak  too  fast. — Will  you 
be  kind  enough  (fo  gut  fcin)  not  to  speak  so  fast  (tongfcmicr  $u  fpres 
d)cn)  1 — I  will  not  speak  so  fast  if  you  will  listen  to  me. — Can  you 
understand  what  my  brother  tells  you  ] — He  speaks  so  fast,  that  I 
cannot  understand  him. — Can  your  pupils  understand  you] — They 
understand  me  when  I  speak  slowly  ;  for  in  order  to  be  understood 
one  must  speak  slowly. — Why  do  you  not  buy  anything  of  that 
merchant  ? — I  had  a  mind  to  buy  several  dozen  of  handkerchiefs, 
some  cravats,  and  a  white  hat  of  him ;  but  he  sells  so  dear  that  I 
cannot  buy  anything  of  him. — Will  you  take  me  to  another? — I 
will  take  you  to  the  son  of  the  one  whom  you  bought  of  last  year. 
— Does  he  sell  as  dear  as  this  (one)  1 — He  sells  cheaper. — Do  you 
like  going  to  the  theatre  better  than  going  to  the  concert  ] — 1  do 
like  going  to  the  concert  as  well  as  going  to  the  theatre  ;  but  I  do 
not  like  going  to  the  public  walk,  for  there  are  too  many  people 
there. — Do  your  children  like  learning  Italian  better  than  Spanish  ? 
— They  do  not  like  to  learn  either ;  they  only  like  to  learn  Ger- 
man.— Do  they  like  to  speak  better  than  to  write  7 — They  like  to  do 
neither. — Do  you  like  mutton  ? — I  like  beef  better  than  mutton. — 
Do  your  children  like  cake  better  than  bread  ] — They  like  both. — 
Has  he  read  all  the  books  which  he  bought  ? — He  bought  so  many 
of  them,  that  he  cannot  read  them  all. — Do  you  wish  to  write  some 
letters  ] — I  have  written  so  many  of  them,  that  I  cannot  write  any 
more.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SEVENTIETH  LESSON.— 0i*ben?ig0te  Action. 

OF  REFLEXIVE  VERBS. 

When  the  action  falls  upon  the  agent,  and  the  ob- 
jective case  refers  to  the  same  person  as  the  nomina- 
tive, the  verb  is  called  reflexive. 

In  reflexive  verbs  the  pronoun  of  the  object  is  of  the 
same  person  as  that  of  the  subject,  and  stands  either 
in  the  dative  or  the  accusative,  according  as  the  verb 


208 

governs  the  one  or  the  other  case.  In  the  third  person 
singular  and  plural  it  is  always  jTrf),  whether  the  verb 
governs  the  dative  or  accusative. 

A  REFLEXIVE  VERB  GOVERNING  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

To  disguise  myself—  to  disguise  Sfttd)  wrfteflen  —  Un£  fcerfMfen. 

ourselves. 
To  disguise  thyself  —  to  disguise  £)id)  scrftcflcn  —  (5ud)  t>cr(Mlen. 

yourselves. 

A  REFLEXIVE  VERB  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE. 

To  represent  to  myself  —  to  re-  9$it  ttorficllcn  —  llnS 

present  to  ourselves. 
To  represent  to  thyself  —  to  re-  £)tt  »or[MIcn  —  (Sud) 

present  to  yourselves. 

THIRD     PERSON     FOR     ALL     GENDERS. 
Singular  and  Plural  Dative  and  Accusative. 

To  disguise  one's  self—  to  repre-  ©id)  ttcrftcltcn  —  fid)  serfMtcn. 
sent  to  one's  self. 


The  personal  pronoun  of  reflexive  verbs  is 
placed  after  the  verb  as  in  English  ;  and  so  are  all 
other  personal  pronouns  when  they  are  not  in  the  no- 
minative. 

Obs.  A.  There  is  no  real  reflexive  verb  in  English, 
that  is  to  say,  such  as  cannot  be  used  otherwise  ;  but 
in  German,  there  are  many,  as  for  instance  the  follow- 
ing, which  govern  the  accusative  : 

To  rejoice.  (Sid)  frcuon. 

To  be  ashamed.  (Sid)  fd)ffmctu 

To  look  back.  (Sid)  umfcfycn*.     Imperf.  falj. 


Do  you  see  yourself?  (Sd)en  <St«  fid)  ?  ((Sdjct  3fc  @ud)  ?) 

I  do  see  myself.  3d)  fcfyc  mid). 

Thou  cuttest  thyself.  £>u  fdjnctDeft  Did). 

He  cuts  himself.  (£r  fd)imbet  fid). 

I  am  afraid  to  go  thither.  Set)  fftrd)tc  mid)  hin^UQC^cn. 

They  burn  themselves.  (Sic  brcnncn  ftd&. 

To  flatter.  (S  d)  m  c  i  d)  c  I  n  (governs  the  da- 

tive). 

Dost  thou  flatter  thyself]  ©d)incid)ctit  Du  Div4? 

I  do  not  flatter  myself.  3d)  fd)mcid)(c  mtr  ntdjt. 


209 

We  do  not  flatter  ourselves.          effiir  fd)meidK(n  UttS  md)t. 
He  disguises  himself.  Gr  KrftcUt  fid). 

You  represent  to  yourself.  ©tc  (Mien  fid)  »or» 

To  fear  some  one.  £u'mantcn  fiird)ten. 

To  be  afraid  of  somebodyi  <£td)  for  Scmnnbcm  furd?ten. 

I  am  not  afraid  of  him.  3d)  ftirdbtc  mid)  ntd)t  t)cr  if;m. 

I  do  not  fear  him.  3d)  fiircbte  thn  md)t. 

Of  whom  are  you  afraid  ?  &>or  rcem  furd)tcn  <Stc  fid)  ? 

Whom  do  you  fear  *  2Bcn  furd)tcn  etc  1  * 

To  enjoy  something  ^id,  3ctt»crtrciO    mtt 

To  amuse  one's  self  in  doing  ^     JJ^fttW 

something-.  j 

To  pass  away  the  time.  Sic  Sett  rcrttcikn*. 

To  drive  away.  BScrtw&cn*. 

Driven  away.  SScrtrtcfccn. 

Drove  away.  SScrtricO  (Imperf.). 

The  pastime,  the  diversion.  5)cr  Scttocrtrctb. 

In  what  do  you  amuse  yourself  1  SScmit  ucrttcibcn  ^ic  fid)  tic  3cttl 
I  amuse  myself  in  reading.  3d)  scrtrctbc  uur  tie  3cit  nut  Scfcn. 

He  diverts  himself  in  playing.     (£r  ocrtrcibt  ficr;  tic  3cit 


Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

Each  or  each  5  Seber,       jete,         jebe^* 
one.  £  ©n  jeber,  etne  jcbe,  ein  jebe<5»  (Sebermann.) 


jB.  3eber,  jebe,  jebe^,  has  no  plural,  and  is  de- 
clined like  alt,  with  the  characteristic  termination  of 
the  article  (Lesson  XLIX.).  Preceded  by  the  indefinite 
article,  it  is  declined  like  an  adjective  preceded  by  this 
article. 

Every  man  has  his  taste.  Scfccr  SMcnfd)  fjot  fctncn  ®cfc^macf. 

Each  of  you.  C£*tn  jct>ct  j?cn  (Sud). 

Every  body  speaks  of  it.  S^nncmn  fprtdjt  bason. 

Each  man  amuses  himself  as  he  ©in  jjcbcr  »crtrciOt  fid)  tic  Sett  ttric 

likes.  c$  if)m  gcfallt. 

Each  one  amuses  himself  in  the  ©in  jcfccr  t»crtrci6t  fic^  tic  3cit  fo  cuU 

best  way  he  can.  cr  fann. 

The  taste,  tct  ©cfcfemadf. 

To  mistake,  to  be  mistaken.  ©  t  d)  t  r  r  c  nx  fid)  t  a  u  f  eft  c  n. 

Every  man  is  liable  to  mistake.    £?ctcr  SORenfd)  fann  fid)  trrcn. 
You  are  mistaken.  ©tc  trrcn  fid). 


To  soil.  ^cfcbnutlcn,  fd)mu|tg  mad)cn. 

To  deceive.  Sctriigen*  (Octrtcqcn*). 


210 

Deceived.  25ctrc^cn  (past  part.)  Imperf.  be* 

treg. 

He  has  cheated  me  of  a  hundred  (Sr  fyat  mid)  um  fyuntert  Staler  be* 
crowns.  trogen. 

At  (over).  Uebcr  (a  preposition  governing 

the  dative  and  accusative). 

To  rejoice  at  something.  ©td)  fiber  etroa*  ftcucru 

I  rejoice  at  your  happiness.  3d)  frcue  mid)  ubct  3b*  d5Iudf. 

At  what  does  your  uncle  rejoice  1  SQScrubcc  frcut  fid)  3fyr  £)f)Ctm  ? 

To  believe.  ©Uubcn. 

This  verb  requires  the  person  in  the  dative,  and  the 
thing  in  the  accusative.  It  governs  also  the  accusa- 
tive with  the  preposition  an* 

Do  you  believe  that  man  1  ©fauben  (Sic  btefcm  Sftcmne  ? 

I  do  not  believe  him.  3d)  gtoube  3bnt  nid)t. 

Do  you  believe  what  I  am  tell-  QHaubcn  <Ste  nut/  rv>a£  id)  SfyWK 
ing  you  1  fa$e  ? 

I  believe  in  God.  3d)  cjtoubc  nn  ©ott. 

The  God,  t>cr  ®ott  (plural  ©otter) ; 

the  story-teller,  the  liar,         ter  Sugner. 

To  utter  a  falsehood,  to  lie.  Ciigcn  (part,  past  gclogcn,  Imperf. 

teg). 

(See  tlie  Continuation  of  this  Lesson  Page  211.) 
EXERCISES.  165. 

Have  you  written  long  or  short  letters  1 — I  have  written  (both) 
long  and  short  ones. — Have  you  many  apples  ? — I  have  so  many 
of  them  that  I  do  not  know  which  I  shall  (fell)  eat. — Do  you  wish 
to  give  anything  to  these  children  ? — They  have  studied  so  badly, 
that  I  do  not  wish  to  give  them  anything. — What  is  this  man  re- 
joicing at? — He  is  rejoicing  at  the  luck  which  has  happened  to  his 
brother. — What  dost  thou  rejoice  at"? — I  rejoice  at  the  good  fortune 
that  has  happened  to  you. — What  do  your  children  rejoice  at  1 — 
They  rejoice  at  seeing  you. — Do  you  rejoice  at  the  happiness  ot 
my  father] — I  do  rejoice  at  it. — What  does  your  uncle  say  to  my 
happiness  1 — He  rejoices  at  it  from  his  heart. — Do  you  flatter  my 
brother? — I  do  not  flatter  him. — Does  this  master  flatter  his  pu- 
pils 1 — He  does  not  flatter  them. — Is  he  pleased  with  them  1 — He 
is  much  (fcfyr)  pleased  (jufrtetcn)  with  them  when  they  learn  well ; 
but  he  is  highly  (fefyr)  displeased  with  them  when  they  do  not  learn 
well. — Do  you  flatter  me? — I  do  not  flatter  you,  for  I  love  you. — 
Do  you  see  yourself  in  that  small  looking-glass  ? — I  do  see  my  sell 
in  it. — Can  your  friends  see  themselves  in  that  large  looking- 
glass  ? — They  can  see  themselves  therein. — Why  do  you  not  re- 
main near  the  fire? — Because  I  am  afraid  of  burning  myself.— 


211 

Does  this  man  make  his  fire] — He  does  not  make  it,  for  he  is 
afraid  of  burning-  himself. — Do  you  fear  me  1 — I  do  not  fear  you. — 
Do  you  fear  those  ugly  men  1 — I  do  not  fear  them,  for  they  hurt 
nobody. — Why  do  those  children  run  away  ! — They  run  away,  be- 
cause they  are  afraid  of  you. — Do  you  run  away  before  your  ene- 
mies 1 — I  do  not  rurr  away  before  them,  for  I  do  not  fear  them. 

16G. 

In  what  do  your  children  amuse  themselves'? — They  amuse 
themselves  in  studying,  writing,  and  playing. — In  what  do  you 
amuse  yourself  !• — I  amuse  myself  in  the  best  way  I  can,  for  I  read 
good  books,  and  I  write  to  my  friends. — In  what  do  you  amuse 
yourself  when  you  have  nothing  to  do  at  home  ] — I  go  to  the  play 
and  to  the  concert,  for  every  one  amuses  himself  in  the  best  way 
he  can. — Every  man  has  his  taste ;  what  is  yours  1 — Mine  is  to 
study,  to  read  a  good  book,  to  go  to  the  theatre,  the  concert,  the 
ball,  and  the  public  walk,  and  to  ride  on  horseback. — Has  that 
physician  done  any  harm  to  your  child  1 — He  has  cut  his  finger 
(cf>  in  ten  finger),  but  he  has  not  done  him  any  harm  ;  so  you  are 
mistaken,  if  you  believe  that  he  has  done  him  any  harm. — Why  do 
you  listen  to  that  man  1 — I  listen  to  him,  but  I  do  not  believe  him  ; 
for  I  know  that  he  is  a  story-teller. — How  do  you  know  that  he  is 
a  story-teller  ] — He  does  not  believe  in  God  ;  and  all  those  who 
do  not  believe  in  God  are  story-tellers. — Why  does  your  cousin 
not  brush  his  hat! — He  does  not  brush  it,  because  he  is  afraid  of 
soiling  his  fingers  (fid)  tic  finger). — What  does  my  neighbour  tell 
you  ? — He  tells  me  that  you  wish  to  buy  his  horse  ;  but  I  know 
that  he  is  mistaken,  for  you  have  no  money  to  buy  it. — What  do 
they  say  at  the  market  1 — They  say  that  the  enemy  is  beaten. — Do 
you  believe  it  1 — I  do  believe  it,  because  every  one  says  so. — Why 
have  you  bought  that  book  1 — I  bought  it,  because  I  wanted  it  to 
learn  German ;  and  because  every  one  spoke  of  it.  (See  end  of 
Lesson  XXXIV.) 




CONTINUATION  OF  THE  SEVENTIETH  LESSON. 
-  £. olge  tor  siebsn^igsten  Cection. 

When  a  proposition  has  no  definite  subject,  the 
English,  in  order  to  avoid  the  pronouns  they,  people, 
&c.,  use  the  verb  in  the  passive  voice  ;  and  say  :  /  was 
told,  instead  of,  They  told  me ;  It  was  given  to  me,  in- 
stead of,  They  gave  it  to  me.  This  is  expressed  in  Ger- 
man by  means  of  the  indefinite  pronoun  matt,  one,  as 
in  French  by  on.  Ex, 


212 


I  am  told  that  he  is  arrived.          SQfan  fagt  mir,  tajj  cr  an.gcfrmmcn 

ifr 
A  knife  was  given  to  him  to  cut  Sftan  gab  tbm  cin  sOfrffcv,  fetn  £3ret 

his    bread,    and   he   cut    his      gu  fdwciten,  unt  cr  fdjnttt  fid)  in 

finger.  ten    ' 


PERFECT  OF  REFLEXIVE  VERBS. 

Have  you  cut  yourself?  Joaben  (£ie  fid)  gcfdjnittcn  ? 

I  have  not  cut  myself.  3d)  babe  mid)  nicbt  gefcbnittcn. 

Have  those  men  cut  themselves  I  ^>aben  fid)  tiefc  Scanner  gcfd)nittcn  ? 
They  have  not  cut  themselves.     (£ie  baben  fid)  nicbt  gefdimttcn. 
Hast  thou  hurt  thyself? 
I  have  not  hurt  myself. 
Who  has  cut  himself? 
I  have  cut  my  finger. 


I  have  rejoiced. 
I  have  flattered  myself. 
Thou  hast  cut  thyself. 
He  has  flattered  himself. 
We  have  been  afraid. 

You  have  mistaken. 

To  pull  out. 

He  pulls  out  his  hair. 

He  has  pulled  out  his  hair. 

He  has  cut  his  hair. 

I  have  had  my  hair  cut. 
I  have  cut  my  nails. 

The  hair, 

To  go  to  bed. 

To  get  up,  to  rise. 


•jbaft 

Scl)  (?oOc  nitr  ntd)t 
S&er  bflt  fid)  Qcfd)iuttcn  ? 
f  3d)  fccibc  nnd)  in  ten  5mQcr  gc 
fdjnittcn. 

t  Sd)  babe  mid)  gcfreut  (gcfccuct). 
3d)  bciOe  mir  gc[cbnieid)c(t. 
£)u  baft  £>id)  gcfd^nittem 
(5r  bat  fid)  gefd)mctd)c(t. 
f  2Btr  batn'n  un^  cjcfitrd)tct. 


C  t  3br  babt  (Slid)  gcirrt. 
£  f  <£te  baben  fid)  getrrt. 


2Cu$reipcn*. 

t  ©r  rcipt  fid)  tie  £aare  < 

t  @r  bat  fid)  tic  £aare 

f  (£r  bat  fid)  tie  £aare  a&gcfd)nit* 

ten. 
t  Set)  babe  mir  tie  £aare  fdjncitcn 

(affen. 
t  3d)  bate  mir  tie  9?a'a,cl  c 

ten. 
ta$  ^aar  (plur.  c). 

f3u  23ette  gcben*. 
geben*. 
tegcn. 


^teftcn  Sic  frub  auf? 
Sci)  )lebe  mit  ©cnnenaufgang  auf. 
C3d>  .qebc  mit  (Scnnenuntergang  311 
<      SBctte. 

C.  3d)  lege  mtcb  mit  (^enncnuntcrgana,. 
At  what  time  did  you  go  to  bed  1  Urn  roekbe  3eit  fint  <Ste  SU  Settc  $v 

gangen  ? 
At  midnight.  Itm  <~'— 


Do  you  rise  early  ? 
I  rise  at  sun-rise. 

I  go  to  bed  at  sun- set. 


213 

At  three  o'clock  in  the  morning,  llm  tret  llfir 

He  went  to  bed  late.  (*r  tft  ft? at  511  iBcttc  gcgangen. 

At  what  o'clock  did  you  go  to  llm  uncmd  Uf)t  fint)  (£'ic  gcflcrn 

bed  yesterday  1  ^cttc  gognngen  ? 

At  a  quarter  past  eleven.  Urn  cm  &>tcrtcl  cuif  jwetf. 

The  bed,  tas  £n'tt  (plur.  en). 

Theories,       J 

Thesun-set,         J 

Nothing  but.  91 1  d)  t  $  a  (  £. 

He  has  nothing  but  enemies.        (£t  f)flt  ntcbtS  cifS 
He  drinks  nothing  but  water.       (£T  trtnft  md)t$ 

EXERCISES.    167. 

Did  your  father  rejoice  to  see  you  1 — He  did  rejoice  to  see  me.— 
What  did  you  rejoice  at? — I  rejoiced  at  seeing  my  good  friends. — 
What  was  your  uncle  delighted  with  (IZScruber  fyat  ficb  thr  Dfxtm 
gcfrcut)  1 — He  was  delighted  with  (fiber)  the  horse  which  you 
brought  him  from  Germany. — 'What  were  your  children  delighted 
with  ? — They  were  delighted  with  the  fine  clothes  which  I  had 
had  made  (for)  them. — Why  does  this  officer  rejoice  so  much  (jo 
fcbr)  1 — Because  he  flatters  himself  he  has  good  friends. — Is  he  not 
right  in  rejoicing"! — He  is  wrong,  for  he  has  nothing  but  enemies. 
— Do  you  flatter  yourself  that  you  know  Qerman? — I  do  flatter 
myself  that  I  know  it;  for  1  can  speak,  read,  and  write  it. — Can 
you  write  a  German  letter  without  an  error  (t>et  $i'l)tcr)  ? — I  can. — 
Does  any  one  correct  your  letters  1 — No  one  corrects  them ;  they  do 
not  require  (braucben  md)t)  to  be  corrected,  for  I  make  no  faults  in 
them. — How  many  letters  have  you  already  written  ] — I  have  al- 
ready written  a  dozen. — Have  you  hurt  yourself1? — I  have  not  hurt 
myself. — Who  has  hurt  himself? — My  brother  has  hurt  himself, 
for  he  has  cut  his  finger. — Is  he  still  ill  1 — He  is  better. — I  rejoice 
to  hear  that  he  is  no  longer  ill ;  for  I  love  him,  and  I  pitied  him  from 
my  heart. — Why  does  your  cousin  pull  out  his  hair]— Because  he 
cannot  pay  what  he  owes. — Have  you  cut  your  hair  1 — I  have  not 
cut  it  (myself),  but  I  have  had  it  cut. — Why  do  you  pity  that 
child  1 — Because  he  has  cut  his  foot. — Why  was  a  knife  given  to 
him  ? — A  knife  was  given  to  him  to  cut  his  nails,  and  he  has  cut 
his  finger  and  his  foot. 

168. 

Do  you  go  to  bed  early  ? — I  go  to  bed  late,  for  I  cannot  sleep  if 
I  go  to  bed  early. — At  what  o'clock  did  you  go  to  bed  yesterday  ? — 
Yesterday  I  went  to  bed  at  a  quarter  past  eleven. — At  what  o'clock 
do  your  children  go  to  bed  ? — They  go  to  bed  at  sun-set. — Do  they 
rise  early  ? — They  rise  at  sun-rise. — At  what  o'clock  did  you  rise 
to-day  ? — To-day  I  rose  late,  because  I  went  to  bed  late  yesterday 


214 

evening. — Does  your  son  rise  late? — He  must  rise  early,  for  he 
never  goes  to  bed  late. — What  does  he  do  when  he  gets  up  ] — He 
studies,  and  then  breakfasts. — Does  he  not  go  out  before  he  break- 
fasts ? — No,  he  studies  and  breakfasts  before  he  goes  out. — What 
does  he  do  after  breakfast1? — As  soon  as  he  has  breakfasted  he 
comes  to  my  house,  and  we  ride  (on  horseback)  into  the  forest.— 
Didst  thou  rise  this  morning  as  early  as  1 1 — I  rose  earlier  than 
you,  for  I  rose  before  sun-rise.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SEVENTY-FIRST  LESSON.—  OEin  tmfc 
Cection. 

To  take  a  walk.  (Spqtcrcn  Qcl)cn*. 

To  take  an  airing  in  a  carriage.  (Spqteren  fasten*  (Imp.  fufyr). 
To  take  a  ride  on  horseback.          (Spa^ictcn  rctten*  (Imp.  rttt). 


-  When  two  or  more  infinitives,  two  past 
participles,  or  a  past  participle  and  an  infinitive  de- 
pend upon  each  other,  the  last  in  English  is  put  the 
first  in  German. 


Do  you  wish  to  take  a  walk  (to  SBollcn  <Stc  fpc^tcrcn 

go  a  walking)  1 
I  do  wish  to  take  a  wajk  (to  go  3d)  will  fpa$tcrcn  gefycn. 

a  walking). 

He  wishes  to  take  a  walk.  (5r  mil  fpagtcrcn  gcfycn. 

Thou  wishest  to  take  an  airing.     £)u  rwllft  fpajicrcn  fafyren. 
They  wish  to  take  a  ride.  (Sic  ruollcn  fpqteren  rcitcn. 

Do  you  wish  to  see  him  work  1    £8otten  (Sic  tfyn  arOctten  fcfyen  ? 
Has  your  brother  been  praised  ?    3ft  %\)i  S3rut)cc  gclobt  n?ort>cn  ? 

He  takes  a  walk  every  day.          (5t  gcf)t  cute  Sacje  fpqtercn. 

Do  you  often  walk  ?  ©cfocn  (Sic  eft  fpqtcren  ? 

I  take  a  walk  every  morning.        3cf)  (jcbe  alle  $02orgcn  fpa^icrcn 

To  take  a  child  a  walking.  (Sin  $inb  fpa^tcrcn  fuftvcn. 

Do    you    take   your  children  a  gufjrcn  (Sic  35^  .^intcv  fp03'tcrcn. 

walking  1 
I  take   them   a  walking   every  3cf)  fiifyrc  fie  atfc  2(ftent>  fpa^tcrcn. 

evening. 


B.     Two  infinitives  or  participles  not  depend- 
ing on  each  other  follow  the  English  construction. 

One  must  love  and  praise  one's  93?cm  mup  fetncn  Jrcunb  ttcfcen  unt) 

friend.  (cbcn. 

Whom  must  we   despise    and  9Bcn  nwp  man   ucrac^tcn  unb  ftra? 

punish  ?  fen  ? 


THE 

[UNIVERSIT1 

215  ^^ 


I  take  a  walk,  when  I  have  no-  3d)  $ef)C  fpa$tctctt,  wcnn  td) 
thing  to  do  at  home.  md)t$  $u  tfyun  fyabe. 


A  The  adverb  tt>amt  is  used  to  interrogate 
with  respect  to  time  only.  In  all  other  instances  the 
English  when  is  translated  by  tt>entt*  Ex. 

When  do  you  start  1  SOBcmn  rctfcn  ©tc  a&  ? 

When  did  he  start  *  SOSann  ift  ec  alujeretpt  ? 

To  teacA.  £e  Ijr  en. 

Ofo.  J5.  This  verb,  \vhen  joined  to  an  infinitive, 
governs  the  name  of  the  person  in  the  accusative  ; 
and  when  the  thing  taught  is  expressed  by  a  substan- 
tive, it  governs  a  double  accusative,  the  one  of  a  per- 
son and  the  other  of  a  thing. 

He  teaches  me  to  read.  (5r  (cfjrt  mid)  tcfen. 

I  teach  him  to  write.  3d)  lef)te  ifyn  fdyrctOcn. 

He  teaches  me    arithmetic  and  (5r   tcfjrt    nrid)    t>a$    SKedjrten    unfo 
writing. 


Obs.  C.  All  infinitives  taken  substantively  are  of 
the  neuter  gender.  Any  German  infinitive  may  thus 
be  taken  substantively,  e.  g.  bag  ^ledjnen,  arithmetic, 
from  recfyttett,  to  reckon;  fca$  @d)reiben,  the  writing, 
from  fefyreiben*,  to  write,  &c. 

I  teach  you  the  German  Ian-  3$   fefyre   ©k   tie  t>cutfd)C  ©pras 
guage.  d)e.a 

rilntcrr  id)tcn. 
To  instruct.  ^Untcrrid^t  e  1  1  &  e  t  te  n  (or  9«- 

C     ben*). 

The  instruction,  the  lessons,         bcr  Untcrrtd)t. 
Heffivesmelesson,  te^&gjp, 

I  give  him  lessons  in  German  (I  3d)  Qct>e  (or  crtr^ettc)  tljm  Untcrrid^t 

teach  him  German).  tm  5)eutfd)cn. 

I  gave  lessons  in  English  to  his  3d)  I)aOe  fetncn  &tnt>crn  llntcmd&t 
children  (I  taught  his  children      tm  Sngttfdjcn  crt()cilt. 
English). 
He  takes  lessons  in  dancing.        (£t  ntmmt  llntcrrt^t  tm  Sanscn. 

The  learned  man,  t>cr  ©efefyrte  ; 

,  the  language,  is  a  feminine  noun,  and  has  n  in  the  plural, 


216 

a  learned  man,  cm  ©ctcfjrtcr   (See    Obs.   Lesson 

LIII.) ; 

the  clergyman,  ber  ®et[t(td)C ; 

a  clergyman,  ctn  ©ctftttdjcr  ; 

the  German  master   (meaning  ) 

the   master  of  the  German  >    bcr  £>cutfd)lcF)rcr ; 

language),  } 

the  German  master   (meaning  1 

that  the  master  is  a  German,  >   bet  bcutfd)C  2cfyrcr  ; 

whatever  he  teaches),  } 
the  dancing  master,  bcr  j 

To  dance. 
To  cipher,  to  reckon.      SRecfyncn. 

To  remember,  to  recollect,     ©id)  C  r  i  n  n  C  r  n. 

Obs.  D.  This  verb  governs  either  the  genitive  alone, 
or,  less  elegantly,  the  accusative  with  the  preposition 
an. 

Do  you  remember  that  man  1        (Srtnncrn  (Sic  fid)  HefeS  SOZanneS  1 
I  do  remember  him.  3d)  crtnncrc  mid)  fetncr. 

((Srinncrt    cr    fid)    fcincS.    ^erfprc* 
Ori£rt  cr   fid)  en  fcin  Ecrfprc* 
d)en  1 

He  does  recollect  it.  \  ®?  *™™*  /'*  *'&"• 

I  (£r  crtnncrt  fid)  barcm. 

Does  he  recollect  it  1  \  £™nerf  er  j!*  ^\ 

I  Crtnncrt  cr  pd)  baran  1 

I  remember  you.  £sd)  crtnncrc  mid)  Sfyrer. 

I  recollect  them.  3d)  crinnerc  mid)  tf)rcr. 

He  remembers  me.  (£r  crinncrt  fid)  mc'tncr. 

He  recollects  us.  (£r  crtnncrt  fid)  unfer. 

I  have  remembered  him.  3>d)  f)flOc  mid)  fetncr  crinncrt. 

EXERCISES.     169, 

Do  you  call  me  1 — I  do  call  you. — What  is  your  pleasure  1 — You 
must  rise,  for  it  is  already  late. — W^hat  do  you  want  me  for? — I 
have  lost  all  my  money  at  play,  and  I  come  to  beg  you  to  lend  me 
some. — What  o'clock  is  it  ]-<•— It  is  already  a  quarter  past  six,  and 
you  have  slept  long  enough. — Is  it  long  since  you  rose  1 — It  is  an 
hour  and  a  half  since  I  rose. — Do  you  often  go  a  walking  1 — I  go 
a  walking  when  I  have  nothing  to  do  at  home. — Do  you  wish  to 
take  a  walk] — I  cannot  take  a  walk,  for  I  have  too  much  to  do. — 
Has  your  brother  taken  a  ride  on  horseback] — He  has  taken  an 
airing  in  a  carriage. — Do  your  children  often  go  a  walking  1 — They 
go  a  walking  every  morning  after  breakfast. — Do  you  take  a  walk 


217 

after  dinner1? — After  dinner  I  drink  tea  and  then  I  take  a  walk. — 
Do  you  often  take  your  children  a  walking ? — I  take  them  a  walking 
every  morning  and  every  evening. — Can  you  go  along  with  me  1 — 
I  cannot  go  along  with  you,  for  I  must  take  my  little  brother  out  a 
walking. — Where  do  you  walk  ? — We  walk  in  our  uncle's  garden 
and  fields.— Do  you  like  walking  ? — I  like  walking  better  than  eat- 
ing and  drinking. — Does  your  father  like  to  take  a  ride  on  horse- 
back ? — He  likes  to  take  a  ride  in  a  carriage  better  than  on  horse- 
back.— Must  one  love  children  who  are  not  good  ? — One  ought,  on 
the  contrary,  to  punish  and  despise  them. — Who  has  taught  you  to 
read  ? — I  have  learnt  it  with  (Oci)  a  French  master. — Has  he  also 
taught  you  to  write  1 — He  has  taught  me  to  read  and  to  write. — 
WTho  has  taught  your  brother  arithmetic  ? — A  German  master  has 
taught  it  him. — Do  you  wish  to  take  a  walk  with  us? — 1  cannot  go 
a  walking,  for  I  am  waiting  for  my  German  master. — Does  your 
brother  wish  to  take  a  walk  ? — He  cannot,  for  he  is  taking  lessons 
in  dancing. 

170. 

Have  you  an  English  master  ? — We  have  one. — Does  he  also 
give  you  lessons  in  Italian? — He  does  not  know  Italian  ;  but  we 
have  an  Italian  and  Spanish  master. — What  has  become  of  your 
old  writing  master  ? — He  has  taken  orders  (has  become  a  clergy- 
man).— What  has  become  of  the  learned  man  whom  I  saw  at  your 
house  last  winter  ? — He  has  set  up  for  a  merchant. — And  what  has 
become  of  his  son  ? — He  has  turned  a  soldier. — Do  you  still  recol- 
lect my  old  dancing  master  ? — I  do  still  recollect  him  ;  what  has 
become  of  him  ? — He  is  here,  and  you  can  see  him,  if  you  like 
(roollcn). — Hastthoua  German  master  1 — I  have  a  very  good  (one), 
for  it  is  my  father,  who  gives  me  lessons  in  German  and  in  Eng- 
lish.— Does  your  father  also  know  Polish  ? — He  does  not  know  it 
yet,  but  he  intends  to  learn  it  this  summer. — Do  you  remember 
your  promise  ? — I  do  remember  it. — What  did  you  promise  me  ? — 
I  promised  to  give  you  lessons  in  German ;  and  I  will  doit. — Wil . 
you  begin  this  morning? — I  will  begin  this  evening,  if  you  please 
(tt>enn  e£  3ftnen  gcfdtltg  tft). — Do  you  recollect  the  man  whose  son 
taught  us  dancing? — I  no  longer  recollect  him. — Do  you  still  recol- 
lect my  brothers  ? — I  do  recollect  them  very  well,  for  when  I  was 
studying  at  Berlin,  I  saw  them  every  day. — Does  your  uncle  still 
recollect  me  ? — I  assure  you  that  he  still  recollects  you. — Do  you 
speak  German  better  than  my  cousin  ? — I  do  not  speak  it  as  well  as 
he,  for  he  speaks  it  better  than  many  Germans. — Which  of  your 
pupils  speaks  it  the  best  ? — The  one  that  was  walking  with  me  yes- 
terday speaks  it  the  best  of  them  all. — Is  your  uncle's  house  as  high 
as  ours  ? — Yours  is  higher  than  my  uncle's,  but  my  cousin's  is  the 
highest  house  that  I  have  ever  seen. — Has  your  friend  as  many  books 
as  1  ? — You  have  more  of  them  than  he  ;  but  my  brother  has  more 
of  them  than  (both)  you  and  he. — Which  of  us  (SOBcr  son  un£)  has 
the  most  money  ? — You  have  the  most,  for  I  have  but  thirty  crowns, 
my  friend  has  but  ten,  and  you  have  five  hundred.  (See  end  of 
Lesson  XXXIV.) 
JO 


218 


SEVENTY-SECOND  LESSON.— 

Certion. 


i  tmb 


To  make  use  of,  to  use. 


©id)6et)tcncn 
genitive). 


(governs    the 


Do  you  use  my  horse  ? 

I  do  use  it. 

Does  your  father  use  it  1 

He  does  use  it. 

Have  you  used  my  carriage  ? 

I  have  used  it. 

Do  you  use  my  books  ? 

I  do  use  them. 

May  I  use  your  book  1 

Thou  mayest  use  it. 

To  approach,  to  draw  near. 

To  withdraw  from,  to  go  away 

from. 

Do  you  approach  the  fire  1 
I  do  approach  it. 
I  go  away  from  the  fire. 
I  go  away  from  it. 
What  do  you  recollect  ] 
I  recollect  nothing. 
What  are  you  withdrawing  from  ? 
Are  you  cold  ? 
I  am  very  cold. 
I  am  not  cold. 
Art  thou  cold  "? 
Is  he  warm  1 
Are  they  warm  or  cold  ] 
They  are  neither  warm  nor  cold. 

Who  is  cold  ? 

My  feet  are  cold. 

His  hands  are  cold. 

Why  does  that  man  go  away  from 

the  fire  ? 
He  goes  away  from  it,  because 

he  is  not  cold. 

To  freeze—frozen. 
Froze. 


SBebtencn  <£te  fid)  metnc* 

3d)  kbtcnc  mid)  teffdOcn. 

JBcbtent  fief)  3f)t  SSatcr  bcffdOen  ? 

©r  kbtcnt  fief)  bcffel&cn. 

£abcn  <Sic  fid)  meincs  2Baa,cn$  be* 

fctcnt  ? 

3d)  faOe  nud)  t>effrU>cn  befctcnt. 
S5ct)tencn  <Stc  fid)  mcincr 

)  kbtcne  nud)  bcrfclbcn. 
id)  mid)  Sfyntf  3 

ncn? 
)u  fannft  2)tc^  t>c(ftf(6cn  Oebicncn* 


naftcrn  (governs  the  dative). 

cntfcrncn  (governs  the  dative- 
with  the  preposition  r>on), 
97abcrn  <£ic  fid)  fccm  gcucr  ? 
Sd)  nabcrc  mid)  tcmfdOcn. 
3>d)  cntfcrnc  mtd)  t)cm  S^uer^ 
3d)  cntfcrnc  mtd)  t>ar>on. 
SBcran  crinncrn  (Sic  fid)  ? 
3d)  crtnncrc  mid)  an  ntdbt^ 
2Bct)cn  cntfcrncn  @tc  fid)  ? 
t  SMSWnfcft? 

@«  iff  m  t  r  fcfjc  f  aft. 

©^  tft  m  t  r  nid)t  !a(t. 

3ft  c^  pit  !alt? 

3ft  c^  i^m  tvarm  ? 

3ft  c^  i^ncn  it>arm  otcr  fa(t  ? 

S^  ift  t^ncn  n?ct>cr  warm   ncc& 

faft, 

t  855cm  tfl  c^  faft  ? 
t  (5^>  ift  mtr  an  ben  $i$cn  faft. 
t  ®*  ift  ibm  an  ten  ^anDcn  faft. 
SBarum  cntfcrnt  fid)  ttcfcr  9}?ann  t>en 

bcm  Jeucr  ? 
©r  cntfcrnt  fid)  bapcnx  n?ci(  c^  ibm 

ntd)t  faft  ift. 


f  Jfrtcrcn—  -.qcfrorcn. 
§  tor  (imperfect). 


Obs.     The  impersonal  verb  frteren,  to  freeze,  governs 


219 

the  accusative,  and  may  also  be  used  for  the  English 
verb  to  be  cold,  as  : 

I  am  very  cold.  t  ®$  fr^ct  mid)  f^)r« 

I  am  not  cold.  t  &*  fcicrt  mict>  ni^» 

Who  is  cold!  t  Sl'cnfrtcrte*? 

My  feet  are  cold.  t  9D2tr  frteren  trie  gdffe. 

His  hands  are  cold.  t  3bm  fricrcn  tic  £cint>e. 


JPor  M?Aa£  ?  whereto  ?  for  what    2B  0  $  U  ? 
purpose  ? 

What  do  you  want  money  for  ?    2£e$u  &rcuicf)en  (Ste  (i5cft>  ? 

I  want  some  to  buy  a  carriage  3d)  braucbe  roctdjcS/  urn  etncn  2Bcu 

with.  gen  311  frmfcn. 

What  dees  this  horse  serve  you  2Bo$u  fcient  36ncn  tiefeS  3)fert>? 

for? 
It  serves  me  to  ride  out  upon.       (£g  ttcm  »vut  ou$jurcitcn  or  $um  2Cu^ 

retten. 

To  ride  out.  Kusreitcn*. 

To  go  out  in  a  carriage.  2(u6fal;ren*. 

EXERCISES.     171. 

WThich  is  the  nearest  way  to  go  to  your  uncle's  castle  ?  —  This 
way  is  shorter  than  the  one  we  took  yesterday  ;  but  my  father 
knows  one  which  is  the  nearest  of  all.  —  Do  you  use  my  carriage  ? 

—  I  do  use  it.  —  Has  your  father  used  my  horse  !  —  He  has  used  it. 

—  What  does  this  horse  serve  you  for?  —  It  serves  me  to  ride  out 
upon.  —  Do  you  use  the  books  which  I  lent  you  1  —  I  do  use  them.  — 
May  I  (.fionn  id))  use  your  knife  1  —  Thou  mayest  use  it,  but  thou 
must  not  cut  thyself.  —  May  my  brothers  use  your  books'?  —  They 
may  use  them,  but  they  must  not  tear  them.  —  May  we  use  your 
stone  table  ?  —  You  may  use  it,  but  you  must  not  spoil  it.  —  What 
has  my  wood  served  you  for"?  —  It  has  served  me  to  warm  myself 
with.  —  For  what  purpose  do  your  brothers  want  money  ]  —  They 
want  some  to  live  upon.  —  What  does  this  knife  serve  us  for1?  —  It 
serves  us  to  cut  our  bread,  our  meat,  and  our  cheese  with.  —  Is  it 
cold  to  day  1  —  It  is  very  cold.  —  Will  you  draw  near  the  fire  ?  —  I 
cannot  draw  near  it,  for  I  am  afraid  of  burning  myself.  —  Why  does 
your  friend  go  away  from  the  fire  1  —  He  goes  away  from  it,  because 
he  is  afraid  of  burning  himself.  —  Art  thou  coming  near  the  fire  1  — 
I  am  coming  near  it,  because  I  am  very  cold.  —  Are  thy  hands  cold  ? 

—  My  hands  are  not  cold,  but  my  feet  are.  —  Do  you  go  away  from 
the  fire  1  —  I  do  go  away  from  it.  —  Why  do  you  go  away  from  it1?  — 
Because  I  am  not  cold.  —  Are  you  cold  or  warm  ?  —  I  am  neither  cold 
nor  warm. 

172. 

Why  do  your  children  approach  the  fire  1  —  They  approach  it,  be- 
cause they  are  cold.  —  Is  any  body  cold  ]  —  Somebody  is  cold,  —  Who 


220 

is  cold  1 — The  little  boy,  whose  father  has  lent  you  a  horse,  is  cold. 
— Why  does  he  not  warm  himself? — Because  his  father  has  no 
money  to  buy  wood. — Will  you  tell  him  to  come  to  me  to  warm 
himself? — I  will  tell  him  so. — Do  you  remember  anything  ? — I  re- 
member nothing. — What  does  your  uncle  recollect? — He  recollects 
your  promise. — What  have  I  promised  him  ? — You  have  promised 
him  to  go  to  Germany  with  him  next  winter. — I  intend  to  do  so  if 
it  is  not  too  cold. — Are  your  hands  often  cold  ? — My  hands  are 
scarcely  ever  cold,  hut  my  feet  are  often  so. — Why  do  you  with- 
draw from  the  fire  ? — I  have  been  sitting  near  the  fire  this  hour  and 
a  half,  so  that  I  am  no  longer  cold. — Does  your  friend  not  like  to 
sit  near  the  fire  ? — He  likes,  on  the  contrary,  much  (fcfyt)  to  sit  near 
the  fire,  but  only  when  he  is  cold. — May  one  approach  your  uncle  ? 
— One  may  approach  him,  for  he  receives  every  body.  (See  end 
of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 

^       V 


SEVENTY-THIRD  LESSON.  -JUrd  tmfr 
Cection. 

Ta  <&*VP  $  Kofircn  (verb  active). 

\  <3id)  raftrcn  (verb  reflexive). 

To  get  shaved.  ©id)  rafircn  lajjcn*. 

To  dress,  to  put  on  clothes.  2£n$icf)cn*. 

To  dress.  tfnfletbtfn. 

To  undress,  to  put  off  clothes.  2(u$$tcjjen* 
To  undress. 


Obs.  A.  2(ttjtef)ett*  expresses  either  to  dress  or  to  put 
on  clothes,  but  anfletbett  caruonly  be  used  to  express  the 
English  to  dress.  The  same  may  be  said  with  regard  to 
and  cutctffctbetu 


Have  you  dressed  yourself?  £a&en  ©tc  ftcf)  onge 

I  have  not  yet  dressed  myself.  3d)  fa&e  mid)  nod)  nid)t  cmgefteibet. 

Have  you  dressed  the  child?  £>a&en  @ic  batf  $tnb  a 

I  have  dressed  it.  3d)  fjafce  e$  angc^ccjcn. 

He  has  put  on  his  coat.  <£r  fyat  fetncn  $?ocf  an 

He  has  taken  off  his  shoes.  (St  l)at  [cine  (Sdjufye 

To  wake.  SBccfcn/  oufwcdCcn. 

To  awake.  (5rtoad)cnx  aufn?ad>cn. 

Obs.  B.  3Bedfett  and  cwftt>e<Jfett  are  active  verbs,  but 
etttXKfyett  and  cwftt>arf)ett  are  neuter,  and  take  the  verb 
fein*  for  their  auxiliary.  SBedfett  signifies  to  wake  in- 
tentionally, cwfwecfen  unintentionally  :  Ex.  SOBotten  ®ie 


221 

mtdf)  urn  jtoet  Ufyr  toerfen  ?  Will  you  wake  me  at  two 
o'clock?  SRactyen  ©te  feinen  ?drm,  bamit  ©ie  ifyn  md)t 
aitftt>e<fen,  do  not  make  any  noise,  that  you  may  not 
wake  him.  @Ttoarf)en  means  to  awake  at  once  or  by  ac- 
cident. Ex.  3cf)  ent>arf)te  auf  dnmal  au$  meinetn  £raume, 
I  at  once  awoke  from  my  dream.  2hiftt>ad)en,  means  to 
awake  regularly  without  any  accident.  Ex. 
auftoacfyett,  to  awake  in  the  morning. 


To  come  down  (  ^erab,  fyinab      >  ftetgen*,  gcfyen*, 

(See  Less.  L.)  (  Remitter,  fyimmter  $  reitcn*,  fasten*,  2C* 

To  go  down  into  the  well.  3n  fcctt  93runncn  !)tnuntcr  fld^cn*. 

To  come  down  the  hill.  Sgcm  5H'r$e  bi'tab  ftetgcn*. 

To  go  down  the  river.  3)m  (Strom  fjinaO  fafjrcn*. 

To  alight  from  one's  horse,  to  83cm  9)fctt>e  ftcigcn*. 
dismount. 


To  alight,  to  get  out.  \ 


ffd^m 


* 


To  mount  —  to  ascend.  (S  t  c  t  g  c  n    (part,   past   gcftwcpn. 

Imperf.  fttcg). 

To  mount  the  horse.  2Cufg  (auf  t>a$)  ^)fcrb  flcigcn*. 

To  get  into  the  coach.  3n  ben  8Ba$en  ftcigcn*. 

To  go  on  board  a  ship.  3n  cin  <Scr»tff  ftctgen*. 

The  dream,  the  beard,  tct  Sraum  ;  tct  23art  ; 

the  stream  (the  river),  bet  (Strom. 

Where  is  your  brother  ?  SOBo  t(!  3fjt  Srubcr  ? 

He  is  in  the  garret.  <5r  tft  auf  bem  JBpben. 

Will  you  desire  him  to  come  SBellcn  <Ste  t^n  (ntten  ^cr 

down  1  ter)  gu  fommcn  ? 

The  garret  (the  loft)  under  the  £)ct  S3obcn  untcr  bem  £ad)C 

roof  of  a  house.  £aufi'$. 

To  come  down.  £cta&  (or  ^cruntcr)  Eommcn. 


To  behave,  to  conduct  one's  f  (Sidf)  auffii^rcn. 

self.  \  <Stcf)  Oetra^cn*  (Imperf.  bctrug). 

I  behave  well.  3tf)  fii()re  mtdf)  gut  auf. 

How  does  he  behave  1  2Bic  fiifjrt  er  fid)  auf  ? 

Towards.  (55  e  g  e  n  (a  preposition  governing 

the  accusative). 

He  behaves  ill  towards  this  man.  (£r  Mra'gt  fid)  fd)tcd)t  gc^cn  btcfen 

9}Zann. 
He  has  behaved  ill  towards  me.  <5r  f)at  fid)  uM  gccjcn  mid) 


222 

To  be  worth  while.  £)er   3#  u  ft  c a  rocrt!)   fein*. 

Is  it  worth  while  1  3ft  c$  frcr  SBiifje  reertf)  ? 

It  is  worth  while.  (S5  tft  tor  9)ttil)i»  rcevtfj. 

It  is  not  worth  while.  (£s  tft  tucl)t  tcr  SRtifjc  rccrtl). 

Is  it  worth  while  to  do  that?  3ft  ?*  tor  9J?uf)e    rccrtfy,  tncfeS   $u 

tfjun  ? 

Is  it  worth  while  to  write  to  3ft  c$  t>ct  SOU'ifyc  roertl),  an  tfyn  311 

him  ?  fcfyvcibcn  ? 

Is  it  better  1  3ft  e£  6cffcr  ? 

It  is  better.  (5s  ift  Ocf[cr. 

It  is  better  to  do  this  than  that.    (g$  ift   kffct,   btcfcS    a($   jcnc$    $tt 

tfnin. 

It  is  better  to  stay  here  than  to  (£$  ift  focflcr,  fytct  $u  bfcibcn,  ci(^  fpa* 
go  a  walking.  gicrcn  $u  gc^cn. 

EXERCISES.       173. 

Have  you  shaved  to-day? — I  have  shaved. — Has  your  brother 
shaved1? — He  has  not  shaved  himself,  but  has  got  shaved. — Do 
you  shave  often  1 — I  shave  every  morning,  and  sometimes  also  in 
the  evening. — When  do  you  shave  in  the  evening  ] — When  I  do 
not  dine  at  home. — How  many  times  a  day  does  your  father 
shave1? — He  shaves  only  once  a  day,  but  my  brother  has  such  a 
strong  beard,  that  he  is  obliged  to  shave  twice  a  day. — Does  your 
uncle  shave  often1? — He  shaves  only  every  other  day  (cincn  £03  um 
ben  cinfccrn),  for  his  beard  is  not  strong. — At  what  o'clock  do  you 
dress  in  the  morning1? — I  dress  as  soon  as  I  have  breakfasted,  and 
I  breakfast  every  day  at  eight  o'clock,  or  at  a  quarter  past  eight. — 
Does  your  neighbour  dress  before  he  breakfasts "? — He  breakfasts 
before  he  dresses. — At  what  o'clock  in  the  evening  dost  thou  un- 
dress"?— I  undress  as  soon  as  I  return  from  (an?)  the  theatre. — 
Dost  thou  go  to  the  theatre  every  evening  ] — I  do  not  go  every  eve- 
ning, for  it  is  better  to  study  than  to  go  to  the  theatre. — At  what 
o'clock  dost  thou  undress  when  thou  dost  not  go  to  the  theatre "? — 
I  then  undress  as  soon  as  I  have  supped,  and  go  to  bed  at  ten 
o'clock. — Have  you  already  dressed  the  child] — I  have  not  dressed 
it  yet,  for  it  is  still  asleep  (fctyaft  nccb). — At  what  o'clock  does  it 
get  up  1 — I  gets  up  as  soon  as  it  is  waked. 

174. 

Do  you  rise  as  early  as  1 1 — I  do  not  know  at  what  o'clock  you 
rise,  but  I  rise  as  soon  as  I  awake. — Will  you  tell  rny  servant  to 
wake  me  to-morrow  at  four  o'clock  ? — I  will  tell  him. — Why  have 
you  risen  so  early? — My  children  have  made  such  a  noise  that 
they  wakened  me. — Have  you  slept  well  ] — I  have  not  slept  well, 
for  you  made  too  much  noise. — At  what  o'clock  must  I  wake  you  ? 

*  £>ie  SD^ii^e,  is  a  feminine  substantive,  and  takes  tt  in  the  plural. 


223 

»— •'Tomorrow  thou  mayest  wake  me  at  six  o'clock.-1- At  what 
o'clock  did  the  good  captain  awake] — He  awoke  at  a  quarter  past 
five  in  the  morning;. — When  did  this  man  go  down  into  the  well  1 
— He  went  down  into  it  this  morning. — Has  he  come  up  again 
yet  (nriefocr  fxrcuif  gcjlicgcn)  ? — He  came  up  an  hour  ago, — Where 
is  your  brother ! — He  is  in  his  room. — Will  you  tell  him  to  come 
down  1 — I  will  tell  him  so  ;  but  he  is  not  dressed  yet. — Is  your 
friend  still  on  the  mountain? — He  has  already  come  down. — Did 
you  go  down  or  up  this  river? — We  went  down  it. — Has  your 
brother  dined  already  ? — He  dined  as  soon  as  he  had  alighted  from 
his  horse. — Is  your  uncle  already  asleep  (fcfytofcn*)  ? — I  believe 
that  he  is  asleep,  for  he  went  to  bed  as  soon  as  he  had  alighted.—- 
Did  my  cousin  speak  to  you  before  he  started  * — He  spoke  to  me 
before  he  got  into  the  coach. — Have  you  seen  my  brother? — I  saw 
him  before  I  went  on  board  the  ship. 

175, 

How  did  my  child  behave  ? — He  did  behave  very  well, — How 
clid  my  brother  behave  towards  you  ? — He  behaved  very  well  to- 
wards me,  for  he  behaves  well  towards  every  body. — Is  it  worth 
while  to  write  to  that  man? — It  is  not  worth  while  to  write  to  htm. 
— Is  it  worth  while  to  alight  in  order  to  buy  a  cake  1 — It  is  not 
worth  while,  for  it  is  not  long  since  we  ate. — Is  it  worth  while  to 
dismount  from  my  horse  in  order  to  give  something  to  that  poor 
man  ? — Yes,  for  he  seems  to  want  it ;  but  you  can  (fb'nncn)  give 
him  something  without  dismounting  from  your  horse. — Is  it  better 
to  go  to  the  theatre  than  to  study1? — It  is  better  to  do  the  latter 
than  the  former. — Is  it  better  to  learn  to  read  German  than  to  speak 
It  ? — It  is  not  worth  while  to  learn  to  read  it  without  learning  to 
speak  it. — Is  it  better  to  go  to  bed  than  to  go  a  walking  ? — It  is 
better  to  do  the  latter  than  the  former. — Is  it  better  to  get  into  a 
coach  than  to  go  on  board  the  ship  ? — It  is  not  worth  while  to  get 
into  a  coach  or  to  go  on  board  the  ship  when  one  has  no  wish  to 
travel.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SEVENTY-FOURTH  LESSON.—  bier  nnir 


To  hire,  to  rent.  9ft  t  e  t  fj  e  n. 

To  hire  a  room.  (Sin  Simmer  mtctfjcn. 

Have  you  hired  a  room  ?  £aben  <Stc  ein  Simmer  gemietftct  1 

I  have  hired  one.  3d)  fyafcc  etn£  gemu'tfyct. 

To  let.  93  c  r  m  t  e  t  fj  c  n. 

He  has  a  room  to  let.  (£r  fjat  cm  Simmer  $u 

To  part  with  something.  <£tn?a$  a&fdjaffcn. 


224 

Do  you  intend  to  part  with  your  ©tnb  <Ste  gefonnett,  3&te  9?fcrbe  afc 

horses  1  sufdjaffen  ? 

I  have  already  parted  with  them.  3ct)  fynbe  fie  fd>cn  afccjefd)Cifft. 

He  has  parted  with  his  carriage.  (5r  f)«t  fetncn  SBagcn  afcgefdfrafft. 

Have    you    parted    with    (dis-  £at>cn  <Sie  3()*en  23ebienten  <%es 

charged)  your  servant  ?  fdjafft  ? 

I  have  parted  with  (discharged)  3d>  fjabe  tfjn 

him. 

£  Sd  ot'f  sTofs^thing.  }  t  « 

Did  you  get  rid  of  youi  damaged  |  ©inb  ©te  S^en  wrbcrfcenctt 

sugar  ]  rfer  log  cjeroorben  ? 

I  did  get  rid  of  it.  t  3$)  bin  tl)n  (o^  gcwotbcn. 

Did  he  get  rid  of  his  old  horse  ?  j  3ft  er  fctn  alte8  $fctb  lofi 

ben? 
He  did  get  rid  of  it.  f  @r  iffc  c^ 


To  hope,  to  expect.         $  0  f  f  e  n. 

Do  you  expect  to  find  him  there  ?  £offen  ©tc  iljn  ba  JU  pnben  ? 
I  do  expect  it.  3d)  6offe  e$. 

Hope    and    expectation    make  £offen  unb  Barren  ma^t 
many  a  dupe.  $um  barren.     (See  Lesson  XL. 

Obs.  B.) 
To  wait,  to  tarry.       Barren. 


To  change.  S  o  u  f  fy  c  n* 


To  change  one  thing  for  another.  (StroaS  ge^en  ftn>a$  t)crtaufi^ett  or 

umtaufd)cn* 
I  change  my  hat  for  his.  3d)  taufd)e  meuten  ^ut  ^egen  ben 

fetntgcn  um. 

To  put  on  one's  hat.  2>cn  ^>ut  auffe|ett. 

To  put  on  linen.  2Bafd)ea  ontegen. 

To  put  on  a  cravat.  ©in    £al$tud)    umbtnben*.     Part. 

past,  cjcbunben.    Imperf.  banb. 


JSMI.  *»«!.. 


He  puts  on  other  (shifts  his)  @r  tegt  (jUM)  onbere  8355fd^e  an. 
linen. 


He  changes  his  linen.  C£t  tt)ed)fcft  fetne 

I  put  on  another  cravat.  3d)  btnfce  etn  anbereS 

I  change  my  cravat.  3d)  tt?ed)$le  ba^  £al$tud). 

»  T^te  SBiifc^e,  the  linen,  is  a  feminine  collective  noun  and  has  consequent^ 
ly  no  plural. 


225 


To  put  on  other  clothes. 
He  puts  on  other  clothes. 
He  puts  on  another  shirt. 


@tn  cmfceres  <jTferl>  nchmen*- 
To  change  the  horse. 


um!(cih*n. 
£)tc  JUctbct  n?ed)jc(n. 
(Sr  flctfcct  fid)  urn. 
(5r  rcccbfclt  fctnc  &(etbcr. 
(5r  $tef)t  cin  nnfccrcg  £emt>  cm. 
(5r  n?cd)fdt  fctn  £>c 


To  exchange.          2S  e  d)  f  c  (  n. 

To  take  fresh  horses.  3)ic  spfcrfcc  n>cd)fe(n. 

To  exchange  a  piece  of  money.    Gin  fetfW  ©clt>  ived)fc(n. 

To  correspond  with  some  one.      JBricfe  nut  3i'mcmt>em  rcedtfem. 

Do   you  correspond  with   your  2Bed)fe(n  <£te  JBrtefe  nut  ifyrcm  93cts 

father  ?  tcr  ? 

I  do  correspond  with  him.  3d)  nxd)*tc  Sriefe  mit  tfjnu 

To  mix.  ©  t  d)  m  t   d)  c  n. 

Amongst.  U  n  t  c  t  (a  preposition  governing 

the  dative  and  accusative). 

I  mix  among  the  people.  3d)  nu'fdjc  mid)  untcr  t)tc  Scute. 

He  mixes  among  the  soldiers.      (£c  nufd)t  (id)  untcr  t»tc  ©oltatcn. 

rSDStebcr  erf  c  nn  en*. 
To  recognise  or  to  acknowledge.  <(£rfcnnen*. 

C  Imperf,  e  r  f  a  n  n  t  c. 

Do  you  recognise  this  man  1        (grfcnncn  ©U  Hefcn  9}?ann  ? 
It  is  so  long  since  I  saw  him,  3d)  fyabc  ihn  fd)on  fo  (anqe  md)t  §& 
that  I  do  not  recollect  him.  fcfjen,  bap  id)  ifjn  nid)t  n?tet>crers 

fcnnc. 

EXERCISES.     176. 

Have  you  already  hired  a  room  1 — I  have  already  hired  one. — 
Where  have  you  hired  it"? — I  have  hired  it  in  William  Street, 
number  (one)  hundred  and  fifty  one. — At  whose  house  (*8ct  n>cm) 
have  you  hired  it  1 — At  the  house  of  the  man  whose  son  has  sold 
you  a  horse. — For  whom  has  your  father  hired  a  room  ? — He  has 
hired  one  for  his  son  who  has  just  arrived  from  Germany. — Did 
you  at  last  get  rid  of  that  man  1 — I  did  get  rid  of  him. — Why  has 
your  father  parted  with  his  horses  1 — Because  he  did  not  want 
them  any  more. — Have  you  discharged  your  servant  ? — I  have  dis- 
charged him,  because  he  served  me  no  more  well. — WThy  have  you 
parted  with  your  carriage1? — Because  I  do  not  travel  any  more. — 
Has  your  merchant  succeeded  at  last  in  getting  rid  of  his  damaged 
sugar  ] — He  has  succeeded  in  getting  rid  of  it. — Has  he  sold  it  on 
credit] — He  was  able  to  sell  it  for  cash,  so  that  he  did  not  sell  it 
on  credit. — Do  you  hope  to  arrive  early  in  Paris  ? — T  hope  to  ar- 
rive there  at  a  quarter  past  eight,  for  my  father  is  waiting  for  me 
this  evening, — For  what  have  you  exchanged  your  carriage  which 


226 

you  no  longer  made  use  of] — I  have  exchanged  it  for  a  fine  Ara- 
bian horse. — Do  you  wish  to  exchange  your  book  for  mine  1 — I 
cannot,  for  I  want  it  to  study  German  with. — Why  do  you  take 
your  hat  off? — I  take  it  off,  because  I  see  my  old  writing-master 
coming. — Do  you  put  on  another  hat  to  go  to  the  market  ] — I  do 
not  put  on  another  to  go  to  the  market,  but  to  go  to  the  great  con- 
cert. 

177. 

Why  does  your  father  put  on  other  clothes  ] — He  is  going  to  the 
king,  so  that  he  must  put  on  others. — Have  you  put  on  another  hat 
to  go  to  the  English  captain  ] — I  have  put  on  another,  but  I  have 
not  put  on  another  coat  or  other  boots. — How  many  times  a  day 
dost  thou  put  on  other  clothes  ]— I  put  on  others  to  dine  and  to  go 
to  the  theatre. — Do  you  often  put  on  a  clean  shirt  (einruetjSfcS  Jocmb)? 
— I  put  on  a  clean  one  every  morning. — When  does  your  father  put 
on  a  clean  shirt] — He  puts  it  on  when  he  goes  to  the  ball. — Does 
he  put  on  a  clean  cravat  (cin  wciped  £n(stucf))  as  often  as  you] — He 
puts  one  on  oftener  than  I,  for  he  does  so  six  times  a  day. — Did 
you  often  take  fresh  horses  when  you  went  to  Vienna  ] — I  took 
fresh  ones  every  three  hours. — Will  you  change  me  this  gold  coin 
(t>a$  (Seftftucf) '? — I  am  going  to  (will)  change  it  for  you  ;  what  money 
do  you  wish  to  have  for  it  (fcafiir)  ] — I  wish  to  have  crowns,  florins, 
and  kreuzers. — Do  you  correspond  with  my  friend  ] — I  do  corres- 
pond with  him. — How  long  have  you  been  corresponding  with  my 
brother] — I  have  been  corresponding  with  him  these  six  years  al- 
most.— WThy  do  you  mix  among  those  people? — 1  mix  among 
them  in  order  to  know  what  they  say  of  me. — Have  you  recognised 
your  father  ] — I  had  not  seen  him  for  such  a  long  time,  that  I  did 
not  recognise  him  (3d)  fattc  tfjn  fo  ton$_c  ntd)t  gcfcbcn,  bap  id)  tfon  md)t 
tuicbcr  criranntc). — Do  you  still  speak  German] — It  is  so  long  since 
I  spoke  it,  that  I  have  nearly  forgotten  it  all. — Amongst  you  (llntcr 
(Such)  country  people  there  are  many  fools,  are  there  not(mcf)t  njafyt)  ? 
asked  a  philosopher  lately  (ncu(tcc))  °f  a  peasant  (ctncn  SBaiu'rn). 
The  latter  (Dicfct)  answered  him  :  "  Sir,  one  finds  some  in  all  sta- 
tions (bet  ©tcmb)."  "  Fools  sometimes  tell  the  truth  (fete 
,"  said  the  philosopher.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SEVENTY-FIFTH  LESSON.— JFftttf  nutr 
Cection. 

To  find  one's  self  (to  be,  to  do).    <S  i  cf)  fc  e  ft  n  b  C  n  *.  Imperf.  fcmb. 

How  do  you  do  ?  t  2&c  fcefinben  @ic  fid)  ? 

I  am  very  well.  t  3d)  Ivjmbe  mid)  fefct  rooW. 

How  is  your 'father?  Sic  (vfi  nbct  ficfy  3&r  4>crt  fBatct  ? 


227 

Obs.     In  the  German  the  words  jjerr,  sir,  $rau,  ma- 
dam, &c.  must  be  preceded  by  the  possessive  pronoun. 


He  is  ill.  t  <£r  bcflufcct  fid) 

Your  brother.  f  3  f)  r  £  c  1  1  Sruber. 

Your  cousin.  t  35*  £  e  r  r  better. 

Your  brothers.  t  3^c  pcrrcn  S3tuber. 


To  stay,  to  sojourn.         ©id)  auf  fatten*.  Imperf.  fyiett.* 
Have  you  stayed  long  at  Vien-  £aben  (Sic  fid)  lano,e  in  £Bien  aufa,e= 

na?  fjaltcn? 

I  have   stayed   there  only  three  3d)  f)aOe  mid)  nut  brct  Sage  ba  aufs 

days.  gcrjattcn. 

Where  does  your  brother  stay  at  2Bo  fyatt  fid)  31JE  £err  23tubct  ges 

present  *  gcnwarttg  auf  ? 

At  present.  (SkantW&rttA. 

To  mock  at,  to  criticise  some  one  ^ti  iibcr  ^cmanben  obcr  ctwa^  aufs 

or  something.  fatten*. 

To  laugh  at  some  one.  ©id)  uOcr  3cmanbcn  luftig  mad)cn. 

He  criticises  every  body.  (5t  l)d(t  fid)  uOcr  3^t>crmann  auf. 

To  earn,  to  get.  SScrbicnen. 

To  gain.  (Sictutnncn*.    Part,    past,  Q  c  * 

tv  o  n  n  e  n.  Imperf.  9  c  ro  a  n  n. 

To  get  one's  bread.  ©etn  S3rcb  tjcrbtencn  or  crructbcn*. 

Part,    past,  crroorfccn.     Imperf. 


To  get  one's  livelihood  by. 

He  gets  his  livelihood  by  work-  <£t  ctna'fjrt  ficr)  nut  Ht&citen. 

ing. 

I  get  my  livelihood  by  writing.  3d)  crndFjre  mid)  nut  <Sd)ret6cn. 

I  gain  my  money  by  working.  3d)  t>erbtene  mctn  ©c(b  nut  2(rOcttcn* 

By  what  does  this  man  get  his  SBomit  crna'fyrt  ficr)  btcfcr  9}jann? 

livelihood  ? 


To  spill.  aSetgtegen*,  Part,  past,  o  e  r  f 

9  o  f  f  e  n.    Imperf.  o  c  r  9  of. 

He  has  spilt  the  wine  over  the  C£t  fycit  ben  SOSein  auf  ben  Sifd)  tiers 
table.  QOffen  (action). 

•  Compound  verbs  are  conjugated  exactly  like  simple  verbs.  We  shall 
therefore  merely  note  the  irregularities  of  the  latter,  and  leave  it  to  the  learner 
himself  to  add  the  separable  or  inseparable  particles.  Thus  fctttb  is  the  im- 
perfect of  finfcen*,  to  find  (See  Lessons  XXXV.  and  XLIL),  and  kfanb  that 
of  befinben*.  The  participle  past  of  ftnben  is  flefunben,  and  that  of  beftnben*, 
befimben,  the  syllable  $e  being  omitted  on  account  of  the  inseparable  particle 
(See  Lesson  XLV.).  ^tett  is  the  imperfect  of  the  verb  fyaUett*,  to  hold  (  Les- 
son LIIL),  and  fyielt  auf  that  of  auf  batten*.  The  past  participle  of  fatten  is 
ge^alten,  and  that  of  auf^atten*,  aufge^attcn. 


228 


To  stand. 
The  wine  is  on  the  table. 


Has    your    father   already 

parted  ] 

He  is  ready  to  depart. 
Ready. 

To  make  ready. 
To  make  one's  self  ready. 
To  keep  one's  self  ready. 

To  split  {to  pierce). 

To  break  somebody's  heart. 
You  break  this  man's  heart. 


To  hang. 

To  be  hanging. 


<5  t  e  I)  c  n  *.   Part,  past,  geftanben. 
Imperf.  ftanb. 

®et    SGSetn   ftcfjt  auf   bem   Stfcfye 
(rest). 

de-  3ft  3&r  £etr  SSatcr 


<5r  ift  fcctett  afyutcifcn. 

33erett. 

SBctcitcn. 

©id)  Oerett  madjcn. 

(Sid)  berett  fatten*. 

Serfpalten  (butd)  fcofyren). 

Semanbem  ba$  £cr$  burd)bo()ren. 
©te  butcfy&efyten  biefem  9ftannc  ba$ 


(verb  active,  regular). 
4!>angen*    (a    neuter    irregular 
verb).      Part,    past, 
Imperf. 


jjDtng  tnctn  |>ut  an  tern  Sftacjcl  ? 

©r  tying  baran. 

3cf)  tyangc  ttjn  an  ben  Sftagel.    ' 

®cr  £>tcb  ift  Qctyan^t  wocbcn. 

8QBcr  fjat  ben  JtotO  an  ben  S3aum  ge* 

tyangt  ? 
bee  £>teb  ; 
ber  JKauOer. 
bev  patient.     (See  Note,  Lesson 

L1V.) 

Siemltd)/  fo  jtcmUdf). 
(5^  ift  siemttd)  fpat. 
©^  ift  stemlic^  welt. 


Was  my  hat  hanging  on  the  nail  1 

It  was  hanging  on  it. 

I  hang  it  on  the  nail. 

The  thief  has  been  hanged. 

Who  has  hung  the  basket  on  the 

tree  1 

The  thief, 

the  robber,  the  highwayman, 
The  patient  (the  sick  person), 

Tolerably  well. 
It  is  rather  late. 
It  is  rather  far. 


EXERCISE  178. 

How  is  your  father  1 — He  is  (only)  so  so. — How  is  your  patient  t 
— He  is  a  little  better  to-day  than  yesterday. — Is  it  long  since  you 
saw  your  brothers  ? — I  saw  them  two  days  ago. — How  were  they  ? 
— They  were  very  well. — How  art  thoul — 1  am  tolerably  well 
(ntdbt  iiOet). — How  long  has  your  brother  been  learning  German  ? 
— He  has  been  learning  it  only  three  months. — Does  he  already 
speak  it? — He  already  speaks,  reads,  and  writes  it  better  than  your 
cousin  who  has  been  learning  it  these  five  years. — Is  it  long  since 
you  heard  of  my  uncle  1 — It  is  hardly  three  months  since  I  heard 
of  him. — Where  was  he  staying  then  1 — He  was  staying  at  Berlin, 
but  now  he  is  in  London. — Do  you  like  to  speak  to  my  uncle  ]— 


229 

I  do  like  very  much  (feljt)  to  speak  to  him,  but  I  do  not  like  (id 
nid)t  cjcrn)  him  to  laugh  at  me.  —  Why  does  he  laugh  at  you  1  —  He 
laughs  at  me,  because  I  speak  badly  —  Why  has  your  brother  no 
friends  ?  —  He  has  none,  because  he  criticises  every  body.  —  WThat 
do  you  get,  your  livelihood  by]  —  I  get  my  livelihood  by  working. 
—  Does  your  friend  get  his  livelihood  by  writing  1  —  He  gets  it  by 
speaking  and  writing.  —  Do  these  gentlemen  get  their  livelihood  by 
working]  —  They  do  not  get  it  by  doing  any  thing,  for  they  are 
too  idle  to  work.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 

_ 

SEVENTY-SIXTH  LESSON.—  Sedjs  nnb  fiicb^igstu 
Section. 

To  doubt  any  thing.  )  Un  etroag  $roctfc(n  (governs  the  da- 

To  question  any  thing.        )      tive  with  the  preposition  on). 
Do  you  doubt  that  ?  Sroetfeln  < 

I  do  not  doubt  it.  "^ 

I  make  no  question,  have  no  £  3$  jwctflc  md)t 

doubt  of  it.  J 

It  is  not  to  be  doubted.  2)atan  ijt  md)t  $u  petfcfo. 

What  do  you  doubt  ]  SBoran  petfeln  ©U? 

I  doubt  what  that  man  has  told  3d)  ^ractfle  on  t>em,  roag  Mcfet  93?ann 

me.  mir  gefagt  ^at. 

To  agree  to  a  thing.  Uebcr   (or  we^cn)  ctwag  cint^  (or 

T°o  ItssVZ;!  "*«'          \ 
Do  you  grant  that  ?  ©cffcfjcn  ©1C  C^  ? 

I  do  grant  it.  3d)  gcftc^e  eg  (or  id)  cjefterje  es  etn/  or 

id)  gcbe  eg  gu). 

How  much  have  you  paid  for  that  SQBtewcl  Ijo^cn  ©U  fdr  tiefen  ^ut  be^ 

hat  1  gQ^tt  ? 

I  have  paid  three  crowns  for  it.     3d)  Ijabe  fctci 


J"or.  5  ft  r  (a  preposition  governing  the 

accusative). 

I  have  bought  this  horse  for  five  3d)   rjaftc  ttcfcg  $)ferb  fiir  (or  urn) 
hundred  francs.  funf  l)unt>ctt  ^ranfcn  gefauft. 


The  price,  bet 

Have  you  agreed  about  the  price  1  ©tnt)  ©tc  fiber  t)cn  ^rctg  (ttJCgcn 

5>reife$)  ctntg  gcracrfcen  ? 
We  have  agreed  about  it.  83?ir  finfc  boruber  (tcgwcgen)  etnig 


t 
About  what  have  you  agreed  ?      SBeritOcc  (rocsroccjen)  (inl)  ©tc  cint/j 


230 


About  the  price.  }«£&>*,, 

On  account  of  (about).  2Bea,cn  (a   preposition    governing 
the  genitive). 

©cftehen  @'tc  3hrcn  JcfjUretn? 

3d)  gfftcfie  if)n  ein. 

3d)  gtfttfa  tap  c*  ein  getter  ift. 


Do  you  confess  your  fault? 

I  do  confess  it, 

I  confess  it  to  be  a  fault. 


To  agree,  to  compose  a  differ- 
ence. 

To  consent. 

However* 
For  all  that. 

To  wear. 

What  garments  does  he  wear? 
He  wears  beautiful  garments. 

Against  my  custom. 

As  customary. 
The  partner, 


"  ©id)  ttcrgleiclxn*.     Part,  past,  we* 

Qlichcn.    Imperf.  wegltd). 
.  (Sid)  tictcinigcn. 
<StnnnUto,cn. 

3nbeffcn,  bed),  j  cbod). 
£)  e  ffen  uncjcadjte  t. 

S  r  a  a,  c  n*.    Imperf.  tru^. 

SBa«  fttr  Jltcibcr  tracer? 
(£c  trfigt  fdjonc  ^letter. 

©ccjcn   mctnc  ©cr»o6nr)ctt  (a  fern. 
noun  taking  en  in  the  plural). 


tec 


(gen.  en). 


To  observe  something,  to  take  ©two*  mcrfcn  (geroolje  tverben*,  fc* 

notice  of  something.  fyen*). 

Do  you  take  notice  of  that  ?         Mcrfcn  <Ste  ba£  ? 
I  do  take  notice  of  it.  3d)  nicrfe  c$. 

Did  you  observe  that  ?  £aben  ©tc  ta^  gcmccft  ? 

Did  you  notice  what  he  did?        ^a(>cn  Sic  gefcfycn,  roa^  ec  getf;an 

I  did  notice  it.  3cr;  f)abe  c$  gefe^cn. 

To  expect  (to  hope).      SBcenmtfjcn  (ftoffen). 

Do  you  expect  to  receive  a  letter  SSermutfjen  ^ic  einen  SBrtef  oon  3for 

from  your  uncle  ?  rem  £>f)eim  ^u  errjalten  ? 

I  do  expect  it.  3d)  fjoffe  eg. 

He  expects  it.  ©c  ocrmut^et  e^. 

Have  we  expected  it?  £al'cn  wtc  e^  t»erntutl)ct ? 

We  have  expected  it.  2Btc  fjaCcn  eg  oennut^et. 

To  get  (meaning  to  procure).  S3crfd)affcn. 

I  cannot  procure  any  money.  3d)  form  mte  fetn  ©e(b  »erfd)affcn. 

He  cannot  procure  any  thing  to  ©c  fonn  fid)  ntd)t»  ^u  effen  t)erfd)afs 

eat.  fen. 

EXERCISES.  179. 

What  have  you  gained  that  money  by  ? — 1  have  gained  it  by 
working. — What  have  you  done  with  your  wine  ? — I  have  spilt  it 


231 

on  the  table. — Where  is  yours  ? — It  is  on  the  lar<re  table  in  my  lit- 
tle room  ;  but  you  must  not  drink  any  of  it,  for  I  must  keep  it  for 
my  father  who  is  ill. — Are  you  ready  to  depart  with  me  ? — 1  am  so. 
— Does  your  uncle  depart  with  us  1 — He  departs  with  us  if  he  plea- 
ses— Will  you  tell  him  to  be  ready  to  depart  to-morrow  at  six 
o'clock  in  the  evening  ? — I  will  tell  him  so. — Why  are  you  laugh- 
ing at  that  man  1 — I  do  not  intend  to  laugh  at  him. — I  beg  of  you 
not  to  do  it,  for  you  will  break  his  heart  if  you  laugh  at  him. —  Why 
have  they  (man)  hanged  that  man  1 — They  have  hanged  him,  be- 
cause he  has  killed  somebody. — Have  they  (man)  hanged  the  man 
who  stole  a  horse  (from)  your  brother  (in  the  dative)  ? — They  (Wan) 
have  punished  him,  but  they  have  not  hanged  him  :  they  only  hang 
highwaymen  in  our  country  (bet  un*). — Where  have  you  found  my 
coat  ? — I  found  it  in  the  blue  room  ;  it  was  hanging  on  a  great  nail. 
— Will  you  hang  my  hat  on  the  tree  1 — I  will  hang  it  thereon. 

180. 

Do  you  doubt  what  I  am  telling  you  1 — I  do  not  doubt  it. — Do 
you  doubt  what  that  man  has  told  you  1 — I  do  doubt  it,  for  he  has 
often  told  me  what  was  not  true  (ivafyr). — Why  have  you  not  kept 
your  promise  ? — I  know  no  more  what  I  promised  you. — Did  you 
not  promise  us  to  take  (fubrcn)  us  to  the  concert  (on)  Thursday  1 — I 
confess  that  I  was  wrong  in  promising  you  ;  although  (infection)  the 
concert  has  not  taken  place. — Does  your  brother  confess  his  fault  1 
— He  does  confess  it. — What  does  your  uncle  say  to  that  letter? — 
He  says  that  it  is  written  very  well  ;  but  he  admits  that  he  has 
been  wrong  in  sending  it  to  the  captain. — Do  you  confess  your  fault 
now  1 — I  confess  it  to  be  a  fault. — Have  you  at  last  bought  the 
horse  which  you  wished  to  buy  1 — I  have  not  bought  it,  for  I  have 
not  been  able  to  procure  money.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SEVENTY-SEVENTH  LESSON.  —  Siebett 

Section. 


OF    THE    PLUPERFECT. 

This  past  tense  expresses  an  action  entirely  finished 
when  another  action  which  relates  to  it  was  com- 
mencing. 

After  having  read  (after  I  had  9?ad)bcm  id)  gcfcfcn  fyatte. 

read). 
After  having  cut  the  bread  (after  9?ad)t>em  ct  bag  SBrob  gcfcf)ntttcn  fjat- 

he  had  cut  the  bread).  re. 

After  having  eaten  (after  he  had  ?iad)l>cm  cr  QCCjeficn  fyatte. 

eaten.) 


232 

After  cutting  myself.  9?ad)bcm  id)  mid)  $cfd)nittcn  Ijatte. 

After  dressing  yourself.  €ftad)tcm  ©tc  fid)  angqecjcn  fatten. 
After  he  had  withdrawn  from  the  9?ad)bcm  cr  fid)  t>om  geucr  cntfcrnt 

fire.  fyatte. 

After  thou  hadst  shaved.  97ad)bcm  3)u  £>id)  rafttt  fyattcji. 

After   they  had  warmed  them-  $ttad)bcm  fie  fid)  gcrccirmt  gotten. 

selves. 

Before  I  set  out.  (Sfjc  id)  abrcife. 

When  I  had  read,  I  breakfasted.  9?ad)bcm  id)  gcfcfcn  fyatte,  frufyflurfte 

id). 


In  the  second  member  of  a  compound  phrase  the 
nominative  is  placed  after  its  verb. 

When  you  had  dressed  you  went  97adjbem  <§tc  jtdj  emgqogcn  fatten/ 

out.  9  1  n  9  c  n  <Sie  au£. 

When  he  had  cut  the  bread  he  9?ad)bcm  cr  ba^  33rcl)  $i'fd)mttcn  \)fa 

cut  the  meat.  tc,  f  c^  n  i  1  1  cr  t>a£  S^CU^» 

After  he  had  read  the  letter  he  9?ad)t>em  cr  ben  JsBrtcf  gclcfcn  Ijattc/ 

said.  f^gte  cr. 

Before  I  depart  I  will  once  more  <5()C  id)  abrcifc,  mill  id)  nod)  cins 

see  my  children.  mat  meitu  jlinbcr  fel)cn. 

Obs.  A.  This  transposition  of  the  nominative  does  not 
take  place  when  the  phrase  begins  with  the  subject. 

He  cut  the  meat  after  he  had  cut  (£r  fdjnitt  ba6  $lcifd),  nnd)bcm  cr  bn^ 
the  bread.  S3rob  gcfd)ntttcn  feattc. 

What  did  he  do  after  he  had  2Ba$  tfyat  cr,  nad)bcm  er  gcgcffcn  fjat^ 
eaten  ?  te  ? 

He  went  to  bed.  (£r  ging  ^u  23ctte. 


THE  FOLLOWING  VERBS  GOVERN  THE  ACCUSATIVE  WITH  THE 

PREPOSITION  ii6er. 

To  be  afflicted  at  something.  Ucfccr  ctnxiS  bctru&t  fcin*. 
To  afflict  one's  self  at  something,  ©id)  ubcr  ctttwS  bctriibcn. 
Are  you  afflicted  at  the  death  of  (Sinb  @ic  iih'r  ben  £ob  mcinc§ 

my  friend  1  $rcunt>C6  bctriiOt  ? 

I  am  much  afflicted  at  it.  3d)  bin  fefjr  foctrfibt  borubcr. 

At  what  is  your  father  afflicted  ?  ffiScrubcr  ijit  3()r  £cnr  SSatcr  bctrubt  ? 

The  accident,  bcr  Bufall ; 

the  death,  bcr  Sob. 

To  die  (to  lose  life).  (Sterben*. 

I  die,  am  dying.  3d)  fterbc. 

Thou  diest,  art  dying.  £)u  fiirbft. 


233 


He  dies,  is  dying. 
Died.  Part,    past,  Cjeftotbctt.     Imperfect, 

Jtatb. 

To  complain  of  some  one  or  some-  ©id)  u  b  e  t   Senianben  ober 
thing.  etwaS  b  e  H  a  9  e  n  (befd)wes 

ten). 

Do  you  complain  of  my  friend  1   SSeftagen    ©ie    fid)    iibct    nictnen 

Jteunb  ? 

I  do  complain  of  him.  3d)  beftoge  mid)  ubct  if)n. 

Of  whom  do  you  complain  ?         Uebct  wen  beftagcn  <Ste  fid)  ? 
Of  what  does  your  brother  com-  SBotubet  befd)wett  fid)  3fyt  SStubet  ? 
plain  t 

To  wonder,  to  be  astonished  or  <5id)  ubct  C  t  W  a  $  wunbettt. 
surprised  at  something. 

Do  you  wonder  at  what  I  have  SQSunbctn  <Ste  fid)  ubct  baS,  wa$  id& 

done  1  getfycm  ^abe  ? 

I  do  wonder  at  it.  3d)  wunbctc  mid)  batubct. 

At  what  are  you  surprised  1          SBotiibet  wunbctn  <Ste  \ 


To  be  glad.  Sieb  fetn*  (governs  the  dative). 

To  be  sorry.  2ctb  fetn*  or  tfyun*  (governs 

the  dative). 

I  am  glad  of  it.  f  (Si  ijl  nut  (teb. 

I  am  sorry  for  it.  f  (££  t^ut  or  (ift)  mtt  (eib. 

I  am  glad  to  hear  that  your  father  (£6  tft  mtt  (teb  gu  ttetneljmen,  bap  3^t 

is  well.  £ctt  SSatet  fid)  wof)l  befinbet. 

To  hear  (to  understand).  83ctncf)men*« 

Dear,  Iteb ; 

sad,  sorrowful.  ttautig. 

The  prince,  bet  ^ittft  (^ttn^)   (en  in  the  ge- 

nitive) ; 

the  count,  bet  ©taf  (en  in  the  genitive)  ; 

the  baron,  bet  23aton. 


To  pronounce. 

The  Saxon, 

the  Prussian,  bet  - 

the  Austrian, 

Saxony, 

Prussia, 

Austria, 

The  Christian,  bet  Gfyttft  (gen.  en)  ; 

the  Jew,  bet  3ube ; 

the  negro,  bet  9?co,et  (tct  -Sttofyt,  gen.  en). 

All  names  of  countries  are  neuter. 


234 

EXERCISES.      181. 

Has  your  father  at  last  bought  the  house  ] — He  has  not  bought  it, 
for  he  could  not  agree  about  the  price. — Have  you  at  last  agreed 
about  the  price  of  that  carriage  1 — We  have  agreed  about  it. — How 
much  have  you  paid  for  it  1 — I  have  paid  fifteen  hundred  francs  (t»ct 
granfc)  for  it. — What  hast  thou  bought  to-day  ? — I  have  bought 
three  beautiful  pictures,  a  pretty  gold  ring,  and  two  pair  of  thread 
stockings. — How  much  hast  thou  bought  the  pictures  for  1 — I  have 
bought  them  for  seven  hundred  francs. — Do  you  find  that  they  are 
dear  1 — I  do  not  find  so.— Have  you  agreed  with  your  partner  1 — I 
have  agreed  with  him. — Does  he  consent  to  pay  you  the  price  of 
the  ship  ] — He  does  consent  to  pay  it  to  me. — Do  you  consent  to  go 
to  England  1 — I  do  consent  to  go  thither. 

Have  you  seen  your  old  friend  again  (tvtcfcct  gcfcr)cn)  7 — I  have 
seen  him  again. — Did  you  recognise  him  1 — T  could  hardly  recognise 
him,  for  contrary  to  his  custom,  he  wears  a  long  sword. — How  is 
he  1 — He  is  very  well. — What  garments  does  he  wear  ? — He  wears 
beautiful  new  garments. — Have  you  taken  notice  of  what  your  boy 
has  done  ] — I  have  taken  notice  of  it. — Have  you  punished  him  for 
it  ? — I  have  not  punished  him  for  it,  because  he  has  confessed  his 
fault. — Has  your  father  already  written  to  you  1 — Not  yet ;  but  I 
expect  to  receive  a  letter  from  him  to-day. — Of  what  do  you  com- 
plain?— I  complain  of  not  being  able  to  procure  some  money.— 
Why  do  these  poor  people  complain  1 — They  complain  because  they 
cannot  procure  a  livelihood. — How  are  your  parents  1 — They  are, 
as  usual  (IMC  florae bnUcb),  very  well. — Is  your  uncle  (Sftr  £cru 
£)f)ctm)  well? — He  is  better  than  he  usually  is  (a(*  aentfrjnUd)). — 
Have  you  already  received  a  letter  from  your  friend  who  is  in  Ber- 
lin 1— I  have  already  written  to  him  several  times ;  he  has,  how- 
ever, not  answered  me  yet. 

182. 

What  did  you  do  when  you  had  finished  your  letter  ? — I  went  to 
my  brother,  who  took  (ffiforcn)  me  to  the  theatre,  where  I  had  the 
pleasure  to  find  one  of  my  friends,  whom  I  had  not  seen  for  ten 
years> — What  didst  thou  do  after  getting  up  this  morning  1 — When 
I  had  read  the  letter  of  the  Polish  count,  I  went  out  to  see  the  the- 
atre of  the  prince,  which  I  had  not  seen  before  (nod)  ntd)t). —  What 
did  your  father  do  when  he  had  breakfasted  1 — He  shaved  and  went 
out. — What  did  your  friend  do  after  he  had  been  a  walking  ? — He 
went  to  the  baron. — Did  the  baron  cut  the  meat  after  he  had  cut  the 
bread  1 — He  cut  the  bread  after  he  had  cut  the  meat. — .When  do  you 
set  out  ? — I  do  not  set  out  till  (crft)  to-morrow ;  for  before  I  depart 
I  will  once  more  see  my  good  friends. — What  did  your  children  do 
when  they  had  breakfasted  '{—They  went  a  walking  with  their  dear 
preceptor. — Where  did  your  uncle  go  to  after  he  had  warmed  him- 
self 7 — He  went  nowhither. — After  he  had  warmed  himself  he  un- 
dressed and  went  to  bed. — At  what  o'clock  did  he  get  up  1 — He  got 
up  at  sun  rise. — Did  you  wake  him  ? — I  had  no  need  to  wake  him, 


235 

for  he  had  got  up  before  me. — What  did  your  cousin  do  when  he 
heard  (of)  the  death  of  his  best  friend  ] — He  was  much  afflicted, 
and  went  to  bed  without  saying  a  word. — Did  you  shave  before  you 
breakfasted  1 — I  shaved  when  I  had  breakfasted. — Did  you  go  to 
bed  when  you  had  eaten  supper  ? — When  I  had  eaten  supper  I 
wrote  my  letters,  and  when  I  had  written  them  I  went  to  bed. — At 
what  are  you  afflicted  ? — 1  am  afflicted  at  that  accident. — Are  you 
afflicted  at  the  death  of  your  relation  1 — I  am  much  (fcfjr)  afflicted 
at  it. — When  did  your  relation  die  1 — He  died  last  month. — Of 
what  do  you  complain] — I  complain  of  your  boy. — Why  do  you 
complain  of  him  ] — Because  he  has  killed  the  pretty  dog,  which  I 
received  from  one  of  my  friends. — Of  what  has  your  uncle  com- 
plained ? — He  has  complained  of  what  you  have  done. — Has  he 
complained  of  the  letter  which  I  wrote  to  him  1 — He  has  com- 
plained of  it.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SEVENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON.—  QUI)t 
Section. 


Declension  of  Feminine  Substantives. 

NOM.   GEN.     DAT.    Ace. 


TU»       S  Singular. 
The       1  Plural. 


bte,      ber,      ber,      bte* 
bte,      bet,      ben,     bte* 


I.  SINGULAR. 

Rule.  All  feminine  substantives,  without  excep- 
tion, together  with  all  foreign  feminine  words  adopted 
into  German,  as :  bt'e  ^orm,  the  form  ;  bt'e  ftnte,  the 
line,  remain  invariable  in  all  the  cases  singular.  Ex. 
NOM.  bte  grail,  the  woman ;  GEN.  ber  gran,  of  the 
woman ;  DAT.  ber  grail,  to  the  woman ;  Ace.  bt'e 
gran,  the  woman. 

II.  PLURAL. 

Rule.     Feminine  substantives  ending  in  e,  el,  er,  add 
n,  and  all  others  en,  in  all  the  cases  of  the  plural ;  and 
do  not  soften  the  radical  vowels.     (See  Table  of  the 
Declension  of  Substantives,  Lesson  XIII.) 
There  are  two  exceptions  to  this  rule  : 
1st,  The  two  substantives:  bte  SNittter,  the  mother; 
bte  £ocf)ter,  the  daughter,  soften  the  radical  vowels  in 


236 


the  plural  without  adding  n*a     Ex.  Plural :  bie 
the  mothers  ;  tie  £orf)ter,  the  daughters. 

2d,  Feminine  monosyllables  containing  an  a  or  n, 
are  declined  in  the  plural  like  masculine  substantives, 
that  is,  they  add  e  in  all  the  cases  and  soften  the  radi- 
cal vowel.b 


The  door  — the  doors. 
The  bottle — the  bottles. 
The  fork  — the  forks. 
The  pen    — the  pens. 
The  hand  — the  hands. 
The  nut    — the  nuts. 

She — they. 


Has  she  * 
She  has. 
She  has  not. 
Have  they  ? 
They  have. 
They  have  not. 


My  (feminine  singular). 
My  (plural  for  all  genders). 


SING.  PLURAL. 

bie  £f)itr,  —  bie  iZfyitren* 
bie  ftfafcfye  —  bie  glafofym* 
bie  ©abel  —  bie  ©abelm 
bie  geber  —  bie  geberm 
bie  £anb  — bie  §dnbe, 
bie 


<£ic  —  ftc.  (See  Table  of  the 
Personal  Pronouns,  Lesson 
XXVIII.) 

£at  fie  ? 
(Sic  f)at. 
(Bte  fat  md)t. 
£afcen  fie  ? 
©te  Ijabcn. 
©ie  fjabcn  md)t. 

NOM.  GEN.      DAT.     Ace. 
meine,  nteiner,  meiner,  nteine* 
meine,  nteiner,  meinen,  meine. 


Obs.  A.  In  this  manner  all  possessive  pronouns  of 
the  feminine  gender  are  declined,  as :  Seine,  thy  ;  feine, 
his  ;  ifyre,  her  ;  unfere,  our  ;  (gnre,  your  ;  ifyre,  their. 

The  father  and  his  son  or  his  £)et  SSater  unb  fein  ©ofjn  ofcct  fetnc 

daughter.  Socbter. 

The  mother  and  her  son  or  her  £te  Gutter  unb  t^r  (Sofjn  ct)er  ifjrc 

daughter.  Soci)ter. 

The  child  and  its  brother  or  its  £)a$  ,ktnt>  unb  fctn  S3tubcc  ot>ct 

sister.  feine  ©cfynxftet. 

My  door      — my  doors.  9??oine  £f)ib     — mctnc 

Thy  fork     — thy  forks.  £>cine  ©aOe(     — ^)eine 

a  Except  in  the  dative.  It  will  bo  remembered  that  all  substantives  with- 
out exception  take  tt  in  the  dative  plural,  if  they  have  not  one  in  the  nomina- 
tive. (See  Lesson  XIII.) 

b  The  declension  of  those  substantives  which  deviate  from  these  rules 
will  be  separately  noted. 


237 


His  pen       — his  pens. 
Her  brother — her  brothers. 
Her  sister    — her  sisters. 
Her  book    — her  books. 


Jvter     —  (Vine  ftetcrn. 
3fa  iBrufccr      — thrc  2$ruter. 
3bre  ©djtwcfU't —  thrc  ©dwcftcrn. 
Sbr  JBud)         —  tfjre  23uct)cr. 


THE    ADJECTIVE    PRECEDED    BY  THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE  OF    THE 
FEMININE    GENDER. 


NOM.    the  good^  ^ 

GEN.  of  the  good  I 

j  >  and 
DAT.  to  the  good  (  j 

Ace.    the  goodj 


SINGULAR. 
NOM.  bte  gitte* 
GEN.  bcr  guten* 
DAT.  ber  gutem 
Ace.  bie  gate. 


PLURAL. 
tie  gutem 
bcr  gutem 
ben  gutem 
bte  gutcm 


Obs.  B.  The  adjective  preceded  by  a  possessive 
pronoun  of  the  feminine  gender,  as  :  nteine,  beine,  &c. 
has  exactly  the  same  declension  as  with  the  definite 
article. 


My  good  linen, 

the  right  hand, 

the  left  hand, 

the  language, 

the  tongue, 

the  street, 

the  town, 

the  woman,  the  wife, 

the  girl, 

the  young  lady, 

My  right  hand  aches. 
His  left  hand  aches. 

The  room, 

the  chamber, 

the  cabinet, 

the  apartment, 
The  front  room, 
the  back  room, 
the  silk, 
the  silk  stocking, 


mcinc  o,ute  Setnwant  ; 
tie  rccbte  £ant>  i 
tie  linf'c  £ant>  ; 
tie  <Sprad)e  ; 
tie  3un$e  ; 
tie  (Stra&c  ; 
tie  <£tat>t  ; 

tie   Jrau   (does    not  soften 
takes  en  in  the  plural)  ; 


and 


tae  Jrautctn. 

tie  rcd)te  J 
fcfymeqt  tie  linfe  |>ant. 

tie  ©tube  ; 

tag  Simmer  ; 

tie  hammer  ; 

tag  ®emad).d 

tie  (Stubc  ocra  Ijcraug  ; 

tie  (Stube  btntenaug  ; 

tie  (Seifce  ; 

tec  fettcne  (Strumpf. 


c  When  the  sensation  expressed  by  the  impersonal  verb  is  felt  only  in  a 
part  of  the  body,  the  person  is  put  in  the  dative. 

d  <5tllbc  is  the  room  commonly  inhabited  and  in  which  there  is  a  stove. 
Btntmer  is  the  general  word  for  room,  whether  there  is  a  stove  in  it  or  not. 
.Rammer  is  a  small  room  in  which  there  is  no  stove,  and  in  which  various 
things  are  kept ;  hence  bic  JHeiberfammer,  the  wardrobe ;  bte  ^Bobenfammer, 
the  garret,  &c.  ©emacf)  is  only  used  in  speaking  of  the  apartments  in  a  cas- 
tle or  a  palace. 


238 

THE    ADJECTIVE    WITHOUT    AN    ARTICLE    IN    THE    FEMININE 
GENDER. 

NOM.     GEN.     DAT.      Ace. 

Good,  &c.  (in  the  singular).!  gute,      guter,    guter,    gute. 
Good,  &c.  (in  the  plural),   j  gute,      guter,    guten,    gute* 

Some  good  soup.  ©ute  ©uppf. 

Some  bad  pens.  ©d)lecf)tc  5c^cr^. 

Some  beautiful  linen  shirts.  Scbone  (einnxmftene  £emfccn.     (See 

Obs.  Lesson  IV.) 

THE    ADJECTIVE    PRECEDED    BY    THE    INDEFINITE    ARTICLE 
IN    THE    FEMININE    GENDER. 


A  good,  &c.  (feminine). 


N.  erne  gate.  G.  enter  gutem 
A.  euie  gute,  D.  enter  gittetu 


THE    FOLLOWING    PRONOUNS    ARE    DECLINED    LIKE    THE 
DEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

This  or  this  one,  that  or  that  one,  biefc,  jcnc. 

Some,  sundry,  eintgc,  etltd)C. 

Many,  several,  me  fore  or  mcf)tctc.- 

Which,  roclcrjc. 

All,  cillc. 

Many  a  one,  some,  manner,  mand)C/  mancfjcS. 
2Cnt>ere  is  declined  like  an  adjective. 

Obs.  C.  In  the  plural  all  adjectives,  ordinal  num- 
bers, and  pronominal  adjectives  have  the  same  declen- 
sion for  all  genders,  as  we  have  already  seen  in  many 
parts  of  this  work,  particularly  in  the  Table  of  the 
Declension  of  Adjectives,  Lesson  XVIII. 

REMARK. 

To  become  intimately  acquainted  with  the  declen- 
sion of  adjectives,  ordinal  numbers,  and  pronominal 
adjectives,  the  learner  has  only  to  familiarize  himself 
•with  the  definite  article  ;  for  when  the  adjective  is 
preceded  by  a  word  having  the  characteristic  termina- 
tion/ it  takes  en  in  all  the  cases,  except  in  the  nomi- 

«  Some  authors  write  mefyre,  others  ntef)tere.  The  latter  is  more  usual, 
the  former  more  correct. 

f  The  terminations  of  the  definite  article  are  called  characteristic  because 
they  characterize  the  case,  number,  and  gender. 


239 

native  singular  of  all  genders  and  the  accusative  sin- 
gular feminine  and  neuter,  in  which  it  takes  e  (Page 
33,  Rule  2d.).  The  adjective  itself  takes  these  termi- 
nations when  it  is  not  preceded  by  any  article*  or  if 
the  word  preceding  has  not  the  characteristic  termi- 
nation, as  :  em,  ntetn,  fetn,  &c.  in  the  nominative  of  the 
masculine,  and  nominative  and  accusative  of  the 
neuter  gender. 

This  principle  is  clearly  exemplified  in  the  adjective 
preceded  by  the  indefinite  article.  The  nominative 
etn,  not  having  the  characteristic  termination  er  for 
the  masculine  and  e£  for  the  neuter,  the  adjective 
takes  it.  Ex.  ©it  guter  9D?ann,  em  guteg  $int>, 

The  characteristic  termination  of  the  masculine 
being  e  r  and  that  of  the  neuter  e  3,  that  of  the  femi- 
nine is  e  :  so  that  ifas  sufficient  to  join  the  ending  e  to 
a  word  of  the  characteristic  termination  to  make  it 
feminine.  Ex.  Masc.  and  neuter  :  tnefer,  tiefeS  ;  femi- 
nine :  tnefe  ;  masc.  and  neuter  :  jener  jcne£  ;  feminine, 
jette, 

These  principles  being  once  well  understood,  the 
learner  will  find  no  difficulty  whatever  in  declining 
adjectives,  ordinal  numbers  or  pronominal  adjectives. 


Have  you  my  pen  ?  £a(>cn  (Sic  nicinc 

No,  Madam,  I  have  it  not.  Sftein,  SKcibam  (gnafcige  Srauh)/  * 

fyafcc  fie  ntcbt. 

Which  bottle  have  you  broken  ?  2Be(cf)c  ??tafd)C  fyakn  (Sic  $cr(>rec!)cn  ? 
Which  soup  has  she  eaten?          SSclcfK  (guppc  f)Qt  fie  gcgcffen? 
What  pear  have  you  ?  2Ba$  flit  cine  23irne  fyaben  <Stc  ? 

What  linen  have  you  bought  1      2Ba$  fuc  Scinwant)  F)abcn  ©tc  QC* 

fauft? 

Do  you  see  my  sister  1  (Scbcn  &ic  mctne  ©d^wcftcr  ? 

I  do  see  her.  3d)  fcfye  ftc. 

.  Have  you  seen  my  sisters  1          £cikn  (Sic  mctne  ^djnxffcrn  Qcfc? 

f)cn? 

No,  my  lady,  I  have  not  seen  3?cin,  nicin   Jrautcin/  id^  ^aOe  ftc 
them.  nid)t  gcfcf)en. 

«  Except  in  the  genitive  singular  masculine  and  neuter,  in  which  it  takes 
en,  and  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  neuter  in  which  it  changes  a8  into 
e«.  (Page  33,  Rule  2d.) 

h  If  speaking  to  a  lady  of  rank,  Qttabtgc  f^rau,  gracious  Lady,  must  be 
used. 


240 

The  nose,  tie 

the  butter,  tie  $8utter  ; 

the  soup,  tie  ©uppe  ; 

the  towel,  ta£  £ant>tu$  > 

the  napkin,  tag  SeUertud),  tie  ©emctte. 

EXERCISES.     183. 

Are  you  not  surprised  at  what  my  friend  has  done  1  —  I  am  much 
surprised  at  it.  —  At  what  is  your  son  surprised  ?  —  He  is  surprised 
at  your  courage.  —  Are  you  sorry  for  having  written  to  my  uncle  ? 

—  I  am,  on  the  contrary,  glad  of  it.  —  At  what  art  thou  afflicted  1  —  I 
am  not  afflicted  at  the  happiness  of  my  enemy,  but  at  the  death  of 
my  friend.  —  How  are  your  brothers  ]  —  They  have  been  very  well 
for  these  few  days.  —  Are  you  glad  of  it  1  —  I  am  glad  to  hear  that 
they  are  well.  —  Are  you  a  Saxon  ]  —  No,  I  am  a  Prussian.  —  Do 
the  Prussians  like  to  learn  French  ]  —  They  do  like  to  learn  it.  — 
Do  the  Prussians  speak  German  as  well  as  the  Saxons  1  —  The 
Saxons  and  the  Prussians  speak  German  well  ;  but  the  Austrians 
do  not  pronounce  it  very  well  (nid)t  all$u  gut)  ;  notwithstanding 
they  are  (teffcn  ungeacfytet  fint  e$)  very  good  people.  —  Which  day  of 
the  week  (38c(d)en  Saq  in  tcr  SBocfye)  do  the  Turks  celebrate  (fcicrn)  1 

—  They  celebrate  Friday  (ten  Jreitag)  5  but  the   Christians  cele- 
brate Sunday,  the  Jews  Saturday,  and  the  negroes  their  birth-day 
(t>er 


184. 

Has  your  sister  my  gold  ribbon  1  —  She  has  it  not.  —  What  has 
she  1  —  She  has  nothing.  —  Has  your  mother  anything  1  —  She  has  a 
fine  gold  fork.  —  Who  has  my  large  bottle  1  —  Your  sister  has  it.  — 
Do  you  sometimes  see  your  mother  ]  —  I  see  her  often.  —  When  did 
you  see  your  sister  1  —  I  saw  her  three  months  and  a  half  (Obs.  C., 
Lesson  LXV.)  ago.  —  Who  has  my  fine  nuts]  —  Your  good  sister 
has  them.  —  Has  she  also  my  silver  forks  ]  —  She  has  them  not.  — 
Who  has  them  ]  —  Your  mother  has  them.  —  Have  your  sisters  had 
my  pens  ]  —  They  have  not  had  them,  but  I  believe  that  their  chil- 
dren have  had  them.  —  Why  does  your  brother  complain  1  —  He 
complains  because  his  right  hand  aches.  —  Why  do  you  complain  ] 

—  I  complain  because  my  left  hand  aches.  —  Is  your  sister  as  old 
as  my  mother  1  —  She  is  not  so  old,  but  she  is  taller.  —  Has  your 
brother   purchased   anything]  —  He   has  purchased   something.  — 
What  has  he  bought]  —  He  has  bought  fine  linen  and  good  pens. 

—  Has  he  not  bought  some  silk  stockings  1  —  He  has  bought  some. 

—  Is  your  sister  writing  ?  —  No,  Madam,  she  is  not  writing.  —  Why 
does  she  not  write]  —  Because  she  has  a  sore  hand.  —  Why  does 
the  daughter  of  your  neighbour  not  go  out]  —  She  does  not  go  out, 
because  she  has  sore  feet.  —  Why  does  my  sister  not  speak  ]  —  Be- 
cause she  has  a  soar  mouth.  —  Hast  thou  not  seen  my  silver  pen  1 

—  I  have  not  seen  it.  —  Hast  thou  a  front  room  ]  —  I  have  one  be- 


241 

hind,  but  my  brother  has  one  in  the  front. — Does  the  wife  of  our 
shoemaker  go  out  already  1 — No,  my  lady,  she  does  not  go  out, 
yet,  for  she  is  still  very  ill. 

185. 

Which  bottle  has  your  little  sister  broken"? — She  broke  the  one 
which  my  mother  bought  yesterday. — Have  you  eaten  of  my  soup 
or  of  my  mother's  1 — I  have  eaten  neither  of  yours  nor  your  mo- 
ther's, but  of  that  of  my  good  sister. — Have  you  seen  the  woman 
that  was  with  (bet)  me  this  morning  ] — I  have  not  seen  her. — Has 
your  mother  hurt  herself? — She  has  not  hurt  herself. — Have  you  a 
sore  nose  ? — I  have  not  a  sore  nose,  but  a  sore  hand. — Have  you 
cut  your  finger  1 — No,  my  lady,  I  have  cut  my  hand. — Will  you 
give  me  a  pen  1 — I  will  give  you  one. — Will  you  (have)  this  (one) 
or  that  (one)  ? — I  will  (have)  neither. — \Vhich  (one)  do  you  wish 
to  have  1 — I  wish  to  have  that  which  your  sister  has. — Do  you 
wish  to  have  my  mother's  good  black  silk  or  my  sister's  1 — I  wish 
to  have  neither  your  mother's  nor  your  sister's,  but  that  which  you 
have. — Can  you  write  with  this  pen  1 — I  can  write  with  it  (Obs. 
B.,  Lesson  LIL). — Each  woman  thinks  herself  amiable  (ItcOcn^ 
tvtirtug)  and  each  is  conceited  (&efi|t  (Stgenltcbc).— The  same  (@&cn 
fc)  as  men  (t>ic  OJicmnSpcrfon),  my  dear  friend. — Many  a  one  thinks 
himself  learned  who  is  not  so,  and  many  men  surpass  (uOcrtrcffcn*) 
women  in  vanity  (an  (Sitetfett).  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


SEVENTY-NINTH  LESSON.—  Jfam  ttttfc  0i*b*nfo0te 
Cection. 


To  go  into  the  kitchen,  to  be  in  3n  tie  £ucf)C  gcljen*,  in 

the  kitchen.  fctn*.       (See     Lesson    XXIX. 

Note  ».) 
To  go  to  church,  to  be  at  church.  3n  trie  jUrcfye  cjefyen*,  in 

fctn*. 
To  go  to  school,  to  be  at  school.  3n  trie  ©cfjule  cjcfjen*,  in  tet 

fctn*. 

To  go  into  the  cellar,  to  be  in  3n  ben  Jtcttcr  qcfjcn*,  in  tern  £cU 
the  cellar.  (cr  fctn*. 

The  dancing  school,  tie  £an$fd)utc  ; 

the  play  (the  comedy),      tic  £eniot>te  ; 
the  opera,  tie  £)pcr. 

To  go  a  hunting,  to  be  at  hunt-  f  2(uf  tie  3a.qt  acfxn*x  cwf  tcr  3aq& 
ing.  fan*.  (See  Lesson  XXX 

Note  *.) 

TO  go  to  the  castle,  to  be  at  the  2(uf  tag  <Scf)Iop  gefyen*,  ouf  tern 
castle.  ©d&foffc  fctn*.' 

•  The  preposition  auf  denotes  action  and  existence  upon  the  exterior  of  any- 
thing  or  motion  towards  an  elevation. 
11 


242 


To  go  to  the  exchange,  to  be  at  2Cuf  ttc  SSorfe  gcfyen*,  cwf  ter 
the  exchange.  fein*. 

The  bank,  tie  2*onf  (plur.  SScmfcn) ; 

the  bench,  tic  JBan!  (plur.  23anfe). 

To  go  to  fish  or  a  fishing.  Rtfcbcn  cjcfyen*. 
To  hunt.  Socn. 


The  whole  day,  all  the  day,  ten  gcmgett  ; 

the  whole  morning,  ten  gcm$en  ! 

the  whole  evening,  ten  $an$en  tfbent ; 

the  whole  night,  all  the  night,  tie  gcwje  9?acf)t ; 


the  whole  year, 

the  whole  week, 

the  whole  society, 

All  at  once, 

suddenly  (all  of  a  sudden), 


ta* 
tic 
tie 
auf  cinmal  ; 


2Bod)e  ; 


®te  funfttge  (ncidjfre)  SBocfte. 


Next  week. 
Last  week. 
This  week. 
This  year. 
Your  mother, 

your  sister, 
your  sisters, 

A  person, 
The  belly-ache, 


She  has  the  stomach-ache.  ©ie  fyat  9^agenfcr;mergcn  (plur.). 

His  sister  has  a  violent  head-  ©cine  (Scrjrvefte*  fyat 
'  ache.  wcf). 


t  3bre   Srau   Gutter   (See   Obs. 

Lesson  LXXV.)  ; 
t  3^  grfiulctn 
t  3f)te  grautein 
cine  5>erfcn. 

23aud)n;cf)  ;  plur.   tie 


Singular  and   Plural  fern. 
A 


Some  of  it,  any  of  it.  1  Sing. 

Some  of  them,  any  of  I    and 

them.  j  Plur. 

Of  it,  of  them.  j   fern. 


SBeldje,  beren,  berfelbem 
(See   Obs.   Lesson  XVI.) 


Pronouns   possessive   abso-y 

lute. 
Mine,  his,  hers, 


A/-  S™g. 

Ours,  yours,  theirs.  ) 


FEMININE. 
Singular. 


tie  metnige,  tie  feimcje,  tie 


tie  unjric^  tic 


tie 


b  Substantives  terminating  in  ct,  t)eit,  !ctt;  fc^aft,  and  Citt)  are  feminine. 


243 


Plural 


Mine,  his,  hers, 
Ours,  yours,  hers.  ,' 


Plural. 


bte  metnujen,  bie  feimgen,  bt'e 

thricjcn* 
bt'e  nnfrtgen,  bte  @nrtgen,  bt'e 

if)rigen.c 

Have  you  my  pen  or  hers  ?  ^jabcn  <Sie  mcine  Jeter  otet  tie  \ty 

^  rtae? 
I  have  hers.  3d)  fabe ' 


To  her.  3  F)  r  (See  Table  of  Personal  Pro- 

nouns, Lesson  XXV11L). 

What  do  you  wish  to  send  to  2Ba$  rootlcti  <Sie  S^rcc  Sfflufjme  fd)U 

your  aunt  ]  ctcn  ? 

I  wish  to  send  her  a  tart.  3d)  rwtt  tljr  cine  Scrtc  fcfetcfcn. 

Will  you  send  her  also  fruits  ?      SOBcUcn  <Stc  t()r  «ud)  ^riid)tc  fd)tcfcn  ? 
I  will  send  her  some.  3d)  will  tfa  n?c(d)C  fd)idfcn. 

Have  you  sent  the  books  to  my  f>a6en  ®i^  mctncn  (Bc^wcftcrn   tie 

sisters  "?  2Biid)cr  .qcfd)tc!t  ? 

1  have  sent  them  to  them.  3d)  fyaOe  fie  tfyncn 


The  fruit,  tic  £tud)t  ; 

the  tart,  tic  Sorte  ; 

the  aunt,  tic  9)?uf)me  (tie  Scmte)  ; 

the  peach,  tic  *pprfid)e  ; 

the  strawberry,  tic  ©rtbcctc  ; 

the  cherry,  tic  $trfd)C  ; 

the  cousin  (aunt),  tic  iBafc  ; 

the  niece,  tic  97id)tc  ; 

the  might  (power),  tic  9Wad)t  ; 

the  maid-servant,  tic 

the  gazette,  tic 

The  relation 


M'  bet  SBewa«W«  J  ?  ( 


The  neighbour  (feminine),  tic  9?ad)6atinn  ; 

the  ware  (merchandise,  goods),    tic  SBaarc* 

Obs.  A.     A  feminine  substantive  is  formed  by  join- 
ing the  syllable  inn  to  a  masculine  substantive.     Ex. 

The  actor,  tcr  <Sd)cwfpic(er  ;   0 

the  actress,  tic  ^djcwfpicfennn. 

«  These  pronouns  have  the  declension  of  an  adjective  preceded  by  the  defi- 
nite article.     (See  Lesson  VII.) 
d  Words  terminating  in  Uttg  are  feminine. 


244 

Ota.  B.  If  the  radical  syllable  of  the  masculine  sub- 
stantive contains  one  of  the  vowels  a,  0,  it,  it  is  gen- 
erally softened  on  being  made  feminine  by  the  addi- 
tion of  the  syllable  inn*  Ex. 

The  countess,  tic  ©ra'fmn  ; 

the  fool  (fern.),  tie  9?arrtnn  ; 

the  cook  (fern.),  tie  £od)inn  ; 

the  peasant  (peasant's  wife),  tic  JBaucrtnn  ; 

the  sister-in-law,  tie  (Sdj 


To  catch  a  cold,  ten  (£cf)nupfvn  (>c!emmen*. 

To  have  a  cold,  ten  ©djnupfcn  fyafccn*. 

To  have  a  cough,  ten  $uffen  f)a&cn*. 

I  have  caught  a  cold.  3d)  fyaOe  ten  (Scfynupfcn  ftcfenmtcn. 

The  cold,  ter  (Sffymipfen  ; 

the  cough,  tec  frafittt* 

To  make  sick.  £tan6  madbcn. 

It  makes  me  sick.  (5$  mod)t  mid)  frnnf. 

EXERCISES.       186. 

Where  is  your  cousin?  —  He  is  in  the  kitchen.  —  Has  your  cook 
(fern.)  already  made  the  soup  ?  —  She  has  made  it,  for  it  stands  al- 
ready upon  the  table.  —  Where  is  your  mother  ?  —  She  is  at  church.  — 
Is  your  sister  gone  to  school  ?  —  She  is  gone  thither.  —  Does  your 
mother  often  go  to  church  1  —  She  goes  thither  every  morning  and 
every  evening.  —  At  what  o'clock  in  the  morning  does  she  go  to 
church  ?  —  She  goes  thither  as  soon  as  she  gets  up.  —  At  what  o'clock 
does  she  get  up  1  —  She  gets  up  at  sun-rise.  —  Dost  thou  go  to  school 
to-day  1  —  I  do  go  thither.  —  What  dost  thou  learn  at  school  ]  —  I 
learn  to  read,  write,  and  speak  there.  —  Where  is  your  aunt  ?  —  She 
is  gone  to  the  play  with  my  little  sister.  —  Do  your  sisters  go  this 
evening  to  the  opera1?  —  No,  Madam,  they  go  to  the  dancing  school. 

—  Is  your  father  gone  a  hunting  ]  —  He  has  not  been  able  to  go  a 
hunting,  for  he  has  a  cold.  —  Do  you  like  to  go  a  hunting  ?  —  I  like 
to  go  a  fishing  better  than  a  hunting.  —  Is  your  father  still  in  the 
country  1  —  Yes,  Madam,  he  is  still  there.  —  What  does  he  do  there  1 

—  He  goes  a  hunting  and  a  fishing  there.  —  Did  you  hunt  when  you 
were  in  the  country  ?  —  I  hunted  the  whole  day. 

187. 

How  long  have  you  stayed  with  (Oct)  my  mother  1  —  I  stayed  with 
her  the  whole  evening.  —  Is  it  long  since  you  were  at  the  castle  ?  — 
I  was  there  last  week.  —  Did  you  find  many  people  there  1  —  I  found 
only  three  persons  there.  —  Who  were  those  three  persons  1  —  They 
((£$)  were  the  count,  the  countess,  and  their  daughter.  —  Are  these 
girls  as  good  as  their  brothers  1  —  They  are  better  than  they.  —  Can 
your  sisters  speak  German1?  —  They  cannot,  but  they  are  learning- 


245 

it. — Have  you  brought  anything  to  your  mother  1 — I  brought  her 
good  fruits  and  a  fine  tart. — What  has  your  niece  brought  you  ? — 
She  has  brought  us  good  cherries,  good  strawberries,  and  good 
peaches. — Do  you  like  peaches'? — I  do  like  them  much  (fef)t). — 
How  many  peaches  has  your  neighbour  (fern.)  given  you  1 — She 
has  given  me  more  than  twenty  of  them. — Have  you  eaten  many 
cherries  this  year? — I  have  eaten  many  of  them. — Did  you  give 
any  to  your  little  sister"? — I  gave  her  some. — Why  have  you  not 
given  any  to  your  good  neighbour  (fein.)  1 — I  wished  to  give  her 
some,  but  she  did  not  wish  to  take  any,  because  she  does  not 
like  cherries. — Were  there  many  pears  last  year  1 — There  were  not 
many. 

188. 

Why  do  your  sisters  not  go  to  the  play  1 — They  cannot  go  thither, 
because  they  have  a  cold,  and  that  makes  them  very  ill. — Did  you 
sleep  well  last  night  1 — I  did  not  sleep  well,  for  my  children  made 
too  much  noise  in  my  room. — Where  were  you  last  night? — I  was 
at  my  brother-in-law's. — Did  you  see  your  sister-in-law  ? — I  did 
see  her. — How  is  she  ? — She  was  better  yesterday  evening  than 
usual. — Did  you  play  1 — We  did  not  play,  but  we  read  some  good 
books  ;  for  my  sister-in-law  likes  to  read  better  than  to  play. — 
Have  you  read  the  gazette  to-day  1 — I  have  read  it. — Is  there  any 
thing  new  in  it  ] — I  have  not  read  anything  new  in  it. — Where  have 
you  been  since  (fettt>cm)  I  saw  you1? — I  have  been  at  Vienna,  Lon- 
don, and  Berlin. — Did  you  speak  to  my  sister] — I  did  speak  to  her. 
—What  does  she  say  ] — She  says  that  she  wishes  to  see  you. — 
\Vhere  have  you  put  my  pen  1 — I  have  put  it  on  the  table. — Do  you 
intend  to  see  your  aunt  to-day  ? — I  do  intend  to  see  her,  for  she  has 
promised  me  to  dine  with  us. — I  admire  (Ocnnmfccrn)  that  family 
(Me  ^amiUf),  for  the  father  is  the  king  and  the  mother  the  queen  of 
it.  The  children  and  the  servants  (fca£  ©efinfce  has  no  plural)  are 
the  subjects  (K'r  Untertfoan,  gen.  en)  of  the  state  (t>et  ©tact). — The 
tutors  of  the  children  are  the  ministers  (tcr  SRimfler),  who  share 
(tlH'ilcn)  with  the  king  and  queen  the  care  (fctc  (Sorqe)  of  the  govern- 
ment (Me  Stcfltcrunj)).  The  good  education  (bte  (Irjieljutw)  which 
is  given  to  children  (See  Obs.  Contin.  of  Lesson  LXX.)  is  the 
crown  (bte  .ftronc)  of  monarchs  (t>et  $ftenard),  gen.  en).  (See  end 
of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 

EIGHTIETH  LESSON.— 2Uljtpg3te  faction. 

To  march  (to  walk)*  9^nrfdbtren.n 

To  walk  (to  go  on  foot).         Qk'fycn*  ($u  Jufie  $cf)en). 

a  The  verb  nuirfcfnrctl  takes  the  auxiliary  few*,  when  there  is  a  destination 
of  place,  else  it  takes  either  baben*  or  fetii*.    Ex.  ^Dte  >Urmee  tft  nad) 
mavfdurr,  the  army  has  inarched  to   Rome;  bie  ?lrmce  fyat  (or  tft)  tdl 
£afl  marfdnrt,  the  army  lias  marched  the  whole  day. 


246 


To  step. 

To  travel. 

To  wander  (to  go  on  foot). 

The  traveller, 

the  wanderer    (the   traveller  on 

foot), 

To  walk  or  travel  a  mile. 
To  make  a  step  (meaning  to  step 

physically). 
To  take  a  step  (meaning  to  take 

measures  morally). 
To  go  on  a  journey. 
To  make  a  speech. 

A  piece  of  business,       "> 
an  affair,  _> 

To  transact  business, 

To  salt. 

Salt  meat, 

fresh  meat, 

the  food  (victuals), 

the  dish  (mess), 

the  milk, 
Salt  meats, 
Milk-food, 

To  attract. 

The  load-stone  attracts  iron. 

Her  singing  attracts  me. 

To  allure,  to  entice. 
To  excite,  to  charm. 
To  charm,  to  enchant. 
To  enrapture,  to  ravish. 
1  am  enraptured  wTith  it. 
The  beauty, 
the  harmony, 
the  voice, 
the  power  (the  force), 

To  meddle  with  something. 

To  concern  one's    self  about 

something. 
To   trouble  one's  head  about 

something,  (to  meddle  with 

something). 


<£d)tcttcn*.   Part,  past,  gcfdjritten. 

Iinperf.  fd)ritt. 

SKeifcn,      )    take    fctn     for    their 
£Bantern,  J  auxiliary. 

ter  SRcifcntc  ; 
tct  SOantcrcr  (£8antcr$mann). 

(Sine  9D7ci(c  jurticflcgcn. 
(Sincn  (Sdjritt  macfycn. 

(Sinen  <£d)ritt  tfyun*. 

(Sine  SKcifc  mad)cn. 
(Sine  <Kctc  fatten*. 

ein  ®cfd)aft  (plural  e). 
©cfd)aftc  macfycn. 

©  a  (  3  c  n. 


tic  (gpetfc  ; 

bag  ®crid)t  (plur.  c)  ; 


gcfa'^cnc  ©pet  fen  ; 


2(n  fid) 


£)ct 
ft*. 


Ccc!cn. 


©tfcn   an 


mid)  an. 


3d)  bin  tarubcr  cntjurft. 
tic  <Sd)onf)cit; 
tic  harmonic ; 
tic  (Stimmc ; 
tic  ®cwalt. 

in  ctroa*  nufdjcn. 
nut  ctrc>a$  abge&en*. 


urn  cnvag  lu'f ummcrn. 


247 

I  <5o  iiol  meddle  with  other  peo-  3d)    tm|d)C    mid)    nid)t   in    frcmt>c 
pie's  business.  $&ntc(. 

The  quarrel  (the  contest),      tcr  vpantvl  ; 

the  commerce  (the  traffic),     tec  £xwtcl  (has  no  plural). 

Strange  (foreign),  (ccntf. 

It  is  strange.  (£•$  ifl  fontcc&ac. 


He  employs  himself  in  painting,  <£c  ^iOt  fid)  niit  tec  9)totctci 
The  art  of  painting,  tic  $D2atcrci; 

chemistry,  tic  (Sfxmie,  ti 

the  chemist,  tec  (Sfxmtfcc  (tec 

the  art,  tic  . 


To  look  at  some  one,  Scnumtcn  nnfcrjen*- 

To  concern  some  one,  3enuwtcn  angcrjcn*. 

I  look  at  yotu  3d)  fcln*  <£k  aru 

Tht3  thin^r  5  tic  @Gd>c' 

lng'  )  M  £1119  (plur.  c). 

I   do   not   like  to   meddle  with  34  mtfct)C  mid)  nid)t  ^mi  in 

tliinqrs  that  do  not  concern  me.       tic  mid)  ntd>t^  an^cfxn. 
What  is  that  to  me  1  t  5£<i6  gcr)t  ta^  mid)  an  ? 

What  is  that  to  you  ?  t  SBa^^t  tag  ©w  an  ? 


To  repeat*  (ffitctet  ^c(c  ru 

The  repetition,  fcatf    SBictcr^ctcn.     (See    Lesson 

LXXI.  Ob*.  C.) 
the  beginning,  the  commence-  tec  TCnfang  ; 

meat, 

the  wisdom,  tie  SBci^cit  ; 

b 


the  goddess,  tic  ©cttinn; 

the  lord,  tec  ^>ecc  ; 

the  nightingale,  tic  Q'lOdjtigatl. 

All  beginnings  are  difficult.  ZCttcc  7(nfang  ift  f^wcr  (a  proverb). 

To  create*  &  d)  a  f  f  c  n.     Part,  past,  cpfdjajfcn. 

Imped*.  fd)Uf. 

The  creator,  tec  Sdjopfec  ; 

the  creation,  tic  ©djopfung  ; 

the  benefit  (the  kindness),     tk  2Bct)ttl)at  ; 

the  fear  of  the  Lord,  tic  gwd)t  ^  jg)eccn  ; 

the  heaven,  tec  ^>tmmc(  ; 

the  earth,  tie  (Scte  ; 

the  solitude,  tic  (Stnfamfeit  ; 

the  lesson,  tic  Section  ; 

b  Substantives  terminating  in  urn,  form  their  plural  by  changing  urn  into 
cn.    Ex.  ba«  Snbtptbuum,  the  individual  ;  plur.  bte3»ti»tbuen; 
the  study  ;  plur  bie  (Stubicu. 


248 

the  exercise,  t>te 

the  goodness.  bie  ®ute.c 

I  have  done  it  for  your  sake.        3d)  fjobe  c$  3()tcttt>egen  gctfjan, 

O65.  The  preposition  ttegen  takes  its  place  either 
before  or  after  the  genitive  which  it  governs  ;  but  when 
it  follows  a  personal  pronoun,  the  letter  t  is  substituted 
for  the  letter  r  of  the  pronoun  which  then  forms  one 
word  with  the  preposition.  The  same  thing  should  be 
observed  with  regard  to  the  prepositions  fyalben,  on  ac- 
count of,  and  um  —  ttuUeit,  for  the  sake  of,  with  this 
difference,  that  the  latter  never  stands  before  the  sub- 
stantive. Ex. 

Sfflctnetivcgcn,  mdnctfycil&cn,  on  ac-  Unfertrocgcn,   unfcrtfycMcn,    on  ac- 
count of  me.  count  of  us. 

2\'inctrc>cgcn,  bcinctljcMcn,  on  ac-  (Surctim'cjen,  eurctfyaffccn,  on  account 
count  of  thee.  of  you. 

©'ctnctnxcjcn,  fcinctfycMcn,  on  ac-  Sfyrctivegcn,  tfjtctfyMcn,  on  account 
count  of  him.  •  of  them,  for  their  sake. 

Sfjri'trvcgcn,  ifjrctf^l&crr,    on  ac- 
count of  her. 

In  the  same  way  we  say :  urn  ttteutetttnttett,  for  my 
sake  ;  urn  beineftmKen,  for  thy  sake,  &c. 

He  has  done  it  for  the  sake  of  (5c  f)at  c$  urn  ifjrctwiflcn  gctfyan. 
her. 

On    account  of  you  and   your  Sfacts  wnb  S^rcr  ^tnber,  etcn  fa 

children,  as  well  as  on  account  n?cf)t  oU  mctnet?  unt>  ter  9}jeini« 

of  me  and  mine,  I  have  put  gen  nx'gcn/  Ijabc  id)   Sbncn  fcicfc 

you  in  mind  of  and  inculcated  n?ict)tigc   unb   untriiolidjc    SBafyts 

this  important  and  infallible  fjcit  ^u  (5Jcmutf)e  gcfuljrt  unb  ctn* 

truth.  gcfd)arft. 

The  cleanliness,  the  uncleanli-  bta  3ictnlid^f cit ;  bic  Unretnltd^fctt  ; ' 
ness, 

the   government   (meaning    the  bic  £)&rtgfdt. 
magistrate), 

Sensible,  reasonable,  Ccmunfttg. 

Not  only — but  also.  9fad)t  allcin  —  fonbcrn  aud&. 

EXERCISES.    189. 

Will  you  dine  with  us  to-day  1 — With  much  pleasure. — What 
have  you  for  dinner  ? — We  have  good  soup,  some  fresh  and  salt 
meat,  and  some  milk-food. — Do  you  like  milk-food  1 — I  like  it  bet- 

c  Abstract  substantives  have  no  plural  in  German ;  as  fcie  ©iite,  the  good- 
ness ;  tie  £tefce;  the  love,  &c. 


249 

ter  than  all  other  food. — Are  you  ready  to  dine] — I  am  ready. — Do 
you  intend  to  set  out  soon  1 — I  intend  setting  out  next  week. — Do 
you  travel  alone  ] — No,  Madam,  I  travel  with  my  uncle. — Do  you 
travel  on  foot  or  in  a  carriage  ] — We  travel  in  a  carriage. — Did  you 
meet  any  one  in  'cwf  with  the  dative)  your  last  journey  to  Berlin  ? 
— We  met  many  wanderers. — What  do  you  intend  to  spend  your 
time  in  this  summer? — I  intend  to  take  a  short  journey. — Did  you 
walk  much  in  your  last  journey  ] — I  like  very  much  to  walk,  but  my 
uncle  likes  to  go  in  a  carriage. — Did  he  not  wish  to  walk  1 — He 
wished  to  walk  at  first,  but  after  having  taken  a  few  steps,  he 
\\ished  to  get  into  the  carriage,  so  that  I  did  not  walk  much. — 
What  have  you  been  doing  at  school  to-day  ] — We  have  been  listen- 
ing to  our  professor,  who  made  a  long  speech  on  (liter  with  the 
accus.)  the  goodness  of  God. — What  did  he  say? — After  saying, 
44  God  is  the  creator  of  heaven  and  earth  ;  the  fear  of  the  Lord  is 
the  beginning  of  all  wisdom;"  he  said,  "  repetition  is  the 
mother  of  studies,  and  a  good  memory  is  a  great  benefit  of  God." — 
Why  did  you  not  stay  longer  in  Holland] — When  I  was  there  the 
living  was  dear,  and  I  had  not  money  enough  to  stay  there  longer. 
—  What  sort  of  weather  was  it  when  you  were  on  the  way  to  Vi- 
enna ] — It  was  very  bad  weather  ;  for  it  was  stormy,  and  snowed, 
and  rained  very  heavily.*1 

190. 

What  are  you  doing  all  the  day  in  this  garden? — I  am  walking 
in  it  (t>orin). — What  is  there  in  it  that  attracts  you  1 — The  singing 
of  the  birds  attracts  me. — Are  there  any  nightingales  in  it  ] — There 
are  some  in  it,  and  the  harmony  of  their  singring  enchants  me. — 
Have  those  nightingales  more  power  over  (ttfccr  with  the  accus.) 
you  than  the  beauties  of  painting,  or  the  voice  of  your  tender  (gflrts 
1Kb)  mother,  who  loves  you  so  much  ] — I  confess,  the  harmony  of 
the  singing  of  those  little  birds  has  more  power  over  me  than  the 
most  tender  words  of  my  dearest  friends. — What  does  your  niece 
amuse  herself  with  in  her  solitude? — She  reads  a  good  deal  and 
writes  letters  to  her  mother. — What  does  your  uncle  amuse  himself 
with  in  his  solitude  ] — He  employs  himself  in  painting  and  chem- 
istry.— Does  he  no  longer  do  any  business"? — He  no  longer  does 
any,  for  he  is  too  old  to  do  it. — Why  does  he  meddle  with  your 
business  ] — He  does  not  generally  (qcn)of)n(tcj))  meddle  with  other 
people's  business ;  but  he  meddles  with  mine,  because  he  loves 
me. — Has  your  master  made  you  repeat  your  lesson  to-day  ]— He 
has  made  me  repeat  it. — Did  you  know  it  1 — I  did  know  it  pretty 
well. — Have  you  also  done  some  exercises  1 — I  have  done  some, 
but  what  is  that  to  you,  I  beg] — I  do  not  generally  meddle  with 
things  that  do  not  concern  me;  but  I  love  you  so  much  (fc  fcbr)  that 
I  concern  myself  much  (ft'fyr)  about  what  you  are  doing. — Does  any 
one  trouble  his  head  about  you  ] — No  one  troubles  his  head  about 

d  The  learner  must  here  repeat  all  the  expressions  relative  to  the  impersonal 
verb  e  £  t  ft,  it  if,  in  Leutont  L1V.  and  LVl. 
11* 


250 

me  ;  for  I  am  not  worth  the  trouhle.  —  Not  only  for  the  sake  of 
cleanliness,  but  also  for  the  sake  of  health  (fcie  ®efunt>f)ett),  prudent 
people  avoid  ((id)  fyutcn  oor  with  the  dative)  uncleanliness,  and  wash 
themselves  often.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


•  EIGHTY-FIRST  LESSON.— ©in  tmir  acl)t}igst* 
Cection. 

OF    THE    FUTURE. 

The  first  or  simple  future  is  formed  from  the  present 
of  the  auxiliary  tt>erfcen*,  to  become,a  and  the  infinitive 
of  the  verb,  as  in  English  from  shall  or  will,  and  the 
infinitive.  Ex. 

I  shall  love,  he  (she)  will  love.   3$  nxrt>e  licfcen,  er  (fie)  ttnrb  liekn. 
Thou  wilt  love,  you  will  love.      2)u  rwrft  lieben,  3^  roerbet  (<Ste 

roerben)  ttebcn. 
We  shall  love,  they  will  love.      SQBtc  nxiben  Ucben,  fie  rvetfccn  lic&en* 

I  shall  be  loved.  3cl)  wertc  qcltebt  iverben. 

Will  you  love  my  mother  1          SBcrben  <Stc  meine  Gutter  lie&en  ? 

1  shall  love  her  much.  3d)  wcrt>e  fie  fejjr  (iebcn. 

1  shall  never  love  her.  3d)  werbe  fie  me  lieben. 
I  shall  love  her  when  she  loves  3d)  roerfce  fie  Iteten,  trenn  fie  mtd) 

me.  tteben  roirt).  (See  Less.  XLVII.) 

Will  you  go  out  to-day  ?  SBerten  @tc  fyeutc  < 


To  be  dusty.  ©  t  a  u  6  i  9  f  e  i  n  *,  ftauOcn. 

Is  it  dusty  1  3il  ee 

It  is  dusty.  (£$  tft 

It  is  very  dusty.  (£$  iff  fe[)r 

Is  it  muddy  out  of  doors  ?  3ft  e£  fd)mn|tg  traupen  ? 

It  is  very  muddy.  (£$  ift  fefjr  fd)mu|tcj. 

To  be  smoky,  to  smoke.        9?aud)cn. 
Is  it  smoky  ]     Does  it  smoke  ?     $Raud)t  e^  ? 
It  is  very   smoky.     It  smokes  (§S  raud)t  fel)t. 

much. 
It  is  too  smoky.     It  smokes  too  (£$  raud)t  ^u  fc^r. 

much. 

To  go  in.  $  t  n  e  i  n  $  c  f)  c  n  *. 

To  come  in.  $  c  t  c  t  n  i  o  m  m  e  n  *. 

*  The  verb  tticrben*,  when  employed  in  the  formation  of  the  future  and 
other  tenses,  loses  its  proper  signification. 


251 

Will  you  go  in  t  SBcrtcn  Sic  fjincin  gcfjcn  ? 

To  sit  down.  ©id)  f  e  £  e  it, 

To  si£,  ©  t  §  c  n  *   (verb    neuter).      Part. 

past,  gefcffcn.    Imperf.  fajj. 

I  will  sit  down  on  that  chair,       3tf)  wttl  mid)  <wf  bicfcn  <Stul)t  fclcn.1* 

Where  did  he  sit  ^  ££c  fa0  cr  ? 

He  sat  upon  that  chair.  <£r  fajj  cwf  ticfcm  ©tufytc. 

7*<?  ^<zve  left.  II  c  b  r  i  g  6  (  e  t  b  c  n  *.    Imperfect, 

b(rcb. 

How  much  money  have  you  left  ?  SBicmrf  @c(b  Wcibt  S&ncn  ftbrtg? 
I  have  a  crown  left.  <£$  blcibt  mir  cin  £l)<Uct  iibrig. 

I  have  only  three  crowns  left.       (££  bfctbcn  nur  nur  brct  Staler  fibrig. 
If  I  pay  him  I  shall  have  but  SDBcnn  icl)  i^n  bc^^c,  nrirfc  mic  nut 
little  left.  t&enig  uOrig  btcibcn  (or  fo  wtrt) 

mic  nur  wcnig  ubcig  b(cibcn). 

DC/3  -A-  The  subject  is  placed  after  the  verb  in  an 
inversion  of  propositions  ;  that  is,  when  that  which 
ought  to  stand  first  is  put  after,  and  forms  as  it  were, 
the  complement  of  the  other.  An  inversion  of  propo- 
sitions takes  place  when  the  first  proposition  begins 
with  a  conjunction.  Ex. 

If  he  comes,  I  shall  speak  to  him  2Senn  cr  femmt,  wcrt>e  id)  mit  tfjm 

(inversion).  fprcdjcn. 

I  shall  speak  to  him  if  he  comes  3d)  rocrfce  mit  tfjm  fprcd)cn,  rocnn  cc 

(without  inversion).  fcmmt. 

If  it  is  fine  weather  to-morrow,  I  SScnn  eS  morgcn  fd)3nc^  letter  ifl, 

shall  take  a  walk  (inversion).  werbe  id)  fpa^tcrcn  gefycn. 

I  shall  take  a  walk  if  it  is  fine  3d)  roerfce  fpa^icren  gc^n,  wcnn  cs 

weather   to-morrow    (without  morgcn  fdjoncS  SOScttcr  ijt. 

inversion). 

DC73  B.  The  subject  is  also  placed  after  its  verb, 
when  in  an  inversion  of  propositions,  the  conjunction 
tioentt,  if,  is  omitted  in  the  first.  This  omission  of  the 
conjunction  may  take  place  or  not  ;  but  when  it  does, 
the  second  proposition  begins  with  the  conjunction  f  o, 
then  (so). 

Then  (so).  ©0. 

If  I  receive  my  money  I  shall  C»^«"«   **   ™in    ®«£  (instead 
J  <     of:  roenn  td)  mem  ®c(t>  befommc), 

C     fo  OcgoWe  id)  Sic. 


b  Wlienever  a  will  or  intention  and  not  merely  futurity  is  to  be  expressed, 
the  verb  tooUen*  is  used. 


252 

to  m"  l  sha11  an- 


Obs.  When  the  conjunction  ttxmtt  is  not  omitted,  the 
conjunction  fo  of  the  second  proposition  may  either  be 
omitted  or  not,  unless  the  proposition  is  of  a  certain 
length. 

If  you  will  promise  me  to  keep  SScnn  &it  mtr  t>erfprcd)cn  rooIU'tt,  c$ 
it  secret,  I  shall  tell  it  to  you.        (jefjctm  $u  batten,  fo  roetbc  tcl)  e$ 

Sfyncn  fa$en. 


I  have  spent  all  my  money,  so  SA    fa&e    all  twin  (5}c(t> 

that  I  have  none  left.  ben,  fo  bap  mit  fcinS  mcfyt  iibncj 

Wctot. 

T0./K/.  SfilUn  (anfullcn). 

To  fill  a  bottle  with  wine.  Gtnc  fttofdje  mit  SBein  anfuflen. 

I  fill  my  purse  with  money.          3cf)  fulle  mctncn  SBcutcl  (nicinc  Sflrs 

fc)  mit  ®ctb. 
With  what  do  you  fill  that  glass]  2Bemtt  fallen  <2te  triefc*  ®fa$  ? 

EXERCISES.       191. 

Will  your  father  go  out  to-day  ?  —  He  will  go  out,  if  it  is  fine 
weather.  —  Will  your  sister  go  out?  —  She  will  go  out,  if  it  is  not 
windy.  —  Will  you  love  my  brother?  —  I  shall  love  him  with  all  my 
heart,  if  he  is  as  good  as  you.  —  Will  your  parents  go  into  the 
country  to-morrow  1  —  They  will  not  go,  for  it  is  too  dusty.  —  Shall 
we  take  a  walk  to-day  ?  —  We  will  not  take  a  walk,  for  it  is  too 
muddy  out  of  doors.  —  Do  you  see  the  castle  of  my  relation  behind 
yonder  mountain?  —  1  do  see  it.  —  Shall  we  go  in?  —  We  will  go  in, 
if  you  like.  —  Will  you  go  into  that  room  ?  —  I  shall  not  go  into  it, 
for  it  is  smoky.  —  I  wish  you  a  good  morning,  Madam.  —  Will  you 
not  come  in  ?  —  Will  you  not  sit  down  ?  —  I  will  sit  down  upon  that 
large  chair.  —  Will  you  tell  me  what  has  become  of  your  brother  ?  — 
I  will  tell  you.  —  Here  is  the  chair  upon  which  he  sat  often.—  When 
did  he  die  ?  —  He  died  two  years  ago.  —  I  am  very  much  (fchr)  afflic- 
ted at  it.  —  Hast  thou  spent  all  thy  money  ?  —  I  have  not  spent  all. 
—  How  much  hast  thou  left  of  it?  —  I  have  not  much  left  of  it;  I 
have  but  one  florin  left.  —  How  much  money  have  thy  sisters  left  ?  — 
They  have  but  three  crowns  left.  —  Have  you  money  enough  left  to 
pay  your  tailor  ?  —  I  have  enough  of  it  left  to  pay  him  ;  but  if  I  pay 
him,  I  shall  have  but  little  left.  —  How  much  money  will  your  bro- 
thers have  left?  —  They  will  have  a  hundred  crowns  left.  —  Will 
you  speak  to  my  uncle  if  you  see  him  ?  —  If  1  see  him,  I  shall  speak 
to  him.  —  Will  you  take  a  walk  to-morrow?  —  If  it  is  fine  weather,  I 
shall  take  a  walk  ;  but  if  it  is  bad  weather,  I  shall  stay  at  home.  — 


253 

Will  you  pay  your  shoemaker  1 — I  shall  pay  him,  if  I  receive  my 
money  to-morrow. — Why  do  you  wish  to  go  ]—  If  your  father  comes 
I  shall  not  go  ;  hut  if  he  does  not  come,  i  must  go. — Why  do  you 
not  sit  down? — If  you  will  stay  with  (bet)  me,  I  will  sit  down; 
but  if  you  go,  I  shall  go  along  with  you. — Will  you  love  my  chil- 
dren 1 — If  they  are  good  and  assiduous,  I  shall  love  them ;  but  if 
they  are  idle  and  naughty,  I  shall  despise  and  punish  them. — Am 
1  right  in  speaking  thus  (fo)  1 — You  are  not  wrong.  (See  end  of 
Lesson  XXXIV.) 


EIGHTY-SECOND  LESSON.— %mi  nn&  ucl)t}igste 
Cation. 

OF    THE    PAST    OR    COMPOUND    INFINITIVE. 

In  German,  as  in  English,  the  past  infinitive  is  formed 
from  the  infinitive  of  the  auxiliary  and  the  past  par- 
ticiple of  the  verb  ;  but  in  English  the  past  participle 
stands  after  the  infinitive,  whereas  in  German  it  pre- 
cedes it.  Ex. 

Have  loved,  to  have  loved.  (SJctiebt  fjabcn,  goticbt  $u  r)abcn. 

In  order  to  have  loved.  Urn  gclicOt  $u  fyaben. 

Without  having  loved.  £>f)ne  gedcbt  511  fyaben. 

Have  been  loved.  ®c(tebt  roorbcn  fetn. 

To  have  been  loved.  (Miebt  wotfccn  311  fetru 

OF    THE    PAST    FUTURE. 

The  past  or  compound  future  is  formed,  as  the  first 
or  simple  future  (preceding  Lesson)  from  the  present 
of  the  auxiliary  toerben*  and  the  past  infinitive.  Ex. 

I  shall  have  loved,  he  (she)  will  3d)  ructbc  geltebt  fyabcn,  cr  (fie)  nrirb 

have  loved.  geltcbt  rjaben. 

Thou  wilt  have  loved,  you  will  ®u  rwrft  gcUcbt  fjafren,  Sfor  rocrtct 

have  loved.  (<Sie  tvetfcen)  qeltcbt  fyafrcn. 

We  shall  have  loved,  they  will  SQBtr  rocrbcn  gCttftt  r)abcn/  fie  rocrfccn 

have  loved.  cjclicbt  bciben. 

I  shall  have  been  loved.  3d)  n)cr^c  gclicOt  rvortcn  fcin. 

I  shall  have  written  my  letters  3d)  tt)crt»e  mctnc  SBrtcfc 
before  you  return.  bnbcn,  cfjc  Sic 

.,  -     4l     ,          f3Scnn  id)  ta5  5>f 
When  I  have  paid  for  the  horse  ^  b  d)(t 

I  shall  have  only  ten  crowns  j      ^^  ^  nuv  ^  ^ 
[     aijrtg  Oteibcn. 


254 

-4-  When  at  the  end  of  a  proposition  there  are 
two  infinitives,  two  past  participles,  or  an  infinitive 
and  a  past  participle,  the  verb  which  on  account  of 
the  conjunction  ought  to  be  thrown  to  the  end  of  the 
phrase,  may  be  placed  either  before  or  after  those  in- 
finitives or  participles.  Ex. 


f  2Bag  rocrfccn  ^tc  tfjun,  rocrm 
"What  will  you  do  when  you  I      9)?ttt<uj    Qcgcffcn    (ja&cn    ivcvtvn, 
have  dined?  1      or  wct&en  311 


SCcnn  id)  3&wi  93rubcr  gcjprod>cn 
gabcn  iwrtr,  or  n>cttc  gcfpttfrn 
fabcn,  fo  tvcrfcc  1$  wtffcn,  wa^  id) 

jii  thun  (;abc. 


__     The  latter  way  of  placing  the  verb  is  the  most 
elegant  and  most  usual.     Ex. 

f3cf)   rjo&c  tfjm  $cfa$t, 


I  have  told  him  that  you  have  J      $fcrt)  fyaben  ocrfaufvn  nu'iffcn  (and 
been  obliged  to  sell  the  horse.  1      not  t?crf  aufcn  gcmujjt  or  muffcn 


The  same  (feminine).  2)  t  c  f  c  1  6  eA  b  t  c  n  &  m  1  1  d)  c.  (See 

Lessons  XII.  and  XIV.) 


rr,  ^  5  ^tcfctbc  (t)tc  namltd)c) 

The  same  thing. 


One  and  the  same.  ©tncrtci. 

It  is  all  one  (the  same).        (5$  if!  etncrtci. 

Masc.       Fern.        NeuL 
Such.  ©clever,  folrf)c,  folcfyetf 

(is  declined  according  to 
the  characteristic  termi- 
nation). 

Obs.  A.     When  fold)  is  preceded  by  ein  or  fettt,  it  has 
the  declension  of  an  adjective.     Ex. 


Such  a  man,  such  a  woman,  such  (Sin  fc(d)Ct  Sftann,  cine  fctd)C 

a  child.  ctn  fo(d)C^  ^tnK 

Such  men  merit  esteem.  (SoldK  9$cnfd)cn  vcct>tcncn  Tfdjtuncj. 


Obs.  B.     When  fold)  is  followed  by  cut,  it  is  not  de- 
dined.     Ex. 


255 


Such  a  man,  such  a  woman,  such  (Sold)  ein  9ftann,  fold)  eine  Jtau,  fold) 
a  happiness.  ein  (SHiirf. 

Ow  Me  outside  of,  without,  out  of.  U  u  p  c  t  Ij  a  1 &  (a  preposition  gov- 
erning the  genitive). 


The  church  stands  outside  the  2)ie  <Rird)e  ift  aufietr;al6  bet 

town. 

I  shall  wait  for  you  before  the  3d)  wcttc  <Sie  sot  bem  £f)0te 

town-gate.  tfjote)  crroartcn. 

Thetownorcity-gate,    {^|gfctflbt. 

To  go  out. 
To  come  out. 

Seldom  (rarely). 
Does  he  sit  under  the  tree  ?          ©t£t  et  untct  bem  SBaume  ? 
He  is  sitting  under  it.  ©t  ft$t  batuntet.     (Obs.  B.  Les- 

son LII.) 


To  continue  (to  proceed).  {f  jVtfej'iu"*' 


He  continues  his  speech.  t  (St  fa^tt  in  feinet  9?ebc  fort 

Theappeti,.,  K^A 


\  bie  (Sfjfoft/  bie  Sufi  jum  Sffen  ; 
the  narrative,  the  tale,  bie  (Sqa'ljluno, ; 

the  shore  (the  coast,  the  bank),    bag  Ufet ; 
the  sea-shore,  bag  Ufet  be 

on  the  sea-shore,  am  Ufet  beg  ' 


Not  until  (not  before]*       92 1  d)  t  e  r)  e  r  — 
Before.  (Stye/  efje  alg/ 


I  shall  not  see  him  until  I  go  3d)  wctbe  irjn  nid)t  fer^en,  e()c  (bis 
thither.  cot)  id)  binQcfje. 

Did  you  see  him  before  his  de-  £aOen  ©ie  i^n  cot  feinet  2(6teife  QCa 
parture  1  fe^en  ? 

I  will  not  do  it  until  you  tell  3d)  tfyue  eg  nid)tx  6ig  @ie  eg  mit  fa? 
me.  gen. 

There  is,  there  are.  £)a  ift,  Plural,  ba  ftnb. 

Here  is,  here  are.  £ict  iff/  —  bict  finb. 

Here  I  am.  J^tet  tin  id). 

There  is  my  book.  £Da  ift  mein  93ud). 

There  it  is.  2)a  ift  eg. 

There  they  are.  2)a  finb  fie. 


is  a  regular  verb  active  and  governs  the  accusative ;  fbrtfafjrett*, 
on  the  contrary,  is  neuter  and  irregular  and  governs  the  dative  with  the  pre- 
position in  or  mit 


256 

Therefore.  £)ejm>egen,  bafjer. 

That  is  the  reason  why.         £)a$  ift  Die  UrfacrK,  tvarum. 

Therefore  I  say  so.  £>*fnxi}cn  facje  tcl)  cS. 

My  sister's  feet  are  cold.  Reiner  (Sd)ivcftct  frtcrcn  tic  Jujtf. 

Her  hands  are  cold.  3br  fvtcrcn  t>tc  &iint>e  (C6  ift  ifyt  an 

fcen  jpanbcn  fait). 

EXERCISES.      192. 

When  will  you  go  to  Italy  ? — I  shall  go  as  soon  as  I  have  learnt 
Italian. — When  will  your  brothers  go  to  Germany  ] — They  will 
go  thither  as  soon  as  they  know  German. — When  will  they  learn 
it ? — They  will  learn  it  when  they  have  found  a  good  master. — 
How  much  money  shall  we  have  left  when  we  have  paid  for  our 
horses  1 — When  we  have  paid  for  them  we  shall  have  only  a  hun- 
dred crowns  left. — Have  you  told  my  brother  that  I  have  been 
obliged  to  sell  the  carriage  1 — I  have  told  him  so. — Have  you  writ- 
ten to  the  same  man  to  wrhom  my  father  wrote? — I  have  not  writ- 
ten to  the  same,  but  to  another. — Have  they  already  answered  you? 
— Not  yet,  but  I  hope  to  receive  a  letter  next  week. — Have  you 
ever  seen  such  a  person  ? — I  have  never  seen  such  a  one. — Have 
you  already  seen  our  church  1 — I  have  not  seen  it  yet. — Where  does 
it  stand1? — It  stands  outside  the  town. — If  you  wish  to  see  it,  I 
will  go  with  you  in  order  to  show  it  to  you. — Who  is  there] — It  is 
I. — Who  are  those  men  1 — They  are  foreigners  who  wish  to  speak 
to  you. — Of  what  country  are  they  1 — They  are  Americans. — 
Where  have  you  been  since  1  saw  you] — We  sojourned  long  on 
the  sea-shore,  until  a  ship  arrived,  which  brought  us  to  France. — 
Will  you  continue  your  narrative  ? — Scarcely  had  we  arrived  in 
France  when  we  were  taken  to  the  king  who  received  (aufnal)m)  us 
very  well  and  sent  us  back  to  our  country. — Whom  are  you  look- 
ing for1? — I  am  looking  for  my  little  brother. — If  you  wish  to  find 
him  you  must  go  into  the  garden,  for  he  is  there. — The  garden  is 
large,  and  I  shall  not  be  able  to  find  him  if  you  do  not  tell  me  in 
which  part  (fccr  £fKi()  of  the  garden  he  is. — He  is  sitting  under 
the  large  tree  under  which  we  were  sitting  yesterday. — Now  I 
.shall  find  him. 

193. 

Why  do  your  children  not  live  in  France? — They  wish  to  learn 
English,  that  is  the  reason  wrhy  they  live  in  England. — Why  do 
you  sit  near  the  fire  ? — My  hands  and  feet  are  cold,  that  is  the  rea- 
son why  I  sit  near  the  fire. — What  do  the  people  live  upon  that 
live  on  the  sea-shore? — They  live  upon  fish  alone. — Why  will  you 
not  go  a  hunting  any  more  ? — I  hunted  yesterday  the  whole  day, 
and  I  killed  nothing  but  an  ugly  bird,  that  is  the  reason  why  I  shall 
not  go  a  hunting  any  more. — Why  do  you  not  eat  ? — I  shall  not  eat 
before  I  have  a  good  appetite. — Why  daes  your  brother  eat  so 
much  ? — He  has  a  good  appetite,  that  is  the  reason  he  eats  so  much 
—If  you  have  read  the  bo^ks  which  I  lent  you,  why  do  you  not  re- 


257 

turn  them  to  me  ]— I  intend  reading  them  once  more,  that  is  the 
reason  why  I  have  not  yet  returned  them  to  you  ;  but  I  shall  return 
them  to  you  as  soon  as  I  have  read  them  a  ($um)  second  time. — 
Why  did  you  not  bring  me  my  clothes  ? — They  were  not  made, 
therefore  I  did  not  bring  them;  but  I  bring  them  to  you  now,  here 
they  are. — You  have  learnt  your  lesson,  why  has  your  sister  not 
learnt  hers] — She  has  taken  a  walk  with  my  mother,  that  is  the 
reason  why  she  has  not  learnt  it ;  but  she  will  learn  it  to-morrow. 
— When  will  you  correct  my  exercises  1 — I  will  correct  them  when 
you  bring  me  those  of  your  sister. — Do  you  think  (ojauben)  you 
have  made  mistakes  in  them. — I  do  not  know. — If  you  have  made 
mistakes  you  have  not  studied  your  lessons  well ;  for  the  lessons  must 
be  learnt  well,  to  make  no  mistakes  in  the  exercises. — It  is  all  the 
same,  if  you  do  not  correct  them  (for)  me  to-day,  I  shall  not  learn 
them  before  (fo  tverte  id)  fte  crft)  to-morrow. — You  must  make  no 
mistakes  in  your  exercises,  for  you  have  all  you  want,  in  order  to 
make  none.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


EIGHTY-THIRD  LESSON.  -Etei  mtfr   ad)t}igste 
Section. 

To  die  of  a  disease.  Tin  ctnet  (dative)    .Rrcmffyeit  fats 

ben*. 

The  small  pox,  tie  Slattern    (plural  of  tic  %>late 

ter,  the  blister,  the  pustule,  the 
pock). 

She  died  of  the  small  pox.  <£tc  tft  an  ben  23(attern  gcfterbcn. 

The  fever,  the  intermitting  fever,  tag  Jtebcr,  ta$  SBecbfclfu'ber. 
He  had  a  cold  fit.  (5r  fyatte  etnen  2Cnfall  sen  giebcr. 

He  has  an  ague.  (5t  bat  ta$  Sicbet  bcfcmmen. 

His  fever  has  returned.  Gr   bat  ta$   Jiebet  rcictct 

men. 
The  apoplexy,  ter  <£d)(ag,  ter  ( 

He  has  been  struck  with  apo-    5  £?.**« 
j  <  (£r  tft  t)em 

f     ten. 
C  ©utcn  ^bgan 
To  sell  well.  <  (5*ut  aba,eben* 

f  8Sic(  ^auferfinten*. 
Wine  sells  well.  f  Der  Sln'tn  geljt  gut  ab  (^ut  guten 

Tfbganq). 
Cloth  sells  well.  t  &**  Such  bat  guten  l(tyw§  (fin* 

tet  met  jtaiijvr). 

Wine  will  sell  well  next  year,     f  £)er  5Bctn  ratrt  nacbflc^  3«!)r  cpc 

ten  ?Cbgan3  fjaben. 


258 


To  open. 
To  shut. 

To  open. 
That  door  opens  easily. 

The  door  does  not  shut. 
The  window  shuts  well. 

Far  off,  from  afar. 

That  house  is  seen  far  off. 


£>effncn,  aufmacftcn, 

Sunwdxn,      $ufd)lu'pcn  *      (active 

verbs).  b 
3ua,el)cn*,  gufcf)ftcpcn*.     Part,  past, 

gcfctyoffcn.    Imperf.  fcfyojl 
2Utfo>'l)cn  *  (a  neuter  verb),  fid)  ftffc 
ncn. 

f)tit  o,cf)t  (ctd)t  cwf  (tft  lcid)t 
effncn). 

£f)ur  fd)Ucfjt  md)t. 
Jenftct 


rocttem 


33  en  roettcm,  ton  fcvnc. 
8)tan  fief)t  btefcg 
(r>en  fcrne). 


f  (Semmerfletber  tragt  man  ntd)t  im 
Summer  clothes  are  not  worn    1      SOStntcr. 
in  winter.  1  (^ommerftetber  roctben  md)t  tm  2Bm* 

(     ter  getragen. 


rvirt>  nicftt  ^cfa 
tft  unbc^rc 
ift  fceutltcf). 


SBcgrcifcn*.    Part,  past,  t>cgriffcn. 

Imperf.  6cqrtff. 
C  97ad)  ten  Umfta'nbcn. 
1  ^ad)  »efd)affcnl)ctt  t)ct:  Umfta'nto. 

tie  93efd)affcn^ctt  ; 

tcr  Umftonb. 


That  is  not  said. 

That  cannot  be  comprehended. 

It  is  clear. 

To  conceive,  to  comprehend. 

According  to  circumstances. 

The  disposition, 
the  circumstance, 

According  as. 

According  to  circumstances. 

It  depends  on  circumstances. 

Do  not  put  the  glass  upon  the  Steflen  <Ste  bag  (Sttag  md)t  auf  ben 
table,  for  it  will  break.  Stfd) ;   benn  eg  tx>itb  gerfctcdjen. 

Imperf.  j 

To  put.  ©teltcn. 

To  lay. 


,  Jc  nacftbenv  in  fo  fern. 
97ad)bem  c^  tft  (nad>t>cm  eg  fommt). 
t)tc  Umftanbc  ftnt). 


»  Deffnctt  and  aufmac^ctt  mean  to  remove  the  obstacle  in  order  to  give  ac- 
cess, as  :  bte  Xfyore,  bte  £pr  cine§  3im»^r^/  *ww  ©c^ran!,  etncn  3Brtcf  offnen 
or  aufmacfecn,  to  open  the  town-gates,  the  door  of  a  room,  a  cupboard,  a  let- 
ter. Deffnen  is  only  employed  to  make  an  opening  in  the  thing  itself,  as :  et= 
iten  Setcfynam,  cine  9lber,  cin  ®efd)n)iir  offtten,  to  open  a  corpse,  a  vein,  an  ab- 
scess, because  there  is  no  opening  yet.  So  we  say  bte  Saitfgraben  offnett,  to 
open  the  trenches.  5luffci)ltef$ett  is  only  employed  in  speaking  of  things  that 
are  shut  with  a  key  or  a  padlock. 

b  The  same  distinction  is  to  be  made  between  JUtttacf)ett  and  jufctyltefmi*,  us 
between  aiifmacfyett  and  auffc^ltepett*. 


259 


To  set,  to  seat. 

To  stick.  @'tecten.c 


Are  the  women  handsome  ?  ^tnb  Me  $raucn  fcfyb'n  ? 

They  are  so  ;  they  are  rich  and  <£ic  fint)  c  6  ;  fie  ftnt>  rctcl)  lint)  fcfyort. 
handsome. 


What  countrywoman  is  she  ?     £  g^  jj 

She  is  from  France.  (Sic  i|i  cw$  (or  pen)  Jranfretcf). 

To  be  angry  at  somebody  (about  SBofc   ciuf  3cmant>cn    (fiber 

anything).  fcin. 

What  are  you  angry  about  ?  Sffieruber  fint)  Sic  fcofc  ? 


Are  you  sorry  for  having  done  £!)Ut  c$  Sfacn  U'tt),  eg  gctfycm  511 
it  1  MH'U  ? 

r<5*  tl)ut  nut  (ctt>. 
I  am  sorry  for  it.  <  &*  ift  mir  nict)t  Ucl\    (See  Lesson 

C     LXXVII.) 

Polite  (courteous),  impolite  (un-  £ofttd)  ;  unfjofttdj. 

civil). 
Happy,  unhappy.  GHucfltd)  ;  uncu'iitfltd). 


What  sort  of  pen  have  you  lost  1  £Ba$  fur  cine  Jfebcv  (jaOen  (Sic 

ten? 

A  gold  one.  (Sine  goftcnc. 

What  sort  of   pens  has    your  2Ba$  fur  Jefcctn  fycit  3 

sister  made  ?  gcfcf)nttten  ? 

Good  ones.  (Sute. 

EXERCISE  194. 

Of  what  illness  did  your  sister  die  ?  —  She  died  of  the  fever.  — 
How  is  your  brother  1  —  My  brother  is  no  longer  living.  He  died 
three  months  ago.  —  I  am  surprised  at  it,  for  he  was  very  well  last 

c  (Stellen  is  used  when  the  person  or  the  thing  spoken  of  is,  as  it  were, 
standing  upright,  and  Icflen  when  it  is  lying.  Ex.  fcie  ($ldfer,  bte  j$lafd)e  auf 
ben  Xifd)  ftcUeu,  to  put  the  glasses,  the  bottle  on  the  table  ;  ein  ^tinb  auf  baS 
S3ctt  legcn,  to  place  a  child  upon  the  bed  ;  ctn  ,ftjeib  auf  bag  $ett  legen,  to  put 
a  coat  upon  the  bed  ;  tvo  babcn  3ic  mctnett  (Stocf  ^ingeftellt?  where  have  you 
placed  my  stick?  wo  Ijafcen  etc  mcitt  ISfttfitt  ^in^clegt?  where  have  you  put 
my  knife  ?  The  verbs  ftefyen*  and  Hcgeil*  may  be  explained  by  the  English 
verbs:  to  stand  and  to  lie.  Ex.  3(>*  Srocf  ftel)t  in  metnem  simmer,  your 
stick  is  (stands)  in  my  room;  3ljr  jSntber.  ftebt  am  ^enfter,  your  brother 
stands  at  the  window  ;  3H*  ?J?effer  ItCi^t  anf  bem  Xtfrf)C,  your  knife  is  (lies) 
upon  the  table;  liter  fteht  3fyt  ^tocf  imb  ba  Ue^t  3^  SJ^effer,  here  stands 
your  stick  and  there  lies  your  knife,  ^refcen  nearly  answers  to  the  English 
verb  to  seat,  as  :  fe^en  ^ic  fid)  hierher,  seat  yourself  here.  It  is  also  used  in 
the  following  idiom  :  Semotlbttl  in  ben  <5tanb  fefeen,  to  enable  some  one,  as: 
tcf)  babe  ibn  in  ben  (Stanb  (^efc^t,  e6  j^u  tbun,  I  have  enabled  him  to  do  it. 
(Stecfen,  as  an  active  verb,  is  used  with  the  preposition  in  followed  by  the 
accusative.  Ex.  $n  bte  £afd;e  fterfen,  to  put  into  the  pocket.  We  shall 
hereafter  see  various  other  examples  of  these  verbs. 


260 

Summer  when  I  was  in  the  country. — Of  what  did  he  die  1 — He 
died  of  apoplexy. — How  is  the  mother  of  your  friend  1 — She  is 
not  well ;  she  had  an  attack  of  ague  the  day  before  yesterday,  and 
this  morning  the  fever  has  returned  (unt)  Mcfen  9?icr^cn  twcti'v). — 
Has  she  the  intermitting  fever  1 — I  do  not  know,  but  she  often  has 
cold  fits. — What  has  become  of  the  woman  whom  I  saw  at  your 
mother's  1 — She  died  this  morning  of  apoplexy. — Did  the  wine 
sell  well  last  year? — It  did  not  sell  very  well;  hut  it  will  sell 
better  next  year,  for  there  will  be  a  great  deal  of  it,  and  it  will  not 
be  dear. — Why  do  you  open  the  door] — Do  you  not  see  how  it 
smokes  here] — I  do  not  see  it;  but  you  must  open  the  window  in- 
stead of  opening  the  door. — The  window  does  not  open  easily, 
that  is  the  reason  why  I  open  the  door. — When  will  you  shut  it  1 
— I  will  shut  it  as  soon  as  there  is  no  more  smoke. — Why  do  you 
not  put  those  beautiful  glasses  on  the  small  table  ] — If  I  put  them 
upon  that  little  table  they  will  break. — Did  you  often  go  a  fishing 
when  you  were  in  that  country  ] — We  often  went  a  fishing  and  a 
hunting. — If  you  will  go  with  us  into  the  country,  you  will  see  the 
castle  of  my  father. —  Y  ou  are  very  polite,  Sir ;  but  I  have  seen 
that  castle  already.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


EIGHTY-FOURTH  LESSON.— bio:  nnb 

Cection. 

The  utility,  the  use,  fret  3?u($cn  ; 

the  advantage,  frcr  Q3orthei(. 

This  thing  is  of  no  use.  JDicfc  <Sfld)C  tft  turn  fctncm  €7u|cn. 

To  profit  by  a  thing.  Stfufccn  cm*  ctncr  Sad)C  gte&cn*. 

To  turn  a  thing  to  profit.  ©id)  cine  @cid)e  $u  9iuf$c  madjcn. 

To  be  useful  to  any  one.  3?nianbi'm  nugcn  (or  nti($cn). 

Of  what  use  is  that  ]  2Be$u  nu£t  tmg  ? 

That  is  of  no  use.  £>as  nii£t  md)t$. 

Useful.  9tt$ad). 

Useless.  llnnti£,  nuftoS. 

Is  it  useful  to  write  a  great  deal  ]  3ft  C6  nu|tid),  met  $u  ffyrctbcn  ? 

It  is  useful.  (£$  tft  nii(3ttd). 

Is  it  well  (right)  to  do  it  1  3ft  e$  InfltC},  eg  $u  tljun  ? 

It  is  not  well  (wrong).  (5$  tft  unlnUtg  (untccfyt). 

What  is  that  ]  8^n£  tft  bos? 

I  do  not  know  what  it  is.  ^cl)  ivetp  rucfyt,  rvaS  e£  ift. 

To  be  called.  £  c  t  p  e  n  *.  Part,  past,  Q  c  1)  c  t  jj  e  n. 

Imperf.  \)  i  c  p. 

What  is  your  name  ]  I  2$te  ljct§cn  @ic  ? 

My  name  is  Charles.  f  3d)  fyetpe  (mcin  S7ame  if!)  £ar(. 


261 

"What  do  you  call  this  in  Ger-  2Btc  hcif't  bciS  mif  tcutfcl)  ? 

man  1 
How  do  you  express  (say)  this  £8tc  fngcn  @tc  fra$  auf  franco  jifd)  ? 

in  French  ? 
What  is  that  called  1  2£ic  ncnnt  man  ta£  ? 

To  name.  Sicnncn*.      Part,    past,    gcnannt. 

Imperf.  nannte. 

DECLENSION    OF    THE    NAMES    OF    PERSONS.* 

The  names  of  persons  are  declined  either  without 
or  with  the  article.  Without  the  article  they  take  $ 
in  the  genitive,  and  en  in  the  dative  and  accusative, 
with  the  article  they  add  nothing  to  their  termination. 
Ex. 

NOM.  Sfittyelm      or  ber   SBttyefat,  William. 

GEN.  SBityelmS    —  beg  2Gill)etm,  of  William. 

DAT.  3Btll)elnten  —  bent  2Bill)ehn,  to  William. 

Ace.  9BtII)elmen  —  ben  2Bill)e(m,  William. 

NOM.  eitfabetf)      or  bte  (Sh'fafcetb,       Elizabeth. 

GEN.  ©ifabetfyg    —  ber  ©tfabett),  of  Elizabeth. 

DAT.  ©tfabetben  —  ber  ©tfabetfy,  to  Elizabeth. 

Ace.  ©tfabetfyen  —  bte  gttfafcetlj,      Elizabeth. 


5.  A.  Names  of  persons  terminating  in  fct),  3,  jl, 
?/  §/  J/  ta^e  en$  in  the  genitive.  Ex.  ^ranj,  Francis  ; 
gen.  ^ranjen^*  Names  of  females  in  a  or  e  (the  com- 
mon endings  for  almost  all  such  names)  change  in  the 
genitive  a  or  e  into  en£.  Ex.  SBtlfyehntna,  Wilhelmine  ; 
gen.  SBilfyefnttnen^,  of  Wilhelmine.  Seonore,  Eleanor  ; 
£eonoren£,  of  Eleanor. 

Obs.  B.  To  indicate  that  the  ending  of  the  geni- 
tive is  not  a  part  of  the  name,  it  is  commonly  separ- 
ated by  an  apostrophe  as  in  English.  Ex.  Sd)ttter^ 
©ebtd)te,  Schiller's  poems  ;  ©oetfye'S  SOBerfe,  Goethe's 
works. 

Sooner  —  than.  (Sfyet  —  a(3. 

Rather  —  than.  CtcOcr  —  dig. 

He  has  arrived  sooner  than  I.       <5r  t|l  efjet  angcfcmmcn  ci($  id). 

•  For  the  proper  names  of  countries  and  towns,  see  Lesson  XLIX. 


262 

(Siefcot  rocrfc  iclj  mctn  <3c(t  in  ben 
Stop,  cfx  id)  c$  ttcrfdbrwnte. 
(Sfye  id)  mctn  ®dt  t>crfd)n?entc,  roers 
fe  id)  c*  licbec  in  ten  gluf. 
J  will  rather  pay  him  than  go  3cfy  will  \l)\\  licber  beaten,  alg  Ijtns 

thither.  gcfycn. 

I  will  rather  burn  the  coat  than  3d)  will  ten  <Kec!  Ucbec  sccbccnncn, 
wear  it.  aii  i(;n  tragcn. 

Sure.  ©  c  ro  1  p. 

To  be  sure  of  a  thing.  (Since  ©ad)C  gcnrip  fcin*. 

I  am  sure  of  that.  3d)  bin  t>ci]en  gcn?ip. 

I  am  sure  that  he  has  arrived.      3d)  reeijj  (or  bin)  getvijj,  tap  cr  (ins 

gcfemmcn  ift. 


To  repair  to,  to  go  to.  ©id)  tvofyin  bcgcbcn*. 

I  went  to  my  room.  3cf)  bcgab  mid)  auf  mctn  Simmer. 

He  repaired  to  that  town.  (?t  bcgab  fid)  in  ticfc  ©tatt. 

To  repair  to  the  army,  to  one's  ©id)  $ur  TCrmce/  ^u  fcinem  ^egimen^ 

regiment.  tc  bcgcben*. 

I  repaired  to  that  place.  3d)  fyabc  mid)  an  ttcfcn  £)rt  bccjcbcn. 

He  repaired  thither.  (£r  ^at  fid)  t>al)in  bcqcbcn. 

Go  where  you  please.  Gk'ljcn  <Sie,  n?cl)in  ©tc  wollcn. 

George  the  Third.  ©eorcj  tec  2)rittc. 

Louis  the  Fourteenth.  Cutnjt^  ter  £$icqef)ntc. 

Henry  the  Fourth.  £einrtd)  tcr 


Europe,  European.  (Suropa; 

Fluently.  ©elaupg. 

Charles  the  Fifth  spoke  several  ^arl  tec  $unftc  fpcad)  gclcfuftg  mc^ 

European  languages  fluently.  cece  euccpa'ifd)C  ©pcadjen. 

Such  a  thing.  ©o  ctroas. 

Have  you    ever    seen   such    a  £aben  ©ie  jc  fo  ctwa^  gefe^cn  ? 

thing] 

Have  you  ever  heard  of  such  a  £abcn  ©ic  je  fo  ctn?a^  gcfjoct  ? 

thing  ] 

I  have  never  seen  nor  heard  of  3d)  ^abe  nic  fo  cttvas  gefeljcn  ncc^ 

such  a  thing.  cjefyoct. 

EXERCISES.    195. 

When  did  you  see  my  father's  castle  ]  —  I  saw  it  when  I  was 
travelling  last  year.  It  is  one  of  the  finest  castles  that  I  have  ever 
seen  ;  it  is  seen  far  off.  —  How  is  that  said  ]  —  That  is  not  said. 
That  cannot  be  comprehended.  —  Cannot  every  thing  be  expressed 
in  your  language  1  —  Every  thing  can  be  expressed,  but  not  as  in 
yours.  —  Will  you  rise  early  to-morrow  7  —  It  will  depend  upon  cir- 
cumstances ;  if  I  go  to  bed  early,  I  shall  rise  early,  but  if  I  go  to 


263 

bed  late,  I  shall  rise  late. — Will  you  love  my  children? — If  they 
are  good,  I  shall  love  them. — Will  you  dine  with  us  to-morrow  ?— 
If  you  get  ready  QuOcrcitcn  taffcn)  the  food  I  like,  I  shall  dine  with 
you. — Have  you  already  read  the  letter  which  you  received  this 
morning1? — I  have  not  opened  it  yet. — When  will  you  read  it? — 
I  shall  read  it  as  soon  as  I  have  time. — Of  what  use  is  that  1 — It  is 
of  no  use. — Why  have  you  picked  it  up  ? — I  have  picked  it  up,  in 
order  to  show  it  to  you. — Can  you  tell  me  what  it  is  1 — I  cannot 
tell  you,  for  I  do  not  know ;  hut  I  shall  ask  my  brother  who  will 
tell  you. — Where  have  you  found  it  1 — I  have  found  it  on  the  bank 
of  the  river,  near  the  wood. — Did  you  perceive  it  from  afar  ? — I  did 
not  want  to  perceive  it  from  afar,  for  I  passed  by  the  side  of  the 
river. — Have  you  ever  seen  such  a  thing  1 — Never. — Is  it  useful  to 
speak  much  1 — If  one  wishes  to  learn  a  foreign  language  it  is  use- 
ful to  speak  a  great  deal. — Is  it  as  useful  to  write  as  to  speak  1 — 
It  is  more  useful  to  speak  than  to  write ;  but  in  order  to  learn  a 
foreign  language,  one  must  do  both  (bcifccs). — Is  it  useful  to  write 
all  that  one  says  ? — That  is  useless. 

196. 

Where  did  you  take  this  book  from  ? — I  took  it  out  of  the  room 
of  your  friend  (fern.). — Is  it  right  to  take  the  books  of  other  people  ? 
— It  is  not  right,  I  know  ;  but  I  wanted  it,  and  I  hope  that  your 
friend  will  not  be  displeased  ;  for  I  will  return  it  to  her  as  soon  as 
I  have  read  it. — What  is  your  name  ? — My  name  is  William. — 
What  is  your  sister's  name  1 — Her  name  is  Eleanor. — Why  does 
Charles  complain  of  his  sister  1 — Because  she  has  taken  his  pens. 
— Of  whom  do  those  children  complain  ? — Francis  complains  of 
Eleanor  and  Eleanor  of  Francis. — Who  is  right  1 — They  are  both 
wrong ;  for  Eleanor  wishes  to  take  Francis's  books  and  Francis 
Eleanor's. — To  whom  have  you  lent  Schiller's  works  ? — I  have  lent 
the  first  volume  to  William  and  the  second  to  Elizabeth. — How  is 
that  said  in  French  ? — That  is  not  said  in  French. — How  is  that 
said  in  German  1 — It  is  said  thus. — Has  the  tailor  already  brought 
you  your  new  coat? — He  has  brought  it  to  me,  but  it  does  not  fit  me 
well. — Will  he  make  you  another? — He  must  make  me  another; 
for  rather  than  wear  it,  I  will  give  it  away. — Will  you  use  that 
horse  ? — I  shall  not  use  it. — Why  will  you  not  use  it  ? — Because  it 
does  not  suit  me — Will  you  pay  for  it  ? — I  will  rather  pay  for  it 
than  use  it. — To  whom  do  those  fine  books  belong  ? — They  belong 
to^William. — Who  has  given  them  to  him  ? — His  good  father. — 
Will  he  read  them? — He  will  tear  them  rather  than  read  them. — 
Are  you  sure  that  he  will  not  read  them  ? — I  am  sure  of  it,  for  he 
has  told  me  so.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 

V 


264 


EIGHTY-FIFTH  LESSON.— Junf  tmb  cul)t}i0*te 
Ejection. 


Sweet. 

mild, 

agreeable, 
Sweet  wine, 
A  mild  zephyr, 
A  mild  air, 
A  soft  sleep, 

Nothing  makes  life  more  agree- 
able than  the  society  of  and 
intercourse  with  our  friends. 

Sour,  acid. 
To  cry,  to  scream,  to  shriek. 

To  help. 


fcmft; 

angcncfjm. 

fftjicr  SBctn  ; 

cm  fanftct 

cine  fcmftc  Ouft  ; 

cin  fanftcr  (5d)(af. 

9?id)t$  mad)t  bag  Scfccn  angenefjmcr, 

alSbtc  ©cfcflfcfyaft  unb  bet  Unhang 

nut  unjcrn  grcunbcn. 

(Saucr. 

<S  d)  r  c  t  c  n  *.  Part,  past,  9  c  : 
fdjttccn.  Imperf.  fd)ttc. 

$  c  t  f  e  n  *  (governs  the  dative). 
Part,  past,  Q  c  I)  o  (  f  c  n.  Imperf. 


Thou  helpest,  he  helps. 
I  help  him  to  do  it. 
I  help  you  to  write. 

I  will  help  you  to  work. 
To  cry  out  for  help. 

To  inquire  after  some  one.     ©id)    nad)    3*nianbcm    ct!i 

(nad)  3cmanbem  ftagcn). 
Will  you  have  the  goodness  to  2Bellcn  (Sic  bte  ©utc  baOcn,  mit  btcfc 

pass  that  plate  to  me  1  <Sd)UJTi'(  $u  rctd)cn  ? 

Will  you  pass  that  plate  to  me  Swollen  @ic  mit  gcfd'l 


,  cr  f)Uft. 
bclfc  tf)tn  bartn. 
3d)  bin  t^m  bartn 
3ct)  ^ctfc  3()ncn  fd)tctOcn.  (See  Les- 

son XL.) 

3d)  rwll  Sbncn  arbcttcn  ()c(fcn. 
Urn  £ulfc  fdjrctcn*. 


if  you  please? 
To  reach. 

If  you  please. 

Complaisant,  pleasing. 
As  you  please. 
At  your  pleasure. 
As  you  like. 

To  knock  at  the  door. 
To  happen. 
Something  has  happened. 


ft'l  tctd)cn  ? 
JKcid)cn. 


gefanta  tfi. 

©cfaUtg. 

SOStc  c^  Sbncn  QcfaUtg  iff. 


im 


?Cn  btc  S^iir  Rcpfcn. 

f^icl)  cretin cnx  ftcl)  gutragen*  (take 
fjatcn  for  their  auxiliary). 
SSorfolIcn*/     gcfc^c^cn*/     bccjcgncn 
(take  fcin). 

©^  (jat  fid)  ctiva^  $ugctra^cn 
net). 


265 


What  has  happened  ?  2Sn$  iff  tJCrcjcfalTcn 

A  great  misfortune  has  happened.  (5»  tjt  ctn  $repc$  Unctftirf  gcfdjc 

Nothing  has  happened.  (5*  ift  md)t$  WrgffaUen, 

A  misfortune  has  happened  to  (5$  tfl  ifym  ctn  lln^Uicf  bcgcgnet. 

him. 

I  had  an  accident,  2>d)  fjattc  cmcn  Sufall. 

To  ^owr.  ©  t  c  9  c  n*,  f  d)  u  1  1  c  n,  c  t  n  f  d)  c  ns 

6  en. 

To  pour  atvay.  SB  c  9  13  t  c  9  c  n*. 

To  sAe<2.  25  c  c  3  t  c  p  c  n*, 

To  shed  tears.  Sfjrd'ncn  tjergicQcn*  (Part,  past,  sets 

gefiVn.    Imperf.  5?cr^c^). 
A  tear.  (Sine  Sbta'nc. 

With  tears  in  his,  her,  our,  OT  9)}it  tljrdncntcn  2(ugcru 

my  eyes. 

I  pour  wine  into  a  glass.  Scf)  cu'cfk  SKctn  in  cm  ®(^. 

I  put  corn  into  a  sack.  2$)  jtf)iittc  @ctrcibc  in  ctnen  @acf. 

I  pour  out  some  drink  for  that  2$)  fcrjcttfc  btcfcm  9)fannc  511  trtnfcn 

man.  cin. 

I  pour  away  the  wine,  for  it  is  Scrjfltcpc  ten  SQBctn  nxg,  tcnn  cr  taugt 

good  for  nothing.  nicfytS, 

C  f  SS  a  5  an&cttcffcn*  (a  n  6  & 

As  ro,  asfor*,  with  respect  to.  <      t  r  o  f  f  e  n,  n  n  0  e  t  r  a  f). 

ft  8Ba$  anbclangctu 


As  to  me,  I  do  not  know  what  f  2£a£  mid)  anOttrifft  (antjctattcjt), 
to  say.  fo  rocip  id)  ntd)^  wag  id)  facjen  foil. 


To  meet  with.  t^ntrcffen*  (governs  the  ace.). 

Part,   past,  gettoffert.    Im- 
perf. traf. 

Where  have  you  met  with  him?  f  S5>c  fjnbcn  @U  t!)n  angctcoffcn  ? 

I  do  not  know  what  to  do.  f  3d)  ructO  ntcftf,  wag  id)  tt)un  fell. 

I  do  not  know  where  to  go  to.      f  3d)  ttxip  ntdjt,  rvor)in  id)  gc^cn 

felt. 
He  does  not  know  what  to  an-  f  @c  roctp  nid)t,  t»ag  er  antn?orten 

swer.  fell, 

We  do  not  know  what  to  buy.     f  2Btt  ttnficn  ntdjt,  roa^  wit  faufw 

fcllcn. 

To  unbosom  one's  self  to  some  (Sid)  Scmantem  ttcrtraucn. 

one. 

To  trust  some  one.  ^emanbcm  trciucn  or  ocrtrauen. 

To  distrust  one.  <etncm  nu§traucn. 

}  (Stncm  ntd)t  trauen. 
PO  you  trust  that  man  ]  Sraum   (or  t)crtcancn)  <Sic  ttefem 

12 


266 


I  do  trust  him, 

He  trusts  me. 

We  must  not  trust  every  body. 

To  laugh  at  something. 

Do  you  laugh  at  that  ? 

I  do  laugh  at  it. 

At  what  do  you  laugh  ? 

To  laugh  at,  to  deride  someone, 

I  laugh  at  (deride)  you. 

Full. 

A  full  glass. 
A  full  glass  of  wine* 

A  book  full  of  errors. 

The  means, 

To  afford  (to  have  the  means). 
Can  you  afford  to  buy  a  horse  ? 

I  can  afford  it. 

I  cannot  afford  it. 

The  lady, 

To  taste,  to  like,  to  relish. 

How  do  you  like  this  wine  ? 
\  like  it  well. 
I  don't  like  it. 


3cf)  trauc  (or  tvrtraue)  tfjm. 
(St  trmit  (or  t»ertraut)  rntr. 
SB  it    miijycn    nicfyt    eincm 

trail  en. 

llcftcr  ctroaS  facbcn. 
Cacfyen  <2ie  tartibct  ? 
3d)  lad)c  tariibcr. 
SBorubct  (adxrc  ©tc  ? 
Semanten  auslacbcn 

lad)C  ©te  au$  (t>er(ad)C 


Gin 

©in  ©tag  roll  2Sctn  (cm  »oflc$ 
KB£tn). 

Gin  ®ud)  roller 

ta^  fitter. 


©tc  tic  SKittcl,  crn  5>fcrt) 

fan  fen  ? 
Scf)  baOc  tic  9JZittcl  tagu  (icft 

fie). 

3rf)  bafcc  fie  ntd)t. 
tic  Dame. 

©  d)  m  c  c!  c  n. 

SBte  fd)mccft  Sbnen  ticfec  SQ&c'tn  ? 
Gr  fcbuiecft  mtr  gut. 
Gr  fcljmcctt  uiir  nid)t. 


EXERCISES.      197. 

Do  your  scholars  learn  their  exercises  by  heart  ? — They  will  ra~ 
ther  tear  them  than  learn  them  by  heart. — What  does  this  man  ask 
me  for  1 — He  asks  you  for  the  money  which  you  owe  him. — If  he 
will  repair  to-morrow  morning  to  my  house  I  will  pay  him  what  I 
owe  him. — He  will  rather  lose  his  money  than  repair  thither. — 
Charles  the  Fifth,  who  spoke  fluently  several  European  languages, 
said  that  we  should  (man  miiffc)  speak  Spanish  with  the  gods, 
Italian  with  our  (fc'tncr)  mistress  (Die  (SMtcfrte  Obs.  Lesson  LIII.)y 
French  with  our  (fcincm)  friend  (masc.),  German  with  soldiers, 
English  with  geese  (tic  ©an*),  Hungarian  (una,ari|"d))  with  horses, 
and  Bohemian  (b&fynrifd))  with  the  devil  (tcr  Scufel). — Why  does 
the  mother  of  our  old  servant  shed  tears  ]  What  has  happened  to 
her1? — She  sheds  tears  because  the  old  clergyman,  her  friend,  who 
was  so  very  good  to  her  (tcr  ifor  fo  stcl  ©utc*  gcthan  bat),  died  a  few 
days  ago. — Of  what  illness  did  he  die! — He  was  struck  with  apo- 
plexy.— Have  you  helped  your  father  to  write  his  letters  ? — I  luive 
helped  him. — Will  you  help  me  to  work  when  we  go  to  town! — I 


207 

will  bolp  you  to  work,  if  3-011  will  help  me  to  get  a  livelihood.— 
Have  you  inquired  after  the  merchant  who  sells  so  cheap  ] — I  have 
inquired  after  him ;  hut  nobody  could  tell  me  what  has  become  of 
him. — V, 'lu  re  did  he  live  when  you  were  here  three  years  ago  ] — 
He  lived  then  in  Charles  Street,  No.  55. — How  do  you  like  this 
wine  1 — I  like  it  very  well ;  but  it  is  a  little  sour. 

198. 

How  does  your  sister  like  those  apples? — She  likes  them  very 
well  ;  but  she  says  that  they  are  a  little  too  sweet. — Will  you  have 
the  goodness  to  pass  that  plate  to  me? — With  much  pleasure.— 
Shall  (Sell)  1  pass  these  fishes  to  you? — I  will  thank  you  to  pass 
them  to  me. — Shall  I  pass  the  bread  to  your  sister] — You  will 
oblige  (ivrbtnK'u*)  me  by  passing  it  to  her. — How  does  your  mo- 
ther like  our  food  1 — She  likes  it  very  well ;  but  she  says  that  she 
has  eaten  enough. — What  dost  thouaskmefor  1 — Will  you  be  kind 
enough  to  give  me  a  little  bit  of  (t>on)  that  mutton  ] — Will  you 
ne  the  bottle,  if  you  please"? — Have  you  not  drunk  enough1? 
— Not  yet;  for  I  am  still  thirsty. — Shall  I  give  (einfcfycnfcn)  you 
some  wine  ] — No,  I  like  cider  better. — Why  do  you  not  eat? — I  do 
not  know  what  to  eat. — Who  knocks  at  the  door"? — It  is  a  foreigner. 
— Why  does  he  cry  ] — He  cries  because  a  great  misfortune  has 
happened  to  him. — What  has  happened  to  you! — Nothing  has 
happened  to  me. — Where  will  you  go  to  this  evening? — I  don't 
know  where  to  go  to. — Where  will  your  brothers  go  to] — I  do  not 
know  where  they  will  go  to ;  as  for  me,  I  shall  go  to  the  theatre. — > 
Why  do  you  go  to  town? — I  go  thither  in  order  to  purchase  some 
books. — Will  you  go  thither  with  me  ] — I  will  go  with  you  ;  but  I 
do  not  know  what  to  do  there. — Must  I  sell  to  that  man  on  credit] 
— You  may  sell  to  him,  but  not  on  credit;  you  must  not  trust  him, 
for  he  will  not  pay  you. — Has  he  already  deceived  any  body  ? — 
He  has  already  deceived  several  merchants  who  have  trusted  him. 
— Must  I  trust  those  ladies  ] — You  may  trust  them  ;  but  as  for  me, 
I  shall  not  trust  them;  for  I  have  often  been  deceived  by  the  wo- 
men, and  that  is  the  reason  why  I  say,  we  must  not  trust  every 
body. — Do  those  merchants  trust  you  ? — They  do  trust  me,  and  I 
trust  them. 

199. 

Whom  do  those  gentlemen  laugh  at  ] — They  laucrh  at  those  la- 
dies who  wear  red  gowns  (fcaS  .ftlett))  with  yellow  ribbons. — Why 
do  those  people  laugh  at  us] — They  laugb  at  us  because  we^peak 
badly. — Ought  we  to  ($Hujj  man)  laugh  at  persons  who  speak  bad- 
ly]— We  ought  not  to  laugh  at  them ;  we  ought,  on  the  contrary, 
to  listen  to  them,  and  if  they  make  blunders  (JcMcr),  we  ought  to 
correct  them  for  them. — What  are  you  laughing  at  ] — I  am  laughing 
at  your  hat;  how  long  (fVit  tvann)  have  you  been  wearing  it  so 
large  ] — Since  (Qfettfccm)  1  returned  from  England. — Can  you  afford 
to  buy  a  horse  and  a  carriage? — I  can  afford  it. — Can  your  brother 


268 

afford  to  buy  that  large  house  ] — He  can  afford  it. — Will  he  buy  it  1 
— He  will  buy  it,  if  it  pleases  him. — Have  you  received  my  let- 
ter ? — I  have  received  it  with  much  pleasure.  I  have  shown  it  to 
my  German  master,  who  was  surprised  at  it,  for  there  was  not  a 
single  mistake  in  it. — Have  you  already  received  Jean  Paul's  and 
Wieland's  works? — I  have  received  those  of  (pen)  Wieland  ;  as 
to  those  of  Jean  Paul,  I  hope  (fo  boffe  id))  to  receive  them  next 
week.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


EIGHTY.SIXTH  LESSON.—  gedjs  nn&  acl)t}igstt 
Cection. 

Who  is  there  ?  fffict  tft  ba  ? 

It  is  I.  3d)  tun  e*. 

Is  it  you?  ©in&  @tc  eg? 

It  is  not  I.  3d)  tin  c$  md)t. 

It  is  you.  ©ie  fint)  c$. 

It  is  he,  it  is  she.  C£t  iff  c$,  fie  tft  e$. 

Are  they  your  brothers  ?  <£tnt>  c$  3bre  SBtwbcr  ? 

They  are  not  my  brothers.  &  ftnb  mctne  $rut>cr  ntd)t. 


Appositional  phrasesa  are  in  German  always 
put  in  the  same  case  as  the  principal  noun.     Ex. 

NOMINATIVE. 

Lycurgus,  the  Spartan  legislator,  fyfurg,  bet  ©cfeggcbcr  (Sparta^. 
Religion,  this  daughter  of  hea-  2)ic  JRcttflicn,  btcfc  £ed)ter  bt1^  .pint? 

ven,  is  the  faithful  companion      incW,  tft  bie  trcuc  ©cfai;rttnn  tcr 

of  men.  Sftnf$ttt. 

GENITIVE. 

The  duty  of  a  father,  the  natural  St$  fBatcr^  bc^  naturltcftcn  2Scr? 
tutor  of  his  children,  is  to  pro-  munbc$  fcincr  ^inbcr/  9)fltcf)t  ifl 
vide  for  them.  eS/  fiir  fie  su  forgcn. 

DATIVE. 

That  honour  is  due  to  my  friend  3)tefe  (Sljrc  getmbtt  mctncm  Jreuube/ 
whq.is  a  brave  man.  ctncm  broken  97}annc. 

I  gave  the  father,  this  honest  old  3d)  ftfl&c  bcm  SSatcr,  btcfem  rcd)t^ 
man,  the  model  of  his  family,  fdjaffcnen  (Srctfc,  bcm  93?uftcr  fcts 
that  advice.  ner  Jonuttc/  ben  Statl)  cjccjcs 

ten. 

»  We  call  a  phrase  appositional  when  it  serves  to  explain  and  determine  the 
principal  noun. 


THE 

fUFIVBBSITJ 

269 

That  happened  under  Constan-  £ieg  cjefd)iVf)  untcr  (Sonftanttn  tent 
tine  the  Great,  the  first  Chris-  ©rcjjen,  tern  erften  d)rijtttd)en  Hai- 
tian emperor.  for. 

ACCUSATIVE. 

It  concerns  my  friend,  the  coun-  (£-g    betrifft    tiietnen     S'rcui?&/    t>en 

sellor  N.  SKatl)  97. 

I  have  known  the  king,  that  £<cb  bnbe  ten  .Renig,  ttefen  SScljltlja* 
benefactor  of  his  people.  tor  fan  eg  JEetfe?,  gcfonnt. 

The  duty,  tie  spfltd)t ; 

the  companion,  ter  ©efabrte ; 

the  tutor  (the  guardian),    ter  2>ermunt  (plur.  SScrmiinter) ; 

the  model,  tag  9)?uflcr  ; 

the  family,  tie  Janiiltc  ; 

the  people,  tag  3Scl6  ; 

honest,  red)tfd)affen ; 

faithful  (true),  trcu. 

To  thee,  my  dearest  friend,  I  give  jDtr,  metnem  (tebften  5rcu"^c/  9cbe 
this  ring.  id)  ttefen  S^incj. 


B.     In  German  the  pronoun  must  be  in  the 
same  gender,  number,  and  case,  with  the  substantive. 

Of  me,  who  am  his  nearest  rela-  SScn  nrir,  fctncm  iflbbftcn 
tion,  he  requests  nothing.  ten,  rcrlantqt  cr  nid)t$. 

Is  it  they  who  speak  ?  <£tnt>  ftc  c?,  btc  fprcdjcn  ? 

It  is  they.  (Sic  fint) 

It  is  I  Who  speak. 


C.  When  a  personal  pronoun  is  followed  by 
a  relative  pronoun,  it  may  or  may  not  be  repeated  af- 
ter the  latter  ;  but  if  it  is  not  repeated,  the  verb  which 
follows  the  relative  pronoun  must  stand  in  the  third 
person,  though  the  personal  pronoun  be  of  the  first  or 
second  person. 

It  is  you  who  laugh.  £  ^fc  /f  /*'   brcr  ,  f  ie  tad>cn  '  or' 

i  &U  fint)  ci%  l)cr  (ad)t. 


r  ^)u  Inft  c^  t>cr  l)u 
It  is  thou  who  hast  done  it.       <      or, 

C  >Du  kiji  eg,  fccr  eg  gctljnn  r;at. 

It  is  you,  gentlemen,  who  have  (Sic  fint)  eg,  nicine  £erren,  tic 
said  that.  9^faQt  fjabcn. 

To  look  like  (to  appear).  TCugfchcn*  tvie. 

IJow  does  he  look  1  85Jtc  fictyt  ec  aug  ? 


270 

He  looks  gay  (sad,  contented).     @r  ftdjt  tuftt^   (tvauncj, 

<w*. 

This  beer  looks  like  water.  £>icfc$  S3tcr  fiefjt  cw$  rwc  SBoffcr. 

You  look  like  a  doctor.  Sic  jVljen  ix>k  cin  2(rjt  au£. 

Our  equals.  f  UnjVrc*  ®(ctd)cn. 

He  has    not   his  equal  or  his  f  (£r  l)at  fctncS  <3lctd)cn  nicfyt. 
match. 

(3  c  m  a  n  b  c  m  9 1  CM  cr>  c  n  *.    Part, 
past,  acaltcbcn.     Imperf.  qltcb. 
3cmantcmd[)nlid)fc(>'u*or 
fctn  *. 

He  resembles  me.  (5r  ftcbt  mir  abnlicf). 

I  resemble  your  brother.  Set)  fltetdjc  S&fi'ni  23rutcr. 

I  resemble  him.  3d)  bin  il;m  af)n(td). 

Each  other.  (5  t  n  a  n  t>  c  r  (an  indeclinable  pro- 

noun)^ 

We  reserve  each  othe,  {8 

They  do  not  resemble  each  other.  Sic  fcbcn  ctnan^cc  mrf)t  afjnttd). 
The  brother  and  the  sister  love  £)cr  JPrubcr  unt>  bic  Sct)tvc)1cr  lic= 

each  other.  ben  cincmt>cr. 

Are  y on  pleaseff  with  each  other1?  (£tnt)  <S'tc  nut  cinanbcr  ^ufrtctcn? 
We  are  (so).  SOBtr  (inb  c§. 

1  am  well.  Scf)  Inn  gcfunb. 

To  drink  to  some  one.  3cmant)cui  gutrinfcn*. 

rScmantcg  ©cfunbljctt  trtnfcn*. 
To  drink  some  one's  health.      <  2Cuf    Scmantc^     ©cfun^ftctt    trttu 

j  |J  g* 

To  make  some  one's  acquaint-  23cEanntfd)aft  nut  Swumfccm  mac^cn. 

ance. 
To  become  acquainted  with  some-  SemaitbfB  fcnncn  (erncn. 

body. 

!3^)    t)«t>c   fctnc   95cfannt|"cl)aft   §& 
3*"£;  »cf«nntfcl,aft  nut  t^m  90 
macfyt. 
I  have  become  acquainted  with  3cf)  ^obc  tf)n  f cnncn  cjcfcrnt. 

him. 

Are   you  acquainted  with    him  <Stnt>  Sic  nut  ifjm  (il)r)  OcFannt  ? 
(her)  ? 

b  ©inanbev  indicates  that  the  action  expressed   by  the  verb  is  reciprocal 
between  several  persons  or  tilings,  and  is  employed  for  all  cases  and  genders, 


271 

Do  you  know  him  (her)  1  ^cnncn  @ic  if)n  (ftc)  ! 

I  am  acquainted  with  him  (her).  Set)  btnniit  ifjm  (if)r)  bcfannt. 

I  k-now  him  (her).  3d)  fcnnc  ifyn  (ftc), 

He  is  an  acquaintance  of  mine.  (£T  tft  mctn  JBcfanntcr. 

She  is  my  acquaintance.  ©tc  ift  mcinc  iBcr'anntc. 

He  is  not  a  friend,  he  is  but  an  (£r  ijt  fcin   grcimfe,  cr  tjl  nut  cm 
acquaintance.  SBcfcwntcr. 

Obs.     (go  denotes  the  consequence  of  a  preceding 
proposition.     (See  DC?3  B.  Lesson  LXXXI.) 

As  tliou  hast  not  done  thy  exer-  SBctt  feu  fectnc  ?Cuftabcn  nkl)t  gut  QCS 

cises  well,  thou  must  do  them  mad)t  ()flft,  fo  nmf't  feu  pc  nccl)  cms 

again,  nutl  macbcn. 

As  he  did  not  come,  I  sent  for  £a  cc  nicl)t  fam,  (fo)  tic£  icf)  ifyn  ru= 

him.  fen.     (Lesson  LXXXI.) 

Again,  once  more.  9?orf)  cinmot. 

As.  SDo, 


EXERCISES.     200. 

Where  have  you  become  acquainted  with  that  lady  ?  —  I  have  be- 
come acquainted  with  her  at  the  house  of  one  of  my  relations.  —  Is 
it  thou,  Charles,  who  hast  soiled  my  book]  —  It  is  not  I,  it  is  your 
little  sister  who  has  soiled  it.  —  Who  has  broken  my  fine  ink-stand? 

—  It  is  I  who  have  broken  it.  —  Is  it  you  who  have  spoken  of  me  ? 

—  It  is  we  who  have  spoken  of  you,  but  we  have  said  of  you  nothing 
but  good  (®utcs).  —  Why  does  your  cousin  ask  me  for  money  and 
books  ?  —  Because  he  is  a  fool  ;  of  me,  who  am  his  nearest  relation 
and  best  friend,  he  asks  for  nothing.  —  W'hy  did  you  not  come  to 
dinner  ($um  9TRtttagefjen)  ?  —  I  have  been  hindered,  but  you  have  been 
able  to  dine  without  me.  —  Do  you  think  that  we  shall  not  dine,  if 
you  cannot  come  ]  —  How  long  did  you  wait  for  me  1  —  We  waited 
for  you  till  a  quarter  past  seven,  and  as  you  did  not  come,  we  dined 
without  you.  —  Have  you  drunk  my  health  1  —  We  have  drunk  yours 
and  that  of  your  parents.  —  A  certain  man  liked  much  wine,  but  he 
found  in  it  (fearan)  two  bad   qualities  (Me  (Sigenfdjaft).     "  If  I  put 
water  to  it  (t)tncin),"  said  he,  "  I  spoil  it,  and  if  I  do  not  put  any 
to  it,  it  spoils  me."  —  How  does  your  uncle  look  7  —  He  looks  very 
gay  ;  for  he  is  much   pleased  with  his   children.  —  Do  his  friends 
look  as  gay  as  he  ?  —  They,  on  the  contrary,  look  sad,  because  they 
are  discontented.  —  My  uncle  has  no  money,  and  is  very  contented, 
and  his  friends  who  have  a  great  deal  of  it,  are  scarcely  ever  so.  — 
Do  you  like  your  sister  ?  —  I  like  her  much,  and  as  she  is  very  com- 
plaisant towards  me,  I  am  so  towards  her  ;  but  how  do  you  like 
yours  ]  —  We  love  each  other,  because  we  are  pleased   with  each 
other. 

201. 

Does  your  cousin  resemble  you  ?  —  He  does  resemble  me.  —  Do 
your  sisters  resemble  each  other  ?  —  They  do  not  resemble  each 
other  ;  for  the  eldest  (t>tc  filtcjtc)  is  idle  and  naughty  (unartuj),  and 


272 

the  youngest  assiduous  and  complaisant  towards  every  body. — Wh<y 
knocks  at  the  door! — It  is  I,  will  you  open  it? — What  do  you 
want '{ — I  come  to  ask  you  for  the  money  which  you  owe  me,  and 
the  books  which  I  lent  you. — If  you  will  have  the  goodness  to 
come  to-morrow,  I  will  return  both  to  you. — Do  you  perceive  yon- 
der house  ] — I  do  perceive  it,  what  house  is  it  1 — It  is  an  inn  (bag 
2Btttf}$()CWS) ;  if  you  like,  we  will  go  into  it  to  drink  a  glass  of 
wine ;  for  I  am  very  (fefyt)  thirsty. — You  are  always  thirsty  when 
you  see  an  inn. — If  we  enter  it,  I  shall  drink  your  health. — Rather 
than  go  into  an  inn  I  will  not  drink. — When  will  you  pay  what 
you  owe  me  1 — WThen  I  have  money ;  it  is  useless  to  ask  me  for 
some  to-day,  for  you  know  very  well  that  there  is  nothing  to  be  had 
of  him  who  has  nothing. — When  do  you  think  you  will  have  mo- 
ney T — I  think  I  shall  have  some  next  year. — Will  you  do  what  I 
shall  tell  you? — I  will  do  it,  if  it  is  not  too  difficult. — Why  do  you 
laugh  at  me  1 — I  do  not  laugh  at  you,  but  at  your  coat. — Does  it 
not  look  like  yours- 1 — It  does  not  look  like  it ;  for  mine  is  short 
and  yours  is  too  long,  mine  is  black  and  yours  is  green.  (See  end 
of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


EIGHTY-SEVENTH  LESSON.— 0ieb*n  tmir 
Cation. 


To  get  into-  a  scrape.  ©id)  $antct  3U$tcr)cr 

©id)  tcroub  rjetfen* 


To  get  out  of  a  scrape, 

I  got  out  of  the  scrape. 
The  snare, 


ter  ©d)ttna,c 


, 

»cn  ctroaS  lc$  madjcn* 
3d)  bafcc  nut  (jctouS 


3d)  Me  mid)  ou$  tct  ©cringe  gqo: 

gen. 

3db  bin  gut  town  cjefommen. 
tie  ©cbltngc ; 


always*  tmmet. 

That  man  always  gets  into  bad  £>teft't  9)Zamt  gterjt  fid)  tmmct  fd)tim« 
scrapes;  but  he  always  gets  me  £6ntcf  $u ;  abet et  f)i(ft  fid) im* 
out  of  them  again.  met  ivietct  fyetaug. 

Between.  3tt>tfd)en    (governs  the  dative 

and  accusative). 

The  appearance,     .  tnS  2Cnfcr)en ; 

the  sight,  the  face,  tog  dk[td)t ; 

the  mien,  the  look,  tie  9fticnc ; 

the   countenance,   the  physiog-  tic  ©cftd)t$6tft>una,.. 

nomy, 

To  have  the  appearance.  2)a$  Tfnfcfjcn  fjafccn*. 

To  appear.  ©d)Ctncn*.    Imperf.  fd)tcn. 


273 

To  look.  ?(usft'f)cn*. 

To  look  well.  (55ut  flu$fef)cn*. 

To  look  good.  ®ut  iu  fein  fdjcincn*. 

You  (appear)  look  very  well.  (Sic  fcfjcn  fcftr  (jut  ou*. 

She  looks  angry.  (Sic  fid)t  ocr&rtcjtftd)  nu£. 

She  appears  to  be  angry.  <Sie    fd)cint    bofc    (octtrtcfJUd))    $u 

fein. 

They  appear  to  be  contented.  ©ic  fchctnen  jufrtcbcn  $u  fctn. 

They  look  contented  (pleased).  (Sic  fc(;cn  ocrgntigt  au*. 

To  look  pleased  with  some  one.  Scnwnbcm   cin   freunt>(id)C$  (5K'ftd)t 

madxn. 

To  receive  one  kindly.  ©incn  frcunbftd)  empfancjcn*. 

Friendly,  kindly.  grcunMtd). 

To  look  cross  at  some  one.  3Miumfccm  cin  Ob'fc^  ©cftcftt  mad)cn. 

When  1  go  to  see  that  man,  in-  2$can  id)  t»tcfcn  9)?ann  bcfiK^c,  mad)t 
stead  of  receiving  me  with  plea-      cr   nrir  cin  bofcil  (5)cftd)t,  onjiatt 

sure,  he  looks  displeased.  micb  frcuntltd)  auf^unchincn. 

A  good-looking  man.  ©in  9}Jann  t»cn  cjutctn  ?Cnfcbcn. 

A  bad-looking  man.  ©in  972ann  t»cn  fcbtccbtcm  ?(nfcr)cn. 

Bad-looking  people  or  folks.  Ccutc  »en  fdjtcc^tcm  ?(njct)cn. 

To  imagine.  (Sid)   cinbitt)cn   (governs    the    da- 
tive). 

That  man  whom  you  see,  seems  Dec  $Rann,  ben  Sic   fcfjen/  fcbctnt 

desirous  of  approaching  us.  fid)  un*  (dative)  na^crn  ^U  rvcllcn. 

To  visit,  to  go  to  see  some  one.  Senianbcn  Oefud)cn. 

To  pay  some  one  a  visit.  Semanfccm  cincn  23efud)  madjen. 

To  frequent  a  place.  ©in  en  £)tt  befucftcn. 

To  frequent  societies.  ©efcllfdwften  befud)cn. 

To  associate  with  some  one.  SMit  Scmanbcm  umcjcfxn*. 

It  is  all  over  with  «.  !  J 

It  is  all  over !  (£•$  tft  tarum  gefcbefjen  ! 

It  is  too  late  to  consult  to-day  ®efd)cf)enc  £tngc  finb  nid)t  ^u  cintcrn 

about  what  was  done  yesterday  (Sptid)ivovt). 
(a  proverb). 

The  spite,  the  displeasure,  &ct  SScrbrufJ ; 

the  grief,  the  sorrow,  bcr  Summer. 

To  vex,  to  spite  some  one.  Semcmfccm  iScrbrup  madjcn. 

To  hurt  some  one's  feelings.  Scnianfccn  fronfcn. 

You    have  vexed    (spited)   that  (Sic  fjabcn  ticfcm  937annc  SScrbrug 

man.  qemod)t. 

You  have  hurt  that  man's  feel-  (Sic  fyabcn  fctcfcn  9}?ann  (jcfra'nft. 
ings. 

The  place,  fccr  £)rt,  tic  (Stcttc, 

I  know  a  good  place  to  swim  in.  3d)    n>ei£    cine    $utc    'Stctlc    ^um 


274 

To  swim.  ©djnrimnu'n*.  Part,  past,  cjc 

men.    Imperf.  fctjwamm. 

To  experience.  (£  r  f  a  r)  r  c  n*.     Imperf.  c  t  f  u  I)  r. 

To  endure  (experience).     &  r  b  u  1  1>  c  n. 

To  feel  (experience).          Gmpfttlbett**     Imperfect,    cm? 

p  f  a  n  t>. 

I  have  experienced  a  great  deal.  Scb  ftafcc  met  ctbutbct  (cmpfunbcn/ 

crfafjrcn). 

I  have  experienced  a  great  many  3cl)  Oab<  t)icl  Un^iicf  cjcfjabt. 
misfortunes. 

To  suffer.  8  c  t  b  c  n*  (9  c  1  1  1  1  c  n/  I  i  1  1). 

To  feel  a  pain  in  one's  head  or  f  2Cm  Jtepfc  obcr  om  Jupc  Jcibcn*. 

foot. 
I  felt  a  pain  in  my  eye.  f  3d)  rjafce  am  2(u$c  (jcttttcn. 


To  neglect. 

To  mm  (/o  neglect).  £>  c  r  f  a  ujn  c  n 

You  have  neglected  your  prom-  <Ste  f)a()cn  ifyr  SScrfprccfjcn  t>crnacl)r 

ise.  tafiicjt. 

You  have  neglected  to  come  to  (Sic  (jafccn  DctfiXumt,  gut  Stunb€  (^uc 
your  lesson.  Cccticn)  ju  fcmmcn. 

To  yield.  8^ctd)cn*a  takes  fctn.     Part,  past, 

$avicf)cn.     Imperf.  iv'tct). 
To  yield  to  some  one.  £\cmant>cm  nacrjgctn'n*. 

r^ict)  in  ctroae  (accus.)  fchich'n. 
To  yield  to  something.  <  ©icb  jii  cttua^  bequcmcn. 

C  ©^  bet  cttva^  (viwntvn  tojfcn*. 

To  yield  to  necessity.  (£td)  in  bit*  9Zctf>wcnbtgEctt  fcrjicfcm 

We  must  yield  to  necessity.          9)?cm  mup  pel)  in  t>tc  Sictl^vcntt^tcit 

fctjicfcn. 

To  spring.  ©pringcn*.    Part,  past,  cjcfprungcn. 
Imperf.  fptancj. 

To  jump  (hop).  ^iipfcn. 

To  hlow  up,  to  burst.  (Sprcngcn. 

To  omit.  2(u£tof|cn*.     Imperf.  Ucp. 

To  spring  up  from  below.  9Scn  untcn  ^erauf  fprin^cn*. 

To  spring  forward.  £>em>art£  fprtngcn« 

To  spring  backward.  Suriicf  fprtn.qcn. 

The  child  hopped  joy  full  around  3)a$  ^lint)  fyiipfte  fccubicj  um   micr; 
me.  f)crum.b 

n  5Bctd)CU,  to  steep,  and  ettoetdjcn,  to  soften,  to  mollify,  are  active  and  regu- 
lar verbs,  and  consequently  take  l)rtben*  for  their  auxiliary. 

b  ijpftpfttt,  to  jump,  to  hop,  to  frisk,  is  gene  rally  used  in  speaking  of  animals 
that  spring,  anil  of  children. 


275 

Tin-    brsiocrers  let  the   bastion  £Me  SSctogcrcr  UcfJt'n  tie  23nf!ct 

blow  up.  gen, 

The  copier  has  omitted  a  few  JDcv  Hfcfcfirci&cr  fyat  ctntcjc  Stfilcn  au$s 

lines.  cjctaficn. 

f2Cuf    3«nwnt>cn    cbcr     ctroaS    (e$ 
fprtnqcn*/  (e$    ftiinen,  lo$    tens 
ncn* 
llcbcr  Scmanfal  efccr  ctwaS  fxtfal? 
(en*. 

The  cat  springs  upon  the  rat.        £)tc  £a£c  fprtn.qt  ouf  He  SKattc  tog. 
To  leap  on  horseback.  ©id)  auf  t>a$  $)fett>  fdjnrincjcn*  (gcs 


To  run.  9<?cnncn»  (gcrannt,  ranntc). 

To  swing.  ©cfyrotngcn*  (gcfdjwungcn,  fdjnxmg). 

To  still  greater  ill  luck.  3u  nccft  grejkrcm  Unglucf. 

To  still  greater  good  luck.  3u  nod)  QrejJcrcm  &[M. 

To  my  still  greater  ill  luck  I  3u  necr/  gropcrtm  llngtilc!  ^abe  tcr) 

have  lost  my  purse.  mctnc  53orfc  pcrlcrcn. 

EXERCISES.    202. 

Is  it  right  to  laugh  thus  at  everybody?  —  If  I  laugh  at  your  coat, 
I  do  not  laugh  at  every  body.  —  Does  your  son  resemble  any  one  T  — 
He  resembles  no  one.  —  Why  do  you  not  drink  1  —  I  do  not  know 
\\\r.\t  to  drink  ;  for  I  like  good  wine,  and  yours  looks  like  vinegar. 
—  If  you  wish  to  have  some  other  I  shall  go  down  into  the  cellar 
(Lesson  LXXIII.)  to  fetch  you  some.  —  You  are  too  polite,  sir,  I 
shall  drink  no  more  to-day.  —  Have  you  known  my  father  long!  —  I 
have  known  him  long,  for  I  made  his  acquaintance  when  I  was  yet 
at  (auf)  school.  We  often  worked  for  one  another,  and  we  loved 
each  other  like  brothers.  —  I  believe  it,  for  you  resemble  each 
other.  —  When  I  had  not  done  my  exercises,  he  did  them  for  me, 
and  when  he  had  not  done  his,  I  did  them  for  him.  —  W^hy  does 
your  father  send  for  the  physician  1  —  He  is  ill,  and  as  the  physi- 
cian does  not  come  he  sends  for  him. 

203. 

Is  that  man  angry  with  (auf  with  the  accus.)  you  ]  —  I  think  he 
is  angry  with  me,  because  I  do  not  go  to  see  him  ;  but  I  do  not 
like  to  go  to  his  house  :  for  when  I  go  to  him,  instead  of  receiving 
rne  with  pleasure,  he  looks  displeased.  —  You  must  not  believe  that 
he  is  angry  with  you,  for  he  is  not  so  bad  as  he  looks.  —  He  is  the 
best  man  in  (ron)  the  world  ;  but  one  must  know  him  in  order  to 
appreciate  (fd)a'£en)  him.  —  There  is  ((£$  ift)  a  great  difference  (t»cc 
flntcrfd)tet>)  between  (dative)  you  and  him  ;  you  look  pleased  with 
all  those  who  come  to  see  you,  and  he  looks  cross  at  them.  — 
Why  do  you  associate  (cjcru'n  Sic  —  um)  with  those  people?  —  I  as- 
sociate with  thorn  because  they  are  useful  to  me.  —  If  you  continue 
to  associate  with  them  you  will  get  into  bad  scrapes,  for  they  have 


276 

many  enemies. — How  does  your  cousin  conduct  himself? — He 
does  not  conduct  himself  very  well ;  for  he  is  always  getting  into 
some  bad  scrape  (or  other). — Do  you  not  sometimes  get  into  bad 
scrapes  ? — It  is  true  that  1  sometimes  get  into  them,  but  I  always 
get  out  of  them  again. — Do  you  see  those  men  (Scute)  who  seem 
desirous  of  approaching  us  ? — I  do  see  them,  but  I  do  not  fear 
them  ;  for  they  hurt  nobody. — We  must  go  away,  for  I  do  not  like 
to  mix  with  people  whom  I  do  not  know. — I  beg  of  you  not  to  be 
afraid  of  them,  for  I  perceive  my  uncle  among  them. — Do  you 
know  a  good  place  to  swim  in  ? — I  do  know  one. — Where  is  it  1 — 
On  that  side  of  the  river,  behind  the  wood,  near  the  high-road  (Me 
Catftfttafle). — When  shall  we  go  to  swim  ? — This  evening  if  you 
like. — Will  you  wait  for  me  before  the  city-gate? — I  shall  wait  for 
you  there ;  but  I  beg  of  you  not  to  forget  it. — You  know  that  I 
never  forget  my  promises.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


EIGHTY-EIGHTH  LESSON.—  &cf)t  tmi> 
Section. 

By  all  means  (obstinately).  Oiftit  atft't  9flad)t  tint)  ®ereaft. 

To  follow.  Scfcjen,  naci)a,el)cn*  (govern  the  da- 

tive). 

To  pursue.  SSctfotgen  (governs  the  accus.). 

I  have  followed  him.  3d)  bin  ifym 


To  lose  one's  wits.  2)cn  8Scrftan&  setltcrcn*.    Imperf. 

wrfor. 

The  sense,  the  wit,  the  intellect,  fcer  25crj!anK 
That  man  has  lost  his  wits,  for  jDicfcr  9}tann  f)at  fcen  QScrjtant)  ccc* 

he  does  not  know  what  he  is       lorcn,  term  cr  ivcif  md)t,  tt>a$  ct 

doing.  tl)ut. 

That  man  wishes  by  all  means  jDtcfcr  9}fann  ttrill  nur  nut  after  (81* 

to  lend  me  his  money.  watt  fan  ©cl&  letfjen. 

Obs.  A.  The  neuter  of  the  demonstrative  pronoun 
biefeg  (ba£)  may  in  the  singular  relate  to  substan- 
tives of  any  gender  or  number,  and  even  to  a  whole 
proposition. 

Is  that  the  lady  whom  you  spoke  3ft  bas  fcte  Dame,  tten  fccr  ©ic  nut 
of  ,to  me  ?  uur  gefprocbcn  fjabcn  ? 

That  is  a  bad  man.  £a$  tffc  cin  fcijfer  9flann. 

Which  are  the  pens  with  which  2Bc(cbe$  fint)  fcte  $ebetn,  nut  tettcn 
you  write  so  well  1  <Ste  fc  $ut  fcfywbcn  ? 

Obs.  B.     The  neuter  of  the  interrogative  pronoun, 


277 


tt)e  Icfye  if  which,  may  equally  relate  to  substantives  of 
any  gender  or  number. 

Which    is   the  best  pronuncia-  S3Md)C$  tft  tic  kfttf  2(U6fprad)C  ? 
tion  1 

What  a  beautiful  book  !  2Bc(4  cin  f$8nc*  23ud)  ! 


C.  SBdcfy,  when  it  expresses  admiration,  may 
be  followed  by  the  indefinite  article.  It  remains  then 
invariable. 


What  a  great  man  !  93Mcb  cin  cprolJcr 

What  fine  weather  !  ££elcf)C$  fftettC  SDBcttct  ! 

What  good  people  they  are  !  SBdcfyc  Cjutc  £cutc  ftnt 

What  a  happiness  !  } 

How  fortunate  !  vBctd)  cin  TOrf  or  tt>c(cfjc$  ®(ucf  ! 

How  lucky  !  J 

Perhaps.  25  i  e  1  1  c  i  df)  t. 

I  shall  perhaps  go  thither.  3d)  roctte  triettctdjt  (jtngcfjcn. 

O^5.  D.     Hoi^,  before  an  exclamation,  is  translated 
by  n>ie,  ttnetriel,  weld),    Ex. 


How  good  you  are  !  8StC  §ut  jinb 

How  foolish  he  is  !  2Btc  t)umm  tfl  cr  ! 

How  foolish  she  is  !  85Mc  founim  tft  fie  ! 

How  rich  that  man  is  !  2Btc  rctd)  tfl  Mcfcr 

How  handsome  that  woman  is  !    2£tc  fd)6n  tft  btcfc  S 
How  kind  you  are  to  me  !          SBctdic  ®utc  ©ic  flit  nudf)  fycibcn  ! 
How  happy  you  are  !  s!$n$  f;n^  @tc  fo  gtucfticf)  ! 

How  much  I  owe  you  !  SBtcwcl  tcf)  3bncn  nid)t  fdjutbt^  fcin  ! 

How  much  I  am  obliged  to  you  !  2Bte  fcfyt  bin  id)  3f)ncn  ntdjt  t»crfcun= 

ten  ! 


How  many  (what  a  multitude  2Bc(cbc  ^cnfdbi'nmcngc  !     SOSclcr;  cine 

of)  people  !  9)Jcngc  85  elf  g  ! 

The  multitude,  the  great  number,  tic 


Some 

To  owe  someth  ing  to  some  one.  5     ""fcnnfcn  Ijabcn*. 
I  am  indebted  to  him  for  it.          iDag  Iiotc  id)  tfjm  j« 


278 

To  thank.  .vD  a  n  f  C  n  (governs  the  dative). 

To  thank  some  one  for  some-  Scmantcm  fur  ctn?a$  tauten. 

thing. 
I  thank  you  for  the  trouble  you  3d)  tanEc  SJmcn  fur  Me  93?{tf)e,  tic 

have  taken  for  me.  .     ©ic  fid)  fur  mid)  QCCjctH'tt  fyaben. 

Is  there  anything  more  grand  I     SS?a$  tft  grower? 
Is  there  anything  more  cruel  ]       £Bag  tft  graufamcr  ? 
Is  there  anything  more  wicked  ]  2£a$  tjt  gcttlofcr  ? 
Can  any  thing  be  more  handsome1?  $ann  etrca*  fd)6ncr  fcin  ? 

To  run  up.  £crkt(aufcn*. 

To  hasten  up.  £>erbcictlen. 

To  run  to  the  assistance  of  some  Scmantcm  $u  |>iltfe  citcn. 
one. 

To  save,  to  deliver.  SKcttcn. 

To  hasten.  @t(cn. 

To  plunder  (to  rob).  ^Muutcrrt. 

Many  men  had  run  up  ;  but  in-  23ictc  Scute  roarcn  f)cr(>cigccttt  ;  ofletn 
stead  of  extinguishing  the  fire,       anftatt  ba$  gcucr  ^u  lofd)cn,  ftn^en 
the  wretches  set  themselves  to       tic  (Sleutcn  cm  ju  ^liintcrn. 
plundering. 

To  bejrin  something.  ©tit)n^  anfancjcn*.     Imperf.  fiucj. 

To  sef  about  something.  ©id)  «n  cttva^  (ace.)  madjcn. 

Have  they  been  able  to  extin-  $ctt  man  bag  Jcucr  lefdjen  f  cnncn  ? 

guish  the  fire  1 
Have  they  succeeded  in  extin-  £sft  c$  thncn  cjctungcn/  ta^  Jcuer  ^u 

guishing  the  fire  ?  Icfcbcn  ? 

The  watch  indicates  the  hours.     Die  Ubr  jCt^t  tic  ^tuuten  on. 
To  indicate.  2(n$eti}cn. 

To  quarrel.          ©id)   3  a  n  f  C  n. 

To  chide,  to  reprove  some  one.     3cmanten  au$}antVn  or  au^fd)iltcn* 

(gefd)c(ten,  fd)a(r). 

To  scold  some  one.  9)?tt  ^cmantem  ^anfen. 

The  quarrel,  ter  3anf,  tic  Sanfcrct. 


To   dispute,   to   contend    about  Ueber     ctivaS    ftrciten*    (g 

something.  ftritt). 

About  what  are  those  people  dis-  8£eruOcr  ftrettcn  ttcfc  Scute  ? 

puting  "? 
Tliey  are  disputing  about  who  ©tc  ^anfen  ftd^/  wcr  gucrfl  gcl)cn  fell. 

shall  go  first. 

OF    THE    PRESENT    PARTICIPLE. 

The  present  participle  is  formed  from  the  infinitive, 
by  adding  the  letter  b*     Ex.  Stebefl,  to  love  ;  present 


279 

part.  Ifcbcnb,  loving  ;  arbcitcit,  to  work  ;  present  part 
arbeftenb. 

The  present  participle  in  German  is  used  in  the  at- 
tributive sense  like  an  adjective.  Ex.  ©it  jlcrbcnbcr 
SSatcr,  a  dying  father  ;  ber  (actycnbe  ^riifyh'ng,  the  smiling 
spring ;  bte  ttdfyenbe  ©tltnbc,  the  approaching  hour  ;  ba$ 
gittcrnbe  $tnb,  the  trembling  child.  But  it  cannot  be 
used  as  a  predicate.  We  cannot  say  with  the  Eng- 
lish :  the  boy  is  reading. a  This  must  be  expressed  by 
the  present  tense,  as:  ber  $nabe  Kcftb 

In  English  the  present  participle  is  used  to  express 
cause,  reason,  condition,  and  time.  But  this  is  rarely  the 
case  in  German.  For  in  all  such  instances  the  present 
participle  is  translated  by  the  following  conjunctions 
with  the  verbs  expressed  by  the  English  participles  : 
ate,  when,  as ;  itacfybem,  after ;  ba,  as ;  tnbem,  as,  whilst ; 
tt>eif,  because.  Ex. 

Being  lately  at  your  brother's  2tt$  id)  neuttd)  foci  3fccm  23ruK't 

house,  I  gave  something  to  his      roar,  gab  id)  fctncn  JUntcrn  ctroa6. 

children. 
Having  eaten  supper,  she  went  to  97ad)fccmc  fie  $u  9?ad)t  gcgefjen  fjattc, 

bed.  ging  fie  $u  JBcttc. 

Having  no  money,  I  cannot  lend  2)a  id)  !cin  ©cl&  fjafce,  fo  fanu  id)  3^ 

you  any.  ncn  feinS  tcifjcn. 

Knowing  that  you  are  my  friend,  S)a  id)  rucip,  fcap  @ie  mcin  Jreunb 

I  beg  of  you  to  do  me  that  fa-      finbx  fo  (ntte  id)  @tc,  nut  ttefen 

vour.  ©cfallcn  511  t^un. 

Not  finding  my  brother,  I  went  3nt>cm  id)  mcincn  ffiruber  nid)t  fanb/ 

to  my  sister.  (fo)  gtng  id)  $u  mcinec  Sd)n?cflcr. 

Being  ill,  I  cannot  work.  SBetl  id)  frcm!  bin,  fann  tc^  nid)t  ars 

beiten. 

Obs.  jB^    These  examples  show  that  each  of  the  con- 

a  In  sublime  style,  principally  in  poetry,  it  may  be  used  adverbially.  Ex. 
Bittevnb  sor  jcbcm  5 fatten  Icbt  bet  ^urd)tfame  in  etvigcr  5lngft,  trembling  at 
each  shade  the  fearful  lives  in  constant  anxiety.  3f)m  in  bte  3?ebe  etnfalienb, 
bcivtint  ber  cblc  2t$iUe6,  interrupting  him,  the  noble  Achilles  began. 

b  Several  words  formed  originally  from  verbs,  have  lost  the  nature  of  pre- 
sHut  participles,  and  are  used  as  adjectives  only,  both  in  the  attributive  and 
predicative  sense  ;  they  are  :  bringcnb,  pressing  ;  briicfeub,  oppressive  ;  Ctltneb- 
ntcnb,  captivating;  flicf?cnb,  fluent :  binreifjeubi  overpowering  ;  friinfcnb,  mor- 
tifying; reijenb,  charming.  Ex.  3bre  Sittcn  ftnb  febv  etnnet)menb,  her  man- 
ners are  very  captivating  ;  bte  S7loth  tft  brin^etlb,  the  necessity  is  pressing ; 
bte  £afl  tfl  bvitcfeiib,  the  burden  is  oppressive ;  biefe  *8eletbtgWtfl  tft  franCeiib, 
this  insult  is  mortifying  ;  feine  9?ebe  tft  flicfjcnb,  his  speech  is  fluent;  ftc  tft 
rei^cnb,  she  is  charming. 

c  S'iadjfem  can  only  be  employed  with  the  pluperfect  of  the  indicative. 


280 

junctions  al$f  nacfybem,  ba,  mbem,  tt>etf,  has  its  peculiar 
signification,  and  that  there  is  necessarily  a  difference 
in  their  application:  1st,  cd$  refers  to  a  definite  event 
of  a  past  time  ;  2d,  nacfybem  states  that  an  action  was 
finished  when  another  action  commenced  ;  3d,  bd  im- 
plies a  logical  cause  from  which  an  inference  is  drawn  ; 
4th,  intent  is  used  to  state  that  an  event  is  simultane- 
ous with  another  event  ;  5th,  tt>ett  expresses  a  real  rea- 
son why  a  thing  is  or  takes  place. 

Obs.  F.  The  present  participle  may,  in  English,  be 
converted  into  a  substantive  by  a  preceding  article, 
as  :  the  reading,  the  writing,  the  speaking.  This  can- 
not be  done  in  German,  where  the  infinitive  must  be 
employed,  as  :  ba£  £  efen,  ba3  ©cfyretben,  ba£  Sprecfyen.  As 
an  adjective,  however,  but  not  as  an  abstract  substan- 
tive, the  present  participle  may  elliptically  be  turned 
into  a  substantive,  as  :  bcr  ?efenbc,  one  that  reads  ;  ber 
©cfyreibenbe,  one  that  writes;  ber  Sprecfyenbe,  one  that 
speaks. 

By  too  much  reading  one  fatigues  £)urd)  311  tnefcS  Scfcn  crmut^t  man 
the  eyes.  fief)  tie  TCucjcn. 

Obs.  G.  Sometimes  the  present  participle  is  transla- 
ted by  a  substantive  preceded  by  a  preposition.  Ex. 

I  saw  your  brother  whilst  I  was  3d)  Ijafce  3f)rcn  23rut>cr  tm  ^orfcctgc; 
passing  by.  ben  cjefefjcn. 

He  came  with  a  book  under  his  (Sr  Fnui  nut  ctncm  25uc!)e  untcr  tern 

arm.  Xrnic* 

When  I  was  in  the  country,  1  was  2ft$  id)  auf  tern  Con^c  nxir,  fccfanb  td^ 

very  well.  mich  fcbr  tvoht. 

She  smiled  as  she  was  saying  <£ie  lac^ctte,  tnbcm  ftc  t)n^  fn^tc. 

this. 


To  perform  (to  represent). 

To  entertain  (to  amuse).  llnter  fatten*.     Imperf.  untcrfjiott. 

To  bargain  (to  deal).  .^ant>ctn. 

To  reply.  (Sritnctvrn. 

To  be  struck  with  horror.  33  on     ©  ration     (©ntfi'|cn)    K'fattcn 

iDcrbcn*. 

The  horror,  t>a$  ©raucn/  tn6  (Sntfofeon. 

A  violent  head-ache.  (5tn 


281 

EXERCISES.       204. 

Ah,  it  is  all  over  with  me  ! — But,  bless  me  !  (mctn  ©ett !)  why 
do  you  cry  thus  ] — I  have  been  (5ftcm  fyat  mir)  robbed  of  my  gold 
rings,  my  best  clothes,  and  all  my  money  :  that  is  the  reason  why 
I  cry. — Do  not  make  so  much  noise,  for  it  is  we  who  have  taken 
them  all  in  order  to  teach  you  to  take  better  care  of  your  things 
(@ad)cn),  and  to  shut  the  door  of  your  room  when  you  go  out. — 
Why  do  you  look  so  sad  ] — I  have  experienced  great  misfortunes  ; 
after  having  lost  all  my  money,  I  was  beaten  by  bad-looking  men  ; 
and  to  my  still  greater  ill-luck  I  hear  that  my  good  uncle,  whom  I 
love  so  much,  has  been  struck  with  apoplexy. — You  must  not 
afflict  yourself  so  much,  for  we  must  yield  to  necessity  ;  and  you 
know  well  the  proverb  :  "  It  is  too  late  to  consult  to-day  about  what 
was  done  yesterday." — Can  you  not  get  rid  of  that  man? — I  cannot 
get  rid  of  him,  for  he  will  absolutely  (fcurcfycuis)  follow  me. — He 
must  have  lost  his  \vits. — What  does  he  ask  you  for  1 — He  wishes 
to  sell  me  a  horse,  which  I  do  not  want. — Whose  houses  are  these  1 
— They  are  mine. — Do  those  pens  belong  to  you  ? — No,  they  be- 
long to  my  sister. — Are  those  the  pens  with  wrhich  she  writes  so 
well  1 — They  are  the  same. — Which  is  the  man  of  whom  you  com- 
plain ? — It  is  he  who  wears  a  red  coat. — "  What  is  the  difference 
(t>cr  UntcrfcbictO  between  a  watch  and  me  1  "  inquired  a  lady  (of)  a 
young  officer.  "  My  lady,"  replied  he,  ua  watch  marks  the  hours, 
and  near  (bet)  you  one  forgets  them." — A  Russian  peasant,  who 
had  never  seen  asses,  seeing  several  in  Germany,  said  :  "  Lord  (3Xdn 
©ett),  what  large  hares  there  are  in  this  country  !  " — How  many 
obligations  I  am  under  to  you,  my  dear  friend  !  you  have  saved  my 
life  !  without  you  1  had  been  (roa'rc  id))  lost. — Have  those  misera- 
ble men  hurt  you  ? — They  have  beaten  and  robbed  me  ;  and  when 
you  ran  to  my  assistance  they  were  about  to  strip  (au^icfycn*)  and 
kill  me. — I  am  happy  to  have  delivered  you  from  (cms)  the  hands 
of  those  robbers. — How  good  you  are  ! — Will  you  go  to  Mr.  Tor- 
tenson's  to  night  (Mcfcn  2(bcnt))  ? — I  shall  perhaps  go. — And  will 
your  sisters  go  1 — They  will  perhaps. — Was  you  pleased  at  the 
concert  yesterday  ? — I  was  not  pleased  there,  for  there  was  such 
a  multitude  of  people  there  that  one  could  hardly  get  in. — I  bring 
you  a  pretty  present  with  which  you  will  be  much  pleased. — What 
is  it  1 — It  is  a  silk  cravat. — WThere  is  it  1 — I  have  it  in  my  pocket 
(Me  Safcbc). — Does  it  please  you  1 — It  pleases  me  much,  and  I 
thank  you  for  it  with  all  my  heart. — I  hope  that  you  will  at  last 
accept  (cmncbmcn*)  something  of  (t>cn)  me. — What  do  you  intend  to 
give  me  1 — 1  will  not  tell  you  yet,  for  if  I  do  tell  you,  you  will  find 
no  pleasure  when  I  give  it  to  you. 

205. 

Why  do  those  men  quarrel  ? — They  quarrel,  because  they  do  not 
know  what  to  do. — Have  they  succeeded  in  extinguishing  the  fire? 
— They  have  at  last  succeeded  in  it;  but  it  is  said  that  several 
houses  have  been  burnt. — Have  they  not  been  able  to  save  any- 


282 

thing  ] — They  have  not  been  able  to  save  anything  ;  for,  instead  of 
extinguishing  the  flue,  the  miserable  wretches  who  had  come  up  set 
themselves  to  plundering. — What  has  happened  1 — A  great  misfor- 
tune has  happened. — Why  did  my  friends  set  out  without  me  ? — 
They  waited  for  you  till  twelve  o'clock,  and  seeing  that  you  did  not 
come,  they  set  out. — Tell  ((Sqafytcn)  us  what  has  happened  to  you 
lately. — Very  willingly,  but  on  condition  (nut  fcem  ^cfcingc  or  untct 
fret  iBctnncjung)  that  you  will  listen  to  me  attentively  (cuifmeitfam) 
without  interrupting  (untcrbrcd)cn*)  me. — We  will  not  interrupt 
you,  you  may  be  sure  of  it. — Being  lately  at  the  theatre,  I  saw  The 
speaking  picture  and  The  weeping  woman  performed.  This  latter 
play  (£)a6  le£terc  (£tuc!)  not  being  very  (fonbcrlict))  amusing  to  me,  I 
went  to  the  concert,  where  the  music  (fctc  9}?ufif)  caused  me  a  vio- 
lent head-ache.  I  then  left  (ocrlaflicn*)  the  concert,  cursing  (ocr* 
uninfdxn)  it,  and  went  straight  (Qcrcifcc)  to  the  mad-house  (fca$  Sftcirs 
rcnfyaufe),  in  order  to  see  (bcfucfycn)  my  cousin. 


EIGHTY-NINTH  LESSON.—  3J*mt  untr 


Towards,  against.  ©  c  9  c  n    )  , 

Against.  2BtDcr    ]  gov 

« 

©egett  denotes  the  direction  of  two  things  turned 
towards  each  other  and  is  used  for  towards  and  against  ; 
tt)  t  b  e  r,  on  the  contrary,  denotes  hostility  and  is  only 
used  for  against.  Ex. 


To  take  the  field  against  the  ©cgcn  (or  itribcr)  ben  Jcint) 

enemy.  gtcfxn*. 

What  have  you  against  me  1  2Ba$  fyafccn  <£ic   gc$en    (or  twt>cr) 

mid)  ? 

You  speak  against  yourself.  (Sic  rct>en  Qcqcti  (or  rotter)  fid)  fclOjf. 

To  swim  against  the  current.  ®cgen  t>cn  Strcni  fdpmmmetl*. 

The  love  of  a  father  towards  his  3)te  Sicbe  ctncS  aSotcrg  gc^cn  (not 

children.  nnt>ct)  fctnc 

I  have  nothing  against  that.  3d)  fya 

Self,  selves.  ©  c  (  6  ft  or  f  c  (  t)  c  t    (is   indeclin- 
able). 

I  myself.  S*  fclfrft. 

Thou  thyself,  he  himself.  £)ii  fd6ft,  cr  fclbft. 

WTe  ourselves,  you  yourselves.  8Str  felbft,  3^r  (8tc)  fctOfl. 

They  themselves.    *  <£tc  fclbft. 

He  himself  has  told  it  to  me.  <5r  fclbft  ()at  c^  nur  cjcfacjt. 


283 

Obs.  A.  The  pronoun  preceding  self  is  not  transla- 
ted into  German.  But  the  personal  pronoun  preced- 
ing felbfl  is  declined. 

He  has  given  it  to  me  (not  to  C£'t  rjat  e$  mtv  fctfrft  gegcben. 

another  person). 
They  themselves  have  come  to  Sic  fcfbft  ftnt  511  mtr  gcfomntcn. 

me. 
We  have  given  it  to  them  (not  SBir  fyaOen  c$  ifjncn  fclbft  gcgcfcen. 

to  others). 

The  day  before.  £)er  Sag  vcrfjcr. 

The  preceding1  day,  K»r  tforbergcr)ent>c  Sag. 

The  day  before  Sunday  is  Satur-  £)et  Sag  rer  (Benntag  r)ctpt  SJamfc 

day.  tag. 

The  day  before  (the  preceding  JDcr  Sag  corner  (tcr  tJOrfyergerjentc 

day)  was  Friday.  Sag)  war  cm  J^eita^, 

Again  (anew).  SScn  iKcucm,  router. 

Once  more  (again).  9i'ccb  cinniaf. 

He  speaks  again.  (5r  jpricbt  rotctcr. 

I  must  hear  him  again.  2>ct)  uiup  il;n  r»cn  97cucm  f)6'rcn. 

Obs.  B.  The  adverb  ttnebcr  must  not  be  mistaken  for 
the  inseparable  particle  ttnfcer  (Lesson  XX  V*),  nor  for 
the  preposition  ttnber,  against.  It  answers  to  the 
English  word  again.  Ex.  tttteberfommen*,  to  come 
again  ;  ttriebetOltfaitgen*,  to  begin  again.  It  must  not 
be  mistaken  for  jururf,  back  again,  which  as  in  English 
denotes  retrogression.  Ex.  ^uritcffoutinefl*,  to  come 
back  again. 

The  light,  ta*  8tct)t. 

To  blow.  i^lcifcn*  (gcbtafcn,  Mies). 

To  blow  out.  2di6t>(afi'n*. 

To  flee.  gltcbcn*  (fleflorxn,  flof)). 


To  run  away.  <  (vntlaufcn*. 

C.  ;Da»cn  lew  fen*. 

Why  do  you  run  away  ?  2Barum  laufen  Sic  nxg  (tarcn)  ? 

I  run  away,  because  1  am  afraid.  Sch  faufe  tarcn  (roeg),  rocit  id)  niter) 

furd)te  (or  nxil  id)  jurd)t  f;abe). 
To  make  one's  escape.  J 

To  run  away,  to  flee.  >  Die  Jjtudjt  ncr)mcn*  (or  ergrctfcn*). 

To  take  to  one's  heels.  } 

He  deserted  the  battle.  (Sr  tft  a«§  tcr  Sd)(ad)t  cntflorjcn  or 

cnUaufen. 
The  thief  has  run  away.  £>er  SDtei  tft  cntfaufcn  (taron-  or  roegs 

gdaufen). 


284 

To  catch,  to  lay  hold  of,  to  seize.  (Srgrctfcn*  (ergriflren,  cr  griff).- 

To  translate.  UcK'rfejjen.* 

To  translate  into  German.  2(uf  K'utfcl)  iibcrfc^cn. 

To  translate  from  French  into  2(u*  tern  Jrnnjoftfdxn  tn$  3)cutfd)e 

German.  (iOcrfcgcn. 

To  translate  from  one  language  2(u$  cincr  <Spracf)C  in  tic  anfccrc  lifters 

into  another.  fo£cn. 

To  introduce.  (Sinfufircn. 

I  introduce  him  to  you.  3^)  fufyrc  ifyn  foci  Sfynen  cin. 

Since  or  from.         93  0  n  —  an,  f  c  1  1. 

TQScn  btcfcm  TdicjcnbUdfe  an. 
From  that  time.  <  (gctt  fcu'fct  3ctt. 

C  iGcn  btcfcr  Sett  an. 


C.  Compound  prepositions  must  be  divided 
and  the  case  which  the  preposition  governs  placed  be- 
tween the  two  component  parts,  as  : 

From  my  childhood.  £?en  mcincr  3ua,cnb  an. 

From  morning  until  evening.        QSom  Sflergcn  fct$  $um  2(&cnt>. 

•c,  .  ,    S  95cm  2Tnfanqc  bi?  ^um  @nte. 

From  the  beginning  to  the  end.   j  ^  y£*m  £  ©nto. 

To  produce  (to  yield,  to  profit).    (Sinbrtna/'n*. 

To  destroy.  Scrftorcn. 

To  reduce.  ^crat)ftf|cn. 

To  limit.  einfcbrd'nfcn. 

To  diminish  (to  lessen).  93cr!lctncrn. 

To  reduce  the  price.  £cn  SprciS  f)cra()fc|cn. 

To  reduce  (to  bring  down)  the  Sen   5>rct^   MS   auf    cincn   Skater 

price  to  a  crown.  IjcruntcrOtingcn*. 

The  merchandise,  tie  S35aarc. 

The   price   of  the  merchandise  f  Die  SSaare  fc^ta'gt  aK 

falls. 

The  yard,  the  ell.  tic  (5ttc. 

To  deduct.  f  S7acfe(affcn*. 

Having  not  overcharged  you,  I  f  £)a  id)  (Sic  gar  ntcf)t  tiOerfcfet  ^a6ex 

cannot  deduct  anything.  jo  fann  ic^  nid)t^  nad)laffcn. 

KaTt^h.  {«*«««  (inseparable). 
By  the  year  (or  a  year),  jahvltd)  ; 

by  the  day  (or  a  day),  tOijttd)  ; 

by  the  month  (or  a  month),  wonatlicrj. 

a  In  iiberfc^ctt,  to  translate,  the  accent  being  on  the  root  of  the  verb,  it  b  e  r 
is  inseparable,  and  consequently  ius  past  participle  is  iifcerfcfct,  not  ubergefffct. 
(See  Lesson  XLV.) 


285 

By  no  means.  ©ar  nid)t. 

Not  at  all.  ©an$  unt>  gar  mcfct. 


How  much  does  that  situation  SBterui  fcrtnqt   3fywn    ttcfi'S   2Cmt 
yield  you  a  year!  j^Wtcl)  dn? 

EXERCISES.     206. 

On  entering  the  hospital  (tas  £efpttal)  of  my  cousin  I  was  struck 
with  horror  at  seeing  several  madmen  (fccr  9?arr,  gen.  en)  who  came 
up  (naben)  to  me  jumping  and  howling  (f)eutcn). — What  did  you  do 
then  1 — I  did  the  same  (e*  cbcn  fo  macben)  as  they,  and  they  set  up 
a  laugh  (anfancjcn*  $u  lacbcn)  as  they  were  withdrawing  (fid)  $ururfs 
atefyen  or  Wfgbfge&cn*). — When  I*was  yet  little  I  once  (einft)  said  to 
my  father,  "  I  do  not  understand  (pcrftcfjcn*)  business,  and  I  do  not 
know  how  to  sell ;  let  me  play."  My  father  answered  me,  smiling- 
(Ui'cbe(n),  "  In  dealing  one  learns  to  deal,  and  in  selling  to  sell." 
"  But,  my  dear  father,"  replied  I,  "  in  playing  one  learns  also  to 
play."  "  You  are  right,"  said  he  to  me ;  "  but  you  must  first  (oevs 
fjcr)  learn  what  is  necessary  and  useful." 

Do  you  already  know  what  has  happened  1 — I  have  not  heard 
anything. — The  house  of  our  neighbour  has  been  burnt  down. — 
Have  they  not  been  able  to  save  anything  1 — They  were  very  for- 
tunate in  saving  the  persons  that  were  in  it ;  but  out  of  (sen)  the 
things  that  were  (fid)  K'flnfccn*)  there,  they  could  save  nothing. — 
Who  has  told  you  that ! — Our  neighbour  himself  has  told  it  to  me. — 
Why  are  you  without  a  light  ? — The  wind  blew  it  out,  when  you 
came  in. — W^hat  is  the  day  before  Monday  called ! — The  day  be- 
fore Monday  is  Sunday. — Why  did  you  not  run  to  the  assistance  of 
your  neighbour  whose  house  has  been  burnt  down  ? — I  could  not 
run  thither,  for  I  was  ill  and  in  bed. — What  is  the  price  of  this 
cloth  ! — I  sell  it  at  three  crowns  and  a  half  the  ell. — I  think  (fin- 
ten*)  it  very  dear. — Has  the  price  of  cloth  not  fallen ! — It  has  not 
fallen :  the  price  of  all  goods  has  fallen,  except  (au6o,encnmicn)  that 
of  cloth. — I  will  give  you  three  crowns  for  it. — I  cannot  let  you 
have  it  for  (urn)  that  price,  for  it  costs  me  more. — Will  you  have 
the  goodness  to  show  me  some  pieces  (ba$  (Stuct,  plur.  c)  of  English 
cloth  ! — With  much  pleasure. — Does  this  cloth  suit  you  1 — It  does 
not  suit  me. — Why  does  it  not  suit  you ! — Because  it  is  too  dear  ; 
if  you  will  lower  the  price,  I  shall  buy  twenty  yards  of  it  (tarwi). 
— Having  not  asked  too  much,  I  cannot  take  off  anything. 

207. 

You  learn  French  ;  does  your  master  let  you  translate  1 — He  lets 
me  read,  write  and  translate. — Is  it  useful  to  translate  in  learning* 
a  foreign  language  ! — It  is  useful  to  translate  when  you  nearly 
know  the  language  you  are  learning ;  but  while  (nxnn)  you  do  not 
yet  know  anything,  it  is  entirely  useless. — What  does  your  Ger- 
man master  make  you  do  ! — He  makes  me  read  a  lesson ;  after- 
wards he  makes  rne  translate  French  exercises  into  German  on 


286 

(ftC'Ct  with  the  accus.)  the  lesson  which  lie  has  made  me  read  ;  and 
from  the  beginning  to  the  end  of  the  lesson  he  speaks  German  to 
me,  and  I  have  to  answer  him  in  the  very  (fdbft)  language  which 
he  is  teaching  me. — Have  you  already  learnt  much  in  that  manner? 
— You  see  that  I  have  already  learnt  something,  for  1  have  hardly 
been  learning  it  four  months,  and  I  already  understand  you  when 
you  speak  to  me,  and  can  answer  you. — Can  you  read  it  as  well  ? 
— I  can  read  and  write  as  well  as  speak  it. — Does  your  master  also 
teach  English  ? — He  does  teach  it. — Wishing  to  make  his  acquaint- 
ance, I  must  beg  of  you  to  introduce  me  to  (bet)  him. — As  you  wish 
to  make  his  acquaintance,  I  shall  introduce  you  to  him. — How  many 
exercises  do  you  translate  a  day  1 — If  the  exercises  are  not  difficult 
I  translate  (from)  three  to  (bis)  fouf  every  day,  and  when  they  are 
so,  I  translate  but  one. — How  many  have  you  already  done  to-day  1 
— It  is  the  third  which  I  am  translating;  but  to-morrow  I  hope  to 
be  able  to  do  one  more,  for  I  shall  be  alone. — Have  you  paid  a  visit 
to  my  aunt] — I  went  to  see  her  two  months  ago,  and  as  she  looked 
displeased,  I  have  not  gone  to  her  any  more  since  that  time. — How 
do  you  do  (to-day)  ] — I  am  very  unwell. — How  do  you  like  that 
soup? — I  think  (ftnl^u*)  it  is  very  bad  ;  but  since  I  have  lost  my 
appetite  I  don't  like  anything. — How  much  does  that  situation 
yield  to  your  father  1 — It  yields  him  more  than  four  thousand 
crowns. — What  news  do  they  mention  (fcigcn)  ? — They  say  that  the 
Turks  have  taken  the  field  against  the  Russians. — Every  one  will 
find  in  himself  the  defects  which  he  remarks  in  others  :  the  defects 
of  others  are  before  (us),  our  own  behind  us.  (See  end  of  Lesson 
XXXIV.) 


NINETIETH  LESSON.—  tfemt&SU   flection. 


PRESENT    OF    THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I  may  have,  thou  mayest  have,  3$   fyfl&e,   3)u   fjafreft,  cr  (fie,  e$) 

he  (she,  it)  may  have.  baft*. 

We   may  have,  you  may  have,  £Bit  fyafcen,  3fa  fyabct,  fie  fjabcn. 

they  may  have. 

I  may  be,  thou  mayest  be,  he  3cf)  fct,  S)u  fctcft  (or  ft'tft)/  IT  (fie, 

(she,  it)  may  be.  C5)  feU 

We  may  be,  you  may  be,  they  2Btr  fetcn,  Sfy?  fctct/  fie  feten. 

may  be. 

I  may  become,  thou  muyest  be-  3cl)  wcrfcc,  £)u  n>crbcft,  cr  (fie,  c£) 

come,  he  (she,  it)  may  become.  iverbe. 

We  may  become,  you  may  be-  2Btr  tm'rfcen,  3^  roctbct,  fie  n?er* 

come,  they  may  become.  K'tt. 

1  may  praise,  thou  mayest  praise,  %$  (cfce,  2>u  lofccft  er  (fie,  c$)  lofte. 
he  (she,  it)  may  praise. 


287 

We  may  praise,  you  may  praise,  SOBtr  (often,  3f)r  fofcct,  fie 
they  may  praise* 

Obs.  A.  The  present  of  the  subjunctive  differs,  in 
regular  verbs,  from  the  present  of  the  indicative  only 
in  the  third  person  singular,  which  rejects  the  letter  t. 
All  German  verbs  are  regular  in  the  present  of  the 
subjunctive,  which  is  formed  from  the  infinitive. 

Obs,  B.  The  letter  e  which  is  often  omitted  in  the 
present  of  the  indicative  (Obs.  A,  Lesson  XXXIV.) 
must  always  be  retained  in  the  present  of  the  sub- 
junctive. 

He  who  requires  to  be  honoured  SDBcr  ocrtangt/  top  man  tfyn  fetneS 
on  account  of  his  riches,  has  9fctd)tf)um6  rocgen  K'tefyrc,  t>ec 
also  a  right  to  require  a  moun-  Ijat  aud)  etn  3icd)t  311  tJCttancjen, 
tain  to  be  honoured  that  con-  fca9  nian  ctncn  SBcvg  wrefyrc,  t>cr 
tains  gold.  ©clt)  in  fid)  fyat. 

IMPERFECT    OP    THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

In  regular  verbs  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive 
does  not  differ  from  that  of  the  indicative.  In  irregu- 
lar verbs  it  is  formed  from  the  imperfect  indicative 
by  softening  the  radical  vowels  and  adding  an  e*b 

The  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  is  used  after  the 
conditional  conjunction  tt>entt,  if,  expressed  or  under- 
stood. 

If  I  had  money.  S5*cnn  td)  d5clt>  fyatte  (or  fjcitte  id) 

©cfo). 

a  In  conjugating  their  verbs,  learners  would  do  well  to  prefix  a  conjunction 
to  each  person  of  the  subjunctive,  not  because  a  conjunction  should  necessa- 
rily precede  that  mode,  but  because  it  is  advisable  to  get  into  the  habit  of 
placing  the  verb  after  the  conjunction,  particularly  in  compound  verbs. 
They  may  use  for  that  purpose  one  of  the  conjunctions  b  a  £,  tt>  e  n  n.  Ex. 
JDaf  id)  abfdjtetbe,  that  I  may  copy ;  t»enn  id)  dbfcfeHebe,  if  I  copied ;  tt>etm 
id;  abgefd)rieben  ptte,  if  I  had  copied ;  bap  id)  a&fd)retben  tvevbe,  that  I  shall 
copy,  &c.  These  examples  show  that  when  the  phrase  begins  with  a  con- 
junction (Lesson  XLVIL),  the  separable  particle  is  not  detached  from  the 
verb  in  simple  tenses,  and  in  the  past  participle  gives  way  to  the  syllable  ge. 

b  From  this  rul§  must  be  excepted  the  sixteen  irregular  verbs  which  com- 
pose the  first  class  in  our  list.  These,  having  already  an  e  in  the  imperfect 
indicative,  do  not  add  one  in  the  subjunctive.  Several  of  them  do  not  soften 
the  radical  vowel,  but  become  regular  again  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  as  : 
fennen*,  to  know ;  nennen*,  to  name,  to  call ;  rennett*,  to  run ;  fenben  *,  to 
send  ;  toenbetl*,  to  turn. 


288 

If  I  saw  him.  SOBcnn  id)  ibtt  fafje  (or  fafyc  id)  ifyn). 

If  he  did  it.  g&cnn  cr  e$  tfyatc  (or  tfjatc  cr  e$). 

Were  he  to  lose  his  money.          SScnn  er  fctn  ©elt>  Dcrlore. 
Were  he  to  beat  his  dog.  2£cnn  cr  fctncn  £unt>  fct)(ugc. 

If  you  were  rich.  SSSerm  @te  rctd)  roarcn  (or  rcflrcn 

<Ste  rctd)). 


C.     As  soon  as  n>etttt  is  not  conditional  it  re- 
quires the  indicative  mode.     Ex. 

If  he  is  not  ill,  why  does  he  send  SOScnn  cr  md)t  frcm!  iff,  nxirum  Wpt 
for  the  physician  1  er  ten  ^Doctor  femmcn  ? 


06s.  D.  Instead  of  toentt,  the  imperfect  subjunctive 
of  the  verb  foffen  is  often  used  at  the  beginning  of  a 
sentence,  as  should  in  English. 

Should  you  still  receive  my  let-  ©ofltcn  <£tc  mctncn  93ricf  nod)  fjcute 
ter  to-day,  I  beg  you  will  call  crf)o(ten/  fo  bitte  id)  "Sic,  augcn? 
on  me  instantly.  Wtrflid)  511  niir  gu  fomnien. 

Should  he  be  hungry,  something  polite  c6  it)n  ljuncjern/  fo  iniiptc  matt 
must  be  given  to  him  to  eat.  ibm  ctraag  511  ef[cn  gcbcn. 

OF  THE  CONDITIONAL  OR  POTENTIAL  TENSES. 

The  conditional  tenses  are  formed  from  the  imper- 
fect subjunctive  of  the  verb  tt>erben*,  which  is:  id} 
nwvfce,  I  should  or  would  become,  and,  as  in  the  future 
tenses  (Lesson  LXXXI.  and  LXXXIL),  the  present  of 
the  infinitive  for  the  conditional  present,  and  the  past 
of  the  infinitive  for  the  conditional  past.  The  imper- 
fect of  the  subjunctive  may  be  used  instead  of  the 
conditional  present,  and  the  pluperfect  of  the  subjunc- 
tive for  the  conditional  past.  Ex. 

I  should  do  it.  3d)  rourbe  c$  tfjun  (or  id)  tljatc  e$)» 

He  would  have  done  it.  CSr  roiirfce  c$  Qctfycm  fyciben  (or  ec 

fyatte  c£  cjctbcm). 

We  would  go  thither.  8SMr  tvurfccn  t>af)in  gcfycn. 

You  would  go  thither.  Sbt  rcwrbct  f)tngcf)cn. 

They  would  go  thither.  ©tc  n?urt)cn  ^tngchcn. 

Thou  wouldst  thank  me  once.  2)u  wfirteft  mtr  ctnft  tanfcn. 

At  one  time,  one  day  (once).  (Stnft,  cinc^  Sagcg. 

Obs.  E.  The  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  or  the 
conditional  tense  may  be  employed  either  before  or 
after  conditional  propositions,  as  in  English.  Ex. 


289 

I  would  buy  it  if  I  had  money  3d)  fauftc  eg  (or  tcb  nnirbc  eg  faiu 

enough.  fen),  nxnn  tcb  ®ell>  cjenug  rja'tte. 

If  1  had  money  enough  I  would  95*enn  tcb  ®clt>  p/mio,  batrc,  fo  tuurfrc 

buy  it.  tcb  06  faufcu  (or  fo  fauftt  tcb  cs). 

Had  I  money  enough  I  would  pay  £attc  id)  ©el&  g«.'nug,  fo  bc$ablte  id) 

for  it.  eg  (or  fo  OJftrDc  tcb  eg  be$ab(cn). 

Had  1  money  I  would  give  you  .pJitte  id)  ®ell>  (or  nvnn  id)   GMb 

some.  fyiittc),  fo  nritrbe  tcb  3bncn  nxtcbeS 

cjcbcn  (or  fo  gabc  id)  Sftiu'ti  n>cU 


If  1  went  thither  I  should  see  SScnn  id)  IjtnQtncjC,  fo  tvurfcc  tct)  if)n 
him.  fcf)cn. 

Were  I  to  give  it  to  him,  he  would  ©abe  id)  c^  t^nt,  cr  tvuvbc  eg  (or  fo 
keep  it.  roiirfrc  cr  w)  bebnttcn. 

If  I  gave  it  to  him,  he  would  not  SBcnn  id)  eg  tbm  .qJibe,  fo  nnirfcc  er  eg 
return  it  to  me.  mtr  nicbt  ivieKT^eben. 

Had  you  come  a  little  sooner  (or,  gftarcn  Sic  eincn  Kugcnbftcf  eber  C£s 
if  you  had  come  a  little  sooner)  fommen  (or  ruenn  Sic  eincn  2(iu 
you  would  have  seen  my  bro-  gcnWicf  ebcr  qcfommcn  tvcircn),  fo 
ther  (or,  you  might  have  seen  nnirfcen  (Sic  mctncn  SWrubcr  gcfe= 
my  brother).  fyen  b^bcn  (or  fo  hattcit  <Sie  iiwis 

nen  5Brubcr  gcfcbcn). 

If  he  knew  what  you  have  done,  SBcnn  er  rviintc/  n?a5  (gte  gctban  fta? 
he  would  scold  you.  benx  fo  tDtirbc  er  Sic  ousfcbctten. 

If  there  was  any  wood,  he  would  £Bcnn  £e($  ta  ware/  fo  ivurfcc  er 
.make  a  fire.  $cuct  onmad)cn. 

If  I  had  received  my  money,  I  £&cnn  tcb  nictn  ®clt)  bcfommcn  batte, 
would  have  bought  a  pair  of  fo  roiirfcc  tcb  wit  ein  $)aar  ncitc 
new  shoes.  Scbubc  gcfauft  ()abcn. 


F.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  of  the  verbs 
fonnen*,  n>olfen*,  mogen*,  biirfen*,  is  often  employed  to 
express  various  feelings,  as  : 

1st,  $6mten,  fear  or  desire.     Ex. 

He  might  fall.  <£t  fonntc  fatten. 

I  might  (could)  do  it,  3d)  fb'nnte  eg  tfyun. 

2d,  5E5oI(en,  solicitation.     Ex. 

Would  you  have  the  goodness  ]   2MIten  Sic  bte  d)tite  bnben  ? 
Would  you  be  so  good  ?  SSoIltcn  (Sic  fo  cu'itic]  fctn  ? 

WTouldst  thou  do  me  the  favour  1  SBelltcjt  tu  nur  tie  (Scfatttgfett  cr= 

wctfcn  ? 

3d,  9K6gett^  desire,  either  with  or  without  the  adverb 
germ    Ex. 

I  should  like  to  know.  \  3*  m?lte  wiffcm  .-. 

<  3d)  modjtc  gern  wtffcn. 

13 


290 

4th,  Surfeit,  politeness,  either  in  the  present  of  the 
indicative  or  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive.     Ex. 

May  I  ask  you  for  the  knife  ?       JDorf  (or  burftc)  id)  <Sic  urn  ba$ 

SReffet  bitten  ? 
May  I  beg  of  you  to  tell  me  ?       2>cirf  (or  tiirftc)  id)  (Sic  bitten,  mir 

$u  fogcn  ? 

Would  you  learn  German,  if  I  SOSurben  <Sic  beutfd)  (cnten,  rocnn  id) 

learnt  it  "?  e$  (crntc  ? 

I  would  learn  it,  if  you  learnt  it.  3d)  rcurbc  c$  lerncn,  roenn  <£ie  c$ 

Icrntcn. 
Would  you  have  learnt  English,  SBfirbcn  <Sie  cnQfifcf)  gctcrnt  fyabcn, 

if  I  had  learnt  it  1  nxnn  id)  e£  gcTcrnt  battc  ? 

I  would  have  learnt  it,  if  you  had  3d)  tvutfce  c^  gcfcrnt  (jobcn/  n?cnn 

learnt  it.  @tc  C£i  gctcrnt  batten. 

Would  you  go  to  Germany,  if  I  S&firfccn  ©tc  nad)  3)cutfd)(ant)  rctfcn, 

went  thither  with  you?  nxnn  id)  nut  3^ncn  ba^tn  rcifctc  ? 

I  would  go  thither,  if  you  went  3d)  nritrfce  baljtn  rcifcn/  n?cnn  (Sic 

thither  with  me.  nut  mir  fcafytn  rctfctcn. 

Would  you  have  gone  to  Ger-  2Biirt>cn   ^ie  nad)  )Dcutfd)tcmb 

many,  if  I  had  gone  thither      rctpt  fein,  wcnn  tcf)  mit 

with  you  ?  fcafiin  gcrctf't  ware  ? 

Would  you  go  out,  if  I  remained      SBiirfccn  (Sic  au&jefycn/  wcnn  ic^ 

at  home  1  $u  .paufc  Wtcbc  ? 

I  would  remain  at  home,  if  you  3d)  nntrfcc  $u  ^>aufc  Mctben  (or  id) 

went  out.  Wcbc  ju  |>aufc)  roenn  ©ie  au\>5 


m 

Would  you  have  written  a  letter,  SEitrtcn  (Sic  cinen  SBricf  qcfcbricbcn 
if  I  had  written  a  note  ?  Ijabcn,  n?cnn  ic^  cm  SBitlct  gefd^rtc* 

fccn 


The  spectacles,  tic  SBritlc  (is  in  German  used  in 
the  singular)  ; 

a  pair  of  spectacles,  cine  23rifle  ; 

the  old  man,  t>cr  cilte  Warn,  tct 

the  optician,  t>cr  SDpticug  ; 

To  go  (or  come),  to  fetch.  ?(bf)eK'n. 

To  keep  one's  bed  (one's  room).  Dag  SBctt  (t>a$  3'tmmcr) 


The  plate,  bet 

the  son-in-law,  bcr 

the  daughter-in-law,  Me  ( 

the  progress,  bic  ^ertfd)rittc  (plural)  ; 

the  step  (the  pace),  bcr  ©cbritt  ; 

really,  nnrfltd). 

EXERCISES.     208. 

Would  you  have  money,  if  your  father  were  here  ?  —  I  should 
have  some,  if  he  were  here.  —  Would  you  have  been  pleased,  it  I 


291 

had  had  some  books  1 — I  should  have  been  much  pleased,  if  you  had 
had  some. — Would  you  have  praised  my  little  brother,  if  he  had  been 
good  ?_If  he  had  been  good,  I  should  certainly  (flenM)  not  onlv 
have  praised,  but  also  loved,  honoured,  and  rewarded  him. — Should 
we  be  praised,  if  we  did  our  exercises  ? — If  you  did  them  without 
a  fault,  you  would  be  praised  and  rewarded. — Would  rny  brother 
not  have  been  punished,  if  he  had  done  his  exercises  1 — He  would 
not  have  been  punished  if  he  had  done  them. — Would  your  sister 
have  been  praised,  if  she  had  not  been  skilful  ! — She  would  cer- 
tainly not  have  been  praised,  if  she  had  not  been  very  skilful,  and 
if  she  had  not  worked  from  morning  until  evening. — Would  you 
give  me  something,  if  I  were  very  good1? — If  you  were  very  good, 
and  if  you  worked  well,  I  would  give  you  a  fine  bpok. — Would 
you  have  written  to  your  sister,  if  I  had  gone  to  Dresden"! — I 
would  have  written  and  sent  her  something  handsome,  if  you  had 
gone  thither. — Would  you  speak,  if  I  listened  to  you! — I  would 
speak,  if  you  listened  to  me,  and  if  you  would  answer  me. — Would 
you  have  spoken  to  my  mother,  if  you  had  seen  her1? — I  would 
(have)  spoken  to  her,  and  have  begged  of  her  to  send  you  a  hand- 
some gold  watch  (tic  iltjt),  if  I  had  seen  her. 

209. 

One  of  the  valet  de  chambres  (t>er  jtammctfctcncr)  of  Louis  the 
XIV.  (Sutwtjj  fccs  XIV.)  requested  that  prince,  as  he  was  going  to 
bed,  to  recommend  (cmpjvblcn*)  to  the  first  president  (t>cr  Dbcrprafu 
tent)  a  law-suit  (t>et  9)ro$c{J)  which  he  had  against  his  father-in-law 
(tvclchi'n  cr  mit  fctncm  (Scbivtegcrsatcr  fiibrtc),  and  said,  in  urging  him 
(in  3cmantvn  fcrtngen*)  :  "Alas  (2(cb)  sire  (@ucr  9}toii'jWt;,  you  have 
but  (®tc  Mirfcn  nur)  to  say  one  word."  "  Well  ((Si),"  said  Louis 
XIV.,  "  it  is  not  that  which  embarrasses  me  (t>a$  tft  es  ntd)t/  nxi£ 
mtch  anftcbt)  ;  but  tell  me,  if  thou  wert  in  thy  father-in-law's  place, 
and  thy  father-in-law  in  thine,  wouldst  thou  be  glad  if  I  said  that 
word  ! " 

If  the  men  should  come,  you  would  be  obliged  to  give  them  some- 
thing to  drink. — If  he  could  do  this  he  would  do  that. — A  peasant 
having  seen  that  old  men  used  spectacles  to  read,  went  to  an  opti- 
cian and  asked  for  a  pair.  The  peasant  then  took  a  book,  and 
having  opened  it,  said  the  spectacles  were  not  good.  The  optician 
put  another  pair  of  the  (sen  ten)  best  which  he  could  find  in  his 
shop  upon  his  nose  ;  but  the  peasant  being  still  unable  to  read,  the 
merchant  said  to  him  :  "  My  friend,  perhaps  you  cannot  read  at 
all!"  "If  I  could,"  said  the  peasant,  "I  should  not  want  your 
spectacles." — I  have  always  flattered  myself,  my  dear  brother,  that 
you  loved  me  as  much  as  I  love  you  ;  but  I  now  see,  that  I  have 
been  mistaken.  I  should  like  to  know  why  you  went  a  walking 
without  me. — I  have  heard,  my  dear  sister,  that  you  are  angry  with 
me,  because  I  went  a  walking  without  you. — I  assure  you  that,  had 
I  known  that  you  were  not  ill,  I  should  have  come  for  you  ;  but  I 
inquired  at  your  physician's  about  your  health,  and  he  told  me  that 
you  had  been  keeping  your  bed  the  last  eight  days. 


292 

210. 

A  French  officer  having  arrived  at  the  court  of  Vienna  (am  $£tcs 
tier  £efc),  the  empress  Theresa  (Die  .fiaijVrtnn  Sfxrcfta)  asked  him, 
if  (cb)  he  believed  that  the  princess  of  (pen)  N.,  whom  he  had  seen 
the  day  before,  was  (rua'rc)  really  the  handsomest  woman  in  (son) 
the  world,  as  was  said  ?  "  Madam,"  replied  the  officer,  "  I  thought 
so  yesterday." — How  do  you  like  that  meat  1 — I  like  it  very  well. 
— May  I  (£arf  or  titrftc  tch)  ask  you  for  a  piece  of  (son)  that  fish  ] — 
If  you  will  have  the  goodness  to  pass  me  your  plate,  I  will  give 
you  some — Would  you  have  the  goodness  to  pour  me  out  some 
drink  1 — With  much  pleasure. — Cicero  seeing  his  son-in-law,  who 
was  very  short  (Han),  arrive  with  a  long  sword  at  his  side  (an  tH't 
©cite)*  said  :  "  Who  has  fastened  (flclnm&cn)  my  son-in-law  to  this 
sword  1 "  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


NINETY-FIRST  LESSON.  —  ©in  tmb  neunpjste 
Section. 

To  propose.  (Sid)  »  e  r  n  c  (j  m  c  n  *. 

I  propose  going  on  that  journey.  3d)  nchmc  mic  t>er,  bicfc  SRcifc 

modxn. 


|  J 

I  endeavour  to  do  it.  3d)  Ocinuhc  mid),  e$  $u  tfnm. 

I  endeavour  to  succeed  in  it.        3d)  fiidx,  C8  1)  a  I)  i  n  ^u  brina,cn. 


To  aspire  after  something.  97ad)  'ctit>a^l  trad)tcn. 

He  aspires  after  places  of  honour,  ^t  tradjtct  nod)  ^Orcnftt'IIcn. 

The  honour,  btc  ©f)rc  ; 

the  riches,  t>cr  9?ctd)tf)um  ; 

the  title,  tcr  SitcU 

I  should  not  have  complained  of  3d)  ttwrfcc  mid)  lifter  bo$,  n?n^  cr 

what  he  has  done,  if  it  had  gctfoan  ^at,  nid)t  t\'f(acjt  babcn, 

injured  only  me;  but  in  doing  tvcnn  c^  nnr  mtr  gcfcht^ct  hattj  ; 

t7,  he  has  plunged  many  fami-  obcr  cr  f)at  pictc  ^amiltcn  ta^urcl) 

lies  into  misery.  in*  (£(cnt>  cjcfKtqt. 

Since  you  are  happy,  why  do  3)a  Sic  t)  o  d)  gliuKid)  finb,  n?arum 

you  complain1?  Ocftogcn  Sic  fid)  t)  c  n  n  ? 

Obs.  A.  In  German  a  good  many  words,  as  :  fcemt, 
booty,  tt>ol)l,  &c.  are  used  for  the  sake  of  euphony. 
Such  words  cannot  possibly  be  rendered  in  English. 
Ex. 


293 


What  do  you  wish  to  say  with  &ci$  rceltcn  Sic  t>  c  n  n  fccmrit 

this?  Qcn? 

Since  you  have  nothing-  to  tell  £)a  Sic  iljm  bed)  nid)t$  $u 
him,  why  do  you  wish  to  see       fyatvn,   tvarum    tvollcn    Sic    tfjn 
him  1  i>  c  n  n  fchcn  ? 

Who  has  made  the  best  use   of  2Bcr  hot  rv  o  b  t  h'n  Ocftcn 
his  money  *?  pen  fcincm  ©cite  gcmadjt  ? 

To  injure.  SdiaK'n. 

To  plunge  (to  precipitate).     Stur^on. 
The  use,  KT 


You  would  oblige   me  much,  if  Sic    nnirbcn    mid)   fcbr 

you  would  do  me  this  favour.  ivenn  Sic  mir  ttcfc 

crivcifcn  ivclltcn. 

If   you   wrould   render  me   this  95>cnn  Sic  nur  ttcfai  ^tcnfl  fciftcn 

service,  you  would  oblige  me  ivclltcn,  fo  tvurtcn  Sic  ir.td)  fcf)t 

much.  rcrbt^cn. 

To  oblige.  ^crbinbcn*,  wrpflicbtcn. 

To  render  a  service  to  some  one.  3ttuant>cm  fincn  ^)icn)l  (ciflcn. 

The  obligation,  tic  £>cr(unfctiel)fcit. 

To  tie  (attach).  2MnN*n*. 

I  tie  the  horse  to  the  tree.  3d)  btnfrc  tfl^  9?fcrb  an  ben  ffioum. 

He  is  the  most  honest  man  that  Sag    ift   tcr   cbr(td)fic  ^ann,   t>cn 

has  ever  been  seen.  man  jc  (jcmcit?)  gcfcfjcn  b«t. 

I  want  a  horse  that  must  be  tal-  3d)  nm§  cin  ^)fcrb  fjcibcn,  t)a^  (ivc(? 

ler  than  this.  d)C6)  proper  ift  n(^  ttcfc^. 

I  am  sorry  that  she  is  ill.  @g  ift  (tt)iit)  mir  tcib,  t>ap  ftc  fran! 

ift. 

I  am  glad  that  you  are  come.  (£$  ift  mir  (icO,  tap  Sic  gc!cmmcn 

ftnK 

I  am  astonished  that  he  has  not  3d)  ruunbcrc  mid),  ba|5  cr  fcinc  2Cufs 

done  his  exercises.  cjabcn  nid)t  qcmad)t  Ijat. 

He  will  marry  her  though  she  is  (5r  ruirt)  fie  bcirat^cn,  cb  fie  a,teidf) 

not  rich.  nicbt  rctcb  ift. 

I  will  wait  until  he  returns.  3d)  ivill  rcartcn,  Oi$  cr  ^urudffcmmt. 

In  case  that   should  happen,  let  3m  JflHc  c^  Qcfdjtcl)^  fo  lajfcn  Sic 

me  know  it.  mid)'6  rciffcn. 

OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    USE    OF     THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

O6s.  B.  In  German  the  subjunctive,  being  only 
used  to  express  doubt  or  incertitude,  is  not  governed 
by  any  particular  words.  It  has  more  affinity  to  the 
English  subjunctive  than  to  that  of  any  other  lan- 
guage, and  more  than  would  at  first  be  supposed.  We 
sometimes,  however,  prefer  the  subjunctive  where  the 
English  use  the  potential  should  or  would,  though  we 
could  in  this  case  even  use  either  the  potential  or  the 
subjunctive.  Ex. 


294 


1  should  do  it,  if  it  were  possible. 

Were  I  in  your  place,  or  if  I  were 

in  your  place. 
Had  he  the  treasures  of  Crcesus, 

or  if  he  had  the  treasures   of 

Cro3sus. 
That  man  would  be  happier,  if 

he  left  off  gambling1. 
He  would  have  been  happier,  if 

he  had  left  off  gambling. 

If  you  knew  how  ill  I  am,  you 
would  not  be  astonished  to  find 
me  in  bed. 


Sel)  ID  it  r  t  c  c$  tfyun,  tvcrm  eg  meg* 
(let)  iv  a  r  c. 

28  a  r  c  tcb  an  Shrcr  Stcfle,  etcr 
avnn  tcb  an  Sbrer  Stdlc  ID  a  r  c. 

£  a  1 1  c  er  tic  Scba£e  tc*  (Sroju?, 
otcr  nx'nn  cr  tic  Scba'£e  tee  (£ri)s 
fu*  b  a  1 1  c. 

£>iefer  9D?ann  rourtc  flfflcffidjet 
f  c  t  n,  rccnn  cr  ta*  @ptdai  1 t  c  9  e. 

(Sr  ty  ii  r  t  e  gliicf  lidbcr  cj  c  n;  c  f  c  n 
f  c  t  n,  rucnn  cr  bag  ©piclcn  g  c  « 
laffcn  hattc. 

85?cnn  Cic  if  u  9 1  c  n  (or  H>  ft  £  t  c  n 
©te),  ivtc  franf  tch  bin,  fc  wiirt 
t>  c  n  (S'tc  nicl)t  crftcumt  fctn  (fo 
roarcn  Sic  ntcht  crftaunt),  niter) 
tm  S^ctti*  311  put  en. 

(5r  it?  ii  r  t>  c  c^  ntcl)t  g  c  t  h  a  n  fyci; 
ben,  f)  a  1 1  c  cr  ten  ©rfctcj 
t>c  r  a  u  eg  c  j"cl)C  n. 

Scb  ID  ii  r  b  c  nucb  fwr  untanfftac 
batten,  f  a  b  e  tcb  Sic  ntd)t  al5 
mctncn  ^ct>(tbatcr  a  n. 

2)tc  Jranjcfcn  ID  ii  r  t)  c  n  Me  Scblacbt 
ntcbt  g  e  ID  c  n  n  e  n  b  a  b  c  n  (or 
batten  Me  Scblacbt  nicht  Qe* 
n?  o  n  n  e  n),  tDcnn  fie  ntcbt  etnc 
fo  grc^c  llcfrcrmacbt  pen  Ccuten 
9  c  b  a  b  t  fatten. 

C.  In  English  the  potential  should  or  would  is 
used  to  express  a  wish  relating  to  a  future  time,  and 
the  subjunctive  to  express  a  wish  relating  to  a  past 
time.  In  both  instances  the  Germans  use  the  subjunc- 
tive. Ex. 


He  would  not  have  done  it,  had 
lie  foreseen  the  result. 

I  should  think  myself  ungrateful, 
did  I  not  consider  you  as  my 
benefactor. 

The  French  would  not  have  gain- 
ed the  battle,  if  they  had  not 
had  superior  numbers. 


I  wish  you  would  do  it. 

I  wish  you  would  go  thither. 

I  wish  you  had  done  it. 

I  wish  you  had  gone  thither. 


1  should  have  wished  to  see  him, 
had  it  been  possible. 


Scb  nriinfcbtc,  Ste  t  M  t  c  n  c$,  or 

fcajj  ©tc  e$  t  b  #  t  e  n. 
Scb  nriinfcbtc,  Sic   9 1  n  9  c  n   I)  t  n, 

or  ta9  Sic  b  t  n  cj  t  n  9  c  n. 
Scb  nninfcbtc,  Sic  *  batten    c$   §t: 

t  b  a  n,  or  tap  Sic  C6  cj  c  t  ()  a  n 

batten. 
Scb   tDitnfcbte,  Stc  n?  a'  r  c  n  \}\m 

Q  e  9  a  n  9  e  n,  or  tap  Stc  bin* 

9  e  9  a  n  9  c  n  ID  a  r  e  n. 
Scb  b  a  1 1  c  9  c  ID  ii  n  f  cb  t,  tbn  511 

feben,  ware  c$  m&jltd)  9  c  to  e  f 

fc  n. 


235 

I  should  like  to  read,  if  I  had  3d)  (  a  f  e  gcrn,  t»cnn  id)  nut  Sett 
only  time.  I)  a  1  1  e. 

Obs.  D.  Some  expressions  require  sometimes  the 
indicative  and  sometimes  the  subjunctive  according  to 
the  manner  in  which  the  sentence  is  formed.  Ex. 

{Indie.    @r  mag  fo  reicf)  fein, 
n>ie  er  nriflL 
Subj.     (£r  fet  fo  reicf),  ttne  er 
rootte, 

Hndic.    Sfyre  ©etoaft  mag  fo 

Whatever    your    power  1  grog  few,  al$  fie  unit. 

may  be.  ]  Subj.     3l)ve  ©eroalt  jet  norf) 

I  fo 


£.     In  German  we  never  employ  the  indica- 
tive, 

1.  In  conditional  propositions  with  or  without  the 
conjunction  tt>emt,  if.     (See  preceding  Lesson.)     Ex. 

If  I  could  I  would  do  it.  ££cnn  id)  fonntc,  fo  tbatc  tdj  e$  ;  or 

fonntc  id)/  fo  tfyate  td)  c^. 

If  she  were  amiable  he  would  S&cnn  fie   Itcbcn^tviirMg  wave  (or 
marry  her.  roarc  ftc  UcOcnsrtJurt)^)/  fo 

tljctc  cc  ftc. 

2.  In  exclamations  and  wishes.     Ex. 

If  I  had  friends  !  £a'ttc  id)  Jrcimfcc  ! 

If  I  were  rich  !  $I£arc  id)  rcid)  ! 

May  heaven  grant  it  !  £>cr  £tmmcl  gc(>c  c^  ! 

God  forbid  !  d>ott  bcftiitc  ! 

I  could  not  have  thought  it  !  £a'tte  id)'»  tocft 


3.  After  the  verbs  erjafyfert,  to  relate  ;  fragett,  to  ask  ; 
fagen,  to  say,  and  others,  which  relate  indirectly,  either 
to  what  we  have  said  ourselves,  or  to  what  we  have 
heard  said  by  other  persons.  Ex. 

He  related  to  me,   that  he  had  (£r  cr^ahftc  mir,  t>a|5  cr  <Sd)tprud) 

suffered   shipwreck,  and  bad  gclttrcn,  unt)  fein  gcw$e6  33ermc^en 

lost  all  his  fortune.  ttcrteren  fjcitto. 

He  asked  me  whether  I  was  not  (5t  frciqte  mid),  oO  td)  ntcht  t>cr  unb 

such  a  one,  whether  I  had  no  JHT  rucirc,  Ob  tcb  fein  ®elt>  f)attc, 

money,  w^hy  I  did  not  know  tvarum  id)  nid)t  fc^rcitjen  fonnte. 
how  to  write. 


296 

Thou  art  master  on  the  cross-  3)u  Gift  em  Sfteiftcr  cwf  fcer 

bow,  Tell.  brujl,  Sett. 

They  say,  thou  standest  up  to  Sfflcrn   fac\t,  tu  na'bmcft  c$  ouf  nut 

any  shooter  ]  jctem  (Schiifecn  ? 

(e*Ulcr*6  'Bttbclm  Sett.) 
I  told  him   he   had   made  a  mis-  ^cb  fagU*  ttwi,  fcajj  cr  ficb  gctrrt  fyate 

take  ;  but  he  thought  that  was       te  ;  er  mctnte  (ibcr,  to?  ivcire  nicl)t 

impossible,  as  he  had  looked       mogUcb,  rueil  cr  cs  trcimot  turd)' 

it  over  three  times.  gcfcbcn  batte. 

A  wise  man  said,  The  renson  (Sin  SBctftr  fagte  :  £)cr  9??cnfcr)  f)at>e 

why  a  man  has  but  one  mouth       bepiucgcn  cincn  SDUmb  unt)  ^it>ct 

and  two  ears  is,  that  lie  may       £)()rcn,  taunt  cr  swinger  fprcc^c, 

speak  less  and  hear  more.  unt)  mcfyr  t)orc. 


F.  Mr.,  Mrs.,  and  Miss  such  a  one,  are  often 
translated  by  ber  ltnt>  t)er  for  the  masculine,  bt'e  imb  t)ie 
for  the  feminine,  fca£  lint)  fcd$  for  the  neuter. 

He  said  he  would  marry  Miss  (5r  fnqtc,  cr   roorbc*   ta^   unfc   ta$ 
such  a  one.  ^rciulctn  lunrntbcn. 

To  sufter  shipwreck.  Schijf^tttdj  (cit)cn*. 

Possible,  mSgttd)  ; 

impossible,  unmocj(td). 

Whether.  £)  6. 

O&s.  G.  D6  is  only  used  in  indirect  questions,  or 
before  sentences  which  express  doubt  or  possibility. 
Ex. 


I  do  not  know  whether  he  is  at  Set)  rocip  nicrjt,  cf)  cr  311  $aufe  tft. 

home. 
I    did    not   know   whether  you  3$  rouC'te  ntcrjt,  c()  c$  S^ncn  (ict) 

would  be  glad  of  it.  fein  nnirtc. 

The  question  is  whether  he  will  (£*  tft  Me  Srngc,  ct>  cr  c$  n?irt) 

do  it.  rocllcn. 


jH".  D6  is  a  component  of  the  following  con- 
junctions :  obgleid),  obfi^on,  obwoM,  objtt)ar,  though,  al- 
though. These  conjunctions  ought  to  be  considered 
as  two  separate  words,  for  the  subject  or  even  the 
case  of  the  verb  may  be  placed  between  them.  Ex. 

I  shall  buy  that  horse,  though  it  ^cb  tvcrtc  MefcS  Spferb  fflufot/  efe  c$ 
is  not  an  English  one.  Qtcid)  fein  (5ncjl3nt>cr  iftb 

*  .9BcrS>C  is  here  in  the  future  of  the  subjunctive.     (See  the  following  Les- 
son.) 

b  When  the  subject  or  case  of  the  verb  is  not  a  personal  pronoun,  it  is  not 


297 

Though   he   is   my   cousin,   he  ££»  cr  ojtctd)  (or  fdjcn)  mctn  SScttct 
nevertheless  does  not  come  to      tft,  fo  tommt  cr  tod)  ntd)t  gu  mir. 
see  me. 
Although  he  has  promised  it  to  £>bo,tcid)  cr  c*  mir  t>erfprod)cn  tar,  fo 

me,  I  do  not  rely  upon  it.  $at)(e  id)  tod)  ntcbt  barauf. 

Although  he  is  poor,  he  does  £)b  cr  [ebon  (or  gk'tcb/  groar,  roof)() 
nevertheless  a  great  deal  of  arm  tft,  fo  tfout  cr  tod)  met  ©utc*. 
good. 

However,  nevertheless,         ted)  ; 

the  folly,  tic  Sborfxtt,  tie  £)?arrbett  ; 

the  character,  tcr   Gbaraftcr   (plur.    c),   tic  Qtt 

muttjeart; 

bashful,  timid,  Mete  ; 

fearful  (timid),  furcbtfam  ; 

natural,  uaturlid)  ; 

polite  (civil),  impolite  (uncivil),  IjofUd)  ;  unfjofltd). 

EXERCISES.       211. 

Well  (9?un),  does  your  sister  make  any  progress  1  —  She  would 
make  some,  if  she  were  as  assiduous  as  you.  —  You  flatter  me.  — 
Not  at  all  ((£on$  unt  gar  nicbt),!  assure  you  that  I  should  be  highly 


satisfied,  if  all  my  pupils  worked  like  you  —  Why  do  you  not  go 
out  to-day  1  —  I  would  go  out  if  it  was  fine  weather.  —  Shall  I  have 
the  pleasure  of  seeing  you  to-morrow  ]  —  If  you  wish  it  I  will  come. 
—  Shall  I  still  be  here  when  you  arrive  (bet  Sbrcr  ?(nfunft)  1  —  Will 
you  have  occasion  ((ScU'Cjenfyi'tt)  to  go  to  town  this  evening]  —  I  do 
not  know,  but  1  would  go  now  if  I  had  an  opportunity  (tie  (&£: 
tccjcnfxit).  —  You  would  not  have  so  much  pleasure,  and  you 
would  not  be  so  happy,  if  you  had  not  friends  and  books.  —  Man 
would  not  experience  so  much  misery  (fo  met  (£(cnt)  in  his  career 
(niif  fetncr  2aufbabn),  and  he  would  not  be  so  unhappy,  were  he  not 
so  blind.  —  You  would  not  have  that  insensibility  (tie  ©cfubllofigfcit) 
towards  the  poor,  and  you  would  not  be  so  deaf  to  (taub  a/gcn)  their 
supplication  (tic  SMtte),  if  you  had  been  yourself  in  misery  for  some 
time.  —  You  would  not  say  that  if  you  knew  me  well.  —  Why  has 
your  sister  not  done  her  exercises'?  —  She  would  have  done  them, 
if  she  had  not  been  prevented.  —  If  you  worked  more,  and  spoke 
oftener,  you  would  speak  better.  —  I  assure  you,  Sir,  that  I  should 
learn  better,  if  I  had  more  time.  —  I  do  not  complain  of  you,  but  of 
your  sister.  —  You  would  have  had  no  reason  (llrfacbc)  to  complain 
of  her,  had  she  had  time  to  do  what  you  gave  her  to  do.  —  What 
has  my  brother  told  you  1  —  He  has  told  me  that  he  would  be  the 
happiest  man  in  the  (?en  tcr)  world,  if  he  knew  the  German  lan- 
fuage,  the  most  beautiful  of  all  languages. 

-isually  placed  between  these  two  words.  Ex.  JCBgfeid?  Hefe$  $fcrb  letn 
irn^lauber  tft,  fo  trerbe  id)  e£  tod)  faufen,  although  this  horse  is  not  an  Eng- 
ish  one,  I  shall  nevertheless  buy  it.  jCbgleirf)  btcfem  9)tanne  tud)tS  tinberfa^ 

ten  tft,  fo  bettagt  er  fid)  tod),  though  nothing  has  happened  to  this  man,  he  is 

nevertheless  complaining. 

13* 


298 

212. 

I  should  like  to  know  why  I  cannot  speak  as  well  as  you. — I 
will  tell  you  :  you  would  speak  quite  as  well  as  I,  if  you  were  not 
so  bashful.  But  if  you  had  studied  your  lessons  more  carefully 
((.K'fjVr),  you  would  not  be  afraid  to  speak;  for,  in  order  to  speak 
well,  one  must  learn;  and  it  is  very  natural,  that  he  who 
does  not  know  well  what  he  has  learnt  should  be  timid. — You 
would  not  be  so  timid  as  you  are  (als  ©tc  finfc),  if  you  were  sure  to 
make  no  mistakes  — There  are  some  people  who  laugh  when  I  speak. 
— Those  are  impolite  people ;  you  have  only  to  laugh  also,  and 
they  will  no  longer  laugh  at  you.  If  you  did  as  I  (do),  you  would 
speak  well. — You  must  study  a  little  every  day,  and  you  will  soon 
be  no  longer  afraid  to  speak. — I  will  endeavour  to  follow  3Tour  ad- 
vice, for  1  have  resolved  (fid)  t»otnel)mcn*)  to  rise  every  morning  at 
six  o'clock,  to  study  till  ten  o'clock,  and  to  go  to  bed  early. — De- 
mocritus  and  Heraclitus  (in  German  as  in  English  £craclitu$,  &c.), 
were  two  philosophers  of  a  (son)  very  different  character :  the  first 
laughed  at  (uber  with  the  accus.)  the  follies  of  men,  and  the  other 
wept  at  them. — They  were  both  right,  for  the  follies  of  men  deserve 
(lU'EluetU'n)  (both)  to  be  laughed  and  wept  at. — My  brother  told  me 
that  you  had  spoken  of  me,  and  that  you  had  not  praised  me. — We 
should  have  praised  you,  if  you  had  paid  us  what  you  owe  us. — 
You  are  wrong  in  complaining  of  my  cousin,  for  he  did  not  intend 
to  hurt  your  feelings. — I  should  not  have  complained  of  him,  if  he 
had  only  hurt  my  feelings  ;  but  he  has  plunged  into  misery  a  whole 
family. — You  are  wrong  in  associating  with  that  man.  He  only 
aspires  after  riches.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


NINETY-SECOND  LESSON.— 2mei  nub 
fiection. 

To  be  thoroughly  acquainted  with  Qfttt  finer  ©acfye  gcnau  fccfcmnt  (or 

a  thing.  Dcrtraut)  few*. 

To  make  one's  self  thoroughly  @td)  nut  finer  <Sad)C  fcefannt  (or 

acquainted  with  a  thing.  Krtraut)  madjen. 

I  understand  this  business.  3d)  bin  mit  fctcfcr  0fldf)C  wrtrcwt  (or 

bcfannt). 

Acquainted,  bcfcmnt ; 

intimate,  familiar,  ttcrttaut. 

1  am  acquainted  with  that.  f  3d)  Inn  bcmut  fccfnnnt  (octtratit). 

A  species  (a  kind),        etnc  2Crr,a  cine  (Startling. 
What  kind  of  fait  is  that ,        j  gj  £  g  JJJJJJ  f  » 

*  The  plural  of  collective  nouns  is  generally  formed  by  adding  5Irtett, 
kinds,  species,  to  the  singular.  Ex.  bte  Dbftarten,  fruit  (i.  e.  various  sorts  of 
fruit) ;  fcte  ©etmbcavren,  corn  tt.  e.  various  kinds  of  corn). 


209 

The  kernel  (of  an  apple,  a  pear,  ) 
an  almond),  f 

The  stone,  tct  (Stem  ; 

kernel-fruit,  tag  jtcrnefojt  ; 

stone-fruit,  tag     ' 


It  is  a  kernel-fruit.  (£g  ift  cine  jlcrnftudjt 

To  gather  fruit.  £)0ft  brccbcn*. 

The  dessert,  tec  9?ad)tifcr). 

To  serve  up  the  dessert,  ten  SHacbttfd)  auftcagcn*. 

The  fruit 
fllt' 


the  plum,  tic  $>flaumc  ; 

the  anecdote,  tic  tfncctetc  ; 

the  soap,  tic  ©cifc  ; 

the  roast-meat,  ter  JBratcn. 

To  dry  (to  wipe).  tfbtredfncn. 

To  cease  (to  leave  off).  2Cuff)6rcn. 

I  leave  off  reading.  f  3d)  fyore  mtf  gu  fcfcn. 

She  leaves  off  speaking.  t  @w  |)ort  auf  ^u  fprcdfjcn. 


T        id  $  mntcn*  (gcmtctcn,  mtct). 

<  ^crmcttcn*. 

To  avoid  some  one.  Scmantcn  mctbcn*. 

To  avoid  something.  (Stroas  t»ermcitcn*. 

To  escape  (avoid  a  misfortune).  Qftnem  lln^lurfc  cntcjcr)cn*  or  cnttttts 

ncn*  (cntronncn/  cntrann). 
The  punishment,  tic  (Strafe. 

To  avoid  death  he  ran  away.        Urn  tern  Sote  gu  cntge^en,  nar)m  cc 

tic  gtud)t. 
The  flight,  the  escape,    tie  Jlucfyt. 


t  Sine    (or  etnet)  ©adjc  cntbcr)rcn 

To  do  without  a  thing.  •?      (governs  the  gen.  or  the  ace.). 

(n'fxlfen*  ofjne  etwag.* 

©ic  fid)  ofyne  23rot 
Can  you  do  without  bread  ? 


[     cntbeljren  ? 

I  can  do  without  it.  3>cf)  fann  eg  entt>e!jrcn. 

I  do  without  bread.  3d)  frcbctfe  mid)  c^nc  93rct. 

Do  you  do  without  bread  ?  93cf)i'lfcn  ©tc  fid)  ofjne  23rot  ? 

I  do  without  it.  3d)  fann  eg  cntbcfyren. 


^ruc^t  is  the  fruit  of  trees  and  plants.  Ex.  £u'e  WelbfrMfe,  the  fruit 
of  the  fields.  $rucf)t  is  also  employed  figuratively  :  Ex.  2)te  Sruc^t  fetner 
Slrbett,  tlie  reward  of  his  labour.  Cbft  is  only  used  in  speaking  of  apples, 
pears,  plums,  and  similar  fruit.  Hence  bag  .fteniobft,  kernel-fruit;  bag  (sreitt= 
cbft,  stone-fruit. 

c  ^ntbcbreu  is  employed  in  the  sense  of  to  be  mtkout  and  to  do  without; 
ftcp  befyelfen*  in  the  sense  only  of  to  do  without. 


300 

There  are  many  things  which  we  SBtt  muffen  tricleS  cntfccfjrctt. 
must  do  without. 

(9}?an  fa^t,  cr-  rocrfce  mermen   afcrcU 
fen. 
9)?cm  focjt,  fcaj*  cc  moreen  afcrctfcn 
n>crt>c. 

FUTURE    OF    THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

The  futures  of  the  subjunctive  differ  from  those  of 
the  indicative  only  in  the  second  and  third  persons 
singular,  which  are  :  toerbejl  and  tt>erbe,  instead  of  ttnr  ft 
and  ttrirb.  Ex. 

Thou  wilt  praise.  £>u  rocrfccft  (often. 

He  will  praise.  (5t  tucrbc  (ebon. 

Thou  wilt  have  praised.  2)u  nxrtcft  c^elcOt  !)flbcn. 

He  will  have  praised.  <£r  n?crt?c  gclcbt  l;abi'n. 

The  future  of  the  subjunctive  implies  a  coming  but 
uncertain  event.  Ex. 


fagt,  cc   rocrfce   fcatt) 
men. 
gtfan   fngt,  to(5  cr  ba(b   an!ommcn 


cfft,  cr  rccrbe  ncd)  gu  reciter 
3cit  nnjjiionmu'n  fetn. 
yKan  bcfft,  ^aO  cr  ncd)  ^u  rcd)tcr  3cit 
angcfouuucn  fcin 


They  will  warm  the  soup.  9^an  n?trb  btc  ^Suppc  warmcn. 

Dinner,  or  supper,  is  on  the  table  f  Sftcm  ()at  auf^ctragcn. 
(Literally  :  one  has  served  up). 

To  serve,  to  attend.  2Cufr»attcn. 

Can  I  help  you  to  some  of  if?      f  ^ann  tdb  Shncn  t>amit  oufroartcn  ? 
Shall  I  help  you  to  some  soup  ?  >  f  .ftann  tcb  Sfencn  nut  Suppc  auf? 
Shall  I  help  you  to  some  soup  ]  3      warren  ? 
I  will  trouble  you  for  a  little.      f  3$  Mtc   nu*   c^n   wenig   tat»on 


To  ask  for  (politely).  ©tcb 

May  I  crave  (beg)  the  favour  of  f  £Virf  id)  nur  3f;rcn  Stamen 
your  name  ]  bitten  ? 


301 


The  woman, 

the  wife,  tag  SBcib.3 

EXERCISES.     213. 

I  come  to  wish  you  a  good  morning.  —  You  are  very  kind.— 
Would  you  do  me  a  favour  1  —  Tell  me  what  you  want,  for  I  would 
do  anything  to  oblige  you.  —  I  want  five  hundred  crowns,  and  I  beg 
of  you  to  lend  them  to  me.  I  will  return  them  to  you  as  soon  as 
I  have  received  rny  money.  You  would  oblige  me  much,  if  you 
would  render  me  this  service.  —  I  would  do  it  with  all  my  heart,  if 
I  could  ;  but  having  lost  all  my  money,  it  is  impossible  for  me  to 
render  you  this  service.  —  Will  you  ask  your  brother  whether  he  is 
satisfied  with  the  money  which  I  have  sent  him  ?  —  As  to  my  bro- 
ther, though  it  be  little,  he  is  satisfied  with  it  :  but  I  am  not  so  ; 
for  having  suffered  shipwreck,  I  am  in  want  of  the  money  which 
you  owe  me.  —  Henry  IV.,  meeting  (nnttcft'en*)  one  day  in  his 
palace  (bcr  s])a(aft)  a  man  whom  he  did  not  know  (t>cr  ifym  unbcfcmttt 
war),  asked  him  to  whom  he  belonged  (jUOtfytrm).  "  I  belong  to 
myself,"  replied  this  man.  "  My  friend,"  said  the  king,  "  you 
have  a  stupid  master." 

214. 

Have  they  served  up  the  soup  "?  —  They  have  served  it  up  some 
minutes  ago.  —  Then  it  must  be  cold,  and  I  only  like  soup  hot  (runrz 
me  (Suppc).  —  They  will  warm  it  for  you.  —  You  will  oblige  me.  — 
Shall  I  help  you  to  some  of  this  roast-meat  1  —  I  will  trouble  you 
for  a  little.  —  Will  you  eat  some  of  this  mutton  ?  —  I  thank  you,  I 
like  fowl  better.  —  May  I  offer  you  some  wine  1  —  I  will  trouble  you 
for  a  little.  —  Have  they  already  served  up  the  dessert  1  —  They  have 
served  it  up.  —  Do  you  like  fruit]  —  I  like  fruit,  but  I  have  no  more 
appetite.  —  Will  you  eat  a  little  cheese  ]  —  I  will  eat  a  little.  —  Shall 
I  help  you  to  English  or  Dutch  (hcttanttfd))  cheese  1  —  1  will  eat  a 
little  Dutch  cheese.  —  What  kind  of  fruit  is  that]  —  It  is  stone-fruit. 
—  What  is  it  called  ]—  It  is  called  thus.  —  Will  you  wash  your 
hands?  —  I  should  like  to  wash  them,  but  I  have  no  towel  to  wipe 
them  with.  —  I  will  let  you  have  (gebcn  lafjcn)  a  towel,  some  soap, 

d  ;£ie  ^tau  is  used  in  titles,  in  which  case  it  is  not  expressed  in  English. 
Ex.  S)ie  ^rau  ©rciftnn,  the  countess.  It  stands  for,  1.  the  mistress  of  the 
house.  Ex.  'DaS  tft  bte  ftrau  som  -Onufe,  that  is  the  mistress  of  the  house  ; 

2.  the  consort.     Ex.  (Seine  ^rau  ift  fefyr   fcfrijn,   his  lady  is  very  handsome  ; 

3.  the  sex,  but  then  it  is   generally  combined  vyith  the  word  ^erfon  or  $im* 
iner.    Ex.  fttititett  (Ste  btefe  Vvrauenspevfon  (btefeS  ^rauenjimmer)  ?  do  you 
know  that  lady  ?     The  word  2Betb  means  :  1.  in   general   a  woman  of  the 
lower  classes.     It  is  sometimes  combined  with  the  word  ^erfoit,  and  in  speak- 
ing contemptuously  with  the  word  ^Bitb.    Ex.  ^te  SBetber  »om  gemeinen 
33olfe,  the  women  of  the  lower  classes  ;  bte  2Betbg£erfcm,  ba3  ^Betbebtlb,  the 
female  ;  2.  a  consort  among  the  lower  classes.     Ex.  @r  fyat  etn  3Betb  QtnQm* 
men,  he   has  taken  a  wife  (has  married)  ;  3.  the  sex  in  general.     Ex.  (£m 
ebleS  SIktb,  a  woman  of  noble  sentiments  ;  bte  ^atuv  beS  SBeibeS,  woman's 
nature. 


302 

and  some  water. — I  shall  be  much  (fv'fjr)  obliged  to  you. — May  I 
ask  you  for  a  little  water  ? — Here  is  some  (£>a  bat»cn  (Sic). — Can 
you  do  without  soap] — As  for  soap,  I  can  do  without  it ;  but  I 
must  have  a  towel  to  dry  my  hands  with. — Do  you  often  do  with- 
out soap  ? — There  are  many  things  which  we  must  do  without. — 
Why  has  that  man  run  away  ? — Because  he  had  no  other  means  of 
escaping  the  punishment  which  he  had  deserved. — Why  did  your 
brothers  not  get  a  better  horse  ? — If  they  had  got  rid  of  their  old 
horse,  they  would  have  got  another  better  one. — Has  your  father 
arrived  already? — Not  yet,  but  we  hope  that  he  will  arrive  this 
very  day  (nod)  fjeutc). — Has  your  friend  set  out  in  time  1 — I  do  not 
know,  but  I  hope  that  he  will  have  set  out  in  time. 

215. 

Will  you  relate  something  to  me  ? — What  do  you  wish  me  to  re- 
late to  you  ? — A  little  anecdote,  if  you  like. — A  little  boy  asked 
(ferfccrn)  one  day  at  table  (bci  Sifdn*)  for  some  meat ;  his  father  said 
that  it  was  not  polite  to  ask  for  any,  and  that  he  should  wait  until 
some  was  given  to  him.  The  poor  boy  seeing  every  one  eat,  and 
that  nothing  was  given  to  him,  he  said  to  his  father  :  "  My  dear 
father,  give  me  a  little  salt,  if  you  please."  "What  will  you  do 
with  it  ?  "  asked  the  father.  "  I  wish  to  eat  it  with  the  meat  (3d) 
mil  06  $u  from  JWfcbc  tfffcn)  which  you  will  give  me,"  replied  (pcrfcs 
£cn)  the  child.  Every  body  admired  (bttOtintetti)  the  little  boy's  wit ; 
and  his  father,  perceiving  that  he  had  nothing,  gave  him  meat  with- 
out his  asking  for  it. — Who  was  that  little  boy,  that  asked  for  meat 
at  table  ? — He  was  the  son  of  one  of  my  friends. — Why  did  he  ask 
for  some  meat? — He  asked  for  some  because  he  had  a  good  appe- 
tite.— Why  did  his  father  not  give  him  some  immediately  ? — Be- 
cause he  had  forgotten  it. — Was  the  little  boy  wrong  in  asking  for 
some  ? — He  was  wrong,  for  he  ought  to  have  waited. — Why  did 
he  ask  his  father  for  some  salt? — He  asked  for  some  salt,  that  (bas 
nut)  his  father  might  perceive  that  he  had  no  meat,  and  that  he 
might  give  him  some.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


NINETY-THIRD  LESSON.  -JDrd  tmfc 
Action. 

To  execute  a  commission.  (Stnen  TCuftrog  auSndjtcn,  r>ott$tcl)cn*, 

lu'forcjcn. 

I  have  executed  your  commission.  3d)  M«c  Sbrcn  2Cuftra$  cuit  cilices 

ridjtct  (r»ell$oacn,  bcfer$t). 

1  2 

I  have  received  with  the  greatest  3d)   Ijcifcc   30*  untcrm    fcdjflcn   cm 
pleasure  the  letter  which  you  3  4 

addressed  to  me,  dated  the  6th      mtd)    gcrtd)tctc$    ©fcftrctfccn    nut 
instant.  tern    groftcn    Skrgnucjcn 

ten. 


303 

When  the  adjective  precedes  the  noun  (Les- 
son XVIII.)  all  words  relating  to  it  are  placed  before 
the  adjective,  or  the  participle  used  adjectively,  in  the 
following  order:  1st,  The  article  or  pronoun;  2d,  all 
words  relating  to  the  adjective  or  the  participle  adjec- 
tive ;  3d,  the  adjective  or  participle  adjective  ;  and 
finally,  4th,  the  noun.  Ex. 

12  3 

A  man  polite  to  wards  everybody,  ©in    Qecjen    Scfcctmatm    F)6fUtf)et 

4 


12  3 

A  father  who  loves  his  children.  C£tn  fcine  .ftinfcct  ftc(H*nt>ct 
You  have  to  study  the  twentieth  ©ic    tyabcn    trie    $nxin,ji<}ftc    Section 
Lesson,   and    to   translate  the  123 

exercises  relating  to  it.  $u  ftutitcn,  unfc    trie  to$u  §t\fo 

4 
ttcjcn 


Have  you  executed  my  commis-  $afccn  ©tc  mcinen  TCuftraa 

sion  V  rid)tct  ? 

1  have  executed  it.  3d)  fafce  tf)n  au$gertd)tct. 

To  do  one's  duty.  ©cine  <Scbu(t>tgfett  tbun*. 

To  fulfil  one's  duty.  ©cine  9?flid)t  crfiillcn. 

To  do  one's  task.  ©cine  irbeit  macbcn. 

That  man  always  does  his  duty.  JDicfer  9)?ann  tljut  tnmicr  fein 

tigfctt. 
That  man  always  fulfils  his  duty.  3)iefer    9}?ann  erfiittt    immer  feme 


Have  you  done  your  task  1  ^>aben  @tc  S^e  2(rbett  cjcmad^t  ? 


He  depends  upon  it.  @r  Derta^t  fid)  fcarauf. 

I  rely  upon  you.  3d)  ucrtoffe  mid)  cwf  <3 

You  may  rely  upon  him.  <Sie  fonncn  fid)  cwf  tfjn  oertajfen. 

To  suffice,  be  sufficient.  ©cniigcn,  ^inretdben/  Qcnug  fein*. 

To  be  contented  with  something.  (Sid)  mit  etwo^  bcc\ntiqcn. 


It  is  sufficient  for  me. 

*  This  kind  of  construction,  wherein  the  noun  stands  separated  more  or 
less  from  its  article,  is  more  frequently  made  use  of  in  elevated  style  than  in 
conversation. 

b  ^Sfltc^t  is  that  which  our  own  conscience  obliges  us  to  :  ^cfcutbtglett,  the 
orders  given  us  by  our  superiors,  and  is  derived  from  bte  <Stf)tuby  the  obliga- 
tion, debt. 


304 

Will  that  money  be  sufficient  for  2Btrt>  fckfcS  (Sk'ft  ttcfcm  Ratine  Qts 

that  man  ?  nfigcn  ? 

It  will  be  sufficient  for  him.         ($$  ixnrt)  tfym  genugcn. 
Little  wealth  suffices  for  the  wise.  Seeing  gcm'igt  t>cui  SBctfen. 
Was  this   man  contented  with  £>at  ftcb  He  for  9ftann  nut  ticfcr^um* 

that  sum  ?  me  Ivgniigt  ? 

{2Bat  ttcfc  ©ummc  fur  ticfen  9}?ann 
btnvctdxnt)  ? 
2Bar  tu'fc  ©ummc  ttcfcm  tOfomnc  Qt; 
mig  ? 

It  has  been  sufficient  for  him.        (5r  ()at  ftcb  fcanut  bcgnti^t. 
He  would  be  contented   if  you  C£T  roiirtc  fid)  bi'gnfigon,  wcnn 
would  only  add  a  few  crowns.       nur  nod)  cintgc 

tvclltcn. 


To  add. 

To  build.  ffiaucn. 

To  embark,  to  go  on  board.     Stcb  cinfd)tffcn. 

The  sail,  tas  ©cgct. 

To  set  sail.  llntcr  8'egc(  gc()cn*. 

To  set  sail  for.  <Scgcln  nacb. 

To  sail  for  America.  5iacb  ?(mcrtfa  fcgctn. 

With  full  sails.  93ttt  Action  <Sa>'in. 

To  sail  with  full  sails.  9)Jtt  pctlcn  ©egcln  faljrcn*. 

He  embarked  on  the  sixteenth  of  (£r  fyflt  fid)  am  fcd)^'l)ntcn  (c^cr  ten 
last  month.  fecb}cl)ntcn)  teuton  SOJemits  ctngc^ 

fd)tffr. 

He  sailed  on  the  third  instant,      ©r  tft  ten  brtttcn  (ctcr  am  trittcn) 

t)iv')V^  uutcr  @cgc(  gogangcn. 

That  is  to  say  (i.  e.}.  &a$  Ijci9t  (namtict)). 

Et  caetera  (etc.),  and  so  on,  and  lint)  fo  ivcttcc  (abbreviated  u.  f.  tx?.). 
so  forth. 

Otherwise,  differently.  ?fnK*r$. 

In  another  manner.  ?Cuf  ctnc  antcrc  ?frt. 

If  I  knew  that,  I  would  behave  £8cnn  id)  t>a6  nn'ulc,  njitrtc  id)  nuc^ 

differently.  anfccrS  bcncbmcn. 

If  I  had   known   that,  I  would  SBcnn  tcb  ba*  gciuuiJt  battc,  fc  tu'trtc 
have  behaved  differently.  id)  mtcb  antvrs  bcncnimcn  feaLH'iu 

To  behave.  (gtd)  Ocncfjmcn*. 


Else  (otherwise). 

If  not.  85?  o  ntcf)t. 

Mend,  else  (if  not)  you  will  be  SBcficrn  @te    ftcb,  fcnjl    (tvo  ntd)t) 

punished.  n?trt)  man  (Sic  ftrafcn. 

I  cannot  do  it  otherwise.  3d)  fann  c^  md)t  antcr^  mac^cn. 


305 


OP    THE    IMPERATIVE. 


The  second  person  singular  of  the  imperative,  being 
formed  from  the  second  person  singular  of  the  indica- 
tive, is  only  irregular  when  the  latter  is  so.  Ex.  ©e* 
ben*,  to  give  ;  second  person  of  the  indicative,  bit  Qibft, 
thou  givest;  imperative,  gib,  give  thou.  £e(fett*,  to 
help  ;  second  person  of  the  indicative,  bit  I)Mfji/  thou 
helpest  ;  imperative,  fyilf,  help  thou. 

From  this  rule  must  be  excepted:  1st.  The  follow- 
ing verbs  :  fyaben*,  to  have  ;  second  person,  bit  Ijaft, 
thou  hast  ;  imperative,  fyabe,  have  thou  ;  feilt*,  to  be  ; 
second  person,  bit  btfi,  thou  art  ;  imperative,  fei,  be 
thou  ;  tt>erben*,  to  become  ;  bit  ttnrfr,  thou  becomest  ; 
imperative,  tt>erbe,  become  thou  ;  WHflht*/  to  know  ; 
second  person,  bit  tt>ei£t,  thou  knowest  ;  imperative,  ttriffe, 
know  thou  ;  Gotten*,  to  will  ;  bit  ttriHjl,  thou  wilt  ;  im- 
perative, tt)ofte,  2d.  Verbs  which,  in  the  second  person 
of  the  indicative  present,  change  the  letter  a  into  CU 
In  the  imperative  they  resume  the  radical  vowel.  Ex. 
£  aitfert,  to  run  ;  bit  Idttffi:,  thou  runnest  ;  imperative,  kill* 
fe,  run  thou. 

All  the  other  persons  of  the  imperative  are  derived 
from  the  present  of  the  subjunctive,  which  is  always 
regular,  as  well  as  the  plural  of  the  present  of  the  in- 
dicative. 


Have  patience  !  £a(vn  <Stc 

Be  attentive  !  (Sctcn  (Sic  cwfmerffam  ! 

Go  thither  !  ©etxn  @ie  I)tn  ! 

Give  it  to  me  !  (Skbcn  ©U  c$  nut  ! 

Give  it  to  him  !  dk'ben  <Ste  e*  tl)m  ! 

Patience,  impatience,  Me  ©ct>ult>  ;  btc 


Lend  it  to  me  !  Cctfjcn  (Sic  c^  nrit  ! 

To  borrow.  SBcrgeu  ((ctf)en*). 

I   will  borrow  some  money  of  Scb  will  nut  rcn  3^ncn  ©c(b 

you.  (Ocrgcn). 

I  will  borrow  this  money  of  you.  3d)  will  McfcS  ®clt)  t?cn 

9CIU 

Borrow  it  of  (or  from)  him.  Bergen  ©ie  c^  t>on  tr)m. 

I  do  borrow  it  from  him.  £sd) 


Obs.  A.     These  examples  of  the  imperative  are  for 
the  third  person  plural,  which  is  most  commonly  used 


306 

in  polite  conversation  ;  but  we  sometimes  also  employ 
the  second  person  plural,  particularly  in  exhortations, 


Be  (ye)  good.  (£ctb  $ut.c 

Know  (ye)  it.  SKtffct  e£.d 

Obey  your  masters,  and   never  (5>d)0td)ete  (Surcn  Ccfyrctn,  unb  \m? 

give  them  any  trouble.  cbct  tfynen  me  i&crbrup. 

Pay  what  you  owe,  comfort  the  25c$af)(et,  roa$  3br  fcbuttig  fetb  ; 
afflicted,  and  do  good  to  those  trojlct  bte  Un§luofltd)en,  unb  tfnit 
that  have  offended  you.  fccnjemgen  ©utc*,  bte  (£ud)  beleU 

btgt  tjcTbcn. 

Love  God,  thy  neighbour  as  thy-  £ickt  ®ott  unb  (Surcn  9?ad)jtcn  rote 
self  (in  German  yourself).  (Sud)  fclbft. 

To  obey.  (5kbotcf)en. 

To  comfort.  Srojlen. 

To  offend.  SMetbujcn. 

The  neighbour,  fccr  97acl)ftc ; 

sadness,  fcic 

the  creditor,  tcr 

the  watch,  Me  Ufa  ; 

the  snuff-box,  bie  Dofe. 

Obs.  B.  We  often  employ  compound  imperatives, 
in  order  to  give  to  understand  that  we  either  com- 
mand or  invite.  They  are  formed  for  the  third  person 
sing,  and  plur.  with  mogett*,  may ;  fofleit*,  shall ;  and 
for  the  first  person  plural  with  laffen*,  to  let,  which 
likewise  forms  the  compound  imperative  in  English; 
and  with  tt>oltett*>  will.  Ex.  @r  mag  Io6en,  let  him  (he 
may)  praise  ;  er  foil  lofceit,  let  him  (he  shall)  praise  ;  jte 
ntogcn  tcben,  let  them  (they  may)  praise  ;  fte  fotten  lobett, 
let  them  (they  shall)  praise ;  laflct  UUg  loben,  let  us 
praise  ;  tt>tr  U)oUcn  Io6en,  let  us  (we  will)  praise,  &c. 

Let  us  always  love  and  practise  Caffct  un$  tmmcr  btc  Sucjcnb  tieben 
virtue,  and  we  shall  be  happy  unb  cuisutu'n,  jb  wcrbcn  it>ir  in 
both  in  this  life,  and  in  the  btefcm  unb  jcncm  CeOcn  gliicfluf) 
next.  fcin. 

Let  us  see  which  of  us  can  shoot  2Btr  rceftcn  fehcn,  tt)cc  sen  un$  am 
best.  fccftcn  fd)ie(jcn  fann. 

c  From  3t)t  fetb,  second  person  plural  of  the  indicative. 
«i  From  %lp  ttJttfet,  &c.  &c. 
«  From  3br  getjorc^ct,  &c.  &c. 


307 

EXERCISES.      216. 

Have  you  executed  my  commission  ? — I  have  executed  it. — Has 
your  brother  executed  the  commission  which  I  gave  him? — He  has 
executed  it. — Would  you  execute  a  commission  for  me  ] — I  am  un- 
der so  many  obligations  to  you,  that  I  will  always  execute  your 
commissions  when  it  shall  please  you  to  give  me  any. — Ask  the 
horse-dealer  (fcet  $pfctt>cr)a'nt»lcr)  whether  he  can  let  me  have  the 
horse  at  (fur)  the  price  which  I  have  offered  him. — I  am  sure  that 
he  would  be  satisfied,  if  you  would  add  a  few  florins  more. — I  will 
not  add  anything.  If  he  can  let  me  have  it  at  (fur)  that  price,  let 
him  do  so;  if  not,  let  him  keep  it  (fo  maq  cr  e$  bcbaltcn). — Good 
morning  (in  the  accus.),  my  children  !  Have  you  done  your  task? 
— You  well  know  that  we  always  do  it;  for  we  must  (miiyten)  be 
ill  not  to  do  it. — What  do  you  give  us  to  do  to-day  1 — I  give  you 
the  ninety-third  lesson  to  study,  and  the  exercises  belonging  to  it  to 
do, — that  is  to  say,  the  216th  and  217th.  Endeavour  to  commit 
(niad)cn)  no  errors  (tor  gefylcr). — Is  this  bread  sufficient  for  you  1 — 
It  would  be  sufficient  for  me,  if  I  was  not  very  hungry. — When  did 
your  brother  embark  for  America] — He  sailed  on  the  thirtieth  of 
last  month  (U'gtcn  Senate). — Do  you  promise  me  to  speak  to  your 
brother] — I  do  promise  you,  you  may  depend  upon  it. — I  rely  upon 
you. — Will  you  work  harder  for  next  lesson  than  you  have  done  for 
this  ] — I  will  work  harder. — May  I  rely  upon  it  1 — You  may  (tons 
ncn  cs). 

217. 

Have  patience,  my  dear  friend,  and  be  not  sad  ;  for  sadness  alters 
(cinfccrn)  nothing,  and  impatience  makes  bad  worse  (arqcr). — Be  not 
afraid  of  your  creditors ;  be  sure  that  they  will  do  you  no  harm. — 
You  must  have  patience,  though  you  have  no  mind  for  it  (t>a$u)  ; 
for  I  also  must  wait  till  I  (man)  am  paid  what  is  due  to  rne. — As 
soon  as  I  have  money,  I  will  pay  all  that  you  have  advanced  (au$z 
Icgcn)  for  me.  Do  not  believe  that  I  have  forgotten  it,  for  I  think 
of  (t»cnfcn  an*  with  accus.)  it  every  day.  I  am  your  debtor  (fcct 
<£d)uthu'r),  and  I  shall  never  deny  (tcuqncn)  it. — Do  not  believe  that 
I  have  had  your  gold  watch,  or  that  Miss  Wilhelmine  has  had  your 
silver  snuff-box,  for  I  saw  both  in  the  hai  ds  of  your  sister  when 
we  were  playing  at  forfeits  (spfant>et  fptclen). — What  a  beautiful 
inkstand  you  have  there !  pray,  lend  it  to  me. — What  do  you  wish  to 
do  with  it  ] — I  wish  to  show  it  to  my  sister. — Take  it,  but  take 
care  of  it,  and  do  not  break  it. — Do  not  fear. — What  do  you  want 
of  (pen)  my  brother  ? — I  want  to  borrow  some  money  of  him. — 
Borrow  some  of  somebody  else. — If  he  will  not  lend  me  any,  I  will 
borrow  some  of  somebody  else. — You  will  do  well. — Do  not  wish 
(for)  what  you  cannot  have,  but  be  contented  with  what  Providence 
(t>«  ^crfcluuun)  has  given  you,  and  consider  (bcbcnfcn*)  that  there 
are  many  men  who  have  not  \vhat  you  have. — Life  ( IDaS  Ceben) 
being  short,  let  us  endeavour  to  make  it  (ofl  un*)  as  agreeable  (ancjcs 
ticfytii)  as  possible.  But  let  us  also  consider  that  the  abuse  (Oct 


308 

of  pleasure  (in  the  plur.  in  German,  SBerqnfiqungen) 
makes  it  bitter  (bitter). — Have  you  done  your  exercis  } — 1  could 
not  do  them,  because  my  brother  was  not  at  home. —  i  on  must  not 
get  your  exercises  done  by  (»?on)  your  brother,  but  you  must  do  them 
yourself.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXI V.) 


NINETY-FOURTH  LESSON.— bier  mib 

Cation. 

To  be  a  judge  of  something.  f  ©id)  cwf  ctu?a$  wrflebcn*. 

Are  you  a  judge  of  cloth  1  j  ^H'rfU'bcn  Sic  fid)  auf  3  tid)  ? 

I  am  a  judge  of  it.  f  3d)  wiftcbe  mid)  fcarauf. 

1  am  not  a  judge  of  it.  j  3d)  »ctiU'f)c"nrid)  md)t  fonrauf. 

I  am  a  good  judge  of  it.  f  3d)  rvr.)1ebe  mid)  fcfjt  gut  tmrauf. 

I  am  not  a  good  judge  of  it.  j  3d)  r»erfUl)c  mid)  nid)t  fd;t  gut 

fcarauf. 

To  draw.  3  c  i  d)  n  c  ru 

To  chalk.  S7ad)^ctd)ncn  (fatftrcn). 

The  drawing,  tic  3ctd)iumg  ; 

the  drawer,  tor  3ctd)ncr. 

To  draw  from  nature,  from  life.    £)Jad)   tec   9?atur,  nac^  tcm 

getcbncn. 
To  draw  a  landscape  from  nature.  Sine  2antfd)aft  nac^  t)cr  97atur 

ncn. 

To  manage  or  to  go  about  a  thing.  (5£  cnfangcn*. 
How  do  you  manage  to  make  a  SBtc  fangcn  <Stc  c^  nn,  cf)nc 

fire  without  tongs  ?  ^cucr  cin^umacbcn  ? 

I  go  about  it  so.  3d)  fancjc  c*  fo  (or  auf  ttcfc 

an. 

You  go  about  it  in  a  wrong  way.  ^tc  fangcn  e$  ntd)t  gut  an. 
I  go  about  it  in  a  right  way.         3d)  fangc  c^  cjut  an. 
How  does  your  brother  manage  ££te  fangt  3'bt:  ffirubcr  c^  an/  um 

to  do  that]  ricfi1^  gu  t!)un  ? 

Skilfully,  dexterously,  cleverly.    @cfd)tcft  (auf  cine  gefd)tc!te  ct>cc  fci- 

nc  2Crt). 

Awkwardly,  unhandily.  l!ngcfd)ic!t. 

He   should    have   managed  the  (£r  battc  eg  bcffcr  anfangcn  foltftt» 

thing  better  than  he  has  done. 
You   should  have  managed  the  ©tc     batten    c^    anfccrtf    anfangcn 

thing  differently.  nutfT^n. 

They  ought  to  have  managed  it  (Sic  batten  c$  mad)cn  fottcn/  n?tc  id). 

as  I  have  done. 

We  ought  to  have  managed  it  23Mr  fatten  c$  antcrS  mac^cn  fcllcn/ 
differently  from  what  they  did.       al$  ftc. 


309 


To  forbid. 

I  forbid  you  to  do  that. 

To  lower. 

To  cast  down  one's  eyes. 
The  curtain  rises,  falls. 
The  stocks  have  fallen. 

The  day  falls. 

It  grows  towards  night,  or  night 

comes  on. 
It  grows  dark. 
It  grows  late. 

To  stoop. 

To  feel. 
To 


He  smells  of  garlic. 

To  feel  some  one's  pulse. 

To  consent  to  a  thing. 
T 


To  hide,  to  conceal. 


85  c  1  6-t  c  t  e  n  *.     Part,  past,  wr* 
fceU'n.     Imperf.  ucrOet. 

3d)  occOtctc  3bncn,  fcicfcS  $u  tF)iin. 

JDttcfccrfcijfi'n*,  Ijcriinterfafjcn*. 

jDtc  2(ugcn  nicl>cr|'d)lcu]cn*. 

£)cr  ^orbnnq  cjebt  mif,  fcillt. 

t  &**  2£ed)fclcour$  tft  Befallen  (ftefjt 

nu'trtijcr). 
t  £>«  Scij}  net$t  fid). 

(£§  twrfc  9£ad)t* 
) 

(5$  rutrb  fpd't* 
<£td)  bucfcn. 

$?uF)(cn. 

5H  i  c  d>  c  n  *  (^crodftcn*,  rod)). 

6r  riccbt  nad)  .Kncb(aiid). 
Sfcmanbcm  t)cn  $u(^  fubton. 


3d)  roilligc  fcaccin. 

3d)  art*  mcinc  (StnmiU^ung  bqu. 

(WrtCrflen/ 


genune 
He  is  a  true  man. 


Indeed.  3n  5i^abrr)cit. 

In  fact.  Sn  bcr  Sfeot  (rwrflid),  wa^r 

The  fact,  tic  Sbat  ; 

true,  roabr  (rcd)t)  ; 

n)af)tfjaft  ; 

(Sr  tft  ctn  nwftrrjaftft  9}2ann. 

This  is  the  right  place  for  this  £)ci?  tft  t>ct  roabrc  (rccfyti1) 
picture.  Mcfcg  ®cma(t)c. 

As  I  live  !  t  ^  w^ftr  id)  (cOc  ! 

To  think  much  of  some  one.         2(uf  Seiuanbcn  t»tc(  fatten*. 
To  esteem  some  one.  Scmonbcn  fcba^en. 

I  do  not  think  much  of  that  man.  3d)  f)a(tc  ntcbt  »tcl  nuf  fcicfcn 
I  think  much  of  him  (I  esteem  3d)  Mtc  tucl  auf  i()n  (id) 
him  much). 


To  permit,  to  allow. 

The  permission, 
I  permit  you  to  go  thither. 

(To  command,  to  order). 


tfyn 


(5  r  (  a  u  6  c  n. 

fctc  @r(autnip. 

3d)  crtaubc  3fyncn  r;in3U9cf;cn   (or 


tafjin 
S3efefyfcn*  (6cfof;(cn,  befall). 


310 

Obs.  When  the  third  person  plural  is  employed  in 
the  imperative  instead  of  the  second,  the  personal  pro- 
noun always  follows  the  verb,  but  never  when  the 
second  person  is  employed.  Ex. 

Order  it  to  be  done.  Sflcfcbfcn  Sic,  tap  man  c$  tfyuc. 

Be  virtuous.  Sett  tucjenbfjaft. 

Will  you  permit  me  to  go  to  the  Swollen  Sic  mtr  crlaubcn,  cwf  ten 
market  ]  9)torft  $u  qcfyen  ? 

To  hasten,  to  make  haste.      @'i(en,  ficb  jVutcn* 
Make  haste,  and  return  soon.       ©Men   Sic   unt   fcmmcn   Sic  fcalt 

nnctcr. 

I  had   done  reading  when  your  3d)  bcittc  mifyefiort  $u  (cfcn,  a($  3fyt 
brother  entered.  JBruter  bercintrat. 

You  had  lost  your  purse  when  I  Sic  batten  Sbrc  SP&'rfc  Dcrtcrcn/  al^ 
found  mine.  icb  tic  mcintqc  font. 

To  step  in,  to  enter.  £crcinttetcn  (cjetretcn,  trat). 

To  be  ashamed.  S  t  d)  f  cf)  a  m  c  n. 

To  be  ashamed  of  some  one  or  Sicb   3«iianfcc6   ctcr   ctncc    Sad)e 

something.  fcbamcn*. 

I  am  ashamed  of  my  impatience,  ^cb  fchcinic  mid)  mcincc  lln<jcbulk 

To  copy,  to  transcribe.           2(lfd)rctlu'n*. 

To  decfine.  iTcdinirv'n. 

The  substantive.  £a$  .auptivcrt. 


To  transcribe  MAj. 

The  adjective,  the  pronoun,  the  tn^    S^ctiucrt  ;    tag    Jiirroert  ; 

verb,  the  preposition,  3citrt)crt  ;  bo»o  £?em)ert. 

The  dictionary,  the  grammar,       taS    S3?orrcrtutcb  ;   tic 

(tic  ©ranmwtil). 


Do  good  to  the  poor,  have  com-  Sbut  ten  2Cvmen  ©ute^,  unt  babt 
passion  on  the  unfortunate,  9}cit(cttcn  mtt  ten  Unqlucflidien, 
and  God  will  take  care  of  the  fo  tvirt  tec  (iebc  ©ctt  fur  tag 
rest.  llcOrige  fcrgen. 

To  do  good  to  some  one.  ^cniantem  ®ute^  tbun*. 

To  have  .  compassion    on  some  93itt(eiten  nut  Scmautcm  !;aOen*. 
one. 

Compassion,  pity,          ta$  sDJtttciben  ; 
the  rest,  ta$  llebriqc. 

He  has  no  bowels.  f  (Sr  bat'fetn  93ttt(ettcn. 

For  pity's  sake.  t  2(u$  ^ittcitcn. 

EXERCISES.      218, 

What  must  we  do  in  order  to  be  happy  1  —  Always  love  and 
practise  virtue  (\Hcbct  unt  itbet  ^ie  —  immer  auf),  and  (fc)  you  will  be 
happy  both  in  this  and  the  next  life.  Since  we  wish  to  be  happy, 


311 

let  us  do  good  to  the  poor,  and  let  us  have  compassion  on  the  un- 
fortunate ;  let  us  obey  our  masters,  and  never  give  them  any  trouble  ; 
let  us  comfort  the  unfortunate,  love  our  neighbour  as  ourselves,  and 
not  hate  those  that  have  offended  us  ;  in  short  (!ur$),  let  us  always 
fulfil  our  duty,  and  God  will  take  care  of  the  rest.  My  son,  in  or- 
der to  be  loved,  you  must  (muf»  man)  be  laborious  and  good.  Thou 
art  accused  (bcfd)u(fctcjcn)  of  having  been  idle  and  negligent  in  thy 
affairs.  Thou  knowest,  however  (iefrcd)),  that  thy  brother  has  been 
punished  for  (rvcil)  having  been  naughty.  Being  lately  in  town,  I 
received  a  letter  from  thy  tutor,  in  which  he  strongly  complained  of 
thee.  Do  not  weep  ;  now  go  into  thy  room,  learn  thy  lesson,  and  be 
(a)  good  (boy),  otherwise  thou  wilt  get. (in  the  present  tense)  nothing 
for  dinner. — 1  shall  be  so  good,  my  dear  father,  that  you  will  certain- 
ly (a,cn>te)  be  contented  with  me. — Has  the  little  boy  kept  his  word  ? 
— Not  quite,  for  after  having  said  that,  he  went  into  his  room,  took 
his  books,  sat  down  at  the  table  (fid)  on  ten  Sifeb  fc|cn),  and  fell 
asleep  (etnfcbtofen*).  He  is  a  very  good  boy  when  he  sleeps,  said 
his  father,  seeing  him  some  time  after  (fcarauf). 

219. 

Are  you  a  judge  of  cloth  1 — I  am  a  judge  of  it. — Will  you  buy 
some  yards  (for)  me  1 — Give  me  the  money,  and  (fc)  I  shall  buy 
some  (for)  you. — You  will  oblige  me. — Is  that  man  a  judge  of 
cloth  1 — He  is  not  a  good  judge  of  it. — What  are  you  doing  there? 
— I  am  reading  the  book  (tn  tern  SBud)tf)  which  you  lent  me. — You 
are  wrong  in  always  reading  it  (unmet  tartn  $u  fcfcn). — What  do  you 
wish  me  to  do  ] — Draw  this  landscape  ;  and  when  you  have  drawn 
it,  you  shall  decline  some  substantives  with  adjectives  and  pro- 
nouns. How  do  you  manage  to  do  that  ? — I  manage  it  so. — Show 
me  how  you  manage  it. — What  must  I  do  for  my  lessons  of  to- 
morrow (Die  mergenK*  <£tunt>c)  1 — Transcribe  your  exercises  fairly, 
do  three  others,  and  study  the  next  lesson. — How  do  you  manage 
to  get  goods  without  money  ? — I  buy  on  credit. — How  does  your 
sister  manage  to  learn  German  without  a  dictionary1? — She  manages 
it  thus. — She  manages  it  very  dexterously. — But  how  does  your 
brother  manage  it  ] — He  manages  it  very  awkwardly  :  he  reads, 
and  looks  for  (cmffucbcn)  the  words  in  the  dictionary. — He  may 
learn  in  this  manner  (cuif  fotcfc  SBeifc)  twenty  years  without  know- 
ing how  to  make  a  single  sentence  (fccr  <Sa£). 

220. 

Why  does  your  sister  cast  down  her  eyes  1 — She  casts  them 
down  because  she  is  ashamed  of  not  having  done  her  task. — Let 
us  breakfast  in  the  garden  to-day  :  the  weather  is  so  fine,  that  we 
ought  to  take  advantage  of  it  (cs  &cnu£cn). — How  do  you  like  that 
coffee  ? — I  like  it  very  much  (tterttcffltd)). — Why  do  you  stoop  ] — I 
stoop  to  pick  up  the  handkerchief  which  I  have  dropped. — Why  do 
your  sisters  hide  themselves  1 — They  would  not  hide  themselves, 
if  they  did  not  fear  to  be  seen. — Whom  are  they  afraid  of  ? — They 


312 

are  afraid  of  their  governess  (tie  (£r$tel)erinn),  who  scolded  them 
yesterday  because  they  had  not  done  their  tasks. — An  emperor, 
who  was  irritated  at  (aufijcbraobt  (jccjen)  an  astrologer  (tcr  ©tcrntciu 
ter),  asked  him :  "  Wretch,  what  'death  (nxlcbcn  Setc$)  dost  thou 
believe  thou  wilt  diel" — "I  shall  die  of  a  fever,"  (Lesson 
LXXXIIL),  replied  the  astrologer.  "  Thou  liest,"  (page  210)  said 
the  emperor  ;  "  thou  wilt  die  this  instant  (in  tiefem  Hugenbltcf)  a  vio- 
lent (qeruattfam)  death."  As  he  was  going  to  be  seized  (ergrcifcn 
rcollcn*),  he  said  to  the  emperor,  "Sir  (dtacibigfter  £>crr),  order  some 
one  to  feel  my  pulse,  and  it  will  be  found  that  I  have  a  fever." 
This  sally  (S)icfet  $utc  (Sinfall)  saved  his  life. — Do  not  judge  (rtcf)s 
ton),  you  who  do  not  wish  to  be  judged  ! — Why  do  you  perceive 
the  mote  (ta$  (Strch)  in  your  brother's  eye,  you  who  do  not  perceive 
the  beam  (tcr  SSciftcn)  which  is  in  your  own  eye  1 — Would  you 
copy  your  exercises  if  I  copied  mine] — I  would  copy  them  if  you 
copied  yours. — Would  your  sister  have  transcribed  her  letter  if  I 
had  transcribed  mine  1 — She  would  have  transcribed  it. — Would 
she  have  set  out  if  I  had  set  out  ] — I  cannot  tell  you  what  she 
would  have  done  if  you  had  set  out.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


NINETY-FIFTH  LESSON.— Jiinf  xtnb 
Section. 

To  grow  (to  wax).  2Bad)fcn*    (takes  fctn*   for   its 

auxiliary.     Part,  past,  Qcwad)* 
fen.     Imperf.  roucl)*). 

To  grow  rapidly  (fast).  <SscbncU  wadbfen*. 

That  child  has  grown  very  fast  2>i*fctf  .Hint  ift  in  fuqcr  Sett  fcfjr 

in  a  short  time.  cjcroacbfcn  (or  fyerangcrcacfyfcn). 

To  grow  up  (to  grow  tall).  ^cranrvad)fcn*. 

The  flower,  tie  SBdtme ; 

the  shelter,  fccr  @d)U|  (Me  <Stc^crI)Ctt) ; 

the  cottage,  the  hut,         tic  (Strofyfyiittc. 

To  shelter  one's  self  from  some-  (gicf)  t)Cr  etwag  (dat.)  fcftilgcn. 

thing. 
To  take  shelter  from  something.  (£id)  set  ctwaS  (dat.)  in  (Std)crf)eit 

fofecn. 
Let  us  shelter  ourselves  from  the  'Bit  rwotten  un^  »cr  tcm  Kegen  (tern 

rain  (the  storm).  SSintc)    fd)ii^cn    (in    (£td)Cvf)Ctt 

fcfecn). 
Let  us  enter  this  cottage  in  order  goffcn  ©ie  unS  in  ttcfc  @trcf)[)utte 

to  be  sheltered  from  the  storm       cjefycn/  urn  per  tcm 

(tempest).  in  ©tcberfjcit  su  fctn. 

For  fear  of.  ?fu$  Jurcbt  —  JU. 

To  catch  a  cold.  ©icfy  erfattcn. 


313 


I   will   not  go   out   for   fear  of 
catching  a  cold. 


He  does  not  wish  to  go  to  town 
for  fear  of  meeting  with  one 
of  his  creditors. 

Every  where,  throughout. 

All  over  (throughout)  the  town. 

Under  the  shade. 

Let  us  sit  down  under  the  shade 
of  that  tree. 


To  pretend. 


fie 


3d)  ttj'ttl  ntdjt 

mid)  $u  ctfaftcn  (cber  tuetl  id) 
micb  yet  (h'Faltimq  futcfytc,  etct 
aiib  Jiird)t,  ten  (Scbnupfen  311  bes 
tenmicn). 

(£r  will  ntcbt  nad)  bet  (Stabt  gchen, 
an*  Jutcfct  ctncn  fetnet  ©laulugct 
anjutrcffcn. 

UeOeraO. 

T  Sit  tcr  ganjcn  Stabt. 

t  3n  ten  (bem)  (gcbattcn. 

t  Scgen  wit  un*  in  ten  <£'d)attv'tt 
tie[e6  iBaumc^  (etet  vnttet  biefen 
'jBaum  in  ten  ©djattcn). 

t  Sljnn  (ft  cb  jicttcn),  a (3  c(> 
or  a  (  $  n?  c  n  n  (followed  by 
the  imperfect  of  the  subjunc- 
tive). 

That  man  pretends  to  sleep.         jiDtefet   QDfcwn  ftcltt  fid),  al$  oft  cu 

fcbttcfc. 

This    young   lady   pretends    to  £)icfc$  ^rautcin  tfwt,  a(»o 
know  German.  ftc  tcutfd),  or  a(6  tvcnn 

bcutfcb  fcetftunbe. 
They  pretend  to  come  near  us.      ®ic  ftcllen  ftcb/  al$  eO  (or  wcnn)  fie 

fid)  un$  na^cvn  wctlten. 

Then,  thus,  so,  consequently,     li  (f  C. 

Obs.  A.  This  word  must  not  be  mistaken  for  the 
English  word  also,  which  is  translated  into  German 
by  and). 

In  a  short  time. 
Lately. 
To  make  a  present  of  something 

to  some  one. 
Mr.  Fischer  wrote  to  me  lately, 

that  his  sisters  would  be  here 

in  a  short  time,  and  engaged 

me  to  tell  you   so ;  you  will 

consequently  be   able    to    see 

them,    and   to  give   them  the 

books  which  you  have  bought. 

They  hope  that  you  will  make 

them  a  present  of  them.  Their 

brother  has  assured  me,  that 

they  esteem  you  without  know- 
ing you  personally. 
14 


cut  ©cfdjcn!  nut 
mncbcn. 

£>erc  gifdxr  fdjrieO  nitr-  ncntid),  tnp 
fcinc  Jrantcin  (Sd)nxftcrn  in 
.ftuqcm  !>tcrf)cr  fomnu'n  tv^cbcn, 
unt  Oat  micb/  ce  S^ncn  ^u  faa.cn. 
^ie  wcrtcn  (Sic  alfo  fc^cn^nt) 
t()ncn  tie  93ttd)cc  gcOcn  fonncn, 
ivc(d)e  Sic  jcfauft  ^aOcn.  Sic 
^cft'cn,  taji  (Sic  tf)ncn  cin  ©cfcbcnH 
tamit  madhcn  n?crtcn.  3^  S3ru  = 
tct  bat  micb  J?erftd)crt/  taO  ftc  '@tc 
bccbfd)^^^/  o^ne  ©ie  perfonttc^  su 
fcnncn. 


314 

Would  to  God.  SBcfftc  ©ctt.  (See  Obs.  F.  Lesson 

XC.) 

Would  to  God  it  were  so.  SQBoUtc  ®ett,  e$  roarc  fo. 

Would  to  God  he  had  done  it.      SQBoUtc  ©ctt,  cr  tyatte  c£  cjcfyan. 

To  want  amusement.  7  n     .   «r»  •/    <.  *  . 

To  get  or  be  tired.  j  eonge  ffiSnte  fofon.* 

How  could  I  get  tired  in  your  83Me  fennte  id)  fret  Sftncn  foncje  9ScU 
company  ?  (c  fyaben  ? 

Firstly  (at  first),  crftcne  ; 

secondly,  &c.  ^wcttcng  K* 

To  have  reason  to.          itrfacrie  hotcn*  —  ju. 
He  has  reason  to  be  sad.  (£r  f)<tt  Urfad)C  traurtg  511  fctn. 

He  has  much  sorrow.  (5r  Ijat  met  SScrtrup  (Summer). 

Obs.  B.     When  any  one  is  thanked  for  a  thing,  he 
must  answer  in  German  : 

You  have  no  reason  for  it.  f  (^  (jftkn)  9?id)t  Urfad)C. 


To  look  upon  or  into.  dkf)cn  nuf  or  nad). 

The  window  looks  into  the  street.  £)a^  ^cnftcr  cjc()t  auf  tic  (nac^  tcr) 


The  back  door  looks  into  the  £5tc  £tntcrtl)Ut  gefjt  nac^  tcm  (SJatfs 
garden.  ten. 

To  drown.  (Srtra'nfcn  (active  verb). 

{S'rtrtnfen*   (neuter    verb).     Part. 
past,    crtrunfcn.      Imperf.    er* 
tronf. 
@r  fan  fen*    (neuter    verb).     Part. 
past,  erfcffen.    Imperf.  crfcff. 

To  jump  outof  the^indow. 
To  throw  out  of  the  window. 

To  shoot  (meaning  to  kill  by  (£  r  f  c!)  t  e  p  e  n  *. 
shooting). 

!3icmanfccm  etne  ^uget  uor  ten  Jlcpf 
Scmanbcm'  cine  ^ugrt   turd,    tot 
®el)trn  jacjcn. 

To  shoot  one's  self  with  a  pistol.  ®icb  nut  etncr  ^)if!c(c  erfcfytepen*. 
He  has  blown  out  his  brains.        ©c  f)cit  fid)  crfdbcffen. 
He  has  blown  out  his  brains  with  ©r   M  fid)  niit   einec  ^)tftcte  er« 
a  pistol,  fcfycffen. 


315 

I  am  drowning.  3cb  crtrtnrV. 

He  jumped  out  of  the  window,     (£r  tft  cut*  fccm  ^cnftcr  cjcfprungcn. 

To  get  paid.  t  ^d>  &c$aMcn  faficn*. 

To  suffer  one's   self  to  be  pre-  j  @M)  bitten  (ajjcu*. 

vailed  upon. 

To  o-et  one's  self  invited  to  dine,  f  (£tcb    yuil    SJttttcujcfiVn    ci 

feffm*. 


Get  paid.  f  Snffru  ©tc  fk 

Let  us  set  out.  CajjVn  Sic  un*  (or  nnr  n>oflcn) 

retfcn. 
Let  us  breakfast.  gaffi'it  (Sic  unS  (or  nnr  rcettcn)  friifjs 

(tfirfen. 
Let  him  give  it  to  me.  £)a£  cr  nut  c$  gc6cx  or  cr  £cfcc  c^ 

nur. 
Let  him  be  there  attwelve  o'clock.  Dap  cr  um  ^n?o(f  llfjr  t>a  fct,  or  cr  fci 

um  ^ruclf  Ubr  t>n. 
Let  him  send  it  to  me.  £)afj  cr  nur  c$  fcnt)c,  or  cr  fenfoc  c5 

nur* 
He  may  believe  it.  JDap  cr  cjtaufcc/  or  cr  gtautc  CN 

To  be  at  one's  ease.  S3cbnc\cn,  bcbagttcl)  cbcr  tcqucm  fcin* 

(impers.  verb,  gov.  dat.), 
To  be  uncomfortable.          UnOc  belief)/  unbcqucm   ct>cr   Cjcmrt 

fan*, 
I  am  very  much  at  my  ease  upon  (5$  tft  nur  auf  btcfcm  <Stul)lc  fc^r 

this  chair.  bcbncjticb. 

You  are  uncomfortable  upon  your  (5$  tft  3bncn  nicbt  (>cf)CU}(teb  (obct 

chair.  unbcba^(tcb)  auf  3brcm  ©'ti 

We  are   uncomfortable   in  that  (5$  bcbnc^t  un^  in  tnefcm 
boarding-house.  (t)tcfcr  ^cnfien)  ntcl)t. 

To  make  one's  self  comfortable.  (5$  ftcb  ftequcm  mad)cn. 
To  put  one's  self  out  of  the  way.  ©tcb  bcmiifjen. 
Make  yourself  comfortable.  DDJacbcn  @tc  C5  ftcb  fcequcm. 

Do  not  put  yourself  out   of  the  iBcmiifycn  ©te  pel)  nicbt. 

way. 

Do  as  if  you  were  at  home.          Sbim  <gic,  a\$  n?cnn  ©tc  51: 

rvarcn. 

Go  and  tell  him  that  I  cannot  ®cbt  unb  fa$t  tbm,  baf?  icr; 

come  to-day.  nicbt  foumtcn  fann. 

He  came  and  told  us  he  could  (Sr  fom  unb  facjtc  un^  t>ap  cr  ni 

not  come.  !cmmcn  fonntc. 

To  prefer.  2Ser$tcbcn* 


I  prefer  the  useful  to  the  agree-  2>cb  $U'l)tf  bv^^  0Ju^(kbc  tcm 
able.  nc^mcn  ucr. 


316 

Obs.  C.  When  an  adjective  is  used  substantively 
in  the  masculine  or  feminine  gender,  a  noun  is  always 
understood,  e.  g.  ber  Otocfye,  the  rich,  meaning  ber  retcfye 
9D?arttt  ;  bte  (2cf)6ne,  the  beautiful  woman,  meaning  bie 
fcfyone  gran, 

Few  words  to  the  wise  (proverb).  (55e[cF»rten  iff  cult  prcttgcn  (Styrtdjs 

ivort). 

Obs.  D.  An  adjective  used  substantively  without 
a  noun  being  understood  is  always  put  in  the  neuter 
gender,  e.  g.  bag  ©ro£e,  the  great  ;  bag  (£rt)a6ene,  the 
sublime  ;  bag  Sleii^ere,  the  exterior  ;  bag  Sttnere,  the  in- 
terior. 


What  he  likes  best  is  hunting  (Sein  CtcOftcS  tg-  tuc 

and  fishing.  gtfcfyeiu 

For  when  the  Manly  and  the   C  -Derm  n?o  fca$  (Strengc  nut  tern 

Fair,  ten, 

When   Strength   and    Beauty  I  9Bo  ©tatfcS  jtd)  unt)  93?tftc$ 

form  a  pair,  ten, 

Then  rings  it  out  a  merry  song.  [  Da  cu'bt  e$  ctncn  cjutcn  .^(anq. 

(©d)i(let  in  his  2tet>*ttcn  tec 
©lecfe,  the  song  of  the  bell). 

Severe,  tender,  mild  (gentle).       ©trcng,  jatt/  nitft. 
To  be  welcome.  SOSillCcmmcn  fctn*. 

You  are  welcome  every  where.     (g>tc  fint)  ubcrall  rctdfcmmcn. 


He  will  arrive  in  a  week.  (?t  rotrb  in  acl)t  Sflcjen  (cincr 

anScmmcn. 
It  took  him  a  week  to  make  this  (Sr  f)at  Mcfe  9Mfe  in   acftt 

journey.  gcmacbt. 

He  will  have  finished  his  studies  (5r   rt>tct>   fctnc   ©tufctcn   in   cincm 

in  three  months.  SSicvtc(jat)re  j?ctlcnt>ct  b^>cn. 

He  finished  his  studies  in  a  year.  (5r  fyat  fctnc  (Stut>tcn  in  cincm  3nr)s 

re 


EXERCISES.       221. 

Have  you  already  seen  my  son  1  —  I  have  not  seen  him  yet,  how 
is  he  ?  —  He  is  very  well  ;  you  will  not  be  able  to  recognise  him, 
for  he  has  growTn  very  tall  in  a  short  time.  —  Why  does  this  man 
give  nothing  to  the  poor  ]  —  He  is  too  avaricious  (|}d$uy)  ;  he  does 
not  wish  to  open  his  purse  for  fear  of  losing  his  money.  —  What 
sort  of  weather  is  it  ]  —  It  is  very  warm  ;  it  is  long  since  we  had 
any  rain  (eg  bat  lana,e  mcl)t  Qcrecjnet)  :  I  believe  we  shall  have  a 
storm  (ctn  (Skroittet  frcfommen).  —  It  may  be  (£a$  fann  wef)l  fctn).  — 
The  wind  rises  (fid)  erfjcbcn*),  it  thunders  already;  do  you  hear  it? 
—  Yes,  I  do  hear  it,  but  the  storm  is  still  far  off  (n?dt  cntfcvnt).  — 


317 

Not  so  far  as  you  think ;  see  how  it  lightens. — Bless  me  (3)?ettt 
©ott),  what  a  shower  (ruclrf)  ctn  cntfc^ltcbor  9?ccjcn  tft  t>ci6)  ! — If  we  go 
into  some  place  we  shall  be  sheltered  from  the  storm. — Let  us  go 
into  that  cottage  then ;  we  shall  he  sheltered  there  from  the  wind  and 
the  rain. — I  have  a  great  mind  to  bathe  (bobcn)  to-day. — Where  will 
you  bathe  ? — In  the  river. — Are  you  not  afraid  of  being  drowned  1 — 
Oh  no  !  I  can  swim. — Who  taught  you  (c5)  ] — Last  summer  I  took 
a  few  lessons  at  the  swimming-school  (tie  S>d)twmmfd)U(c). — Where 
shall  we  go  to  now  1 — Which  road  shall  we  take  ? — The  shortest 
will  be  the  best. — We  have  too  much  sun  and  I  am  still  very  tired  ; 
let  us  sit  down  under  the  shade  of  this  tree. — Who  is  that  man  that 
is  sitting  under  the  tree  ? — I  do  not  know  him. — It  seems,  he  wishes 
to  be  alone  ;  for  when  we  offer  to  (n>dlcn*)  to  approach  him,  he 
pretends  to  be  asleep. — He  is  like  your  sister  :  she  understands 
German  very  well ;  but  when  I  begin  to  speak  to  her,  she  pretends 
not  to  understand  me. 

222. 

Have  you  seen  Mr.  Jaeger  1 — I  have  seen  him  ;  he  told  me  that 
his  sisters  would  be  here  in  a  short  time,  and  desired  me  to  tell  you 
so. — When  they  have  arrived,  you  may  give  them  the  gold  rincrs 
which  you  have  bought ;  they  flatter  themselves  that  you  will 
make  them  a  present  of  them,  for  they  love  you  without  knowing 
you  personally. — Has  my  sister  already  written  to  you  ] — She  has 
written  to  me,  I  am  going  to  answer  her. — Shall  I  (@otl  id))  tell  her 
that  you  are  here  1 — Tell  her  ;  but  do  not  tell  her,  that  I  am  wait- 
ing for  her  impatiently. — Why  have  you  not  brought  your  sister 
along  with  you  ]-— Which  one  ] — The  one  you  always  bring,  the 
youngest  (fcic  junjtftc)- — She  did  not  wish  to  go  out,  because  she  has 
the  tooth-ache. — I  am  very  sorry  for  it ;  for  she  is  a  very  good  girl. 
— How  old  is  she  1 — She  is  nearly  fifteen  years  old. — She  is  very 
tall  for  her  age  (bag  Tttter). — How  old  are  you  ] — I  am  twenty-two. 
— Is  it  possible  !  I  thought  you  were  not  yet  twenty. 

223. 

Will  you  drink  a  cup  of  (fcic  SaffV)  tea] — I  thank  you,  I  do  not 
like  tea. — Do  you  like  coffee  ] — I  do  like  it,  but  I  have  just  drunk 
some. — Do  you  not  get  tired  here  ] — How  could  I  get  tired  in  this 
agreeable  society  ] — As  to  me  I  always  want  amusement. — If  you 
did  as  I  do,  you  would  not  want  amusement ;  for  1  listen  to  all  those 
who  tell  me  anything. — In  this  manner  I  learn  (crfabren*)  a  thou- 
sand agreeable  things,  and  I  have  no  time  to  get  tired  ;  but  you  do 
nothing  of  that  kind,  that  is  the  reason  why  you  want  amusement. 
— I  would  do  every  thing  like  (nnc)  you,  if  I  had  no  reason  to  be 
sad. — I  have  heard  just  now  that  one  of  my  best  friends  has  shot 
himself  with  a  pistol,  and  that  one  of  my  wife's  best  friends  has 
drowned  herself. — Where  has  she  drowned  herself] — She  has 
drowned  herself  in  the  river  which  is  behind  her  house.  Yester- 
day at  four  o'clock  in  the  morning  she  rose  without  saying  a  word 


318 


to  any  one,  leaped  out  of  the  window  which  looks  into  the  garden, 
and  threw  (fttirjcn)  herself  into  the  river  where  she  was  drowned. — 
Let  ns  always  seek  the  friendship  (Me  •Jrcunt^foaft)  of  the  good  and 
avoid  (flicben*)  the  society  of  the  wicked  ;  for  bad  society  corrupts 
(tK'rberlK'n)  good  manners  (bie  ©'ttten,  fern.  plur.). — What  sort  of 
weather  is  it  to-day  ] — It  snows  continually  (nod)  tinnier),  as  it 
snowed  yesterday,  and  according  to  all  appearances  (allem  '2(nfd>cU 
ne  nacb)  will  also  snow  to-morrow. — Let  it  snow,  I  should  like  it  to 
snow  still  more,  and  to  freeze  also,  for  I  am  always  very  well  when 
it  is  very  cold. — And  I  am  always  very  well  when  it  is  neither 
cold  nor  warm. — It  is  too  windy  (gar  411  nrinbta,)  to-day,  and  we 
should  do  better  if  we  staid  at  home. — Whatever  weather  it  may  be, 
I  must  go  out,  for  I  promised  to  be  with  my  sister  at  a  quarter  past 
eleven,  and  I  must  keep  my  word.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


NINETY-SIXTH 


LESSON.—  Sect)*  nrib 
JUctum. 


Notwithstanding,  in  spite  of. 

Notwithstanding  that. 

In  spite  of  him  (her,  them). 

Notwithstanding  his  promise. 


Hnqcad)tct  (governs  the  gen.). 
2£ibcr  (governs  the  accus.). 
jDcffcn  ungead)tct. 
SBtfccr  fttnrn  (tbrcn)  2Bitten. 
(Seine*  JBcrfprcd)cn6  ungcaofytct. 


To  manage. 


Do  you  manage  to  finish  your 
work  every  Saturday  night  ] 


Even.  (Scgar. 

He  has  not  even  money  enough  (£r  bat  fcgar  md)t  (Mb  gcnug,  um 
to  buy  some  bread.  JBtcb  $u  faufen. 

ber0cl!a(t  macbert,  tap. 
fc  einrtcbtcn,  bap. 
fc  nwcben,  bap. 

tc  c^  fc,  fraO  (Sic  atlc 
©aniftag  2(benb  nut  S^rcr  2(rt>cit 
fcrtig  werbcn  ? 

SKicbtcn  (Sic  c^  fc  ctn,  bap  (Sic  jebcn 
(Samjlag  ?(6cnb  niit  3()rci:  TCrbeit 
fcrttjj  wcrbcn  ? 

{iKicbtcn  Sic  eg  fc  etn  (cbcr  niodhcn 
(Sic  c*  fc),  bap  ©te  allc  Satnftag 
2(bcnb  nut  3brcr  Krfcctt  fcrtig 
ftnb  (cbcr  tferc  2(rt>ctt  fevtia  l)as 
ben)  ? 


Try  to  do  that  to  oblige  me. 
I  manage  to  go  thither. 


S3eftrcK»n  Sic  ftcb,  btefcg 
um  mid)  gu  Derbtnbem 

Scb  rtcbtc  c6  fo  ctn,  bap  id) 
fann. 


tl)im/ 


319 

To  have  done. 

Will  you  soon  have  done  work-  feint)   Sic   bait   nut   Sfyvcr  TCrbctt 

in  or  ?  fcrtio,  ? 

I  shall  soon  have  done.  3d)  nxrtc  bait)  taunt  fcrttcj  fcin. 

To  keep  warm.  (Sid)  warm  fatten*. 

To  go  always  neat.  (Sid)  imnier  rctnltd)  batten*. 

To  be  (to  keep)  on  one's  guard,  (Sid)  Mi  ten,  fid)  serfehcn*. 

To  take  care  (be  careful).  (Sid)  in  2Cd)t  net)  men*. 

To  keep  on  one's  guard  against  <Sid)  fler  3emantcm  in  2Cd)t  ncfymcn* 

some  one.  (or  biiten). 

Take  care  that  you  do  not  fall.       Sftebmen  <Sie  fid)  in  ?fd)t  (butctt  ©ic 

fid)),  tat}  (Sie  nid)t  fallen. 
To  beware  of  somebody  or  some-  (Sid)  per  3emantcm  eter  v»or  ctroaS 

thing.  bitten  (or  in  2(d)t  nefjmcn*). 

Keep  on  your  guard  against  that  £utcn  (Sic  fid)  t>er  tiefcm  Sftannc. 

man. 
Jf  you  do  not  take  care  of  that  ££enn   Sic   fid)   £er  ticfem  ^ferbc 

horse  it  will  kick  you.  ntd)t  in  ?Cd)t  ne^mcn,  fo  n?trb  C6 

©ic  fd>(oc\en. 
Take  care.  (Sefycn  (Ste'fid)  oor. 

I  fear  he  will  come.  3>cb  f'ird)te,  ba§  er  fcmme. 

I  do  not  doubt  but  he  will  come.  3d)  $a>eifle  nicbt,  frafj  er  fcmmt. 

The  bad  weather  hinders  us  from  £>a*  fcbtccbtc  Settee  ferl)int'Crtx  tap 

taking  a  walk.  n?ir  fpajieren  gcbcn. 

I  shall  prevent  you  from  going  3d)  rucrbc  fd)Cti  t>erf)int>crn,  tap  (Sic 

out.  au^eben. 

I   shall   not  set  out  till  every  3cb  nxrtc  nicftt  aftreifen,  big  altcS 

thing  is  ready.  fertig  ift. 

The  enemy  is  stronger  than  you  £>er  S^nt)  ift  ffatfer,  alg  ftc  Cjccjfaubt 

thought.  faben. 

I  shall  certainly  come,  unless  I  Scb    nxrtc   gewip   fcmmcn/   c$   fei 

am  taken  ill.  tenn,  tap  id)  !ranf  wiirtc. 

To  be  taken  ill  (to  fall  sick).  &ran6  roerten*. 

Very  little  more,  and  I  would  do  (£$  fe()lt  wenii},  tap  tc^  eg  tl)UC. 

it. 

It  is  in  your  power  to  obtain  me  f  (5$  ftebt  nur  bet  3bncn,  tap  tc§ 

that  situation.  ttefe  (Stelle  befcmme. 

He  is  quite  different  from  what  ©r  ift  ganj  anter^  alg  cr  t)Cr  ^ract 

he  was  two  years  ago.  3abren  ivar. 

You  do  not  act  any  more  as  you  Sie  fanteln  nicht  mef)t  fc,  n?ic  (or 

have  done.                 ,  (Sie  bcinMn  antcr^  ale)  (Sic  ^ 

bantelt  baben. 

Before  you  undertake  anything  (Sbe  (Sie  etiva?  untfrncrjmcn,  fagen 

tell  me  of  it.  (Sie  es  nur. 

Did  any  body  know  how  to  tell  £at   3?niant   anf  eine  natnrlid)erc 

a  story  in  a  more  natural  (more  (nnqefunftettere)   ?(rt  511 

artless)    manner  than  Lafon-  genwpt,  als  Safontaine  ? 

taine  ? 


320 

A  thought,  cin  ©ctcmft'  (masc.)  ; 

an  idea,  cine  3^cc ; 

a  sally,  .cin  (Stnfafl  (masc.). 

To  be  struck  with  a  thought.  (Sinen  (Sinfaft  babcn*  (etnfaflcn*). 

A  though,  strikes™.  {^^^. 

That  never  crossed  my  mind.        (So  eftuaS  tft  nur  nie  eingefaUcn. 

To  take  it  into  one's  head.  f  ©id)  etnfallen  foffen*. 

He  took  it  into  his  head  lately  to  f  C£r  (icjj  fid)  ncuUd)  etnfaHen,  mid) 

rob  me.  gu  befh'bU'n. 

What  is  in  your  head  1  t  SSaS  fdllt  3fynen  cin. 


In  order  that,  in  order  to.  2(uf  tap  or  framit. 

He  works  in  order  to  be  one  day  Q;r  arbcitct,  taunt  cr  fetncm 
useful  to  his  country.  (ante  cinft  (cincS 

nxrtc. 

The  native  country,  the  father-  ta$  8Sater(ant>. 
land, 

One  day,  once,  cincS  Sac^e^,  ctnj!* 


To  be  born.  ©ebtirttcj  fcin*. 

Where  were  you  born  ?  f  jffio  fint)  (Sic  i_ 

I  was  born  in  this  country.  f  3d)  bin  in  ticfcm  Cant>c 

Where  was  your  sister  born  ?  f  2Bc  ift  3J)re  <Sd)n?cf!er  gcbartig  ? 

She  was  born  in  the  United  States  f  <Ste  if!  in  ben  SBetCtmcjten  (Staa: 

of  North  America.  ten  t>en  9iCrt)anicrifa  gcbiirttg. 

WTherewere  your  brothers  born  ?  f  9Bo  fint)  3bre  JBrfi^cc  gcburttg  ? 

They  were  born  in  France.  f  <Sic  fint)  in  Jranfreid)  gebiirtig. 


Around,  round.  Return  (um!>cr). 

All  around,  round  about.  SKunfc  Return  (runt)  umfjcr). 

The  dish  went  around  the  whole  £)ie  ^cbiifTc(  cu'no,  bet  tcr  gan^cn 
company  till  it  came  back  to  Stfd)gcfeUfcr>aft  fyenmi,  big  fie  wit* 
the  landlord.  t)er  ^iim  SBirt()C  $uriicf  fam. 

We  sailed  around  England.          £Bir  fcgcltcn  urn  (Snqtant)  fycrum. 

They  went  about  the  town  to  look  Sic  gingen  in  t)cr  (Stat)t  umber,  um 
at  the  curiosities.  tftrc  innercn  3^erfn>iirt)tg!eitcu  $u 

bctrad)tcn. 

To  go  around  the  house.  Mm  tag  £>au£  fycrum  gcfjen*. 

To  go  about  the  house.  3>n  tern  |)aufe  umfycrgcfjen*. 

To  express  one's  self.  (Sid)  augbtticfcn. 

To  make  one's  self  understood.     (Sid)  tferftanfclid)  macrjen. 

To  have  the  habit.  £>ic  (9en?el)nfyett  ^abcn*. 

To  accustom.  ©cru&'bncn. 

To  accustom  one's  self  to  some-  (Sid)  an  ctwag  (accus.)  gcmofjncn. 

thino;. 
Children  must   be    accustomed  Winter  mfiffcn  bet  3citen  on  tic  2(rs 

early  to  labour.  bctt  gcwitynt  wcvtcn. 


321 


rCEinc  (accus.)  <£nd)e  gcrceFmt  fan*. 
To  be  accustomed  to  a  thing.     <  (Sinet  <Snd)e  (gen.)  qcrcobnt  few*. 

C.  2Cn  eine  <Scid)e  gcn>8r)nt  fein*. 
lam  accustomed  to  it.  3d)  bin  c*  geroefynt. 

I  cannot  express  myself  in  Ger-  3d)  fann  mid)  im  3)cutfdbcn  ntd)t  cwt 
man,  for  I  am  not  in  the  habit  ousfrriicfcn,  ivetl  icb  r,td)t  $u  }?*£* 
of  speaking  it.  d)en  qavebnt  bin  (ctcr:  rue  it  id) 

im  ©Vrcdxn  nid)t  gctibt  bin). 

You  speak  properly.  f  (Sic  refccn,  nnc  pd)  (J  Qcfyort. 

To  chatter.  §Maut>crn. 

To  piate.  <Sd)iva£en. 

A  prating  man,  ctn  ^MauK'tcr,  < 

A  prating  woman,  cine  (Sd)iva£erinn. 

To  practise.  lleben. 

I  practise  speaking.  f  3d)  ubc  mid)  im  <Sprcd)cn. 

To  associate  (to  converse)  with  sjftit  3cmcmtcm  umgcfjcn*. 

some  one. 
I  associate  (converse)  with  him.  3d)  QcrjC  mit  ifym  urn. 

EXERCISES.    224. 

Have  you  been  learning  German  long  ? — No,  Sir,  I  have  only 
been  learning  it  these  six  months. — Is  it  possible  !  you  speak 
tolerably  ($icaittd))  well  for  so  short  a  time. — You  jest  (fcbcqen)  ;  I 
do  not  know  much  (of  it)  yet. — Indeed,  you  speak  it  well  already. 
I  think  you  flatter  me  a  little. — Not  at  all ;  you  speak  it  properly. 
— In  order  to  speak  it  properly  one  must  know  more  (of  it)  than  I 
know. — You  know  enough  (of  it)  to  make  yourself  understood. — I 
still  make  many  mistakes. — That  is  (tfyut)  nothing ;  you  must  not 
be  bashful ;  besides  (liberties)  you  have  made  no  mistakes  in  all 
you  have  said  just  now. — I  am  still  timid  because  I  am  afraid  of 
being  laughed  at  (man  mocbtc  fid)  uber  mid)  lufttcj  mad)cn). — They 
would  be  very  unpolite  to  laugh  at  you.  Who  would  be  (t>enn)  so 
unpolite  as  to  laugh  at  you  1 — Do  you  not  know  the  proverb  1 — 
What  proverb  1 — He  who  (Lesson  XXIX.)  wishes  to  speak  well, 
must  begin  by  speaking  badly.  Do  you  understand  all  I  am  telling 
you  ? — I  do  understand  and  comprehend  (bfgreifen*)  it  very  well ; 
but  I  cannot  yet  express  myself  well  in  German,  because  I  am  not 
in  the  habit  of  speaking  it. — That  will  come  in  (mit  fccr)  time. — I 
wish  it  (may)  with  all  my  heart. 

Good  morning,  Miss. — Ah  (C£'i)  !  here  you  are  at  last.  I  have 
been  waiting  for  you  with  impatience. — You  will  pardon  me,  my 
dear,  I  could  not  come  sooner  (cbcr). — Sit  down,  if  you  please. — 
How  is  your  mother  1 — She  is  better  to-day  than  she  was  yesterday. 
— I  am  glad  of  it. — Were  you  at  the  ball  yesterday  ? — I  was  there. 
— Were  you  much  amused  (fid)  bcluftigcn)  ? — Only  so  so. — At  what 
o'clock  did  you  return  home  ] — At  a  quarter  past  eleven. 


322 

225. 

Do  you  sometimes  see  my  brother  ] — I  do  see  him  sometimes  ; 
when  I  met  him  the  other  day  (neultcb),  he  complained  of  you.  "  If 
he  had  behaved  better,  and  had  been  more  economical  (fpavfam)," 
said  he,  "  he  would  have  had  no  debts  (Scbulbcn,  plur.)  and  I 
would  not  have  been  angry  with  him." — I  begged  of  (bitten*)  him 
to  have  compassion  on  you,  telling  him,  that  you  had  not  even 
money  enough  to  buy  bread.  "Tell  him,  when  you  see  him,"  re- 
plied he  to  me,  "that  notwithstanding  his  bad  behaviour  towards 
me,  I  pardon  him.  Tell  him  also,"  continued  he,  "  that  one  should 
not  laugh  (fpcttcn)  at  those  to  whom  (Lessons  XIV.  and  LX.)  one 
is  under  obligations.  Have  the  goodness  to  do  this,  and  I  shall  be 
much  obliged  to  you,"  added  he  in  going  away. —  Why  do  you 
associate  with  that  man1? — I  would  not  associate  with  him,  if  he 
had  not  rendered  me  great  services. — Do  not  trust  him,  for  if  you 
are  not  on  your  guard,  he  will  cheat  you. — Take  care  of  that  horse, 
otherwise  it  will  kick  you. — Why  do  you  work  so  much  ? — 1  work 
in  order  to  be  one  day  useful  to  my  country.  (See  end  of  Lesson 
XXXIV.) 


NINETY.SEVENTH  LESSON.—  Siebcn  unb  neanpflste 
Cedion. 

He  is  too  fond  of  me  to  do  such  f  (5r  (ie(>t  mtcb  $u  fcfyr,  of$  bap  cr 

a  thing.  bicfcs  tbun  (elite. 

I  will  rather  die  than  do  that.        |  3cb  will  lu'bcr  ftcr&cn,  cite  ba§  id) 

biefcs  tf)un  [elite  or  al*  frtefc*  tfyun. 
She  loved  him  so  much,  that  she  <Stc  liebtc  tf)n  fo  ft'br,  fcap  fie  tljn  fa 

even  wished  to  marry  him.  qor  bcinUben  ivelltc. 

He  cannot  have  said  that  unless  f  (gv  farm  fctcfcs  md)t  Qcfagt  b^6cn/ 

he  is  a  fool.  c?  fci  fccnn,  t>ap  cr  cin  9^arr  ift. 

To  get  married  (to  enter   into  i  ©tcb  flcrfxtratbt'ru 

matrimony).  (  ©id)  Dcrc^Itcbcn  or  rcrmaf)(cn. 

To  marry  somebody.  Scmcinfccn  btirotben. 

To  marry  (meaning  to  give  in  2>erl)citatt)cn  (t»cvcf)ticr;cn). 

marriage). 
My   cousin,   having   given    his  SJiacbfccm  tnetn  SScttcr  fcinc  Sebrcc? 

sister    in    marriage,    married      ftcr  »erbctratf)et  bflttc  (Page  280)^ 

Lady  Pommern.  fyctratfycte  cr  ^rouU'tn  con  ycu;? 

morn. 

Is  your  cousin  married  1  3ft  3br  £crr  SScttcc  »cr^ciratr)ct  ? 

No,  he  is  still  a  bachelor.  f  Sftcin,  cr  ift  nod)  lefctg. 

To  be  a  bachelor.  f  CcDig  fcin*. 


Embarrassed,  puzzled,  at  a  loss.  95  c  r  i  c  Q  c  n» 

The  embarrassment,  the  puzzle,    tic  93erlcgcnf)dt. 

You  embarrass  (puzzle)  me.         (Sic  fe|cn  nuc^  in  2?crtcgcnf)Ctt. 


323 

You  puzzle  (perplex)  me.  ©tc  madjcn  mid)  tfertegcn. 

The  marriage,  tie^beirnth,  Me  (£*f)C. 

He  demands  my  sister  in  mar-  (*t   wrtanQt    mctnc    ©d)tt>cftct   $ur 
riage.  C£'()C. 

To  lake  measures.  93tak't\YjC(n  ncfymcn*  (or  crqrcifcn*). 

I  shall  take  other  measures.          3d)  iWrfce  cmtcrc  Qfttfrcgefa  crgrcU 

fen  (or  nefymcn). 


Goodness  !  how  rapidly  does  SOfdn  ®eK  !  vole  mftteidjt  tie  3cit 
time  pass  in  your  society.  in  3brcr  ®cfcttfd>aft. 

The  compliment,  ta$  (£omplimcnt  (plur.  ca). 

You  are  making  me  a  compli-  8te  macbcn  mic  ta  cin  (Sompttmcnt, 
ment  to  which  I  do  not  know  tvcrauf  id)  md)t$  $u  antwoctcn 
what  to  answer.  roctj}. 

The  least  blow  makes  him  cry  2)cc  flctnftc  (Scf)(ag  m«d)t  i^n  ivcu 
(weep).  ncn  (Orincjt  tljn  sum  ilBctncn). 

To  frighten.  6  r  f  cl)  r  c  dt  c  tt  (a  regular   active 

verb). 

rp   i     r  .  i  ,  J  @rfd)rccfcn*    (a    neuter    irregular 

To  be  frightened.  J      ^  (crfc^rccfcn/  crfcf)raf).8 

Thou  art  frightened,  he  is  fright-  2)u  crfcfyrictfr,  cr  ccfdjuit. 

ened. 

Be  not  frightened.  (Srfdjrccfcn  (Sic  ntd)t. 

The   least  thing   frightens  him  £>a5  ©cctn^ftc  crfcfytccft  i^n  (jic). 

(her,  them). 
At  what  are  you  frightened?          SBortiOct    crfcf)rccfcn    <Stc  ?      (See 

Obs.  C.  Lesson  LII.) 
To  be  frightened  at  something.    Ucbct  ctroaS  (accus.)  crfc^rcdcn*. 


That  depends  upon  circumstan-  2)a^  fya'ngt  t?cn  t)cn  Um(tant)cn  a^. 

ces. 

That  does  not  depend  upon  me.     £)a£  f)an§t  ntcl)t  turn  mtr  at>. 
It  depends  upon  him  to  do  that.     (5s  Ijangt  Don  iftm  a6,  fctcfeS  gu  t^un. 
O  !  yes,  it  depends  upon  him.       £)  !     [a,    bag    ban^t   ton    tl;m   ab 

(fcmmt  ouf  ifjn  an). 
That  man  lives  at  every  body's  iDicfcr  9}^ann  (cbt  auf  3>ct>crmann$ 

expense.  Unf  often. 

The  expense  (cost),  tic  llnfcjlen  (is  never  used  in  the 

singular). 
At  other  people's  expense   (or  7(uf  Kirtcret  Unfcftcn. 

charge). 

*  Neuter  nouns  derived  from  foreign  languages  and  terminating  in  cut  take 
e  in  the  plural,  except  the  two  words:  bag  ^arlament,  the  parliament;  bad 
^egtmenr,  the  regiment,  which  like  all  other  neuter  nouns,  take  er  in  all  the 
case*  plural. 


324 


The  fault,  bie  < 

ItisnotmyfaHl,  *{Jj?S&.ai** 

D°0  ::i  15*?££s*',  1 1  «*«  **  «*«  «•  «*»»  nu-,,t. 

Who  can  help  it  ?  2£er  faun  tafur  ? 


Whose  fault  is  it  I  i^Vgj»*m> 


IcannotheJpi,  j  g  ^  ^tlL, 

The  delay,  bcr  Tfuffcfeuk 

He  does  it  without  delay*  (5r  tfyut  C6  cbne  2(uffd)iib. 

I  must  go  (must  be  off).  f  3d)    will    macfyen,   tap   id)   forte 

fcnunc. 
Go  away  !  be  gone !  t  SOtocfyen  Sic,  bap  ©'ic  fortfemmn  ! 

To  ^e  astonished  (surprised).  (Srftauncn,  erftaunt  fetn*. 

I  am  surprised  at  it.  5  |*  ^Ftaiine  barubcr. 

J  3d)  bin  barubcr  erftaunt. 

An  extraordinary  thing  happened  (5^  crctgncte  fid)  cto>a£  2Cupercrbcnt? 
which  surprised  every  body.         lidxs,    wcviibcr    3ebcrmann    er- 

ftaiintc  (erftaunt  ivar). 

(<$$  tft  JCie(e5  gefd)c&en/  wcrfiber  Ste 
crjtauucn  werten. 
S^  bat  fid)  9Stete6  cteignct,  rpcrubcu 
Sic  crftaunen  ivcrfccn. 
(g^cbrerc  Sage  werten  (jtncjc^en,  efje 
tiefc?  gefd)tef)t» 
(Se  werten  mcfyrcrc  Sage 
cljc  ttcfcg 


To  jest.  ©  d)  e  r  3  c  n. 

The  jest,  ter  ©d&erg. 

You  are  jesting.  Ste  fcbcr^cn. 
He  is  no  joker  (cannot  take  a  (Sr  (apt  utd)t  nut  fief)  | 
joke). 

To  beg  some  one's  pardon.  Scmanbcn  um  33cr$eibuna,  bitten" 

I  beg  your  pardon.  3d)  bittc  Sic  um  f" 

To  pardon.  8Serjei()er" 


The  w7atch  goes  too  fast.  3)te  Ubr  gebt  t?cr  (or  $u  fri!ib). 

The  watch  goes  too  slow  (re-  £>ic  llljr  ^c(>t  nacl)  (or  ^u  fpa't). 

tards). 

My  watch  has  stopped.  Sffietnc  Ur;r  ift  fteben  gcblieben. 

To  stop.  ©tc^cu  bleibcn*. 

Where  did  we  leave  off]  t  2Bo  fint  wtr  jte^en 


325 

Where  did  we  stop  7  f  2£o  fint  rwr  cjcMtcOcn  ? 

We  left  off  at  the  fortieth  Les-  &Dtr  ftnt>  bet  tec  ricrjto/tcn  Cccttcn, 
son,  page  100.  ©cite  100  jlefjcn  gcbltcOcn. 

To  wind  up  a  watch.         (Sine  Ufjr  ouf$tcf)cn*. 
To  regulate  a  watch.          (Sine  Uhc  (Mien, 

Your  watch  is  twenty  minutes  £sfyrc  llbr  acl)t  $rcanjig  90?imUcn  511 
too  fast,  and  mine  a  quarter  friilj  (r»or),  tint)  tic  nietntvjc  cine 
of  an  liour  too  slow.  9>iertc(ftunto  $u  fpcit  (nad)). 

[t  will  soon  strike  twelve.  (£g  ruirt)  cjtctcb  jroflf  fd)lagcn. 

Has  it  already  struck  twelve  ?       £at  eg  fd)en  jrootf  gcfd)to£cn  ? 
To  strike  (heat).  Sdtfacjcn*  (Imperf.  fd)liuj). 

Thou  strikest,  he  strikes.  £)u  fcljta^  cc  fd)(a^t. 

Till  I  see  you  ao-ain.  7  ,   ... 

I  hope  to  see  you  again  soon.    5* 

To  fail,  to  want,  to  ail.       J  c  &  t  C  n. 

What  ails  you  ?  ?  «r>  *  r  f  ^ 

What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  j****  ^ft 
You  look  so  melancholy.  (£tc  fc^cn  fo  fd)n?ccmfltl)t9 


On  condition,  or  provided.          f  !J^bcr  »«Wnfl«no,  tafr 

(_  O^tt  tern  SBcttn^c,  tap. 

I  will  lend  you  money,  provided  3d)  roiU  3bncn  ©clt>  tctfjcn/ 
you  will  henceforth  be  more       tcr  Scttncjung,  tap  (Sic  in 
economical  than  you  have  hi-      funft  fparfamcr  feicn,  a(^  ©ic 
therto  been.  Fjcr  qctvcfcn  ftnt). 

Henceforth.  £sn  3u!«nft. 

Economical.  ©parfam  or  fjauSfjaftcttfd). 


To  renounce  gambling.  3)cm  <Sptc(c  cntfagcn. 

The  game  (sport,  play),       ta$  Sptct. 

To  fo,,OW  advice  (counsel). 

EXERCISES.     226. 

What  o'clock  is  it  ?  —  It  is  half  past  one.  —  You  say  it  is  half  past 
one,  and  by  (auf  with  the  dat.)  my  watch  it  is  but  half  past  twelve. 
—  It  will  soon  strike  two.  —  Pardon  me,  it  has  not  )^et  struck  one.  — 
I  assure  you,  it  is  five  and  twenty  minutes  past  one,  for  my  watch 
goes  very  well.  —  Bless  me  !  how  rapidly  time  passes  in  your  so- 
ciety. —  You  make  me  a  compliment  to  which  I  do  not  know  what  to 
answer.  —  Have  you  bought  your  watch  in  Paris  ?  —  I  have  not 
bought  it,  my  uncle  has  made  me  a  present  of  it  (taunt).  —  What 
has  that  woman  entrusted  you  with  ?  —  She  has  entrusted  me  with 

h  This  is  the  way  in  which  Germans  who  are  intimately  acquainted 
generally  express  themselves  when  separating.  It  answers  the  French  :  au 
plaisir  de  vous  rcvoir,  or  simply  au  revoir. 


326 

a  secret  of  a  (sen  ctncm)  great  count  who  is  in  a  great  embarrass- 
ment about  the  marriage  of  one  of  his  daughters. — Does  any  one 
ask  her  in  marriage  ? — The  man  who  demands  her  in  marriage  is  a 
nobleman  of  the  neighbourhood  (au*  KT  9?fld)l'Cirfcbaft). — Is  he  rich  1 
— No,  he  is  a  poor  devil  who  has  not  a  farthing  (tvr  .ybeller). — You  say 
you  have  no  friends  among  your  schoolfellows  (i^cr  ^itfd)u(cr)  ;  but 
is  it  not  your  fault?  You  have  spoken  ill  of  them  (r»on  ibm'n),  and 
they  have  not  offended  you.  They  have  done  you  good  and  never- 
theless you  have  quarelled  with  them  (page  278).  Believe  me,  he 
who  has  no  friends  deserves  (ocrfcicnen)  to  have  none. 

227. 

Dialogue  (Da£  ©cfprcidi)  between  a  tailor  and  his  journeyman 
(bet  dk'fdl,  gen.  en).  Charles,  have  you  taken  the  clothes  to  the 
Count  Narissi  1 — Yes,  Sir,  I  have  taken  them  to  him. — What  did 
he  say  1 — He  said  nothing  but  that  (miOer  t>otj)  he  had  a  great  mind 
to  give  me  a  box  on  the  ear  (He  Cbrfctcjo),  because  I  had  not 
brought  them  sooner. — What  did  you  answer  him  ? — Sir,  said  I, 
I  do  not  understand  that  joke  :  pay  me  what  you  owe  me ;  and  if 
you  do  not  do  so  instantly,  I  shall  take  other  measures.  Scarcely 
(.fiauni)  had  I  said  that,  when  he  put  his  hand  to  his  sword  (nad) 
tern  Decjcu  cjveifai*),  and  I  ran  away  (Me  'fiiuity  nefymen*). 

228. 

At  what  are  you  astonished  1 — I  am  astonished  to  find  you  still 
in  bed. — If  you  knew  how  (one)  sick  I  am  you  would  not  be  as- 
tonished at  it. — Has  it  already  struck  twelve  1 — Yes,  madam,  it  is 
already  half  past  twelve. — Is  it  possible  that  it  is  so  late! — That  is 
not  late,  it  is  still  early. — Does  your  watch  go  well  (rccht)  1 — No, 
miss,  it  goes  a  quarter  of  an  hour  too  fast. — And  mine  goes  half  an 
hour  too  slow. — Perhaps  it  has  stopped. — In  fact,  you  are  right. — Is 
it  wound  up  ! — It  is  wound  up,  and  yet  (Cvnnocb)  it  does  not  go. — 
Do  you  hear,  it  is  striking  one  o'clock. — Then  I  will  regulate  rny 
watch  and  go  home. — Pray  (3d)  btttc)  stay  a  little  longer  (ncd)  cin 
! — I  cannot,  for  we  dine  precisely  at  one  o'clock  (mtt  K'Ul 
dn*). — (Adieu),  till  I  see  you  again. 

229. 

What  is  the  matter  with  you,  my  dear  friend  1  why  do  you  look 
so  melancholy  1 — Nothing  ails  me. — Are  you  in  any  trouble  ( ,£aben 
Ste  indent)  cinen  Rummer)  ? — I  have  nothing,  and  even  less  than 
nothing,  for  I  have  not  a  farthing  and  o\ve  a  great  deal  to  my  cre- 
ditors. Am  I  not  very  unhappy  ] — When  a  man  is  well  and  has 
friends  he  is  not  unhappy. — Dare  I  ask  you  a  favour  1 — What  do 
you  wrish  ? — Have  the  goodness  to  lend  me  fifty  crowns. — I  will 
lend  you  them  with  all  rny  heart,  but  on  condition  that  you  will  re- 
nounce gambling  and  be  more  economical  than  you  have  hitherto 
been. — I  see  now,  that  you  are  iny  friend,  and  I  love  you  too  much 


327 

not  to  follow  your  advice. — John  ! — What  is  your  pleasure,  sir] — 
Bring  me  some  wine. — Presently,  sir. — Henry  ! — Madam  1 — Make 
the  fire.-— The  maid-servant  has  made  it  already. — Bring  me  some 
paper,  pens  and  ink.  Bring  me  also  some  sand  (NT  (gtrcnfont)  or 
blotting-paper  (t^as  £efct)pciPUT),  sealing-wax  (tcr  (StCQcUacf)  and  a 
liyht  (^tcbt). — Go  and  tell  my  sister  not  to  wait  for  me,  and  be  back 
again  m,  twelve  o'clock  in  order  to  carry  my  letters  to  (auf)  the  post 
office. — Very  well,  madam.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


NINETY-EIGHTH  LESSON.—  2UI)t  tmir 
Section. 

Out  of,  except.  It  u  j)  c  r  (governs  the  dative).* 

Out  of,  or  without  doors.  Tfnfjcr  fccm  .frctufe. 

He  works  out  of  doors.  G?r  arOcitct  aniJcr  tern  Joaufe. 

They   were  all  present,  except  (£tc  tvarcn  attc  t>a,  aufjcr  t>cn  6ctt>m 

the  two  brothers.  23rtit>ern. 

Except  you  and  I,  nobody  was  2Cupcr  Sfyncn  unb  nur  fcfylte  0ttcs 

absent.  manfc. 

Besides  that,  otherwise.     2(n§crN'm  (ii&etHc$). 
Excepting  this,  he  is*  an  honest  tfufetfcem  t|l  cc  cin  efytttdjct: 


It  can  be  done.  f  ©^ttt  ^tttcl,15  c^  ^u  tbun. 

There   is   no   means  of  rinding  f  (5$  ift  nid)t  nioq(id)  (cfecr  c$  gtOt 
money  now.  fctn  Sflittel),  ficb  in  ttcfcm  ^ugcns 

bltctc  ©ell)  gu  fcrfd)a(fv'n. 

Along.  C  a'  n  $  6    (governs   the   dative   as 

well  as  the  genitive).0 


A,ong  the  road. 

All  the  year  round.  f  £)a$  gcin^c  3^1)^  F)tnburc^. 


To  enable  —  to.  Sn  fcen  ^tanb  fc|cn  —  gu. 

To  be  able  —  to.  %\\\  ©tcmfcc  fan*  —  ^u. 

To  sing.  eincjcn*     (Part,     past,    gcfuncjcn. 

Imperf.  fang). 

•  Qtll^er  employed  as  a  conjunction  may  be  followed  by  any  case,  according 
to  the  verb  by  which  the  case  is  governed.  Ex.  3d)  bttbe  Wemanbcn  aiifcer 
tfyn  gefefyen,  I  have  seen  no  one  except  him  ;  e3  tvar  9ltemaub  ba,  aufier  er, 
nobody  was  there  except  he. 

b  ^vi§  2J7ittej,  the  means,  is  here  in  the  plural. 

c  The  preposition  liittflg  must  not  be  mistaken  for  the  adverb  Kingfl,  super- 
lative of  lange,  a  long  while.  Ex.  Ccinqg  ben  Ufern  be8  3ftf)einS  ttit  icf)  f^on 
langfl  geretfet,  it  is  a  long  time  since  I  travelled  along  the  borders  of  the 
Rhine. 


328 

To  the  right,  on  the  right  side  JKccfytS,  rcd)tct 

(or  hand). 
To  the  left,  on  the  left  side  (or  £inf$,  (infer  £>cmt. 

hand). 
Could   you  not  tell  me  which  is  <fienntcn  (Sic  mir  mcbt  fcigcn,  rocfcficS 

the  nearest  way  to  the    city       ter  ffir$ejrc  &i*ccj  ift,  urn  cms  £l;ec 

gate  1  $u  fommcn  ? 

Go  to  the  foot  of  this  street,  and  ©cbcn  (Sic  tic  gcm$c  StrcijSc  fjincwf 

when  you  are  there,  turn  to  the       (btnab)  ;    unt)    roe  tin    (Sic    oben 

right,  and  you  will  find  a  cross-       (unten)    fmt>,    tventcn    <Sie    fid) 

way,  which  you  must  take.  linfg  ;     ta     roerfccn    ©tc     ctnoa 

^Ircujivcg  ftnl^cn/  fiber   ten  (Sic 


And  then]  Itnb 

You  will  then  enter  a  broad  street,  jpevnacb  fcnuucn  'S'tc  in  etnc  ^teiii^ 
which  will  bring  you  to  a  great  Ucb  brctte  (Strnpe,  t)tc  (Sic  cuif 
square,  where  you  will  see  a  cinen  Qropen  §Mfl&  fui'vt,  ivo  <Sic 
blind  alley.  cine  Soc!i}affe  fcljen  iDorten. 

You  must  leave  the  blind  alley  (Sic  In  (fen  tie  Sacfynffc  Uufer  .frcmfc, 
on  your  left,  and  pass  under  unt  cjcbcn  turd)  tic  (Scl)urirobCi}en, 
the  arcade  that  is  near  it.  tic  tancOcn  [int. 

Then  you  must  ask  again.  f  Tffcbann  fragen  »Ste  iveiter. 

The  arcade,  fcer  (Sebrctbbccjcn  ; 

the  cross-  way,  ter  .Rri'u$iu«..j  ; 

the  shore  (bank),  ta5  (Deflate 

the  blind  alley,  tie 


Through.  ^D  u  r  d)  (governs  the  accusative). 

Do  not  cross  (on  horseback)  the  9\ettc  nid)t  tuvd)  ten  ££rtlt  ! 

forest. 

He  made  his  way  through  the  f  (5r  bnbnte  fid)  cincn  2£c$  turcr) 

enemy.  tie  getnte. 

By  this  means  the  patient  was  Surd)  tiefes  93tf  ttct  ivarb  tcr  ^ranfc 

cured.  gefunt. 

He  speaks  through  the  nose.  ©r  vet>et  turd)  tic  97afc. 

Without.  £)  f)  n  c,    f  o  n  b  c  r     (govern     the 

accus.). 

Do  not  go  out  without  me.  (?3cben  (Sic  oljnc  mtcb  ntcr;t  auc>  ! 

Without  the  least  doubt.  (Sonterd  alien  SivetfcU 

To  last:  (lo  wear  well).         gotten*/  t  a  n  c  r  n. 

That  cloth  will  wear  well.  £)tcfe$>  Sucb  tvtvt  c\ut  finften. 

How  long  has  that  coat  lasted  £Bic  Inn^e   f)at  3f)ncn  fctefcS 
you?  gehatten  ? 

To  my  liking.  S^acr;  metncm  ^BeftcOen  (©cfallcn) 

d  Center  instead  of  c^/tte  is  only  used  in  poetry. 


329 

To  every  body's  liking.  9?ad)  3ctctmann£  25c(ict>cn 

gc  fall  en). 

Nobody  can  do  any  thing  to  his  9?icmant>  fann  ifjm  ctrcmS  tcd)t 
liking-.  d)cn. 


The  question  is,  it  turns  upon.   { 


g 

It    does    not    turn    upon    your  (£s  fyanMt  fid)  md)t  urn 
pleasure,  but   upon  your  pro-       cmiiqen,  fentcrn  um 
gress.  fd)rittc. 

You  play,  sir,  but  playing  is  not  (gic  fptelon,  nictn  £err  ;   flln't  @tc 
the  thing,  but  studying.  fctlcn  nid)t  fpiclcn,  fentcrn  ftutU 

ten. 


What  is  going  on?  }  ™* 

:$  fcnnnt  tarauf  an  ^u  nriffcn,  tx>a£ 
n>ir  tl)un  rocrtcn  (conversational 


style :    SOStr  niujjcn  tviffcn, 
ivtc  t^un  feUcn),  um  unfcrc  Sett 
fytnauOrincjcn  ot>cr  311^= 


The  question  is  to  know  what 
we  shall  do  to  pass  the  time  . 
agreeably. 

frrino,cn. 

I  propose  (intend)  joining  a  hunt-^  3d)  nd)inc  mir  tter,  eincr  * 
ing  party.  K't^uroefyncn. 

On  purpose.  §07tt  SU'ijJ/  Dccfa^lid). 

I  beg  your  pardon,  I  have  not  3d)  Otttc   <2>tc   um  ^cr^ci^un^,  id) 
done  it  on  purpose.  fyabc  C5  nic^t  t)ovfa|(ic^  (mit  g(cip) 

getfyan. 


A  game  at  chess,  cine  ^arttc 

A  game  at  billiards,  cine  \parttc 

To  play  upon  the  violin.  2Cuf  6cr  SStctinc  fpictcn. 

To  play  the  violin.  £)tc  3Stcttnc  efccr  SSiolin  fptctcn. 

To  play  for  something.  It  in  ctu?a$  fptclcn* 

To  play  upon  the  harpsichord.  2Cuf  fccm  ^taricr  (tag  ^(at?tcr)  fpic* 

{en. 

To  play  upon  the  flute.  2(uf  tcr  glctc  (t)tc  S(otc)  6lofcn*. 

To  play  at  cards.  Garten  fptctcn. 

The  game  of  chess,  ba5  ©cJ)ad)fptc( ; 

the  card,  tic  $attc  ; 

the  playing  at  cards   (the  card-  t>a$  Jtartcnfptcl ; 

playing), 

the  pack  of  cards,  tag  (gptcl  Garten. 

Obs.  The  name  of  the  instrument  is  put  in  the  ac- 
cusative when  we  wish  to  express,  with  the  verb  fpt'e* 
lcnr  that  a  person  knows  how  to  play  ;  but  when  we 
wish  to  express  that  he  is  actually  playing,  it  requires 
the  preposition  auf  with  the  dative.  Ex.  t>te  23ioltne 
fptefcn,  to  play  the  violin  ;  auf  fcer  Siclme  fpielcn,  to  play 


330 

upon  the  violin.     The  names  of  games  are  employed 
without  an  article,  and  the  rest  is  as  in  English. 

To  blow.  S3  ( a  f  c  n  *  (acMafcn,  Mtc$). 

Thou  blowest,  he  blows.  ®u  blafi'tf,  cc  Waft. 

To  hold  one's  tono-ue.  7  ^  < 

To  stop  speaking,  to  be  silent,  j  @*»ctflcn* 

Do  you  hold  your  tongue  ?  Scbroci^cn  Sic  ? 

I  do  hold  my  tongue.  3d)  |cbn>eigc. 

After  speaking  half  an  hour,  he  9?ad)l>cm  cr  cine  fyatOe  Stunbc  cjcrc* 
held  his  tongue.  bet  tyattc,  fdjroicg  cr. 

To  suspect.  93  c  t  m  u  t  f)  c  n. 

I  suspect  what  he  has  done.         3d)  wrmutbc,  roaS  cr  gctfjan  fjat. 
He   does  not   suspect   what  is  (£r  rcrmutbct  tud)t,  tvaS 

going  to  happen  to  him.  fahrcn  luirD. 

Do  you  intend  to  make  a  long  ©ctcn!cn  Sic  fid)  fano,c  in  t>cr  Stabt 

stay  in  town  ?  auftu  batten  ? 

I  do  not  intend  to  make  a  long  3d)  flct>cn!c  mid)  nid)t  lancjc  ta  aufs 
stay  there.  jubattcn. 

To  make  a  stay.  (Sid)  ouffjoltcn*. 

The  stay,  the  sojourn,        bcr  ttufcntfyalt. 

To  think.  >D  e  n  !  c  n  *  (cjcbfldjt,  badjtc). 

To  think  of  some  one  or  of  some-  2(n  3^ntant>cn  ofcct  an  ctn?a5  ten* 

thing.  fen*. 

Of  whom  do  you  think?  Tin  rocn  frcnfcn  Sic? 

Of  what  do  you  think  1  SBoran   t>cn!cn  Sic?     (See  Rule, 

Lesson  LXIV.) 

EXERCISES.       230. 

Sir,  may  I  ask  you  where  the  Earl  of  B.  lives  1 — He  lives  near 
the  castle  (Lesson  LXVIII.)  on  the  other  side  (jcnfttt)  of  the  river. 
— Could  you  tell  me  which  road  I  must  take  to  go  thither? — You 
must  go  along  the  shore  ((a'ng$  tK'm  dkllflfcc  bin),  and  you  will  come 
to  a  little  street  on  the  right,  which  will  lead  you  straight  (curare) 
to  his  house  (cwf  t^a$  £au$  $u).  It  is  a  fine  house,  you  will  find  it 
easily  (U'tobt). — I  thank  you,  sir. — Does  the  Count  N.  live  here"? 
— Yes,  sir,  walk  in  (fid)  berdn  bcmitbcn),  if  you  please — Is  the 
count  at  home  1  I  wish  to  have  the  honour  to  speak  to  him. — Yes 
sir,  he  is  at  home  ;  whom  shall  I  have  the  honour  to  announc 
(nu'lfrcn)  T — I  am  from  B.,  and  my  name  is  F. 

Which  is  the  shortest  way  to  the  arsenal  (ba$  3cu$bau$)  ? — Go 
down  this  street,  and  when  you  come  to  the  foot,  turn  to  the  lefl 
and  take  the  cross-way ;  you  will  then  enter  into  a  rather  narrov 
(cncjc)  street,  which  will  lead  you  to  a  great  square,  where  you  wili 


331 

see  a  blind  alley. — Through  which  I  must  pass  ! — No,  for  there  is 
no  outlet  (Dcr  2(u6gam}).  You  must  leave  it  on  the  right,  and  pass 
under  the  arcade  which  is  near  it. — And  then  ! — And  then  you 
must  inquire  further. — 1  am  very  much  ohliged  to  you. — Do  not 
mention  it  (lis  ifr  ntcl)t  ilrjViolx). 

231. 

Are  you  ahle  to  translate  a  French  letter  into  German  ! — I  am 
(i*$). — Who  has  (of)  taught  you  ? — My  German  master  has  enabled 
me  to  do  it. — You  are  singing,  gentlemen,  but  it  is  not  a  time  for 
singing;  you  ought  to  be  silent,  and  to  listen  to  what  you  are  told. 
—  We  are  at  a  loss. — What  are  you  at  a  loss  at! — I  am  going  to 
tell  you  :  it  is  a  question  with  us  how  we  shall  pass  our  time  agree- 
ably.— Play  a  game  at  billiards  or  at  chess. — We  have  proposed 
joining  a  hunting  party  :  do  you  go  with  (us)  ! — I  cannot,  for  I 
have  not  done  my  task  yet :  and  if  I  neglect  it,  my  master  will 
scold  me. — Every  one  according  to  his  liking;  if  you  like  staying 
at  home  better  than  going  a  hunting,  we  cannot  hinder  you. — Does 
Mr.  K.  go  with  us! — Perhaps. — I  should  not  like  to  go  with  him, 
for  he  is  too  great  a  talker,  excepting  that  he  is  an  honest  man. 

What  is  the  matter  with  you!  you  look  angry. — I  have  reason 
to  be  angry,  for  there  is  no  means  of  getting  money  now. — Have 
you  been  at  Mr.  A's  1 — I  have  been  at  his  house  ;  but  there  is  no 
possibility  of  borrowing  any  from  him.  I  suspected  that  he  would 
not  lend  me  any,  that  is  the  reason  why  I  did  not  wish  to  ask  him  ; 
and  had  you  not  told  me  to  do  so,  I  should  not  have  subjected  my- 
self (fid)  ausfcgcn)  to  a  refusal  (Die  cib|cl)la'ijt£C  ?(ntn;crt). 

232. 

I  suspected  that  you  would  be  thirsty,  and  that  your  sister  would 
be  hungry  ;  that  is  the  reason  why  I  brought  you  hither. 

I  am  sorry,  however,  that  your  mother  is  not  here.  1  am  aston- 
ished ((is  (.K'frcniM  inicb)  that  you  do  not  drink  your  coffee. — If  I 
were  not  sleepy  1  would  drink  it.— Sometimes  (^cilfc)  you  are  slee- 
py, sometimes  cold,  sometimes  warm,  and  sometimes  something 
else  is  the  matter  with  you  (iff  Sbncn  ctruo*  ?(nl»cres).  I  believe 
that  you  think  too  much  about  (an)  the  misfortune  that  has  hap- 
pened to  your  friend  (fein.). — If  I  did  not  think  about  it,  who  would 
think  about  it  ! — Of  whom  does  your  brother  think  1 — He  thinks  of 
me ;  for  we  always  think  of  each  other  when  we  are  not  together 
(t*ctfammcn). 

I  have  seen  six  players  (t>cr  Sptc(cr)  to-day,  who  were  all  win- 
ning at  the  same  time  (}U  catcher  Sett). — That  cannot  be,  for  a 
player  can  only  win  when  another  loses. — You  would  be  right  if  I 
were  speaking  of  people  that  had  played  at  cards  or  billiards ;  but 
I  am  speaking  of  flute  and  violin  players  (Dcr  ^(6tcn=  tint)  i>ieltnfptcs 
fcr). — Do  you  sometimes  practise  (macbcn)  music  ! — Very  often,  for 
I  like  it  much. — What  instrument  do  you  play  ! — I  play  the  violin, 


332 

and  my  sister  plitys  the  harpsichord.  My  brother,  who  plays  the 
bass  (6cr  25a|5)»  accompanies  (ln\)(nfcn)  us,  and  Miss  Stolz  some- 
times applauds  us  (ocmcmKm  JBctfflH  gtifratfdben). — Does  she  not 
also  play  some  musical  instrument  (fcas  nuififiittfcbc  3"ftniment)  1 — 
She  plays  the  harp  (t>tc  ^atjv),  but  she  is  too  proud  (ftel$)  to  prac- 
tise music  with  us. — A  very  (fc(jr)  poor  town  went  to  considerable 
expense  (fccc  fcetracf)t(td)e  ?(ufh>anl>)  in  feasts  and  illuminations  (suit 
5rcut>enjv)lcn  unt)  (£r(e«d)tiim}cn)  on  the  occasion  of  its  prince  passing- 
through  (&ct  tcr  Durd)rcifc  ti)re6 — ). — The  latter  seemed  himself 
astonished  (erftcumt)  at  it. — "It  has  only  done,"  said  a  courtier 
(fccr  .pcfiiiann),  "  what  it  owed  (to  your  majesty)." — "That  is  true," 
replied  (ocrfegcn)  another,  "but  it  owes  all  that  it  has  done."  (See 
end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


NINETY-NINTH   LESSON.— 

Cedion. 


tm&  neunjigsie 


(Sntrocfcct  —  ober.      (Lesson 
LXI.) 


Either — or. 


He  either  has  done  it,  or  will  <£t  hat  c«t  cntwcbcr  fiction/  cbc 
still  do  it.  c$  nod)  t()un. 

Obs.  A.  It  has  been  noticed  in  many  parts  of  this 
work,  that  certain  conjunctions  correspond  with  others 
that  generally  follow  them.  These  conjunctions  are  : 


(gttttteber,  is  followed  by :  cber  (Lesson  LXL),  either — or. 


aHein, 
nur, 


(Less.  XCI.) 


je,  or  befto,  the  —  the. 
fonbcrn  and)  (Lesson  LXL), 

not  only  —  but  also. 
fo  —  bed),  or  gleidjwofyt,  or 


SEBeber, 

SfBenn, 
3Senn 

SBcnn  fctjcn, 


nevertheless. 
fo,  however  —  still. 
al3,    or    at^    aud)    (Lesson 

LXL),  as  well  —  as. 
nod)  (Less.  VII.  and  LXL), 

neither  —  nor. 
fo,  if  —  so. 
jo  —  bod),  though  —  yet  or 

nevertheless. 


a  3»c  unites  two  comparatives. 

b  2i>eini  is  not  only  combined  with  8letc£  and  fcf)on,  but  also  with  anberdt 


333 

(  afcer,    or  attcm  or  g[etef)tt)of)t 
3tt>ar,        ....  or  jebcd),  though  —  never- 

(      theless,  or  but. 


Prepositions   either   govern  the  £)ic    95ftF)<SltmfhvStfrr 

genitive,  or  the  dative,  or  the  ncn)  rccjicrcn  cntnxtcr  ten  ©cnis 
accusative,  or  finally  the  da-  tir»,  otct  ton  Satis,  otct  ten  ?Cc? 
live  and  accusative.  cufatto,  otct  cntlid)  ten  JDotto  nut) 

2fccufatto. 

The  sooner,  the  better.  %c  cfjcr,  jc  lic&cr. 

The  greater  our  pleasures,  the  3c  grower  unfcrc  Jrcutcn  fint,  tcfto 
more  we  feel  how  transitory  nicf)t  cmpfmtcn  rvit  ifytc  83  ct* 
they  are.  gang(icl)fcit. 

Obs.  B.     Seflo  may  be  placed  in  the  first  member  of 
the  phrase,  in  which  case  jc  begins  the  second.     Ex. 

A  work  of  art  is  the  more  beau-  ©in  .ftunffojerf  tft  bcfto  fd)oncr7  jc 

tiful  the  more  perfect  it  is.  PoUt'enwicncr  c£  tft. 

(Sulzer.) 
She  is  not  only  handsome,  but  (gtc  tft  ntd)t  nur  fd)cn,  fcnCcru  cue!) 

she  is  rich  also.  reicb. 

Not  only  his  idleness,  but  his  in-  97td)t   nur   fctnc   -Jautfjctt/    fcntcrn 

discretion  also  makes  him  con-      ciud)  fctnc  Unbcfd)cit)cn^ctt  mad)t 

temptible.  tfyn  t)cracbt(tcl). 

Though  this   young  lady  is  not  £>0g(ctct)  bicfc^  Jraulctn  ntd)t 

very  handsome,  she  is  never-      fcbcn  tft,  fo  tft  fie  t>cd)  feljr 

theless  very  amiable.  tuurttg. 

However  handsome  she  maybe,  ^o  fcbcVfic  nucf)  fctn  ning,  fo  ift  ftc 

still  she  is  not  amiable.  tod)  md)t  ttebcneiuurttg. 

You  as  well  as  your  sister.  <£erool)l    (Ste,    at5    S^t:    Jrtfulein 


She  is  as  handsome  as  she  is  (Sic  ift  fon)o()(  fd)6'n  Q 

amiable  and  rich.  tit)  unt  reid). 

They  had  neither  bread,  nor  meat,  (Sic  fatten  tvctcr  9Brot,  nocft 

nor  arms,  nor  money.  nod)  SSnffen/  nod)  ©clt. 

Jf  he  does  not  pay  you  for  the  £Bcnn  cr  3bnen  ta^  ^fcrt  ntd^t  6c? 

horse,  tell  me.  ^a{){t,  fo  fagcn  (Sti*  c^  mir. 

Though  I  should  have  money,  SBenn  td)  glcidb  ©e(t  tattc,  fo  gate 

still  I  would  give  him  none.  id)  tfym  ted)  fcinS. 

Indeed  I  do  not  know  him  yet,  3rcflt  fenne  tcb  tf)n  nod)  nid)t,  aOct 

but  he  seems  to  be  docile.  ct  fd)ctnt  mir  felgfam. 

jeboc^,  aitcb,  felbfl,  and  nur.  Ex.  3Benn  anber§,  if  otherwise  ;  ivcnn  jeboc^,  if 
however;  tccnn  aurf)  or  tvcnn  felfcft,  if  even;  wenn  nur,  if  only.  All  these 
compound  conjunctions  must  be  considered  as  two  separate  words,  between 
which  the  subject  and  even  the  case  of  the  verb  (when  a  personal  pronoun) 
may  be  placed.  The  same  observation  applies  to  the  combination  of  oft  with 
other  words.  (See  Lesson  XCI.  Obs.  H  Note  i>.) 


334 

Though  I  wrote  to  him,  never-  3cb  f)fl&c  tfym  .jroat  gefebrtcbcn,  gfctcb- 
theless  he  has  not  answered  n?ol)l  f;cit  er  niir  wd)t  gcontwortct. 
me. 

(3cb  tviinfebtc,  cr  fyattc  c$  nicfyt  §cs 
3  Anfcftte,  tag  cr  c*  md>t  gctfom 
jjatte. 


s.   C.     The   conjunction    t>  a  $   may  be  omitted  ; 
but  then  the  verb  immediately  follows  its  subject. 

I  wish  you  Would  go  with  m,  }  g  SJJ 


I   hope  that  your  sister  will 
marry  my  brother. 


Suppose  we  had  neither  bread, 
nor  wine,  nor  money. 


Would  to  God  that  all  great 
lords  loved  peace ! 


Sch   Fjcffc,  S^r  Jrfiutcin 
ivtrt)     mctncn     SBrutcr 


Jra'utctn 


then. 


ftcr    mcincn 

n?trb. 
fit,  ivtr  fjd'ttcn  wcbcr  S3rot/  nod) 

9&<in,  nccb 
©cfi'fet,  ba(t  rvtr 

SJkin,  nccb  ©ctb  batten. 
53?c(Itc  djctt,  otic  grope  ^crrcn  licttcn 

t>i*n  ^rtcbcn  ! 
SBotltc  ©ott,  bo9  otic  grope  ^crren 

ten  gricfccn  Itebten  ! 


By  virtue  of.  jt  r  a  f  t  (governs  the  genitive). 

By  virtue    of   his  employment  (£r  mup  fro  ft  fetnc$  2Cmte$  fo  fyans 
(his  office)  he  must  act  thus.          tcln. 

According  to  (by  virtue  of).      23  C  r  m  6  g  C  (governs  the  gen.). 

According  to  your  order  I  must  aSerm&'gc  3fac$  95efer;U  nmp  ic^  fo 
speak  thus.  fprcdjcn. 

Instead  of.  2Cnftntt   or  ftatt  (governs  the 

genitive). 

He  sent  his  daughter  instead  of  Hnftatt  fetncS  vSof)ncg  fc^tcftc  cr  fctne 

his  son.  Socbtcr. 

He  has  adopted  him.  ©r  bat  ibn  an  .RtnbcS     ^tattc  am 

gcnomnicn. 
Go  thither  instead  of  me.  (gtott  metncr  gcljc  5)u  fyn. 

c  The  word  <Statf,  lieu,  place,  when  thus  separated  from  an,  must  be  con- 
sidered as  a  substantive. 


335 

In  consequence  of  (according  to}.  2  a  u  t  (governs  the  genitive). 

According  to  his  letter,  he  ought  Omit   femes    SSttefcS,   muS    ct    b 
to  arrive  here  on   the  18th  of      18tcn  btefcS  Ijict  ctntrcffcn. 
this  month. 

To  exclaim.  3(u$rufvn*  (Imperf.  t'tcf). 

To  make  uneasy.  SSfunrubigcn. 

To  be  uneasy  (to  fret).  JBcunrubiflt  (befergt)  fctn*. 

Why  do  you  fret  (are   you  un-  gRcirum   finb   <Stc   bcunrufyigt   (b 

easy)  1  ferflt)  ? 
I  do  not  fret  (am  not  uneasy).       3cb  bin  ntcbt  fccforAt  (Ocunruljt^t). 

Compose  yourself!  SBcrufytgcn  €>tc  (id)! 


To  alter,  to  change.  (£tcb 

That  man  has  altered  a  great  deal  £>kfer  g)iann  bat  ficb  fcbr  t>cranbcrtx 
since  I  saw  him.  fcttbcm  tcb  thn  nicbt  gcfeljcn  ^^« 

To  alter  a  coat.  (Stncu  9?ocf  an^crn. 

To  recommend.  (Smpfefjtcn*. 

To  take  leave  (to  commend  one's  ©id)  cmpfcf)(cn*. 

self). 

Farewell,  adieu  !  Scb  cmpfcbtc  mtcb  S^ncn  ! 

I  have  the  honour  to  bid  you  f  3d)  f)«t»c  tic  G'fytt',  mtcb  35ncn  gu 

adieu.  cmpfcfjlcn. 

Obs.  D.  This  and  le&ett  ©ie  n)of)f,  farewell,  is  the 
general  salute  of  the  Germans  when  leaving  each 
other. 


Farewell  (adieu)  !  Men  ©tc 

To  bid  one's  friends  adieu.  ©ctncn  ^rcunt)cn  2c(>cn?of)t  fflvjcn. 

The  recommendation  (respects,  tic  (Smpfefjluncj. 
compliments), 


o 

Remember  me  to  him  (to  her).  5 


mcine 


To  enjoy.  ©cnicpcn*  (governs  the  ace.). 


Enjoy  all  the  pleasures  that  vir-  (5>eme9en   @tc   alle 
tue  permits.  tt?c(cbc  tie  Su.Qcnt)  crtaubt. 

The  past,  btc  ^Scrcjan^onbctt,  t>a 

the  present,  t>a$  ©cgontvartigc  ; 

the  presence,  btc  (Sjccjenroart. 

In  his  presence.  Sti  fcincr  (SJcgenwart. 

The  future,  bcib  SuHinfttgc  ; 

the  loss,  bet  33cr(uft  ; 

the  loss  of  time,  bcr  3ettr>erliift. 

Not  to  fail.  2(u6vtcbtcnx  nidjt 


336 

Pray,  present  my  compliments  3>d)    btttc    <Sie,     S6t*cm     $raulem 
(my  respects)  to  your  sister.        <Sd)tt?cftcr  qiittgft  mcinc  (Smpfefjs 

Utna,  $u  macbcn. 

f2Bcnn    eS    Sbncn    gcfafluj   ijt,    or 
If  vou  nlease  J      simply  gcfffaigft. 

LSe'  i  SBcnn  <£ic  fo  qut  fctn  roollcn   or 

simply  qutiaJT. 
T  shall  not  fail  5  $*  tvcrfcc  c^  «"^td)tcn. 

)  3d)  wctDc  md)t  ermangctn. 

EXERCISES.       233. 

I  have  the  honour  to  wish  you  a  good  morning.  How  do  you 
do?— Very  well,  at  your  service  (Sftncn  aufturoartcn). — And  how 
are  they  all  at  home  (bcfinfcct  man  fief)  bet  Shncn  $u  £aufe)  1 — Toler- 
ably well,  thank  God  (($5ott  fct  £anf).  My  sister  was  a  little  indis- 
posed (unpajKtd)),  but  she  is  better  (ttriebcr  bcrgcjreUt)  ;  she  told  me 
to  give  you  her  best  compliments  (fie  (apt  fid)  Sfjnetl  bcjtcng  empfcfylen). 
— I  am  glad  (@8  tft  nur  Reb)  to  hear  that  she  is  well.  As  for  you, 
you  are  health  itself;  you  cannot  look  better  (@tc  fonntcn  md)t  befs 
fcr  QUgfcbciO. — I  have  no  time  to  be  ill ;  my  business  would  not  per- 
mit me. — Please  to  sit  down  (SMtcbcn  ©tc  fid)  ntetcqu(affcn),  here 
is  a  chair. — I  will  not  detain  you  from  your  bniness  (pen  ben  ($cs 
fd)6ftcn  obhaltcn*)  ;  I  know  that  a  merchant's  time  is  precious  (bafj 
ctnem  ^aufmannc  bic  Sett  foftbar  iff). — I  have  nothing  pressing  (nidbtS 
(Siltgc^)  to  do  now,  my  courier  is  already  dispatched  (mcinc  $>eft  tft 
fdjon  akvfcrttqt). — I  shall  not  stay  (fid)  ouf&fiftcn*)  any  longer.  I 
only  wished  in  passing  by  (tm  SSotbctgcrjCn),  to  inquire  about  (fid) 
crEunMa.cn  nach)  your  health. — You  do  me  much  honour. — It  is  very 
fine  weather  to-day.  If  you  will  allow  me,  I  shall  have  the  plea- 
"Bure  of  seeing  you  again  this  afternoon  (nod)  Stfdjc),  and  if  you 
have  time  we  will  take  a  little  turn  together  (fo  qcfycn  ruir  cin  iin'niq 
mtt  I'tnanbcr  fpajicrcn). — With  the  greatest  pleasure.  In  that  case  I 
shall  wait  for  you. — I  will  come  for  you  (Sic  abbelcn)  about  (o,cqcn) 
seven  o'clock. — -Adieu  then  (alfc),  till  I  see  you  again. — I  have  the 
honour  to  bid  you  adieu. 

234. 

The  loss  of  time  is  an  irreparable  (uncrfc|(td))  loss.  A  single 
minute  cannot  be  recovered  (uncbctcr(anqcn)  for  all  the  gold  in  the 
world. — It  is  then  of  (pen)  the  greatest  importance  (tic  2Btd)ttcj£ett) 
to  employ  well  the  time,  which  consists  only  of  minutes  (au$  SRU 
nutcn  bejMu'n*)  of  which  we  must  make  good  use  (Me  man  roobl  be? 
nu(3cn  nuip). — We  have  but  the  present ;  the  past  is  no  longer  any 
thing,  and  the  future  is  uncertain.  A  great  many  people  (©cbt  ttU'ltf 
9)?enfcben)  ruin  themselves  (fid)  511  ©runbc  rtd)tcn),  because  they  wish 
to  indulge  themselves  too  much  (it)ctt  fie  ficb  flfl^u  qttt(id)  tf)tin  tucltcn). 
If  most  (Me  nictftcn)  men  knew  how  to  content  themselves  (fid)  Ocz 
pnuqen)  with  what  they  have  they  would  be  happy,  but  their  gree- 
diness (Me  ©iericjfctt)  very  often  makes  them  unhappy.  In  order  to 


337 

be  happy,  we  must  (muji  man)  forget  the  past,  not  trouble  ourselves 
about  (fid)  befuiumern  uiu)  the  future,  and  enjoy  the  present. — I  was 
very  dejected  (trauru})  when  my  cousin  came  to  me.  "  What  is 
the  matter  with  you  ]  "  he  asked  me.  "  Oh  (neb)  !  my  dear 
cousin,"  replied  1,  "in  losing  that  money,  I  have  lost  every 
thing."  "  Do  not  fret,"  said  he  to  me,  u  for  I  have  found  your 
money." 

235. 

As  soon  as  Mr.  Flausen  sees  me  he  begins  to  speak  French,  in 
order  to  practise  it  (um  fid)  $u  itben),  and  overwhelms  me  with  po- 
liteness (nut  4bofUcI)tVttcn  fttetfy&ufttl),  so  that  I  often  do  not  know 
what  to  answer  (n?a£  id)  tfym  anhverten  foil).  His  brothers  do  the  same 
(e$  cbenfo  macrjcn). — However,  they  are  very  good  people ;  they  are 
not  only  rich  and  amiable,  but  they  are  also  generous  (qreOnwtbto,) 
and  charitable  (roebltfyatig).  They  love  me  sincerely  (cwfttd)ttg), 
therefore,  I  love  them  also,  and  consequently  (fe(glid))  shall  never 
say  anything  to  their  disadvantage  (9?ad)tbei(to,e$  son  tfynen).  I 
should  love  them  still  more,  if  they  did  not  make  so  much  ceremony 
(tne  UmftanN')  ;  but  every  one  has  his  faults  (t>er  Jeljler),  and  mine 
is  to  speak  too  much  of  their  ceremonies. 

236. 

Have  the  enemies  surrendered  (fief)  crgeben*)  ? — They  have  not 
surrendered,  for  they  did  not  prefer  life  to  death  ;  and  though  they 
had  neither  bread,  nor  water,  nor  arms,  nor  money,  they  determined 
to  die  rather  than  surrender. — Why  are  you  so  sad  ? — You  do  not 
know  what  makes  me  uneasy,  my  dear  friend  (fern.). — Tell  me, 
for  I  assure  you  that  1  share  (tbetlen)  your  sufferings  (t^a£  Cettvn)  as 
well  as  (eben  fcwcbl  ate)  your  pleasures  (Me  #wil>c). — Though  I  am 
sure  that  you  partake  of  (-Sbeil  an  c'tncr  <Sad)C  ucljmcn*)  my  suffer- 
ings, I  cannot,  however,  tell  you  now  (in  Mefeiu  2fugenblic!)  what 
makes  me  uneasy  ;  but  I  will  tell  you  when  an  opportunity  offers 
(getegentltcf)  ot>er  bet  ©cleqenl)cit).  Let  us  speak  of  something  else 
now.  What  do  you  think  of  the  man  who  spoke  to  us  yesterday 
at  the  concert  1 — He  is  a  man  of  much  understanding  (cm  fef)r  »eri 
ftanbiger  9)Jann),  and  not  at  all  wrapt  up  in  his  merits  (t»cn  fctnen 
SScrMonfton  cinj.V'ncnimcn  fcin*).  But  why  do  you  ask  me  that1? — To 
speak  of  something. — It  is  said  (Wan  faa,t) :  contentment  surpasses 
riches  (Siifriefccnfjctt  Qcl)t  fiber  JKetcbtrwiu)  ;  let  us  then  always  be 
content.  Let  us  share  with  each  other  (nut  einanber  tr>ettcn)  what 
we  have,  and  live  all  our  life-time  (unfer  gan^e^  Ccbcn)  inseparable 
(uniertrennltcb)  friends.  You  will  always  be  welcome  (ttnllfommen) 
at  my  house,  and  I  hope  to  be  equally  so  (c3  aucb)  at  yours. — If  I 
saw  you  happy  I  should  be  equally  so,  and  we  should  be  more  con- 
tented than  the  greatest  princes,  who  are  not  always  so.  We  shall 
be  happy,  when  we  shall  be  perfectly  (gcllfommcn)  contented  with 
what  we  have ;  and  if  we  do  our  duty  as  we  ought  (gcljorioj,  God 
15 


338 

will  take  care  of  the  rest  (jo  nritb  bcr  licfoc  ©ett  fur  fca$  ttcfcricje  fers 
gen).  The  past  being  no  longer  any  thing,  let  us  not  be  uneasy 
about  the  future,  and  enjoy  the  present. 

237. 

Behold,  ladies,  those  beautiful  (fyerrttcf))  flowers,  with  their 
colours  so  fresh  and  bright  (nut  ifyren  fo  frtfcl)cn  unt>  glcinjcnben  gars 
ben)  ;  they  drink  nothing  but  water.  The  white  lily  has  the  colour 
of  innocence  (Me  Unfcl)u(t)  ;  the  violet  indicates  gentleness  (Me 
(gJcmftmutl))  ;  you  may  (man  fann)  see  it  in  Louisa's  eyes.  The 
forget-me-not  (£)as  d$crgijmicmnid)t)  has  the  colour  of  heaven,  our 
future  (tunfttq)  dwelling  (tie  SBofjnuwj,  repeat  the  genitive),  and  the 
rose  (Me  $ofe),  tne  queen  of  flowers,  is  the  emblem  (fcaS  ©innbtlfc) 
of  beauty  (Me  ©cbonfyett)  and  of  joy  (Me  Jreufce).  You  (^Jan)  see 
all  that  personified  (ocrnrirflict)t)  in  seeing  the  beautiful  Amelia 
(2(ma(ie). — How  beautiful  is  the  fresh  verdure  (tn$  jun$e  frtfcfoe 
($5run) !  It  is  salutary  (roefyl  tbun*)  to  our  eyes,  and  has  the  colour 
of  hope  (Me  £offnuni)),  our  most  faithful  (ttcu,  repeat  the  genitive) 
friend  (fern.),  who  never  deserts  (wrlaflVn*)  us,  not  even  in  death 
(tin  Sote). — One  word  more  my  dear  friend. — What  is  your  plea- 
sure ? — I  forgot  to  tell  you  to  present  my  compliments  to  your 
mother.  Tell  her,  if  you  please,  that  I  regret  (betcuicrn)  not  having 
been  at  home  when  lately  she  honoured  (Oeefyren)  me  with  her  visit. 
— I  thank  you  for  her  (in  tftrcm  9?amen),  1  shall  not  fail. — Farewell 
then.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


HUNDREDTH  LESSON.— ^tmbertste  Cection. 

s 
OF    THE    ADVERB. 

We  have  hitherto  shown  by  numerous  examples  for 
the  practice  of  learners,  the  place  which  the  adverb 
is  to  occupy  in  a  sentence.  Let  us  now  determine  the 
place  of  the  adverb  by  standard  rules. 

As  the  adverb  modifies  the  signification  of  the  verb, 
it  should  always  be  near  it,  particularly  the  negative 
nid)t>  which,  if  misplaced,  would  entirely  change  the 
meaning  of  a  phrase.  Ex. 

I  have  not  the  honour  to  know  3cb  fjafce  ntcfjt   Me   (Sfyve,  <Su*  $u 

you.  fennen. 

And: 
I  have  the  honour  not  to  know  3cf)   b&bt  tie   (Sfyre,  (Sic  nid)t  $u 

you.  fennen. 


339 

Rules. 

1st.  The  adverb  precedes  the  adjective,  the  meaning 
of  which  it  modifies.  Ex.  ©u  tt>al)rbaft  guter  SKann,  a 
truly  good  man  ;  eine  ttnrflid)  gute  ©elegeufyeit,  a  truly 
good  opportunity  ;  eiu  fcl}r  artige^  $iub,  a  very  good 
child. 

2d,  It  follows  the  imperative  and  precedes  the  infi- 
nitive to  which  it  relates.  Ex.  Ofcben  Sie  laut,  speak 
aloud  ;  fprcrfien  <£ie  tticfyt  fo  fdntelt,  do  not  speak  so  quick- 
ly; fcfyrcibeu  Sie  laugfam,  fo  toerben  ®ie  fcfyeit  jcfyreibcn, 
write  slowly,  and  you  will  write  well  ;  id)  bitte  Sic, 
nid)t  511  fdjueii  ju  fcfyreiben,  pray,  do  not  write  too  fast. 

3d,  It  follows  the  simple  tense  of  the  verb,  but  pre- 
cedes it  when  the  sentence  depends  on  a  conjunction. 
Ex.  3d)  fage  e$  Shnen  frei  bercutg,  I  tell  you  frankly  ; 
id)  Derjlehe  Sie  uiefyt,  roett  @ie  jit  fofynett  fprerf)en,  I  do 
not  understand  you,  because  you  speak  too  fast  (Les- 
son LXIX.)  ;  er  fotnntt  um  gefyn  Ul)r  9ERcrgen^a  Don  ba 
juriicf,  he  returns  from  there  at  ten  o'clock  in  the  morn- 
ing (Lesson  XL  VII.)  ;  tt>emt  £ie  langfam  rebeten,  fo  n>itr^ 
be  id)  £ie  tocrfleljen,  if  you  spoke  slowly  I  should  under- 
stand you. 

4th,  In  compound  tenses  it  precedes  the  past  parti- 
ciple. Ex.  &  fyatte  laut  gelefcn,  roemt  Sie  ifyn  ofter  bajit 
angcl)alten  fatten,  he  would  have  read  aloud,  if  you 
had  oftener  engaged  him  to  do  so  ;  irf)  bin  fcfyon  ba  ge# 
n>efenr  I  have  already  been  there  (Lesson  XLI.)  ;  id) 
fyabe  ihn  Dorgeflern  gcfeljen,  I  saw  him  the  day  before 
yesterday. 

5th,  It  follows  the  case  of  the  verb,  but  precedes  it 
when  it  is  a  partitive,  or  joined  to  an  indefinite  article. 
Ex.  3d)  faf)  tint  geftent,  I  saw  him  yesterday  ;  er  l)at  e3 
nttr  fo  eben  gegebett,  he  has  just  now  given  it  to  me  ;  id) 
ttntl  ibn  Sbneu  morgen  fd^irfen,  I  will  send  it  to  you  to- 
morrow (Lesson  XXVIII.)  ;  fjafl  £u  maitrf)mat  ^a^tit^ 
cf)er  au^beflern  taflen  ?  hast  thou  sometimes  had  cravats 
mended?  id)  fyabe  trattd)ma[  ^c(d)eau^bej]ern  taflfen,!  have 


a  Um  ^et)U  U^r  S^or^enS,  is  an  adverbial  phrase,  and  all  sorts  of  adverbial 
expressions,  or  compound  adverbs,  as  they  may  be  called,  follow  the  rules  of 
simple  adverbs. 


340 

sometimes  had  some  mended  (Lesson  XLIV.) ; 
@te  je  einen  ©epfyanten  gefeben  ?  have  you  ever  seen  an 
elephant  ?  id)  babe  me  emen  gefeben,  I  have  never  seen 
one  ;  er  l)atte  biefen  5E>iorgen  feitt  ©elb,  he  had  no  money 
this  morning ;  er  tragt  gern  etnen  gro£en  §itt,  he  likes  to 
wear  a  large  hat. 

6th,  It  precedes  the  case  of  the  verb  when  governed 
by  a  preposition.  Ex.  3d)  tt>itt  ifyn  morgen  jit  Sfynen  fd)i* 
den,  I  will  send  him  to  you  to-morrow  (Lesson 
XXVIII.) ;  fmb  Sie  (ange  bet  meinem  2Sater  geblieben  ? 
have  you  stayed  long  with  my  father  (Lesson  XLVII.)  ? 
id)  bin  eine  ©tunbe  fang  bet  ifym  gebtieben,  I  have  stayed 
with  him  a  full  hour  (Lessons  XLVII.  and  XLVIII.) ; 
tt)tr  fprad)en  fo  eben  tton  3()nen,  we  have  just  spoken  of 
you ;  fonnen  @ie  fyente  ju  mir  fommen  ?  can  you  come  to 
me  to-day? 

PLACE  OF  THE  NEGATIVE  n  i  d)  t 

Rules. 

1st,  It  likewise  follows  the  simple  tense  and  the 
case  of  the  verb,  when  there  is  one,  but  precedes  the 
infinitive  and  the  past  participle.  Ex.  3$  tterflefye  bie* 
fen  SKann  nid)t>  I  do  not  understand  that  man ;  ber  SKann 
fyat  ben  goffer  nid)t,  the  man  has  not  the  trunk ;  ber 
jnnge  ?D?enfd)  (3iutg(ing)  f)at  tbn  nidjr,  the  young  man  has 
it  not  (Lesson  IX.) ;  @te  ejjen  nid)t,  you  do  not  ea't ;  id) 
^abe  i!)it  ntd)t  gebabt,  I  have  not  had  it  (Lesson  XLII.) ; 
er  tt)ttt  nid)t  arbetten,  he  does  not  wish  to  work  ;  id)  babe 
ifyn  nid)t  gefel)en,  I  have  not  seen  him  ;  id)  babe  <Te  nid)t 
gefannt,  I  have  not  known  them  (Lesson  XLIV.)  ;  id) 
ijbre  Sie,  aber  t)erfle()e  ©e  nid)f,  I  hear,  but  do  not  un- 
derstand you  (Lesson  XL VI.);  id)  gebe  e£  ibm  ntd)t,  I 
do  not  give  it  to  him  ;  fie  (ieben  ftd)  nid)t>  they  do  not 
love  each  other ;  id)  fd)meid)fe  mir  nid)t,  I  do  not  flatter 
myself;  fte  feben  einanber  mcf)t  dt)nlid),  they  do  not  re- 
semble each  other  (Lesson  LXXXVL). 

O^5.  A.  When  the  negative  sentence  is  preceded 
or  followed  by  an  affirmative  one,  nid)t  precedes  the 
case  of  the  verb,  but  if  the  affirmative  sentence  con- 
tains another  nominative  with  Ctber,  the  negative  fol- 


341 

lows  the  general  rule.  Ex.  3d)  Me  nid)t  biefen,  foit* 
tern  jenen,  I  have  not  the  latter,  but  the  former  ;  er  f)dt 
biefetf,  aber  nidjt  jene3,  he  has  the  latter,  but  not  the 
former  (Lesson  XL)  ;  id)  fyabe  Sfjren  £nt  nid)t,  aber  went 
SSrnber  fyat  ifjn,  it  is  not  I  who  have  your  hat,  but  my 
brother. 

Obs.  B.  A  negative,  not  depending  on  the  nomina- 
tive of  the  verb,  precedes  the  word  the  sense  of  which 
it  modifies.  Ex.  &  arbeitet  ben  gangen  £ag  mrfjt,  he  does 
not  work  during  the  whole  day  ;  and  man  arbeitet  nid)t 
ben  ganjen  £ag,  one  does  not  work  all  day. 

2d,  The  case  of  the  verb  being  governed  by  a  pre- 
position, nid)t,  like  other  adverbs  (Rule  6  above),  pre- 
cedes it.  Ex.  &  ifl  nicfy:  jn  £anfe,  he  is  not  at  home 
(Lesson  XXVI.)  ;  id)  fitrcfyte  mid)  nid)t  fcor  if)tn,  I  do  not 
fear  him  (Lesson  LXX.). 

3d,  It  follows  the  adverbs  of  time,  but  precedes  all 
other  adverbs,  as  adverbs  of  quality,  of  place,  &c. 
Ex.  3d)  arbeite  bente  nid)t,  I  do  not  work  to-day  ;  er 
fdjreibt  nid)t  fd)on,  he  does  not  write  well  ;  er  ifl  nid)t 
ba,  he  is  not  there  ;  id)  gefje  nid)t  ba^in,  I  do  not  go 
thither. 

4th,  It  follows  the  adverb  nod).  Ex.  3d)  bin  nod) 
nid)t  ba  gewefen,  I  have  not  yet  been  there  ;  id)  bin  nod) 
ntd)t  bei  ibm  gemefen,  I  have  not  yet  been  at  his  house 
(Lesson  XLL).  The  following  sentences,  however, 
must  be  distinguished  from  each  other  :  tt>otten  ©e  nod) 
n  i  d)  t  etn>a3  effen  ?  will  you  not  eat  anything  yet  ?  and 
ttwllen  Sie  n  i  d)  t  nod)  etwa^  eflen  ?  will  you  not  eat 
anything  more?  In  the  latter  sentence  nid)t  modifies 
the  signification  of  nod)  ettt>a3. 

Obs.  C.  The  negative  precedes  the  word  and),  when 
the  sentence  is  both  interrogative  and  negative,  but 
follows  it  when  the  sentence  is  simply  negative.  Ex. 
SSin  id)  nid)t  and)  ba  geroefen  ?  have  I  not  also  been 
there  ?  nnb  id)  and)  nid)t,  nor  I  either  ;  nnb  er  and)  nid)t, 
nor  he  either. 


To  pretend  to  be  ill.  >  f(ir 

1  1  ©flScn,  man  fci 


342 

This  boy  always  pretends  to  be  £)tefer  .ftnafrc  cjtfrt  fid)  tmmer  flic 
ill  ;  but  when  we  sit  down  to  frnnf  auS  ;  allein  rvenn  man  $tt 
dinner,  he  is  generally  well  3tfd)C  fleht,  fo  tft  or  gewohn(id) 
again.  nncbet  ijcr^cjlcUt  (ivtebcr  gefunb). 

To  be  said.  f  <S  0  I  (  e  n  *. 

He  is  said  to  have  suffered  ship-  f  (?r  fell  an  ber  £ufte  sen  <Stcilten 
wreck  near  the  coast  of  Sicily.  ©cbtffforud)  gctittcn  fyaben. 

Out  of  all  his  property  he  is  said  f  (£T  fell  son  alien  fetnen  ^atfe(ic|s 
to  have  saved  nothing  but  an  fatten  md)t£  al?  ctncn  leeren  $Kct- 
empty  portmanteau.  fefcicf  gercttet  fyaben. 

OF    TENSES. 

1st,  The  present  tense  is  frequently  substituted  for 
the  imperfect,  to  enliven  the  narrative  and  excite  at- 
tention. This  is  sometimes  done  in  English,  but  not 
so  often  as  in  German.  Ex. 

Imagine  my  horror  !     Yesterday  3)cnft  (Slid)  metnen  ©cbrcrfen  !  id) 

I  went  with  my  child  to  the  o,cf)c  gcftcrn  mtt  meincm    ^tnbc 

gate  of  the  town,  to  see  the  i?cr  ba$  S^rx  urn  ten  flufH'allen 

ascent  of  the  balloon.      We  oufjlctgen   ^u   fefjcn/    fcninic    mtt 

were  soon  surrounded  by  the  thm  tn^  ©ebranae,  »crtiorc  e£  au5 

crowd,  when  suddenly  I  lost  ten  Tfucu'tt,  nnt  ftnt^e  c§  crft  nad) 

sight  of  my  child,  and  it  was  etner  (Stuntc  (u'tnahe  ^crtriicft  unb 

not  till    an    hour   afterwards  gcrtrctcn  ruteter   (for  :    id) 

that  I  found  it,  trampled  un-  fam,  verier  and  fant>). 
der  foot  and  nearly  crushed 
to  death. 


I  now  ascend  the  mountain  ;  a  Sefet  crflimmc  id;  ten  SBerq  ;    ctn 

deep  valley  unfolds  itself  to  ttefe$  Sbat    ercffnct  fid)  iiietnem 

my  delighted  eyes  ;  a  limpid  ferfchcnten  ?(uflc  ;  ^it>ifd)en  ^arten 

stream   murmurs    among   the  ©etnifcben  riefctt  cm  ftarer  5?ocb/ 

verdant     shrubs;    sheep    are  $u  meinen  ^iiQcn  nxtt>en  Cnmmcr, 

grazing  at  my  feet,  and  I  be-  unb  burd)  ben  fernen  S^alt)  l>res 

hold  the  last  rays  of  the  set-  cben  fid)  btc  (often  (Strablen  ber 

ting  sun  breaking  through  the  finfcntcn  <Senne* 
deep    foliage   of   the    distant 
wood. 

2d,  The  present  tense  is  employed  for  the  future, 
when  that  time  is  indicated  by  another  word  in  the 
sentence.  Ex. 

We  leave  to-morrow  for  Berlin,  SDferqen  retfen  rwr  nad)  Berlin  ;  tn 
but  1  shall  be  back  within  a  acbt  Sagen  fcmmc  tcb  after  rotebcr, 
week,  and  I  shall  then  cer-  unb  bann  fcefud)C  tcb  S)td)  ()en)t5 
tainly  come  to  see  you.  (for  roerben  rmr  rctfcn/  it>erbc  tci) 

nncbctfcmmcn,  &c.). 


343 

I  shall  be  back  in  a  moment.         3d)  fcmmc  Qfcid)  rwcbcr. 

We  scale  the  castle   this  very  S)tcfe5  (2d)(o£  crftcujcn  roir  in  ticfa 

night.  Sincbt. 

1  have  the  keys,  we  kill  £)cr    ScbttiflM    bin     idj    nid'd)tia, ; 

nnr  crmerfccn 

The    guards,    and   deliver   thee  JDte  £utcr,  rcipen  £id)  au3  £)cinct 
from  thy  prison.  jammer. 

(@{f>iHet'$  SKaria  (Stuart). 

1st,  The  imperfect  has  already  been  touched  upon 
in  Lesson  LVII.  It  is  the  historical  tense  of  the  Ger- 
mans. Ex. 

Scipio  Africanus  was  in  the  ha-  ©cipie,  tcr  2ffrifancr,  fac^tc,  cr  ware 

bit  of  saying,  he  never  was  rue  nxnia^r  olmc    •sBcfcbaftto/tng, 

less   idle  than  when  he  had  at*  rccnn'er  nid)t$  $u  tbun  battc. 

nothing  to  do;  and  in  fact  his  ££irflid)  roar  cr  aucb  ^i*-'  nicbr  fas 

busiest  time  was  that  which  fcfoafrtcjt,  al^  in  t>cr  (Sinfamfctt ; 

he  spent  in  solitude.     For  it  tcnn  J)U'r  fann  cr  fcincn  roicbttcjcn 

was  there  he  meditated  over  Itntcrncrmumgcn    unt)    dicfcbaftcn 

his  great  enterprises  and  his  nacb  ;  btcr,  im  @cbopc  tcr  JKuljc/ 

future  deeds.     In  the  bosom  cntiuarf  cr  $lanc  ^um  9Kct)t  fcincs 

of  retirement,  he  traced  plans  SSatcrlantc^    unt)    bier/   cntfcrnt 

for  the  happiness  of  his  coun-  tten  tern  ^trcifc  fctncr  S^ttbur^Ct/ 

try ;  and  there,  far  from  the  untcrf)tett  cr  fid)  ctnjtg  unt)  atlcitt 

intercourse  of  his  fellow-citi-  mit  t>cm  ©lucfc  tcrfclbcn. 
zens,  he  devoted  his  thoughts 
to  the  promotion  of  their  wel- 
fare. 

2d,  It  is  used  to  narrate  an  action  or  event  of  which 
the  narrator  was  an  eye-witness,  or  to  express  an  ac- 
tion in  reference  to  another  which  was  either  simulta- 
neous with,  or  antecedent  to  it  (Lesson  LVII.). 

Yesterday  a  child  was  drowned,  dkftcrn  crtrcmf  cin  jtinb,  a(3  id)  auf 

while  I  was  on  the  bridge.  tcr  iBriicfc  ftanK 

He  granted  rny  request  because  (£r  gcruabrtc  mcinc  SSittc,  wci(  cr  ftc 

he  found  it  just.  qcrccbt  font*. 

I  was  playing  with  my  pupil,  3d)  fptcttc  mit  mctncm  Scgtingc,  C(H 

when  the  news  was  brought  man  uiir  tic  Sftacfyrtcfyt  brad)tc. 

to  me. 

1st,  The  perfect  tense  is  used  to  express  an  action 
or  event  as  perfectly  ended  without  any  reference  to 
another  circumstance,  and  when  the  narrator  was  not 
an  eye-witness  of  it.  Ex. 


344 

Were  you  yesterday  at  the  con-  ©tnt  ©te  (jeftcrn  tm  (Scnccrt 

cert  1  rcefen  ? 

Has  the  army  been  beaten  1          3ft  tie  TCrmce  Qefdjlac^en  rcottcn  ? 
Has  anybody  been  drowned  ?       3ft  Semcmt  ertrunfcn  ? 
Were  you  ever  in  Vienna  ?  ©tnt  ©te  j[e  in  2i$tcn  gcrwfen  ? 

2d,  The  imperfect  may  even  be  used  when  the  nar- 
rator has  not  witnessed  the  event  ;  but  then  he  must 
take  care  to  add  to  his  narrative  a  phrase  like  :  fagte 
er,  he  said  ;  fagt  ntatt,  it  is  said,  &c.  Ex. 

They  say,  that  day  before  yester-  SSorgcftcrn,    fa  $  t   m  a  n,    war    cm 
day  there  was  a  great  feast  in       o,tofjc£  JJcft  in  ter  ©tatt. 
the  town. 

They  say  there  was  a  battle  on  2)en  ftinf  unt  $twn$tqften    foricjen 
the  25th  of  last  month.  Senate/  fjeipt  e*,  pel  cine  ©d)lad)t 


Obs.  D.  We  have  already  seen  (Lesson  XXXIY.) 
that  we  cannot  say  with  the  English,  I  am  writing,  I 
do  write,  both  of  which  must  be  expressed  by  the  only 
present  id)  fd)rci6e,  I  write  ;  nor,  I  was  writing,  I  did 
write,  both  of  which  must  be  expressed  by  the  only 
imperfect  id)  fefyrieb,  I  wrote  (Lesson  LVIL).  Expres- 
sions such  as  the  following  :  When  you  come  to  learn, 
he  is  to  write,  to  go,  I  am  to  have  it,  fyc.,  cannot  be 
translated  literally  in  German.  In  such  cases  we  use 
the  future  when  mere  futurity,  and  the  verb  fottett  when 
necessity  or  a  wish  is  to  be  expressed.  Ex. 

When  you  come  to  learn  French.  SQ&ann  ©te  fran.jffjifd)  lerncn  WCttctU 

He  is  to  write.  (5r  rotrt  fcfjrctOen. 

Am  I  to  go  thither  1  ©oil  id)  fnna,el)cn  ? 

He  is  to  go  thither.  (£r  fell  fytngefycn. 

Am  I  to  have  this  book1?  ©oil  id)  ttcfeS  23ttd)  fjofccn? 

Am  I  to  give  you  a  pen?  ©oil  id)  Sbncn  cine  Jeter  ge&cn? 

I  was  to  speak  for  them  all.  3d)  folltc  flit  2(lle  fprcdften. 

He  was  to  arrive  on  the  20th.  ©r  follte  ten  $n>an$to,jleii  anfommen* 

Obs.  E.  At  the  end  of  a  phrase  we  sometimes  omit 
the  auxiliary  of  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  tenses,  when 
the  phrase  that  follows  it  begins  with  another  auxi- 
liary. Ex. 


345 

f  £)b  id)  gfetd)  me  $u  $pavt£  gercefen 


Though  I  have  never  been  in 
Paris,  I  am  nevertheless  ac- 


quainted   with    all  that    is  ^ 
going  on  there. 


bin,  inn  id)  tod)  t>cn  cittern 
tetrtd)tet,  tvaS  tafelbft 


£)b  id)  g(eid)  ntematS  $u  ^ari^  gen?es 
fen,  fc  bin  id)  tod)  son  allem  um 
tetrtd)tct,  ivai>  tafelbft  rotgel)t. 
As  he  did  not  answer  me,  I  wrote^a  et  nut  nid)t  geantivortet  (bot), 
to  him  no  more.  babe  id)  ifym  ntd)t  me()t  gcfd)vtcs 

ben. 

The  enemy  having  been  beaten,  9?ad)tem  bet  fitirib  gefdtfafjen  roots 
it  is  to  be  hoped  that  the  war  ten  (ift),  ift  gu  ^offen,  tflp  t>ct 
will  be  at  an  end.  £tieg  geenbigt  fetn  met. 


EXERCISES.     238. 

Have  you  seen  your  niece  1 — Yes,  she  is  a  very  good  girl  who 
writes  well  and  speaks  German  still  better  :  therefore  she  is  hon- 
oured and  loved  by  every  one. — And  her  brother,  what  is  he  doing  ? 
— Do  not  speak  to  me  of  him,  he  is  a  naughty  (bofc)  boy,  who 
writes  always  badly  and  speaks  German  still  worse :  he  is  there- 
fore loved  by  nobody.  He  is  very  fond  of  dainties  (ter  qute  iBiffcn)  ; 
but  he  does  not  like  books.  Sometimes  he  goes  to  bed  at  broad 
day-light  (bei  hetlcm  Sage),  and  pretends  to  be  ill ;  but  when  we  sit 
down  to  dinner,  he  is  generally  better  again.  He  is  to  study 
physic  (tie  ?(rjnct!itnft)  ;  but  he  has  not  the  slightest  inclination  for 
it  ($ar  fctne  2ujt  ta$u). — He  is  almost  always  talking  of  his  dogs 
which  he  loves  passionately  (lett>enfd)aft(td)). — His  father  is  ex- 
tremely (cuifjcrerfcentltdb)  sorry  for  it.  The  young  simpleton  (t>er 
SMcfcfinntQe)  said  lately  to  his  sister:  " I  shall  enlist  (^clbat  rcers 
ben*  obir  fid)  anroetben  (affcn*)  as  soon  as  pea^ce  is  proclaimed  (of? 
feut(id)  bcfcmnt  umd)en  ofcet  pub(ktren). 

239. 

My  dear  father  and  my  dear  mother  dined  yesterday  with  some 
friends  at  (in  dat.)  the  (hotel)  King  of  Spain  (sen  Spantcn). — Why 
do  you  always  speak  French  and  never  German  ? — Because  I  am  too 
bashful. — You  are  joking;  is  a  Frenchman  ever  bashful? — I  have 
(a)  keen  appetite  :  give  me  something  good  to  eat. — Have  you  any 
money  1 — No,  sir. — Then  I  have  nothing  to  eat  for  you. — Will  you 
not  let  me  have  some  on  credit  1  I  pledge  (oerpfdnfcen)  my  honour. 
— That  is  too  little. — What,  sir  ! 

My  dear  friend,  lend  me  a  ducat  (t>et  ^ncot,  gen.  en). — Here  are 
two  instead  of  one. — How  much  I  am  obliged  to  you ! — I  am  al- 
ways glad  when  I  see  you,  and  I  find  my  happiness  in  yours. — Is 
this  house  to  be  sold  1 — Do  you  wish  to  buy  it1? — Why  not? — Why 
does  your  sister  not  speak  1 — She  would  speak  if  she  were  not  al- 
ways so  absent  (jcrftrcut). — I  like  pretty  anecdotes  (t>tc  2(nect)0te)  ; 
they  season  (nritrjen)  conversation  (tie  UlttcrfyattUttg)  and  amuse  (be- 
i  p;* 


346 

lufti^en)  every  body. — Pray,  relate  me  some.  Look,  if  you  please, 
at  page  389  of  the  hook  (in  from  ^ud>e)  which  I  lent  you,  and  (fe) 
you  will  find  some. — To-morrow  I  shall  set  out  for  Hanau ;  but  in 
a  fortnight  (in  wcrjcbn  Sagcn)  I  shall  be  back  again,  and  then  I 
shall  come  to  see  you  arid  your  family. — Where  is  your  sister  at 
present  ? — She  is  in  Berlin,  and  my  brother  is  in  Leipzic. — This 
little  woman  is  said  to  be  going  to  marry  the  counseller  N.,  your 
friend  ;  is  it  true  1 — I  have  not  heard  of  it. — What  news  is  there 
of  our  great  army  1 — It  is  said  to  be  lying  (ftef)en*)  between  the 
Rhine  and  the  Weser.  All  that  the  courier  told  me  seeming  very 
probable  (ruafjrfcbctnltcb),  I  went  home  immediately,  wrote  some 
letters,  and  departed  for  Paris.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


HUNDRED  AND  FIRST  LESSON.—  Qnribttt  mib  *rste 
Cection. 

To  begin  to  laugh,  to  weep,  to  2Cnfan$cn  $u  todjen,  gu  roetnen,  $u 

cry,  &c.  fcbrcicn  u.  f.  tv. 

To  pledge.  9Serpfant>en. 

To  pawn.  23erfcgen. 

To  destroy  by  fire  and  sword.       sfflit  Jcutr  unb  ©dfjrocrt  tterfyeeren. 
To  look  out  of  the  window.          2(u£  t>em  JJenftcr  fcben*. 
I  do  not  know  whether  this  so-  %fy  nwt(*  nid)t,  cb  Mefe  ©cfcflfoftaft 

ciety  will  admit  me.  mid)  nrirD  fyaben  ivellen. 

After  ten  o'clock  you  will  not  f  9Zad)  gcftn  lU)r  trcffcn  <StC  mtc^ 

find  me  at  home.  nicbt  mcftc  ^u  £cuife. 

The  weather  is  clearing  up.  £)a$  ^Better  hcitcrt  fid)  auf. 

My  hand  is  asleep.  f  ^ctnc  ^>ant>  ijl  cingcfd)(afen. 

To  smell  of  garlick.  9?ad)  .finebtaud)  ricd)cn*. 

To  smell  of  wine.  9?ad)  SBcin  riccbcn*. 

The  sermon  is  over.  £)ic  ^rcbigt  ift  au^. 

That  is  the  question.  <£$  tfl  t)ic  Jra^c  (c»  fommt  barauf 

an). 

He  has  nearly  fallen.  t  (£T  ware  frcinafte  gcfatlcn. 

I  did  not  find  a  living  soul.          3d)  fabc  frinc  (cbcnbi^c  @cc(c  an^c* 

troffcn. 

To  meet  with.  2f  n  t  r  c  f  f  c  n  *  (Part,  past,  cjctref* 

fen.    Imperf.  traf). 


You  have  the  wrong  key.  Ste  baftcn  ten  unred)ten  (Sdjttiffef. 

He  is  now  on  the  road.  ©r  ift  jc$t  auf  ban  SBcgc. 

Give  me  a  clean  plate,  if  you  ©cben  <Sie  nur  gcfatltgfl  cincn  reU 
please.  ncn  Seller. 


347 

VARIOUS  WAYS  OF  TRANSLATING  THE    VERB,  TO  PUT. 

To  put  one's    hand  into  one's  2>n  tic  Safcfye  9  ret  fen*. 

pocket. 
To  put  one's  son  to  school.          ©ctnen  <Sefjn  in  tie  <Sd)u(e  t  (j  u  n  * 

(b  r  i  n  $  c  n  *). 
To  put  one  out  to  prenticeship  3inianten  in  tie  Scfjte  t  f)  u  n  *. 

(t.u  bind  one  prentice). 

To  put  to  account.  3n  SKcdwung  $  i  c  f)  e  n  *. 

To  put  to  flight.  3n  tic  Jtud)t  i  a  9  e  n  (ctct  \fylaz 

gen*). 

To  ;?M£  one's  hat  on.  ©etncn  £ut  auffe$en. 

To  put  an  end.  Gin  (Snte  m  a  d)  c  n. 

VARIOUS  WAYS  OF  TRANSLATING  THE    VERB,  TO  SET. 

To  set  pen  on  paper  (to  take  the  Die  Jeter  crcjretfen*. 

pen  in  hand). 

To  set  sail.  Unter  (Sc$c{  §  e  f)  e  n  *  (a  b  f  e  9  e  (  n). 

To  set  in  order    (to    regulate,  3n  £>ttnung  b  r  i  n  9  e  n  *. 

settle). 

To  set  something  on  fire.  C£tn>a3  an^iinten  (anftecfen). 

To  set  to  work.  ©id)  an  tie  Xrbctt  m  a  d)  e  n. 

IDIOMATIC    EXPRESSIONS    DEPENDING 

1st,  On  the  use  or  omission  of  an  article. 

1  have  read  Schiller.  3d)  fjafce  ten  @d)i(tct 


He  broke  his  neck.  ©r  (jat  ten  ^>a(5  gebrod)cn. 

Nature  is  the  best  instructress.  3)  i  c  37atur  ift  tic  bcfte  Scfjrennn. 

Man  is  mortal.  £>  e  r  SKenfd)  tft  fterbltd). 

Human  life  is  short.  3)  a  ^  mcnfd)ltd>e  Cebcn  ift  futj. 

Vice  plunges  its  followers  into  £)a$  Safter  fluqt  fcine 

perdition.  in^  3Sertcrbcn. 

Eloquence  is  powerful.  &  i  e  SBcrettfamfett  ift  mddjttg. 

Poetry  is  enchanting.  3)  i  e  ^id)thmft  tft  bc§aubernt» 

Government.  2)  i  c  9?i'gierung. 

History  teaches  us  experience.  2)  i  c  (Skfd)id)te  Uf)tt  un^  ©rfa 

Saint  Paul.  2)  e  r  t)ti(\w  ^autu^ 

Most  of  his  contemporaries.  2)  i  e  mciffcn  fcincc 

In  town.  Sn  t  c  r  ©tatt. 

To  go  to  church.  Sn  t  i  e  .ftirdjc  gefjen*. 

The  East  Indies.  Dfftntien. 

The  West  Indies.  S^cfttnticn. 

Before  the  conclusion  of  the  dra-  SSoc  (Sttticjung 

ma. 

2d,  On  the  use  of  a  pronoun. 

I  take  the  liberty  of  writing'  to  3$  nctjme  mtc  tie  greifjett,  an 
you.  ©te  ^u  fdjreibem 


348 

How  goes  it  1  How  do  you  do?  SBtc  gcr)t'$  3  f)  n  c  n  ? 

Very  well.  (££  gebt  mtr  fcljr  tvefyf. 

I  have  bought  a  hat.  3*  &abe  m  t  r  ctncn  £ut  gefauff.  ^ 

Let  us  go  on  a  party  of  pleasure.  2Btr  roollen  u  n  t  fjeute  etn  £$cr£nu* 

gen  Dcrfftttffcn. 

He  is  quite  at  home.  (Sc  mod>t  ft  d)  *  6  bequenu 

He  is  very  conceited.  <£r  btftet  fid)  met  em. 

I  have  it  in  my  hands.  3d)  babe  e*  in  £ant>en. 

I  have  it  before  my  eyes.  3d)  f)«be  c$  »or  2Cugcn. 

I  consent  tazY,  (willingly  or  with  Sd)  bin  e$  jufrtefcen. 
pleasure). 

3d,  On  the  use  of  a  verb. 

Who  has  said  mass  to-day  ?         SQBcr  foot  F)cutc  tie  Sftcfjc  g  e  (  c  f  c  n  ? 

I  am  with  you  in  a  moment.          3d)  f  C  m  m  C  Qtctcf). 

We  shall  have  a  storm.  2Bit  wcrfccn  eih  (Sewttter  b  e  f  o  m  s 

m  en. 

How  is  that  ?  SODte  9  e  fj  t  ba^  $u  ? 

I  do  not  scruple  to  do  it.  3d)   t  r  o  g  c  !  e  t  n   S3  e  t)  c  n  !  e  n, 


What  do  you  ^AinA;  of  it?  83>a*  fjottcn  €ie 

They  will  not  dissuade  me  from  3d)  ta(fc  nur  t>n^  ntd)t 

it. 

To  buy  a  lottery  ticket.  3«  Me  Scttcrtc  f  C  §  e  n. 

To  fo  ftorw.  3ut  2Be(t  f  c  m  m  c  n  *. 

To  bring  forth.  3ut  SBclt  b  r  t  n  9  e  n  *. 
To  doubt  (to  ca//  in  question).       3n  3a)Ctfc(  g  t  c  fj  c  n  *. 

To  /ay  the  cloth.  5)cn  Stfcft  beef  en. 

To  se£  rfown  (to  compose).  <Sd)riftltd)  a  it  f  f  e  |  c  n. 

4th,  On  the  use  of  a  preposition. 

How  is  your  health  ?  2£tc  (!cf)t  e^  urn  35^  ©cfuntf;ett? 

To  land,  to  go  ashore.  2Cn  $  2ant)  treten*. 

His  affairs  are  in  a  bad  state.  (£$  ftefyt  iibct  m  1  1  tfym  au^. 

I  bet  six  crowns.  3d)  nxtte  u  m  fed)$  Sinter. 

1  forgive  you.  3d)  fyafte  C5  3bnen  5  u  gut. 

To  esteem  one's  self  happy.  ©id)  fur  gh'tcftid)  ^tten. 

To  make  an  enemy  of  some  one.  (Sid)  3cwcml>en  $um  ^etnbc  ntQdftcit. 

I  fear  to  be  burdensome  to  you.  3d)  futd)te  3fynen  ^ut  eaft  gu  fallen. 

OBSERVE    ALSO    THE    FOLLOWING    IDIOMS. 

To  prescribe  milk-diet.  ©  i  e  9}?tlcr)fur  rerort)nen. 

To  copy  fair.  3n$  9?cinc  fdjwben*  (rein  obfc^rei? 

ben*). 

Of  one's  own  accord.  2(ue»  freien  ^tiidfen. 

We  shall  not  live  to  see  it.  SBir  n?er^en  c$  nict)t  erteben. 

It  is  all  over  with  me.  @$  ift  urn  nu'cr;  gefci)e()en. 


349 

My  head  turns  round  (is  giddy).  (S3  wtvb  nut  fdjrotnbttcrj. 

I  faint.  3d)  Kiemnic  cine  £)f)mnad)t. 

I  thought  you  were  a  German  by  3d)   fjtelt  @ic   fttt   etncn   $$0rnefl 

birth.  £)cutfd)cn. 

To  live  on  bad  terms  with  some  llncintg  mit  Senionbcm  tc&en. 

one. 

To  follow  an  unprofitable  trade.  (Sid)  nut  fcreblofcn  &iinficn  ofcgc&cn*. 

This  seems  reasonable.  £)a$  Id'jjt  fid)  fyoten  (fdjctnt  t>ccnunf= 

tig). 

To  lose  one's  reputation.  ©cinen  gutcn  Seamen  writer  en*. 

o/.  SKtttclft  or  ocrmittctft  (go- 

vern the  genitive). 


He  has  succeeded  by  means  of  9Scrmtttc(ft  Sftrc^  SBcijtanbcg  ift  eg 

your  assistance.  ifjm  gctunc^cn. 

We  reached  the  shore  by  means  2Btr  famcn  mtttelft  (t)crmttte(ft)  etnc§ 

of  a  boat.  ^atjnc^  an5  itfcr. 


Towards  (to  meet).         <£  n  t  g  c  9  c  n  (governs  the  dative). 
We  went  to  meet  his  father.         SOBit  gingcn  fctncm  SSatcr  cntgcgen. 

Against  (in  opposition  to).     3  u  tt)  t  b  e  r. 
Never  act  against  the  laws.         $ant(e  me  ten  ©efegcn 

Opposite.  ©egcniiber. 

My  house  is  opposite  his.  SBctn  j^au^  ftc^t  tern  fetnigen 

iiOcr. 

Obs.    The  prepositions  entgegett,  jimrifcer,  and 
iibcr  are  always  placed   after   the    case  which   they 
govern. 

Next  to  (after).  9fc  &  d)  ft  (governs  the  dative). 

Next  to  you  I  like  him  best.        3?d'd)ft  Sfacn  ift  er  mir  bet  Sictfte. 


Together  with  (besides,  inclu-  Sftc&ft/  fammt  (govern  the  dative). 
ding). 

He  lost  the  ducat  together  with  (5c  Ktfet  ben  Uneaten  fammt  ben 
the  crowns,  sold  the  garden  £t)n(ern,  ttcrfaufte  ben  (Garten 
including  the  house.  ncOft  betn  jg>aufe. 

If  I  were  now  to  question  you  as  SKcnn  id)  (Sic  jc£t  fragtc/  tt?te  id)  in 
I  used  to  do  at  the  beginning  unfern  crftcn  Cccttoncn  ^u  than 
of  our  lessons,  what  would  pflegtc  (tx>te  id)  nnfnng^  gu  t^un 
you  answer!  Pfl^tc),  n;a^  n?urben  8te  ants 

roortcn  ? 


350 

We  found  these  questions  at  first  ££tr  fmrtcn  nnfnngS  biefe  g'vogcn 
rather  ridiculous,  but  full  of  etwas  ladbcrlid)  ;'aflctn  Dell  23cv? 
confidence  in  your  method,  we  trancn  ouf  Sfyrc  2d)tart,  beams 
answered  as  well  as  the  small  tvortcten  rwr  fciefelbcn,  fo-gut  eg 
quantity  of  words  and  rules  we  une  ter  Heine  SScrratf)  pen  3£crs 
then  possessed  allowed  us.  tern  unt  S^egeln  ($)rinctpten),  ten 

nnt  tcmicils  Ijattcn,  gvftattetc  (ct« 

laubte). 

We  were  not  long  in  finding  out  2£tt  fyafon  bait  gcmcrft,  tap  tie 
that  those  questions  were  cal-  grcigen  tnrciuf  bercdjnct  woven, 
culated  to  ground  us  in  the  un$  turd)  tic  rciterfpmbenten 
rules,  and  to  exercise  us  in  TCntroertcn,  tic  tx>it  gcjrmmgcn 
conversation,  by  the  contradic-  nxircn,  tarouf  gu  gebcn,  tie  tyrin; 
tory  answers  we  were  obliged  ctpien  (3?e$e(n)  etn^ufct)arfen  unb 
to  make.  un$  in  ter  Unter!)flttun0  $u  (iben. 

We  can  now  almost  keep  up  a  Sc|t  fonnen  tt)tr  un^  Oetnn^e  rclU 
conversation  in  German.  fcnmien  auf  fccutfd)  (im  2)cutfd)cn) 

unterbntten. 

This  phrase  does  not  seem  to  us  £>iefet  ©o|  fc^ctnt  un^  md)t  tcgtfcft 
logically  correct.  rtd)ttc\. 

We  should  be  ungrateful  if  we  £Btt  nxiren  untonftar,  ruenn  nrir 
allowed  such  an  opportunity  cine  fc  fcbcnc  ©elcgenbctt  Dcrbeis 
to  escape  without  expressing  gefyen  licpcn,  cbne  Sbnen  unfcrc 
our  liveliest  gratitude  to  you.  leb()aftej!e  3)anfbarfett  ju  be^etcjen. 

In  all  cases,  at  all  events.  7(uf  jeten  Jail. 

The  native,  ter  (Stnqebovne ; 

the  insurmountable  difficulty,       tie  unubemnntftcbe  (^dbtrtertQfeit ; 

this  energetic  language,  ttefe  cncrgifcbc  (fraftpcllc)  <Spracl)C ; 

the  acknowledgment,  tie  @rfcnnt(id)Ccit  ;* 

the  gratitude,   the   acknowledg-  tie  2)anfbaiiett 
ment, 

EXERCISES.       240. 

Will  you  drink  a  cup  of  coffee  1 — I  thank  you,  I  do  not  like 
coffee. — Then  you  will  drink  a  glass  of  wine  1 — I  have  just  drunk 
some. — Let  us  take  a  walk. — Willingly  ;  but  where  shall  we  go 
to  1 — Come  with  me  into  my  aunt's  garden  ;  we  shall  there  find  a 
very  agreeable  society. — I  believe  it  (£>a*  gtoubc  id)  gern)  ;  but  the 
question  is  whether  this  agreeable  society  will  admit  me. — You 
are  welcome  every  where. — What  ails  you,  my  friend  ? — How  do 
you  like  (£Btc  fdjmectt  S^ncn)  that  wine? — I  like  it  very  well  (herr* 
Ucb)  ;  but  I  have  drunk  enough  ($ut  ©cniigc  ctet  genug)  of  it. — 
Drink  once  more. — No,  too  much  is  unwholesome  (ungcfunt)  ;  I 
know  my  constitution  (tic  97atur). — Do  not  fall. — What  is  the  mat- 
ter with  you  ? — I  do  not  know  ;  but  my  head  is  giddy  ;  I  think  I 
am  fainting. — I  think  so  also,  for  you  look  almost  like  a  dead  per- 
son.— What  countryman  are  you  "? — I  am  a  Frenchman. — You 

a  CfriCitntltctjfett  is  derived  from  erfennett,  to  acknowledge.  £anf&ar!ctt 
expresses  both  gratitude  and  acknowledgment. 


351 

speak  German  so  well  that  I  took  you  for  a  German  by  birth. — You 
are  jesting. — Pardon  me.  I  do  not  jest  at  all. — How  long  have  you 
been  in  Germany  ] — A  few  days. — In  earnest] — You  doubt  it  per- 
haps, because  I  speak  German  ;  I  knew  it  before  I  came  to  Ger- 
many.— How  did  you  manage  to  learn  it  so  well  ? — I  did  like  the 
prudent  starling  (ter  ©taar). 

Tell  me,  why  you  are  always  on  bad  terms  with  your  wife  (Me 
gran)  1  and  why  do  you  engage  in  unprofitable  trades'? — It  costs 
so  much  trouble  ((£$  fofU't  fc  fid  932iif)C)  to  get  an  employment  (big 
man  cin — bcfenwit). — And  you  have  a  good  one  and  neglect  it  (c<> 
f)tntanfc(5cn  ctcr  »crnad)tafficjen).  Do  you  not  think  of  the  future  ? 
— Now  allow  me  to  speak  also  (3^£t  toffcn  ©tc  nitd)  aud)  rctcn). 
All  you  have  just  said  seems  reasonable,  but  it  is  not  my  fault  (c$ 
tjl  md)t  nictnc  (Scbulfc),  if  I  have  lost  my  reputation  ;  it  is  that  of  my 
wife  (twine  $rcw  ift  @d)utb  fcaran)  ;  she  has  sold  my  finest  clothes, 
my  rings,  and  my  gold  watch.  I  am  full  of  debts  (roll  Scfoulbcn 
fcin*),  and  I  do  not  know  what  to  do  (rociSid)  onfangcn  ctcr  tf)im  fell). 
—I  will  not  excuse  (cntfcbultigi'n)  your  wife  ;  but  I  know  that  you 
have  also  contributed  (l>cttra$en*)  to  your  ruin  (t>as  83crtcrbcn). 
Women  are  generally  good  when  they  are  left  so. 

241.     DIALOGUE. 

The  master.  If  I  were  now  to  ask  you  such  questions  as  I  did 
at  the  beginning  of  our  lessons,  (viz.)  Have  you  the  hat  which 
my  brother  has  1  am  I  hungry  ?  has  he  the  tree  of  my  brother's 
garden  1  &c.  what  would  you  answer? 

The  pupils.  We  are  obliged  (gc$nnmgcn)  to  confess  that  we 
found  these  questions  at  first  rather  ridiculous  ;  but  full  of  confi- 
dence in  your  method,  we  answered  as  well  as  the  small  quantity 
of  words  and  rules  we  then  possessed  allowed  us.  We  were  in 
fact  not  long  in  finding  out  that  these  questions  were  calculated  to 
ground  us  in  the  rules,  and  to  exercise  us  in  conversation,  by  the 
contradictory  answers  we  were  obliged  to  make.  But  now  that  we 
can  almost  keep  up  a  conversation  in  the  energetic  language  which 
you  teach  us,  we  should  answer :  It  is  impossible  that  we  shouM 
have  the  same  hat  which  your  brother  has,  for  two  persons  cannot 
have  one  and  the  same  thing.  To  (2fuf  with  accus.)  the  second 
question  we  should  answer,  that  is  impossible  for  us  to  know 
whether  you  are  hungry  or  not.  As  to  the  last,  we  should  say  : 
that  there  is  more  than  one  tree  in  a  garden,  and  in  telling  us  that 
he  has  the  tree  of  the  garden,  the  phrase  does  not  seem  to  us  logi- 
cally correct.  At  all  events  we  should  be  ungrateful  if  we  allowed 
such  an  opportunity  to  escape,  without  expressing  our  liveliest 
gratitude  to  you  for  the  trouble  you  have  taken  in  arranging  those 
wise  combinations  (Huge  £Be$e  ctnfctyciqcn*  ctcr  (Sombinntioncn  ma.; 
d>cn),  to  ground  us  almost  imperceptibly  (bctnobc  unmcrf(icb)  in  the 
rules,  and  exercise  us  in  the  conversation  of  a  language  which, 
taught  in  any  other  way,  presents  (tarlneten*)  to  foreigners,  and 
even  to  natives,  almost  insurmountable  difficulties.  (See  end  of 
Lesson  XXXIV.) 


352 

HUNDRED  AND  SECOND  LESSON.—  fjunbert  xtnb 

Cation. 


To  avoid  death,  with  which  he  Urn  tern  Sefce  $u  entgcljcn,  tcr  tnm 
was  threatened,  he  took  to  K'fcrftnnt)  (rueimt  cr  betvelu't 
flight.  aw),  nabm  (crgriff)  cr  tic  gludjt. 

I  warrant  you  (I  answer  for  it),    f  3d)  ftchc  Sbncri  tafiiv. 

So  goes  the  world.  {  ©o  cjcl)t  eg  in  tec  2Be(t. 

But  must  one  not  be  a  fool  to  tfbcr  nutptc  man  nicbt  em  9?arr  fcin, 
remain  in  a  place  bombarded  roam  man  an  cincm  pen  Ungnrn 
by  Hungarians  1  bcmOorDtrtcn  £>rte  blciben  roelirc  ? 

The  deuce  take  the  Hungarians  f  *Dap  tic  ltnC|arn,  nx(d)C  fcinc 
who  give  no  quarter  !  (Snabc  gcOcn  (n>c(d)C  gar  ntdjt 

fd)cncn)/  betni  Jpcnfcc  wcircn  ! 

Will  you  be  my  guest  1  90?c(Tcn  Sic  nu'tn  ©aft  fctn  ? 

Will  you  dine  with  me  1  Swollen  <Stc  mit  niir  cfj'cn  ? 

r  3>cnianbcn  311  ©aft  bitten*. 
To  invite  some  one  to  dinner.  <  Scmanfccn    ^um    9}Jtttogc(rcn   ctn 

C     ten*. 
I  have   ordered   your   favourite  f  Scb  f)abc  3^c  Cctbfpctfc 

dish.  taffcn. 

There  is   nothing  like   a  good  (5$  gcht  nid)t5  itbcr  ctn 
piece  of  roast  meat.  JBratCll. 

The  roast  meat,  tcr  2^raton,  t>a^  ©cbratcnc  ; 

the  guilty,  t>cr  Scbulfci^c  ; 

the  innocent,  tcr  llnfcbulitc^c  ; 

a  good   (jovial)  companion,  ctn  (nfHgcr  iBrubcr  ; 
the  husband,  t)cr  9)?ann  (@l;cmann). 

I  an  ctncr  ©nd)e  F) 
To  be  disgusted  with  a  thing.-?  (Stncv  (Sacbc  (genitive)  uOcr'Dritffig 


.<  Gtner  ©ad 
(      fctn*. 


Who  hazards  gains.  )  f  gvifd)  gcnxiQt  ift  featb  gcivcnncn. 

Nothing  venture  nothing  have.  £  (<Sprid)WOrt.) 

To  strike  (in  speaking  of  light-  f  (Stnfd/tacjcn*. 
ning). 

The  lightning  has  struck.  f  @So  tjnt  ctngcfd)(aqon. 

The  lightning  struck  the  ship.      f  i)cr  5B(i§  fcblua,  'ing  ^cfetff. 

While  my  brother  was  on  the  2C(6  mctn    iBn^iT  auf  tcr   cffcncn 

open  sea  a  violent  storm  rose  (Sec  (otk't  auf  tern  r)d)cn  SOtocvc) 

unexpectedly  ;    the    lightning  njar,  crbcO  ftcr)  (fain  unrvrmutfK't) 

struck  the  ship  which  it  set  ctn    (jcftigcr    ©turm  ;    tcr    93lt| 

on  fire,  and   the  whole  crew  fcfyfug  ins  ©cb'tff/  tag  cr  on^tintcs 

jumped  into  the  sea  to  save  tc,     tint)    tag    c\an?c    (Sd)tff$t>cfl| 

themselves  by  swimming.  fprana  (ftur^te  fid))  ing  9}iccr,  um 

fid)  nut  ^d)ivtnmicn  511  vcttcn. 


353 

He  was  struck  with  fright,  (Sr  wurbe  tton  ^cftrcdfcn  fccfattcn 
when  he  saw  that  the  fire  (crfcfyrctf  l)cftig),  al$  cr  faf),  tag 
was  gaining  on  all  sides.  tag  Jcuer  ouf  alien  ^ettcn  urn 

fid)  griff- 

He  did  not  know  what  to  do.       j  (5r  n>u£te  ntd)t,  wo$u  cr  fid)  cnts 

fd)ltepcn  fellte. 

C  (5r  mecfytc  nad)ft'nncn,  rwc  cr  wofltc. 
He  reflected  m  vain.  ^  &  f(lnn  ^^  ^ 

In  vain.  SBftgefttd),  rergefcenS,  umfonfh 

To  reflect  (to  hesitate).          <£tcl)  fccfinncn*   (Part,  past,  fccfens 

ncn). 
He  hesitated  no  longer.  f  (5r  kfann  fid)  ntc^t  (anger. 

I  have  not  heard  of  him  yet.        3d)  ^atc  ncd)  !cinc  9?ad)nd)t  »cn 

ifjm  crf)oltcn, 

My  friend  who  was  present  told  9)?ctn  gramt>,  n?c(d)cr  ^uc\e^cn  n?ar, 
me  all  this.  f;at  mtr 


What  would  have  hecome  of  <  SQ&ic  n?arc  c$  nur  crgan^cn  ? 
me  ?  \  2Ba^  ware  au^  mtr  cjcnJerfccn  ? 


A    FEW    MORE    IDIOMS. 

It  is  a  fortnight  (a  week)  since  SStcqe^n  (ad)t)  Sa^c  tancj  6m 

I  was  out.  nid)t  au^cgnngen. 

Will  you  not  go  out  to-day  ?        ©tc  rcerben  tccl)  ^cutc 
I  would  not  importune  you.          Set)   will   3fynen  nid)t 

fallen. 

He  has  nothing  to  live  upon.        (Sr  fjcit  nid)t^  ^u  Ic6cn. 
I  board  and  lodge  him.  3d)  gcOe  i()m  frcicn  Sifd)  unt 

nung. 
The  mystery  will  be  discovered.  £)tc  ©adje  it)trb  fcljcn  an  ten  Sag 

fcmmcn. 

They  are  going  to  lay  the  cloth.  Wlan  tvirt>  talb  ben  Sifc^  becfcn. 
He  lives  high  (feasts,  eats,  and  (Sr  tf't  unb  trinft  gut. 

drinks  well). 

Have  you  done  ?  ©tnb  ©tc  fertig  ? 

That  is  his  business.  £)a  mag  er  gufeben. 

To  do  one's  best.  (gein  TTeuperfte^  tl)un*. 

He  has  assisted  me.  (Sr  tft  mir  gur  ^)anb  gc.gangen. 

We  must  not  be  too  particular.     SBtr  mujfcn  c^  fo  gcnau  hid)t  nc§- 

men. 
He  is  not  to  be  blamed  for  not  @S  tft  ifjm  nid)t  511  t>crbcn!cn/  bap  cr 

doing  it.  c$  ntcbt  tbut. 

The  book  is  out  of  print  ;  it  was  £a$  S3ud)  tft  ocrgrtffen  ;  c^  war  tci 

publised  by  N.  97.  serlegt. 

Will  you  please  to  take  a  plain  Swollen    (£tc    mtt    ctncm    ctnfacften 
supper  with  us  ]  TlOcnbcffcn  frci  un^  furltci)  (obcr 

t)crltc(>)  nefymcn  ? 


354 

The  general  has  been  defeated  -Set  -Jcltfjcrr  tft  aufS  &aupt  Qcfd)(az 
and  the  army  routed.  gen  unt>  tie  2(rmec  fitec  t)cn  £cws 

fen  gavcrfcn  wcrtcn. 

The  angel,  ter  <5ncjd ; 

the  masterpiece,  tci?  93cetfterftuc? ; 

her  physiognomy,  ibrc  @H'fid)t$l>Utung ; 

the  expression,  tcr  2(ustrucf ; 

her  shape,  tl>rc  (Skftolt ; 

the  action,  tie  £cmt>lung  ; 

the  look,  tor  2(ntlic! ; 

the  contentment,  tie  Sufrictcnfjctt ; 

the  respect,  tie  <£l)rfurd)t ; 

the  admiration,  tic  ^erwintcruncj ; 

the  charm,  the  grace,  tie  2(nmutb  ; 
the  demeanour,  the  manners,     ta$  SBcncfymcn  ; 

thin  (Blender),  fd)lam?; 

fascinating  (engaging),  ctnncbment ; 

ravishingly,  gum  (£nt$uclcn  ; 

uncommonly  well,  gnn$  portrcff(id) ; 

perfectly  well,  rcllfenmicn. 

Her  look  inspires  respect  and  3b?  2(nbltcf  flb'ftt  (£f)rfurd)t  unb  $3t: 
admiration.  nnwfrerung  ein. 

Allow  me,  my  lady,  to  introduce  (Svlnukn  Sie,  cuiatt$e  Jrciu,  tap 
to  you  Mr.  G.,  an  old  friend  id)  Srmen  .^errn  rcn  ®.  cits  etnen 
of  our  family.  olten  greunt  mcinc^  ^aufcg  »crs 

fletle. 

I  am  delighted  to  become  ac-  3d)  freue  mid)  fefc,  metfc  £ett,  Sftri 
quainted  with  you.  2>efanntfd)aft  gu  mod)cn. 

I  shall  do  all  in  my  power  to  3d)  wcrte  nlle^  932ocjttcbc  tf)un,  um 
deserve  your  good  opinion.  mid)  Sftrcr  ©eivcgenfieit  iviictig 

gu  mncbcn. 

Allow  me,  ladies,  to  introduce  to  (Srtaubcn  <Ste,  meinc  ^amen,  tng 
you  Mr.  B.,  whose  brother  has  id)  Sfoncn  ^errn  v^cn  S3»  fcrftollc^ 
rendered  such  eminent  ser-  tef[v.n  prater  Sbrem  better  fo 
vices  to  your  cousin.  cnrojk  Dtenfte  geleiftet  bot. 

How  happy  we  are  to  see  you  at  2Bte  febr  fint)  ruir  crfrcut,  ^ic  tci 
our  house  !  iw^  gu  fefjcn  ! 

EXERCISES.      242. 

Why  do  you  hide  yourself? — I  am  obliged  to  hide  myself,  for  it 
is  all  over  with  me  if  my  father  hears  that  I  have  taken  to  flight ;  but 
there  was  no  other  means  (fcin  anteretf  9)Jtttel  ubrtcj  ofcer  ntdit  nnter^ 
Hicg(td)  fcin*)  to  avoid  death,  with  which  I  was  threatened. — You 
have  been  very  wrong  in  leaving  (ivrtoffcn*)  your  regiment,  and 
your  father  will  be  very  angry  (febr  bcfe  ctet  ^crntg  fetn*)  when  he 
hears  of  it,  I  warrant  you. — But  must  one  not  be  a  fool  to  remain 
in  a  place  bombarded  by  Hungarians  1 — The  deuce  take  the  Hun- 
garians, who  give  no  quarter  ! — They  have  beaten  and  robbed  (aufc 
Jrtuntcrn)  me,  and  (never)  in  my  life  have  I  done  them  any  harm. — 


355 

So  goes  the  world,  the  innocent  very  often  suffer  for  the  guilty. — 
Did  you  know  Mr.  Zweifel  ] — I  did  know  him,  for  he  often  worked 
for  our  house. — One  of  my  friends  has  just  told  me  that  he  has 
drowned  himself,  and  that  his  wife  has  blown  out  her  brains  with 
a  pistol  (Lesson  XCV.). — I  can  hardly  believe  it;  for  the  man 
whom  you  are  speaking  of  was  always  a  jovial  companion,  and 
good  companions  do  not  drown  themselves. — His  wife  is  even  said 
to  have  written  on  the  table  before  she  killed  herself:  "  Who  haz- 
ards gains  ;  I  have  nothing  more  to  lose,  having  lost  my  good  hus- 
band. I  am  disgusted  with  this  world,  where  there  is  nothing 
constant  (bcftanbtg)  except  (at?)  inconstancy  (t>ic  Uubcfrantt^ctt)." 

213. 

Will  you  be  my  guest1? — I  thank  you  ;  a  friend  of  mine  has  in- 
vited me  to  dinner:  he  has  ordered  my  favourite  dish. — WThat  dish 
is  it] — It  is  milk-food. — As  for  me  (;i£a$  mid)  nnbelangt),  1  do  not 
like  milk- food  :  there  is  nothing  like  a  good  piece  of  roast  beef  or 
veal  (:0tint^'  et>er  &a(b*bratt'n). — What  has  become  of  your  young- 
est brother  1 — He  has  suffered  shipwreck  ingoing  to  America. — 
You  must  give  me  an  account  of  that  (C£r$at)U*n  @ic  nut  food)  t>a*). — 
Very  willingly.  Beingr  on  the  open  sea,  a  great  storm  arose.  The 
lightning  struck  the  ship  and  set  it  on  fire.  The  crew  jumped  into 
the  sea  to  save  themselves  by  swimming.  My  brother  knew  not 
what  to  do,  having  never  learnt  to  swim.  He  reflected  in  vain ; 
he  found  no  means  to  save  his  life.  He  was  struck  with  fright 
when  he  saw  that  the  fire  was  gaining  on  all  sides.  He  hesitated 
no  longer,  and  jumped  into  the  sea. — Well  (57un),  what  has  be- 
come of  him  1 — I  do  not  know,  having  not  heard  of  him  yet. — But 
who  told  you  all  that  1 — My  nephew,  who  was  there,  and  who  saved 
himself. — As  you  are  talking  of  your  nephew  (£)a  (£ic  qcrabe  t)Ca 
Sbrcm  97cffcn  fprcdvn),  where  is  he  at  present? — He  is  in  Italy. — 
Is  it  long  since  you  heard  from  him  ] — I  have  received  a  letter  from 
him  to-day. — What  does  he  write  to  you  ] — He  writes  to  me  that 
he  is  going  to  marry  a  young  woman  who  brings  (jubnnflfn*)  him 
a  hundred  thousand  crowns. — Is  she  handsome1? — Handsome  as 
an  angel  ;  she  is  a  master-piece  of  nature.  Her  physiognomy  is 
mild  and  full  of  expression ;  her  eyes  are  the  finest  in  (sen)  the 
world,  and  her  mouth  is  charming  (atlcrltebft).  She  is  neither  too 
tall  nor  too  short :  her  shape  is  slender ;  all  her  actions  are  full  of 
grace,  and  her  manners  very  engaging.  Her  look  inspires  respect 
and  admiration.  She  has  also  a  great  deal  of  wit  (Ccr  flSerftanD)  ; 
she  speaks  several  languages,  dances  uncommonly  well,  and  sings 
ravishingly.  My  nephew  finds  in  her  but  one  defect  (t>cr  -JcbU'r). — 
And  what  is  that  defect] — She  is  affected  (inacbt  2(nfprudx)' — There 
is  nothing  perfect  in  the  world.  How  happy  you  are  ('JBte  flliicHid) 
ftnt)  v£tc)  !  you  are  rich,  you  have  a  good  wife,  pretty  children,  a 
fine  house,  and  all  you  wish  (for). — Not  all,  my  friend. — What  do 
you  desire  more  ] — Contentment ;  for  you  know  that  he  only  is 
happy  who  is  contented.  (See  end  of  Lesson  XXXIV.) 


356 


HUNDRED  AND  THIRD  LESSON.  —  fjnnbert  unb 
brUte  Action. 

GENERAL    REMARKS    ON    GERMAN    CONSTRUCTION. 

The  fundamental  principle  of  German  construction 
is  this :  the  word  which,  after  the  subject,  expresses 
the  principal  idea,  is  always  placed  after  those  words 
which  only  express  accessory  ideas.  It  has  the  advan- 
tage of  attracting  and  of  keeping  up  and  increasing 
the  attention  to  the  end  of  the  phrase. 

The  word  which  least  defines  the  subject  is  placed 
at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  then  come  those 
words  which  define  it  in  a  higher  degree,  so  that  the 
word  which  most  determines  the  meaning  of  the 
phrase  is  at  the  end. 

According  to  this  we  place  the  words  in  the  follow- 
ing order: 

1st,  The  adverb  of  negation  tticfyt,  when  it  relates 
to  the  verb  of  the  subject.  Ex.  Sctn  SSatcr  fccantttwtct 

1 
ntcinen  S3rtef  ntcfyt,  his  father  does  not  answer  my  letter. 

2d,  The  other  adverbs  relating  to  the  verb  of  the 

1        2 

subject.    Ex.  @ie  fcfyretfceit  3^en  SSrief  wcfyt  gut,  you  do 
not  write  your  letter  well. 

3d,  The  preposition  with  the  case  it  governs,  or  in 
its  stead  the  adverbs  of  place :  ba,  fyter,  and  their  com- 
pounds :  bafyer,  bafyin,  as  well  as  the  demonstrative  ad- 
verbs compounded  of  ba  and  fyter,  as :  bamit,  batten, 

1 
fyiertwt,  barauf,  baruber,  &c.    Ex.  @r  antwortete  ittdjt 

2         3 
fyoflirf)  aitf  meuteit  SSrtef,  he  did  not  answer  my  letter 

1          2  3 

politely.     @r  cuttrcortete  nicfyt  fcfynctf  bavauf,  he  did  not 
answer  it  quickly. 

Ofrs.  When  the  verb  of  the  subject  has  several  ca- 
ses with  their  prepositions,  that  which  defines  it  the 
most  exactly  follows  all  the  others,  the  determination 
of  time  always  preceding  that  of  place.  Ex.  £r  trat 


357 

roegen  feiner  Unfdjirfb  nrit  froljlidjem  @5ej7d)te  Dor  ba3  ©eridjt 
(which  defines  most  exactly),  on  account  of  his  inno- 
cence he  appeared  before  his  judges  with  a  joyful 
countenance.  £er  ©efhtyttofe  blteban  btefem  £age  (time), 
auf  ber  fd)onften  gutr  (place),  bet  alter  gdjonljeit  ber  ret'jcn* 
ben  5Ratur  (place)  bennod)  efyne  alle  Sntpjtnbung  (which  de- 
fines most  exactly),  the  insensible  man,  remained  on 
that  day  without  the  least  emotion,  though  in  the  most 
beautiful  field  and  surrounded  by  all  the  beauty  of 
charming  nature.  1 

4th,  The  predicate  of  the  subject.     Ex.  3d)  &W  nkf)t 

2         3  4 

intnter  mit  fetner  Sfattoort  jufrtcben,  I  am  not  always 
satisfied  with  his  answer. 

5th,  The  separable  particles  of  compound  verbs,  as 
well  as  all  those  words  which  are  considered  as  separ- 
able particles,  inasmuch  as  they  complete  the  sense  of 
the  verb  (Obs.  A,  Lesson  LXVIL),  as:  au$tt)enbig 
lernen,  to  learn  by  heart;  in  3(d)t  nefymen*,  to  take 
care ;  ju  9D?tttag  ejfen*,  to  dine,  &c.  Ex.  SOBannn  gtng 

123  5 

er  nid)t  ofter  mit  3I)nnt  an^  ?  why  did  he  not  go  out  with 
you  oftener  ? 

6th,  The  verb  in  the  infinitive.     Ex.  &  fann  Sfyltcn 
1223  6 

nid)t  tmmer  fdjneK  auf  3fyven  S3rfef  anttnorten,  he  cannot 
always  answer  your  letter  quickly. 

7th,  The  past  participle  or  the  infinitive,  when  they 
form  with  the  auxiliary  a  compound  tense  of  the  verb. 

1223  7 

Ex.  @r  fyat  mir  ntd)t  tmmer  fyoflid)  baranf  geanm>ortet,  he 
has  not  always  answered  it  politely.  &  nnrb  S'jnen 

1223  7 

ntd)t  tmmer  fo  fyofltd)  anf  3f)ren  93rtef  antworten. 

%*  These  remarks  apply  to  the  natural  order  of 
ideas;  but  the  German  language  is  so  much  subject  to 
inversions,  that  we  must  sometimes  deviate  from  them, 
according  to  the  stress  which  we  wish  to  put  on  cer- 
tain words,  or  the  strength  and  importance  we  wish 
to  give  them  in  the  sentence.  See  the  following 


358     % 

RECAPITULATION  OF  THE  RULES  OF  SYNTAX 
OR  CONSTRUCTION. 

1st,  When  the  adjective  which  precedes  the  noun 
is  accompanied  by  some  words  that  relate  to,  or  define 
it,  they  are  placed  immediately  before  it.  Ex.  ©ne 
gegen  3^bermann  t)ofltd)e  Sran,  a  woman  polite  towards 
everybody.  3fyt  @ie  fyerjlid)  ltebenbe$  $inb,  your  child 
that  loves  you  from  all  his  heart.  (Lesson  XCIII.) 

2d,  Personal  pronouns,  when  not  in  the  nomina- 
tive, as  well  as  reflexive  pronouns  (Lesson  LXX.)  are 
placed  after  the  verb.  Ex.  3d)  Itebe  £td),  I  love  thee. 
&  Itebt  mid),  he  loves  me.  3d)  nwnfcfye  3t)nen  einen  gnten 
5Korgen,  I  wish  you  a  good  morning.  S0?eine  £d)tt>efler 
befutbet  (Td)  tt>ol)(,  my  sister  is  well. 

Obs.  A.  When  the  accusative  is  a  personal  pro- 
noun, it  precedes  the  dative,  if  not,  it  follows  it.  Ex. 
©eben  @ie  me  in  em  83rnber  ba3  83  nd)?  do  you 
give  the  book  to  my  brother  ?  3d)  gebe  e  $  i  fy  m,  I  do 
give  it  to  him.  9DJad)en  ®ie  3fyrer  gran  ©emaljlinn  metne 
@mpfel)(ung,  present  my  compliments  to  your  lady.  3d) 
gab  etf  bem  SSater,  I  gave  it  to  the  father.  (Lesson 
XXVIII.)  But  if  we  wish  to  put  a  particular  stress  on 
the  dative,  we  must  put  it  after  the  accusative.  Ex. 
(Sr  er$cif)(te  bie  ganje  ©efdjirfjte  feiner  Srau,  he  told  his  wife 
the  whole  history.  Here  the  whole  strength  of  the 
sentence  falls  on  the  words  feiner  $ran* 

O&s.  B.  When  the  case  of  the  verb  is  a  genitive, 
it  is  always  preceded  by  the  accusative,  whether  a  per- 
sonal pronoun  or  not.  Ex.  3d)  t>erjTd)ere  ©e  meiner 
£;>od)ad)timg,  I  assure  you  of  my  esteem.  SERan  fyat  ben 
©efangenen  be£  23erbred)en3  itbentnefen,  the  prisoner  has 
been  convicted  of  the  crime.  (Lesson  LXIV.) 

3d,  The  infinitive  and  past  participle  are  always 
preceded  by  their  cases,  or  in  other  words,  the  infini- 
tive and  past  participle  always  stand  at  the  end  of  the 
sentence.  Ex.  3d)  tt>erbe  morgen  anf$  ?anb  gefyen,  I  shall 
go  into  the  country  to-morrow.  &  i\i  gefiern  bal)in  ge* 
gangen,  he  went  thither  yesterday.  3d)  rcerbe  3ftnen  ba3 
S3nd)  geben,  I  shall  give  you  the  book.  &  tjat  e$  mir  ge^ 
fagt,  he  has  told  it  to  me.  (Lessons  XXIV.  and  XLI1.) 


359 

Obs.  A.  When  two  or  several  infinitives,  two  past 
participles,  or  a  past  participle  and  an  infinitive  de- 
pend on  each  other,  the  first  in  English  becomes  the 

1  2 

last  in  German.     Ex.  @ic  fcmtett  il)tt  fpredjen  fyoren,  you 

21  12 

may  hear  him  speak ;  id)  tterbe  fycitte  nid)t  fpajieren  gefyett 

3  321 

f  onnett,  I  shall  not  be  able  to  go  a  walking  to-day ;  feilt 

12  2*1 

£an3    iff  fcerfauft  tocrben,  his  house    has  been    sold. 
(Lesson  LXXI.) 

Obs.  B.  The  two  infinitives  or  participles,  &c.,  not 
depending  on  each  other,  follow  the  English  construc- 

1  2 

tion.    Ex.  9Q?cm  ntu£  ©ett  liebett  unb  fcereljren,  we  must 

1  2 

love  and  honour  God ;  fte  tt>irb  geliebt  unb  gelobr,  she  is 

1  2 

loved  and  praised.     (Lesson  LXXI.) 

4th,  The  verb  of  the  subject  (in  compound  tenses 
the  auxiliary)  is  removed  to  the  end  when  the  phrase 
begins,  (a)  with  a  conjunction,  as :  a(£,  ba,  ob,  ba$, 
tt>etf,  tt>entt,a  &c.  (b)  with  a  relative  pronoun,  as :  ber, 
toeldjer,  tt>err  meaning  he  who,  and  ttx*3,  that  which  ;  (c) 
after  the  relative  adverb,  VDO,  and  all  the  prepositions 
combined  with  it,  as :  tt>oburdf>,  toontit,  toofcon,  &c.  Ex. 
2lf^  id)  (Te  jam  erflen  5>?ate  faf),  when  I  saw  her  for  the 
first  time.  2tf)  ttnmfcfjte,  bag  er  mitgutge,  I  wish  he  would 
go  with  us.  @r  liebt  Sic  niefjt,  n>ei(  @ie  il)n  bcletbigt  J)a^ 
ben,  he  does  not  love  you,  because  you  have  offended 
him.  SBarten  gie,  bi£  id)  mein  ©e(b  befcmme,  wait  till  I 
receive  my  money.  SBBentt  id)  e^  gemugt  hatte,  had  I 
known  that.  ?efen  ©te  ba^  SSud),  n)e(d)e^  id)  3()iien  gelie^ 
fyen  I)abc?  do  you  read  the  book  wrhich  I  have  lent 
you  ?  SBifen  ^©ic  nidjr,  n>o  er  gen>efen  iff  ?  do  you  not 
know  where  he  has  been  ?  Gormen  Sie  mtr  tttd)t  fctgen, 
tt>a£  au^  i{)tn  gen>orben  iff  ?  can  you  not  tell  me  what 

•  For  conjunctions  which  do  not  remove  the.  verb  to  the  end  of  the  phrase, 
see  Lesson  LXI. 


360 


has  become  of  him  ?  Sag  ijl  eg  efcen,  toobnrrf)  cr  einen 
fo  grogen  ©djaben  erlitten  fyat,  n>ofcon  er  jTcfy  fd)tt>erlid)  Dieter 
erfyolen  ttnrb,  it  is  precisely  that,  by  which  he  has  sus- 
tained such  a  loss,  as  he  will  find  it  difficult  to  recover 
from.  (Lesson  XL  VII  ) 

Obs.  A.  When  a  proposition  in  which  the  verb  is 
required  at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  contains  one  of 
the  auxiliaries  fein  and  tt>erben,  or  one  of  the  verbs 
biirfen,  fonnen,  lafien,  miififen,  foKen,  woffen,  joined  to  an 
infinitive,  those  take  their  place  immediately  after  the 
infinitive.  Ex.  28enn  @te  bag  ^)ferb  faufen  Gotten,  if  you 
wish  to  buy  the  horse.  (Lesson  LXIX.)  But  when 
not  governed  by  a  conjunctive  word,  they  stand  before 
the  infinitive  and  its  case.  Ex.  SOBotten  @ie  bag  ^ferb 
faufen  ?  Do  you  wish  to  buy  the  horse  ? 

Obs.  B.  Incidental  or  explanatory  propositions  are 
placed  immediately  after  the  word  which  they  define, 
or  at  the  end  of  the  principal  proposition.  Ex.  @g  ifl 
fefyroer,  einen  $einb,  todcfyer  toacfyfam  ijl,  ju  itberfattert,  or  : 
eg  ifl  fd)tt>err  einen  ^etnb  ju  uberfatten,  n)elc^er  tt)ad)fam  ijl* 
(Lesson  LX.) 

Obs.  C.  When  there  are  at  the  end  of  a  sentence 
two  infinitives,  two  past  participles,  or  an  infinitive 
and  a  past  participle,  the  verb  which  the  conjunction 
requires  at  the  end,  may  stand  either  before  or  after 
them.  Ex.  9Bcnn  @ie  S^re  Section  werben  (liibtrt  fyafcen, 
or:  (lubtrt  t)aben  werbcn,  fo  n>erbe  id)  3l)nen  fagen,  n>ag  gie 
git  tl)ltn  l)aben,  when  you  have  studied  your  lesson,  I 
shall  tell  you  what  you  have  to  do.  (Lesson  LXXXII.) 

ON  THE  TRANSPOSITION  OF  THE  SUBJECT  AFTER  ITS  VERB. 

5th,  Whenever  a  sentence  begins  with  any  other 
word  than  the  subject  or  nominative,  its  order  is  in- 
verted, and  in  all  inversions  the  subject  stands  after 
the  verb  in  simple,  and  after  the  auxiliary  in  compound 
tenses  (Lesson  LVIIL).  From  this  rule  must  be  ex- 
cepted  conjunctive  words  which  serve  to  unite  senten- 
ces. They  leave  the  subject  in  its  place  and  remove 
the  verb  to  the  end  of  the  sentence  (Lesson  XL  VII. 
and  Rule  4th  above). 


361 

A  German  sentence  may  begin  with  an  adverb,  a 
preposition  and  its  case,  a  case,  an  adjective,  a  parti- 
ciple or  an  infinitive.  Ex.  £ente  g  e  b  c  i  rf)  mcttf  au£, 
I  do  not  go  out  to-day ;  morgeit  n>  e  r  b  e  -id)  £ie  befnd)en, 
to-morrow  I  shall  come  to  see  you  ;  im  Slufauge  fd)uf 
©ott  fiiintntet  unb  (Srbe,  in  the  beginning  God  made 
heaven  and  earth.  S3  o  n  f  e  i  n  e  n  $  i  n  b  c  r  it  f  p  r  a  d) 
e  r,  he  spoke  of  his  children.  Set  ^sbneit  babe  id) 
ntcht  S3  ltd)  fcergeffett,  I  forgot  my  book  at  your  house.  •Dnt 
5Kettfd)en  madjt  fein  SEBifle  grog  unb  ftein  (Sniffer),  his  will 
makes  a  man  great  and  little.  Dfeid)  ift  cr  nid)t,  aber 
gefebrt,  he  is  not  rich,  but  learned,  ©eitebt  nrirb  er  md)t, 
aber  gefitrd)tet,  he  is  not  loved,  but  feared.  (Sdjabctt  faint 
Seber,  abcr  niUscn  fann  itur  bcr  2Geife  unb  ©utc,  any  man 
can  do  injury,  but  the  wise  and  good  only  can  be  use- 
ful. (Lesson  LVIII.) 

6th,  The  subject  is  placed  after  the  verb  in  an  in- 
version of  propositions,  that  is,  when  that  which  ought 
to  stand  first,  is  placed  after,  and  forms,  as  it  were, 
the  complement  of  the  other.  In  other  words :  the 
subject  is  placed  after  its  verb  in  the  second  member 
of  a  compound  phrase  (Lesson  LXXVIL).  An  inver- 
sion of  propositions  takes  place,  when  the  first  propo- 
sition begins  with  a  conjunction.  Ex.  £af5  er  ©ie  (te&r, 
tt>  e  t  $  td)  (for:  id)  twig,  bap  er  Ste  liebt),  I  know  that 
he  loves  you.  3e  fletgiger  ein  ©djiUer  ift,  befto  fdntellere 
gertfdjrt'tte  nf  a  d)  t  e  r,  the  more  studious  a  pupil  is,  the 
more  progress  he  makes.  Sffienit  id)  reid)  Ware,  fo  t)  a  1 1  e 
t  d)  gteuttbe,  I  should  have  friends,  if  I  were  rich.  9?ad)* 
bem  unr  bte  @tabt  t)er[ajTett  batten,  jog  b  e  r  g  e  i  n  b  iit 
btcfefbe  ein,  when  we  had  left  the  town,  the  enemy  en- 
tered it  (Lesson  LXXXL). 

Obs.  In  transposing  the  phrase  there  is  no  inversion 
of  propositions.  Ex.  £er  $einb  30*}  in  bte  gtabt  ein, 
ttad)bem  tt>tr  biefelbe  Dertaflfen  fatten,  the  enemy  entered 
the  town,  after  we  had  left  it  (Lesson  LXXVIL). 

7th,  The  subject  also  follows  its  verb,  when  in  an 

inversion  of  propositions,  the  conjunction  lt>  e  n  n  is  left 

out  in  the  first.     Ex.  3(1  bag  SBetter  flflnfttg  (for: 

toenn  baS  Setter  giinftig  tfi),  fo  n?erbe  id)  biefe  &eife  "in  ad)t 

16 


362 

antreten,  if  the  weather  is  favourable  I  shall  set 
out  in  a  week  (Lesson  LXXXL). 

The  same  is  the  case  with  the  conjunction  ob, 
whether.  Ex.  3d)  n>eig  iticfyt,  f  d)  I  a  f  e  ober  tt>  a  d)  e  i  d> 
(for:  ob  id)  fefyfafe  ober  tt>ad)e),  I  do  not  know  whether  I 
am  asleep  or  awake ;  and  all  compound  conjunctions, 
such  as :  obgfeid),  obfdjon,  tt>enn  gfeirf),  tt>enn  fdjon,  though. 
Ex.  S3in  i  d)  gfctrf)  (fdjon)  ntcfjt  reid)  (for :  ob  or  n>emt  id} 
g(eid)  nid)t  refd)  bin),  fo  bin  id)  bod)  jnfrieben,  though  I  am 
not  rich,  I  am  nevertheless  contented. 

Obs.  Adverbs  of  comparison,  such  as  :  ttn'e,  as ;  gleid)* 
ftne,  the  same  as  ;  nid)t  niir — fonbent  and),  not  only — but 
also,  &c.,  make  the  nominative  of  the  second  member 
go  after  the  verb,  but  not  that  of  the  first  (this  ob- 
servation is  included  in  Rule  6.  above).  Ex.  3Bie  (or 
gleid)tt>ie)  bcttf  Sfteer  fcom  SBinbe  (eioegt  tt>irb,  alfo  tt>  i  r  b 
c  t  n  SOi  a  n  n  &on  fetnen  ?ctbenfd)aften  bcwegt,  as  the  sea 
is  agitated  by  the  winds,  so  a  man  is  agitated  by  his 
passions. 

8th,  Some  conjunctions,  when  beginning  a  sentence, 
make  the  nominative  go  after  its  verb,  as :  bod),  how- 
ever ;  bennod),  nevertheless  ;  gtetctylttofrf,  notwithstand- 
ing ;  beflfen  wngecufyet,  for  all  that ;  trirfjtg  befb  roemgetv 
nevertheless  ;  l)uigegett,  im  ©egetttfyett,  on  the  contrary. 
(This  rule  is  included  in  Rule  5.)  Ex.  £effen  uttgead)* 
tet  f)  a  6  e  n  @  t  e  ntcmaK  ntetnen  Sffiunfd)  erfutten  rotten, 
for  all  that  you  were  never  willing  to  accomplish  my 
desire  ;  bod)  f  d)  r  i  e  b  e  r,  cr  femtte  wcfyt  Fouttneif,  however 
he  wrote  that  he  could  not  come. 

9th,  The  subject  follows  its  verb  when  the  phrase  is 
interrogative  or  ejaculatory.  Ex.  Semen  Sfyre 
JQerren  33  r  fiber  beutfd)?  do  your  brothers  learn 
German  ?  SBte  gfftcf (id)  f  i  n  b  ©  t  e  !  or  $8 ie  f  i  n  b  ©  t  e 
fo  glitdflid) !  how  happy  you  are  !  (Lesson  XXXII.  and 
LXXXVIII.) 

Obs.  When  the  subject  is  a  personal  or  an  interro- 
gative pronoun,  the  construction  of  the  interrogative 
sentence  is  the  same  as  in  English.  Ex.  3ft  ?r  jtt 
Saufe  ?  is  he  at  home  ?  ©inb  Sfyte  grdulein  ©dweftern 
in  bent  ©arten  ?  are  your  sisters  in  the  garden  ?  22er 
ift  ba  ?  who  is  there  ?  SEBaS  f)aben  @ie  getban  ?  what 


363 

have  you  done  ?  2Se(d)er  $nabe  ()at  biefe  33nd)er  gefanft, 
nnb  tt>em  hat  er  (Te  fccrcbrt  ?  which  boy  has  bought  those 
books,  and  to  whom  has  he  given  them  ?  3I?a3  fitr  ei* 
nen  SOBageu  fyaben  Sie  gefauft  ?  what  carriage  have  you 
bought  ? 

10th,  The  subject  not  only  stands  after  the  verb,  but 
also  after  all  the  words  relating  to  it,  when  the  sen- 
tence begins  with  the  indefinite  pronoun  e3*  Ex.  @$ 
lebrt  im$  bte  Srfafyrnng,  experience  teaches  us. 
@3  ill  nid)t  atte  £age  eine  fo  gute  ®elegenf)eit,  there  is  not 
every  day  such  good  opportunity. 

llth,  In  inversions  where  the  subject  stands  after 
its  verb,  it  may  take  its  place  either  after  or  before 
the  other  cases,  if  they  are  personal  pronouns,  and  if 
the  subject  is  a  substantive.  Ex.  petite  gibt  mem  fefyrer 
mir  ein  Sad),  or  fyentegibt  mir  mein  ?ebrer  cut  SSnd),  to-day 
my  master  will  give  me  a  book.  ©ejTern  gab  mem  ?ef}* 
rer  e$  mir,  or  geftern  gab  e3  mtr  mein  ?el)rcr,  my  master 
gave  it  to  me  yesterday.  £)b  er  gfeirf)  gan j  enfjlettt  n)ar, 
erfannte  il)n  bod)  fein  (Eol)n,  or  erfannte  fein  @ol)it  i()it  bed), 
though  he  was  quite  disfigured,  nevertheless  his  son 
recognized  him. 

12th,  But  if  the  subject  is  likewise  a  personal  pro- 
noun, or  if  the  other  cases  are  substantives,  it  must 
precede.  Ex.  ©eftern  gab  er  e£  mir  (not  e3  mir  er),  yes- 
terday he  gave  it  to  me.  £>af)er  liebt  ber  Sd)it(er  ben  £ef)# 
rer  (not  liebt  ben  Cefyrer  ber  ®d)it(er),  therefore  the  pupil 
loves  his  master.  2)ejfen  nngead)tet  erfannte  ber  @ol)n  ben 
3Sater  (not  ben  Sater  ber  @of)n),  nevertheless  the  son  re- 
cognised his  father. 

EXERCISES.       244. 

A  stranger  having  sold  some  false  jewels  (ber  faffcftc  (Stuljlctn)  to 
a  Roman  empress  (tic  rourifdx  Jtatfcrinn),  she  asked  (ferfccrn  Den) 
her  husband  (to  make)  a  signal  example  (of  him)  (Me  cutffallcnbe 
(55enuc|tf)iU!n^).  The  emperor,  a  most  excellent  and  clement  prince 
(t)cr  ein  fcftr  gncitigcr  unb  nutber  Jurft  war),  finding  it  impossible  to 
pacify  (Oerulu^en)  her,  condemned  the  jeweller  to  be  thrown  to  the 
wild  beasts  ($11:11  .ftanwfe  nut  ben  ivUben  SI)tercn).  The  empress  re- 
solved to  be  present  (Beufle)  with  her  whole  court  (ber  Jbcfjlaat)  at 
the  punishment  of  the  unfortunate  man  (fane?  Scbi'6).  As  he  was 
led  into  the  arena  (cuf  ben  ^vampfpfafe  ivfu!:vt  luurbe),  he  expected  to 
die  (fid)  auf  ben  Scb  gcfapt  raadjen) ;  but  instead  (jlatt  governs  the 


364 

genitive)  of  a  wild  beast  a  lamb  (fcciS  Somni)  came  up  to  him  and 
caressed  him  (rucld)C$  ifyn  (tcbfefctc).  The  empress,  furious  (au^crft 
aufgebrad)t)  at  the  deception  (fid)  gum  95cftcn  gcbatten  gu  fcljen),  com- 
plained bitterly  of  it  (fid)  bitter  teprocgcn  bcfjagcn)  to  (bet)  the  em- 
peror. He  answered  :  "  I  punished  the  criminal  (t>er  83erbred)cr) 
according  (nad))  to  the  law  of  retaliation  (fcas  808tctcrt>crgcltunQsrcd)t). 
He  deceived  (bctrifjjcn*)  you,  and  he  has  been  deceived  in  his  turn 
(tvietcr)." 

245. 

The  bakers  of  Lyons,  having-  gone  to  Mr.  Dugas  (gn  Scmantcm 
Common*),  the  provost  (tcr  ©tcit)trtd)tcr),  to  ask  his  permission  (3e- 
wanten  urn  (Srtaubntfi  bitten*)  to  raise  the  price  of  bread  (mit  fccm 
S3rete  cwfgufdjtoQen),  he  answered  that  he  would  take  their  petition 
into  consideration  (cr  rootle  ten  ©egenjlant  ifjrer  £Mtte  untcrfudjen). 
As  they  took  leave  (ivcggcfycn*),  they  contrived  to  slip  (Itepcn  fie  un« 
bemcrft)  a  purse  containing  (mit)  two  hundred  Louis  d'ors  (ter  £out$s 
for)  on  the  table. — When  they  returned,  in  the  full  conviction  (nid)t 
gruetfeln)  that  the  purse  had  been  a  powerful  advocate  in  their  favour 
(rwtffam  fur  cine  ©cid)C  fprcd)cn*),  the  provost  said  to  them  :  4i  Gen- 
tlemen, I  have  weighed  (abtua'cjcn)  your  reasons  (tec  ©runt)  in  the 
scale  of  justice  (tie  S3Jagfd)atc  tcr  ©erccfytigfctt),  and  I  have  found 
them  wanting  (ntd)t  »OlIrDtd)ttp).  I  have  not  thought  it  expedient 
(3d)  f)telt  md)t  bafur)  by  a  fictitious  raising  of  price  (unter  ctncr  linens 
cjriintctcn  Sfyeurunq)  to  make  the  public  (bat  9?ub(thim)  suffer :  I 
have,  however  (ubrt^en?),  distributed  (ocrtf)Ct(cn)  your  money  to  (\\ns 
ter  with  accus.)  the  two  hospitals  of  the  town,  for  I  concluded  (id) 
gfciubtc)  you  could  not  intend  it  for  any  other  purpose  (l>cr  ®ebrauch). 
Meanwhile  (3d)  fycibe  ctngefefjen)  as  you. are  able  to  give  such  alms 
(folcfye  2ftmcfen  ^u  gebcn),  it  is  evident  you  are  no  losers  (rcvlicrcn*) 
by  your  trade  (tas  ©ewerbe)-" 

246. 

THE    PHYSICIAN    TAKEN    IN    (bl'tVOgeil). 

A  physician  of  (in)  Dublin,  who  was  rather  old  (rocfdxr  fd)cn 
gtctnttd)  bejaljrt  ruar),  but  who  was  very  rich  and  in  extensive  prac- 
tice (in  Qrofjcm  JKufe  ftcfjen*),  went  one  day  to  receive  a  considerable 
(jtcmiid)  grc9)  sum  of  money  in  bank  notes  and  in  gold.  As  he  was 
returning  home  with  (bclatvn  mit)  this  sum,  he  was  stopped  (anfjaU 
ten*)  by  a  man  who  appeared  out  of  breath  (aujj'cr  ?Ctf)euO?  owing  to 
the  speed  with  which  he  had  run  (roeil  er  gu  fd)netl  gefanfen  ivar). 
This  man  asked  him  (lint  ter  iljn  bat)  to  come  to  see  his  wife, 
whom  a  violent  diarrhoea  retained  in  bed  dangerously  ill  (an  einem 
F)efttvqen  Rdiffe  qcfahrCid)  franf"  barnicbcr  ttec\cn*)  ;  he  added  that  it  was 
urgent  she  should  have  immediate  advice  (t>ojj  fd)(euntae  ."pitfe  fehr 
nothiuenttg  iva're),  and  at  the  same  time  promised  the  physican  his 
guinea  fee  (cine  ©uincc  ftir  ctnen  S3cfud)). 

The  physician,  who  was  very  avaricious  (cjetjtg),  was  pleased  at 
the  prospect  of  gaining  his  guinea  (ei(te  fie  gii  tvrttenen)  ;  he  direc- 


365 

ted  (facjcn  gu)  the  man  to  lead  the  way  (3cmanbem  ben  SOSeo,  gctgcn), 
and  promised  to  follow.  He  was  led  to  a  house  situated  (ftefyen*) 
in  a  remote  (entleo,en)  street,  and  made  to  ascend  to  the  third  story 
(in  ba$  brttte  (Sterfrocrf),  where  he  was  admitted  into  a  room,  the 
door  of  which  was  immediately  (o(fobalb)  locked  (&erfd)fu*9cn*). 
The  g-uide  (Dcr  Jaibrer)  then  presenting  (l>arrcid)en*)  a  pistol  with 
one  hand,  and  with  the  other  an  empty  (leer)  purse,  which  was 
open,  spoke  as  follows  (bterauf  rebete  ber  gubrer  ben  cvfcfyr  ecfenen  TCrjt 
fohjcnbcriiKiQcn  an,  inbcm,  &c.). 

44  Here  is  my  wife  :  yesterday  she  was  seized  with  a  violent 
diarrhoea  (an  ctncm  fyefttgen  ffiaucrjffuffc  letbcn*),  which  has  reduced 
her  to  the  state  (in  ben  Suftanb  flerfefeen)  in  which  you  (now)  see 
her  ;  you  are  one  of  our  most  eminent  (gcfd)tc!t)  physicians,  and  I 
know  you  are  better  able  than  any  one  to  cure  her.  I  am  besides 
(tiberbtctf)  aware  that  you  possess  the  best  remedy  for  her;  haste 
then  to  employ  (anruenben)  it,  unless  you  prefer  swallowing  (KM? 
fcb(ucfen)  the  two  leaden  pills  (Me  $)iUe)  contained  in  this  instru- 
ment." The  doctor  made  a  horrible  face  (ba$  obfcJ)Cultd)C  @cftcf)t), 
but  obeyed.  He  had  several  bank  notes  and  a  hundred  and  twen- 
ty-five guineas  rolled  up  (in  SKellen)  ;  he  placed  the  latter  (Me  lt$s 
tern)  into  the  purse,  as  he  had  been  desired  (gebulMcj),  hoping  thus 
to  save  his  bank  notes. 

But  the  thief  (t)er  ©ouncr)  was  up  to  this,  and  was  perfectly 
aware  of  his  having  them  in  his  pocket  (roupte,  bojj  cr  fie  in  ber  Sa- 
fd)C  battc).  "Wait,"  said  he,  "it  would  not  be  fair  (biUicj)  that 
you  should  have  performed  (r>ertid)ten)  so  miraculous  a  cure  (tie 
»fiur)  without  remuneration  (t)ergeOen6)  ;  I  promised  you  a  guinea 
for  your  visit,  I  am  a  man  of  honour  (bee  9ftann  flon  ©ftre),  and 
here  it  is  ;  but  I  know  that  you  carry  about  your  person  (bet  fief) 
fjaben)  several  little  recipes  (bag  SReccpt,  plur.  c)  most  efficacious 
(fe()r  rotrffam)  as  preventives  against  the  return  (Me  Mclfefyr)  of  the 
disorder  (t>a?  Uebel)  you  have  just  removed  (fyeilen)  ;  you  must  be 
so  kind  as  to  leave  them  with  me."  The  bank-notes  immediately 
took  the  same  road  as  the  guineas  had  done.  The  thief,  then 
keeping  his  pistol  concealed  "beneath  his  cloak  (ber  Mantel),  ac- 
companied the  doctor  into  the  street  ((jicrnuf  fiifyfte  fcct  ©aimer,  in^ 
bem  —  ivtcbcr  girlie!)  requesting  him  to  make  no  noise.  He  stopped 
him  (frel)en  taffen*)  at  the  corner  (an  ber  (Sdfc)  of  a  street,  and  for- 
bidding (t>erbieten*)  him  to  follow,  suddenly  (plofjttcl))  disappeared, 
to  seek,  in  a  distant  part  of  the  town  (bag  cntlecjcne 
another  habitation  (tie 


247.     DIALOGUE  (bte  Unterretung) 

BETWEEN    A    FATHER    AND    MOTHER    ON    THE    HAPPINESS 
OF    THEIR    CHILDREN. 


Countess.  Forgive  me  for  having  disturbed  (roedfen  (a  (Ten*) 
you  so  early  ;  but  I  wanted  to  speak  to  you  on  matters  of  im- 
portance. 


366 

Count.  You  alarm  (beunrufytcjen)  me  ....  I  see  that  you 
have  been  crying;  what  has  happened,  my  dear  (tfyeuer)? 

Countess.  I  own  I  am  a  little  agitated  (iinriitjtq) ;  but  I  have 
nothing  unpleasant  (UnangenefymeS)  to  communicate  (mtttfyetlen) ; 
on  the  contrary. 

Count.  From  your  emotion  (bte  53ett5ec}ung),  I  should  guess 
Emily  to  be  the  cause  of  it  (bag  »on —  bte  9?ebe  tft). 

Countess.  It  is  true  ....  My  sister  came  this  morning 
with  a  proposal  (etne  £etratfy  sorfcfytaaen*)  for  her. 

Count.     Well? 

Countess.  The  gentleman  who  asks  her  (in  marriage)  is  en- 
dowed  with  (befigen*)  all  the  advantages  (ber  $er$ug)  of  birth 
(bte  ©eburt)  and  fortune  (ba§  ©(itcf).  His  merit  is  acknowl- 
edged (cmerf  enncn)  by  all.  He  is  thirty ;  his  person  agreeable  ; 
he  loves  Emily,  and  even  refuses  the  fortune  (bte  3lii3fteuer) 
which  we  should  give  her,  stating  his  affection  to  be  secured  by 
her  only  (serfoncjt  nut  fie). 

Count.  But  how  comes  it  that  you  are  not  overjoyed  at  this 
(auger  ftd)  »or  Jreube  fetn*)?  I  am  very  anxious  (v>or  23e<jtev* 
be  breunen)  to  learn  his  name. 

Countess.  You  know  him ;  he  often  comes  here,  and  you 
like  him  exceedingly  (febr). 

Count.     Pray  gratify  (befriebt'cjen)  my  curiosity. 

Countess.     It  is  the  Count  of  Moncalde  .... 

Count.  The  Count  of  Moncalde  !  a  foreigner ;  but  he  prob- 
ably (roafyrfcfyetnli'cfy)  intends  to  settle  (fjcfy  mebertajfen*)  in 
France  ?  .  .  . 

Countess.  Alas  !  he  has  declared  that  he  can  promise  no- 
thing (feme  ^erpfltcfytuna.  etncjefyen*)  on  that  score  (bte  £tnftd)t)  ; 
this  is  informing  us  (erf(dren)  clearly  (beutltcfy)  enough,  that  he 
intends  to  return  to  his  own  country. 

Count.  And  you  would  nevertheless  accept  him  for  your 
daughter  1 

Countess.  I  have  known  him  (Umcjano,  nut  3em^n^e^  N- 
ben*)  for  four  years.  I  am  thoroughly  acquainted  with  his 
disposition  (ber  Sfyaracter).  There  cannot  be  a  more  virtuous 
(titgenbfyaft)  or  estimable  (fd)a'£ett$»ertl?)  man.  He  is  very 
clever  and  agreeable  (soft  ©et'ft  unb  9(nnefymltcf)feit  fetn*),  has 
much  good  feeling  ($efui)foplO>  is  well  informed  (unterrtd)tet), 
and  perfectly  devoid  of  affectation  (unaffecttrt).  He  is  a  passion- 
ate admirer  of  talent  (etn en  let'benfcfyaftltcfyen  ©efcfymacf  fur  la* 
lente  fy<*bcn*) ;  in  short  (mtt  etnem  2Botte)  he  possesses  every 
quality  (bte  (Stojenfcfyaft)  that  can  answer  my  daughter's  happi- 
ness (gliicf(td)  madjen).  How  can  I  reject  him  (fie  tfym 


367 

Surely,  my  love  (meut  ^reunb),  you  do  not  think  me  so 
selfish  (etneS  fold) en  ®got3miiS  fdfyto,  Bitten*). 

Count  (taking  her  hand)  (fie  bet  bev  £>anb  fafifenb).  But 
can  I  consent  to  a  sacrifice  (bav  Opfer)  that  would  make  you  for 
ever  (cutf  winter)  unhappy  ?  Besides  (UeberbteS)  I  never  could 
bring  myself  to  part  from  Emily. — She  is  my  daughter ;  more 
than  that  even,  her  amiable  disposition  is  your  work.  In  Emi- 
ly I  find  your  sense  (ber  ©etft)  and  your  virtues.  No,  I  cannot 
part  (fid)  trennen)  from  her.  I  am  looking  forward  with  so  much 
delight  (fid)  etne  fo  fitge  23orflel(ung  oon  bent  2Sercjnttgen  mad)en) 
to  her  entrance  into  the  world  (fie  in  bte  £Belt  etncjefufyrt  311  fe* 
fyen)  !  I  am  in  much  hopes  of  her  shining  in  it  (tfyreS  giiten  (£r* 
folgS  barm  311  gemegen). — How  gratifying  (n>te  teener)  to  me 
will  be  the  praise  (ba3  Sob)  bestowed  (ertfyetlen)  on  her !  —  for 
I  am  convinced  (ba  td)  ba3  SBennigtfetn  fyabe),  that  to  your  care 
of  her  (bte  ^orgfa(t)  alone,  my  love,  she  will  be  indebted  for 
whatever  success  she  may  obtain.  After  having  devoted  (n)tb^ 
men)  the  best  years  of  your  life  to  her  education,  can  you  now 
give  her  up,  and  see  her  torn  from  (entretgen*  with  dative)  your 
arms  and  her  country ;  can  you  consent  thus  to  lose  in  one  mo- 
ment the  fruit  of  (son)  fifteen  years  of  anxiety  ($Rut)e  imb  Sfrfcett)  ? 

Countess.  I  have  laboured  for  her  happiness,  and  (have)  not 
(sought)  to  educate  (brtmjen*)  a  victim  to  my  own  vanity.  I 
beseech  you,  consider  (bebenfen*)  also  the  great  and  unhoped 
for  advantages  of  the  match  (bte  $}erbtnbuttg)  now  in  agitation 
(roeldje  man  unS  anbtetet).  Think  of  the  smallness  (bte  bJOtttteU 
rotigt'gfet't)  of  her  fortune.  Consider  the  excellence  and  amiable 
disposition,  the  high  birth  and  immense  (unermegltd))  fortune  of 
her  future  husband !  —  It  is  true,  I  shall  be  separated  from 
Emily,  but  she  will  never  forget  me  .  .  .  this  thought  will  be 
my  consolation,  and  without  fear  for  her  future  life  (iiber  ba§ 
(£d)tcffal  SmtlienS  bemfytgt),  I  shall  be  able  to  bear  any  other 
triaJ  (alleS  ertragen). 

Count.  But  will  Emily  herself  be  able  to  bring  herself  to 
leave  you  ? 

Countess.  She  has  always  been  accustomed  to  obey  the  dic- 
tates of  reason  (bte  QSermtttft  sermao,  atteS  iiber  fie).  I  am  wil- 
ling to  believe  this  will  cost  her  some  effort  (bte  ^(nftrengung 
nnrb  t'br  fd)wer  fatten) ;  but  if  she  does  not  dislike  Qemanbem 
mtgfatten*)  the  temper  and  person  of  Mr.  de  Moncalde,  I  can 
answer  (auf  fid)  nefymen*)  for  her  compliance  (fie  311  betuecjen), 
however  painful  (fcfyroterig)  the  sacrifice  (ju  bt'efem  Opfer).  In 
short  I  entreat  (befd)tt?ore)  you  to  entrust  entirely  to  (fid)  o,att3 
auf)  me  the  care  (meo,en  ber  ©orge)  of  her  happiness. 


368 

Count.  Well  (2Bofylcm),  since  you  wish  it,  I  will  give  my 
consent.  You  have  indeed,  my  dear,  earned  (erwerben*)  for 
yourself  a  right  (fcaS  S^ed)!)  to  dispose  of  your  daughter  (fiber  tfyr 
@d)tcffa(  511  entfdjetfoen),  which  I  will  not  dispute  (jtretttg  mad)ett). 
I  know  you  will  sacrifice  (aufopfern)  yourself  for  the  sake  of 
one  so  dear  to  you  (fur  fctefen  fo  tfyeuern  ©egenftanb).  — I  fore- 
see OoorauSfetyen*)  that  I  shall  not  have  your  fortitude  (fcer  9)iiitt))y 
but  I  admire,  and  can  no  longer  withstand  (mtberftefyen*)  (your 
argument). — Still  (3 efcodj)  think,  what  sorrow  (imemel  Summer) 
you  are  preparing  for  yourself  (ft d)  beretten)  ;  how  shall  I  my- 
self support  your  grief  and  my  own,  your  tears  and  those  of 
Emily? 

Countess.  Do  not  fear  (befutcfyten)  that  I  should  cloud  (fcciin* 
rubigen)  your  life  by  useless  (iiberflufttg)  repinings  (tie  Stage). 
How  could  I  give  myself  up  to  sorrow  when  my  greatest  con- 
solation will  be  the  hope  of  alleviating  (mtlfcevn)  your  grief? 

Count.  Ah,  you  alone  are  every  thing  to  me  !  You  know 
it  well  ....  friendship,  admiration,  and  gratitude  are  the  ties 
(tie  SBanfcc,  plur.)  that  bind  (feffe(n)  me  to  you.  The  influence 
(Die  £>errfd)cift)  you  have  acquired  (erlangett)  over  my  mind 
(iiber  mid))  is  so  thoroughly  justified  (recfytfertigen)  by  your  vir- 
tues, that  far  from  denying  (serlaiignen),  I  glory  in  it  (fetnett 
Sftitbm  foart'n  fe£cn,  fte  anjuerfennen).  —  It  is  to  you  I  owe  every 
thing  :  my  reason,  my  sentiments  (ba§  ©efiif)l)»  niy  principles 
(^er  ©runt>fa^)  and  my  happiness.  In  you  I  find  the  most  ami- 
able as  well  as  the  most  indulgent  (nacfyftcfytto,)  of  friends,  the 
wisest  (roet'fc)  and  most  useful  adviser  (bte  milMtcfyfte  JRatfcgebe* 
rinii).  Be  then  the  arbiter  of  my  children's  destiny  (fcte  &d)ieb& 
rtdbtertnn  i'tber  ba^  @d)icffal)  as  you  are  that  of  my  own.  But 
at  any  rate  (memgftenS)  let  us  attempt  (atleS  oerfud)cn)  to  per- 
suade the  Count  of  Moncalde  to  settle  (ftd)  ntebeirldffett)  in 
France.  ...  He  seemed  so  srruck  (gerufert)  by  your  affection 
(fcte  &totlid)ttifl  for  Emily,  and  to  feel  for  you  such  sincere 
attachment  (9(ni)dnglt'ct}fett)  that  I  cannot  yet  believe  his  inten- 
tion (tie  9(bftd)t)  to  be  to  separate  you  from  your  child.  I  can- 
not think  his  decision  (fcer  Sntfcfylug)  unalterable  (unoercinbers 
ltd)). 

Countess.  No,  do  not  let  us  flatter  ourselves.  He  is  a  firm 
and  decided  character  (fern  —  {ft  feft  unfc  entfcfyfeffen).  He  has 
positively  (bcfh'mmt)  told  my  sister  that  it  would  be  vain  to  at- 
tempt to  exact  from  him  a  promise  (tl)m  h'e  33e  t'ncumg  »pr$ii* 
fcfyretben)  of  residing  in  France.  His  resolution  is  irrevocably 
(umtnfcemifhd))  taken  to  return  to  Portugal. 

Count.     You  grieve  (betvuben)  me  ....  But  I  repeat  to 


369 

you,  the  fate  of  Emily  is  in  your  hands.  Whatever  it  may  cost 
me,  you  shall  be  absolute  mistress  (iDt'e  iimimfcfyrcmfte  ©ebt'ete* 
rinn)  of  it.  I  shall  consent  to  whatever  you  decide  on  (befdjlte* 
gen*).  Do  you  intend  speaking  to-day  (nod)  fyeiite)  (on  the 
subject)  to  Emily  ? 

Countess.  After  dinner  ....  But  it  is  late  ;  it  is  time  to 
dress  ....  I  have  not  yet  seen  my  sons  to-day ;  let  us  go  and 
see  them. 

Count.  I  wanted  to  consult  (urn  3?atfy  fragcn)  you  on  (meg en) 
something  connected  with  (cmgefeen*)  them.  I  am  dissatisfied 
with  their  tutor  (bet  £efmetfler).  Another  has  been  proposed 
($orfd)(ac}en*)  me,  I  should  wish  you  to  speak  to  him  ;  I  am  told 
he  speaks  English  perfectly  ;  I  cannot  judge  myself  of  the  latter. 

Countess.     I  will  tell  you  if  he  really  understands  it  well  .  . 

Count.     How  ?  .  .  .  But  you  have  never  learnt  English  .  . 

Countess.  I  beg  your  pardon.  I  have  been  studying  it  for 
the  last  year,  to  be  able  to  teach  Henrietta,  who  had  asked  me 
to  give  her  Oemanfcen  um  etroaS  erfiicfyen)  an  English  master. 
In  general  Qm  £)iird)fd)mtt)  masters  teach  so  carelessly  (mttfo 
meler  Dfocfylaffigfeit)  that,  however  excellent  they  may  be>  two 
years  of  their  lessons  (fcer  Untemcfyt)  are  not  worth  three 
months  (fca£  £h'erte(jaf)r)  of  those  (oon  tern)  given  by  a  mother. 

Count.  What  a  (wonderful)  woman  you  are  !  .  .  .  .  Thus 
till  your  children's  education  is  completed,  you  will  spend  part 
of  your  life  with  masters.  Half  of  it  (T)te  erne  ^)a(fte)  you  devote 
(anwenften)  to  study  (fid)  311  iintemd)ten),  and  the  other  half  in 
teaching  what  you  have  learnt  ....  Yet  in  spite  of  such  nu- 
merous occupations,  whilst  you  thus  multiply  (ttennelfdlttcjen) 
your  duties,  you  spare  time  to  devote  (twbmen)  to  your  friends 
and  to  the  world  (fct'e  ©efeflfcfyaft).  How  do  you  manage  (e3 
cmfancjen)  ? 

Countess.  It  is  always  possible  to  find  time  for  the  fulfilment 
of  duties  that  are  pleasing  to  us  (bte  un3  tfyeuer  ftnb). 

Count.  You  always  surprise  me  (beftdnbtg  m  Grflaunen  fe* 
£en),  I  own  ....  Ah  !  if  your  children  do  not  make  you  hap- 
py,  what  mother  could  ever  expect  from  hers  a  reward  of  her 
affection  !  .  .  .  .  And  our  dear  Emily  may  be  for  ever  lost  to 
you  !  .  .  .  I  cannot  bear  (ertragen*)  the  thought  of  it !  —  Shall 
you  see  your  sister  again  to-day  ?  Shall  you  give  her  your  an- 
swer for  the  Count  of  Moncalde  ? 

Countess.     He  requested  a  prompt  decision  (cine  fdjneffe  nnb 
befh'mmte)  ....  I  shall  accordingly  give  (ertt)et(en)  him  the 
answer,  since  you  allow  it,  as  soon  as  I  have  questioned  Emily 
on  the  subject  (£mt'(ten§  ©eftnmmcjen  priifen). 
16* 


370 

Count.     I  am  certain,  Emily  will  refuse  (cwSfcfyfogen*)  him. 

Countess.  I  think  as  you  do,  but  it  is  not  enough  (fytnret  cfyenb 
fetn*)  that  she  has  no  aversion  (abgenetgt  fetn*)  to  the  Count  of 
Moncalde,  and  that  she  feels  (fyegen)  for  him  the  esteem  he  so 
justly  deserves  ..... 

Count.  Well,  I  see,  we  must  submit  (fief)  entfcfyltegen*)  to 
this  sacrifice  (fcte  5(ufopfenmcj)  ....  Speak  to  your  daughter 
.....  Speak  to  her  alone,  I  should  never  have  courage  to 
support  (cwSMten*)  sucn  an  interview  (tie  Unterrehmg)  .  .  . 
I  feel  I  should  only  spoil  all  your  work. 

248.     DIALOGUE. 

EMILY.       AGATHA. 

Agatha.  I  was  looking  for  you  ....  But,  dear  Emily, 
what  is  the  matter? 

Emily.     Have  you  seen  mamma  (bte  Gutter)  ? 

Agatha.     No,  she  is  gone  out  ;  she  is  gone  to  my  aunt's. 

Emily.     And  my  father  ? 

Agatha.  He  has  shut  himself  up  (fid)  etnfdfylteisen*)  in  his 
study  (ba$  Sabtnett)  ....  But  surely,  Emily,  they  are  think- 
ing of  your  marriage  (bte  2*er{)etratl)nng)  ;  I  guess  (erratfyen*) 
as  much  (e3)  from  your  agitation  (an  Detner  Stenwrruncj). 

Emily.  Ah;  dearest  sister,  you  little  dream  (me  ttnrflt  £)u 
ben  Wamen  beSjenujen  erratfyen)  who  is  my  intended  (tern  man 
mid)  bejltmmt)  !  .  .  .  .  Agatha,  dearest  Agatha,  how  much  1 
pity  you,  if  you  love  me  as  well  as  I  love  you  ! 

Agatha.  *  Good  heavens  (©erecfytet  |)tmmel)  !  Explain 
(Sr  Heir  en)  yourself  more  clearly  (bentltcfy). 

Emily.  I  am  desired  ($ftcm  beftefylt  mfr)  to  marry  the 
Count  of  Moncalde,  and  he  is  to  take  (mtt  fid)  fiifyren)  me  to 
Portugal. 

Agatha.  And  you  intend  to  obey  ?  .  .  .  .  Could  you  leave 
us  ?  ....  Is  it  possible  my  mother  even  should  consent  ? 

Emily.     Alas  !  (Setter)  dear  Agatha,  it  is  but  too  true. 

Agatha.  No,  I  never  can  believe  it  ....  it  is  impossible 
you  ever  can  (£)it  barfft  mcfyt)  obey. 

Emily.  What  are  you  saying  ?  Do  you  think  I  should 
oppose  my  mother's  wishes  (fcmn  tcfy  metner  Sautter 


Agatha.     But  do  you  think  she  herself  will  ever  consent  to 
such  a  separation  ? 

Emily.     She  only  considers  (in  SSetracfytung  atefyen*)  what 


371 

she  calls  my  interest  (ber  QSortfyetO  ;  she  entirely  forgets  her- 
self. Alas  !  she  also  forgets  that  I  could  enjoy  (geniejjen*)  no 
happiness  she  did  not  witness  (befifen  fie  mcfyt  3eucje  ware)  ! 

Agatha.     Dear  sister,  refuse  your  consent  (nidjt  etnttnUtcjen) ! 

Emily.     I  have  given  my  word. 

Agatha.     Retract  (juriufnefymen*)  it ...  out  of  affection  to 
my  mother  herself;  your  unfortunate  obedience  (ber  ©efyo 
would  be  Oorbevetten)  a  constant  source  of  regret  (bte 
D?eue)  to  us  all. 

Emily.  Agatha,  you  do  not  know  my  mother's  fortitude. 
Her  sensibility  (3()r  gefiifyfootfeS  £er$),  though  mastered  (gelei* 
tet)  by  her  superior  mind  (bte  iiberlecjene  2}ernunft),  can,  it  is 
true,  sometimes  make  her  suffer,  but  will  never  be  strong 
enough  to  betray  her  even  into  showing  a  momentary  weak- 
ness (nie  roirb  e$  etnen  ^higenbftcf  ©cfyrocicfye  in  ifyr  ^erwotbrtn^ 
gen)  ....  She  is  incapable  (imfdfytg)  of  ever  regretting 
(be veu en)  she  has  fulfilled  a  duty. 

Agatha.  Emily !  dearest  sister,  if  you  go,  I  shall  not  sur- 
vive (etn>a$  iiberleben)  such  a  misfortune  ! 

Emily.  Ah,  if  you  love  me,  conceal  (from)  me  the  excess 
(ba$  ttebermag)  of  your  grief.  It  can  only  unfit  me  for  the 
task  I  have  to  perform  (welcfyer  nut  511  fefyr  ba$u  geeignet  ifl, 
mid)  nod)  fdjroa'cber  311  macfyen). — Do  not  further  rend  (nid)t 
»D(lenb^  gerrei^en*)  a  heart  already  torn  by  the  conflict  of  (ba6 
fdjon  fo  9ett)ei(t  if!  $tt)ifc^en)  duty,  affection  and  reason. 

Agatha.  Do  not  expect  me  to  confirm  (Did)  511  befefHcjett 
in)  this  cruel  resolution.  I  can  only  weep  and  lament  my  own 
hard  fate. 

Emily.  I  hear  some  one  ....  Dear  Agatha,  let  us  dry 
our  eyes. 

249. 

ON  THE  LIABILITY  TO  ERROR  (2Bie  fefyr  man  ftd)  irten  fann) 
OF  OUR  JUDGMENTS  (in  feinem  ilrtfyeile),  OR  THE  INJURY 
(ber  ©cfyaben)  REPAID  (erfegen). 

An  English  stage-coach  (bte  Ccmbfiitfcfye),  full  of  travellers 
(ber  3^eifenbe),  was  proceeding  (fafyren*)  to  York.  Conversa- 
tion fell  on  (9TRcm  fprad)  met  son)  the  highwaymen  and  robbers 
that  infested  (bie  man  5fter3  auf — antreffe)  those  parts  (ber 
SSecj),  and  on  the  way  of  concealing  one's  money.  Each 
person  had  his  secret,  but  no  one  thought  (feinem  f^et  e§  ein) 
of  telling  it  (offenbaren).  One  young  lady  (ba§  $?cibd)en)  only 
of  eighteen,  was  less  prudent  than  the  rest  (nidfyt  fo  Hug  few*). 


372 

Imagining,  no  doubt,  (Cfyne  3roetfel  in  ber  SWetmmcj)  that  she 
was  thereby  giving  a  proof  (ber  £3eroet$)  of  her  cleverness 
(ber  £}erjlanb),  she  said  with  great  self-satisfaction  (gcm$  offen*' 
$er$*g)  that  she  had  a  draft  (ber  2Bed)felbrtef)  for  two  hundred 
pounds,  which  was  (beftefyen*)  her  whole  fortune,  but  that  the 
thieves  would  be  very  clever  (ItfttoJ  if  they  thought  of  seeking 
for  (menn  fte — fucfyen  fottten)  this  booty  (ber  9?aub)  in  her  shoe, 
or  rather  (ja  fogar)  under  the  sole  of  her  foot ;  to  find  it  they 
would  be  obliged  to  (e3  mftfjte  tfynen  nur  etnfaften)  rob  her  of 
stockings. 

The  coach  was  soon  after  (balb  barcutf)  stopped  (anfyalten*) 
by  a  gang  of  thieves  (bte  9?anberbanbe),  who  called  upon  (cuif> 
forbern)  the  affrighted  and  trembling  travellers  to  deliver  up 
(I)  era,  eb  en*)  their  money.  They  accordingly  all  pulled  out 
(t)erau§$tefyen*)  their  purses,  fully  aware  (ftcfy  sorjMlen)  that 
resistance  (ber  SBtberflfoltfc)  would  be  perfectly  useless,  and 
might  prove  dangerous  (cber  gar  gefa'brltd)).  The  sum  (thus 
produced)  appearing  too  small  to  these  gentlemen  (of  the  road) 
they  threatened  (broken)  to  search  (bnrd)fitd)en)  all  the  luggage 
(bte  Sffecten),  if  a  hundred  pounds  were  not  immediately  given 
them. 

"  You  will  easily  (letcfyt)  find  double  that  sum  (ba§  Sopped 
te),"  said  an  old  gentleman  from  the  corner  of  the  coach  (rtef 
ifyrteit  —  fwTten  cui3  bem  ^Bagen  SH)»  "  if  you  examine  (burd)? 
f ltd) en)  the  shoes  and  stockings  of  that  lady."  The  advice  was 
very  well  taken  (cuifnefymen*),  and  the  shoes  and  stockings  being 
pulled  off,  the  promised  treasure  (ber  uerffmbtgte  ©cfyalj)  was 
discovered  (jetgt  ftdj).  The  robbers  humbly  (fyefltd))  thanked 
the  lady,  paid  (mad) en)  sundry  compliments  on  the  beauty  of 
her  foot,  and  without  waiting  for  an  answer,  they  made  off  with 
their  prize,  leaving  the  coach  to  proceed  on  its  journey  (wetter 
fafyren*).  Hardly  were  the  robbers  gone,  when  the  consterna- 
tion (bte  S5e(!iirgiinvq)  of  the  travellers  was  changed  (fid)  tterrcan* 
beln)  into  indignation  (bte  SQButfe).  Words  could  not  express 
(fid)  mcfyt  mtt  Morten  cuiSbriicfen  (aflfeii*)  the  sorrow  of  the  poor 
woman,  nor  the  resentment  (ber  3Drn)  expressed  by  (emporen) 
the  whole  party  against  the  betrayer  (ber  ^erratber). 

The  strongest,  and  even  the  most  insulting  epithets  of  disgust 
CDte  ung(tmpfltd)fi:en  unb  befc^tmpfenbjl'en  23etnamen)  were  lav- 
ished on  him  by  all  (fid)  an3  alter  3)iunbe  l)6ren  laffen*),  and 
many  went  even  so  far  as  to  call  him  a  rascal  (ber  S3ofett)td)t) 
and  the  accomplice  of  the  thieves  (ber  ^cinbergencg).  To 
these  marks  (bte  3(eiigerung)  of  the  general  indignation  (be$alk 
cjemetnen  Unnn!!en§)  (his  conduct  had  excited)  was  added  (oer* 


373 


btnben*)  the  threat  (He  SrofHimO  of  giving  the  informer  (ber 
5(rujeber)  a  sound  beating,  and  of  throwing  him  out  of  the  window 
(jum  $Bao,en  fytnauS),  and  of  instituting  legal  proceedings  against 
him  (3emanbett  a,ertd)t(td)  befottgett).  In  short  (Stur$),  all  seemed  • 
to  concur  (fid)  erfcfyopfen)  in  forming  schemes  (fcer  Sntitnirf  ) 
for  taking  exemplary  vengeance  on  the  offender  (an  tern  ©traf* 
bar  en  cine  auffatfenbe  9?ad)e).  The  latter  remained  perfectly 
unmoved  (fief)  cjcmj  ftttt  &etfta(ten*)»  and  only  remarked  once  in 
extenuation  (fidb  mtt  ber  3teugenmq  etttfd)Hlbtaen),  that  a  man 
could  have  nothing  dearer  to  him  than  himself  (3eber  fet  fid) 
felbfl  ber  Ctebfie)  ;  and  when  the  coach  reached  the  end  of  its 
journey  (ate  man  am  Qiele  ber  JKetfe  mar),  he  suddenly  (unset- 
fefyens)  disappeared  (x>erfd)tt>t'nben*),  before  his  fellow-travellers 
could  accomplish  (tnS  28erf  fe$en)  any  one  (et'ne  etn$to,e)  of 
their  intended  measures  (bte  beabficfyttcjten  Sftagrecjeht)  against 
him. 

As  to  the  unfortunate  young  lady,  it  is  easy  to  imagine  (fid) 
sorfteflen)  that  she  passed  a  sad  and  sleepless  night  (bte  9?ad)t 
t)6d)jl:  traitrtg  itnb  fd)(af1ic^  siibringen*).  To  her  joy  and  aston- 
ishment (fcaS  ©rfiaitnen),  she  received  the  next  day  the  follow- 
ing letter  : 

"  Madam,  —  You  must  yesterday  have  hated  (serabfcfyenen) 
as  an  informer  the  man  who  now  sends  you,  besides  the  sum 
you  then  advanced  him  (*>orfd)t'egen*),  an  equal  (g(et'd))  sum,  as 
interest  thereof  (ate  3^nfe«  baraitf),  and  a  trinket  (ba$  3titt>el) 
of  at  least  the  same  value  (ber  SfBertfy)  for  your  hair  (ju  3f)rew 
£aarfd)mncfe).  I  hope  this  will  be  sufficient  (btnretd)en)  to  si- 
lence (mt(bern)  your  grief,  and  I  will  now  explain  (fagen)  in  a 
few  words  what  must  appear  mysterious  in  my  conduct  (ben  cje* 
fyetmen  @mnb  metneS  95etrao,en3).  After  having  spent  (fid)  auf* 
fatten*)  ten  years  in  India  (3nbten),  where  I  amassed  (jufam- 
menbnnqen*)  a  hundred  thousand  pounds,  I  was  on  my  way 
home  with  letters  on  my  bankers  (ber  2Bed)felbrfef)  to  that 
amount  (fi'ir  bte  o,an$e  ®umme),  when  we  were  attacked  (ano,e- 
fatten  werben*)  yesterday  by  the  highwaymen.  All  my  savings 
(bte  retd)ltd)en  Erfparniflfe)  must  have  inevitably  been  sacrificed 
(e3  mar  gefd)eften  um),  had  the  shabbiness  (tie  Sarg()ett)  of  our 
fellow-travellers  (ber  9?etfea,efd'l)rte)  exposed  us  to  a  search  from 
(otMt  ^etten)  these  unprincipled  spoilers  (ber  9(nqret'fer).  Judge 
(ilrtt)et(en)  for  yourself,  if  the  idea  of  returning  to  India  thorough- 
ly empty  handed  (mtt  sofltq  leeren  £)anben),  could  be  support- 
able (ertracjltd))  to  me.  Forgive  me,  if  this  consideration  (bte 
33etrad)tnng)  led  (ttermogen*)  me  to  betray  your  confidence 
(ba3  3lltraiien  »erratfeen*)  and  to  sacrifice  (aufopfern)  a  small 


374 

m K^J  sum,  though  not  my  own,  to  save  my  whole  fortune.    I 

am  under  the  greatest  obligation  to  you.  I  shall  be  happy  to 
testify  (33eroetfe  geben  son)  my  gratitude  in  any  way  in  my 
power,  and  I  request  you  to  consider  (recfynen)  these  trifles  (fi'tr 
md)t3)  as  only  the  expressions  (fcte  cjertngen  &id)eri)  °f  my 
readiness  (burd)  n^elc^e  tc^  mtc^  beeifere)  to  serve  you." 


SYSTEMATIC    OUTLINE 


DIFFERENT  PARTS  OF  SPEECH, 


THEIR  INFLECTION  AND  USE. 


A 

SYSTEMATIC  OUTLINE 

OF   THE 

DIFFERENT  PARTS  OF  SPEECH, 

THEIR  INFLECTION  AND  USE. 


PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 

§  1.  The  German  language  has  ten  parts  of  speech: 
— The  Article,  Substantive  or  Noun,  Adjective,  Numeral, 
Pronoun,  Verb,  Adverb,  Preposition)  Conjunction,  and 
Interjection. 

Of  these  six  are  declinable ;  namely,  the  Article,  the 
Noun,  the  Adjective,  the  Numeral,  the  Pronoun,  and 
the  Verb. 

The  remaining  parts  of  speech  are  indeclinable  and 
are  called  PARTICLES. 

The  declinable  parts  of  speech  have  two  numbers, 
the  Singular  and  the  Plural. 

To  substantives,  and  to  all  the  other  declinable  parts 
of  speech,  except  the  verb,  belong  three  genders,  Mas- 
culine, Feminine,  and  Neuter. 

§  2.  They  have  also  four  cases: — Nominative, 
Genitive,  Dative,  and  Accusative,  which  in  general  cor- 
respond to  those  of  the  same  name  in  the  Classical 
Languages. 

1st,  The  nominative  is  employed  as  the  subject  of  a  proposition, 
in  answer  to  the  question  "who?"  or  "what?"  e.  g.  SSct 
femmt?  K't  SSatcr,  Me  gutter  unb  t>a$  .fitnb  fcmmen  ;  who  comes  1 
the  father,  the  mother  and  the  child  are  coming. 

2d,  The  genitive  denotes  the  relation  of  origin,  possession,  mu- 
tual connection,  and  many  others,  which  in  English  are  expressed  by 
the  possessive  case,  or  by  the  preposition  of.  It  answers  to  the 
question  "whose?"  e.  g.  SBScjpn  £>aus  ift  t>a$?  (5*  ift  t>cS  ^6ntg5 ; 
bos  £aufmann$  ;  whose  house  is  this?  It  is  the  king's;  the  mer- 
chant's. 


378 


3d,  The  dative  is  the  case  of  the  remote  object,  from  which  any 
thing  is  taken,  to  or  for  which  any  thing  is  done.  It  answers  to 
the  question  "to  whom?"  "for  what?"  e.  g.  8QBcm  brtngft  £)u 
tas  23ttcb  ?  5>cui  Cchrcr  ;  torn  ^nabcn  ;  for  whom  do  you  bring  that 
book  ?  For  the  teacher ;  the  boy. 

4th,  The  accusative  indicates  the  immediate  object  of  an  active 
transitive  verb,  in  answer  to  the  question  "  whom?"  or  "tvhat?" 
e.  g.  S3?a$  fjaft  2)u  ?  (Sine  gebet ;  cm  SOlcfict ;  what  hast  thou  1  A 
pen ;  a  knife. 


ARTICLES. 

§  3.  An  article  is  a  word  which  serves  to  restrict 
or  individualize  the  meaning  of  substantives. 

There  are  in  German  as  in  English  two  articles  ; 
the  definite  ber,  tie,  ba£,  the  ;  and  the  indefinite  cut,  cine, 
cin,  an  or  a. 

In  German  both  articles  are  declined,  i.  e.  they  indi- 
cate by  a  change  of  termination  the  gender,  the  num- 
ber, and  the  case  of  the  substantive  to  which  they  be- 
long. 


DECLENSION    OF    THE    DEFINITE     ARTICLE. 


SINGULAR. 


Masc. 

NOM.  ber, 

GEN.  be$, 

DAT.  fcem, 

Ace.  ben, 


Fern. 

bte, 
ber, 
ber, 
bte, 


Neut. 


bem, 


the. 
of  the. 
to  the. 

the. 


PLURAL. 

For  all  genders. 

bte,  the. 

ber,  of  the. 

ben,  to  the. 

bte,  the. 


DECLENSION     OF    THE    INDEFINITE     ARTICLE. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

NOM. 

ctn, 

ctne, 

cm, 

a,  an. 

GEN. 

etneS,, 

etner, 

etneS, 

of  a,  an. 

DAT. 

etnem*, 

etner, 

etnem, 

to  a,  an. 

Ace. 

etnert, 

etne, 

etn, 

a,  an. 

OBSERVATIONS. 


§  4.  Obs.  I.  The  meaning  of  substantives  without  the 
article  is  expressed  in  the  most  general  manner.  The  office 
of  the  article  is  to  point  out  either  definitely  or  indefinitely  an 
individual  of  the  genus  or  species  denoted  by  the  substantive ; 
e.  g.  ber  90?cmn,  the  man ;  cine  S3(ume,  a  flower. 


379 

Obs.  2.  Hence  common  nouns  only,  which  under  one  term 
comprehend  many  individuals,  can,  strictly  speaking,  assume 
the  article.  The  remaining  classes  of  nouns  must  from  the 
nature  of  their  signification  commonly  reject  it  ;  viz  :  1st, 
proper  names,  which  already  contain  the  notion  of  individuali- 
ty ;  as,  Goethe,  Walter  Scott,  &c.  ;  2d,  abstract  substantives 
and  names  of  materials,  the  meaning  of  which  is  so  general, 
that  no  individual  is  distinguished  ;  as,  virtue,  water,  gold. 

Obs.  3.  The  article,  however,  is  employed  in  various  rela- 
tions before  all  classes  of  substantives,  even  more  frequently 
in  German  than  in  English. 

ARTICLE    BEFORE    PROPER    NAMES. 

§  5.  The  article  is  used  before  proper  names  in  the 
following  instances  :  — 

1st,  When  the  name  of  a  person  assumes  the  signification  of 
a  common  noun.  This  is  the  case,  when  the  same  name  is  com- 
mon to  several  individuals  ;  as,  tic  (gtuart'S,  tic  Gatene,  the  Stuarts, 
the  Catos,  or  when  it  is  employed  to  express  some  quality  or 
characteristic  ;  as,  cr  tft  cm  grocttcr  ^Mato,  he  is  a  second  Plato  ;  bcr 
(Sajar  unfcrcc  Sett,  the  Caesar  of  our  age. 

2d,  If  the  name  of  a  person  is  preceded  by  an  adjective  ;  as, 
bcr  belli  flc  spetruS,  bcr  grojic  Jrtebrid),  St.  Peter,  Frederick  the  Great. 

3d,  When  the  name  of  an  author  is  put  instead  of  his  works  ; 
as,  id)  (cfc  ben  <Sd)arTpecire,  I  am  reading  Shakspeare;  fyabcn  (Sic 
ben  ?cffing  ncd)  ntd)t  ?  have  you  not  yet  purchased  Lessing's 
works  1 

4th,    To  denote   familiarity  or  inferiority  ;    as,   td)  ntag'£  unb 

ill's  ntcftt  ctfauOcn,  taj}  mid)  bet  Sflar  ocrtoffm  (jot  (<£d)tllcr),  I  cannot 


possibly  believe  that  (friend)  Max  has  deserted  me;  bet  $ri£  foft 
CKKbrutnt)  femmcn,  let  Frederick  (servant)  make  haste  to  come.  In 
this  connection  the  article  may  often  be  rendered  into  English  by  a 
possessive  pronoun;  e.  g.  roo  tft  bet  iOotcr?  where  is  your  father? 
tie  Gutter  tfr  airfgcgangcn,  my  (our)  mother  has  gone  out. 

5th,  To  distinguish  the  gender  of  names  of  countries  and  places, 
such  as  are  not  of  the  neuter  gender  ;  as,  btc  €fd)nH'tj/  bet  23rei$* 
gau  K. 

6th,  The  article  serves  often  simply  to  point  out  the  case  of  the 
name  ;  as,  ber  Belbjui)  bc$  (Sprite,  the  expedition  of  Cyrus  ;  tcr  Sob 
te$  ©ocratcS,  the  death  t)f  Socrates. 

ARTICLE    BEFORE    ABSTRACT    SUBSTANTIVES    AND    NAMES    OF 
MATERIALS. 

§  6.  Before  abstract  substantives  and  names  of 
materials  the  article  is  employed, 


380 

1st,  To  express  the  distinction  of  case,  when  the  noun  is  of  the 
feminine  gender  and  therefore  indeclinable  in  the  singular  (§  30) ; 
e.  g.  bet  Sag  b  c  r  $Kad)C  iff  gefommen/  the  day  of  vengeance  is 
come;  in  ber  gretbett  bciCqcm  ©d)u£,  under  the  sacred  protection 
of  liberty;  b  et  £>u(fe  bcburfen,  to  stand  in  need  of  help. 

2d,  When  their  meaning  is  restricted  to  some  particular  in- 
stance ;  as,  bas  SBaffer  bcr  (Slbe,  the  waters  of  the  Elbe ;  bet 
•Sletp  be£  (£d)ii(ct£,  the  diligence  of  the  scholar. 

ARTICLE    BEFORE    COMMON    NOUNS. 

§  7.  Common  nouns  are  usually  connected  either 
with  the  definite  or  indefinite  article.  Its  omission, 
however,  becomes  necessary  in  the  following  cases : — 

1st,  When  the  common  noun  expresses  some  quality  or  condi- 
tion; as,  ct  tft  jtaufmann,  jlomg,  (Sclbat  geroerben/  he  has  become 
a  merchant,  king,  a  soldier. 

2d,  In  titles,  superscriptions,  &c.,  as  in  English  ;  e.  g.  teeter 
Cutfyct ;  £ctt,  gran  ©tctrtcb/  Mr.,  Mrs.  Dietrich  ;  beutfd)  --  cnglifd)C$ 
SBortetlwd),  German-English  Dictionary. 

3d,  When  the  common  noun,  in  connection  with  a  preposition, 
constitutes  an  adverbial  expression,  or  when  several  common  nouns 
are  united  by  a  copulative  conjunction  and  form  one  complex  no- 
tion ;  e.  g.  $u  -Julie/  fiber  2cmb,  $u  (£d)tffe  retjen,  to  travel  on  foot,  by 
land,  by  sea;  $0fi  unb  SRettet  fd>noOen/ unb  jliee  unb  Junfcn  jtoben 
(SBurgcr)/  both  horse  and  horseman  were  panting,  and  pebbles 
and  sparks  were  flying;  nut  ®ut  unb  JBlut/  with  property  and 
life. 

4th,  Common  nouns  in  the  plural,  denoting  several  individuals 
in  an  indeterminate  manner,  and  corresponding  to  the  singular  with 
the  indefinite  article  cin,  cine,  ctn/  do  not  admit  of  the  article ;  as,  tcl) 
FjaOe  e  t  n  e  n  SB  1 1  c  f  crftalten/ 1  have  received  a  letter ;  plur.  id)  hciOe 
S3  r  t  e  f  e  ctfyatten,  I  have  received  letters,  spferbe  ftnb  nu^tid)C  Sf^icre/ 
horses  are  useful  animals.  , 

5th,  The  omission  of  the  article  often  gives  a  partitive  significa- 
tion to  the  substantive,  especially,  if  it  be  the  name  of  a  material 
substance.  In  this  case  we  supply  the  English  some  (the  French 
du)  ;  e.  g.  gt&  ifjm  SBrob,  9Jtt(d)/  SQBetn,  give  him  some  bread,  milk, 
wine,  &c. 

IDIOMATIC    USE    OF    THE    ARTICLE. 

§  8.  In  a  manner  peculiar  to  the  German,  the  definite  ar- 
ticle is  often  put  before  a  common  noun,  to  indicate  that  the  en- 
tire species  is  meant ;  e.  g.  t)  e  r  $ftenfd)  tjt  jterbltd),  man  (all 
men,  every  man)  is  mortal.  So  also  before  abstract  substan- 
tives and  names  of  materials,  when  their  meaning  is  to  be  taken 
to  its  full  extent ;  e.  g.  unb  b  t  e  lugenb,  fie  tjl  few  leerer 


381 


,  and  virtue,  it  is  no  empty  sound  ;  fca£  Stfen  tjl  cm  $)ie* 
tad,  iron  (all  iron)  is  a  metal. 

The  Germans  employ  the  definite  article  also  before  the  names 
of  seasons,  months,  days,  and  in  many  other  cases,  where  the 
English  idiom  does  not  admit  of  it  ;  e.  g.  fcer  £cn$,  ber  ©omnuT, 
fcer  2(benb,  spring,  summer,  evening  ;  fca3  Sfcrtjlcntfyum,  Christi- 
anity, fcte  (£fye,  matrimony,  &c. 

THE    ARTICLE    IN    SENTENCES. 

§  9.  When  in  the  same  proposition  several  substantives  of 
the  same  gender  and  number  follow  each  other,  the  article  is 
expressed  with  the  first  only  ;  but  if  they  differ  in  gender  or  in 
number,  or  are  otherwise  opposed  to  each  other,  it  must  be 
expressed  with  each  ;  e.  g.  btc  QBcrwanfctcn  imfc  JfCUltfce  buv 
jVs  Planned  ftnb  afle  tcbt,  the  relations  and  friends  of  this  man 
are  all  dead  ;  bcr  93atcr,  bte  Strutter  unb  bte  ttutbcr  fiitb  311 
£  a  ufer  the  father,  the  mother  and  the  children  are  at  home. 

When  a  substantive  in  the  genitive  case  limits  the  meaning 
of  another,  the  article  is  always  omitted  before  the  limited  sub- 
stantive,  if  the  genitive  precedes  it  ;  e.  g.  mcmcS  Q3ruber3 
93ud)  —  ba6  S3  lid)  mcmcS  95rufcet§,  my  brother's  book  ;  cwf  fei* 
ncS  ?fbctt^  crflcm  ©angc,  on  the  first  journey  of  his  life. 

§  10.  If  the  definite  article  is  preceded  by  one  of  the  pre- 
positions an,  cuifr  bet,  turd),  fi'ir,  in,  »cn,  »cr,  iibcr,  311,  both  are 
frequently  contracted  into  one  word. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  the  principal  contractions  thus 
formed  :  — 


?Cm, 

an*, 
aufc, 
betm, 


tm, 

lUcrm, 
untcrm, 


instead  of  an 

bent/     e. 

an 

t»a^,        4 

4                   QUf 

4             bci 

bcm, 

4             hird)  ta£,    ' 

4             fur 

ta^ 

4             in 

Dem, 

4             in 

>a$, 

4            t>on 

tcm, 

4             rer 

batv 

4             iibcc  torn, 

4             iibcr  ta?x 

4            tint 

:t  tern, 

4            311  torn, 

t            -it  j 

wr. 

e.  g.  am  Jcnftcr,  at  the  window  ; 
an$  lifer,  to  the  shore  ; 
cwf  5  $c(t>,  into  the  field  ; 
fcetm  Stcbte,  near  the  light; 
turd)^  SYIUT,  through  the  fire  ; 
fiir6  JCatcvtnnt/  for  one's  country  ; 
tin  &flUJV,  in  the  house  ; 
tn$  S^oijcr,  into  the  water; 
ttom  v^)tmuu'(,  from  (the)  heaven  ; 
&er6  Tfng^'tcbt,  before  the  face  ; 
ubcrin  CiTfccnleOcn,  above  this  earth- 

ly life  ; 

libcrg  sj^ocr/  over  the  sea  ; 
untcrm  JBaumc/  under  the  tree  > 
511111  (i)(ucf,  fortunately  ; 
gut  Jroutc,  to  the  joy. 


382 
SUBSTANTIVES  OR  NOUNS. 

§  11.  A  substantive  or  noun  is  the  name  of  any 
person  or  thing. 

Substantives  are  divided  into  three  principal  clas- 
ses :  Proper,  Common,  and  Abstract. 

A  proper  noun  is  the  name  of  an  individual  person 
or  object ;  as,  ^etrtrirf),  ^eittfcfyfaitb,  Henry,  Germany. 

A  common  noun  is  a  general  term  comprehending 
a  plurality  of  individuals  or  parts,  and  applicable  to 
each  of  them  ;  e.  g.  SKenfof),  SSaum,  ^ferb,  man,  tree, 
horse,  &c. 

Among"  common  nouns  may  also  be  included  names  of  materials ; 
as,  (£ifcn,  iron ;  93iild),  milk,  and  collective  nouns,  which  are  singu- 
lar in  form,  but  plural  in  signification ;  as,  83 elf,  people  ;  ©ebircje, 
range  of  mountains. 

An  abstract  noun  is  one  which  serves  to  denote 
either  a  quality,  an  activity,  or  mode  of  being,  to  which 
the  mind  attributes  an  independent  existence ;  e.  g. 
greil)ctt,  liberty  ;  ?aitf,  course ;  ©ebarf)tm$,  memory,  &c. 

In  German  the  initial  of  substantives  and  words 
used  substantively  is  always  a  capital  letter. 

We  shall  consider  the  substantive  in  a  fourfold 
point  of  view  ;  namely,  as  to  its  Gender,  its  Number, 
its  Inflection,  and  lastly  its  Government. 


I.    GENDER. 

§  12.  The  grammatical  gender  of  names  of  per- 
sons and  animals  generally  corresponds  to  their  natu- 
ral sex,  i.  e.  the  names  of  all  male  beings,  including 
that  of  the  Divinity  and  other  superior  beings  regard- 
ed as  males,  are  masculine  ;  those  of  all  females  are 
feminine  ;  e.  g.  ber  9Wamt,  the  man  ;  ber  ©ott,  God  ;  bev 
©eifi,  the  spirit ;  bte  ©ottinn,  the  goddess ;  bte  SKutter, 
the  mother. 

Exceptions.  Diminutives  in  cb  c  n  and  ( c  i  n  ;  as,  ta$  9D?aM)cn, 
the  maid  ;  fcaS  <D?iaun(i'tn,  the  mannikin  ;  also,  fcaS  SBi'tO,  the  woman, 
and  certain  compounds  ;  as,  Me  9)ionnspcrfen,  the  male;  t>06 
fcittV  grauenjtmiucr,  the  female,  woman. 


383 

Appellations,  comprehending  an  entire  species  of  living 
beings  without  reference  to  any  distinction  of  sex,  are  some- 
times masculine,  sometimes  feminine,  and  sometimes  neuter, 
e.  g.  fcer  ^ttenfd),  man  (homo)  ;  fcte  ^Bacfytel,  the  quail  ;  fcaS 
the  horse. 


§  13.  With  respect  to  substantives  in  general,  their 
gender,  as  far  as  it  is  reducible  to  rules,  may  be  deter- 
mined either  by  their  signification,  or  by  their  termi- 
nation. 

GENDER    OF    SUBSTANTIVES    DISTINGUISHED    BY    THEIR 
SIGNIFICATION. 

I.  Masculines.     The   name  of  winds,  seasons,  months,  and 
days  are  masculine  ;  also  the  points  of  compass,  as,  fcer  9torb, 
^iifc,  Ojt,  2Befl,  the  north,  south,  east,  west. 

II.  Feminities.     Most  names  of  rivers  are   feminine,  e.  g. 
tie  Xfyemfe,  Sonau,  SBefer,  the  Thames,  Danube,  Weser.  Ex- 
cept fcer  9tyetn,  SRain,  Dtyone,  3ftl  :c. 

§  14.     III.  Neuters.     To  the  neuter  gender  belong  : 

1st,  The  names  of  letters,  fcaS  3(,  35,  £  :c. 

2d,  All  infinitives  and  other  words,  which  properly  are  no 
substantives,  but  are  used  as  such  ;  e.  g.  fca£  Sefyen,  <£)bren, 
the  seeing,  hearing  ;  ba$  ©lite,  ©efybne,  the  good,  beautiful  ; 
t>a$  Scnn,  ba3  Slber,  the  if,  the  feirf. 

3d,  Names  of  countries  and  places  ;  as,  Seiitfofylcmb,  granf? 
^,  2efpS'3/  Sret'burg,  Germany,  France,  Leipzig,  Freiburg. 

Except  the  following  :  tic  .ftrtmm,  Crimea  ;  t>te  Caufi|,  Lusitania; 
tie  Wlwt,  Mark  ;  fcie  ^fa(^  Palatinate;  t)ic  Sct)ivci^  Switzerland; 
all  those  ending  in  e  t  ;  as,  t>ie  Sittfet,  SGBalodbci  2C.,  Turkey,  Wala- 
chia  ;  and  all  those  compounded  with  a  u  or  3  a  u  ;  e.  g.  tec  58rei$2 
gait,  tic  SOBcttcrau  K. 

4th,  Most  collective  nouns  and  names  of  materials  ;  as,  ba3 
$df,  the  people  ;  QStet),  cattle  ;  gletfd),  flesh  ;  £»aar,  the  hair. 

5th,  Names  of  metals  ;  as,  fcaS  Stfen,  ©olb,  ©tlber,  3l'nn/  tne 
iron,  gold,  silver,  tin. 

Except:  t)cr  ^oOatt,  cobalt;  tic  ^{atina,  platina;  bcc  (Staljt,  steel  ; 
ter  Sombarf,  tombac  ;  tcr  3inf,  zink. 

GENDER    OF    SUBSTANTIVES    DISTINGUISHED     BY    THEIR 
TERMINATION. 

§  15.  I.  MASCULINES.  To  the  masculine  gender  be- 
long : 


384 

1st,  Primary  derivatives*  of  one  syllable ;  as,  fcer  $ln$,  ©cfyfag, 
©prud),  Sanf,  fflnft,  the  flight,  beat,  sentence,  course,  river. 

2d,  Most  derivatives,  both  primary  and  secondary,  terminating 
in  el,  er,  en,  ing,  ling;  e.g.  fcer  ©tpfel,  top;  (Ecfynabel, 
beak ;  Summer,  sorrow ;  £)urtger,  hunger ;  ©attert,  garden ; 
SfBcujert,  waggon ;  £<mng,  herring ;  £)6fltng,  courtier ;  ©iinfk 
(tncj,  favourite. 

To  these  there  are  many  exceptions : — 

Exc.  1.  Substantives,  the  gender  of  which  is  otherwise  de- 
termined by  their  signification,  e.  g.  tie  SCftutter,  mother ;  Secbtcr, 
daughter ;  tie  SJiofcl,  jpfctt  (rivers) ;  tag  ©il&er,  silver ;  SKefftmj, 
brass. 

Exc.  2.  Most  names  of  animals  in  c  (,  and  many  names  of 
things  are  feminine,  e.  g.  tie  Tl'mfcl,  blackbird ;  3)roffc(,  thrush ; 
pummel,  bumble-bee ;  2£acl)tef,  quail ;  2fd)fc(,  shoulder ;  93ucfc(,  boss  ; 
(£id)C(,  acorn  ;  ©abet,  fork  ;  9?ate(,  needle  ;  Sd)ad)tcl,  box  ;  (£d)intef, 
shingle ;  £afe(,  table ;  £remmc(,  drum  ;  2Bur$c(,  root,  &c. 

§  16.  Exc.  3.  Words  in  c(,  of  Latin  origin,  which  formerly 
ended  in  la  are  feminine;  as,  tic  ^ormct,  formula;  Snft't  (insu/a), 
island,  &c.  ;  but  those  which  originally  ended  in  lum  are  neuter, 
e.  g.  ta£  @vcmpc(  (exemp/wm),  the  example  ;  (Sapttd,  chapter;  £)ras 
fc(  (oracu/wm),  oracle.  So  also, ta$  •sBiintcl, bundle;  iDJittct/ means; 
(Sicojd,  seal,  and  others. 

Exc.  4.     The  following  in  ct  are  feminine  : — 

2(tcr,  vein.  Jlicfcr,  pine. 

2f«ftcr,  oyster.  Stammer,  cramp. 

JBtnttcr,  blister.  ^tapper,  clapper. 

JButtcr,  butter.  Ccbcr,  liver. 

(Sifter,  magpie.-  Ccttcr,  ladder. 

$afct,  fibre.  9^afcr,  speck. 

^cK'r,  pen.  Scatter,  adder. 

Jfdttcr,  tinsel.  ^ttcr,  viper, 

getter,  torture.  SZujlcr,  elm. 

£a(ftcr,  halter.  (Sd)(cutcr,  sling. 

j^ammcty  chamber.  Rebutter,  shoulder, 

better,  wine-press.  SOBimpcr,  eye-lash. 

Exc.  5.     The  following  in  c  t  are  neuter  : — 

2C(ter,  age.  (Sutcr,  udder. 

(Stter,  pus.  guter,  load. 

*  Substantives  formed  from  primitive  verbs  by  a  simple  change  of  the 
radical  vowel,  are  called  primary  derivatives ;  as,  SBrncfy,  breach,  from  fore* 
d)cn,  to  break  ;  3u$,  march,  from  Jtebeit,  to  march.  Commonly  they  add  no 
other  termination  to  the  root  of  the  verb.  But  sometimes  they  assume  e  r, 
e  I,  C  n,  and  also  b,  e,  t,  ft.  Secondary  derivatives  are  formed  either  from 
verbs,  from  adjectives,  or  from  other  nouns,  by  means  of  certain  affixes, 
such  as  d,  er,  f)  e  it,  feit,  ung,  ffbaft  K. 


385 

r,  fodder.  9)2cffcr,  knife. 

©otter,  ")       .  SHicNr,  bodice, 

©tttcr,    3g  sffluftcr,  pattern. 

Jllafter,  fathom.  spcljlcr,  cushion. 

Cagcr,  couch.  SHufcvT,  oar. 

Caller,  vice.  lifer,  bank. 

Ccfccr,  leather.  ffiLVtter,  weather. 

£iiKT,  carrion.  Saunter/  wonder, 
falter,  a  measure  of  corn.     Simmer,  room. 

Exc.  6.  Of  those  terminating  in  en,  the  following  are  neuter: — 
fai  i^ecfcn,  basin  ;  ^ijji'n,  cushion;  gafcn,  sheet;  happen,  escutch- 
eon ;  3eict)cn,  sign. 

§17.     II.  FEMININES.     To  the  feminine  gender  belong: 

1st,  All  substantives  having  the  termination  in  it  (also  writ- 
ten {  n),  which  affix  is  joined  to  masculine  names  of  persons 
and  animals,  to  form  corresponding  terms  for  females ;  e.  g. 
©ett,  ©ottuw;  Come,  Cdroinn,  lion,  lioness;  £eft>,  £eltwm, 
hero,  heroine,  &c. 

2d,  Primary  derivatives  in  fce,  e,  t,  ft;  e.  g.  fcte 
snake  ;  ftiutfce,  knowledge  ;  ^ernunft,  reason  ;  Swift,  art. 
JS.xc.  1.     The  following-  are  masculine: — 
3$aft,  bast.  9#ont>,  moon. 

S^eiacrjt,  reflection?  93icnat,  month. 

JBctrad)t,  consideration.  s))?ojt,  must. 

Socbt,  wick.  SKof!,  rust. 

2Henft  service.  (£ct)ad)t,  shaft  (in  mines). 

£>raf)t,  wire.  Schaft,  shaft. 

S)un|l,  vapour.  ^dnift,  rascal. 

JDurft,  thirst.  Sc(C,  pay. 

ft,  earnestness.  Stift,  tag. 

fl,  forest.  Srcjl,  comfort, 

j!,  frost.  £>ctr;ad)t,  suspicion. 

ibt/  yest.  ^crluji,  loss, 

©ennnnft,  gain.  2Bon|l,  paunch. 

£ed)t,  pike.  S5?irf)t,  wight. 

^cvbjlt,  autumn.  8Q5utf,  filth. 

932 1  ft/  dung.  Stvift,  dispute. 

c.  2.  The  following  are  neuter  :  —  fcn$  ©efpcnfl,  spectre ;  (&tf 
ficbt,  face;  ^aupt,  head;  ^tn^  child ;  £(cinot>,  jewel;  Ctd)t,  light; 
Stiff,  (ecclesiastical)  foundation. 

§  18.  3d,  Secondary  derivatives,  formed  by  the  affixes  e  t, 
e,  I)  e  1 1,  f  e  1 1,  11  n  g,  f  rf)  a  f  t,  a  t  ty,  it  t  ^ ;  as,  bte  ^euc^elet, 
hypocrisy;  (stdrfe,  strength;  Sufenftett,  boldness;  Sttelfett, 
vanity;  gefliing,  fortress;  gan^fc^aft,  landscape; 
home ;  5(rmutt)r  poverty. 
17 


386 

Exceptions.  Many  of  those  in  c  are  masculine ;  as,  t>cr  «pa[l', 
the  hare;  JKflOc/  crow;  .Rafc,  cheese,  &c.,  and  some  are  neuter; 
as,  fraS  TdiCjt',  the  eye  ;  (S'rbo,  inheritance  ;  (Srtfc,  end,  &c. — Sicratl), 
ornament,  is  masculine,  and  ^ctfdjaft,  seal,  is  neuter. 

§19.     III.  NEUTERS.      To  the  neuter  gender  belong : — 

1st,  All  diminutives  ending  in  cfyen  and  (etn;  as,  fca3 
Q3U'tmd)ert,  the  floweret ;  ©ol)ncf)eit,  little  son ;  ^ucfylem,  little 
book  ;  gran  letrt,  young  lady,  miss. 

2d,  Collective  and  frequentative  substantives  formed  by  the 
prefix  g  e ;  as,  fra3  ©eftnfce,  domestics ;  ©etbfe,  noise ;  ®c* 
ftt'rn,  constellation ;  —  fca§  ©erefcc,  talk  ;  ©elciufe,  frequent 
walking,  &c. 

3d,  Most  secondary  derivatives  formed  by  the  affixes  f  e  (, 
fat,  tfyum,  ntgj  as.  fca§  Ucberbletfcl,  remainder;  ^citbfcl, 
riddle  ;  £>rangfal,  distress  ;  ©c^tdffal,  iate  ;  Stjrtftcnt^um,  Chris- 
tianity ;  £)  erg  outturn,  dukedom ;  S3imfcntg,  alliance  ;  &er(att$ 
nt0,  relation. 

Exc.  1.  Of  those  in  t  f)  u  m,  three  are  masculine:  —  KT  3>m 
t^uin/  error  ;  9?clcbtl)inn,  riches  ;  S&odb&fyum,  growth.  Of  those  in 
fat,  Srubfal,  affliction,  is  feminine;  (Etcpfcl,  stopper,  is  neuter. 

Exc.  2.     The  following  in  n  1 15  are  feminine  : — 

grievance.  (J-rtaiiOni^pefmission. 

rubnt:}/  affliction.  ^autnif^  putrefaction. 

JBct-ummcrni^  sorrow.  $in|lcrmp,  darkness. 

JBcfercjni?/  apprehension.  JlcnntniS,  knowledge. 

SBtNKinbfltf,  condition.  fiScrbammni^  damnation. 

©mpfangnt^  conception.  SBtltutH,  wilderness. 
(Srfparntp,  savings. 

GENDER    OF    COMPOUND    SUBSTANTIVES. 

§  20.  Compound  substantives  generally  adopt  the  gender 
of  the  second  component,  which  contains  the  emphatic  idea ; 
as,  fcer  Sird)  t)  D  f/  tne  church-yard ;  fcaS  9?at()  I)  cut  ^  the  town- 
hall  ;  bte  Suib  m  it  i)  ( e,  the  windmill. 

Exc.  1.  Names  of  places  are  always  neuter,  though  their  prin- 
cipal component  may  be  masculine  or  feminine ;  e.  g.  (ta?)  grcis 
0  u  r  $  (Me  JBurc}),  £am  ft  u  r  $,  SBtttcn  0  c  r  3  (t>  c  c  iBcrcO,  &c, 

Exc.  2.  A  number  of  substantives  compounded  with  t  C  t 
93?  u  t  ()  are  feminine  : — 

TCnmutf)/  grace.  (ganfrnuitft,  meekness. 

JDcmutf)/  humility.  @d)twrmutf),  melancholy. 

(Srefimutb,  generosity.  aBchmut^,  sadness, 
f),  forbearanctj. 


387 


Exc.  3.  The  following  likewise  deviate  from  the  general  rule: 
tvr  tflM'cb  e  u  (b  i  e  S\'bou), abhorrence;  Me  ^lOURauge,  lamprey  ;  the 
following  compounds  of  Sbeil,  part: — ta*  ($H\}emhd(,  the  reverse; 
vpinteitbett,  hind  part;  i^ortvvtbnl,  fore  part ;  also,  fc  e  r  9Jiittn?ed), 
Wednesday,  which,  however,  sometimes  is  t>  i  e  9)ttttn>od). 

GENDER    OF    FOREIGN    SUBSTANTIVES. 

§  21.  Those  foreign  substantives  which  have  preserved  their 
original  fcirn,  retain  also  the  gender  which  they  have  in  the  lan- 
guage from  which  they  are  adopted ;  e.  g.  tcr  Sector,  *3i;ntt? 
cud;  fct'c  ^pntar.t'3,  fra$  Souciltum. 

But  those,  whose  form  has  become  assimilated  to  German 
words,  frequently  assume  another  gender ;  c.  g.  t>cr  3(Uar 
(altare),  the  alter  ;  ter  5lerper  (corpus),  the  body ;  fcer  D?uut 
(ruina),  the  ruin  ;  bay  Genfulat  (consulatus),  the  consulship,  &c. 

Some  substantives  have  two  genders,  and  are  generally  also  em- 
ployed in  different  significations.  The  following  list  exhibits  the 
most  important  of  them  :^— 

ba$  Spanb/  the  ribbon. 
5^cr  Sillier/  the  peasant ;  fcas  ^ouer/  the  cage. 

ta5  ^uul)/  the  bundle. 

tn*  (Sbcr,  the  chorus. 

ta£  ^rfi'nntnip,  decision  (judicial). 

ta?  (Srl'C,  the  inheritance. 

ba?  ©ebalt/  the  salary. 

Me  ©ei^i't,  the  whip. 

Mo  irKiftv',  the  heath. 
32er  .ftimfce,  the  customer  ;  Me  .^ui^o,  knowledge. 

tflS  0)?cnfd)/  the  wench. 

tfl6  JRei£,  the  twig. 

^n5  (Sd)t(^/  sign  (of  a  house). 
£\T  ©ec,  the  lake  ;  Me  <Boe,  the  sea. 

5>er  Stiff,  the  peg ;  t>n^  ^ttft,  charitable  foundation. 

>Der  SbcK,  the  part ;  tn^  Sbeil/  the  share. 

5)er  Sbcr,  the  fool;  bn$  2bcr,  the  door. 

*Der  ^etMenfl/  earnings  ;  ta^  ^orMonji/  the  merit. 


the  volume  ; 
the  peasant ; 
the  alliance  ; 
(Sber,  the  choir  ; 
(vrfnuitiuh',  knowledge; 
OiTlu',  the  heir ; 
(Sic bolt/  the  contents  ; 
(Si'ifvl,  the  hostage  ; 
j>Ctbf/  the  pagan  ; 
.ftiinbo,  the  customer; 
b/  man ; 
rice  ; 


II.     NUMBER. 

§  22  In  German,  as  in  English,  substantives  have 
two  numbers,  the  Singular  and  the  Plural. 

With  respect  to  the  termination  of  the  singular  no 
definite  rules  can  be  given. 


388 

The^nominative  plural  is  formed  from  the  nomina- 
tive singular  according  to  one  of  the  following  Rules: — 

Rule  I.  The  nominative  plural  frequently  does  not 
differ  from  the  nominative  singular  by  any  additional 
letter  or  syllable,  especially  in  masculine  and  neuter 
substantives  ending  el,  er,  en,  and  diminutives  in 
d)  e  tt  and  I  e  i  n . 

It  is  then  either  the  same  as  the  singular,  or  is  distinguished 
from  it  by  the  modification  of  its  radical  vowel  ;*  e.  g.  ber  @n- 
gel,  the  angel,  pi.  bte  (Jngel;  ber  Staffer,  emperor,  pi.  bte 
Staffer;  baS  genfler,  window,  pi.  bte  genfler  \ — ber  >8ater,  ia- 
ther,  pi.  bte  QSdter ;  ber  Of  en,  stove,  pi.  bte  Oefen;  ber  93ru* 
ber,  brother,  pi.  bt'e  $3riiber. 

There  are  only  two  feminine  substantives  belonging  to  this 
class :  flatter,  mother ;  Tecfyter,  daughter,  pi.  OJiittter,  Ted)- 
ter.  The  change  of  the  radical  vowel  is  restricted  to  mascu- 
line nouns ;  of  neuters,  only  ^tejTer,  monastery,  has  Stlbjler  in 
the  plural ; — but,  bo3  SfBajfer,  water,  pi.  bie  ^Bajfer ;  ba£  9?n* 
ber,  oar,  pi.  bte  9?iiber. 

§  23.  Rule  II.  In  all  other  cases  the  nominative 
plural  is  formed  from  the  nominative  singular  by  an- 
nexing one  of  the  terminations  e,  e  r,  e  n  (n);  e.  g.  ber 
greimb,  the  friend,  pi.  bie  ^reunb  e  ;  bev  ^nabe,  the  boy, 
pi.  bte  $naben ;  batf  S3itd),  the  book,  pi.  bte  SSitrf)  er« 

O^5.  1.  The  termination  c  belongs  chiefly  to  masculine  substan- 
tives. It  is,  however,  also  added  to  feminines  and  neuters  ;  e.  g. 
frcr  £09,  the  day,  pi.  bte  Sflgc ;  bet  Jtcpf/  the  head,  pi.  tic  .ficpfe; 
tic  Jtunft,  art,  pi.  tie  ^linfte ;  tn6  iBovt,  the  word,  pi.  Me  SBctti1. 

Obs.  2.  The  termination  cr  properly  belongs  to  nouns  of  the 
neuter  gender  only.  Masculines  assume  it  only  by  way  of  excep- 
tion ;  e.  g.  bn$  *8tlb,  the  picture,  pi.  tic  iBtlfrcr  ;  tas  ^lint1,  the 
child,  pi.  tic  Winter  ;  tcr  ©ctjl,  the  spirit,  pi.  tic  Gciftcr. 

Obs.  3.  The  termination  c  n  (n)  is  assumed  principally  by  femi- 
nines, also  by  masculines,  and  a  few  neuters  ;  e.  g.  tic  (Debute,  the 
school,  pi.  tic  ^cbutcn  ;  tic  Stfatd,  the  needle,  pi.  tic  9?citcln  ;  tcr 
^afc,  the  hare,  pi.  tic  £afcn  ;  ta£  £}f)C,  the  ear,  pi.  tic  £>f)rcn. 

§  24.     Obs.  4.     Substantives  which  form  their  plural  in  e  r 

*  That  part  of  the  substantive  which  is  never  affected  by  the  changes  of  in- 
flection is  called  its  root.  When  it  contains  one  of  the  vowels  a,  0,  ll,  or  the 
diphthong  au,  they  are  frequently  changed  into  (i,  P,  ii,  ail  in  the  plural  and  arc 
then  said  to  be  modified. 


389 

always  modify  the  vowels  of  the  root  (a,  o,  u,  ail) ;  and  those, 
which  form  their  plural  in  e  n,  never  modify  it.  With  respect 
to  plurals  in  e,  the  modification  always  takes  place  when  the 
substantive  is  feminine,  and  usually  too  when  it  is  masculine, 
but  rarely  when  it  is  neuter. 

Rule  III.  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  adopted  from  modern 
languages  frequently  form  their  plural  in  $ ;  as,  @eiue%  Corfc§, 
(£plo'§  5  so  also  German  words,  the  termination  of  which  is  not 
susceptible  of  inflection ;  as,  fcte  U\«,  fcte  £'$/  fcte  ty  a  p  a  '  3. 

Rule  IV.  Nouns  compounded  with  OJtann  usually  take 
£  e  u  t  e  instead  of  9R  d  n  n  c  r  (the  regular  pi.  of  9Q?cmn)  in 
the  plural ;  e.  g.  fcer  Slaiif  m  a  n  n,  the  merchant,  pi.  Saitf  ( e  it  t  e ; 
fcer  £>cf  m  a  n  n,  the  courtier,  pi.  tie  £>of  I  e  u  t  e. 

§  25.  Common  nouns  alone  are  by  their  significa- 
tion entitled  to  a  plural  number. 

The  following  classes  of  substantives  want  the  plu- 
ral:— 

1st,  Proper  names,  except  when  they  assume  the  signification 
of  common  nouns  (§  45)  ;  as,  Slarl,  Jrtefcnrf),  9?em. 

2d,  Names  of  materials,  except  when  different  species  of  the 
same  genus  are  to  be  denoted ;  as,  fca$  Sifett,  (£tlber,  ©otb, 
iron,  silver,  gold  ; — but  fcte  SrDcn,  the  earths  (different  kinds)  ; 
tie  Sftmeralmajfer,  mineral  waters. 

^3d,  Many  collectives  ;  as,  fca§  ©eftnfce,  the  domestics;  ba§ 
SStel),  cattle,  &c. 

4th,  All  infinitives  and  neuter  adjectives  used  substantively ; 
as,  ta3  ^Betg,  white  (the  colour) ;  bt$>  £>d'gltd)e,  the  ugly ;  ta§ 
Stnfommett,  the  income  ;  ba§  ^iffen,  knowledge. 

5th,  Most  abstract  substantives,  especially  such  as  denote 
qualities,  powers  or  affections  of  the  mind,  &c. ;  as,  fcer  J$(ei@/ 
diligence  ;  tie  3ll9en^  J°uth  ;  fcte  Q^ernunft,  reason  ;  fcte  Surest, 
fear.  Sometimes,  however,  they  become  concrete,  expressing 
different  kinds  of  the  same  quality,  &c.,  and  then  they  are  em- 
ployed in  the  plural ;  as,  litgenben,  virtues  ,•  (Bcfybnfyet'ten,  beau- 
ties. 

§  26.  6th,  Substantives  denoting  number,  measure,  weighty 
when  preceded  by  a  numeral,  are  put  in  the  singular,  even 
though  in  other  connections  they  may  form  a  plural ;  as,  gn>et 
g  u  g  brett,  two  feet  wide  ;  fed)3  ^  f  u  n  t  Gutter,  six  pounds 
of  butter  ;  etn  9?eqtment  con  tcutfent)  $)?  a  n  n  (not  Banner,  pi.)/ 
a  regiment  of  thousand  men. 


390 


Exceptions.  Feminine  substantives  in  e,  and  such  as  express  a 
measure  of  time;  as,  $rc>ci  (Sllcn  (&i  c  (Stic)  Such/  two  ells  of  cloth; 
fiinf  Safyte  tong,  for  five  years;  moreover,  all  names  of  coins; 
as,  $tt>ct  ©refcrjcn,  $tpb'(f  .ft reiser,  two  groshes,  twelve  kreuzers, — are 
put  in  the  plural  as  in  English. 

§  27.  Some  substantives  are  employed  in  the  plur- 
al number  only : — 

2(l)nen,  ancestors.  -[fftaferrt,  \          i 

Meltern,  parents.  JRot&eln,  $  m 

3Upenr  alps.  ^3?clfeit,  whey. 

O)l:ern,  Easter. 

^ffncjflen,  Whitsuntide. 

£^cinfe,  tricks. 

^porteln,  fees. 

Ira'ber,  husks. 

Iritmmer,  ruins. 

Iruppen,  troops. 

2Betfynad)ten,  Christmas. 

3ett(ciiifte/  junctures. 

3tnfen,  interest  of  money. 


^ 

£>ofert,          $ 
23neffd)aften,  papers. 
Siltffinfte,  revenue, 
gatfen,  Lent, 
gterien.  vacation, 
©efdtfe,  rents. 
©Uebmagen,  limbs. 
5toften,  expenses. 
Ceute,  people. 


§  28.  There  are  a  number  of  substantives  which 
have  two  forms  for  the  plural,  partly  as  a  simple  dia- 
lectic variety,  but  most  commonly  with  different  sig- 
nifications : — 


SINGULAR. 

Set  23ant>,  the  volume  ; 
£)a£  93anb,  the  ribbon  ; 
£)a3  23anfc,  the  bond ; 
Ste  23anf,  the  bench ; 
£)te  33anf,  the  bank ; 
Ser  Waiter,  the  peasant ; 
£)a3  Waiter,  the  cage  ; 

Ser  Sern,  the  thorn ; 

£)m$,  the  thing  ; 
Sing,  little  creature  ; 
©eftd)t,  the  face ; 
©eftcfyt,  the  vision ; 
£)Dtn,  the  horn  ; 


PLURAL. 

tie  23anbe. 
t>te 


fcte  -23d'nfe. 
bte  35anfen» 
tie  ^Sauern. 
tie  Waiter. 
Dernen. 
X)brner. 
bte 
He 

tie  ©ejtd)ter. 
bte  ©eftdfjte. 
tie  Corner ;   but  $  o  r  n  e,  dif- 
ferent sorts  of  horn. 


391 

Ser  £aten,  the  shutter ;         tie 

Ser  i'aben,  the  shop  ;  fcte  Cdben. 

Ser  Orr,  the  place; 

Set  gifjtto,  the  shield  ;  tie 

Sad  £d)tlb,  the  sign  ;  fcie 

Sad  Sti'uf,  the  piece  ;  tie  Stiicfe. 

Sad  ©tmf,  the  fragment ;  tie  Stiidfen. 

Ser  Ifjor,  the  fool ;  fcte  Ifyeren. 

Sad  Ifyev,  the  door ;  bte  Ifyere. 

Sad  SBort,  the  word ;  tie  ^Sorter  ;  but  ffi  o  rt  c,  words, 

in  connected  discourse. 


III.     INFLECTION. 

§  29.  For  the  purposes  of  declension  we  divide 
German  substantives  into  two  classes,  which  differ  es- 
sentially in  their  mode  of  inflection  ;  viz  :  1st,  Common 
and  Abstract  Nouns  ;  2d,  Proper  Names. 

DECLENSION    OF    COMMON   AND    ABSTRACT    NOUNS. 

§  30.  Common  and  abstract  nouns  have  two  priii 
cipal  forms  of  inflection,  denominated  the  earlier  and 
the  later  declensions.  The  characteristic  distinction  of 
each  is  the  termination  of  its  genitive  singular,  which 
in  the  earlier  declension  is  3  or  e  £,  and  in  the  later 
It  or  e  m 

All  feminine  substantives  are  invariable  in  the  sin- 
gular ;  hence  their  mode  of  declension  is  determined 
by  the  nominative  plural. 

The  nominative,  genitive  and  accusative  plural  are 
always  alike,  and  their  difference  is  pointed  out  by 
the  article  only. 

The  dative  plural  always  assumes  it,  unless  its  nom- 
inative already  ends  in  that  letter. 


EARLIER  DECLENSION. 


§  31.     The  earlier  declension  comprises  nouns  of  all 
genders,  and  may  be  distinguished  by  the  termination 


392 


of  its  genitive  singular,  which  (feminine  nouns  ex- 
cepted)  is  always  $  or  e  $«, 

The  nominative  plural  is  either  the  same  as  the 
nominative  singular,  or  it  assumes  one  of  the  termina- 
tions e,  e  r,  e  n  or  n. 

In  the  plural  the  radical  vowels  a,  0,  U,  and  the  diph- 
thong ail,  are  generally  modified  into  a,  5,  it,  au. 

Hence  to  inflect  a  word  of  this  declension,  not  only 
the  genitive  singular,  but  also  its  nominative  plural 
must  be  given  ;  e.  g.  ber  23rnber,  the  brother,  gen.  be3 
33ruber£,  nom.  pi.  bie  S3riiber  ;  bie  Srucfyt,  fruit,  nom.  pL 
bie  griicfyte  ;  bcr£  $(eib,  the  garment,  gen.  beg  $feibe£, 
nom.  pi.  bie  $leiber* 

TABULAR    VIEW    OF   THE    TERMINATIONS    OF   THE    EARLIER 


DECLENSION. 


SINGULAR. 

] 

I. 

NOM. 

given. 

1  like  the  sing. 

GEN. 

e$,  3  (en$,  n$). 

" 

DAT. 

e,  or  like  the  nom. 

—  n. 

Ace.    like  the  nom. 

i  like  the  nom. 

PLURAL. 

II.        III.       IV. 


e. 
e. 
en. 
e. 


er. 

er. 

ern. 

er. 


en,  n. 
en,  n. 
en,  n. 
en,  tu 


§  32.    PARADIGMS. 

I.  a.    2)er  33ater,  the  father. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  ber  93ater,       the  father ;  bte  QSater,  the  fathers. 

GEN.  fceS  55ater^,  of  the  father ;  ber  53ater,  of  the  fathers. 

DAT.  bem  ^ater,  to  the  father  ;  ben  QSatern,  to  the  fathers. 

Ace.  ben  93ater,        the  father ;  bte  93dter,  the  fathers. 

I.  b.     £)te  5D7utter,  the  mother. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  fcfe  Stutter,  the  mother;  bie  9)iiitter,  the  mothers. 
GEN.  ter  flutter,  of  the  mother ;  ber  SRiitter,  of  the  mothers. 
DAT.  ter  iWutter,  to  the  mother ;  ben  9SRuttern,  to  the  mothers. 
Ace.  bte  2)iiitter,  the  mother ;  bte  SSRiitter/  the  mothers. 


393 

II.  a.     £)er  93anm,  the  tree. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  ber  93anm,         the  tree  ;  bte  23aume,  the  trees. 

GEN.  bed  93anmed,  of  the  tree  ;  ber  23anme,  of  the  trees. 

DAT.  bem  93anme,    to  the  tree  ;  ten  93anmen,  to  the  trees. 

Ace.  ten  93aum,          the  tree  ;  tie  93aume,  the  trees. 

II.  b.     Die  $anb,  the  hand. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  bte  £anb,  the  hand  ;  bte  £anbe,           the  han  ' 

GEN.  bet  £)anb,  of  the  hand ;  bcr  £»dnbe,  of  the  hands. 

DAT.  ber  $anb,  to  the  hand ;  ben  £>anben,  to  the  hands. 

Ace.  bte  £>anb,  the  hand ;  bte  £a'nbe,          the  hands. 

III.  a.     J)ad  ?teb,  the  song. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  bad  Ct'eb,  the  song ;  bte  Ct'eber,  the  songs. 

GEN.  bed  StebeS,  of  the  song ;  ber  Weber,  of  the  songs. 

DAT.  bem  ?t'ebe,  to  the  song ;  ben  Ctebern,  to  the  songs. 

Ace.  bad  Steb,  the  song ;  bte  Cieber,  the  songs. 

III.  b.     Ser  ©et'fr,  the  spirit. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  ber  ©et'ft,         the  spirit ;  bte  ©etfter,         the  spirits. 

GEN.  bed  ©ct'tfed,  of  the  spirit;  ber  ©etfter,    of  the  spirits. 

DAT.  bem  ©et'fle,   to  the  spirit ;  ben  ©etftern,  to  the  spirits. 

Ace.  ben  ©eijt,         the  spirit ;  bte  ©etfler,         the  spirits. 

IV.  a.     55er  ©tra^I,  the  ray. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  ber  (Stratyl,        the  ray ;  bte  <£trafyfen,  the  rays. 

GEN.  bed  <Strat)led,  of  the  ray;  ber  @tral)(en,  of  the  rays. 

DAT.  bem  ©trafole,  to  the  ray;  ben  ®trat)(en,  to  the  rays. 

Ace.  ben  ©trafyf,        the  ray ;  bte  ©trafylen,  the  rays. 

IV.  b.     Sad  2(iia,e,  the  eye. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  bad  Sfucte,          the  eye  ;  tte  SCngen,  the  eyes. 

GEN.  bed  3(ncjed,  of  the  eye  ;  ber  2(iia,en,  of  the  eyes. 

DAT.  bem  ^itcje,  to  the  eye  ;  ben  2(na.en,  to  the  eyes. 

Ace.  bad  Stncje,          the  eye  ;  bte  ^Uiaen,  the  eyes. 
17* 


394 

V.     Set4  IRame,  the  name. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  fcer  9?ame,      the  name  ;  fcte  Seamen,  the  names. 

GEN.  fce3  IftamenS,  of  the  name  ;  fcer  9iamen,  of  the  names. 

DAT.  fcem  Seamen,  to  the  name;  fcen  teamen,  to  the  names. 

Ace.  ten  Sftamen,     the  name  ;  bte  Stamen,  the  names. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

The  laws  of  euphony  alone  can  decide,  whether  the  termi- 
nation of  the  genitive  singular  is  to  be  §  or  e£,  and  whether 
the  dative  is  to  be  like  the  nominative  or  to  have  e.  Gener- 
ally, however,  nouns  ending  in  b,  fc,  t,  jl,  d),  g,  f,  3,  fd),  p,  3 
form  their  genitive  in  e  3,  and  their  dative  in  e  j  those  ending 
in  ant,  at,  ent),  id)t,  ig,  in  9,  ling,  rid),  fa(,  tfyitm 
have  s  in  the  genitive,  and  the  dative  like  the  nominative. 

§  33.  Like  3Sater  (I.  a.)  are  inflected  all  masculine 
and  neuter  substantives  terminating  in  e  I,  e  r  or  en; 
diminutives  in  if)  e  n  and  [  c  t  n  ;  and  neuters  in  e,  which 
have  the  prefix  g  e  ;  as,  ©erebe,  ©ctofe,  talk,  noise,  &c. 
Examples  :  — 


Set  2fpfc(,  apple  ;  fra$  S^n^r,  window  ; 

tec  (Snfc(,  grandchild  ;  fcciS  ©Ctoittct,  thunderstorm  ; 

tec  >!H\}C(,  bird;  l>cc  Dcgon,  sword; 

tag  Stcqrt,  seal  ;  t>cr  (fatten,  garden  ; 

bcr  ?(t>(er,  eagle  ;  tcr  S^acion,  waggon  ; 

tcr  5Bru^cr/  brother;  ta£  SBccfcn,  basin; 

tec  ^cijtcr,  master  ;  fcaS  Scicbcn,  signal. 


girl,  maiden  ;  23iicMctn,  little  book  ; 

Skttcfyen,  violet;  SUiimlctn,  floweret. 

9)cUtt»:c  and  Scd^tcr,  daughter,  are  the  only  feminine  substantives 
which  retain  in  the  plural  the  termination  of  the  nominative  sin- 
gular. 

§  34.  Like  bcr  S3aum  (II.  a.)  are  inflected  the  follow- 
ing: — 

1st,  Masculines  and  neuters  terminating  in  the  prefixes  cmfc, 
at,  id)t,  ig,  ing,  ling,  rid)  ;  e.  g.  $ei(an&,  saviour  ;  9J?onat, 
month  ;  ftaffg,  cage  ;  $)ciupt(tng,  chieftain,  &c. 

2d,  .Many  foreign  substantives,  such  as,  ber  3fbt,  Sfttar,  93i* 
fd)Df,  Sarttnat,  ^ataft;  the  abbot,  alter,  bishop,  cardinal,  pal- 
ace,  &c. 


305 

3d,  All  substantives  ending  in  the  affixes  rtt£  and  fat; 
as,  bte  gtnjlerm'g,  darkness  ;  Semttm'g,  knowledge  ;  fca$  (Scfyuf* 
fa  I,  fate  ;  J)rangfal,  calamity,  &c. 

Like  tie  £anb  (II.  b.)  are  declined  the  following  fem- 
inines  :  — 

?fnc\jt,  anguish.  2uft,  air. 

2(u*ftucf)t,  evasion.  2  lift,  delight. 

?Cvt,  axe.  9J?ad)t,  power. 

*8anf,  bench.  SRagfo,  maid-servant. 

SSrcmt,  bride.  SDtaiiS,  mouse. 

ffiruft,  breast.  9?ad)t,  night. 

•^auji,  fist.  9Jaf)t,  seam. 

§rud)t,  fruit.  92otri,  distress. 

©an$,  goose.  -Diiif',  nut. 

(Stefcbnwlft,  swelling.  <Snu,  sow. 

GJvuft,  tomb.  @d)nur,  string. 

t,  skin.  Statt/  city. 

ft,  gulf.  S[San^/  wall. 

ft,  force.  aBulft,  tumour. 

h/  cow.  fSutft/  sausage. 

njl,  art.  3unft,  guild. 

^  louse. 


To  these  are  to  be  added  the  compounds  of  the  words  ^unft  and 
£vwfr,  which  are  never  employed  separately  ;  as,  t)ic  Sufammcn* 
funft,  the  meeting  ;  (Sinftinfte,  pi.,  revenues  ;  ScirtauftvV  pi.,  junctures 
(§  27). 

Remark.  Masculines  of  this  form  generally  modify  the 
radical  vowel  in  the  plural  ;  feminine  s  always  ;  of  neuters  only 
the  following  three  :  —  >fca3  2()er,  the  chorus  ;  fca£  fflv$,  the 
r,  the  reed;  pi.  gt)6re,  gtog 


§  35.  Substantives  declined  like  ba£  ?teb  (III.)  are  gen- 
erally of  the  neuter  gender,  and  masculine  only  by 
way  of  exception.  They  always  modify  the  vowel 
of  the  root.  Examples  :  — 

?Cmt,  office.  Samm,  lamb. 

231Kb,  book.  9?cft,  nest. 

Dcrf,  village.  SKat>,  wheel. 

C$5etb,  money.  (Scbtcp,  castle. 

grave.  S>ctf,  nation. 

herb.  SKc't^  woman. 


So  also  all  nouns  ending  in  t  f)  n  nt  ;  as,  JKcidfttrium/  riches  ; 
m,  dukedom,  and  a  few  foreign  words  ;  as,  ^avfomcnt, 


396 

The  masculines  declined  like  £  {  C  b  are  as  follows  :  —  3 
rotdjt,  villain  ;  Corn,  thorn  ;  ©eift,  spirit  (III.  b.)  ;  @ott,  God  ; 
\tetb,  body  ;  $?cmn,  man  (wr)  ;  Ort,  place  ;  9?anb,  border  ; 
QSormiinb,  guardian  ;  2Balb,  wood  ;  2Burm,  worm. 

§  36.  Substantives  inflected  like  ber  Strafyl  (IV.)  are 
of  the  masculine  and  neuter  genders.  They  are  but 
few  in  number  and  never  modify  the  radical  vowel  in 
the  plural.  They  are  :  — 

1st,  Names  of  persons  terminating  in  o  r  ;  as,  Sector,  *pre* 
feffor,  ^ajtor,  &c.  Except  :  Saftor,  Slectropfyor,  9ftatabor,  and 
also  Meteor,  which  have  their  plural  in  e. 

2d,  Foreign  words  which  still  have,  or  once  had  the  Latin 
termination  i  u  m,  as,  ©tub  t  it  m,  pi.  ©tub  i  e  n,  studies  ;  Sottc> 
gtitm,  pi.  (SoQegt'en,  lectures  ;  ^(bxjerb,  pi.  5(b»erbten,  adverbs  ; 
also  those  ending  in  tt  »r  as,  Srebitw,  ©itb(lantt»r  &c.  ;  those 
terminating  in  a  (  or  i  1  have  i  e  n  in  the  plural,  as,  *Rega(,  pi. 
goffit,  pi.  geffil  t  e  n. 


3d,  The  following  masculine  substantives  :  — 

jDorn,  thorn.  @pcrn/  spur. 

Jfcrft,  forest.  ^tadjct,  sting. 

tcr,  god-father.  ©ttcfcl,  boot. 

laurel.  (Stnwjj/  ostrich. 

mast.  letter,  cousin. 

r,  neighbour.  llntcrt^an,  subject. 

$)fau,  peacock.  StcratI)/  finery. 
(Sec,  sea. 

4th,   To  these  may  be  added  the  following  foreign 
masculines  :  — 

Gonfuf,  consul.  ^rtffcct,  prefect. 

demon.  3)fatm,  psalm. 

t,  diamond.  JRubtn/  ruby. 

n,  pheasant.  ©tnot,  state. 

Snipcf!,  import.  Sfyren,  throne. 

^jiuefcl,  muscle.  Sractat,  treaty. 
ct,  slipper. 


5th,  The  following  neuter  words  : — 

tfucjc,  eye.  3nfect,  insect. 

JBctt,  bed.  Sproncm,  pronoun. 

(£nt>e,  end.  ©tatut,  statute. 

,£>cmb,  shirt.  9?crfc,  verb. 

§  37.     Like  9Jame  (V.)  are  inflected  the  following 


397 

masculines: — fcer  33ncf)fla6e,  letter  ;  geld,  rock;  grtebe, 
peace ;  $nnfe,  spark  ;  ©ebcmfe,  thought ;  ©(aube,  faith  ; 
£mtfe,  heap  ;  Same,  seed ;  <£d)aber  detriment ;  2Gil(e, 
will.  These  substantives,  however,  frequently  assume 
an  n  in  the  nominative  ;  e.  g.  ber  gitnfen,  ©ebcmfen, 
and  then  they  follow  the  inflection  of  the  first  form 
(SSater). 

Remark.  The  word  £erj,  heart,  has  en$  in  the  genitive, 
and  retains  the  e  n  in  the  dative  singular  and  in  all  the  cases 
of  the  plural,  thus  : — 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 


NOM.  t>a$ 
GEN.  tc6 
DAT.  torn 
Ace.  t>a$ 


tic  £cr$cn, 
t>ct 


tic  £cr$cn. 


The  word  €>d)mcrg,  pain,  has  either  c  n  ^  or  e  ^  in  the  genitive, 
and  in  the  dative  en  or  e.  Nom.  t»ct  ©cfynicr^  Gen.  t>e$  ©cljnicr^cn^ 
or  (£d)tiu'r$c$,  Dat.  tern  ^cbnier^n  or  6>d)imrje ;  Nom.  pi.  Me 
^cn.  The  word  ^djrccf,  terror,  is  also  irregular :  Nom.  tcr 
or  ©djrccfcnx  Gen.  tc$  @d)rccfcn$  or  (Sd)tccfc^^  Dat.  t>cm 
or  ©djrcrfcn/  Ace.  ten  ^djred  or  ©c^cccfcn ;  Nom.  pi.  tie 
©cfyrccfen. 


LATER  DECLENSION. 

§  38.  Substantives  of  this  declension  are  either 
masculine  or  feminine. 

Masculines  form  their  genitive  in  n  or  en,  and  re- 
tain that  termination  in  all  the  remaining  cases  sin- 
gular and  plural. 

Feminines  being  indeclinable  in  the  singular,  as- 
sume the  n  or  en  in  the  plural  only. 

No  nouns  of  this  declension  ever  modify  the  radical 
vowels  a,  0,  n,  or  the  diphthong  au  in  the  plural  (§  24). 

TABULAR    VIEW    OF    THE    TERMINATIONS    OF    THE    LATER 
DECLENSION. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Masculine. 

Masc.  and  Fern. 

NOM. 

given, 

en,  n, 

GEN. 

err,  n, 

en,  n, 

DAT. 

en,  n, 

en,  n, 

Ace. 

en,  n. 

en,  n. 

398 


§39.     PARADIGMS. 
I.     Ser  ©raf,  the  count. 


SINGULAR. 

NOM.  ber  ©raf,  the  count ; 
GEN.  be3  ©rafen,  of  the  count; 
DAT.  bem  ©raf en,  to  the  count ; 
Ace.  ben  ©rafen,  the  count ; 


PLURAL. 

tie  ©raf en,  the  counts  ; 
ber  ©rafen,  of  the  counts  ; 
ben  ©rafen,  to  the  counts  ; 
bte  ©rafen,  the  counts. 


II.     Der  Srbe,  the  heir. 


SINGULAR. 

NOM.  ber  Srbe,  the  heir ; 

GEN.  be$  Srben,  of  the  heir  ; 
DAT.  bem  (£rben,  to  the  heir ; 
Ace.  ben  Srben,  the  heir ; 


PLURAL. 

bte  Srben,  the  heirs  ; 

ber  (Srben,       of  the  heirs  ; 

ben  Srben,      to  the  heirs  ; 

bte  (£rben,  the  heirs. 


III.     Ste  Jraii,  the  woman. 


SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

the  woman ;  bte  Jranen,  the  women ; 
ber  §rauen,  of  the  women  ; 
ben  graiten,  to  the  women ; 
bte  5  ran  en,  the  women. 


NOM.  bte         , 

GEN.  ber  5rcu1/  °f  tne  woman ; 
DAT.  ber  grail,  to  the  woman  ; 
Aec.  bte  3 ran,  the  woman  ; 


IV.     Die  Jeber,  the  pen. 


SINGULAR. 

NOM.  bte  geber,  the  pen ; 

GEN.  ber  5cker,  of  the  pen ; 
DAT.  ber  §eber,  to  the  pen ; 
Ace.  bie  geber,  the  pen ; 


PLURAL. 

bie  Sckmi/  the  pens  ; 

ber  gcbern,  of  the  pens  ; 
ben  gebern,  to  the  pens  ; 
bte  gebeni,  the  pens. 


OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs.  1.  When  the  nominative  singular  ends  in  e,  or  in 
one  of  the  unaccented  affixes  el,  e r,  a r,  the  genitive  and  re- 
maining cases  assume  n  only;  as,  ber  Coroe,  the  lion,  gen.  be$ 
£6rcen;  bie  Sangel,  the  pulpit,  pi.  bte  Han$e(n;  ber  23an* 
er,  the  farmer,  gen.  be3  33anern ;  otherwise  e  n  becomes  ne- 
cessary; e.  g.  ber£)elb,  the  hero,  gen.  be$  ^elben;  ber  ©efetf, 
the  companion,  gen.  be3  ©efe((en ;  ber  ^3eet,  the  poet,  gen.  be^ 
^Poeten ;  bte  Jyran,  plur.  bte  jranen. 

Obs.  2.  Feminine  substantives  were  formerly  declined  in 
the  singular  number  also ;  this  practice,  however,  has  been 


399 

retained  only  in  certain  adverbial  expressions,  in  which  the 
substantive  is  connected  with  a  preposition  ;  e.  g.  cwf  (Jrfce  tt, 
on  earth;  mtt  greufcen,  with  joy,  joyfully;  son  (Betten  fceS 
$bm'<j3,  from  the  part  of  the  king;  in  ©nafcen,  graciously; 
mtt  t£l)ten  fterben,  to  die  an  honourable  death  ;  311  ^cfyanfcen 
ttjerten,  to  be  put  to  shame,  &c.  ;  sometimes  en  seems  to  be 
annexed  simply  for  the  sake  of  euphony  ;  as,  fetner  5  rait  e  it 
Skater,  his  wife's  father. 

§  40.     To  this  declension  belong  the  following  clas- 
ses of  nouns  :  — 


1st,  Masculines  of  one  syllable;  as,  23ar,  bear;  3tfect  sPot; 
giirft,  prince;  ©raf,  count;  £e(b,  hero;  £err  (has  £>errn  in 
the  gen.  and  dat.  sing.,  but  $  err  en  in  the  plur.),  master; 
3Dtenfd),  man  ;  Iftarr,  fool  ;  *J)fau,  peacock  ;  ^rtnj,  prince  ; 
Ityot,  simpleton. 

2d,  Masculines  terminating  in  e  unaccented  ;  e.  g. 

2Cffe,  the  ape.  R  nappe,  squire. 

SSatbe,  bard.  9?ad)fomme,  descendant. 

,  surety.  9?effe,  nephew. 

,  dragon.  $)atf)e,  sponsor. 

fe,  hawk.  3?iefe,  giant. 

©ehiitfe,  assistant.  ©claoe,  slave. 

c,  idol.  3cugex  witness. 
,  shepherd. 


3d,  Names  of  nations,  such  as  are  not  derived  from 
the  name  of  the  country.  They  generally  end  also  in 
e  ;  e.  g. 

bet  -Bcner,  the  Bavarian.  tcr  Sftaure,  the  Moor. 

tec  SBolwic,  the  Bohemian.  bet  gMc,  the  Pole. 

bet  SBtttte,  the  Britain.  bet  ^teupe,  the  Prussian. 

bet  93u(gat,  the  Bulgarian.  bet  SHufje,  the  Russian. 

bet  SMnc,  the  Dane.  bet  ©acbfe,  the  Saxon. 

bet  Deutfcrje,  the  German.  bet  (Scbrcabe,  the  Swabian. 

bet  ^tan^cfe,  the  Frenchman,  bet  <Sct)ivet>e,  the  Swede. 

bet  (SktcctK,  the  Greek.  bet  Sartnt,  the  Tartar. 

bet  £ef[e,  the  Hessian.  bet  Surfe,  the  Turk. 

bet  3ube,  the  Jew.  bet  Uncjar,  the  Hungarian. 

§  41.  4th,  Masculine  substantives  of  foreign  origin,  termi- 
nating in  ant,  a  r  cfy,  at  e  n  t,  if,  t  ft,  e  t,  1  1,  o  t,  o  g,  o  p  b/ 
om  :c.  ;  e.  g.  bet  ^rofejlant,  D3?onatd),  CSantttat,  ^tatat,  (Stu^ 
bent,  ^taftbent,  ^atbeltf,  937etl)Dbifl,  (Shttft,  ^Det,  Fernet,  (Jte^ 
mtt,  Sefiitt,  Sbfet,  Tljeelog,  ^Pfetfoleci/  ^btlcfopl),  ^ftronom  :c. 

5th,  All  the  feminine  nouns  in  the  language,  except 


400 

those  mentioned  above  (§  33  and  §  34).  They  are 
either  monosyllables,  as  Safyti,  path  ;  ^>flicf)t,  duty,  or 
polysyllables,  chiefly  ending  in  e,  el,  er,  at  I),  ei,  enb, 
fyett,  inn,  frfjaft,  Uttg.  The  following  may  serve  as 
examples  :  — 

MONOSYLLABLES. 

tfrt,  kind.  ©oat,  seed. 

2Hirg,  citadel.  ©cbladjt,  battle. 

$5(ur,  plain.  (Spur,  trace. 

3a$fc,  chase.  3f)ot,  deed. 

Cafl,  burden.  3at)t/  number. 
£tua(,  torment. 

POLYSYLLABLES. 

tfrftctt,  labour.  9?otur,  nature. 

(Sntc,  duck.  £)()nmad)t,  impotence. 

Cermet,  formula.  $pccfic,  poetry. 

©CQcnt),  region.  SScltgton,  religion. 

.frcmfclung,  action.  ^cbiiffd,  plate. 

Sungfcr,  maiden.  Saubc,  dove. 

.ftcmginn,  queen.  Umscrfitat,  university. 

Ccifccnfcbaft,  passion.  SBafytfyett,  truth. 

;^  news.  Sungc,  tongue. 


FOREIGN  SUBSTANTIVES. 

§  42.  1st,  With  respect  to  substantives  of  foreign  origin,  we 
have  already  under  each  declension,  noticed  such  as  have  ac- 
commodated their  termination  to  the  analogy  of  German  words. 
There  are  some,  however,  which  still  appear  in  their  original 
form  unaltered  ;  as,  ber-JOtfefct'cuS,  the  physician  ;  fcer  SafuS,  the 
case  ;  ta$  ^actum,  the  fact  ;  ba$  Ifyema,  the  theme,  &c.  These 
are  either  indeclinable  in  the  singular;  as,  ter  @(eni£,  the 
clergy,  gen.  fce3  SleruS,  dat.  tern  @(cni$,  &c.,  or  they  as- 
sume $  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  fca3  Sactum,  gnbi'whuinv  the  fact, 
individual,  gen.  fceS  3ac^um^  3nWt>ttMMitlJ, 

2d,  In  the  plural,  foreign  nouns  either  assume  en  (§36); 
as,  SSerbiim,  verb,  pi.  $erben;  (Btufcuitn,  study,  pi.  ©tii&t'  en; 
or  they  retain  in  all  cases  the  original  termination  of  the  nomi- 
native plural  ;  as,  9Rebict',  $?iiftct,  Safit^,  gacta,  l^emata. 

3d,  Masculine  and  neuter  substantives,  adopted  from  the 
French  or  English,  generally  take  $  in  the  genitive  singular, 
and  retain  it  in  all  the  cases  of  the  plural  ;  fcer  Cert,  gen.  ted 
t'ovtS,  pi.  tie  CertS  ;  ter  Sfyef,  the  chieftain,  gen.  te*  ®i)ef$, 
pi.  tie  SbefS;  taS  ©erne,  the  genius,  gen.  te$  ®  erne'  3,  pi.  tie 
(§  24.  Rule  III.) 


401 


DECLENSION  OF  PROPER  NOUNS. 

§  43.  Proper  nouns  are  either  names  of  PERSONS,  or 
names  of  COUNTRIES  and  PLACES. 

Names  of  persons  are  declined  either  with  or  without 
the  article. 

I.  When  preceded  by  either  of  the  articles  (em  orber), 
names  of  persons  are  not  varied  in  the  singular,  the 
different  cases  being  sufficiently  indicated  by  the  in- 
flection of  the  article  ;  as,  ber  ©emitter,  gen.  betf  Sofyttler, 
dat.  bent  Sdntter,  ace.  ben  gcfyilter;  ein  Sutler,  gen,  eine$ 
Cutljer,  dat.  einem  futfyer,  ace.  eincn  fntfyer, 

Exception.  If  the  genitive  of  the  name  of  a  male  limiting  the 
meaning  of  another  word  is  connected  with  an  adjective,  and  placed 
before  the  governing  word,  it  assumes  the  termination  £  ;  as,  &eg  gro? 
pen  .ft  a  n  t  *  £  SBcrfc,  the  works  of  the  great  Kant  ;  tc$  bcriifymtcn 
2)  it  r  c  r  *$  ©cmalfcc,  the  paintings  of  the  celebrated  Diirer. 

§  44.  II.  When  not  connected  with  the  article,  mas- 
culine names  ending  in  $,  $,  fof),  r,  j,  and  feminines  end- 
ing in  e,  form  their  genitive  in  e  n  3  ;  all  other  names, 
both  masculine  and  feminine,  including  also  diminu- 
tives in  d)en,  form  their  genitive  in  '$  simply;  e.  g. 
9War,  gen.  ?[Raren$;  3So£,  gen.  8So£en$;  Souife,  gen* 
goutfenS;  but  jgtermann,  gen.  §ermann'd;  (5arl,  gen. 
(5arl  'd  ;  ^«"^rf)^  (Jonny),  gen.  ^dn^djen  g  ;  2lbelf)etb,  gen. 
b'  $. 


Remark  I.  In  the  dative  and  accusative  singular  it  has  been 
customary  to  annex  the  termination  c  n.  It  is  better,  however,  to 
leave  those  cases  like  the  nominative,  and  to  prefix  the  article, 
when  ambiguity  would  otherwise  arise;  e.  g.  nom.  C  effing/  gen. 
fieffing'S/  dat.  (frcm)  Ceffing  (better  than  Ccffmgcn),  ace.  (ten) 


Rcm.  2.  Names  of  Latin  or  Greek  origin  were  formerly 
inflected  after  the  manner  of  Latin  nouns  ;  e.  g.  nom.  *paii(u$/ 
gen.  ^aitlt,  dat.  faille,  ace.  ^autum  ;  'pfotomS  ©efprddje, 
Plato's  dialogues  ;  (Siceront'S  S^eben,  Cicero's  orations,  &c. 
Now,  however,  they  follow  the  analogy  of  German  nouns,  and 
the  ancient  mode  of  inflection  is  only  retained  in  a  few  expres- 
sions, as,  (SfyrifH  ©elnirt,  &c.;  e.g.  *}Mato'3  ©efpracfye  ;  gt^ 
cerc'3  9?cben  ;  ^Pbabui§'  Sabetn  or  bie  jabetn  be^  ^tjabri^,  the 
fables  of  Phaedrus  ;  ber  D?eic^t^um  be^  Srofu^,  the  wealth  of 
Cro3sus. 


402 

PLURAL    OF    PROPER    NAMES. 

§  45.  The  plural  of  proper  names  is  only  employed  when 
the  same  name  is  common  to  several  individuals ;  as,  bte 
(Scfylegel,  bte  £>ermcmne,  persons  of  the  name  of  Scfylecjet,  £)er* 
mann ;  or  when  they  are  converted  into  common  nouns 
(§  5.) ;  as,  bte  S^eiitcne  unferer  $eit,  the  Newtons  of  our 
age,  &c. 

Rules.  The  inflection  of  proper  names  in  the  plural 
number  is  not  influenced  by  the  article,  and  the  radi- 
cal vowels  (a,  o,  it,  au)  are  never  modified. 

When  the  names  are  masculine,  terminating  in  a,  e, 
t,  a  I,  e  I,  t  (,  e  r,  e  n  or  d)  e  it,  the  plural  remains  unaltered. 

All  other  masculine  names  of  German  origin,  and 
foreign  names  ending  in  a  ttt,  0  It,  form  their  plural  by 
adding  e  to  the  nom.  sing. ;  but  those  ending  in  o,  add 
tte*  Examples : — 

Sing*  Plur.  Sing.  Plur. 

(Sotta,  (bte)     Gotta.  2(Mpf),  (tic) 

(£ampc,  „      (Sanipc. 

£anntba(,        „      £anmba(.  Dmtv 

SKeter. 

„      ©atone. 


The  dative  plural  always  assumes  the  termination 
n,  unless  the  nominative  already  ends  in  that  letter  ; 
as,  ten  ?ittl)erit,  9)Manrf)tl)one  n,  &c.,  to  the  Luthers, 
Melanchthons,  &c. 

Names  of  females  invariably  add  e  it  or  n  in  every 
case  of  the  plural ;  as,  gfora,  pi.  gfora'it,  gm'fe,  guifen, 
pi. 


§  4G.     PARADIGMS. 

MASCULINES. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 


NOM.  Sutler, 
GEN.  8utfyer% 
DAT.  (bem)  gutter, 
Ace.   (ben)  Cutfyer ; 


NOM.  (bte)  Cutler, 

GEN.  ber*  Cutler, 

DAT.  (ben)  Cutfyern, 

Ace.  (bte)  2ittl)er. 


*  In  the  genitive  plural  the  article  is  necessary  to  point  out  the  case  ($  5. 6th.). 


403 


SINGULAR. 

NOM.  getbm(3/ 
GEN.  £etbm£en$, 
DAT.  (bem)  £etbnt$, 
Ace.   (ben)  Setbntg; 

SINGULAR. 

NOM.  $ermann, 

GEN.  £crmami% 

DAT.  (tern)  £)ermann, 

Ace.  (fcen)   Hermann ; 

SINGULAR. 

NOM.  ©btfye, 
GEN.  ©btfee'S, 
DAT.  (bem)  ©btfje, 
Ace.    (ben)  ©btfye; 


PLURAL. 

NOM.  (Die)    2etbm£e, 
GEN.    ber     Setbmge, 
DAT.  (ben)  £etbnt£en, 
Ace.   (bte)    Sctbmfce. 

PLURAL. 

NOM.  (bte)  £ermanne, 

GEN.    ber  ^)ermanne, 

DAT.  (ben)  £ermannen, 

Ace.    (bte)  |)ermanne. 

PLURAL. 

NOM.  (bte)    ©btfee, 
i  GEN.    ber    ©btt)er 
DAT.  (ben)  ©btfyen/ 
Ace.   (bte)  ©bt^e. 


FEMININES. 


SINGULAR. 

NOM.  SBcrtba, 

GEN.  Eertba'S, 

DAT.  (ber) 

Ace.  (bte) 


SINGULAR. 

NOM.  ©ertranb, 

GEN.  ©ertraub'S, 

DAT.  (ber)  ©ertraub, 

Ace.  (bte)  ©ertraub; 

SINGULAR. 

NOM. 

GEN. 

DAT.  (ber)  gutfc, 

Aec.    (bte)  Sutfe  ; 

SINGULAR. 

NOM.  Suite, 

GEN.  3ulten$, 

DAT.  (ber)  3iiKc, 

Ace.  (bte)  Suite; 


PLURAL. 

NOM.  (bte) 

GEN.  ber 

DAT.  (ben) 

Ace.  (bte) 

PLURAL. 

NOM.  (bte)  ©ertrauben, 
GEN.  ber  ©ertrauben, 
DAT.  (ben)  ©ertrauben, 
Ace.  (bte)  ©ertrauben. 

PLURAL. 

NOM.  (bte)  Sutfen, 
GEN.  ber  Cutfcn, 
DAT.  (ben)  gmfen, 
Ace.  (bte)  gittfetu 

PLURAL. 

NOM.  (bte)  %niitn, 
GEN.  ber  %u[ien, 
DAT.  (ben)  3ulten, 
Ace.  (bte) 


404 


OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs.  1.  The  termination  c  n  6  of  the  genitive  singular  belongs 
particularly  to  feminine  names  in  c.  With  respect  to  masculines 
in  ^  fj,  fet),  X/  $,  the  practice  of  substituting  %  or  a  simple  apostrophe, 
instead  of  cn6,  is  becoming  more  frequent ;  e.  g.  £dbni£*6  spt)ilefcpl)U', 
the  philosophy  of  Leibnitz  ;  9)fcrt£  SRi'ty'd)'*  llmriffc  gtt'&fctUer't  I'U'D 
Don  fccc  ®(ocfc,  Retzsch's  Illustrations  to  Schiller's  Song  of  the  Bell. 

§  47.  Obs.  2.  When  a  family  name  is  preceded  by  one 
or  more  Christian  names,  or  common  nouns  without  an  article, 
the  family  name  alone  is  inflected  ;  e.  g.  3D^ann  $einrid) 
$  of  fen  3  (or  simply  Stog'S)  Ueberfegumjen,  John  Henry 
Voss's  translations  ;  itbmcj  5  r  *  c  &  *" id) ' d  ^eben,  the  life  of 
King  Frederick. 

Ofo.  3d,  But  if  the  article  precedes,  in  connection  with  the 
word  5)  err,  or  a  common  noun  designating  some  title  or  office, 
the  proper  name  is  not  inflected  ;  as,  bad  £)aud  feed  £>errn  IW  it  ($ 
(er,  the  house  of  Mr.  Mailer ;  tie  Ifyaten  bed  ftatferd  Sari 
be^  5^nf^en/ tne  expl°its  of  the  Emperor  Charles  V. ;  fca$  ®tant)^ 
bt(t)  bed  grof  en  Stc^ter§  @  b  t  ^  e,  the  statue  of  the  great  poet 
Goethe. 

NAMES    OF    COUNTRIES    AND    PLACES. 

§  48.  1.  Names  of  countries,  places,  rivers,  mountains,  &c. 
which  are  of  the  masculine  or  feminine  gender,  are  generally  ac- 
companied by  the  article  (§  5),  and  declined  like  common  nouns  ; 
as,  tie  S>rf)roet3,  gen.  fcer  <5cf;n>et$,  dat.  fcer  (Bcfyroet'j,  ace.  fcte 
(gcfyroetj ;  ber  SBrei&jcw,  gen.  bed  -^retd^ait'd,  &c. ;  bet  D^ljein, 
gen.  bed  9?f)eined,  &c. ;  bte  X^emfc,  gen.  ber  Xtjemfe,  &c. 

2.  Neuter  names  of  countries  and  places,  not  terminating 
in  d,  g  or  x,  have  the  sign  d  in  the  genitive  and  remain  unal- 
tered in  all  the  other  cases  ;  e.  g.  bte  Unttterfttciten  Deutfofy* 
lanbd,  the  Universities  of  Germany  ;  D^ngtcmbd  5(be(,  the  no- 
bility of  Russia ;  er  fommt  son  Q3er(tn   (dat.),  he  comes  from 
Berlin  ,  nad)  Cetpjtg  (ace.),  to  Leipzig,  &c. 

3.  Since  names  of  places  which  end  in  d,  g,  x  do  not  admit 
of  an  additional  d  in  the  genitive,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  it  is 
customary  to  put  them  in  apposition  with  the  genitive  of  some 
word  like  ©  t  a  b  t,  £)  o  r  f,  g  e  ft  it  n  g  (town,  village,  fort),^or  to 
prefix  the  preposition  » o  n  ,  e.  g.    bte  (Stnroofyner  ber  ^tabt 

(or  yon  ^3arfd)  the  inhabitants  of  the  city  of  Paris  ;  bte 
son  Sftatnj,  the  situation  of  Mentz. 


THE 

(UNIVERSr 

405  \£d 

IV.     GOVERNMENT. 

§  49.  1st,  When  a  substantive  is  the  subject  of  a  proposi- 
tion, it  is  always  in  the  nominative  case,  and  governs  the  verb 
in  number  and  person.  2Ber  rctf't?  T)cr  23ater,  fret  5rciin^ 
itnb  bte  ^ofyne  retfen.  Who  travel]  The  father,  the  friend, 
and  the  sons  are  travelling. 

2d,  In  the  oblique  cases,  i.  e.  in  the  genitive,  dative,  and 
accusative,  nouns  are  governed  either  by  other  nouns,  or  by 
adjectives,  verbs,  prepositions,  &c.  ;  e.  g.  bte  IWuttcr  b  c  3 
£)  a  u  f  e  £,  the  mother  of  the  house  ;  ber  <S>  t  v  a  f  e  roiirbu), 
worthy  of  punishment;  etnen  33rtef  fcfyreiben,  to  write  a 
letter ;  auf  Dem  £  a  it  b  e,  in  the  country.  We  shall  here 
only  consider  the  relation  which  one  substantive  may  sustain 
to  another. 

§  50.  Substantives  which  stand  in  the  relation  of  equality 
to  each  other,  are  put  in  the  same  case.  They  may  be  thus 
related : — 

1st,  When  one  is  added  to  another,  for  the  sake  of  explana- 
tion, or  is  put  in  apposition  with  it;  e.  g.  2Btlt)clm  b  er  (fro- 
b  e  r  c  r,  William,  the  Conqueror ;  3fyr  f ennet  tfyn,  ben  &  d)  6  * 
p  f  c  r  fiibner  £)eere,  ye  know  him,  the  creator  of  bold  armies  ; 
tl)m,  m  e  t  it  e  m  3B  c  1)  1 1  b  d  t  e  r,  to  him,  my  benefactor. 

2d,  When  one  constitutes  the  predicate  to  the  other;  as, 
fctn  2*ater  t|l  S\bntg  geroorfcen,  his  father  has  become  king; 
er  tfl  m  e  t  n  5  r  e  "  n  &/  ne  ^s  m7  f"6^. 

3d,  When  one  is  compared  with  another ;  as,  ber  Ifwrm  i(l 
^}6()er  al§  ber  S3  a  u  m,  the  tower  is  higher  than  the  tree. 

4th,  When  several  substantives  constitute  a  compound  sub- 
ject to  one  verb;  e.  g.  ©djDnfyett  unb  3»9^"^  treten  tn  ifyre 
i>ptfe  9ted)te  mtebcr  etit,  Beauty  and  Youth  are  fully  reinstated 
to  their  former  rights. 

§  51.  1st,  A  substantive  which  stands  in  the  relation  of 
cause,  wigirij  possessiori,  mutual  connection,  &c.,  to  another,  is 
put  in  the  genitive;  e.  g.  ber  ©efcmcj  ber  236  get,  the  sing- 
ing of  birds  ;  ber  (Scfyopfer  b  e  v  2B  e  1 1,  the  creator  of  the 
world  ;  ba£  $>au3  b  e§  Sa  it  f  m  a  n  n  3,  the  house  of  the  mer- 
chant; bie  ©djwefler  be$  Q3ater&,  the  sister  of  the  father. 

2d,  The  genitive  is  often  employed  adverbially  to  express 
the  relation  of  time,  locality  or  manner;  be3  9)?orcjen6,  bed 
9[)?tttvig£,  be$  5(benb3,  in  the  morning,  at  noon,  in  the  evening ; 
fctefigen  OrteS,  of  this  place ;  gute^  sDhttl)e§  fetnr  to  be  of  good 
cheer ;  imttem'cfyteter  Sacfye,  without  accomplishing  one's  pur- 
pose. 


406 

3d,  A  substantive  which  has  a  partitive  signification  is  fol- 
lowed by  a  genitive  of  the  whole ;  e.  g.  fcte  33aiime  etne£  ®ar- 
tenS,  the  trees  of  a  garden ;  fca3  J)act)  be»  £>aufe3,  the  roof  of 
the  house. 

4th,  If,  however,  the  partitive  substantive  points  out  a  num- 
ber, measure  or  weight,  the  name  of  the  material  numbered, 
measured,  &c.,  is  more  frequently  put  in  apposition  with  it 
than  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  etne  -JWemje  $  t  n  fc  e  r,  a  number  of 
children;  mir  fiinf  Silent)  (Stern,  with  five  dozen  of  eggs; 
cut  ^Paar  <5ttefc(,  a  pair  of  boots.  But  when  the  thing 
measured  has  an  adjective  or  other  declinable  word  connected 
with  it,  the  genitive  is  required;  as,  jroet  glafcfyen  f  bfHtcfyen 
2Betne3,  two  bottles  of  superior  wine;  ein  *JJfunt>  fvtfdjer 
Gutter,  a  pound  of  fresh  butter. 


ADJECTIVES. 

§  52.  An  adjective  is  a  word  which  limits  the 
meaning  of  substantives. 

Every  adjective  may  generally  be  employed  in  two 
different  relations,  viz  : 

1st,  The  quality  expressed  by  it  may  be  conceived  as  inde- 
pendent of  the  subject,  and  be  asserted  of  it  by  a  formal  act 
of  judgment  ;  as,  ba$  £)an&  tjl  $  r  o  g,  the  house  is  large  ;  tie 
9?efe  tft  rotfy,  the  rose  is  red.  The  adjective  thus  used  is 
called  predicative,  and  is  never  inflected  in  German. 

2d,  The  quality  expressed  by  it  may  be  so  intimately  con- 
nected with  the  substantive  as  to  form  one  complex  idea  with 
it,  and  then  the  adjective  is  termed  attributive  ;  as,  fca£  g  r  0  £  e 
3,  the  large  house  ;  tie  r  otf)  e  9?efe,  the  red  rose. 


Remark.  The  predicative  adjective  stands  usually  after  the 
verbs  f  e  t  n,  to  be  ;  ru  c  r  t>  c  n,  to  become,  and  b  (e  1  1>  c  n,  to  remain  ; 
sometimes  also  after  certain  transitive  verbs  ;  e.  g.  NT  £immcl  ivnr 
b  (cut/  the  sky  was  blue  ;  Me  9tad)t  ivtrt)  t)  u  n  i  c  t,  the  night  be- 
comes dark  ;  tm$  ,ft(ctt>  btctbt  fa  u  b  c  r,  the  dress  remains  clean  ; 
f  I  it  9  maolxn,  to  make  wise  ;  9  r  it  n  farbcn,  to  die  green,  &c. 

§  53.  Some  adjectives  can  only  be  employed  in  the 
predicative  sense,  as  :  — 

cibbeft,  disaffected  ;  bract),  fallow  ; 

oncjft,  distressed,  afraid  ;         etnqctcnf,  remembering; 

bcrdt,  ready  ;  foint,  hostile  ; 


407 

gar,  done  ;  notf),  needful ; 

ganc}  unt>  <je&e,  current ;  nu£,  useful ; 

gcbaiJ,  hating  ;  <|uer,  diagonal,  cross  ; 

gctroft,  of  good  cheer;  quttt,  free  from; 

0mm,  bearing  a  grudge  ;  tbi'ilbaft,  partaking  of; 

trrc,  stray  ;  unpaf},  indisposed,  ill ; 

funt),  known;  wrlujttj^  losing. 
(at),  sorry ; 

§  54.  Others  again  can  only  be  used  as  attribu- 
tives : — 

1st,  Those  terminating  in  crn,  en,  and  indicating  the  material 
of  which  anything  is  made;  e.  g.  fccr  (ctvrne  .jbantfcbuf?/  the  leather 
glove;  t>a*  (Vtfccnc  .palStucb,  the  silk  cravat; — but,  KT  .panfcfobuf)  tfl 
r»on  £ct>cr,  KT  $1119  \\i  t»on  G>o(fc,  the  glove  is  (made)  of 
leather,  the  ring  is  (made)  of  gold. 

2d,  All  superlatives,  ordinal  numerals,  and  certain  adjectives 
formed  from  adverbs  of  time  and  locality ;  e.  g.  tcr  grotto,  fret 
gnji'ite,  tor  trtttc  K.,  the  tallest,  the  second,  the  third,  &c. ;  —  fcorttfl, 
hv'uttiV  b^'fuV  3l'^r^V  mergcnfc,  from  t)crt,  there ;  (jciite,  to-day ;  fjtcr/ 
in  this  place  ;  gcjU'rn,  yesterday  ;  morcjcn,  to-morrow. 

3d,  Many  derivatives  ending  in  tfrf)  and  lief)/  including  also 
adjective  names  of  nations ;  as,  btcbtfd),  rtiievish  ;  ncrMfch/  northern; 
roortlid),  literal ;  anfangltd),  original ;  bcutfd)/  German ;  franjofifd)/ 
French  ;  cncjltfd)/  English,  &c. 

We  are  to  consider,  1st,  the  inflection,  2d,  the  comparison, 
and  3d,  the  use  and  government  of  adjectives. 


I.    INFLECTION. 

§  55.  When  an  adjective  is  used  in  the  attributive 
relation,  certain  terminations  are  added  to  it,  indica- 
tive of  the  gender,  the  number,  and  the  case  of  the  sub- 
stantive to  which  it  is  united ;  e.  g.  gilt  e  r  SBettt,  good 
wine  ;  cuter  fofyonctt  33htme,  of  a  fair  flower  ;  fca£  ffetn  c 
SSitcfy,  the  small  book. 

All  attributive  adjectives  of  every  degree  of  com- 
parison are  susceptible  of  three  different  modes  of  in- 
flection, denominated  the  flrst,  second,  and  third  declen- 
sions. 


408 


THE  FOLLOWING  TABLE  EXHIBITS  THE  TERMINATIONS  OF  THE 
THREE  DECLENSIONS. 

SINGULAR. 
First  Declension.    Second  Declension.   Third  Declension. 


/  — 

Muse. 

Fern. 

N 

Neut. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

NOM. 

cr 

e 

eg 

C 

e 

e 

er 

C 

(1 

GEN. 

c$,  en 

er 

c$,  en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

DAT. 

cm 

er 

em 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

en 

Ace. 

en 

e 

e$ 

en 

e 

e 

en 

e 

ti 

PLURAL. 


For  all  genders. 

15*         2d        3d 

Decl.  Decl.  Decl. 

NOM. 

c 

en 

en 

GEN. 

er 

en 

en 

DAT.  * 

en 

en 

en 

Ace. 

e 

en 

en 

Remark.  The  first  declension  of  adjectives  corresponds  to  the 
earlier  declension  of  substantives,  and  presents  the  greatest  varie- 
ty of  terminations ;  so  also  the  second  possesses  the  characteris- 
tics of  the  later  declension  of  substantives  (the  en  in  the  genitive 
and  remaining  cases).  The  third  declension  is  composite,  partak- 
ing of  the  character  of  both. 


FIRST  DECLENSION. 

§  56.  When  an  adjective  is  preceded  by  no  other 
limiting  word,  or  by  one  which  is  indeclinable,  it  as- 
sumes the  terminations  of  the  definite  article*  in  all 
its  cases  singular  and  plural,  and  is  said  to  be  inflected 
according  to  the  first  declension,  thus : — 

*  With  this  difference,  that  in  the  nom.  and  ace.  neuter  singular  the  ad- 
jective has  C  $  instead  of  a  9. 


409 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

NOM. 
GEN. 

DAT. 

Ace. 

Masc. 

g  liter, 
(  guteS, 
f  guten, 
giitem, 
guten, 

Fern. 

gate, 
giiter, 

guter, 
giite, 

\ 

NeuL 

guteS, 

g  u  ten, 
giitem, 
guteS  ; 

For  all  genders. 

NOM.  gitte, 
GEN.  guter, 

DAT.  guten, 
Ace.   gute, 

good, 
of  good, 

to  good, 
good. 

PARADIGMS. 

I.  MASCULINE. 

SINGULAR.                                  PLURAL. 

NOM. 
GEN. 

DAT. 
Ace. 

rotter 
rotbeS  ) 
rotten  $ 
rotfyem 
rotten 

2Bem, 
ffietneS, 
ffietne, 

red  wine, 
of  red  wrine, 

to  red  wine, 
red  wine  ; 

rctfye 
rottjer 

rotfyen 
rotfye 

Seine, 

II.  FEMININE. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  fiige   5rucfa/      sweet  fruit,  ffige   fivufyte, 

GEN.  fiiger  $md)t,  of  sweet  fruit,  fiiger  ^riicfyte, 

DAT.  fiiger  Srucfyt,  to  sweet  fruit,  fufjen  5riicf)tetT, 

Ace.  fiijje  gnicr^t,      sweet  fruit ;  fiige   gviid)te. 

III.  NEUTER. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  gnteS     @e(^,         good  money,       gute   ©etter, 

GEN.  ^     ;    >  @e(be^,  of  good  money,        giiter  ®e(ber, 

DAT.  giitem    ©elfce,  to  good  money,        guten  ©elfcent, 
Ace.   gute^     ©elb,        good  money ;        gute   ©e(t)er. 

Obs.  1st.  The  following  are  some  of  the  indeclinable  words 
which  may  precede  the  adjective  without  affecting  its  termination: 
c  t  to  a  $,  some ;  g  e  n  u  g,  enough  ;  a  t  ( e  r  I  c  i,  of  various  sorts  ;  m  c  b  r, 
more;  v>  t  e  f,  much;  loenig,  little;  in  the  plural  the  numerals 
g  n>  c  i,  t>  r  c  i,  &c.  e.  g.  g  c  n  u  g  rctfjcr  SKctn/  enough  red  wine  ;  a  If 
( c  r  (c  t  fflpe  Snid)^  a  variety  of  sweet  fruit ;  w  c  n  i  g  guteS  iBrct), 
little  good  bread. 

Obs.  2d.  We  are*  to  regard  c$  as  the  regular  termination  of  the 
genitive  singular  masculine  and  neuter,  though  en  most  always 
takes  its  place  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  when  the  noun  itself  has 
c$  in  the  genitive;  e,  g,  gut  en  2Bctne*,  fatten  SBaJTerS,  of  cold  wa- 
ter; Oanren  Gx(t>v'$/  of  ready  money. 


410 

SECOND  DECLENSION. 

§  57.  An  adjective  belongs  to  the  second  declen- 
sion, when  it  is  preceded  either  by  the  definite  article 
ber,  bie,  bd3,  by  a  demonstrative  or  relative  pronoun,  or 
an  indefinite  numeral.  It  then  assumes  the  termination 
ein  the  nominative  singular  for  all  genders,  and  in  the 
accusative  singular  feminine  and  neuter,  and  the  ter- 
mination c  U  in  all  the  remaining  cases  singular  and 
plural, 

The  pronouns  and  indefinite  numerals  are  :— 

ticfcr,  btofc,  btcfcS,  this  ; 

jjcncr,  jonc,  jcneS,  that,  yonder; 

tcrjVdn*,  tucfeUn',  bciffclbc,  the  same  ; 

fcerjcmcje,  fcicjemge,  iaeicnicjc,  that  ; 

n)c(cl)cr,  twldx,  rveicbc*,  who,  wliich  ; 

felcbcr,  feldx,  fetd)C$,  such  ; 

jrtcr,  Jcfce,  jcfccC  ?  each 

jccj(id)cr,  Kj}(idx,  jtgftd)e£,  5 

alter,  allc,  allc^  all  ; 

cinder,  cinuy,  ctni^c^  >  several- 

ctltdxr,  ctftclx,  c  s   ne'se 


niancl)cr/  inanc^c,  manclx*,  many  a,  &c. 

§  58.     PARADIGMS. 
SINGULAR.  PLUKAL. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neu*.  For  all  genders. 


N.  ter  gute,    t)(e  (jute,    ba$  gate, 
G.  be§  guten,  fcer  guten,  be^   guten, 


.  ,  ,  , 

D.  bcm  guteit,  ber  giiten,  bem  guten, 
A.  ben  guten,  bte  gttte,    ba^  gute  ; 


bie  gitten,      the  good, 
ber  guteti,  of  the  good 


fti     VJUitll,    vj.    \.iiys    £v^\_fvt, 

ben  guten,  to  the  good, 
bie  guten,      the  good. 

I.    Dtefer  wctfe  -JOtann,  this  wise  man. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL, 


NOM.  btefer   roeife 
GEN.  biefeS  weffen 
DAT.  biefem  wetfen  -D?anne 
Ace.  tfefen  met  fen 


btefe  roet'fen  L_ 
btefer  rceifen  9)?ci»tiv^ 
btefen  wet  fen  v^dnnenv 
btefe  weifen  5Dtanner. 

II.     3ebe  fc^one  Sdime,  each  fair  flower. 
SINGULAR,  PLURAL. 

fd)6nen  S3(umen? 


NOM.  jcfe  fd)bne  , 

GEN.  jeber  fct)bnen  QSuime, 
DAT.  jeber  fd)6nen  SSlume, 
Ace.  jebe  fci)i>ne  33(ume; 


metier  fd)6nen 
roetcfyen  fd)bnen  33(nmen? 
c^icnen  5?(umen? 


411 


III.     3^ne3  grime  Sefo,  yonder  green  field. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

jene  cjrimen  Jelber, 
jencr  gnuien  Jyetfcer, 
jenen  gri'men  gelfcern, 
jene  cjrunen  Jelber. 


NHM.  jeneo  cjritne  Jve^r 

GJ:.\.  jeneS  gviuicn  gelteS, 

DAT.  jcncm  cjrimen  fid^e, 

Ace.  jene3  grime  Jelt  ; 


So  decline  :  tvrfclbc  retfrc  58ctn,  the  same  red  wine  ;  Me  K'fjVrc 
^rucht  (pi.  Jsriicbti1)/  the  better  fruit;  ivcldjcs  ncujlc  JUcib  (pi.  JUetfrcr)  ? 
which  newest  garment  1 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1st,  According  to  the  usage  of  many  writers  the  adjective  rejects 
the  n  in  the  nom.  and  ace.  plural,  when  it  is  preceded  by  one  of 
the  words  c  t  n  t  $  c,  some  ;  c  1  1  1  d)  i*/  in  c  h  r  c  or  in  c  ()  r  o  r  o,  seve- 
ral ;  in  n  n  di  o,  r>  t  c  I  c,  many  ;  a  I  (  c,  all  ;  as,  cilK'  fictile  Schulcr,  all 
diligent  scholars  ;  ptclc  ctlc  SKcnjdxn/  many  noble  men,  &c.  It  is 
not  necessary,  however,  to  make  this  exception  to  the  general  rule. 

2d,  When  the  definite  article,  being  preceded  by  a  preposition, 
coalesces  with  it  into  one  word  (§  10),  the  inflection  of  the  adjec- 
tive is  not  thereby  altered  ;  e.  g.  t)  u  r  d)  6  g  r  u  n  c  Jcft,  through  the 
green  field  ;  t  m  Q  r  c  (j  c  n  ^paufc,  in  the  great  house. 


THIRD  DECLENSION. 

§  59.  An  adjective  is  inflected  according  to  the 
third  declension,  when  it  is  preceded  either  by  the  in- 
definite article,  by  a  personal  or  possessive  pronoun,  or  by 
the  singular  of  the  indefinite  numeral  I  e  i  n,  no,  none. 
It  assumes  the  terminations  of  the  first  declension  in 
the  nominative  singular  of  all  genders  (er,  e,  eg),  and  in 
the  accusative  singular  feminine  and  neuter  (e,  e3), 
and  the  terminations  of  the  second  declension  in  all 
the  remaining  cases. 

The  pronouns  are  :  personal,  id),  fcu,  er,  fte,  c§,  rot'r,  t'fyr,  fie, 
I,  thou,  he,  she,  it,  we,  you,  they ;  possessive,  mem,  bem,  fein, 
linfer,  euer,  tl;v>  my,  thy,  his,  our,  your,  her  (their). 

PARADIGMS. 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

Masc.  Fein.  Neut.  For  all  genders. 

fetne  gitten, 
femer  cwten, 
fetnen  gnten, 
fetne  guten. 


NOM.  em      filter,  erne    gate,  em       cjitte^,      fetne    cutten, 

GEN.  eined  cwten,  etner  guten,  eineS   guten, 

DAT.  einem  gnten,  etner  gnten,  einem  gnten, 

Ace.  etnen  guten,  efrte    gute,  ein      giiteS; 


412 


I. 


SINGULAR. 
NOM.  met'n  guter  95rufcer, 
GEN.  metneS  guten  $3ruber£, 
DAT.  metnem  guten  25niber, 
Ace.   metnen  guten  53ntber  ] 


(jitter  33ruber,  my  good  brother. 


PLURAL. 

metne  guten  SBrufcer, 
metner  guten  93riifcer, 
meinen  guten  53rufcern, 
metne  guten  25riiber. 


II.     ^e  jungfte  <£d)tt>efter,  her  youngest  sister. 


SINGULAR. 

NOM.  tyre  ji'tngfie  ^cfyroefler, 
GEN.  t^rer  jungften  ^cbwefler, 
DAT.  tfyrer  ji'mgjlen 
Ace. 


PLURAL. 

tyre'  ji'tngjien  ^(^mefl'ern/ 
tt)rer  jungften  (Bcfyweftern, 
tt)ren  jiingflen  ^d)W)ejiern, 


III.     Unfer 
SINGULAR. 
NOM.  unfer  a^^ 
GEN.   itnfreS  gro^en 
DAT.   itnfcrm  grofjen 
Ace.    unfer 


•/  our  large  house. 
PLURAL. 
unfre  grcgen  £ciufer, 
unfrer 

unfern  grcgcn 
unfve 


So  decline  :  few  fofycnerer  lacj  (gen.  1a$e3),  no  finer  day  ; 
fetne  ancjene^me  D?etfe  (pi.  0?eifen)^  l^s  pleasant  journey  ; 
Sinb  (gen.  StnbcS,  pi.  ^tnber),  thy  good  child. 


Remark.  The  adjective  is  declined  in  the  same  manner  when 
it  follows  one  of  the  personal  pronouns  icb,  I  ;  fcu,  thou  ;  ivir,  we  ; 
iftr  (©ic)/  you  ;  except  in  the  genitive  case,  where  the  definite  ar- 
ticle must  be  supplied;  e.  g.  tch  nrmcr  9)?ann,  1  poor  man;  gen. 
in  c  t  n  c  r,  ^  c  £  arincn  5^anne*>  of  me,  the  poor  man  ;  dat.  mtr  ar^ 
men  sojannc/  to  me  poor  man;  ace.  nriebcirnicn  iDDiann,  me  poor  man. 
So  also,  tu  cjutc  Sautter,  thou  good  mother  ;  gen.  t)  c  t  n  c  r,  \>  c  r  c\u? 
ten  g^uttcr,  &c.  ;  the  guten  Oeutc,  you  good  people  ;  dat.  eucl)  cjutcn 
Ccuten  ;  ace.  cud)  gutcn  Scute/  &c. 


OBSERVATIONS  ON  THE  THREE  DECLENSIONS. 

§  60.  Obs.  1st.  When  adjectives,  terminating  in  c  f,  e  rx  e  n,  are 
inflected,  they  frequently  drop  the  c  of  those  terminations  for  the 
sake  of  euphony  ;  as,  em  cfclcr  (instead  of  efceler)  S'ebn,  a  mag- 
nanimous son  ;  fcer  ebne  (for  et>  e  n  e)  SS^cq,  the  smooth  road  ;  Me  bit? 
t  r  e  (instead  of  Ottt  etc)  Jrncht,  the  bitter  fruit.  Sometimes  this  c  is 
retained,  and  that  of  the  syllable  of  inflection  is  rejected  in  its  stead, 
especially  in  the  dative  case  ;  as,  ein  Ijcttrcr  .pimmd,  clear  sky,  gen. 
fine*  fyettven  .ptnmicte/  dat.  c'tnem  l)eit  «  r  n  (not  belt  i*  r  e  n  or  fjctt  v  e  u) 


413 

jjDtmmcl,  &c.  ;  ten  cfc  c  (  n,  rjctt  c  r  n  Jg>erjcn,  to  the  generous,  cheerful 
hearts. 

Obs.  2d.  The  attributive  adjective  is  frequently  left 
uninflected  like  the  predicative.  This  is  the  case  :  — 

1st,  When  it  is  placed  after  its  substantive,  as  the  predicate  of 
an  abridged  proposition  ;  as,  tic  .fittppc,  f  cl)  r  c  f  f  lint)  ft  c  t  I,  the  cliff, 
rough  and  steep  ;  tic  £Uicfc,  fret  unt)  f  c  f  f  c  It  c  $  crgcfycn  fid)  in  un* 
gcincjmcn  SRaumcn  (<Sd)ittcr),  the  eyes,  free  and  unshackled,  roam 
through  the  measureless  abyss  of  space. 

2d,  In  poetry  and  conversational  German,  the  c$  is  often  dropped 
in  the  ace.  neut.  sing,  of  the  first  and  third  declensions  ;  as,  g  u  t  (for 
giitcs)  ^Brofc,  good  bread  ;  a  1  1  (Stjcn,  old  iron  ;  cm  u  r  a  (t  2Bort,  an 
ancient  saying,  &c. 

3d,  When  the  adjective  is  used  adverbially,  to  limit  the  meaning 
of  another  adjective  ;  as,  cin  9  a  n  $  ncuc*  £au$,  a  house  entirely 
new  ;  tic  u  n  c  r  rc  a  r  t  c  t  frofyc  9?ad)rid)t,  intelligence  cheering  be- 
yond expectation  ;  cm  n  c  u  cimjcbuntencS  33ud),  a  newly  bound 
book. 

If  in  these  cases  the  adjective  is  inflected,  the  sense  is  entirely  al- 
tered :  —  cin  aan$c$,  nau'6  $au*4  an  entire,  new  house  ;  tic  uncrrcartctc, 
frcf)c  9?ad)rtd)t,  the  unexpected,  cheering  intelligence  ;  cin  ncuc^/  ctn? 
gcbuntcnce  JBud)/  a  new  book,  bound. 

§  61.  Obs.  3d.  If  a  substantive  in  the  genitive  limits  the  mean- 
ing of  another  substantive,  and  is  placed  before  it,  so  that  the  lat- 
ter loses  its  article  (§  9),  the  adjective  connected  with  the  latter 
substantive  must  be  inflected  according  to  the  first  declension  ;  e.  g. 
fcincS  SSntcrS  liimjfter  ©ofjn,  instead  of:  bcr  jungftc  (gebn  fcincS 
SSatctS,  his  father's  youngest  son  ;  unfreg  JbaufCb  qrcpt  c  r  <Saulc,  in- 
stead of  :  t  c  r  ojrtf  £t  c  n  ©a'ute  unfcrc<>  £aufc$,  to  the  greatest  pillar 
of  our  house. 


4th.  When  two  or  more  adjectives  are  con- 
nected with  the  same  substantive,  they  all  follow  the 
same  rules  of  inflection  :  — 

I.  ©utcr,  tetl)cr,  fcwtrct  SBctn,  good,  red,  pure  wine. 
NOM.  center,  retf)cr,  Icuitrcr  SSktn, 


Bitten,  rctf>cn,  lautrcn 
DAT.  c\utcm,  rctbcm,  tautcrm  ^Bct 
Ace.  gutcn,  rct^cn,  (autcrn  SKcin. 

II.  £)ic  rcifo,  fc^onc,  gate  5rud)t,  the  ripe,  fair,  good  fruit. 


NOM.  tie  rctfc,  fchonc,  gutc  ^ 

GEN.  tcr  rcifcn,  fd)oncn,  gutcn  gruc^t/  u. 


414 


III.  Unfct  fd)8nc$,  QvttncS  ©ra$/  our  fine,  green  grass. 


NOM.  unfcr  fd)onc$/  primes 

GEN.  unfrcs  fctyonw,  gruncn  ®rafc$,  K. 

With  respect  to  case  I,  however,  usage  is  not  decidedly  estab- 
lished, as  the  last  adjective  frequently  follows  the  inflection  of  the 
1st  declension  in  the  nom.  sing,  and  plur.  only,  and  that  of  the 
2d  declension  in  all  the  remaining  cases  :  tuarnu'/  frtfd)C  9DZtkb,  warm, 
fresh  milk,  gen.  and  dat.  warmer/  frifd)  c  n  SOJtld)  ;  QUtcS/  wctjjcs  Srefc, 
good  white  bread,  gen.  gutcS,  rvcijk  n  Jftrotc*,  dat.  Qutcm/  tt?ctjj  c  u 
c/  pi.  gute,  rocijjc  SSrofcc,  gen.  gutcr  au'tpcn  53rctc,  «• 


II.    COMPARISON. 

§  62.  In  German,  as  in  English,  there  are  two 
modes  of  comparing  adjectives,  called  the  terminational 
and  the  compound  comparisons. 

The  former  makes  the  comparative  and  superlative 
by  adding  certain  terminations  to  the  simple  form  of 
the  positive  ;  the  latter  by  prefixing  to  it  the  adverbs 
of  comparison :  m  e  1)  r,  more  ;  a  in  m  e  t  ft  c  n  or  1)  6  cf)  (1, 
most. 

Rule  I.  The  terminational  comparative  is  formed  by  ad- 
ding e  r,  and  the  terminational  superlative  by  adding  (1  or  e  ft 
to  the  root  of  the  positive  ;  e.  g.  frol),  comp.  frofy  e  r,  superl.  fro* 
fy  e  (1,  glad,  glader,  gladest ;  retd),  reid)  e  r,  reid)  ft  rich,  richer, 
richest ;  fd)btt>  fdjoii  e  r,  fd)6n  ft/  beautiful,  more  beautiful,  most 
beautiful. 

Rule  II.  Adjectives,  containing  the  vowels  a,  C,  it/  gener- 
ally modify  them  in  the  comparative  and  superlative  degrees  ; 
e.  g.  alt/  alter/  a Iteft,  old,  older,  oldest ;  a,ro£,  cjroger,  (jrbgt, 
great,  greater,  greatest. 

§  63.  The  vowels  of  the  root,  however,  are  not 
modified  in  the  following  instances  : — 

1st,  In  all  participles  which  have  become  susceptible  of  com- 
parison, by  assuming  the  signification  of  adjectives ;  as,  rafcnb/ 
mad  ;  fcfylacjcnt*/  decisive;  wfdjlaa/n/ cunning;  tvnverfcn, abandoned, 
&c. ;  e.  g.  rafcnb/  comp.  rnfcnt)  cr,  superl.  rafcnb  ft. 

2d,  All  adjectives  containing  the  diphthong  au;  as,  rnuli/ 
rough,  comp.  raufycr/  superl.  raufycft;  so:  a/au/grey;  tanb,  deaf ; 
laut,  loud,  &c. 

3d,  Derivative  adjectives  terminating  in  c  (/  e  r/  c  n,  c/  or  in  one 


415 

of  the  affixes  t>  a  r,  fa  m,  r)  a  f  t,  i  cj,  i  d)  t,  1 t  d)  K.,  e.  g.  hm!ef,  dark ; 
trccfrn,  dry;  rjagcr,  slender ;  fuvd)tbar,  formidable;  ratl^fcini,  advisa- 
ble;  Ocfhaft,  malicious;  roaltto,,  woody ;  grcifid)t,  grass-like;  tljuns 
lid),  feasible,  &c. 

4th,  In  the  following  : 

SMoft,  pale ;  f(ar,  clear  ;  fcuft,  gentle  ; 

hint,  variegated  ;  f ncipp,  tight ;  fatt,  satisfied  ; 

faM,  fallow  ;  larmi,  lame;  fcbtaff/ slack  ; 

folfd),  false  ;  lc?,  loose ;  fd)(anf,  slender  ; 

fwbf  joyful »  matt,  wearied  ;  Parr,  numb  ; 

aerate,  straight ;  nierfd),  brittle  ;  fte($,  proud  ; 

iKfunfc,  healthy ;  rtacft,  naked;  ffraff,  stiff; 

c\lfltt/  smooth ;  ptatt,  flat;  fhimm,  dumb; 

t^c!  t,  hollow ;  plump/  clumsy  ;  tell,  mad  ; 

I -eft,  kind;  rob,  raw  ;  veil,  full ; 

ft\M,  bald  ;  runt>,  round  ;  $al)m,  tame, 
faro,  stingy  ; 

§  64.  When  the  adjective  ends  either  in  b,  t,  ft,  e,  £,  fd)  or  $, 
the  c  before  the  (t  of  the  superlatives  becomes  essential  for  the 
sake  of  euphony.  In  all  other  cases  it  is  commonly  rejected  ;  e. 
g.  inevfeb/  brittle,  superl.  mcvfd)cft;  flclj/  proud,  superL  ftol$  c  ft  :c. ; 
but,  f(ar,  clear,  superl.  f(ar  ft ;  tapjvr,  valiant,  superl.  tapfcc  ft ; 
fdjuttiji,  culpable,  superl.  fd)u{Mi)  |1  2C. 

Polysyllables  terminating  in  c(,  cv  or  en,  generally  reject 
the  c  of  this  termination  in  the  comparative,  but  resume  it  again  in 
the  superlative;  e.  g.  cbef,  comp.  cfcUr  (instead  of  cMcr),  superl. 
ct>  c  ( ft ;  fu'itcr,  cheerful,  comp.  t)dt  r  c  r,  superl.  fycit  c  r  jit ;  cr^ebcn/  de- 
voted, comp.  cr^cb  n  c  rx  superl.  crgcb  c  n  ft. 

§  65.  Comparatives  and  superlatives  are  inflected 
like  positive  adjectives ;  thus : — 

1.  Better  wine,  2.  fairer  flower,  3.  greener  field. 

N.  Offerer  2£etn,        fd)onccc     <B(umc,          griincrcg 
G.  betfccen  8Scinc^     (itcncrcr  SBtunie,         gruncren 

So :  t»er  fccfl  e  SScin,  the  best  wine,  gen.  t>c^  6cft  c  n  2£ctnc$  K./  tie 
fdjonft  e  SBliune,  gen.  tcr  fdjonft  c  n  SMume  K. 

IRREGULAR    COMPARISON. 

§  66.  The  following  adjectives  are  irregular  in  their  com- 
parison : — 

POSIT.  COMP.  SUPERL. 

gut,  beflfer,           bejt,  good,  better,  best; 

bed),  l)6l)er,            fccdjft,  high,  higher,  highest; 

nafye,  nafcer,            ndd)fl,  near,  nearer,  nearest ; 

tn'ef,          me^r,         <         '    J  much,   more,      most. 


416 

Also  the  adverbs  : — 

gent,       liefrer,    am  liebjlen,      gladly,  more  gladly,  most  gladly  ,• 
(wemg),  mfnfcer,  am  mtnfceften,  little,    less,  least. 

§  67.  There  are  a  number  of  adjectives,  derived  from  ad- 
verbs of  place,  which  under  a  comparative  form  have  a  posi- 
tive signification,  and  hence  their  comparative  is  wanting : — 

POSIT*  SUPERL. 

fcer,  bte,  ba§  dufjeve,  aitgerfle,  outer,  extreme,  uttermost; 

it      n      a    fytntere,  fytnterile,  hind,  hindermost; 

n      n      n    trmete,  innerfte,  inner,  innermost ; 

tt      tt      n    mtttlete,  rwttelfte,  middle,  middlemost; 

n      n      n    ntefcere,  niefcerfte,  lower,  lowermost ; 

tf      n      n    obere,  cberfle,  upper,  uppermost; 

n      n      tt    imtere,  untetfle,  under,  undermost; 

H      it      n    werbere,  sorberjle,  fore,  foremost. 

COMPARISON    OF    ADVERBS. 

§  68.  Adverbs  of  manner,  the  form  of  which  is  generally 
the  same  with  that  of  adjectives,  are  likewise  susceptible  of 
comparison;  as,  cjefcfyrmnfe,  gefcfynnnber,  fcfybn,  fcfycwer,  swiftly, 
more  swiftly,  beautifully,  more  beautifully.  They  express  the 
superlative,  however,  by  prefixing  to  it  a  m  (a  contraction  for 
an  bem,  §  10);  as,  am  gefcfynnnfcften,  am  fcrjbnflen,  most 
swiftly,  most  beautifully. 

But  when  no  comparison,  but  simply  eminence  is  to  be  denoted 
by  the  superlative,  au  f  *,  a  contraction  of  the  preposition  mif  with 
the  accusative  of  the  article  (t>a*),  is  prefixed,  or  $11111,  a  contraction 
of  the  preposition  $u  with  the  dative  of  the  article  (K»m)  ;  e.  g-.  a  u  f  $ 
frcunMtcfoftc,  311  in  fcbenftcn,  most  kindly, most  beautifully;  cr  cmpfing 
mid)  nuf?  bof  lichflc,  he  received  me  most  courteously.  The  ad- 
verbial superlative  of  eminence,  which  is  also  called  the  absolute 
superlative,  may  likewise  be  expressed  by  the  simple  form  of  thai 
degree,  or  by  the  termination  c  n  $  ;  as,  gtttt9ft,  most  kindly  ;  ins 
mj})!,  most  cordially ;  fyecbftcnS,  at  the  most ;  ta'ngllen*/  at  the  longest. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

§  69.  Obs.  1.  The  plural  of  the  comparative  mcljr,  more,  is 
in  c  I)  r  c  or  m  c  f)  t  e  r  ?/  which  is  used  as  an  indefinite  numeral  in 
the  sense  of  the  English  several. 

Obs.  2.  The  two  numerals,  K't  erftex  the  first,  bcr  k|ti%  the  last, 
though  superlatives  in  sense,  give  rise  to  new  comparatives,  fcer 
er  fU  r  c  and  t)cr  ( c  §  t  cr  c,  which  correspond  to  the  English  the 
former — the  latter. 

Obs.  3.     The  compound  comparative  becomes  necessary  when 


417 

two  adjectives,  denoting  qualities  of  different  degrees,  are  predi- 
cated of  the  same  person  or  thing ;  e.  g.  cr  tjlt  m  c  1)  r  fntt  n(S  warm/ 
he  is  rather  cold  than  warm ;  t>u  luft  ni  c  1)  r  gclcfyrt  a(£  flucj,  thou 
art  more  learned  than  prudent. 

Obs.  4.  The  compound  superlative  becomes  necessary  when 
the  indefinite  article  precedes ;  e.  g.  cin  bb'obft  gtcuifcwuT  •Oittenfd), 
a  most  cruel  man;  cine  1)  0  d)  ft  gcfal)rfid)C  Slfifc,  a  most  dangerous 
journey. 

Obs.  5.  There  are  a  number  of  particles  (adverbs)  which  are 
frequently  placed  before  adjectives  of  every  degree  of  comparison 
to  render  their  meaning  intensive.  They  are  : — 1st,  With  the  posi- 
tive, au&crft,  extremely;  1)  3d)  ft/  highly;  fo  fjr,  very,  &c.  3d, 
With  the  comparative,  u  t  c  (,  much ;  ID  c  t  f  or  b  c  t  n>  c  t 1  c  w,  by  far ; 
n  e  d),  yet,  &c.  3d,  With  the  superlative,  bet  we  it  cm/ by  far; 
and  the  prefix  a  H  f  r  ;  e.  g.  f  c  fj  r  f  cl)  c  n,  very  pretty ;  w  c  i  t  grSjicr, 
by  far  greater ;  a  II  c  rfdjenjl,  most  beautiful  of  all. 

Obs.  6.  In  comparisons,  af  $  corresponds  to  the  English  than, 
and  n>tc  to  the  English  as ;  e.  g.  (Sic  ftnfc  alter  nl$  id)/  you  are 
older  than  I ;  cr  ift  fo  Qrcp  n?  t  c  fcin  Stater,  he  is  as  tall  as  his 
father. 

III.     USE  AND  GOVERNMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  70.  1.  Adjectives  of  every  degree  of  comparison  may 
be  employed  substantively ;  but  they  even  then  retain  the  in- 
flection of  adjectives  ;  e.  g.  fcer  2Bct'f  e,  the  wise  (man),  sage  ; 
ein  2'Beff  e  r,  a  sage  ;  tie  @d)6ne/  the  fair  woman  ;  ta3  (£rfycu 
lene,  the  sublime. 

2.  With  respect  to  adjectives  which  are  used  substantively 
in  the  neuter  gender,  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  : — 

1st,  Those  which  assume  no  termination,  and  which  designate 
either  some  abstract  quality,  or  some  material  named  after  that 
quality;  e.g.  fcciS  9?  c  d)  t/  justice;  cr  fr»rtd)t  fin  rcinc*  2)cutfd)/ 
he  speaks  pure  German  ;  ta$  SMci  n>  c  t  $,  white  lead  ;  XBcrttncc 
SB  t  a  u,  Prussian  blue,  &c.  These  are  inflected  like  substantives 
of  the  earlier  declension,  and  are  used  in  the  singular  only ;  as, 
fra$  Sfctou/  t)c?  SBtoirf  &c. 

2d,  Those  which  assume  the  terminations  of  the  attributive  adjec- 
tive and  are  inflected  like  it;  e.  g.  ta$  (SJutc,  the  good  (3d  decl.)  ; 
ctrcns  ®utc^/  somethingr  good  (1st  decl.);  t>a$  ©rune/  the  green; 
cin  ©an^cS,  a  whole. 

§  71.  With  respect  to  their  signification,  adjectives  are  di- 
vided into  two  classes,  viz  :  1st,  such  as  make  complete  sense 
of  themselves  without  the  addition  of  any  other  word;  as,  gut, 
good ;  grog,  great,  &c.  2d,  Those  which  of  themselves  can- 
not express  an  entire  idea,  but  require  the  addition  of  some 
18* 


418 

complemental  notion  ;  as,  b  e  tt)  ll  0  1,  conscious  of;   (  o  §,  free 
from,  &c.     The  former  may  be  termed  absolute,  the  latter  re- 
' 


The  complement  of  a  relative  adjective  may  either  be  the 
oblique  case  (§  49.  2d.)  of  a  substantive  (including  all  words  used 
as  such),  or  a  verb  in  the  infinitive  with  $  u  . 


ADJECTIVES    WITH    THE    INFINITIVE. 

§  72.  Adjectives  signifying  possibility,  duty,  necessity,  easi- 
ness, difficulty,  and  the  like,  are  followed  by  an  infinitive  with 
3  u  ;  as,  e$  tft  mtr  mcfyt  m  6  9  1  1  d)  3  u  9  e  fy  en,  it  is  not  possible 
for  me  to  go  ;  er  tfl  genotfytgt  3  it  a  r  b  e  1  1  e  n,  he  is  obliged 
to  work  ;  berett  311  fampfen,  ready  to  contend.  In  this  connec- 
tion the  infinitive,  though  active  in  form,  is  often  passive  in  signi- 
fication ;  (etd)t  sit  macfyen,  easy  to  be  done  ;  fcfyroer  sit  glauben, 
hard  to  be  believed,  &c. 

ADJECTIVES  GOVERNING  THE  OBLIQUE   CASES  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 

§  73.  When  relative  adjectives  are  followed  by  a 
substantive,  it  is  put  either  in  the  genitive,  the  dative, 
or  the  accusative. 

I.     The  adjectives  governing  the  genitive  are  :  — 


fci'fcfu'fticj/  in  want  of;  tuntucj,  acquainted  with  ; 

IvfltfjVn,  diligent  in  ;  macbttg/  master  of; 

fcfligt,  authorized  ;  miifci',  tired  of; 

benefit,  in  need  of;  fd)utt%  guilty  of; 

K'ft>u£t,  conscious  of;  tf)eUf)aft,  partaker  of; 

Ctnocbent,  remembering  ;  t)crt>ad)tifl,  suspected  of; 

fcil)tg,  capable  of  ;  tterlufHo,  losing  ; 

fret),  happy  in  ;  toll,  full  of  ; 

gaturttC},  in  expectation  of;  tviirfcu),  worthy  of. 
QCixnp,  certain  of  ; 

Examples.  (Stnct  (£prctct)C  m  a  cl)  1  1  cj  fctn/  to  be  master  of  a  lan- 
guage ;  cuu'tf  2Sctt>vccr)cn6  fd)Ulti^  guilty  of  a  crime;  fccr  (Strafe 
ti)  ii  r  t)  i  Q,  worthy  of  punishment. 

§  74.  II.  The  adjectives  which  govern  the  dative 
case  are  :  — 

1st,  Such  as  are  derived  from  verbs  which  govern  the  dative  ; 
as,  gcbcrfam,  obedient  to;  frtcnjlfrar,  bound  in  service  to; 
t>cn,  obliged  to,  &c. 


419 


2d.     The  following  : 

cifinftd),  resembling; 
angemcffen,  suited  to; 
cuu^cndwi,  agreeable  ; 
anjflcjjtfj,  offensive  ; 
frcfannt,  known  ; 
K'C|iU'iH,  convenient  ; 
fccnnijjt,  known  ; 
biinltd),  serviceable  ; 
ttgcn,  own  ; 
frcwfc,  strange  ; 
freimtltcb,  friendly  ; 
cjcgcnrucirttg,  present  to  ; 
gclmtftg,  fluent  ; 
(jt'iuajj1/  suited  to  ; 
£jcnctgt,  inclined  ; 
gcivogcn,  kind  ; 
flcivacfyfi'n,  equal  to  ; 
ijlcidb,  like  ; 

,  gracious; 
n,  salutary  ; 


^,  kind  ; 
tQ,  troublesome ; 
Hob,  dear,  agreeable; 

v'ttiij,  hurtful ; 
,  near ; 

),  useful ; 
fci)x\Mtcl),  injurious; 
fcbuiMi^  indebted ; 
trcu,  true,  faithful ; 
tibcrU'Qen,  superior ; 
tnuvr^o^ticb,  ever  memorable  to; 
t\'i^acbtuv  suspected  by ; 
ttcrbcrHtd),  destructive  to  ; 
Dcrbapt,  odious  to ; 
l?t•rwfln^t/  related ; 
t>ortl)ctll)aft,  advantageous  ; 
tvttrtg,  loathsome ; 
nnllfommen/  welcome ; 
gugct^an,  addicted  to. 


Examples  :  tct  ^cf)n  tft  fctncm  SSatct  a  f)  n  I  i  d),  the  son  resembles 
his  father;  ct  iff  fctncm  33crufc  md)t  g  c  tt)  n  d)  f  c  n,  he  is  not  equal  to 
his  calling;  cs  tft  itjm  6  c  t  (  fam,  it  is  salutary  to  him  ;  nnc  wc(  Inn 
tch  3f)»uin  f  ct)  u  i  t>  i  9  ?  how  much  do  I  owe  you  1  cc  t)l  mtr  t»  c  r  ()  a  f'  t, 
he  is  odious  to  me,  &c. 

III.  Adjectives  denoting  the  measure,  weight,  or  wor/A  of  a 
thing  ;  also  age  or  duration  of  time,  govern  the  accusative  ; 
as,  $n?olf  spfimt)  fd)U>cr,  twelve  pounds  in  weight;  cincn  Stngct: 
b  r  c  1  1,  of  the  breadth  of  a  finger  ;  cincn  Sfatcr  it)  c  r  t  f),  worth  a 
crown  ;  cr  tfl  jcfyn  3ttfyr  a(t,  he  is  ten  years  old  ;  funf  Sa^re  I  a  n  Q, 
for  five  years,  &c. 


NUMERALS. 

§  75.  Numerals  are  either  definite  or  indefinite  ;  as, 
t)  i  e  r,  }  c  1)  n,  four,  ten  ;  t)  i  e  (,  a  ( ( er  many,  all. 

Definite  numerals  are  divided  into  two  classes  : — 
Cardinal  and  Ordinal. 

Cardinal  numerals  are  such  as  express  simply  the  number 
of  persons  or  things  in  answer  to  the  question  "  how  many?" 
fcrei,  three ;  merstg,  forty. 

Ordinal  numerals  designate  the  rank  of  a  person  or  thing  in 
a  series  ;  as,  fcer  erjle,  the  first ;  fcet  atttolfte,  the  twelfth. 


420 


Ordinals  are  formed  from  cardinals  by  annexing  the  termi- 
nation ft  e,  when  the  cardinal  ends  in  cj,  and  the  termination 
tc  in  all  other  cases;  as,  ter  an?an$t'g  ft  e,  w'erte,  the  twen- 
tieth, fourth. 

Exceptions.  The  ordinal  of  ettt,  one,  is  irregular:  bet  erftc 
(instead  of  fcct  ctntc),  the  first.  Instead  of  t>cr  grocttc/  the 
second,  it  was  formerly  customary  to  say  tec  a  n  b  c  r  e. 

§  76.  The  following  is  a  list  of  cardinal  and  ordinal 
numerals : — 


CARDINAL. 

1.  dn,  dn$,  one; 

2.  $n>d,  two ; 

3.  t>rd,  three; 

4.  mcr,  four; 

5.  fiinf,  five ; 

6.  fed)*,  six ; 

7.  futon,  seven ; 

8.  «d)t,  eight; 

9.  twin,  nine ; 

10.  jcbn,  ten ; 

11.  c(f,  eleven ; 

12.  $tr8lf,  twelve,  &c, 

13.  brdjcbn  ; 

14.  wer$ebn ; 

15.  fiinftcfjn ; 

16.  jcd>pbtt; 

17.  ju'frenjcbn  or  fict^cfjn  ; 
18. 

19. 
20. 

21.  cin  uni) 

22.  ^it)ct 

30.  brctO 

31.  ctnunD 
40.  rtc 

50.  fftnfttg; 

00.  fccbjt^; 

70.  ftebcnjig  or  \idw$ ; 

80.  nd)tjtjj ; 

90.  ncun^tg; 

100.  liuntcrt; 

101.  huntort  unb  etn$ ; 

102.  buntcrt  unt)  ^n?ci ; 

103.  ^onbcrt  un^  trd,  :c 
200.  ^cttiunbert ; 
300.  frrctyunbcrt ;    , 


ORDINAL. 

;  crftc,     the  first. 
$tvdtc,     '  second, 
britte,      '  third, 
tricrti*,      i  fourth, 
ftinfte,     '  fifth, 
fi'cbftc,      *  sixth. 
fu'lK'nte,  '  seventh. 
ocbtc,       '  eighth, 
neuntc,  "  ninth, 
gi'bnti*/    "  tenth. 
ctftc,       "  eleventh, 
gtvclftc,  "  twelfth,  &c. 
brd§c()ntc. 

ftinf^cbntc. 


groan  ji.qfte. 

dn  unb  [ 

grod  unb  c 

brct^tgftc. 

dn  unb  brdpujfte  it. 


jicben^tgfte  or  ftcfytgjtc. 

ncun^igfte. 
bunbcrtjlc. 
bunbcrt  unb  cr|^c. 
bunbcrt  unb  ^njdtc. 
bunbcrt  unb  brtttc  K. 


brdl)unbcrtftc. 


ad)tbunt>crtfK. 

ncunbunfrcrtftc. 

tciufcntflc. 


421 

CARDINAL.  ORDINAL. 

400.  iricrfiunfccrt ;  tct,  tie,ta$ 

500.  ffttif  bimbctt ; 
600.  fecbsbmrtcrt ; 
700.  pebcnrjuntert ; 
800.  ad)tbuntcrt ; 
900.  ncunfmntert; 
1000.  taufcnt) ; 

2000. 

3000.  t>reitaufcnt>. 
100,000.  buntctttaufenb. 
1,000,000.  cine  93?tllten. 
2,000,000.  groct  gjztUioncn. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

§  77.  Obs.  1.  When  c  in  stands  in  connection  with  other 
numerals,  it  is  indeclinable ;  as,  e  i  n  lint  werjuj,  forty  one  , 
e  t  n  taufcnt)  acfytfntntert  fi'mf  itnfc  wer^ta,,  1845.  In  other  ca- 
ses it  is  always  inflected.  This  may  be  done  in  four  different 
ways  : — 

1st,  If  the  numeral  c  i  n,  either  alone  or  with  an  adjective,  limits 
the  meaning  of  a  substantive,  and  is  not  preceded  by  any  other  de- 
clinable word,  it  follows  the  inflection  of  the  indefinite  article  C  t  n, 
c  t  n  c,  ci  n,  and  differs  from  it  only  by  a  greater  stress  of  accentua- 
tion; e.  g.  ctn  (ojuter)  SHann,  one  (good)  man;  cine  (gute)  Jrau, 
one  (good)  woman ;  c  t  n  (cuiteS)  JPtint*,  one  (good)  child. 

2d,  When  it  stands  entirely  alone,  either  in  an  absolute  sense  or 
relating  to  some  substantive  understood,  it  is  inflected  like  an  ad- 
jective of  the  first  declension — c  i  n  c  r,  e  i  n  c,  c  i  n  c  $,  &c. ;  e.  g. 
and)  ntd)t  Since  roar  ta,  not  one  even  was  there ;  (Si  n  c  n  »cn  un$ 
roirl)  fra$  2ec$  treffen,  the  lot  will  fall  on  one  of  us ;  cine  mctnec 
@cl)ivcficrn,  one  of  my  sisters,  &c. 

3d,  But  if  it  is  preceded  either  by  the  definite  article  t>Ct,  t>ic,t>a$, 
or  any  other  word  having  the  characteristic  terminations  of  the  ar- 
ticle (§  57),  it  is  declined  like  an  adjective  of  the  second  declen- 
sion ;  e.  g.  K*r  cine  9Jtann,  fcte  cine  Srciu/  &a$  etne  Jttnt),  the 
one  man,  one  woman,  one  child,  &c. 

4th,  The  numeral  c  i  n  follows,  finally,  the  inflection  of  the  third 
declension  of  adjectives,  when  it  is  preceded  by  a  possessive  pronoun, 
in  e  t  n,  t)  ctn,  f  c  i  n/  &c. ;  e.  g.  mctn  c  t  n  e  t  -tBriiK'r,  my  one  bro- 
ther; ft'tnc  cine  ©cfyrccfkr,  his  one  sister ;  (Sucr  c  t  n  c  $  spferfc,  your 
one  horse,  &c. 

§  78.  Obs.  2.  The  numerals  g  ro  e  {  and  fe  r  e  t  are  in- 
fleeted  only  when  they  are  not  preceded  by  the  article  or  some 
other  declinable  word  ;  thus  : — 


422 

NOM.  groci,  brct ; 
GEN.  gipctcr,  bract ; 
DAT.  groctcn,  brctcn  ; 
Ace.  jwei,  brcu 

Examples:  mis  ^roctcr  ebct  brcicr  3citgen  93?unb,  from  the 
mouth  of  two  or  three  witnesses  ;  facjc  c$  bed)  j  c  n  e  n  b  r  c  i  (not 
b  r.  c  i  e  n)  Srcunbcn,  pray  tell  those  three  friends. 

Obs.  3.  The  remaining  cardinal  numerals  are  indeclinable, 
except  that  they  assume  e  n  in  the  dative  case,  when  they  are 
used  substantively ;  e.  g.  mtt  ©  e  cf)  f  e  n  fafyrert,  to  ride  in  a 
coach  with  six  (horses);  cuif  atfert  JHeren  frtecfyen,  to  crawl 
on  hand  and  foot.  But,  mtt  fed)  c  vO^ann,  with  six  men;  mtt 
» t  e  r  (Sofynen,  with  four  sons. 

Ofo.  4.  Instead  of  $ro  C  t,  b  c  1 b  c,  both,  is  frequently  used,  and 
is  inflected  like  an  adjective  in  the  plural :  nom.  b  ci  b  c,  gen.  b  c  U 
b  c  r,  &c. ;  b  t  c  b  c  i  b  c  n,  gen.  bet  b  c  i  b  c  n,  &c. ;  f  c  i  n  c  b  c  i  b  c  n, 
gen.  f  c  t  n  c  t  0  c  i  b  c  n,  &c. ;  e.  g.  feme  b  c  t  b  e  n  93rut>et  ftnb  franf, 
both  his  brothers  are  sick  ;  bic  bctbcn  Jrcunbe  tvorcn  ba,  both  friends 
were  there.  The  neuter  singular,  b  c  t  b  c  $,  refers  to  two  different 
things,  but  is  never  applied  to  persons.  It  corresponds  to  the  Eng- 
lish :  both  the  one  and  the  other ;  as,  fjdben  (Sic  ferob  cbcr  9Bein? 
Scl)  bflbc  b  e  t  b  C  ^.  Have  you  bread  or  wine  1  I  have  both  the  one 
and  the  other. 

§  79.  Obs.  5.  Most  cardinal  numerals  are  adjectives, 
which,  however,  like  all  other  adjectives,  may  be  used  substan- 
tively. The  words  $  it  n  b  e  r  t  and  X  a  u  f  e  n  t)  are  employed 
as  collective  nouns  of  the  neuter  gender,  and  are  inflected  as 
such :  nom.  ba3  £)iint>ert,  gen.  be$  £)unbert&,  pi.  bte  £)wtDerte ; 
e«  g«  i  u  $  u  n  b  c  v  t  e  n,  by  hundreds  ;  3  it  X  a  it  f  e  n  b  e  n,  by 
thousands.  (£  t  n  e  Million  is  a  noun  of  the  feminine  gen- 
der, and  occurs  only  in  connection  with  an  article, 

Obs.  6.  When  numerals  serve  simply  to  denote  cyphers, 
or  the  abstract  notion  of  number,  they  are  substantives  of  the 
feminine  gender,  the  word  3 a  M  being  understood ;  as,  bte 
C3ftW)  S  r  e  t,  the  number  three  ;  bte  2*  t  e  r  3 1  g,  the  number 
forty. 

Ofo.  7.  By  means  of  the  affixes  et  and  ling,  masculine  sub- 
stantives of  various  significations  are  formed  from  cardinal  num- 
bers ;  e.  g.  cm  5)  r  c  t  c  r,  ctn  ©  c  d)  f  c  r,  coins  of  three  and  six 
kreuzers  ;  ctn  ?( cb  t  g  t  g  c  r,  a  man  of  eighty  ;  3  n?  c  t  u  n  b  g  n?  a  n  3 1  - 
Q  e  r,  wine  grown  in  1822  ;  3  rot  U  i  n  cj,  twin  ;  5)  r  t  U  t  u  cj,  triplet. 

Obs.  8.     Ordinal  numerals  are  regularly  declined  after  the 


423 

manner  of  adjectives.  When  used  substantively,  their  initial 
letter  must  be  a  capital,  if  a  person  is  referred  to ;  as,  bte 
Srften  roerben  bte  2e£ten  fern,  the  first  shall  be  last. 

§  80.  To  the  preceding  classes  of  numerals  may  be  added 
the  following  compounds,  formed  partly  from  cardinals,  partly 
from  ordinals,  and  partly  from  indefinite  numerals  : — 

I.    COMPOUNDS   FORMED    FROM    CARDINAL    AND    INDEFINITE 
NUMERALS. 

1st,  Distributives  ;  formed  by  prefixing  the  adverb  j  e ;  as, 
j  e  fi  e  b  e  n,  by  seven  ;  j  e  3  e  \)  n,  ten  at  a  time,  or  as  in  Eng- 
lish, j  m  e  t  11  n  b  s  ro  e  t,  two  and  two. 

2d,  Iteratives ;  formed  by  adding  the  substantive  £0?  a  I, 
time,  etnmal,  once;  funfmal,  five  times;  jebeSmal,  each 
time  ;  welmal,  many  times,  &c.  Sometimes  9J?  a  (  is  separat- 
ed and  declined  like  a  substantive;  as,  em  -JO?  a  I,  once;  311 
gefyn  vO?  a  I  e  n,  ten  times.  This  is  always  the  case  when  it  is 
preceded  by  an  ordinal :  ba3  erfte,  jroette  5D?a(,  the  first,  second 
time. 

3d,  Multiplied  lives ;  formed  by  annexing  the  affix  fad),  or 
the  obsolete  fdlttcj,  fold;  e.  g.  etnfad),  sroetfad), 
simple,  twofold,  tenfold  ;  s  t  e (  f  a  cfy,  manyfold  ; 
ttg,  an  hundredfold,  &c. 

4th,  Variatives ;  which  are  indeclinable,  and  formed 
by  adding  the  obsolete  substantive  let  (meaning  kind, 
manner),  and  inserting  e  t  for  the  sake  of  euphony ;  as,  ei* 
n  e  r  I  e  t,  of  one  kind,  all  the  same  ;  fcreierlei,  of  three 
kinds ;  mcincfyerlet',  welerlet,  of  various,  of  many  kinds,  &c. 

II.      COMPOUND    NUMERALS    FORMED    FROM    ORDINALS. 

§  81.  1st,  Dimidiatives ;  indeclinable  adjectives  formed  by 
annexing  J)  a  I  b,  half,  to  the  ordinal ;  as,  t)  r  1 1 1  e  I)  a  I  b,  two 
and  a  half  (literally  third-half ^  meaning  two  whole  and  one  half 
of  a  third] ;  f  ii  n  f  t  e  1)  a  I  b,  four  and  a  half,  &c.  Instead  of 
aroettefyalb/  anfcertfyalb  is  used,  from  the  obsolete  word  ter 
anbere,  the  second  (§  75.  Exc.~). 

2d,  Ordinal  adverbs  in  e  n  S  ;  as,  e  r  jl  e  n  §,  3  tt>  e  1 1  e  n  3, 
2  e  1)  n  ten  3,  firstly,  secondly,  tenthly,  &c. 

3d,  Partitives ;  masculine  substantives  formed  by  means  of 
the  affix  tel  (from  Ifyetl,  part);  e.  g.  ber  Qrt'ttel,  Q3ter? 
tel,  3e&ntel/  ^unbertftel,  the  third,  fourth,  tenth,  hun- 
dredth part. 


424 

INDEFINITE  NUMERALS. 

§  82.     The  indefinite  numerals  are  as  follows  :  — 

dtfe,  all  ;  md)t3,  nothing  ; 

gefammt,    ?  complete,  etmcje,    ) 

fammtlufr,  S  entire  ;  etltdje,   >  JJJJ, 

gcm$,  all,  whole  ;  mancfye,  } 

Jeter,        }  each  wel,  much,  many  ; 

jebroeber,  >  e      '  .  mcfcr,  more  ; 

fegltdjer,  }         *  '  genitg,  enough  ; 

few,  no,  no  one  ;  ettt>a>3,  some,  a  little. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs.  1.  The  indefinite  numerals  serve  either  to  express  num. 
ber,  as,  etntge,  edtcfye,  mandje,  jeber  or  jecjltcfyer;  01 
quantity,  as,  etroa3,  gang;  or  icrt/i,  as,  <t((,  qcfammt,  et* 
n  t  cj  e  $,  e  t  n  t  5  e,  f  e  t  n,  v  t  c  I,  m  e  I)  r,  u>  e  n  t  <j,  9  e  n  it  g. 

O5^.  2.  Those  which  may  indicate  quantity  and  number 
both,  are  generally  inflected  only  when  they  imply  number; 
e.  g.  s  t  e  I  e  SRenfcfyen,  many  men  ;  ein  i  c\c  S^ern,  several 
pens;  but  otel  5f6etn,  much  wine;  mel)r  33rDb,  more  bread. 

§    83.       INDEFINITE    NUMERALS    DENOTING    NUMBER    ONLY. 


1st,  Scbcr,  jcbc,  jct)C^  (of  which  jcgttchiT  and  jchwtvr  are 
antiquated  forms),  is  disjunctive^  corresponding  to  the  English 
each,  every  ;  e.  g.  jctu't  Sron^  l)at  fciiu'  ^cfcbivcvt^cn,  every  condi- 
tion has  its  troubles.  It  is  inflected  like  adjectives,  and  is  often 
preceded  by  the  article  ctn  ;  as,  c  t  n  \  c  t)  c  \,  cine  [  c  t)  c,  c  t  n 
1  c  t)  c  £. 

2d,  ©tntcicr,  ctnt^c,  cint.qc^  some,  a  few,  when  applied 
to  number,  is  used  in  the  plural  only,  and  is  synonymous  with 
ctltcbc.  In  the  singular,  however,  it  has  reference  to  quantity; 
as,  c  i  n  t  cj  c  £  9)?cf)(,  some  flour  ;  c  t  n  t  $  c  Sett,  some  time. 

3d,  Wl  a  n  cb  c  r,  m  n  n  cl)  c,  m  a  n  cb  c  6,  in  the  singular,  answers 
to  the  English  many  a;  as,  mancbcv  oltc  'Jrcunl*,  many  an  old 
friend  ;  in  n  n  cb  c  tctfltcfx  ®nK',  many  a  precious  gift.  In  the 
plural  it  is  to  be  rendered  by  many. 

§  84.       INDEFINITE    NUMERALS    IMPLYING    QUANTITY    ONLY. 

1st,  (£tix>  a  S,  some,  is  indeclinable,  and  usually  connected  with 
collective  nouns  or  names  of  materials  ;  e.  g.  c  t  ro  a  6  (SK'tt,  some 
money  ;  c  t  n>  n  c«  frtfdxS  95?flfff  rx  some  fresh  water.  When,  as  a 
substantive,  it  corresponds  to  something,  it  is  an  indefinite  pronoun 
(§  92). 


425 

2d,  (5$  a  n  3  indicates  the  completeness  of  an  object  and  is  opposed 
to  half,  part,  &c. ;  ber,  bte,  bag  ©  a  n  J  c,  the  entire,  whole  ;  ctn  9  a  nt 
$  e  6  3tabr,  a  whole  year.  It  is  inflected  like  adjectives ;  but  before 
neuter  names  of  places  and  countries'  it  is  always  indeclinable  ;  as, 
Q  a  n  3  Xmcrifa,  £cnben,  all  America,  London. 

§  85.       INDEFINITE    NUMERALS    IMPLYING    NUMBER    AND 
QUANTITY    BOTH. 

1st,  ?(l f  e  r,  a  I  I c,  a  ( (  c  £,  all,  in  the  plural  implies  number,  and 
in  the  singular  quantity ;  e.  g.  alter  &  c  t  n,  all  the  wine  ;  a  II  c 
9}?  itch,  all  the  milk  ;  and  often  without  any  termination  (§  81,. 
Obs.  2.);att  btefer  ££etn,  all  this  wine;  alt  bas  iBrob,  all  the 
bread  ;  a  1 1  c  Me  iiSafoter,  btc  ficbcn  (<Sd)ilkr),  all  the  electors,  seven 
in  number.  Its  signification  does  not  admit  of  its  being  preceded 
by  the  article,  and  hence  its  inflection  is  not  affected  when  another 
word,  declined  like  the  article,  precedes ;  e.  g.  n>cld)C£  a  If  eg 
(not  a  1 1  e,  $  57),  all  which  ;  l>et  b  i  e  f  e  m  a  1 1  c  m,  in  all  this,  &c. 
The  neuter  singular  sometimes  designates  number  in  the  most  inde- 
finite manner;  e.  g.  a  1 1  c  5  rennet,  rettct,  flud)tet,  all  are  running,  sa- 
ving, rescuing.  "When  the  English  all  is  equivalent  to  the  whole, 
it  is  rendered  by  the  German  q  a  n  5 ;  as,  all  the  hour,  all  the  day, 
bte  9  a  n  3  c  (Ettinbe,  ben  g  a  n  5  e  n  Sag. 

2d,  &  c  t  n,  i  e  t  n  c,  !  e  t  n,  no,  none,  is  declined'  like  the  indefinite 
article  tin,  etne,  etn,  when  it  stands  in  connection  with  a  substan- 
tive ;  and  like  an  adjective  of  the  first  declension,  Reiner/  6  c  t  n  c, 
f  e  t  n  e  $,  when  the  substantive  is  not  expressed  ;  as,  f  c  t  n  SXftenfd), 
no  man  ;  Ijojl  £)u  cm  ittud)  ?  3d)  r)abc  f  c  t  n  e  *  ;  hast  thou  a  book  ?  I 
have  none ;  er  Ijat  f  e  t  n  e  Jreunbe,  he  has  no  friends. 

3d,  <Sa'mmtttcf)er,  fam  m  tit  d)  e,  fa'mmt(td)C^v  t)er  $a 
fa  in  in  t  e,  bte  c\  e  f  a  m  m  t  c,  b  a  $  a,  e  f  a  m  m  t  c,  are  nearly  synony- 
mous with  a  ( f,  all,  entire,  the  complete.  They  are  regularly  de- 
clined like  adjectives ;  as,  (Vine  fammtttdjen  2$er!e,  his  complete 
works  ;  Seine  fa'mmtltcfxn  (jjcfammten)  Jreun^e/all  thy  friends. 

4th,  95  i  e  t  and  ro  c  n  t  $,  when  they  imply  quantity,  or  number  con- 
sidered as  a  mass,  are  invariable  (§82.  Obs.  2).  iCtct  23rcb,  »tel($5elb, 
much  bread,  much  money  ;  r»  t  e  I  9)2cnfd)cn,  a  large  mass  of  men. 
But  if  they  refer  to  a  number  of  individuals  or  things  regarded  as 
distinct,  they  follow  the  inflection  of  adjectives  :  t>  t  e  t  c  r,  t»i  e  \  c, 
in  c  ( e  $,  n?  c  n  1 9  e  r,  iv  e  n  t  9  c,  ro  e  n  t  9  c  $,  &c. ;  e.  g.  e^  fonnen  fieri 
nur  £8  e  n  t  q  e  reciicren,  but  few  can  govern  themselves  ;  id)  effe  ritd)t 
IM  c  t  e  ^rucbt,  I  do  not  eat  many  kinds  of  fruit.  When  an  article 
or  pronoun  precedes,  incl  and  tucmg  must  be  inflected,  even  if  they 
refer  to  quantity  ;  e.  g.  tie  D  t  c  (c  n  ££crte,  the  many  words;  fetn 
n>  e  n  t  ge  ^  ©ctb,  his  little  money,  &c. 

5th,  The  comparatives  m  e  b  r,  more,  and  rt)  e  n  t  g  e  r,  less,  are  not 
generally  inflected,  except  m  e  t)t  cr  ex  the  plural  of  metjr,  when  it 
assumes  the  signification  of  several  (§  69). 


426 

§  86.       OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    USE    OF    NUMERALS. 

Obs.  1.  If  numerals  stand  in  connection  with  substantives 
which  express  a  definite  number,  measure,  or  weight,  the  Ger- 
man idiom  requires  the  substantive  to  be  put  into  the  singular 
(§  26)  ;  as,  jroblf  ty  f  «  n  b,  twelve  pounds  ;  jwet  ©  t  it  cf,  two 
pieces. 

Obs.  2.  Numerals  which  denote  a  part  of  a  greater  num- 
ber or  multitude  of  objects,  are  followed  by  a  genitive  of  the 
whole,  or  by  the  dative  with  the  preposition  a  n  6,  from  among ; 
n  n  t  e  r,  among  ;  x>  o  n,  of ;  e.  g.  t  r  e  t  f  e  in  e  r  5tinber, three 
of  his  children;  fcer  erfle  son  meinen  greunfcen,  the  first 
of  my  friends  ;  $H  I  ( e  li  n  t  e  r  1 1)11011,  many  among  them. 

Obs.  3.  When  the  genitive  of  the  whole  is  a  personal  pro- 
noun, it  always  precedes  the  numeral ;  as,  e$  ftnb  it  n  f  e  r 
3  tt>  a  n  $  t  g,  there  are  twenty  of  us  ;  e£  roerben  i  ()  r  e  r  m'cfyt 
£  i  e  I  e  fetn,  there  will  not  be  many  of  them. 

O6^.  4.  When  a  definite  number  is  to  be  stated  approxi- 
mately, or  with  uncertainty,  the  adverbs  and  prepositions  em- 
ployed in  German  for  that  purpose  are  :  e  t  tt)  a,  something 
like;  ungefafyr,  about;  b  etna  fee,  fa  ft,  almost;  fa  urn, 
scarcely  ;  $  e  9  e  n,  bet,  an  t)  i  e,  nearly,  about ;  e.  g.  fca§ 
spferb  ifl  nng  ef  ai)r  fynnbert  "IMcr  roertfy,  tne  horse  is  worth 
about  a  hundred  crowns  ;  cv  ifl  b  e  i  n  a  f)  e  or  an  fc  i  e  fnnfsia, 
3afyr  alt,  he  is  nearly  fifty  years  of  age. 

Ofo.  5.  The  word  6t$  (till,  to)  is  used  when  a  number  can  be 
stated  only  KS  fluctuating  between  two  given  numbers  ;  as,  »i  c  r 
b  t  £  f  ii  n  f  tiiufcnt)  9)Jann,  from  four  to  five  thousand  men  ;  jivan^a, 
fciS  ttdfncj  3l)atcr,  about  twenty  or  thirty  crowns. 

Obs.  6.  The  English  upward  is  rendered  by  u  n  ft  c  tt  i  cf)  C  or 
«  n  t)  c  t  n  1 9  c ;  as,  Da*  .pans  ill  n  c  u  n  $  t  g  u  n  t)  c  t  ( i  df)  c  5u|}  f)ecf), 
the  house  is  upward  of  ninety  feet  high,  or  in  conversational  Ger- 
man often,  c  1 1  i  d)  c  n  e  11  n  $  t  g. 

Obs.  7.  The  English  either  and  neither  have  no  corresponding 
words  in  German,  and  are  rendered  by  c  i  n  c  r  t)  0  n  b  c  i  fe  c  n/  one 
of  the  two,  and  f  c  i  n  c  r  t»  o  n  b  c  1 1>  c  n,  none  of  the  two. 

§  87.  Obs.  8.  Numerals  are  sometimes  employed  ellipti- 
cally  without  a  substantive,  when  a  point  of  time  is  expressed; 
e.  g.  tfl  e3  nod)  ntd)t  $tv  blf ?  is  it  not  twelve  yet?  (J3  fyat  eben 
fc  r  e  i  gefcfylagcit,  it  has  just  struck  three.  In  these  cases  the 
word  U  b  r  or  an  t  e  r  II  t)  r,  o'clock,  is  to  be  supplied.  In 
the  same  manner  ordinal  numerals  are  used,  when  the  day  of 
the  month  is  to  be  denoted  ;  e.  g.  ten  ttjiettielften  t?aben 


427 

nnr  ?   what  day  of  the  month  is  it  ?    2Btr  fyafcen  fc  e  n  $  tt>  a  it  - 
3  t  3  ft  e  it  (Tag  be3  Senate),  it  is  the  twentieth. 

When  in  connection  with  a  date  the  name  of  the  month  is  given, 
the  preposition  of  is  never  expressed  in  German;  as,  ten  funftcii 
932  a  t,  the  fifth  of  May  ;  am  t>  r  1 1 1  c  u  2C  u  Q  u  ft,  on  the  third  of 
August,  &c. 


PRONOUNS. 

§  88.  Pronouns  are  words  which  serve  as  the  sub- 
stitutes of  nouns. 

Pronouns  are  divided  into  Personal,  Possessive,  De- 
monstrative, Determinative,  Relative,  and  Interrogative. 

I.     PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

§  89.  A  personal  pronoun  is  one  which  simply  indicates 
the  relation  of  personality ;  i.  e.  whether  the  substantive  rep- 
resented be  the  person  speaking  (t  d),  tt)  t  r,  I,  we),  or  spoken 
to  (b  u,  i  fy  r,  thou,  ye),  or  spoken  of  (e  r,  ft  e,  e  3,  ft  e,  he,  she, 
it,  they). 

Personal  pronouns  are  declined  as  follows  : — 

FIRST  PERSON  (FOR  ALL  GENDERS). 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 


NOM.  id),  I, 

GEN.  metner  (mein),  of  me, 
DAT.  nut,  to  me, 

Ace.  mid),  me ; 


NOM.  twr,         we, 
GEN.  unfer,  of  us, 
DAT.  un^r     to  us, 
Ace.  un§,         us. 


SECOND  PERSON  (FOR  ALL  GENDERS). 
SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

NOM.  tfyr,          ye  or  you, 
GEN.  eiier,    of  you, 
DAT.  end),    to  you, 
Ace.  end),        ye  or  you. 


NOM.  til,  thou, 

GEN.  fretner  (bent),  of  thee, 
DAT.  bit,  to  thee, 

Ace.  bid),  thee ; 


THIRD    PERSON. 

SINGULAR. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Neuter. 

NOM. 

er, 

he, 

fte,                she, 

e$, 

it, 

GEN. 

feiner 

(fetn),  of 

him, 

tferer,        of  her, 

fetner 

(fetn), 

of  it, 

DAT. 

tfym 

) 

to 

him, 

tl)r  ?  n  -•    to  her, 

tt)m 

\ 

to 

it, 

Ace. 

tfyn 

I 

P«h 

him  -fte  $'lu;'     her; 

e^ 

} 

P^/ 

it. 

428 
PLURAL. 

For  all  genders. 

NOM.  fte,  they; 

GEN.  tfyrer,  of  them  ; 

DAT.  tl)nert  ?  r  ,     to  them  ; 

Ace.  fte      $  |ICP'       them.  ^ 

§  90.       OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs.  1.  The  genitives  m  c  t  n  c  r,  fc  c  i  n  c  r,  f  e  t  n  e  r,  now  gener- 
ally  take  the  place  of  the  earlier  forms  m  c  t  n,  t>  etn,  f  c  i  n,  which 
are  found  only  in  poetry,  and  in  certain  familiar  expressions ;  as, 
ttetcu'O  nictn  md>t,  forget  me  not ;  qefcenfc  nu'tn,  remember  me. 

Obs.  2.  When  the  prepositions  f)  a  (  0  c  n,  rot*  fl  e  n,  on  account 
of,  and  urn — rot  ((en,  for  the  sake  of,  are  compounded  with  the  geni- 
tives m  c  t  n,  t)  c  i  n,  f  c  t  n,  if)  r,  the  syllable  ct  is  inserted  for  the 
sake  of  euphony ;  e.  g.  me  i  n  c  t  - ,  t>  c  t  n  c  t  - ,  f  c  i  n  c  t  - ,  \\jrct: 
ft  a  I  0 1'  n  (roc^cn),  on  my,  thy,  his,  her  account.  The  genitives 
«  n  f  c  r  and  ^  u  c  r  take  t  simply  :  urn  u  n  f  c  r  t  ro  i  ( ( c  n,  for  our 
sake  ;  c  u  r  c  t  n?  e  q  c  n,  on  your  account. 

Obs.  3.  The  word  fid)  (sibi,  se)  is  the  reflexive  pronoun  for  the 
gen.  and  dat.  of  the  third  person,  both  singular  and  plural.  It  is 
used  in  propositions,  in  which  the  action  of  the  verb  terminates  in 
the  subject  itself,  from  whence  it  proceeded.  The  oblique  cases 
of  the  first  and  second  persons,  as  well  as  the  gen.  of  the  third 
(feiner,  t()rer),  do  not  possess  a  separate  form  of  the  reflexive,  and 
hence  they  are  themselves  employed  in  a  reflexive  sense ;  e.  g.  id) 
fd)ante  mid)/  I  am  ashamed  (lit.  I  shame  myself) ;  bu  foK'ft  bid), 
thou  praisest  thyself.  In  these  instances,  however,  the  indeclina- 
ble word  f  e  ( t>  ft  or  fc  I  b  c  r  is  added,  whenever  emphasis  or  per- 
spicuity require  it ;  e.  g.  f  c  t  n  c  r  f  c  I  0 11  ntd)t  fcbenen,  not  to  spare 
one's  self;  mtr  fclber,  to  myself;  bid)  fclbft,  thyself.  When 
joined  to  the  nominative  of  the  first,  second  or  third  persons,  feftft 
or  fclbcr  is  intensive;  as,  id)  fctbcr  farm  fie  rctten,  1  myself  can 
rescue  her ;  £u  f  e  ( 0  ft  mupt  rtd)tcn,  thou  thyself  must  be  the  judge  ; 
fcer  .Ronifl  fc  (bft  erfcbtcn,  the  king  appeared  in  person. 

Obs.  4.  There  is  one  reciprocal  pronoun  in  German — ct  nan  bet 
(contracted  for  c  t  n  c  r  ben  a  n  t)  e  r  n),  one  another,  each  other. 
Instead  of  this,  however,  the  reflexive  pronouns  are  often  employed 
in  a  reciprocal  sense  in  the  plural ;  as,  roir  fennen  u  n  $  or  cincinz 
t)  c  r,  we  know  each  other ;  fte  $anfen  fi  d)  or  m  i  t  c  t  n  a  n  t)  c  r,  they 
are  quarrelling  with  each  other. 

§  91.  Obs.  5.  In  poetry,  and  when  addressing  the  Supreme  Being, 
their  intimate  friends  or  families,  the  Germans  employ  the  second 
person  singular,  £»u.  In  polite  conversation,  however,  they  al- 
ways address  each  other  in  the  third  person  plural,  ©  t  ex  gen.  5  ^' 
r  ev,  dat.  3  f)  n  e  n,  ace.  ©  t  e ;  e.  g.  ich  tnnfe  3  ft  n  e  n,  I  thank  you  ; 
roc  cjehcn  (Ste  fmi  ?  where  are  you  going!  It  is  also  customary 
for  superiors  to  address  their  dependants  and  others  of  inferior 
rank  in  the  second  person  plural  (3  f)  r,  (£'  U  d),  you,  to  you),  or  in 


429 

the  third  person  singular  ((5r,  (Sic,  he,  she} ;  e.  g.  iva?  fyat  (5r  ^ 
(>rnd)t  ?  what  have  you  brought  1  In  writing,  both  the  personal 
and  possessive  pronouns  relating  to  the  person  addressed,  must  al- 
ways begin  with  a  capital  letter;  e.  g.  id)  bittc  <S'tc  (3Md),  (Such/ 
3>f)n)  um  3br  (£X'tn,  (vm'r)  J^ucb,  I  beg  you  to  give  me  your  book. 

Obs.  6.  The  neuter  pronoun  cs  is  never  used  in  the  genitive 
and  dative  cases  (f  c  t  n  cr,  t  b  m)»  except  when  it  relates  to  a  per- 
son. When  a  thing  is  referred  to,  the  expressions  of  it,  of  them, 
to  it,  with  it,  are  either  rendered  by  the  demonstrative  pronouns 
bcffen,  t>crcn,  or  by  an  adverbial  pronoun,  t)  a  $  u,  t>  a  mi  f, 
t)  a  r  a  n  &c. ;  e.  g.  have  you  much  of  it?  fyabcn  (Sic  ttffftl  i»M  ? 
what  do  you  wish  with  it1}  n?Q6  lucllcn  @U*  t>  a  mi  t  (see  pages  20 
and  142)? 

Obs.  7.  The  pronoun  c$  has  often  a  very  indefinite  significa- 
tion, sometimes  corresponding  to  the  English  "  it,11  sometimes  to 
the  unaccented  "  there,"  but  frequently  it  is  expletive,  and  cannot 
be  rendered  at  all.  It  is  employed  : — 

1st,  As  the  subject  of  impersonal  verbs,  or  such  as  appear  to  be 
used  impersonally;  as,  cs  tonncrt,  c$  bltgt,  it  thunders,  it 
lightens  ;  c  $  f  r  c  u  t  m  i  d),  I  am  glad  ;  c  $  3  i  0  t  2  c  u  1 1,  there  are 
men. 

2d,  It  simply  stands  as  the  representative  of  the  subject  of  a 
proposition,  when  its  order  is  inverted  and  the  predicate  comes 
first ;  as,  c  $  fullt  fid)  t>  c  r  ©  p  c  i  d)  c  r,  c  $  K'bnt  (id)  t>  a  $  £  a  «  3 
(expletive),  the  granary  is  replenished,  the  house  expands ;  c  $  fint) 
incbt  cOcn  fd)tcd)tc  Banner,  they  are  by  no  means  worthless 
men. 

The  c  of  the  c$  is  often  elided;  as,  Ottncj'S  mir,  bring  it  to 
me  ;  cr  f)  a  t '  $  Qctfyan,  he  has  done  it. 

INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 

§  92.  Among  personal  pronouns  are  properly  included  the 
following,  which,  however,  represent  the  third  person  only,  and 
in  the  most  indefinite  manner  :  —  3  ?  w  a  n  fc,  S  t  n  e  r,  some 
one,  some  body ;  3^^^^^^nn,  every  one,  every  body ; 
$K  t  c  m  a  n  b,  S  c  t  n  c  r,  no  one,  nobody  ;  man,  one,  they, 
people  (corresponding  to  the  French  on).  To  these  may  be 
added  c  t  tt>  a  $,  something,  and  n  t  d)  1 3,  nothing. 

9)?an,  etroaS  and  ntcfytS  are  indeclinable. 
and  Se^rmann  are  declined  as  follows  : — 


NOM.        3ero<wb,         9itemanb, 
GEN. 


3emant£,       9ftemanfc3, 


DAT.         ~ 

n,     IRtcmantem, 

rv  _ w 

Acc. 


430 


The  declension  of  (£  t  n  e  r  and  Seiner  has  already  been 
noticed  among  the  indefinite  numerals  (§  77  and  §  85),  between 
which  and  the  indefinite  pronouns  it  is  difficult  to  fix  the  line 
of  distinction.  A  few  examples  may  illustrate  their  inflection 
and  use  :  — £)afl:  Su  et'ne  fiebev,  ein  53ud)  ?  Hast  thou  a  pen,  a 
book?  3d)  fyabe  et'ne,  et  n  e$,  I  have  one  ;  id)  babe  fetne, 
f  e  t  n  e  £,  I  have  none  ;  e3  tft  S  i  n  e  r  fcraugen,  some  one  is 
out  of  doors  ;  Seiner  roeig  atteS,  no  one  knows  every  thing. 

II.     POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  93.  A  possessive  pronoun  is  one  which  repre- 
sents the  object  to  which  it  relates,  as  belonging  ei  - 
ther  to  the  speaker  (mine),  the  person  spoken  to  (thine) 
or  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of  (his). 

Possessive  pronouns  are  formed  from  the  genitive  of  personal 
pronouns.  They  are  : — 

IST  PERSON.  2v  PERSON.  3D  PERSON. 

m  e  i  n,     my,  mine  ;  b  e  t  n,  thy,    thine  ;  f  e  t  n,  his,  its  ; 
unfer,  our,  ours ;    e  it  e  r,  your,  yours  ;  i  {)  r,    her,  hers,  their. 

§  94.  When  a  possessive  pronoun  stands  in  connection 
with  a  noun,  it  is  called  conjunctive,  and  is  declined  like  the  in- 
definite  article  in  the  singular,  and  like  the  definite  article  in 
the  plural.  Thus  : — 

SINGULAR. 

Fern.  NcuL 

meine,      mein, 
meineS, 
meinem, 
metn, 

SINGULAR. 

Fern. 

(  unfere, 
(  unfre, 

S  itnferer, 
J  unfrer, 

unferem, 

imfvem, 

unferm, 

1  unfere, 
i  unfre, 


Masc. 

NOM.  mein, 
GEN.  meineS, 
DAT.  meinem, 
Ace.  meinen, 


metner, 
meiner, 
meine, 


my, 
of  my, 
to  my, 

my ; 


PLURAL. 

For  all  genders. 

metne,  my, 
metner,  of  my, 
metnen,  to  my, 
meine,  my. 


NOM. 


GEN. 


DAT. 


Ace. 


Masc. 

unfer, 
unfereS, 


our. 


i  itnferer, 
i  unfrer, 


ii  nfer  en, 
unfren, 
un  fern, 


Neut. 

>  unfer, 

(  unfere^, 

itnfreS,    of  our, 

unferS, 
'  unferem, 

unfrem,  to  our, 
.  unferm, 


^  unfer, 


our. 


431 

PLURAL. 

For  all  genders. 

NOM.  imfeve,  iinfre,  our, 
GEN.  unferer,  unfrer,  of  our, 
DAT.  unferert,  nnjVen,  to  our, 
Ace.  unfere,  iinfre,  our. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs.  I.  Of  the  remaining  pronouns  of  this  class,  en  c  r,  your, 
is  declined  like  u  n  fc  r,  and  the  others  like  m  c  t  n.  It  will  he  per- 
ceived that  the  remark  made  respecting  euphonic  changes  in  ad- 
jectives ending  in  c  I,  er,  en,  unaccented  (§  60.  Obs.  1st.),  is  also 
applicable  in  the  case  of  u  nfcr. 

Obs.  2.  The  word  e  t  cj  c  n,  own,  is  often  joined  to  possessive 
pronouns  to  make  the  notion  of  possession  more  prominent ;  as, 
iiictn  ctcjnct  9?ecf,  my  own  coat;  unfcc  eigncg  jUnfc,  our  own 
child. 

Obs.  3.  It  will  be  perceived,  that  for  the  third  person  singular 
there  are  two  forms  of  the  possessive,  viz  :  f  c  t  n/  when  the  gender 
of  the  possessor  is  masculine  or  neuter,  and  t  f)  r,  when  it  is  femi- 
nine. Each  of  these  again  indicates,  by  means  of  its  terminations, 
the  gender  of  the  object  possessed,  with  which  possessive  pronouns, 
like  all  other  adjectives,  must  agree  in  gender,  number  and  case  ; 
e.  g.  f  c  t  n  (iljr)  flSatcr,  f  c  t  n  c  (tt)rc)  Gutter,  f  c  t  n  (tbr)  JBucl),  his 
(her)  father,  his  (her)  mother,  his  (her)  book. 

Obs.  4.  When  a  possessive  pronoun  constitutes  the  predicate 
to  a  substantive,  or  to  a  pronoun  denoting  a  determinate  object,  it  re- 
mains like  adjectives,  uninflected  ;  as,  fcn*  93ucb  ill  fctn,  the  book 
is  his  ;  roc9  t)l  tcr  JRubm  ?  9?uc  £>  c  i  n,  nut  5)  c  t  n  !  Whose  is  the 
glory  1  Thine,  only  thine  !  (§  52,  1st.) 

Obs.  5.  In  addressing  persons  of  rank,  it  was  formerly  custom- 
ary to  use  3  b  t  o  instead  of  the  third  person  feminine  3  f)  t  e,  her, 
and  also  in  place  of  (Su  c  r,  your  ;  e.  g.  3  b  t  0  (now  3  b  t  c)  93?ojes 
flat  Me  .^oniqtnn,  her  Majesty  the  queen;  3b  ro  ((Sur  c)  sjftoji'ftat 
bflOcn  nrir  Ocfcbtcn/  your  Majesty  has  commanded  me.  In  written 
communications  the  pronouns  (£urc,  your,  ©cine/  his,  and  (Seiner, 
to  his,  are  commonly  contracted  into  (£  iu,  ©  e.,  and  ©  r. ;  e.  g. 
(Sn;.  iDurcfylaucfyt,  your  Highness;  <Sr.  SKaii'jtat/  to  his  Majesty. 

§  95.  Possessive  pronouns  are  called  absolute  when  they 
are  not  immediately  connected  with  a  substantive,  but  related 
to  one  already  mentioned  or  understood. 

Absolute  possessive  pronouns  with  the  article  are  inflected 
like  adjectives  of  the  second  declension,  and  without  it,  like  ad- 
jectives of  the  first. 

When  connected  with  the  article,  they  frequently  change  the 
termination  e  into  1 9  e  *,  as,  tcv  m  e  t  n  e,  m  e  t  n  t  9  e ;  ber  f  e  t- 
n  e,  f  e  i  n  i  q  e. 


432 

The  following  list  exhibits  the  absolute  possessive  pronouns 
of  both  declensions  in  the  nominative  singular. 

FIRST  DECLENSION.  SECOND  DECLENSION. 

metner,   met'ne,   metneS,  ter,  tie,  fcaS   metne  or  metmge,  mine, 
fceuter,    beine,     betneS,     »     //     r/     fcetne  "   betm'ge,  thine, 
fetner,     feine,     fetneS,      rr     ^     >/     feme    "   fetntge,   his, 
tfyrer,      t^re,      tfyreS,       it      n     n     tfyre     "   tfyrfge,    hers, 
unferer,  itnfere,  unfereS,   r/     /<     n     unfre  "  imfrtcje,  ours, 
eurer,      eure,     eure^,       ff     ^      »     eure    "   eurtge,    yours, 
t'fyrer,       t^rer      t^re^,       ff      ^      f,     t^re     "   t^rtge,    theirs, 
3fyrer,     3f)^^     3^^^      (in  polite  conversation)  JJfyre  or3t)ru 
ge,  yours. 

§  96.     The  inflection  of  possessive  pronouns,  both  absolute  and 
conjunctive,  may  be  illustrated  by  the  following  examples  :  — 

I.  My  brother  and  his. 

SINGULAR. 

NOM.  nicin      23rubcr    unb  fotncr,  tec    fctntgc  ; 
GEN.  mcincS  J#rut>cr$  unl)  fctncs,  t>c^    fctnigcn  ; 
DAT.  mcincm  93ru^cc    unb  fcincm/  fccm  fctntgcn  ; 
Ace.  mcincn  JBrut>cr    unt>  fctnc^  ben  fctnt^cn. 

PLURAL. 

NOM.  mctnc  SBrtibcr  unb  fctn^  tie  fciniqcn  ; 
GEN.  mctncc  S^rubec  unb  fetncr,  ber  fetnigcn  ; 
DAT.  mctncu  SBrubern  unb  fetncn,  ben  feintcjcn; 
Ace.  mctnc  JBriiber  unb  fetne,  btc  fctntgcn. 

II.  Her  sister  and  mine. 

NOM.  if)rc  @d)tvcf!cr  unb  nictnc,  bte  mctnigc  ; 
GEN.  U)rer  (BVbrucjIei*  unb  mctncr/  ber  mctnujcn  ; 
DAT.  t()rec  ©djivcftcr  unb  meincr,  ber  mctntgcn  K. 

III.  Our  house  and  theirs. 

NOM.  unfec     ^>au^     unb  tfcre^/    ba$  il^rigc  ; 
GEN.  unfre^  &aufc$  unb  ihre^    be^  iljvtgcn  ; 
DAT.  unfecm  ^aufe    unb  tfyrcm,  bem  tljrtQen  K. 


Examples.  3ft  bt$>  %fa  DTecjenfd&trm  (masc.)r  3^  lltnte 
(fern.),  3t)t  ^(etb  (neut.)  ?  3a,  c§  tfi:  m  e  t  n  e  r,  ber  meute, 
t)er  meuncje  —  metne,  tie  metrte,  bte  metnt^e  —  met? 
neS,  t)a^  metne,  ba£  metnfge;  is  this  your  umbrella, 
your  ink,  your  garment  1  Yes,  it  is  mine  (i.  e.  my  umbrella,  my 
ink,  my  garment). 

Remark.  The  absolute  possessive  pronouns  are  sometimes  em- 
ployed substantively,  in  which  case  their  initial  must  always  be  a 


433 

capital  letter  (§  11);  as,  ta$  9ft  c  i  n  t  §  c,  £)  c  t  n  t  g  e,  <S  c  t  n  t  $  c, 
my  own  (my  property),  thy  own,  his  own;  e.  g.  £abc  id)  md)t 
9)?ad)t,  $u  tl)un,  iva*  id)  unll,  nut  tern  $?2  c  t  n  t  c\  c  u  ?  Is  it  not  lawful 
for  me  to  do  what  I  will  with  mine  own  1  tSo  also  in  the  plural, 
tic  932  c  i  n  i  9  c  n,  £)  c  t  n  1  9  c  n,  @  c  t  n  t  .q  c  n,  3  fy  r  i  Q  c  n,  my,  thy, 
his,  their  (your)  friends,  relatives,  family. 

III.     DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  97.  A  demonstrative  pronoun  serves  to  point  out 
the  locality  of  the  person  or  thing  with  which  it  is 
connected, 

The  German  language  has  three  demonstrative  pronouns, 
viz:  Dtefer,  btefe,  btefeS,  this;  jener,  jene,  jeneS, 
that,  and  fc  e  r,  fc>  t  e,  b  a  £,  this,  that. 

J)tefer  and  jener  are  declined  like  adjectives  of  the  first  de- 
clension, thus  :  — 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

Masc.        Fern.       Neuf.  For  all  genders. 

fct'efe,  these, 
ttefer,  of  these, 
btefetr/to  these, 
fctefe,  these. 

§  98.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  b  e  r,  fc  t  e,  t  a  ^  may 
supply  the  place  of  either  bt'efer  or  jener.  When  it  stands  in 
connection  with  a  substantive,  or  any  word  used  as  such,  it  is 
inflected  like  the  definite  article  (§  3),  and  differs  from  it 
only  by  a  stronger  accentuation.  But  when  it  is  used  abso- 
lutely, it  deviates  from  the  inflection  of  the  article  in  the  gen- 
itive singular,  and  in  the  genitive  and  dative  plural,  thus  :  — 

SINGULAR. 

Masc.  Fein.  Neut. 

NOM.     &er,         tfj$\       t)M  this,  that; 


NOM.  btefer,   btefe,   bt'efeS  (bt'e§),  this, 

GEN.  btefeS,  btefer,  bt'efeS,  of  this, 

DAT.  btefem,  btefer,  btefem,  to  this, 

Ace.  btefen,  btefe,   bt'efed  (bt'e£),  this ; 


GEN.       *™>        W      een,  f  thi 

I  beg,     ^  tier,     ^  bep,  ^ 

DAT.     bem,       ber,        bent,  to  this,  that; 

Ace.      ben,        bie,         ba3,  this,  that; 

PLURAL, 

For  all  genders. 

NOM.  bte,     these,  those  ; 

GEN.  beren,  of  these,  those; 

DAT.  benen,  to  these,  those  ; 
Ace.  bte,     these,  those. 


434 

§   99.       OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs.  1.  iDtcfct  implies  proximity  either  of  space  or  time  to 
the  person  speaking,  and  hence  it  is  frequently  equivalent  to  the 
English  the  latter.  3  ?  "  c  r/  on  tne  other  hand,  refers  to  some- 
thing well-known  (the  Latin  ille},  already  mentioned^  or  remote, 
and  hence  it  is  often  rendered  by  the  former. 

Obs.  2.  The  neuter  pronouns  l>  t  c  s  and  fc  a  $  are,  like  the  in- 
definite c»o  (§  91.  Obs.  7),  often  employed  to  represent  the  subject 
of  a  proposition  in  the  most  general  and  indefinite  manner,  some- 
times even  without  any  distinction  of  gender  or  number  ;  e.  g.  Is  a  $ 
ill  cm  gran^ejV,  that  is  a  Frenchman;  l>  t  c  r>  f t  n  t>  incinc  l^ltcrn, 
these  are  my  parents ;  t)  n  $  finl»  9Mtvn,  those  are  pinks. 

Obs.  3.  jsDcjj  is  the  more  ancient  form  of  the  genitive  singular 
masculine  and  neuter,  now  only  used  in  the  more  elevated  style  of 
poetry  and  in  composition  ;  as,  fce  0  I)  a  (  b,  t>  e  f}  ro  t-  $  c  n,  on  that  ac- 
count ;  t>  c  p  frcuc  fid)  t«5  (Srtrtftd)/  let  the  earth  rejoice  in  it. 

IV.     DETERMINATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  100.  Determinative  pronouns  serve  to  make 
prominent  the  person  or  object  which  is  the  antece- 
dent of  a  subsequent  relative  clause. 

They  are  : — fccr,  fcie,  fca§,  that ;  fcerjem'cje,  biejenuje, 
ge,  he,  she,  it,  that  person  (who)  ;  terfelbe,  fctefclbe, 
the  same;  the  obsolete  fclbtcjcr/  felbtcjc,  felbigeS,  the  same  ;  and 
folcbcr,  feldje,  fold)c^  (talis),  such. 

Ser,  tie,  ta^r  when  standing  with  a  substantive,  is  inflected 
like  the  article  (§  3),  and  when  used  absolutely,  like  the  de- 
monstrative pronoun  fcer,  btc,  fcaS,  except  that  in  the  genitive 
plural  it  has  t)  e  r  e  r  instead  of  be  r  en  j  e.  g.  ta3  Scfytcffat 
beret  ift  batt,  bte  fid)  felbjl  gu  erna^ren  nid)t  tm  ©tante  ftnb, 
the  fate  of  those  is  hard,  who  are  not  able  to  support  them- 
selves. 

§101.  ©oldjer,  when  used  without  the  article,  follows  the 
inflection  of  the  first  declension  of  adjectives,  but  when  prece- 
ded by  the  indefinite  article  etn,  cine/  em,  it  is  inflected  like  an 
adjective  of  the  third  declension,  thus  : — 

NOM.    felcfyer,     fold>e, 


;<<  >"'  lititen, 

NOM.  etn     fetefyer,  etne  fcldje,    etn      fv*wwv/ 
GEN.  etne§  fold}en,  etnet  folc^en,  eineS  fold; en,  &;c. 

Jetjenige  and  b  e  r  f  e  I  b  e  are  compounds,  of  which 


435 

both  components  are  declined ;  ber,  tie,  ba£  following  the  in- 
flection of  the  definite  article,  and  j  c  n  i  g  £  and  f  e  I  fc  c  that 
of  the  second  declension  of  adjectives  : — 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut.  For  all  genders. 

NOM.  berjenfge,      btejentge,     basjemge,       I  NOM.  btejemgen, 


GKX.  beSjentgen,  berjemgen,  beajemgen, 
DAT.  bcmjemgen,  berjemgen,  bemjemgen, 
Ace.  benjemgert,  btejemge,  bciSjenige  5 


GEX.  bcrjemgen, 
DAT.  benjemgen, 
Ace.  btejemgen. 


§    102.       OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs.  1.  Determinative  pronouns  can  always  be  distinguished 
from  demonstratives  by  the  relative  clause  by  which  they  are  gen- 
erally followed.  Examples  :  t>  c  r  \  c  n  t g  e,  iv  c  I  cb  e  r  t>  i  e  2i>  i  \- 
f  e  n  fd)  a  f  r  c  n  lie  b  t,  nxib*  feine  9)Zuj;c  cuf  cine  angenefjmc  7(rt  311  be* 
mi£en,  he  who  is  fond  of  the  sciences,  is  never  at  a  loss  how  to 
improve  his  leisure  hours  pleasantly;  cr  fyat  bcnfclbcn  JeMec 
gemacbt,  ID  c  ( d)  e  n  id)  geniad)t  Oabe,  he  has  made  the  same  mistake, 
which  Ijiavemade;  trauc  ben  en  ntc/  t>ic  *Dir  fdjmcidjctn,  never  put 
confidence  in  those,  who  flatter  you. 

Obs.  2.  The  determinative  pronouns  may  be  employed  either 
adjectively  or  substantively.  3)crjenige  serves  simply  to  point  out 
emphatically  the  antecedent  without  any  other  modification  ;  K'rfdbc 
adds  to  it  the  notion  of  identity,  which  is  often  made  intensive  by 
the  particle  e  b  c  n  ;  as,  e  b  e  n  I'crfeKH1/  the  very  same,  ©eldu'r  im- 
plies a  reference  to  the  kind  or  constitution  of  persons  or  things ; 
e.  g.  f  c  (  d)  e  Sriid)t,  such  fruit ;  c  t  n  f  c  (d)  e  r  iBater,  such  a  father. 
When  jchbcr,  in  conformity  with  the  English  idiom,  is  followed  by 
the  indefinite  article,  it  is  not  inflected, — f  old)  c  t  n  Sftann/  such  a 
man ;  fold)  ctncm  Sohne,  to  such  a  son.  Sometimes  the  syllable  of 
inflection  is  likewise  dropped,  when  it  is  accompanied  by  an  adjec- 
tive ;  as,  fold)  gre&c  83ffdKi6enl)dt,  such  great  modesty. 

Obs.  3.  £)et  and  fcetfelbe  often  stand  simply  as  the  repre- 
sentatives of  the  personal  pronouns  er,  fie,  c  $,  or  of  the  posses- 
sives  fetn,  ihr,  his,  hers,  when  two  persons  mentioned  in  the 
same  or  in  a  previous  sentence  are  to  be  clearly  distinguished  from 
each  other;  e.  g.  ct  fant)  ben  iCater  unb  bcffen  (5obn  ^u  .^aufc,  he 
found  the  father  and  his  (i.  e.  the  father's)  son  at  home;  bcr  3ttng* 
Itn^  fd)rteO  fetnem  greunte  fiber  tn^  besorfteljenbe  Sd)icffa(  bcffelbcn/ 
the  youn^  man  wrote  to  his  friend  concerning  his  (the  friend's)  fu- 
ture destiny  ;  btcfer  9DJann  tljut  ollee  fiir  fdncn  SJsruber,  abet  berfcU 
be  ructii  t(jm  fetnen  5)nu!  bapr,  this  man  does  every  thing  for  his 
brother,  but  he  (the  brother)  is  not  grateful  for  it. 

V.     RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  103.  A  relative  pronoun  is  one  which  serves  to 
connect  a  limiting  or  explanatory  clause  to  a  preceding 


436 


noun,  to  which  it  relates,  and  which  is  called  its  ante- 
cedent. 

The  German  language  has  four  relative  pronouns,  viz  : — fcer, 
tie,  fcaS,  and  roelcfyer,  TOelcfye,  TOelcfyeS,  who,  which ;  roer,  TOaS, 
who,  what,  and  the  obsolete  and  indeclinable  f  o« 

§  104.  2Belcfyer  is  the  only  pronoun  of  this  class  which  may  stand 
adjectively  in  connection  with  a  substantive.  It  is  declined 
like  an  adjective  of  the  first  declension,  thus  : — 

SINGULAR. 

Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 

NOM.  TOelcfyer,    TOelcfye,    TOelcfyeS,  who,         which, 

GEN.  TOelcfyeS,     TOelcfyer,  welched,  whose,  of  which, 

DAT.  TOelcfyem,    TOelcfyer,   welcfyem,  to  wrhom,  to  which, 

Ace.  TOelcfyen,    weldje,    welc^e^,  whom,       which. 
PLURAL. 

'    For  all  genders. 

NOM.  roelcfye,  who,  which, 
GEN.  roelcfyer,  whose,  of  which, 
DAT.  roeldjert,  to  whom,  to  which, 
Ace.  roelcfye,  whom,  which. 

The  relative  t  e  r  is  inflected  like  the  demonstrative  fcer, 
bte,  ba$  (§  98). 

The  plural  of  w  e  r  and  n>  a  3  is  wanting  ;  in  the  singular 
they  are  thus  declined  : — 

Masc.  and  Fem.  Neut. 

NOM.  roer,  who,  he  who,  she  who, 

GEN.  wcffen'  I  whose,  of  whom, 
TO  eg,     ) 

DAT.  TO  em,     to  whom, 
Ace.  TO  en,  whom  ; 


which,      what, 
meg,    of  which,  of  what, 

t,  to  which,  to  what, 
which,      what. 


§  105.       OBSERVATIONS. 

Ofo.  1.  The  pronouns  roct  and  n?  a  £  never  relate  to  an  indi- 
vidual or  determinate  object,  but  to  such  only  as  are  of  the  most 
general  and  indefinite  character.  Hence  they  are  commonly  em- 
ployed after  the  neuter  demonstrative  t>a  $,  or  the  indefinite  numer- 
als ollcS,  all,  ctrociS,  something,  mcincfycS,  many  a  (thing-), 
Diet,  much,  n>  c  n  i  <j,  little,  n  t  d)  t  6,  nothing;  e.  g.  t>  a  S,  t»  a  6  id) 
^abe,  gcOc  id)  ©it,  that  which  I  have,  I  give  thee  ;  a  U  c  *,  tt)  a  5  nut 
tfycucr  ift,  all  that  is  dear  tome.  But,  bicfcr  ^naOc  (definite), 
roc  Id)  cr  in  tic  ©d)u(c  gcfjt,  this  boy  who  goes  to  school ;  t>te  iKcfc, 
rv  c  I  d)  c  Wuht,  the  rose  which  blossoms. 

Obs.  2.  The  forms  vo  c  r,  n>  c  f  f  c  n,  n>  c  m,  n?  c  n  relate  to  persons 
only,  of  either  sex  ;  n?  a  6  and  the  genitive  n?  e  p  only  to  things  and 


437 

abstract  terms.     93$  c  {J  is  also  used  in  the  compounds 
and  roe  p  ()  a  1 6  e  n,  wherefore,  on  which  account. 

Ofo.  3.  On  account  of  this  indefinite  signification  of  ro  c  t  and 
tt>  a  $,  their  antecedent  is  frequently  omitted,  and  they  become  equi- 
valent to  t>  e  r  j  c  n  t  g  c  rc>  e  t  cb  c  r,  b  i  c  j  c  n  i  9  c  n?  e  t  d)  c,  t)  a  5  i  c  n  is 
9  e  n?  eld)  c  i,  he  who,  she  who,  that  which  ;  e.  g.  nx  r  ctnfam  fi£t 
in  feinct  hammer  unt)  (cfyrocrc,  btttvc  Sbronen  roetnt  (9teatU)/  Ae  w^o 
sits  in  his  lonely  chamber,  shedding  the  heavy,  bitter  tear;  n?o$ 
fein  nw£,  gcfd)c()C !  That  which  must  needs  be,  let  it  come  to  pass  ! 
Sometimes,  however,  to  give  emphasis  to  the  expression,  the  de- 
terminative t>er,  trie,  t>ci$  is  added  to  the  main  proposition,  which 
in  this  construction  always  follows  the  relative  clause  ;  e.  g.  tu  e  r 
ntd)t  arbettcn  iwtt,  bet  fell  aucfy  nid)t  ejfen,  7*e  who  is  not  willing  to 
labour,  neither  shall  he  eat. 

Obs.  4.  The  compound  relatives  whoever-)  whatever,  whosoever, 
&c.,  are  rendered  in  German  by  annexing  ciud)  or  t  miner  to 
roer  or  nxi£  ;  e.  g.  re  c  r  and)  (t  m  m  c  r),  n?  a  $  a  u  cb  (t  m  m  c  r),  &c. 

Obs.  5.  After  personal  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons, 
the  relative  tv  e  ( d)  e  r  is  never  used,  but  always  &  e  r  ;  e.  g.  t  d),  t)  c  r 
(not  nxldxr)  id)  ttor  £)ir  ftefyc,  I  who  am  standing  before  thee ;  5)  u, 
t  e  r  £>u  mctn  ctgcncr  ^Brubcr  luft,  thou  who  art  mine  own  brother. 

It  will  be  perceived  from  these  examples,  that  in  German  the 
personal  pronouns  (t  ch,  t)  u)  are  repeated  after  the  relative  ;  when- 
ever this  is  the  case,  the  verb  of  the  relative  clause  must  agree  in 
person  with  the  personal  pronoun  ;  otherwise  it  is  put  in  the  third 
person,  and  agrees  with  the  relative ;  e.  g.  Unfcr  £>atcr,  t)  c  r  £)  u  In  ft 
in  fccin  Jptmmct,  our  father  who  art  in  heaven  ;  2)  u,  t)  e  r  fo  trie  I 
lie  f  t  unt)  fo  rocnti)  t)  c  n  i  t/  thou,  who  readest  so  much  and  thinkest 
so  little. 

Obs.  6.  Instead  of  ro  e  t  d)  e  ^  ro  c  ( d)  e  rx  pi.  w  c  I  df)  e  rx  the  gen- 
itives of  the  relative  ivdolxr,  the  Germans  regularly  substitute  1)  e  f  * 
f  I*,  to  €  ¥  C  it,  pi.  b  C  r  etl ;  the  genitives  of  n>c(d)cr  being  only  used 
when  the  relative  is  employed  adjectively  (§  104);  e.  g.  t>ct  ^cmn, 
t>  c  f  f  e  n  (not  n?  c  ( d)  c  6)  (£ef)n  id)  fcnne,  the  man  whose  son  I  am  ac- 
quainted with;  tic  iBaume,  t>e  r  en  (not  tue(d)cr)  ®ltit()en  aOqcfallen 
ftnb,  the  trees,  the  blossoms  of  which  have  perished.  But,  teuton/ 
tt>eid)C^  ^pbifcfcpbcn  ^rincipta  tcf)  gctefcn  Ijabe,  Newton,  the  Princi- 
pia  of  which  philosopher  I  have  read. 

0£s.  7.  The  use  of  the  relative  f  o,  instead  of  ro  c  I  d)  e  r  and  t>  e  r, 
is  antiquated.  It  occurs  only  occasionally  in  poetry,  as,  3lb'$dKn 
fchtummcrt,  fo  tor  Sautter  Jrcufrc/  fo  t>er  ©tclj  t)c»  ^)orfe^  war,  Rosetta 
sleeps  (in  death),  who  once  was  the  joy  of  her  mother,  the  pride 
of  the  place. 

VI.    INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  106.  Interrogative  pronouns  are  employed  in 
asking  questions. 

They  are : — 1st,  wer?  wa$?  who?  what?  which  are  al- 


438 

ways  used  substantively ;  2d,  welder,  ro  e  I  d)  e,  tt>  e  I  d)  e  3  ? 
which,  what  1  used  substantively  and  adjectively  both ;  and  3d, 
tt>  a  §  fiir  etn,  eine,  etn?  what  sort  of  ? 

The  plural  of  roer,  roaS  is  wanting ;  the  singular  is  declined 
thus : — 

Masc.  and  Fern.  Neut. 

NOM.  ttjer,  who?        roa$,         what? 

GEN.  ttjeffen  or  roe£,      whose?      (n)e£),  of  what? 

wcjn,*  to  what  ? 

was,        what  ? 


DAT.  rcem,  to  whom  ? 

Ace.  wen,  whom? 


The  interrogative  roelcfyer  is  inflected  precisely  like  the  re- 
lative (§  104). 

§  107.  When  nja£  fiir  efn  stands  in  immediate  connection 
with  a  substantive,  the  e  t  n,  which  is  the  only  declinable  part, 
follows  the  inflection  of  the  indefinite  article  in  the  singular 
number.  In  the  plural  the  pronoun  is  simply  n>  a  3  f  it  r. 

What  sort  of  a  tree,  a  flower,  a  book  ? 
SINGULAR. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

NOM.  roa3  fur  etn      93aum,    ei'ne   35htme,  etn 
GEN.  roaS  fiir  etne§  SSaumeS,  enter  53lume,  etne§ 
DAT.  waS  fiir  etneut  SBattme,   etner  QShtme,  etnem  S3ud)e? 
Ace.  roa$  fiir  etnen  ^Saum,     etne  SSlume,  etn      Q3ud)? 

What  sort  of  trees,  flowers,  books  ? 

PLURAL. 

NOM.          roaS  fiir  £3cutme,    23(umen,  S3iic^er  ? 
GEN.   »on  rcaS  fiir  Mailmen,  SSdimen,  S5iid)ern? 
DAT.  waS  fiir  ^Sditmen,  SSlumen,  SSiicfyern? 

Ace.  tt)a§  fiir  SSciume,    S3(umen,  S3iic^er? 

But  if  the  substantive,  to  which  roa§  fiir  etn  relates,  is  not 
expressed,  it  is  declined  in  the  singular  only,  like  an  adjective 
of  the  first  declension,  thus  : — 

Masc.        Fern.      Neut. 

NOM.  roa§  fiir  etner,   etne,   etneS, 

GEN.  roa$  fiir  etned/   efner,  eineS, 

DAT.  n>a§  fiir  etnem,  etner,  etnem, 

Ace.  roaS  fiir  et'nen,  etne,   etne^. 

*  With  respect  to  the  pivnominal  adverbs,  which  supply  the  place  of  the 
oblique  cases  of  demonstrative,  relative  and  interrogative  pronouns,  see  the 
remarks  on  ADVERBS,  below. 


439 

§  108.       OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs.  1.  The  genitive  tucffen,  and  the  dative  ID  cm,  are  gener- 
ally applicable  to  persons  only,  and  not  to  things,  except  the  ab- 
breviated form  iv  cO  in  composition;  as,  wcfjbnlb,  ivcfhvcgcn, 
wherefore,  on  what  account ;  e.  g.  ivevf)a((>  toft  £)u  gefemuicn  ? 
wherefore  hast  thou  come?  ivef'ivcjjen  ivcint  fie?  why  does  she 
weep  1 

Ohs.  2.  The  pronouns  run  $  f  u  vein  and  tv  c  f d),  the  nninflected 
form  of  ivdofocr,  are  sometimes  used  in  exclamations  of  surprise ; 
e.  g.  sll>flj>  fiir  ctu  JBauni !  What  a  tree!  Scltf,  iveld)  etn 
SKcnfel) !  Lo,  what  a  man  !  £>>  c  t  d>  ©Kief  K'$  &tmmc($  l)ab  id)  wefl* 
(jifdrtcnt'ert !  What  heaven-sent  fortune  1  have  cast  away  ! 

Obs.  3.  £$  c  r  and  iv  n  $  are  employed  when  inquiry  is  made 
after  a  person  or  thing  in  the  most  general  and  indefinite  manner. 
CSeUbcr  is  more  definite,  including  the  notion  of  the  qualili/  or 
condition  of  the  individual  object  inquired  after.  It  is  the  correlative 
of  fclcber  (§  102.  Obs.  2),  and  corresponds  to  the  Latin  qualis.  9£a$ 
fur  ctn  indicates  the  species  or  kind,  to  which  the  person  or  thing 
belongs;  e.  g.  SScv  tit  tci  ?  Gin  9)ionn.  &3  n  $  fur  cincr? 
(5'\\\  .^nufiuonu  0115  .^amlnir^.  9Bc(d)cr  ^taufmann?  ^orr  Qt\ 
Who  is  there  ]  A  man.  What  sort  of  one  ]  A  merchant  of  Ham- 
burg. What  merchant  ]  Mr.  N.  £$n$  hofl  ^)u  ?  Ginc  SBdniu*. 
^J  a>>  f  u  r  e  t  n  e  ^(ituic  1  G'tne  .9?cfo.  21>  c  ( d)  e  ?  £>te  rctlje.  What 
have  you  "?  A  flower.  What  sort  of  a  flower?  A  rose.  Which 
rose  ?  The  red  rose. 

Obs.  4.  The  c  i  n/  of  ivaS  fur  etn,  is  omitted  before  names  of  ma- 
terials, or  before  substantives  of  the  plural  number.  85?  a  $  fur 
8£ein  ?  What  kind  of  wine?  ££a$  fiir  Ceutc?  What  sort  of 
people? 

Obs.  5.  The  interrogative  iva$  is  sometimes  employed  in  the 
sense  of  iv  a  r  u  m ;  e  .g.  2i*  n  c>  K'trtU'ft  ^n  IDid)  ?  Why  art  thou  cast 
down  ?  2£  a  $  ivetneu  Sic  ?  Why  do  you  weep  ? 


VERBS. 

§  109.  1st,  A  verb  is  a  word  by  which  either  an  ac- 
tivity, a, passivity,  or  a  simple  mods  of  existence  is  predi- 
cated of  a  person  or  thing  called  its  subject ;  e.  g.  t'rf) 
fcfyreifce,  I  write  ;  £u  nnrfi  gcfrfjfaqcn,  thou  art  beaten  ; 
tie  5Kcfe  6IiU)t,  the  rose  blooms. 

2d,  Verbs  are  divided  into  two  principal  classes — 
Transitive  and  Intransitive. 

3d,  Transitive  verbs  are  active  verbs,  the  sense  of  which  is 
not  complete  without  the  addition  of  an  object  in  the  accusa- 
tive case;  e.  g.  id)  fcfyretbe  cinen  23rief,  I  am  writing  a  letter. 


440 

§  110.  Intransitive  verbs  are  of  two  kinds: — 
1st,  Neuter  verbs,  which  denote  either  a  quiescent  state  (sim- 
ple mode  of  existence)  ;  as,  id)  ntfye,  ftge,  fd)lafe,  I  am  resting, 
sitting,  sleeping,  or  such  an  activity  as  does  not  terminate  in 
any  object ;  e.  g.  id)  laufe,  fdmpfe,  gefye,  I  am  running,  strug- 
gling, going. 

2d,  Those  active  verbs,  the  object  of  which  is  either  in  the 
genitive  or  dative  ;  e.  g.  id?  fcfyone,  ttergeffe,  erinnere  mid)  fei* 
n  e  v,  I  spare,  forget,  remember  him  ,  id)  gefyorcfye,  traue,  banfe 
i  I)  m,  I  obey,  trust,  thank  him. 

§  111.  Transitive  verbs  have  two  forms,  called  the 
active  and  the  passive  voices. 

If  the  subject  is  represented  as  the  agent  acting  upon  an- 
other person  or  thing  (object  in  the  accusative),  the  verb  is  said 
to  be  in  the  active  voice;  e.  g.  id)  rufe,  Hebe,  nenne 
ifyn,  I  love,  call,  name  him. 

But  if  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  the  object  of  the  action  ex- 
pressed by  it,  the  verb  is  said  to  be  in  the  passive  voice ;  e.  g. 
id)  rcerbe  gerufen,  geliebt,  genamtr,  I  am  called,  loved,  named* 

§  112.  1st,  Intransitive  verbs  do,  from  the  nature  of  their 
signification,  not  admit  of  a  passive  voice,  but  have  the  active 
form  only  ;  as,  id)  reife,  ftefye,  I  am  travelling,  standing. 

2d,  When,  however,  the  active  subject  cannot  be  named,  or 
is  designedly  left  indeterminate,  intransitive  verbs  may  be  used 
impersonally  in  the  third  person  singular  of  the  passive  voice  ; 
e.  g.  e£  mtrfc  getangt,  gefptelt,  getrttnfen,  there 
is  dancing,  playing,  drinking  going  on. 

§  113.  The  class  of  intransitive  verbs  comprehends  also 
reflexive  verbs.  Of  thfese  there  are  two  kinds  : — 

1st,  Such  as  are  employed  in  the  reflexive  form  only ;  as, 
ftd)  beftnnen,  fid)  fefynen,  ftcfy  freuen,  to  reflect,  to 
long,  to  rejoice. 

2d,  Such  as  are  formed  from  transitive  verbs  by  the  addition 
of  the  reflexive  pronouns  mid),  it  n  3,  fc  t  d),  e  u  d),  ft  d)  (§  90. 
Obs.  3) ;  e.  g.  er  cirgert  ft  d),  he  is  vexed  ;  id)  (ege  m  i  d),  I  lie 
down  ;  fy&te  S)tt  £>  i  d) !  beware  !  from  &  r  g  e  r  n/  I  e  g  e  n, 
I)  u  t  e  n,  to  vex,  to  lay  down,  to  guard. 

This  form  of  verbs  is  of  extensive  use  in  German,  and  cor- 
responds to  the  deponent  verbs  in  Latin  and  to  the  middle  voice 
in  Greek. 

§  114.  1st,  Impersonal  verbs  are  employed  in  the  third 
person  singular  only.  Their  subject  is  quite  indeterminate,  and 


441 

is  always  expressed  by  the  indefinite  pronoun  e  3  (§  90.  Obs.  7") ; 
as,  e  &  r  e  g  n  e  t,  e  3  b  o  n  n  e  r  t,  e  6  b  1 t 1}  t,  it  rains,  it  thun- 
ders, it  lightens  ;  e3  fyetfjt,  it  is  said ;  e3  cjtbt  Ceitte,  there  are 
men. 

2d,  Many  verbs  have  an  impersonal  form  in  German,  which 
are  not  used  as  such  in  English  ;  e.  g.  e3  bumjert  mid),  I  am 
hungry ;  e3  titrftet  mtcf),  I  am  thirsty ;  e£  frtert  mid),  I  am 
cold  ;  e3  (dgt  ftd)  mcfyt  (jut  jtncjen,  it  is  not  easy  to  sing,  &c. 

§  115.  Of  auxiliary  verbs  there  are  two  classes  in  Ger- 
man : — 

1st,  Auxiliary  verbs  of  tenses,  of  which  there  are  three  : 
I)  a  b  e  n,  to  have  ;  f  e  t  n,  to  be ;  and  ro  e  r  t  e  n,  to  become  (shall, 
will). 

2d,  Auxiliary  verbs  of  mood,  not  absolutely  necessary  to  the 
conjugation  of  the  verb.  They  are  seven  in  number :  b  it  r* 
f  e  n,  to  be  permitted ;  f  6  n  n  e  n,  to  be  able  (can) ;  m  6  3  e  n,  to 
be  allowed  (may) ;  m  it  f  f  e  n,  to  be  obliged  (must) ;  f  o  1  ( e  n/  to 
be  under  obligation  (ought)  ;  w  D  t  ( e  n,  to  be  willing  (to  intend)  ; 
laff  en,  to  let  (permit). 

§  116.  In  the  conjugation  of  the  German  verb,  we 
distinguish,  as  in  English,  the  relations  of  Number, 
Person,  Mood*  and  Tense. 

§117.  Verbs  have  two  numbers,  Singular  and  Plural; 
and  three  persons,  each  of  which  may  be  distinguished  by  its 
characteristic  termination. 

The  following  scheme  exhibits  the  terminations  of  verbs  as  as- 
sumed by  the  three  persons,  singular  and  plural : — 

Singular.  Plural. 


1st  Person — e  or  given, 

2d  Person— eft,  (1, 

3d  Person — e  t,  t,  or  like  the  first  person  ; 

EXAMPLES  I 

Singular.  Plural. 


en, 

et,t, 

en. 


id)  ret)  e,  I  speak, 

tit  (obefr,  thou  praisest, 

ev  fptet  t,  he  plays  ; 


nn'r  (efen,  we  read, 
ibr  fel)  e  t,  ye  see, 
fte  fucfy  e  n,  they  seek. 


§  118.  German  verbs  have  four  moods,  viz  : — the  Indica- 
tive, Subjunctive,  Imperative,  and  the  Infinitive ;  the  significa- 
tion of  which  in  general  corresponds  to  that  of  moods  of  the 


442 

same  name  in  English ;  e.  g.  fte  r  e  b  e  n,  they  speak  (in- 
die.) ;  id)  bcitte  g  e  r  e  b  e  t,  I  should  have  spoken  (subj.)  ; 
r  e  b  e  S  u  !  speak  thou  (imper.)  ! 

§  119.  They  have,  moreover,  six  tenses: — the  Present, 
Imperfect,  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  Simple  Future,  and  Future 
Perfect.  Of  these  the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  indicative 
and  subjunctive  active  are  simple  tenses ;  the  remaining  ten- 
ses of  the  active  voice,  as  well  as  all  the  tenses  of  the  passive, 
are  periphrastic,  i.  e.  formed  by  means  of  the  perfect  partici- 
ple or  infinitive,  and  the  auxiliary  verbs  of  tenses  (§  115) ;  e.  g. 
pres.  id)  ty  o  r  e,  I  hear  ;  imperf.  id)  fyb  r  te,  I  heard  ;  perf.  id) 
babe  g  e  fy  b  r  t,  I  have  heard ;  pres.  passive,  id)  werfce  g  e  * 
I)  b  r  f,  I  am  heard,  &c. 

§  120.  There  are  four  forms  of  the  infinitive  : — the  present 
and  perfect  infinitives  active ;  as,  I  o  b  e  n,  to  praise ;  cj  e  1 0  b  t 
ft  a  b  e  n,  to  have  praised  ;  and  the  present  and  perfect  infinitives 
passive  ;  e.  g.  Q  e  I  o  b  t  tt>  e  r  b  e  n,  to  be  praised ;  3  e  I  o  b  t 
n>  o  r  b  e  n  f  e  t  n,  to  have  been  praised.  The  present  infinitive 
active  always  ends  in  n  or  e  n,  and  is  often  preceded  by  the  pre- 
position 5  ii  5  as,  ju  fyelf  e  n,  to  help  ;  gu  tabel  n,  to  blame. 

§  121.  The  German  verb  has  three  Participles:  the 
present,  perfect,  and  future. 

1st,  The  present  participle  is  formed  from  the  present  infini- 
tive, by  adding  b  to  it ;  as,  toben  fc,  fyoren  b,  praising,  hearing. 
It  is  always  active  in  its  signification,  and  is  less  extensively 
employed  than  the  English  participle  in  ing. 

2d,  The  perfect  participle  generally  assumes  the  prefix  g  e, 
and  ends  either  in  e  t  or  t  in  regular  verbs  ;  as,  g  e  (cb  e  t, 
praised  ;  g  e  (eb  e  t,  lived ;  or  in  e  n  00  m  irregular  verbs  ;  as, 
Q  e  feb  e  n,  seen  ;  g  e  $ef[  e  n,  eaten.  When  belonging  to  tran- 
sitive verbs,  it  has  a  passive  signification  (except  in  the  com- 
pound tenses  of  the  active  voice),  but  when  formed  from  in- 
transitive verbs,  it  is  active  (§  112),  differing  from  the  present 
participle  only  in  the  relation  of  time. 

3d,  The  future  participle  is  formed  from  the  infinitive  with 
git,  by  annexing  the  letter  b ;  as,  gu  (oben,  to  praise  ; 
Sit  lebenfc,  to  be  praised;  $u  »crebren  b,  to  be  venerated, 
verable.  Like  the  Latin  participle  in  dus  (amandus,  veneran- 
dus),  it  always  has  a  passive  signification,  involving  at  the  same 
time  the  notion  of  necessity,  propriety,  or  possibility.  It  is, 
however,  employed  only  as  an  adjective  in  the  attributive  rela* 


443 

thn  (§52);  as,  fccr  $u  ID  ben  be  (2d)ii(er,  the  scholar  who 
is  to  be  (ought,  may,  must  be)  praised.  But  not :  ber  ©cfyi'tler 
i\t  5  it  (o  b  e  n  fo  5  in.  the  latter  case  the  infinitive  with  $u  is  used 
instead  of  the  participle: — ter  @d)iUer  tft  git  lob  en,  the 
scholar  is  to  be  praised,  is  worthy  of  praise. 

§  122.  With  respect  to  the  perfect  participle,  it  is  to  be  re- 
marked, that  it  does  not  assume  the  prefix  <j  e  in  the  following 
instances  : — 

1st,  In  the  verb  m  e  r  b  e  n,  when,  as  an  auxiliary,  it  stands 
in  connection  with  another  verb  ;  as,  er  tft  cjefragt  tt)  0  r  t)  e  n 
(not  (jeroorfcen),  he  has  been  asked. 

2d,  In  all  German  verbs  compounded  with  the  inseparable 
and  unaccented  prefixes  b e,  beitn,  emp,  ent,  er,  ge,  ser, 
»  e  r  a  b,  o  e  r  u  n  and  $  c  r ;  as,  b  e  I  e  I)  r  r,  entfaltet, 
e  r  1 1)  e  1 1 1,  »  e  r  g  e  f  f  e  n,  s  e  r  r  t  f  f  e  it,  instructed,  unfolded, 
imparted,  forgotten,  torn  ;  not  q  e  belcbrt,  g  e  entfaltet,  &c. 

4th,  In  all  verbs  derived  from  foreign  languages,  which 
have  the  accented  termination  t  r  e  n  or  {  e  v  e  n  ;  e.  g.  a  b  f  0 1  * 
i>  i  r  r,  ft  it  t>  t  r  t,  b  a  r  b  t  e  r  t,  from  abfeto  t  r  e  n,  to  absolve  ; 
fhit>  t  r  e  n,  to  study  ;  barb  t  e  r  e  it,  to  shave. 

5th,  In  verbs  compounded  with  the  particles  fcurcfy,  f) inter, 
ii  b  e  r,  it  m,  u  it  t  e  r,  D  o  1  (  and  ra  t  e  t)  e  r,  when  they  are  in- 
separable,  in  which  case  the  accent  rests  not  on  the  particle, 
but  on  the  verb  ;  e.g.  »  o  1 1  b  r  a  d)  t,  t)  t  n  t  e  r  g  a  n  9  e  n,  u  n  f 
t  e  r  f  cfy  r  t  e  b  e  n,  from  orttbrutgen,  to  consummate,  finish  ; 
fyintercjefyen,  to  deceive,  and  antei'fcfyretben,  to  sign. 

AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

§  123.  To  the  full  conjugation  of  German  verbs,  three 
auxiliaries  are  necessary,  and  only  three,  namely,  the 
auxiliary  verbs  of  tenses  (§  115) :  I)  a  b  e  n,  to  have  ; 
f  e  t  it,  to  be,  and  tt>  e  r  b  e  n,  to  become. 

1st,  £>  a  b  c  n  is  used  in  forming  the  perfect  infinitive  (and 
tenses  derived  from  it),  the  perfect  and  pluperfect,  both  indi- 
cative and  subjunctive,  of  all  transitive  and  of  many  intransitive 
verbs;  as,  gcliebt  fya&en,  to  have  loved;  perf.  icb  We  cjcltcbt,  I 
have  loved  ;  pluperf.  id)  f)  a  1 1  c  i}e(tc['f,  1  had  loved  ;  future  perf. 
id)  iverK'  $  c  I  i  c  b  t  f)  a  b  c  n,  I  shall  have  loved,  &c. 

2d,  ©  c  t  n  serves  to  form  the  same  tenses  of  all  verbs  in  the 
passive  voice  and  of  many  intransitive  verbs  in  the  active ;  e.  g. 
perf.  id)  b  t  n  flcltcbt  wetfccn,  I  have  been  loved  ;  future  perf.  hi  unrtf 
flclkbt  tverbetTfdn,  thou  shall  have  been  loved;  id)  b  i  n  gcrcif't/  I 
have  travelled. 


444 

3d,  80S  c  t 1>  e  n  is  used  in  the  formation  of  the  future  tenses, 
when  it  corresponds  to  the  English  shall  or  will,  and  also  in  the 
formation  of  all  the  tenses  of  the  passive  voice,  when  it  corresponds 
to  the  English  verb  to  be ;  e.  g.  id)  tt>  c  r  t>  c  Ucbcn,  I  shall  love  ; 
tm  n>  i  r  ft  cjelU&t  fyaOcn,  thou  M?J^  have  loved  ;  ct  n?  i  r  t>  geticbt,  he  is 
loved,  &c. 

§  124.  The  simple  tenses  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  are  irre- 
gular as  in  English.  The  compound  tenses  are  regularly 
formed,  as  in  all  other  verbs,  according  to  the  following 

RULES    FOR    THE    FORMATION   OF    THE   COMPOUND    TENSES, 

Rule  I.  The  perfect  tense  of  any  verb  is  formed  by  annex- 
ing its  perfect  participle  to  the  present  indicative  of  either  1)  a  * 
b  en  or  f  eirt  ;  id)  r;  a  b  e  gefyabt,  geliebt,  gefungen,  I  have  had, 
loved,  sung  ;  id)  b  i  n  gett>efen,  gegangen,  gereifyt,  I  have  been, 
gone,  travelled. 

Rule  II.  The  pluperfect  is  made  by  joining  the  perfect  par- 
ticiple of  the  verb  to  the  imperfect  tense  of  either  f)  a  b  e  n  or 
f  e  i  n  ;  as,  id)  fy  a  1 1  e  gefyabr,  geiiebr,  gefungen,  I  had  had, 
loved,  sung  ;  id)  m  a  r  gewefen,  gecjangen,  geretf  t,  I  had  been, 
gone,  travelled. 

Rule  III.  The  first  or  simple  future  is  formed  by  annexing 
the  present  infinitive  of  the  verb  to  the  present  indicative  of 
the  auxiliary  roerfcen;  as,  id)  roerfce  ^aben,  Keben,  reifen, 
fetn,  I  shall  have,  love,  travel,  be. 

Rule  IV.  The  future  perfect  is  made  by  joining  the  perfect 
infinitive  of  the  verb  to  the  present  of  the  auxiliary  n)  e  r  t)  e  n ; 
e.  g.  id)  w  c  r  b  e  gefyabt  fyaben,  geltebt  fyaben,  gereif  t  fyaben,  I 
shall  have  had,  loved,  travelled. 

Remark.  The  corresponding  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood 
are  formed  in  a  similar  manner. 

§  125.  From  these  rules  it  will  be  seen,  that  in  order  to 
form  all  the  compound  tenses  of  a  verb,  three  principal  parts 
must  necessarily  be  given,  viz  :  the  present  infinitive,  the  per- 
fect participle,  and  the  perfect  infinitive  (which  also  contains 
the  auxiliary  which  the  verb  employs). 

§  126.  Instead  of  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive 
(td)  fydtte,  id)  l)dtte  getmbt,  I  might  have,  I  might  have  had), 
when  they  are  conditional,  i.  e.  when  they  denote  a  possibility 
not  conceived  as  really  existing,  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of 
t»  e  r  b  e  n  (id)  rourbe),  in  connection  with  the  present  and  per- 


445 

feet  infinitive,  is  often  used  ;  e.  g.  id)  ro  ft  r  t  e  f)  a  b  e  rt,  I  i  t  * 
b  e  n,  I  should  have,  love ;  id)  imtrte  gefyabt,  geltebt  fyaben,  I 
should  have  had,  have  loved. 

These  compound  forms  of  the  verb  have  commonly  had  a 
place  among  the  other  tenses,  under  the  name  ofjirst  and 
second  conditionals. 

§  127.     PARADIGMS 
TO  THE  CONJUGATION  OF  THE  AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

I.     §  a  ben,  to  have. 

C  PRES.  INFIX,  fyciben,  to  have. 
Principal  parts.  <  PERF.  PART,  gefyabt,  na(L 

(  PERF.  INFIN.  gcfyabt  fyaben,  to  have  had. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Singular.  Singular, 

id)  fyabe,  I  have,  am  having,  do  id)  fcabe,  I  may  have,  be  hav- 

have,  ing, 

til  ^aft,  thou  hast,  &c.  til  fyabcft,  thou  mayst  have,  &c. 

cr  (fie,  e^)  ^at,  he  (she,  it)  has,     er  (fie,  e3)  fyabe,  he  (she,  it) 
&c.  may  have,  &c. 

Plural.  Plural. 

tmr  ftaben,  we  have,  <&c.  n>tr  ftaben,  we  may  have,  &c. 

i^r   t)abet   (babt),   ye  or  you     i^r  fjabet,  ye  or  you  may  have, 

have,  &c.  <kc. 

fte  fyaben,  they  have,  dec.  fte  fyaben,  they  may  have,  &c. 

IMPERFECT. 

Singular.  Singular, 

id)  batte,  I  had,  was  having,     td)  fyatte,  I  might  have,  be  hav- 

did  have,  ing, 

tu  fyatteft,  thou  hadst,  &c.  til  fytittefl,  thou  mightst  have, 

&c. 
er  fyatte,  he  had,  &c.  er  t^tte,  he  might  have,  &c. 

Plural.  Plural. 

n^t'r  fatten,  we  had,  &c.  mtr  fatten,  wTe  might  have,  &c. 

t()r  fyattet,  ye  or  you  had,  &c.       i^r  ^rtet,  ye   or  you  might 

have,  &c. 
fte  fcatteit,  they  had,  <fec.  fte  fatten,  they  might  have,  <fec. 


446 

PERFECT. 

Singular.  Singular, 

id)  bc^e  gebabt,  I   have  had,  id)  babe  gebabt,  I  may  have 

been  having,  had,  been  having) 

tit  baft  gebabt,  thou  hast  had,  tit  babeft  gebabt,  thou  mayst 

&c.  have  had,  &c. 

er  bat  gebabt,  he  has  had,  &c.  er  babe  gebabt,  he  may  have 

had,  &c. 

Plural.  Plural. 

ttnr  baben  gebabt,  we  have  had,  unr  baben  gebabt,  we  may  have 

&c.  had,  &c.           ^ 

ibr  babet(babt)  gebabt,  you  have  ifyr  babet  gebabt,  you  may  have 

had,  &c.  had,  &c. 

fte  baben  gebabt,  they  have  had,  fte  baben  gebabt,  they  may  have 

&c.  had,  &c. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Singular.  Singular, 

id)  batte  gebabt,  I  had  had,  been  id)  ba'tte  geb^bt,  I  might   have 

having,  had,  been  having, 

tit  batteft  gebabt,  thou  hadst  tit  batted  gebabt,  thou  mightst 

had,  &c.  have  had,  &c. 

cr  batte  gebabt,  he  had  had,  &c.  er  ba'  tte  gebabt,  he  might  have 

had,  &c. 

Plural.  Plural. 

rotr  batten  gebabt,  we  had  had,  imr  batten  gebabt,  we  might 

&c.  have  had,  &c. 

tbr  battet  gebabt,  you  had  had,  ifyr  battet  gebabt,  you  might 

&c.  have  had,  &c. 

fie  batten  gebabt,  they  had  had,  fie  batten  gebabt,  they  might 

&c.  have  had,  &c. 

FIRST  FUTURE. 

Singular.  Singular, 

id)  werte  baben,  I  shall  have,  id)  werte  baben,  I  shall  have, 

be  having,  be  having, 

til  wirft  baben,  thou  wilt  have,  tit   roertefl  baben,  thou  wilt 

&c.  have,  &c. 

er  nrirfc  b^ben,  he  will  have,  er  merte  b^ben,  he  will  have, 

&c.  &c. 

Plural,  Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 
iwr  merten  baben,  we  shall  have,  &c. 
ibr  wertet  baben,  you  will  have,  &c. 
fte  werten  baben,  they  will  have,  &c. 


447 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

Singular.  Singular, 

id)  roerbe  gefyabt  fyaben,  I  shall  id)  roerbe  gcfyabt  fyaben,  I  shall 

have  had,  been  having,  have  had,  been  having, 

bit  rot'rfl:  cjefyabt  fyaben,  thou  wilt  bit  rcerbeft  geljabt  fyaben,  thou 

have  had,  &c.  wilt  have  had,  &c. 

er  nnrb  getyabt  fyaben,  he  will  er  roerbe  gefyabt  baben,  he  will 

have  had,  &c.  have  had,  &c. 

Plural,  Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 

twr  werben  gefyabt  fyaben,  we  shall  have  had,  &c. 
tfyr  roeibet  gefyabt  baben,  you  will  have  had,  &c. 
fte  werben  ge^abt  fyaben,  they  will  have  had,  &c. 


CONDITIONALS. 
FIRST  CONDITIONAL.  SECOND  CONDITIONAL. 

Singular.  Singular. 

Id)  twirbe  fjaben,  I  should  have,    id)  nntrbe  ge^abt  ^aben,  I  should 

have  had, 
bit  nntrbeft  ^aben,  thou  wouldst    bit  wtrbeft  ge^abt  baben,  thou 

have,  wouldst  have  had, 

er  wiirbe  ^aben,  he  would  have ;    er    n>itrbe    gefyabt   I)aben,   he 

would  have  had ; 

Plural.  Plural. 

roir  nntrben  ^aben,  we  should    wir  mitrben  gefcabt  l^aben,  we 

have,  should  have  had, 

tfyr  witrbet  fyaben,  you  would    ifer  wiirbet  (jebabt  l)aben,  you 

have,  would  have  had, 
fie  roikben  l)aben,  they  would    fte  nnirben  ge^abt  fyaben,  they 

have*  would  have  had. 

IMPERATIVE. 
Singular.  Plural. 

fyabett  tmr,  let  us  have, 
^abe  (bit),  have  (thou),  do  thou     (jdbetorfyabt(tt)r)/  ^  have  ye,  do 

have, .  t^aben  ©te,  ^ ve  nave> 

^abe  er  (fte,  e$),  let  him  (her,     fyaben  fte,  let  them  have, 
it)  have ; 

INFINITIVES.  PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  fyaben,  to  have,  Pres.  fyctbenb,  having, 

Perf.  gefyabt  ^aben,to  have  had.     Perf.  gefyabt,  had. 


448 

§  128.     II.     ©  e  t  n,  to  be. 

C  PRES.  INFIN.  fetn,  to  be. 
Principal  parts.  <  PEIIF.  PART,  gewefen,  been. 

(  PERF.  INFIN.  gewefen  fetn,  to  have  been. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)  btn,  I  am,  id)  fet,  I  may  be, 

fcu  btfl,  thou  art,  hi  feieft  (fetft),thou  mayst  be, 

er   (fie,    e3)    tjl,    he  (she,  it)     cr  jet,  he  may  be  ; 
is; 

Plural.  Plural. 

wtr  fmt),  we  are,  tmr  feten  (fetn),  we  may  be, 

tfyr  fett>,  you  are,  tt)t  fetet,  you  may  be, 

fte  fmfc,  they  are.  fte  feten  (fetn),  they  may  be. 

IMPERFECT. 

Singular.  Singular. 

tdf)  mar,  I  was,  tdf)  ware,  I  might  be, 

fcu  marejl  (warft),  thou  wast,       &u  wdrefl  (roa'vfr),  thou  mightst 

be, 
er  war,  he  was  ;  er  ware,  he  might  be  ; 

Plural.  Plural. 

imr  waren,  we  were,  imr  waren,  we  might  be, 

tfyr  waret  (wart),  you  were,         tfyr  waret  (wart),  you  might  be, 
fie  waren,  they  were.  fie  waren,  they  might  be. 

PERFECT. 
Singular.  Singular. 

td)  bin  (jewefen,  I  have  been,       id)   fet  cjewefen,  I  may  have 

been, 
tu  btjlgewefen,  thou  hast  been,     bit  fetjl    cjewefen,  thou  mayst 

have  been, 
er  tjl  gewefen,  he  has  been  ;         er  fet  gewefen,  he  may  have 

been ; 

Plural.  Plural- 

wir  ftnfc  gewefen,  we  have  been,     wtr  feten  cjewefen,  we  may  have 

been, 
i()r  fett)  gewefen,  you  have  been,     ifyr  fet'et  gewefen,  you  may  have 

been, 
fte  ftnfc  cjewefen,  they  have  been,     fte  feten  a,ewefen,  they  may  have 

been. 


449 

PLUPERFECT. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  tt>ar  cjemefen,  I  had  been,       id)  mare  gemefen,  I  might  have 

been, 
bit  marfl  gemefen,  thou  hadst     bu  mareft  gemefen,  thou  mightst 

been,  have  been, 

er  mar  cjemefen,  he  had  been  ;     er  mare    gemefen,    he  might 

have  been  ; 

Plural.  Plural. 

mtr  maren  gemefen,  we  had  mtr  maren  gemefen,  we  might 

been,  have  been, 

ifyr  maret  gemefen,  you  had  ifyr  mdret  gemefen,  you  might 

been,  have  been, 

fie  maren  gemefen,  they  had  fte  maren  cjemefen,  they  might 

been.  have  been. 

FIRST  FUTURE. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)  merbe  fetn,  I  shall  be,  id)  merbe  fetn,  I  shall  be, 

tut  mirjl  fein,  thou  wilt  be,  fcu  merbefl  fern,  thou  wilt  be, 

er  mtri)  fetn,  he  will  be  ;  er  merbe  fetn,  he  will  be ; 

Plural,  Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 

mtr  merben  fetn,  we  shall  be, 
ifyr  merbet  fetn,  you  will  be, 
fte  merben  fetn,  they  will  be. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  merfce  gemefen  fetn,  I  shall  id)  merfce  gemefen  few,  I  shall 

have  been,  have  been, 

bit  mt'rft  gemefen  fetn,  thou  wilt  tu  merbejl  gemefen  fetn,  thou 

have  been,  wilt  have  been, 

er  mtrb  cjemefen  fetn,  he  will  er  merbe  ^emefen  fet'n,  he  will 

have  been ;  have  been ; 

Plural,  Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 

mir  merben  gemefen  fein,  we  shall  have  been, 
ifyr  merbet  gemefen  fetn,  you  will  have  been, 
fte  merben  cjemefen  fetn,  they  will  have  been. 


450 

CONDITIONALS. 
FIRST  CONDITIONAL.  SECOND  CONDITIONAL. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)  twtrbe  fefn,  I  should  be,          id)  nnirfce  geroefen  fein,  1  should 

have  been, 
ba  roarbeft  fetn,  thou  wouldst    ba  itwrbeft:  cjeroefen  fern/  thou 

be,  wouldst  have  been, 

er  nntrbe  fetn,  he  would  "be  ;         er  iwtrbe  geroefen  fein,  he  would 

have  been  ; 

Plural.  Plural. 

nnr  twtrben  fetn,  we  should  be,     tmr  nntrben  geroefen  fern,  we 

should  have  been, 
t&r  txnirbet  fetn,  you  would  be,     tfyr  market  gercefen  fetn,   you 

would  have  been, 
fte  nntrben  fetn,  they  would  be.     fte  roitrben  geroefen  fefn,  they 

would  have  been. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

feten  rot'r,  let  us  be, 
fet  (t>a),  be  thou,  do  be,  fett)  (tftr),  )  be  ye, 

feten  ©te,  )  do  ye  be, 

fct  er  (fie,  e§),  let  him  (her,  it)     feien  fte,  let  them  be. 
be; 

INFINITIVES.  PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  fetn,  to  be,  Pres.  feienfc  (roefenb),  being, 

Perf.  geroefen  fetn,  to  have  been.  Perf.  geroefen,  been. 

§  129.     III.     SB  e  r  fc  e  n,  to  become  (shall,  will). 


rPREs.    INFIN..    roerben,  to  become. 

Principal  parts.    \  ^ERF'  fART-     Shorten,   become. 

I  JTERF.   INFIN.    gensorben  fetn,   to  have 
L  become. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)  toerfce,   I  become,  am  be-     id)  werbe,  I  may  become,  bo 

coming,  do  become,  becoming, 

fca  rotrft,  thou  becomest,  &c.      ta    merbeft,  thou  mayst    be- 

come, &c. 
er  rotrfc,  he  becomes,  &c.  er  roerbe,  he  may  become,  &c. 


451 

Plural  Plural 

tmr  roerben,  we  become,  &c.       rotr  roerben,  we  may  become, 

&c. 
tfyr  roerbet,  you  become,  &c.       tfyr  roerbef,  you  may  become, 

&c. 
fte  roerben,  they  become,  &c.      fte  roerben,  they  may  become, 

&c. 

IMPERFECT. 

Singular.  Singular, 

id)  nntrbc  (roarb),   I  became,  id)  roitrbe,  I  might  become,  be 

was  becoming,  did  become,  becoming, 

bit  rourbefl  (roarbft),  thou   be-  bu  roitrbcft  thou  mightst  be- 

camest,  &c.  come,  &c. 

er  twtrbe  (roarb),  he  became,  er  roiirbe,  he  might  become, 

Plural  Plural 

rotr  rourben,  we  became,  &c.     wtr   witrben,    we   might    be- 
come, &c. 

tfyr  ttjurbet,  you  became,  &c.       tfyr   mitrbet,    you   might    be- 
come, &c. 

fte  ttntrben/  they  became,  &c.      fte   mitrben,   they   might   be- 
come, &c. 

PERFECT. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)  btn  ^emorben  (morben),  I  id)  fet  (jeroerben  (worben),  I 
have  become,  been  becom-  may  have  become,  been  be- 
ing, coming, 

bit  btjl  cjeroorben  (roorben),  thou  bit  fetft  geroorben  (wcrben), 

hast  become,  &c.  thou  mayst  have  become, 

er  tft  ^emorben  (roorben),  he  er  fet  cjewerben  (morben),  he 
has  become,  &c.  may  have  become,  &c. 

Plural  Plural. 

wtr  ftnb  gerocrben  (roorben),  rot'r  feten  geroorben  (roorben), 

we  have  become,  &c.  we  may  have  become,  &c. 

tfyr  fetb  cjeroorben  (roorben),  tfyr  fetet  geroorben  (roorben), 

you  have  become,  &c.  you  may  have  become,  &c. 

fte  ftnb  geroorben  (roorben),  fte  feten  gerootben  (roorben), 

they  have  become,  &c*  they  may  have  become, 


452 


PLUPERFECT. 


Singular. 

id)  roar  geroorben  (roorben),  I 
had  become,  been  becom- 
ing* 

bit  roarft  geroorben  (roorben), 
thou  hadst  become,  &c. 

er  roar  geroorben  (roorben),  he 
had  become,  &c. 


rotr  roaren  geroorben  (roorben), 
we  had  become,  &c. 

ifyr  roaret  geroorben  (roorben), 
you  had  become,  &c. 

fte  roaren  a,eroorben  (roorben), 
they  had  become,  &c. 


Singular. 

id)  rodre  geroorben  (roorben),  I 
might  have  become,  been 
becoming, 

bit  rod'refl:  geroorben  (roorten), 
thou  mightst  have  become, 

er  roa're  geroorben  (roorben), 
he  might  have  become,  &c. 

Plural. 

rotr  roaren  geroorben  (roorben), 
we  might  have  become,  &c. 

ifyr  roaret  geroorben  (roorben), 
you  might  have  become,  &c. 

fte  roaren  geroorben  (roorben), 
they  might  have  become, 


FIRST  FUTURE. 


Singular. 

id)  roerbe  roerben,  I  shall  be- 
come,  be  becoming, 

tit  rotrjl  roerben,  thou  wilt  be- 
come,  &c. 

er  rotrb  roerben,  he  will  be- 
come, &c. 


Singular. 

id)  roerbe  roerben,  I  shall  be- 
come,  be  becoming, 

til  roerteft  roerben,  thou  shalt 
become,  &c. 

er  roerbe  roerben,  he  shall  be- 
come, &c. 


Plural,  Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 
ttnr  merben  roerbert,  we  shall  become, 
tfyr  werbet  werben,  you  will  become,  &c. 
fte  werben  werben,  they  will  become,  &c. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 


Singular. 

id)  tperbe  gemerben  (roorben) 

fein,  I  shall  have  become, 

been  becoming, 
til  iwrjl:  genwrben    (worben) 

fein,  thou  wilt  have  become, 

&c. 
er  wtrb  geroorben  (vt>orben)  fetn, 

he  will  have  become,  &c. 


Singular. 
\&)  werbe  ^emorDen  (worben) 

fetn,   I  shall  have  become, 

been  becoming, 
bii  roerbefl:  ^emcrben  (wcrben) 

fein/  thou  wilt  have  become, 

&c. 
er  roerbe  geroorben   (worben) 

fetn,  he  will  have  become, 

&c. 


453 


Plural,  Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 

rot'r  werben  geroorben  (roorben)  few,  we  shall  have  become,  &c. 
t'fyr  roerbet  cjeroorben  (roevfcen)  fet'n,  you  will  have  become,  &c. 
fte  roerben  geroorben  (roerfcen)  fetn,  they  will  have  become,  &c. 

CONDITIONAL. 


FIRST  CONDITIONAL. 

Singular. 

tcfy  roiirbe  roerben,  I  should  be- 
come,  be  becoming, 

til     roiirbefl     roerben,     thou 
wouldst  become,  &c. 

er    roiirbe  roerben,  he  would 
become,  &c. 

Plural. 

roir  rourben  roerben,  we  should 
become,  &c. 

tfyr  miirbet  werben,  you  would 
become,  &c. 

fie  miirben  merben,  they  would 
become,  &c. 


Singular. 


werbe  (bu),  become  thou,  do 

become, 
roerbe  er  (fie,  e^),  let  him  (her, 

it)  become ; 

INFINITIVES. 
Pres.  roerben,  to  become, 
Perf.  geroorben  fein,  to  have 
become. 


SECOND  CONDITIONAL. 

Singular. 
id)  roi'trbe  geroorben  (roorben) 

fetn,  I  should  have  become, 

been  becoming, 
bu  ttntrDeft  gerocrben  (roorben) 

fetn,  thou  wouldst  have  be- 
come, &c. 
er  roiirbe  geroorben  (roorben) 

fein,  he  would  have  become, 

&c. 

Plural. 

rotr  roiirben  cjeroorben  (roorben) 
fetn,  we  should  have  be- 
come, &c. 

t'^r  roiirbet  gemcrben  (roorben) 
fetn,  you  would  have  be- 
come, &c. 

fie  roiirben  geroorben  (roorben) 
fein,  they  would  have  be- 
come, &c. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Plural. 

roerben  rotr,  let  us  become, 
roerbet  (tbr),  )  become  ye, 
roerben  (Ste,  $  do  become, 
roerben  fte,  let  them  become. 


PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  roerbenb,  becoming, 
Perf.  cjeroorben,  become. 


§  130.  It  has  been  remarked  (§  123)  that  the  compound 
tenses  of  some  intransitive  verbs  are  made  by  means  of  the 
auxiliary  ty  a  b  e  n,  and  of  others  by  means  of  f  e  i  n.  The  sig- 


454 

nification  of  the  verb  generally  decides  which  auxiliary  is  to 
be  employed. 

§    131.       INTRANSITIVE    VERBS    WHICH    ASSUME    THE 

AUXILIARY  I)  a  b  e  rt* 

1st,  Impersonal  and  reflexive  verbs;  as,  e3  fyat  cjere^itef, 
gebennert,  it  has  rained,  thundered ;  id)  I)  a  b  e  mid)  gefmit,  I 
have  rejoiced  ;  er  ty  a  t  fid)  gedrcjert,  he  has  been  vexed. 

2d,  All  the  auxiliary  verbs  of  mood  (§  115)  ;  as,  id)  f)  a  b  e 
germigt,  I  have  been  obliged  ;  er  {)  a  t  md)t  fommen  fcnnen,  he 
has  not  been  able  to  come. 

3d,  All  intransitive  verbs  which  are  followed  by  an  object 
in  the  genitive  or  dative,  or  by  a  preposition  ;  as,  er  fy  a  t  met* 
tier  gebad)t,  he  has  remembered  me  ;  id)  I)  a  b  e  ifym  getient,  I 
have  served  him ;  er  1)  a  t  i'tber  £)id)  gefpottet,  he  has  derided 
you. 

Except:  fcecjegncn,,  to  meet;^  fefQcn,  to  follow,  and  rocidjcn,  to 
yield  to,  which  govern  the  dative,  and  take  fcin. 

4th,  Verbs  denoting  a  permanent  state  or  such  an  activity, 
by  means  of  which  an  impression  on  the  outward  senses  is 
produced ;  e.  g.  id)  fy  a  b  e  cjelegen,  gefd)(afen,  geftanben,  cje* 
roobnt,  1  have  lain,  slept,  stood,  lived;  er  1) at  gefrraufet,  cje^ 
triittt,  cjefcuftet,  gegtdnjt,  gerod)en,  gefd)tenenr  geweint,  he  has 
bellowed,  roared,  exhaled  fragrance,  glittered,  smelled,  ap- 
peared,  wept,  &c. 

§    132.       INTRANSITIVE    VERBS    WHICH    ASSUME    THE 
AUXILIARY   fettt, 

1st,  The  verb  fern  itself;  as,  id)  bin  geroefen,  I  have  been  ; 
id)  n>  a  r  geroefen,  I  had  been. 

2d,  Verbs  wrhich  imply  motion  either  in  general,  or  to  some 
definite  place  or  object ;  moreover,  such  as  denote  a  transition 
from  one  state  to  another,  especially  verbs  compounded  with 
the  prefixes  er,  set,  ent,  or  with  the  particles  an,  auf,  cuiS, 
em,  &c.  The  following  list  exhibits  most  of  them : — 

cutfia?acf)cn,  to  awake ;  erftouncji,  to  be  astonished,   and 
mtCmrtcn,  to  degenerate  ;  other  compounds  with  e  r  ; 

gncn,  to  meet ;  fofjrcn/  to  move ; 

cn,  to  burst ;  faukn,  to  become  putrefied  ; 

xn,  to  break ;  fltcqcn,  to  fly ; 

gcn,  to  press ;  fltcfvii,  to  flow  ; 

filen,  to  hasten  ;  frtcrcn,  to  freeze ; 
cr^rimuicn/  to  grow  angry ;        Qefyen,  to  go ; 


455 


grfangcn,  to  get,  to  arrive  ; 
gem  fen/  to  recover  ; 
getattocn/  to  fall  into  ; 
gertnnen/  to  coagulate  ; 
gefobcben/  to  come  to  pass  ; 
l)t'i(cn,  to  heal  ; 
jiwn,  to  run  in  haste; 


fomsnen/  to  come  ; 
fvuvben,  to  creep  ; 
fanK'ii/  to  land  ; 
laufen/  to  run  ; 
quell  en/  to  well  forth  ; 
vet  fen,  to  ripen  ; 
reifen,  to  travel  ; 
retten/  to  ride; 
rennen,  to  run  ; 
rin  iicn/  to  flow; 
riirfen/  to  move  ; 
fcbetfcen/  to  part  ; 
fd)tei\'n/  to  dart  forth; 
fcbiffen,  to  sail  ; 
fd)(eicben/  to  sneak  ; 
fetyliipfen,  to  slip  ; 


fc&mctjcn/  to  melt ; 

fdjreiten/  to  stride ; 

fcbiucllen,  to  swell ; 

februimmen/  to  swim ; 

fd)tt>tnt>en,  to  vanish  ; 

[ege(n/  to  sail ; 

fin  fen/  to  sink  ; 

(prte^en/  to  sprout; 

fpringcn/  to  leap ; 

fbta/n/  to  rise ; 

flerben,  to  die; 

ftojjen/  to  push  ; 

flranfcen,  to  strand ; 

ftraucbetn,  to  trip ; 

flveidxn,  to  ramble ; 

fturjen/  to  plunge ; 

treten,  to  step ; 

trciben/  to  trot ; 

tterarnien/  to  grow  poor  ; 

ttcrnxfcn/  to  decay,  and  many  other 

verbs  compounded  with  o  c  t ; 
tt?anl>ern,  to  wander ; 
nxiten/  to  wade ; 
wcicbcn/  to  yield  ; 
5ie()en/  to  pass. 


§  133.  Some  verbs  employ  fyabert  in  one  signification,  and 
fctn  in  another.  With  fyaben  they  generally  imply  an  activity, 
and  with  fetn  a  state  or  condition : — 

Sr  bat  fca3  Samin  au%ebrannt,  he  has  burnt  out  the  chim- 
ney ;  ba3  fttue?  ift  aii^qebrannt:,  the  fire  has  done  burning  ;  id) 
feabe  fcrtgefabren  s»  lefen,  I  have  continued  to  read  ;  id)  bin 
fortgefafyren,  I  drove  off;  fcie  9?6l)re  t)at  gefloffen,  the  pipe  has 
leaked ;  fca§  SBaffcr  ifl  gefloflfen,  the  water  has  flowed  ;  id)  fyabe 
gefroren,  I  have  been  cold ;  tie  9Jii(d)  ijl  gefroren,  the  milk  is 
frozen ;  id)  fyabe  mic^  miifce  gegangen,  I  have  become  fatigued  with 
walking  ;  id)  bin  nad)  £)aiife  gegangen/  I  have  gone  home  ;  id) 
babe  gejagt,  I  have  hunted  ;  id)  bin  gejagt,  I  have  run  in  haste  ; 
id)  babe  ein  ^Pferfc  geritten/ 1  have  ridden  a  horse ;  id)  bin  auS* 
geritten,  I  have  taken  a  ride. 

CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS. 

§  134.  It  has  already  been  observed  (§  119)  that  only 
.two  tenses  of  the  German  verb  are  simple  tenses,  namely,  the 
present  and  imperfect  of  the  active  voice.  Besides  these  the 
present  infinitive  active  (fyaben/  werfcen),  two  participles  (pres. 


456 

fyabenfc,  perf.  gefyabt),  and  the  imperative  mood,  are  also  simple 
forms  of  the  verb.  All  other  parts  are  periphrastic  or  com- 
pound,  and  formed  by  means  of  the  infinitive  or  perfect  parti- 
ciple,  and  one  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  of  tenses. 

§  135.  In  the  compound  tenses  the  auxiliary  alone  is  in- 
flected. Hence  it  follows,  that  when  the  inflection  of  the  aux- 
iliaries is  known,  and  the  principal  parts  of  any  verb  are  given, 
all  the  .tenses  of  the  same  may  be  easily  formed  according  to 
the  rules  given  above  (§  124). 

§  136.  The  inflection  of  the  compound  tenses  being  uniform 
in  all  German  verbs  (with  this  variation  only,  that  some  take 
fyaben  and  others  few  for  their  auxiliary),  all  the  differences  and 
irregularities  of  conjugation  must  be  sought  for  in  the  simple 
forms. 

§  137.  With  respect  to  their  simple  forms,  verbs 
follow  two  different  modes  of  inflection  : — 

1st,  Without  changing  the  radical  vowel,  they  form  the  im- 
perfect simply  by  adding  the  termination  e  t  e  or  e  t  to  the  root ;  and 
the  perfect  participle,  by  adding  the  termination  e  t  or  t ;  e.  g. 
pres.  infin.  lob  e  n,  to  praise,  imperf.  id)  lob  t  e,  perf.  part,  ge* 
lobet  (ge(obt).  Verbs  thus  conjugated  are  usually  called 
regular  verbs. 

2d,  The  vowel  of  the  root  is  changed  in  the  imperfect  tense 
and  in  the  perfect  participle,  which  latter  then  always  ends  in 
c  n  or  n,  and  the  first  and  third  persons  of  the  imperfect  indica- 
tive remain  without  any  termination ;  e.  g.  pres.  infin.  b  e  * 
f  e  fy  I  c  n,  to  command,  imperf.  td),  er  befall,  I,  he  com- 
manded, perf.  part,  b  e  f  o  ty  I  e  n ;  pres.  infin.  (  e  f  c  n,  to  read, 
imperf.  id)  I  a  3,  perf.  part,  g  e  I  e  f  e  n. 

Verbs  of  this  form  of  conjugation  have  heretofore  passed  under 
the  name  of  irregular  verbs.  As,  however,  they  are  very  numer- 
ous, comprehending  nearly  all  the  primitive  verbs  of  the  language, 
this  name  is  now  generally  discarded,  and  various  attempts  have 
been  made  to  reduce  them  to  a  number  of  regular  conjugations. 

Note.  The  classification  of  the  irregular  verbs  (which  name  we 
retain  for  the  sake  of  convenience),  and  an  alphabetical  list  of  them 
will  be  found  below. 

Sixteen  verbs  are  partly  regular  and  irregular,  in  the  forma- 
tion of  their  simple  forms.  They  will  be  found  in  the  table 
of  irregular  verbs  below. 


457 


§  138.  The  personal  terminations  of  the  simple  tenses 
are  essentially  the  same  in  both  kinds  of  verbs,  except  in  the 
first  and  third  persons  singular  of  the  imperfect  indicative,  in 
which  irregular  verbs  assume  no  termination.  The  first  and 
third  persons  plural  end  always  in  e  n,  and  the  second  person 
plural  in  e  t  throughout  all  the  moods  and  tenses. 

§  139.  When  the  root  of  an  irregular  verb  contains  one  of 
the  vowels  a,  o  or  it,  it  is  generally  modified  into  d,  6,  u  in  the 
second  and  third  persons  of  the  present  indicative,  and  also  in 
the  imperfect  subjunctive  ;  e.  g.  id)  fyalte,  tit  fydltft,  et  fydtt,  I  hold, 
thou  holdest,  he  holds  ;  id)  fanfc,  subj.  id)  fdnbe,  I  found,  I  might 
find.  In  like  manner  the  radical  e  is  changed  into  {  or  t  e  in 
the  second  and  third  persons  of  the  present  indicative,  and  in 
the  singular  of  the  imperative ;  e.  g.  id)  cjebe,  fcii  gtbft,  er  Qibt, 
gtb  bu,  I  give,  thou  givest,  he  gives,  give  thou ;  id)  fefye,  bit 
ftefyft,  er  fiefyt,  fret)  ht,  I  see,  thou  seest,  he  sees,  see  thou. 

§  140.  The  following  table  presents  a  comparative  view 
of  the  terminations  of  the  simple  forms  of  verbs,  both  regular 
and  irregular. 


PRESENT  OF  ALL  VERBS. 

Indicat.         Subjunct. 


Indicat. 


! 


'  1st  Pers.  e,  e,          ^  C  1st  Pers.  en,n, 

2d  Pers.  eft,  ft,        eft,          ^  <  2d  Pers.  et,  t, 

[3d  Pers.  et,  t.          e.          SJ  (  3d  Pers.  en,n. 

IMPERFFCT  OF  REGULAR  VERBS. 


Subjunct. 

en, 
et, 
em 


IMPERAT.  OF  REG.  VERBS. 


2d  Pers.  sing,  e, 
1st  Pers.  pi.      en, 
2d  Pers.  pi.     et,t 

INFINITIVE. 
en,  m 


Pres.     ent>,  nfc. 
>  \Perf.     9  — et,t 

IMPERFECT  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS.  IMPERAT.  OF  IR.  VERBS. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 


Indicative.                       Subjunctive. 

•  (  1st  Pers. 

te,  ete, 

ete,  te, 

.^  ?  2d  Pers. 

teft,  eteft, 

eteft,  teft, 

^  £  3d  Pers. 

te,  ete, 

ete,  te, 

^  (1st  Pers. 
^  ^  2d  Pers. 
g;  (3d  Pers. 

ten,  eten, 
tet,  etet, 
ten,  eten. 

eten,  ten, 
etet,  tet, 
eten,  ten. 

PARTICIPLES. 


1st  Pers. 

2d  Pers. 

'3d  Pers. 

20 


ft,  eft, 


e, 

eft,  ft, 
e. 


2d  Pers.  sing.  — f  e, 
1st  Pers.  pL    en, 
2d  Pers.  pi.    et,  f. 


458 

IMPERFECT  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


Indicative.                       Subjunctive. 

"3 

:  1st  Pers. 

en, 

en, 

iNFINITIVIf, 

I* 

?2d  Pers. 

et,  t, 

et,  t, 

s  i 

[3d  Pers. 

en. 

en. 

en. 

PARTICIPLES.  <  nreSr 
1  Perf.    ge  —  en. 

§   141.       REMARKS    ON    THE    TABLE. 

Remark  I.     In  the  present   tense,  all  German  verbs  are 
larly  formed  by  adding  the  above  terminations  to  the  root  of  the 
present  infinitive, 

Remark  2.  In  the  imperfect  of  regular  verbs,  the  t  and  the  c  t  in- 
dicate  the  tense,  and  the  remaining  part  of  the  termination  the 
different  persons.  The  imperfect  of  irregular  verbs,  on  the  other 
hand,  lias  terminations  for  the  person  only,  the  tense  being  suffi- 
ciently distinguished  by  the  change  of  the  radical  vowel. 

Remark  3.  With  respect  to  the  c  preceding  the  terminations  ff, 
tc,  &c.,  it  is  to  be  observed,  that  it  is  always  retained  in  the  sub- 
junctive mood,  but  in  the  indicative  it  may  either  be  retained  OF 
omitted,  as  euphony  may  require  ;  e.  g.  subjunctive,  tcf)  Ict>c,  I  may 
praise,  tu  (cbcjl,  tliou  mayst  praise,  id)  fob  c  t  c,  I  might  praise  -r 
indicative,  tu  le(>cft  or  lob  ft,  thou  praisest;  id)  tab  etc  or  lob  t  e,  I 
was  praising. 

Remark  4.  Verbs  ending  cf  tt  or  cr  n,  reject  the  c  of  the  termi- 
nation of  inflection  throughout,  before  ft,  t  or  n.  But  in  the  first 
person  of  the  present  indicative,  and  in  the  imperative  singular,  the 
c  of  the  original  termination  is  rejected  in  its  stead ;  e.  g.  fammcln, 
to  collect;  pres.  indie,  td)  fammle  (instead  of  fmitmctc),  I  collect, 
tw  fcmmu'lfr,  cr  famine!  t/  thou  collectest,  he  collects,  fammtc  2)u, 
do  thou  collect ;  C5  fcauct  tx  it  lasts,  from  franc  r  n,  &c.  The  sub- 
junctive,  however,  either  retains  the  c  in  both  cases,  or  rejects  the 
first  only;  e.  g.  id)  tafcclc  or  tat)  I  c,  I  may  blame,  jie  tat)  c  (en  or 
tat1  ( c  n,  they  may  blame,  &c. 

§  142.  The  tenses  of  the  passive  voice  are  all  periphrastic, 
and  are  formed  by  combining  the  perfect  participle  of  the  verb 
with  the  different  moods  and  tenses  of  the  auxiliary  no  e  r  b  e  n  j 
as,  pres.  indie,  tcf)  tt>evfce  g  elteb  t>  I  am  loved  ;  imperf.  widic. 
id)  ronrbe  q  e  I J  e  6  tf  I  was  loved  ;  perf.  indie,  td)  bin  a,  e  1 1  e  b  t 
n,  I  have  been  loved,  &c.  In  this  connection  the  perfect 
tperben  always  loses  its  prefix  g  t.  (§  122.  1st.) 


459 


PARADIGMS 

TO  THE  CONJUGATION  OF  GERMAN  S^ERBS. 
§  143.     I.    TRANSITIVE  VERBS. 

8  o  b  e  it,  to   praise,  regular. 
Di  ii  f  e  it ,   to   call,  irregular. 
rPREs.  I^FIN.  (oben,  rufen, 
biFERF.  IXDIC.  id)  (obte,  rtef. 
.  PAKT.  ^  g^" 

.  INFIN.  cjelobt,  gerufen  tyabem 

ACTIVE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 


Singular. 
I    praise,    call,    am    praising, 

calling,  do  praise,  call, 
id)  lobe,  ntfe, 

tu  lobefl  (lobfl),  nifejl  (ruffe), 
er  lobet  (lobt),  mfct  (ruft) ; 

Plural. 

wit  lobcn,  rufen, 
tfer  lobet  (lobt),  rufct  (raft), 
fte  lob  en,  rufen* 


Singular. 

I  may  praise,  call,  be  prais- 
ing, calling, 
id)  lobe,  rufe, 
tit  (obeft,  ntfefl, 
er  lobe,  rufe  5 

Plural. 

wir  (oben/  rufen, 
ifyr  lobet,  rufet, 
fte  lob  en,  rufeiu 


IMPERFECT. 
Singular. 

I  praised,   called,  was  prais 
ing,  calling,  did  praise,  call 
id)  lobtc,  rtef, 
tu  (obteft,  rtefefl  (n'effl), 
er  (obte/  rtef; 

Plural. 

U5tr  lobten,  riefen, 
ifer  (obtet/  rtefet  (rieft), 
fte  lobten,  riefen. 


Singular. 

I  might  praise,  call,  be  prais- 
ing, calling, 
id)  lobete,  riefe, 
tu  lobetefl,  riefeft, 
er  lobete,  riefe ; 

Plural. 

n>ir  lobeten,  riefen, 
ifcr  lobetet,  rtefet, 


fte  lobeten,  rteferu 
PERFECT. 

I  have  praised,  called,  been  I  may  have  praised,  called, 

praising,  calling,  &c.  been  praising,  calling,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  fyabe,  tu  fyajt,  er  fyat  Sing,  id)  fyabe,  tu  l)abe(l/  er 

gelobt,  gerufetf ;  t)abe  gelobt,  gerufen ; 


460 

Plur.  rotr  fyaben,  tfyr  fyabt,  fte  P/wr.  rotr  fyaben,  tfyr  fyabet,  fie 
fyaben  cjelobt,  geritfen,  fyaben  gelobt,  geritfem 

PLUPERFECT. 

I  had  praised,  called,  been  I  might  have  praised,  called, 
praising,  calling,  &c.  been  praising,  calling,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  fyatte,  bit  fyatteft,  er  £zrc#.  id)  fyatte,  bit  fycittefl,  er 
fyatte  gelobt,  geritfen  ;  ^citte  getobt,  gerufen  5 

PZwr.  mtr  fatten,  t>r  t)attet,  fie  PZwr.  wtr  fatten,  tf)t  l)dttet,  file 
fatten  gelobt,  gerufem  fatten  ^elobt,  gentfen* 

FIRST  FUTURE. 

I  shall  praise,  call,  be  prais-  I  shall  praise,  call,  be  prais- 
ing, calling,  &c.  ing,  calling,  dec. 

Sing,  id)  werfce,  bit  ttnrft,  er  Sing,  id)  merbe,  bit  roerbeft, 
rotrb  (oben,  rufen  j  er  werbe,  loben,  riifen  ; 

Plur.  nnr  njerben,  tl)r  werbet,  Plur.  tmr  werben,  ft)r  merbetr 
fte  roerben  loben,  ritfeiu  fie  roerben  loben,  ntfen* 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

I  shall  have  praised,  called,  I  shall  have  praised,  called, 
been  praising,  calling,  &c.  been  praising,  calling,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  roerbe,  bu  rot'rft  er  Sing,  id)  roerbe,  bit  ttjerbeff,  er 
twrb  cjelobt,  gerufen  l^aben  ;  rcerbe  ^elobt,  cjentfen  fcciben  , 

Plur.  twr  werben,  tl)r  merbet,  Plur.  twr  werben,  tl)r  merbet, 
fie  roerben  gelobt,  gerufen  l)a?  fte  roerben  gelobt,  cjenifen 
bem 


CONDITIONALS. 
FIRST  CONDITIONAL.  SECOND  CONDITIONAL. 

I  should  praise,  call,  be  prais-     I  should  have  praised,  called, 
ing,  calling.  been  praising,  calling. 

Sing,  id)  roitrbe,  bit   rofirbeft,     Sing,  id)  roiirbe,  bit  roiirbefi, 
er  rottrbe  loben,  ritfen  ;  er  roitrbe  gelcbt,  cjerufcn  l)a^ 

ben; 

Plur.  rotr  roitrben,  t'^r  roiirbet,    Plur.  rotr  roftrben,  t^r  roitrbet, 
fte  roiirben  loben,  riifen.  fte  roiirben  gelobt,  gentfen 


461 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 
Singular.  Plural. 

lobert   tmr,  let   us  praise,  be 

praising, 
lobe    (feu),    praise    thou,   do     lobet,  (obt  (tfyr),  ?  praise   ye, 

praise,  lobert  ©te,  $  do  ye  praise, 

lobe  er  (fie,  e§),  let  him  (her,     loben  fte,  let  them  praise, 
it)  praise,  be  praising ; 

Singular.  Plural. 

ntfen  tt>tr,  let  us  call,  be  call- 
ing, 
tufe  (bit),  call  thou,  do  call,        ntfet,  raft  (tfyr),  )  call  ye,  do 

ritfen  ®te,          J     ye  call, 

tlife  er  (fte,  e3),  let  him  (her,     ntfen   fte,   let   them   call,   be 
it)  call,  be  calling ;  calling. 

INFINITIVES.  PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  loben,  rttfen,  to  praise,     Pres.  lobenb,  ntfenb,  praising, 
to  call.  calling. 

Perf.  gelobt,  gerufen  fyaben,  to    Perf.  gelobt,  geritfen,  praised, 
have  praised,  called.  called. 


PASSIVE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

I  am  praised,  called,  &c.  I  may  be  praised,  called,  &c. 

Sing,  td)  roerfce,  hi  nnrft,  er  Sing,  id)  roerbe,  bit  wertejl,  ev 
wtrb  ge(obt,  geritfen ;  werte  gelobt,  cjeritfen ; 

Plur.  iwr  werben,  tt)r  merbet,  Plur.  tmr  werben,  t()r  werbet, 
fie  werben  gelobt,  gerufen.  fte  werben  cjelobt,  cjeritfen. 

IMPERFECT. 
I  was  praised,  called,  &c.  I  might  be  praised,  called,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  nntrbe,  bit  witrbeft,  Sing,  id)  roitrbe,  bit  ttjitrbefi",  er 
er  iwirbe  getobt,  ^erttfen ;  txntrbe  gelobt,  gerttfen  j 

Plur.  twr  wnrben,  ttjr  murbet,    Plur.  n>tr  witrben,  tf)t 
fte  witrben  cjetobt,  gerttfen.  fte  tx>itrben  gelebt, 


462 


PERFECT. 

I  have  been  praised,  called,  I   may   have    been    praised, 

&c.  called,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  bin,  tu  btfl,  er  tft  ge*  Sing,  id)  fet,  tu  fet'eft,  er  fet 

lobt,  gerufen  morten;  gelobt,  gerufen  morten  ; 

Plur.  mtr   ftnt,   tfyr   fett,  fte  Plur.  mtr  feten,  tfyr  fetet,  fte 

ftnt  gelobt,  gerufen  mortem  feten  ge(obt,  gerufen  mortem 

PLUPERFECT. 

I   had   been    praised,  called,  I  might   have   been   praised, 

&c.  called,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  mar,  tit  marft,  er  mar  Sing,  id)  mare,  tu  mareft,  er 

gelobt,  gerufen  morten  ;  mare  gelobt,  gerufen  morten ; 

Plur.  mtr  maren,  tfyr  maret,  fte  Plur.  mtr   maren,  tfer   mdret, 


maren    gelobt,  geriifen  mor^      fte    maren    gelobt,    gerufen 
tern  mortem 

FIRST  FUTURE. 

I  shall  be  praised,  called,  &c.     I  shall  be  praised,  called,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  merte,  tu  rntrjl,  er    Sing,  id)  merte,  tu  mertefl,  er 

mtrt  gelobt,  gerufen  mert^n ;        merte  gelobt,  gerufen  mer* 

ten; 

Plur.  mtr  merten,  t'fyr  mertet,  Plur.  mtr  merten,  tfyr  mertet, 
fte  merten  gelobt,  gerufen  fte  merten  gelobt,  gerufen 
mertem  mertem 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 
I   shall   have    been    praised,     I   shall    have   been   praised, 


called,  &c. 


called,  &c. 


Sing,  id)  werte,  tu  ttnrft,  er     Sing,  id)  roerte,  tu  wertefl,  er 
mtrt  ^elobt,  (jenifen  worten        merte  geiobt,  gerufen  roorteu 


fern; 


fern; 


Plur.  wtr  merten,  t()r  mertet,    Plur.  wtr  roertert,  tbr  ttjertet, 
fte   werten   cjelobt,   gerufen        fte   merten   gelobt,   gerufen 


worten  fetm 


worten  fein. 
CONDITIONALS. 


FIRST  CONDITIONAL. 
I   should   be   praised,  called, 


SECOND  CONDITIONAL. 

I  should  have  been  praised, 

called,  &c. 

$eHg-.  id)   miirte,  tu  miirteft,    Sing,  id)  mi'trte,  tu  miirteft,  er 

miirte  gelobt,  gerufen 
ten  fetnj 


er    mitrte    gelobt,    gerufen 
merten ; 


463 


Plur.  nnr  awrbeit,  ifyr  twtrbet, 
fie  roikben  gelobt,  gerufen 
roevben. 


Plur.  nnr  roiirben,  ifyr 
fte  roitrben    getobt,   gerufen 
rcorben  fern* 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Singular.  Plural. 

roerben  rcir  gelcbt,  gerufen,  let 

us  be  praised,  called, 

roerbe  (bit)  gelobt,  gemfen,  be     roerbet  (tf)r)  gebbt,  gernfen,  ) 
(thou)  praised,  called,  ttjerben  <£ie  gelobt,  gernfen,   $ 

be  ye  (you)  praised,  called, 

ttjerbe  er  (fte,  e§)  gefobt,  gent*     roevben  fte  gelobt,  gernfen,  let 
fen,    let    him    (her,    it)    be         them  be  praised,  called. 


praised,  called  ; 

INFINITIVES. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Pres.  getobt,  gernfen  roerben,  to     Perf.  gefobt,  gerufen,  praised, 


be  praised,  called. 
Perf.    gelobt,   cjeritfen   roorben 
fet'n,  to   have  been  praised, 
called. 


called. 

Fut.  $u  (obenb,  $u  rufenb,  to  be 
praised,  called. 


§  144.     II.     REFLEXIVE   VERBS. 
©  i  d)  f  r  e  u  e  n,  to  rejoice. 

rPREs.  INFIX,  fid)  freiten. 

D  •  „-„  7    ^  4    }  IMPERF.  INDIC.  id)  freitte  mic^. 
Principal  parts.  I  PERF>  PART>         ^^  op  ^^ 

I.PERF.  INFIN.  fid)  gefreut  ^abem 
INDICATIVE  MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 
I  rejoice,  am  rejoicing,  do  re-       I  may  rejoice,    be    rejoicing, 


id)  freite  mid),  bit  freuefi: 
bier;,  er  freue  fic^  ; 


joice,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  freite  mid),  bit  freiteft 

(freujr)  bid),  er  freuet  (freut) 


Plur.  roir  freiten  un$,  i()r  fren^    Plur.  mir  freiten  wt§ 
et  (freut)  euc^,  fie  freuen  ficr;.        et  end),  fie  freiten  fid). 

IMPERFECT. 

I  rejoiced,  &c.  I  might  rejoice,  dec. 

Sing,  id)  freitte  mtc^,  bit  freu?    Sing,  id)  freuete  mid),  bu  fren^ 
teff  bic^,  &c.  etejl  bic^/  &;c. 


464 

Plur.  Nit    freitten    un§,    tyr    Plur.  tm'r  fmteten  un§,  &c. 
freutet  end),  &c. 

PERFECT. 
I  have  rejoiced,  &c.  I  may  have  rejoiced,  &c. 

id)  fyabe  mtd)  gefreut,  fcu     Sing,  id)  fyabe  mid)  gefreut,  fcu 
bid)  gefmtt,  &c.  fyabefl:  fctd)  gefreut,  &c. 

imt  daben  un§  gefreut,    PZ^^.  wr  ^aben  un^  gefreut, 
.  &c. 

PLUPERFECT. 

I  had  rejoiced,  &c.  I  might  have  rejoiced,  &c. 

td)    ^atte  mtc^   gefreut,    jSz'wg-.  ic^  ^atte  mtc^ 


FIRST  FUTURE. 

I  shall  rejoice,  &c.  I  shall  rejoice,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  roerfce  mtc^   freuen,     Sing,  id)  werbe  mtd^  freuert, 
tu  ttJtrjl  fcid)  &c.  fcu  merbejl  t>idb  &c. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

I  shall  have  rejoiced,  &c.  I  shall  have  rejoiced,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  werte  mid)  gefreut    5f«n^.  tc^   werSe  mtc^  gefretit 
^aben/  feu  wtrft  btd)  &c.  l)aben,  bit  roerbefl  &c. 

CONDITIONALS. 

FIRST  CONDITIONAL.  SECOND  CONDITIONAL. 

I  should  rejoice,  &c.  I  should  have  rejoiced,  dec. 

Sing,  id)  nntrbe  mtcf)  freiten,  tu    Sing,  id)  witrbe  mtdf)  gefreut 
wiirfceft  &c.  ^aben,  bit  wurbejl  &c. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 
rejoice  thou,  &C. 

P/wr.  fteiten  writ  itn§^ 

freue  btdf),  freitet  (tt)r)  eitd^, 

freite  er  (fie  eS)  ftc^  ;  freiten  fie  fid), 

INFINITIVES.  PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  ftd)  freiien,  to  rejoice.         fid)  freuenfc,  rejoicing. 
Perf.  ftc^    gefreut    fyaben,    to    fic^  gefreut,  rejoiced. 
have  rejoiced. 

§  145.     III.     INTRANSITIVE  VERBS. 

©  e  f)  e  tt,  to  go,  takes  f  e  t  n  for  its  auxiliary. 
r  PRES.  INFIN.  get)  en,  to  go. 
IMPERF.  INDIC.  tch  qtnq,  I  went. 


gone. 
.  INFIN.  gegangen  fetn,  to  have  gone. 


465 

INDICATIVE  MOOD.  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

I  go,  am  going,  do  go,  &c.  I  may  go,  be  going,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  cjefye,  bit  gdjejit  (gefyjl:),    Sing,  id)  gefye,   tu  gefyeft  er 


P/wr.  wir    gefyen,    ifyr    gefyet    PZwr.  wir  gefyen,  ifyr  gefyet,  fte 
(gefyt),  fte  gefyen  (gefyn)»  gefyen. 

IMPERFECT. 

I  went,  was  going,  did  go,  &c.     I  might  go,  be  going,  &c. 
Sing,  id)  ging,  bu  gingjl,  er    $wg-.  id)  ginge,  bit  gtn^ejl,  er 


PZwr.  tt)ir  gutgen,  t^r  gtnget,    PZwr.  nnr  gtngen,  i^r  cjtnget, 
fie  gtncjeiu  fte  gingen* 

PERFECT. 
I  have  gone,  been  going,  &c.   I  may  have  gone,  been  going, 

&c. 
Sing,  id)  bin,  bit  bijl,  cr  i|l  ge?     Sing,  id)  fei,  bit  feiejl:,  cr  fci 

garden  ;  gegangcn  ; 

Plur.  wir  ftnb,  ifer  feib,  fte  ftnb    Plur.  twir  feien,  i^r  feiet,  fte 
gegangen,  feien  gegangen. 

PLUPERFECT. 
I  had  gone,  been  going,  &c.   I  might  have  gone,  been  going, 

&c. 

Sing,  id)  war,  bit  roar|T,  er  war    fikVi^.  id)  ware,  bu  wareft,  er 
;  ware  cjecjangen  ; 


Plur.  wir  waren,  il)r  waret,  fte  Plur.  wir  waren,  i^r  waret,  fte 

waren  gecjangen.  waren  gegangen* 

FIRST  FUTURE. 

I  shall  go,  be  going,  &c.  I  shall  go,  be  going,  &c. 

Sing,  id)  werbe,  bit  wirfl,  er  Sing,  id)  werbe,  bit  werbeft,  er 

wirb  $et)en  ;  werbe  gefyen  ; 

Plur.  wir  werben,  ifyr  werbet,  Plur.  wir  werben,  it)r  werbet, 

fie  werben  cje^en*  fte  werben  gefyen* 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

I  shall  have  gone,  been  going,  I  shall  have  gone,  been  going, 

&c.  &c. 

Sing,  id)  werbe,  bu  wirjl,  er  Sing,  id)  werbe,  bit  werbeft,  er 

wirb  gegangen  fein;  werbe  gea,ana,en  fein; 

Plur.  wir  werben,  ifyr  werbet,  Plur.  wir  werben,  ifyr  werbet, 

fte  werben  gegancjen  fein.  fte  werben  a,ea,ana,en  fein. 
20* 


466 

CONDITIONALS. 

FIRST  CONDITIONAL.  SECOND  CONDITIONAL. 

I  should  go,  be  going,  &c.  I  should  have  gone,  been  go- 

ing, &c. 
Sing,  id)  toiirbe,  bu  ttwrbejl:,     Sing,  id)  rm'irbe,   bit   rm"ttbe(l, 

er  rottrbe  (jefyen  ;  er  roiirbe  gegangen  fetn  ; 

Plur.  rot'r  tt)tirben,  t()r  ttJiirbet,     Plur.  rmr  rmtrben,  tt^r  roitrbet, 

fte  nntrben  ge^en*  fie  wurben  gegan^en  fetn. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Plur.  gefyen  ttn't,  let  us  go,  be 


Sing.  <jel)e  (bu),  go  thou,  do  gefyet  or  ge^t  (ifyr),  geljen  ©te, 
go,  go  ye  (you),  do  go, 

gelje  er  (fte,  e£),  let  him  (her,  gefyen  or  ge^n  fte,  let  them  go. 
it)  go ; 

INFINITIVE  MOOD.  PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  cjefyen,  to  go.  Pres.  gefyenb,  going. 

Perf.  gegangen   fetn,   to   have  Perf.  gegangen,  gone, 
gone. 

IV.     IMPERSONAL  VERBS.* 

§  146.  Impersonal  verbs  are  conjugated  like  other  verbs  in 
all  the  rnoods  and  tenses,  but  only  in  the  third  person  singular 
(§114). 

They  want  the  passive  voice,  and  generally  employ  the  auxi- 
liary fyaben  (§  131). 

$  c  g  n  c  n,  to  rain. 

Pres.  Ind.  c$  rennet,  it  rains.  Subj.  e$  rcgne,  it  may  rain. 

Imperf.  Ind.  e*  rcc^nctc,  it  rained.     Subj.  e$  regnctc/  it  mi^ht  rain. 
Perf.  Ind.  cS  ^at  gcrcgnct/  it  has     Subj.  c^  babe  gcrcgnct/  it  may  have 

rained.  rained. 

Pluperf.  Ind.  c^  ^attc  gcrcgnct,  it    £w5/.  c^  fiattc  gcrcgnct/  it  might 

had  rained.  have  rained. 

First  Put.  cs  rwrb  rcgncn,  it  will    SM^;.  c^  nxrfce  rcgncn,  it  will  rain. 

rain. 
Future  Perf.  c$  wirb  gcre.qnct  fa    Subj.  eg  wcrbc  gcregnct  fjafcen,  it 

Ocn,  it  will  have  rained.  will  have  rained. 

CONDITIONALS. 
First  Cond.  e6  njiirbc  rcgncn,  it    Second  Cond.  c$  routt'C  Cjcrcc^nct 

would  rain.  fjabcn,  it  would  have  rained. 

Imperat.  eg  rcgnc !  let  it  rain ! 

Pres.  Infin.  rcgncn,  to  rain.  Partirinl**  5  rcA"^^  raining, 

Per/.  /71/Ti.  gcreflnct  (jatcn,  to  have  X*W*.  ^  Qcrcgnct,  rained. 

rained. 

*  For  exercises  on  the  impersonal  verbs  see  Lesson  LVI. 


467 

§  147.  Some  impersonal  verbs  have  a  reflexive  form ;  as, 
e3  fragt  fid),  it  is  a  question ;  e3  giemt  fid),  it  is  becoming,  &c. 
Others  again  are  active,  and  are  followed  by  an  object  in  the 
accusative  or  dative,  which  may  be  either  a  substantive  or  a 
personal  pronoun ;  e.  g.  e$  bungert  ttt  t  d),  £>  t  d),  i  t)  it,  I  am, 
thou  art,  he  is  hungry ;  e3  burflet,  frtert,  fdjaubett  m  t  d),  I  am 
thirsty,  cold,  shuddering ;  e3  geltngt  m  i  r,  I  succeed  ;  e3  grauet 
1 1)  m,  he  dreads.  The  accusative  or  dative  is  sometimes  placed 
first,  and  then  the  e  3  is  omitted ;  as,  m  i  d)  fyungert,  m  t  d)  bur* 
ftet,  m  t  r  graiiet/  &c. 

V.     COMPOUND  VERBS. 

§  149.  1st,  Compound  verbs  are  either  separable  or  inse- 
parable. 

2d,  In  compounds  of  the  first  class,  the  constituent  parts  are 
separated,  and  the  first  component  is  placed  after  the  verb,  in 
all  the  simple  forms  of  the  verb  which  are  susceptible  of  in- 
flection, viz  : — in  the  imperative  active,  and  in  the  present  and 
imperfect,  both  indicative  and  subjunctive ;  e.  g.  cmfangeit,  to 
begin,  pres.  indie,  id)  faitije  a  n,  I  begin,  irnperf.  id)  ftitg  a  n,  I 
begun,  imperat.  fancje  I)u  a  n,  begin  thou.  Moreover,  in  the  per- 
fect participle,  the  augment  g  e  is  inserted  between  the  separable 
particle  and  the  verb  ;  e.  g.  atugezfangen,  ait&ge*gattgen/  ab*ge* 
reif't,  from  aitfancjen/  to  commence ;  auScjefyen,  to  go  out;  ab* 
retfcn,  to  set  out  on  a  journey. 

Remark.  In  subordinate  propositions,  however,  which  are  in- 
troduced by  a  conjunction  or  conjunctive  word,  such  as — alf>,  t>a,  in? 
b  c  m,  iv  e  n  n,  nn*  U,  fo  a  9,  &c.,  or  by  a  relative  pronoun,  this  separa- 
tion of  the  component  parts  does  not  take  place;  e.g.  a  (6  cOcn 
Mo  3cnnc  aufgtng  (from  aufge&cn),  just  as  the  sun  was  rising; 
ix>  c  n  n  cr  nur  a  n  f  a  m  e  (from  anfomatcn)  !  would  that  he  might  ar- 
rive !  3  n  &  c  m  id)  am  $aufc  t)  c  r  b  c  i  g  t  n  g,  as  I  was  passing  by  the 
house.  Die  Sijurc,  n>  c  I  cl)  e  fid)  a  u  f  1 1)  at/  the  door  which  opened. 

§  149.  {n  compounds  of  the  second  class,  the  constituent 
parts  remain  inseparably  connected  throughout  the  entire  con- 
jugation of  the  verb,  and  the  perfect  participle  does  not  assume 
the  augment  $  e,  if  the  first  component  is  one  of  those  insepa- 
rable particles  mentioned  above  (§  122)  ;  but  if  it  is  a  noun  or 
an  adjective,  the  augment  is  prefixed  to  the  entire  compound  ; 
e.  g.  id)  ocrlfere,  I  lose,  td)  oerlor/  I  lost,  part.  »erforen,  lost. 
But,  frufyfhtdfen,  to  breakfast  (compounded  with  the  adjective 
fri'tl),  early),  perf.  part,  g  e  fritfyjtudf f ;  recfytfertuj en,  to  justify  (from 
redjt,  just),  per£  part,  g  e  recfytfevtujt,  &c. 


468 

§  150.  Verbs  compounded  with  substantives  or  adjectives 
are  generally  inseparable,  when  they  so  coalesce  in  sense  as 
to  form  one  complex  conception ;  but  when  their  union  is  so 
slight,  that  they  may  be  regarded  as  distinct  words,  they  are  se- 
parable ;  e.  g.  ©tatt  ftnben,  to  take  place  ;  fyod)  acfyten,  to 
esteem  highly ;  lo§  fprecfyett,  to  acquit ;  perf.  parts,  <&tatt  ge* 
funben,  fyod)  cjeacfytet,  lo$  gefprocfyem 

§  151.  When  the  verb  is  compounded  with  a  particle  (i. 
e.  with  an  adverb,  a  preposition,  or  a  simple  prefix),  the  accent 
determines  to  which  of  the  two  classes  the  compound  belongs. 
If  the  particle  is  accented,  the  compound  is  separable  ;  but  if 
the  principal  accent  falls  on  the  verb  itself,  the  compound  is  in- 
separable. 

A  list  of  inseparable  prefixes  has  already  been  given  above 
(§  122.  2d). 

§  152.  Verbs  compounded  with  the  following  adverbs  and 
prepositions  are  separable : —  a  b,  an,  a  ii  f,  a  it  3,  b  e  t,  b  a  r, 
e  t  n,  fort,  fy  e  r,  fyt  n,  and  the  compounds  of  ber  and  fytn : — 
tyerab,  fytnetn,  &c. ;  n  a  d),  n  t  e  b  e  r,  o  b,  »  o  r,  ro  e  g,  3  u,» 
S  u  r  u  cf  .* 

EXAMPLES. 

an!ommcn,  to  arrive,  part,  angcfommcn  ; 

cuifjlefyen,     to  rise, 

barbrtngcn,  to  offer, 

fettfafyten,    to  continue,  fottgefafyrcn  ; 


n,  to  throw  away, 
jubrtngcn,    to  spend, 

§  153.  Compounds  with  b  it  r  d)r  t)  t  n  t  e  r,  ii  b  e  r,  n  m,  u  rt* 
t  e  r/  tt  D  ft  and  m  t  e  b  e  t  are  separable,  when  the  accent  rests 
on  the  particle  ;  they  are  inseparable,  when  it  rests  on  the  verb 
itself  (§  122.  5th). 

It  is  frequently  the  case,  that  in  one  and  the  same  compound  this 
difference  of  accentuation  has  given  rise  to  different  significations. 

EXAMPLES. 

burd)  b  r  t  n  9  e  n  (inseparable),  to  penetrate,  part,  burd)  btun^en; 
burd)  bttncjcn     (separable),    to    press    through    a  crowd,    part. 


burd)  r  c  t  f  c  n  (insep.)/  to  travel  over,  part,  burd)  r  c  t  f  f  t  ; 
b  u  r  d)  tctfcn  (sep.)/  to  travel  through,  part.b  u  t  d)  gmipt  ; 
liber  f  ii  t)  r  c  n  (insep.),  to  convince,  part,  ubcr  f  ii  ft  r  t  ; 
ii  b  cr  fiiftrcn  (sep.),  to  convey  over,  part, 


*  Compare  also  the  table  of  separable  and  inseparable  verbs  on  pages  52 
and  53. 


469 

imtct  r)  a  ( t  c  n  (insep.),  to  entertain,  part.  Utltct  gotten; 
u  n  t  c  r  fatten  (sep.)/  to  hold  under,  part,  u  n  t  c  r  a/fyaltcn  ; 
roll  c  n  t)  c  n  (insep.),  to  finish,  part.  r?oll  e  n  t>  c  t ; 
D  0  I ( Qtepcn  (sep.),  to  fill  by  pouring  into,  part.  t>  0  H  cjea,effcn. 

Remark.  Compounds  with  the  preposition  rotfccr  (which 
should  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  adverb  n>  t  e  b  e  r)  are 
always  inseparable,  the  accent  being  invariably  assumed  by  the  verb 
itself;  as,  rotter  I  c  g  e  n,  to  confute,  part,  nnfccr  t  c  q  t ;  nrifccrftcfyen,  to 
withstand,  part,  tx>tt>crftant>en.  The  adverbial  prefix  mt0  cannot  be 
reduced  to  any  definite  rule,  as  the  accent  does  not  in  all  instances 
decide  whether  it  is  separable  or  inseparable. 

§  154.  With  respect  to  the  infinitive  of  compound  verbs, 
it  is  to  be  remarked,  that  the  particle  gu  (§  120)  is  placed  be- 
fore it,  if  the  verb  is  inseparable ;  if  separable,  it  is  inserted  be- 
tween  the  two  components,  and  constitutes  one  word  with 
them ;  e.  g.  $  u  entroet'fyert,  to  desecrate ;  $  u  aerfaflen,  to  fall 
into  pieces ;  but,  an^u^famjen,  to  begin ;  weg^u-werfert,  to 
throw  away ;  juritcf-su^tretben,  to  drive  back,  &c. 

§  155.  Compounds  generally  follow  the  conjugation  of 
their  simple  verbs.  The  following  is  a  specimen  of  the  simple 
forms  of  a  separable  compound : — 

3(  b  r  e  t  f  e  n ,  to  set  out  on  a  journey. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Singular.  Singular. 

td)  rcifc  ab,  tu  rcifcft  afc,  cc  rctfct    id)  rctfe  a&,  tu  rcifcft  afc/  et  reifct 
(rctf't)  oO ;  ab  ; 

Plural.  Plural. 

nnt  rctfcn  at,  tfjr  reifct  (rcif  t)  a^    ttrit  reifcn  at),  i^r  rctfct  at,  fte  tctfcn 
ftc  rctfcn  afo.  at. 

IMPERFECT. 

Singular.  Singular. 

trf)  rctf'tc  at,  tu  rctf'tcft  at,  cr  rctf'tc    ic^  rcifctc  afe,  t>u  rctfctcft  at,  cr  teU 
at ;  fete  at ; 

Plural.  Plural. 

roir  rciptcn  at,  ifyt  rctftct  at,  fte    roir  retfetcn  at,  if)r  rctfctct  at,  ftc 
rctptcn  at.  retfetcn  at. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

teifc  (bu)  at,  rctfc  er  at ;  rctfen  n?ir  at,  rctfet  (retf'r)  i^r  atx 

retfen  fie  at. 


470 

INFINITIVES.  PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  afctetfcn  or  aOgutctfen.  Pres.  Part,  cibtdfenb. 

Perf.  afojereif  t  few.  Perf.  Part,  abgetetf't. 

SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB. 

I.       AGREEMENT. 

§  156.  The  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  nominative  in 
number  and  person.  In  German  the  subject  cannot  be 
omitted  as  in  the  Classical  languages,  in  which  the  termina- 
tion of  the  verb  is  sufficient  to  indicate  the  difference  of  per- 
son and  number ;  except  in  the  second  person  of  the  impera- 
tive singular,  when  bii,  like  the  English  thou,  is  expressed  only 
for  the  sake  of  emphasis ;  e.  g.  id)  lefe,  I  read  ;  b  11  tebeft 
thou  speakest ;  bet  @turm  fyat  au$geto6t,  the  storm  has  ceased 
to  rage  ;  bte  Snabcn  fptelert,  the  boys  are  playing.  But,  im- 
perat.  rebel  ( e  f  e !  read,  speak  (thou)  !  @  p  t  e  I  e ,  Stnb,  cutf 
bet  3)hittcr  <8d)DO§ !  Play,  my  child,  on  thy  mother's  lap  ! 
(Schiller.) 

Exception  1.  When  several  verbs  constitute  a  compound  predi- 
cate to  one  subject,  it  is  only  expressed  with  the  first.  5)u  arbciteft 
tttcl,  r  id)tcft  cibct  wcnig  cuiS,  thou  labourest  much,  but  accomplish- 
es! little;  unb  cc  f)ort'£  mit  ftummem  £atme,  reH't  fid)  blutcnt)  IcS, 
pr  c^t  (tc  t)cftig  in  t»tc  2Crme,  fcbtvtngt  (id)  auf  fcin  <Kep  (^cbillcr),, 
and  with  mute  grief  he  hears  it,  tears  himself  bleeding  away,  ea- 
gerly folds  her  to  his  breast,  springs  upon  his  steed. 

Excep.  2.  The  neuter  personal  pronoun  c  6  and  the  demonstra- 
tives l>ic$  and  t>ci$  are  followed  by  a  verb  in  the  plural;  when 
the  substantive  after  the  verb  which  they  represent  is  plural ;  fctcS 
ft  n  b  mctnc  58riit>cr,  these  are  my  brothers  ;  c£  ft  n  t)  cfytUcfye  Banner, 
they  are  honest  men. 

Excep.  3.  In  reciting  the  multiplication  table,  the  Germans  use 
the  singular  where  the  plural  would  seem  proper  ;  wet  mat  funf  i  ft 
gwan^tc},  four  times  five  are  twenty,  &c. 

Excep.  4.  When  the  subject  of  a  verb  is  a  pronoun  of  the  first 
or  second  person,  it  is  sometimes  omitted  by  poetical  license ;  as, 
£  a  b  c  nun,  act) !  ^pfyttofepfytc,  3urij!tcrei  unb  50?cbictn  burcfyauS  ftututt, 
I  have  now,  alas !  completely  mastered  philosophy,  the  jurist's  craft, 
and  medicine  (Goethe's  Faust). 

§  157.  When  the  verb  refers  to  several  subjects  equally 
related  to  it,  it  must  be  put  in  the  plural ;  as,  Dfocfyt  nnb  Icuj 
flrttten  nut  et'ncmbet  urn  ben  SSorjiig,  night  and  day  were 
contending  with  each  other  for  the  preference.  When,  how- 
ever, the  subjects  are  connected  by  disjunctive  conjunctions, 
or  when  they  are  regarded  as  one  complex  notion,  the  verb  is 


471 

in  the  singular  ;  e.  g.  webcr  ber  &ater  nod)  few  ©ofyn  i  ft  fca 
(jeroefen,  neither  the  father  nor  his  son  has  been  here  ;  $er* 
rat()  unb  Slrgroefyn  I  a  u  f  d)  t  tit  alien  (£cfen,  treason  and  suspi- 
cion (combined)  lurch  at  every  corner  ;  fyier  tft  *Pfeffer  unb 
l$,  here  is  pepper  and  salt. 


§  158.  After  several  subjects  of  different  persons,  the  verb 
in  the  plural  agrees  with  the  first  person  in  preference  to  the 
second,  and  with  the  second  in  preference  to  the  third  ;  e.  g.  id) 
unb  Su  (tmr)  ft  n  b  23riiber,  I  and  thou  are  brothers  ;  Dii  unb 
ber  SBater  (3fyr)  fet'b  einanber  a'fynlid),  you  and  your  father 
resemble  each  other.  Sometimes,  however,  the  verb  agrees 
with  the  nearest  nominative  ;  id)  bavf  veben,  md)t  Sii,  /  am  per- 
mitted to  speak,  not  thou. 

II.    TENSES. 

§  159.  It  will  be  perceived  from  the  paradigms,  that  the 
German  verb  has  no  separate  forms  to  express  the  distinctions 
observed  in  English  between  /  praise,  and  I  am  praising,  do 
praise,  I  praised,  and  I  was  praising,  did  praise,  &c.,  all  of 
which  are  implied  in  the  one  form  id)  lobe,  id)  lobte  (see  page 
279). 

§  160.  In  German,  as  in  English,  the  present  is  often  em- 
ployed instead  of  the  imperfect,  to  give  greater  animation  to 
historical  narration  (see  page  342). 

§  161.  The  present  is  used  in  place  of  the  future,  espe- 
cially if  the  event  is  regarded  as  certain  ;  as,  morgen  f  bmmt 
er  roteber,  to-morrow  he  will  come  again  ;  fimftige  2Bed)e  ret- 
fe  id)  nad)  Sonbon,  next  week  I  am  going  to  London  ;  serlag 
Sid)  brauf,  id)  laffe  fed)tenb  fyier  ba^  8ebenr  ober  fiiljr  e  fte 
au$  ^pilfen,  depend  upon  it,  I  shall  either  fighting  lose  my  life 
here,  or  lead  them  out  of  Pilsen  (Schiller).  (See  page  342). 

§  162.  So  also,  on  the  other  hand,  the  first  future  is  used 
instead  of  the  present,  and  the  future  perfect  instead  of  the 
perfect,  to  give  an  air  of  probability  to  the  expression  ;  e.  g. 
er  ro  ir  b  roefyl  nid)t  $u  £)cwfe  fetn,  he  is  not  likely  to  be  at 
home,  er  ro  i  r  b  auSgecjangen  f  e  i  n,  he  has  in  all  probability 
gone  out  (literally,  he  will  have  gone  out)  ;  £)u  ttnrjl  £5  id)  ge^ 
irrt  l)aben/  you  must  have  made  (have  probably  made)  a  mis- 
take. 

§  163.  The  imperfect,  the  perfect,  and  the  pluperfect  cor- 
respond on  the  whole  to  the  tenses  of  the  same  name  in  Eng- 


472 

lish,  with  this  exception,  that  when  simply  a  division  of  time, 
and  not  another  event  is  referred  to,  the  Germans  sometimes 
employ  the  perfect,  when  the  English  idiom  requires  the  im- 
perfect;  e.  g.  geflern  ftub  3fyre  33itd)er  angefommert,  yes- 
terday your  books  arrived  ;  er  tfl  le£te  £8ed)e  g  eflo  r  b  en,  he 
died  last  week.  On  the  meaning  and  use  of  these  tenses,  and 
on  the  omission  of  the  auxiliary,  see  pages  343,  344,  and  Les- 
son LVII. 

§  164.  As  to  the  moods  of  the  German  verb,  the  Indica- 
tive, the  Subjunctive,  as  well  as  the  Conditionals  and  the  Im- 
perative, have  been  treated  at  large  and  illustrated  with  numer- 
ous examples  in  the  former  part  of  the  book,  so  that  a  further 
analysis  of  them  in  this  place  would  be  superfluous.  On  the 
Subjunctive  and  Conditionals  see  Lessons  XC.  and  XCL,  and 
on  the  Imperative,  page  305. 

III.    THE    INFINITIVE. 

§  165.  Besides  serving  to  form  the  compound  tenses  of 
the  verb  (§  134),  the  infinitive  mood  is  used  in  various  other 
relations,  either  with  or  without  the  preposition  JIL 

§  166.  All  infinitives  may  be  regarded  as  abstract  verbal 
substantives  of  the  neuter  gender,  and  are  frequently  employed 
as  such  in  every  case,  generally  in  connection  with  the  arti- 
cle;  e.  g.  fcaS  (5t£en  tfl  tfym  fcfyafcltd),  sitting  is  injurious  to 
him ;  id)  bin  fc  e$  ©•  d)  r  e  t  b  e  n  3  mttfce,  I  am  tired  of  writing  ; 
Sum  Si  e  t  f  e  n  bijl  £)u  mcfyt  (jefcfyuft,  you  are  not  fit  for  travel- 
ling. 

§  167.  The  infinitive  is  employed  without  $u  in  the  follow- 
ing instances  : — 

1st,  When  it  stands  as  the  subject  of  a  proposition  ;  as, 
cjeben  t'ft  fe(to,er  ate  nefymert,  it  is  more  blessed  to  give 
than  to  receive  ;  flerbett  tfl  m'cfytS,  aber  leben  unD  m'cfyt  fefyert, 
fcaS  tfl  etn  Ungliicf  (Scfytller),  to  die  is  nothing,  but  to  live  and 
not  to  see,  that  is  a  wretched  lot  indeed. 

2d,  In  connection  with  the  auxiliary  verbs  of  mood  —  b  ii  r  * 
fen,  fonnen,  la  f  fen,  mo  3  en,  muff  en,  follen,  rooU 
ten  (§  115.  2d),  and  in. particular  expressions,  also  with  fyabert 
and  t  &  u  n  ;  e.  g.  er  I  d  g  t  em  £a«3  b  a  u  e  n,  he  orders  a 
house  to  be  built;  id)  barf  fptelen,  I  am  permitted  to  play; 
£)it  f  D  1 1  fl  mcfyt  fl  e  !)  I  e  n,  thou  shalt  not  steal ;  la£  fie  gefyeit, 
let  them  go  ;  £)u  fy  afl  gut  r  efc  e  n,  it  is  easy  for  you  to  speak  ; 
fie  tfyitt  mcijtS  ate  roetuen,  she  does  nothing  but  v/erp. 


473 

Remark.  When  the  auxiliary  taff  c  n,  in  the  sense  of  to  order, 
is  followed  by  an  infinitive,  the  latter,  though  active  in  German, 
must  generally  be  rendered  by  the  passive  in  English ;  as,  cc  (apt 
em  35ud)  einbinben/  he  orders  a  book  to  be  bound,  &c. 

3d,  In  connection  with  the  verbs  f)  e  t  $  e  n,  to  order ;  fy  e  t  £  e  tt 
and  n  e  n  n  e  n,  to  call ;  ty  e  t  f  e  n,  to  help  ;  t  e  f)  r  e  n,  to  teach  ; 
I  e  r  n  e  n,  to  learn,  and  m  a  cf)  e  n,  to  make  ;  e.  g.  fyetg  tfyn  ge* 
Ijen !  tell  him  to  go  ! 

4th,  When  joined  to  certain  verbs  denoting  an  exercise  of 
the  senses ;  as,  fefyen,  to  see;  fjbren,  to  hear;  fufylen, 
to  feel ;  ft  n  t>  e  n,  to  find ;  as,  id)  fefye  tfyn  f  cmmen,  lefen,  setd)* 
it  en,  I  see  him  coming,  reading,  drawing,  &c. ;  id)  fyore  ifyn 
ftngen,  fptelen,  I  hear  him  singing,  playing ;  id)  fanfc  ifen  fcfylafen, 
ft^en,  I  found  him  sleeping,  sitting.  In  this  connection  the  in- 
finitive has  the  signification  of  the  present  participle. 

5th,  The  infinitive  is  employed  without  ju  in  connection  with 
the  following  verbs: — b  let  ben/  to  remain;  get)  en,  to  go; 
fasten,  to  ride  in  a  carriage  ;  r  e  1 1  e  n,  to  ride  on  horseback ; 
e.  g.  bletben  @tc  ft£en,  keep  your  seat ;  er  gefyt  betteln,  he  goes 
a  begging  ;  fte  fafyren  fpajteren,  they  take  an  airing,  a  ride  in 
a  carriage ;  er  rettet  fpc^teren/  he  takes  a  ride  on  horseback. 

§  168.  By  an  idiom,  peculiar  to  the  German,  the  auxiliary 
verbs  of  mood  —  fcitrfen,  fonnen,  mogen,  mufien,  fotten,  rootten, 
lajfen,  and  also  the  verbs  fyetgen,  ^elfen,  t)6ren,  fe^en,  lernen, 
le^ren,  assume  the  form  of  the  infinitive,  instead  of  the  perfect 
participle,  when  they  stand  in  connection  with  another  infini- 
tive ;  e.  g.  er  fyat  fid)  nid)t  ruf)ten  biirfen  (instead  of  gebiirft), 
he  has  not  been  permitted  to  stir ;  Su  fydtteft  f  ommen  f  o  ( (  e  n 
(instead  of  gefettt),  you  ought  to  have  come ;  3^  fcabt  tie  getnfce 
Sng(ant)'^  fennen  lernen/  ye  have  learnt  to  know  the  enemies 
of  England.  It  is  now  customary,  however,  regularly  to  employ 
the  participle  of  the  verbs  lernen  and  lefyren  instead  of  the  in- 
finitive ;  as,  er  feat  tfyn  fennen  9  e  I  e  r  n  t,  he  has  become  ac- 
quainted with  him;  tcf)  fyabe  tfyn  seicfynen  gelefyrt,  I  have 
taught  him  drawing. 

THE    INFINITIVE    WITH   JU* 

§  169.  The  infinitive  with  $u  is  sometimes  employed  in- 
stead of  the  simple  infinitive,  as  the  subject  of  a  proposition, 
especially  when  in  an  inverted  proposition  it  comes  after  its 
predicate;  e.  g.  e§  cjejtemt  fcem  ^anne,  tfycittg  gu  fetn,  it 
behoves  man  to  be  diligent,  &c. 


474 

§  170.  When  the  infinitive  with  311  is  not  the  subject  of  a 
proposition,  it  is  equivalent  to  a  verbal  substantive  in  an 
oblique  case,  corresponding  either  to  the  Latin  supine  (ama- 
tum,  amatii),  or  to  the  gerund  (amandi — do — dum — do).  It  is 
thus  used  : — 

1st,  After  substantives,  especially  such  as  signify  an  inclina- 
tion or  affection  of  the  mind,  opportunity,  time,  <fyc. ;  as,  9Ret^ 
gang,  inclination  ;  (£ntfd)hig,  resolution  ;  (£tfer,  zeal ;  DDiittf), 
courage  ;  guft,  desire  ;  3^it,  time  ;  ©elegentjett,  opportunity ; 
er  fyat  8u(l  311  ret  fen,  git  effert,  &c.,  he  has  a  mind  to 
travel,  to  eat,  or  he  is  desirous  of  travelling,  of  eating,  &c.  ;  e3 
fft  3eit  3  u  a  r  b  e  1 1  e  n,  3  it  f  dj  (a  f  e n,  it  is  time  to  work,  to 
sleep. 

2d,  After  adjectives — signifying  possibility,  duty,  necessity, 
easiness,  difficulty,  and  the  like  ;  as,  mogltd),  immogltdj,  tter*  . 
pfltcfytet,  genbtfyt'gt,  letrfjt,  fcfyroer,  fyart,  &c.     £>te  33itrbe  tft  fcfywer 
311  tragen,  the  burden  is  hard  to  be  borne  ;  e§  tjl  mtr  unmbgltcf) 
311  fommen,  it  is  impossible  for  me  to  come,  &c. 

3d,  After  verbs,  generally  as  the  object  to  which  an  activity, 
a  desire,  or  emotion  of  the  mind  implied  by  them,  is  directed  ,• 
e.  g.  ftcf)  freuen,  to  rejoice ;  fid)  bemiifyen,  to  strive ;  fyeffen,  to 
hope ;  gebenfen,  to  intend ;  notfytgen,  gtwngen,  to  necessitate, 
compel;  ttetgeflfett,  to  forget ;  cerbteten,  to  forbid,  &c. ;  e^  freitt 
mid),  ©te  311  fel)en,  I  am  glad  to  see  you ;  er  bemiifyte  ftd),  t^rt 
etnjuboten,  he  strove  to  overtake  him  ;  icfy  ratfye  Sir,  311  fcijrcet* 
gen,  I  advise  you  to  be  silent. 

§  171.  4th,  After  many  verbs  which  serve  to  designate  the 
time  or  mode  of  an  action ;  as,  anfcmgett/  to  begin  ;  auffyoren, 
to  cease  ;  fortfafyren,  to  continue  ;  etten,  to  hasten ;  pflegen,  to 
be  wont ;  ttermcgert,  to  be  able  ;  brcwcfyen,  to  need  ;  fcfyetnen/to 
appear;  nn'ffeit,  to  know ;  e.  g.  er  fcingt  an  311  ftngen,  311  tan^ert, 
he  begins  to  sing,  to  dance  ;  er  sermag  mcf)t  3U  fprec^en,  he  is 
not  able  to  speak ;  £)u  fcfyetnjl  e^  ntd)t  3U  rot  (fen,  you  appear  not 
to  know  it,  &c. 

5th,  The  infinitive  with  311  is  sometimes  employed  as  the 
predicate  of  a  proposition  in  connection  with  the  copula  f  e  t  n, 
to  express  the  possibility  or  necessity  of  an  action.  The  infin- 
itive, in  this  connection,  though  active,  has  generally  a  passive 
signification ;  as,  e$  tft  fetne  3^^  3«  »erlteren,  there  is  no  time 
to  be  lost ;  fein  (Sternbtlb  tft  311  fefyen,  no  star  is  to  be  seen;  er 
tfl  mrgenb$  angutreffen,  he  is  nowhere  to  be  found.  It  occurs 
also  in  the  same  signification  with  fyaben ;  er  fyat  fyter  mcfytS  311 
fagen,  he  has  nothing  to  say  here  ;  wa$  fyaft  Su  311  tfywt  ?  what 


475 

have  you  to  do  ?     It  is  this  construction  of  the  infinitive,  which 
has  given  rise  to  the  future  participle  (§  121.  3d). 

6th,  The  infinitive  with  311  serves  sometimes  to  denote 
the  purpose  or  design  of  an  action  or  state  expressed  by  a 
previous  verb,  in  which  case  the  particle  um  usually  is  pre- 
fixed to  add  emphasis  to  the  expression  ;  e.  g.  t'df)  f  emme,  ii  m 
£)tr  93ucfyer  $u  brtngen,  I  come  for  the  purpose  of  bringing  you 
books ;  er  gefyt  tit  We  ©tabt,  u  m  mtt  etnem  5relln^e  jujam* 
men  git  fommen,  he  goes  into  town  in  order  to  meet  a  friend. 

IV.     PARTICIPLES. 

§  172.  Participles  are  declined  like  adjectives,  and  follow 
the  same  rules  of  inflection.  Set  (tebenbe  Skater,  the 
affectionate  father ;  etn  ge(tebte$  fiinb,  a  beloved  child.  So 
also  substantively  : — ber  ©enefene,  one  who  has  recovered  from 
sickness ;  bte  ©terbenbe,  the  dying  woman  ;  ba§  S3er(ana,te, 
that  which  was  wished  for,  &c. 

§  173.  The  present  and  perfect  participles  are  frequently 
used  as  adverbs  of  manner ;  e.  g.  @te  fprecfyen  fl  t  e  £  e  n  b, 
you  speak  fluently ;  errotfjenb  folgt  er  tfyrett  ©pitren, 
blushing  he  follows  her  steps.  This  is  especially  the  case 
with  perfect  participles,  in  connection  with  the  verb  f  o  m  m  en, 
to  come ;  fyeitlenb  f  ommt  ber  ©tiirm  9  e  fl  o  g  e  n,  bet  bte  5 (am* 
me  braufenb  fucfyt  (©cfyttfer),  howling  the  blast  comes  flying, 
and  roaring  seeks  the  flame  ;  er  fbmmt  ge(aufen,  gentten,  he 
comes  running,  riding,  &c. 

§  174.  Participles,  like  adjectives,  serve  either  to  form 
the  predicate  of  a  proposition,  or  they  are  joined  to  a  noun  in 
an  attributive  sense  (§  52)  ;  e.  g.  ber  £D?amt  ifl  9  e  ( e  f)  r  t, 
the  man  is  learned,  and  ber  g  e  I  e  fy  r  t  e  9Lftann,  the  learned 
man;  bte  Dfacfyt  tft  serfloffen,  the  night  is  past,  and  bte 
serfloffene  9tarf)t,  the  past  night;  ba£  2fBaflfer  tjl  fte* 
b  e  n  b,  the  water  is  boiling,  and  ba3  ft  e  b  e  n  b  e  2Bafjer,  the  boil- 
ing water  ;  bte  £anbfcf)aft  tjl  e  n  1 3  ii  rf  e  n  b,  the  landscape  is 
charming,  and  bte  etttgiidfenbe  Canbfcfyaft,  the  charming 
landscape. 

The  present  participle,  however,  is  not  generally  used  in  the 
predicative  sense,  unless  it  has  entirely  assumed  the  signification 
of  an  adjective;  thus  we  cannot  say  : — id)  feinrufcnb/ltebcnb,  fefycnt), 
I  am  calling,  loving,  seeing;  but : — id)  tufc,  licbc,  fcf)C.  (§  159.) 

§  175.  In  connection  with  another  verb,  the  present  par- 
ticiple, either  alone  or  qualified  by  other  words,  frequently 


476 

stands  as  the  abridged  form  of  a  subordinate  proposition,  serv- 
ing to  express  the  time,  manner,  cause,  or  condition  of  the  ac- 
tion denoted  by  the  verb ;  as,  bte$  bet  mfr  b  e  n  f  e  n  b,  fcfyltef  td) 
etn  (time),  revolving  these  things  with  myself,  I  fell  asleep,  in- 
stead of,  tnbem  tcfy  bte£  bet  mtr  fetbjl  bodjte,  &c.,  whilst  I  was 
revolving,  &c. ;  tfym  bte  £>cinbe  b  r  u  cf  e  n  b,  nafym  er  2(bfd)teb 
(manner},  shaking  his  hands  he  took  leave  ;  fern  9(bbtlb  buU 
bet  fie,  aflet'n  ba3  forperlefe  2Bort  serefyrenb;  i.  e.  met!  fie 
afletn  ba3  forperlofe  SfBort  serefyrt  (cause)  (Skitter),  she  tole- 
rates no  image,  adoring  the  incorporeal  word  alone. 

This  construction,  however,  is  not  as  extensive  in  German 
as  in  English,  and  entirely  inadmissible,  when  the  subject  of 
the  participle  is  different  from  that  of  the  verb,  or  when  in 
English  we  employ  the  compound  participle.  Thus  we  cannot 
say,  the  sun  being  risen,  I  set  out  on  my  journey,  but  when  the 
sun  had  arisen,  &c«,  a  I  §  tie  <Sonne  cutfgegangen  roar,  retf  te  id) 
ab  ;  after  having  breakfasted,  he  read  his  paper,  n  a  d)  b  e  m  er 
gefrnfyflncft  (jatte  (after  he  had  breakfasted),  la§  er  feine  3^ 
fcfyrtft  (see  page  279). 

§  176.  In  certain  expressions  only,  both  the  present  and 
the  perfect  participle  are  used  absolutely  in  the  accusative 
case ;  e.  g.  fcaS  Q3itd)  f  ofier,  ten  @  t  n  b  a  n  b  abgerecfynet, 
SWet  Abater,  the  book  costs  two  crowns,  exclusive  of  the  bind- 
ing ;  fte  feuftet  fyt'ncuiS  tn  tie  ftnftere  9?acr;t,  fca3  2(uge  »om 
38  tin  en  getritbet  (@  djtfler),  she  sighs  out  into  the  murky 
night,  her  eyes  bedimmed  by  the  gushing  tears ;  er  trat  tn  ba3 
3tmmer/  ben  §ut  auf  bem  ^opfe,  ben  ©tocf  tn  ber  ^)anb,  he  en- 
tered the  room,  with  the  hat  on  his  head,  and  cane  in  his  hand. 
In  this  last  example  the  participle  fyabenb,  having,  may  be  sup- 
plied, to  link  the  expression  to  the  subject  of  the  proposition. 

§  177.  The  perfect  participle,  when  formed  from  transitive 
verbs,  has  always  a  passive  signification,  and  is  therefore  used  ad- 
jectively  only  by  way  of  exception.  When  formed  from  reflexive 
or  impersonal  verbs,  it  is  employed  neither  in  an  attributive  nor  in 
a  predicative  sense,  but  serves  simply  to  form  the  compound  ten- 
ses;  as,  id)  Ijobe  mid)  gefrcut,  gecitgcrt,  Qcfdjftmt,  I  have 
rejoiced,  been  vexed,  ashamed;  e$  fyat  90  r  eg  net,  cjefcfynett,  it 
has  rained,  snowed  ;  but  not,  fcer  flcfrcute,  qcfcfya'mte  £ftann ;  nor,  fccr 
SOfann  ift  cjcfrcut,  gcfcbamt,  &c.  Of  intransitive  verbs  those  only, 
which  take  the  auxiliary  f  c  t  tt,  may  be  used  in  the  attributive  re- 
lation, as  well  as  in  the  predicative;  e.  g.  tag  £au$  ift  ctf>ge« 
I)  r  a  n  n  t,  the  house  is  burnt  down,  and  ba$  a&ge&rannte  ^>au^ 
the  house  which  has  burnt  down ;  tcr  ^reunt)  i  ft  a  n  g  e  !o  m  me  n, 
the  friend  has  arrived,  and  t  er  a  n  9  c  f  c  m  m  c  n  e  greunt/  the  friend 


477 

who  has  arrived.     Some  participles  have  assumed  the  signification 
of  adjectives,  and  may  even  be  compared.     (See  §  63.  1st.) 

Note.     The  government  of  verbs  is  treated  of  at  the  close  of  the 
table  of  irregular  verbs  below. 


ADVERBS. 

§  178.  An  Adverb  is  a  word  which  limits  the 
meaning  of  verbs,  of  adjectives,  and  of  other  adverbs. 
Adverbs  correspond  to  the  questions  where  ?  when  ? 
how  ?  to  what  degree  ?  &c. 

EXAMPLES. 

2$  0  iff  bag  $)ferb  ?  Where  is  the  horse  ? 

(St  ift  n  t  r  g  e  n  b  $  gu  finbcn.  He  is  nowhere  to  be  found. 

.fiemmen  (Sic  fy  c  r  c  t  n !  Walk  in ! 

SB  o  n  n  ift  cr  ancjtfemmcn  ?  When  did  he  arrive  1 

(£r  ijl  9  c  ft  c  r  n  gcfterbcn.  He  died  yesterday. 

£)cc  Jtnabc  fcfyrciOt  fcfyon,  after  CC  The  boy  writes  beautifully,  but 

licf't  f  cf)  I  e  d)  t.  reads  poorly. 

3)cr  SSatcr  tft  fc  for  fcctttiOt.  The  father  is  very  sad. 
£>te    S^cfc    tft    a  u  £  n  c  I;  m  c  n  b  The  rose  is  exceedingly  beauti- 

fd)Ciu  ful. 

§  179.  With  respect  to  their  signification,  adverbs 
may  be  divided  into  six  classes : — 

1st,  Adverbs  of  Place.  These  may  either  designate  rest  in  a 
place,  in  answer  to  the  question  where  1  as,  itberatt,  aflentfyat 
ben,  every  where  ;  ircjenbroo,  any  where  ;  mrgenfcS,  nowhere  ; 
fyt'er,  ta,  bort,  here,  there  ;  wo,  where  ;  augert,  without ;  t'nnert, 
within  ;  obert,  above  ;  unten,  below ;  fyinten,  behind  ;  »orn,  be- 
fore ;  recf)t3,  on  the  right  hand ;  ItnB,  on  the  left  hand ;  and 
the  compounds  :  broben  (bar^oben),  there  above  ;  btimten  (bar^ 
unten),  below  ;  brau^en,  out  of  doors  ;  ^tenteben,  here  below ; 
bteflfett^,  on  this  side ;  jenfett$,  on  that  side ; — or,  motion  or 
direction  towards  a  place,  in  answer  to  the  question  whither  ? 
bafcer,  along ;  fyterfyer,  hither ;  babm,  thither ;  fyerab,  down 
(towards  the  speaker)  ;  fytnab,  down  (away  from  the  speaker)  ; 
bergcwf,  up  hill ;  bercjab,  down  hill ;  ttorroartS,  forward ;  ritcf* 
«5art^,  backwards  ;  ()t  mm  elm  art  3,  toward  heaven,  &c. 

2d,  Adverbs  of  Time.     These  denote  either  a  point  or  pe- 


478 

riod  of  time,  in  answer  to  the  questions  when  ?  how  long 
since  ?  by  what  time  ?  as,  bcmn,  then ;  mamt,  when ;  bam  a  13, 
at  that  time  ;  mm,  je£t,  now  ;  etnjl,  once ;  ned),  still ;  fdjon, 
berettS,  already;  £otmal§,  fonfl,  heretofore,  formerly;  balb, 
soon  ;  funfttg,  hereafter ;  neultd),  jimgfl:,  recently  ;  cmfangS,  at 
first ;  be3  $?orgen3,  be§  3(benb3,  in  the  morning,  in  the  eve- 
ning ;  cjeftern,  yesterday ;  fyeute,  to-day ;  morcjen,  to-morrow ; 
je,  jemal§,  ever  ;  me,  never,  &c.  ; — or  a  duration  of  time ;  as, 
attegett,  at  all  times  ;  tmmer,  fretS,  always  ;  lange,  long. 

3d,  Adverbs  of  Modality,  which  are  either  affirmative,  nega- 
tive, potential,  optative,  interrogative,  or  imperative ;  as,  ja,  yes ; 
bod),  however ;  fret(td),  aroar,  though,  however ;  fiiwafyr,  roafyr* 
ltd),  ttnrf(td),  verily,  truly,  actually,  in  very  deed ;  fid)er(td), 
surely  ; — new,  no ;  ntd)t,  not ;  fetne§tt>eg§,  by  no  means  ; — 
wetfetcfyt,  perhaps ;  mafyrfcfyetnltd),  probably ;  etroa,  n>ol)(,  per- 
haps, indeed; — wenn  bod),  ta^  bod),  would  that ; — ofc,  if;  et* 
wa,  mot)(,  perhaps,  perchance;  mm,  now;  fcenn,  then;— htrd)* 
au§,  aderbtng^,  fdjlec^terbtng^,  by  all  means,  absolutely,  &c. 

4th,  Adverbs  of  Quantity,  derived  from  numerals,  and  an- 
swering to  the  questions  how  much  ?  how  many  ?  e.  g.  ettt)a3, 
somewhat ;  gcm^,  entirely ;  gemtg,  sufficiently ;  mel,  much ; 
mem'g,  little  ;  tfyette,  partly  ;  metftenS,  mefflent^etl^,  mostly,  for 
the  most  part;  erfreni,  firstly;  groettenS,  secondly,  &c. ;  ferner, 
further,  moreover ;  legtenS,  lastly ;  gmetmal,  twice,  &c. ;  euu 
fad),  simple  ;  welfad),  many  fold,  &c.  (§  80.) 

5th,  Adverbs  of  Quality  or  Manner,  which  answer  to  the 
question  how?  as,  gtticHt'd),  fortunately;  fd)Dtt,  beautifully; 
fcfylecfyt,  badly;  fletgig,  diligently,  dec.;  fo,  so,  thus;  me,  as, 
how;  eten  fo,  just  so,  &c.  Many  of  this  class  are  originally 
adjectives  or  participles. 

6th,  Adverbs  of  Intensity ;  as,  fefyr,  very ;  gar,  quite  ;  fo* 
gar,  even  ;  a'ltfjerjr,  bod)fr,  ungemetn,  extremely,  highly,  uncom- 
monly; ganjltcfy,  »btttg,  entirely,  fully;  betnaije,  fafl,  almost, 
nearly;  mir,  only;  faiim,  scarcely;  I)bc!)fren3,  at  the  most; 
menf^flen^,  at  least ;  rcett,  bet  roeitem,  by  far,  &c. 

§  180.       OBSERVATIONS    ON    THE    ADVERBS. 

Ofo.  1.  Beginners  should  carefully  mark  the  distinction  be- 
tween the  adverbs  f)  t  n  and  I)  c  r,  for  which  there  are  no  correspond- 
ing1 terms  in  English  ;  f)  t  n  denotes  motion  away  from,  and  fj  e  r 
approximation  towards  the  person  speaking.  These  words  have 
given  rise  to  a  number  of  compounds,  all  of  which  participate  in 
this  original  signification.  Examples  :— 


479 


Away  from, 

towards    the 

speaker. 

IjinaO, 

Ixrab, 

down  ; 

jjtnauf, 

fjcrauf, 

up; 

rjtnau?, 

fyerautf, 

out; 

fnnctn, 

h'rein, 

in; 

fyuuiOcr, 

fjciubcr, 

across. 

So  also  —  b  a  I)  t  n,  thither,  to  that  place  ;  b  a  r)  c  V,  thence,  from  that 
place  ;  b  0  r  t  f)  t  n,  to  yonder  place  ;  bortfjer/  from  yonder  place  ; 
roof)  in,  whither;  roofyct,  whence,  &c. 

Obs.  2.  To  adverbs  of  intensity  may  be  added  the  compound 
proportionals  j  c  —  j  c,  or  {  c  —  t)  c  ft  c,  or  jc  —  u  in  f  o,  the  —  the  ;  as, 
j  c  grower,  b  c  ft  o  fccffcr,  the  greater,  the  better  ;  j  c  (anger  cr  U'bt,  u  m  f  0 
fd)lcd)tcr  nnrb  a4,  the  longer  he  lives,  the  worse  he  becomes. 

Obs.  3.  The  adverb  of  place,  t)  a,  is  derived  from  the  demonstra- 
tive pronoun  b  c  r,  and  is  an  abbreviated  expression  for  an  bicfcm  £)rtc, 
in  this  place.  So  the  adverb  rc>o,  the  correlative  of  t>a,  is  derived 
from  the  relative  pronoun  rocr,  and  stands  instead  of  cm  nx'lcfyem 
£)rtc,  in  which  place.  Both  t>a  and  roo,  therefore,  are  termed  pro- 
nominal adverbs.  As  adverbs  of  place  they  are  combined  with  I)  t  n 
and  I)  c  r,  and  form  the  compounds  t>cif)tn,  tafjcr,  n>el)tn,  tuofxr. 

Obs.  4.  Besides  serving  as  adverbs  of  place,  t>a  (tar),  and  tt>0 
(n?cr),  are  often  compounded  with  prepositions,  to  supply  the  place 
of  the  dative  and  accusative  neuter  of  the  demonstrative  1)  c  r,  and 
of  the  relative  or  interrogative  it)  c  rx  n>  c  (  cr;  c  r  .  Thus  the  Ger- 
mans regularly  say  :  — 

fcafrct,  therewith,  instead  of  foci  fccm  ; 

recOci,  wherewith,  —  bet  weld)  cm  ; 

banrit,  thereby,  nttt  t>cm  ; 

rcemtt,  whereby,  nut  tx>c(cf)cm  ; 

babuvcf),  through,  by  it,  burcf)  t>aS  ; 

rcoburcf),  through,  by  which,  —  burd)  it)c(cl)c5  ; 

baftir,  for  that,  —  fur  ba$  ; 

ttjcftir,  for  which,  fur  rc>e(cr;e$  ; 

baran,  thereon,  an  bcm  ; 

tucran/  whereon,  —  an  tuctdjcm  ; 

baucn,  thereof,  rcn  bcm  ; 

n,  whereof,  »on  it)clcr;em  ; 

u,  thereto,  gu  bcm  ; 

n,  whereto,  gn  wctc^cm. 


Obs.  5.     Some    adverbs    are    compared    like    adjectives. 
Their  mode  of  comparison  has  already  been  explained  (§  68). 

Obs.  6.     On  the  position  which  the  negative    nicfyt  and 
adverbs  generally  are  to  occupy  in  sentences,  see  Lesson  C. 


480 
PREPOSITIONS. 

§  181.  A  preposition  is  a  word  which  is  joined  to 
nouns  or  pronouns,  to  point  out  their  relation  to  some 
other  word  in  the  sentence. 

§  182.  The  following  is  a  list  of  the  German  pre- 
positions : — 

on,  on,  by,  near ; 
^instead; 

cwf,  on,  upon ; 
ciuS,  out,  out  of; 
cw£er,        >  without,  on  the 
cwperfycilb,  J      outside ; 
fcct,  near,  with,  by  ; 
frinnen,  within ; 
fcieffcit,  on  this  side  ; 
burd),  through  ; 
entgccjcn,  over  against ; 
fur,  for,  in  favour  of ; 

aetf"'  S  towar<^s»  against  > 

lU, 

tyalbcn,  £>on  account  of; 


•  next  to ; 

nefccn,  beside ; 
ticOft,  together  with ; 
cbcrfyalb,  above ; 


fammt,  together  with  ; 
fctt,  since,  from  ; 
tro§,  in  spite  of; 


,  ? 

tyalbcn,  £>o 
hcMcr,  j 


urn,  about,  round  ; 
um  —  ttJtUcn,  for  the  sake  of  ; 
t,  notwithstanding  ; 


ijtntcr,  behind  ; 
in,  in,  into  ; 


jcnfett,  beyond  ; 
Craft,  by  virtue  of; 
lancjS,  along; 
tout,  according  to  ; 
nut,  with  ; 


nad),  after  ; 


c,  by  virtue  of; 
Don,  from,  by,  of; 
$or,  before  ; 
roaf)tent>,  during  ; 
tvcgcn,  on  account  of; 
ttnfcct,  against  ; 
$u,  to  ; 

^ufolcjc,  in  consequence  of  ; 
giitt>it>ct,  against  ; 
grwfcfyen,  between,  betwixt. 


§  183.  Prepositions  require  the  substantives,  with  which 
they  are  connected,  to  be  put  either  in  the  Genitive,  the  Dative, 
or  the  Accusative.  Some  few  require  the  dative  in  one  signi- 
fication, and  the  accusative  in  another. 

I.    PREPOSITIONS    WHICH    GOVERN    THE    GENITIVE. 

§  184.  The  prepositions  which  govern  the  genitive  case, 
are: — anftatt  or  ftatt,  fyalben  or  fyaiber,  cutfjerfyalb,  ir 


481 

cterfyalb,  imterfjalb,  btefieit,  jenfet't,  fraft,  but,  mittcljl  or 
mttteljl,  nngeacfytet,  urtroett  or  wtfern,  tfermoge,  roaforenb,  roegen, 
urn  —  widen,  and  lcwg£,  sufolge,  tvo£  (see  §  188). 


EXAMPLES. 

2C  n  ft  a  1  1  fdncS  23ater£,  instead  of  his  father  ;  bet  (5f)rc  F)  a  1  6  e  n, 
for  the  sake  of  honour  ;  auJK't  [)  a  (0  ber  Statt,  without  the  city  ; 
jcnfeit  be£  (5>ra6e*,  beyond  the  grave;  fraft  metneS  2(mte$,  hy 
virtue  of  my  office  ;  (cut  beg  JBriefe*,  according  to  the  letter;  u  n- 
n?  c  1  1  be$  $ird)I)ef$,  not  far  from  the  church-yard  ;  ro  a  ()  r  c  n  t>  t>c^ 
Jtrtcgcfv  during  the  war  ;  u  m  t>c$  :5r^'^cn^  widen/  for  the  sake  of 
peace  ;  t  r  o  $  fciner  9^ad)tx  in  spite  of  his  power. 

II.    PREPOSITIONS    WHICH    GOVERN    THE    DATIVE    ONLY. 

§  185.  Prepositions  which  govern  the  dative  case  alone, 
are  :  —  cui3,  auger,  bet,  Innnen,  entgegert,  gecjenuber,  gema'g,  mtt, 
nad),  nac^ft,  suna'cfyjl,  nebft,  fammt,  fett,  »on,  311,  juiwfcer,  and  o  b, 
when  it  is  equivalent  to  n>  e  g  e  n/  on  account  of. 

EXAMPLES. 

©r  Fcmmt  cutS  tcr  jttrcljc,  he  comes  from  church;  aupcr  2)tt: 
tvarcn  2(Uc  t)a,  all  were  present  except  you  ;  cr  t^ofynt  b  c  t  m  23cic!er, 
he  lives  with  the  baker;  b  inn  en  (always  refers  to  time)  gwet 
SOBedx'n,  within  two  weeks;  cr  cjet)t  i()tn  entgegen/  he  goes  to 
meet  him*;  m  it  metncr  9)Zutter,  with  my  mother  ;  n  a  d)  tern  £aufe, 
to  the  house  ;  n  e  0  ft  fcinem  Jrcunbc/  together  with  his  friend  ;  fail 
tern  Sage,  since  that  day  ;  3  u  fcer  £Uiellc,  to  the  spring. 

III.     PREPOSITIONS    WHICH    GOVERN    THE    ACCUSATIVE    ONLY. 

§  186.  The  following  prepositions  require  the  accusative 
only  :  —  barer;,  fiir,  gegert,  ofyne  or  fonfcer,  urn,  and  wtber. 

EXAMPLES. 

©r  rctf't  burcf)^  gan$c  Canb,  he  travels  through  the  entire 
country  ;  t)  u  r  cb  if)n  tun  icf)  gtftcfltc^/  by  him  I  am  made  happy  ;  cc 
belofynt  mid)  fiir  metne  9}2uf)c/  he  rewards  me  for  my  trouble  ;  ter 
SSatcr  fcrgt  fiir  feme  jttnfcer,  the  father  provides  for  his  children; 
9DJann  f  ii  r  93Jann,  man  by  man  ;  tcl)  l)o(te  t)a^  f  it  r  ®d)meicbe(et,  I  re- 
gard this  as  flattery  ;  q  e  9  e  n  ben  Strom,  against  the  stream  ;  g  c- 
g  en  etnanber,  towards  each  other;  ol)ne  Swetfef/  without  doubt; 
fonber  (55(etd)cn,  without  an  equal;  um  etn  ill)r,  at  one  o'clock; 
um  ben  ,88ntg,  about  the  king;  id)  faufte  e^  um  gn?o(f  ^reu^er,  I 
bought  it  for  twelve  kreuzers  ;  n?ibcr  fetnen  Sccun^/  against  his 
friend. 

21 


482 


IV.       PREPOSITIONS   GOVERNING    BOTH     THE    DATIVE    ASTI* 
ACCUSATIVE. 

§  187.  The  following  prepositions  are  sometimes  connect- 
ed with  the  dative,  and  sometimes  with  the  accusative  :  — 
an,  auf,  (unter,  tn,  neben,  iiber,  urtter,  »or,  and 


With  respect  to  all  the  prepositions  of  this  class  it  is  to  be  ob- 
served, that  when  they  imply  rest  or  motion  in  a  place,  they  are 
followed  by  the  dative,  in  answer  to  the  question  where  ?  but  when 
they  imply  a  tendency  or  motion  from  one  place  to  another,  they 
are  followed  by  the  accusative,  in  answer  to  the  question  whither  ? 


EXAMPLES. 

($r  roofynt"  an  b  c  m  9)Jeerc,  he  lives  near  the  sea  ;  cr  geljt  a  n  b  a  £ 
itfcr,  he  goes  towards  the  shore  ;  ct  fd)tctbt  ci  n  fetnen  Srcun^/  ne 
writes  to  his  Yriend  ;  a  n  ber  ©rcinje,  at  the  frontiers  ;  cr  arbcttct 
n  u  f  bem  $elt>c,  he  labours  in  the  field  ;  a  u  f  bcr  (Sd>ulc,  at  school  ; 
cr  gtcfjt  n  u  f  ba£  2anb,  he  moves  into  the  country  ;  a  u  f  ben  ?COenb, 
for  the  evening  ;  f)  t  n  tc  r  bcm  £xuife,  behind  the  house  ;  cr  fcfet  ftd> 
^tntcr  ben  £)fcn,  he  takes  his  seat  behind  the  stove;  cr  ift  i  n  bee 
&tabi,  he  is  in  the  city;  IcT)  CJC(K  in  bic  Stabt,  I  am  going  into  the 
city;  im  Some/  in  anger;  in  btc  £cmb  ncl;mcn/  to  take  into  the- 
hand;  cr  (le()t  ncbcn  nur,  he  is  standing  by  my  side;  tct)  fe^te 
mid)  n  c  0  c  n  tfen,  I  seated  myself  by  his  side  ;  u  b  c  r  ben  (Stcrnen, 
above  the  stars  ;  (i  0  c  r  ben  glup  gefycn,  to  go  across  the  river  ;  u  r^ 
ter  freiem  .ptmmet,  under  the  open  sky;  untcr  fcinen  .  JBntbcrn> 
among  his  brothers;  t»cr  tljm,  before  him;  cr  ftellt  fid)  t>cr  bcit 
(Sptccjol/  he  takes  his  position  before  the  looking-glass  ;  5  n;  i  f  d)  c  it 
nur  unb  tt)in,  between  me  and  him,  &c. 

§  188.  Of  those  prepositions  which  govern  the  genitive 
(§  184),  the  following  three  may  also  be  connected  with  the 
dative  :  —  (  d  n  9  §  ;  as,  Idn$§  bey  UfetS,  or  IdngS  kern  lifer,  along 
the  shore  ;  —  3  u  f  D  I  cj  e,  which  with  the  genitive  precedes,  and 
with  the  dative  follows  the  noun  ;  as,  jufolge  fceS  SBericfyted,  or 
bem  33end)te  gufolcje,  according  to  the  report  ;  —  and  t  r  D  i}  ;  as, 
trots  fetrtcm  fyerben  ©d)tcffale,  in  spite  of  his  hard  fate  ;  tro£  ber 
©cfal)rr  in  spite  of  the  danger. 

§  189.  When  prepositions  precede  the  definite  article,  they 
often  coalesce  with  it  into  one  word,  as,  t  m,  for  inbem,  &c.  A 
list  of  these  contractions  has  been  given  above  (§  10). 


483 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

§  1 90.  A  conjunction  is  a  word  by  which  two  simple 
sentences  are  united  into  one  compound  sentence* 

§  191.  Conjunctions  have  been  variously  classified  accord* 
ing  to  their  different  significations.  They  are  : — 

1st,  COPULATIVE  ;  unb,  and ;  cmd),  also  ;  foroofyt  a(§,  as  well 
as  ;  aitbcm,  moreover ;  ciugerbem,  besides  ;  roeber — nod),  nei- 
ther— nor  ;  md)t  nut  or  mcfyt  atletn — fonbern  and),  not  only — 
but  also  ;  ferner,  furthermore  ;  jugletd),  at  the  same  time. 

2d,  DISJUNCTIVE;  entroeber — o bet,  either — or;  e.  g.  eitt* 
tt>  e  b  e  r  grog  o  b  e  r  Hem,  either  large  or  small. 

3d,  ADVERSATIVE  ;  aber,  attem,  but ;  fcnbern  (used  only 
after  a  negative),  but ;  bod),  jebod),  yet ;  bennod),  nevertheless  ; 
fonft  else  ;  m'elmefyr,  rather  ;  fytngegen,  on  the  contrary ;  md)t 
foroofyt — al3  welmefyr,  not  so  much — as  rather. 

4th,  CONDITIONAL;  menu/  fo,  wo,  roofern,  if;  fafl3  or  tm 
gatf,  in  case  ;  «jo  md)t,  if  not ;  e.  g.  «>  e  n  n  id)  nut  etn  vOitttel 
nwgte,  ben  ©djaben  iweber  cjut  $u  mad)en!  if  I  only  knew  some 
means  of  repairing  the  damage  !  In  German  the  conjunction 
roenn  is  often  omitted,  and  then  the  verb  (if  the  tense  is  simple) 
or  the  auxiliary  (if  the  tense  is  compound)  takes  the  place  of 
the  conjunction ;  m  d  r  e  ft  Sit  fyier  geroefen,  mem  SSrttber  ware 
md)t  geftorben,  for  roenn  Sit  fyter  gemefen  warefl,  &c.,  if 
thou  hadst  been  present,  my  brother  would  not  have  died. 

5th,  CONCESSIVE  ;  gwar,  to  be  sure,  indeed,  true  ;  nnettjofyf, 
obmot)(,  obfd)on,  ob^(etd),  wenn  g(etd),  though,  although ;  e.  g. 
o  b  n)  o  \)l  ba^  letter  fd)6n  iff,  fo  fann  er  bod)  m'd)t  au^geten, 
though  the  weather  is  fine,  he  is  nevertheless  unable  to  go  out. 
Compare  also  page  296. 

6th,  CAUSAL  ;  benn,  for  ;  ba,  roeil,  nun,  since  ;  e.  g.  t'd)  gefye 
mtt  Str,  w  e  i  (  Sit  ben  recfyten  SBeg  md)t  fcnnfl,  I  go  with  you, 
because  you  do  not  know  the  right  way ;  sortt>art3  mugt  Sit, 
benn  ritcfroartS  fannjl  Sit  ntc^t  met)r,  you  must  go  onward, 
for  back  you  can  no  longer  go. 

7th,  ILLATIVE  ;  alfo,  bamm,  therefore ;  bafyer,  hence  ;  beg* 
fyalb,  begwegen,  nm  begmitten,  on  that  account;  fo(glt'd),  conse- 
quently ;  e.  g.  ev  i\t  franf,  f  o  1 9  1 1  df)  mug  er  ju  £>aiife  bleiben, 
he  is  sick,  consequently  he  must  remain  at  home ;  e§  cjeftel 
i^m  md)t  mebr  unter  ben  5)?cnfd)en,  begroe^en  sog  er  fid)  in  bte 
(Sinfamf ett  juvi'uf,  he  was  no  longer  pleased  among  men,  there- 
fore he  retired  into  solitude. 


484 

8th,  FINAL  ;  fca£,  that ;  cwf  fcag,  fcamtt,  in  order  that ;  um 
511,  in  order  to ;  «jtr  ftrafen  tfyn,  b  a  m  i  t  er  fid)  beflfere,  we  punish 
him  in  order  that  he  may  reform  ;  eilen  ©te,  fcamt't  <Ste  md)t 
gu  fpa't  fommen,  make  haste,  lest  you  come  too  late. 

9th,  COMPARATIVE  ;  a(S,  vwe,  gtetdjtw'e,  as,  just  as ;  fo,  so, 
thus ;  a(3  roenn,  a(3  ob,  as  when,  as  if;  g(etd)  a(S  ob,  just  as 
if;  er  fiircfytete  fid),  aU  ob  er  attetn  mare,  he  was  afraid,  as  if 
he  were  alone  ;  er  jMfte  fid),  aU  fdjltefe  er,  he  acted  as  if  he 
were  asleep. 

10th,  Conjunctions  expressing  a  relation  of  time  : — bamafe, 
barm,  at  that  time,  then ;  tnfceffen,  meanwhile  ;  »ort)er,  invw, 
e^er,  before,  sooner ;  fcarcwf,  thereupon ;  fyernad),  afterward  ; 
fettbem,  since ;  al$,  t>a,  when ;  roann,  when  ;  nja^renb,  whilst ; 
tnbem,  tnteffen,  in  that,  during  which  time  ;  In3,  until,  &c. 

§  192.  For  those  conjunctions  which  require  the  verb  to 
be  put  at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  see  page  180.  On  com- 
pound conjunctions,  cntroeber — oter,  &c.,  see  page  332. 


INTERJECTIONS. 

§  193.     Interjections  are  words  or  articulate  sounds 
expressive  of  sudden  emotion. 

The  most  important  interjections  used  in  German,  are  : — 

act) !  alas  !  ah !  falto  !  holla  ! 

df) !  ah  !  l)ui !  hurrah  !  quick  ! 

auf !  up  !  l)ufd) !  hush  ! 

brat* !  bravo  !  fnadfS  !  crack  !    snap  ! 

ct !  why  !  eigh  !  Icifcet !  alas  ! 

frtfci) !  brisk  !  quick  !  ol) !  0 !  oh  ! 

fort !  away !  paff !  puff !  puff ! 

©(iicf  ^u  !  success  to  you  !  pfui !  fy  ! 

60  1  ha !  pc^taufcnt) !  'zounds  ! 

f)a,  f)a, 


F)C !  fyc  t>a !  soho !  ho  there !      fd)t ! 

fyAt !  hold  !  tcpp  !  agreed  ! 

phalli  Wl^lo,  behold! 


fief;  ba ! 
!  hey-day!     "J^wo!  ala«! 

j)tlf,  |>tmmri !  heaven  help  !       n?cl)(an  !  well  then  ! 


485 

Remark  1.  As  interjections  express  no  thought,  but  simply  out- 
breaks of  feeling1,  they  neither  govern  other  words,  nor  are  they 
governed  by  any. 

Rent.  2.  They  stand  in  connection  with  every  case,  but  more 
particularly  with  the  nominative,  -griftf) !  ©cfcflcn,  fctfc  $ut  £cmt) ! 
brisk  !  my  workmen,  be  at  hand  !  £  t>cm  Sljorcn  gefcfytcfyt  c»  rccl)t ! 
the  fool  deserves  it ! 

Rem.  3.  The  use  of  rcol)t,  rocfyc,  $etf,  is  elliptical,  fct  being 
understood.  They  always  require  the  dative  which  depends  on 
the  omitted  verb  ;  e.  g.  rochc  (fct)  tf)m  !  wo  be  to  him  !  Jbcit  (fct) 
£)it!  hail  thou  !  The  interjections  e,  ad),  and  pf  ui  are  frequent- 
ly put  with  the  genitive  ;  e.  g.  pfut  fcet  ©cfyanfcc !  for  shame !  ncf) 
t>cg  @(cntcS !  alas,  the  misery  ! 

NOTE.  For  the  general  principles  of  CONSTRUCTION  and  a 
recapitulation  of  the  RULES  OF  SYNTAX,  which  are  scattered 
through  the  book,  see  Lesson  103,  pages  356 — 363. 


486 


TABLE   OF   CLASSIFICATION 

OF   THE 

IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

REMARK. — From  this  table  must  be  excepted  the  sixteen  irregu- 
lar verbs,  which  in  our  list  form  the  first  class.* 


J 

i 

o 

rS 

^ 

11 

I 

^1 

Infinitive. 

h 

Past 
Participle. 

i 

i 

e 

a 

e 

©cFjcn,  to  see, 

fab, 

flcf^cn. 

e 

^clfcn,  to  help, 

Mf, 

Qcl)o(fcn» 

11 

a 

0 

i 

©tnnen,  to  reflect, 

fann, 

^cfonncn. 

in 

t 

a 

u 

Srinfcn/  to  drink, 

rtanf, 

cjctvunfcn. 

IV 

0 

ie 

a 

fatten,  to  fall, 

IW, 

gcfaltcn. 

K 

ie 

©djrdfcen/  to  write, 

fc^rtc^ 

9cfd)rie6cn. 

V 

et 

i 

i 

Scipcn,  to  bite, 

t)tp, 

QcOtffcn. 

a',  cm, 

vi 

tr 

0 

0 

(Sdjtepcn/  to  shoot, 

fd^cp/ 

gcf^offen. 

VII 

a 

u 

a 

(^cf)(o^cn/  to  beat, 

f*,9, 

gefdjtagcn. 

The  5th  and  6th  classes  include  the  greater  part  of  the  irregular  verbs. 


487 


EXPLANATORY  REMARKS. 

I.  The  first  class  changes  the  radical  vowel  e  into  a  in  the 
imperfect,  and  resumes  it  in  the  past  participle.     Ex.  ©eben,  to 
give  ;  imperfect  gab  ;  past  part,  gegeben.     To  this  class  must 
be  added  :  bitten,  to  entreat  (beg),  which  changes  the  radical 
vowel  t  in  the  same  manner,  as  :  imperfect  bat  j    past  part, 
gebeten. 

II.  The  second  class  changes  the  radical  vowel  e  or  {  into 
a  in  the  imperfect,  and  in  the  past  participle  into  p.     Ex.  Iftef)* 
men,  to  take ;  imperf.  nafym ;  past  part,  genommen ;  geroinnen, 
to  win  ;  imperf.  geroann  ;  past  part,  genoonnen.     To  these  must 
be  added,  gebd'ren,  produce  (to  give  birth  to),  which  has  a  in- 
stead of  t  in  the  root,  as  :  imperf.  gebar ;  past  part,  geboren. 

III.  The  third  class  changes  the  radical  vowel  t  into  a  in 
the  imperfect,  and  in  the  past  part,  into  u.     Ex.  Scfyltngen,  to 
sling  ;  imperf.  fctylang,  past  part,  gefcfyhmgcn ;    except  fctngen, 
to  hire ;  imperf.  bung  ;  past  part,  gefcungen  5  fcfytnten,  to  flay ; 
imperf.  fcfyunb ;  past  part,  gefcfyunten ;  and  tfyun/  to  do  ;  imperf. 
tfyat;  past  part,  getfyan. 

IV.  The  fourth  class  changes  the  radical  vowel  a  into  te  in 
the  imperfect,  and  resumes  it  in  the  past  participle.     Ex.  £)at 
ten,  to  hold;  imperf.  fyt'elt;  past  part,  gefyalten  $  except  fang  en, 
to   catch ;  imperf.   ftng  ;  past  part,  gefangen.     The  following 
conform  to  the  principle  of  the  rule,  resuming  in  the  past  part, 
the  radical  vowel  or  diphthong  of  the  present :  (aufen,  to  run  ; 
imperf.  Itef ;  past  part,  gelaufen ;  ge^en,  to  go ;  imperf.  gtng ; 
past  part,  gegangen  ;  betgen,  to  order  ;  imperf.  fyfeg  ;  past  part, 
gefyeigen ;  rufen,  to  call ;  imperf.  rtef ;  past  part,  gerufen  ;  ftcgen, 
to  push  ;  imperf.  ftte£ ;  past  part,  gejlo^en. 

V.  The  fifth  class  changes  the   radical  vowel  et  into  te  in 
the  imperf.  and  in  the  past  part,  or  before  a  double  consonant 
into  u      Ex.    S3tetben,  to  remain ;  imperf.    blteb ;  past  part. 
geMteben ;   fcfynetfcen,  to  cut ;    imperf.  fc^nttt  j  past  part,   ge* 
frf?nttten. 


488 

VI.  The  sixth  class  changes  the  radical  vowels  :  5,  cm,  e,  t, 
it,  6,  ii,  into  o  in  the  imperf.  and  past  participle.     Ex.  ©cfyroci* 
rert,  to  fester ;  imperf.  fcfyroor  ,  past  part,  gefcfyworen ;  faugett, 
to  suck ;  imperf.  fog ;  past  part,  gefogen ;  fcmfen,  to  drink  to 
excess;  imperf.  foffj  past  part,  gefeflp en  ;  fyebert,  to  lift ;  imperf. 
tyob ;  past  part,  gefyoben ;  »ertt)trrenr  to  embroil  (to  confuse)  ; 
imperf.  sermorr ;  past  part,  ^ermorren;  bteten,  to  offer  ;  imperf. 
tot ;    past   part,  geboten ;  fc^moren,  to  swear ;  imperf.  fdjwor 
fdjwur) ;    past  part,  gefcfyworett ;    lugen,  to  lie ;    imperf!  (09  ; 
past  part,  gelogen* 

VII.  The  seventh  class  changes  the  radical  vowel  a  into  u 
in  the  imperfect,  and  resumes  it  in  the  past  participle.     Ex. 
2Bad)fen,  to  grow  •  imperf.  HnicfyS;  past  part,  geroacfyfen ;  jle^en/ 
to  stand,  has  jlanb  in  the  imperfect  (formerly,  however,  jtunt>)» 
and  in  the  past  parf.  gejtcmberu 


489 


to      ' 

.1 

f  s. 

.l^  13 

fi  =1 

. 

r2  2 

S.£^ 

^ 

^        O  .j                                  C  ** 

""^  OH 

f  &a 

1  1  1 

"£•3 

"s 

vE      52  *l                            '22 

r§    "fl 

o  •-• 

SM 
CO 

*i  "^ 

#• 

• 

f  | 

1^^ 

•z  &*&  % 

S5=ff|l|  ||f  | 

"°    0 

(Li 

£  £  JO  >0 

^*S<42SSe2u2-      22 

wf 

*o  53 

cricncncr 

en  CD  cr  crxr:  CD  en  en       ^n  en 

i 

|| 

f     8 

*-  Jri   .*   *i 

«; 

S 

.f  g  <»• 

3 

c  ti  ii  ii 

S.H-e^ 

W    W  :<3  -ZZ 
•£j  ^j  &  /=> 

Illfliiiilfi 

•^ 

"5  2~2 

ts         ^ 

*e^e*e*e 

•B  *€"  -S"  *B  *B  *6"  *S"  -S"      'S-S' 

H—  3 

*^  s 

«r       > 

£D 

'-*    C  _d 

1 

O 

^   ca  -g 

#* 

« 

§s^ 

£ 

*^  -j  •  • 

.•  .;  .j     .  O  -i  #*        *i     • 

HH 

^."o  "o 

-2  a  t5 

.S-"*  ^ 

"3 

o 

1 

Ifl'n- 

J-»    jL    <3    S 

^e-e-e^ 

iUltlililf  i 

rH 

*»  S"  ® 

w 

c3    °    G^ 

«« 

EH 

OH£.§ 

i 

PH 

to  ^ff  ^ 

B 

c 

O 

CL,-^  ^ 

& 

•     -     •  *J7 

•   §   cf5^-    '     *     *           '  S&  tz 

CO 

je^'"1 

"  . 

"5 

«    '  tl  S  1             '  fes    *  §'§ 

CO 

**   w  "c 

T3    ^ 

t* 

^^       ^  |j  ^                 £.       t*  i^ 

•^^ 

fi  »—  *    cd 

C    rt   3 

V 

£2          £±      x   **                            l^ 

0 

"«  .2  ,2 

o  -^ 

|5| 
l/i 

^3 

1 

^  Iff       ^  -if 
I  1»»       ^  »» 

s 

.1 
<*H 

! 

^   «s  1  s         !H    §  a 

• 

OJ    ° 

o 

—    .«-  .»- 

g  12 

* 

«ll     i 

"S  ^ 

.1 

^"s^     -j    § 

M  ^2 

CJ      ^ 

• 

,£  ^ 

£» 

**  ^Q 

I0S 

'S 
^ 
a 

•«  ^>  s  « 

o  o  ^-° 
X^22 

M-^JJ  °  s  s  «2J^ 

t3S||532-3|o 

ft 

0     M 

llll 

s^    ^»    S  «-3 

g||silllgl|g 

^  S  .s  s^^  S  S  S  ^  S  15=^ 

£1* 

«$«^             S5     (9^5?5? 

490 


PQ 


w 

EH 

o 
o 


o 
o 


02    * 


EH         'r-   , 

hH        §  ' 

.      "1  Q^ 


1  §' 


*>$ 


0 

IJ 


§ 


•3  •§  -a  •  g 

^   .S      W3  Cj 

"all  s 


1 


"^   be  52  T3 

^  §^  J 

8  'o    03  bD 

02  +*  *»  *H 


I 


I 

£ 

3 


c 

0 


bD 

02 


03 


I 


•*••  cu 

S.JH 


g  g    g 

°  "5      £ 

O  '™         *-<  ' 


£ 

c3 


IS 

- 1 
BI 

O3     ;_, 


e§S, 

g/E  a 

eS.'3 


i\ 


I    I 


••C* 

>=> 


^     &H 

o>  -j3 


S      o  3 

^ 


491 


JS25 


I     I     M     I 


1 


.  .     e- 


C    -s> 


-  ^.J      «i— 

gjT       :-•  i- 


:a    If     ^l*.fi|.ft| 

—  -j  ?>     n>  »O  ;o   :«  »C  '^  '^  '^     W     J-»     >— 

J>^>  sO>^>  •^>^/J^«Sj^O»C/-^j'^>^>'J^ 


" 


^  O     O     G 


v«  ^    .  ^  ^g-  jr 

*i  *>  ^  ^.—  o  S 
a  ;S  «  ^  *->  j-»  >-> 


I     §     li 


«  *" 

r*^  C^ 


o 
bo 


J  t 

.38  I 

rO       O 

o3  3 


1 


o       .^     - 

p  o3    Q3 

o  > 
«  o 

3      o| 

F^ 


S'rt 

O)     &« 


iiifiWii 


jtji 

Sy^y-^-S^  S^  S^i  ^S^^'c^^^^^^^^^  S^  c ^ 

'  •  "M^O'^^CJ"'  ""i^O'^o 

If5o5         Oi  W         <— i         O^D         ^OvSC^rMT^OO^C^^        ^^ 


-S.s 


492 


ill 

III 


If  1 1 


d 

'S 


g  c       5  c 
<n^i      f>  y 

IS     II 


I  il 

" 


gg 


c  cs 


I 

*e* 


JO          JO  JO  ^  JO  JO 

>e 


ill 


If 


I 


.2 
1 
I 

•8 


c  e: 
rs  55 

JO  JO 


"T~ 


.S 

(D    O 


U 

^      §H  ^ 

3  o      3 


. 


g 


3   ^  g  S      S^  o 

*.^&:^.       c'*t.r 

C    re    C 


-li  l-slf^i 


s        .  . fc3 ' 

Q      co  <vo      co  Q 


493 


,.  *:  s  s  s 
'«=*.''  !  'I  '-Iff  s" 'it   '  ' 


S3 
.11 


g   P 


en   en  en  en  en  en  en  en  en   en     en   en 


tfc 


a 


.?    jt 


scn 


ri   f  a  . 

i  s.   ^ss, 


i  r. 


en 
*e 


«f 

S  S*i 

:    *^^ 
^*  ^*  ^_ 

*'rt±£?£ 


Jifii 


.*>  o  o  o  --a  :zr 


liifli 


C  0   K 


j 

J3 

cT 

§ 


494 


cL  £  a 

Is.'8 


s^ 
8-3 


s 


E    C 


C    C          l.*  0 

en  cn       en  < 


cr  c*i 
cncf) 


I 
1 


&    -^    2 

00      cficn      en 


§  §    .  -J 
^"en'cn 

srsar 


c  «       c: 


!•*  i 


£>          C 


«>         o  vs 
en      cncn 


K 

T3 
P? 

-1- 
fef 

£«: 


.a 

» 


?  2 


&  -»— • 

y  t  ^y%    1 

J_>  .«_• 

*>  en.< 


8 


M    « 


I    .f! 

cn     "cn . 


g     3 
S     ^ 

O         <R 


.S  <X> 


'    tT  G      ^     oT       r, 

®         U   ^  od  -S 

g*   3  B-^.S 

o       o^  3 

"*t.  ^"^         £> 


-Pn2  «g-g 

p^  <^»        .^.  ,__ 


I   r-4  O  ^   O 


495 


II        111       I    I    I      8r 


g§    sg 

fj  It 


si,    ggs    g 

4=  c     S  *  s-    ;£- 


*     *     *f  J 

t    I     111 

o  <>  o    ^>    «> 


'  «i          «?* 

»  »r«N        w^ 


*"   2  •  ..• 

5*  i    "sIS1    S    ^g5    *  ^tf    £=• 


^    I 


.a 


I 


1; 


3 

I 

.& 


*8- 


•J2  a 

aT 

CS3 

1 

2 

2 

.f-    1 

s     M 
1)    g 

q 

•5 


o 


bo 

si 

" 


o  5\2 


r> 

11 


^ 

<D        „ 


"|  3  03^' 
~"'  c  c  ^  c  *§ 

"i  (ii    •>!    r-    cj  r~i 


10  -O 


^fllll 

g  g  «  ^  g  a 

^§13     '  ^  ai  ^ 

T^  O   Tj! 


o  ^2 


*3il 


2-d 

•a^ 
s^l 
11 

cr  w 

«    33 

PXJ 


l-s 


496 


Ill 

? 

111 

f  1    1    1            1 

uf  I  I  §  I    |) 

1    1 

e* 

«-> 

»_.    s_                        t—  .                          M 

r2 

*-  "H, 

^  s  §  ^       g 

g       g 

<£'£ 

cc^cg^c        c 

£ 

"S  "H  J>    o                 2 

JC>  J^^  S  -**^  *?J  .j**    c>)         <3^ 
C3     <3     <3  -—  »  .»-•     '-*    trf            O 

1    "i 

«>    o    tj    t>                 t> 

<3^  C71,  <3^  Cfi  <>i  <>i  C>}          <?3 

<3^         CTi 

>* 

1 

*73 

1 

IE? 

*:!_  .^      * 

^  S  s  2           ^ 
'c  c  '5  to           *2 

1  44s*  4<±  |5  ^ 

M       .^ 

1  <  * 

i.iis    «• 

S"SS555^  § 

S°S»Q. 

jl 

s 

1 

fill     1 

t"***2^*     * 

0  ~  § 

c 

I 

*§>§>§•§       ^e 

^•e-B-s-e^g^e    ^e 

a>  **  ^6" 

o 

^_j 

1 

c           f 

A 

.  & 

:  :  :J       ^ 

.  •  *•  •     p 

:         •' 

P3  §3 

^      ^ 

.                  O                 r£? 

J»I 

§         2 

vS.  's"               '-**                  ^ 

<3                   ^J 

;2  ^S           -^           k- 

1" 

£        /=» 

ij  ^             «            5 

''S 

!    I    I  cT 

*  ^Jti-    *     *  (±1    *          ^ 

.         . 

•- 

«          ° 

*  ^="3"             ^-              0 

1 

!r>             ^° 

»1        »        & 

"8 

•^              S 

JO  >=>                  JO                    M 

X            £ 

0                 ^3 

•*             cd                  d> 
-§                vS         ^S 

^     1         ^ 

.2      aTjj        5 

""1          §                  | 

^r 

o"    o  -1  ^tS  o 

->'S     -  a?    *"        ® 

.S       *o 

E» 

"*"*      °   c  ^  ^*  ** 

»^    C    §3    0^2           °^^ 

J   bJD        ca 

'3 

C3 

"*    ^  :  *  t  "3  § 
ccSS-g^S    ^ 

SS^Isl^^S: 

^2         -2 

•*—  O-  C       v  ^_i     C  «g"   <D 

CCC^Sf^S*"*    c 

S*       ji> 

"c  >t:  i  s  ®  -o  ~2  c5 

C3         '?> 

sIsSS^s|S 

g     g 

tf>  ift  C9  *?         0  «0 

f  U    W,    ^     ,-,     ^     ^^               <•- 

i-       o 

497 


II 


w^  £ 
i 

OO  OO  £3    OD         OO 


- 


C    5          « 


55 
<3" 

oo 


*e*£*      ^° 

°s  §    "g 

oo      on 


i 


C  3 

«.        cr 


tt 


4 


I 


55   5    5 


I 


.a 

I 
* 


SrS 


isl 
I 

en. 

2 


t 


Jf 


.  2 


S  5  53  n 


S3 
>S* 


2  ~ ' 

3  £X;i 
.  »•  ^    co 


S-S-  » 


£ 


^       o7^   ^  2 
•s      *•  «i  JL!      H 


-2      -^ 


^S      B 


a, 


^       ° 


bfl 


rl^i 


^    2 


1JI- 

5«i* 

,    B§^s 

3      a  to  *3  § 

3     *o  s.S  5 

O    S    d 

S  H  ^0 
-I--Q  o  ** 


«   ^s" j 


499 


s&- 

~s 


.4||     ||     I     I     II 


g  g  c       3  Sj 


c 

o 

e 


B          C 


« 


,t  I 

^•S  s    s  s     g    -c     i  g      J?i:i:i§:   is 

% 

I 
> 

-ll 

-^S1  <J=- 

^«'S  J 

s 

J 


fefl 


..    g 


r— 1     tr5  8»5  ^*^( 


ii  1 

iH   ill 


499 


ll    1    1 


J: 


ej=ggggg 

<J3  C73  <?}  O1)  <S}  <55  C>}  <3} 


II 

a     s 

&     & 


III 

c  S"           ^S 

-                                            _J  .~    ZT  "^T   o           CJ  ?*                   ?» 
<3          o    o          o    3  •.,«-?  ^zi  V~?  "Ci  Mi  -    -         wi 

>g"  C? 

1 1      ti  I 

;§•   •§:           g£        «  a 

*    tt            e^  ^ 

j&   S           S§i          .  ^  t§i 

bc-S- 

3    M            £%          £*""  ^ 

"2=       ?              S:                 tf  ^-5    .2 


8, 

CO     0 


s 


I   ! 

§0  «T 

III 


ittfi 

&.-pg  ^ 


C    ^ 

O      rfi 
' 


>**° 


v& 

19 


c3  o5  S  oT 


500 


ill 

>  o  do 


1       I   I 


1       1 


:  c  g  c 


-->        .> 

•c  a  a  a 


o    3 

B  a 


"S-'s-     'S-'s-'s-S- 

. •       en  en  en  en 


SS  r^      C 

a  a    J>£- 

enen       en  en 


-Blee 


-e>ev 


£    £    ££ 


C    C8   3 

!*! 

P-i  aT» 


•s 

*s 


ti=L 


<N  CO         CO  O         i-li-i 


501 


*l 


t  nSgO  £ 

>c»  £;  cr?4*i  c  g 

a  o   ~  ~  o  *?= 

»>  -^     -_.   '^~'^~  '  r^ 

en  en  en  en  en  en 


a^.^io  \riSj_>  0  ^oic: 
^^^1  ^aitg:  ^  «-  I  «£- 
enencn  er.  en  en  en  en  en 


3s 

/=>          . 

c       *s 
.e:        ^. 

>e 


-  —       ^^ 


& 


I 


I 

t 


e±. 

S3 


bJD  ^ 

^^T            OH  'S 

-^     S3            03  » 

•tT  S  2  b? 

&«  &1  ^           Q  .2 


« 


2    a- 


.2  d 


g-s 


»-  a  -^ 


g  n  s 
- 


O  CO  CO  C*         i-<  ( 


!  s  g  £ 

i^g-3 


[iff] 

s5  « is  g 
p?^  I  «'«- 


502 


C    C,  S 


o 
.*S   b*D 


c        g  g 
S^       &S 


sir   |       B-yLJ    s,s 


g^ 


|a| 

I1 
1 


eiii: 

>f>  3    3 


^   <D 

11 


•I     3 


:2     3 


o  ° 


5      S  S      g      S  e>e  < 

>^        cr.-=>       «^>  <£•*£  j>  -^  j 

*S"     "2  5     "^  I>  -5  f^  £  i 
S  " 


.   o 


^sc«=       ?  c  c  a 

3  Iff  g  I. fit 

1~  MMlA   Q  ^ 


503 


\         1 
1          1 


*" 

1 

£ 

§ 

g      •     g 

S5     g     4? 

jl         J*        g 

c 

« 

a 

JO 

u 

c 

If 

JO 

l§ 

lilt 

}_>     W     W     J- 

rworrcn 

4 

!          « 

15       «» 

s 

? 

1 

K  »  »  K 

* 

» 

& 

2s  • 

^> 

. 

. 

#* 

US 

,A 

§1£^>      *§* 

"S  s 

o  ts= 

lift. 

«3^£*e 

B 

^ 

-*-• 

*C    ^ 

»  ^  S     S 

»%i 

?  ^ 

<^3 

^^s  *s" 

.Si 

SB 

j-*  »>      r> 

»  **      *» 

g  § 

K 

i  K  S  § 

§ 

•e 

^•S* 

^^"^^     ^6* 

*G*N 

-X'U> 

*S* 

*6'*S'«9' 

^ 

*B" 

»j  »-*  .».» 

i»-» 

•"•* 

Y(^ 

05 

£T>   • 

Ti   CD 

5  S 

^j  '"^               ^« 

ti  ^3^*^      *s* 

^     ^     0            ^ 

1 
•e 

^ 

u 

JO 
H 

<i> 

1 

Ill 

* 
•f-t 

b 

t 

* 

°s 

*^S~    5 

* 

« 

s 

1  sss 

_>§• 

s 

f 

.  .    i 

I* 
£ 

^o 

U 

» 

N 

O 

?" 
"g 

H 

^ 
K 

•i-  •     : 

S 

0 

hD 

2 

M 

JO 

1 

i 

M 
JO 

<6 
1       1 

1*S          'en                    & 

JQ       g  ** 

°              w 

13 

J 

>i 

§ 

^s" 

O)  O 

he  o 

.2            W 

-4.8  i 

M 

c 
o 

.S 


a*  •  ££      ;Q 


^      S 


J->  O  .s*^> 

"1  **  "~*  "^ 

)    03  pQ          S?    O  ?Q 


£ 

S  g  §   - 


2       ^  -3 

3  3 

^S  I 

iff  I 

I  G  «  ^ 


504 


gll 

jt-1 


INI!    | 


tr 
'a 


:~      S      g 


•  B-' 


a 


t:      c£  s 
•^j      ^      «^c  ji 

o  S  o 

gag 

C?)  CS^  C53 


1^ 


a 
>e 


a  a  "a  "a  a        1  a 


f 
a 


flssl 

a  a  a  a  a 


cs        a     .  <3 
B       2-02 


It: 


* 

^ 


a 

JO 


*  i 


a 

JO 


I 
1 


'§  p  ?  S  3  o  si 


o 

2 

o 


I 

^3 


G    co 
O  .±S 


505 


1    I 


£js3 

•§§«? 
IU 

ooc-> 

W      *-i      *-» 

o  *•'  ' 
-S  5-3 

^O  <•*—  £ 

2  H  3 

Hi 

C  _.  O 

•-*  T3  en 

t^  C!  O 

O    c3  j^ 

1-U 

Isl 

i=? 

S-t-g 
8  c  a 


§ 


'•SH^- 


2 
2 

^~ 
'§ 

X 

"2 

^ 

r 

' 

is  active  and  regular. 

),  is  an  active  and  regular  verb. 

1 

o 
1 

I 

<g 

o 

00 
(C 

> 

'  = 

*n 

& 
h 

*^ 

^ 

1 

J 

o; 

1 

O 

o 

5 

3 

-f— 

^   ,-. 

.^ 

— 

i 

• 

^ 

o 

t  ^ 

SS 

c 

C' 
00 

kh 

1 

0 

r: 

0 

.f 

<D 
03 

1       r 

P 

0 
O 

^ 

1 

il 

o 
••3 

-g 

i 

^ 

cr 
a 

0 

DQ 

C 

I 

O 

'1 

'•n      4 

rt 

tf 

beg 

^ 

I 

1 

7 

"Z 

3 

a 

c 

'o 

?  = 

i 

^1 

* 

s 

3 

i 

N 

i 

5 

tS- 

o 

c 

fi 

M 

•* 

^  ^ 

C/2 

g" 

^ 

^  S 

f.s 

.*§ 

S3 

S 

S* 

B 

S 

rz; 

~^ 

Qi      '^" 

p  rt 

p^ 

•£> 

S 

13 

^  i 

"^' 

r_l     •-" 

O    o 

•J-( 

£ 

cr, 

S 

^OQ 

«jts 

>» 

. 

^ 

r. 

a 

ll 

506 


OF  THE  GOVERNMENT  OF  VERBS. 

The  subject  of  the  verb  is  always  in  the  nominative  ;  the  di- 
rect or  immediate  object  is  put  in  the  accusative.  Ex.:  Sav( 
fcfyretbt  etnen  23nef,  Charles  writes  a  letter.  Sari  is  the  sub- 
ject  or  nominative,  etnen  55rfef  is  the  immediate  object  or  accu- 
sative. 

I.     VERBS  WHICH  ARE  FOLLOWED  BY  THE  NOMINATIVE. 

The  following  verbs  take  after  them  only  the  nominative  ;  if 
they  have  an  attribute,  it  is  in  like  manner  put  in  the  nomi- 
native : — 

<&  i  t  n,  to  be.  (Setn  23rutcr  roar  etn  proper  |>ctt>,  his  brother  was 
a  great  hero. 

SB  c  r  t>  c  n,  to  become.  (5t  rourbe  cin  wcfycr  SOfann,  he  became  a 
rich  man. 

SB  ( tf  i  t>  c  n,  to  remain.  (5r  HicO  f!ct$  mcin  getrcuer  £rcunt>,  he  al- 
ways remained  my  faithful  friend. 

.£>  c  i  ji  c  n,  to  call  (be  called).  9)?etn  attcjlcr  SBruber  fyctpt  (Sarf, 
my  eldest  brother  is  called  Charles. 

©  d)  c  i  n  c  n/  to  appear.    3)cr  £00,  fcfyicn  nrir  cine  (Srimbe,  t 
cm  Sag,  the  day  appeared  to  me  an  hour,  the  year  a  day. 

With  some  passive  verbs,  such  as  genannt  roerben,  to  be 
called,  named.  Ex. :  Sr  fann  etn  brauer  -JWann  genannt  n>erbcn, 
he  can  (may)  be  called  a  good  man ;  gefcfyolten  roerfcen,  to  be 
chided. 

II.    VERBS  WHICH  GOVERN  THE  GENITIVE. 

a)  The  following  verbs,  besides  the  direct  object  in  the  accu- 
sative, have  an  indirect  object  in  the  genitive : — - 

?(  n  f(  a  q  c  n,  to  accuse,  93Zcm  ftagtc  ifyn  t>c$  2)icbflaOle»  an,  they 
accused  him  of  theft. 

^  c  1  c  h  r  c  n,  to  instruct.  (Jr  fiat  mid)  ctnc^  SBcffcrn  Mcbrt,  he  has 
instructed  me  in  something  better  (put  me  right). 

VH  c  v  o  »  b  c  n,  to  deprive,  rob.  93?cm  hat  thn  fcincS  3Scrmocjon«»  Oc* 
raubt,  they  have  deprived  (robbed)  him  of  his  fortune. 

&cfd)tt(btgen,  to  charge.  93Jan  hat  i()n  teti  .pcd)ivrrat^  fcc* 
fd}ll(^t^'\t/  they  have  charged  him  with  high  treason. 

(£•  n  1 1  c  1)  i  a,  c  n,  to  exempt,  dispense.  9)?an  (jot  tl)n  fcuu'S  TTmtcS 
Cntfo^t,  they  have  dismissed  him  from  his  office. 

U  c  b  c  r  f  ti  h  r  c  n,  u  b  c  r  ID  c  i  f  c  n,  to  convict.  937an  !mt  thn  cU 
iu*$  a>i'rbvcd)cn^  iibcvfti()rt  (iiiuTivicfi'n)/  they  have  convicted  him  of  a 
crime. 

U  c  b  c  r  f)  e  b  c  n  *,  to  exempt.  Sa'manfrcm  ejncv  @acl)C  ubcv^cOcn,  to 
exempt  a  person  from  any  thing  (or  trouble). 


507 

U  e  fr  e  r  9  e  it  $  e  n,  to  persuade,  convince.  (£r  tyat  mid)  fceficn* 
liK'  v^iK}t,  he  has  convinced  me  of  it. 

£>  e  v  ficbcrn  (see  Obs.  Lesson  64),  to  assure.  3d)  t»crfid)cre 
<2  te  uu'tner  ^>cd)ad)tuncj  unt)  mctncr  Sicbc,  I  assure  you  of  my  esteem 
and  affection. 

Jo  or  iv  c  if  en  *,  to  banish.  Gtnen  te$  2antc*b  wrrocifcn,  to 
banish  a  person  from  his  country. 

&*  u  r  1 1  a,  e  n,  to  honour,  estimate,  (Sr  nntrfcicjt  raid)  feineS  a>cr^ 
trau  cn$,  he  honours  me  with  his  confidence. 

b")  A  considerable  number  of  reflexive  verbs  require  an  in- 
direct object  in  the  genitive,  as  : — 

©  t  cb  a  n  n  c  f)  in  c  n*,  to  interest  one's  self.  (5r  nafym  fid)  be*  £in? 
h'5  an,  he  interested  himself  in  (for)  the  child. 

©icb  be  Men  en,  to  avail  one's  self.  £sd)  befricne  mid)  ticfet 
fcbeiKn  ^H'leaenfH'it,  I  avail  myself  of  this  good  opportunity. 

©id)  b  e  f  I  e  i  9  e  n  *  or  b  c  f  I  c  i  (H  cj  c  n/  to  apply,  attach  one's 
self.  J^ofK'tfncjc  5Mcb  tcr  ^111)01^,  attach  yourself  to  virtue. 

<Sid)  f  c  t  n  t(  £  2(  m  t  c  £/  f  e  i  n  c  r  J  c  r  t>  c  r  u  n  q  b  c  9  c  b  c  n  *,  to 
resign  one's  office,  to  desist  from,  renounce  one's  claim,  pretension. 

©  i  cb  b  c  m  a  cb  1 1 9  c  ny  fi  cb  0  c  m  c  i  ft  c  r  n,  to  possess  one's  self, 
to  make  one's  self  master.  9)?an  bcmacbtt^te  fid)  t>e$  JDtcbc^  they  pos- 
sessed themselves  of  (captured)  the  thief. 

©id)  cine?  £)  r  t  c  $  b  c  fi  n  n  c  n  *,  to  remember  a  place. 

Sid)  t>c$  SBctncS  cntfyaltcn*,  to  abstain  from  wine. 

Sid)  ctner  ©adje  c  ntfd)  i  a  a,cn*x  to  divest  one's  self  of 
(give  up)  any  thing. 

©id)  t)  c  r  2C  r  me  n  c  r  b  a  r  m  c  n  *,  to  take  upon  one's  self  the 
cause  of  the  poor. 

©icb  e  t  n  e  $  93erfprcdjen$  (or  an  f  c  t  n  93  e  r  f  p  r  c  d)  c  n) 
c  r  i  n  n  e  r  n  (Obs.  D.  Lesson  71),  to  remember  a  promise. 

©id)   fetnetf   3ornc£   crivcbtcn/to  check  one's  anger. 

©  i  cb  e  t  n  c  t  2C  n  t  tv  o  r  t  3  c  1 1  6  ft  c  n,  to  console  one's  self  with 
an  answer  (await  a  reply  in  confidence). 

©id)  f  c  i  n  c  £  9?  c  i  cb  t  !j  u  m  £  r  ii  f)  m  c  n,  to  boast  of  one's  riches. 

©icb  ctncr  fcbtccbtcn  £ant>luno,  fdjamcn,  to  blush 
(feel  ashamed)  at  a  bad  action. 

©id)  ctncr  ©acbc  untcrfangcn*  (cber  untcrfte^cn)/  to 
venture  upon  (undertake)  any  thing. 

©id)  cineS  felcben  ®(iic!$  tJcrmutFjcn,  to  anticipate 
(calculate  upon)  such  good  fortune. 

©icb  cinct  ©ad)C  ttctfcljctt,  to  be  aware  of  (prepared  for) 
any  thing. 

©id)  c  i  n  c  r  ©  a  cb  c  tv  c  i  g  c  r  n,  to  hesitate  upon  (refuse)  any 
thing. 

«  This  verb  is  used  also  with  oon,  as :  3d;  bin  sou  3$ret  ^mwbfc^aft  liber* 
jeitgt,  I  am  convinced  of  your  friendship. 

b  This  may  also  take  after  it  the  preposition  (IU§,  as :  Scmanbcn  an§  bent 
ganfcf  Otmctfen,  to  banish  a  person  from  his  country. 


508 

c)  Many  verbs  are  used  indifferently  with  the  genitive  or 
accusative  ;  but  with  the  genitive  they  mark  a  sense  more  gen- 
eral and  more  absolute  than  with  the  accusative,  as  :  — 

2C  cb  t  c  n,  esteem.     3cr>  ncbtc  fcinct  (eN'r  tfjn),  I  esteem  him, 

SB  e  fe  2  r  f  c  n,  to  be  in  need,  fSMr  bcfciirfcn  Sfjrcr  (ofccr  SOrc)  £ufe 
fe,  we  are  in  need  of  your  aid. 

(£•  n  t  b  c  f)  r  c  n,  to  spare,  do  without.  3d)  fcmn  fcincr  (ebcr  tl)n)  nic()t 
cntbdjrcn,  I  cannot  spare  (do  without)  him. 

(£•  r  ru  a  r)  n  c  n,  to  mention,  make  mention.  ($t  mvafynte  3f;rcc 
(eK't  <£k),  he  mentioned  (made  mention  of)  you. 

©  c  n  t  c  p  c  n,  to  enjoy.  Gkmef'c  t>c$  ScbcnS  (efcct  tag  Cebcn),  en- 
joy life. 

5)  f  i  c  Q  c  n,  to  take  care,  (£T  pfU'Qte  fcincr  (ofccr  fctne)  ©efunfcrjcit, 
he  took  care  of  his  health. 


c  n,  to  spare  (take  care  of),    gftcm  muff  fcincc  (efcct  tf)n) 
fcfycncn,  they  must  spare  him. 

d)  The  verb  few,  to  be,  requires  the  genitive  in  the  following 
expressions  :  — 

©  c  tv  o  fj  n  t  f  c  t  n,  to  be  accustomed.  (§t  iff  tcffcn  nid>t  gcrcefjnt, 
he  is  not  accustomed  to  it. 

5)  c  r   93f  c  t  n  u  n  3   f  c  t  n,   to  be  of  opinion. 

®  u  t  c  n  9)2  u  t  ft  c  £/  Q  u  t  c  r  0  a  u  n  e  f  c  i  n,  to  have  courage, 
to  be  in  a  good  humour,  in  spirits. 

SB  i  U  c  n  5    f  c  t  n7  to  have  the  intention. 

3)  c  $  £  0  t)  c  $  f  C  i  u,  to  die,  be  dead.  (Sr  tft  fat  £ot>c$,  he  is 
a  dead  man. 

©  u  t  c  r  £  o  f  f  n  u  n  g  f  *  t  n/  to  he  with  child. 

Rem.  —  Verbs  always  require  after  them  the  same  case  as 
the  past  participles  used  adjectively.  (See  the  government  of 
adjectives,  Lesson  93.) 

e)  Verbs  referring  to  time,  require  in  like  manner  the  geni- 
tives, although  not  followed  by  a  preposition,  as  :  — 

5)  c  $  932  c  r  tq  c  n  $,  t>  c  $  ?C  6  c  n  b  $  f  p  a  3  i  c  r  e  n  g  c  f)  c  n,  *D 
take  a  walk  in  the  morning,  in  the  evening. 

5)  c  $  9?cicbt$c  (b  c  r  92  act)  t  or  tTie  9?acr)t  I)  tribute!)) 
a  r  b  c  i  t  c  n,  to  work  at  (all)  night. 

5)  c  $  83  o  r  m  i  1  1  a  cj  6  a  0  r  c  i  f  e  n/  to  depart  (start,  set  out) 
in  the  morning,  forenoon. 

£)  e  $  9?  a  cb  mi  1  1  a  9  $  f  p  a  g  i  c  r  c  n  r  c  1  1  e  n/  to  ride  out  (on 
horseback)  in  the  afternoon. 

£>  c  $  S  a  9  £  (0  c  t  o  t>  c  r  a  m  £  a  cj  c)  a  r  b  c  i  t  c  n,  to  work 
by  day,  in  the  day  time. 

c  Custom  requires  that  the  word  !ftacl)r,  although  feminine,  takes  here  an  § 
in  the  genitive. 


509 

S  u  n  b   S07ontag$gcbt  Me   $  o  ft  a  &/  the  mail 
leaves  on  (every)  Sunday  and  Monday. 

Wl  c  i  n  5  r  c  u  n  b  t  o  nun  t  f  c  d)  5  m  a  t  b  c  $  3  a  F)  r  $  (o  b  c  t 
i  in  3  «  b  r  e)/  $  n>  c  t  m  (i  (  t  c  5  932  c  n  a  t  $  (o  b  c  r  i  m  93?  o  n  a  t), 
c  t  n  in  a  (  Me  3.$  ccb  c  (accusative),  my  friend  comes  six  times  a 
(in  the)  year,  twice  a  month,  once  a  week.  (See  Lessons  31  and  54, 
Obs.  B.) 

III.  VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE. 

Besides  the  direct  object  in  the  accusative,  verbs  often  have 
an  indirect  one,  which  is  put  in  the  dative.  Ex.  : — 

3  c  in  a  u  t>  c  m  c  t  n>  a  £  3  c  0  c  n,  to  give  something  to  some- 
body. 

3  c  in  a  n  ft  c  m  f  a  3  c  n,  m  c  ( b  c  n,  f  d)  r  c  i  0  c  n,  a  n  t  n>  e  r= 
t  c  n,  to  say  to,  mention  to,  write  to,  reply  to  somebody. 

The  verbs  which  require  the  dative  are  : — 

a)  Most  neuter  verbs  which  do  not  admit  of  a  direct  object 
in  the  accusative,  as  : — 

3  t'  in  a  n  b  c  m  a  n  9  c  lj  c  r  c  n,   to  belong  to  somebody. 
3  i*  m  a  n  t)  c  in   a  u  6  ID  c  t  d)  c  n  *,  to  avoid  somebody. 

f  a  I  (  c  n,  to  please.     (Sr  gcfallt  mirfefjr,  he  pleases  me  much. 
3  c  HI  a  n  &  c  m    $  c  ()  c  r  cb  c  n,   to  obey  somebody. 
3  *-'  in  a  n  t>  c  m   9  ( c  i  cl)  c  n  *,  to  resemble  somebody. 

b)  The  following  reflexive  verbs  : — 

©  t  cb  c  t  n  0  i  ( t>  c  n,  to  imagine  to  one's  self.  £u  Wbcft  2)ir 
cin,  you  imagine  to  yourself. 

©  i  cb  c  r  fl  c  b  c  n  *,  to  yield,  surrender.  <5t  crcjtOt  fid)  bet  Siu 
gcnt<,  he  yields  to  virtue. 

(2  i  cb  n  a  b  c  r  n  (c  b  e  r  ft  d)  n  n  f)  c  n),  to  approach.  9?af)mt 
(Sic  fid)  Mn  Jcucr,  approach  the  fire,  ©r  natjct  fid)  nur,  he  approaches 
me. 

€>tcf)  ttorftenen/to  represent  to  one's  self,  to  imagine.  3d) 
ftcllc  nut  t>cr,  I  represent  to  myself. 

©  t  d)  ro  i  b  m  e  n,  to  devote  (consecrate,  dedicate)  oneself.  (Sc 
rwtmict  fid)  ben  ®cfd)aftcn,  he  devotes  himself  to  business. 

c)  Certain  impersonal  verbs.     See  page  158,  Obs.  A. 

(S  e>   t  ft   m  i  r   a  n  g  ft/  I  am  afraid. 
(£•  £   f  d)  c  t  n  t    2)  t  r/   it  appears  to  you  (thee). 
58enn  e$   3bncn   bclte&t,  if  you  please,  like. 
<£  g   ^atmttgett&umt,   I  dreamt,  &c. 

IV.     VERBS  GOVERNING  THE  ACCUSATIVE, 
a)  All  active  and  transitive  verbs  are  followed  by  the  accu- 
sative of  the  direct  object,  which  in  the  passive  voice  becomes 
the  subject  nominative,  as  : — 


510 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 


3  d)  f  d)  a  £  c  m  c  i  n  c  n  ft  r  c  a  n  b,  SttctR  Jrcunb  rcirb  r»en  mtr  cjcfd)a£t. 

I  esteem,  appreciate  my  friend. 
3d)  cf)tc  bi  e  SB  a  ^  r  fy  e  i  t,  I  Sic  SBa&rfyctt  nnrfc  sen  nut  gccfyrt. 

honour  the  truth. 
@  r  1  1  c  b  t  t>  a  $  ,R  i  n  t>,  he  loves  £5a3  ftint>  tvtrb  fen  if;m  geltcOt. 

the  child. 

b)  Most  of  those  reflexive  verbs,  which  ought  to  be  consid- 
ered as  active,  expressing  an  action  which  terminates  in  the 
agent  himself  (see  Lesson  70),  as  :  — 

3  eft  f  r  c  u  c  m  t  cf)/  I  rejoice. 

5)  u   f  cb  a  m  ft   Si  d),   you  are  (thou  art)  ashamed. 

23  c  m  ii  f)  c  n  (Sic  fi  d)  n  t  d)  t,  do  not  trouble  yourself. 

c)  Certain  impersonal  verbs.     (See  page  158,  Obs.  A.),  as  : 

6  $   fj  it  n  g  c  r  t  mid)/  I  am  hungry. 
.(5  £  f  r  i  c  r  t  i  I)  n,  he  is  cold. 

d)  The  following  verbs  govern  two  accusatives,  the  one  of 
the  person,  and  the  other  of  the  thing  :  — 

$  c  1  9  c  n  *,  to  call,  be  called,  order.  <£t  Ijctflt  mid)  ctncn  Smarten, 
he  calls  me  a  fool.  SScr  fyat  Sid)  tag  gcfycificn?  who  ordered  you  to 
do  that] 

9Z  c  n  n  c  n  */  to  name,  call.  3d)  m'rmc  ifjn  mcincn  Jrcunt)/  I  call 
him  my  friend. 

©  d>  c  (  t  c  n  *,  f  d)  i  m  p  f  c  nxd  to  abuse.  <5t  fcbaft  (fdjimpftc) 
mid)  cincn  barren,  he  called  me  a  fool  by  way  of  reproach. 

^  It  must  not  be  forgotten  that  the  verbs  ^cijjett,  ttettttett,  fc^eltett,  and  fc^tm* 
^>fen  have  two  nominatives  in  the  passive. 


D.  Appleton  fy  Co.  have  recently  published 

HISTORY    OF    GERMANY, 

FROM  THE  EARLIEST  PERIOD  TO  THE  PRESENT  TIME. 

BY 

FREDERICK  KOHLRAUSCH, 

Chief  of  the  Board  of  Education  for  the  Kingdom  of  Hanover,  and 
late  Professor  of  History  in  the  Polytechnic  School. 

Translated  from  the  last  German  edition, 
BY   JAMES   D.    HAAS. 

One  elegant  8vo.  volume,  of  500  pages,  with  complete  Index,  SI  50. 

TRANSLATORS    PREFACE. 

The  high  merits  and  distinguished  character  of  the  original  German  Work,  by  Pro- 
fessor Kohlrausch,  of  which  this  is  a  translation,  have  long  been  acknowledged.  A 
work  which,  d tiring-  a  period  of  thirty  years,  has  enjoyed  so  much  popularity  as  to  have 
gone  through  several  editions,  embracing  a  circulation  of  many  thousand  copies  ;  a 
production  which  has  extended  and  established  its  good  repute,  even  in  its  original  form 
far  beyond  its  native  clime,  to  England,  France,  Belgium,  Italy,  America,  &c.  (in  some 
of  which  countries  it  has  been  r«  printed  in  German,)  and  has  thus  become  a  standard 
bo<>k  of  reference  in  almost  all  thi  Universities  and  principal  public  as  well  as  private 
educational  Institutions.  Such  a  p  iblication  possesses  ample  testimony  proving  it  able  to 
create  a  lasting  interest,  and  confirn.  ng  its  claims  to  consideration  and  esteem. 

The  aim  of  the  distinguished  author,  in  this  valuable  history,  is  thus  simply  but  dis- 
tinctly expressed  by  himself:  "  My  sole  object,"  he  says,  "  has  been  to  produce  a  suc- 
cinct and  connected  development  of  the  vivid  and  eventful  course  of  our  country's  his- 
tory, written  in  a  style  calculated  to  excite  the  interest  and  sympathy  of  my  readers, 
and  of  such  especially  who,  not  seeking  to  enter  upon  a  very  profound  study  of  the  sources 
and  more  elaborate  works  connected  with  the  annals  of  our  empire,  are  nevertheless 
anxious  to  have  presented  to  them  the  means  of  acquiring  an  accurate  knowledge  of 
the  records  of  our  Fatherland,  in  such  a  form  as  to  leave  upon  the  mind  and  heart  an 
enduring,  indelible  impression." 

That  our  industrious  historian  has  attained  his  object,  the  intelligent  reader  will  find 
in  the  interest  excited,  the  clear  views  i't.r»arted,  and  the  deep  impression  effected  by 
Ins  animated  portrayals  of  both  events  and  individuals.  This  has  been  the  original  and 
acknowledged  characteristic  of  Herr  Kohirausch's  work  throughout  its  entire  existence  j 
but  in  the  new  edition,  from  which  this  translation  has  been  rendered,  he  has  endeavour- 
ed to  make  it  as  perfect  as  possible,  both  in  matter  and  style,  and  besides  this  has  en- 
riched it  with  many  valuable  notes  not  contained  in  the  former  editions  :  thus  making  it 
in  reality  a  concise,  yet,  in  every  respect,  a  complete  history  of  Germany. 

It  is  important  to  remark,  that  Professor  Koh'rausch  is  a  Protestant,  and  one  distin 
guished  not  less  for  his  freedom  from  prejudice  and  impartiality,  than  for  the  comprehen- 
siveness of  his  views  and  the  high  tone  of  his  philosophy.  The  general  adoption  of  the  work 
—alike  by  Protestant  and  Romanist — is  proof  sufficiently  convincing  of  the  impartiality  ot 
his  statements,  and  of  the  justice  of  his  reflections  and  sentiments. 


"  After  England,  no  country  has  stronger  claims  upon  the  attention  of  Americans  than 
Germany  Its  institutions,  language,  literature  and  national  character  combine  to  ren- 
der its  history  highly  interesting.  The  place  it  has  occupied  among  nations  for  1000 
years — that  is,  ever  since  the  era  of  Charlemagne — has  been,  on  the  whole,  second  to 
none  in  importance  Some  of  the  greatest  inventions— among  them  gunpowder  and  the 
art  of  printing — owe  their  origin  to  the  Germans.  The  literature  of  Germany  is  now 
exciting  a  marked  influence  over  our  own,  and  we  can  never  forget  that  Germany  is  the 
cradle  of  the  Reformation. 

"  Notwithstanding  all  these  claims  upon  our  attention,  it  is  not  to  be  denied  that  the 
history  of  Germany  has  been  very  little  known  among  us.  Few  persons  except  the  highly 
educated  have  more  than  a  very  measrre  knowledge  of  the  outlines  of  German  history. 

*'  The  publication  of  Kohirausch's  History,  which  is  a  standard  work  at  home,  comes  m 
very  opportunely  to  supply  the  dearth  of  information  on  this  interesting  topic.  It  fur 
nishes  a  most  valuable  compeud  ;  and  will  tend  to  spread  in  our  country  a  knowledge 
of  one  of  the  most  refined  as  well  as  most  learned  of  modern  nations.  Few  of  the  his- 
torical works  of  our  day  are  more  worthy  of  the  public  patronage. —  Erenhff  JUirrvr, 


A  NEW  SCHOOL  AND  REFERENCE  DICTIONARY, 

Published  by  D.  Apphton  <5f  Company. 


A  DICTIONARY   OF   THE   ENGLISH    LANGUAGE* 

CONTAINING    THE 

PRONUNCIATION,  ETYMOLOGY,  AND  EXPLANATION 

Of  all  words  authorized  by  eminent  writers ; 

TO    WHICH   ARE    ADDED, 

A    VOCABULARY    OF    THE    ROOTS    OF    ENGLISH    WORDS, 
AND    AN    ACCENTED    LIST    OF  GREEK,  LATIN,  AND   SCRIPTURE    PROPER   NAMES. 

BY   ALEXANDER   REID,   A.  M., 

Rector  of  the  Circus  School,  Edinburgh. 

WITH    A    CRITICAL    PREFACE, 

BY  HENRY  REED, 

Professor  of  English  Literature  in  the  University  of  Pennsylvania. 

One  Volume  12mo.  of  near  600  pages,  neatly  bound  in  leather.    Price  $1. 

Among  the  wants  of  our  time  was  a  good  Dictionary  of  our  own  language,  espe- 
cially adapted  for  academies  and  schools.  The  books  which  have  long  been  in  u-e, 
were  of  little  value  to  the  junior  students,  being  too  concise  in  the  definitions,  and 
immethodical  in  the  arrangement.  Reid's  English  Dictionary  was  compiled  e\[ K  -  ly 
to  develop  the  precise  analogies  and  various  properties  of  the  authorized  words  in 
general  use,  by  the  standard  authors  and  orators  who  use  our  vernacular  tongue. 

Exclusive  of  the  large  numbers  of  proper  names  which  are  appended,  this  Diction- 
ary includes  four  especial  improvements — and  when  their  essential  value  to  the 
student  is  considered,  the  sterling  character  of  the  work  as  a  hand-book  of  our  lan- 
guage instantly  will  be  perceived. 

The  primitive  word  is  distinguished  by  a  larger  type  ;  and  where  there  are  any  de- 
rivatives from  it,  they  follow  in  alphabetical  order,  and  the  part  of  speech  is  append- 
ed, thus  furnishing  a  complete  classification  of  all  the  connected  analogous  words  of 
the  same  species. 

With  this  facility  to  comprehend  accurately  the  determinate  meaning  of  the  English 
word,  is  conjoined  a  rich  illustration  for  the  linguist.  The  derivation  of  all  the  prim- 
itive words  is  distinctly  given,  and  the  phrases  of  the  languages  whence  they  are  de- 
duced, whether  composite  or  simple ;  so  that  the  student  of  foreign  languages,  both 
ancient  and  modern,  by  a  reference  to  any  word,  can  ascertain  the  source  whence  it 
has  been  adopted  into  our  own  form  of  speech.  This  is  a  great  acquisition  to  the 
person  who  is  anxious  to  use  words  in  their  utmost  clearness  of  meaning. 

To  these  advantages  is  subjoined  a  Vocabulary  of  the  Roots  of  English  Words, 
which  is  of  peculiar  value  to  the  collegian.  The  fifty  pages  which  it  includes,  fur- 
nish the  linguist  with  a  wide-spread  field  of  research,  equally  amusing  and  instruct- 
ive. There  is  also  added  an  Accented  List,  to  the  number  of  fifteen  thousand,  of 
Greek,  Latin,  and  Scripture  Proper  Names. 

With  such  novel  attractions,  and  with  such  decisive  merits,  the  recommendations 
which  are  prefixed  to  the  work  by  Professors  Frost,  Henry.  Parks,  and  Reed,  Messrs. 
Baker  and  Greene,  principals  of  the  two  chief  grammar  schools  at  Boston,  and  by  Dr. 
Reese,  Superintendent  of  Common  Schools  for  the  city  and  county  of  New  York,  are 
justly  due  to  the  labors  of  the  author.  They  fully  corroborate  the  opinion  expressed 
by  several  other  competent  authorities,  that  "  Reid's  English  Dictionary  is  peculiarly 
adapted  for  the  use  of  schools  and  families,  and  is  far  superior  to  any  other  existing 
ftunilar  compilation." 


TEXT  BOOK  FOR  COLLEGES  AND  SCHOOLS. 


Appleton  Sf  Co.  have  recently  published  the  third  edition 
GENERAL 

HISTORY    OF     CIVILIZATION 
IN     EUROPE, 

From  the  Fall  of  the  Roman  Empire  to  the  French  Revolution. 
BY    M.  GUIZOT, 

Late  Professor  of  History, now  Prime  Minister  of  France. 
With  occasional  Notes  by  C.  S.  HENRY,  D.D.,  Professor  of  Philosophy  and 

History  in   the   University  of  the  City  of  New-York.      One  volume 

12mo.     Price  $1  00. 

"  We  hail  with  pleasure  the  republication  of  this  able  work.  It  is  terse  and  full,  and 
adverts  to  the  most  interesting  topic  in  the  social  relations  of  mankind,  the  progressive 
improvement  of  the  European  nations  frinn  the  overthrow  of  the  Roman  Empire  by  the 
Goths,  and  Huns,  rind  Vandals,  in  the  Fifth  Century. 

"  The  work  of  M.  Guizot  comprehends  a  Course  of  Lectures  which  he  delivered,  and 
which  contain  the  spirit  of  Modern  History,  all  condensed  into  a  focus,  to  illuminate  one 
ni.-st  impressive  feature  in  the  annals  of  ihe  world.  A  concise  view  of  the  chief  themes 
will  accurately  unfold  the  importance  of  this  volume. 

A  The  introductory  lecture  is  devoted  to  a  discussion  of  the  general  subject  in  its  prin- 
ciples ;  which  is  followed  by  the  application  of  them  to  the  condition  of  European  society. 

"  M.  Guizot  next  proceeds  to  develop  the  deranged  state  of  the  kingdoms  of  Europe, 
after  the  subversion  of  the  Roman  power,  and  the  subdivision  of  the  ancient  empire  into 
d'.stiiirt  sovereignties  ;  which  is  followed  by  a  survey  of  the  feudal  system.  The  various 
>  and  civil  revolutions  of  the  people  with  the  crusades,  the  conflicts  between  the 
nicrarHncal  supremacy,  and  the  monarchical  and  arlstocratical  authorities  also,  are  de- 
veloped with  the  fluctuations  of  society,  through .their  combined  tumultuous  collisions; 
until  the  invention  of  printing,  and  the  maritime  discoveries  of  the  fifteenth  century,  with 
the  Reformat*,  produced  a  convulsion,  whose  mighty  workings  still  are  exhibited,  and 
the  rich  fruits*bf  which  constantly  become  more  plentiful  and  fragrant. 

"  The  two  lectures  which  close  the  series,  are  devoted  to  the  English  revolution  of  the 
seventeenth,  and  the  French  revolution  of  the  eighteenth  century. 

"  There  are  two  features  in  M.  Guizot's  lectures  which  are  as  attractive  as  they  are 
novel.  One  is,  the  lofty  moral  and  religious  principles  which  he  inculcates.  We  doubt 
that  very  few  professors  of  history  in  our  own  country,  in  their  prelections,  among  their 
students,  within  an  American  College,  would  have  commingled  such  a  continuous  stream 
of  the  best  ethics,  with  a  subject  avowedly  secular,  as  M.  Guizot  has  incorporated  with 
his  lectures  addressed  to  the  Parisian  infidels. 

'•  Another  is,  the  predominant  influence  which  he  has  attributed  to  Christianity,  in 
effecting  the  progressive  melioration  of  European  society. 

"  To  the  friends  of  religious  freedom  especially  M.  Guizot's  Lectures  on  Civilization 
are  a  most  acceptable  present ;  because  they  are  not  the  result  of  a  controvertist's  en- 
deavours to  sustain  his  own  opinions  in  a  polemical  conflict  with  an  adversary,  but  the 
deliberate  judgment  of  an  impartial  observer,  who  has  embodied  his  decisions  m 
cideutally,  while  discussing  another  topic." — JY*.  Y.  American. 

PREPARING-  FOR  PUBLICATION, 

COMPLETE  HISTORY  OF  MODERN  CIVILIZATION ; 

From  the  Fall  of  the  Roman  Empire  until  the  Year  1789.  With  com. 
plete  Chronological  and  Historical  Tables.  Translated  from  the  French 
of  M.  GUJZOT. 

This  volume  is  the  second  part  of  M.  Guizot's  "  Course  of  Modern  History,"  in  thirty 
thi^e  Lectures,  and  is  an  erudite  and  luminous  development  of  the  principal  changes, 
even'-s,  derangements,  and  organization  of  the  modern  European  nations  after  the  fall 
of  the  Roman  Empire,  until  they  assumed  their  present  chief  characteristics.  It  forma 
a  complete  filling  up,  in  minute  details,  of  the  former  work,  and  is  precisely  adapted  to 
unfold  the  origin,  attributes,  and  operations  of  the  political  systems  connected  with  feu 
dahsui,  and  the  subsequent  revolutions  »r  the  kingdoms  of  Europe. 


D.  Appleton  fy  Co.  have  just  published 

LECTURES 

ON 

MODERN      HISTORY. 

BY 

THOMAS    ARNOLD,    D.D., 

Author  of  "  History  of  Rome."  etc.,  etc. 

With  an  Introduction  and  Notes  by  HENRY  REED,  Professor  of  English 
Literature  in  the  University  of  Pennsylvania.  One  handsome  volume 
12mo. 

This  volume  contains  the  first  Lectures  which  were  delivered  by  Dr.  Arnold  after  his 
appointment  as  Regius  Professor  of  History  in  the  university  of  Oxford.  The  series  of 
Lectures  must  be  considered  merely  as  introductory  to  the  expanded  views  and  re- 
searches which  the  author  would  have  developed  had  h  s  life  buen  prolonged.  In  the 
primary  lecture  which  was  delivered  when  he  entered  upon  his  official  duty,  the  lecturer 
presented  his  definition  of  history  with  a  summary  of  the  duties  appertaining  to  the  pro- 
fessor of  it.  Appropriate,  dignified  and  perspicuous,  it  exhibits  both  originality  and 
power  in  a  high  degree,  commingled  with  felicitous  illustrations  of  the  characteristics, 
effects,  and  value  of  historical  literature. — Four  lectures  follow  on  the  study  of  history, 
rich  in  the  prominent  topics  of  inquiry  concerning  national  prosperity — among  which, 
with  masterly  eloquence  and  delineations  he  adverts  to  the  political  economy,  the  re- 
ligious controversies,  the  national  wars,  and  the  geographical  relations  of  countries. — 
The  next  three  lectures  contain  a  survey  of  European  history,  particularly  examining 
the  revolutions  in  ecclesiastical  affairs,  and  the  continuous  struggles  to  cast  off  the 
despotic  yoke,  and  to  gain  and  establish  religious  and  civil  freedom.— The  eighth  lecture 
displays  the  nature  of  that  historical  testimony  which  claims  and  merits  credence.  In 
this  disquisition  the  author  exhibits  in  his  truth  and  forcefulness  the  law  of  evidence 
and  the  method  of  its  application  in  investigating  historical  facts.— The  course  of  Lec- 
tures is  an  elegant  memorial  of  the  author  whose  unquenchable  philanthropy  and  un- 
.  tiring  zeal  in  behalf  of  the  best  interests  of  mankind  render  his  decease  the  subject  of 
regret  to  the  civilized  world. 

WILL       SHORTLY       PUBLISH 

HISTORY 

OF      THE 

ROMAN    REPUBLIC. 

BY 

M  .    M  I  C  H  E  L  E  T  , 

Professor  of  History  in    the   University  of  France,   Author  of  "  The 

jSistory  of  France,"  etc.,  etc. 
Translated  by  VICTOR  G.  BENNE,  A.B      One  handsome  8vo  volume 

*'  M.  Michelet-  in  his  history  of  the  Roman  Republic,  first  introduces  the  reader  to  the 
Ancient  Geography  of  Italy:  then  by  giving  an  excellent  picture  of  the  present  state  of 
Rome  and  the  surrounding  country,  full  of  grand  ruins,  he  excites  in  the  reader  the  desire 
to  investigate  the  ancient  history  of  this  wonderful  land.  He  next  imparts  the  results  of 
the  latest  investigations,  entire,  deeply  studied  and  clearly  arranged,  and  saves  the  uu- 
educated  reader  the  trouble  of  investigating  the  sources,  while  he  gives  to  the  more  edu- 
cated mind  an  impetus  to  study  the  literature  from  which  he  gives  very  accurate  quo- 
tations in  his  notes.  He  describes  the  peculiarities  and  the  life  of  the  Roman  people  in 
a  masterly  manner,  and  he  fascinates  every  reader,  by  the  brilliant  clearness  and  vivid 
freshness  of  his  style,  while  he  shows  himself  a  good  historian,  by  the  justness  *md 
impartiality  with  which  he  relates  and  philosophizes." 

The  Westminster  Review  observes  :  "  His  '  Histoire  Romaine'  is  not  only  the  history 
of  institutions  and  ideas,  as  in  Niebuhr,  but  also  by  virtue  of  the  vast  interpretative  faculty 
of  imagination,  places  the  men  of  Rome,  with  their  creeds  and  aspirations,  vividly  before 
you." 


COMPLETE  TEXT-BOOK  OF  HISTORY. 

D.  APPLETON  &  co.  HAVE  JUST  PUBLISHED, 
A  MANUAL 

OP 

ANCIENT  AND  MODERN  HISTORY. 

COMPRISING 
I. 

Ancient  ?£>fstor» ; 

Containing  the  Political  History,  Geographical  Position,  and  Social  State  of  the  Principal  Na- 
tions of  Antiquity,  carefully  revised  from  the  ancient  writers,  and  illustrated 
by  the  discoveries  of  Modern  Scholars  and  Travellers. 

II. 


Containing  the  Rine  and  Progress  of  the  Principal  European  Nations,  their  Political  History,  and 

the  changes  in  their  Social  Condition,  with  a  History,  of 

the  Colonies  founded  by  Europeans. 

BY  W.  COOKE  TAYLOR,  1,1,.  D. 

Of  Trinity  College,  Dublin. 

Revised,  with  an  Additional  Chapter  on  the  United  States, 
BY  O.  S.  HENRY,  D.  D., 

Professor  of  History  in  the  University  of  New-York 
One  handsome  volume  8vo.  of  upwards  of  700  pages.   $2  25 

+**  For  the  convenience  of  Students  as  a  tezt  book,  the  Ancient  or  Modern  portions  can  b* 
had  separately  bound. 

The  ANCIENT  HISTORY  division  comprises  Eighteen  Chapters,  which  include  the  general  out- 
lines of  the  History  of  Egypt — the  Ethiopians — Babylonia  and  Assyria — Western  Asia — Palestine 
—the  Empire  of  the  Medes  and  Persians — Phenician  Colonies  in  Northern  Africa — Foundation 
and  History  of  the  Grecian  States — Greece — the  Macedonian  Kingdom  and  Empire — the  States 
that  arose  from  the  Dismemberment  of  the  Macedonian  Empire — Ancient  Italy — Sicily — the  Ro- 
man Republic — Geographical  and  Political  Condition  of  the  Roman  Empire — History  of  the  Ro- 
man Empire — and  India — with  an  Appendix  of  important  illustrative  articles. 

This  portion  is  one  of  the  best  Compends  of  Ancient  History  that  ever  yet  has  appeared.  It 
contains  a  complete  text  for  the  collegiate  lecturer  ;  and  is  an  essential  hand-book  for  the  student 
rho  is  desirous  to  become  acquainted  with  all  that  is  memorable  in  general  secular  archaeology. 

The  MODERN  HISTORY  portion  is  divided  into  Fourteen  Chapters,  on  the  following  general 
subjects : — Consequences  of  the  Fall  of  the  Western  Empire — Rise  and  Establishment  of  the 
Saracenic  Power — Restoration  of  the  Western  Empire — Growth  of  the  Papal  Power — Revival  otf 
Literature — Progress  of  Civilization  and  Invention — Reformation,  and  Commencement  of  the 
States  System  in  Europe — Augustan  Ages  of  England  and  France — Mercantile  and  Colonial  Sys- 
tem— Age  of  Revolutions — French  Empire — History  of  the  Peace — Colonization — China— the 
Jews— with  Chronological  and  Historical  Tables  and  other  Indexes.  Dr.  Henry  has  appended  a 
new  chapter  on  the  History  of  the  United  States. 

This  Manual  of  Modern  History,  by  Mr.  Taylor,  is  vhe  most  valuable  and  instructive  work 
concerning  the  general  subjects  which  it  comprehends,  that  can  be  found  in  the  waole  department 
tf  historical  taerature. 


COMMON-SCHOOL  LIBRARY. 

First  Series,  25  volumes-*- Second,  25  volumes. 

D.  APPLETON  &  CO.  respectfully  invite  the  attention  of  Superintendents  and  Teaclv 
ers  of  District  Schools,  to  their  valuable  Series  of  Instructive  and  Moral  Works  for  youth  or 
the  adult.  The  design  has  been  to  embrace  in  this  collection  only  such  Works  as  tnay  be 
read  by  every  member  of  a  family,  always  inculcating  a  good  moral,  yet  unsectarkm  in 
character,  aiming  to  give  an  interest  and  a  taste  for  reading. 

RECOMMENDATION    FROM    I.   8.    RANDALL,   DEPUTY    SUPERINTENDENT    OF   COMMON   SCHOOLS 
FOR  THE    STATE    OF    NEW-rORK. 

u  I  have  long  been  in  the  habit  of  recommending  your  first  Series  of  the  School  Library 
to  Trustees  of  School  Districts  wishing  to  purchase  for  their  Library  ;  and  I  can  cheerfully 
bear  testimony  to  the  value  of  the  entire  Series.  Taken  as  a  whole,  the  works  are  admira- 
bly adapted  to  the  intellectual  and  moral  wants  of  the  rising  generation  ;  and  the  neatness  of 
their  execution  no  less  than  the  cheap  rate  at  which  you  are  enabled  to  afford  them,  render! 
their  introduction  into  our  School  District  Libraries  in  every  respect  desirable." 

FIRST    SERIES. 

FIRST  IMPRESSIONS  ;  or,  Hints  to  those 
who  would  make  Home  happy.  Bj  Mrs. 
Ellis. 

THE  DANGERS  OF  DINING  OUT ;  or, 
Hints  to  those  who  would  make  Home 
happy.  To  which  is  added  the  Confes- 
sions of  a  Maniac.  By  Mrs.  Ellis. 

SOMERVILLE  HALL ;  or,  Hints  to  those 
who  would    make    Home    happy.      To- 
which  is  added  the  Rising  Tide.   By  Mra 
Ellis. 

LITTLE  COIN,  MUCH  CARE:  or,  How 
Poor  People  Live.  By  Mary  Howitt. 

WORK  AND  WAGES  ;  or,  How  Poor  Peo- 
)le  Live.     By  Mary  Howitt. 
E  ON,  HOPE  EVER;  or, the  Boyhood 
of  Felix  Law.    By  Mary  Howitt. 

STRIVE  AND  THRIVE,  a  tale.    By  Mary 

SOWING  AND  REAPING;  or,  What  will 

Come  of  It  ?    By  Mary  Howitt. 
ALICE  FRANKLIN,  a  sequel  to  Sowing 

and  Reaping.     By  Mary  Howitt. 
WHO  SHALL  BE  GREATEST  ?  a  tale. 

By  Mary  Howitt. 
WHICH    IS    THE    WISER  ?    or,  People 

Abroad.    By  Mary  Howitt. 
TIRED  OF  HOUSEKEEPING.     By  S.  T 

Arthur. 


THE  LIFE  AND  ADVENTURES  OF 
HENRY  HUDSON.  By  the  author  of 
"  Uncle  Philip's  Conversations." 

THE  ADVENTURES  OF  HERNAN 
CORTES,  the  Conqueror  of  Mexico.  By 
the  same. 

THE  LIFE  OF  CAPT.  JOHN  SMITH. 
By  the  same. 

THE  D  AWNINGS  OF  GENIUS  ;  or,  Early 
Lives  of  Eminent  Men.  By  Anne  Pratt. 

THE  MYTHOLOGY  OF  GREECE  AND 
ITALY,  adapted  for  children.  By  Tho- 
mas Keightly. 

THE  POPLAR  GROVE  ;  or,  Little  Harry 
and  his  Uncle  Benjamin.  By  Mrs.  Cop- 

EARLY  FRIENDSHIPS.    By  Mrs.  Copley. 

THE  PEASANT  AND  THE  PRINCE ;  a 
tale  illustrative  of  the  French  Revolu- 
tion. By  Harriet  Martineau. 

MASTERMAN  READY  ;  or,  the  Wreck  of 
the  Pacific.  Written  for  Young  People. 
By  Capt.  Marryatt.  Three  volumes. 

THh  LOOKING-GLASS  FOR  THE 
MIND  ;  or,  Intellectual  Mirror.  An 
elegant  collection  of  delightful  stories 
and  tales.  Many  plates. 

THE  TWIN  SISTERS,  a  tale.  By  Mrs. 
Sandharn. 


HOPE 


SECOND    SERIES. 


THE  LIFE  OF  OLIVER   CROMWELL. 

By  Robert  Southey.  LL.  D. 
HISTORY  OF  THE  FRENCH  REVOLU- 

TION, its  Causes    and  Consequences. 

By  F.  Maclean  Rowan.     2  vols. 
THE      ADVENTURES      OF      DANfEL 

BOONE,  the   Kentucky  Rifleman.    By 

the  author  of  "  Uncle  Philip's  Conversa- 


YOUNG  STUDENT;  or,  Ralph  and 

Victor.     By  Madame  Guizot.     In  3  vols. 

One  of  the  best  moral  and  instructive 

works  ever  written. 
LOVE  AND  MONEY,  an  Every-Day  Tale. 

By  Mary  Howftt. 
THE  MINISTER'S  FAMILY;  or,  Hints  to 

make  Home  happy.     By  Mrs.  Ellis. 
PHILIP  RANDOLPH,  a  tale  of  Virginia. 

By  Mary  Gertrude. 
MY  OWN  STORY,  the  Autobiography  of 


a  Child.    By  Mary  Howitt. 
THE  TWO  APPRENTICES;   a  Tale  for 
Youth.     By  Mary  Howitt. 
**«  The  volumes  are  furnished  strongly  bound  in  leather,  at  30  cents  each  by  the  Series. 


WOMAN'S  WORTH ;  or,  Hints  to  Raise 
the  Female  Character.  A  very  valuable 
work,  suitable  for  all  classes. 

THE  SETTLERS  IN  CANADA,  written 
for  Youth.  By  Capt.  Marryatt.  2  vols. 

MY  UNCLE,  THE  CLOCKMAKER,  & 
tale.  By  Mary  Howitt. 

THE  GIRLS'  MANUAL  ;  containing  the 
Principles  of  Conduct. 

THE  BOYS'  MANUAL;  containing  the 
Principles  of  Conduct. 

THE  FARMER'S  DAUGHTER,  a  Picture 
of  Humble  Life.  By  Mrs.  Cameron. 

THE  YOUNG  MAN  FROM  HOME,  in  a 
Series  of  Letters  on  Dangers  and  Duties. 
By  J.  A.  James. 

FAMILIAR  LETTERS  ON  CHEMISTRY, 
and  its  application  to  Physiology,  Com- 
merce, and  Agriculture.  By  Prof.  Liebig 

THE  GOLDMAKER'S  VILLAGE  ;  an  ex- 


cellent narrative.     Translated  from  the 
German  of  H.  Zchokke. 


A    CATALOGUE    OF 

BOOKS, 

IN  VARIOUS  DEPARTMENTS  OF  LITERATURE. 


PUBLISHED    BY 

D.  APPLETON  b  Co.,  NEW-YORK, 

AXD 

GEO.  S.  APPLETON,  PHILADELPHIA. 
For  sale  by  the  several  Booksellers  throughout  the  United  States. 

(Ulassifieb 


AGRICULTURE. 
Falkner  on  Manures. 
Smith's  Productive  Farming. 
Farmer's  Treasure,  by  Falkner  and  Smith. 

ARTS,  MAmJFACTURES,  &c. 
Ewbank's  Mechanics  and  Hydraulics. 
Hodge  on  the  Steam-Engine. 
Lafever's  Modern  Architecture. 

*'         Sta.ir-ca.se  Construction. 
Ure's  Dictionary  of  Arts,  Manuf.,  and  Minei. 

BIOG-RAPHY, 
Hamilton  (Alex.),  Life  of. 
Philip's  Life  of  Milne. 

CHEMISTRY. 
Freseniua's  Chemical  Analysis. 
Liebig's  Chemical  Letters. 
Parnell's  Applied  Chemistry. 

EDUCATION. 
Hazen's  Symbolical  Speller. 
Keightley's  Mythology  of  Greece  and  Italy. 
Taylor's  Home  Education 

HISTORY. 

Fro«t's  History  of  United  States  Navy. 
«  «  Army. 


Guizot's  History  of  Civilization. 
L'Ardeche's  History  of  Napoleon. 
Taylor's  Natural  History  of  Societj. 

JUVENILE. 

Boone.  Daniel,  Adventures  of. 
Boy's  Manual. 

Cameron '3  Farmer's  Daughter. 
Child's  Delight. 
Copley's  Early  Friendships 
Copley's  Poplar  Grove. 
Cortes,  Adventures  of. 
De  Foe's  Robinson  Crusoe. 
Evans's  Joan  of  Arc. 

"       Evenings  with  the  Chronicler!. 
Guizot's  Young  Student. 
Girl's  Manual. 
Holyday  Tales. 
Howitt's  Love  and  Money. 

"        Work  and  Wages. 

"        Little  Coin,  much  Care. 

"         Which  is  the  Wiser? 

"         Who  shall  be  Greatest 

"        Hope  on,  Hope  ever. 

"         Strive  and  Thrive. 

*'        Sowing  and  Reaping. 

"        No  Sense  like  Common  Sense, 

"        Alice  Franklin. 
Jerram's  Child's  Story-Book. 


Appleton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 


Looking-Glass  for  the  Mind. 
Lucy  and  Arthur. 
Log  Cabin,  or  World  hefore  You. 
Martineau's  Crofton  Boys. 

"  Peasant  and  Prince. 

Marryat's  Masterman  Ready. 
Old  Oak  Tree. 
Prize  Story- Book. 
Pratt's  Dawnings  of  Genius. 
Sandham's  Twin  Sisters. 
Smith,  Capt..  Adventures  o£ 
Sherwood's  Duty  is  Safety. 

'*  Jack  the  Sailor. 

"  Think  before  you  Act. 

Taylor's  Young  Islandeis. 
•  cry  Little  Tales. 
Youth's  Book  of  Nature. 

MEDICAL. 

Chavasse's  Advice  to  Mothers. 
Hall's  Principles  of  Diagnosis. 
Smith  on  Nervous  System. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 
Arthur's  Tired  of  Housekeeping. 
Austin's  German  Writers. 
Carly  e's  Heroes,  Hero  Worship. 
Cotton's  Exiles  of  Siberia. 
D'Israeli's  Curiosities  of  Literature. 
Deleuze  on  Animal  Magnetism. 
Ellis's  Mothers  oTEngland. 

*'      Wives  of  England. 

"      Daughters  of  England. 

"      Women  of  England. 

"      First  Impressions. 

"      Danger  of  Dining  Out. 

«      Somerville  Hall. 
Embury's  Nature's  Gems. 
Foster's  Miscellanies. 

"       Christian  Morals. 
Goldsmith's  Vicar  of  Wakefield. 

"  Essays. 
Johnson's  Rasselas. 
Lover's  Handy  Andy. 

"      £.5.  d. — Treasure  Trove. 
Maxwell's  Hector  O'Halloran. 
More's  Domestic  Tales. 

««      Rural  Talcs. 
Pure  Gold. 
Sinclair's  Scotland  and  Scotch. 

••         Shetland  and  Shetlanders. 
St.  Pierre's  Paul  and  Virginia. 
Taylor's  Physical  Theory  of  Another  Life. 
Useful  Letter-Writer. 
Woman's  Worth. 

POETRY. 

Burns's  Poetical  Works. 
Cowper's          " 
Gems  from  American  Poets. 
Hemans's  Poetical  Works. 

"         Songs  of  the  Affections. 
Lewis's  Records  of  the  Heart. 
Milton's  Poetical  Works. 

"        Paradise  Lost. 

"  "        Regained 

Moore's  Lallah  Rookh. 
Pollok's  Course  of  Time. 
Scott's  Poetical  Works. 

"      Lady  of  the  Lake. 

"      Marmion. 

"      La/ of  the  Last  Minstrel. 
Southey's  Poetical  Works. 
Thomson's  Seasons. 
Token  of  Affection,  by  various  writer! 
"        Friendship. 


Token  of  Love. 

"      the  Heart. 

"        Remembrance. 
Young's  Night  Thoughts. 

RELIGIOUS. 

A  Kempis's  Imitation  of  Christ. 
Anthon's  Catechism  on  Homilies. 
Beaven's  Help  to  Catechising. 
Bible  Expositor. 
Book  of  Common  Prayer. 
Burnet's  Hist,  of  Reformation. 

"       Exposition  of  XXXIX.  Artic.es. 
Bradley's  Practical  Sermons. 

"        Sermons  at  Clapham  and  Glasbury. 
Churton's  Early  English  Church. 
Christmas  Bells. 
Cruden's  Concordance,  N.  T. 
Clarke's  Scripture  Promises. 
Evans's  Rectory  of  Valehead 
Faberon  Election. 
Gresley  on  Preaching. 

"      English  Churchman. 
Hare's  Sermons. 
Hooker's  Works. 
James's  True  Christian. 

"       Widow  Directed. 

"       Young  Man  from  Home. 
Christian  Professor. 

"       Anxious  Inquirer  after  Salvation. 

"       Happiness,  its  Nature  and  Sourcen- 
Kip's  Double  Witness. 
Kingsley's  Sacred  Choir. 
Lyra  Apostolica. 
Magee  on  Atonement. 
Manning  on  Unity  of  the  Church. 
Marshall's  Notes  on  Episcopacy. 
More's  Private  Devotion. 

"      Practical  Piety. 
Maurice's  Kingdom  of  Christ. 
Newman's  Parochial  Seimons. 

"          Sermons  on  Subjects  of  the  D*y. 
Ogilby  on  Lay-Baptism, 

"      Lectures  on  the  Church. 
Palmer  on  the  Church. 
Paget's  Tales  of  the  Village. 
Pearson  on  the  Creed. 
Philip's  Devotional  Guides. 

"      The  Hannahs. 

"      The  Marys. 

"       The  Marthas. 

"       Th«  Lydias. 

"      Love  of  the  Spirit. 
Sherlock's  Practical  Christian. 
Smith  on  Scripture  and  Geology. 
Spencer's  Christian  Instructed. 
Spincke's  Manual  of  Devotion. 
Sprague's  Lectures  to  Young  People 

"         True  and  False  Religion. 
Button's  Learn  to  Live. 
"       Learn  to  Die. 
"       On  Sacrament. 
Stuart's  Letters  to  Godchild 
Taylor  on  Episcopacy. 

""      Golden  Grove. 

"       Spiritual  Christianity 
Wayland's  Human  Responsibility 
Wilson's  Sacra  Privata. 
Wilberforce's  Communicant's  Manual. 

VOYAGES  AND  TRAVELS. 

Cooley's  American  in  Egypt. 
Olmsted's  Whaling  Voyage. 
Silliman's  Ameiican  Scenery 
Southgate's  Turkey  and  Persia. 


Applet  on' s  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

A  KEMPIS.— OF  THE  IMITATION  OF  CHRIST: 

Four  books  by  Thomas  a  Kempis.     One  elegant  volume,  16mo.     §1  00. 

"The  author  of  this  invaluable  work  was  born  about  the  year  1380,  ami  luis  always  bean 
honoured  by  the  Church  for  his  eminent  sanctity.  Of  the  many  pious  works  composed  by  him, 
his  '  Imitation  of  Christ'  (being  collection?:  of  hi*  devotional  thoughts  and  meditations  on  impor- 
tant practical  subjects,  together  with  a  separate  treatise  on  the  Holy  Communion)  is  the  most 
celebrated,  and  has  ever  been  admired  and  valued  by  devout  Christians  of  eveiy  name.  It  li;n 
passed  through  numerous  editions  and  translations,  the  first  of  which  into  English  is  said  to  have 
been  made  by  the  illustrious  Lady  Margaret,  mother  of  King  Henry  VII.  .Messrs.  Appluton's 
rery  beautiful  edition  is  a  reprint  from  the  hist  English,  the  translation  of  which  was  chiefly 
copied  from  one  printed  at  London  in  1677.  It  deserves  to  be  a  companion  of  the  good  Bishop 
Wilson's  Sacra  Privata. — Banner  of  the  Crons. 

AMERICAN  POETS,— GEMS    FROM    AMERICAN  POETS. 

One  volume,  32mo.,  frontispiece,  gilt  leaves,  37  1-2  cents. 
Forming   one   of  the    series    of    "  Miniature    Classical    Library." 
Contains   selections  from  nearly    one    hundred  writers,  among  which  are — 
Bryant,    Halleck,    Longfellow,    Percival,    Whittier,    Sprague,     Brainerd, 
Dana,  Willis,  Pinkney,  Allston,  Hillhouse,  Mrs.  Sigourney,  L.  M.  David- 
son, Lucy  Hooper,  Mrs.  Embury,  Mrs.  Hale,  etc.  etc 

ANTHON,— CATECHISMS    ON   THE    HOMILIES  OF  THE 

CHURCH, 

18mo.  paper  cover,  6  1-4  cents,  $4  per  hundred. 


I.     Of  the  Misery  of  Mankind. 
II.     Of  the  Nativity  of  Christ. 


CONTENTS. 


III.  Of  the  Passion  of  Christ. 

IV.  Of 'the  Resurrection  of  Christ. 


By  HENRY  ANTHON,  D.  D.,  Rector  of  St.  Mark's  Church,  New  York. 

This  little  volume  forms  No.  2,  of  a  series  of  "  Tracts  on  Christian  Doctrine  and  Practice," 
now  in  course  of  publication  under  the  supervision  of  Rev.  Dr.  Anthon. 

AUSTIN— FRAGMENTS    FROM    GERMAN    PROSE 
WRITERS. 

Translated  by    Sarah    Austin,  with   Biographical    Sketches  of  the  Authow. 
One  handsomely  printed  volume,  12mo.     $1  25. 

ARTHUR.— TIRED  OF  HOUSE-KEEPING 

By  T.  S.  Arthur,  author  of  "Insubordination,"  etc.  etc.     One  volume,  18mo, 
frontispiece,  37  1-2  cents. 

Forming  one  of  the  series  of  "  Tales  for  the  People  and  their  Children." 
CONTENTS. — I.  Going  to  House-keeping. — II.  First  Experiments. — III, 
Morning  Calls. — IV.  First  Demonstrations. — V.  Trouble  with  Servants. — VI. 
A  New  One.— VII.  More  Trouble.— VIII.  A  True  Friend.— IX.  Another 
Powerful  Demonstration. — X.  Breaking  up. — XI.  Experiments  in  Boarding 
and  Taking  Boarder. — XII.  More  Sacrifices. — XIII.  Extracting  Good  from 
Evil.— XIV.  Failure  of  the  First  Experiments.— XV.  The  New  Boarding- 
house.— XVI.  Trouble  in  Earnest.— XVII.  Sickness.— XVIII.  Another 
Change. — XIX.  Conclusion. 

BEAVEN.— A    HELP   TO   CATECHISING. 

For  the   use  of  Clergymen,  Schools,  and  Private  Families.      By  James  Bea 
ven,  D.  D.,  Professor  of  Theology  at  King's  College,  Ton  nto.     Revised 
and  adapted  to  the  use  of  the  Protestant  Episcopal  Church  in  the  United 
States.     By  Henry  Anthon,  D.  D.,  Rector  of  St.  Mark's  Church,  N.  Y. 
18mo.,  paper  cover,  6  1-4  cents,  $4  per  hundred. 

Forming  No.  I  of  a  series  of"  Tracts  on  Christian  Doctrine  and  Practice,"  now  in  courie  of 
publication  under  the  superintendence  of  Rev.  Dr.  Anthon. 


Appleton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

BIBLE    EXPOSITOR. 

Confirmation  of  the  Truth  of  the  Holy  Scriptures,  from  the  Observations  ol 
recent  Travellers,  illustrating  the  Manners,  Customs,  and  Places  referred  to 
in  the  Bible.  Published  under  the  direction  of  the  Society  for  the  Promo 
tion  of  Christian  Knowledge,  London.  Illustrated  with  90  cuts.  On* 
volume,  12ino.,  75  cents. 

EXTRACT    FROM    PREFACE. 

•*  The  Holy  Scriptures  contain  many  passages  full  of  importance  and  beauty,  but  not  generally 
understood,  because  they  contain  allusions  to  manners  find  customs,  familiar  indeed  to  those  to  whoi* 
they  were  originally  addressed,  but  imperfectly  known  to  us.  In  order  to  obviate  this  difficulty 
this  volume  is  now  presented  to  the  public,  consisting  of  extracts  from  the  narratives  of  trave. 
lers  who  have  recorded  the  customs  of  the  oriental  nations,  from  whom  we  learn  that  some  usages 
were  retained  among  them  to  this  day,  such  as  existed  at  the  times  when  the  Scriptures  were 
written,  and  that  their  manners  are  in  many  instances  little  changed  since  the  patriarchal  times. 
The  compiler  of  this  volume  trusts  that  it  may  be  the  means,  under  God's  providence,  of  leading 
unlearned  readers  to  a  more  general  acquaintance  with  Eastern  customs,  and  assist  them  to  a 
clearer  perception  of  tlie  .propriety  and  beauty  of  the  illustrations  so  often  drawn  from  them  iu  the 
Bible." 

BOOK   OF   COMMON   PRAYER; 

And  Administration  of  the  Sacraments  and  other  Rites  and  Ceremonies  ol 
the  Church,  according  to  the  use  of  the  Protestant  Episcopal  Church  in  the 
United  States  of  America,  together  with  the  Psalter  or  Psalms  of  David. 
Illustrated  with  six  steel  engravings,  rubricated,  18mo.  size,  in  various 
bindings. 

Morocco,  extra  gilt  leaves,  $2  25.  With  clasp,  do.,  $3  09.  Imitation  of  Morocco,  gilt 
leaves,  $1  50.  Plain  do.,  $1  00.  Without  rubrics,  in  Morocco,  extra,  $2  00.  Imitation  do., 
$1  25.  Sheep,  plain,  37  1-2  cents.  It  may  also  be  had  in  rich  silk  velvet  binding,  mounted  with 
gold,  gilt  bonders,  clasp,  &c.,  price  .$8  00. 

A  very  superior  edition,  printed  in  large  type,  from  the  new  authorized  edition,  is  nearly 
ready.  It  will  be  embellished  with  choice  steel  engravings  from  designs  by  Overbeck. 

BOONE.— ADVENTURES  OF  DANIEL  BOONE, 

The  Kentucky  Rifleman.  By  the  author  of  "  Uncle  Philip's  Conversations." 
One  volume,  18mo.  37  1-2  cents. 

Forming  one  of  the  series  of   "A  Library  for  my  Young  Countrymen." 
"  It  is  an  excellent  narrative,  written  in  a  plain,  familiar  style,  and  sets  forth  the  character  and 

wild  adventures  of  the  hero  of  the  Kentucky  wilderness  in  a  very  attractive  light.     The  boys  will 

all  be  in  an  agony  to  read  it." — Com.  Jldn. 

BOYS'   MANUAL. 

Comprising  a  Summary  View  of  the  Studies,  Accomplishments,  and  Princi- 
ples of  Conduct,  best  suited  for  promoting  Respectability  and  Success  in 
Life.  1  vol.  18mo.  50  cents. 

BRADLEY.— FAMILY    AND    PARISH    SERMONS. 

Preached  at  Clapham  and  Glasbury.  By  the  Rev.  Charles  Bradley.  From 
the  seventh  London  edition,  two  volumes  in  one,  8vo.  $1  25. 


PRACTICAL  SERMONS 


For  every  Sunday  throughout  the  vear  and  principal  holydays.  Two  volumes 
of  English  edition  in  one  8vo  $1  50. 

J)^r  The  above  two  volumes  may  be  bound  together  in  one.     Price  $2  50. 

The  Sermons  of  this  Divine  are  much  admired  for  their  plain,  yet  chaste  and  elegant  style; 
they  will  be  found  admirably  adapted  for  family  reading  arid  preaching,  where  no  pastor  is  located. 
Recommendations  might  be  given,  if  space  would  admit,  from  several  of  our  Bishops  and  Clergy — 
also  from  Ministers  of  various  denominations. 

The  following  are  a  few  of  the  English  and  American  critical  opinions  of  their  merit: — 

"  Bradley's  ityle  is  sententious,  pithy,  and  colloquial.  He  is  simple  without  being  quaint, 
and  he  almost  holds  conversation  with  his  hearers,  without  descending  from  the  dignity  of  the 
tacred  chair." — Eclectic  Re.vicic. 

"  We  earnestly  desire  that  every  pulpit  may  ever  be  the  vehicle  of  discourses  as  judicious  and 
practical,  as  scriptural  and  devout,  as  these.'1 — Christian  Observer. 

"  The  style  is  so  simple  that  the  most  unlearned  can  understand  them  ;  the  matter  so  instruc- 
tive that  the  best  informed  can  learn  something;  the  spirit  so  fervent  that  the  most  engaged 
Christian  can  be  animated  and  wanned  by  tbyir  perusal." — Christian  Witness, 


Applctons  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications 

BURNET.— THE  HISTORY  CF  THE  REFORMATION 

Of  the  Church  of  England,  by  Gilbert  Burnet,  I).  1).,  late  Lord  Bishop  of 
Salisbury — with  the  Collection  of  Records  and  a  copious  Index,  revise* 
and  corrected,  with  additional  Notes  and  a  Preface,  by  tiie  Rev.  E 
Nares,  I).  D.,  late  Professor  of  Modern  History  in  the  University  of  Oxford 
Illustrated  with  a  Frontispiece  and  twenty-three  engraved  Portraits,  form 
ing  four  elegant  8vo.  volumes.  $8  00. 

A  cheap  edition  is  printed,  containing  the  History  in  three  vols.  without  the 
Records — which  form  the  fourth  vol.  of  the  above.  Price,  in  boards,  $2  50. 
To  the  student  either  of  civil  or  religious  history,  no  epoch  can  he  of  more  importance  than 
thnt  of  the  Reformation  in  Engl  md.  The  History  of  Bishop  Burnet  is  one  of  the  most  celebrated 
and  hv  far  the  most  frequently  quoted  of  ;tny  that  has  been  written  of  this  great  event.  Upon  the 
original  publication  of  the  first  volume,  it  was  received  in  Great  Britain  with  the  loudest  and 
most  extravagant  encomiums.  The  author  received  the  thanks  of  both  Houses  of  Parliament, 
and  was  requested  by  thorn  to  continue  tho  work.  In  continuing  it,  he  had  the  assistance  of  the 
most  learned  find  eminent  divines  of  his  time;  and  he  confesses  his  indebtedness  for  important 
aid  to  Lloyd,  Tillotson,  and  Stillingtieet,  three  of  the  greatest  of  England's  Bishops. 

The  present  edition  of  this  groat  work  lias  been  edited  with  laborious  care  by  Dr.  Nares,  who 
professes  to  have  corrected  important  errors  into  which  the  author  fell,  and  to  have  made  such 
improvements  in  the  order  of  the  work  as  will  render  it  far  more  useful  to  the  reader  or  historical 
student.  Preliminary  explanations,  full  and  sufficient  to  the  clear  understanding  of  the  author, 
are  given,  and  marginal  references  are  made  throughout  the  book,  so  as  greatly  to  facilitate  and 
lender  accurate  its  consultation.  It  will  of  course  iind  a  place  in  every  theologian's  libraiy — and 
will,  by  no  means,  we  trust,  be  confined  to  that  comparatively  limited  sphere — JV*.  Y.  Tribune. 

BURNET.— AN  EXPOSITION  OF  THE  XXXIX  ARTICLES 

Of  the  Church  of  England.  By  Gilbert  Burnet,  D.  D.,  late  Bishop  of  Salisbury. 
With  an  Appendix,  containing  the  Augsburg  Confession,  Creed  of  Pope 
Pius  IV.,  &c.  Revised  and  corrected,  witli  copious  Notes  and  Additional 
References,  by  the  Rev.  James  R.  Page,  A.  M.  One  handsome  8vo.  vol- 
ume. $2  00. 

The  editor  has  given  to  our  clergy  and  our  students  in  theology  an  edition  of  this  work,  which 
must  necessarily  supersede  every  other,  and  we  feel  he  deserves  well  at  the  hands  of  the  Church, 
which  he  has  so  materially  served. — Churck  of  England  Quarterly  Review. 

BURNS.— THE  COMPLETE  POETICAL  WORKS 

Of  Robert  Burns,  with   Explanatory  and  Glossarial  Notes,  and  a  Life  of  the 
Author,  by  James  Currie,  M.  D.,  illustrated  with  six  steel  engravings,  one 
volume,  16mo.     $1  25. 
Forming  one  of  the  series  of  "  Cabinet  Edition  of  Standard   British  Poets." 

This  is  the  most  complete  American  edition  of  Burns.  It  contains  the  whole  of  the  poetry  com- 
prised in  the  edition  lately  edited  by  Cunningham,  as  well  as  some  additional  pieces  ;  and  sach 
notes  have  been  added  as  are  calculated  to  illustrate  the  manners  and  customs  of  Scotland,  so  ag 
to  render  the  whole  more  intelligible  to  the  English  reader. 

He  owes  nothing  to  the  poetry  of  oilier  lands — he  is  the  offspring  of  tho  soil :  he  is  as  natural 
to  Scotland  as  the  heath  is  to  her  hills — his  variety  is  equal  to  his  originality;  his  humour,  his 
gayety,  his  tenderness  and  his  pathos,  come  all  in  a  breath;  they  come  freely,  for  they  come  of 
their  own  accord  ;  the  contrast  is  never  offensive  ;  the  comic  slides  easily  into  tho  serious,  the 
serious  into  the  tender,  and  the  tender  into  the  pathetic. —  Allan  Cunniii<rham. 

CAMERON.— THE    FARMER'S    DAUGHTER: 

A  Tale  of  Humble  Life,  by  Mrs.  Cameron,  author  of  u  Emma  and  Her  Nurse," 

u  the  Two  Mothers,"  etc  ,  etc  ,  one  volume,  18mo.,  frontispiece.     37  1-2  cts. 

We  welcome,  in  this  little  volume,  a  valuable  addition  to  the  excellent  series  of  "  Tales  for 

the  People  and  their  Children."     The  story  conveys  high  moral  truths,  in  a  most  attractive  form 

— Hunt's  Merchant?*  Mag. 

CARLYLE.— ON    HEROES,  HERO   WORSHIP, 

And  the  Heroic  in  History.  Six  Lectures,  reported  with  Emendations  and  Ad- 
ditions, by  Thomas  Carlyle,  author  of  the  "  French  Revolution,"  "Sartor 
Resartus,"  <fcc.  Elegantly  printed  in  one  vol.  12mo.  Second  edition.  $1. 

CHILD'S    DELIGHT; 

A  Gift  for  the  Young.  Edited  by  a  lady.  One  volume  small  4to.  Embel- 
lished with  six  steel  Engravings  coloured  in  the  most  attractive  style. 

This  is  thn  gem  of  the  season.  In  style  of  embellishment  and  originality  of  matter,  it  standf 
nloi.a.  We  cordially  recommend  the  volume  to  our  juvenile  friends. —  U.  S.  'Gazette. 

5 


Applcton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications 

CHURTON.— THE  EARLY  ENGLISH  CHURCH; 

Or,  Christian  History  of  England  in  early  British,  Saxon,  and  Norman  Time*. 
By  tiie  Rev.  Edward  Churton,  M.  A  With  a  Preface  by  tiie  Right  Rev. 
Bishop  Ives.  One  vol.  16rno.  $1  00. 

The  following  delightful  pages  place  before  us  some  of  the  choicest  examples — both  clerical 
and  lay— of  the  true  Christian  spirit  in  the  EARLY  ENGLISH  CHURCH.  In  truth,  those  pagei 
are  crowded  with  weighty  lessons.  *  *  *  Extract  from  Editor's  Preface. 

CLARKE.— SCRIPTURE    PROMISES 

Vnder  their  proper  heads,  representing  the  Blessings  Promised,  the  Duties  to 
which  Promises  are  made.  By  Samuel  Clarke,  D.  D.  Miniature  size, 
37  1-2  cents. 

In  this  edition  every  passage  of  Scripture  has  been  compared  and  verified.  The  volume  ia 
like  an  arranged  museum  of  gems,  and  precious  stones,  and  pearls  of  inestimable  value.  Th* 
divine  promises  comprehend  a  rich  and  endless  vaiiety. — Dr  Wardlaw. 

COOLEY.— THE    AMERICAN    IN    EGYPT. 

With  Rambles  through  Arabia-Petraea  and  the  Holy  Land,  during  the  years 
1839-40.  By  James  Evving  Cooley.  Illustrated  with  numerous  steel  En 
gravings,  also  Etchings  and  Designs  by  Johnston.  One  handsome  volume, 
octavo,  of  610  pages.  $2  00. 

No  other  volume  extant  gives  the  reader  so  true  a  picture  of  what  he  would  be  likely  to  see 
and  meet  in  Egypt.  No  other  book  is  more  practh*.!  and  plain  in  its  picture  of  precisely  what 
the  traveller  himself  will  meet.  Other  writers  have  one  account  to  give  of  their  journey  on  paper, 
and  another  to  relate  in  conversation.  Mr.  Cooley  has  but  one  story  for  the  fireside  circle  and 
the  printed  page. — Brother  Jonathan. 

CHAVASSE.-ADVICE    TO    MOTHERS 

On  the  Management  of  their  Offspring,  during  the  periods  of  Infancy,  Child- 
hood, and  Youth,  by  Dr.  Pye  Henry  Chavasse,  Member  of  the  Royal  Col- 
lege of  Surgeons,  London,  from  the  third  English  edition,  one  volume, 
18mo.  of  180  pages.  Paper  25  cents,  cloth  37  1-2. 

All  that  I  have  attempted  is,  to  have  written  useful  advice,  in  a  clear  style,  stripped  of  all 
technicalities,  which  mothers  of  every  station  may  understand.  *  *  *  I  have  adopted  a  con- 
versational form,  as  being  more  familiar,  arid  as  an  easier  method  of  making  myself  understood. — 
Eitractfrom  Author"1  s  Preface. 

COPLEY.— EARLY    FRIENDSHIPS. 

By  Mrs.  Copley.     With  a  frontispiece.     One  volume,  18mo.     37-12  cents. 

A  continuation  of  the  little  library  of  popular  works  for  "  the  People  and  their  Children."  Tti 
design  ia,  by  Diving  the  boarding-school  history  of  a  young  girl,  whose  early  education  had  been 
conducted  on  Christian  principles,  to  show  the  pre-eminent  value  of  those  principles  in  moulding 
and  adorning  the  character,  and  enabling  their  possessor  successfully  to  meet  the  temptation* 
and  trials  of  life.  It  is  attractively  written,  and  full  of  interest. — Com.  Adv. 

COPLEY.— THE    POPLAR    GROVE: 

Or,  little  Harry  and  his  Uncle  Benjamin.     By  Mrs.  Copley,  author  of"  Early 
Friendships,"  &-c.,  &c.     One  vol.  18mo.  frontispiece,  37  1-2  cents. 

An  excellent  little  story  this,  showing  how  sound  sense,  honest  principles,  and  intelligent 
industry,  not  only*a<lvance  their  possessor,  but,  as  in  the  case  of  Uncle  Benjamin  the  gardener, 
enable  him  to  become  the  benefactor,  piide,  and  friend  of  relations  cast  down  from  a  loftier  sphere 
in  life,  and,  but  for  him,  without  icsource.  It  is  a  tale  for  youth  of  all  classes,  that  cannot  b« 
read  without  profit. — JV*.  Y.  American. 

CORTES.— THE    ADVENTURES    OF 

Hernan  Cortes,  the  Conqueror  of  Mexico,  by  the  author  of  "  Uncle  Philip '• 

Conversations,"  with  a  Portrait.     One  volume,  18mo.  37  1-2  cents, 
forming  one  of  the  series  of  "  A  Library  for  my  Young  Count/ymen.' 

The  story  is  full  of  interest,  and  is  told  in  a  captivating  style.  Such  books  add  all  the  charma 
of  romance  to  the  value  of  history. — Prov.  Journal. 

COTTON.— ELIZABETH;  OR,  THE  EXILES  OF  SIBERIA. 

By  Madame  Cotton.     Miniature  size,  31  1-4  cents. 
Forming  one  of  the  series  of  "Miniature  Classical  Library." 
The  extensive  popularity  of  this  littl«  talc  is  well  known. 

6 


Applctoji's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

COWPER.-THE  COMPLETE  POETICAL  WORKS 

Of  William  Cowper,  Esq.,  including  the  Hymns  and  Translations  from  Mad 
Guion,  Milton,  &c.,  and  Adam,  a  Sacred  Drama,  from  the  Italian  of  Bat- 
tista  Andreini,  with  a  Memoir  of  the  Author,  by  the  Rev.  Henry  Stebbiug, 
A.  M.  One  volume,  16mo.,  800  pages,  $1  50,  or  in  2  vols.  $1  75. 

Forming  one  of  the  Series  of  "Cabinet  Edition  of  Standard  British  Poets." 

Morality  never  found  in  genius  a  more  devoted  advocate  than  Cowper,  nor  has  moral  wisdom, 
hi  its  plain  and  severe  precepts,  been  ever  more  successfully  combined  with  the  delicate  Kpint  of 
poetry  than  in  his  works.  He  was  endowed  with  all  the  powers  which  a  poet  could  want  who 
«vas  to  be  the  moralist  of  the  world— the  reprover,  but  not  the  satirist,  of  men — the  teacher  of 
•imple  truths,  which  were  to  be  rendered  gracious  without  endangering  their  simplicity. 

CRUDEN.-CONCORDANCE  OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT. 

By  Alexander  Cruden,  M.  A.,  with  a  Memoir  of  the  Author  by  W.  Youngman. 
Abridged  from  the  last  London  Edition,  by  Win.  Patton,  D.  D.     Portrait. 
One  volume,  32mo.,  sheep,  50  cents. 
***  Contains  all  the  words  to  be  found  in  the  large  work  relating  to  the  New  Testament. 

DE  FOE.-PICTORIAL  ROBINSON  CRUSOE. 

The  Life  and  Adventures  of  Robinson  Crusoe.  By  Daniel  De  Foe.  With  a 
Memoir  of  the  Author,  and  an  Essay  on  his  Writings,  with  upwards  of  300 
spirited  Engravings,  by  the  celebrated  French  artist,  Granclville  One 
elegant  volume,  octavo,  of  500  pages.  $1  75. 

Crusoe  has  obtained  a  ready  passport  to  the  mansions  of  the  rteA,  and  the  cottages  of  the  poor, 
and  communicated  equal  delight  to  all  ranks  and  classes  of  the  community.  Few  works  have 
been  more  generally  read,  or  more  justly  admired  ;  few  that  have  yielded  such  incessant  amuse- 
ment, and,  attho  same  time,  have  developed  so  many  lessons  of  practical  instruction. — Sir  Waiter 
Scott. 

>  The  Messrs.  Appleton  &.  Co.,  of  New  York,  have  just  published  a  beautiful  edition  of  "  The 
Life  and  Adventures  of  Robinson  Crusoe."  Not  the  miserable  abridgment  generally  circulated, 
but  De  Foe's  genuine  work,  Robinson  Crusoe  in  full  and  at  length,  a  story  which  never  palls  upon 
the  reader,  and  never  can  lose  its  popularity  while  the  English  language  endures. — Pentisylvan'um. 

D'ISRAELI.— CURIOSITIES    OF    LITERATURE, 

And  the  Literary  Character  illustrated,  by  I.  D'Israeli,  Esq.,  D.  C.  L.,  F.  S.  A. 
First  and  Second  Series.  The  Literary  Character,  illustrated  by  the  Histo- 
ry of  Men  of  Genius,  drawn  from  their  own  feelings  and  confessions,  by  I. 
D'Israeli,  Esq.  Curiosities  of  American  Literature,  compiled,  edited,  and 
arranged  by  Rev.  Rufus  W.  Griswold.  The  three  works  in  one  volume, 
large  8vo.  Price  $3  50. 

This  is  the  double  title  of  a  large  and  beautifully  printed  octavo  volume,  which  has  just  made 
its  appearance  in  the  World  of  Letters.  With  the  first  part  every  body  is  already  familiar.  The 
deep  research,  the  evident  enthusiasm  in  his  subject,  and  the  light  and  pungent  humor  displayed 
by  D'Israeli  in  it,  are  the  delight  of  all  classes  of  readers,  and  mil  undoubtedly  send  him  down  a 
cheerful  journey  to  posterity,  if  only  on  account  of  the  pleasant  company  in  which  he  has  managed 
•p  agreeably  to  introduce  himself.  The  other  portion  of  this  work — that  relating  to  the  Curiosi- 
ties of  American  Literature — is  entirely  new  to  the  public;  yet  we  shall  be  disappointed  if  it  i> 
not  directly  as  popular  as  the  other.  Mr.  Griswold  has  performed  his  task  in  a  manner  highly 
creditable  to  his  tasto,  while  displaying  most  favorably  his  industry,  tact,  and  perseverance. — Nt* 
York  Tribune. 

DE    LEUZE.— PRACTICAL    INSTRUCTION    IN    ANIMAL 

Magnetism,  by  J.  P.  F.  De  Leuze,  translated  by  Thomas  C.  Hartshorn.  Re- 
vised edition,  with  an  Appendix  of  Notes  by  the  Translator,  and  Letters 
from  «,minent  Physicians  and  others,  descriptive  of  cases  in  the  U.  States. 
One  volume,  12mo.  $1  00. 

The  translator  of  this  work  has  certainly  presented  the  piofession  with  an  uncommonly  weV 
digested  treatise,  enhanced  in  value  by  his  own  notes  and  the  corroborative  testimony  of  eminent 
Dtofiicians. — Boston  Med  «$'  Surg.  Journal. 


Appleton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

ELLIS.-THE  DAUGHTERS  OF  ENGLAND; 

Their  position  in   Society,  Character,   and  Responsibilities.     By  Mrs.  Ellis. 
In  one  handsome  volume,  12rno.,  cloth  gilt.     50  cents. 

ELLIS.— THE  WOMEN  OF  ENGLAND; 

Their  Social  Duties  and  Domestic  Habits.     By  Mrs.  Ellis.     One  handsome 
volume,  12mo.,  cloth  gilt.     50  cents. 

ELLIS.— THE  WIVES  OF  ENGLAND  ; 

Their  Relative  Duties,  Domestic  Influences,  and  Social  Obligations.     By  Mr». 
Ellis.     One  handsome  volume,  12mo.,  cloth  gilt.     50  cents. 

ELLIS.— THE  MOTHERS  OF  ENGLAND; 

Their  Influence  and  Responsibility.     By  Mrs.  Ellis.     One  handsome  volume, 
l^mo.,  cloth  gilt.     50  cents. 

Tliis  is  an  appropriate  ami  very  valuable  conclusion  to  the  series  of  works  on  the  subject  oJ 
female  duties,  by  which  Mrs.  Ellis  has  pleased,  and  we  doubt  not  profited,  thousands  of  readers. 
Her  counsels  demand  attention^  not  only  by  their  practical,  sagacious  usefulness,  but  also  by  the 
•neek  anil  modest  spirit  in  which  they  are  communicated. —  Watchman. 

ELLIS.— THE  MINISTER'S  FAMILY; 

Or  Hints  to  those  who  would  make  Home  happy.     By  Mrs.  Ellis.     One  vol- 
ume, 18mo.     37  1-2  cents. 

ELLIS.-FIRST  IMPRESSIONS; 

Or  Hints  to  those  who  would  make  Home  happy.     By  M/s.  Ellis.     One  vol 
nine,  ]8mo.     37  1-2  cents. 

ELLIS.-DANGERS  OF  DINING  OUT; 

Or  Hints  to  those  who  would  make  Home  happy.     By  Mrs.  Ellis.     One  vol 
ume,  18rno.     37  1-2  cents. 

ELLIS.— SOMERVILLE  HALL; 

Or  Hints  to  those  who  would  make  Home  happy.     By  Mrs.  Ellis.     One  vol- 
ume, ISrno.     37  1-2  cents. 
The  above  four  volumes  form  a  portion  of  series  of"  Tales  for  the  People  and  their  Children." 

u  To  wish  prosperity  to  such  books  as  these,  is  to  desire  the  moral  and  physical  welfare  of  the 

human  species." — Belli  Chronicle. 

EVANS.- EVENINGS  WITH  THE  CHRONICLERS; 

Or   Uncle  Rupert's  Tales  of  Chivalry.     By  R.  M.  Evans.     With  seventeen 
illustrations.     One  volume,  16mo.,  elegantly  bound,  75  cents. 

This  would  have  been  a  volume  after  our  own  hearts,  while  we  were  younger,  and  it  is 
»carcely  less  so  now  mhen  we  are  somewhat  older.  It  discourses  of  those  things  which  '.harmed 
nil  of  us  in  early  youth — the  daring  deeds  of  the  Knights  and  Squires  of  feudal  warfare — the  true 
version  of  the  "Chevy  Chase," — the  exploits  of  the  stout  and  stalwart  Warriors  of  England, 
Scotland,  and  Germany.  In  a  word,  it  is  an  attractive  book,  and  rendered  more  so  to  young  read- 
ers by  a  series  of  wood  engravings,  beautifully  executed. — Courier  fy  Enquirer. 

EVANS— THE  HISTORY  OF  JOAN  OF  ARC. 

By  R.  M.  Evans,  author  of  "  Evenings  with  the  Chroniclers,"  with  twenty- 
four  elegant  illustrations.     One  volume,  16mo.     Extra  gilt.     75  cents. 
In  the  work  before  us,  we  have  not  only  a  most  interesting  biography  of  this  female  prodigy, 
including  what  she  was  and  what  she  accomplished,  but  also  a  faithful  account  of  the  relations 
that  exirted  between  England  and  France,  and  of  the  singular  slate  of  things  that  marked  the 
period  when  this  wonderful  personage  appeared  upon  the  st;ige.     The  lead  ing  incidents  of  hei 
5ife  are  related  with  exquisite  simplicity  and  touching  pathos  ;  and  you  eannot  repress  your  :id mi- 
ration for  her  heroic  qualities,  or  scarcely  repress  your  tears  in  view  of  her  ignominious  end.     To 
the  youthful  reader  we  heartily  recommend  this  volume.— Albany  Advertise* 

8 


Appleton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

EVANS,— THE  RECTORY  OF  VALEHEAD ; 

Or,  the  'Records  of  a  Holy  Home.  By  the  Rev.  R.  W.  Evans.  From  the 
twelfth  English  edition.  One  volume,  16mo.  75  cents. 

Universally  and  cordially  do  we  recommend  this  delightful  volume  We  believe  no  person 
coaKl  read  this  work,  and  not  be  the  better  for  its  pious  and  touching  lessons.  It  is  a  page  taken 
j-orn  the  book  of  life,  and  eloquent  with  all  the  instruction  of  an  excellent  pattern  ;  it  is  a  com- 
mentary on  the  affectionate  warning,  "Remember  thy  Creator  in  the  days  of  thy  youth."  We 
have  not  for  some  time  seen  a  work  we  could  so  deservedly  praise,  or  so  conscientiously  recom- 
c*«.,,J  — Literary  Gazette. 

EMBURY.— NATURE'S  GEMS;  OR,  AMERICAN  FLOWERS 

In  their  Native  Haunts.     By  Emma  C.  Embury.     With  twenty  plates  of  Plants 
rarefully  colored   after   Nature,   and   landscape   views  of  their  localities, 
from  drawing.=Mtaken  on  the  spot,  by  E.  W.  Whiteiield.     One  imperial  oc- 
tavo vul'ime,  printed  on  the  finest  paper,  and  elegantly  bound. 
This  beautiful  work  will  undoubtedly  form  a  "Gift-Book"  for^jLseasons  of  the  year.     It  is 
illustrated  with  twenty  colored  engravings  of  indigenous  flowers,^^en  from  drawings  made  on 
the  spot  where  they  were  found  ;  while  each  flower  is  accompanied  by  a  view  of  some  striking 
f'Mture  of  American  scenery.     The  literary  plan  of  the  book  differs  entirely  from  that  of  any  other 
work  on  a  simil  tr  subject  which  has  yet  appeared.     Each   plate  has  its  botanical  and  local  de- 
scription, f  hough  the  chief  part  of  the  volume  is  composed  of  original  tales  and  poetry,  illustrative 
of  the  sent  i  men's  of  the  flowers,  or  associated  with  the  landscape.     No  pains  or  expense  has  been 
spared  in  the  inichanical  execution  of  tiio  volume,  and  the  fact  that  it  is  purely  American  both 
in  its  graphic  and  literary  departments,  should  recommend  it  to  general  notice. 

EWBANK.—  HYDRAULICS  AND  MECHANICS. 

A  Descriptive  and  Historical  Account  of  Hydraulic  and  other   Machines  for 
raising  \Vater,  including  the  Steam  and  Fire  Engines,  ancient  and  modern  ; 
with  Observations  on  various  subjects  connected  with  the  Mechanic  Arts  ; 
including   the   Progressive   Development  of  the   Steam   Engine.     In   five 
hooks.     Illustrated    by  nearly    three   hundred    Engravings.     By   Thomas 
Ewbank.     One  handsome  volume  of  six  hundred  pages.     $3  50. 
This  is  a  highly  valuable  production,  replete  with  novelty  and  interest,  and  adapted  to  gratify 
equally  the  historian,  the  philosopher,  and  the  mechanician,  being  the  result  of  a  protracted  and 
extensive  research  among  the  arcana  of  historical  and  scientific  literature. — Nat.  Intelligencer. 

FABER.— THE  PRIMITIVE  DOCTRINE  OF  ELECTION; 

Or,  an  Historical  Inquiry  into  the  Ideality  and  Causation  of  Scriptural  Elec- 
tion, as  received  and  maintained  in  the  primitive  Church  of  Christ.  By 
(ieorge  Stanley  Faber,  B.  D.,  author  of  "Difficulties  of  Romanism,' 
"Difficulties  of  Infidelity,"  &c.  Complete  in  one  volume,  octavo.  $1  75. 
Mr.  Faber  verifies  his  opinion  by  demonstration.  We  cannot  pay  a  higher  respect  to  his  work 

than  by  recommending  it  to  all. — Church,  of  England  Quarterly  Review. 

FALKNER.— THE  FARMER'S  MANUAL, 

A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Nature  and  Value  of  Manures,  founded  from 
Experiments  on  various  Crops,  with  a  brief  Account  of  the  most  Recent 
Discoveries  in  Agricultural  Chemistry.  By  F.  Falkner  and  the  Author  of 
"  British  Husbandry."  12mo.,  paper  cover  31  cents,  cloth  50  cents. 

It  is  the  object  of  the  present  treatise  to  explain  the  nature  and  constitution  of  manures  gene- 
rally— to  point  out  the  moans  of  augmenting  the  quantity  and  preserving  the  fertilizing  power  of 
fari».  yard  manure,  the  various  sources  of  mineral  and  other  artificial  manures,  and  the  cause  of 
tbixi  frequent  fuiluics. — Aatlior^s  Preface. 

FARMER'S  TREASURE,  THE  ; 

Containing  "  Falkner's  Farmer's  Manual,"  and  "  Smith's  Productive  Farm- 
ing," bound  together.  12mo.,  75  cents. 

FOSTER— ESSAYS  ON  CHRISTIAN  MORALS, 

Experimental  and  Practical.  Originally  delivered  as  Lectures  at  Broadmead 
Chapel,  Bristol.  By  John  Foster,  author  of  "  Essays  on  Decision  of  Char- 
acter, etc.  One  volume,  18mo.,  50  cents. 

This  volume  contains  twenty-six  Essays,  some  of  which  are  of  the  highest  order  of  sublimity 
. 

9 


Applcton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable.  Publications. 

FOSTER.— B1OG-,  LIT.,  AND  PHIL.  ESSAYS, 

Contributed  to  the  Eclectic  Review,  by  John  Foster,  author  of"  Essays  on  De- 
cision of  Human  Character,"  etc.     One  volume,  12mo.,  $1  25. 
These  contributions  well  deserve  to  class  with  those  of  Macauley,  Jeffrey,  and  Sidney  Smith, 
in  the  Edinburgh  Review.     They  contain  the  productions  of  a  more  original  and  profound"  thinker 
than  either,  whose  master-mind  has  exerted  a  stronger  influence  upon  his  readers,  and  lias  left  a 
deeper  impression  upon  our  literature  ;  and  whose  peculiar  merit  it  was  to  present  the  doctrines 
and  moralities  of  the  Christian  faith,  under  a  form  and  aspect  which  redeemed  the  familiar  from 
triteness,  and  threw  a  charm  and  freshness  about  the  severest  truths. — London  Patriot. 

FROST.— THE  BOOK  OF  THE  NAVY: 

Comprising  a  General  History  of  the  American  Marine,  and  particular  account* 
of  all  the  most  celebrated  Nava.  Battles,  from  the  Declaration  of  Independ 
ence  to  the  present  time,  compiled  from  the  best  authorities.  By  John 
Frost,  LL.  D.  With  an  Appendix,  containing  Naval  Songs,  Anecdotes, 
&c.  Embellished  vvith  numerous  original  Engravings,  and  Portraits  oi 
distinguished  Nava^poinrnanders.  One  volume,  12mo.,  $1  00. 

This  is  the  only  popular  and  yet  authentic  single  view  which  we  have  of  the  naval  exploits  of 
our  country,  arranged  with  good  t.iste  and  set  forth  in  good  language  — U.  S.  Gazette. 

This  volume  is  dedicated  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy,  and  is  altoge'her  a  very  faithful  and 
attractive  historical  record.  It  deserves,  and  will  doubtless  have,  a  very  extended  circulation 
— JV*a£  Intelligencer. 

FROST.— THE  BOOK  OF  THE  ARMY: 

Comprising  a  General  Military  History  of  the  United  States,  from  the  period 
of  the  Revolution  to  the  present  time,  with  particular  accounts  of  all  the 
most  celebrated  Battles,  compiled  from  the  best  authorities.  By  John 
Frost,  LL.  D.  Illustrated  with  numerous  Engravings,  and  portraits  ot 
distinguished  Commanders.  One  volume,  12mo.,  $1  25. 

This  work  gives  a  complete  history  of  military  operations,  and  their  causes  and  effects,  from 
the  opening  of  the  Revolution  to  the  close  of  the  last  war,  with  graphic  descriptions  of  the  cele- 
brated battles  and  characters  of  the  leading  generals.  It  is  illustrated  with  numerous  portraits  on 
steel  and  views  of  battles,  from  original  drawings  by  Darley  and  others.  The  importance  of  pop- 
ular works  of  the  class  to  which  this  and  the  "  Book  of  the  Navy  "  belong,  must  be  obvious  to  all 
who  recognize  the  value  of  national  recollections  in  preserving  a  true  national  spirit. 

FRESENIUS.— CHEMICAL  ANALYSIS. 

Elementary  Instruction  in  Chemical  Analysis.  By  Dr.  C.  Rhemigius  Frese- 
nius.  With  a  Preface  by  Prof.  Liebig.  Edited  by  I.  Lloyd  Bullock.  One 
neat  volume,  12mo.  Paper,  75  cents  ;  cloth,  $1  00. 

This  Introduction  to  Practical  Chemistry  is  admitted  to  be  the  most  valuable  Elementary  In- 
structor in  Chemical  Analysis  fo  scientific  operatives,  and  for  pharmaceutical  chemists,  which  has 
ever  been  presented  to  the  public. 

GUIZOT.-THE  YOUNG  STUDENT; 

Or,  Ralph  and  Victor.  By  Madame  Guizot.  From  the  French,  by  Samuel 
Jackson.  One  volume  of  500  pages,  with  illustrations.  Price  75  cents,  or 
in  three  volumes,  $1  12. 

This  volume  of  biographical  incidents  is  a  striking  picture  of  juvenile  life  To  all  that  num- 
berless class  of  youth  who  arc  passing  through  their  literary  education,  whether  in  boarding- 
school?  or  academies,  in  the  collegiate  course,  or  the  preparatory  studies  connected  with  them,  we 
know  nothing  more  ptecisely  fitted  to  meliorate  their  character,  and  direct  their  course,  subordi- 
nate to  the  higher  authority  of  Christian  ethics,  than  this  excellent  delineation  of  "The  Young 
Student,"  by  Madame  Guizot.  *  *  *  The  French  Academy  were  correct  in  their  judgment, 
when  they  pronounced  Madame  Guizot's  Student  the  best  book  of  the  year.—  Courier  $  Enquirer* 

GUIZOT.— GENERAL  HISTORY  OF  CIVILIZATION 

In  Europe,  from  the  fall  of  the  Roman  Empire  to  the  French  Revolution. 
Translated  from  the  French  of  M.  Guizot,  Professor  of  History  to  la  Facul- 
te  des  Lettres  of  Paris,  and  Minister  of  Public  Instruction.  Third  Ameri- 
can edition,  with  Notes,  by  C.  S.  Henry,  D.  D.  One  handsome  volume, 
12-no.,  $1  00. 


Appleton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

GRISWOLD.— CURIOSITIES  OF  AMER.  LITERATURE: 

Compiled,  edited,  and  arranged   by  Rev.  Rufus  W.  Griswold.     See  D'Israeli 

GIRL'S  MANUAL: 

Comprising  a  summary  View  of  Female  Studies,  Accomplishments,  and  Prin 
ciples  of  Conduct.  Frontispiece.  One  volume,  18mo.,  50  cents. 

GOLDSMITH.-PICTORIAL  VICAR  OF  WAKEFIELD. 

The  Vicar  of  Wakefield.  By  Oliver  Goldsmith.  Illustrated  with  upwards  of 
100  engravings  on  wood,  making  a  beautiful  volume,  octavo,  of  300  pages. 
$1  25.  The  same,  miniature  size,  37  1-2  cents. 

We  love  to  turn  back  over  these  rich  old  classics  of  our  own  language,  and  re-juvenate  our- 
selves by  the  never-f.iiling  associations  which  a  re-perusal  always  calls  up.  Let  any  one  who  hag 
not  read  this  immortal  tale  for  fifteen  or  twenty  years,  try  the  experiment,  and  we  will  warrant 
that  he  rises  up  from  the  task — the  pleasure,  we  should  have  said — a  happier  and  a  better  man. 
In  the  good  old  Vicar  of  Wakefield,  nil  is  pure  gold,  without  dross  or  alloy  of  any  kind.  This 
much  we  have  said  to  our  last  generation  readers.  This  edition  of  the  work,  however,  we  take  it, 
was  got  up  for  the  benefit  of  the  rising  generation,  an<J  we  really  envy  our  young  friends  the  plea- 
sure which  is  before  such  of  them  as  will  read  it  for  the  first  time. — Savannah  Republican, 

GOLDSMITH.-ESSAYS  ON  VARIOUS  SUBJECTS, 

By  Oliver  Goldsmith.     Miniature  size,  37  1-2  cents. 

Forming  ono  of  the  seiies  of"  Miniature  Classical  Library." 

GRESLEY.-PORTRAIT  OF  A  CHURCHMAN, 

By  the  Rev.  W.  Gresley,  A.  M.  From  the  Seventh  English  edition.  On« 
elegant  volume,  IGnio.,  75  cents. 

"  The  main  part  of  this  admirable  volume  is  occupied  upon  the  illustration  of  the  practical 
working  of  Church  principle  inlu'ii  sincerely  received,  setting  forth  their  value  in  the  commerce  of 
daily  liu-,  ;u,<l  hou-  surely  they  conduct  those  who  embrace  them  in  the  safe  and  quiet  path  of  holy 
life.'1 

GRESLEY— A  TREATISE  ON  PREACHING, 

In  a  Series  of  Letters  by  the  Rev.  W.  Gresley,  M.  A.  Revised,  with  Supple- 
mentary Notes,  by  the  Rev.  Benjamin  I.  Haight,  M.  A.,  Rector  of  All 
.Saints'  Church,  New  York.  One  volume,  12mo.  $1  25. 

JJrrrti.-irment. — In  preparing  the  American  edition  of  Mr.  Gresley's  valuable  Treatise,  a  few 
foot-notes  have  bt'en  added  by  the  Editor,  which  are  distinguished  by  brackets.  The  more  extend- 
ed notes  at  the  end  have  been  selected  from  the  best  works  on  the  subject — and  which,  v/ith  one 
or  two  exceptions,  are  not  easily  accessible  to  the  American  student. 

HAMILTON.-THE  LIFE  OF  ALEXANDER  HAMILTON, 

Edited  by  his  son,  John  C.  Hamilton.     Two  volumes,  8vo.,  $5  00. 

We  cordinlly  recommend  the  perusal  and  diligent  study  of  these  volumes,  exhibiting,  a§  they 
do,  much  vs-Iuable  matter  relative  to  the  Revolution,  the  establishment  of  the  Federal  Constitu- 
tion, and  other  important  events  in  the  annals  of  our  country. — JV.  Y.  Review. 

HEMANS.-THE  COMPLETE  POETICAL  WORKS 

Of  Felicia  Hemans,  printed  from  the  last  English  edition,  edited  by  her  Sister. 

Illustrated  with  6  steel  Engravings.     One  beautifully  printed  and  portable 

volume,  IGino.,  §         ,  or  in  two  volumes,  $ 

Of  this  highly  accomplished  poetess  it  has  been  truly  said,  that  of  all  her  sex  "  few  have  writ- 
ten so  much  and  so  well."  Although  her  writing*  possess  an  energy  equal  to  their  high-toned 
beauty,  yet  are  they  so  pure  and  so  refined,  that  not  a  line  of  them  could  feeling  spare  or  delicacy 
blot  fiom  her  pages.  Her  imagination  was  rich,  chaste,  and  glowing.  Her  chosen  thsmes  are  the 
craille,  the  hearth-stone,  and  the  death-bed.  In  her  poems  of  Co?ur  de  Lion,  Ferdinand  of  Ara- 
fon,  ajid  Bernard  del  Carpio,  we  see  beneath  the  glowing  colors  with  which  she  clothes  her  ideas, 
the  feelings  of  a  teaman's  heart.  Her  earlier  poems,  Records  of  Woman  and  Forest  Sanctuary, 
ttand  unrivalled.  In  short,  her  works  will  ever  be  read  by  a  pious  and  enlightened  community. 

HEMANS.-SONGS  OF  THE  AFFECTIONS, 

By  Felicia  Hemans.     One  volume,  32mo.,  gilt.     31  cents. 

Forming  one  of  the  series  of"  Miniature  Classical  Library." 

HARE.-SERMONS  TO  A  COUNTRY  CONGREGATION, 

By  Augustus  William  Hare,  A.  M.,  late  Fellow  of  New  College,  and  Rector  of 
Alton  Barnes.  One  volume,  royal  8vo.,  $2  25. 


Afjjjlcton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

HALL.— THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  DIAGNOSIS, 

By  Marshall  Hall,  M.  D.,  F.  R.  S  ,  &c.  Second  edition,  with  many  improve- 
ments. By  Dr.  John  A.  Sweet.  One  volume,  8vo.T  $2  00. 

This  work  '/vas  published  in  accordance  with  the  desiro  of  some  of  the  most  celebrated  physi- 
cians of  this  country,  who  were  anxious  that  it  should  be  brought  within  the  reach  of  all  classes 
of  medical  men,  to  whose  attention  it  oiFers  strong  claims  as  the  best  work  on  the  subject. 

HAZEN.— SYMBOLICAL  SPELLING-BOOK. 

The  Symbolical  Spelling-Book,  in  two  parts.  By  Edward  Hazen.  Contain- 
ing 288  engravings.  18  3-4  cents. 

This  work  is  used  in  upwards  o-f  one  thousand  different  schools,  and  pronounced  to  be  one  tl 
the  best  works  published. 

HODGE.— THE  STEAM-ENGINE: 

Its  Origin  and  gradual  Improvement,  from  the  time  of  Hero  to  the  present  day, 
as  adapted  to  Manufactures,  Locomotion,  and  Navigation.  Illustrated  with 
48  Plates  in  full  detail,  numerous  wood  cuts,  &c.  By  Paul  R.  Hodge, 
C.  E.  One  volume  folio  of  plates,  and  letter-press  in  8vo.  $10  00. 

This  work  should  be  placed  in  the  '•  Captain's  Office"  of  every  steamer  in  our  country,  and 
also  with  every  engineer  to  whom  is  confided  the  control  of  the  engine.  From  it  they  would  de- 
rive all  the  information  which  would  enabla  them  to  comprehend  the  cau«-»  and  effects  of  every 
ordinary  accident,  and  also  the  method  promptly  and  successfully  to  repair  any  injury,  and  to  rem- 
edy any  defect. 

HOLYDAY  TALES: 

Consisting  of  pleasing  Moral  Stories  for  the  Young.  One  volume,  square 
IGmo.,  with  numerous  illustrations.  37  1-2  cents. 

This  is  a  most  capital  little  book.  The  stories  are  evidently  written  by  an  able  hand,  and  that 
too  m  au  exceedingly  attractive  slyle. — Spectator. 

HOOKER.— THE  COMPLETE  WORKS 

Of  that  learned  and  judicious  divine,  Mr.  Richard  Hooker,  with  an  account  of 
his  Life  and  Death.  By  Isaac  Walton.  Arranged  by  the  Rev.  John  Keble, 
M.  A.  First  American  from  the  last  Oxford  edition.  With  a  complete 
general  Index,  and  Index  of  the  texts  of  Scripture,  prepared  expressly  for 
this  edition.  Two  elegant  volumes,  8vo.,  $4  00. 

CONTENTS. — The  Editor's  Preface  comprises  a  general  survoy  of  the  former  edition  of  Hooker's 
Works,  with  Historical  Illustrations  of  the  period.  After  which  follows  the  Life  of  Hooker,  by 
Isaac  Walton.  His  rhief  work  succeeds,  on  the  "  Laws  of  Ecclesiastic;.!  Polity." 

[t  commence*  with  a  lengthened  Preface  designed  <is  an  address  "to  them  who  *eok  the  refor- 
mation of  the  Laws  and  Orders  Krrlrsiastical  of  the  Church  of  Enyhnd."  The  discussion  is  divi- 
ded intoeight  books,  which  include  an  investigation  of  the  topics.  After  tho-<e  «ight  hooks  of  the 
"Laws  of  Ecclesiastical  Polity,"  follow  two  Sermons.  u  The  certainty  and  perpetuity  of  Faith  in 
the  elect;  especially  of  the  Prophot  Hahakkuk's  f.iith  ;"  and  "  Justification,  Works,  and  how  tho 
foundation  of  faith  is  overthrown."  Next  are  introduced  "A  supplication  made  to  the  Council 
by  Master  Walter  Travers,"  and  kt  Mr.  Hooker's  answer  to  the  supplication  that  Mr  Traveri 
made  to  the  Council."  Then  follow  two  Sermons — ^  On  the  nature  of  Pride,"  and  a  "  Remedy 
against  Sorrow  and  Kcar."  Two  Sermons  on  part  of  the  epistle  of  the  Apostle  Jude  arc  next  in- 
serted, with  a  prefatory  dedication  by  Henry  Jackson.  The  last  article  in  the  works  of  Mr.  Hooker 
is  a  Sermon  on  Prayer! 

The  English  edition  in  three  volumes  sells  at  $10  00.  The  American  is  an  exact  reprint,  at 
less  than  half  the  price. 

HUDSON.-THE  ADVENTURES  OF  HENRY  HUDSON, 

By  the  author  of  "  Uncle  Philips  Conversations."  Frontispiece.  18mo  , 
cloth.  37  cents. 

Forming  one  of  the  series  of  "  A  Library  for  my  Young  Countrymen." 

This  little  volume  furnisher  us,  from  authentic  sources,  the  most  important  facts  in  this  cc'e- 
oratcd  adventurer's  life,  and  in  a  style  that  possesses  more  than  ordinary  interest. — Evening  Post. 

HOWITT.— THE  CHILD'S  PICTURE  AND  VERSE-BOOK; 

Commonly  called  "Otto  Speckter's  Fable-Book."  Translated  from  the  Ger- 
man by  Mary  Howitt.  Illustrated  with  300  engravings  on  wood.  Square 
12mo.,  in  ornamental  binding,  $ 

A  celebrated  German  review  says,  "  Of  this  production,  which  makes  itself  an  epoch  in  the 
world  of  children,  it  is  superfluous  to  speak.  The  Fable-Book  is  throughout  all  Germany  in  the 
hands  of  parents  and  children,  and  will  always  be  new,  because  every  year  fresh  children  are  born  " 


Appleton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

HOWITT.— LOVE  AND  MONEY; 

An  Every-Day  Tale,  by  Mary  Jlcnvitt.     18mo.,  two  Plates,  cloth  gilt,  33  cents 

—     LITTLE  COIN,  MUCH  CARE; 

Or,  How  Poor  People  Live.     By  Mary  Ilowitt.     Idino.,  two  Plates,  38  cents. 

SOWING  AND  REAPING; 

Or,  What  will  Come  of  It.     By  Mary  Ilowitt.     18mo.,  two  Plates,  38  cents. 

ALICE  FRANKLIN; 

A  Sequel  to  Sowing  and  Reaping — a  Tale.     By  Mary  Howitt.     18mo.   two 
Plates,  cloth  gilt,  3rf  cents. 

WORK  AND  WAGES; 

Or,   Life  in    Service — a  Tale.     By  Mary   Ilowitt.     ISmo.,  two  Plates,  cloth 
gilt,  38  cents. 


STRIVE  AND  THRIVE; 


A  Tale.     By  Mary  Ilowitt.     18mo.,  two  Plates,  cloth  gilt,  38  cents. 

WHO  SHALL  BE  GREATEST; 

A  Talc.      Bv  Marv  Ilowitt.     Idmo.,  two  Plales,  cloth  gilt,  33  cents. 

WHICH   IS  THE  WISER; 


Or,  People  Abroad— a  Tale.     P>y  Mary  Ilowitt.      LSiuo.,  two  Plates,  38  cents. 

HOPE  ON,  HOPE  EVER; 

Or,  The   Boyhood  of  FYlix   Law — a   Tale.     By    Mary  Howitt.     18mo.,  two 
Plates,  ClOth  gilt,  3d  cents. 


NO  SENSE  LIKE  COMMON  SENSE; 


A  Tale.     By  Mary  Ilowitt.     18mo.,  two  Plates,  cloth  gilt,  38  cents. 

***  The  above  ten  volumes  form  a  portion  of  the  series  published  under  the  general  title  of 
'•  Tales  for  the  People  and  their  Children." 

Of  late  years  many  writers  have  exerted  their  talent*  in  juvenile  literature,  with  great  success. 
>iarti:ie:iu  Ins  nnde  pol'  '.c.il  economy  as  familiar  to  boys  as  it  formerly  was  to  statesmen. 
Our  own  Mi.-s  Sedgwick  has  produced  some  of  the  most  beautiful  mor.il  stories,  for  the  edification 
and  delight  of  children,  which  have  ever  been  written.  The  lion.  Horace  .Mann,  in  addresses  to 
adults,  h;is  presented  the  claims  of  children  for  good  education,  with  a  power  and  eloquence  of 
t»tyl  ••,  :md  ;in  elevation  of  thought,  which  shows  his  heart  is  in  his  work.  The  stories  of  Mary 
liowitt  Harriet  Martin-jail,  Mrs.  Copley,  and  Mrs.  Ellis,  which  form  a  part  of"  Tales  for  the  Peo- 
]>!••  :<nd  their  Children,"  will  be  found  valuable  additions  to  juvenile  literature  ;  at  the  same  time 
they  m.iy  !>«•  read  with  profit  by  parents  for  the  good  lessons  they  inculcate,  and  by  all  other  read- 
ers for  the  literary  excellence  they  display 

We  wish  they  could  be  placed  in  the  hands  and  engraven  on  the  minds  of  all  the  you'n  in  the 
country.  They  manifest  a  nice  and  accurate  observation  of  human  nature,  and  especially  the  na- 
tu  e  of  children,  a  fine  sympathy  with  every  thing  good  and  pure,  and  a  capability  of  infusing  it  in 
the  minds  of  others — great  beauty  and  simplicity  of  style,  and  a  keen  eye  to  practical  life,  with  all 
its  fiults.  united  with  a  deep  love  for  ideal  excellence. 

Messrs  Appleton  &  Co  deserve  th?  highest  praise  for  the  excellent  manner  in  which  they 
h:;v  --{jot  up"  their  juvenile  library,  and  we  sincerely  hope  that  its  success  will  be  so  great  as  to 
induce  them  to  make  continual  contributions  to  its  treasures.  The  collection  is  one  which  should 
be  owned  by  every  parent  who  wishes  that  the  moral  and  intellectual  improvement  of  his  children 
should  keep  pace  with  their  growth  in  years,  and  tho  development  of  their  physical  powers. — 
American  Traveller 

JERRAM.-THE  CHILD'S  OWN  STORY-BOOK; 

Or,  Tales  and  Dialogues  for  the  Nursery.     By  Mrs.  Jerram  (late  Jane   Eliza- 
beth Holmes).     Illustrated  with  numerous  Engravings.     50  cents. 
There  are  seventy  stories  in  this  volume      They  are  admirably  adapted  for  the  countless 
youth  for  whose  edification  they  are  narrated — Boston  Gazette. 

JOHNSON.— THE  HISTORY  OF  RASSELAS, 

Prince  of  Abyssinia — a  Tale.     By   Samuel  Johnson,    LL.   D.     32mo.,   gik 
leaves,  33  cents. 

***  Forming  one  of  the  series  of"  Miniature  Classical  Library." 


Appletoti's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

JAMES.— THE  TRUE  CHRISTIAN, 

Exemplified  in  a  Series  of  Addresses,  by  Rev.  John  Angell  James.     One  vol 
18mo,  38  cents. 
These  addresses  are  amongst  the  choicest  effusions  of  the  admirable  author. — Chr.  Intell. 

-  THE  ANXIOUS  INQUIRER 

A.fter  Salvation   Directed   and   Encouraged.     By   Rev.  John   Angell  Jameg, 
One  volume,  18rno.,  38  cents. 

Up  wards  of  fwnnty  thousand  copies  of  this  excellent  little  volume  have  been  sold,  which  fully 
attests  the  high  estimation  the  work  has  attained  with  the  religious  community. 

-  HAPPINESS,  ITS  NATURE  AND  SOURCES. 

By  Rev.  John  Angell  James.     One  volume,  32mo.,  25  cents. 

This  is  written  in  the  excellent  author's  best  vein.     A  better  book  we  have  not  in  a  long  tim« 
see  n . — Evangelist. 


THE  CHRISTIAN  PROFESSOR: 


Addressed  in  a  Series  of  Counsels  and  Cautions  to  the  Members  of  Christian 
Churches.     By  Rev.  John  Angell  James.     Second  edition.     One  volume, 
18rno.,  63  cents. 
A  most  excellent  work  from  the  able  and  prolific  pen  of  Mr.  James.  —  Chr.  Intelligencer. 

THE  YOUNG  MAN  FROM   HOME. 

In   a  Series  of  Letters,  especially  directed  for  the   Moral  Advancement  of 
Youth.      By    Rev.    John    Angell    James.     Fifth    edition.      One    volume, 
18mo.,  38  cents. 
The  work  is  a  rich  treasury  of  Christian  counsel  and  instruction. — Albany  Advertiser 

-   THE  WIDOW  DIRECTED 

To  the  Widow's  God.     By  Rev.  John  Angell  James.     One  volume,  18mo., 
38  cents. 

The  book  is  worthy  to  be  read  by  others  besides  the  class  for  which  it  is  especially  designed  ; 
and  we  doubt  not  that  it  is  destined  to  come  as  a  friendly  visitor  to  many  a  house  of  mourning, 
and  as  a  healing  balm  to  many  a  wounded  heart. — JV*.  Y.  Obaerccr 

KEIGHTLEY-— THE  MYTHOLOGY  OF  GREECE 

And  Italy,  designed  for  the  use  of  Schools.     By  Thomas  Keightley.     Nume- 
rous wood-cut  illustrations.     One  volume,  18mo.,  half  bound,  44  cents. 

This  is  a  neat  little  volume,  and  well  adapted  to  the  purpose  for  which  it  was  prepared.  It 
presents,  in  a  very  compendious  and  convenient  form,  every  thing  relating  to  the  subject,  of  impor- 
tance to  the  young  student. — L.  /.  Star, 

KINGSLEY.— THE  SACRED  CHOIR: 

A  Collection  of  Church  Music,  consisting  of  Selections  from  the  most  distin- 
guished Authors,  among  whom  are  the  names  of  Haydn,  Mozart,  Beetho- 

•»-»  i         •      c-          i> :  ii__        i  _ : .  ~.c  ~\/r :_i «i._    A  ._.! i   „  i 


Mr.  George  Kingsley  :  Sir, — Wo  have  examinedthe  "  Sacred  Choir"  enough  to  lead  us  to  ap- 
preciate the  work  tis  the  best  publication  of  Sacred  Music  extant.  It  is  beautifully  printed  and 
tabstantially  bound  conferring  credit  on  the  publishers.  We  bespeak  for  the  "  Sacred  Choir  "  an 
extensive  circulation  O.  S.  BOWDOIN, 

Sinceicly  ycurs,  E    O.  GOODWIN 

D.  IN  GRAHAM. 

KIP._THE  DOUBLE  WITNESS  OF  THE  CHURCH, 

By  Rev.  Wm.  Ingraham  Kip,  author  of  "  Lenten  Fast.1'     One  volume,  12mo. 
Second  edition.     Boards  75  cents,  cloth  $1  00. 

This  is  a  sound,  clear,  and  able  production — a  book  much  wanted  for  these  times,  and  one  that 
we  feel  persuaded  will  prove  eminently  useful.  It  is  a  happy  delineation  of  that  DOUBLE  WITNESI 
which  the  Church  bears  against  Romanism  and  ultra-Protestantism,  and  points  out  her  middle 
path  as  the  only  one  of  truth  and  safety.— Banner  oftfie  Cross. 

14 


**  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 


LAFEVER.—  BEAUTIES  OF   MODERN    ARCHITECTURE; 

Consisting  of  forty-eight  Plates  of  Original  Designs,  with  Plans,  Elevations, 
and  Sections,  also  a  Dictionary  of  Technical  Terms  ;  the  whole  forming  a 
complete  Manual  for  the  Practical  Builder.  By  Al.  Lafever,  Architect. 
One  volume,  large  8vo.,  half  bound,  $6  00. 

STAIR-CASE  AND  HAND-RAIL 

Construction.  The  Modern  Practice  of  Stair-case  and  Hand-rail  Construction, 
practically  explained,  in  a  Series  of  Designs.  By  M.  Lafever,  Architect 
With  Plans  and  Elevations  for  Ornamental  Villas.  Fifteen  Plates.  One 
volume,  large  6vo.,  $3  00. 

Mr.  L:ifl-vfr's  "  Beauties  of  Architecture,"  and  his  "Practice  of  Stair-case  and  Hand-rail  cou- 
•truction,"  constitute  two  volumes  rich  in  instruction  in  those  departments  of  business.  They 
tre  a  noc'-ssary  acquisition  not  only  to  the  operative  workman,  but  to  all  landlords  and  proprietors 
of  houses,  who  would  rom'usm  both  the  ornamental  and  usefu'  in  their  family  dwellings,  and  also 
understand  the  most  economical  and  profitable  modes  by  which  their  edifices  can  be  erected  and 
repaired. 

LEWIS.—  RECORDS  OF  THE  HEART, 

By  Sarah  Anna  Lewis.     One  volume,  12mo.,  $1  00. 

VvV  h  ivt-  re-id  some  of  the  pieces  with  much  pleasure.  They  indicate  poetic  genius  of  no  or- 
dinary kiii'l,  ;tnd  are  irn!>u  :d  with  much  feeling  and  pathos.  We  welcome  the  volume  an  a  credit 
able  accession  to  the  poetic  literature  of  the  country.  —  Boston  Traveller. 

LIEBIG.-FAMILIAR  LETTERS  ON  CHEMISTRY, 

And  its  relation  to  Commerce,  Physiology,  and  Agriculture.  By  Justus  Lie- 
big,  M.  D.  Edited  by  John  Gardner,  M.  D.  One  volume.  13  cents 
in  paper,  25  cents  bound. 

The  Letters  contained  in  this  littles  volume  embrace  some  of  the  most  important  points  of  the 
Science  of  Chemistry,  in  their  application  to  Natural  Philosophy,  Physiology,  Agriculture,  uud 
Commerce. 

LETTER-WRITER, 

The  Useful    Letter-Writer,  comprising  a  succinct  Treatise  on  the  Epistolary 
Art,  and  Forms  of  Letters  for  all  ordinary  Occasions  of  Life.     Compiled 
from  the  best  authorities.     Frontispiece.     32mo.,  gilt  leaves,  38  cents. 
Forming  one  of  the  series  of  u  Miniature  Classical  Library." 

LOOKING-GLASS  FOR  THE  MIND; 

Or,  Intellectual  Mirror.     Being  an  elegant  Collection  of  the  most  delightful 
little  Stories  and  interesting  Tales  ;  chiefly  translated  from  that  much  ad- 
mired  work,  L'ami   des  Enfans.     Illustrated  with   numerous  wood-cuts 
From  the  twentieth  London  edition.     One  volume,  18mo.,  50  cents. 
Forming  one  of  the  series  of"  Tales  for  the  People  and  their  Children." 

LOG  CABIN: 

Or,  The  World  before  You.     By  the  author  of  "Three  Experiments  of  Liv 
ing,"  "  The  Huguenots  in  France  and  America,"  etc.     One  volume,  ISino., 
50  cents. 
Every  person  who  takes  up  this  volume  will  read  it  with  interest.     It  is  truly  what  the  writer 

intended  it  should  be  —  **  A  Gnide  to  Usefulness  and  Happiness." 

LOVER.—  HANDY  ANDY: 

A  Tale  of  Irish  Life,  by  Samuel  Lover.  Illustrated  with  twenty-three  char- 
acteristic steel  Engravings.  One  volume,  8vo.,  cloth  $1  25,  boards  $1  00 
Cheap  edition,  two  Plates,  paper,  50  cents. 

This  boy  Handy  will  be  the  death  of  us.  What  is  the  police  force  about  to  allow  the  uttering 
«f  a  publication  that  has  already  brought  us  to  the  brink  of  apoplexy  fifty  times  ?  —  Sport.  Review. 


L-  S.  D.— TREASURE  TROVE  : 


A  Tale,  by  Samuel   Lover.     One  volume,  8vo.,  with  two  steel  Engravings- 
Paper  cover,  25  cents. 

This  is  a  capital  thing.  The  gay  and  the  grave,  the  "lively  and  severe,"  are  unived  with  a 
akilful  hand,  and  there  is  a  latent  tone  of  sound  morality  running  through  "L.  S.  D."  which  wi)J 
give  a  lasting  value  to  its  pages.— Commercial  Advertiser. 

15 


Applcton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

LUCY  AND  ARTHUR; 

A  Book  for  Children.  Illustrated  with  numerous  engravings,  elegantly  bour« 
in  cloth.  50  cents. 

Lucy  airl  Arthur  is  a  charming  story  of  the  nurserk, prepared  oy  an  experienced  author.  Se- 
cure it  for  the  funnily. — American  Traveller. 

LYRA  APOSTOLICA. 

From  the  Fifth  English  edition.     One  elegantly  printed  volume,  75  centi. 

In  this  elegant  volume  there  are  forty-five  sections,  and  one  hundred  and  seventy-nine  IrtM 
poems,  all  short,  and  many  of  them  sweet. — New  York  American. 

MAGEE.— ON  ATONEMENT  AND  SACRIFICE: 

Discourses  and  Dissertations  on  the  Scriptural  Doctrines  of  Atonement- and 
Sacrifice,  and  on  the  Principal  Arguments  advanced,  and  the  Mode  of 
Reasoning  employed,  by  the  Opponents  of  those  Doctrines,  as  held  by  the 
Established  Church.  By  the  late  Most  Rev.  William  M'Gee,  D.  D.,  Arch- 
bishop of  Dublin.  Two  volumes,  8vo.,  $5  00 

This  is  one  of  the  ablest  critical  and  polemical  works  of  modern  times.  The  profound  biblical 
information  on  a  variety  of  topics  which  the  Archbishop  brings  forward,  must  endear  his  name  to 
all  lovors  of  Christianity. —  Orme. 

MANNING.-THE  UNITY  OF  THE  CHURCH, 
By  the  Rev.  Henry  Edward  Manning,  M.  A.,  Archdeacon  of  Chichester.    One 
volume,  16mo.,  $1  00. 

Part  I.  The  History  and  Exposition  of  the  Doctrine  of  Catholic  Unity.  Part  II.  The  Moral 
Design  of  Catholic  Unity.  Part  III.  The  Doctrine  of  Catholic  Unity  applied  to  the  Actual  Stata 
of  Christendom. 

We  commend  it  earnestly  to  the  devout  and  serious  perusal  of  all  Churchmen,  and  particularly 
of  all  clergymen,  as  the  ablest  discussion  we  ever  met  with  of  a  deeply  and  vitally  important  sub- 
ject.—  Churchman. 

MARRYAT.-MASTERMAN  READY; 

Or,  The  Wreck  of  the  Pacific.     Written  for  Young  Persons,  by  Capt.  Marry- 
at.      Complete  in  3  vols.,  18mo.,  with  Frontispiece,  cloth  gilt,  $1  25. 
Forming  a  portion  of  the  series  of  "Tales  for  the  People  and  their  Children." 

We  have  never  seen  any  thing  from  the  same  pen  we  like  as  well  as  this.  It  is  the  modem 
Crusoe,  and  is  entitled  to  take  rank  with  that  charming  romance.  —  Commercial  Advertiser. 

MARSHALL.— NOTES  ON  THE  EPISCOPAL  POLITY 

Of  the  Holy  Catholic  Church,  with  some  account  of  the  Developments  of  Mo 
dern  Religious  Systems,  by  Thomas  William  Marshall,  B.  A.,  of  the  Dio 
cese  of  Salisbury.  Edited  by  Jonathan  M.  Wainwright,  D.  D.  With  a 
new  and  complete  Index  of  the  Subjects  and  of  the  Texts  of  Scripture 
On«  volume,  12mo.,  $1  25. 

I.  Introduction.  II.  Scripture  Evidence.  III.  Evidence  of  Antiquity.  IV.  Admission  o! 
Adversaries.  V.  Development  of  Modern  Religious  Systems. 

A  more  important  work  than  this  has  not  been  issued  for  a  long  time.  We  earnestly  recom 
mend  it  to  the  attention  of  every  Churchman. — Banner  of  the  Cross. 

MARTINEAU.— THE  CROFTON  BOYS; 

A  Tale  for  Youth,  by  Harriet  Marti neau.  One  volume,  18mo.,  Frontispiece 
Cloth  gilt,  38  cents. 

Forming  one  of  the  seiies  of  "Tales  for  the  People  and  their  Children." 

It  abounds  in  interest,  and  is  told  with  the  characteristic  ability  and  spirit  of  the  distinguished 
author.—  Eoawng  Post. 


THE  PEASANT  AND  THE  PRINCE; 


A  Tale  of  the  French  Revolution,  by  Harriet  Martineau.     One  volume,  18mo. 
Frontispiece.     Cloth  gilt,  38  cents. 

Forming  one  of  the  series  of"  Tales  for  the  People  and  their  Children.' 

This  is  a  most  inviting  little  history  of  Louis  the  Sixteenth  and  his  family.  Here,  in  a  atylm 
even  more  familiar  than  Scott's  Talos  of  a  Grandfather,  we  have  a  graphic  epitome  of  many  faeti 
connected  with  the  days  of  the  "  Revolution."—  Courier  $  Enquirer. 


Applctoti's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

MAURICE.— THE   KINGDOM  OF  CHRIST; 

Or,  Hints  respecting  the  Principles,  Constitution,  and  Ordinances  of  the  Cath- 
olic Church.     By  Rev.  Frederick  Denison  Maurice,  M.  A.    London.    One 
volume,  8vo.,  600  pages,  $2  50. 
On  the  theory  of  the  Church  of  Christ,  all  should  consult  the  work  of  Mr.  Maurice,  the  most 

philosophical  writer  of  the  day. — Pruf.  Garbctt's  Bampton  Lectures,  1842 

MILTON.— THE  COMPLETE  POETICAL  WORKS 

Of  John  Milton,  with  Explanatory  Notes  and  a  Life  of  the  Author,  by  the  Rev. 
Henry  Stebbing,  A.  M.     Illustrated  with  six  steel  Engravings.     One  vol- 
ume, 16mo.,  $1  25. 
Forming  one  of  the  series  of  "Cabinet  Edition  of  Standard  Poets."     %*   Tho  Latin  and  Italian 

Poems  are  included  in  this  edition. 

Mr.  Stebbing's  Notes  will  be  found  very  useful  in  Hur.idating  the  learned  allusions  with  which 
the  text  abounds,  and  they  are  also  valuable  for  the  correct  appreciation  with  which  the  writer  di- 
rects attention  to  the  beauties  of  the  author. 

PARADISE  LOST, 

By  John  Milton.     With  Notes,  by  Rev.   II.  Stebbing.     One  volume,  18mo., 
cloth  3tf  cents,  gilt  leaves  50  cents. 


PARADISE  REGAINED, 


By  John  Milton.  With  Not«'s,  by  Rev.  II.  Siebbing.  One  volume,  18mo., 
cloth  '.-.">  cents,  ii'ilt  l»-a\r>  3£  cents. 

MAXWELL.—  FORTUNES  OF  HECTOR  O'HALLORAN 

And  his  man  Mark  Antony  O'Toolr,  by  W  .  II.  Maxwell.  One  volume,  8vo., 
two  plates,  paper,  :">()  cents,  twenty-four  plates,  boards,  $1  00,  cloth,  $1  25 
It  is  one  of  the  bust  of  all  the  Irish  stories,  full  of  s,>,rit,  fun,  drollery,  and  wit.  —  Cour.  4*  E-nq 

MOORE.-LALLAH  ROOKH  ; 

An  Oriental  Romance,  bv  Thomas  Moore.  One  volume,  32mo.,  frontispiece, 
cloth  gilt,  3d  c- 

Forming  a  portion  of  the  scries  of  '•  Miniature  Classical  Library." 
This  exquisite  Poem  has  long  been  the  admiration  of  readers  .  1'r.il  <•  lasses. 

MORE.-PRACTICAL  PIETY, 

By  Hannah  More.     One  volume,  3£mo.,  frontispierr,  3S  cents. 
Tunning  one  of  the  series  of-'  Miniature  Chusical  Library." 

'•  I'r  :nMicr'l  Piety  "  has  always  bee     deemed  the  most  attractive  and  eloquent  of  all  Hannah 
M  ore's 

PRIVATE  DEVOTION: 

A  Series  of  Prayers  and  Meditations,  willi  an  Introductory  Essay  on  Prayer, 
chietly  from  the  writings  of  Hannah  More.  From  the  twenty-fifth  London 
edition.  One  volume,  32mo.,  Frontispiece,  cloth  gilt,  31  cents. 

Forming  one  of  the  series  of-  Miniature  ('I  i.->ic  il  Library." 
Upwards  of  fifty  thousand  copies  of  this  admirable  manual  have  been  sold  in  the  U.  States. 

DOMESTIC  TALES 

And  Allegories,  illustrating  Human  Life.     By  Hannah  More.     One  volume, 
o.,  38  cents. 


CONTENTS.  —  I.  Shepherd  of  Salisbury  Plain.     II.  Mr.   Fantoin  the  Philosopher.     TIL  Two 
Shoemakers.     IV    Giles  the  Poacher.     V.  Servant  turned  Soldier,     VI.  General  Jail  Delivery. 

RURAL  TALES, 

By  Hannah  More.     One  volume,  18mo.,  38  cents. 

CONTENTS.—  I.  Parley  the  Porter.     II.  All  for  the  Best.     III.  Two  Wealth"  Farmers.    IV 
Tom  White.     V.  Pilgrims.     VI.  Valley  of  Teais. 

Forming  a  portion  of  the  series  of"  Tales  for  the  People  and  their  Children  " 

These  two   volumes  comprise  that  portion  of  Hannah  More's  Repository  Takt  »vlach  ait 
adapted  to  general  usefulness  in  this  country. 


Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 


NAPOLEON.-PICTORIAL  HISTORY 

Of  Napoleon  Bonaparte,  translated  from  the  French  of  M.  Laurent  de  L'Ar- 
deche,  with  Five  Hundred  spirited  Illustrations,  after  designs  by  Horace 
Vernet,  and  twenty  Original  Portraits  engraved  in  the  best  style.  Com- 
plete in  two  handsome  volumes,  8vo.,  about  500  pages  each,  $3  50  ;  cheap 
edition,  paper  cover,  four  parts,  $2  00. 

The  work  is  superior  to  the  long,  verhose  productions  of  Scott  and  Bourienne  —  not  in  style 
alone,  but  in  truth  —  being  written  to  please  neither  Charles  X.  nor  the  English  aristocracy,  but  for 
the  cause  of  freedom.  It  has  advantages  over  every  other  memoir  extant.  —  American  Traveller. 

NEWMAN—  PAROCHIAL  SERMONS, 

By  John  Henry  Newman,  B.  D.  Six  volumes  of  the  English  edition  in  two 
volumes,  8vo.,  $5  00. 

---      SERMONS  BEARING  ON  SUBJECTS 

Of  the  Day,  by  John  Henry  Newman,  B.  D.     One  volume,  12mo.,  $1  25. 

As  a  compendium  of  Christian  duty,  these  Sermons  will  be  read  by  people  of  all  denomina- 
tions ;  as  models  of  style,  they  will  be  valued  by  writers  in  every  department  of  1.  erature.—  United 
States  Gazette. 

OGILBY.—  ON  LAY-BAPTISM: 

An  Outline  of  the  Argument  against  the  Validity  of  Lay-Baptism.     By  John 

D.  Ogilby,  D.  D.,  Professor  of  Eccles.  History.     One  vol.,  12mo.,  75  cents. 

From  a  cursory  inspection  of  it,  we  take  it  to  be  a  thorough,  fearless,  and  able  discussion  of  the 

subject  which  it  proposes  —  aiming  less  to  excite  inquiry,  than  to  satisfy  by  learned  an-l  ingenious 

argument  inquiries  already  excited.  —  Churchman. 

--      CATHOLIC  CHURCH   IN  ENGLAND 


And   America.     Three   Lectures  —  I.  The  Church  in   England   and 

Apostolic  and  Catholic.  II.  The  Causes  of  the  English  Reformation.  HI 
Its  Character  and  Results.  By  John  D.  Ogilby,  D.  D.  One  vol.,  16mo., 
75  cents. 

"  I  believe  in  one  Catholic  and  Apostolic  Church."    JVtcenc  Creed 

Prof.  Ogilby  has  furnished  the  Church,  in  this  little  volume,  with  a  most  valuable  aid.  We 
Uiink  it  is  designed  to  become  a  text-book  on  the  subject  of  which  it  treats.—  True  Catholic. 

OLD  OAK  TREE: 

Illustrated  with  numerous  wood-cuts.     One  volume,  18mo.,  38  cents. 

Tho  precepts  conveyed  are  altogether  unexceptionable,  and  the  volume  is  well  calculated  to 
prove  attractive  with  children.  —  Saturday  Chronicle. 

OLMSTED.-INCIDENTS  OF  A  WHALING  VOYAGE: 

To  which  is  added,  Observations  on  the  Scenery,  Manners,  and  -Customs,  and 
Missionary  Stations  of  the  Sandwich  and  Society  Islands,  accompanied  by 
numerous  Plates.     By  Francis  Allyn  Olmsted.     One  vol.,  12mo.,  $1  50. 
The  work  embodies  a  mass  of  intelligence  interesting  to  the  ordinary  reader  as  well  as  to  tho 

philosophical  inquirer.  —  Courier  4"  Enquirer 

PAGET.-TALES  OF  THE  VILLAGE, 

By  the  Rev.  Francis  E.  Paget,  M.  A.     Three  elegant  volumes,  18mo.,  $1  7: 

The  first  series,  or  volume,  presents  a  popular  view  of  the  contrast  in  opinions  and  modca  of 
thought  between  Churchmen  and  Romanists  ;  the  second  sets  forth  Church  principles,  as  opposed 
to  what,  in  England,  is  termed  Dissent;  and  the  third  places  in  contrast  the  chaiacter  of  the 
Churchman  and  the  Infidel.  At  any  time  these  volumes  would  be  valuable,  especially  to  the 
young.  At  present,  when  men's  minds  are  much  turned  to  such  subjects,  they  cannot  fail  of  being 
eagerly  sought  for.  —  New-York  American 

PALMER.-A  TREATISE  ON  THE  CHURCH 

Of  Christ.     Designed  chiefly  for  the  use  of  Students  in  Theology.     By  the 
Rev.  William  Palmer,  M.  A.,  of  Worcester  College,  Oxford.     Edited,  with 
Notes,  by  the  Right  Rev.  W.  R.  Whittingham,  D.  D.,  Bishop  of  the  Prot. 
Epis.  Church  in  the  Diocese  of  Maryland.     Two  volumes,  8vo.,  $5  00. 
Ths  chief  design  of  this  work  is  to  supply  some  answer  to  the  assertion  so  frequently  made. 
that  individuals  are  not  bound  to  submit  to  any  ecclesiastical  authority  whatever  :  or  that,  if  they 
•re,  th«y  must,  inconsistency,  accept  Romanism  with  all  its  claims  and  errors.  —  Preface. 

18 


Appleton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

PARNELL.— APPLIED  CHEMISTRY, 

In  Manufactures,  Arts,  and  Domestic  Economy.  Edited  by  E.  A.  Parnell. 
Illustrated  with  numerous  wood  Engravings,  and  specimens  of  Dyed  and 
Printed  Cottons.  Paper  cover  75  cents,  cloth  $1  00. 

The  Editor's  aim  is  to  divest  the  work,  as  flir  as  practicable,  of  all  technical  terms,  so  as  to 
adapt  it  to  the  requirements  of  the  general  render. 

The  above  forms  the  first  division  of  the  work.  It  is  the  author's  intention  to  continue  it  from 
time  to  time,  so  us  to  form  a  complete  Practical  Encyclopaedia  of  Chemistry  applied  to  the  Arta. 
The  subjects  to  immedi..tely  follow  will  be,  Manufacture  of  Glass,  Indigo,  Sulphuric  Acid  Zinc, 
Potaih.  Coffee,  Tea,  Chocolate,  &.C. 

PEARSON.— AN  EXPOSITION  OF  THE  CREED, 

By  John  Pearson,  D.  D.,  late  Bishop  of  Chester.  With  an  Appendix,  contain- 
ing the  principal  Greek  and  Latin  Creeds.  Revised  and  corrected  by  the 
Rev.  W.  S.  Dobson,  M.  A.,  Peterhouse,  Cambridge.  One  vol.,  Svo.,  $2  00. 

The  fallowing  mail  be  stated  as  the  ad-untu^c.-;  <>fthi.i  fiit.ion  over  all  others  • 

First — Gre.it  care  has  been  taken  to  correct  the  numerous  errors  in  the  references  to  the  texts 
0f  Scripture,  which  had  crept  in  by  reason  of  the  repeated  editions  through  which  this  admirable 
work  has  passed,  and  many  references,  us  will  be  seen  on  tuining  to  the  Index  of  Texts,  havo 
oeen  added. 

Secondly — The  Quotations  in  the  Notes  have  beenulmosi  universajjy  identified  and  the  refer- 
ence to  them  adjoined. 

Lastly — The  principal  Symbola  or  Creeds,  of  which  the  particular  Articles  have  been  cited  by 
the  Author,  have  IXM-M  annexed  ;  and  wherevei  the  original  writers  have  -jiven  the  Symbola  in  a 
scattered  and  disjointed  manner,  the  detached  parts  have  been  brought  into  a  successive  and  con- 
nected point  of  view.  These  have  been  added  in  Chronological  order,  in  the  form  of  an  Appen- 
dix.—T<We  Editor 

PHILIP.— THE  LIFE  AND  OPINIONS 

Of  Dr.    Milne,  Missionary  to  China.     Illustrated  by  Biographical   Annals  of 

Asiatic   Missions,  from   Primitive  Protestant  Times  :   intended  as   a  Guido 

to  Missionary  Spirit.     By  Rev.  Robert  Philip.     One  vol.,  I2mo.,  50  cents. 

The  work  is  executed  with  great  skill,  and  embodies  a  vast  amount  of  valuable  missionary 

into  licence,  besides  a  ricli  variety  of  personal  incidents,  adapted  to  gratify  not  only  the  missionary 

or  the  Christian,  but  the  more  general  reader. —  Gbjii'rr>r. 

YOUNG  MAN'S  CLOSET  LIBRARY, 

By  Robert  Philip.  With  an  Introductory  Essay,  by  Rev.  Albert  Barnes.  One 
volume,  12mo.,  $1  00. 

-  LOVE  OF  THE  SPIRIT, 

Traced  in  His  Work  :  a  Companion  to  the  Experimental  Guides.  By  Robert 
Philip.  One  volume,  Idmo.,  50  cents. 

-  DEVOTIONAL  AND  EXPERIMENTAL 

Guides.  By  Robert  Philip.  With  an  Introductory  Essay  by  Rev.  Albert 
Barnes.  Two  volumes,  12mo.,  $1  75.  Containing  Guide  to  the  Per- 
plexed, Guide  to  the  Devotional,  Guide  to  the  Thoughtful,  Guide  to  the 
Doubting,  Guide  to  the  Conscientious,  Guide  to  Redemption. 

-  LADY'S  CLOSET  LIBRARY: 

The  Marys,  i  r  Beauty  of  Female  Holiness  ;  The  Marthas,  or  Varieties  of  Fe- 
male Piety  ,  The  Lydias,  or  Development  of  Female  Character.  By  Rob- 
ert Philip.  Each  volume,  ISmo.,  50  cents 

The  MATERNAL  scries  of  the  above  popular  Library  is  now  ready,  entitled 
The   Hannahs  ;  or,   Maternal  Influence   of  Sons.     By  Robert  Philip.     One 
volume,  18m^.,  50  cents. 

The  author  of  this  excellent  work  is  known  to  the  public  as  one  of  the  most  prolific  writer§  <H 
the  day,  and  scarcely  any  writer  in  the  department  which  he  occupies  has  acquired  so  extensive 
and  well-merited  a  popularity.— Evangelist. 

POLLOK.— THE  COURSE  OF  TIME, 

By  Robert  Pollok.     With  a  Life  of  the  Author,  and  complete  Analytical  In 
dex,  prepared  expressly  for  this  edition.     32rno.,  frontispiece,  38  cent*. 

Forming  one  of  the  series  of  "  Miniature  Classical  Library." 

Few  modern  Poems  exist  which  at  once  attained  such  acceptance  and  celebrity  as  this. 

19 


Applet  on' s  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

PRATT.— DAWNINGS  OF  GENIUS; 

Or,  the  Early  Lives  of  some  Eminent  Persons  of  the  last  Century.  By  Anna 
Pratt.  One  volume,  18mo.,  frontispiece,  38  cents. 

Forming  one  of  the  series  of  "  A  Library  for  my  Young  Countrymen." 

CONTEXTS. — Sir  Humphrey  Davy — Rev.  George  Crabbe — Baron  Cuvior — Sir  Joshua  Reynold* 
— Lindley  Murray — Sir  James  Mackintosh— Dr.  Adam  Clarke. 

PRIZE  STORY-BOOK: 

Consisting  chiefly  of  Tales,  translated  from  the  German,  French,  and  Italian, 
together  with  Select  Tales  from  the  English.  Illustrated  with  numerous 
Engravings  from  new  designs.  One  thick  volume,  I6mo.,  cloth  gilt. 

PURE  GOLD  FROM  THE  RIVERS  OF  WISDOM: 

A  Collection  of  Short  Extracts  from  the  most  Eminent  Writers — Bishop  Hall, 
Jeremy  Taylor,  Barrow,  Hooker,  Bacon,  Leighton,  Addison,  Wilberforce, 
Johnson,  Young,  Southey,  Lady  Montague,  Hannah  More,  etc.  One 
volume,  32rno.,  frontispiece,  cloth  gilt,  31  cents. 

Forming  one  of  the  series  of  "  Miniature  Classical  Library." 

PUSS  IN  BOOTS  : 

A  pure  Translation  in*  Prose,  from  the  original  German.     Illustrated  with  1 
original  Designs,  suitable  for  the  Tastes  of  the  Young  or  Old,  by  the  cele- 
brated artist,  Otto  Speckter.     One  vol.,  square  12mo.,  cloth  gilt. 

SAINT  PIERRE.-PAUL  AND  VIRGINIA: 

A  Tale,  by  J.  B.  H.  De  Saint  Pierre.  One  volume,  32mo.,  frontispiece,  cloth, 
gilt,  31  cents. 

Forming  one  of  the  series  of"  Miniature  Classical  Library." 

SANDHAM.— THE  TWIN  SISTERS: 

A  Tale  for  Youth,  by  Mrs.  Sandham.  From  the  twentieth  London  edition 
One  volume,  18mo.,  frontispiece,  cloth  gilt,  38  cents. 

Forming  a  portion  of  the  series  of"  Tales  for  the  People  and  their  Children." 
Th<?  moral  is  excellent  throughout.      Its  merit  renders  it  a  pleasant  hook  for  even  grown-up 
children.— Boston  Pout. 

SOOTT.-THE  POETICAL  WORKS 

Of  Sir  Walter  Scott,  Bart.  Containing  Lay  of  the  Last  Minstrel,  Marmion, 
Lady  of  the  Lake,  Don  Roderick,  Rokeby,  Ballads,  Lyrics,  and  Songs, 
with  a  Life  of  the  Author.  Illustrated  with  six  steel  Engravings.  One 
volume,  IGmo.,  $1  25. 

LADY  OF  THE  LAKE: 

A  Poem,  by  Sir  Walter  Scott.     One  volume,  18mo.,  frontispiece,  cloth  25 

cents,  gilt  edges  38  cents. 

MARMION  : 

A  Tale  of  Flocldun  Field,  by  Sir  Walter  Scott.  One  volume,  18mo.,  frontis- 
piece, cloth  25  cents,  gilt  edges  38  cents. 

LAY  OF  THE  LAST  MINSTREL: 

A  Poem,  by  Sir  Walter  Scott.  One  volume,  1 81110.,  frmtispiece,  cloth  25 
cents,  gilt  edges  38  cents. 

Walter  Scott  is  the  most  popular  of  aH.  the  poets  of  the  present  day,  and  deservedly  so.  He 
describes  that  which  is  most,  easily  and  generally  understood  with  more  vivacity  and  effect  than 
any  other  writer.  His  st\lo  is  clear,  flowing,  and  transparent;  his  sentiment),  of  which  hiu  style 
is  an  easy  and  natural  medium,  are  common  to  him  with  his  readers. — JIazLitt. 

SPINOKES.— MANUAL  OF  PRIVATE  DEVOTIONS: 

^Complete,)  collected  from  the  writings  of  Archbishop  Laud,  Bishop  Andrew's, 
Bishop  Ken,  Dr.  Hickes,  Mr.  Kettlewell,  Mr.  Spinckes,  and  other  eminent 
old  English  divines.     With  a  Preface  by  the  Rev.  Mr.  Spinckes.     Edited 
by  Francis  E.  Paget,  M.  A.     One  elegant  volume,  ICimo.,  $1  00. 
A*  a  manual  of  private  devotions,  it  will  be  found  most  valuable. — New-York  American. 

20 


Applet  an*  s  Catalogue  of  Vahtabie  Publications. 

SPENCER.— THE  CHRISTIAN  INSTRUCTED 

In  the  Ways  of  the  Gospel  and  the  Church,  in  a  series  of  Discourses  delivered 
at  St.  James's  Church,  Goshen,  New- York.  By  the  Rev.  J.  A.  Spencer, 
M.  A.,  late  Rector.  One  volume,  IGmo.,  $1  25. 

This  is  a  very  useful  volume  of  Sermons  :  respectable  in  style,  sound  in  doctrine,  and  affec- 
tionate in  tone,  they  are  well  adapted  for  reading  in  the  family  circle,  or  placing  on  the  family 
book-shelf.  *  *  *  We  think  it  a  work  of  which  the  circulation  is  likely  to  promote  true  reli- 
gion and  genuine  piety.  It  is  enriched  with  a  body  of  excellent  notes  selected  from  the  writings 
of  the  dead  and  living  ornaments  of  the  Church  in  England  and  this  country. —  True  Catholic. 

SPRAGUE.-TRUE  AND  FALSE  RELIGION. 

Lectures  illustrating  the  Contrast  between  true  Christianity  and  various  other 
Systems.  By  William  B.  Sprague,  D.  D.  One  volume,  12mo.,  $1  00. 

LECTURES  TO  YOUNG  PEOPLE, 

By  W.  B.  Sprague,  D.  D.  With  an  Introductory  Address,  by  Samuel  Miller, 
D.  D.  Fourth  edition.  One  volume,  12mo.,  88  cents. 

SUTTON.— MEDITATIONS  ON  THE  SACRAMENT. 

Godly  Meditations  upon  the  most  IIolv  Sacrament  of  the  Lord's  Supper.     By 
Christopher  Button,   D.   D.,   hi*-   I'n-b'-nd  of  UYstminsU-r.     One  volume, 
royal   lijmo.,  elegantly  oHKinienled,  $1  00. 
\\~t>  aivimri  ••••!  i;n:i:r  I  \»\  number  the  rcpuMication  in  this  country  of  Pulton's   •'  Meditations 

on  the  Lord-  d,  having  since  read  the  work,  are  prepared  to  recommend  it  warmly  and 

without  qualifica'...on  to  the  perusal  of  our  readers. — Banner  of  the  Cross. 

•    DISCE  MORI—LEARN  TO  DIE: 

A  Religious  Discourse,  moving  every  Christian  man  to  enter  into  a  Serious 
Remembrance  of  his  End.  By  Christopher  Sutton,  D.  D.  One  volume, 
Himo.,  jjfci  DO. 

Of  the  thr<>"  works  of  this  excellent  author  lately  reprinted,  the  "  Disce  Mori"  is,  in  our  judg- 
ment, decidedly  the  h.*st.  \Vc  do  not  believe  that  a  single  journal  or  clergyman  in  the  Church 
will  he  found  to  s.iy  a  word  in  its  disparagement. —  Churdnnan. 


DISCE  VIVERE—LEARN  TO  LIVE: 


Wherein  is  shown  that  the  Life  of  Christ  is  and  ought  to  be  an  Express  Pat- 
tern for  Imitation  unto  the  Life  of  a  Christian.  By  Christopher  Sutton, 
D.  D.  One  volume,  IGmo.,  $1  00. 

In  the  "  Di-ce  Viverc,"  the  author  moulded  his  materials,  after  the  manner  of  a  Kcmpis,  into 
an  "  Imitatio  I'hrnti ;"  each  chapter  inculcating  some  duty,  upon  the  pattern  of  Him  who  gave 
Himself  to  be  the  beginning  and  the  end  of  all  perfection. — Editor's  Preface. 

SWART.— LETTERS  TO  MY  GODCHILD, 

By  the  Rev.  J.  Swart,  A.  M.,  of  the  Diocese  of  Western  New- York.  One 
volume,  o^mo.,  cloth,  gilt  leaves,  3S  cents. 

The  design  of  this  little  wr.r\.  1  by  tin;  author  in  the  preface,  is,  the  discharging  of 

Sponsorial  obh^utmti.-!.     \\  \\  with  interest  and  pleasure,  and  deem  it  well  fitted  to  se- 

cure its  end. — Primitive  Standard. 

SHERLOCK.— THE  PRACTICAL  CHRISTIAN; 

Or,  the  Devout  Penitent ;  a  Book  of  Devotion,  containing  the  Whole  Duty  of 
a  Christian  in  all  Occasions  and  Necessities,  fitted  to  the  main  use  of  a  holy 
Life.  By  R.  Sherlock,  D  D.  With  a  Life  of  the  Author,  by  the  Right 
Rev.  Bishop  Wilson,  Author  of  "  Sacra  Private,"  &c.  One  elegant  vol- 
ume, IGmo.,  $1  00. 

Considered  as  a  manual  of  private  devotion,  and  a  means  of  practical  preparation  for  the  Holy 
Communion  of  the  Body  and  Blood  of  Christ,  this  book  is  among  the  best,  if  not  the  best,  ever 
commended  to  the  members  of  our  Church. —  Churchman. 

SILLIMAN.-A  GALLOP  AMONG  AMERICAN  SCENERY; 

Or,  Sketches  of  American  Scenes  and  Military  Adventure.  By  Augustus  L. 
Silliman  One  volume,  IGmo.,  75  cents. 

21 


Applet  on' s  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

SHERWOOD.— DUTY  IS  SAFETY; 

Or,  Troublesome  Tom,  by  Mrs.  Sherwood.     One  volume,  small  4to.,  illustra 
ted  with  wood  cuts,  cloth,  25  cents. 


THINK  BEFORE  YOU  ACT, 


By  Mrs.  Sherwood.     One  volume,  small  4to.,  wood  cuts,  cloth,  25  cents. 

-    JACK  THE  SAILOR-BOY, 

Ujf  Mrs.  Sherwood.     One  volume,  small  4to.,  wood  cuts,  cloth,  25  cents. 

Mrs.  Sherwood's  stories  carry  with  them  always  such  an  excellent  moral,  that  no  child  can  read 
them  without  becoming  better. — Pliiladelphia  Enquirer. 

SINCLAIR.— SCOTLAND  AND  THE  SCOTCH; 

Or,  the  Western  Circuit.  By  Catharine  Sinclair,  author  of  Modern  Accom 
plishments,  Modern  Society,  &c.  &c.  One  volume,  12mo.,  75  cents. 

SHETLAND  AND  THE  SHETLANDERS; 

Or,  the  Northern  Circuit.     By  Catharine  Sinclair,  author  of  Scotland  and  the 
Scotch,  Holiday  House,  <fec.  &c.     One  volume,  12mo.,  88  cents. 
The  author  has  proved  herself  to  be  a  lady  of  high  talent  and  rich  cultivated  mind. — JV*.  Y.  Am, 

SMITH.— SCRIPTURE  AND  GEOLOGY; 

On  the  Relation  between  the  Holy  Scriptures  and  some  parts  of  Geological 
Science.  Eight  Lectures.  By  John  Pye  Smith,  D.  D.,  author  of  the 
Scripture  Testimony  of  the  Messiah,  &c.  &c.  One  vol.,  12mo.,  $1  25. 

ADVENTURES  OF  CAPT.  JOHN  SMITH, 

The  Founder  of  the  Colony  of  Virginia.  By  the  author  of  Uncle  Philip'* 
Conversations.  One  volume,  18mo.,  frontispiece,  38  cents. 

Forming  one  of  the  scries  of  u  Library  for  my  Young  Countrymen." 
It  will  be  read  by  youth  with  all  the  interest  of  a  novel,  and  certainly  with  much  more  profit 

—  DISCOURSES  ON  THE  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

Select  Discourses  on  the  Functions  of  the  Nervous  System,  in  opposition  to 
Phrenology,  Materialism,  and  Atheism  ;  to  which  is  prefixed  a  Lecture  on 
the  Diversities  of  the  Human  Character,  arising  from  Physiological  Pecu- 
liarities. By  John  Augustine  Smith,  M.  D.  One  vol.,  12mo.,  75  cents. 


PRODUCTIVE  FARMING. 


A  Familiar  Digest  of  the  Most  Recent  Discoveries  of  Liebig,  Davy,  Johnston, 
and  other  celebrated  Writers  on  Vegetable  Chemistry,  showing  how  the 
results  of  Tillage  might  be  greatly  augmented.  By  Joseph  A.  Smith.  One 
volume,  12mo.,  paper  cover  31  cents,  cloth  50  cents. 

SOUTHGATE.-TOUR  THROUGH  TURKEY 

And  Persia.  Narrative  of  a  Tour  through  Armenia,  Kurdistan,  Persia,  and 
Mesopotamia,  with  an  Introduction  and  Occasional  Observations  upon  the 
Condition  of  Mohammedanism  and  Christianity  in  those  countries.  By 
the  Rev.  Horatio  Southgate,  Missionary  of  the  American  Episcopal  Church. 
Two  volumes,  12mo.,  plates,  $2  00. 

SOUTHEY.— THE  COMPLETE  POETICAL  WORKS 

Of  Robert  Southey,  Esq.,  LL.  D.  The  ten  volume  London  edition  in  one  ele- 
gant volume,  royal  8vo.,  with  a  fine  portrait  and  vignette,  $3  50. 

At  the  age  of  sixty-three  I  have  undertaken  to  collect  and  edit  my  poetical  works,  with  the  last 
corrections  that  I  can  expect  to  hestow  upon  them.  They  have  obtained  a  reputation  equal  to 
my  wishes.  *  *  Thus  to  collect  and  revise  them  is  a  duty  which  I  owe  to  that  part  of  the  pub- 
lic by  whom  they  have  been  auspiciously  received,  and  to  those  who  will  take  a_  lively  concern  in 
my  pood  name  when  I  shall  have  departed. — Extract  from  Author*  a  Preface. 

The  beauties  of  Mr.  Southey's  poetry  arc  such,  that  this  edition  can  hardly  fail  to  find  a  place 
in  ttt  library  of  every  man  fond  of  elegant  literature.— JScfectic  Review 


Appleton's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

TAYLOR.— THE  SACRED  ORDER  AND  OFFICES 

Of  Episcopacy  Asserted  and  Maintained  ;  to  which  is  added,  Clerus  Domini, 
a  Discourse  on  the  Office  Ministerial,  by  the  Right  Rev.  Bishop  Jeremy 
Taylor,  D.  D.  One  volume,  16mo.,  $1  00. 

The  reprint  in  a  portable  form  of  this  eminent  divine's  masterly  defence  of  Zpiscopacy,  cannot 
fail  of  being  welcomed  by  every  Churchman. 

The  publishers  have  presented  this  jewel  in  a  fitting  casket. — JV*.  Y.  American. 

-    THE  GOLDEN  GROVE: 

A  choice  Manual,  containing  what  is  to  be  Believed,  Practised,  and  Desired, 
or  prayed  for  ;  the  Prayers  being  fitted  for  the  several  Days  of  the  Week. 
To  which  is  added,  a  Guide  for  the  Penitent,  or  a  Model  drawn  up  for  the 
Help  of  Devout  Souls  wounded  with  Sin.  Also,  Festival  Hymns,  &c.  By 
the  Right  Rev.  Bishop  Jeremy  Taylor.  One  volume,  16mo.,  50  cents. 


THE  YOUNG   ISLANDERS: 


A  Tale  of  the  Last  Century,  by  Jefferys  Taylor.     One  volume,  16mo.,  beauti- 
fully illustrated,  75  cents. 

This  i-i.scinating  and  eli.'gantly  illustrated  volume  for  the  young  is  pronounced  to  equal  in  into- 
t  De* Foe's  immortal  work,  Robinson  Crusoe. 


rest  De*  F< 


HOME   EDUCATION, 


By  Isaac  Taylor,  author  of4'  Natural  History  of  Enthusiasm,"  &c.  &c.     Sec- 
ond edition.     One  volume,  12mo.,  $1  00. 
A  very  enlightened,  just,  and  Christian  view  of  a  most  important  subject. — Am.  Bib.  Rcpos. 

•    PHYSICAL  THEORY 

Of  another  Life,  by  Isaac  Taylor.     Third  edition.     One  vol.,  12mo.,  88  cents. 
Oneof  the  most  learned  and  extraordinary  works  of  modern  times. 


SPIRITUAL  CHRISTIANITY. 


Lectures  on  Spiritual  Christianity,  by  Isaac  Taylor.     One  vol.,  12mo.,  75  cents 
The  view  which  this  volume  gives  of  Chiistianity,both  as  a  system  of  truth  and  a  system  of 
duty,  is  in  the  highest  degree  instructive.—  Albany  Keening  Journal. 


NATURAL  HISTORY  OF  SOCIETY 


In  the  Barbarous  and  Civilized  State.  An  Essay  towards  Discovering  the 
Origin  and  Course  of  Human  Improvement,  by  W.  Cooke  Taylor,  LL.  D., 
&c.,  of  Trinity  College,  Dublin.  Handsomely  printed  on  fine  paper.  Two 
volumes,  12mo.,  $2  25. 

THOUGHTS  IN  PAST  YEARS: 

A  collection  of  Poetry,  chiefly  Devotional,  by  the  author  of  The  Cathedral 
•  One  volume,  16mo.,  elegantly  printed,  $1  25. 

TOKEN  OF  AFFECTION. 

One  volume,  32mo.,  frontispiece,  cloth,  gilt  leaves,  31  cents. 

FRIENDSHIP. 

One  volume,  32mo.,  frontispiece,  cloth,  gilt  leaves,  31  cents. 

LOVE. 

Dne  volume,  32mo.,  frontispiece,  cloth,  gilt  leaves,  31  cents. 

REMEMBRANCE. 

One  volume,  32mo.,  frontispiece,  cloth,  gilt  leaves,  31  cents. 

THE  HEART. 

One  volume,  32mo.,  frontispiece,  cloth,  gilt  leaves,  31  cents. 

Forming  a  portion  of  the  scries  of"  Miniature  Classical  Library." 

Each  volume  consists  of  nearly  one  hundred  appropriate  extracts  fioin  the  best  writers  of  Enf 
fend  and  America. 

33 


Applejori's  Catalogue  of  Valuable  Publications. 

THOMSON.— THE  SEASONS, 

A  Poem,  by   James  Thomson.     One  vol.,  32mo.,  cloth,  gilt  leaves,  38  cents, 

Forming  one  of  the  series  of-'  Miniature  Classical  Library." 
Place  "  The  Seasons  "  in  any  light,  and  the  poem  appears  faultless.— -S.  C.  Hall 

URE.— DICTIONARY  OF  ARTS, 

Manufactures,  and  Mines,  containing  R  clear  Exposition  of  their  Principles  and 
Practice.  By  Andrew  Ure,  M.  D.,  F.  R.  S.,  &c.  Illustrated  with  1240 
Engravings  on  wood.  One  thick  volume  of  1340  pages,  bound  in  leather, 
$5  00,  or  in  two  volumes,  $5  50. 

In  every  point  of  view,  a  work  like  the  present  can  hut  he  regarded  as  a  benefit  done  to  theoret* 
icaL  and  practical  science,  to  commerce  and  industry,  and  an  important  addition  to  a  species  of 
literature  the  exclusive  production  of  the  present  century,  and  the  present  state  of  peace  and  civi- 
lization— Jlthenasuin. 

Dr.  Ure's  Dictionary,  of  which  the  American  edition  is  now  completed,  is  a  stupendous  proof 
of  persevering  assiduity,  combined  with  genius  and  triste.  For  all  the  benefit  of  individual  enter- 
prise in  the  practical  arts  and  manufactures,  and  for  the  enhancement  of  general  prosperity  through 
the  extension  of  accurate  knowledge  of  political  economy.  %ve  have  not  any  work  worthy  to  be 
compared  with  this  important  volume.  We  are  convinced  that  manufacturer's,  merchants,  trades- 
men, students  of  natural  and  experimental  philosophy,  inventive  mechanics,  men  of  opulence, 
members  of  legislatures,  an  1  all  who  desire  to  comprehend  something  of  the  rapidly  accelerating 
progress  of  those  discoveries  which  facilitate  the  supply  of  human  wants,  and  the  augmentation 
of  social  comforts  with  the  naiioir.il  weal,  will  find  this  invaluable  Dictionary  a  perennial  source 
of  salutary  instruction  and  edifying  enjoyment. — National  Intelligencer. 

VERY  LITTLE  TALES, 

For  Very  Little  Children,  in  single  Syllables  of  three  and  four  Letters — first 
series.  One  volume,  square  18mo.,  numerous  illustrations,  cloth,  38  cents 
Second  Series,  in  single  Syllables  of  four  and  five  Letters.  One  volume, 
square  18mo.,  numerous  illustrations — to  match  first  series — 33  cents. 

WAYLAND.— LIMITATIONS  OF  HUMAN 

Responsibility.     By  Francis  Wayland,  D.  D.      One  volume,  16mo.,  38  cents. 

CONTESTS. — I.  The  Nature  of  the  Subject.  II  Individual  Responsibility.  III.  Individual 
Responsibility  (continued).  IV.  Pcieecution  on  account  of  Religious  Opinions.  V.  Propagation 
of  Truth.  VI.  Voluntary  A<s<>ci  M  ions.  Vil.  Kcrlosiastical  Associations.  VIII.  Official  Respon 
sibility.  IX.  The  Slavery  Question. 

WILBERFOROE.— MANUAL  FOR  COMMUNICANTS; 

Or,  The  Order  for  administering  the  Holy  Communion  ;  conveniently  arrang- 
ed with  Meditations  and  Prayers  from  old  English  divines  :    being  the  Eu- 
charistica  of  Samuel  Wilberforce,  M.  A.,  Archdeacon  of  Surrey,  (adapted 
to  the  American  service.)     38  cents,  gilt  leaves  50  cents. 
We  most  earnestly  commend  the  work. —  Churchman. 

WILSON— SACRA  PRIVATA. 

The  Private  Meditations,  Devotions,  and  Prayers  of  the  Right  Rev.  T.  Wil- 
son, D.  D.,  Lord  Bishop  of  Soder  and  Man".  First  complete  edition.  One 
volume,  IGmo.,  elegantly  ornamented,  $1  00. 

The  reprint  is  an  honor  to  the  American  press.  The  work  itself  is,  perhaps,  on  the  whole,  the 
best  devotional  treatise  in  the  language,  it  has  never  before  in  this  country  been  printed  entire. 
— Churchman. 

A  neat  miniature  edition,  abridged  for  popular  use,  is  also  published.     Price  31  cents. 

WOMAN'S  WORTH  ; 

Or,  Hints  to  Raise  the  Female  Character.     First  American  from  the  last  Eng 
lish  edition,  with   a  Recommendatory   Notice,  by  Emily   Marshall.     On« 
neat  volume,  18mo.,  cloth  gilt  38  cents,  paper  cover  25  cents. 
The  sentiments  and  principles  enforced  in  this  book  may  be  safely  commended  to  the  atten- 
tion of  women  of  all  rinks  — London  Atlas. 

YOUTH'S  BOQK  OF  NATURE; 

Or,  The  Four  Seasons  Illustrated,  being  Familiar  Descriptions  of  Natural  His- 
tory, made  during  Walks  in  the  Country,  by  Rev.  H.  B.  Draper.  Illustra- 
ted with  upwards  of  50  wood  Engravings.  One  vol.,  square  16mo.,  75  cents. 
One  of  the  moat  faultless  volumes  for  the  younjr  that  hr.s  ever  been  issued. —  Chr. 


*«7Ks«rsJ 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN     INITIAL     FINE     OF    25     CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  5O  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


ICLF  (N)  I 


OCl  181939 


DEC  I21940JM 


19  1942 


M 


co 

1939 


OCT  2  3  198? 

IRCULATION  DEPT. 


BY 

c  5  1989 

CIRCULATION  DEPT. 


LD  21-50m-l,'3£ 


I  D 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4 
days  prior  to  due  date. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


SEP  o  7  2001 


12,000(11/95) 


